Lucent Technologies Server Users Manual
PDF DEFINITY ECS R6 Maintenance for R6vs-si Volumes 1 & 2 T E X T F I L E S
Definity ECS R6 Maintenance for R6vs-si Volumes 1 & 2 Definity ECS R6 Maintenance for R6vs-si Volumes 1 & 2
lucent to the manual 396e9979-11fe-45d9-a57a-624f83be7cf9
2015-02-02
: Lucent-Technologies Lucent-Technologies-Lucent-Technologies-Server-Lucent-Users-Manual-436363 lucent-technologies-lucent-technologies-server-lucent-users-manual-436363 lucent-technologies pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 2392
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Comcode 108041948 Issue 1 August 1997 Copyright 1996, Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A. Trademarks DEFINITY is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies in the U.S. and throughout the world. AUDIX is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies. Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change. Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party, for example, persons other than your company’s employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s behalf. Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and, if toll fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services. You and your system manager are responsible for the security of your system, such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use. The system manager is also responsible for reading all installation, instruction, and system administration documents provided with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk. Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use. Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance, call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643-2353. Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15: Class B Statement. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient the receiving television or radio antenna where this may be done safely. • To the extent possible, relocate the receiver with respect to the telephone equipment. • Where the telephone equipment requires ac power, plug the telephone into a different ac outlet so that the telephone equipment and receiver are on different branch circuits. Part 68: Network Registration Number. This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. It is identified by FCC registration number AS593M-11185-MF-E. Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer-supervision signals to the public switched network when: • • • Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible exceptions are: • • • A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received Ordering Information Call: Lucent Technologies Publications Center Write: Voice 1 800 457-1235 International Voice 317 361-5353 Fax 1 800 457-1764 International Fax 317 361-5355 Lucent Technologies Publications Center P.O. Box 4100 Crawfordsville, IN 47933 Order: Document No. 555-230-127 Comcode 108041948 Issue 1, August 1997 For additional documents, refer to the section entitled, “Related Documents” in “About This Book.” You can be placed on a Standing Order list for this and other documents you may need. Standing Order will enable you to automatically receive updated versions of individual documents or document sets, billed to account information that you provide. For more information on Standing Orders, or to be put on a list to receive future issues of this document, please contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center. Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to the “Limited use Software License Agreement” card provided with your package. European Union Declaration of Conformity Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that XXX equipment specified in this document conforms to the referenced European Union (EU) Directives and Harmonized Standards listed below: EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive 89/336/EEC 73/23/EEC The “CE” mark affixed to the equipment means that it conforms to the above Directives. Disclaimer Intellectual property related to this product and registered to AT&T Corporation has been transferred to Lucent Technologies Incorporated. Any references within this text to American Telephone and Telegraph Corporation or AT&T should be interpreted as references to Lucent Technologies Incorporated. The exception is cross references to books published prior to December 31, 1996, which retain their original AT&T titles. Heritage Lucent Technologies - formed as a result of AT&T’s planned restructuring designs, builds, and delivers a wide range of public and private networks, communication systems and software, consumer and business telephone systems, and microelectronics components. The world-renowned Bell Laboratories is the research and development arm for the company. Acknowledgment This document was prepared by the Product Documentation Development group, Lucent Technologies, Denver, CO and Columbus, OH. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page iii Contents 1 2 3 4 Contents iii About This Book xxi ■ General xxi ■ Conventions Used in This Document xxii ■ Organization xxiii ■ Safety Precautions xxiv ■ Class 1 Laser Device xxv ■ Security Issues xxv ■ Standards Compliance xxv ■ Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards xxvi ■ Trademarks and Service Marks xxvii ■ Related Documents xxviii ■ Federal Communications Commission Statement xxxi Maintenance Architecture 1-1 ■ Maintenance Objects 1-1 ■ Alarm and Error Reporting 1-2 ■ Maintenance Testing 1-2 ■ Protocols 1-3 ■ Service Codes 1-17 ■ Facility Interface Codes 1-18 ■ Multimedia Interface (MMI) 1-19 Circuit Packs and Power 2-1 ■ Circuit Packs 2-1 ■ Power 2-6 Management Terminals 3-1 ■ General 3-1 ■ Management Terminals 3-1 ■ System Login Procedure 3-3 ■ Switch-Based Bulletin Board 3-24 ■ System Logoff Procedure 3-26 ■ DEC VT220 Terminal 3-27 Initialization and Recovery 4-1 ■ Reset System 1 (System Warm Start) 4-2 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page iv Reset System 2 (System Cold Start Without Translations Loading) 4-2 Reset System 3 (System Cold Start With Translations Loading) 4-3 ■ Reset System 4 (System Reboot) 4-4 ■ Reset System 5 (System Reboot and Run All 24-Hour Tests) 4-5 Reset System Interchange (High or Critical Reliability Systems Only) 4-7 ■ Procedure for SPE-Down Mode 4-8 ■ Procedure for Duplication Interface — Processing Element Communication Down 4-11 ■ ■ ■ 5 6 Routine Maintenance Procedures 5-1 ■ Suppress Alarm Origination [y] 5-1 ■ Handling Control Circuit Packs 5-1 ■ TN790 Processor Circuit Pack (Memory) 5-4 ■ Removing Power 5-4 ■ Restoring Power 5-6 ■ Troubleshooting Control Cabinet Power Units 5-9 ■ Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later) 5-10 ■ System Backup 5-14 ■ Software Upgrade 5-18 ■ Preventive Maintenance Procedures 5-36 ■ System Features 5-37 ■ Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems 5-62 ■ Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) 5-62 ■ Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) 5-69 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid 6-1 ■ General 6-1 ■ Reliability Options 6-2 ■ Duplicated Hardware 6-4 ■ Duplication Concepts 6-8 ■ System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems 6-13 ■ Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies 6-16 ■ Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability 6-18 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page v ■ ■ 7 8 Procedure for Installing/Replacing the Inter-Cabinet Cable 6-31 Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing 6-32 LED Interpretation 7-1 ■ General 7-1 ■ Processor and Maintenance Circuit Pack LEDs 7-1 ■ Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs 7-3 ■ Attendant Console LEDs 7-5 ■ Cabinet Power Unit LEDs 7-5 ■ Power Distribution Unit LEDs 7-5 ■ Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs 7-5 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids 8-1 ■ busyout access-endpoint 8-1 ■ busyout board 8-2 ■ busyout cdr-link 8-4 ■ busyout data-module 8-5 ■ busyout journal-printer 8-6 ■ busyout link 8-8 ■ busyout mis 8-9 ■ busyout modem-pool 8-10 ■ busyout packet-control 8-11 ■ busyout pms-link 8-13 ■ busyout port 8-14 ■ busyout pri-endpoint 8-15 ■ busyout sp-link 8-16 ■ busyout spe-standby 8-17 ■ busyout station 8-19 ■ busyout tdm 8-20 ■ busyout tone-clock 8-21 ■ busyout trunk 8-22 ■ cancel hardware-group 8-23 ■ change circuit-packs 8-24 ■ change synchronization 8-27 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page vi ■ change system-parameters maintenance 8-28 ■ clear audits 8-39 ■ clear errors 8-39 ■ clear interface 8-40 ■ clear isdn-testcall 8-40 ■ clear link 8-40 ■ clear mst 8-41 ■ clear pkt 8-41 ■ clear port 8-41 ■ copy update-file 8-41 ■ disable administered-connection 8-42 ■ disable mst 8-43 ■ disable suspend-alm-orig 8-43 ■ disable synchronization-switch 8-43 ■ disable test-number 8-44 ■ display alarms 8-44 ■ display cabinet 8-49 ■ display communication-interface 8-51 ■ display disabled-tests 8-56 ■ display errors 8-57 ■ display events 8-63 ■ display initcauses 8-65 ■ display memory-configuration 8-71 ■ display port 8-73 ■ display synchronization 8-74 ■ display system-parameters maintenance 8-76 ■ display time 8-86 ■ download update-file 8-88 ■ enable administered-connection 8-92 ■ enable mst 8-92 ■ enable suspend-alm-orig 8-93 ■ enable synchronization-switch 8-94 ■ enable test-number 8-94 ■ format card-mem 8-94 ■ get vector 8-95 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page vii ■ list configuration 8-97 ■ list config software-version 8-100 ■ list disabled-mos 8-104 ■ list history 8-105 ■ list isdn-testcall 8-107 ■ list marked-ports 8-108 ■ list measurements 8-109 ■ list mst 8-113 ■ list suspend-alm-orig 8-145 ■ list testcalls 8-146 ■ mark port 8-150 ■ monitor bcms 8-151 ■ monitor health 8-155 ■ monitor security-violations 8-158 ■ monitor system 8-160 ■ monitor traffic 8-165 ■ monitor trunk 8-167 ■ recycle carrier 8-168 ■ refresh spe-standby 8-170 ■ release access-endpoint 8-170 ■ release board 8-171 ■ release cdr-link 8-173 ■ release data-module 8-174 ■ release journal-printer 8-175 ■ release link 8-176 ■ release mis 8-177 ■ release modem-pool 8-178 ■ release packet-control 8-179 ■ release pms-link 8-180 ■ release port 8-181 ■ release pri-endpoint 8-182 ■ release sp-link 8-183 ■ release spe-standby 8-185 ■ release station 8-186 ■ release tdm 8-187 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page viii ■ release tone-clock 8-188 ■ release trunk 8-189 ■ reset board 8-190 ■ reset interface 8-191 ■ reset maintenance 8-192 ■ reset spe-standby 8-193 ■ reset system 8-193 ■ restore announcements 8-196 ■ resume hardware-group 8-198 ■ save announcements 8-198 ■ save translation 8-201 ■ set expansion-link 8-202 ■ set options 8-203 ■ set signaling-group 8-209 ■ set synchronization 8-209 ■ set tdm 8-210 ■ set time 8-211 ■ set tone-clock 8-212 ■ set vector 8-212 ■ status access-endpoint 8-214 ■ status administered-connection 8-216 ■ status attendant 8-217 ■ status audits 8-218 ■ status bri-port 8-226 ■ status card-mem 8-233 ■ status cdr-link 8-236 ■ status cleared-alarm-notif 8-237 ■ status conference 8-238 ■ status data-module 8-274 ■ status hardware-group 8-275 ■ status health 8-277 ■ status interface 8-279 ■ status isdn-testcall 8-280 ■ status journal-link 8-282 ■ status link 8-283 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page ix ■ status pms-link 8-290 ■ status pri-endpoint 8-291 ■ status processor-channel 8-293 ■ status signaling-group 8-295 ■ status sp-link 8-297 ■ status station 8-298 ■ status synchronization 8-300 ■ status system 8-301 ■ status trunk 8-310 ■ status tsc-administered 8-312 ■ status tti 8-313 ■ test access-endpoint 8-316 ■ test alarms 8-317 ■ test analog-testcall 8-322 ■ test board 8-325 ■ test card-mem 8-327 ■ test cdr-link 8-331 ■ test customer-alarm 8-333 ■ test data-module 8-334 ■ test ds1-loop 8-336 ■ test duplication-interface 8-338 ■ test eda-external-device-alrm 8-340 ■ test environment 8-343 ■ test hardware-group 8-346 ■ test inads-link 8-352 ■ test interface 8-354 ■ test isdn-testcall 8-355 ■ test journal-printer 8-357 ■ test led 8-359 ■ test link 8-361 ■ test maintenance 8-362 ■ test memory 8-365 ■ test modem-pool 8-366 ■ test network-control 8-369 ■ test packet-control 8-372 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page x 9 ■ test pkt 8-373 ■ test pms-link 8-375 ■ test port 8-378 ■ test pri-endpoint 8-379 ■ test processor 8-382 ■ test shadow-link 8-383 ■ test signaling-group 8-386 ■ test sp-link 8-387 ■ test spe-standby 8-389 ■ test station 8-391 ■ test synchronization 8-393 ■ test tdm 8-396 ■ test tone-clock 8-397 ■ test trunk 8-399 ■ test tsc-administered 8-401 ■ upgrade software 8-403 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction 9-1 ■ General 9-1 ■ Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance 9-2 ■ Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction 9-3 ■ Packet Bus 9-3 ■ Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus 9-5 ■ Maintenance of the Packet Bus 9-7 ■ The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) 9-10 ■ Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart 9-19 ■ Packet Bus Fault Correction 9-24 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 10-1 ■ Escalation Procedures 10-1 ■ Cabling Precautions 10-1 ■ 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) 10-3 ■ ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) 10-6 ■ AC-POWER 10-7 ■ ADM-CONN (Administered Connection) 10-15 ■ ADX8D-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack) 10-19 ■ ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) 10-20 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xi ■ ADX16D-B (16 Port AUDIX Circuit Pack) 10-27 ■ ADX16A-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack) 10-28 ■ ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) 10-29 ■ ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) 10-36 ■ ALARM-PT (ALARM PORT) 10-43 ■ ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) 10-44 ■ ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack) 10-63 ■ ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) 10-64 ■ ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) 10-84 ■ ANN-PT (Announcement Port) 10-105 ■ ANNOUNCE (Announce) 10-119 ■ ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board) 10-124 ■ ASAI-EPT 10-126 ■ ASAI-PT 10-134 ■ ASAI-RES/E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot) 10-144 ■ BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) 10-145 ■ BRI-DAT (ISDN-BRI) 10-153 ■ BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) 10-154 ■ BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT 10-178 ■ CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) 10-209 ■ CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity) 10-223 ■ CARD-MEM (Memory Card) 10-226 ■ CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems 10-245 CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems 10-262 ■ CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit Pack) 10-277 ■ CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) 10-278 ■ CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack) 10-283 ■ CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) 10-284 ■ CO-TRK (CO Trunk) 10-301 ■ CONFIG (System Configuration) 10-328 ■ CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device) 10-340 ■ DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) 10-343 ■ DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) 10-348 ■ Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xii ■ DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) 10-377 ■ DAT-LINE (Data Line) 10-379 ■ DC-POWER 10-387 ■ DETR-BD 10-391 ■ DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack) 10-392 ■ DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) 10-393 ■ DID-TRK (DID Trunk) 10-405 ■ DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack) 10-422 ■ DIG-LINE (Digital Line) 10-423 ■ DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) 10-450 ■ DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk), DIOD-BD (DIOD Circuit Pack) [G1.2SE] 10-462 ■ DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] 10-463 ■ DLY-MTCE (MO-DAILY) 10-474 ■ DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) 10-475 ■ DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack) 10-547 ■ DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] 10-548 ■ DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) 10-553 ■ E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board) 10-570 ■ E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot) 10-572 ■ E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) 10-573 ■ EMG-XFER 10-583 ■ EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit) 10-587 ■ ERR-LOG (Error Log) 10-590 ■ ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) 10-592 ■ EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) 10-598 ■ EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link) 10-647 ■ EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm) 10-649 ■ EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm) 10-653 ■ FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) 10-657 ■ GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR)] 10-672 ■ HYB-BD (Hybrid Line Circuit Pack) 10-673 ■ HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) 10-674 ■ INADS (INADS Link) 10-699 ■ ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) 10-702 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xiii ■ ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) 10-709 ■ ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) 10-718 ■ ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) 10-745 ■ LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation) 10-772 ■ JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link) 10-775 ■ LGATE-AJ 10-776 ■ LGATE-BD 10-776 ■ LGATE-PT 10-776 ■ MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) 10-777 ■ MEM-BD (Memory) 10-795 ■ MEMORY 10-801 ■ MET-BD (MET Line Circuit Pack) 10-802 ■ MET-LINE (MET Line) 10-803 ■ MIS (Management Information System) 10-827 ■ MODEM-BD (Modem Pool Circuit Pack) 10-828 ■ MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) 10-829 ■ MMI-BD 10-845 ■ MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level) 10-854 ■ MMI-PT 10-857 ■ MMI-SYNC 10-863 ■ M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) 10-865 ■ M/T-BD (Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack) 10-875 ■ M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] 10-876 ■ M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) 10-889 ■ OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) 10-894 ■ PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) 10-907 ■ PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) 10-927 ■ PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) 10-946 ■ PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) 10-953 ■ PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) 10-969 ■ PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) 10-974 ■ PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) 10-982 ■ PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) 10-993 ■ PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) 10-1008 ■ PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) 10-1016 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xiv POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems 10-1022 POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems 10-1031 PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) 10-1035 ■ PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) 10-1050 ■ PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) 10-1062 ■ PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) 10-1071 ■ PROC-SAN (Process Sanity Audits) 10-1078 ■ PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) 10-1079 ■ PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) 10-1086 ■ RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) 10-1094 ■ S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack) 10-1103 ■ S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) 10-1104 ■ SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link Maintenance) 10-1117 ■ SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) 10-1118 ■ SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) 10-1125 ■ SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) 10-1143 ■ STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) 10-1147 ■ STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] 10-1184 ■ SVC-SLOT (Service Slot) 10-1196 ■ SW-CTL (Switch Control) 10-1198 ■ SYNC (Synchronization) 10-1212 ■ SYS-PRNT (System Printer) 10-1224 ■ SYSTEM (System) 10-1230 ■ TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286] 10-1232 ■ TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency) 10-1262 ■ TBRI-BD (TN2185 ISDN Trunk-Side BRI) 10-1273 TBRI-PT (TN2185 ISDN Trunk-Side BRI Port) 10-1281 TBRI-TRK (TN2185 ISDN Trunk-Side BRI) 10-1301 ■ TDMODULE (Trunk Data Module) 10-1311 ■ TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) 10-1312 ■ TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) 10-1333 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xv A ■ TIE-BD (Tie Trunk Circuit Pack) 10-1347 ■ TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk) 10-1348 ■ TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk) 10-1366 ■ TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) 10-1391 ■ TONE-PT (Tone Generator) 10-1411 ■ TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections) 10-1422 ■ TTR-LEV (TTR Level) 10-1428 ■ UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack) 10-1433 ■ VC-BD 10-1523 ■ VC-DSPPT 10-1527 ■ VC-LEV (Voice Conditioner DSP Port Level) 10-1536 ■ VC-SUMPT 10-1539 ■ WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port) 10-1544 ■ XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) 10-1551 Error Messages A-1 Error Messages from Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands A-1 ■ busyout access-endpoint A-1 ■ busyout board A-2 ■ busyout cdr-link A-3 ■ busyout data-module A-4 ■ busyout journal-printer A-5 ■ busyout link A-5 ■ busyout mis A-6 ■ busyout modem-pool A-7 ■ busyout packet-control A-8 ■ busyout pms-link A-8 ■ busyout port A-9 ■ busyout pri-endpoint A-10 ■ busyout sp-link A-11 ■ busyout spe-standby A-11 ■ busyout station A-12 ■ busyout tdm A-13 ■ busyout tone-clock A-13 ■ Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xvi ■ busyout trunk A-15 ■ cancel hardware-group A-16 ■ change circuit-packs A-16 ■ change synchronization A-17 ■ clear audits A-17 ■ clear errors A-17 ■ clear interface A-18 ■ clear isdn-testcall A-19 ■ clear link A-20 ■ clear mst A-21 ■ clear pkt A-21 ■ clear port A-22 ■ copy update-file A-22 ■ disable administered-connection A-23 ■ disable mst A-24 ■ disable suspend-alm-orig A-24 ■ disable synchronization-switch A-25 ■ disable test-number A-25 ■ display alarms A-26 ■ display disabled-tests A-28 ■ display errors A-28 ■ display events A-33 ■ display initcauses A-33 ■ display memory-configuration A-33 ■ display port A-34 ■ display synchronization A-34 ■ display system-parameters maintenance A-35 ■ display time A-35 ■ download update-file A-35 ■ enable administered-connection A-38 ■ enable mst A-39 ■ enable suspend-alm-orig A-39 ■ enable synchronization-switch A-40 ■ enable test-number A-40 ■ format card-mem A-41 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xvii ■ get vector A-41 ■ list disabled-mos A-42 ■ list history A-42 ■ list isdn-testcall A-43 ■ list marked-ports A-43 ■ list measurements A-44 ■ list mst A-44 ■ list suspend-alm-orig A-45 ■ list testcalls A-45 ■ mark port A-46 ■ monitor bcms A-47 ■ monitor health A-47 ■ monitor system A-48 ■ monitor traffic A-49 ■ monitor trunk A-49 ■ recycle carrier A-50 ■ refresh spe-standby A-51 ■ release access-endpoint A-51 ■ release board A-52 ■ release cdr-link A-53 ■ release data-module A-54 ■ release journal-printer A-55 ■ release link A-55 ■ release mis A-56 ■ release modem-pool A-57 ■ release packet-control A-58 ■ release pms-link A-58 ■ release port A-59 ■ release pri-endpoint A-60 ■ release sp-link A-61 ■ release spe-standby A-62 ■ release station A-62 ■ release tdm A-63 ■ release tone-clock A-64 ■ release trunk A-65 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xviii ■ reset board A-66 ■ reset interface A-67 ■ reset maintenance A-69 ■ reset spe-standby A-70 ■ reset system A-70 ■ restore announcements A-71 ■ resume hardware-group A-72 ■ save announcements A-73 ■ save translation A-74 ■ set expansion-link A-75 ■ set options A-76 ■ set signaling-group A-78 ■ set synchronization A-78 ■ set tdm A-79 ■ set time A-80 ■ set tone-clock A-81 ■ set vector A-83 ■ status access-endpoint A-84 ■ status administered-connection A-85 ■ status attendant A-86 ■ status audits A-86 ■ status bri-port A-87 ■ status card-mem A-88 ■ status cdr-link A-89 ■ status cleared-alarm-notif A-89 ■ status conference A-89 ■ status data-module A-89 ■ status hardware-group A-90 ■ status health A-91 ■ status interface A-91 ■ status isdn-testcall A-92 ■ status journal-link A-93 ■ status link A-94 ■ status logins A-94 ■ status mst A-95 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xix ■ status packet-control A-95 ■ Ostatus periodic-scheduled A-96 ■ status pms-link A-96 ■ status pri-endpoint A-97 ■ status processor-channel A-97 ■ status signaling-group A-98 ■ status sp-link A-99 ■ status station A-99 ■ status synchronization A-100 ■ status system A-100 ■ status trunk A-101 ■ status tsc-administered A-102 ■ status tti A-103 ■ test access-endpoint A-103 ■ test alarms A-104 ■ test analog-testcall A-108 ■ test board A-110 ■ test card-mem A-111 ■ test cdr-link A-112 ■ test customer-alarm A-113 ■ test data-module A-113 ■ test ds1-loop A-114 ■ test duplication-interface A-116 ■ test eda-external-device-alrm A-117 ■ test environment A-117 ■ test hardware-group A-117 ■ test inads-link A-120 ■ test interface A-120 ■ test isdn-testcall A-122 ■ test journal-printer A-123 ■ test led A-124 ■ test link A-124 ■ test maintenance A-125 ■ test memory A-126 ■ test modem-pool A-128 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Contents Page xx IN ■ test network-control A-129 ■ test packet-control A-131 ■ test pkt A-131 ■ test pms-link A-132 ■ test port A-133 ■ test pri-endpoint A-134 ■ test processor A-135 ■ test shadow-link A-136 ■ test signaling-group A-137 ■ test sp-link A-138 ■ test spe-standby A-138 ■ test station A-139 ■ test synchronization A-140 ■ test tdm A-141 ■ test tone-clock A-142 ■ test trunk A-143 ■ test tsc-administered A-144 ■ upgrade software A-145 Index IN-1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 About This Book General Page xxi About This Book General This book has the information needed to monitor, test, and maintain DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Systems and covers many of the faults and troubles that can occur in the system. Most maintenance requirements are simple procedures due to the modular, self-testing nature of the system. This document covers information related to DEFINITY ECS Release 6.1, including all incremental releases. Simple, traditional troubleshooting methods are sometimes sufficient to locate and clear faults. The traditional methods include terminal substitution, visual inspections, continuity checks, and clarification of operating procedures with users. The information in this book is intended for use by: ■ A maintenance technician dispatched to a DEFINITY System site in response to a trouble alarm or a user trouble report, ■ A maintenance technician located at a remote maintenance facility, or ■ The user’s assigned maintenance technician. The technician is expected to have a knowledge of telecommunications fundamentals and of the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5 Systems to the extent that the procedures in this book can be performed, in most cases, without assistance. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Conventions Used in This Document Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxii Each DEFINITY System has a user-designated System Manager who is responsible for administration of the system. The maintenance technician should work closely with the user’s System Manager. This book is not intended to solve all levels of troubles. It is limited to troubles that can be solved by using the Alarm Log, Error Log, trouble-clearing procedures, maintenance tests, and traditional troubleshooting methods. If the trouble still has not been resolved, it the responsibility of the maintenance technician to escalate the problem to a higher level of technical support. Escalation should conform to the procedures in the Technical and Administration Escalation Plan. When features, screen displays, equipment, or operations differ between system types, for example, Generic 3 V4, Release 5si, or Release 5si + memory, these differences are clearly identified by use of the following indicators: “[G3V4]”, “[R5si]”, or “[R5 si + memory].” Conventions Used in This Document The following conventions are used in this document: ■ DEFINITY Systems are called G3V4, Release 5; Release 5vs, Release 5si, Release 5si + memory, and Release 6. ■ All occurrences of G3siV4, G3siV4+m, Release 5si, and Release 5 si + memory are called Release 5si unless a specific configuration is required to differentiate among product offerings. ■ All occurrences of R5 without a suffix following the “5” refer to Release 5si, and Release 5si + memory. ■ A component of a DEFINITY System, such as a circuit pack, occurring without a reference to any specific system, is part of G3V4 or Release 5. ■ The term “ASAI” is synonymous with the newer CallVisor ASAI. ■ All physical dimensions in this book are in English (Foot Pound Second) (FPS) followed by the metric Centimeter Grams Second (CGS) in parenthesis. Wire gauge measurements are in AWG followed by the diameter in millimeters in parenthesis. ■ Admonishments used in this book are as follows: ! CAUTION: This sign is used to indicate possible harm to software, possible loss of data, or possible service interuptions. ! WARNING: This sign is used where there is possible harm to hardware or equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Organization Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxiii ! DANGER: This sign is used to indicate possible harm or injury to people. Organization This book is organized into two volumes: volume 1 contains Chapters 1 through 9, and volume 2 contains Chapter 10. ■ Chapter 1, ‘‘Maintenance Architecture’’ describes the system’s design and maintenance strategy. ■ Chapter 2, ‘‘Circuit Packs and Power’’ describes DEFINITY circuit packs. It also explains how power is supplied to the system. ■ Chapter 3, ‘‘Management Terminals’’ describes the various management terminals that can be used on the system and how to set up the terminals. ■ Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’ describes the various reset and reboot processes, and discusses how these processes are used to perform maintenance and to recover systems or subsystems that are out of service. ■ Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ discusses common maintenance tasks, including: removing and installing circuit packs, removing and restoring power, performing system backups, upgrading software, and various testing and troubleshooting procedures. ■ Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ provides detailed hardware and functional descriptions as well as additional repair strategy (in addition to the procedures provided in this document) for Standard, High, and Critical Reliability systems. ■ Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’ is a quick reference to interpreting circuit pack LEDs. ■ Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ has the maintenance commands, and explains how to use these commands using the management terminal. Specific command syntax plus typical forms and display output are also given in the chapter. ■ Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ describes Pack Bus maintenance and the interactions of the bus with Packet circuit packs. The chapter also discusses how Packet Bus faults are isolated and corrected. ■ Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ has specific troubleshooting and repair instructions for every component in the system. The chapter contains repair procedures for system-alarmed and userreported troubles. For each MO, a table lists the alarm level, hardware error associated with the MO, and the associated test that caused the error. The test sequences and the specific command line entry required to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Safety Precautions Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxiv run the tests are given and a brief description of each test. Explanations of error codes associated with each test are given, as are specific maintenance procedures to be used to resolve each problem. Each MO is described in a separate section of Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. The individual sections are labeled with the name of the MO exactly as the name appears in the Alarm Log; for example, MAINT (for Maintenance circuit pack). The only exception is the MO name for Common Port Circuit Pack maintenance which is XXX-BD. The XXX-BD section contains a set of common tests used by certain circuit packs listed in the section. The common portion of these circuit packs is the generic hardware that interfaces with the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. Lucent Technologies listens carefully to its readers. The organization of this book is a direct result of user feedback. Your feedback is important. Use the feedback form at the back of this book to send your comments to Lucent Technologies. Safety Precautions When performing maintenance or translation procedures on the system, users must observe certain precautions. Observe all caution, warning, and danger statements to prevent loss of service, possible equipment damage, and possible personal injury. In addition, the following precautions regarding electromagnetic interference (EMI) and static electricity must be observed: Electromagnetic Interference This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. Electromagnetic fields radiating from the switch may cause noise in the customer’s equipment. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction book, radio interference may result. ! WARNING: To maintain the EMI integrity of the system, maintenance personnel must ensure that all cabinet panels, covers, and so forth, are firmly secured before leaving the customer’s premises. Static Electricity To prevent or reduce electrostatic discharge (ESD), always attach wrist grounding straps before working on switch components or handling circuit packs. ! CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage or destroy circuit packs containing integrated circuits (ICs). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Class 1 Laser Device Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxv The ESD wrist strap, cable assembly, and spare fuses are packed in a plastic bag and placed in the top of the system cabinet. Use the ESD wrist strap when troubleshooting, performing maintenance, or handling any circuit packs associated with the system. Class 1 Laser Device The DEFINITY ECS contains a Class 1 Laser device if single-mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network (EPN). The LASER device operates within the following parameters: Power Output: -5 dBm Wavelength: 1310 nm Mode Field Diameter: 8.8 microns ! DANGER: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Contact your Lucent Technolgies representative for more information. Security Issues A number of matters concerning maintenance are affected by security issues. For details, be sure to consult the GBCS Products Security Handbook, Release 6, 555-025-600. ! CAUTION: Login security is an attribute of the DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server (ECS) Release 5 software. Standards Compliance The equipment presented in this document complies with the following (as appropriate): ■ ITU-T (Formerly CCITT) ■ ECMA ■ ETSI ■ IPNS ■ DPNSS ■ National ISDN-1 ■ National ISDN-2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 About This Book Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards ■ ISO-9000 ■ ANSI ■ FCC Part 15 and Part 68 ■ EN55022 ■ EN50081 ■ EN50082 ■ CISPR22 ■ Australia AS3548 (AS/NZ3548) ■ Australia AS3260 ■ IEC 825 ■ IEC950 ■ UL 1459 ■ UL1950 ■ CSA C222 Number 225 ■ TS001 Page xxvi Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following: ■ Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment, EN55022 (CISPR22), 1993 ■ EN50082-1, European Generic Immunity Standard ■ FCC Parts 15 and 68 ■ Australia AS3548 NOTE: The system conforms to Class A (industrial) equipment. Voice terminals meet Class B requirements. ■ Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2 ■ Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000-4-3 ■ Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000-4-4 ■ Lightning effects IEC 1000-4-5 ■ Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000-4-6 ■ Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000-4-8 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Trademarks and Service Marks ■ Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxvii Low frequency mains disturbance The system conforms to the following: ■ Electromagnetic compatibility General Immunity Standard, part 1; residential, commercial, light industry, EN50082-1, CENELEC, 1991 ■ Issue 1 (1984) and Issue 2 (1992), Electrostatic discharge immunity requirements (EN55024, Part 2) IEC 1000-4-2 ■ Radiated radio frequency field immunity requirements IEC 1000-4-3 ■ Electrical fast transient/burst immunity requirements IEC 1000-4-4 European Union Standards Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that the DEFINITY equipment specified in this document bearing the “CE” mark conforms to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives. The “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark indicates conformance to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (89/336/EEC) Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment (TTE) Directive (91/263/EEC) and with i-CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and i-CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) as applicable. The “CE” mark is applied to the following Release 5 products: ■ Global AC powered Multi-Carrier Cabinet (MCC) ■ DC powered Multi-Carrier Cabinet (MCC) with 25-Hz ring generator ■ AC powered Single-Carrier Cabinet (SCC) with 25-Hz ring generator ■ AC powered Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet (CSCC) with 25-Hz ring generator ■ Enhanced DC Power System Trademarks and Service Marks The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies: ■ 5ESS™, 4ESS™ AUDIX® ■ Callvisor® ■ Callmaster® ■ CentreVu™ ■ ■ ■ CONVERSANT® DEFINITY® DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Related Documents Page xxviii ■ DIMENSION® MERLIN® ■ VOICE POWER® ■ Issue 1 August 1997 The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of AT&T: ■ ACCUNET® ■ ■ ■ ■ DATAPHONE® MEGACOM® MULTIQUEST® TELESEER® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies: ■ Ascend® (registered trademark of Ascend, Inc.) ■ ■ Audichron® (registered trademark of the Audichron Company) MS-DOS® (registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation) ■ MicroChannel® (registered trademark of IBM Systems) MULTIQUEST® (registered trademark of Telecommunications Service) PagePac® (trademark of the Dracon Division of the Harris Corporation) ■ UNIX® (trademark of the Novell Corporation) ■ ■ Related Documents The following books are useful for system-related information: DEFINITY ECS Release 6.1.0 — Change Description, Issue 1, 555-230-474 Gives a high-level overview of what is new in DEFNITY ECS Release 6. Describes the hardware and software enhancements and lists the problem corrections for this release. DEFINITY ECS Release 6 — System Description Pocket Reference, Issue 1, 555-230-211 Provides hardware descriptions, system parameters, listing of hardware required to use features, system configurations, and environmental requirements. This compact reference combines and replaces Release 6 System Description and Specifications and Release 6 Pocket Reference. DEFINITY ECS Release 6 — Administration and Feature Description, Issue 2, 555-230-522 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Related Documents Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxix Provides descriptions of system features. Also provides step-by-step procedures for preparing the screens that are required to implement the features, functions, and services of the system. Includes the applications and benefits, feature interactions, administration requirements, hardware requirements, and procedures for voice terminal, data module, and trunk group administration. DEFINITY ECS Release 5 — System Monitoring and Reporting, Issue 4, 555-230-511 Provides detailed descriptions of the measurement, status, security, and recent change history reports available in the system and is intended for administrators who validate traffic reports and evaluate system performance. Includes corrective actions for potential problems. Issue 2 of this document was titled Traffic Reports. The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Planning and Configuration, Issue 2, 555-230-601 This document was written for Generic 3 Version 2 software, but still contains relevant information for the ECS. Provides step-by-step procedures for the account team in determining the customer’s equipment and hardware requirements to configure a system according to the customer specifications. Includes detailed requirements and block diagrams. DEFINITY ECS Release 5 — Installation and Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets, Issue 3, 555-230-894 Provivdes procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of single-carrier cabinets.The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well. This document is available in the following languages: English, German (DE), Dutch (NL), Brazilian Portuguese (PTB), European French (FR), Castillian Spanish (SP), Italian (IT), Russian (RU), and Japanese (JA). To order, append the language suffix to the document number; for example, 555-230-894DE for German. No suffix is needed for the English version. DEFINITY ECS Release 5 — Installation and Upgrades for R5vs, Issue 1, 555-230-124 Provivdes procedures and information for hardware installation, upgrades, and initial testing of compact single-carrier cabinets. The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well. DEFINITY ECS Release 6 — Installation and Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets, Issue 3, 555-230-112 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of multi-carrier cabinets. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 About This Book Related Documents Page xxx DEFINITY ECS Release 6 — Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals, Issue 2, 555-230-125 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of ECS adjunct and peripheral systems and equipment. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3vs/si — Upgrades and Additions, Issue 1, 555-230-108 Provides procedures for an installation technician to convert an existing DEFINITY Communications System earlier than Generic 3 Version 4 to Generic 3vs/si Version 4. DEFINITY ECS Release 6 — Upgrades and Additions for R6vs/si, Issue 3, 555-230-120 Provides procedures for an installation technician to convert an existing DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Version 4 to DEFINITY ECS and from DEFINITY ECS Release 5 to DEFINITY ECS Release 6. Included are upgrade considerations, lists of required hardware, and step-by-step upgrade procedures. Also included are procedures to add control carriers, switch node carriers, port carriers, circuit packs, auxiliary cabinets, and other equipment. DEFINITY ECS Release 6 — Maintenance for R6r, Issue 1, 555-230-126 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring, testing, troubleshooting, and maintaining the R6r ECS. Included are maintenance commands, step-by-step trouble-clearing procedures, the procedures for using all tests, and explanations of the system’s error codes. BCS Products Security Handbook, Issue 6, 555-025-600 Provides information about the risks of telecommunications fraud and measures for addressing those risks and preventing unauthorized use of BCS products. This document is intended for telecommunications managers, console operators, and security organizations within companies. DEFINITY ECS Release 5 — Terminals and Adjuncts Reference, Issue 8, 555-015-201 Provides descriptions of the peripheral equipment that can be used with System 75, System 85, DEFINITY Communications System, and DEFINITY ECS. This document is intended for customers and Lucent Technologies account teams for selecting the correct peripherals to accompany an ECS. The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well. DEFINITY Wireless Business System Users Guide, 555-232-105 DEFINITY Wireless Business System Installation and Test Guide, 555-232-102 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Federal Communications Commission Statement Issue 1 August 1997 Page xxxi DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems System Interface, 555-232-108 AT&T Network and Data Connectivity Reference, 555-025-201 Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 68: Statement Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer-supervision signals to the public switched network when: ■ Answered by the called station ■ Answered by the attendant ■ Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible exceptions are: ■ A call is unanswered ■ A busy tone is received ■ A reorder tone is received This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. NOTE: REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 About This Book Federal Communications Commission Statement Page xxxii Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following table. Manufacturer’s Port Identifier FIC Code SOC/REN/ A.S. Code Network Jacks Off/On Premises Station OL13C 9.0F RJ2GX, RJ21X, RJ11C DID Trunk 02RV2-T 0.0B RJ2GX, RJ21X CO Trunk 02GS2 0.3A RJ21X CO Trunk 02LS2 0.3A RJ21X Tie Trunk TL31M 9.0F RJ2GX 1.544 Digital Interface 04DU9-B,C 6.0P RJ48C, RJ48M 1.544 Digital Interface 04DU9-BN,KN 6.0P RJ48C, RJ48M 120A2 Channel Service Unit 04DU9-DN 6.0P RJ48C If the terminal equipment (DEFINITY® System) causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact the Technical Service Center at 1-800-248-1234. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. It is recommended that repairs be performed by Lucent Technologies certified technicians. The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is hearing aid compatible. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 1 Maintenance Architecture Maintenance Objects Maintenance Architecture Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-1 1 The maintenance subsystem is a part of the software that initializes and maintains the system. The software continuously monitors system health, and keeps a record of errors detected in the system. The maintenance subsystem also provides a user interface for on-demand testing. This chapter provides a brief description of the Release 5 maintenance strategy and the background information on the system’s overall functions. For detailed descriptions of components and subsystems, refer to related topics in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Maintenance Objects The system is partitioned into separate entities called Maintenance Objects (MOs). Each MO is referred to by an upper-case, mnemonic-like name that serves as an abbreviation for the MO. For example, “CO-TRK” stands for “Central Office TRunK”. Each MO is monitored by the system and has its own maintenance strategy. Most MOs are individual circuit packs. Some MOs are hardware components that reside on part of a circuit pack. For example, the TDM bus Clock circuits reside on the Tone/Clock circuit pack. Other MOs, such as cabinet environmental sensors, represent larger subsystems or sets of monitors. Finally, some MOs, such as SYNChronization, represent processes or a combination of processes and hardware. “Maintenance names” are recorded in the error and alarm logs. Individual copies of an MO are assigned an address that defines the MO’s physical location in the system. These locations display as the “PORT” field in the alarm and error logs and as output of various commands such as test board, busy tdm-bus, and so forth. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Architecture Alarm and Error Reporting Page 1-2 Alarm and Error Reporting During normal operations, software or firmware may detect error conditions relevant to specific MOs. The system attempts to fix or circumvent these problems automatically. However, if a hardware component incurs too many errors, an alarm is raised. Errors are detected in two ways: ■ For “in-line” errors, firmware on the component detects the occurrence of an error during ongoing operations. ■ For other types of errors, a “periodic test” or a “scheduled test” started by the software detects the error. The technician can run these tests on demand by using the maintenance commands described in Chapter 8, ‘‘busyout journal-printer’’, and Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Software puts the error in the error log, and increments the error counter for that error. When an error counter is “active,” (greater than zero), there is a maintenance record for the MO. Alarms are classified as MAJOR, MINOR, or WARNING, depending on the effect on system operation. They are also classified as ON-BOARD or OFF-BOARD. — MAJOR alarms identify failures that cause a critical degradation of service. These alarms require immediate attention. — MINOR alarms identify failures that cause some service degradation but that do not render a crucial portion of the system inoperable. MINOR alarms require attention. However, typically a MINOR alarm affects only a few trunks or stations or a single feature. — WARNING alarms identify failures that cause no significant degradation of service or equipment failures external to the switch. These failures are not reported to INADS or to the attendant console. — ON-BOARD problems originate in the circuitry on the alarmed circuit pack. — OFF-BOARD problems originate in a process or component that is external to the circuit pack. Alarms are discussed further in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Maintenance Testing Most troubles are reduced to the circuit pack level and can be identified by LEDs on the circuit packs and software reports generated by the system. The maintenance tests in the system are divided into three groups: ■ Periodic Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Page 1-3 Background tests are performed by software maintenance, usually on an hourly basis. These tests are nondestructive and can be run during high traffic periods without interfering with calls. ■ Scheduled Background tests performed by software maintenance, usually on a daily basis, are generally more thorough than periodic testing. The tests are considered destructive and are run only during off-hours so as not to interfere with calls. ■ Fixed interval Background tests performed by software maintenance at regular time intervals (these intervals cannot be administered). These tests run concurrently with periodic maintenance. The following table lists the MOs that run fixed interval testing. Maintenance Object Interval (minutes) POWER 60 SPE-SELEC 60 STBY-SPE 120 TDM-BUS 10 TONE-PT 10 Demand tests are also run by the system when it detects a need or by maintenance personnel in trouble-clearing activities. Demand tests include periodic tests plus other tests required only when trouble occurs. Some nonperiodic demand tests may disrupt system operation. In this book, destructive (service-disrupting) tests are identified in boldface type. Maintenance personnel can use the management terminal to initiate the same tests that the system initiates. The terminal screen displays the test results. Protocols This section describes the protocols handled by the system and the points where these protocols change. Figure 1-1 is a pictorial guide through datatransmission state changes. Figure 1-1 illustrates the flow of data from DTE equipment, like a terminal or host, through DCE equipment, like a modem or data module, into a communications port on the system. The data flow is shown by solid lines. Below these lines are the protocols used at particular points in the data stream. Not shown in the Figure 1-1 is the treatment of D-channels in ISDN-PRI and ISDN-BRI transmissions. PRI and BRI D-channels transport information elements DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-4 that contain call-signaling and caller information. These elements conform to ISDN level-3 protocol. In the case of BRI, the elements are created by the terminal or data module; for the PRI, the elements are created by the system, which inserts them into the D-channel at the DS1 port. For ISDN transmissions, therefore, BRI terminals and data modules, and DS1 ports insert, interpret, and strip both layer-2 DCE information and layer-3 elements. Also, the DS1 port passes layer-3 elements to the system for processing. Layers The Open System Interconnect (OSI) model for data communications contains seven layers, each with a specific function. Communications to and through the system concern themselves only with layers 1 and 2 of the model. Layer 1, or the physical layer, covers the physical interface between devices and the rules by which bits are passed. Among the physical layer protocols are RS-232, RS-449, X.21, DCP, DS1, and others. Layer 2, or the data-link layer, refers to code created and interpreted by the DCE. The originating equipment can send blocks of data with the necessary codes for synchronization, error control, or flow control. With these codes, the destination equipment checks the physical-link reliability, corrects any transmission errors, and maintains the link. When a transmission reaches the destination equipment, it strips any layer-2 information the originating equipment may have inserted. The destination equipment only passes to the destination DTE equipment the information sent by the originating DTE equipment. The originating DTE equipment can also add layer-2 code to be analyzed by the destination DTE equipment. The DCE equipment treats this layer as data and passes it along to the destination DTE equipment as it would any other binary bits. Layers 3 to 7 (and the DTE-created layer 2) are embedded in the transmission stream and are meaningful only at the destination DTE equipment. Therefore, they are shown in the figure as ‘‘user-defined,’’ with no state changes until the transmission stream reaches its destination. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Page 1-5 ORIGINATING DCE DTE DATA MODULE DTE DATA MODULE 1 RS232C 2 ASCII SYSTEM DCP DESTINATION DCE D I G I T A L P O R T D I G I T A L P O R T D I G I T A L P O R T D I G I T A L P O R T RAW BITS DATA MODULE DATA MODULE DCP DTE RS232C DMI ASCII USER DEFINED 3-7 A N A L O G P O R T MODEM MODEM POOLING CABLE PCM MODEM DTE 1 RS232C 2 ASCII ANALOG A N A L O G L I N E P O R T PCM E P I O A R T ADU RS232C ADU PROT ASYNCH ASCII DTE RS232C ASCII E P I O A R T ADU ADU PROT DMI DTE RS232C ASYNCH ASCII USER DEFINED DATA MODULE DTE 2 MODEM ANALOG RAW BITS 3-7 1 P O R T USER DEFINED DTE 2 T R U N K VOICE GRADE DATA 3-7 1 A N A L O G RS232C ASCII 3-7 DCP D I G I T A L P O R T P D O S R 1 T RAW BITS DMI USER DEFINED Figure 1-1. Data Transmission States DS1 PORT DS1 FORMAT DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-6 Usage The following is a list of the protocols when data is transmitted to and through the system. The list is organized by protocol layers. Refer to Figure 1-1. Layer-1 Protocols Layer-1 protocols are used between the terminal or host DTE and the DCE, used between the DCE equipment and the system port, and used inside the system. The following layer-1 protocols are used between the DTE equipment and the DCE equipment. DCE equipment can be data modules, modems, or Data Service Units (DSUs). A DSU is a device that transmits digital data to a particular digital endpoint over the public network without processing the data through any intervening private network switches. ■ ■ ■ RS-232 — A common physical interface used to connect DTE to DCE. This protocol is typically used for communicating up to 19.2 kbps RS-449 — Designed to overcome the RS-232 distance and speed restrictions and lack of modem control V.35 — A physical interface used to connect DTE to a DCE. This protocol is typically used for transmissions at 56 or 64 kbps The following protocols are used at layer 1 to govern communication between the DCE equipment and the port. These protocols consist of codes inserted at the originating DCE and stripped at the port. The DS1 protocol can be inserted at the originating, outgoing trunk port and stripped at the destination port. ■ ■ ■ Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) — A standard for a 3-channel link. This protocol sends digitized voice and digital data in frames at 160 kbps. The channel structure consists of two information (I) channels and one signaling (S) channel. Each I-channel provides 64 kbps of voice and/or data communication and the S-channel provides 8 kbps of signaling communication between the system and DTE equipment. DCP is similar to ISDN-BRI Basic Rate Interface (BRI) — An ISDN standard for a 3-channel link, consisting of two 64-kbps bearer (B) channels and one 16-kbps signaling (D) channel. For the implementation of this standard, see DEFINITY Communications System and System 75 and System 85 ISDN BRI Reference, 555-025-103 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) — An ISDN standard that sends digitized voice and digital data in T1 frames at 1.544-Mbps or, for countries outside the United States, in E1 frames at 2.048-Mbps. Layer 1 (physical), layer 2 (link), and layer 3 (network) ISDN PRI protocols are defined in AT&T System 75 and 85 — DS1/DMI/ISDN-PRI — Reference Manual, 555-025-101. At 1.544 Mbps, each frame consists of 24 64-kbps channels plus 8 kbps for framing. This represents 23 B-channels plus 1 D-channel. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-7 The maximum user rate is 64 kbps for voice and data. The maximum distances are based on T1 limitations. At 2.048 Mbps, each E1 frame consists of 32 64-kbps channels ■ ■ ■ ■ Analog — A modulated voice-frequency carrier signal ADU Proprietary — A signal generated by an ADU. The signal is for communication over limited distances and can be understood only by a destination ADU or destination system port with a built-in ADU Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) — A protocol defining the line coding, signaling, and framing used on a 24-channel line. Many types of trunk protocols (for example, PRI and 24th-channel signaling) use DS1 protocol at layer 1 European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications rate 1 (CEPT1) — A protocol defining the line coding, signaling, and framing used on a 32-channel line. Countries outside the United States use CEPT1 protocol Inside the system, data transmission appears in one of two forms: 1. Raw digital data, where the physical layer protocols, like DCP, are stripped at the incoming port and reinserted at the outgoing port. 2. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)-encoded analog signals (analog transmission by a modem), the signal having been digitized by an analog-to-digital coder/decoder (CODEC) at the incoming port. Layer-2 Protocols Layer-2 protocols are given below: ■ ■ ■ 8-bit character code — Between the DTE equipment and the DCE equipment. Depending on the type of equipment used, the code can be any proprietary code set. Digital multiplexed interface proprietary — Family of protocols between the originating DCE and the destination DCE for digital transmission. See DEFINITY Communications System and System 75 and System 85 DS1/DMI/ISDN PRI Reference, 555-025-101; and Digital Multiplexed Interface [DMI] Technical Specification, 555-025-204 Voice-grade data — Between the originating DCE and the destination DCE for analog transmission Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Page 1-8 Protocol States Table 1-1 summarizes the protocols used at various points in the data transmission stream. See Figure 1-1. Table 1-1. Protocol States for Data Communication Transmission Type Analog Incoming DTE to DCE OSI Layer Protocols DTE to DCE Modem 1 RS-232, RS-449, or V.35 analog PCM 2 8- or 10-bit code voice-grade data voice-grade data 1 RS-232 ADU proprietary raw bits 2 asynchronous 8-bit code asynchronous 8-bit code DMI 1 RS-232, RS-449, or V.35 DCP or BRI raw bits 2 8-bit code DMI DMI 1 any DS1 PCM or raw bits 2 8-bit code DMI or voicegrade data DMI or voice- grade data ADU Digital Data Module Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) DCE to System Port Inside System NOTE: OSI means Open Systems Interconnect PCM means Pulse Code Modulated DMI means Digital Multiplexed Interface Both the physical-layer protocol and the Digital Multiplexed Interface (DMI) mode used in the connection are dependent upon the type of 8-bit code used at layer 2 between the DTE equipment and DCE equipment, as listed in Table 1-2 and Table 1-3. Table 1-2. Physical-Layer Protocol Versus Character Code Protocol Code RS-232 Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII, and synchronous RS-449 Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII, and synchronous V.35 Synchronous DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Table 1-3. Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-9 Digital Multiplexed Interface (DMI) Mode Versus Character Code DMI Mode Code 0 Synchronous (64 kbps) 1 Synchronous (56 kbps) 2 Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII (up to 19.2 kbps), and synchronous 3 Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII, and private proprietary Connectivity Rules Figure 1-1 implies the following connectivity rules: ■ Only the DS1 port and the analog trunk port are trunking facilities (all other ports are line ports). For communication over these facilities, the destination DCE equipment can be a hemisphere away from the system, and the signal can traverse any number of intervening switching systems before reaching the destination equipment. ■ Data originating at any type of digital device, whether DCP or BRI, can exit the system at any type of digital port — BRI, digital-line, PRI, DS1, and others; as long as the call destination is equipped with a data module using the same DMI mode used at the call origin. This is because once the data enters the system through a digital port, its representation is uniform (raw bits at layer 1, and DMI at level 2), regardless of where it originated. ■ Although data entering the system through an EIA port has not been processed through a data module, the port itself has a built-in data module. Inside the system, port data is identical to digital line data. Data entering the system at a DCP line port can exit at an EIA port. Conversely, data entering the system at an EIA port can exit at any DCP line port. The destination data module must be set for Mode-2 DMI communication. ■ Voice-grade data can be carried over a DS1 facility as long as the destination equipment is a modem compatible with the originating modem ■ If a mismatch exists between the types of signals used by the endpoints in a connection (for example, the equipment at one end is an analog modem, and the equipment at the other end is a digital data module), a modem-pool member must be inserted in the circuit. When the endpoints are on different switches, it is recommended that the modem-pool member be put on the origination or destination system. A modem-pool DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-10 member is always inserted automatically for calls to off-premises sites via analog or voice-grade trunking. For internal calls, however, the systems are capable of automatically inserting a modem-pool member. ■ Data cannot be carried over analog facilities unless inside the system it is represented as a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)-encoded analog signal. To do this for data originating at a digital terminal, the signal enters the system at a digital port and exits the system at a digital port. The signal then reenters the system through a modem-pool connection (data-module to modem to analog-port) and exits the system again at an analog port. ■ Although DS1 is commonly called a trunk speed, here it names the protocol used at layer 1 for digital trunks. Some trunks use different signaling methods but use DS1 protocol at layer 1 (for example, PRI and 24th-channel signaling trunks). Disconnect Supervision Disconnect supervision means the CO has the ability to release a trunk when the party at the CO disconnects, and the system is able to recognize the release signal. In general, a CO in the United States provides disconnect supervision for incoming calls but not for outgoing calls. Many other countries do not provide disconnect supervision on either incoming or outgoing calls. The system must provide the assurance that at least one party on the call can control the dropping of the call. This avoids locking up circuits on a call where no party is able to send a disconnect signal to the system. Internal operations must check to be sure one party can provide disconnect supervision. An incoming trunk that does not provide disconnect supervision is not allowed to terminate to an outgoing trunk that does not provide disconnect supervision. In a DCS environment, an incoming trunk without disconnect supervision can terminate to an outgoing DCS trunk connecting two nodes. The incoming trunk is restricted from being transferred to a party without disconnect supervision on the terminating node. This is because, through messaging, the terminating node knows the originating node cannot provide disconnect supervision. This messaging is not possible with non-DCS tie trunks, and the direct call is denied. Some two-wire loop start trunks outside the United States provide busy tone disconnect in place of line signals. For these trunks, an adjunct can be attached to the trunk to listen for busy or other disconnect tone. When a tone is detected, the adjunct sends line signals for disconnect to the system. Administration is provided for each trunk group to indicate whether it provides disconnect supervision for incoming calls and for outgoing calls. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Page 1-11 Transfer on Ringing A station or attendant may conference in a ringing station or transfer a party to a ringing station. When a station conferences in a ringing station and then drops the call, the ringing station is treated like a party without disconnect supervision. However, when a station transfers a party to a ringing station, the ringing station party is treated like a party with disconnect supervision. Two timers (Attendant Return Call Timer and Wait Answer Supervision Timer) are provided to ensure the call is not locked to a ringing station. Conference, Transfer, and Call-Forwarding Denial If a station or attendant attempts to connect parties without disconnect supervision together, the following is possible: ■ Digital Station or Local Attendant Transfer: if a digital station attempts to transfer the two parties together, the call appearance lamp flutters, indicating a denial. If transferring to a DCS trunk, the denial may drop the call since the transfer is allowed and the other system is queried for disconnect supervision. ■ Analog Station Transfer: if an analog station attempts to transfer two parties together by going on-hook, the analog station is no longer on the call and the transfer cannot be denied. ■ Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) Attendant Transfer: if a CAS attempts to transfer two parties together by pressing the release key, the release link trunk is released and the branch attempts a transfer by going on-hook ■ Station Conference/Dropout: if a station conferences all parties, the conference is allowed since the station has disconnect supervision. When the station is dropped from the call, the call is dropped since the other parties do not have disconnect supervision. ■ Station Call Forwarding: if a station is call forwarded off-premise to a trunk without disconnect supervision, the calling party without disconnect supervision is routed to the attendant Table 1-4 lists the various protocols, with applications and maximum limitations. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Table 1-4. Page 1-12 Protocols Used in DEFINITY Maximum Data Rate Protocol Applications DCP Digital switch to data endpoints 64 kbps 5000 feet (1524 m) for data 3000 feet (915 m) for voice RS-232 System to administration terminal. Data module to host computer 19.2 kbps 50 feet (15.2 m) Data module to printer 64 kbps 17 feet (5.9 m) Data module for downloading and high-speed data transfer 64 kbps 17 feet (5.9 m) 19.2 kbps 9.6 kbps 4.8 kbps 2.4 kbps 1.2 kbps 0.3 kbps 2000 feet (610 m) 5000 feet (1524 m) 7000 feet (2130 m) 12,000 feet (3654 m) 20,000 feet (6100 m) 40,000 feet (12200 m) EIA interface (Data line to ADU) Maximum Distance RS-449 Processor Interface to Processor Interface 19.2 kbps 9.6 kbps 4.8 kbps 2.4 kbps 200 feet (61 m) 400 feet (122 m) 800 feet (244 m) 1600 feet (488 m) SSI 715 BCS-2 to Processor Interface 500 series printers to Processor Interface 56 kbps 5000 feet (1524 m) BISYNC Processor Interface line controller to host computer for terminal emulation (9.6 kbps) 2.4 kbps 4.8 kbps 9.6 kbps BX.25 Communication interface to MSA, DCS, ISDN, or AUDIX 9.6 kbps SDCPI Data module to Processor Interface 64 kbps 17 feet (5.9 m) RS-366 Host computer to ACU Data module to ACU 64 kbps 50 feet (15.2 m) 17 feet (5.9 m) 56 kbps 50 feet (15.2 m) V.35 Data module to data endpoints Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Table 1-4. Page 1-13 Protocols Used in DEFINITY — Continued Maximum Data Rate Maximum Distance Data modules to terminals or cluster controller 64 kbps 500 feet (152 m) Data module in ASCII emulation mode 9.6 kbps Communication interface to ISDN-BRI S/T 64 kbps 655 feet (199.3 m) to network interface or repeater 1310 feet (399.3 m) system to system ISDN-BRI U 160 kbps 18,000 feet (5486.4 m) from system to network interface, and then ~2000 feet to phone Communication interface to ISDN-PRI 64 kbps 655 feet (199.3 m) to network interface or repeater 1310 feet (399.3 m) system to system Protocol Applications Category A ISDN-BRI ISDN-PRI Continued on next page NOTE: ADU means Asynchronous Data Unit BCS means Business Communications System MSA means Message Servicing Adjunct ACU means Automatic Call Unit Transmission Characteristics The system transmission characteristics comply with the American National Standards Institute/Electronic Industries Association (ANSI/EIA) standard RS-464A (SP-1378A). The following tables list some general switch transmission characteristics. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Page 1-14 Frequency Response Table 1-5 lists the analog-to-analog frequency response for station-to-station or station-to-CO trunk, relative to loss at 1 kHz for the United States. Table 1-5. Analog-to-Analog Frequency Response Frequency (Hz) Maximum Loss (dB) Minimum Loss (dB) 60 — 20 200 5 0 300 to 3000 1 -0.5 3200 1.5 -0.5 3400 3 0 Table 1-6 lists the analog-to-digital frequency response of the system for station or CO-trunk-to-digital interface (DS0), relative to loss at 1 kHz for the United States. Table 1-6. Analog-to-Digital Frequency Response Frequency (Hz) Maximum Loss (dB) Minimum Loss (dB) 60 — 20 200 3 0 300 to 3000 0.5 -0.25 3200 0.75 -0.25 3400 1.5 0 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-15 Insertion Loss for Port-to-Port; Analog or Digital Table 1-7 lists the insertion loss in the system for different connection types for the United States. Table 1-8 shows the overload and cross-talk characteristics. Table 1-7. Insertion Loss for the United States Typical Connections Nominal Loss (dB) at 1 kHz On-premises to on-premises station 6 On-premises to off-premises station 3 Off-premises to off-premises station 0 On-premises station to 4-wire trunk 3 Off-premises station to 4-wire trunk 2 Station-to-trunk 0 Trunk-to-trunk 0 Table 1-8. Overload and Crosstalk Overload level +3 dBm0 Crosstalk loss >70 dB Intermodulation Distortion Table 1-9 lists the intermodulation distortion in the system for analog-to-analog and analog-to-digital, up to 9.6 kbps data Table 1-9. Intermodulation Distortion Four-Tone Method Distortion Second-order tone products >46 dB Third-order tone products >56 dB DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Protocols Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-16 Quantization Distortion Loss Table 1-10 lists the quantization distortion loss in the system for analog port to analog port. Table 1-10. Quantization Distortion Loss Analog Port-to-Analog Port Signal Level Distortion Loss 0 to -30 dBm0 >33 dB -40 dBm0 >27 dB -45 dBm0 >22 dB Table 1-11 lists the quantization distortion loss in the system for analog port to digital port and digital port to analog port. Table 1-11. Quantization Distortion Loss Analog Port-to-Digital Port or Digital Port-to-Analog Port Signal Level Distortion Loss 0 to -30 dBm0 >35 dB -40 dBm0 >29 dB -45 dBm0 >25 dB Terminating Impedance: 600 Ohms nominal Trunk balance impedance (selectable): 600 Ohms nominal or complex Z [350 Ohms + (1 k Ohms in parallel with 0.215uF)] Impulse Noise On 95% or more of all connections, the impulse noise is 0 count (hits) in five minutes at +55 dBrnC (decibels above reference noise with C-filter) during the busy hour. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Service Codes Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-17 ERL and SFRL Talking State Echo-Return Loss (ERL) and Single-Frequency Return Loss (SFRL) performance is usually dominated by termination and/or loop input impedances. The system provides an acceptable level of echo performance if the ERL and SFRL are met. Station-to-station ERL should meet or exceed 18 dB SFRL should meet or exceed 12 dB Station to 4-wire trunk connection ERL should meet or exceed 24 dB SFRL should meet or exceed 14 dB Station to 2-wire trunk connection ERL should meet or exceed 18 dB SFRL should meet or exceed 12 dB 4-wire to 4-wire trunk connection ERL should meet or exceed 27 dB SFRL should meet or exceed 20 dB Peak Noise Level Analog to analog — 20 dBrnC (decibels above reference noise with C-filter) Analog to digital — 19 dBrnC Digital to analog — 13 dBrnC Echo Path Delay Analog port to analog port — < 3 ms Digital interface port to digital interface port — < 2 ms Service Codes Service codes (for the United States only) are issued by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) to equipment manufacturers and registrants. These codes denote the type of registered terminal equipment and the protective characteristics of the premises wiring of the terminal equipment ports. Private line service codes are as follows: ■ 7.0Y — Totally protected private communications (microwave) systems ■ 7.0Z — Partially protected private communications (microwave) systems ■ 8.0X — Port for ancillary equipment ■ 9.0F — Fully protected terminal equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Facility Interface Codes ■ 9.0P — Partially protected terminal equipment ■ 9.0N — Unprotected terminal equipment ■ 9.0Y — Totally protected terminal equipment Issue 1 August 1997 Page 1-18 The product line service code is 9.0F indicating it is terminal equipment with fully protected premises wire at the private line ports. Facility Interface Codes A Facility Interface Code (FIC) is a five-character code (United States only) that provides the technical information needed to order a specific port circuit pack for analog private lines, digital lines, MTS lines, and WATS lines. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Maintenance Architecture Multimedia Interface (MMI) Page 1-19 Table 1-12 through Table 1-14 list the FICs. Included are service order codes, Ringer Equivalency Numbers (RENs), and types of network jacks that connect a line to a rear panel connector on a carrier. Table 1-12. Analog Private Line and Trunk Port Circuit Packs Circuit Pack FIC Service Order Code Network Jack TN742 and TN747B Off-Premises Station Port, and TN746B Off-Premises Station Port or On-Premises Station port 0L13C 9.0F RJ21X TN760/B/C/D Tie Trunk TL31M 9.0F RJ2GX Table 1-13. Digital Trunk Port Circuit Packs Circuit Pack FIC Service Order Code Network Jack TN1654 and TN574 DS1 Converter; TN722B DS1 Tie trunk; and TN767 and TN464 DS1 Interface 04DU9B,C 6.0P RJ48C and RJ48M Table 1-14. MTS and WATS Port Circuit Packs Circuit Pack FIC Ringer Equivalency Number (REN) TN742 and TN746B Analog Line 02LS2 None RJ21 and RJ11C TN747B Central Office Trunk 02GS2 1.0A RJ21X TN753 DID Trunk 02RV2-T 0,0B RJ21X TN790 Processor 02LS2 1.0A RJ21X TN1648 System Access and Maintenance 02LS2 0.5A RJ21X Multimedia Interface (MMI) The Multimedia Interface handles the following protocols: Network Jack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 1 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Architecture Multimedia Interface (MMI) ■ Page 1-20 International Telecommunications Union (ITU) H.221 — Includes H.230, H.242, H.231, and H.243 protocol — Includes H.230, ■ American National Standards Institute (ANSI) H.221 H.242, H.231, and H.243 protocol ■ BONDING (Bandwidth On Demand INoperability Group) Mode 1 ■ ESM HLP HDLC Rate Adaptation The Vistium Personal Conferencing System is supported either through the 8510T BRI terminal or directly through the Vistium TMBRI PC board. Using the World Class Core (WCC) BRI interface, most desktop multimedia applications are supported through the Personal Computer’s BRI interface. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 2 Circuit Packs and Power Circuit Packs Circuit Packs and Power Issue 1 August 1997 Page 2-1 2 This chapter discusses the hardware configurations contained within and supported by the DEFINITY Systems. Where appropriate, detailed information down to the circuit pack level is provided. This chapter also discusses the power sources required to enable the various components within the system. Circuit Packs The following table list all circuit packs supported by DEFINITY Release 5 systems. For information concerning vintages and current versions, see Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices which is published periodically as a special edition of the AT&T Technical Monthly. For more information concerning which circuit packs are needed for different environments and locales, see the Application Notes section of DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and Feature Description. Table 2-1 lists circuit packs by Apparatus Code, Name, and Type. See the Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices for circuit packs that pertain to your system. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 Circuit Packs and Power Circuit Packs Table 2-1. Page 2-2 Circuit packs and modules supported by DEFINITY Apparatus Code Name Type 631DA1 AC Power Unit Power 631DB1 AC Power Unit Power 644A1 DC Power Unit Power 645B1 DC Power Unit Power 649A DC Power Unit Power 676B DC Power Supply Power 982LS Current Limiter Power CFY1B Current Limiter Power CPP1 Memory Expansion Control ED-1E546 (TN2169) (TN2170) (TN566) (TN567) DEFINITY AUDIX R3 System Port Assembly ED-1E546 (TN2208) (TN2170) Call Visor ASAI over the DEFINITY (LAN) Gateway R1 Port Assembly J58890MAP (TN800) CallVisor over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway R2 Port Assembly TN417 Auxiliary Trunk Port TN419B Tone-Clock Control TN420B/C Tone Detector Service TN429 Direct Inward/Outward Dialing (DIOD) Trunk Port TN433 Speech Synthesizer Service TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN437 Tie Trunk Port TN438B Central Office Trunk Port TN439 Tie Trunk Port TN447 Central Office Trunk Port TN457 Speech Synthesizer Service TN458 Tie Trunk Port Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 Circuit Packs and Power Circuit Packs Table 2-1. Page 2-3 Circuit packs and modules supported by DEFINITY — Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN464C/D/E/F DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel - E1, 32 Channel Port TN465/B/C Central Office Trunk Port TN467 Analog Line Port TN468B Analog Line Port TN479 Analog Line Port TN497 Tie Trunk Port TN553 Packet Data Line Port TN556/B ISDN-BRI 4-Wire S/T-NT Line (A-Law) Port TN570/B/C Expansion Interface Port TN572 Switch Node Clock Control TN573/B Switch Node Interface Control TN574 DS1 Converter - T1, 24 Channel Port TN577 Packet Gateway Port TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk Port TN725B Speech Synthesizer Service TN726/B Data Line Port TN735 MET Line Port TN742 Analog Line Port TN744/B Call Classifier Service TN744/C/D Call Classifier - Detector Service TN746/B Analog Line Port TN747B Central Office Trunk Port TN748/B/C/D Tone Detector Service TN750/B/C Announcement Service TN753 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN754/B Digital Line 4-Wire DCP Port TN755B Neon Power Unit Power TN756 Tone Detector Service Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 Circuit Packs and Power Circuit Packs Table 2-1. Page 2-4 Circuit packs and modules supported by DEFINITY — Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN758 Pooled Modem Port TN760B/C/D Tie Trunk Port TN762B Hybrid Line Port TN763B/C/D Auxiliary Trunk Port TN765 Processor Interface Control TN767B/C/D/E DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel Port TN768 Tone-Clock Control TN769 Analog Line Port TN771D Maintenance/Test Service TN772 Duplication Interface Control TN773 Processor Control TN775/B Maintenance Service TN776 Expansion Interface Port TN777/B Network Control Control TN778 Packet Control Control TN780 Tone-Clock Control TN786 Processor Control TN786B Processor Control TN787F/G Multimedia Interface Service TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner Service TN789 Radio Controller Control TN790 Processor Control TN793 Analog Line, 24-Port, 2-Wire Port TN796B Processor Control TNPRI/BRI PRI to BRI Converter Port TN1648 System Access/Maintenance Control TN1650B Memory Control TN1654 DS1 Converter - T1, 24 Channel/E1, 32 Channel Port TN1655 Packet Interface Control Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 Circuit Packs and Power Circuit Packs Table 2-1. Page 2-5 Circuit packs and modules supported by DEFINITY — Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN1656 Tape Drive Control TN1657 Disk Drive Control TN2135 Analog Line Port TN2136 Digital Line 2-Wire DCP Port TN2138 Central Office Trunk Port TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2140/B Tie Trunk Port TN2144 Analog Line Port TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2147/C Central Office Trunk Port TN2149 Analog Line Port TN2180 Analog Line Port TN2181 Digital Line 2-Wire DCP Port TN2182/B Tone-Clock -Tone Detector and Call Classifier Control TN2183 Analog Line Port TN2184 DIOD Trunk Port TN2198 ISDN-BRI 2-Wire U Interface Port TN2199 Central Office Trunk Port TN2202 Ring Generator Power TN2224 Digital Line, 24-Port, 2-Wire DCP Port UN330B Duplication Interface Control UN331B Processor Control UN332 Mass Storage/Network Control Control WP-90510 AC Power Supply (Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet) Power WP-91153 AC Power Supply (Single-Carrier Cabinet) Power Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 Issue 1 August 1997 Circuit Packs and Power Power Page 2-6 Power There are two basic powering options available with the Release 5si systems. These options include AC and DC. The cabinets and their associated power supplies can be powered by 120/208 volts AC either directly or from a Universal Power Supply (UPS) system. Alternatively, the cabinets and their power supplies may be powered by -48 volts DC from a battery power plant. The Release 5vs system requires between 80 and 264 or between 90 and 132 volts AC. The system can be powered directly or from the WP-90510 power supply. The DC power option is not available with this system. Except for the Release 5vs system, each control cabinet in an AC-powered system has an internal battery that provides a short term holdover to protect the system against short power interruptions. This method is known as the Nominal Power Holdover Strategy. The battery is connected so that it automatically provides power if the AC service fails. The time and extent of the holdover varies according to the type of cabinet and to whether or not the system has a duplicated control complex. Table 2-2 summarizes the response to the interruption of power service in systems without an internal holdover battery. Table 2-2. Response to Power Service Interruption (without Internal Holdover Battery) Cabinet Power Interruption Less Than Power Supply Decay -48 volt DC external power or multicarrier cabinet with UPS, no internal battery. None on system, some impact on 48-volt powered circuits. Greater Than Power Supply Decay All calls dropped, system reloads. The next two tables indicate various responses to the interruption of power service in DEFINITY Systems equipped with an internal holdover battery. Table 2-3 provides a summary of holdover times. Table 2-4 indicates the types of cabinet power interruption based on power holdover durations. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Circuit Packs and Power Power 2 Table 2-3. Page 2-7 Response to Power Service Interruption with an Internal Holdover Battery System and Configuration Cabinet Holdover for Entire Cabinet (in seconds) Holdover for Entire Control Carrier (in minutes) Standard PPNMCC 10 10 High, Critical PPNMCC 10 5 Standard/High, Critical PPN SCC/ESCC 1/4 2 Standard/High, Critical1 EPN MCC 15 none Standard/High, Critical EPN SCC/ESCC 1/4 none 1. The holdover times listed are in effect if the EPN contains a TN775 maintenance circuit pack. However, if the EPN contains a TN775B maintenance circuit pack, the holdover time for the entire cabinet is 10 seconds, and the holdover time for the control carrier is 10 minutes. Table 2-4. Types of Cabinet Power Interruption Shorter Holdover Than Entire Cabinet Longer Holdover than Entire Cabinet, Shorter Holdover than Control Carrier PPN SCC No calls dropped All calls dropped System reloads EPN SCC No calls dropped All calls dropped System reloads System and Cabinet Longer Holdover Than Control Carrier NOTE: When EPN power is interrupted for greater than the cabinet holdover but less than the control carrier holdover, calls in the control carrier are held for the duration of the interruption but are dropped when power is restored. Single-Carrier Cabinets In single-carrier cabinets, there is no internal AC wiring or distribution and no software interaction with the power system. The power supplies themselves take about 250 milliseconds for the voltages to drop below limits. The control cabinet that houses the Switch Processing Element (SPE) is the only cabinet that has an internal battery reserve. All other control cabinets and port cabinets have the 250 millisecond power supply decay delay, after which all connections and links associated with the cabinets are dropped. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 2 Circuit Packs and Power Power Issue 1 August 1997 Page 2-8 The SPE control cabinet has a battery that furnishes power to the processor memory complex for a minimum of two minutes if the battery is fully charged. This battery is recharged after power is restored, but the charging process is not monitored by the system. The cabinet is not able to detect AC power loss, and it notices only a DC power output failure as the power supply output decays. The memory contents are preserved, and the processor continues operating during the two minute period. However, the tone-clock circuit pack is not held over, and as a result, no connections are possible. The battery does not supply all the voltages necessary for the internal modem circuit on the processor circuit pack. As a result, no call is originated to INADS, and the switch cannot answer any calls. Thus, the switch cannot report any internal or external alarms during this period. After two minutes (depending on the condition of the battery), the processor and memory are lost, and the system is totally inactive. If power is restored in less than 250 milliseconds, no calls are dropped. If power is restored between 250 milliseconds and two minutes, all calls are dropped, and memory is maintained. However, since the tone-clock was lost, the system undergoes a reset once the AC restoral process clears all calls and the alarm log (in which errors are retained). The switch keeps a record of the restart in the error log, but it might not detect a power error if the outage is between 1/4 of a second and one minute, during which time only a loss of clock and not a loss of the power failure that caused the loss of clock is logged. After one minute, a power error is logged. If the outage exceeds the battery holdover interval, the error logs and alarm logs are lost (since they cannot be saved to tape). Depending on the size of the system, it can take up to one minute to restore service to the ports. After a power outage of two minutes following the restoral of AC power, the system re-initializes from the tape. It takes about 10 minutes to restore service. Again, if the customer has frequent power outages or critical service needs, an external UPS or DC power system should be considered. NOTE: For more power control information, refer to AC-POWER, DC-POWER, and POWER maintenance objects. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 3 Management Terminals General Management Terminals Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-1 3 General Maintenance personnel can use the management terminal to initiate the same tests that the system initiates. Test results display on the terminal screen. This chapter illustrates these terminals, explains how to use them, and identifies the typical maintenance tasks that can be performed from them. Management Terminals The maintenance interface for the system technician is the management terminal. These terminals may be referred to as an administration terminal. The following terminals are supported as administration terminals: ■ 715 BCS ■ 2900/715 BCS ■ 715 BCS-2 In a standard reliability system, the terminal connects to the Processor circuit pack. In the PPN of a high or critical reliability system , the administration terminal connects to the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the PPN. In the EPN of a standard reliability system or of a high or critical reliability system, the administration terminal connects to the Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN. Duplication Interface circuit pack A controls and monitors the same environment leads as the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN system without high or critical reliability. Duplication Interface circuit pack A also supports the serial channel to the terminal in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system. The terminal connects to Duplication Interface circuit pack A via a connector, labeled DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals Management Terminals Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-2 DOT (Duplication Option Terminal), on the back of cabinet A. At any time, the terminal may be disconnected from the Duplication Interface circuit pack A and connected directly to the active processor circuit pack by attaching the terminal to the connector labeled TERM. This connection should be made only if the terminal fails to function, since a problem with the Duplication Interface circuit pack A may be present. Typical tasks that can be performed at the terminal are shown below. ■ Display Error and Alarm logs ■ Test circuit packs ■ Test system functions ■ Busyout and release system equipment ■ Reset the system ■ Monitor the system ■ Check status of maintenance objects ■ Check system translations Most maintenance functions performed at the local administration terminal can also be done remotely at the INADS (Initialization and Administration System). Terminal Keyboard The keyboard is equipped with cursor keys, editing keys, and transaction keys. The three types of keys are described here. Cursor Keys: Cursor keys are used to move the cursor between fields and pages on a screen form. The cursor must be positioned on a field before the user can add or change information in that field. Editing Keys: Two editing keys, BACKSPACE and Clear, are provided. BACKSPACE is used to erase the character at the current cursor position. The cursor moves one position to the left each time the key is pressed. If the cursor is at the first position of the data entry field, it erases the character at the first position. Clear when pressed simultaneously with the Shift is used to clear all data in a field on a screen form. The cursor must be positioned at the field the user wants to clear before Clear is pressed. Transaction Keys: Three transaction keys, Cancel, Enter, and Help, are provided. CANCEL is used to erase a form or command. Once the key is pressed, the system returns the user to the command (tasks request) level and asks for a new command. Enter is used to store the data entered on a screen form in the system’s memory. Help displays information on the type of data that can be entered into the field associated with the current cursor position. The system displays all the permissible entries the user can input for that field. This key can be pressed at the ”enter command” level to obtain a list of all commands. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-3 System Login Procedure Forced Password Aging and Administrable Logins Release 5 and later releases provide enhanced login/password security by adding a security feature that allows users to define their own logins/passwords and to specify a set of commands for each login. The system allows up to 11 customer logins. Each login name can be customized and must be made up of from 3 to 6 alphabetic/numeric characters, or a combination of both. A password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol. Password aging is an optional feature that the super-user administering the logins can activate. NOTE: If several users are logging in and out at the same time, a user may see the message “Transient command conflict detected; please try later”. After the “users” have completed logging in or out, the terminal is available for use. The password for each login can be aged starting with the date the password was created, or changed, and continuing for a specified number of days (1 to 99). The user is notified at the login prompt, 7 days before the password expiration date, that the password is about to expire. When the password expires the user is required to enter a new password into the system before logging in. If a login is added or removed, the “Security Measurement” reports are not updated until the next hourly poll, or a clear measurements security-violations command is entered. Once a non-super-user has changed the password, the user must wait 24 hours to change the password again. Security is enhanced by providing a logoff notification screen to a system administrator at log off while either the facility test call or remote access features are still administered. The administrator can be required to acknowledge the notification before completing the logoff process. Logoff notification is administered on the Login Administration screen. Release 5 and later releases are delivered to the customer with one customer “super-user” login/password defined. The customer is required to administer additional login/passwords as needed. The super-user login has full customer permissions and can customize any login created. Login permissions for a specified login can be set by the super-user to block any object that may compromise switch security. Up to 40 administration or maintenance objects commands can be blocked for a specified login in. Release 5 and later releases commands are grouped into three command categories. Each of the three command categories has a group of command subcategories listed under them, and each command subcategory has a list of command objects that the commands acts on. A super-user can set a users DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-4 permissions to restrict or block access to any command in these categories. The three main categories are: ■ Common Commands — Display Admin. and Maint. Data — System Measurements ■ Administration Commands — Administer Stations — Administer Trunks — Additional Restrictions — Administer Features — Administer Permissions ■ Maintenance Commands — Maintain Stations — Maintain Trunks — Maintain Systems — Maintain Switch Circuit Packs — Maintain Process Circuit Packs These categories are displayed on the Command Permissions Categories form. To Log In 1. Enter your login name and password on the login and password screen. If your password has expired, you see the message: Your password has expired, enter a new one. Reenter current password: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Issue 1 August 1997 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Page 3-5 Login: telmgr Password: Your Password has expired, enter a new one. Reenter Current Password: New Password: Reenter New Password: Figure 3-1. Password Expiration Screen The Password Expiration screen displays when you log in. See Figure 3-1. If your password is expired, you are prompted to enter a new password. If your password is within 7 days of the expiration date, you see: WARNING: Your password will expire in X days To Logoff To logoff, enter “logoff” at the command prompt. You will receive a logoff screen if any of the following is true. If either a or b (see below) is true and an acknowledgment is required, or if any of c, d, or e is true, you need to respond to the “Proceed with Logoff?” prompt on the logoff screen. See Figure 3-2. The response is defaulted to “n”; you will need to enter “y” to override the default. a. If Facility Test Call Notification has been enabled for your login (see Adding Customer Logins and Assigning Initial Passwords). b. If Remote Access Notification has been enabled for your login (see Adding Customer Logins and Assigning Initial Passwords). c. If Alarm Origination is disabled. d. If any active major or minor alarm is active. e. If any resource is busied out. ! CAUTION: To leave the Facility Test Call administered after you logoff poses a significant security risk. ! CAUTION: To leave the Remote Access feature administered after logging off poses a significant security risk if you are using the feature in conjunction with the Facility Test Call feature. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Issue 1 August 1997 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Page 3-6 ! CAUTION: No alarms report through the INADS interface if Alarm Origination is disabled. ! CAUTION: A busied out resource is one that is out of service. Be sure to verify if a busied resource needs to be released or if the resource should remain busied out. Facility Test Call Administered Remote Access Administered Alarm Origination is currently disabled. Active major or minor alarm detected; be sure to resolve it. *** Busied out resource detected; verify if release is needed! **** Proceed With Logoff: [n] Figure 3-2. Logoff Screen To Display a Login 1. Enter the command display login [login name] and press Enter. The system displays the requested login’s: ■ Name ■ Login type ■ Service level ■ Disable following a security violation value ■ Access to Inads Port value ■ Password aging cycle length DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Issue 1 August 1997 Management Terminals System Login Procedure ■ Facility test call notification and acknowledgment ■ Remote access notification and acknowledgment Page 3-7 To List Logins 1. Enter the command list logins. The system displays the following information for all current logins: ■ Name ■ Service level ■ Status (active, inactive, disabled, svn-disabled, void) ■ Password aging cycle length The system displays only those logins with the same, or lower, service level as the requestor. To Remove a Login 1. Enter the command remove login [login name]. The system displays the Login Administration form. 2. Press the ENTER key to remove the login, or press Cancel to exit the remove login procedure without making a change. To Test a Login 1. Enter your login name at the login prompt. 2. After the user enters the correct login name and password and the login is administered correctly, the system displays the command line interface. Administering Customer Logins and Forced Password Aging Adding Customer Logins and Assigning Initial Password To add a customer login you must be a super-user, have administrative permissions, and: 1. Enter the add login [name] command to access the Login Administration form. 2. Enter your super-user password in the Password of Login Making Change field on the Login Administration form. The 3- to 6-character login name (characters 0-9, a-z, A-Z) entered with the add login [name] command is displayed in the Login’s Name field. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-8 3. Enter “customer” in the Login Type field. The system default for the Login Type field is “customer.” The maximum number of customer logins of all types is 11. 4. Enter super-user or non-super-user in the Service Level field. Default is none-super-user. ■ “super-user” gives access to the add, change, display, list, and remove commands for all customer logins and passwords. The super-user can administer any mix of super-user/non-super-user logins up to a total of ten additional system logins. ■ “non-super-user” permissions are limited by restrictions specified by the super-user when administering the non-super-user login. A non-super-user can change his/her password with permission set by the super-user, however once a password has been changed the non-super-user must wait 24 hours before changing the password again. A non-super-user cannot change other user passwords, login characteristics, or permissions. 5. Enter “y” in the Disable Following a Security Violation field to disable a login following a login security threshold violation,. This field is a dynamic field and only appears on the Login Administration form when the SVN Login Violation Notification feature is enabled. The system default for the Disable Following a Security Violation field is “y.” 6. Enter “y” in the Access to INADS Port? field to allow access to the remote administration port,. This field only displays if Acct. has first enabled customer super-user access to the INADS Remote Administration Port. Default is “n”. 7. Enter a password for the new login in the Login’s Password field. A password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol. Valid characters include numbers, and!&*?;’^(),.:- (the system will not echo the password to the screen as you type). 8. Re-enter the password in the Login’s Password field. The system will not echo the password to the screen as you type. 9. Enter the number of days (1 to 99) from the current day, that you want the password to expire, in the Password Aging Cycle Length field. If a you enter a blank in this field, password aging does not apply to the login. 10. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Facility Test Call Notification? field. If “y” is selected, the user receives notification at logoff that the facility test call feature access code is administered. If you do not want the notification to appear, set the field to “n”. ! CAUTION: Leaving The facility Test Call administered after logging off poses a significant security risk. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Page 3-9 11. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Facility Test Call Notification Acknowledgment Required field. If “y” is selected, the user is required to acknowledge that they wish to logoff while Facility Test Call is still administered. If you do not want to force the user to acknowledge, set the field to “n”. This field appears only if the Facility Test Call Notification field is set to 'y” 12. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Remote Access Notification? field. If “y” is selected, the user receives notification at logoff that remote access is still administered. If you do not want the notification to appear, set the field to “n”. ! CAUTION: To Leave Remote Access feature administered after logging off poses a significant security risk if you are using the feature in conjunction with the Facility Test Call feature. 13. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Remote Access Acknowledgment Required? field. If “y” is selected, the user is required to acknowledge that they wish to logoff while remote access is still administered. If you do not want to force the user to acknowledge, set the field to “n”. This field appears only if the Facility Test Call Notification field is set to 'y”. LOGIN ADMINISTRATION Password of Login Making Change: LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED Login’s Name:xxxxxxx Login Type: Service Level: Disable Following a Security Violation? Access to INADS Port? LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION Login’s Password: Reenter Login’s Password: Password Aging Cycle Length: LOGOFF NOTIFICATION Facility Test Call Notification? y Remote Access Notification? y Screen 3-1. Login Administration Acknowledgment Required? y Acknowledgment Required? y DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Issue 1 August 1997 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Page 3-10 Changing a Login’s Attributes To change a customer login’s attributes you must be a super-user, have administrative permissions (specifically, the Administration Permission field must be set to “y” for the super-user), and: 1. Enter the change login [name] command to access the Login Administration form. 2. Enter your super-user password in the Password of Login Making Change field on the Login Administration form. The 3- to 6-character login name (characters 0-9, a-z, A-Z) entered with the change login [name] command is displayed in the Login’s Name field. 3. Enter “customer” in the Login Type field. 4. Enter “super-user” or “non-super-user” in the Service Level field. NOTE: You cannot change your own service level. 5. To disable a login following a login security threshold violation, enter “y” in the Disable Following a Security Violation field. This field is a dynamic field and only appears on the Login Administration form when the SVN Login Violation Notification feature is enabled. 6. To allow access to the remote administration port, enter “y” in the Access to INADS Port? field. This field will only display if Lucent Technologies has first enabled customer super-user access to the INADS Remote Administration Port. 7. Enter a password for the new login in the Login’s Password field. A password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol. Valid characters include numbers, and!&*?;’^(),.:- (the system will not echo the password to the screen as you type). 8. Re-enter the password in the Login’s Password field. The system will not echo the password to the screen as you type. 9. Enter the number of days (1 to 99) from the current day, when you wish the password to expire, in the Password Aging Cycle Length field. If a blank is entered in this field, password aging does not apply to the login. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-11 Administering Login Command Permissions Users with super-user permissions can set the permissions of the logins they create. The Command Permissions Categories form displays fields to which a user with super-user permissions can give or limit access. These commands are divided into three categories: ■ Common Command ■ Administration Commands ■ Optional Maintenance Commands Each of the three main categories have subcategories listed under them that when set to a “y” give permission to use the command sets associated with that category. When the Command Permissions Categories form is displayed for a login, the subcategories fields appear with the fields set to give the login full permissions for that login type. The super-user administering login permissions can set any of these field to deny access to a command category for the specified login. If the super-user making the assignments has full super-user permissions and would like to limit permissions for a category, the super-user can do so by entering “y” in the Additional Restrictions field located under the Administration Category section of the Command Permissions Categories form. Refer to the Command Permissions Form Entries Tables at the end of this section for a list of command Objects and Actions by: ■ Display Administration and Maintenance ■ Administer Features ■ Administer Permissions ■ Administer Stations ■ Administer Trunks The information is the tables will help you to establish command permissions for user logins. To administer command permissions, log in as super-user and: 1. Access the Command Permissions Categories form by entering change permissions login [login name]. When the form is displayed for a login, the default permissions for that “login type” are shown. The super-user administering the login can change a “y” to “n” for each subcategory field. 2. Select a category for the login and enter “y” in each field where permission to perform an administrative or maintenance action is needed. The command object you select must be within the permissions for the login type you are administering. If the Maintenance option is set to “y” on the Customer Options form, the super-user can enter “y” in the Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? or Maintain Process Circuit Packs fields. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Page 3-12 3. A super-user with full super-user permissions (super-user administering the login cannot have the Additional Restrictions field set to “y” for his/her own login) can restrict additional administrative or maintenance actions for a specified login by entering “y” in the Additional Restrictions field on the Command Permission Categories form. Enter the additional restrictions for a login in the Restricted object list fields on the Command Permission Categories Restricted Object List form. You can enter up to 40 command names (object names) to block actions associated with a command category for a specified login. Page 1 of 3 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: Sup3ru COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint. Data? y System Measurements? _* ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS Administer Stations? y Administer Trunks? y Additional Restrictions? n Administer Features? y Administer Permissions? y MAINTENANCE COMMANDS Maintain Stations? n Maintain Trunks? n Maintain Systems? n Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n Screen 3-2. Command Permission Categories (Page 1 of 3) *This field only displays on Release 5vs and Release 5si + memory systems. Page 2 of 3 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ Screen 3-3. Command Permissions Categories (Page 2 of 3) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Page 3-13 Page 3 of 3 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ Screen 3-4. Table 3-1. Command Permissions Categories (Page 3 of 3) Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance Action Object Change Status Tes t X X X X Display List aar analysis X X aar digit-conversion X X aar route-chosen Monitor Remove X abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons X abbreviated-dialing enhanced X abbreviated-dialing group X X abbreviated-dialing personal X X abbreviated-dialing system X aca-parameters X access-endpoint X adjunct-names X adjunct-controlled-agents X administered-connection X X agent-loginID X X alarms X alias-station X alphanumeric-dial-table X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-1. Page 3-14 Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance — Continued Action Object Change alternate-frl Display List Monitor Remove Status X analog -testcall X announcements X ars analysis X ars analysis ars digit-conversion Tes t X X X ars digit-conversion X ars route-chosen X ars-toll X attendant X X bcms agent X bcms loginIDs X bcms split X bcms trunk X bcms vdn X board X bri-port X bridged-extensions X bulletin-board X button-location-aca X cabinet X call-forwarding X X call-screening X capacity X card-mem (MIPS Only) X X cdr-link X X circuit-packs X cleared-alarm-notif X communication-interface hop-channels X communication-interface links X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-1. Page 3-15 Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance — Continued Action Object Change communication-interface proc-channels Display List X X configuration board X configuration carrier X configuration control X configuration network X configuration software X configuration station X configuration trunk X X cor X cos X coverage answer-group X coverage groups X coverage path X Remove Status Tes t X configuration all console-parameters Monitor X X X customer-alarm X data-module X dialplan X digit-absorption X display-format X X X do-not-disturb station X X dsp-msg-auto-wakeup X dsp-msg-call-identifier X dsp-msg-date-time X dsp-msg-lwc X dsp-msg-mct X dsp-msg-miscellaneous X dsp-msg-property-mgmt X X X do-not-disturb group ds1 X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-1. Page 3-16 Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance — Continued Action Object Change Display dsp-msg-softkey-label X dsp-msg-tod-routing X emergency enp-number-plan List Monitor Remove Status Tes t X X environment X errors X events X external-device-alarm extension-type X external-device-alarming X feature-access-code X fiber-link (MIPS Only) X groups-of-extensions X X hardware-group X health X history hunt-group X X X X inads-link X integrated-annc-boards X X intercom-group X X interface (MIPS Only) X intra-switch-cdr X isdn cpn-prefix X isdn network-facilities X X X isdn-testcall X isdn tsc-gateway X ixc-codes X journal-printer X led X link X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-1. Page 3-17 Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance — Continued Action Object Change listed-directory-numbers Display List Monitor Remove Status Tes t X login X login (MIPS Only) X login-ids X maintenance X marked-port X mct-group-extensions X mct-history X meas-selection coverage X meas-selection principal X meas-selection route-pattern X meas-selection trunk-group X meas-selection wideband-trunk-grp X measurements security-violations detail X measurements security-violations summary X memory X MO X modem-pool X multi-frequency signaling X X X network-control X node-routing X X packet-control (MIPS Only) X packet-interface (MIPS Only) X paging code-calling-ids X paging-loudspeaker X password X X X periodic-scheduled X permissions X personal-CO-line X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-1. Page 3-18 Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance — Continued Action Object Change Display List pgate X X pickup-group X X Monitor Remove Status pkt X pms X pms-down X pms-link X pms-log X pnc X port X station X svn-button-location X suspend-alm-orig synchronization Tes t X X X X X sys-link X X system X X X system 1st-cabinet X system 2nd-cabinet X system 3rd-cabinet X system all-cabinets X system conn X system customer-options X system features X system-maintenance X system-parameters cdr X system-parameters country-options X system-parameters hospitality X system-parameters security X tdm X term-ext-group X terminal-parameters 603/302B1 X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Management Terminals System Login Procedure 3 Table 3-1. Page 3-19 Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and Maintenance — Continued Action Object Change Display terminal-parameters 8400 X test-schedule X time X time-of-day X toll X List Monitor Remove Status X toll all X toll restricted-call X toll-list X toll unrestricted-call X tone-clock X trunk trunk-group X X X trunk-group-history X trunk-group-members X X X tti X X X unstaffed-agents X usage button-type hunt-ns X usage button-type trunk-ns X usage button-type night-service X usage-extensions X usage-hunt X vdn X X vector X X wakeup incomplete X wakeup requests X wakeup station X wakeup-log X X tsc-administered udp Tes t X X Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-2. Page 3-20 Command Permissions Form Entries — Administer Permissions Action Object login Add Change Display Enable Remove X X X X X permissions Table 3-3. X Command Permissions Form Entries — Administer Stations Object Action Add Change abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons X X X abbreviated-dialing enhanced X X X abbreviated-dialing group X X X X X X X abbreviated-dialing personal abbreviated-dialing system X alias-station attendant Duplicate Remove X X X data-module X X routing-table X X station X X X console-parameters terminal-parameters 603/302B1 X terminal-parameters 8400 X vdn vector X X X X X X X X X Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Table 3-4. Page 3-21 Command Permissions Form Entries — Administer Trunks Object Action Add Change aar analysis X aar digit-conversion X access-endpoint X Display X announcements X ars analysis X ars digit-conversion X ars toll X digit-absorption X meas-selection route-pattern X meas-selection trunk-group X meas-selection wideband-trunk-grp X Duplicate Remove X X modem-pool X X X personal-CO-line X X X pri-endpoint X X remote-access X rhnpa X route-pattern X time-of-day X toll X trunk-group X X Testing a Login 1. Enter your login name at the login prompt. Login: telmgr Password: Screen 3-5. Login Prompt Form X X X X DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-22 After the user enters the correct login name and password and the login is administered correctly, the system displays the command line interface. To log into the system, do the following: 1. Turn on the administration terminal. Verify that the screen displays: login: 2. Enter your login name, then press Enter. Verify that the screen displays: password: 3. Enter your password, then press Enter. For security reasons, the password is not displayed as you type it. The system verifies that a valid login and password name were entered. If an invalid login or password name was entered, the screen displays: login incorrect:, and you must repeat the procedure. If the system recognizes the login and password name, verify that the screen displays the software version. 4. For your terminal type, complete one of the following: Terminal Type (Enter 513, 715, VT220, 4410, or 4425): [513] a. If the terminal is a 513 BCT, press Enter. The 513 in brackets [513] is the system default terminal. b. If the terminal is a 610 BCT or a 615 MT that has a 513 emulation cartridge, press Enter. c. If the terminal is a 610 BCT or a 615 MT that does not have a 513 emulation cartridge, enter 4410 and press Enter. d. If the terminal is any other of the types listed, enter the terminal type and press Enter. 5. You can deactivate INADS alarm origination whenever you log in as craft. After you supply the terminal type information requested, the system displays the following if alarm origination is activated on the Maintenance System-Parameters screen: NOTE: Unless you are in a special situation, please reduce unnecessary trouble tickets by always answering “y” to the following prompt to suppress Alarm Origination. Suppress Alarm Origination: [y] The default answer is yes. If you do NOT wish to suppress alarm origination, enter no. Any other entry defaults to yes. The test inads-link command works regardless of whether you have overridden INADS alarm origination. 6. Verify that the screen displays: enter command: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Login Procedure Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-23 You may enter the desired command, such as display station xxxx or press Help to obtain the list of permissible commands. Command Line Details After a successful login, the administration terminal displays enter command: and waits for entry of a command. A command is made up of multiple words that are typed on the keyboard and that instruct the system to perform a particular task. The system’s command structure follows the format: Action, Object, and Qualifier. The first word entered is the Action. It specifies the operation to be done (for example, test, display, or reset). The second word entered is the Object. It specifies the object to receive the action (for example, station, trunk group, or hunt group). The third word(s) entered is/are the Qualifier. The Qualifier is one or more words or digits used to further identify or complete the Object. Depending on the Object used, a Qualifier may or may not be used. An example of a command line used to do a short test twice on a station with the extension number 1212 is: test station 1212 short r 2. In this example, test is the Action, station is the Object, and 1212 short r 2 is the Qualifier. Spaces separate the Action, Object, and Qualifier on the command line. NOTE: Command line words do not have to be completely spelled out. All that is required is to type enough letters to make the word unique. Screen Forms After the user completes a command line, the terminal displays the appropriate screen form(s). Screen forms are system-generated forms that are formatted to allow easy entry of translation data. Screen forms enable the user to change the translations of the system by typing parameters on the keyboard. Screen forms also allow system technician to display errors and alarms. Each screen form consists of a title, page number, body area, and a help and error message line. Specific screen forms exist for each type of administrable function. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and Feature Description contains detailed information and examples of the screen forms generated by the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals Switch-Based Bulletin Board Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-24 Switch-Based Bulletin Board This feature will allow a user to leave messages in the system in order to communicate with other system users. NOTE: This feature is not intended as a substitute for the existing procedures for escalating problems, but only as an aid to the existing process. Description The bulletin board service provides an easy interface for the customer and Lucent Technologies to leave messages on the system. The bulletin board feature makes it easy for the customer to communicate with Lucent Technologies (and vise-versa). For example, when a new load is installed on a switch in the customer’s system, Lucent Technologies can leave the customer messages which describe new functionality. This feature also allows Lucent Technologies to keep the customer informed on the progress of trouble items. In addition, the feature can be used by the customer to provide additional information concerning problems that have already been escalated. Accessing the Bulletin Board Any user with the appropriate permissions can log into the system and have access to the bulletin board. User’s who have “Maintain System” or “Administer Features” permissions can enter, change, display, print, or schedule to print a message. Users who have “Display Admen” and “Maintain Data” permission can display the bulletin board. Any user who has “Display” permission can display, print, and schedule to print the contents of the bulletin board. When logging onto the system, users will be notified of any messages on the bulletin board. The notification message will indicate the last time the bulletin board was updated, if any “High-Priority” message exists, and if the bulletin board is 80% or more full. If a “High-Priority” message exists, the command prompt will change to the following message: ■ High-Priority Bulletin Board Messages Entered: After the next command is entered, the default command prompt returns to the screen. User Considerations ■ Only one user at a time may edit a message on the bulletin board. ■ The user must have the proper permissions to access the bulletin board. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals Switch-Based Bulletin Board ■ Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-25 The user must maintain the information stored on the bulletin board. It is the user’s responsibility to delete old messages. If the bulletin board is full, any new messages overwrite old messages. System Considerations The Bulletin Board feature provides up to 3 pages of text for each message. Each page is limited to 20 lines of text, and each line of text is limited to 40 characters per line. The first 10 lines of text on page 1 is reserved for Lucent Technologies Service’s High-Priority messages. System Bulletin Board Commands The system commands “change bulletin board,” “display bulletin board,” and existing commands in the user interface are provided for use in the Switch Based Bulletin Board. Editing a Bulletin Board Message 1. Log into the system with “Maintain System” or “Administer Features” permissions. 2. Enter the command “change bulletin-board.” 3. Follow system prompts. To display messages on the Switch Based Bulletin Board the user must: 1. Log into the system with “Maintain System”, “Display Admin”, or “Maint Data” permissions. 2. Enter the command “display bulletin board.” 3. Follow system prompts. Editing a Switch-Based Bulletin Board Message A message may contain up to three pages of information. Message lines 1 through 10 on page 1 are reserved for Lucent Technologies Services High-Priority messages (the “init” and “inads” logins can edit the first 10 lines on page one). Pages 2 and 3 will allow up to 20 lines of text, and each line of text may be up to 40 characters per line. Each line of text has an associated date field that is populated automatically by the system each time the line is modified. The control keys used to edit existing feature forms must be used to edit a message in the Switch Based Bulletin Board. The following characters are allowed for use in the text field: ■ Uppercase/Lowercase letters, spaces, numerals, and !@#$%^&*()_ -+=[]{};’”<>./?. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals System Logoff Procedure Page 3-26 NOTE: Tab characters are not allowed. The existing command line interface will cause the cursor to move to the next field if a Tab character is entered. If a user changes any lines that cause two or more consecutive blank lines, then the bulletin board will be automatically reorganized (upon submittal). Two or more blank lines will be consolidated into a single blank line. If a blank line is at the top of a form, it will also be deleted. This function will help prevent holes in the bulletin board screens as old entries are deleted. To save a message entered into the bulletin board text field, the user must execute the save translation command. G3V3 software is required for the bulletin board feature. The bulletin board feature, as described in this document is available in G3V4. The G3V3/G3V4 feature on the systems-parameters customers-options form need not be enabled. The following screen is an example of bulletin board messages between Lucent Technologies and a customer who is having trouble with trunk group translations: display bulletin-board Page 1 of 3 Messages (* indicates high-priority) * * * * * * * * * * AT&T is in the process of investigating your trunk lockup problem. The Bulletin Board will be updated as information is found. We have identified the problem. The trunk you added does not provide disconnect supervision, however your trunk group was administered as such. Please call for details. Date 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 02/02/95 We recently added a new trunk group (14) 02/03/95 and have had trunk group members locking up. 02/03/95 We see the error - Thanks for checking. 02/03/95 System Logoff Procedure The system logoff procedure should be done any time the terminal is not being used. This assures that system translations are not accidentally corrupted. The monitor system command, when canceled, automatically causes a terminal user to be logged off and, thus, prevents unauthorized use of the terminal. Use the following procedure to log off the system: 1. Verify that the screen displays: enter command: 2. Enter logoff and press Enter. The screen displays: login: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals DEC VT220 Terminal Page 3-27 If after either logging on as system technician or issuing a system technician command no additional command is issued for 30 minutes, an automatic time-out and logoff occurs. At that time, any alarms in the system previously unreported to INADS are reported. If you are logged in at two separate administration terminals, the system waits until the second terminal times out or until you log off before reporting such alarms to INADS. Logoff Notification alerts system administrators if features that present a significant security risk are enabled. A message displays on the system administration/maintenance interface. Additionally, the user can be required to acknowledge the notification before the logoff is completed. DEC VT220 Terminal The system supports use of the DEC VT220 connected to the system and used in the same way as the other terminals. When logging in, at the terminal-type prompt the user should enter ”VT220” to initialize the correct parameters. Keyboard definitions shown in Table 3-5 are in effect: Table 3-5. Keyboard Definitions for the DEC VT220 Terminal FUNCTION VT220 KEY ESCAPE SEQUENCE Help Help ESC[28~ Previous Page Previous Screen ESC[5~ Next Page Next Screen ESC[6~ Cancel Remove ESC[3~ Execute Do ESC[29~ Previous Field F17 ESC[31~ Next Field F18 ESC[32~ Clear Field F19 ESC[33~ Refresh F20 ESC[34~ Next Form Select ESC[4~ Up Arrow Up_Arrow ESC[A Down Arrow Down_Arrow ESC[B Right Arrow Right_Arrow ESC[C Left Arrow Left_Arrow ESC[D Update Form Find ESC[1~ DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 3 Management Terminals DEC VT220 Terminal Issue 1 August 1997 Page 3-28 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Issue 1 August 1997 Initialization and Recovery Page 4-1 4 Initialization and Recovery 4 When the system is powered up, or when it experiences a catastrophic fault that interrupts its basic functions, the system undergoes a reboot. Besides “reboot,” there are several less severe resets available to the system that allow it to recover from disrupting errors. The user can initiate these resets by using the reset system commands. These commands are used to manually restart the system at various levels, depending on the required test activity. The reset system commands are discussed in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. A system is reset due to a loss of power, or via one of the following: ■ Reset commands at the administration terminal. ■ Maintenance software, from which the system can reset itself. (This process starts when certain software and hardware errors are detected by the software.) ■ “Interchange,” which is a type of reset that can be scheduled as part of daily maintenance in High or Critical Reliability systems. ! WARNING: When the system is rebooted or reset at level 2, 3, 4, or 5, all voice terminal and attendant console features are adversely affected. Users should be advised of services that are lost and that, as a result, must be reactivated. See “Removing Power” in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. The administration terminal display and circuit pack LEDs indicate the progress of the recovery process. LEDs are discussed in Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’. The sections that follow discuss successful system resets. For each level of reset, a typical administration terminal display is provided. Note that any DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Reset System 1 (System Warm Start) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 4-2 hexadecimal numbers shown in parentheses, such as”(=8B89),” are only examples and are subject to change. Subsequent sections discuss the recovery process following an SPE-Down Mode and for "duplication interface-processing element communication down." NOTE: If any of the diagnostic tests fail, the system may or may not function properly, and the LMM may or may not proceed with the restart. If the LMM does not proceed with the restart, the system goes into SPE-Down Mode. In failure cases, the appropriate part (for example, the Processor circuit pack) should be replaced. NOTE: Use and check the results of the set/get vector command found in the "Set Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, to determine how much time should be added for the recovery levels. Also, if an update file is applied on a system reset, add from 30 seconds to one minute to the recovery time for that reset. Reset System 1 (System Warm Start) This recovery takes about 30 seconds. All stable phone calls remain up. In-progress calls are dropped. No new calls can be made during this time. In this restart, all software (Oryx/Pecos, drivers, maintenance, and so forth.) is reset. Typical Display RESET 1 (WARM) PERFORMED Reset System 2 (System Cold Start Without Translations Loading) All Port circuit packs are reset. All telephone sessions are dropped. Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large system, reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes. In this restart, all software (Oryx/Pecos, drivers, maintenance, and so forth) is reset. In addition, the TDM Bus and all port circuit packs are reset. Typical displays in a Release 5vs/si system follow: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Reset System 3 (System Cold Start With Translations Loading) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 4-3 Typical Display Release 5vs/si and Later Systems INTERNAL REGISTER TEST PASSED LOCAL BUS TEST PASSED ROM CHECKSUM TEST PASSED CONTROL STATUS TEST PASSED DCACHE TEST PASSED ICACHE TEST PASSED WRITE BUFFER TEST PASSED BTO TEST PASSED TIMER TEST PASSED RESET 2 (COLD_2) PERFORMED Reset System 3 (System Cold Start With Translations Loading) Emergency Transfer is invoked. Translations reload from translation card. Depending on the translations, the reloading process could take from five to 30 seconds. Thereafter, all port circuit packs are reset, and all telephone sessions drop. Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large system, reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes. In this restart, all software (Oryx/Pecos, drivers, maintenance, and so forth) is reset. After the software is reset, all translations load from translation card. In addition, the TDM Bus and all port circuit packs are reset. Typical displays in a Release 5 vs/si system follow: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Reset System 4 (System Reboot) Page 4-4 Typical Display (TN790 Release 5vs/si and Later Systems) INTERNAL REGISTER TEST PASSED LOCAL BUS TEST PASSED ROM CHECKSUM TEST PASSED CONTROL STATUS TEST PASSED DCACHE TEST PASSED ICACHE TEST PASSED WRITE BUFFER TEST PASSED BTO TEST PASSED TIMER TEST PASSED RESET 3 (COLD_1) PERFORMED Reset System 4 (System Reboot) Emergency Transfer is invoked. The boot image is already in the flash ROM memory. The system reboots immediately after the LMM performs a series of diagnostics on the processor and memory. Translations reload from the translation card. Depending on the translation, the reloading process takes from five to 30 seconds. Thereafter, all port circuit packs are reset, and all telephone sessions drop. Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large system, reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes. Typical displays in a Release 5 system follow: Typical Display (TN790 Release 5 and Later) INTERNAL REGISTER TEST PASSED LOCAL BUS TEST PASSED ROM CHECKSUM TEST PASSED CONTROL STATUS TEST PASSED DCACHE TEST PASSED ICACHE TEST PASSED Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Reset System 5 (System Reboot and Run All 24-Hour Tests) WRITE BUFFER TEST PASSED BTO TEST PASSED MEM CONFIG TEST PASSED MEMORY FUNCTIONAL TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A BURST TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B BURST TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C BURST TEST PASSED VIRTUAL MEMORY TEST PASSED EXECEPTION TEST PASSED TIMER TEST PASSED MTP TEST PASSED SANITY TIMER TEST PASSED ADDRESS MATCHER TEST PASSED FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM TEST PASSED DECOMPRESSING IDATA in_cnt = 455532, out_cnt = 1802240 RAM DATA CHECKSUM TEST PASSED Page 4-5 RESET 4 (EXT REBOOT) PEFORMED Continued on next page Reset System 5 (System Reboot and Run All 24-Hour Tests) Emergency Transfer is invoked. The LMM performs a series of diagnostics on the processor, on memory, and on memory card. Some diagnostics perform twice. This takes less than three minutes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Reset System 5 (System Reboot and Run All 24-Hour Tests) Page 4-6 The boot image is already in the flash ROM memory. The system reboots immediately after the LMM performs a series of diagnostics on the processor and memory. Translations reload from the translation card. Depending on the translation, the reloading process takes from five to 30 seconds. Thereafter, all port circuit packs are reset, and all telephone sessions drop. Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large system, reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes. Finally, scheduled maintenance is initiated. Typical displays in a Release 5vs/si system follow: Typical Display (TN790 Release 5 and Later) INTERNAL REGISTER TEST PASSED LOCAL BUS TEST PASSED ROM CHECKSUM TEST PASSED CONTROL STATUS TEST PASSED DCACHE TEST PASSED ICACHE TEST PASSED WRITE BUFFER TEST PASSED BTO TEST PASSED MEM CONFIG TEST PASSED MEMORY FUNCTIONAL TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A BURST TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A COUPLE TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B BURST TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B COUPLE TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C BURST TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE C COUPLE TEST PASSED VIRTUAL MEMORY TEST PASSED Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Reset System Interchange (High or Critical Reliability Systems Only) EXECEPTION TEST PASSED TIMER TEST PASSED MTP TEST PASSED SANITY TIMER TEST PASSED ADDRESS MATCHER TEST PASSED FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM TEST PASSED DECOMPRESSING IDATA in_cnt = 455532, out_cnt = 1802240 RAM DATA CHECKSUM TEST PASSED Page 4-7 RESET 5 (EXT REBOOT ) PEFORMED Continued on next page Reset System Interchange (High or Critical Reliability Systems Only) SPE-interchange (system hot start) is denoted by an "i" in the initcauses log. This restart is used to transfer control from the Active SPE to the Standby SPE in the least disruptive manner. Interchange (i) is the most transparent of all levels of restart and causes no disruption of service to telephone users. This restart takes fewer than two seconds. NOTE: The administration terminal is logged off. No diagnostics are performed, and only the login prompt displays. An interchange (i) can be performed in one of the following three ways: a. System Technician-Demanded: using the reset system interchange command b. Scheduled Maintenance c. Software-Requested: The software requests the interchange when it determines that the Standby SPE is healthier than the current Active SPE NOTE: For most SPE alarms, interchange to the standby SPE is achieved using the hot restart (i). However, there may be other alarms for which another restart level (1 through 4) must be used to achieve a transition to the Standby SPE. See Table 6-1, “Software-Requested Interchanges Caused by Alarm Conditions” in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’, for a complete list of alarms and restart levels. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Procedure for SPE-Down Mode Page 4-8 Procedure for SPE-Down Mode Due to fatal hardware and software problems, it is possible for a system to go into SPE-Down Mode. In this mode, the system invokes emergency transfer and does not provide any other service. Moreover, while in this mode, the software does not (or cannot) run at all. In a high or critical reliability system the system goes into SPE-Down mode only when both SPEs go into SPE-Down mode. There is an interface to the system by maintenance. The Processor circuit pack, is responsible for maintenance in a standard reliability system. In a high or critical reliability system, the maintenance is provided by the A-carrier Duplication Interface (DUPINT-A) TN772 circuit pack with help from the processor. The administration terminal, which connects directly to the processor in a standard reliability system and to DUPINT-A in a high or critical reliability system, provides a very limited interface to the system. Technicians can display alarms or restart the system. Only a subset of control complex alarms displays. The following are sample displays for SPE-Down mode and the alarms displayed. Display for SPE-Down in a Standard Reliability system: **************SPE DOWN MODE************* You can display alarms and reset system(4). SPE_DOWN-> Screen 4-1 and Screen 4-2 show all possible SPE-Down alarms in a standard reliability system and in a high or critical reliability system, respectively. DISPLAY ALARMS: Physical Name Logical Name On Board? Alternate Name Alarm Type Date Alarmed Date Resolved ------------------------------------ PROC_BD MEM_BD_0 M_BUS MAINT* NETCON_BD TAPE_UNIT NO_TAPE y y y y y ----------- ----------------------------- MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR ------------------------------------ ------------------------------------ Screen 4-1. Display Alarms Command Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Procedure for SPE-Down Mode Page 4-9 * The “MAINT” designation is used for PR-MAINT. Display for SPE-Down in a High or Critical Reliability System: **************SPE DOWN MODE************ You can display alarms [a|b] and reset system(4) [a|b]. SPE_DOWN-> Screen 4-2 shows only one SPE-Down alarm in a high or critical reliability system after entering the display b command: DISPLAY ALARMS B: Physical Name ------ Screen 4-2. Logical Name PROC_BD On Board? Alternate Name y ----- Alarm Type MAJOR Date Alarmed Date Resolved ------ ------ Display Alarms (one SPE-Down) NOTE: A standard reliability system tries to restart itself every 20 minutes. A high or critical system tries to restart itself every 10 minutes. The first step is to determine the location of the problem. It is possible for two or more circuit packs to have failed. It is also possible for a fatal problem with one circuit pack to affect another circuit pack. This is especially true for the Processor and Memory circuit packs, where a failure in one affects the other. All three of the following methods should be employed to determine where the fatal fault lies. 1. Use display alarms command: Issuing the display alarms [a | b] command at the administration terminal shows where maintenance thinks the problem lies. The alarms are a good indication of why the system went down. They should be used with the following two methods. 2. Observe red LEDs: Observe the red LEDs on the circuit pack to determine where software or processor firmware (LMM) had a problem. 3. Use the reset command: In 286 system, issuing the reset command (Standard Reliability system) or the reset [a | b ] command (High or Critical Reliability system) causes the system to attempt a reset system 4. Observe all the diagnostics on the screen, and note if the LMM has a problem with any of the diagnostics, as this information should give a good indication of where the problem lies. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Procedure for SPE-Down Mode Issue 1 August 1997 Page 4-10 The procedure to get a system out of SPE-Down mode follows. NOTE: This is important! If you cannot complete the first step or have problems with the maintenance interface, then the first step should be to replace the Processor circuit pack. In a high or critical reliability system the DUPINT-A circuit pack can also cause SPE-Down. 1. If the alarms indicate a tape failure, replace the tape or tape drive and go to Step 3. Otherwise, verify that there is a good tape in the tape drive. If a tape is not present or if either the tape or tape drive is defective, then restarting the system using the reset command causes the system to go down again. 2. In a High or Critical Reliability system, select a carrier to repair first. When it is possible to accurately determine the location of the problem, use the display alarms [a | b ] command to display alarms for both SPEs and check the red LEDs on the processor complex circuit packs. Select the carrier where the red LEDs indicate the circuit pack alarmed. Bring up the system on that carrier and then refer to Standby SPE Maintenance documentation to repair the Standby SPE. In a Standard Reliability system or after a carrier is chosen in a High or Critical Reliability system, determine which circuit pack is defective by displaying alarms and observing the red LEDs (as discussed previously). Depending on the alarms, use Table 4-1 to replace the circuit packs indicated, one by one, in the order shown. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Procedure for Duplication Interface — Processing Element Communication Down Table 4-1. Issue 1 August 1997 Page 4-11 Order of Circuit Pack Replacement Alarm Suggested Circuit Packs To Replace PROC_BD 1) Processor 2) Network Control MEM_BUS 1) Processor 2) Network Control PROC_MEM 1) Processor OFFBD_MEM 1) Processor 2) Network Control INVALID_ERR 1) Processor 2) Network Control MAINT_BD 1) Processor 2) Network Control NETCON_ABSENT 1) Network Control 2) Processor NO_CARTRIDGE 1) Memory Card 2) Network Control 3) Processor Procedure for Duplication Interface — Processing Element Communication Down In a High or Critical Reliability system, it is possible for both SPEs to stop communicating with the A-carrier TN772 Duplication Interface (DUPINT-A) circuit pack. Thus, the DUPINT-A, which is in charge of maintenance, prints the following message on the administration terminal: Duplication Interface-Processing Element Communication down The system may continue to function on one of the SPEs. However, the system is not able to provide any interface to the administration terminal. If the system is still providing service, connect the administration terminal to the Active SPE (check the amber LED on the Processor circuit pack). Then, if DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 4 Initialization and Recovery Procedure for Duplication Interface — Processing Element Communication Down Issue 1 August 1997 Page 4-12 software provides a login on the administration terminal, you can determine the problems via the display alarms command. If the system is not providing service, there is a problem with the Processor circuit packs and/or DUPINT-A. Replace these circuit packs, one by one, until the system starts functioning normally. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Suppress Alarm Origination [y] Routine Maintenance Procedures Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-1 5 The following general purpose maintenance procedures may be used with other repair strategies to clear system-alarmed and user-reported troubles. Suppress Alarm Origination [y] When logged in as “craft”, no alarms are reported to INADS. After logging off, INADS automatically reactivates, and any unresolved alarms are reported to INADS. Also, when logged in as “craft,” an automatic logoff of the terminal occurs after 30 minutes of non-use. At that time, any unresolved alarms are reported to INADS. If you are logged in as “craft” at 2 different terminals, the logoff occurs when the second terminal remains unused for 30 minutes. NOTE: The test inads-link command functions even if INADS Alarm Origination is overridden. Handling Control Circuit Packs PPN Control Circuit Packs ! WARNING: It is NOT recommended that you reseat circuit packs unless the documentation specifically instructs you to do so. If it is required to reseat a DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Handling Control Circuit Packs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-2 circuit pack, follow the instructions below which explain how to unseat, reseat, and replace circuit packs. The procedures for unseating, reseating, and replacing control circuit packs vary depending on the system configuration. Therefore, before performing these maintenance activities, refer to the appropriate procedure below. Procedure for a Standard Reliability Cabinet To unseat a control circuit pack: 1. Remove power from the PPN using the procedure provided in ‘‘Removing Power’’. 2. Slide the latch pin upward to unlock the locking lever. 3. Pull down on the locking lever until the circuit pack disconnects from its socket. 4. Pull the circuit pack just enough to break contact with the backplane connector, but do not remove it from the cabinet. To reseat a circuit pack: 1. Push the unseated circuit pack back into the backplane connector. 2. Lift the locking lever until the pin engages. 3. Restore power to the PPN using the procedure provided in ‘‘Restoring Power’’ To replace Control circuit packs: 1. Remove power from the PPN using the procedure in the ‘‘Removing Power’’ 1. Unseat the circuit pack. 2. Slide the circuit pack out of the slot. 3. Replace the circuit pack as per the following procedure: NOTE: If a new circuit pack does not correct the problem, install the original circuit pack. NOTE: If you are replacing a TN790 circuit pack, refer to ‘‘TN790 Processor Circuit Pack (Memory)’’ in this chapter. To install a new circuit pack or return the original one to service: 1. Carefully insert the circuit pack and push it all the way into its mounting slot. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Handling Control Circuit Packs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-3 2. Lift the locking lever until the latch pin engages. 3. Restore power to the PPN using the procedure in ‘‘Restoring Power’’. 4. Verify that the circuit pack LED indications are correct. 5. Test the replaced control circuit pack by issuing the system technician commands after power has been restored. Network Control Circuit Pack ! WARNING: When a TN777B Network Control circuit pack is reseated or replaced, the correct date and time setting must be manually entered and verified. The TN777B Network Control Pack holds a translation card. Before this circuit pack is handled, remove the translation card. 1. Check that the "card in use" LED is not lighted. Otherwise, removing the memory card may damage the data recorded on it. 2. Carefully pull the translation card from the card slot. To insert the card into the slot: 1. Take the translation card and hold it in front of you so that the card’s label is facing to your left. 2. With the card in this position, insert the shorter edge of the card into the mounting slot. Then, gently push the card forward until you feel some resistance at the opposite edge of the card. Once you feel this resistance, the card is inserted. About 3/4 of an inch of a fully inserted card should appear outside of the card slot. ! WARNING: Remember, assuming you are directly facing the circuit pack, the card label should be facing to your left. If this is not the case, remove the card and start again. 3. Test the inserted card by issuing the test card-mem system technician command. EPN Control Circuit Packs Control circuit packs are unseated, reseated, replaced, and tested in the same way as Port circuit packs. Refer to the ‘‘Handling Control Circuit Packs’’ section in this chapter. Note the special precautions required when handling the TN776 and TN570 Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit packs and the EPN TN768 and TN780 Tone-Clock circuit packs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures TN790 Processor Circuit Pack (Memory) Page 5-4 EPN Expansion Interface Circuit Packs If the system has high or critical reliability, verify that the Expansion Interface to be unseated or replaced is NOT a part of the Active Expansion Interface Link. Issue the status system command. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is shown to be a part of the Active Expansion Interface Link, use the set expansion-link PCSS command to make the current Standby link the Active one. EPN Tone-Clock Circuit Packs If the EPN has redundant Tone-Clock circuit packs, make sure the Tone-Clock to be unseated or replaced is the Standby circuit pack. Issue the status system command. If the Tone-Clock is shown as Active, use the set tone-clock PC command to make the current Standby Tone-Clock the Active one. TN790 Processor Circuit Pack (Memory) Unless upgrading memory, the TN790 must have the same number of SIMMs as the replaced circuit pack. ! CAUTION: Be sure to use a Lucent Technologies-provided SIMM. Other brands may have incompatible edge connectors and could produce unpredictable results. Removing Power When power is removed, the following features deactivate: ■ Attendant Trunk Group Control ■ Automatic Callback ■ Call Park ■ Make Busy for Direct Department Calling (DDC) and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) The procedures for removing power vary depending on the system configuration. Before performing these activities, refer to the following appropriate procedure. ! WARNING: Before powering down a cabinet or carrier that contains DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs (TN566), first power down the AUDIX unit to avoid damaging the AUDIX software. Instructions for powering down this unit are in the ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures’’ below, on the circuit pack, and in DEFINITY AUDIX documentation. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Removing Power Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-5 DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures Manually Power Down AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system. 1. Using a pointed object, such as a paper clip or pen (do not use a pencil), press the Boot/shutdown button. The button is located at the top right portion of the front panel. 2. Hold the boot/Shutdown button in until the LCD display flashes the message MSHUT. 3. Release the Boot/Shutdown button. NOTE: The DEFINITY AUDIX System takes about five minutes to shut down. The “heartbeat” indication on the display continues to flash. Procedure for a Single-Carrier Cabinet PPN This procedure applies to a single-carrier cabinet PPN with or with high or critical reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either an AC or a DC power source. ! WARNING: If a translation card alarm is present, or if a translation card problem is suspected, do not save translations of the translation card that is provided with the system. ! CAUTION: Check that the translation card is present in the system or check that the translation card is in the TN777B Network Control circuit pack. 4. At the administration terminal, enter the save translation command. 5. In a standard reliability system on the Processor circuit pack in the PPN, and on the Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN, set the Emergency Transfer switch to "ON." ! CAUTION: When removing power, Error Log information is lost. If the data is to be retained, enter the reset system 4 command. This command restarts the system and may take several minutes. Wait for the login prompt before proceeding. 6. To remove power from the cabinet: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Restoring Power Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-6 ■ In an AC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the carrier behind the WP-91153 Power Unit. ■ In a DC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the cabinet, behind the 676B Power Unit. Procedure for a Single-Carrier Cabinet EPN This procedure applies to a single-carrier EPN with or without high or critical reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either an AC or a DC power source. Power may be removed from the EPN without affecting the PPN. NOTE: In a high or critical reliability system, if power is to be removed from an individual cabinet only, make sure that the affected cabinet does not contain an Expansion Interface circuit pack that is part of the Active Expansion Link or an Active Tone-Clock. To determine which Expansion Interface Link and Tone-Clock are active, issue the status system command. To determine the synchronization reference, use the display synchronization command. 1. To remove power from the cabinet: ■ In an AC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the cabinet behind the WP-91153 Power Unit. ■ In a DC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the cabinet behind the 676B Power Unit. Restoring Power The procedures you need to restore power depend on the system configuration. Before performing these activities, refer to the following appropriate procedure. NOTE: If the AUDIX unit has been powered down, refer to ‘‘Power Up the AUDIX System’’ on page 5-8. Procedure for Single Carrier Cabinet PPN This procedure applies to single-carrier cabinet PPNs with or without high or critical reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either AC or DC power. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Restoring Power Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-7 NOTE: In a high or critical reliability system, if power is to be removed from an individual cabinet only, make sure that the affected cabinet does not contain an Expansion Interface circuit pack that is part of the Active Expansion Link or an Active Tone-Clock. To determine which Expansion Interface Link and Tone-Clock are active, issue the status system command. To determine the synchronization reference, use the display synchronization command. 1. Restore power as follows: NOTE: If the cabinet is powered by a 676B Power Unit, the 676B must have been powered off for at least 10 seconds before being powered on. If not, the 676B Power Unit does not restart. ■ In an AC-Powered system, turn on the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the back of the cabinet behind the WP-91153 Power Unit. ■ In a DC-Powered system, turn on the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the back of the cabinet behind the 676B Power Unit. 2. Make sure that the translation card is properly inserted into the slot. 3. The system now goes through the rebooting process.The translations are loaded from the translation card, and rebooting takes about three minutes. 4. When system power is restored, the appropriate display is shown on the administration terminal. The display is the same as a reset system 4 that is described in ‘‘Reset System 4 (System Reboot)’’ in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’. 5. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared, return the EMER XFER (Emergency Transfer) switch(es) to AUTO. This restores the system to the normal operating mode. 6. Reset the time using the set time command. Use display time command to verify. Procedure for Single-Carrier Cabinet EPN Power may be restored to the EPN without affecting the PPN. This procedure applies to single-carrier cabinet EPNs with or without high or critical reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either AC or DC power. NOTE: In a high or critical reliability system, if power is to be removed from an individual cabinet only, make sure that the affected cabinet does not DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Restoring Power Page 5-8 contain an Expansion Interface circuit pack that is part of the Active Expansion Link or an Active Tone-Clock. To determine which Expansion Interface Link and Tone-Clock are active, issue the status system command. To determine the synchronization reference, use the display synchronization command. 1. To restore power to the cabinet: NOTE: If the cabinet is powered by a 676B Power Unit, the 676B must have been powered off for at least 10 seconds before being powered on. If not, the 676B Power Unit does not restart. ■ In an AC-Powered single-carrier cabinet system, turn on the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the back of the cabinet behind the WP-91153 Power Unit. ■ In a DC-Powered single-carrier cabinet system, turn on the power in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the back of the cabinet behind the 676B Power Unit. 2. The EPN circuit packs is inserted and the EPN is available for call processing. 3. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared, return the Emergency Transfer switch to AUTO. This restores the system to the normal operating mode. Power Up the AUDIX System 1. Using a pointed object such as a paper clip or a pen (do not use a pencil), press the Boot/Shutdown button. 2. Hold the boot/Shutdown button in until the display indicates the message, BTEST, steady on. 3. Release the Boot/Shutdown button. the DEFINITY AUDIX system takes approximately 5 minutes to power up. ■ The display has the following sequence of steady on messages: — OSINIT — OS — AINIT — ADX ■ The DEFINITY AUDIX System is now powered up. When the system is in the active state, the display indicates ADX, and the red LED is off. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Control Cabinet Power Units Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-9 NOTE: When powering up, the DEFINITY ADUXI System automatically reboots. This sequence may show an MD or MJ ADX alarm in the display until the system how powered up. When the system has completed its power up sequence, the display reads: ADX. Troubleshooting Control Cabinet Power Units 1. Check that the translation card is in the TN777B circuit pack and enter the save translation command. 2. On the Processor circuit pack in the PPN, set the EMER XFER (Emergency Transfer) switch to ON. This locks the system in the Transfer Mode until the trouble is cleared. ! WARNING: Electrostatic discharge can destroy or severely damage integrated circuits or circuit packs. Always wear the electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist grounding strap when handling circuit packs. Connect the wrist strap to one of the metal tabs located on the lower left or right side of one of the carriers. 3. Unlatch the locking lever and unseat the power unit. 4. Unseat all the control circuit packs. 5. Reseat the power unit. If the yellow LED on the suspect power unit lights immediately, the control circuit packs can be presumed to be healthy. If the yellow LED on the suspect power unit does not light immediately, continue with the next step. 6. Reseat the circuit packs one at a time while observing the LED on the power unit. a. If the yellow LED on the power unit lights when a specific circuit pack is reseated, unseat and reseat the same circuit pack again to rule out a transient problem. If the yellow LED lights again, the problem is with the circuit pack, and the power unit is functioning properly. Replace the defective circuit pack. b. If the yellow LED on the suspect power unit does not light during the reseating of the control circuit packs, continue with the next step. 7. Unseat all port circuit packs. 8. Reseat the port circuit packs one at a time following the same steps outlined above for control circuit packs. 9. If none of the control or port circuit packs appears to be defective, replace the power unit. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-10 10. When the system reboot has completed, return the EMER XFER (Emergency Transfer) switch to AUTO. This restores the system to the normal operating mode. Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later) Components within the Release 5vs can be replaced while the unit is attached to the wall. Also, if the wires and cables at the back of the cabinet are neatly bundled, these wires and cables need not be disconnected. Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 provide views of the power supply sub-assembly. Figure 5-3 provides a view of the fan sub-assembly. The sections following the figures discuss how to disassemble the unit and then replace the power supply or fans within the unit. ! CAUTION: When replacing either the power supply or the fans within a Release 5vs unit that is already attached to the wall, you should disconnect the entire fan panel from the unit. Otherwise, if the fan panel is left to dangle, the cable assemblies leading out from the fans (which are connected to the fan panel) and into the backplane might become damaged or disconnected from the backplane. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later) Page 5-11 Cable Retainer Power Panel Screw Term DCE Connector Connector PI Connector Ground Block Power Cord Receptacle On/Off Figure 5-1. Power Supply Sub-Assembly (Outside View) Power Supply 1. Remove the four screws on the top of the cabinet. 2. Remove the four screws from the fan panel at the rear of the unit. Then remove the fan panel. 3. If the unit is attached to the wall, disconnect the entire fan panel. 4. Extending out from the power supply is a cord consisting of numerous individual wires. This cord plugs into the backplane. A Burndy connector is at the end of the cord. Squeeze the sides of the connector to release the latch. Then pull the connector off of the backplane. 5. Remove the power supply from the unit. Once the power supply is removed, disconnect the AC power cord. 6. Reconnect the AC power cord, insert the new power supply, reconnect the Burndy connector and the cord, reinsert (if removed) the reconnected fan panel, screw the fan panel back onto the unit, and reinsert the screws on the top of the unit. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later) Page 5-12 P/O (Plug to Power Supply) Circuit Breaker Wire Assembly (Green) To Backplane P/O (Blue) P/O (Brown) Wire Assembly (Blue) Wire Assembly (Brown) Screw Screw Circuit Module (Green-Yellow Wire Attaches to Ground Block Screw) P/O, PI Cable, TY Wrap t A bl Figure 5-2. Power Supply Sub-Assembly (Inside View) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later) Page 5-13 Hex Nut Flow Direction Fan Fan Guard Screw Fan Panel Figure 5-3. Fan Sub-Assembly Fans 1. At the back of the unit, remove the four screws from the fan panel. Then remove the panel. 2. If the unit is attached to the wall, disconnect the entire fan panel. ! CAUTION: The power cord for each fan extends from a plug on the backplane. Do not tug on any of these cords. Otherwise, the corresponding plug on the backplane might come off. 3. Each fan has a power cord. At the end of each power cord is a plug and receptacle. Disconnect the plug for each fan that is to be replaced. Then remove the appropriate fan(s). 4. Install the new fan(s), reconnect the fan plug(s), reconnect the fan panel (if disconnected), and screw the fan panel back onto the back of the unit. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Backup Page 5-14 System Backup System translations can be restored by using the data on the system or on the backup translation card if the length of power failure is appropriate for the corresponding system. Table 5-1 lists the requirements: Table 5-1. Requirements for System Backup Minimum Length of Power Failure (in Minutes) System 2 Single-Carrier Cabinet Standard System 2 Single-Carrier Cabinet High or Critical Reliability System Save Translation To ensure that the translation card contains the most recent copy of the translation data, the system can automatically save the translation data onto the translation card every 24 hours. Automatic daily backup of the system translation data is controlled by an entry in the system parameters that defaults to "daily". If many translation data changes are made, it is recommended that you save the translation data using the save translation command. This action saves the new changes to the translation card without having to wait for the next automatic daily translation backup. NOTE: The save translation command blocks all maintenance commands except some list, display, monitor, and status commands. The system blocks the execution of any commands that change translations or trigger a maintenance action (for example, test board, busyout port, and so forth). The status card-mem command is blocked during the save translation operation. In a high or critical reliability system, if the save translation command is entered without a qualifier, an attempt is made to save the translations on both the Active and Standby SPE. If the command is qualified with either "spe-active" or "spe-standby," the translations are saved only on the specified SPE. For example, if, when the save translation command was issued, the translations were successfully saved on the active SPE’s translation card, but were not successfully saved on the standby SPE’s translation card, issue the save translation spe-standby command to save the translations on the standby SPE as well. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Backup Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-15 The system blocks the execution of any commands that change the translation, access a translation card, or trigger a maintenance action. ! CAUTION: It is recommended that "save translation" be performed after business hours so that dial tone delays are not encountered. ! CAUTION: Do not issue the "save translation" command when alarm conditions are present. Save Recorded Announcements In a high or critical reliability system, if the save announcements command is entered without a qualifier, an attempt is made to save the integrated announcements on both the Active and Standby SPE. If the command is qualified with either "spe-active" or "spe-standby," the integrated announcements are saved only on the specified SPE. For example, if, when the save announcements command was issued, the integrated announcements were successfully saved on the Active SPE’s translation card, but were not successfully saved on the Standby SPE’s translation card, then you would issue the save announcements spe-standby command to save the announcements on the Standby SPE as well. ! WARNING: The "save announcements" commands should only be used after business hours or when the system is operating during a low usage period. The system takes about 45 minutes to one hour to transfer the recorded announcements from the Announcement circuit pack to the system tape. During this interval, use of the administration terminal is blocked for other activities until the command completes. Translation Card Backup In case of a power failure, the system translations can be restored using the translation card. Translation data can be saved during the daily scheduled maintenance. However, if the translation data changes frequently, translations should be saved frequently to ensure that the most up-to-date information is kept. Note that only one translation card is provided with the system. It is recommended that the customer purchase additional translation cards to serve as backup or replacement. Translation cards should be alternated periodically. It is also recommended that backup copies of the translation data be made weekly, or after many changes have been made to the translation data. This minimizes the loss of recent translation data changes if the translation card in the system becomes damaged. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Backup Page 5-16 Enter the save announcements command to save the recorded announcements in the system on the translation card. NOTE: A 10 MByte or larger translation card is required to save and restore announcements. The system takes about 10 minutes to complete this task. Because the terminal is unavailable during this time, it is recommended that this command be used after business hours. During this time period, the terminal cannot be used to administer the system until the transfer is complete; however, all other terminals (if provided) are allowed to perform administration procedures. Enter the restore announcements command to restore the recorded announcements from the translation card back into system memory. The system takes about 22 minutes to complete this task. After completing the task, the system performs an audit to make sure that the announcements on the announcement circuit pack match the announcements administered in the system. The working copy of the announcements is stored on the announcement circuit pack. A backup copy should be made on a 10 Mb or larger translation card. The following procedure is used to make a backup Memory Card: 1. Remove the translation card from the Netcon circuit pack. 2. Insert the backup translation card into the Netcon circuit pack. 3. Enter the save translation command and press Enter. This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and transfer it into the translation card. The following display appears: save translation SPE A SAVE TRANSLATION Processor Command Completion Status SPE_A Success Error Code 0 Command successfully completely enter command: Screen 5-1. Save Translation — SPEA 4. Verify that the command successfully completes. If not, an error message appears. In such a case, refer to the “Translation Card Errors” section. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Backup Page 5-17 5. If the system is equipped with a TN750 Announcement circuit pack, the recorded announcements can be saved using the save announcement commands. Enter the command and press Enter. The following display appears: save announcements SAVE ANNOUNCEMENTS Processor Command Completion Status SPE_A Success Error Code 0 Command successfully completely enter command: Screen 5-2. Save Announcements Screen — SPEA 6. Verify that the command successfully completes. If not, an error message appears. In such a case, refer to the “Translation Card Errors” section. 7. Remove the backup translation card and insert the original translation card. 8. Label the backup translation card with the date and time it was updated. A special notation on the card clearly distinguishes it from other cards. 9. Store the backup translation card in a secure place. Translation Card Errors Translation card-related failures may occur for two reasons: the card is at fault, or the Netcon circuit pack is at fault. The following is a list of the error messages and recommended responses to each. 1. Cannot access file storage area—Implies that the wrong translation card may be installed. Response: Check to see which translation card is installed. If the correct one is installed, test it. 2. Cannot turn on 12 volt power supply—Implies that something may be wrong with the Netcon circuit pack, which contains the power supply. Response: Test the 12-volt power supply by entering the test card-mem command from the terminal. Executing this command causes the system to run Test 701 (12 Volt Power Supply Test). If the power supply test fails, replace the Netcon circuit pack. Then repeat whichever command failed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-18 3. Invalid directory on Card-Mem — The translation card needs refreshing. Run test card-mem and be sure all tests pass. 4. Card-Mem is unusable — Something is wrong with the translation card. Replace the translation card. 5. Could not write to Card-Mem — Something is wrong with the translation card. Test the translation card. 6. Cannot access mass storage system now; try again later — The storage system is in use. Try again later. 7. Request is incompatible with currently running operations — The storage system is in use. Try again later. 8. Card-Mem is not inserted in the system — Insert the translation card. 9. Cannot access file; wrong type of Card-Mem is inserted — The correct translation card for the desired operation has not been inserted. Load the appropriate translation card. 10. File size exceeded — There is no more file space. Call your Lucent Technologies representative. 11. Upgrade Memory Card inserted — The system upgrade translation card may have been inserted instead of the translations card. Insert the translation card. 12. Card-Mem is write-protected — The switch on the top side of the translation card is incorrectly set. Move the switch to the down position. 13. Transmission problem; please try later — There is a problem communicating with the announcement circuit pack. Check to see that the announcement circuit pack has been correctly administered. Use the change datacommand. Verify that the announcement circuit pack is in the correct slot in the processor. If so, wait and retry. 14. Command has been aborted; please try later — The command was pre-empted. Try again later. 15. Saved copy of translations is unusable — The copy of the translations on your translation card is faulty. Re-enter the save translation command. Software Upgrade The software upgrade feature permits a DEFINITY System to upgrade its software to include new features and to fix software problems.Performing an upgrade on a system without high or critical reliability requires a reset system 4 (reboot) and thus causes a service disruption. Performing an upgrade on a system equipped with high or critical reliability requires only a reset system 2 (Cold-2) restart that is less disruptive. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade ! Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-19 WARNING: No administration changes should be entered during the following software upgrade procedure. There can be substantial time gaps between steps and, since the system cannot prevent administration changes, it is up to the system technician to make sure that none are attempted during the entire software upgrade process. NOTE: This section does not apply to processor hardware upgrades such as upgrading a 386 system to a Release 5vs/si or later system. See “Upgrades and Additions/Software Upgrades”. Procedure on a System using Translation Cards The software in a Release 5vs/si or later system can be upgraded to include new features and to fix software problems. Performing an upgrade on a standard reliability system requires a Reset System 4 (reboot) and thus causes a service disruption. Performing an upgrade on a high or critical reliability system requires only a Reset System 2 (Cold-2) restart, which is less disruptive. ! CAUTION: Do not enter any administration changes during the following software upgrade procedure. There can be substantial time gaps between steps and, since the system cannot prevent administration changes, it is up to the system technician to make sure that none are attempted during the entire software upgrade process. This includes making sure that no one (including the customer) is making administration changes through connections other than through the local administration terminal. Standard Reliability (Simplex) Systems The software upgrade for a standard reliability system can take up to 130 minutes, during which time service is interrupted for about 15 minutes. Upgrade software cannot be done remotely, and it must be performed at the local terminal. Ensure that the following items are available before proceeding: ■ Generic program card with the software release running currently in the system ■ Generic program card containing the new software to which the upgrade is to be done ■ Translation card on which the system translations are to be saved (the card should already be in the system) ■ Software patch (if it exists) that is currently applied to the system (this patch is downloaded if a software backout is required) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade ■ Page 5-20 Software release label to be applied to the processor circuit pack after a successful upgrade. The following table indicates the processes and their corresponding time allotment for the upgrade procedure. Process Time (minutes) save translation 10 save announcement 45 upgrade software 10 save translation 10 save announcements 45 miscellaneous 10 Total Time 130 Figure 5-4 illustrates the output that appears on the terminal during the upgrade procedure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade ).4%2.!, 2%')34%2 4%34 ,//0 $!4! 4%34 $5!24 4%34 2/- #(%#+35- 4%34 #/.42/, 34!453 4%34 $#!#(% 4%34 )#!#(% 4%34 72)4% "5&&%2 4%34 "4/ 4%34 -%- #/.&)' 4%34 -%-/29 &5.#4)/.!, 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% ! 345#+ ")4 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% ! 0!2)49 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% ! "5234 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% " 345#+ ")4 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% " 0!2)49 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% " "5234 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% # 345#+ ")4 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% # 0!2)49 4%34 -%-/29 -/$5,% # "5234 4%34 6)245!, -%-/29 4%34 %8#%04)/. 4%34 4)-%2 4%34 -40 4%34 3!.)49 4)-%2 4%34 !$$2%33 -!4#(%2 4%34 &,!3( 4%84 #(%#+35- 4%34 2!- $!4! #(%#+35- 4%34 2%3%4 2%"//4 0%2&/2-%$ Figure 5-4. Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-21 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ 0!33%$ Typical Start-up Messages (TN790) Save Current Translations to Original Translation Card 1. Set the write switch on the original translation card down to record. Insert the card into the slot on the TN777B faceplate. 2. Enter save translation and press Enter to get translations onto the translation card. This takes about 10 minutes. The yellow LED on the TN777B is on. If the translations were corrupted, the following error message displays when logging in: ! WARNING: Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-22 NOTE: The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears. Disable TTI Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use Page 2 of the form to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) by changing the value to n. List Configuration Software Version Issue the list configuration software-versions command to determine if any patches have been applied. NOTE: If the system must be restored to the old software, download the correct patches. Disable Scheduled Maintenance Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Use this form to prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the update or upgrade. NOTE: If scheduled maintenance has begun, set the value of the “Stop Time” field to 1 minute after the current time. If scheduled maintenance has not yet begun, change the value of the “Start Time” field to a time after the upgrade is finished. Disable Alarm Origination to INADS 1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. 2. Enter n in the Alarm Origination field and press Enter. 3. For some releases of system software, disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form. ! CAUTION: Disabling alarm origination prevents the system from generating alarms, thus preventing unnecessary trouble tickets. Save Announcements 1. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, enter display announcements, and press Enter. If administered recorded announcements are listed, enter save announcements [from PCSS] and DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-23 press Enter. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, and 2-4 for EPN), C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, or D), and SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). NOTE: If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper location. NOTE: The TN750C Announcement circuit pack has on-board non-volatile storage and does not need to be saved to the translation card. Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down. ! CAUTION: Save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system. ! CAUTION: Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk. 1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 555-230-223, for the procedure to log on. 2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance. 3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu. 4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu. 5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors. Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded, shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade ! Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-24 WARNING: Neglecting to shut down AUDIX before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk. 2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors in the carrier. Power Down Basic Control Cabinet ! CAUTION: Powering down the PPN cabinet causes important system data, such as BCMS data, records of queued ACD calls, Automatic Wakeup request, and Do Not Disturb requests to be lost. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si for information about preparing the system for a power down. 1. Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to OFF. Replace Circuit Packs 1. At the basic control cabinet, remove the combined TN786B/CPP1 Processor/Memory circuit pack. 2. Install the TN790 Processor circuit pack into the control cabinet slot labeled “PROCR.” Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors. Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System Reseat the AUDIX assembly into its backplane connectors. Reboot the System 1. Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to ON. 2. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process by loading translations from the translation card. This takes 8 to 11 minutes. 3. Peel the paper backing from the TN790 Processor circuit pack position label (designation strip) and affix it to the front of the control cabinet. 4. Install a circuit pack blank into the slot previously occupied by the CPP1. 5. Log in as “craft” at the login: prompt on the terminal. 6. Enter set time, and press Enter to set the time and ensure that the system is booted properly. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-25 7. Enter list configuration software-version, and press Enter to compare the version number of the Release 5.4 software program (displayed on the terminal) with the TN790 version number (written on a label on the TN790’s faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same, change the version number on the TN790 label so that they agree. 8. Perform a sanity check on the system running the new software by executing the following commands in this order: a. status system 1 (to check out unusual status in the system) b. list station (to ensure that the translation is read in properly) c. display alarm (to ensure no alarm is raised in the system) d. list trunk-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly) e. list hunt-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly) This ensures there is no translation corruption and the translations can be saved with the new software. NOTE: If the new load must be returned to the previous software load, re-install the TN786B/CPP1 circuit packs and reboot with the previous version’s translation card. 9. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade, and call the regional CSA to request an “init” login. Once logged in as “init,” the CSA should assign the Release 5.4 option, which automatically sets the 24-hour password aging for the upgraded system’s customer logins. NOTE: Certain forms have changed for DEFINITY ECS R5. Upgraded translations may appear on a different form, fields may shift within a form, and the name assignments to particular fields may change. 10. Notify the switch administrator that any previous login names and passwords still exist, but that the passwords expire in 24 hours. The new login names and passwords must conform to the requirements below. NOTE: A password must have from 4 to 11 alphanumeric characters including at least 1 alphabetic character and 1 numeric character. A login name must have from 3 to 6 alphanumeric characters. 11. Since an R1V3.0 G3-MA cannot notify users about expiring passwords, disable password aging for any login name used with an R1V3.0 G3-MA. Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. 2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-26 3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu. 4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu. Save Upgraded Translations onto New Translation Card 1. Enter status system 1, and press Enter to verify the system is in “active” mode. 2. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, check for completion of an automatic restore of announcements before removing the original translation card. If the system has been running for at least 45 minutes since power on, this operation should be complete. Check the yellow LED on the TN750/B which is lit during the download. If the restore did not start within 15 minutes of power on, enter restore announcements, and press Enter. 3. At this point, all telephones should be working properly. 4. Insert the new Release 5.4 translation card. Verify the write switch is down. 5. The original translation card can be reformatted and reused. Enter format card-mem announcements and press Enter. This formats the original translation card into Release 5.4 format (even if no announcement circuit packs are installed). 6. Enter save translation, and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory onto the translation card. 7. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack and announcements were restored in the above step, enter save announcements [‘from’ cabinet(1-X). carrier (A-D), slot (0-20)] and press Enter. Where cabinet/carrier/slot is the location of the TN750/B. NOTE: If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper location. Enable TTI If TTI was optioned prior to the software upgrade: 1. Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter. 2. Use page 2 of the form to change the TTI field back to y. Enable Scheduled Maintenance Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Enable the scheduled daily maintenance. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-27 Enable Customer Options 1. Enter change system-parameters customer-options. 2. Use these forms to verify the customer options are properly set. NOTE: In the Basic Call Setup field, if ISDN-PRI? was set to y before the upgrade, be sure to set the field back to y. Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si. Verify Alarm Origination to INADS Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center (TSC). Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS. As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination. Return Equipment Return the replaced equipment (including the old Translation Card) to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in the following documents: BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns High and Critical Reliability (Duplex) Systems The upgrade procedure for high and critical reliability systems takes up to two hours. Service is interrupted for about five minutes. The procedure cannot be done remotely, and it must be performed at the PPN (local) terminal. Ensure that the following items are available before proceeding: 1. Generic software card with the software release currently running in the system 2. Generic software card containing the new software to which upgrades are to be made 3. Translation cards on which to save system translations (these cards should already be in the system) 4. Software patch (if it exists) that is currently applied to the system (this patch is downloaded if a software backout is required) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-28 5. Software release label to be applied to the processor circuit pack after a successful upgrade The following table indicates the processes and their corresponding time allotment for the upgrade procedure. Process Time (minutes) save translation 9 save announcement 45 upgrade software 15 save translation 9 miscellaneous 11 Total Time 90 Figure 5-5 presents output that appears on the terminal during this procedure. TN786 CLMM Release X.X.X INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE MEM-CARD CHECKSUM REPROGRAMMING MTP ERASING MEMORY REPROGRAMMING SPE PASSED PASSED PASSED PASSED REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD ON B WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD UPGRADE COMPLETE REPLACE TRANSLATION MEM-CARD ON A WITH SOFTWARE MEM-CARD TN786 CLMM Release X.X.X INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE MEM-CARD CHECKSUM REPROGRAMMING MTP ERASING MEMORY REPROGRAMMING SPE PASSED PASSED PASSED PASSED REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD ON A WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD UPGRADE COMPLETE Figure 5-5. Terminal Display for a Duplex System Software Upgrade DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-29 Save Current Translations to Original Translation Card 1. Set the write switch on the original translation card down to record. Insert the card into the slot on the TN777B faceplate. 2. Enter save translation and press Enter to get translations onto the translation card. This takes about 5 minutes. The yellow LED on the TN777B is on. If the translations were corrupted, the following error message displays when logging in: ! WARNING: Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor immediately. NOTE: The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption message appears. Disable TTI Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use Page 2 of the form to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) by changing the value to n. List Configuration Software Version Issue the list configuration software-versions command to determine whether any patches have been applied. NOTE: If the system must be restored to the old software, download the correct patches back onto the system. Disable Scheduled Maintenance 1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Use this form to prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the update or upgrade. NOTE: If scheduled maintenance has begun, set the value of the “Stop Time” field to one minute after the current time. If scheduled maintenance has not yet begun, change the value of the “Start Time” field to a time after the upgrade is finished. Disable Alarm Origination to INADS 1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-30 2. Enter n in the Alarm Origination field and press Enter. 3. For some releases of system software, disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form. ! CAUTION: Disabling alarm origination prevents the system from generating alarms, thus preventing unnecessary trouble tickets. Save Announcements 1. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, enter display announcements, and press Enter. If administered recorded announcements are listed, enter save announcements [from PCSS] and press Enter. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, and 2-4 for EPN), C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, or D), and SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). NOTE: If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper location. NOTE: The TN750C Announcement circuit pack contains on-board non-volatile memory. It is not necessary to back up a TN750C. Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down. ! CAUTION: Save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system. ! WARNING: Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk. 1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 555-230-223, for the procedure to log on. 2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-31 3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu. 4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu. 5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors. Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System 1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the control cabinet to be upgraded, shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down. ! WARNING: Neglecting to shut down AUDIX before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk. 2. Manually Power Down AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system. a. Using a pointed object, such as a paper clip or pen (do not use a pencil), press the Boot/shutdown button. The button is located at the top right portion of the front panel. b. Hold the boot/Shutdown button in until the LCD display flashes the message MSHUT. c. Release the Boot/Shutdown button. NOTE: The DEFINITY AUDIX System takes about five minutes to shut down. The “heartbeat” indication on the display continues to flash. 3. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors in the carrier. Power Down Basic Control Cabinet ! CAUTION: Do not power down the entire system. This defeats the purpose of high or critical reliability configurations. ! CAUTION: Powering down the control cabinet causes important system data, such as BCMS data, records of queued ACD calls, Automatic Wakeup request, and Do Not Disturb requests to be lost. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si for information about preparing the system for a power down. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-32 Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to OFF. Replace Circuit Packs 1. Remove the combined TN786B/CPP1 Processor/Memory circuit pack from the basic control cabinet. 2. Install the TN790 Processor circuit pack into the control cabinet slot labeled “PROCR.” Reboot the System 1. Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to ON. 2. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process by loading translations from the translation card. This takes 10 to 15 minutes. 3. Peel the paper backing from the new circuit pack position label (designation strip) and affix it to the front of the basic control cabinet. 4. Install a circuit pack blank into the slot previously occupied by the CPP1. Power Down Duplicated Control Cabinet ! CAUTION: Do not power down the entire system. This defeats the purpose of high or critical reliability configurations. Set the duplicated control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to OFF. Replace Circuit Packs 1. Remove the combined TN786B/CPP1 Processor/Memory circuit pack from the duplicated control cabinet. 2. Install the TN790 Processor circuit pack into the control cabinet slot labeled “PROCR.” Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors in the carrier. Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System Reseat the AUDIX assembly into its backplane connectors. Reboot the System 1. Set the duplicated control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to ON. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-33 2. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process by loading translations from the translation card. This takes 10 to 15 minutes. 3. Peel the paper backing from the new circuit pack position label (designation strip) and affix it to the front of the duplicated control cabinet. 4. Install a circuit pack blank into the slot previously occupied by the CPP1. 5. Log in as “craft” at the login: prompt on the management terminal. 6. Enter set time, and press Enter to set the time and ensure that the system is booted properly. 7. Enter list configuration software-version, and press Enter to compare the version number of the Release 5.4 software program (displayed on the terminal) with the TN790 version number (written on a label on the TN790’s faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same, change the version number on the TN790 label so that they agree. 8. Perform a sanity check on the system running the new software by executing the following commands in this order: a. status system 1 (to check out unusual status in the system) b. list station (to ensure that the translation is read in properly) c. display alarm (to ensure no alarm is raised in the system) d. list trunk-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly) e. list hunt-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly) This ensures there is no translation corruption and the translations can be saved with the new software. NOTE: If the new load must be returned to the previous software load, re-install the TN786B/CPP1 circuit packs and reboot with the previous version’s translation card. 9. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade, and call the regional CSA to request an “init” login. Once logged in as “init,” the CSA should assign the DEFINITY ECS R5 option, which automatically sets the 24-hour password aging for the upgraded system’s customer logins. NOTE: Certain forms have changed for DEFINITY ECS R5. Upgraded translations may appear on a different form, fields may shift within a form, and the name assignments to particular fields may change. 10. Notify the switch administrator that any previous login names and passwords still exist, but that the passwords expire in 24 hours. The new login names and passwords must conform to the requirements below. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-34 NOTE: A password must have from 4 to 11 alphanumeric characters including at least 1 alphabetic character and 1 numeric character. A login name must have from 3 to 6 alphanumeric characters. 11. Since an R1V3.0 G3-MA cannot notify users about expiring passwords, disable password aging for any login name used with an R1V3.0 G3-MA. Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System 1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. 2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance. 3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu. 4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu. Save Upgraded Translations onto New Translation Card 1. Enter status system 1, and press Enter to verify that the system is in the “active/standby” mode. NOTE: At this point, all telephones should be working properly. 2. Insert the new Release 5.4 translation card. Verify the write switch is down. 3. The original translation card can be reformatted and reused. Enter format card-mem announcements and press Enter. This formats the original translation card into Release 5.4 format (even if no announcement circuit packs are installed). 4. Enter save translation, and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all translation information from memory onto both translation cards. 5. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack and announcements were saved above, enter restore announcements, and press Enter. Once the administered recorded announcements are restored, enter save announcements [from PCSS] and press Enter. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, and 2-4 for EPN), C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, or D), and SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). NOTE: If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper location. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Software Upgrade Page 5-35 NOTE: The TN750C Announcement circuit pack has on-board non-volatile storage and does not need to be saved to the translation card. Enable TTI If TTI was enabled prior to the software upgrade: 1. Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter. 2. Use page 2 of the form to change the TTI field back to y (if necessary). Enable Scheduled Maintenance Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Use this form to enable scheduled daily maintenance. Enable Customer Options 1. Enter change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter. 2. Use these forms to verify the customer options are properly set. NOTE: In the Basic Call Setup field, if ISDN-PRI? was set to y before the upgrade, be sure to set the field back to y. Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si. Verify Alarm Origination to INADS Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center (TSC). Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS. As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination. Return Equipment Return the replaced equipment (including the old Translation Card) to Lucent Technologies according to the requirements outlined in the following documents: BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Preventive Maintenance Procedures Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-36 Preventive Maintenance Procedures The following preventive maintenance procedures should be followed when you are visiting customer sites: Air Filters Air filters should be inspected annually. If a filter is dirty or clogged, first tap it on the ground. If the filter is still dirty or clogged, then wash it with warm water and a mild detergent. A vacuum cleaner can be used if one is available. If there is no facility for washing or vacuuming the air filter, then replace the filter. Refer to “CABINET” maintenance object for more information on air filters and fans. Tape Head/Capstan The tape drive head (also called the tape head) should be cleaned at least once a year. Moreover, it should be cleaned as part of the preventive maintenance strategy. It is recommended that you inspect the tape head during each maintenance visit and that you clean the tape head several times a year. In addition, a dated label should be placed on the tape drive unit after the tape head is cleaned. New tapes leave more abrasive particles on the tape head. The tape head can be accessed for cleaning from the front of the drive by opening the tape access door with your finger. Refer to TAPE Maintenance documentation for more details on cleaning the tape head. Batteries The batteries should be replaced every four years or whenever a POWER alarm occurs in the system. Preventive Maintenance Log Figure 5-6 shows a sample of the AT&T Preventive Maintenance Log. Whenever you complete any of the preventive maintenance procedures described in this section, be sure to fill in the requested information on the log form before you leave the customer’s premises. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-37 SYSTEM 75/DEFINITY GENERIC 3 SCHED. AIR FILTERS1 Inspect Annually Clean or replace System 75XE 403-302-159 System 75/G1 (Lg. & Med) 403-326-820 TAPE HEAD / CAPSTAN2 Clean annually* Replace when an alarm is received, COMPL. SCHED. COMPL. COMPL. DATE DATE BY ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ SCHED. COMPL. COMPL. DATE DATE BY ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ DATE DATE BY ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ SCHED. BATTERY PACKS3 COMPL. DATE DATE BY ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ SCHED. COMPL. COMPL. COMPL. COMPL. DATE DATE BY ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ SCHED. COMPL. COMPL. DATE DATE BY ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ or every 4 years ** System 75/G1 (Lg. & Med.) 403-302-912 System 75XE 403-289-422 * It is recommended that the tape head/capstan be inspected several times per year and cleaned if necessary. ** Battery packs should also be replaced whenever a POWER alarm occurs. Notes: Refer to CABINET Maintenance documentation Refer to TAPE Maintenance documentation Refer to POWER (for AC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation NOTE: This form is to be posted with the equipment. Figure 5-6. DATE SYSTEM INSTALLED____________ Preventive Maintenance Log System Features In addition to the various maintenance and test commands (described in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’) that are available, the following system features may also be useful in troubleshooting certain system resources: ■ Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) ■ Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks ■ Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to Attendant ■ Trunk Identification by Attendant ■ Facility Test Calls DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features ■ Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back Testing ■ Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing ■ Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems ■ Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems ■ Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Calls Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-38 Complete descriptions of each feature are provided in the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and Feature Description. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 — Console Operations, 555-230-700, and DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Voice Terminal Operations as required for detailed operating procedures (does not include Facility Test Calls, Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back Testing, Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing, Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems, Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Calls, or Troubleshooting ISDN-BRI Problems described in this chapter.) Automatic Circuit Assurance Requires the use of a display-equipped voice terminal (may be nondisplay type if the Voice Message Retrieval feature is provided) or an attendant console. An "ACA activate/deactivate" button (one per system) is required on the voice terminal or attendant console. Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) assists users in identifying possible trunk malfunctions. The system maintains a record of the performance of individual trunks relative to short and long holding time calls. The system automatically initiates a referral call to an attendant console or display-equipped voice terminal when a possible failure is detected. Holding time is the elapsed time from when a trunk is accessed to the time a trunk is released. When ACA is enabled via administration, the system measures the holding time of each call. A short holding time limit and a long holding time limit are preset by the System Manager for each trunk group. The short holding time limit can be from 0 to 160 seconds. The long holding time limit can be from 0 to 10 hours. The measured holding time for each call is compared to the preset limits for the trunk group being used. Measurements are not made on personal CO lines, out-of-service trunks, or trunks undergoing maintenance testing. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-39 Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks Requires the use of a multi-appearance voice terminal or attendant console equipped with a "verify" button. Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks allows a user at a voice terminal or attendant console to make test calls to trunks, voice terminals, and hunt groups (DDC/UCD). These test calls check the status of an apparently busy resource. This provides an easy method to distinguish between a voice terminal or resource that is truly busy and one that only appears busy because of a trouble condition. Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to Attendant Requires the use of an attendant console. Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to Attendant provides the console user with a visual indication of the trunk group status for each trunk group associated with the 12 Trunk Group Select buttons located on the console. Trunk groups with busy indications during nonbusy periods should be checked to ensure that the trunks are busy and not out-of-service. Use the Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks feature to test the suspected faulty trunks. Trunk Identification by Attendant Requires the use of a display-equipped voice terminal or an attendant console equipped with a "trunk id" button. Trunk Identification by Attendant allows a voice terminal or attendant console user to identify a specific trunk being used on a call. This is useful when a user experiences noise or poor transmission on a trunk call. The trunk identification (access code and group number) is displayed when the "trunk id" button is pressed while on a trunk call. Use of this feature is denied if there are more than two trunks on a call. If the call is trunk-to-trunk, the identification displayed is of the last trunk added to the call. Facility Test Calls The Facility Test Calls feature provides a voice terminal user the capability of placing test calls to access specific trunks, touch-tone (DTMF) receivers, time slots, and system tones. The test call can be made by a local voice terminal user by dialing an access code. NOTE: For the ISDN-PRI Test Call feature, see ‘‘Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Call Problems’’ later in this chapter. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-40 NOTE: The following test call descriptions are for voice terminal users: Trunk Test Call The trunk test call accesses specific Tie or CO trunks. DID trunks cannot be accessed. To place a call: 1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for example, 197, see Note), and listen for dial tone. NOTE: The Facility Test Call Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example. For more information on FAC, refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation, 555-230-653. 2. Dial the 6-digit port number "PCSSpp" P = Port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN) C = Carrier number (A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4, E=5) SS = Slot number (01—20) pp = Port number The channels on a DS1 trunk are addressed by using the channel number for the port number. 3. Listen for one of the following tones: ■ Dial Tone or Silence—trunk is connected. Go to Step 4. If you hear a dial tone, it is coming from the far end. If the far end has been disabled, you do not hear dial tone. However, depending on far-end administration, you may still be able to dial digits. All digits dialed after the port number are transmitted using end-to-end DTMF signaling; therefore, if the trunk being tested is a rotary trunk, it is not possible to break dial tone. ■ Reorder Tone—trunk is busy or maintenance busy. ■ Intercept Tone— a trunk or touch-tone (DTMF) receiver has not been accessed. 4. Place a call. Even if you do not hear a dial tone, you may still be able to dial digits, depending on the administration of the far-end switch. All digits dialed after the port number are transmitted using end-to-end DTMF signaling; therefore, if the trunk being tested is a rotary trunk, it will not be possible to break dial tone. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-41 If the call does not go through (that is, no ringing), determine if the trunk circuit pack has been removed. Touch-tone (DTMF) Receiver Test Call The touch-tone (DTMF) receiver call accesses and tests the four touch-tone (DTMF) receivers located on the Tone Detector circuit pack. To place the call: 1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for example, 197, see Note), and listen for dial tone. NOTE: The Feature Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example. 2. Dial the 6-digit port number "PCSSpp": P = Part network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN) C = Carrier number (A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4, E=5) SS = Slot number (01—20) pp = Touch-tone (DTMF) Receiver Port number (01, 02, 05, or 06)) 3. Listen for one of the following tones: ■ Confirmation Tone—touch-tone (DTMF) receiver is connected. Go to Step 4. ■ Reorder Tone—touch-tone (DTMF) receiver is busy. ■ Intercept Tone—a touch-tone (DTMF) receiver or trunk has not been accessed. 4. Dial 1234567890*# and listen for Confirmation tone (test passed) or intercept tone (test failed). The test fails if the touch-tone (DTMF) receiver does not recognize all the touch-tone (DTMF) signals. 5. To test another touch-tone (DTMF) receiver, repeat Steps 2 through 4. 6. To terminate the test call, hang up the station set used for testing. Time Slot Test Call The time slot test call connects the voice terminal user to a specific time slot located on the TDM Buses (A or B) or out-of-service time slots. Specific Time Slots To place the call: 1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for example, 197, see Note), and listen for dial tone. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-42 NOTE: The Feature Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example. 2. Dial port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN), then press # and the 3-digit time slot number "xxx," where: xxx = Time slot number (000 through 255 on Bus A and 256 through 511 on Bus B) 3. Listen for one of the following tones: ■ Confirmation Tone—time slot is idle or maintenance busy ■ Reorder Tone—time slot is busy ■ Dedicated Tone—One of the following tones is heard (see Table 5-2) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Table 5-2. Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-43 TDM Bus Time Slot Numbers TDM Bus A time slot TDM Bus B time slot 000 256 Reorder 001 257 Reorder 002 258 Reorder 003 259 Reorder 004 260 Reorder 005 261 Touch Tone 1 - 697Hz 006 262 Touch Tone 2 - 770 Hz 007 263 Touch Tone 3 - 852Hz 008 264 Touch Tone 4 - 941 Hz 009 265 Touch Tone 5 - 1209 Hz 010 266 Touch Tone 6 - 1336Hz 011 267 Touch Tone 7 - 1447 Hz 012 268 Touch Tone 8 - 1633 Hz 013 269 Dial Tone 014 270 Reorder Tone 015 271 Alert Tone 016 272 Busy Tone 017 273 Ringback Tone 018 274 Special Ringback Tone 019 275 2225 Hz Tone 020 276 Music 021 277 Tone on Hold 022-253 278-509 254 510 Reorder 255 511 Confirmation Tone Heard Confirmation (used for calls) Out-of-Service Time Slots To place the call: 1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for instance, 197, see Note), and listen for dial tone. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-44 NOTE: The Feature Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example. 2. Dial port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN), then dial ** and listen for the following tones: ■ Confirmation Tone—Connection is made. Go to Step 3. ■ Reorder Tone—No time slots are out-of-service. 3. Repeat from Step 1 to alternate between out-of-service time slots on TDM Bus A and B. System Tone Test Call The system tone test call connects the voice terminal user to a specific system tone. To place the call: 1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for instance, 197, see Note), and listen for dial tone. NOTE: The Facility Test Call Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example. 2. Dial port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN), then dial * followed by the two-digit tone identification number listed in Table 5-3. 3. Listen for the tone that was specified. NOTE: For a definition of Call Progress Tones see DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 System Descriptions and Specifications. Table 5-3. System Tone Identification Numbers Number Description 00 Null tone 01 Dial tone 02 Reorder tone 03 Alert tone 04 Busy tone Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Table 5-3. Page 5-45 System Tone Identification Numbers — Continued Number Description 05 Recall dial tone 06 Confirmation tone 07 Internal call waiting tone 08 Ringback tone 09 Special ringback tone 10 Dedicated ringback tone 11 Dedicated special ringback tone 12 Touch tone 1 13 Touch tone 2 14 Touch tone 3 15 Touch tone 4 16 Touch tone 5 17 Touch tone 6 18 Touch tone 7 19 Touch tone 8 20 Chime 21 350 Hz 22 440 Hz 23 480 Hz 24 620 Hz 25 2025 Hz 26 2225 Hz 27 Counter 28 External call waiting 29 Priority call waiting 30 Busy verification 31 Executive override/intrusion tone 32 Incoming call identification Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Table 5-3. Page 5-46 System Tone Identification Numbers — Continued Number Description 33 Dial zero 34 Attendant transfer 35 Test calls 36 Recall on don’t answer 37 Audible ring 38 Camp-on recall 39 Camp-on confirmation 40 Hold recall 41 Hold confirmation 42 Zip tone 43 2804 Hz 44 1004 Hz (-16db) 45 1004 Hz (0 db) 46 404 Hz 47 Transmission test sequence 105 48 Redirect tone 49 Voice signaling tone 50 Digital milliwatt 51 440 Hz + 480 Hz 52 Music 53 Transmission test sequence 100 54 Transmission test sequence 102 55 Laboratory test tone 1 56 Laboratory test tone 2 57 Disable echo supervision dial tone 58 7 seconds of answer tone 59 4 seconds of answer tone 60 Restore music (or silence) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Table 5-3. Page 5-47 System Tone Identification Numbers — Continued Number Description 61 Warning tone 62 Forced music tone 63 Zip tone (first of 2 sent) 64 Incoming call ID (first of 2 sent) 65 Tone on hold 66 CO dial tone 67 Repetitive confirmation tone 68 Conference/bridging tone Continued on next page Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back Testing The TN760B circuit pack can be configured for back-to-back testing (also known as connectivity testing) by making translation and cross-connect changes. This testing configuration allows for the connection of Tie Trunks back-to-back in the same switch to verify the operation of Tie Trunk ports. The tests can be performed in either the E & M or simplex modes. E & M Mode Test Procedure The procedures to perform the Analog Tie Trunk port test in the E & M mode are as follows: 1. At the administration terminal, enter list configuration trunks command to determine which ports are assigned on the Tie Trunk circuit pack. 2. Enter display dialplan command to determine the Trunk Access Code (TAC) format. 3. Enter display port xx command for all ports defined in Step 1. This action displays the trunk groups to which the ports belong (that is, of which the ports are members). NOTE: See the ‘‘Handling Control Circuit Packs’’ section in this chapter for details on how to remove and replace port circuit packs. 4. Insert the circuit pack back into the slot. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-48 5. Enter display trunk xx p command for each trunk group identified in Step 3. This command displays the specified trunk group on the administration terminal screen and prints a hard copy on the printer. Save this data for later use. 6. Remove all members defined by these ports from the trunk group(s) using the ch trunk xx command. 7. Remove the Tie Trunk circuit pack from the carrier slot. 8. Set the dip (option) switches for each of the two ports to be tested on the Tie Trunk circuit pack to "E & M mode" and "unprotected." 9. Enter add trunk n command to add a new (test) trunk group. Then enter the following information: ■ Group Type — tie ■ TAC — (use trunk access code obtained from dial plan) ■ Trunk Type (in/out) — wink/wink ■ Port — assign two of the ports from the tie trunk ■ Mode — E & M ■ Type — specify one port as t1 standard and other port as t1 compatible Examples of the Trunk Group forms are shown in Screen 5-3 and Screen 5-4.. display trunk-group 10 Page 1 of 5 TRUNK GROUP Group Number: Group Name: Direction: MIS Measured? Dial Access? Queue Length: Comm Type: 10 tr 10 two-way n y 0 voice Group Type: tie COR: 1 Outgoing Display? n Busy Threshold: 60 Internal Alert? n Auth Code? n CDR Reports? y TAC: 110 Data Restriction? n Night Service: Incoming Destination: TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type (in/out): wink/wink Outgoing Dial Type: tone Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec): 5 Incoming Dial Type: tone Disconnect Timing(msec): 500 Digits: Digit Treatment: Used for DCS? n ACA Assignment? n Baud Rate: 1200 Incoming Dial Tone? y Answer Supervision Timeout: Screen 5-3. Synchronization: async Duplex: full Maintenance Tests? y Suppress # Outpulsing? n Trunk Group Form (Page 1 of 2) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-49 Page 2 of 5 TRUNK GROUP GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port Name 1: B1901 2: B1902 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: Screen 5-4. Mode Type Answer Delay E & M E & M t1 stan t1 comp Trunk Group Form — E & M Mode (Page 2 of 2) 10. Locate the Tie Trunk port terminal connections at the cross-connect field. See Table 5-4. 11. At the cross-connect field, disconnect outside trunk facilities from the Tie Trunk ports and mark the disconnected wires for later reconnecting the Tie Trunk ports back to normal operation. The D Impact Tool (AT-8762) is required to perform this step. 12. Use jumper wires (DT 24M-Y/BL/R/G and DT 24P-W/BRN) and the D Impact Tool to connect wiring between the two ports assigned in Step 9 at the cross-connect field. For example, if the two ports on the Analog Tie Trunk circuit pack are port 1 and 2, connect the wirings as shown below: Port 1 T1 R1 T11 R11 E1 M1 t1 stan E&M Port 2 T12 R12 T2 R2 M2 E2 t1 comp E&M DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-50 13. Check all wirings to verify good connections between the two test ports. 14. Place a call from one voice terminal to another voice terminal using the Tie Trunk ports assigned. Dial TAC and extension. For example, if TAC of Tie Trunk group is 110 and station number is 5012, then dial 110 5012. If the call cannot be made, either one of these ports could be defective. There are four ports on TN760B (port 1, 2, 3, and 4), try different combinations to determine defective ports. 15. If there is a defective port on the circuit pack, try to switch to an unused port. However, if all ports are normally used, then replace the circuit pack. 16. Disconnect the jumpers between two ports. Then use administration terminal and trunk printouts to restore all trunk group changes to normal values. Table 5-4. Carrier Lead Appearances at 110 Cross-Connect Field 110 Connecting Block Terminals CO Trunk TN747B Tie Trunk TN760B 1 T1 T1 2 R1 R1 3 T11 4 R11 5 E1 6 M1 7 T2 T2 8 R2 R2 9 T12 10 R12 11 E2 12 M2 13 T3 T3 14 R3 R3 15 T13 16 R13 17 E3 18 M3 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Table 5-4. Page 5-51 Carrier Lead Appearances at 110 Cross-Connect Field 110 Connecting Block Terminals CO Trunk TN747B Tie Trunk TN760B 19 T4 T4 20 R4 R4 21 T14 22 R14 23 E4 24 M4 25 T5 26 R5 27 28 29 30 31 T6 32 R6 32 33 34 36 37 T7 38 R7 39 40 41 42 43 T8 44 R8 45 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Table 5-4. Page 5-52 Carrier Lead Appearances at 110 Cross-Connect Field 110 Connecting Block Terminals CO Trunk TN747B Tie Trunk TN760B 46 47 48 49 50 Continued on next page Simplex Mode Test Procedure The procedures to perform the Analog Tie Trunk Port Test in the simplex mode are as follows: 1. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 of the E & M Mode Test Procedure. 2. Set the dip (option) switches for each of the two ports to be tested on the Tie Trunk circuit pack to simplex mode. 3. Enter add trunk n command to add a new (test) trunk group. Then enter the following information: ■ Group Type — tie ■ TAC — (use trunk access code obtained from dial plan) ■ Trunk Type (in/out) — wink/wink ■ Port — assign two of the ports from the tie trunk ■ Mode — simplex ■ Type — type 5 An example of the Trunk Group Form Page 2 is shown in Screen 5-5. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-53 . Page 2 of 5 TRUNK GROUP GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port Name 1: B1901 2: B1902 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: Screen 5-5. Mode Type Answer Delay simplex simplex type 5 type 5 Trunk Group Form — Simplex Mode (Page 2 of 5) 4. Locate the Tie Trunk port terminal connections at the cross-connect field. See Table 5-4. 5. At the cross-connect field, disconnect outside trunk facilities from the Analog Tie Trunk ports and mark the disconnected wires for later when the Tie Trunk ports are placed back into normal operation. The D Impact Tool (AT-8762) is required to perform this step. 6. Use jumper wires (DT 24M-Y/BL/R/G) and the D Impact Tool to connect wiring between the two ports assigned in Step 4 at the cross-connect field. For example, if the two ports on the Analog Tie Trunk circuit pack are ports 1 and 2, connect the wirings as shown below: Port 1 T1 R1 T11 R11 type 5 simplex Port 2 T12 R12 T2 R2 type 5 simplex 7. Repeat Steps 13 through 16 of the E & M Mode Test Procedure. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-54 Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing The Terminating Trunk Transmission (TTT) (noninteractive) feature provides for extension number access to three tone sequences that can be used for trunk transmission testing from the far end of the trunks. The three test types should have extension numbers assigned on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form. Test Type 100:_____ Test Type 102:_____ Test Type 105:_____ Test Type 100 provides: 1. 5.5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB 2. Quiet until disconnect; disconnect is forced after one minute Test Type 102 provides: 1. 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB 2. 1 second of quiet 3. This cycle is repeated until disconnect; disconnect is forced after 24 hours. Test Type 105 provides: 1. nine seconds of 1004 Hz at -16dB 2. one second of quiet 3. nine seconds of 404 Hz at -16dB 4. one second of quiet 5. nine seconds of 2804 Hz at -16dB 6. 30 seconds of quiet 7. one half second of Test Progress Tone (2225 Hz) 8. approximately five seconds of quiet 9. forced disconnect Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems The following flowchart, Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8, defines a layered approach when troubleshooting ISDN-PRI problems. Since a problem at a lower layer affects upper layers, layers are investigated from low to high. In the flowchart, the DS1 facility is layer 1, the TN765 Processor Interface is layer 2, and the ISDN trunks are layer 3. Transient problems are diagnosed on Page 2 of the flowchart, Figure 5-8. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-55 START ARE THERE ALARMS OR DETERMINE PRESENT YES STATUS OF DS-1 FACILITY ERRORS AGAINST VIA DS1-BD MO SECTION. DS1-BD FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURES NO IF MULITPLE ALARMS EXIST, INVESTIGATE IN FOLLOWING ARE THERE ORDER: ALARMS OR PI-BD YES ERRORS AGAINST PI-BD, PI-PT, PI-SCI, PI-PT PI-SCI PI-LINK, OR PI-LINK ISDN-LINK ISDN-LINK FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR APPROPRIATE MO NO ARE THERE ALARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST YES FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-TRK ISDN-TRK NO END TO PAGE A 2 Figure 5-7. Processing of ISDN-PRI Problems (Page 1 of 2) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-56 COMPARE INDICATED FROM PAGE FACILITY TO RECORD A OF PREVIOUS PROBLEMS PERFORM AN IN-DEPTH 1 ANALYSIS OF T1 FACILITY INCLUDING: TRANSMISSION FACILITY, ARE TRANSIENT EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT ARE BIT THERE ERRORS OCCURRING NO PROBLEMS MAKING MORE FREQUENTLY ISDN-PRI THAN PREVIOUS CALLS HISTORY END (DACS, CSUs, ETC.,) AND ANY OTHER YES NOISE-PRODUCING EQUIPMENT. REFER TO AT&T PRACTICE 855-351-101 ISSUE 8, YES NO JANUARY 1987. THIS DESCRIBES T1 CABLING TO CSUs, ETC, IN DETAIL ARE THERE BIT ERRORS OVER YES RECORD INDICATED THE TI FACILITY? FACILITY AND, IF THIS USE LIST CONTINUES TO OCCUR, MEASUREMENTS CONTACT FACILITY OR COMMAND END EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT PROVIDER. THEN ESCALATE NO HAS A SEE DS1-BD MO FOR SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE BEEN UNSTABLE? REPAIR PROCEDURES IF YES SYNC PROBLEM IS DUE TO SLIPS. OTHERWISE, SYSTEM SWITCHING FOLLOW REPAIR AWAY FROM IT? PROCEDURES FOR SEE SYNC MO SYNC MO NO IF PROBLEMS STILL EXIST, THEN ESCALATE Figure 5-8. Processing of ISDN-PRI Problems (Page 2 of 2) Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems The following flowchart, Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10, defines a layered approach when troubleshooting PRI endpoint problems. Since a problem at a lower layer affects upper layers, layers are investigated from low to high. In the flowchart, the DS1 facility is layer 1, the TN765 Processor Interface is layer 2, and the ISDN trunks are layer 3. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-57 The troubleshooting procedure described here diagnoses faults between the switch and the line-side PRI terminal adapter/ISDN-PRI endpoint equipment. Problems encountered on the network-side of a wideband connection or problems with end-to-end equipment compatibility are out of the scope of this section. START Are there alarms or errors against DS1-BD? YES FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE IN THE DS1-BD MO SECTION NO Are there alarms or errors against PI-BD, PI-PT, PI-SCI, PI-LINK, ISDN-SGR, or ISDNLNK? YES IF MULTIPLE ALARMS EXIST, INVESTIGATE IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER: PI-BD, PI-PT, PI-SCI, PI-LINK, ISDN-LNK, AND ISDN-SGR. FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR APPROPRIATE MO. NO YES Are there alarms or errors against PE-BCHL? FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE IN THE PE-BCHL MO SECTION NO Does the PRI Terminal Adapter or the ISDN endpoint equipment indicate alarms or errors? Check the endpoint equipment for status - not the SAT YES FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE RECOMMENDED BY THE PRI TERMINAL ADAPTER VENDOR OR ISDN ENDPOINT EQUIPMENT VENDOR NO Is the administration between the endpoint equipment and the switch consistent? (for example, port boundary, width, etc.) NO FIX ADMINISTRATION MISMATCH YES TO PAGE 2 Figure 5-9. A Processing of PRI Endpoint Problems (Page 1 of 2) END Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-58 FROM PAGE 1 TRANSIENT FAILURES Are there bit errors over the DS1 interface between the switch and the PRI Terminal Adapter or the ISDN endpoint equipment. Use ‘‘list measurement’’ command. YES A Does every call fail or are the failings transient? Perform an in-depth analysis of DS1 interface between the switch and the endpoint equipment, including the premise distribution wiring, endpoint equipment, and any other noiseproducing equipment. ALWAYS FAIL CHECK THE HEALTH OF THE APPLICATION EQUIPMENT (FOR EXAMPLE, VIDEO CODEC) AND THE HEALTH OF THE DEFINITY NETWORK IF THE PROBLEM STILL EXISTS, THEN ESCALATE NO END Has a synchronization source been unstable? System switching away from it? Check for alarms and errors against SYNC. YES FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR SYNC MO NO IF PROBLEM STILL EXISTS, THEN ESCALATE Figure 5-10. Processing of PRI Endpoint Problems (Page 2 of 2) Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Call Problems An ISDN-PRI test call is a call of a diagnostic nature that is placed across an ISDN-PRI user-network interface to a previously designated number. An ISDN-PRI test call is also a maintenance procedure concerned with the identification and verification ISDN-PRI user-network interface problems. The ISDN-PRI test call can access ISDN-PRI trunks only. Placing an Outgoing ISDN-PRI Test Call NOTE: An ISDN-PRI test call can be placed only if the circuit translates to an ISDN-PRI trunk. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-59 An ISDN-PRI test call can be originated via either the synchronous or the asynchronous method. Each method is described below. Synchronous Method One command is used in this method to start, stop and query an ISDN-PRI test call. In the synchronous method, an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call may be part of a system technician-demanded long test sequence to test a circuit pack, port, or trunk. Therefore, the command line entry can be any of the following: test trunk / long [repeat #] test port PCSSpp long [repeat #] test board PCSS long [repeat #] The "long" qualifier must be entered in the above commands in order for the ISDN test call to run. The repeat number (#) can be any number from 1 through 99 (default = 1). The following information is displayed in response to the above commands: ■ Port: The port address (PCSSpp) is the port network number, carrier designation, slot, and circuit of the maintenance object under test. ■ Maintenance Name: The type of maintenance object tested. ■ Test Number: The actual test that was run. ■ Test Results: Indicates whether the test passes, fails, or aborts. ■ Error Code: Additional information about the results of the test. (See the ISDN Trunk Maintenance documentation for details.) Asynchronous Method NOTE: The asynchronous method requires a Maintenance/Test circuit pack to be physically present in the system. In this method, four commands are used to start, stop, query, and list an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call. These commands are as follows: clear isdn-testcall / (stop) list isdn-testcall (list) status isdn-testcall / (query) test isdn-testcall / [minutes] (start) NOTE: Before placing an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call, verify that the FAC on the System Features Form has been administered as well as the Far End Test Line No and TestCall Bearer Capability Class (BCC) on the Trunk Group Administration Form. Furthermore, if the ISDN-PRI trunk is of the "cbc" (call Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Page 5-60 by call) service type, then the Testcall Service field on Trunk Group Administration Form must have been administered also. To initiate an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call in the asynchronous method, issue the following command: test isdn-testcall / [minutes] This command enables you to specify a specific the trunk on which to originate the ISDN-PRI test call. NOTE: The optional qualifier can also be used that specifies in minutes the duration of the test call. If no duration is specified, the default duration is used which is 8.4 or 9.6 seconds. The qualifier "minutes" accepts the numeric values one through 120 (that is, two hours = 120 minutes). Screen 5-6 shows a typical response to the test isdn-testcall command: test isdn-testcall Port Maintenance Name 1B1501 ISDN-TRK Screen 5-6. Test Number 258 Test Result Error Code PASS Typical Response to Test ISDN-Testcall Command The meaning of the information displayed in response to the above command is described in the following list. ■ Port: The port address (PCSSpp) is the port network number, carrier designation, slot, and circuit of the maintenance object under test. ■ Maintenance Name: The type of maintenance object tested. ■ Test Number: The actual test that was run. ■ Test Results: Indicates whether the test passes, fails, or aborts. ■ Error Code: Additional information about the results of the test. (See the ISDN Trunk Maintenance documentation for details.) The functions of the clear, list, and status commands associated with the ISDN Testcall are summarized in the following list. For more detailed information, refer to the appropriate sections as directed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures System Features Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-61 ■ Clear isdn-testcall / enables you to cancel an in-progress ISDN-PRI test call and allow another test call to start. For details on this command, refer to the clear isdn-testcall command description in the "Clear Commands" section of Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. ■ List isdn-testcall / enables you to list all the ISDN-PRI trunks in use for an ISDN-PRI test call in the system. For details on this command, refer to the list isdn-testcall command description in the "List Commands" section of Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. ■ Status isdn-testcall / [minutes] enables you to check on the progress of an outgoing test call. When an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call completes in a specific port network, another ISDN-PRI trunk from the same port network is available for testing (regardless of whether the status information has been displayed). For details on this command, refer to the status isdn-testcall command description in the "Status Commands" section of Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. Troubleshooting the Outgoing ISDN-Testcall Command If the TestCall BCC field appears on the Trunk Group Administration Form, make sure the TestCall BCC field indicates the correct BCC for the service provisioned on the ISDN-PRI trunk. The TestCall BCC values are defined as follows: ■ 0—Voice ■ 1—Digital Communications Protocol Mode 1 ■ 2—Mode 2 Asynchronous ■ 3—Mode 3 Circuit ■ 4—Digital Communications Protocol Mode 0 (which is usually the default). NOTE: If the ISDN-PRI trunk is of type "cbc," make sure the TestCall Service field on the Trunk Group Administration Form indicates the correct service so that a network facility message can be sent across the ISDN-PRI network If the outgoing ISDN-PRI test call keeps aborting, please make sure that the far-end device can handle DCP Mode 0 or DCP Mode 1. NOTE: Before attempting to make an ISDN-PRI test call to the public network (that is, the network is the far-end), make sure that test call service is provisioned by the network. The user must subscribe to Test Type 108 service and have the correct far-end test call number administered on the trunk group form for the call to be allowed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-62 Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack is a test tool that allows easy access to the backplane pins that provide various voltages to control and port slots. Probes from a voltmeter can be plugged into the access point for the desired voltage and a ground access point to measure the voltage. This circuit pack itself has instructions for use printed on the side as well as a listing of the voltage tolerance range for each voltage on the front panel. The voltages and tolerances are as follows: ringing voltage: 75 -> 115 VAC +12 VDC: 11.4 -> 12.6 VDC +5 VDC: 4.95 -> 5.35 VDC -5 VDC: -4.95 -> -5.35 VDC -48 VDC: -43 -> -53 VDC neon message waiting voltage: -80 VDC -> -165 VDC The type of cabinet determines where the circuit is placed to measure the voltages. For single-carrier cabinets, all voltages except +12 VDC and +5 VDC can be measured from any port slot. However, the neon message waiting voltage requires that the system have a TN752 or TN755 Power Unit circuit pack. The Tape Drive slot is used to measure +12 VDC. NOTE: All control circuit packs should be removed from the backplane before this measurement is made. The +5 VDC measurement must be made in two separate cabinet locations since the power unit has two independent +5 VDC outputs [+5 VDC and +5(B) VDC]. Each output supplies a different section of the cabinet with power. For the control cabinet, make one measurement in the processor slot and another in any port slot. For an EPN control cabinet, make one measurement in any port slot from 1 to 4 and another in any port slot from 5 to 16. For a port cabinet, make 1 measurement in any port slot from 1 to 6 and another in any port slot from 7 to 18. Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Before troubleshooting any problems associated with the DEFINITY MMCH, always be sure that the endpoint is operating correctly (audio, video, and data) by making point-to-point test calls. If possible, make the test calls over the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-63 network to test the connectivity and routing of network calls from the endpoint. This eliminates problems such as disconnected audio or video cables and network troubles. 64 Kbps Calls Terminate but Far End Receives 56 Kbps Indication Description Some 2x64 Kbps conferences on the DEFINITY MMCH do not establish because of framing, audio, or video problems. For calls that are routed in the network through a Lucent Technologies/LEC interface, the originating equipment may launch a 64 Kbps call attempt, and the far end receives either a 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps indication. If the far end receives a 64 Kbps indication, the call may have used 56 Kbps facilities. If so, the call may exhibit any of the following conditions: ■ No handshaking in one direction or both (call disconnects after timeouts) ■ Call connects, but audio or video is corrupted (audio noise or no video) ■ Call succeeds without disruption (this is the least likely since one endpoint must be aware that the call is really 56 Kbps to connect) If any of the above conditions occur, then 64 Kbps calls from the site are blocked. Solution Administer the conference for connection at 56 Kbps. Calls Terminate with No Audio Description To support endpoints that do not support Multipoint Command Conference (MCC), the DEFINITY MMCH changes its capability set and initiates a capability set exchange with the endpoint when the Selected Communications Mode (SCM) changes. If the endpoint does not follow the SCM audio mode, the MCU may include the endpoint as a secondary (audio only) endpoint. If the endpoint sends an unknown or unsupported audio mode, then the TN788B decoder port mutes the endpoint from the conference. The user may hear the conference but may not be heard by other parties in the conference. Solution 1. Use the Status Conference x form and check the Audio Mode field for the current operating mode of the conference. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-64 2. Another indication of the audio modes is in the “Incoming Mode Commands from Endpoint and Outgoing Commands from MMI” on page 3 of the Status Conference x Endpoint y form. Check the Audio fields under the Mode Commands/Communication Modes section of the form. Some Parties Cannot Be Heard by Others (Audio Subsetting) Description Problems where varying subsets of the conference hear different things may have problems with the various summing resources/groups that are in use. Traditionally theses faults are caused by the SPE not cleaning up the connections properly. Isolation and diagnosis should focus on the VC resources in use by that conference. Solution 1. Use the status conference command to list the VC resources in use by this conference. Try a hot replacement of any VC boards in use, which refreshes the VC translations and move all of the audio connections to different VC ports. 2. If the problem still exists, try dropping the conference and then bringing the conference back up again. Not only does this refresh VC translations, but uses different timeslots as well. 3. If the problem still exists, suspect a hardware problem. If practical, wait for the DEFINITY MMCH to be idle (no active conferences), and then check the circuit packs for active (yellow) LEDs. If any of these are unexpected, such as on a VC board, try replacing the board and then bringing the conference up again. Calls Terminate with No Video Description Generally, loss of video can be divided into 2 types. The first occurs when the DEFINITY MMCH switches to the endpoint, but nobody sees them. The receivers see either “black” video or a frozen image of the previous speaker depending on the codec of the manufacturer. The type occurs when the DEFINITY MMCH does not switch to an endpoint. Solution In the first type described above, wiring problems, power to the camera, or video encoder circuit pack problems in the codec are typical causes. In the second type, no video from an endpoint typically occurs because it is not a valid video source. This can be checked by looking at page 1 of the Status DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-65 Conference x Endpoint y Vid form under the Capability section. In this section, a “y” or “c” suggests that the endpoint has video. An “e” means ept has not declared any video capability in cap set, “n” is audio only, and “blank” means audio add-on. Also check page 1 of the Status Conference x Endpoint y Vs form for indication of the video state for the endpoint values. Calls Terminate Correctly but Are Unstable Description A number of conditions will lead to some or all endpoints having stability problems during the course of a conference. A lack of stability from an endpoint is noticeable by a lack of a video switching while the party is the only talker or excessive disconnects from that endpoint. Synchronization Generally, the most common problem is a mismatch in synchronization sources between the endpoint and the DEFINITY MMCH. This typically causes low-level (Px64) handshake problems that can trigger the endpoint/MMCH to disconnect the call. The MCCH’s timers are set to sufficiently high values so that, normally, the endpoint will timeout and disconnect first. If installed in a customer network, it is a good idea to perform an audit of the path synchronization is being supplied. If there are different clock sources between endpoints and the DEFINITY MMCH, some problems are sure to occur. The severity of these problems can range from a handshake failure every few seconds to one per day. Depending on the type of endpoint, this can cause the endpoint to disconnect or just freeze video until the main problem is resolved. Specifically, PictureTel System 4000 endpoints seem to be the most sensitive to instability. The Lucent Technologies Vistium also disconnects fairly infrequently. Last, the CLI Rembrandt II VP freezes video and waits for framing to be recovered. Network Configuration Concerns with Synchronization When auditing a network for synchronization, avoid unnecessary hops. Thus, a switch providing star-configuration synchronization is preferred over a daisy-chain configuration. Additionally, if there are DEFINITY PBXs that have EPNs, synchronization should be provided to sub nodes from the same port network through which the PBX receives its synchronization. Passing synchronization through the PBX Expansion Interface adds an unnecessary hop to the path and creates another potential point of failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-66 Expansion Interface Duplication If a customer’s network uses PBX EPNs with duplicated Expansion Interfaces, scheduled switching of the Expansion Interface links should be disabled on the PBX via change system-parameters maintenance. When scheduled maintenance runs and switches the links, there is a brief corruption of the data path. If endpoints have active calls when the switch occurs, this corruption of the data path causes Px64 handshake problems, which lead to the endpoints losing video source status, and sometimes disconnecting as described above. Disabling the EI switching is in the customer’s best interest to prevent the disruption of the Px64 data stream. The customer will get the same level of alarm indications and maintenance on the EI links, regardless of the status of scheduled switching. PRI D-Channel Backup A somewhat unlikely source of call stability problems occur where the translations for PRI D-channel Backup between two non-MCU switches were incorrect. As an example, on switch A, DS1 1A10 was designated as the primary source, and on switch B, the corresponding DS1 was designated as the secondary source. When scheduled maintenance was run on the switch that had an active standby D-channel, an audit disconnected some calls using the link. The problem was corrected when the the D-channel primary/secondary assignments matched. Processor Duplication on the PBX Do not enable the PI link switch on scheduled maintenance. This can cause link stability problems on the Accunet Bandwidth Controller (ABC). Voice-Activated Switching Problems Voice-activated switching on the DEFINITY MMCH does not follow the loudest talker. The MMCH queues all speaking parties and selects a new video broadcaster (the second-oldest speaking party) when the oldest speaking party has stopped talking. The new broadcaster will see the last speaker as its video. The system can also “learn” about the noise coming from an endpoint to help prevent false switches, adapting both to noise level and repetitive sounds such as a fan. This adaptation occurs over approximately 10 seconds. No Switching, Full Motion Video If a room is excessively noisy, the DEFINITY MMCH may receive sufficient audio signal to conclude that there is a speaker present. Use the Status Conference x form to determine if the MMCH thinks an endpoint is talking. The MMCH sets the Ts field to t for each endpoint if there is voice energy detected. This endpoint may have to mute when nobody at the site is speaking to allow the conference to proceed normally. Remind the customer that it may be necessary to mute if a side conversation is going on in the background, just as one would do in an DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-67 audio conference. If the system does not switch broadcasters even after the current broadcaster has muted, check the conference administration using the display conference X command to ensure that the conference is in voice-activated mode. Also verify that parties who were speaking are valid video sources as described in the “Calls Terminate with No Video” section above. The See-Me feature (MCV) can also cause VAS to “lock-up.” An endpoint can activate MCV to force their site to become the broadcaster. If they do not disable the feature when finished, the system remains in this mode indefinitely. Beginning with Release 3.0, the status conference X command shows that MCV is in effect by displaying av in the Video Status (Vs) column. Page 3 of the Status Conference X Endpoint Y form also has a Broadcaster field that indicates MCV is in effect with (SEE-ME) as the broadcaster. The same scenario can occur in a CHAIR or UCC-controlled conference with a designated broadcaster. In this situation the CHAIR/UCC has not released the designated broadcaster and returned to VAS mode. If there is a UCC-designated broadcaster, status conference X indicates a Video Status of u. Also, for UCC rollcall the return video may appear to be stuck. Check the Video Status for an “R,” indicating rollcall. If none of the examples above appears to be the cause, and if the room was quiet, all speakers are valid video sources, the conference is voice-activated, and the speaker can be heard, then escalate the problem. Video Never Switches to a Particular Party Description Verify that the endpoint is a valid video source as described in the “Calls Terminate with No Video” section above. If it is, then the audio from the endpoint may not have sufficient voice signal for the hardware to determine the parties at the endpoint are speaking. Check the Talk field on page three of the Status Conference X Endpoint Y form to see if the talking bit is y. Next, check the audio by standing adjacent to the microphone and speaking at a normal level. Solution If the audio is not muffled: 1. Use the status conference command to determine which port on the TN788B (VC board) is connected to this endpoint. 2. Check the VC (TN788B) board using the test board xxyy long command. 3. Drop the call. 4. Find another available port, then: a. Busyout the port to which the endpoint was connected. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-68 b. Make another call to the same conference. If the problem corrects itself, then the previous port may be bad. If there are other VC boards with sufficient available ports to replace calls on the current VC, then pull the board that has the bad endpoint on it (the status conference command displays the encoder port associated with the call). The system will automatically reestablish the VC connections without dropping the call. If this fixes the problem, then replace the board, as it has at least one bad port. Reseating the board may temporarily fix the problem due to the hard reset done to the board. Audio Echo Echo in conference calls, particularly those with large delay characteristics, is totally disruptive. When Voice Activated Switching is taken into account, the effects are disastrous. Various arrangements of the microphone(s) and room speaker(s) may be needed. For some Lucent Technologies Vistium endpoints, if an external speaker is attached or was attached when the system was last rebooted, this endpoint will cause audio echo throughout the conference. First, isolate the offending endpoint by asking each endpoint to mute, one at a time, until the echo disappears. If the input from an endpoint is located too close to the speakers of an endpoint, then acoustic echo is created. The microphone must be moved away from the speakers. Normally, if any microphone in the room is moved relative to the speakers, that site will cause echo until the echo canceller in the codec retrains itself, some will require a manual reset. If a PictureTel keypad is configured with external microphones connected to the keypad, then the internal microphone and external microphone(s) “sing” to each other if the “ext mic” bat switch is set to “int mic” on the back of the keypad. In this configuration, VAS locked on that site, and the acoustic “singing” was inaudible. Rate Adaptation Because of a lack of a clear explanation in standards, sometimes endpoints do not work well with each other and the DEFINITY MMCH. The MMCH will only allow a conference to downgrade from 64kbps to 56 kbps operation on conferences that have the Rate Adaptation flag set to y. When a downgrade does occur, information on the Status Conference form indicates the success or failure of the 64kbps-endpoints that are participants to properly rate adapt to 56kbps. As a general indication that the conference has rate adapted, the Conference Transfer Rate and Effective Transfer Rate fields show initial and current transfer rates, respectively. For each 64-kbps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-69 endpoint the column that indicates Rate Adapt shows an n if the endpoint did not follow the procedures as specified by the H.221. If an endpoint shows y, it did successfully rate adapt. If an endpoint shows c, it joined the conference at 56kbps. Once the conference rate adapts, the endpoints that do not properly follow suit, will become audio-only endpoints. A conference will not rate adapt from 56 kbps back to 64 kbps until all endpoints disconnect from the conference and it idles. The PictureTel 1000 Release 1.1C, PictureTel 6.01 software, and the Vistium 2.0 software successfully rate adapt with the MCU. External rate adaptation techniques used by VTEL and CLI are known to cause problems with the endpoint when used with this feature. Endpoint or I-MUX in Loopback Mode Some endpoints have a loopback enable feature. This makes DEFINITY MMCH data loopback at the MMCH when a connection is in progress. The loopback can be enabled prior to or during a connection. The MMCH does not detect the loop and continues to VAS. In most scenarios, the switch occurs, but within a few seconds, the broadcaster’s return video becomes its own image. Once the broadcaster stops speaking, the system “false” switches to an apparently random port that was not speaking. Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Using the DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (apparatus code 700A, comcode 107988867), a technician can test the DS1 span between the system and the network interface point. The loopback jack is required when DC power appears at the interface to the ICSU. The loopback jack isolates the ICSU from the DC power and properly loops the DC span power. NOTE: The loopback jack operates with any vintage of TN767E (or later) or TN464F (or later) DS1 circuit packs and with G3V3 EDI release 3 (or later) software. The loopback jack operates with the 120A2 (or later) Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) only; not the 31xx series of Channel Service Units or other external CSUs or earlier ICSUs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Issue 1 August 1997 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Page 5-70 Loopback Jack Installation Configurations Using a Smart Jack The preferred location of the loopback jack is at the interface to the Smart Jack. This provides maximum coverage of CPE wiring when remote tests are run using the loopback jack. If the Smart Jack is not accessible, install the loopback jack at the extended demarcation point. 1. If there is no extended demarcation point, install the loopback jack directly at the network interface point as shown in Figure 5-11. 2. If there is an extended demarcation point and the Smart Jack is not accessible, install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 5-12. 3. If there is an extended demarcation point, but the Smart Jack is accessible, install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 5-13. Configurations Without a Smart Jack 1. Install the loopback jack at the point where the cabling from the ICSU plugs into the “dumb” block. If there is more than one “dumb” block, choose the one that is closest to the Interface Termination feed or the fiber MUX. This provides maximum coverage for loopback jack tests. Refer to Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15. Installation 1. To install the loopback jack, simply disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector (typically an H600-383 cable) at the appropriate interface point and connect the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span. See Figure 5-11 through Figure 5-15. 2. Plug the H600-383 cable from the ICSU into the female connector on the loopback jack. 3. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point. NOTE: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. This is not a test tool and should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span. Administration 1. At the management terminal, enter change ds1 . The “location” is the DS1 interface circuit pack for which the loopback jack was installed. 2. Be sure the “near-end CSU type” is set to integrated. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-71 3. On page 2 of the form, change the supply CPE loopback jack power field to y. NOTE: Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is present on the facility. This allows a technician to determine that the facility is available for remote testing. 4. Enter save translation to save the new information. DS1 Span Test This test should only be performed after the DS1 circuit pack and the 120A2 (or later) ICSU have been successfully tested using appropriate maintenance procedures. The DS1 span test consists of 2 sequential parts. Each part provides a result indicating if there is a problem in the CPE wiring. CPE wiring may be considered problem-free only if the results of both parts are successful. The first part of the span test powers-up the loopback jack and attempts to send a simple code from the DS1 board, through the wiring and loopback jack, and back to the DS1 board. Maintenance software waits about 10 seconds for the loopback jack to loop, sends the indication of the test results to the management terminal, and proceeds to the second part of the test. The second part of the test sends the standard DS1 3-in-24 stress testing pattern from the DS1 board, through the loopback jack, and back to a bit error detector and counter on the DS1 board. The bit error rate counter may be examined at will via the management terminal, and provides the results of the second part of the test. The test remains in this state until it is terminated so that the CPE wiring may be bit error rate tested for as long as desired. 1. Busy out the DS1 circuit pack by entering busyout board UUCCSS (where UUCCSS is the cabinet, carrier, and slot number of the DS1 board). 2. At the management terminal, enter change ds1 and verify the near-end csu type is set to integrated. 3. Change to page 2 of the DS1 administration form and confirm that the TX LBO field is 0dB. If not, record the current value and change it to 0dB for testing. Press Enter to implement the changes or press Cancel to change nothing. 4. Enter test ds1-loop cpe-loopback-jack. This turns on simplex power to the loopback jack and waits about 20 seconds for any active DS1 facility alarms to clear. A “PASS” or “FAIL” displays on the terminal. This is the first of the 2 results. A “FAIL” indicates a fault is present in the wiring between the ICSU and the loopback jack. The loopback jack may also be faulty. A “PASS” only indicates that the loopback jack looped successfully, not that the test data contains no errors. If a “PASS” is obtained, continue with the following steps. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Page 5-72 NOTE: The loss of signal (LOS) alarm (demand test #138) is not processed during this test while the 3-in-24 pattern is active. 5. Enter clear meas ds1 loop to clear the bit error count. 6. Enter clear meas ds1 log to clear the performance measurement counts. 7. Enter clear meas ds1 esf to clear the ESF error count. 8. Enter list meas ds1 sum to display the bit error count. Refer to Table 5-5 for troubleshooting information. Table 5-5. DS1 Span Troubleshooting Displayed Field Function Indication Test: cpeloopback-jack Pattern 3-in-24 The loopback jack test is active. Synchronized Y or N If “y” displays, the DS1 circuit pack has synchronized to the looped 3-in-24 pattern and is accumulating a count of the bit errors detected in the pattern until the test has ended. If “n” displays, retry the test 5 times by ending the test per Step 11 and re-starting the test per Step 4. If the circuit pack never synchronizes, substantial bit errors in the 3-in-24 pattern are likely. This could be intermittent connections or a broken wire in a receive or transmit pair in the CPE wiring. Bit Error Count Cumulative count of detected errors If there are no wiring problems, the counter remains at 0. A count that pegs at 65535 or continues to increment by several hundred to several thousand on each list meas command execution indicates intermittent or corroded connections, severe crosstalk, or impedance imbalances between the two conductors of the receive pair or the transmit pair. Wiring may need replacement. Note that “ESF error events” counter and the ESF performance counter summaries (“errored seconds”, “bursty errored seconds”, and so forth) will also increment. These counters are not used with the loopback jack tests. However, they will increment if errors are occurring. Counters should be cleared following the test. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-73 9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 as desired to observe bit error rate characteristics. Also, wait 1 to 10 minutes between Steps 5 through 7. One minute without errors translates to better than a 1 in 10 to the eighth error rate. Ten minutes without errors translates to better than a 1 in 10 to the ninth error rate. 10. If the test runs for 1 minute with an error count of 0, confirm that the 3-in-24 pattern error detector is operating properly by entering test ds1-loop inject-single-bit-error. This causes the 3-in-24 pattern generator on the DS1 circuit pack to inject a single-bit error into the transmit pattern. A subsequent list meas ds1 summary command displays the bit error count. If a count greater than 1 is displayed, replace the ICSU and retest. If the problem continues, replace the DS1 circuit pack. 11. Terminate the test by entering test ds1-loop end cpe-loopback-jack-test. Wait about 30 seconds for the DS1 to re-frame on the incoming signal and clear DS1 facility alarms. Loopback termination fails under the following conditions: a. The span is still looped somewhere. This could be at the loopback jack, at the ICSU, or somewhere in the network. This state is indicated by a fail code of 1313. If the red LED on the loopback jack is on, replace the ICSU. Re-run the test and verify that the loopback test terminates properly. If not, replace the DS1 circuit pack and repeat the test. b. The DS1 cannot frame on the incoming span’s signal after the loopback jack is powered down. This means that there is something wrong with the receive signal into the loopback jack from the “dumb” block or the Smart Jack. If the service provider successfully looped and tested the span, up to the Smart Jack, this condition isolates the problem to the wiring between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack. Refer to “Loopback Jack Fault Isolation Procedures” for information on how to proceed in this case. The test cannot be successfully terminated until a good signal is received. To properly terminate the test before a good receive signal is available, enter reset board . 12. Restore the “TX LBO” field to the original value recorded in Step 2. 13. Release the DS1 circuit pack using the release board UUCCSSpp command. 14. Leave the loopback jack connected to the DS1 span. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-74 Loopback Jack Fault Isolation Procedures This section describes the possible DS1 configurations in which the loopback jack may be used. These configurations are: when the DS1 provider includes a Smart Jack, when no Smart Jack is provided at all, and when sites use fiber multiplexers. These configurations are separated into “Configurations Using a Smart Jack” and “Configurations Without a Smart Jack.” Configurations Using a Smart Jack The addition of the loopback jack and the presence of a Smart Jack divides the DS1 span into 3 separate sections for fault isolation. These sections are shown in Figure 5-11 through Figure 5-13 for the different span configurations. They are: Section 1: Between the 120A2 (or later) ICSU and the loopback jack. Section 2: Between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack (network interface point). Section 3: From the Smart Jack to the CO. It is necessary to contact the DS1 provider to run this test. A problem can exist in 1 or more of the 3 sections. The field technician is responsible for finding and correcting problems in the first 2 sections. The DS1 service provider is responsible for finding and correcting problems in the third section. Testing is divided into 3 steps. ■ Test customer premises wiring (section 1 in the following 3 figures) from the ICSU to the loopback jack as described in “DS1 Span Test.” ■ Test the CO-to-network interface wiring (section 3 in Figure 5-11) using the Smart Jack loopback (CO responsibility). Coordinate this test with the DS1 provider. ■ Test the short length of customer premises wiring (section 2 in the following 3 figures) between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack. This can be done using a loopback that “overlaps” section 2 of the cable. Any of the following loopbacks can do this: a. The local ICSUs line loopback, which is typically activated, tested, and then deactivated by the DS1 service provider at the CO end. b. The local DS1 interface’s payload loopback, activated and tested by the DS1 service provider at the CO end. c. The far-end ICSU’s line loopback. This test is activated at the management terminal by entering test ds1-loop far-csu-loopback-test-begin. The test is terminated by entering test ds1-loop end-loopback/span-test. Bit error counts are examined as described in “DS1 Span Test.” This test method is the least preferable because it covers wiring that is not in the local portion of the span. This test only isolates problems to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-75 section 2 wiring if there are no problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end ICSU. Coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider. If any of the above tests (a, b, or c) fail, a problem is indicated in section 2 as long as the tests for section 1 and section 3 pass. Since section 2 includes the network interface point, it is necessary to work with the service provider to isolate the fault to the loopback jack cable, the “dumb” block, or the Smart Jack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-76 Figure Notes: 1. Span Section 1 2. Span Section 2 3. Span Section 3 4. 120A2 (or later) Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) 5. RJ-48 to Network Interface (Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m) 6. Loopback Jack 7. Network Interface Smart Jack 8. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 9. Central Office Figure 5-11. Network Interface at Smart Jack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-77 Figure Notes: 1. Span Section 1 6. Loopback Jack 2. Span Section 2 7. “Dumb” Block (Extended Demarcation) 3. Span Section 3 8. Network Interface Smart Jack 4. 120A2 (or later) Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) 9. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 5. RJ-48 to Network Interface (Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m) Figure 5-12. 10. Central Office Network Interface at Extended Demarcation Point (Smart Jack Inaccessible) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-78 Figure Notes: 1. Span Section 1 6. “Dumb” Block (Extended Demarcation) 2. Span Section 2 7. Loopback Jack 3. Span Section 3 8. Network Interface Smart Jack 4. 120A2 (or later) Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) 9. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 10. Central Office 5. RJ-48 to Network Interface (Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m) Figure 5-13. 11. “Dumb” Block to Smart Jack RJ-48 Network Interface at Extended Demarcation Point (Smart Jack Accessible) Configurations Without a Smart Jack When the loopback jack is added to a span that does not contain a Smart Jack, the span is divided into 2 sections. See Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15. 1. ICSU to the loopback jack. 2. Loopback jack to the Central Office (CO). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-79 Figure Notes: 1. Span Section 1 5. Loopback Jack 2. Span Section 2 6. “Dumb” Block (Demarcation Point) 3. 120A2 (or later) Integrated 7. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX Channel Service Unit (ICSU) 8. Central Office 4. RJ-48 to Network Interface (Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m) Figure 5-14. Network Interface at “Dumb” Block DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-80 Figure Notes: 1. Span Section 1 5. Loopback Jack 2. Span Section 2 6. “Dumb” Block (Demarcation Point) 3. 120A2 (or later) Integrated 7. Repeater Channel Service Unit (ICSU) 8. Fiber MUX 4. RJ-48 to Network Interface 9. Central Office (Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m) Figure 5-15. Network Interface at “Dumb” Block with Repeater Line to Fiber MUX Section 2 includes the short cable from the loopback jack to the “dumb” block demarcation point (part of the loopback jack). This is the only portion o f section 2 that is part of customer premises wiring but is not covered in the loopback jack’s loopback path. A problem can exist in 1 or both of the 2 sections. The field technician is responsible for finding and correcting problems in section 1 and the loopback cable portion of section 2. The DS1 service provider is responsible for finding and correcting problems in the majority of section 2. Testing is divided into 2 steps. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-81 1. Test customer premises wiring (section 1 in Figure 5-14) from the ICSU to the loopback jack as described in the “DS1 Span Test” section. 2. Test the loopback jack-to-”dumb” block and ”dumb” block-to-CO wiring (section 2 in Figure 5-14). This can be done using a loopback that “overlaps” the section of the span. Any of the following loopbacks can do this: a. The local ICSUs line loopback, which is typically activated, tested, and then deactivated by the DS1 service provider at the CO end. b. The local DS1 interface’s payload loopback, activated and tested by the DS1 service provider at the CO end. c. The far-end ICSU’s line loopback. This test is activated at the management terminal by entering test ds1-loop far-csu-loopback-test-begin. The test is terminated by entering test ds1-loop end-loopback/span-test. Bit error counts are examined as described in the “DS1 Span Test” section. This test only isolates problems to section 2 wiring if there are no problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end ICSU. Coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider. If any of the above tests (a, b, or c) fail, a problem is indicated in section 2. This could mean bad loopback jack -to-”dumb” block cabling, but is more likely to indicate a problem somewhere between the “dumb” block and the CO. This is the responsibility of the DS1 service provider. If the DS1 Span Test confirms that there are no problems in section 1, the technician should proceed as follows to avoid unnecessary dispatch. ■ Identify and contact the DS1 service provider ■ Inform the DS1 provider that loopback tests of the CPE wiring to the “dumb” block (section 1) showed no problems ■ If the far-end ICSU line loopback test failed, inform the DS1 provider ■ Request that the DS1 provider perform a loopback test of their portion of the section 2 wiring by sending someone out to loop section 2 back to the CO at the “dumb” block. If this test fails, the problem is in the service provider’s wiring. If the test passes, the problem is in the cable between the loopback jack and the “dumb” block. Replace the loopback jack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 5-82 Configurations Using Fiber Multiplexers Use the loopback jack when customer premises DS1 wiring connects to an on-site fiber multiplexer (MUX) and allows wiring to the network interface point on the MUX to be remotely tested. This requires that ICSUs be used on DS1 wiring to the MUX. Fiber MUXes can take the place of Interface termination feeds as shown in Figure 5-11 , Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, and Figure 5-14. Test these spans using the same procedures as metallic spans. Note the following points: 1. Fiber MUXes may have loopback capabilities that can be activated by the service provider from the CO end. These may loop the signal back to the CO or back to the DS1 board. If the MUX provides the equivalent of a line loopback on the “problem” DS1 facility, this may be activated following a successful loopback jack test and used to isolate problems to the wiring between the loopback jack and the MUX. 2. Be aware that there are installations that use repeatered metallic lines between the MUX and the “dumb” block. Theses lines require DC power for the repeaters and this DC power is present at the “dumb” block interface to the CPE equipment. A loopback jack is required in this configuration to properly isolate and terminate the DC power. To check for the presence of DC, make the following 4 measurements at the network interface jack: 1. From Transmit Tip (T, Pin 5) to Receive Tip (T1, Pin 2) 2. From Transmit Ring (R, Pin 4) to Receive Ring (R1, Pin 4) 3. From Transmit Tip (T, Pin 5) to Transmit Ring (R, Pin 4) 4. From Receive Tip (T1, Pin 2) to Receive Ring (R1, Pin 4) All measurements should read 0 (zero) volts DC. For pin numbers and pin designations, refer to Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) Installation and Operation, 555-230-193. Operating Charasteristics If a TN464F or TN767E and a 120A2 were installed in a system running pre-G3V3 software and the software is later upgraded to G3V3 Release 3 or later, reseat the DS1 circuit pack so that the ICSU administration fields will appear on the DS1 administration form. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid General Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid 6 Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-1 6 General A high or critical reliability system provides highly-available call processing because single points-of-failure in the system that result in loss of call processing are minimized. Such a system uses the existing duplicated TDM buses, provides the SPE, translation card, and Tone-Clock circuit pack duplication, and it uses packet bus redundancy. These components are each single points of failure in a standard reliability system. The SPE is fully duplicated. The two SPEs are mounted in separate carriers and powered by different carrier power supplies. As a result, a high or critical reliability system has two control carriers: the A control cabinet and the B control cabinet. Since the circuit packs in the two SPEs are the same, the SPEs have identical capabilities. Either SPE can act as the active SPE. However, only one of the SPEs can be the active SPE at any given time. The active SPE performs the same operations that the single SPE performs in a standard system; that is, all call processing, administration, and maintenance activities being performed by the switch. All memory writes performed on the active SPE are copied to the other SPE. The other SPE is known as the standby SPE. Its role is to take over as the active SPE if the current active SPE fails. If the active SPE (or a component of the active SPE) fails, the system automatically switches to the standby SPE. Under normal conditions, the system operates using both TDM Buses. If the system detects transmission problems on one of the buses, it takes that bus out-of-service and operates with only one bus. This action results in a reduction in capacity. However, if the system detects a problem with one of the Tone-Clock circuit packs, it is able to take that circuit pack out-of-service without any impact on system capacity or performance. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Reliability Options Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-2 The Packet Bus is NOT duplicated in the same way that the TDM Bus is duplicated (that is, there is one Packet Bus, while there are two TDM Buses). However, there are several spare leads on the Packet Bus itself that are not normally used. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is provided. This circuit pack has ability to detect faulty Packet Bus leads and to instruct all Packet circuit packs (for example ISDN-BRI, Packet Control, TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs) to use up to three spare leads in place of defective ones. The rest of this chapter provides a detailed description of the High and Critical Reliability systems that are available in as well as of the Standard system that is available across the board. The chapter explains the duplicated hardware and includes a description of the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack. It provides a look at the following concepts relevant to high and critical reliability systems: memory shadowing, SPE modes, and SPE-interchanges. In addition, this chapter contains technical descriptions important to the general maintenance of High and Critical Reliability systems, such as a list of the appropriate system technician commands, SPE circuit pack LED strategies, installation and replacement procedures for SPE Control Carrier circuit packs, and for the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC). This chapter uses the term “Standard Reliability system” or “Standard system” to denote a system without duplication. Reliability Options The Release 5 systems are available in three different reliability options: standard, high and critical reliability. An increased level of reliability is implemented by duplicating various components so that standby components can take over (interchange) when a failure occurs on an active component. Most interchanges take place with no disruption of current service, and they allow for repairs to be made without disruption. Furthermore, duplication allows for the upgrading and maintenance of duplicated components and software without service disruption. The following sections describe which components are duplicated with each option. Standard Reliability On standard reliability systems, the 512-time-slot TDM bus is divided into two duplicate 256-time-slot buses, A and B. Call traffic is shared between the two buses. The first five time slots on each bus are reserved for the control channel, which is active on only one of the two buses at a time. Likewise, the next 17 time slots are reserved for carrying system tones. The tone time slots are not necessarily on the same bus (A or B) as the control channel. If any failure that affects the ability of the active control channel or the tone time slots to function takes place, the other bus becomes active for those time slots. For more DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Reliability Options Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-3 information, see TDM-BUS Maintenance section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and the set tdm command in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. High Reliability High reliability systems duplicate components that are critical to the viability of the system as a whole to prevent a single failure from dropping all service. These components include the following: ■ PPN control carrier and carrier power units (OLSs) ■ All SPE circuit packs, including the Processor, Memory, Network Controller, Processor Interface, Packet Controller, and Duplication Interface circuit packs ■ PPN Tone Clock circuit pack (EPN Tone-Clocks are not duplicated) ■ TDM buses (described in the previous section) The duplicated SPEs operate in active/standby fashion. Operation of this duplication is described in the STBY-SPE and DUPINT MO sections in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Interchanges of the SPE and of PPN Tone-Clocks operate independently unless induced by use of the SPE-select switches. Critical Reliability Critical reliability systems include all of the features of the High Reliability option described in the previous section. Additionally, these systems duplicate components of Port Network Connectivity (PNC) and of other components that are critical to the viability of each EPN. These components include the following: ■ PPN and EPN Tone-Clock circuit packs ■ PPN and EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs ■ Inter-PN cabling The entire direct-connected fiber connectivity is duplicated between each pair of port networks. Each duplicated fiber pair operates in an active/standby manner with all inter-PN calls set up on both fibers so that the active SPE can assume control without disruption of service. Each fiber pair between a pair of port networks operates independently of the other fiber pairs with respect to the active/standby operation (that is, the A-carrier fiber can be active between the PPN and EPN 1, and the B-carrier fiber can be active between the PPN and EPN 2). The Tone-Clocks in each EPN operate in an active/standby manner independently from other duplication strategies. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplicated Hardware Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-4 Duplicated Hardware A description of the hardware components used in a high or critical reliability system follows. SPE Duplication Each SPE in a high or critical reliability system consists of the following circuit packs: ■ Processor Circuit Pack (TN790) ■ Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777B) ■ Packet Control Circuit Pack (TN778) NOTE: There may be zero or one Packet Control circuit pack. However, both SPEs must have an equal number of circuit packs. ■ Processor Interface Circuit Pack(s) (TN765) NOTE: There may be zero, one, or two Processor Interface circuit pack. However, both SPEs must have an equal number of Processor Interface circuit packs. ■ Duplication Interface Circuit Pack (TN772) Duplication Interface Circuit Pack The Duplication Interface circuit pack is required to support SPE duplication. Duplication Interface A is part of the SPE in the A control carrier, and Duplication Interface B is part of the SPE in the B control carrier. The Duplication Interface circuit packs provide a broad range of functionality. Alone, Duplication Interface A provides control of the following components: the duplicated Processor circuit packs, the duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs, the environmental maintenance monitoring and control, and G3MT terminal connection. Together, Duplication Interface A and Duplication Interface B provide memory shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE. Duplication Interface A controls a lead that indicates to the duplicated Processor and Network Control circuit packs, respectively, which SPE is currently the Active SPE. This lead is known as the SPE Select lead. Duplication Interface A controls another set of leads that indicate to the duplicated TN768 and TN780 8 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplicated Hardware Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-5 Tone-Clock circuit packs which of the two is currently the active one. These leads are known as the Tone-Clock Select leads. System software can request that the SPE Select lead and/or the Tone-Clock Select leads be changed. Duplication Interface A controls and monitors in the PPN of a High or Critical Reliability system the same set of environmental leads that the EPN TN775 or TN775B Maintenance circuit pack controls and monitors in an EPN. The Duplication Interface circuit packs communicate with one another over the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC). In a multicarrier cabinet, the ICC physically consists of two 25-pin connector cables known as ICC-A and ICC-B. In a single-carrier cabinet, the ICC physically consists of three 25-pin connector cables known as ICC-A, ICC-B, and ICC-C. The ICC connects the Duplication Interface circuit packs via pin fields on the backplane. The pin fields where ICC-A and ICC-B (and ICC-C in a single-carrier cabinet) are connected are labeled on the backplane near the pin fields for the Duplication Interface circuit packs. The ICC carries leads related to maintaining a High or Critical Reliability system. Furthermore, without the ICC properly attached, the system cannot function as either a High or Critical Reliability system or as a Standard system. The Duplication Interface circuit packs support serial links that provide for G3 MT connection, memory shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory, and communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE. Four serial links are supported: 1. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to the G3 MT. 2. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to the Maintenance/Tape Processor in carrier A. 3. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to the Maintenance/Tape Processor in carrier B. 4. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to Duplication Interface B. NOTE: The Duplication Interface B circuit pack does not communicate directly with either Maintenance/Tape Processor or with the G3MT. Duplication Interface A supports the serial channel to the G3MT that is connected to the Duplication Interface A circuit pack by a connector on the back of carrier A labeled “DOT” (Duplication Option Terminal). If the Duplication Interface A circuit pack becomes defective, and the B carrier becomes the Active SPE, the terminal can be connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor in carrier B by connecting the terminal to the connector labeled "TERM" on the back of carrier B. If the Duplication Interface A circuit pack becomes defective and carrier A becomes the Active SPE, the terminal can be connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor in carrier A by connecting the terminal to the connector labeled "TERM" on the back of carrier A. Communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE is conducted via a message flow between the two Processors. The flow of messages from the Processor in carrier A to the Processor in carrier B is as DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplicated Hardware Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-6 follows: Processor A to Maintenance/Tape Processor A over the serial link to Duplication Interface A over the serial link to Maintenance/Tape Processor B to Processor B. The flow in the reverse direction is exactly opposite. The serial link between Duplication Interface A and Duplication Interface B is involved only in memory shadowing from the Active SPE to the Standby SPE as described in the ‘‘Memory Shadowing’’ section. SPE Select Switches The SPE-SELEC (SPE Select) switches are located on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs and are used to hard-select the Active SPE in a high or critical reliability system. “Hard-select” means that the SPE Select switches can be moved from the AUTO position to force the current Active SPE to remain the Active SPE or to force the current Standby SPE to become the Active SPE. Hard selection of the Active SPE using the SPE Select switches overrides any attempts by the system software to switch to the Standby SPE to make it become the Active SPE. Each switch has three positions: ■ SPE-A (the left position) ■ AUTO (the middle position) ■ SPE-B (the right position) To hard-select SPE A as the Active SPE, both SPE Select switches must be moved one at a time to the SPE-A position. To hard-select SPE-B as the Active SPE, both SPE Select switches must be moved to the SPE-B position. Any other combination of SPE Select switches leave control of the Active SPE to the system software. Inter-Cabinet Cable As described previously, the ICC connects the two TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs and is a basis of support for the Duplication Interface circuit pack functionality described previously. The ICC carries leads related to maintaining a High or Critical Reliability system. The SPE Select lead indicates which SPE is the Active SPE. The Tone-Clock Select leads indicate which Tone-Clock circuit pack is active. SPE Select switch state leads indicate the position of the SPE Select switches. Emergency Transfer leads indicate whether Emergency Transfer is on or off in the PPN cabinet. Other leads “combine” the INADS, CDR, and the Customer-Provided Alarming device channels from the two Maintenance/Tape Processors. The ICC also carries an indication of whether memory shadowing is enabled or disabled. Information to be shadowed is sent over the serial link between DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplicated Hardware Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-7 Duplication Interface B and Duplication Interface A; this serial link is carried over the ICC. Communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE is sent over the serial link between Duplication Interface A and the Maintenance/Tape Processor in carrier B. This serial link is also carried over the ICC. The presence of the ICC also causes ID pins on the backplane to indicate that the system is a high or critical reliability system rather than a standard reliability system. The ICC is difficult to connect, and its proper connection is critical to the operation of the system. Refer to the ‘‘Procedure for Installing/Replacing the Inter-Cabinet Cable’’ section for details on how to properly connect the ICC. Tone-Clock Circuit Pack Duplication For more information about the Tone-Clock circuit packs see TONE-BD Maintenance Object in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. The TONE-BD (Tone-Clock) MO functionality is made up of the TONE-PT (Tone Generator) and the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock). The Tone Generator provides all tones required by the system; the TDM Bus Clock provides synchronization for the TDM Bus and aids in monitoring and selection of SYNC (Synchronization) references. Each High or Critical Reliability system provides two Tone-Clock circuit packs. In this configuration, a failed Tone-Clock circuit pack is switched off-line and an operational circuit pack is put on-line. Duplication Interface A selects the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack by driving the Tone-Clock Select lead. The selection of the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack is independent of the selection of the Active SPE. Time Division Multiplexing Bus Duplication The TDM Bus is composed of two separate, independent buses called bus A and bus B. The first five time slots of both buses are reserved for communication between the SPE and port circuit packs. These time slots are known as the control channel. The control channel is a vital component and must be operational for the system to provide meaningful customer voice and data services. In addition to the control channel time slots, several other time slots are reserved for system use. These additional time slots are for the standard tones. The standard tones include the dial tone and the touch tones. The ability to move the control channel and tones from a defective TDM Bus to an operational TDM Bus is a key component of a highly-available system. The system can detect transmission errors on the control channel, errors can be diagnosed, and corrective actions can be taken when necessary. If a bus is found to be defective, it is taken out-of-service. All existing calls on the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Issue 1 August 1997 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplication Concepts Page 6-8 out-of-service bus are maintained, but no new calls are assigned to the out-of-service bus. In addition to the system software’s ability to detect a defective bus and perform a TDM Bus switch, the user also has the ability to specify if and when a scheduled control channel switch is to be performed. Packet Bus Redundancy The Packet Bus is used to provide ISDN-BRI signaling via the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack. The Packet Bus is not physically duplicated in the same way that the TDM Bus is duplicated. However, there are several spare leads on the Packet Bus itself that are not normally used. In a High or Critical Reliability system that is using the Packet Bus, a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is provided for each port network. The Maintenance/Test circuit pack has the ability to test the Packet Bus and discover shorted or open leads on the Packet Bus. When such a fault is discovered, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack sends a message to each circuit pack that uses the Packet Bus, instructing that circuit pack to use one of the spare leads in place of the defective lead. The Maintenance/Test circuit pack can recover up to three Packet Bus lead failures by this mechanism. This provides high availability by decreasing the chance of a blocking Packet Bus fault by two orders of magnitude. The Maintenance/Test circuit pack has other capabilities, primarily with respect to ISDN-PRI Test Call features. Because of these other capabilities, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is available as an option in Standard Reliability systems or in High and Critical Reliability systems that are not using the Packet Bus. In such systems, the Packet Bus redundancy capabilities of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack are NOT enabled. Duplication Concepts High and critical reliability systems employ several concepts of duplication. These are described in the following sections. Memory Shadowing Most of the time the Standby SPE is in a mode known as Standby Mode (see ‘‘SPE Modes’’ section) in which it is ready to assume the role of the Active SPE. To be ready to assume the role of the Active SPE. PR-MEM Release 5vs/si and later must be an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. This is accomplished by the memory shadowing mechanism. The SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuitry) on the Active SPE TN772 DUPINT (Duplication Interface) detects all memory writes that the Active SPE PROCR (Processor) makes to Active SPE Memory. The Active SPE Common Shadow DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplication Concepts Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-9 Circuitry sends this information to the Common Shadow Circuitry on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface via the ICC. The Common Shadow Circuitry on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface then writes the data to Standby SPE Memory. This logical connection between Active SPE Memory and Standby SPE Memory is known as the SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link). Although most of the components making up the Memory Shadowing Link (that is, Active SPE Memory, both sets of Common Shadow Circuitry, and Standby SPE Memory) are tested and maintained individually, the integrity of the entire logical connection is also tested and maintained to make sure that the shadowing mechanism is functional and that Standby SPE Memory is the same as Active SPE Memory. Therefore, this testing is done under the guise of the Memory Shadowing Link. SPE Modes As described earlier, the Active SPE is the SPE that is currently responsible for all call processing, administration, and maintenance activities being performed by the switch. The Active SPE is always in Active Mode. The role of the Standby SPE is to be ready to take over as the Active SPE in the event that the current Active SPE fails. The Standby SPE does not perform Call Processing or Administration activities. It does perform Maintenance activity, but this is carried out completely under the direction of the Active SPE in order to monitor and maintain the health of the Standby SPE. The Standby SPE is always in one of three modes: Standby, Maintenance, Busyout, or Down. Usually the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode. In this mode, the SW-CTL (Switch Control) on the Standby SPE Network Control circuit pack is isolated from the TDM Bus so that it does not attempt to control the bus and interfere with the Switch Control on the Active SPE Network Control circuit pack. Similarly, the Standby SPE Packet Control circuit pack is isolated from the Packet Bus so that it does not attempt to control the Packet bus, and thus interfere with the Active SPE Packet Control circuit pack. The Standby SPE PROCR (Processor) is held in a reset state so that it does not run software. Finally, Standby SPE is being shadowed into from Active SPE Memory—meaning that Standby SPE Memory is updated to reflect every change in Active SPE Memory (for example, calls and administration changes). In Standby Mode, the Standby SPE is available to assume the role of the Active SPE. In certain circumstances, the Standby SPE is put into Maintenance Mode by the Active SPE. In this mode, the Standby SPE is still isolated from the TDM and Packet Buses, but is no longer having its Memory shadowed into; its Processor is no longer held in a reset state. In Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE accepts maintenance activity requests from the Active SPE to perform testing on Standby SPE components. For many of the requested activities, system software on the Standby SPE is brought up to conduct the activity. Translation saves and announcement saves may be performed on the Standby SPE when it is in Maintenance Mode. While in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE is not as DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplication Concepts Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-10 readily available to assume the role of the Active SPE, but may do so depending on the severity of the Active SPE fault(s). In Busyout Mode, the Standby SPE is busied out by the busyout SPE-standby command. Only system technician-requested activities are carried out on the Standby SPE until a release SPE-standby command is executed. Refer to the status system command in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for information concerning Standby Modes. Whenever the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode from Maintenance Mode, its Memory is refreshed. NOTE: Verify that the Standby SPE is functional (no duplication alarms exist and the SPE has returned to the Standby Mode) by running the status system 1 command. If the standby SPE is in the maint/idle mode with no standby alarms, use the standby refresh command to put the standby SPE into the standby mode. Verify the results by using the status system 1 command. For more information about the status system command see Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. NOTE: The system software automatically returns the Standby SPE from Maintenance Mode to Standby Mode at the completion of any maintenance activity. However, it is also possible to force the Standby SPE to return to Standby Mode by issuing the refresh spe-standby command from the G3MT terminal. The refresh spe-standby command preempts Standby SPE Maintenance Mode except that of entering maintenance mode. See the ‘‘System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems’’ section for a description of the refresh spe-standby command. This means that all of Active SPE DRAM Memory is shadowed over into Standby SPE Memory. The refresh is necessary because, while in Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing to the Standby SPE is disabled, and Standby SPE Memory is not updated to reflect changes in Active SPE Memory. After the refresh, Standby SPE Memory is again an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. The Standby SPE goes into Down Mode when certain error conditions are detected. These error conditions are described in detail in the "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" section of STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Once the error condition(s) that caused the Standby SPE to go into Down Mode is (are) corrected, the Standby SPE is first put into Maintenance Mode to conduct testing on Standby SPE components and is then returned to Standby Mode. The current mode of the Standby SPE can be determined by issuing the status system command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplication Concepts Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-11 SPE-Interchanges The process by which the Standby SPE takes over for the Active SPE is referred to as an SPE-interchange. There are six conditions under which an SPE-interchange is initiated: ■ Upgrade Software Issuing the upgrade software command to upgrade the software on a High or Critical Reliability system reboots the Standby SPE from the standby translation card and then invokes an SPE-interchange so that the system is now running on the new software. ■ System Technician Command Issuing the reset system interchange command on the G3MT terminal causes an SPE-interchange to be initiated. ■ Alarm Condition If a Major or Minor alarm is activated on any circuit pack, an SPE-interchange is initiated, provided the health of the Standby SPE is better than that of the Active SPE. Table 6-1 lists the MOs, the alarm levels, the level of SPE-interchange initiated, and the severity given to the alarm for all MOs that can cause software requested SPE-interchanges. The health of an SPE is based upon the single most severe alarm active within that SPE. The higher the severity level, the more severe the problem. The restart level of the interchange also depends on the single most severe alarm within the active SPE. Hot Restarts occur only when the Standby SPE is in standby mode. For example, the active SPE has a MAJOR SHDW-CIR and a MINOR DATA-BD alarm, and the standby SPE has a MAJOR TAPE alarm. In this case, the severity level of the active is 60, the severity level of the standby is 65, and no SPE-interchange would occur. ■ SPE Select Switches An SPE-interchange can be initiated by moving both SPE Select Switches, one at a time, to the position that selects the Standby SPE for Active Mode. The SPE Select Switches were described earlier in this chapter. ■ Scheduled Maintenance An SPE-interchange can be requested as a part of scheduled maintenance. This mechanism is used to exercise both SPEs. An SPE-interchange can be requested as part of scheduled maintenance by issuing the change system-parameters maintenance command and updating the form. ■ Processor Insanity Duplication Interface A (DUPINT, TN772) periodically audits the sanity of each of the Processor circuit packs. If the Active SPE does not respond to the sanity audit, Duplication Interface A initiates an SPE-interchange. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Duplication Concepts 6 Table 6-1. Page 6-12 Software-Requested Interchanges Caused by Alarm Conditions Maintenance Object Alarm Level On/Off Board Fault Severity Level Restart Level STBY-SPE WARNING OFF 120 None MEM-BD MAJOR or MINOR ON 110 Hot or Warm1 MEMORY MAJOR or MINOR ON 110 Hot or Warm1 STBY-SPE MAJOR ON 100 None PROCR MAJOR ON 70 Hot or Warm1 SW-CTL MAJOR ON 65 Cold 2 MEM-CARD MAJOR OFF 65 Cold 1 12V-PWR MINOR ON 65 Hot DUPINT MAJOR ON 61 Hot CARR-POW MAJOR ON 61 Cold 2 SHDW-CIR MAJOR ON or OFF 60 Warm SHDW-LINK MAJOR ON 60 Warm SW-CTL MINOR ON 40 Hot PR-MAINT MINOR ON 30 Hot PI-BD MAJOR or MINOR ON 20 Hot PKT-CTRL MAJOR ON or OFF 20 Hot PKT-CTRL MINOR ON or OFF 15 Hot PI-PT MAJOR ON 15 Hot DATA-CHL MINOR ON 15 Hot DATA-CON MINOR ON 15 Hot DATA-BD MINOR ON 15 Hot CARD-MEM MINOR ON or OFF 10 Hot PR-MAINT MINOR OFF 8 Hot 1. If the Standby SPE is in Standby mode when the alarm occurs, a Hot SPE-Interchange occurs. If the Standby is in Maintenance mode when the alarm occurs, however, a Warm SPE-Interchange rather than a Hot SPE-Interchange occurs. Regardless of the condition that initiates an SPE-interchange, the G3MT is always logged off as a result of the SPE-interchange. The G3MT is available to log into after the SPE-interchange is complete and the “login” prompt is displayed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-13 System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems The following system technician commands support high and critical reliability systems. Complete descriptions of these commands are found in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. Commands for SPE Duplication ■ The busyout SPE-standby command stops all background maintenance activities on the Standby SPE, and it doubles memory shadowing. ■ The release SPE-standby command refreshes the Standby SPE, and it allows all background standby maintenance activities to continue. ■ The status system command displays the status of the Active SPE and the Standby SPE (among other information). NOTE: Verify that the Standby SPE is functional (no duplication alarms exist and the SPE has returned to the Standby Mode) by running the status system 1 command. If the standby SPE is in the maint/idle mode with no standby alarms, use the standby refresh command to put the standby SPE into the standby mode. Verify the results by using the status system 1 command. For more information about the status system command see Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. ■ The status mem-card [1] a|b command displays the status of the Active SPE Memory Card or the status of the Standby SPE Memory Card. ■ The test processor [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified Processor circuit pack. ■ The test memory [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified on-circuit pack memory with an optional Memory Expansion circuit pack. ■ The test card-mem [1] a | b [short | long] command tests either the Active SPE Memory Card or the Standby SPE Memory Card. ■ The test network-control [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified TN777B Network Control circuit pack and the Memory Card. ■ The test packet-control [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified TN778 Packet Control circuit pack. ■ The test interface [1] a1 | b1 [short | long] command tests the specified first TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. ■ The test interface [1] a2 | b2 [short | long] command tests the specified second TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-14 ■ The test duplication-interface [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack. ■ The test shadow-link command tests the SHDW-LINK (Memory Shadowing Link). Refer to “MEM-BD” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ for a detailed description of this command. ■ The set vector [spe-active | spe-standby | spe-maint] command requests that a core dump be taken when a system restart of level occurs. ■ The reset system interchange command requests an SPE-interchange. ■ The test spe-standby [short | long] command tests the Processor, Memory, Network Control, Processor Interface, Duplication Interface, and translation card circuit packs in the control carrier containing the Standby SPE. Refer to “STBY-SPE” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ for a detailed description of this command. ■ The refresh spe-standby puts the Standby SPE into Standby mode. ! CAUTION: Because of the power of the “refresh spe-standby” command, its full impact is described here so that it is clearly understood. The refresh spe-standby command is used to immediately put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode. The command conducts the same activities regardless of whether the Standby SPE is already in Standby Mode or whether it is in Maintenance Mode. When this command is issued, most Standby SPE maintenance activity that is currently in progress is preempted, the Standby SPE Processor is held reset, and the Standby SPE Memory is refreshed (that is, all of Active SPE DRAM Memory is shadowed to Standby SPE Memory). Recall that the refresh is necessary because, while the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing is disabled. When the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode, its Memory must be brought up-to-date with Active SPE Memory. If the system was trying to enter Maintenance Mode, the refresh spe-standby command aborts with the message, “Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later.” ! WARNING: Because of its power to preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, the “refresh spe-standby” command should be used judiciously. If the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode when the “refresh spe-standby” command is issued, the maintenance activity that is being conducted by the Standby SPE is immediately terminated. The following side-effects may occur: ■ Testing of the Standby SPE components that are the target of the maintenance activity may not have completed. Depending on the maintenance activity and the point at which it is terminated, tests that DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-15 detect faults and/or lack of faults on those Standby SPE components may not have had the opportunity to run. Accordingly, alarms are not raised or retired on the components. ■ If the maintenance activity is scheduled maintenance, and if the refresh spe-standby command is issued before a scheduled translation save is performed, the translation save is not done, and the translation data on both the Active SPE and Standby SPE tapes or memory cards do not reflect changes made since the last translation save. In general, after a refresh spe-standby command has been used and the user has finished working with the system, the test spe-standby long command should be issued if the refresh spe-standby command preempted a Standby SPE maintenance activity. Additionally, if the refresh spe-standby command was used in the time frame in which scheduled maintenance with a translation save was to have been conducted, the save translation command should be issued to ensure that the current translation data has been written to the Active SPE and Standby SPE tapes or Memory Cards. When using the refresh spe-standby command to preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, it may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled “standby” on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the G3MT terminal message “Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors” or “Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later.” Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. Commands for TDM Bus Duplication ■ The status system command displays the bus on which the control channel and tones currently reside (among other information). ■ The test tdm port-network [1 | 2 | 3] [short | long] command tests both TDM Buses. ■ The set tdm port-network [1 | 2 | 3] a | b [override] command moves the control channel and dedicated tones to the specified TDM Bus. ■ The busyout tdm port-network [1 | 2 3] bus a | b command places the specified bus in a maintenance busy state. ■ The release tdm port-network [1 | 2 3] bus a | b command places a busied-out bus back in service. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies Page 6-16 Commands for Packet Bus Redundancy ■ The status system command displays the status of the Packet Bus, and the number of faulty and open leads that the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has found. ■ The test pkt port-network [1 | 2 | 3] command tests the Packet Bus. Commands for Tone-Clock Circuit Pack Duplication ■ The status system command displays the Tone-Clock circuit pack that is currently supplying tones and clocks (among other information). ■ The test tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack. ■ The set tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b [override] command makes the specified Tone-Clock circuit pack active. ■ The busyout tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b command places the specified Tone-Clock circuit pack in the maintenance busy state. NOTE: This cannot be the one that is currently active. ■ The release tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b command removes the specified Tone-Clock circuit pack from the maintenance busy state. Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies The LEDs on the circuit packs in the two SPEs have the following meanings: ■ Processor Circuit Pack Yello w Green Red On Off - Active mode On On - Active mode: Maintenance running Off On - Maintenance mode; Memory not refreshed Off Off - Maintenance mode; Memory refreshed - - On Meaning Fault on Processor circuit pack Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies Page 6-17 NOTE: In addition to the standard LEDs, the Processor circuit pack has the red major and minor alarm LEDs, an amber warning LED, a green ack LED, and a red Emergency Transfer LED. ■ Duplication Interface Circuit Pack (PICP)(B carrier) (TN772):: Yello w Green Red On - - SPC in active mode On - Maintenance running on PICP - On ■ Meaning Fault on PICP Duplication Interface Circuit Pack (DICP)(A carrier) (TN772): Yello w Green Red On - - SPC in active mode, or A carrier Tone-Clock circuit pack active On - Maintenance running on DICP - On - Meaning Fault on DICP Each Duplication Interface circuit pack has another red LED associated with the SPE Select Switch. The purpose of the red switch LED is to serve as a reminder that an SPE is being forced to be the Active SPE and, therefore, the system is not duplicated. Both SPE Select Switch LEDs (one on each Duplication Interface circuit pack) are on when an SPE is being forced to be the Active SPE by the consistent positions of the two SPE Select Switches. Both LEDs are extinguished when the SPE Select Switch positions are inconsistent or when both SPE Select Switches are in the position. In the latter two cases, the Active SPE is automatically selected by the system software. ■ Processor Interface Circuit Pack (TN765): Yello w Green Red On - - Link terminated at PICP On - Maintenance running on PICP - On - Meaning Fault on PICP Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability ■ Page 6-18 Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777B): Yello w Green Red On - - Link terminated at NCCP On - Maintenance running on NCCP - On - Meaning Fault on NCCP There is also an yellow LED (below Memory Card slot). When ON, the Memory Card is in use. ■ Packet Control Circuit Pack(PCCP)(TN778) Yello w Green Red On - - Link terminated at PCCP On - Maintenance running on PCCP - On ■ Meaning Fault on PCCP Tone-Clock Circuit Pack: NOTE: For information on the standard amber/green/red LEDs see TONE-BD Maintenance Object in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability This section describes the procedure for installing or replacing Standby SPE circuit packs. These circuit packs are: ■ Processor Circuit Pack (TN790) ■ Memory Expansion Board (CPP1) ■ Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777[B]) ■ Packet Control circuit pack (TN778) ■ Processor Interface circuit pack(s) (TN765) ■ Duplication Interface circuit pack (TN772). This procedure does not apply to the TN768 or TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to ‘TONE-BD”, “TONE-PT”, or “TDM-CLK” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-19 Object Repair Procedures’’ for the procedure to replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack. ! CAUTION: When circuit packs in the Active SPE are to be replaced, this section provides procedures for performing an SPE-interchange to place the circuit packs in the Standby SPE mode. SPE circuit packs should never be replaced while they are located in the Active SPE. Use this section when: 1. Defective (that is, alarmed) Active or Standby SPE circuit packs are to be replaced. The procedure begins at the ‘‘Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs’’ section. Ignore the ‘‘Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs’’ section, as it does not apply to replacing defective Standby SPE circuit packs. 2. Healthy Standby SPE circuit packs are to be upgraded. The procedure begins at the ‘‘Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs’’ section. Ignore the ‘‘Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs’’ as it does not apply to upgrading Standby SPE circuit packs. The ‘‘Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure’’ and ‘‘Additional Tests for Replaced DATA-CHL, PKT-CTRL, and PROCR Circuit Packs’’ sections apply to both situations but should be referred to only after reading the appropriate sections as instructed previously. Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs Determine that software is running by looking at the G3MT and verifying that it does not have either the “SPE DOWN MODE” or the “Duplication Interface Processing Element Communication Down” message displayed. Software Not Running If system software is not running or if it stops running at any point during this procedure, the suggested order of Processor Complex circuit packs to replace in an attempt to fix the SPE down problem is: ■ Processor Circuit Pack (TN790) ■ Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777[B]) ■ Packet Control circuit pack (TN778) ■ Duplication Interface circuit pack (TN772) ■ Processor Interface circuit pack (TN765) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-20 Software Running If system software is running, determine which SPE is the Standby SPE by issuing the status system command from the G3MT terminal. Look at the SPE and MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form to determine which SPE (A or B) is the Active SPE; it is labeled as ”active.” The other SPE is the Standby SPE and is labeled as either “standby,” “maint,” or “down.” Follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” described later for each Standby SPE circuit pack to be replaced. Continue with this procedure as follows. 1. If alarms are against the Active SHDW-CIR, Active DUPINT, or SHDW-LNK, replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. Proceed to the ‘‘Handling SHDW-CIR and SHDW-LNK Alarms in the Active SPE’’ or ‘‘Handling DUPINT Alarms in the Active SPE’’ sections as applicable. 2. If these sections do not need to be referenced, proceed to the ‘‘Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure’’ section. The rest of this section describes how the system behaves when there are faulty circuit packs in the SPEs and is meant to be informative rather than part of the general procedure of replacing SPE circuit packs. NOTE: When circuit packs other than the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the Active SPE are defective, the SPE containing the more severely defective circuit packs is usually in the Standby SPE. Handling SHDW-CIR and SHDW-LNK Alarms in the Active SPE Check for the existence of SHDW-CIR alarms against the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack or SHDW-LNK alarms. If there are Active SPE SHDW-CIR or SHDW-LNK alarms, inform the customer that a COLD 2 restart of the system is needed and determine a time at which to restart may be. At that time, complete the following steps: 1. Make sure that the tape (memory card) in the Active SPE tape unit (memory card slot) has the most current translations. If it does not, issue the save translations spe-active command to put the most current translations on it. 2. Exchange the tapes (memory cards) in the Active SPE and Standby SPE so that the Standby SPE tape unit (memory card slot) contains the tape (memory card) from the previous step. 3. For a 386 system, if the Standby SPE is not in standby mode, issue the refresh spe-standby command to put it into standby mode if possible (see the previous Note). If the Standby SPE was successfully put into standby mode, then issue the reset system interchange command to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-21 cause a PEI. If the refresh or system interchange are unsuccessful, then use the SPE select switches to hard select the Standby SPE (this will result in a COLD 2 restart of the system). 4. If the upgrade software (reset system interchange) command is successful, an SPE-interchange results in the new Active SPE performing a COLD 2 (HOT) restart. Follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” described later. If the upgrade software command failed, determine why the failure occurred, resolve the problem, and repeat this entire procedure. Handling DUPINT Alarms in the Active SPE Check for the existence of DUPINT alarms against the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack. If there are Active SPE DUPINT alarms, inform the customer that a reboot of the system may be required and determine a time at which a reboot may be done. At that time, complete the following steps: 1. Make sure that the translation card in the Active SPE has the most current translations. If it does not, issue save translations spe-active to put the most current translations on it. 2. Exchange the translation cards in the Active SPE and Standby SPE so that the Standby SPE contains the card with the most current translations. 3. Throw the SPE Select Switches on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs to force an SPE-interchange so that the current Standby SPE becomes the new Active SPE. If SPE B is currently the Standby SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the right. If SPE A is currently the Standby SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the left. If the Duplication Interface circuit pack actually severed the Memory Shadowing Link resulting in corruption of Standby SPE Memory, the SPE-interchange results in the new Active SPE performing a Reboot. However, if the defect in the Duplication Interface circuit pack did not sever the Memory Shadowing Link, the SPE-interchange results in the new Active SPE performing a Warm Start instead. 4. After the SPE-interchange is complete, log into the terminal. Follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” described later for each circuit pack to be replaced in the new Standby SPE. Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs Determine which SPE is the Standby SPE by issuing the status system command. Look at the SPE and MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form. The Active SPE; it is labeled as “active.” The other SPE is the Standby SPE and is labeled as either “standby,” “maint,” or “down.” Follow the ‘‘Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure’’ described later for each Standby SPE circuit pack to be upgraded. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-22 When all Standby SPE circuit packs have been upgraded, force the Active SPE to become the Standby SPE as follows: 1. Issue the status system command from the terminal. Look at the SPE and MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form to determine the status of the Standby SPE. Recall that the Standby SPE is labeled as either “standby,” “maint,” or “down.” 2. If the Standby SPE is labeled as “maint,” continue issuing the refresh spe-standby command followed by the status system command until the Standby SPE is labeled “standby.” NOTE: It may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled “standby” on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 3. If the Standby SPE is labeled “standby,” issue the reset system interchange command from the G3MT. After the SPE-interchange is complete, log into the terminal, issue the status system command, and verify that the SPEs have reversed roles. 4. Then, follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” for each circuit pack to be upgraded in the new Standby SPE. Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure This procedure does not apply to the TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack. Please refer to “TONE-BD”, “TONE-PT”, or “TDM-CLK” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ for the procedure to replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack. NOTE: See the flowchart of the procedure for installing or replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs In Duplication Option Systems at the end of this section, for use as a circuit pack replacement maintenance aid. The following procedure involves throwing the SPE Select Switches to hard-select the current Active SPE. After completing the circuit pack replacement procedure, verify that the SPE Select Switches have been returned to the AUTO position both by noting their position and by noting that the SPE Select Switch LEDs on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs are not on. 1. Throw the SPE Select Switches, one at a time, to force selection of the current Active SPE. If SPE B is currently the Active SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches, one at a time, to the right. If SPE A is currently the Active SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches, one at a time, to the left. Throwing the SPE Select Switches automatically disables shadowing. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-23 NOTE: Do not remove power before proceeding with step 2. All PPN Control Carriers used in High or Critical Reliability Systems (A slot for the Duplication Interface circuit pack identifies these carriers.) have staggered pins to support the hot plug-in of circuit packs. 2. Unseat the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack. (It is not necessary to entirely remove the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack from its slot.) 3. If the circuit pack to be replaced is the TN772 Duplication Interface in the A carrier, continue with this step. Otherwise, proceed to Step 4. Issue the status system command from the terminal, and check the status of the Tone-Clock in the 1B carrier: a. If the SERVICE STATE field indicates that the 1B carrier Tone-Clock is “in” (that is, in service) and the SYSTEM CLOCK and SYSTEM TONES fields indicate that it is “active,” proceed to Step 4. b. If the SERVICE STATE field indicates that the 1B carrier Tone-Clock is “in” (that is, in service) but the SYSTEM CLOCK and SYSTEM TONES fields indicate that it is “standby,” then check the Error Log for an active Error Type 3329 against the 1B TONE-BD by issuing the display error command. If this error exists, proceed to Step 4. NOTE: Error Type 3329 implies that the Tone-Clock circuit pack probably cannot provide system clocks and an attempt to set the system clocks to this circuit pack would result in a reset system 2 of the system. When the 1A Duplication Interface circuit pack is replaced, however, the system experiences a loss of clock, and a reset system 2 occurs. If an active Error Type 3329 is not logged against the 1B TONE-BD, issue the set tone-clock 1B command from the G3MT terminal to make the 1B carrier Tone-Clock active. Verify that the switch occurs by issuing the status system command and checking that the SERVICE STATE, SYSTEM CLOCK and SYSTEM TONES fields are now “in” and “active.” Proceed to Step 4. NOTE: If the 1B Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective the switch may have failed and a reset system 2 may have occurred. In this case, proceed to Step 4. However, the system experiences a loss of clock and another reset system 2 when the 1A Duplication Interface circuit pack is replaced. c. If the SERVICE STATE field indicates that the 1B carrier Tone-Clock is “out” (that is, out-of-service), refer to the TONE-BD (Tone-Clock circuit pack), TONE-PT (Tone Generator), and TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-24 Object Repair Procedures’’, to restore it to service. Proceed to Step 4 regardless of whether or not the attempt to restore the 1B Tone-Clock to service was successful. NOTE: If the 1B Tone-Clock was not successfully restored to service, the system experiences a loss of clock, and a reset system 2 when the 1A Duplication Interface circuit pack is replaced. 4. If the circuit pack to be replaced is the TN772 Duplication Interface, throw the SPE Select Switch of the replacement Duplication Interface circuit pack to the same position as the SPE Select Switch on the Duplication Interface circuit pack that was removed. If the Standby Processor is not being replaced Install the replacement circuit pack and reinsert the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack. a. If the circuit pack that was replaced was the TN772 Duplication Interface in the A carrier, the G3MT terminal is logged off. Log in to the Manager I terminal and proceed to Step 7. 5. If the circuit pack to be replaced is a TN790 Standby SPE Processor circuit pack loaded with the same software as loaded in the Active Processor or is a TN770 Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, install the circuit pack and proceed to Step 7. 6. If the circuit pack to be replaced is a TN790 Standby SPE Processor circuit pack and the software is being loaded from the generic program card, continue with the following steps: NOTE: The TN790 must have the same number of SIMMs as the replaced circuit pack. a. Insert the generic program card into the Active SPE. Issue the list configuration software-versions command. If the software matches and the UPDATE FILE Identifier displays none, continue with this procedure. Replace the translation card in the Active SPE. b. Insert the generic program card into the Standby SPE. c. Install the TN790 Standby Processor circuit pack. When the Standby Processor starts to initialize and detects the program card, it does a software upgrade and displays the progress of this upgrade on the terminal. d. When prompted, replace the program card in the Standby SPE with the translation card. The Standby SPE boots up with the translation. NOTE: Perform this operation within two minutes. Otherwise the Standby SPE will boot up without translations. However, it will DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-25 recover the translations when the Active SPE enables memory shadowing to the Standby SPE. e. At the prompt REPLACE TRANSLATION MEM-CARD ON WITH SOFTWARE MEM-CARD, wait 3 minutes for the Standby SPE to initialize before proceeding to next step. f. Issue the list configuration software-versions long command to ensure that both SPEs are running identical software. Use the next step if the this command does not display the software versions, otherwise skip the next step. g. Issue the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE into a mode to accept the list configuration software-versions long command. Wait 5 minutes for the Standby SPE to initialize and issue the status system 1st-cabinet command. The Standby SPE failed to initialize if the Standby SPE Mode is down. If the Standby SPE Mode is maint/init or maint/entering, execute the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command up to 2 more times. If this step does not succeed, try this procedure again. 7. Issue the status system 1st-cabinet command. The status system form indicates the presence of MAJOR and MINOR alarms on both SPEs. If SPE alarm counts are displayed, run component tests to resolve these alarms. Allowed tests include test spe-standby, test duplicationinterface, and test shadow-link. Use the next step if the allowed test commands are not accepted, otherwise skip the next step. ! CAUTION: If the Duplication Interface circuit pack is being tested, Test #278 fails because the SPE Select Switches are thrown. 8. Issue the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE into a mode to accept the test commands attempted in the previous step. Wait 5 minutes for the Standby SPE to initialize and issue the status system 1st-cabinet command. If the Standby SPE failed to initialize if the Standby SPE Mode is down. If the Standby SPE Mode is maint/init or maint/entering, execute the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command up to 2 more times. If this step does not succeed, try this procedure again. 9. If other Standby SPE circuit packs are to be replaced, return to Step 2. 10. Move each SPE Select Switch back to the AUTO position. If any of the TN777B Network Control or the Processor circuit packs were replaced, please refer to the ‘‘Additional Tests for Replaced DATA-CHL, PKT-CTRL, and PROCR Circuit Packs’’ section. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability ! Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-26 WARNING: Move only one SPE Select Switch at a time. DO NOT move both switches at the same time. ! WARNING: If the Active SPE has alarms in it, an SPE-interchange may occur after moving each SPE Select Switch back to the AUTO position. Maintenance activity is performed automatically on the Standby SPE after the SPE Select Switches are returned to their AUTO positions in Step 10. This can be verified by issuing the status system command and noting that the Standby SPE is labeled as “maint.” It may take up to 5 minutes for this activity to begin. The maintenance activity itself takes from 10 to 30 minutes to complete. NOTE: The time required for the maintenance activity to finish depends on the number of TN765 Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of administered ports on the Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of administered data channels on the TN777B Network Control circuit pack, and the current load on the system. Verify the completion of the maintenance activity by issuing the status system 1 command and noting whether the Standby SPE is labeled as “standby.” Although not recommended at this stage of the procedure, the maintenance activity on the Standby SPE can be preempted using the refresh spe-standby command. To preempt the maintenance activity, continue issuing the refresh spe-standby command followed by status system 1 command until the status system form shows that the Standby SPE is labeled “standby.” It may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled “standby” on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the status system 1 command continues to show SPE alarms, issue the appropriate command(s) from the G3MT terminal to test these alarmed MOs. After Step 10, if the Active SPE contains more severely defective circuit packs than the Standby SPE, an SPE-interchange may occur. The presence of alarms in the Active and Standby SPE can be verified by issuing the status system command. The status system form indicates the presence of MAJOR and MINOR alarms on both SPEs. If the Active SPE has alarms in it, an SPE-interchange may occur. The occurrence of the SPE-interchange can be verified by issuing the status system command to determine which SPE is now the Active SPE. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-27 Additional Tests for Replaced DATA-CHL, PKT-CTRL, and PROCR Circuit Packs After all affected circuit packs have been replaced, if the replaced circuit packs include the TN777B Network Control circuit pack(s), the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack(s), or the Processor circuit pack(s), additional testing is required to ensure that the new circuit packs are healthy. This testing must be done on these circuit packs when they are located in the Active SPE. Issue the status system command to determine which SPE is currently the Active SPE and determine the SPE, Active or Standby, in which each replaced Network Control, Packet Control, and/or Processor circuit pack resides. If any of the replaced circuit packs are located in the Active SPE, test it by issuing the test network-control [a | b], test packet-control [a | b], or test processor [a | b] command, as appropriate. If any tests fail or abort, refer to the SW-CTL (Switch Control), DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel), PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack, DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack), or PROCR, and PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, as appropriate. If any of these circuit packs are located in the Standby SPE, force the Standby SPE to become the Active SPE as described in "Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs." However, before the Standby SPE is made to become the Active SPE, the replaced circuit pack should first be tested while on the Standby SPE. Then, test these circuit packs (that are now located in the Active SPE) by issuing the test network-control [a | b], test packet-control [a | b], or test processor [a | b] command, as appropriate. If any tests fail or abort, refer to the SW-CTL (Switch Control), DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel), DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack), PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack), or PROCR, and PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, as appropriate. ! WARNING: Before leaving the system, verify that the SPE Select Switches have been returned to their proper position. The switches should be in the AUTO position and the SPE Select Switch LEDs should be off on both the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs. See the following flowchart, Figure 6-1, Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3, for the procedure for installing or replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs in Duplication Option System. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability YES Issue the "save translations spe-active" command Page 6-28 Are there SHDW-CIR alarms in the active SPE or are there SHDW-LNK alarms? NO Are there DUPINT alarms in the active SPE carrier? Exchange the active SPE and STANDBY SPE memory cards or tapes Issue the "save translations spe-active" command YES NO Exchange the active SPE and STANDBY SPE memory cards or tapes Issue the "upgrade software" command Was the "upgrade software" successful? YES Throw the SPE select switches to force an SPE interchange Throw the SPE select switches to hard-select the active SPE B NO Throw the SPE select switches to hard-select the standby SPE and allow the standby SPE time to become active Is processor being replaced and a software card being used? YES C NO Unseat the standby SPE processor circuit pack A Figure 6-1. Page 1 Procedure for Replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Page 6-29 A YES Is the 1B CARRIER TONE CLOCK "in" service and "active"? NO Is the 1B CARRIER TONE CLOCK "in" service and "standby"? NO Restore the 1B TONE CLOCK to "in" service (Refer to the TONE-BD section of the maintenance manual, 555-204-105) Is the defective circuit pack the carrier A DUPINT? NO YES YES Issue the "set tone 1b" command to make it "active" Is the defective circuit pack either of the DUPINTs? YES Throw new DUPINTs SPE select switch to hard-select the active SPE NO D Figure 6-2. Page 2 Procedure for Replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability Page 6-30 D C In sta ll n ew circ u it p a ck Inser t softw are m em ory card into the active SP E . U se the "lis t config soft" com m and to verify yo u h ave th e c o rre c t vers io n. If the softw are does n ot m atch or the update file contains data es calate. R e -in se r t th e sta n d by S P E p ro c e sso r circ u it p a ck E R eplace the trans lation m em or y ca rd in th e a c tive SP E Is su e th e "te st" co m m a n d s o n th e N E W circ u it p a ck to re so lve a la rm s In s e rt s o ftw a re m em ory card into stand by S PE If "list" o r "te st" co m m a n d s a re blo cke d a fte r re p e a te d trie s, u se th e "b u syo u t sp e -s ta n d b y" a n d "re le a s e sp e -sta n d by" co m m a n d s a n d try a g a in A re th e re o th e r d e fe ctive circu it p a cks to b e re p la c e d ? R eplace proc essor circ uit pack (do not rem ove S P E pow er) R epla ce s oftw are m em ory card w ith trans lation m em or y card w hen prom pted from S AT YES B IG N O R E prom pt from S AT to repla ce ac tive trans lation m em or y card. W ait 3 m inutes. NO Th row th e SP E se le ct sw itch e s to th e n o rm a l p o s itio n , o n e a t a tim e W a it fo r b a ck gro u n d S P E te stin g to fin is h "sta tu s sys te m 1 " Figure 6-3. "lis t configuration softw are-vers ions long" to verify identic al active a nd standby softw are E Page 3 Procedure for Replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Issue 1 August 1997 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Procedure for Installing/Replacing the Inter-Cabinet Cable Page 6-31 Procedure for Installing/Replacing the Inter-Cabinet Cable The Inter-Cabinet Cables (ICCs) are physically located on the back of the cabinet behind the panels and between the A control cabinet and the B control cabinet. The panels must first be opened to see the ICCs. ! WARNING: Damage can be done to the Inter-Cabinet Cables during removal or installation. Follow the guidelines listed below to minimize the possibility of damage to the cables and later need of replacement. To remove ICC-A, ICC-B, or ICC-C: 1. Remove power from the system. Refer to the ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 2. Grasp the cable connector, not the cable itself. Attempting to remove a cable by pulling on the cable itself can damage the cable-to-connector interface. 3. Pull the cable straight out. Pulling the connector from the backplane at an angle can bend the backplane pins. 4. Push the ICC connector onto the insulated sleeves. ! CAUTION: The pins should not show through the back of this connector. If they do, they ICC may be shorted out. The only way to check the connector-cable-connector integrity is with a continuity test. To re-install ICC-A, ICC-B, or ICC-C: 1. Verify that the backplane pins are not bent. If any are bent, they must be straightened or replaced before continuing. 2. Align the ICC connector with the backplane pins and push partially into place. 3. Use a dental mirror and light to view the back sides of the connector. Determine that all 50 backplane pins are seated correctly in the ICC connector. 4. Push the ICC connectors fully onto the insulated sleeves. The pins should not show through the back of the connectors. If the pins show through, the ICC may be shorted out. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-32 Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing Sometimes it is necessary to block Standby SPE maintenance activities so that system technician commands that test Standby SPE components can be conducted without being blocked with the G3MT terminal message line “Standby SPE busy with another task; for information use ‘status system’.” To block Standby SPE maintenance activities, perform the steps listed below. ! WARNING: The following procedure involves throwing the SPE Select Switches to hard-select the current Active SPE. After completing the circuit pack replacement procedure, verify that the SPE Select Switches have been returned to the AUTO position both by noting their position and by noting that the SPE Select Switch LEDs on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs are not on. 1. Throw the SPE Select Switches (on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs) to force selection of the current Active SPE. If SPE-B is currently the Active SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the right. If SPE-A is currently the Active SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the left. 2. Issue the status system 1st-cabinet command from the G3MT terminal. The status system form indicates the presence of MAJOR and MINOR alarms on both SPEs. If SPE alarm counts are displayed, run component tests to resolve these alarms. Allowed tests include test spe-standby, test duplication-interface, and test shadow-link. Use the next step if the allowed test commands are not accepted, otherwise skip the next step. ! CAUTION: If the Duplication Interface circuit pack is being tested, Test #278 fails because the SPE Select Switches are thrown. 3. Issue the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE into a mode to accept the test commands attempted in the previous step. Wait 5 minutes for the Standby SPE to initialize and issue the status system 1st-cabinet command. If the Standby SPE failed to initialize if the Standby SPE Mode is down. If the Standby SPE Mode is maint/init or maint/entering, execute the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command up to 2 more times. If this step does not succeed, try this procedure again. 4. Move each SPE Select Switch back to the AUTO position. ! WARNING: Move only one SPE Select Switch at a time. DO NOT move both switches at the same time. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-33 Maintenance activity is performed automatically on the Standby SPE after the SPE Select Switches are returned to their AUTO positions in Step 4. This can be verified by issuing the status system command and noting that the Standby SPE is labeled as “maint.” The maintenance activity takes from 10 to 30 minutes to complete. (The time required for the maintenance activity to complete depends upon the number of TN765 Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of administered ports on the Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of administered data channels on the TN777B Network Control circuit pack, and the current load on the system.) The completion of the maintenance activity can be verified by issuing the status system command and noting whether the Standby SPE is labeled as ”standby.” Although not recommended at this stage of the procedure, the maintenance activity on the Standby SPE can be preempted using the refresh spe-standby command. To preempt the maintenance activity, continue issuing the refresh spe-standby command followed by status system command until the status system form shows that the Standby SPE is labeled ”standby.” It may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled “standby” on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the G3MT terminal message line errors “Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors” or “Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later.” Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 6 Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing Issue 1 August 1997 Page 6-34 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 7 Issue 1 August 1997 LED Interpretation General LED Interpretation Page 7-1 7 General The lighting and unlighting of LEDs indicates to the system user the status of various maintenance components in the system. LEDS are located on the attendant console, on all circuit packs in the switch cabinets and, optionally, on customer-designated voice terminals. The following LEDS are included in the system: ■ Processor circuit pack and maintenance circuit pack LEDs ■ Duplication interface circuit pack LEDs ■ Attendant console LEDs ■ Carrier power unit LEDs ■ Power distribution unit LEDs ■ Control and port circuit pack status LEDs Processor and Maintenance Circuit Pack LEDs The front panels of the Processor circuit pack and the Maintenance circuit pack are identical. Each has two groups of LEDs. One group indicates the status of the pack, and the other group (which includes the Major, Minor, and Warning alarms described previously) reflects maintenance conditions in the entire system (that is, the PPN and EPN cabinets). See Figure 7-1. ■ Red (alarm)—the system has detected a fault in this circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Processor and Maintenance Circuit Pack LEDs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 7-2 NOTE: Alarms on the PROCR, PR-MAINT, MEMORY, and PR-MEM MOs are indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack. ■ Green (test)—the system is running tests on this circuit pack. NOTE: On the Standby Processor circuit pack, green means that the Standby Switch Processing Element (SPE) is not refreshed (that is, it is in Maintenance or Down Mode). NOTE: On the Maintenance circuit pack, the green LED may blink very faintly once per second. This is the normal operating state of the Maintenance circuit pack. The faint blink is due to a once-per-second self-test executed by the Maintenance circuit pack. ■ Yellow (busy)—this circuit pack is in use. In a high or critical reliability system, the yellow LED is always off for the Standby Processor and Memory circuit packs even when in Maint mode. ■ MAJOR ALARMS (red) ■ MINOR ALARMS (red) ■ WRNG (warning) ALARMS (yellow) ■ ■ ACK (acknowledgment) (green)—indicates Major or Minor alarms have been reported to INADS EMERGENCY TRANSFER (red)—indicates emergency transfer has been invoked NOTE: If the AC power cord is unplugged from the control cabinet, the emergency transfer feature invokes, however the EMERGENCY TRANSFER LED (red) is not lit due to loss of AC power. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 7-3 ALARM LED (RED) TEST LED (GREEN) BUSY LED (AMBER) ALARMS MAJOR MINOR MAJOR ALARM LED (RED) MINOR ALARM LED (RED) WARNING ALARM LED (AMBER) WRNG ACK EMERGENCY TRANSFER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT LED (GREEN) OFF CONTROL SWITCH ON EMERGENCY TRANSFER AUTO EMERGENCY TRANSFER LED (RED) Figure 7-1. Indicators on Maintenance and Processor Circuit Packs Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs In a High or Critical Reliability system, there are two Duplication Interface circuit packs. One is located in carrier A and one in carrier B of the PPN. Each circuit pack has two groups of LEDs. The top three have the traditional function of indicating the status of the pack. The LED located at the bottom of the faceplate directly beneath the SPE AUTO switch is labeled OVERRIDE. Under normal operating conditions, the SPE AUTO switch is in the AUTO (center) position (see Figure 7-2). This means that the system controls which SPE is active. However, there will be times (during maintenance activity, for example) when you, the technician, may choose to manually override the SPE selection function. To override system selection of the Active processor, move the SPE Select switches one at a time on both Duplication Interface circuit packs from the AUTO position DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 7-4 to either the ‘‘A’’ position or the ‘‘B’’ position. Thus, when both SPE Select switches have been moved to either ‘‘A’’ or ‘‘B,’’ the OVERRIDE LED turns red and lights steadily. NOTE: Failure to move both SPE Select switches to the same position causes the system to retain control of processor selection. To return control of the SPE selection to the system, return the SPE Select switches on both Duplication Interface circuit packs to the AUTO position (one at a time to avoid accidentally selecting the other SPE). The OVERRIDE LED goes dark. ALARM LED (RED) TEST LED (GREEN) BUSY LED (AMBER) SPE AUTO SPE SELECT SWITCH A B OVERRIDE SPE SELECT LED (RED) Figure 7-2. Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Indicators DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Attendant Console LEDs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 7-5 Attendant Console LEDs The console has two red LEDs, labeled ALM and ACK, on the left side of the dial. The left LED lights steadily when there is a Major or Minor alarm at the switch cabinet. The right LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully reported to INADS. If the system is unable to report the alarm to INADS, the LED flashes; signaling the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm. Cabinet Power Unit LEDs For a description of Cabinet Power Unit LEDs, refer to “AC-POWER” for AC-Powered Systems and “DC-POWER” for DC-Powered Systems in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Power Distribution Unit LEDs For a description of Power Distribution LEDs, refer to “AC-POWER” for AC-Powered Systems and “DC-POWER” for DC-Powered Systems in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs Each circuit pack has three LEDs on the front panel visible at the front of the carrier. On all circuit packs, except the TN736 Power Unit, the LEDs indicate: 1. Red (alarm) — If the circuit pack is communicating with the system, the system has detected a fault in this circuit pack. An on-board alarm for this circuit pack is displayed in the Alarm Log. The circuit pack also lights this LED when either the circuit pack has not yet initialized communication with the system or when the circuit pack loses contact with the system and stops functioning (circuit pack is said to be ‘‘in reset’’). In these cases, there may not be an alarm in the Alarm Log. To determine if the red LED is lit because the circuit pack is not in contact with the system, issue the list configuration board PCSS command, where PCSS refers to the slot containing this circuit pack. If the system does not detect the circuit pack, this command returns ‘‘Identifier not assigned’’ or ‘‘no board.’’ If the circuit pack has just been inserted, the system may still be initializing the circuit pack. If, after 5 minutes, the circuit pack still has not initialized communications with the system, check the MO for any special instructions (for example, EPN Maintenance circuit pack can stop EXP-INTF circuit pack from initializing). If the MO does not provide the needed information, perform the following steps: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs Issue 1 August 1997 Page 7-6 ■ Check the Error Log for TONE-BD and TDM-BUS errors. Enter test tdm P where P is the port network containing the relevant slot. Refer to” Restarting Nonfunctioning Port Circuit Packs” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ in the general description of the “TDM-BUS”. Enter test tone-clock PC, where P is the network containing the relevant slot, and C is the carrier containing the relevant slot. Follow appropriate sections for any “TONE-BD” and “TDM-BUS” errors. ■ Reseat the suspect circuit pack. ! WARNING: Reseating some circuit packs may be very destructive (for example, Control Carrier circuit packs.) Wait 5 minutes. Then issue the list configuration board PCSS command. If the result indicates that the system still has not registered the circuit pack, go to next step. ■ Try to insert the circuit pack into a different slot and try to insert a different circuit pack into the suspect slot (provided the maintenance documentation for this circuit pack does not warn against either of these actions). ■ If the system seems to be functioning correctly, but the circuit pack does not start communicating with the system, replace the circuit pack. 2. Green (test)—the system is running tests on this circuit pack. 3. Yellow (busy)—indicates that the circuit pack is in use. NOTE: A port circuit pack also lights its red LED when it performs initialization tests (for example, when the circuit pack is initially inserted into the system). If all initialization tests pass, the red LED is turned off. If any initialization tests fail, the red LED remains lighted and the circuit pack is not placed into service. Packet circuit packs such as the TN556 ISDN BRI-Line and TN570 Expansion Interface perform extensive initialization tests and light both the red and green LEDs during that testing. During the various states of operation (start-up testing, normal operation, circuit failure, and so forth) circuit pack status LED indications appear as shown in Table 7-1. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs Table 7-1. Page 7-7 Circuit Pack Status LEDs Equipment Type Port Circuit Packs LED Description Red On briefly during power up, circuit pack reseating, resetting, and system reset. Steadily on if circuit pack fails start-up test or fails while in use. Off during normal operation. Green Briefly on during circuit pack testing following power up, circuit pack reseating, and system reset. On during periodic, scheduled, and system technician demanded testing. Off during normal operation. Yellow On when any port in the circuit pack is in use, otherwise, off. The yellow LED on the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack may blink. This has special meaning for systems using Packet Bus. Refer to “Packet Bus” for more information. Control Circuit Packs Red On briefly during power up and system reset. Steadily on if circuit pack fails start-up test or fails while in use. Off during normal operation. Control Circuit Packs (continued) Green On briefly during board testing following power up and system reset. Also on during periodic, scheduled, and system technician-demanded testing. Off during normal operation. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 7 LED Interpretation Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs Table 7-1. Page 7-8 Circuit Pack Status LEDs — Continued Equipment Type LED Yellow Description Network Control ■ Lit when one of the data channels is in use ■ On the TN777B Network Control circuit pack, a fourth yellow LED with the label ‘‘Card in use’’ is lit when the translation card is in use. Processor ■ Lit during processor initialization. Lit steady on the Active SPE and off during normal operation on the Standby SPE. Memory. ■ Lit during system initialization (stays lit until Emergency Transfer is turned off). Lit steady on the Active SPE and off during normal operation on the Standby SPE. Packet Control ■ Lit when at least one Packet Control is in use. Packet Control LEDs do not light up (not even for the test led command) if the packet feature is not enabled on the Systems-Parameters Maintenance screen. Tone Detector/Generator ■ Slow blinking when clock is in use. Otherwise, off. Processor Interface ■ Lit when one (or more) channels (links) is in use. Otherwise, off. Duplication Interface ■ Lit steady on the Active SPE and dark during normal operation on the Standby SPE. Exception: Duplication Interface Circuit Pack A has the yellow LED lit steady if Tone/Clock Circuit Pack 1B is active, regardless of which SPE is active and which is standby. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout access-endpoint Page 8-1 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids 8 8 For Maintenance Objects and Maintenance Commands for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System (DWBS), refer to the appropriate maintenance documentation that accompanies the DWBS. This chapter provides additional trouble-clearing information for resolving both system-alarmed and user-reported troubles. This chapter supplements the information found in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. The information consists of using the maintenance commands as trouble-clearing aids. The maintenance commands are used to control, test, and obtain information associated with maintenance objects (MOs). The commands require the use of the administration terminal or remote Initialization and Administration System (INADS) interface (a valid login and password to perform maintenance are required). In this chapter, the commands are first identified and organized into categories. Thereafter, each command is described individually. busyout access-endpoint This command is destructive. This command busyouts a specified access endpoint. Action/ Object busyout accessendpoint Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions extension Extension number of access endpoint (per dial-plan) init inads craft nms none See below Examples: busyout access-endpoint 25012 busyout access-endpoint 77868 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout board Page 8-2 Feature Interactions ■ If there is an active call on the specified access endpoint, this command causes the call to drop. Output The following example shows the output for the busyout access-endpoint 22502 command and assumes that access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. busyout access-endpoint 22502 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C1101 WAE-PORT 01C1102 WAE-PORT 01C1103 WAE-PORT 01C1104 WAE-PORT 01C1105 WAE-PORT 01C1106 WAE-PORT Alt. Name 22502 22502 22502 22502 22502 22502 Result PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name Name of maintenance object (wideband access endpoint = WAE-PORT; single port access endpoint = TIE-DS1) Alt. Name The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field contains the extension number of the access endpoint. Result Test result: Pass, Fail, Abort Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout board This command puts all the ports associated with the specified access endpoint in a maintenance busy (craft busy) state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out access endpoint ports until they are released. When the access endpoint ports are maintenance busy, the access endpoint is removed from active service on the switch, meaning that no call processing activity can include the busied objects because terminals on the administered Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout board Page 8-3 ports do not receive dial-tone. Warning alarms are generated on each busied out port in the access endpoint. The release access-endpoint command returns all the ports associated with the specified access endpoint to operation. ! WARNING: This command is service disrupting and may cause extraneous alarms. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout board location Board address (PCSSpp) init inads craft none None Examples: busyout board 01c11 busyout board 02c15 Output The following example shows the output from the busyout board 1c07 command, and assumes that board in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7 is an analog board with three administered ports. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. busyout board 01C07 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C07 ANL-BD 01C0702 ANL-LINE 01C0701 ANL-LINE 01C0703 ANL-LINE Alt. Name 51001 Result PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout cdr-link Page 8-4 Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. Alt. Name If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Result Test result: Pass, Abort, or Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout cdr-link This command busyouts a maintenance object associated with the specified call detail recording (cdr)-link. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout cdr-link link-id Link identifier (primary or secondary) init inads craft Primary None Examples: busyout cdr-link primary busyout cdr-link secondary nms Output The following example shows the output from the busyout cdr-link primary command. busyout cdr-link primary SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port 1 Maintenance Name CDR-LNK Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit); 1 = primary, 2 = secondary link Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout data-module Page 8-5 Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. Alt. Name If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Result Test result: Pass, Abort, or Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout data-module This command puts the specified data module in a maintenance busy state, even uninstalled data modules. No periodic or scheduled tests is performed on the busied out data module or data channel until it is released and no call processing can be executed on the data modules or over the data channels. Warning alarms are generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS can access the state of the objects. The release data module command returns the specified data module (or data channel) to operation. On a system with the duplication option, a busyout of a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) or a Processor Interface Port Data Channels (PI-PT) are preserved across SPE interchanges. The data channel extension must be released before the data channel can be brought back into service. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout data-module extension Extension number (per dial-plan) init inads craft nms None None Example: busyout data-module 31300 Output The following example shows the output from the busyout data-module 300 command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout journal-printer busyout data-module 300 Page 8-6 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C1103 DIG-LINE Alt. Name 300 Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) or the data channel number Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Result Test result: Pass, Abort, or Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout journal-printer This command places the maintenance object associated with a specified pms-log or wakeup-log link in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out maintenance object until it is released. Also, no activity occurs over the links (for example, no data is transferred to the printer) and the link drops. Warning alarms are generated (Error type 18) on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can access object status. The release journal-printer command will return the object to operation. A link is comprised of several components. It involves a far end data module, a simulated data channel on a PKTINT board, a manager that initiates and maintains the link, and a controller/protocol that services the link. A controller/protocol is usually a transient process that exists for as long as the link is up. A link is considered up if a physical connection is established. A link can be considered to be up while no useful work can be performed over it, in this Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout journal-printer Page 8-7 case the link is insane and should be torn down. These links provide asynchronous data connections from the switch to peripherals. For general information on journal printer links, refer to the description of the ‘‘busyout pms-link’’ command. For information on what a journal printer is and does, refer to the description of the ‘‘status journal-link’’ command. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout journal-printer pms-log Link to pms (in output, port name for pms link =1) None See below wakeuplog Link to the wakeup logging facility (in output, port name = 0) init inads craft nms Examples: busyout journal-printer pms-log busyout journal-printer wakeup-log Feature Interactions Maintenance of a particular component on a link sometimes interferes with the maintenance of the link itself. For example, maintenance can put a link component in a busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may delay the recovery of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, disable the attempted re-setup of a link with the busyout command and the link will remain intact. If the link is already down, the busyout command stops periodic re-setup attempts on the link. Output The following example shows the output for the busyout journal-printer wakeup-log command. busyout journal-printer wakeup-log SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port 0 Maintenance Name JRNL-LINK Alt. Name Command successfully completed Result PASS Error Code Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout link Page 8-8 Field descriptions Port Physical object port address: 0 = wakeup log, 1 = pms log Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object Alt. Name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout link This command places maintenance objects associated with a specified link in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out maintenance objects until they are released. The link is marked out of service and is inaccessible to call processing. Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The release link command reactivates the objects. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout link link-id Processor Interface circuit pack 1a1 or 1b1 = 1 – 4 init inads craft none none Processor Interface circuit pack 1a2 or 1b2 = 5 – 8 Examples busyout link 1 Output The following example shows the output from the busyout link 1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. busyout link 1 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C0301 PI-LINK Alt. Name Command successfully completed Result PASS Error Code Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout mis Page 8-9 Field descriptions Port Port address represents link-id Maintenance Name The name of the busied out maintenance object Alt. Name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout mis This command places the management information system in the maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled maintenance is performed until it is released. When the object is busied out no call processing activity may be performed over the link. A warning alarm (error type 18) is generated on the busied out mis, so that INADS can determine its state. The command, release mis, reactivates the busied out mis. Action/Object Qualifier busyout mis Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Example: busyout mis init inads craft cust rcust None None Output The following example shows the output from the busyout mis command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. busyout mis SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name MIS Alt. Name Command Successfully Completed Result PASS Error Code Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout modem-pool Page 8-10 Field descriptions Port Not applicable Maintenance Name Name of busied out maintenance object: MIS Alt. Name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout modem-pool This command places specified installed and uninstalled modem pool groups or group members in the maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out modem pool groups or group members until they are released. When the object is maintenance busy it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). A single group member can be busied out by specifying the group and member number. All members in a modem pool group can be busied out by specifying the modem pool group number. Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The command, release modem-pool, reactivates the specified modem pool group or group member. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout modem-pool group Group number = 1 – 5 none none member Member number = 1 – 32 (a member is a pair of analog and digital line ports — two pair for integrated pool modem. init inads craft Examples busyout modem-pool 1 busyout modem-pool 4/3 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout packet-control Page 8-11 Output busyout modem-pool 1 SPE B COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C0701 01C0703 Alt. Name MODEM-PT MODEM-PT Result Error Code PASS PASS Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name Name of busied out maintenance object: MODEM-PT Alt. Name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout packet-control This command places the packet-control circuit pack in a maintenance busy state, and tears down each point-to-point signaling link that terminates on this packet-control. No periodic or scheduled test is performed on the busied out packet-control until it is released. A warning alarm (error type 18) is generated on the busied out packet-control, so that INADS can determine the state of the object. The release packet-control command reactivates the board and initiates recovery on all point-to-point signaling links terminated on this packet-control. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout packet-control Page 8-12 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults busyout packet-control location Location applies to duplicated configurations only. Location represents a carrier that contains packet-control in the system. Valid locations = 1A or 1B. init inads craft simplex systems (optional) = cabinet 1, carrier A Feature Interactions See below duplex systems = cabinet 1, carrier of choice. Examples busyout packet-control 1A busyout packet-control 1B Feature Interactions ■ In a duplicated system, the packet-control busyout of standby process complex is not allowed. ■ When the packet-control in the active control complex is busied out, all connectivity across the Packet Bus is severed. Thus, all ISDN-BRI point-to-point signaling links that have been established through the active packet-control are torn down by the busyout packet-control command. The release packet-control command re-establishes all Packet Bus connectivity. Output The following example shows the output from the busyout packet-control 1A command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. busyout packet-control 1A SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port 1A Maintenance Name Alt. Name PKT-CTRL Command successfully completed Result PASS Error Code Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout pms-link Page 8-13 Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier) Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object (PKT-CTRL). Alt. Name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout pms-link This command places all maintenance objects associated with a property management system link in the maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled maintenance is performed on the busied out maintenance objects until they are released. When the object is maintenance busy the object is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object) and the link is dropped. Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The command, release pms link, reactivates the busied out objects on the link. These links provide asynchronous data connections from switches to peripherals; they are composed of a: ■ Far-end data module ■ Simulated data channel on a NETCON board ■ Manager that initiates and maintains the link ■ Controller/protocol that services the link For information on PMS, see the description of the ‘‘status pms-link’’ command. Action/Object Qualifier busyout pms-link Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Example: init inads craft none See below busyout pms-link Feature Interactions Maintenance of a particular component on a link sometimes interferes with the maintenance of the link itself. For example, maintenance can put a link component in a busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may delay the recovery of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a component only taking place when the component is idle. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout port Page 8-14 Therefore, disable the attempted re-setup of a link with the busyout command and the link remains intact. If the link is already down, the busyout command stops periodic re-setup attempts on the link. Output The following example is a display of the busyout pms-link command. busyout pms-link SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name PMS-LINK Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Always blank Maintenance Name Name of maintenance object: PMS-LINK Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout port This command places the specified port on a circuit pack in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out port until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy, it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The command, release port, reactivates the administered port on a circuit pack at a specified location. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout port location Port location: PPsspp init inads craft none see below Examples: busyout port 01c1101 busyout port 02c1501 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout pri-endpoint Page 8-15 Output The following example is a display of the busyout port command. busyout port 01C0701 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C0701 ANL-LINE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO lineP/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout pri-endpoint This command places all PRI endpoint ports (B-channels) associated with the specified PRI endpoint in a maintenance busy (system technician busy) state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out PRI endpoint ports until they are released. When the PRI endpoint port is maintenance busy it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms (error type ???) are generated on each busied out port. The command, release pri-endpoint, reactivates all ports (B-channels) associated with the specified PRI endpoint extension and the switch attempts to negotiate with the far-end PRI terminal adapter to reactivate each PRI endpoint port (B-channel). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout sp-link Page 8-16 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults busyout pri-endpoint extension PRI endpoint extension number init inads craft nms none Examples: busyout pri-endpoint 25012 busyout pri-endpoint 77868 Feature Interactions If active calls resides on specified PRI endpoints, the busyout command drops the call. Once the PRI endpoint is maintenance-busy, call attempts from far-end PRI terminal adapters are denied with a cause value 17. Output busyout pri-endpoint 22501 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01B2001 PE-BCHL 01B2002 PE-BCHL 01B2003 PE-BCHL 01B2004 PE-BCHL 01B2005 PE-BCHL 01B2006 PE-BCHL Alt. Name 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 Result PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object: PE-BCHL Alt. Name Extension number of PRI endpoint Result Test result: Pass, Fail, Abort Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout sp-link This command places the system printer link into a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled maintenance is performed on the busied out system printer link until it is released. Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout spe-standby Page 8-17 each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can determine the state of the object. Placing the system printer link in a busyout state blocks access to the system printer. The release sp-link command reactivates the system printer link. Action/Object Qualifier busyout sp-link Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Examples: busyout sp-link init inads craft none none Output busyout sp-link SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name SYS-PRNT Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Not applicable Maintenance Name Type of maintenance object that is busied out: SYS-PRNT Alt. Name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout spe-standby This command raises the Fault Severity Level of the Standby SPE (see reference 5) of the standby Switch Processing Element (SPE) by raising a Warning Off-board alarm against STBY-SPE. Because a Warning Off-board STBY-SPE alarm is defined to have the highest Fault Severity of all alarms the affect the health of an SPE (refer to the Reset System MUS), the chance that an SPE interchange will occur is diminished, but does not guarantee that an SPE interchange will not occur. Once the standby SPE is busied out, an SPE interchange occurs if the standby SPE is hard selected with the SPE Select switches or the active SPE goes into SPE down mode. This command also stops any activity currently executing on the standby SPE and disables memory shadowing to the standby SPE. Periodic and scheduled testing cannot start on the standby SPE while it is busied out. The busyout state of the standby SPE and Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout spe-standby Page 8-18 the STBY-SPE Warning alarm are maintained across a reset system 1 (Warm restart) and a reset system 2 (Cold 2 restart) but are removed after all other levels of restart. Action/Object Qualifier busyout spe-standby Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Examples: busyout spe-standby init inads craft none See below Feature Interactions ■ When a busyout of the standby SPE is performed, the fault severity level of the standby SPE is set to the highest possible value and memory shadowing is turned off. This is done to lessen the probability that the system switches to the standby SPE. However, in some cases a “spontaneous” (hard) interchange of the SPEs may still occur. ■ This command can be used as a mechanism to turn off memory shadowing of the standby SPE. ■ If the standby SPE is in poor health (less than optimum), memory shadowing can not be disabled, or communication to the standby is impossible a busyout of the standby SPE are still successful. Output The following example is a display of the busyout spe-standby command. busyout spe-standby SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port 01B Maintenance Name STBY-SPE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Standby SPE cabinet and carrier location (01A or 01B) Maintenance Name Always STBY-SPE Alt. Name Always blank Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout station Page 8-19 busyout station This command places the installed and uninstalled administered voice terminal extension (station) in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out station until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The command, release station, reactivates the specified voice terminal extension. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout station extension Extension number (per dial-plan) init inads craft none none Examples: busyout station 10020 busyout station 32770 Output The following example is a display of the busyout station command. busyout station 1002 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C1102 DIG-LINE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object Alt. Name Alternate means to identify maintenance object: extension number Result Test result: Pass, Fail, Abort Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout tdm Page 8-20 busyout tdm This command places the specified tdm bus in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out bus until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out tdm bus, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The command, release tdm, reactivates the specified tdm bus. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults busyout tdm pn number pn number = TDM bus Port Network number to be busied out. init inads craft none bus bus = “a” or “b” specifies desired half of TDM bus. Each 512 time slot TDM bus configures as two duplicate 256 time slot buses. This division allows duplication of control channels and dedicated tone time slots. “a” bus = the default control bus; “b” bus = the default tone bus. Feature Interactions If a bus is busied out, no calls are torn down. and no new calls are set up. Dedicated tone time slots must be moved to another bus (the other half of the duplicated bus) before a busyout of a particular bus is allowed. Examples: busyout tdm 1a Output The following example is a display of the busyout tdm command. busyout tdm port-network 1 bus a SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port PN 01A Maintenance Name TDM-BUS Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address and associated TDM number and bus (PNA or PNB) Alt. Name Not applicable Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout tone-clock Page 8-21 Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object: TDM-BUS Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout tone-clock This command places the specified tone/clock in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out object until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each tone clock circuit pack busied out, so that INADS can determine the state of the objects. The command, release tone-clock, reactivates the specified tone/clock. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout tone-clock location Physical location (PC) init inads craft 1 (one) none Examples: busyout tone-clock 01c busyout tone-clock 03d Output The following example is a display of the busyout tone-clock command. busyout tone-clock 1a SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port 01A 01A 01A Maintenance Name TONE-PT TDM-CLK TONE-BD Alt. Name Result PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Tone/clock board address (cabinet-carrier) Maintenance Name Circuit pack name: TONE-PT, TDM-CLK, TONE-BD Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids busyout trunk Page 8-22 Alt. name Not applicable Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. busyout trunk This command places the specified installed or uninstalled trunk group or trunk group member in a maintenance busy state. No periodic or scheduled tests are performed on the busied out trunk groups or trunk group members until they are released. When the object is maintenance busy it is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object). A single group member can be busied out by specifying the group and member number. All members in a trunk group can be busied out by specifying the trunk group number. Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object, so that INADS can access the state of the objects. The release trunk command reactivates the specified trunk group or group member. NOTE: If the user enters busyout trunk /, the lowest port-location in the group is busied out. This s NOT recommended. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout trunk group Trunk group number (1–99) none none member Number of a trunk within a trunk group (1 – 99) init inads craft Examples: busyout trunk 78 busyout trunk 78/1 Output The following example is a display of the busyout trunk command. busyout trunk 78/1 SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C1505 CO-TRK Alt. Name 78/01 Command successfully completed Result PASS Error Code Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids cancel hardware-group Page 8-23 Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. cancel hardware-group This command temporarily or permanently aborts the execution of a test hardware-group command. To resume testing, enter resume hardware-group or test hardware group. Action/Object Qualifier cancel hardware-group Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Examples: cancel hardware-group init inads none See below Feature Interactions ■ Scheduled and Periodic Maintenance When a test hardware-group is entered, all activity related to scheduled background maintenance, periodic background maintenance, and data audits suspends for the duration of the test hardware-group command. All activity related to scheduled background maintenance, periodic background maintenance, and data audits restarts if the test hardware-group command is canceled. ■ Status Hardware-group The status hardware-group command displays the state of a canceled test hardware-group command as canceled. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change circuit-packs Page 8-24 change circuit-packs This command allows users to administer circuit packs that are inserted into the system port, expansion control, and switch node carriers. It is used to configure the system when circuit packs are not physically inserted. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions change circuit-packs cabinet number Cabinet number of circuit packs to change init inads craft cust nms 1 (one) none Examples: change circuit-packs 1 change circuit-packs 2 Output The following example shows the output from the change circuit-packs 1 command (SCC) All five pages are shown here. change circuit-packs 1 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet: 1 Cabinet Layout: single-carrier Slot Code Sfx Name 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10: TN570 TN767 TN556 TN754 TN769 B EXPANSION INTF DS1 INTERFACE BRI LINE DIGITAL LINE ANALOG LINE ’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict. Page 1 of 5 Carrier: A Carrier Type: processor Slot Code Sfx Name 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change circuit-packs change circuit-packs 1 Page 8-25 Page 2 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet: 1 Cabinet Layout: Slot Code Sfx 00: 01: TN754 02: TN754 03: TN754 04: TN754 05: TN754 06: TN754 07: TN754 08: TN754 09: TN754 10: TN754 single-carrier Name DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE Carrier: B Carrier Type: port Slot Code Sfx Name 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: ’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict. change circuit-packs 1 Page 3 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet: 1 Cabinet Layout: Slot Code Sfx 00: 01: TN748 C 02: 03: 04: TN771 C 05: TN748 B 06: TN767 07: TN742 08: TN762 B 09: TN742 10: single-carrier Name TONE DETECTOR MAINTENANCE/TEST TONE DETECTOR DS1 INTERFACE ANALOG LINE HYBRID LINE ANALOG LINE ’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict. Carrier: C Carrier Type: port Slot Code Sfx Name 11: TN754 DIGITAL LINE 12: TN753 DID TRUNK 13: TN742 ANALOG LINE 14: TN760 C TIE TRUNK 15: TN747 B CO TRUNK 16: TN742 ANALOG LINE 17: TN556 BRI LINE 18: TN742 ANALOG LINE 19: 20: TN754 DIGITAL LINE Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change circuit-packs Page 8-26 change circuit-packs 1 Page 4 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet: 1 Carrier: D Cabinet Layout: single-carrier Carrier Type: port Slot Code Sfx Name Slot Code Sfx Name 00: 11: 01: 12: TN722 B DS1 TIE TRUNK 02: 13: TN760 C TIE TRUNK 03: TN750 B ANNOUNCEMENT 14: 04: 15: TN754 DIGITAL LINE 05: 16: 06: 17: TN742 ANALOG LINE 07: TN747 B CO TRUNK 18: 08: TN753 DID TRUNK 19: 09: TN742 ANALOG LINE 20: 10: ’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict. change circuit-packs 1 Page 5 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet: 1 Cabinet Layout: single-carrier Slot Code Sfx Name 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10: TN570 TN747 TN747 TN747 TN747 TN747 B B B B B EXPANSION INTF CO TRUNK CO TRUNK CO TRUNK CO TRUNK CO TRUNK Carrier: E Carrier Type: port Slot Code Sfx Name 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: ’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict. Field descriptions Cabinet Administered cabinet number Cabinet Layout Type of cabinet (single-carrier) Carrier In-use cabinet carrier Carrier Type Carrier function (port, processor, or expansion control) Slot Slot numbers (0 - 21). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change synchronization 8 Page 8-27 Code Circuit pack code (TN number) to identify the circuit pack type Sfx Lists the suffix, if applicable Name Alphanumeric circuit pack name change synchronization Each system contains a hierarchy of sources used for timing synchronization. DS1 inputs to the external stratum 3 clock affect stratum 3 synchronization hierarchy. Primary and secondary fields reflect Stratum 4 synchronization. If all fields are blank, the tone clock board within each PN provides timing for that PN. Action/Object Qualifier change synchronization Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Examples: change synchronization change synch init inads craft cust rcust bcms none Feature Interactions DS1 interface, BRI trunk, or UDS1 board selected as either a primary or secondary synch source cannot be removed on the DS1 circuit pack administration form or the regular circuit pack administration form. Output The following example shows the output for the change synchronization command. “4” was entered in the stratum field. change synchronization Page 1 of 1 SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE (circuit pack location) Stratum: 4 Primary: _____ Secondary: _____ Location Name Slip Location Name Slip NOTE: DS1 and BRI trunk source will result in stratum 4, type II synchronization The following output example shows the output for the change synchronization command. “3” was entered in the stratum field. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance change synchronization Page 8-28 Page 1 of 1 SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE (DS1 circuit pack location) Stratum: 3 Port Network: 1 Field descriptions Stratum: Current synchronization stratum (3, 4) Primary: First choice system synchronization source (blank entry = no synchronization); field valid only if stratum 4 synchronization is specified. Secondary: Second choice system synchronization source (blank = no synchronization); valid if stratum 4 synchronization selected Location: Circuit pack location of all administered DS1 circuit packs (port network, carrier and board slot) Name: User-defined name for the DS1 circuit pack (blank = no user-defined name assigned) Slip: If DS1 circuit pack has slip alarm, y; if not, n. Port Network: Display-only field specifying the port network that supplies synchronization through the tone clock circuit pack (valid for stratum 3 synchronization) change system-parameters maintenance This command specifies and displays scheduled maintenance operations and maintenance support functions. It also activates and deactivates INADS alarm origination during repairs. To deactivate alarm origination: 1. Make a note of the current entries in the Alarm Origination and CPE Alarm fields so you can restore them later. 2. Change the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field to “neither.” 3. Change the CPE Alarm Activation Level field to “none.” 4. If daily scheduled maintenance must remain idle during a maintenance procedure, set the Start Time field to a time after the session ends. If daily Scheduled Maintenance is running and needs to be deactivated, set the Stop Time field to one minute after the current time. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Page 8-29 5. Press Enter and verify that the screen displays the message: Command successfully completed NOTE: For earlier releases of system software, disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form. NOTE: When finished working on the switch be sure to return all fields to their original settings. Action/Object change system-parameters maintenance Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Examples: change system-parameters maintenance init inads craft cust rcust none none Output The following output example shows a display of the change system-parameters maintenance command change system-parameters maintenance MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS Product Identification: First OSS Telephone Number: Second OSS Telephone Number: Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers: Cleared Alarm Notification? Restart Notification? Test Remote Access Port? CPE Alarm Activation Level: Packet Bus Activated? Customer Access to INADS Port? Repeat Dial Interval (mins): SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Start Time: Daily Maintenance: Control Channel Interchange: SPE Interchange: 22: 00 daily no no 1000000000 5551212 5551213 both y y n none n n 7 Page 1 of 3 Abbrev Alarm Report? y Abbrev Alarm Report? n Suspension Threshold: 5_ Stop Time: 04: 00 Save Translation: daily System Clocks Interchange: no EXP-LINK Interchange: no Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance change system-parameters maintenance Page 8-30 Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification ) Minimum Threshold for TTRs: 4 Minimum Threshold for CPTRs: 1 Minimum Threshold for Call Classifier Ports: _ TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST (Extension) Test Type 100: Test Type 102: Test Type 105: ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN-PRI TEST CALL Extension: _____ ISDN BRI Service SPID: _____ DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension: _____ LOSS PLAN (Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required) Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss: _____ SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Disk? y Packet Intf1? y Packet Intf2? n change system-parameters maintenance Packet Intf3? n Page 3 of 3 MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Modem Connection: external Data Bits: 8 Parity: none Modem Name: intel RTS/CTS Enabled: Asynchronous Data Mode: DTE Auto-Data Speed: Disable Data Compression: Enable Error Control: Misc. Init. Param: \Q3 Auto Answer Ring Count (rings): &M0&Q0 Dial Type: \J1 Adjustable Make/Break Ratio: H0%C0 Dial Command: \N3 No Answer Time-out: ____________________ S0=10 T &P0 D S7=255 Help/Error Message Line Command Line The following fields describe how to administer the change system-parameters maintenance form. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-31 Operations Support Parameters Product Identification Identifies switch to an Operations Support System (OSS): 10-digit number starting with 1. First OSS Telephone Number Switch reports alarms first to the First OSS telephone number (for example, INADS or Trouble Tracker). The number must be obtained from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or the TSC. (# and * are not allowed in the telephone number.) Abbrev Alarm Report Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the first OSS. (yes) Second OSS Telephone Number The switch reports alarms secondly to the second OSS telephone number. For example, INADS or DEFINITY SNMP. The number must be obtained from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or the TSC. (# and * are not allowed in the telephone number.) Abbrev Alarm Report Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the second OSS. (no) Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers Indicates one of four options for alarm origination (neither): ”both” = Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic call to both administered OSS telephone numbers. “first-only” = Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic call to the first administered OSS number. “neither” = alarm origination does not occur; reports are not sent to either number. “second no-backup” = Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic call to the first administered OSS telephone number. If calling the first OSS telephone number fails four times, the switch calls the second administered OSS telephone number until calling the first OSS telephone number is successful. NOTE: Before Release 5, the name of this field is Alarm Origination Activated. If Alarm Origination is deactivated, Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification deactivate, even though they may still be activate in the administration. Cleared Alarm Notification The switch originates calls to the OSS and sends an alarm resolution message once all previously-reported Major and Minor alarms are resolved. Activate Alarm Origination to enable Cleared Alarm Notification. (no) Restart Notification Enables the switch to originate calls to the OSS and report any system restarts caused by switch problems. Activate Alarm Origination to enable Restart Notification. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-32 Suspension Threshold Some problems cause alarms to be generated and resolved repeatedly. To detect these problems, the switch suspends Cleared Alarm Notification when it has reported the specified number of Cleared Alarm notifications in a 24 hour period. A suspended Cleared Alarm Notification reactivates with a successfully-completed “logoff” command, a system reset, or when the threshold is changed. This field is irrelevant if Cleared Alarm Notification or Alarm Origination are disabled. (1–15) Test Remote Access Port Indicates if remote access testing on the SYSAM circuit pack is active. This field should be set to yes when an INADS line is connected to the switch and a maintenance contract is in effect to maintain alarm origination capability. If no equipment is connected to the remote access port, or if a trunk for remote access and alarm origination is not provided, running tests on the remote access port on the SYSAM results in test failures. This causes unnecessary maintenance alarms and allows potentially destructive tests to be run. To prevent this set this field to no. CPE Alarm Activation Level Indicates the minimum level (Major, Minor or Warning) to activate Customer-Provided Equipment (CPE) alarm. If the level is none, the CPE does not activate for any alarm. (none) NOTE: When the switch goes into Emergency Transfer, the CPE alarm activates regardless of the CPE Alarm Activation Level setting. Packet Bus Activated If this field is set to yes, maintenance software assumes that a Packet Control circuit pack is installed. If packet endpoints (for example, ASAI, and/or BRI) are administered, and maintenance testing runs on both the Packet Control circuit pack and Packet Bus (set this field to yes after a packet control circuit pack is installed.). If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed in the system, a major alarm is raised against the PKT-CTRL MO. Change this field from yes to no if no packet endpoints are administered, to ensure that no packet endpoints can be administered if the packet bus deactivated. Set this field to yes after a Packet Control circuit pack is installed. If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed, then this field should be set to no (the only exception is system translations that do not have all required hardware). (no) Customer Access to INADS Port To prevent customer login ID access to system administration and maintenance interface control, set this field to no. Lucent Technologies services has sole access to this field. (no) Repeat Dial Interval (MMS) Number of minutes that the system must wait before attempting another call origination to an OSS. Lack of a far-end acknowledgment triggers the timer. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-33 Scheduled Maintenance An automated series of maintenance tests and operations runs daily according to the schedule and settings specified in the following fields Table 8-1. Scheduled Maintenance Settings Start Time Hour and minute (24-hour notation) when daily scheduled maintenance starts Stop Time The hour and minute when scheduled daily maintenance ceases. If any daily maintenance operations are not completed by this time, the system notes its stopped sequence location and includes those operations during the next scheduled daily maintenance. Daily Maintenance This display-only field lists the standard test series run by maintenance software during daily maintenance. Save Translation Indicates days that translation data in memory automatically saves to the Mass Storage System disk and/or tape devices during scheduled maintenance. The operation saves to disk, then completes a backup to tape. Translation data saves to both SPEs, if systems have duplicated SPEs. (daily, days of the week, or no) “No” prevents automatic saves. Control Channel Interchange Each port network has a pair of TDM busses called A and B. Each has a set of time slots dedicated to the control channel. One bus (at a time) carries the control channel in each PN. (daily, days of the week, or no) “No” prevents interchanges. (no) System Clocks Interchange For High and Critical Reliability systems, this option initiates a Tone-Clock interchange in each port network possessing duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs. Each port network interchanges into the standby Tone-Clock for 20 seconds and then back to the originally-active Tone-Clock. This field indicates the days that interchanges occur. (daily, days of the week, or no). “No” prevents interchanges. (no) The system performs a Tone-Clock interchange, activating the stand by Tone-Clock. After the newly-active Tone-Clock circuit pack is tested, it provides system clocks for its native port network. Then the system interchanges to the originally active Tone-Clock circuit pack. SPE Interchange This field indicates the days SPE interchanges execute during scheduled maintenance, for duplicated SPE systems. (daily, days of the week, or no). “No” prevents scheduled interchanges. (no) Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Table 8-1. Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-34 Scheduled Maintenance Settings — Continued EXP-LINK Interchange This field indicates if expansion links between port-networks interchange as part of scheduled maintenance. The value, “daily”, means that EXP-LINK interchanges automatically occur everyday. The value “no'' means that EXP-LINK interchanges do not automatically occur as part of scheduled maintenance. Values represented by the days of the week mean that EXP-LINK interchanges automatically occur automatically on specified days. Since EXP-LINK interchanges apply to duplicated systems, simplex systems do not display this field. (no) Minimum Threshold for TTRs When the number of touch tone receivers (TTRs) in service falls below this number (4 to 200), a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. These are also known as dual-tone multifrequency receivers (DTMRs). There are 4 TTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack, and up to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a TTR being taken out of service, set this field to 4 times the number of TN748s. If this number is set to more than three less than the total number of TTRs, a port network with only one TN748 could lose all of its TTRs before this alarm is raised. Minimum Threshold for CPTRs When the number of call progress tone receivers in service falls below this number (2 to 100), a WARNING alarm raises against TTR-LEV. These are also known as general purpose tone detectors (GPTDs). There are 2 CPTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack, and up to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a CPTR being taken out of service, set this field to 2 times the number of TN748s. If this number is set to more than one less than the total number of TTRs, a port network with only one TN748 could lose all of its CPTRs before this alarm is raised. Minimum Threshold for Call Classifier Ports When the number of call classifier ports (CLSFY-PTs) in service falls below this number, a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. Valid entries are 1 to 200. There are 8 ports on each TN744 Call Classifier circuit pack, and up to 25 TN744s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a CLSFY-PT being taken out of service, set this field to 8 times the number of TN744s. If this number is set to more than 7 less than the total number of CSLFY-PTs in the system, a port network with only one TN744 could lose all of its CLSFY-PTS before the alarm is raised. If there are no TN744s in the system, leave this field blank. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Table 8-1. Test 100, Type Test Page 8-35 Scheduled Maintenance Settings — Continued Type Test 102, Type 105 This field specifies extensions assigned to receive tie-trunk calls from other switches that have test line origination capability. The system responds by sending a sequence of test tones. Test Type 100 tests far end to near end loss and C-message by sending: ■ 5.5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB ■ Quiet until disconnect; disconnect is forced after one minute Test Type 102 tests far end to near end loss by sending: ■ 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB ■ 1 second of quiet ■ This cycle is repeated until disconnect; disconnect is forced after 24 hours. Test Type 105 tests 2-way loss, gain slope, and C-message and C-notch noise by sending: ISDN-PRI Test Call Extension ■ nine seconds of 1004 Hz at -16dB ■ one second of quiet ■ nine seconds of 404 Hz at -16dB ■ one second of quiet ■ nine seconds of 2804 Hz at -16dB ■ 30 seconds of quiet ■ one half second of Test Progress Tone (2225 Hz) ■ approximately five seconds of quiet ■ forced disconnect This field indicates the extension used by far-end ISDN nodes to place calls to the system, for testing ISDN-PRI trunks between the far-end and the system. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Table 8-1. Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-36 Scheduled Maintenance Settings — Continued ISDN-BRI Service SPID This field shows if the link associates with the Service SPID. If the link is associated with the Service SPID. This number is the test SPID (0 – 99999) (under BRI-SET MO). Otherwise, this field is blank. Service SPID is a feature used by the system technician to check building wiring between the switch and the BRI endpoint. DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension The extension used to set up a DSO loop around connection for testing non-ISDN DS1 trunks The DSO Loop-Around Test Call feature is used primarily for testing DSO channels associated with non ISDN-PRI trunks. The loop-around is activated by dialing the test extension number. Multiple DSO Loop-Around connections can be established by placing multiple calls to the loop-around extension. For more information see “Facility Test Calls” in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. Loss Plan Leave this field blank if no extra loss is required. If extra loss is required, enter digits as shown below. Use this field if additional loss is required to maintain transmission quality for conference calls by entering the digits shown below. Continued on next page SPE Optional Boards: No. Of Parties To Be Conferenced Enter Digit 3 2 4 3 5 4 6 5 7 6 These fields indicate if a Disk circuit pack is present, and identifies administered Packet Interface slots. If a Packet Interface circuit pack is present, the corresponding Packet Interface field is set to y when the system boots. No change to that field is allowed. If the system is equipped with duplicated SPEs, a Packet Interface field is set to y if either SPE carrier contains a Packet Interface circuit pack in the corresponding position. If a Packet Interface circuit pack is not present, the value for the Packet Interface field is read from translation data, and stored on disk or tape. If the field is set to n, a Packet Interface circuit pack may be administered by changing the corresponding Packet Interface field to y. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-37 Modem Connection On page 3 of the example forms, 11 fields disappear when the “Modem Connection?” field is set to internal. In this example the “Modem Connection” field is set to “external” revealing the 11 fields. The first 2 fields on page 3 establish the data format for transmitting serial data from the switch to the modem. The field names are, “Data Bits:”, and “Parity?”. The two valid combinations for these 2 fields are: ■ Data Bits = 8, Parity = None ■ Data Bits = 7, Parity =(odd, even, mark, or space) Modem Connection Valid entries are internal or external. The default is (internal). Modem Name This 20-character field accepts alpha-numeric characters to provide unique qualifiers for specified modems. ( ) RTS/CTS Enabled This field informs modems that communication with data source UARTs drive with RTS/CTS flow control. This 6-character field defaults to (\Q3). This field is case in-sensitive. Asynchronous Data Mode This field configures the modem as an asynchronous communications device. This 8-character field defaults to (&M0&Q0). This field is case in-sensitive. DTE Auto-Data Speed This option adjusts the speed of data sources (DTE) UART to outgoing (modem-to-modem) data rates. The maximum speed is 9600 baud. This 6-character field defaults to blank ( ) and is case insensitive. Disable Data Compression This field deactivates default data compression algorithms in use by most consumer modems. This 6-character field defaults to blank (). Similar commands support the AT commands that control this capability; however, these commands do not operate the same. Intel modems require “H%C0” to disable V.42bis & MNP Class 5 data compression algorithms; however, Paradyne products use “%C0” to disable both algorithms. This field is case in-sensitive; blank is its default. ( ) Enable Error Control This field activates V.42 LAPM and MNP error control protocols, if available. This 6-character field defaults to blank ( ). This V.42/MNP/Buffer mode attempts to negotiate V.42 error controls with the remote modem, then transitions to MNP. If this fails, no error control is used. This field is case in-sensitive. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids change system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-38 Misc. Init. Param This 20-character field defaults to blank ( ). This field supports unspecified initialization parameters. The AT commands specified in this free-form field to be sent to the external modem, always initialize last. This field is case in-sensitive. Auto-Answer Ring Count This field controls the number of rings required before modems automatically answer incoming calls. This 6-character field defaults to (S0=10). Typically, the maximum permissible value is 255. 1-255 denote the number of incoming ring cycles. This field is case in-sensitive. Dial Type This field controls inter-register signaling used between modems and Central Offices. This 3-character field defaults to (T) for tone dialing. P indicates Pulse dialing, This field concatenates with the dial string. This field is case in-sensitive. Adjustable Make/Break Ratio This field can be of particular importance when using a modem that may be transferable from country to country. This field controls make/break ratios of pulses and DTMF dialing. Intel product information supports make/break options for pulse dialing. Intel uses “&P0” to select 39% make ratios 61% break ratios for communication within the U.S. and Canada. “&P1” sets a 33% make ratio and 67% break ratio for the U.K. and Hong Kong. This 5-character field defaults to blank ( ) and is case in-sensitive. Dial Command This 3-character field defaults to (D). It denotes the modem’s dialing command. This field is case in-sensitive. No Answer Time-Out Most off-the-shelf external modems provide timers that abandon outbound data calls after predetermined intervals. Some modems permit this timer to be disabled, allowing outbound calls to ring indefinitely. AT&T Paradyne does not provide this capability, because having outbound call attempts ring indefinitely is generally undesirable. The internal modem must disable this parameter set it to at least 255 seconds. This parameter is not administrable. For external modem connections, this parameter transmits first to the external modem. Type approval applications can override this hardcoded constant, specifically in the U.K and other Western European nations, with the “Misc. Init. Param:” field. (S7=255) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids clear audits Page 8-39 clear audits This command clears cumulative and/or peak hour’s data collected for each data relation audit. This command clears old data to display data collected since the last clear audits command when the status audits command is invoked. Refer to the status audits manual page for more information). Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions clear audits cumulative Clears data collected about the peak hour since the last reboot or clear audits cumulative command init inads none See below peak-hour Clears peak hour data Examples: clear audits cumulative clear audits peak-hour Feature Interactions Status audits displays data cleared by the clear audits command. After clear audits executes successfully, the display audits cumulative and/or display audits peak-hour commands display information collected since the last clear audits command. The start date displays on the status audits screen reflecting the time that clear audits executed. clear errors This command moves errors and resolved alarms to cleared-error lists, making room for new incoming error messages. This command does not clear active alarms from the alarm log. This command must be used with care to prevent overwriting cleared entries. When additional entries are needed to log new errors, the system clears error entries first. Use the display errors command to list the cleared errors. Action/Object clear errors Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Examples: clear errors init inads craft none none Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids clear interface Page 8-40 clear interface This command reintializes counter values maintained by the Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack. The status interface command, used in the development environment, displays the counters. The PI circuit pack, a front end processor, implements the packet and link layers of the BX.25 protocol, and the ISDN procedure-D protocol. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions clear interface location Processor interface address (cabinet-carrier-position): init inads craft none none 1 = first processor 2 = second processor Examples: clear interface 01a1 clear interface 01a2 clear interface a2 clear isdn-testcall This command cancels in-progress ISDN-PRI test calls. Once a running test call is cleared, another can begin. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions clear isdn-testcall group number Trunk group number. none none member number Trunk within a trunk group. init inads craft Examples: clear isdn-testcall 80/1 clear isdn-testcall 78/2 clear link This command clears the hardware error counters associated with ports on the Processor Interface circuit pack (displayed with the status link command). Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions clear link link-id Link number (1-8) assigned through communication-interface links form. init inads craft none none Examples: clear link 1 clear link 8 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids clear mst Page 8-41 clear mst This command precedes a trace. If this command is active during a trace, it clears unwanted data. Action/Object Qualifier clear mst Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Examples: clear mst init inads none none clear pkt This command resolves packet bus problems and sends a forced packet bus clear stimuli command over the packet bus. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions clear pkt port network location Physical location of the packet bus (1 - 3) init inads craft none none Examples: clear pkt port-network 1 clear port This command works with the mark port command. This command removes marks from ports frees them for service. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions clear port location Port location (PCsspp) init inads cust nms none none Examples: clear port 01c1102 copy update-file In Duplex systems, the copy update-file copies update files from active SPEs to standby SPEs. This command recovers field update (“patch”) files that are downloaded to the switch when the Standby SPE is unavailable. The switch makes validation checks on the standby as it receives the file. If newer, valid update files exist on the standby, use the override option to force the copy. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids disable administered-connection Page 8-42 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions copy update-file override Copies update files from active SPEs to standby SPEs, regardless of the dates. init inads none see below. Examples: copy update-file copy update-file override Feature Interactions ■ The form display for the list configuration software-vintage command has been modified to allow INADS to determine the hardware configuration, software vintage, and patch identifier. ■ Because patches are applied on restarts before the system is in normal operation, no interaction with routine periodic or scheduled maintenance exists. ■ The flash checksum test acts as a backup check to ensure entire field update files are applied correctly. When the flash Checksum Test fails, a MAJOR on-board alarm is raised on the processor/memory circuit pack. Maintenance runs a data consistency test on a daily basis to check that copies of translations, announcements, and software files are consistent across both processors in a High or Critical Reliability System. If the test detects a difference, a minor, off-board alarm is generated. ■ When checking software, the test compares the memory resident software version and the patch identifier. It also searches for the presence of field update files. If found, it compares the old and new patch identifiers to ensure that the same patch file id is loaded on each processor. If the software or update files are inconsistent, the list configuration software command displays the patch file status. disable administered-connection This command stops both scheduled and periodic testing and stops processing of in-line errors for all or selected administered connections. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions disable administeredconnection ac number Number of the administered connection none none all Selects all administered connections init inads craft cust rcust mis Examples: disable administered-connection all disable administered-connection 1 disable administered-connection 128 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids disable mst Page 8-43 disable mst This command stops the message trace facility. If the trace was not already disabled, the command inserts a GAP marker into the trace. The user should execute the disable mst command when the trace is complete. If left enabled, the trace continues to use CPU time until the time limit expires. Entering disable mst command has no effect on the system if the trace is already disabled. To view the results of the trace, enter the list mst command. Action/Object Qualifier disable mst Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Example: disable mat init inads none none disable suspend-alm-orig This command stops entries from the active Suspend Alarm Origination table. This command disables all board entries that match a specific physical board location. NOTE: This command does not disable port entries. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions disable suspendalm-orig board location Physical location of the replaced or corrected board (does not support port location): PCss init inads craft cust rcust none none Examples: disable suspend-alm-orig 1C03 disable suspend-alm-orig 1E07 disable synchronization-switch This command stops the automatic clock switching capability of the maintenance subsystem. The clock refers to the oscillator on a tone/ clock or DS1 interface. The synchronization subsystem (TDM bus clock, DS1 trunk board, and maintenance and administration software) provides error-free digital communication between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer equipment. Action/Object disable synchronizationswitch Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft none none Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids disable test-number 8 Page 8-44 disable test-number This command prohibits selected maintenance tests from running. To run a disabled test number, enter the enable test-number command. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions disable test-number number Maintenance test number none none print Report sent to printer init inads schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Examples: disable test-number 710 disable test-number 710 print disable test-number 510 schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. display alarms This command creates an Alarm Report. The user completes an option screen to select the parameters for the report. The system creates the reports from the logs of the maintenance subsystem. The subsystem monitors the system hardware and logs problems as errors or alarms. The type of alarm indicates the impact of the problem, as defined below: Warning alarm—A minor interference which does not noticeably impair service. Minor alarm—A problem which could disable a local area of the system and noticeably impair service. Major alarm—A problem which widely degrades the system and seriously impairs service. The system automatically calls INADS to report major alarms. Resolved alarm—A problem which has been corrected, and the system is correctly functioning. The system stamps resolved alarms with the date and time the problem was corrected. The system handles any errors associated with the alarms as “resolved.” DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display alarms Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-45 System Reboots and the Alarm Logs The system saves the alarm and error logs to the active SPE memory card if any of the following events occur: — The save translation command is executed. — Translations are saved as part of scheduled maintenance. — A reboot takes place. — The PPN is about to lose all power after having been on battery backup. The attempt to save the alarm and error logs may be unsuccessful if the MSS is not available. Whenever the system reboots, the logs are restored from the SPE disk that becomes active with the reboot. Since the logs are saved to the disk on the SPE that was active before the reboot, the versions restored at reboot time may not be current. This condition occurs if: — The attempt to save at reboot did not succeed. — The SPE disk that is rebooted is not the same disk to which the logs were last saved. In such a case, the logs do not contain the most recent errors and alarms. To determine if the restored logs are complete, look for indications that would have preceded the reboot. System resets, that are less severe than a reboot, rarely affect the error and alarm logs. NOTE: If the error and alarm logs contain SYSTEM errors, then use the display initcauses command to search for information that system could not log during reset operation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display alarms 8 Page 8-46 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults display alarms print Report sent to printer schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse all alarms displayed Feature Interactions See below Examples: display alarms display alarms print display alarms schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions ■ If the user disables the alarm origination with the change system parameters-maintenance command, then the Ack? (Acknowledged) field on the Alarm Report is blank regardless of the true acknowledged state of the alarm. Options screen When you enter the display alarms command, the system first displays the options screen. Select the options you want to view on the report. The figure below is an example of the options screen for Alarm Reports. display alarms Page 1 of 1 ALARM REPORTS The following options control which alarms will be displayed. ALARM TYPES Active? y_ Resolved? n_ Major? y_ Minor? y_ Warning? y_ REPORT PERIOD Interval: m_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one, if any, of the following ) Cabinet: ____ Port Network: __ Board Number: _______ Port: ________ Category: ________ Extension: _____ Trunk ( group/member ): ___/___ DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display alarms Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-47 The fields on the options screen are described below: ALARM TYPES Enter y (yes) or n (no) in any of the 5 alarm type fields Interval Enter one of the codes below: m = last month h = last hour d = last day w = last week a = all (default) From Month/day/year (example: 01/01/97); if the From date is blank, the report contains all the active alarms for the month prior to the current date. To Month/day/year (example: 01/15/97); if the To date is not entered, the report contains all the active alarms starting with the From date to the current date. Cabinet Administered cabinet number (1-3) Port Network 1-3 Board Number: Board address (PCSS); example: 01A20 Port Port address (PCSSpp); example: 01A2031 Category Object code for the equipment category. Press HELP in this field to view a list of the object codes. Extension Extension number (per dial-plan) Trunk Enter a group number or a group and member number: ■ Enter only the group number (01-99) to display all members in the group. Example: 01/__ ■ Enter both the group number (01-99) and member number (01-99) to display a specific member in a group.Example: 01/99 Output After you complete the options screen, the system displays a 1- or 2-page Alarm Report. To toggle between the pages and to exit the report, use the keys described below: ■ For 513 and 715 terminals, use F8 for NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE commands ■ For all other terminals, use F7 for NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE commands ■ Use Esc for the CANCEL command Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display alarms Page 8-48 The figure below is an example of an Alarm Report. display alarms ALARM REPORT Port Maintenance Name On Brd? 02A 01C07 01C0702 01C0701 01C0703 01C1505 01C1505 02A0201 02A PN 02B TONE-BD ANL-BD ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE CO-TRK CO-TRK TONE-PT TDM-CLK TDM-BUS y y n n n n n n n n Alt Name 311 1051 1053 78/01 78/01 Alarm Type MAJOR MINOR WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Svc Ack? State 1 2 y n n n IN IN IN OUT OUT Date Alarmed 05/22/20:34 05/22/20:26 05/22/20:26 05/22/20:26 05/22/20:26 05/22/20:26 05/22/20:26 05/22/20:34 05/23/13:43 05/23/14:53 Date Resolved 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 00/00/00:00 Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Lists the location codes for the alarmed object, as follows: ■ Circuit packs locations display as: cabinet-carrier-[slot]-[circuit]. Example: 01C0702. ■ Port network locations display as: port network number-bus. Example: PN 02B. PN 02 = Port Network (PN) number and A or B = bus. ■ Fiber link locations display as: fiber link number-PNC side. Example: x A-PNC. “X” = fiber link number and “A” = PNC side [A or B]. Maintenance Name Lists the logical name of the maintenance object with the alarm. On Brd A y (yes) indicates the fault was found on the associated circuit pack. A n (no) indicates the fault is not connected to the circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display cabinet Page 8-49 Identifies the location of maintenance object, as follows: Alt Name ■ Station = extension number ■ Trunk = Group number (78/__) or group and member numbers (78/01) ■ Private CO Line = private CO line (P) and group number. (P/xxx) Alarm Type Alarm level: MAJOR, MINOR, or WARNING Service State Identifies the service state of the station and trunk ports, as follows: ■ RDY = ready for service ■ OUT = out of service ■ IN = in service ■ [Blank] = No associated service state Headings 1 and 2 identify the first and second OSS telephone numbers, respectively. The entries below indicate the acknowledged alarm state: Ack? ■ Y (yes) = alarm has been acknowledged ■ N (no) = alarm has not been acknowledged ■ C (cleared) = alarm was first acknowledged, then resolved and cleared [Blank] = no attempt was made to report the alarm NOTE: If the user disables the alarm origination with the change system-parameters maintenance command, then the Ack? field is blank regardless of the true acknowledged state of the alarm. Date Alarmed Indicates the month, day, hour, and minute of the alarm. Date Resolved Indicates the month, day, hour, and minute of the resolution. For active alarms, this field contains zeros (0). display cabinet This command displays the cabinet description and location and the carrier description for a selected cabinet number. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display cabinet 8 Page 8-50 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display cabinet print Report sent to printer none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust Examples: display cabinet 1 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The example below shows the output for the display cabinet 1. . display cabinet 1 CABINET CABINET Description Cabinet: Cabinet Layout: Cabinet Type: Number of Portnetworks: Room: Floor: Building: 1 five-carrier processor 1 30n46 first main CARRIER Description Carrier Carrier Type C B A X D E port not-used processor Fan not-used switch-node Command Successfully Completed Number PN PN PN 01 01 01 PN SN 01 01 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display communication-interface Page 8-51 Field descriptions Cabinet Administered cabinet number Cabinet Layout Type of cabinet (five-carrier or single-carrier-stack) Cabinet Type Type of port network (processor or expansion) Number of Port networks Number of port networks (1 or 2) Room Room where cabinet is located, if administered on the cabinet form. Floor Floor where cabinet is located, if administered on the cabinet form. Building Building where cabinet is located, if administered on the cabinet form. Carrier Letter identifying the carrier (A-E or X not applicable) Carrier Type Port, processor, switch-node, fan, or not-used Number Administered port network number or switch node number When you enter the command: display cabinet 3 and the cabinet is a stack of single-carrier-cabinets, the system displays a screen similar to the figure below. The fields on the screen are the same as described above. display cabinet 3 CABINET CABINET Description Cabinet: Cabinet Layout: Cabinet Type: Number of Portnetworks: Room: Floor: Building: 3 single-carrier-stack expansion-portnetwork 1 30n46 first main CARRIER Description Carrier Carrier Type D D B A not-used not-used port expansion-control Number PN PN PN PN 03 03 03 03 display communication-interface The display communication-interface command must contain one of the three qualifiers defined below: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display communication-interface 8 Page 8-52 The display comm hop-channels command displays the translation data for hop channels. A hop channel is a bi-directional network channel between two interface links for DCS message hopping. A hop channel is used to tandem DCS messages from one interface link to another interface link. The display communication-interface links command displays the translation information for each communication interface link. A link is an electronic communication channel transmitted over the Packet Bus for carrying packet-switched data. There are 16 links that terminate at one end on the Packet Interface circuit pack in the SPE. At the physical and link layers, the link terminates at the other end on a port on the PBX’s switching matrix. At a higher level, the link continues over a transmission facility to another endpoint, such as a DCS node or AUDIX. The link carries application messages between the SPE and other switches or adjuncts. The display comm processor-channel command displays the translation information for each of the local processor channels. A processor channel is one several data streams which are multiplexed by the X.25 protocol onto a single data link. The system has 128 total processor channels; up to 64 can be assigned to a single link. See also ‘‘status link’’ for more details. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display communicationinterface hopchannels See above init inads craft cust rcust none none links See above processorchannel See above print| Report sent to printer schedule 1. Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output for Hop-channels qualifier When you enter the command display comm hop, the systems displays the Hop Channel Assignment screen, similar to the figure below. The number of the local processor channel, used to hop the interface link channels, is not shown. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display communication-interface Page 8-53 . display communication-interface hop-channels Page 1 of 4 HOP CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Link/Channel A 3 Link/Channel B 1 4 Link/Channel A Link/Channel B 12 Field descriptions Link/Channel A Identifies the first of the two link/channels joined by the hop channel. Links range from 1 to 16. Channels range from 1 to 64. The link/channel must not be assigned to a local processor channel. Also, the link must not be assigned to a PRI local processor channel. Link/Channel B Identifies the second of the two link/channels joined by the hop channel. Links range from 1 to 16. Channels range from 1 to 64. The link/channel pair must not be assigned to a local processor channel. Also, the link must not be assigned to a PRI local processor channel. Output for Links Object When you enter the command: display communication-interface links, the systems displays the Interface Links screen, similar to the figure below. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display communication-interface Page 8-54 display communication-interface links SPE A INTERFACE LINKS Link Enabled 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: y n y n n n n n n n n n n n n n X.25 Extension 5464 5461 5466 Destination Number external external external Establish Connection y y y Connected Data Module 5460 Identification AUDIX ID1 AUDIX-ADM-CONN1 CMS-ADM-CONN-2 Field descriptions Link The physical link number. Enabled A y (yes) indicates the link is enabled for normal operation. A n (no; default) indicates that the message flow over the link is suppressed. The link can only be enabled if the corresponding data module has been administered. X.25 Extension The extension of the TN577 Packet Gateway port through which the link is routed. Destination Number The entry “external” indicates the link goes to equipment connected locally to an external port on a Packet Gateway circuit pack. Such ports must show a y in the Establish Connection field. Establish Connection This field indicates whether the local switch is responsible for any part of call set-up with the far-end data module. If the physical link is through a pair of data modules, each switch terminating the link must set up a connection to its PDM/TDM. If the physical link is over a DS-1 interface, it is possible for one switch to set up the entire connection without any initiation by the other end. The ISDN signaling links must be set to “y” at both ends of the interface. Connected Data Module The extension of a PDM/MPDM directly connected to a PGATE port cable or to an adjunct in an administered connection arrangement. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display communication-interface Identification Page 8-55 This field records the type and identification number of the machine connected to this link. This field is for informational purposes only. Output for Processor-Channel Object When you enter the command: display comm proc, the systems displays Processor Channel Assignment screen, similar to the figure below. display communication-interface processor-channels Page 1 of 8 PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Chan 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Application dcs audix audix gateway gateway Interface Link Chan 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 10 1 9 Local Port 1 59 59 59 59 Remote Port 1 11 11 10 9 Adjunct Name AUDIX1 audix2 Machine-ID 13 1 2 Field descriptions Proc Chan The field identifies one of the processor channels on the processor link. The valid range for a processor link is 1 to 16. Each interface link corresponds to a port on a PGATE board. The Processor channel is not administered. To specify a network channel to a remove machine, use this link/logical channel pair and the one specified in the interface link and interface channel field. Application This field specifies the type of application that connects to this processor channel. The following lists the valid entries: Interface Link The interface link to which the processor channel is connected. Interface Chan The channel on the interface link to which the processor channel is connected. Local Port The switch application port used by the local session. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display disabled-tests 8 Page 8-56 Remote Port The application port used by the remote session. Adjunct Name The name of the adjunct connected to this processor channel. These are defined in the Adjunct Name Form. Only AUDIX and MSA channels require entries in this field: AUDIX, MSAAMWL, MSAHLWC, MSALLWC, and MSAMCS. Machine-ID The network machine ID for the remote machine. Machine IDs are required only for the AUDIX adjunct and DCS connections. display disabled-tests The display disabled-tests command lists the numbers for all maintenance tests that have been disabled by INADS. These tests are not available for background or demand testing. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display disabled-tests print Report sent to printer none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following example shows the output from the display disabled-tests command. display disabled-tests SPE A DISABLED TEST INFORMATION Test Number 710 Command successfully completed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display errors Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-57 display errors This command creates an Alarm Report. The user completes an option screen to select the parameters for the report. The system creates the reports from the logs of the maintenance subsystem. The subsystem monitors the system hardware and logs problems as errors or alarms. Errors can result from in-line firmware errors, periodic tests, failures detected while executing a test command, software inconsistency, or a data audit discrepancy. System Reboots and the Error Logs The system saves the alarm and error logs to the active SPE memory card if any of the following events occur: — The save translation command is executed. — Translations are saved as part of scheduled maintenance. — A reboot takes place. — The PPN is about to lose all power after having been on battery backup. The attempt to save the alarm and error logs may be unsuccessful if the MSS is not available. Whenever the system reboots, the logs are restored from the SPE disk that becomes active with the reboot. Since the logs are saved to the disk on the SPE that was active before the reboot, the versions restored at reboot time may not be current. This condition occurs if: — The attempt to save at reboot did not succeed. — The SPE disk that is rebooted is not the same disk to which the logs were last saved. In such a case, the logs do not contain the most recent errors and alarms. To determine if the restored logs are complete, look for indications that would have preceded the reboot. System resets, less severe than a reboot, rarely affect the error and alarm logs. NOTE: If the error and alarm logs contain SYSTEM errors, then use the display initcauses command to search for information that system could not log during reset operation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display errors 8 Page 8-58 T Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults display errors high resolution Highlights the time stamps on the Error Report for the first and last occurrences of the error. all errors displayed print Report sent to printer schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust nms browse Feature Interactions none Examples: display errors display errors print display errors schedule display errors high-resolution print 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Input form When you enter the display errors command, the system first displays the options screen. You select the options you want to view on the report. The figure below is an example of the options screen for an Error Report. display errors Page 1 of ERROR REPORT The following options control which errors will be displayed. ERROR TYPES Error Type: _____ Error List: active-alarms REPORT PERIOD Interval: _ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one, if any, of the following ) Cabinet: __ Port Network: __ Board Number: ____ Port: ______ Category: ________ Extension: _____ Trunk ( group/member ): ___/___ Field descriptions . Error Type Enter a specific error type. If the field is blank, the system displays all errors. Press HELP in this field to view a list of codes. 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display errors Error List Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-59 Enter one of the error lists below: active-alarms (default) errors cleared-errors The title for the Hardware Error Report includes the name of the selected error list. Interval Enter one of the codes below: m = last month h = last hour d = last day (default) w = last week a = all From Enter 2-digit numbers for the month/day/year (Example: 01/01/97). The default is the earliest time of the existing error records in the log. To Enter 2-digit numbers for the month/day/year (Example: 01/01/97). The default is the current date. Cabinet Enter 1, 2, or 3 (the administered number) Port Network Enter 1, 2 or 3 Board Number: Enter a 5-digit equipment code for: Cabinet = 01-03 (if omitted, the default is 01) Carrier = A-E Slot = 00-20 Example: 01A20 Port Enter a 7-digit equipment code for: Cabinet = 01-03 (if omitted, the default is 01) Carrier = A-E Slot = 00-20 Circuit = 01-31 Example: 01A2031 Category Enter the object code for the equipment category. Press HELP in this field to view a list of the object codes Extension Enter the extension number Trunk Enter a group number or a group and member number: ■ Enter only the group number (01-99) to display all members in the group. Example: 01/__ ■ Enter both the group number (01-99) and member number (01-99) to display a specific member in a group. Example: 01/99. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display errors Page 8-60 Form output After you complete the options screen, the system displays a 1- or 2-page Hardware Error Report. To toggle between the pages and to exit the report, use the keys described below: ■ For 513 and 715 terminals, use F8 for NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE commands ■ For all other terminals, use F7 for NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE commands ■ Use Esc for the CANCEL command The figure below is an example of an Hardware Error Report -- Active Alarms, without the high-resolution qualifier in the command line. display errors Page 1 SPE A HARDWARE ERROR REPORT - ACTIVE ALARMS Port 01C0702 01C0701 01C0703 01A 01C1505 01C1505 02A0201 PN 02B Mtce Name ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE TDM-CLK CO-TRK CO-TRK TONE-PT TDM-BUS Alt Name 311 1051 1053 Err Aux Type Data 257 257 257 0 0 078/001 3329 57408 078/001 1537 0 18 0 First Occur 01/31/09:20 01/31/20:26 01/31/20:26 01/31/20:34 01/31/20:26 01/31/20:26 01/31/20:34 01/31/14:53 Last Err Err Rt/ Al Ac Occur Cnt Rt Hr St 01/31/20:26 255 256 255 a y 01/31/20:26 4 0 4 a y 01/31/20:26 4 0 4 a y 01/31/20:34 1 0 1 a n 01/31/20:27 5 300 5 a y 01/31/20:28 5 150 5 a y 01/31/20:34 1 0 1 a y 01/31/21:12 1 0 1 a n Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Lists the location codes for the alarmed object, as follows: ■ Circuit packs locations display as: cabinet-carrier-[slot]-[circuit]. Example: 01C702. ■ Port network locations display as: port network number-bus. Example: PN 02B. PN 02 = Port Network (PN) number and A or B = bus. Maintenance Name Lists the logical name of the maintenance object with an error logged against it. Alt Name Identifies the location of maintenance object, as follows: ■ Station = extension number ■ Trunk = Group number (78/__) or group and member numbers (78/01) ■ Private CO Line = private CO line (P) and group number (P/xxx) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display errors Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-61 Error Type Lists the error number for the type of problem encountered for this maintenance object. The technician must use this error number in conjunction with the logical name information to determine the exact nature of the error. Aux Data Lists additional information concerning the maintenance object error condition. Like the error type, this data is specific to the maintenance object type. However, unlike the error code, only the most recent value of the auxiliary data is retained for each error record. First Occur Displays the month, day, hour, and minute (and second if the high-resolution command line option is used) that the error was first recorded. Seq Cnt Sequence Count - This number indicates the order of errors logged within a second for the time stamps associated with the first occurrence and last occurrence of an error. This information is displayed only if the high-resolution command line option is entered. There may be gaps for the sequence numbers within a given second since the last occurrence of an error may replace an existing entry that had been assigned the missing sequence number. Gaps may also appear in the numbers since sequence counts are also used with software event information not shown in the hardware error log. Last Occur Displays the month, day, hour, and minute (and second if the high-resolution command line option is used) of the most recent error. Note: if the system is unable to retrieve the time of day when the error occurred, a ‘dummy’ date is stamped in the log and appears as: 00/00/01:07. Err Cnt Error Count - The total number of times that the error type has occurred for this maintenance object. If the number of errors exceeds 3 digits, the system enters the number 256, which indicates that a larger number of errors occurred, but could not be displayed correctly. Err Rt Error Rate - The average rate at which the errors have occurred from the first occurrence to the present. If the number of errors exceeds 3 digits, the system enters the number 256, which indicates that a larger number of errors occurred, but could not be displayed correctly. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display errors Page 8-62 Rt/Hr Rate per Hour - An approximation of the rate that this error occurred in the last hour.If the number of errors exceeds 3 digits, the system enters the number 256, which indicates that a larger number of errors occurred, but could not be displayed correctly. Al St Alarm Status - A character indicating the status of this MO in the error and alarm logs. The allowed values are: a = Active alarm entry r = Resolved alarm entry c = Resolved alarm entry as a result of the long “clear” option of the test command s = Resolved alarm entry as a result of a software requested (non-demand) system restart t = Resolved alarm entry as a result of a technician requested system restart n = Not alarmed. Active? - A y (yes) entry indicates the maintenance object is still active. A n (no) entry indicates the object is no longer a problem. Ac The figure below is an example of an Hardware Error Report -- Active Alarms, with the high-resolution qualifier in the command line. When you enter the command display errors high-resolution, the system adds the Seq Cnt (sequence count) column. The number in the column indicates the order of errors logged within a second for the time stamps associated with the first occurrence and the last occurrence of an error. Refer to the field description above for more details. display errors high-resolution Page 1 SPE A HIGH RESOLUTION HARDWARE ERROR REPORT - ACTIVE ALARMS Port 01C0702 01C0701 01C0703 01A 01C1505 01C1505 02A0201 PN 02B Mtce Name ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE TDM-CLK CO-TRK CO-TRK TONE-PT TDM-BUS Alt Name 311 1051 1053 Err Aux First Seq Last Seq Err Al Type Data Occur Cnt Occur Cnt Cnt St 257 01/31/09:20:21 1 01/31/20:26:05 1 255 a 257 01/31/20:26:18 1 01/31/20:26:18 7 4 a 257 01/31/20:26:18 2 01/31/20:26:18 8 4 a 0 0 01/31/20:34:35 1 01/31/20:34:35 1 1 a 078/001 3329 57408 01/31/20:26:07 1 01/31/20:27:28 1 5 a 078/001 1537 01/31/20:26:52 1 01/31/20:28:41 1 5 a 0 01/31/20:34:28 1 01/31/20:34:28 1 1 a 18 0 01/31/14:53:03 1 01/31/21:12:22 1 1 a Command successfully completed Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display events Page 8-63 display events A vector event is the occurrence of something unexpected during a vector-routed call due to resource exhaustion or faulty vector programming. (For example, route-step failures are typically due to the programming of an invalid extension.) These types of failures are not due to faulty hardware or system software error and do not constitute incorrect feature operation. This command allows you to diagnose and correct vectoring problems due to the above-mentioned causes. See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide, 555-230-520, for information on how to interpret this report. Action/Object display events Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft cust rcust none none Input form The following entry form is displayed to allow limiting the report to events of a certain type or from a certain time period. Enter the desired parameters and press Enter. Category “Vector” specifies the type of event report to display and is the only valid entry. Report Period The fields in this section allow you to view only those vector events that occurred within a specific time period. If these are left blank, all vector events recorded are displayed. Interval: This field specifies a display of all events within the last time period of the type Enter the first letter of one of the following selections: all, month, day, hour, minute. Start/Stop Time The starting and ending times, in 24-hour notation, of the interval to be reported. Vector Number The number of the vector (1-256) for which events is reported. If this field is left blank, events for all vectors is reported. Event Type Specific types of vector events are associated with numbers from 50000 to 50999. Entering one of these numbers limit the report to events of this type. If this field is left blank, events for all types of vectors are reported. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display events Page 8-64 Output See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide, 555-230-520, for more information on how to interpret this report. In particular, the Event Data 2 field are associated with possible causes and repair strategies for the event. Event Type A number from 50000 to 50999 that identifies what type of vector event occurred. Event Descriptio n A text string describing the event. Event Data 1 If in the format number/number such as “200/10”, this indicates the vector number and step number associated with the event. If in the format “Split number” such as “Split 2”, this indicates the split number. Event Data 2 Additional data concerning the event encoded as a hex number. First Occur The date and time when the vector event first occurred. Last Occur The date and time when the vector event last occurred. Evnt Cnt The total number of times, up to 255, that vector events of this type have occurred. The following example shows the input form for display events: display events Page 1 of 1 SPE B EVENT REPORT The following options control which events will be displayed. EVENT CATEGORY Category: vector REPORT PERIOD Interval: _a_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ SEARCH OPTIONS Vector Number: ___ Event Type: _____ Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display initcauses Page 8-65 The following example shows a typical vector event report. display events Page 1 SPE B EVENTS REPORT Event Event Type Description Event Data 1 50020 Call not queued 50541 Not a messaging split 256/5 Split 89 Event Data 2 B 4C First Occur Last Occur Evnt Cnt 09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43 1 1 display initcauses The display initcauses command displays a history of recovery steps taken by the system. This command displays information for restarts of the active processor only. Each time the system performs some type of recovery (due to user request or a hardware or software problem), the recovery information is stored. The software error log also contains information pertaining to restarts. If a reset 4 (reboot) occurs, the software error log are also stored on tape. Information in the software error log should be used in conjunction with information in the initcauses log. The history of the last 16 restarts performed by the system are recorded to the initcauses buffer in chronological order. This buffer fills an entire screen with information if it is completely full. Power failures in the processor complex wipe out the entire initcauses buffer which is stored by the software. In duplex systems, both processors have to lose power before the information is lost. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display initcauses print Report sent to printer none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft nms Examples: display initcauses display initcauses print display initcauses schedule Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 1. Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display initcauses Page 8-66 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following example shows the output from the display initcauses command. display initcauses INITIALIZATION CAUSES Cause Action Initialized 4 System Technician Request i System Technician Request i Sanity Timer Reset 1 Sanity Timer Reset 1 Sanity Timer Reset 2 Scheduled Interchange i Bad Handshake 1 Software Request 2 System Technician Request 1 System Technician Request 4 Upgrade Software 2 Software Request i System Technician Request 2 Software Request 1 No Handshake 1 Command successfully completed Escalated no no no no no yes no no no no no no no no no no Carrier 1B 1A 1B 1B 1B 1B 1A 1B 1B 1B 1A 1A 1B 1B 1A 1A Time 08/01 08/01 08/01 08/02 08/02 08/02 08/03 08/04 08/05 08/05 08/05 08/05 08/06 08/06 08/09 08/09 1:14 2:14 2:18 6:03 6:08 6:14 2:33 2:34 8:22 8:23 9:15 9:29 7:00 7:09 2:34 2:36 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display initcauses Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-67 Field descriptions Cause Reason for the restart: ■ Active Down: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The Active SPE went into SPE Down mode. The Duplication Interface initiated an SPE-interchange to the Standby SPE. If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of display initcauses for a complete explanation. If a high or critical reliability system does a PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred. ■ Bad Handshake: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The Duplication Interface received inconsistent handshakes from the Active SPE. Thus, the Duplication Interface initiated an SPE-interchange to the Standby SPE. If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of display initcauses for a complete explanation. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a COLD 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred. ■ Bad Memory: A defective memory circuit pack generating too many errors caused a restart. ■ System Technician Request: The restart was performed because of system technician demand. A system technician-requested reset system 4 command entry should always precede an upgrade software command entry. ■ Failed Interchange: A “hot-start” interchange (system technician-demanded, scheduled, or software-requested) failed because shadowing was disabled. ■ From Monitor (mon): (For Development Environment only) ■ Initialized: This is always the first entry in the history and is present until more than 15 restarts have been performed. It indicates power-up and also occurs if the Maintenance/Tape Processor is reset during initialization. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display initcauses Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-68 ■ LMM Request: A sanity time-out was requested by the LMM firmware. The three processor circuit pack LEDs blink until the sanity timer goes off. The LMM requests a restart like this when it gets into trouble, usually with memory. ■ Maintenance Reset: The Maintenance/Tape Processor or Duplication Interface reset the system. This refers to resets of the SPE by maintenance in SPE Down mode in which maintenance periodically tries to awaken the SPE. ■ No Handshake: (High or Critical Reliability System only) The Duplication Interface lost handshaking with the active SPE. Thus, the Duplication Interface initiated an SPE-interchange to the Standby SPE. A defective tape drive may cause the Active SPE to miss handshakes with the Duplication Interface which, in turn, could result in an initialization cause of “No Handshake.” Check the Hardware Error Log for TAPE-related error types and alarms and follow the recommended repair procedures in the TAPE Maintenance documentation. If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of display initcauses for a complete explanation. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred. ■ Oryx Request: A sanity time-out was requested by the Oryx operating system. The three processor circuit pack LEDs blink until the sanity timer goes off. Oryx requests a restart like this when it gets into trouble, usually with software. ■ Sanity Timer Reset: The sanity timer on the processor timed out and reset the system. This event usually indicates a software fault. ■ Scheduled Interchange: A scheduled SPE-interchange occurred. ■ Software Request: Software requested the system restart. In a system equipped with High or Critical Reliability, software can also request SPE-interchanges when it detects problems. See the Software Requested Interchanges Caused by Alarm Conditions table (Table 6-1) in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the opening description for a complete explanation. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display initcauses Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-69 ■ SPE-Select Lead Change: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The system could not determine why the SPE changed its status from Active or Standby. However, this change usually indicates a transition from Active to Standby. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred. ■ SPE-Select Switch: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The SPE-Select switches on the Duplication Interface circuit packs were thrown to select the Standby SPE, which became the Active SPE, using the restart level shown. It is also possible to get an initialization cause of SPE-Select Switch when SPE B is active and power to carrier B is lost. In this case, an SPE switch to SPE A occurs and the initialization cause can show either SPE-Select Switch or SPE Down. If this initcause triggers an SPE-interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of ‘‘display initcauses’’ for a complete explanation. ■ Stby-SPE Core Dump: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The Standby SPE had finished a core dump when an interchange took place that made the Standby SPE the Active SPE. If this initcause triggers an SPE-interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of ‘‘display initcauses’’ for a complete explanation. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred. ■ Stby-SPE Tests: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The Standby SPE was in the process of running tests at the request of the Active SPE when an interchange occurred. If this initcause triggers an SPE-interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of ‘‘display initcauses’’ for a complete explanation. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred. ■ Unknown: A restart that could not be classified. The Software Error Log may contain more information about the restart. ■ Upgrade Software: (High or Critical Reliability system only) This indicates that the system was upgraded to a new software generic using the Standby SPE to load the new software via the upgrade software command. A system technician-requested reset system 4 command should be the previous entry. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display initcauses Action Escalated Page 8-70 ■ LMM Put Fail: This initcause occurs when the LMM has failed to place the request for initcause message in the DPR. This could occur if the MTP does not respond to the DPR handshake. Level of Restart: Warm (escalation turned on). ■ LMM Get Fail: This initcause occurs when the LMM does not receive a response to the request for initcause message from the MTP. This could occur if the MTP is not taking messages out of the DPR. Level of Restart: Warm (escalation turned on). ■ Dupint Unknown: This initcause occurs when the LMM receives an UNKNOWN initcause from the Dupint. This could occur in a High or Critical Reliability System where the MTP thinks a PEI has occurred but the dupint disagrees. Level of Restart: Warm (escalation turned on). ■ MTP Reset Unknown: This initcause occurs when the LMM has reset the MTP during the process of trying to get initcause from the MTP. Level of Restart: Warm (escalation turned on). ■ S-vintage Mismatch: This initcause occurs when a mismatch in the duplication super vintage is detected by the LMM. Level of Restart: Reboot (no escalation). ■ Monitor Reset: (For Development Environment Only) This initcause occurs when “ini 1" is executed from the Flash Monitor. This initcause can occur only in systems with SBB. Level of Restart: Reboot (no escalation). ■ Bad GDT: (For Development Environment Only) This initcause occurs when the LMM fails to transfer control to Oryx/Pecos because of absence of entry in GDT to point at O/P. This usually occurs in a system with no data. Again, this should only occur in systems with SBB. The level of recovery performed by the system. The recovery levels follow: ■ Reset system 1 (Warm) ■ Reset system 2 (Cold-2) ■ Reset system 3 (Cold-1) ■ Reset system 4 (Reboot) ■ Reset system 5 (Extended Reboot) ■ Reset system interchange (High or Critical Reliability System only hot restart interchange) Whether the restart was escalated to a higher level to clear the problem. There is a software escalation strategy which can cause a higher level of restart than the one previously performed to be executed if the need arises. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display memory-configuration 8 Page 8-71 Carrier The “carrier” statement indicates the carrier on which the recovery was performed (possible values are 1A and 1B). In most cases, this “carrier” is the Active SPE carrier when the restart occurs. However, it is possible in a High or Critical Reliability System that this carrier was the Standby carrier. See the preceding description of ‘‘display initcauses’’ for a complete explanation. Time The date (month and day) and time of the restart. display memory-configuration This command indicates the total memory available for the active, and if present the standby, processor(s). This command is a single page display with hidden fields for the standby-processor; these hidden fields are visible if a standby processor is available in the system. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display memoryconfiguration long Displays the standby SPE Flash ROM and DRAM configuration. none none print Report sent to printer schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust browse Examples: display memory-configuration display memory-configuration long 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following output example is for the display memory long command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display memory-configuration display memory-configuration long PROCESSOR MEMORY-CONFIGURATION (M bytes) SPE_A Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-72 SP_A SPE_B Flash ROM: 16 16 Total DRAM: 12 12 SIMM A: SIMM B: SIMM C: 4 4 4 4 4 4 Command successfully completed Command: The following output example is for the display memory command. display memory-configuration PROCESSOR MEMORY-CONFIGURATION (M bytes) SPE_A Flash ROM: 16 Total DRAM: 12 SIMM A: SIMM B: SIMM C: 4 4 4 Command successfully completed Command: SPE_B SP_A Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display port 8 Page 8-73 display port This command displays the port location, the equipment connected to the port, and the means by which the port can be identified (for example, an extension number, the trunk group and member, and so on). Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display port location Port address (PCSSpp) none none print Report sent to printer schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust browse Examples: display port 1c0801 display port 1c0802 print display port 2c1504 schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following example shows the output for the display port 1c0801 command. display port 1c0801 SPE A PORT INFORMATION Port: 01C0801 Equipment Type: Station Identification: 1021 Field descriptions Port: Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Equipment Type: Hardware that is physically connected to the specified port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display synchronization 8 Page 8-74 Depends on the hardware that is physically connected to the port: If hardware is The field contains Identification: station trunk modem pool station extension trunk group and member number) modem pool group number display synchronization This command calls up the synchronization form where the administered synchronization stratum and reference sources are displayed. (No changes can be made to the system synchronization with this command.) Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display synchronization print Report sent to printer See below Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none schedule Examples: display synchronization display synchronization print display synchronization schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions ■ A DS1 interface or a UDS1 board that has been selected as either a primary or secondary synchronization source cannot be removed on the DS1 circuit pack administration form or the regular circuit pack administration form. Output The following example shows the output for the display synchronization command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display synchronization display synchronization Page 8-75 Page 1 of 2 SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE (DS1 circuit pack location) Stratum: 4 Primary: Secondary: DS1 CIRCUIT PACKS Location 02B10 D92D1 02B11 d92D1 01C10 D92D1 01C11 D92D1 Name Slip ds1 2b10 n ds1 2b11 n ds1 1c10 n ds1 1c11 n Location Name Slip NOTE: TN722B DS1 sources result in stratum 4, type II synchronization display synchronization Page 2 of 2 SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN DS1 CIRCUIT PACKS Location Name Slip Location Name Slip Field descriptions Stratum: Synchronization stratum that is used (3 or 4) Primary: First choice system synchronization source (blank = no synchronization); valid only if stratum 4 synchronization specified Secondary: Second choice system synchronization source (blank = no synchronization); valid only if stratum 4 synchronization specified Location: Circuit pack location (cabinet-carrier-slot) of all administered DS1 circuit packs are listed here. Name: User-defined name administered for the DS1 circuit pack. Blank means no user-defined name administered. Slip: If the DS1 circuit pack has slip alarm, field shows y; otherwise it shows n. Port Network: Only valid for stratum 3 synchronization; specifies the port network supplying synchronization through the tone clock circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance 8 Page 8-76 display system-parameters maintenance This command displays the translation data for maintenance-related system parameters. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display system-parameters maintenance print Report sent to printer none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft super-user Maintain Switch Circuit Packs permissions Examples: display system-parameters maintenance display system-parameters maintenance print display system-parameters maintenance schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following display shows a typical result when display system-parameters maintenance is entered. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Page 8-77 display system-parameters maintenance MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS Product Identification: First OSS Telephone Number: Second OSS Telephone Number: Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers: Cleared Alarm Notification? Restart Notification? Test Remote Access Port? CPE Alarm Activation Level: Packet Bus Activated? Customer Access to INADS Port? Repeat Dial Interval (mins): SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Start Time: Daily Maintenance: Control Channel Interchange: SPE Interchange: 1000000000 5551212 5551213 both y y n none n n 7 22: 00 daily no no Page 1 of 3 Abbrev Alarm Report? y Abbrev Alarm Report? n Stop Time: 04: 00 Save Translation: daily System Clocks Interchange: no EXP-LINK Interchange: no display system-parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification ) Minimum Threshold for TTRs: 4 Minimum Threshold for CPTRs: 1 Minimum Threshold for Call Classifier Ports: _ TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST (Extension) Test Type 100: Test Type 102: Test Type 105: ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN-PRI TEST CALL Extension: _____ ISDN BRI Service SPID: _____ DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension: 1001 LOSS PLAN (Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required) Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss: _____ SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Disk? y Packet Intf1? y Packet Intf2? n Packet Intf3? n Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance change system-parameters maintenance Page 8-78 Page 3 of 3 MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Modem Connection: external Data Bits: 8 Parity: none Modem Name: intel RTS/CTS Enabled: Asynchronous Data Mode: DTE Auto-Data Speed: Disable Data Compression: Enable Error Control: Misc. Init. Param: \Q3 Auto Answer Ring Count (rings): &M0&Q0 Dial Type: \J1 Adjustable Make/Break Ratio: H0%C0 Dial Command: \N3 No Answer Time-out: ____________________ S0=10 T &P0 D S7=255 Help/Error Message Line Command Line Field descriptions Defaults for data entry fields are listed in parentheses. Product Identification 10-digit number (starting with 1) that identifies the switch to an Operations Support System (OSS), for example, INADS. First OSS Telephone Number First telephone number that the switch dials to report alarms; must be obtained from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or the TSC. (# and * are not allowed in the telephone number.) Abbrev Alarm Report Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the first OSS. (yes) Second OSS Telephone Number Second telephone number that the switch dials to report alarms; must be obtained from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or the TSC. (# and * are not allowed in the telephone number.) Abbrev Alarm Report Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the second OSS. (no) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-79 One of four options for alarm origination (neither): ■ If both, all Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic call to both OSS telephone numbers. Both OSS telephone numbers must be administered. ■ If first-only, all Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic call to the first OSS number only. The switch does not call the second OSS telephone number even if the number is administered. The first OSS telephone number must be administered ■ If neither, alarm origination does not take place. Warning alarms are not reported to either numbers. ■ If second-as-backup, all Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic call to the first OSS telephone number. If calling the first OSS telephone number fails four attempts, the switch starts to call the second OSS telephone number as a backup until calling the first OSS telephone number becomes successful. Both OSS telephone numbers must be administered. Before Release 5, the name of this field is Alarm Origination Activated. If Alarm Origination is deactivated, both Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification are disabled, even though they may still be activated in the administration. Cleared Alarm Notification Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and send an alarm resolution message whenever all previously-reported Major and Minor alarms are resolved. Alarm Origination must be activated in order for Cleared Alarm Notification to work. (no) Restart Notification Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and report any system restarts caused by problems with the switch. Suspension Threshold The threshold for suspending Cleared Alarm Notification (1-15). Some problems may cause alarms to be generated and then resolved repeatedly. To detect these problems (by not sending additional Cleared Alarm notifications to indicate a problemfree system), the switch suspends Cleared Alarm Notification when it has reported this administrable number of Cleared Alarm notifications in a 24-hour period. A suspended Cleared Alarm Notification is only enabled again with a successfully completed “logoff” command, a system reset, or when the threshold is changed. This field is irrelevant if Cleared Alarm Notification or Alarm Origination is disabled. Test Remote Access Port Specifies whether testing of the remote access port on the SYSAM circuit pack is enabled. This field should read yes whenever there is an INADS line connected to the switch and there is a maintenance contract in effect so that alarm origination capability is maintained. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-80 Indicates the minimum level (Major, Minor or Warning) at which the Customer-Provided Equipment (CPE) alarm is activated. If the level is none, the CPE does is not activated for any alarm. (none) CPE Alarm Activation Level NOTE: The CPE alarm is always activated when the switch goes into Emergency Transfer, regardless of the CPE Alarm Activation Level setting. Packet Bus Activated Enables the system Packet Bus. If this field read yes, then maintenance software assumes that there is a Packet Control circuit pack installed in the system. The packet endpoints (for example, ASAI, and/or BRI) may be administered, and maintenance testing runs on both the Packet Control circuit pack and on the Packet Bus (This field should read yes after a packet control circuit pack is installed.). If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed in the system, then a major alarm is raised against the PKT-CTRL MO. This field can only be changed from “yes'' to “no'' if there are no packet endpoints administered, thus ensuring that there can be no packet endpoints administered if the packet bus is not activated. This field should be set to “yes” after a Packet Control circuit pack is installed. If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed, then this field should be set to “no'' (the only exception is when setting up translations for a system for which not all of the required hardware is available). (no) Customer Access to INADS Port Provides the capability to prohibit access to system administration and maintenance interface, via the INADS port when using customer login ID’s. This field can only be activated by Lucent services through system-parameters maintenance administration.(no) Repeat Dial Interval (MMS) Indicates the number of minutes that the system must wait before attempting another call origination to an OSS. This timer is triggered by the lack of a far-end acknowledgment. (7) Scheduled Maintenance A series of maintenance tests and operations runs automatically every day according to the schedule and settings specified in the following fields. Start Time The hour and minute (24-hour notation) at which daily scheduled maintenance begins. (22:00) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-81 Stop Time Time (hour and minute) when scheduled daily maintenance stops. If any daily maintenance operations are not completed by this time, the system notes where in the sequence it stopped and perform those operations during the next scheduled daily maintenance. Daily Maintenance This display-only field simply represents the series of tests that are always run by maintenance software as part of daily maintenance. Save Translation This field indicates on which days translation data in memory automatically saves to the Mass Storage System disk and/or tape devices during scheduled maintenance. The save operation is first made to disk, followed by a disk backup to tape. On systems with duplicated SPEs, translation data is saved on both SPEs. Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or no. “No” specifies that no automatic saves are to be executed. (daily) Control Channel Interchange Each port network has a pair of TDM busses called A and B, each of which has a set of time slots dedicated to use by the control channel. At any one time, the control channel in each PN is carried on only one of the two busses. This field indicates on which days the control channel in each port network will be switched from one of the paired TDM busses to the other. Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or no. “No” specifies that no interchange be executed. (no) System Clocks Interchange On High and Critical Reliability systems, this option causes a Tone-Clock interchange in each port network with duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs. Each port network interchanges into the standby Tone-Clock for 20 seconds and then back to the Tone-Clock that was originally active. This field indicates on which days the interchanges are to take place. Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or no. “No” specifies that interchanges be executed. (no) SPE Interchange On systems with duplicated SPEs, this field indicates on which days an SPE interchange will be executed during scheduled maintenance. Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or no. “No” specifies no scheduled interchanges. (no) EXP-LINK Interchange This field indicates whether or not the expansion links between port-networks are interchanged as part of scheduled maintenance. The value “daily'' means that EXP-LINK interchange occurs automatically everyday. The value “no'' means that EXP-LINK interchange is not done automatically as part of scheduled maintenance. Values represented by the days of the week mean that EXP-LINK interchange occurs automatically on the specified day only. Since EXP-LINK interchange only applies to duplicated systems, simplex systems do not display this field. (no) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-82 Minimum Threshold for TTRs When the number of touch tone receivers (TTRs) in service falls below this number (4 to 200), a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. These are also known as dual-tone multifrequency receivers (DTMRs). There are 4 TTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack, and up to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a TTR being taken out of service, set this field to 4 times the number of TN748s. If this number is set to more than three less than the total number of TTRs, a port network with only one TN748 could lose all of its TTRs before this alarm is raised. Minimum Threshold for CPTRs When the number of call progress tone receivers in service falls below this number (2 to 100), a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. These are also known as general purpose tone detectors (GPTDs). There are 2 CPTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack, and up to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a CPTR being taken out of service, set this field to 2 times the number of TN748s. If this number is set to more than one less than the total number of TTRs, a port network with only one TN748 could lose all of its CPTRs before this alarm is raised. Minimum Threshold for Call Classifier Ports When the number of call classifier ports (CLSFY-PTs) in service falls below this number, a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. Valid entries are 1 to 200. There are 8 ports on each TN744 Call Classifier circuit pack, and up to 25 TN744s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a CLSFY-PT being taken out of service, set this field to 8 times the number of TN744s. If this number is set to more than 7 less than the total number of CSLFY-PTs in the system, a port network with only one TN744 could lose all of its CLSFY-PTS before the alarm is raised. If there are no TN744s in the system, leave this field blank. Test Type 100, Test Type 102, Test Type 105 An extension assigned to receive tie-trunk calls from other switches with test line origination capability. The system responds by sending a sequence of test tones. Test Type 100 tests far-end to near-end loss and C-message by sending: ■ 5.5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB ■ Quiet until disconnect; disconnect is forced after one minute ISDN-PRI Test Call Extension The extension used by a far-end ISDN node to place a call to the system to test the ISDN-PRI trunks between the far-end and the system. ISDN-BRI Service SPID This field shows whether or not the link is associated with the Service SPID. If the link is associated with the Service SPID, this field contains a “yes” and the extension field is blank; otherwise, this field is blank. Service SPID is a feature used by the system technician to check building wiring between the switch and the BRI endpoint. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-83 Extension number for the test call. This test extension number is used to establish a loop-around connection on the selected trunk. The DSO Loop-Around Test Call feature is used primarily for testing DSO channels associated with non-ISDN-PRI trunks. The loop-around is activated by dialing the test extension number. Multiple DSO Loop-Around connections can be set up by placing multiple calls to the loop-around extension. The DS0 Loop Around feature provides a loop around connection for incoming non-ISDN DS1 trunk data calls. This feature is similar to the far-end loop around connection provided for the ISDN Test Call feature. This DS0 loop around is provided primarily to allow a network service provider to perform facility testing at the DS0 level before video teleconferencing terminals are installed at the PBX. The feature is activated on a call-by-call basis by dialing a test call extension specified on the second page of the System Parameters Maintenance form. No special hardware is required. When the test call extension is received by the PBX, a non-inverting, 64 kbps connection is set up on the PBX’s Time Division Multiplexed bus. More than one loop around call can be active at the same time. For calls routed over the public network using the ACCUNET Switched Digital Service (SDS) or Software Defined Data Network (SDDN), the data transmission rate is 56 Kbps, since robbed bit signaling is used. For calls established over a private network using common channel signaling, the full 64 kbps data rate is available. When the incoming trunk group is used only for data calls (SDS), the Communications Type on the associated Trunk Group form should be set to “data.” When the incoming trunk group is used for robbed bit alternate voice and/or data (SDN/SDDN), the Communications Type on the Trunk Group form should be set to “rbavd” (robbed bit alternate voice data). For private network trunks using common channel signaling, the Communications Type on the associated Trunk Group form can be set to “avd.” Loss Plan Use only when extra loss is required to maintain quality of transmission on conference calls. Leave this field blank if no extra loss is required. If extra loss is required, enter digits as shown below. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-84 No. of Parties to Be Conferenced Enter Digit 3 2 4 3 5 4 6 5 7 6 These fields indicate whether a Disk circuit pack is present in the system, and which Packet Interface slots are administered. If a Packet Interface circuit pack is physically present, the corresponding Packet Interface field is set to y when the system boots, and no change to that field is allowed. If the system is equipped with duplicated SPEs, a Packet Interface field is set to y when either SPE carrier contains a Packet Interface circuit pack in the corresponding position. If a Packet Interface circuit pack is not present, then the value for the Packet Interface field is read from translation data stored on disk or tape. If the field is set to n, a Packet Interface circuit pack may be administered by changing the corresponding Packet Interface field to y. SPE Optional Boards: Modem Connection On page 3 of the example forms shown below, there are 11 fields that are hidden when the Modem Connection? field is set to internal. In this example the Modem Connection field is set to external and these additional 11 fields are visible. The first 2 fields on page 3 help setup the data format for the serial data from the switch to the modem. The field names are Data Bits: and Parity?. There are only two valid combinations for these 2 fields: ■ Data Bits = 8, Parity = None ■ Data Bits = 7, Parity = (odd, even, mark, or space) The remaining fields are listed below: Modem Connection Valid entries for this field are “internal” or “external”. The default is set to internal. (internal) Modem Name 20-characters alpha-numeric field for a unique modem name DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display system-parameters maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-85 RTS/CTS Enabled Informs the modem that communication with the data source UART will be driven with RTS/CTS flow control (6 characters long, default = \Q3). Field is case insensitive, however, the default is in upper case. (\Q3) Asynchronous Data Mode Configures the modem as an asynchronous communications device (8 characters long, default = &M0&Q0). Field is case insensitive, however, the default is in upper case. DTE Auto-Data Speed Speed of the data source (DTE) UART to the outgoing (modem-to-modem) data rate (maximum = 9600 baud); field is 6 characters long and case insensitive; default = blank Disable Data Compression Turns off the default data compression algorithms that are in use by most consumer modems; field is 6 characters long and case insensitive; default = blank. The AT commands that control this capability are supported by similar commands; however, these commands do not operate in the same manner: Enable Error Control ■ The Intel modems require the use of “H%C0” to disable V.42bis & MNP Class 5 data compression algorithms ■ Paradyne products use “%C0” to disable both algorithms. Turns on the V.42 LAPM and MNP error control protocols, if available, on the modem; field is 6 characters long and case insensitive; default = blank. This V.42/MNP/Buffer mode first attempts to negotiate V.42 error control with the remote modem. If this fails, then the modem transitions to MNP, and if this fails then no error control is used. Misc. Init. Param Supports any initialization parameters not already specified; field is 20 characters long and case insensitive; default = blank. The AT commands specified in this free-form field are always the last initialization parameters to be sent to the external modem. Auto-Answer Ring Count Number of rings before the modem automatically answers an incoming call; field is 6 characters long and case insensitive; default is “S0=10” (in upper case). The values 1-255 denote the number of incoming ring cycles. Dial Type Type of inter-register signaling to be used between the modem and the Central Office; field is 3 characters long, case insensitive, and is concatenated with the dial string. T = tone dialing (default in upper case) P = pulse dialing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display time Adjustable Make/Break Ratio Page 8-86 Controls the make/break ratios of pulses and DTMF dialing and can be of particular importance when using a modem that may be transferable from country to country. Field is 5 characters long and case insensitive; default = blank. Intel uses different pulse dial options: ■ “&P0” = 39% make and 61% break within the U.S. and Canada. ■ “&P1” = 33% make and 67% break for the U.K. and Hong Kong. Dial Command Modem dial command; field is 3 characters long and case insensitive; default = “D” as the default. No Answer Time-Out Most off-the-shelf external modems provide a timer that abandons any outbound data call after a predetermined interval. Some modems provide for this timer to be disabled, thus allowing an outbound call to ring indefinitely. AT&T Paradyne does not provide this capability with their modem line, because it is generally undesirable to have an outbound call attempt ring indefinitely. The internal modem must have this parameter disabled or set to at least 255 seconds. This is a non-administrable parameter. For the external modem connection, this parameter will be the first initialization string to be transmitted to the external modem. This field will be visible on the administration form in display mode only. This hardcoded constant can be overridden for type approval applications, specifically in the U.K and other Western European nations, by the use of the “Misc. Init. Param:” field. (S7=255) display time The display time command brings up the time form. The system time displays on this form. This command does not allow for any changes to be made to the system time. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids display time 8 Page 8-87 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults display time print Report sent to printer none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust browse Feature Interactions Date and time are generally used by the switch. Examples: display time display time print display time schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following example shows the output for the display time command. display time DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week: Sunday Day of the Month: 1 Month: January Year: 1990 TIME Hour: 6 Minute: 8 Second: 20 Field descriptions Day of the Week The day of the week that the system has stored. Day of the Month The numerical day of the month. Month The month of the year stored by the system. Year The current year stored by the system. Hour The hour of the current day. Minute The number of minutes into the hour. Second The number of seconds into the minute stored by the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids download update-file Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-88 download update-file The update file is transferred to the switch asynchronously from either an INADS host or a personal computer (PC) using the XMODEM protocol. Remote download Remote users can dial into the switch by either using the “call” command (from an INADS host) or by dialing the switch directly with a modem. Once the connection has been established, the user logs into the switch as a remote system access terminal (SAT) using the inads login. NOTE: Only the INADS and INIT logins have the necessary permission to send an update file to the switch. 1. Type the download update-file command and press ENTER. “Please wait...” displays on the screen. After completing some initialization, “Please start file transmission now...” displays. 2. Start an XMODEM session on the remote end and send the update file. a. INADS host: enter ~dload to start the file transmission. b. PC: follow the instructions in the emulator’s manual for invoking an XMODEM session to send the update file. Each block is written to tape or flash card as it is received by the switch. The link level of XMODEM provide error detection and retransmission. Additional protection is provided within the application level. After the entire file has been written to tape or flash card, it is read back and each update file block is validated, and the file checksum is also checked. If the file appears to be sound, the status word in the header block is changed to indicate that it is a valid update file. There may be a delay (up to 5 minutes on a duplex system) between the end of the file transmission and command completion. This delay is caused by the patch application of any immediate sub-patches and, if on a duplex system, the automatic copy of the update file to the standby SPE, which takes place after receiving a valid update file. In a High or Critical Reliability System, the connection to the INADS host computer can be dropped by the INADS side, but the process of copying the patch file to the standby processor continues. The standby is placed in maintenance mode and a call placed between active and standby SPE over the data channels. The file is transmitted in the same way for both tape and flash card systems. The same checks are made on the receiving side as were made Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids download update-file Page 8-89 during and after the original download. If no errors are found, the file is marked valid. There is no feedback to the user on the status of the standby copy. If an error is encountered during the copy or validation process on the standby, an error is logged in the software error log. Because the data consistency audit discovers that the two patch files are inconsistent, the user must manually copy the valid file on the active processor over to the standby processor. The software does not indicate when the copy has completed, so scripts run by the TSC must not issue an immediate reset on High or Critical Reliability Systems. This interrupts the copy and guarantees that the field update files on the two processors are inconsistent. This problem can be avoided by using one of the following techniques: ■ Use two scripts: the first to apply the patch and a second (run later) to issue the reset that applies the patch. This requires two calls to each duplicated switch. ■ Put a delay into the scripts, causing the scripts to wait a period of time after downloading the file and before issuing the reset. This requires only one call, but the amount of delay time required is not well defined, as it varies by system load. ■ Use a manual means of detecting when the copy has completed: either a “PASS” on the data consistency audit or a match on the List Configuration Software form. This requires only one call and introduces less delay in requesting the reset. Action/Object Qualifier download update-file Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads none See below Feature Interactions ■ The form displayed for the list configuration software-vintage command has been modified to reflect the changes imposed by the flash architecture. The list configuration software command allows INADS to determine with one query the hardware configuration, software vintage, and patch identifier. ■ There is no interaction with routine periodic or scheduled maintenance, because patches are only applied on restarts before the system is in normal operation. ■ The flash checksum test acts as a backup check to ensure that the entire field update file was applied correctly. It can fail because of a bad checksum update from a poorly constructed update file or because the patching operation has aborted. When the flash Checksum Test fails, a MAJOR on-board alarm is raised on the processor/memory circuit pack. Maintenance runs a data consistency test on a daily basis to check that DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids download update-file Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-90 copies of translations, announcements and software files are consistent across both processors in a High or Critical Reliability System. If the test detects a difference, a minor, off-board alarm is generated. ■ When checking the software, the test compares the memory resident software version and patch identifier. It also checks for the presence of a field update file and, if found, compares the old and new patch identifiers to make sure the same patch file id loaded on each processor. If the software or update files are inconsistent, the list configuration software command can be used to display the status of the patch file. Recovery procedures In the event of a failure encountered during the download and application of the update file, follow the recommended recovery procedures. The instructions apply to both simplex and duplex switches; additional detail is given when needed. Error on the download transmission If the error displayed on the terminal indicates that the download step in the process failed, there are several culprits: 1. The transmission line could have been noisy. Retry after making all the following checks. Failed attempts take up room in the hard patch file and may require a warm start to clear the file. 2. The user may have downloaded the tape/MIPS version of the patch instead of the flash version. 3. The vintage of the update file may not match the vintage of software currently running in the system. Check the customer’s vintage using list configuration software and patch vintage provided in the documentation. 4. The switch may have had difficulty in writing to the hard patch file. Check the hardware error log for processor/memory board failures. 5. The hard patch file may be full. Issue a reset system 1. This should cause valid files to be applied and invalid ones to be erased. Error on Application of the Patch A patch may not have been applied for the following reasons: 1. The memory card is write-protected. Remove this protection and issue a reset system x command 2. The patch identifiers are inconsistent. Run list configuration software and compare the old_patch identifier with the values in the update file. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids download update-file Issue 1 August 1997 Page 8-91 3. The LMM encountered a problem with the patch file. This is unlikely because the same checks (and more) were performed when the file was downloaded, prior to marking the file valid. This implies that the memory that stored the update file was corrupted. a. Apply the back out file immediately to back out the changes. b. Run the flash checksum test to make sure the system is back to its prepatch state. c. Check the validity of the file again d. Try redownloading and applying the patch immediately. 4. The LMM reports a hard error. Symptoms of this are an entry in the hardware error log for the processor/memory board (if you’re lucky), or extremely odd switch behavior followed by SPE down mode (if you’re not). The problem is that the LMM cannot complete the programming of memory with the result that memory is in a corrupted state. The only recovery is to get or order new software and processor/ memory circuit packs. In a High or Critical Reliability System, the failure causes a interchange to the standby processor. The hardware on the standby must be repaired and the patch redownloaded. (There was nothing wrong with the patch.) Good application - bad patch This error is not caused by a failure in the download or application, but by a fault in the patch file itself. To recover from this type of problem, the back out file that backs out the patch should be downloaded and applied. This requires that the system be sane enough to receive the file correctly and be able to apply it. In a High or Critical Reliability System, the user has approximately 8 minutes to recognize that a problem exists and force an interchange to the standby processor. If this can be done, the file on the newly-active processor can be invalidated using a file containing a destroy tuple or the wp byte command. The standby processor can be restored to a normal state using the back out file. Inconsistent software versions on a duplicated switch As indicated by a failure in the data consistency test, inconsistent software can be caused by problems in copying the update file to the standby or validation test failures on the standby. Unlike the tape or MIPS systems which revert to the same version of software as a result of a refresh, a flash system remains inconsistent until some manual intervention occurs: 1. Use the list config software command to determine the status of the vintages, patch identifiers, and patch file data on both the active and standby processors. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids enable administered-connection Page 8-92 1. If one processor looks as if it has been patched (updated patch identifier and no update file) and the other looks as if the patch file is still present (no patch identifier and valid update file), the application of the patch can be forced by making that processor active and requesting the system restart indicated in the accompanying documentation. 2. If one processor has a copy of the update file and the other doesn’t (neither has been patched), the file can be copied using the copy update-file command. 3. If patch identifiers disagree but neither side has a valid update file, the missing patch should be redownloaded to the system. During the download process, the file should pass the vintage test and then be copied to the standby processor. Validation tests are then be run on both processors. The patch is applied to memory on the next restart. This procedure is less disruptive to the customer if the unpatched processor is the standby at the time of the restart. enable administered-connection This command restarts scheduled and periodic maintenance for a single or all administered connections and can be used to track the maintenance processing of administered connections without interference from other maintenance processing. This command also restarts the processing of in-line errors for all or the selected administered connection. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions enable administeredconnection ac number The number of the administered connection none none all All administered connections are enabled. init inads craft cust rcust mis Examples: enable administered-connection 128 enable administered-connection all enable mst Enables the message trace that is controlled according to the parameters created with the change mst command. If executed while the trace is enabled, the command has no effect and returns a screen message indicating that the command was successful. Action/Object enable mst Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads none none Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids enable suspend-alm-orig Page 8-93 enable suspend-alm-orig This command enables Suspend Alarm Origination for a board (including all ports and endpoints on the board) or for a port (including all endpoints on the port) for both on- and off-board alarms or for off-board alarms only. Many control circuit packs do not have a board location, so this command cannot support all circuit packs. Each enable command becomes a new entry or replaces an existing entry in the Suspend Alarm Origination table. A new entry that matches both the physical location and off-only, on-, and off-board specifications of an active entry replaces the active entry in the Suspend Alarm Origination table. On the command line, specify a time-out duration of 1 - 72 hours. The off-board-only is optional; if the keyword is not specified, the entry suspends Alarm Origination for both on-and off-board alarms. This command may be particularly useful for: ■ Improved control over customer requests. For example, to suspend off-board DS1 alarms temporarily for customers that periodically disconnect DS1 trunks for testing or other business-related purposes. ■ Improved control over external (non-Lucent) problems such as suspending off-board DS1 alarms before a customer resolves facility problems (for example, a T1 trunk that has developed an off-board condition). ■ Improved control over internal (Lucent) problems that cannot be resolved immediately. For example, the command can be used to suspend Alarm Origination for a bad circuit pack detected late Friday night and dispatch personnel cannot respond until Monday. NOTE: Also see other Suspend Alarm Origination related commands, including disable suspend-alm-orig and list suspend-alm-orig. Action/ Object enable suspendalm- orig Qualifiers Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults board/port location Physical location of the hardware off-boardonly optional; if not specified, both on-and off-board alarms suspended init inads craft cust rcust Both on- and off-board alarms if the off-boardonly keyword is not specified expires-inhrs No. of hours (1-72) Examples: enable suspend-alm-orig 1B03 expires-in-hrs 3 enable suspend-alm-orig 1B0701 expires-in-hrs 72 enable suspend-alm-orig 1B07 off-board-only expires-in-hrs 24 Feature Interactions none Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids enable synchronization-switch Page 8-94 enable synchronization-switch This command re-enables automatic clock switching or returns the maintenance subsystem back to the normal state. The synchronization subsystem consists of the TDM bus clock, DS1 trunk board, and SPE-resident maintenance and administration software and provides error free digital communication between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer-premise equipment (CPE). Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description enable synchronization-switch Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft none none enable test-number This command enables a previously disabled test number. At the next request by maintenance or the technician, this test number runs. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults enable test-number number The specific test number to re-enable init inads craft none Example: enable test-number 102 Feature Interactions The display disabled-tests command gives a list of all disabled tests. format card-mem This command erases and formats the active processor Flash Read-Only Memory card before writing translation, announcements, coredump, and firmware data. Action/Object Qualifier format card-mem translation announcements coredump firmware Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions Erases and formats the memory card for: init inads craft cust browse system none none translations only translations and announcements translations, announcement, and coredump translations, announcements coredump, and firmware Output The server shows the active SPE and returns Command completed successfully if completed. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids get vector Page 8-95 get vector This command displays the conditions and the Switch Processing Element (SPE) associated with a core dump of memory to tape or memory card. The dump occurs on the tape or disk of the previously active SPE or the SPE previously specified using the set vector command in systems with duplicated SPEs. ! CAUTION: The vector is cleared when a system restart of the proper level is performed regardless of whether the core is actually dumped. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions get vector long Core dump timestamps printed; if SPEs are duplicated, timestamps are printed for both SPEs. init inads craft none none print Report sent to printer. Examples: get vector get vector print get vector long get vector long print Output get vector GET RESULTS Core Dump Vector 0 Set Vector Command Option spe-active Core Dump Time SPE_A SPE_B Command successfully completed Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids get vector Page 8-96 Field descriptions Core Dump Vector A hexadecimal value representing the condition(s) that cause(s) a core dump. This hexadecimal value is a bit map of the four reset conditions (from least to most significant bit): ■ warm start ■ cold 2 restart ■ cold 1 restart ■ reboot. A value of 0 indicates that the vector is cleared or not set. See the Vector-Condition Mapping table that follows. Vector-Condition Mapping Set Vector Command Option value warm-start cold-2 cold-1 reboot 0 n n n n 1 y n n n 2 n y n n 3 y y n n 4 n n y n 5 y n y n 6 n y y n 7 y y y n 8 n n n y 9 y n n y a n y n y b y y n y c n n y y d y n y y e n y y y f y y y y The user-specified SPE prior to the core dump. For simplex SPE systems this field is always spe-active unless the vector is cleared or not set. In duplex SPE systems, the field is either spe-active or spe-standby unless the vector is cleared or not set. If the vector is cleared or not set in either a duplex or simplex SPE system, this field is blank. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list configuration 8 Page 8-97 The time of the core dump for SPE A and SPE B. If the system has a simplex SPE, a timestamp for SPE A (or the active SPE) and non duplicated SPE” are displayed for SPE B. If the core dump cannot be accessed, can’t access displays for the corresponding SPE. For example, in a High or Critical Reliability System where SPE B is not refreshed, SPE B displays can’t access instead of a timestamp. If the MSS device storing the core dump timestamp is busy for any reason, device busy displays at the terminal. Core Dump Time list configuration Hardware configuration reports list, for each circuit pack in the group specified, the type, code, suffix, and vintage of the requested circuit packs as installed in the switch, and all ports assigned to the circuit pack. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list configuration hardwaregroup Enter a group listed in the Hardware Groups section below. none none print Report sent to printer. schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust Examples: list configuration carrier 2c schedule list configuration port-network 5 list configuration stations print 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. NOTE: The list configuration software-version command is discussed separately under its own heading. Hardware Groups Enter one of the following hardware groups: carriers all Displays all circuit packs administered and/or physically inserted in the port, switch node, and control carriers on the system. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list configuration Page 8-98 board PCSS Displays all assigned ports on the circuit pack specified by cabinet, carrier, and slot. carrier c Displays all circuit packs and assigned ports on a specified carrier. control Displays all circuit packs in the control complex. ds1 Displays all the DS1 (TN722, TN767, and TN464) port circuit packs administered and/or physically inserted. port-network pn# Displays all circuit packs located in a specified port network. (List cabinet gives the port network number(s) associated with a particular cabinet.) Circuit packs on switch node carriers are not displayed when the port-network qualifier is entered. To display switch node circuit packs, use the all, carrier or board qualifiers. stations Displays all circuit packs that can be assigned stations, including DS1 circuit packs for remote stations. trunks Displays all circuit packs that can be used for administering trunks. Output The following display shows the output from the list configuration all command. . list configuration all Page 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Number Board Type 01C00 01C01 01C02 01C03 01C05 01C06 MAINTENANCE/TEST AUXILIARY TRUNK EXPANSION INTRFC PGATE BOARD TONE DETECTOR DS1 INTERFACE TN771C TN748C TN577 TN748B TN767 000003 conflict no board 000003 000002 000011 01C07 01C08 01C09 01C11 01C12 01C13 ANALOG LINE HYBRID LINE ANALOG LINE DIGITAL LINE DID TRUNK ANALOG LINE TN742 TN762B TN742 TN754 TN753 TN742 000010 000004 000010 000004 000006 000010 press CANCEL to quit -- Code Vintage Assigned Ports u=unassigned t=tti u u 02 03 04 u u u u 01 u u u u u u u u u u 02 u u u u u u u u u press NEXT PAGE to continue u 03 u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u 05 u u u u u u u u u 06 u u u u u u u u u 07 u u u u u u u u u Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list configuration Page 8-99 Field descriptions Board Number The functional name of the circuit pack Code The TN or UN code and suffix of the circuit packs Vintage The vintage number of the circuit pack no board The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed conflict The circuit pack administered to the slot differs from the circuit pack that is physically installed no link The T1 link is down to a DS1 circuit pack The following display shows output from the list configuration ds1 command. list configuration ds1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - DS1 Circuit Packs Location Code Vintage Signaling 01B05 01B06 01B10 01B11 01B12 01C06 01C13 01C16 01C18 TN464F TN464D TN767C TN767E TN767E 000002 000002 000003 000003 conflict no board 000003 000024 000002 isdn-pri isdn-pri none robbed-bit none none common-channel robbed-bit isdn-pri TN464E TN767D TN464F Name CSU MOD 120A1 n/a n/a 120A1 unknown unkonwn none Field descriptions Signaling This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 is entered. The contents of the field are the same as the signaling mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack or none if the circuit pack is not administered. Name This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 is entered. The contents of the field are the same as the signaling mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack or none if the circuit pack is not administered. CSU MOD This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 option is selected. The field contains the identification number of the Integrated CSU module present on the DS1 circuit pack (TN767E or later / TN464F or later) or none. If the circuit pack is a TN464E or TN767D, unknown displays. If the circuit pack is a TN464D or TN767C or earlier suffix DS1 board, then n/a displays. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list config software-version Page 8-100 8 list config software-version This command displays ■ Software version numbers and compatibility indexes of the software load modules stored in system memory (RAM) and on the Mass Storage System devices (tape). ■ The dates and times when translation and announcement data were last saved to the MSS. ■ Information about any software update files that have been applied to the system. See “Software Upgrade” in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for an explanation of software versions and compatibility indexes. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list configuration software-version memory-resident | long1 Data for the active SPE or both SPEs (High or Critical reliability systems)2 init inads craft none none print Report sent to printer. schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.3 RAM-resident files only. Fields for tape data contain n/a 1. On high and critical reliability systems, only fields for the active SPE are displayed unless the long option is specified. 2. 3. Fields in the SPE-B column are blank for standard reliability systems. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output If the tape or memory card contains a core dump file, fields for tape or memory card data display coredump. When a core dump is present, all other files on the device are marked invalid. If the memory card cannot be read at the time the command is entered, the relevant fields display no tape or memory card. (This does not indicate that the system does not recognize the presence of the device.) The following display shows the output from the list configuration software-version command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list config software-version Page 8-101 8 list configuration software-version Page 1 SOFTWARE VERSIONS SPE-A UPDATE FILE Creation (GMT) Date: Old Version Tape: Old Identifier Tape: New Identifier Tape: Update State: SPE-B 4:17 pm FRI NOV 3,1995 G3V4i.03.0.044.0 none 000010 new update ready to be applied SOFTWARE VERSION Memory Resident: G3V4i.03.0.044.0 Mem Card Resident: none Update Identifier: none 4:17 pm FRI NOV 3, 1995 G3V4i .03.0.044.0 none 000010 entirely applied to memory G3V4i .03.0.044.0 none 000010 TRANSLATION DATE Memory Resident: 1:01 pm THU NOV 2, 1995 Mem Card Resident: 1:01 pm THU NOV 2, 1995 list config log applied patch to standby press CANCEL to quit -- press NEXT PAGE to continue Field descriptions, Page 1 Update File Section Displays information pertaining to software field-update files or “patches.” Creation (GMT) Tape and (GMT) Disk When the update file was originally created, in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Note that this is not the time at which the update file was written to the MSS device. Old-Version Tape and Disk The software version for which the update was created. Old-Identifier Tape and Disk Which previous update file this update file expected to find stored in the MSS when it was applied. New-Identifier Tape and Disk Uniquely identifies the current update file. Software Version Section Displays information related to the current software-load module stored in memory and in the MSS. Memory Resident Version number of the RAM-resident load module. Mem Card Resident Version of memory card resident load module. If a memory card is not installed, this field will display “no card”. Update-identifier (Patch Identifier) This uniquely identifies the update file, if any, that has been applied to memory. Update-state (Patch State) The status of the software field-update (“patch”) file id is displayed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list config software-version Page 8-102 8 Translation Date Section Displays information related to the translation files as stored in memory and the MSS. Memory Resident Date and time when translation data was last read from the MSS into memory. This is stored in SPE memory and is not modified by changes to translation data. A save translation command updates this date. If Date invalid is displayed, the timestamp does not contain the expected information. Mem Card Resident The date and time when translation data was last saved to the memory card. If a memory card is not installed, this field will display no card. list configuration software-version Page 2 SOFTWARE VERSIONS SPE-A PI FW VERSION PI 1 Resident: 000162 PI 2 Resident: none Flash Resident: 000162 SPE-B PI FW VERSION PI 1 Resident: 000162 PI 2 Resident: none Flash Resident: 000162 PI 1 Resident: 000162 PI 2 Resident: none Flash Resident: 000162 PI 1 Resident: 000162 PI 2 Resident: none Flash Resident: 000162 ANNOUNCEMENT DATE Mem Card Resident: none ANNOUNCEMENT DATE Mem Card Resident: none PKT-CTRL FW VERSION Pkt-Ctrl Resident: 000021 Flash Resident: 000021 PKT-CTRL FW VERSION Pkt-Ctrl Resident: 000021 Flash Resident: 000021 Field descriptions, Page 2 . P1 FW Version Section Displays information related to the Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack (resident copy and corresponding tape file) firmware. PI 1 Resident The version of firmware in the first PI circuit pack in the control carrier. PI 2 Resident The version of firmware in the second PI circuit pack in the control carrier. Flash Resident The version of PI firmware residing on the system flash memory. Announcement Date Section Displays information related to the announcement files. Information is displayed for the memory resident copy as well as the corresponding MSS file DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list config software-version Page 8-103 8 Mem Card Resident The last date and time that announcement data was saved to the memory card. If the memory card is not installed, this field displays no card. PKT-CTRL FW Version Section displays information related to the Packet Control firmware. Information is displayed for the Packet Control circuit pack resident copy as well as the corresponding tape file Pkt-ctrl Resident The version of firmware in the Packet Control circuit pack. Flash Resident The version of the Packet Control circuit pack residing on the system flash memory. Some things to note when using the list configuration software-version command are: 1. For simplex systems, the fields under column “SPE_B are always blank and the optional Long qualifier is not part of the command line. 2. For a High or Critical Reliability System, the fields under the column of the standby SPE are blank if the optional long modifier is not given. 3. If the tape or memory card contains a core dump file system, fields for the tape or memory card will contain coredump. This is because in a coredump file system all files other than the coredump file are marked as invalid. 4. If for any reason, MSS cannot be read when the command is issued, the string no tape or none for no memory card will be placed in the appropriate fields on the screen. This does not mean that the system thinks there is no tape, only that the software was unable to read the appropriate information when requested. 5. If the command is issued using the memory-resident option, the fields on the form associated with the tape will contain the string n/a. 6. When the status of the update field is displayed, the following strings will be used (for more information refer to step c of this list): a. none in memory — no update has been applied to memory. b. immediate partially applied — an error condition that is valid only when an update that is in the process of being applied fails. Check the validity of the update file that was sent, and then check the hardware error log for tape errors, and follow standard maintenance procedures. c. all immediate applied deferred pending — a valid update file was received by the switch, and all the immediate sub-patches were applied. This state indicates that there are deferred sub-patches in the update file, and a system reset of the proper level has not occurred since the update file was received. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list disabled-mos Page 8-104 8 d. deferred partially applied — an error condition that is valid only when a update that is in the process of being applied fails. Check the validity of the update file that was sent, and then check the hardware error log for tape errors, and follow standard maintenance procedures. e. entirely applied to memory — the update associated with the memory-resident identifier has been completely applied to memory. list disabled-mos This command displays all the MOs that have been maintenance disabled in the system. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list disabled-mos print Report sent to printer. none Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads none schedule Examples: list disabled-MOs list disabled-MOs print list disabled-MOs schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output list disabled-MOs DISABLED MAINTENANCE OBJECT INFORMATION Maintenance Name ALL DIG-LINE Location 02A1203 Command successfully completed Status Enabled Disabled DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list history Page 8-105 8 Field descriptions Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object (or group of maintenance objects) that have been disabled. All is also valid. Location The physical location of the disabled maintenance object that has been disabled. This field displays blanks if all maintenance objects have been disabled (disable all) or all MOs of a specific type have been disabled (disable MO-all). Status Whether the maintenance object or group of maintenance objects is Enabled or Disabled. list history The list history command generates a log listing of the most recently completed “data affecting” administration and maintenance commands. Data commands are those administration and maintenance commands that change the data state associated with any object and qualifier in the system. Administration data commands affect translation data, while maintenance data commands affect state information. For example, change station is a data command, whereas display station is not. All information in the transaction log is saved on tape as translation data when the save translation command is performed (LIFO order). When the switch COLD I starts or reboots, the saved translation, and thus the transaction log, is loaded from tape. In this way, the translation data and the data in the transaction log remain compatible. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list history print Report sent to printer. none See below schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust browse nms Examples: list history list history print list history schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list history Page 8-106 8 Feature Interactions The translation log is written to the memory card as translation data when the save translation command is executed. The translation data is time stamped when saved. This time stamp is noted when translation is loaded from the memory card and included in all recent change history reports. When a user requests a recent change history report, there could be other users concurrently issuing data commands and altering the contents of the transaction log. Therefore, if the user pages the entire way through the report, the oldest entries in the transaction log (maximum 250 commands) may have been overwritten by data commands issued by these other users. Should this occur, the final entries of the report show the data commands issued by the other users since the recent change history report was originally requested. Also, use of the set time command to alter the system clock could make it look as if the recent change history report is not in true LIFO order. Output list history Page 1 SPE A HISTORY Date of Loaded Translation: 11:34am Mon Apr 20, 1992 Date 4/20 4/20 4/20 4/20 4/20 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/18 Time 17:23 11:34 11:25 11:25 11:25 17:59 17:59 17:58 17:58 17:58 17:58 17:57 17:57 17:57 Port SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL SYSAM-LCL press CANCEL to quit -- Login init init init init init init init init init init init init init init Actn go cha add cha add clea test clea enab cha disa test clea test Object Qualifier tcm trunk-group 100 trunk-group 100 circuit-pack 9 cabinet 9 mst board 2e01 mst mst mst mst board 2e01 mst board 2e01 press NEXT PAGE to continue DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list isdn-testcall Page 8-107 8 Field descriptions Date The date the command was issued in (mm/dd format) Time The time the command was issued (in hh:mm format) Port The port type to which the user was connected when the command was issued. Port Number Board List History Display 0 - 30 EPN Maintenance Board Port MAINT 31 - 40 System Access Port SYS-PORT 41 Maintenance Board Port SYSAM-LCL 42 Remote Maintenance Board Port SYSAM-RMT Login User login Actn The first word (verb) of the command, specifying the operation to be performed. This field is truncated after four characters to allow enough space for objects and qualifiers. Four characters is enough to uniquely identify each action. Object The qualifier, or second phrase of the command, specifying the particular thing being acted upon by the command. Twelve characters is enough to uniquely identify each object. NOTE: Where the object is multiple words in length, only the first word will be displayed in the object field. All succeeding words will be treated as qualifiers. This field is truncated after twelve characters to allow enough space for qualifiers. Qualifier One or more qualifiers describing the characteristics of the action/object pair. This field is truncated after 31 characters to keep information for a command on a single line. list isdn-testcall This command displays the ISDN-PRI trunks in use for ISDN-PRI test calls. This command is useful to determine which trunk is in use for an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list marked-ports Page 8-108 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list isdn-testcall print Report sent to printer. none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft Examples: list isdn-testcall list isdn-testcall print list isdn-testcall schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output list isdn-testcall B-Channel 078/001 ISDN-PRI TESTCALLS Start Time Duration 25/12:36 120 M/T Port 1B1102 Command successfully completed Field descriptions B-Channel The trunk in use for the ISDN-PRI test call (trunk group number/ member number). Start Time The time the test call started (dd/hh:mm format). Duration The expected duration of the test call. M/T Port The TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack’s digital port address (in cabinet/carrier/slot/circuit format) in use for the outgoing asynchronous ISDN-PRI test call. list marked-ports This command lists all the ports that have been marked unusable with the mark port command (maximum of fifteen marked ports per page). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list measurements Page 8-109 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list marked-ports print Report sent to printer. none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse Examples: list marked-ports list marked-ports print list marked-ports schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output list marked-ports Port 1C0101 1C0601 1C0702 MARKED-PORT INFORMATION Board-Type DIG-BD DIG-BD Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the marked port. Board-Type The type of circuit pack containing the marked port. If this circuit pack information is no longer available because the circuit pack was removed after the port was marked, the Board-Type field is blank. list measurements This command lists performance measurements of a DS-1 link indicating the quality of the DS-1 physical interface between the system and a far end system. The ds1 summary option provides a summary report while the ds1 log option provides a detailed report. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list measurements Page 8-110 8 NOTE: The list measurements command has many more options than documented here. Only those options dealing with DS1 board are documented below. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list measurements log Detailed report generated none none summary Summary report generated ds1_location The physical location of a DS1 circuit pack entered as cabinet-carrier-slot. print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust browse nms bcms schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Examples: list measurements ds1 log 2a18 list measurements ds1 summary 2a18 print list measurements ds1 summary 2a18 schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list measurements Page 8-111 8 Output list measurements ds1 summary 2a19 Switch Name: Date: 1:25 pm SPE A THU APR 16, 1992 DS-1 Link Performance Measurements Summary Report Counted Since: 1:20 pm THU APR 16, 1992 Number of Seconds Elapsed Into Current 15-min Interval: 323 Total of Valid 15-min Intervals in Past 24-hr Period: 0 Total of Current Worst_15-Min_Interval 24-hr 15-Min Interval Category Date Time Count Count Count Errored Seconds 4/16 13:20 0 0 4 Bursty Err Secs 4/16 13:20 0 0 4 Severely Err Secs 4/16 13:20 0 0 0 Failed Seconds 4/16 13:20 0 0 0 Command successfully completed Field descriptions (list measurements ds1-summary) Counted Since: The start time and date when the associated measurement counters were cleared or the DS1 circuit pack was administered. Number of Seconds Elapsed Into Current 15-min Interval: The number of seconds from the beginning of the current 15-minute interval (0 - 900). Total of Valid 15-min Intervals in Past 24-hr Period: The total number of 15-minute intervals in the past 24-hour period that contain valid data (0 - 96). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list measurements Page 8-112 8 Category The four categories correspond to four measurement error counters. The four categories are "," "," "," and "". The meanings of each category follow: ■ Errored Seconds: the value of the errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). ■ Bursty Err Secs: the value of the bursty errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). ■ Severely Err Secs: the value of the severely errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval(0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). ■ Failed Seconds: the value of the failed seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). Worst_15-Min_ Interval The date(Date), end time(Time), and error count (Count; from 0 to 900 in increments of four) of the 15-minute interval in the previous 24-hour period that contains the maximum value for each of the four error categories. Total of 24-Hour Count The sum of all valid 15-minute counts for the previous 24-hour period for each of the four error categories (0 - 65535). Current 15-Minute Interval The error count for the current (incomplete) 15-minute interval for each of the four error categories (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). list measurements ds1 log 2a19 Switch Name: SPE A Date: 1:26 pm THU APR 16, 1992 DS-1 Link Performance Measurements Detailed Log Report Counted Since: 1:20 pm THU APR 16, 1992 ERRORED BURSTY SEVERELY FAILED VALID DATE TIME SECOND ERR SECS ERR SECS SECONDS INTERVAL 4/16 13:05 0 0 0 0 y 4/16 13:20 0 0 0 0 y Command successfully completed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-113 8 Field descriptions (list measurements ds1 log) Counted Since: The start time and date when the associated measurement counters were cleared or the DS1 circuit pack was administered. DATE The date of the 15-minute interval. TIME The time of the 15-minute interval. ERRORED SECONDS The value of the errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). BURSTY ERR SECS The value of the bursty errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). SEVERELY ERR SECS The value of the severely errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). FAILED SECONDS The value of the failed seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 - 900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). VALID INTERVAL This field indicates whether the data for the specified 15-minute interval is valid. Data is considered valid when a count for that 15-minute interval. If the field has a value of y, the data for the four error categories is valid; otherwise, the data is invalid. Data is considered valid when a count for that 15-minute interval is retrieved and none of the following invalid conditions occur: — If a system warm start or a system cold start occurred during the interval — If the DS1 circuit pack was not inserted during the interval — If the system time was changed during the interval — If the system was too busy to respond to a poll request for the interval. list mst This command displays the messages in the trace buffer and can be used when the trace is disabled or active, but if active, older messages may be sporadically omitted if wraparound is selected and the message rate is high. The command can be used repeatedly without destroying the integrity of the buffer. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-114 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults list mst from message number Message number to start the display; if the number is not in the buffer, then that is indicated on the display, and no additional messages are displayed. Omitting this qualifier causes messages to be displayed starting with the oldest FIFO and continuous messages. init inads FIFO order count number Message count; can be used to limit the trace continuous Display updates as new messages enter the trace buffer (FIFO). This option is most useful in conjunction with "auto-page." The command terminates only when canceled by the user. LIFO Newest message displayed first. FIFO Messages displayed in the order received. [ auto-page ] The screen will automatically page when full. Used in combination with continuous (above), provides a way to "watch" as messages arrive. print Report sent to printer. schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Examples: list mst continuous list mst continuous auto-page list mst LIFO list mst from 222 count 7 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions See documentation on the system printer feature. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-115 8 Output list mst MST DATA Number Date/Time 1 12/21/90 14:30:21.220 Type 62 2 3 4 5 14:30:22.420 14:30:23.420 14:30:25.420 14:30:25.820 60 60 60 60 6 7 8 14:30:28.020 14:50:25.820 14:52:26.020 62 71 56 9 14:52:26.020 57 Message 00 03 6f 00 00 00 00 74 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 a1 6e 00 00 00 00 69 00 74 83 20 74 74 74 74 6f 74 17 86 35 17 17 17 17 6e 17 08 70 31 08 08 08 08 20 08 02 01 30 02 02 02 02 35 02 00 80 30 80 80 80 80 31 00 11 96 31 11 11 11 11 30 11 05 04 03 80 90 a2 18 28 0d 73 74 61 74 69 00 03 00 03 70 02 70 30 00 01 00 05 08 c4 08 02 01 40 01 01 04 08 84 c4 64 96 64 40 96 1c 13 91 a1 10 02 49 05 83 31 30 30 b4 96 1c 0d 91 a2 0a 02 00 02 03 01 07 30 0f 18 03 a9 83 86 1e 02 81 81 96 28 0d 73 74 61 34 Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Number The sequence number for the message. Date/Time The Date/Time. Type MST message type: 60 = ISDN uplink 62 = ISDN downlink, 6C = ISDN level 2 primitive Message Message text in hexadecimal (ISDN or X.25). See Table 8-2 for an explanation of the numeric codes. Table 8-2. Summary of MST Message Types Code Description 0x10 Vector Trace message 0x11 Vector Event message 0x21 IMT proc_errs 0x22 IMT crec 0x23 IMT miscellaneous hooks (dbug) Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-116 8 Table 8-2. Summary of MST Message Types — Continued Code Description 0x24 Hardware error log 0x25 PREC message 0x26 CMS outgoing (individual) 0x27 CMS incoming (individual) 0x30 CCMS uplink message 0x31 CCMS downlink message 0x32 Packet uplink message 0x33 Packet downlink message 0x40 IMT internal-message trace for call_p, conn_m, grp_m, serv_d, suser_m 0x50 ASAI level 2 primitive uplink 0x51 ASAI level 2 primitive downlink 0x52 ASAI maintenance uplink 0x53 ASAI maintenance downlink 0x54 ASAI unrecognized uplink 0x55 ASAI unrecognized downlink 0x56 ASAI association uplink 0x57 ASAI association downlink 0x58 ASAI error uplink 0x60 ISDNPRI uplink 0x62 ISDNPRI downlink 0x64 ISDNBRI uplink 0x66 ISDNBRI downlink 0x68 ISDNBRI level 2 primitive uplink 0x6A ISDNBRI level 2 primitive downlink 0x6C ISDNPRI level 2 primitive uplink 0x6D ISDNPRI level 2 primitive downlink 0x6E ISDNPRI unrecognized message 0x6F ISDNBRI unrecognized message 0x71 GAP marker 0x72 Time changed while trace enabled Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-117 8 Table 8-2. Summary of MST Message Types — Continued Code Description 0xA0 X.25 Outgoing application data message 0xA1 X.25 Incoming application data message 0xA2 X.25 Application error message 0xB0 X.25 Outgoing session layer control message 0xB1 X.25 Incoming session layer control message 0xCF X.25 Message confirmation 0xD0 X.25 Outgoing processor channel control message 0xD1 X.25 Incoming processor channel control message 0xD2 X.25 Link control message 0xD3 X.25 Link status message 0xE2 X.25 Session Timer Expirations 0xF0 X.25 Error Message (Outgoing Message Lost) 0xF1 X.25 Unrecognized Messages 0xF2 X.25 Error Message (DIP ICOM Record Aborted) (R2 Only) 0xF9 Snapper instrumentation message 0xFA Snapper continuation message (for large msgs) Continued on next page Detailed description of Messages** Note that the X.25 messages discussed below really follow the BX.25 Message Protocol. The terminology Message[n] used below refers to the byte at offset n in the message being displayed. MST message types contain a version number. Whenever the structure of the MST message changes, the version field in the MST buffer is changed. Version 1 (default) displays a blank in the version field which is immediately after the MST message type field. Subsequent versions display the version number after the MST message type field and are connected with a hyphen (“-”). For example: Version 2 of the X.25 Application error/notification message has added the text of the pm state table stimulus which was ignored. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-118 8 Version 1 of MST message type 0xA2 would appear on the’list mst’ output: Number Date/Time Type Message 1 11:41:22:425 A2 17 10 Version 2 of MST message type 0xA2 would appear on the list mst output: Number Date/Time Type Message 90 12:41:14:112 A2-02 17 10 21 03 32 05 01 80 Vector Trace Message type: 0x10 Message format: Message[1-4] = call identifier (CID) (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/capro.h) Message[5-6] = vector number (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/dpm_calls.h) Message[7] = step number (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/callr.h) Message[8] = step type (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/dpm_calls.h) Message[9] = step state (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/dpm_calls.h) Message[10-12] = VDN Message[13] = port network number Message[14] = endpoint number Message[15] = angel number Message[16] = circuit number Message[17-20] = trunk number Message[21+] = auxiliary data (based on step type) Vector Event Trace (D92 Only) Message type: 0x11 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-119 8 Message format: Message[1-4] = cid (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/capro.h) Message[5-6] = event Message[7+] = auxiliary data (based on event) Events are defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/evnt_defs.h. Events based on the call_p will have the following auxiliary data: Message[7-8] = vector number Message[9-10] = step number Events based on the grp_m will have the following auxiliary data: Message[7-10] = hunt group number IMT (D92) The messages described in this section cannot be controlled directly through any of the MST screens. They are enabled/disabled through TCM but their output goes to the MST buffer. See [IMT] for details on these messages. A read-only field in the “change mst” screen, “Other Tracing?”, alerts the user that one or more of these types of messages is enabled. 0x21 - IMT proc_errs Message format: Message[1-4] = process number(lname) Message[5-8] = sequence number (defined in *.p/hdrs/main_err.h, for example: $BASEPJ/gmtce.ss/hmm.p/hdrs/main_err.h) Message[9-12] = data 1 Message[13-17] = data 2 0x22 - IMT crec Message format: Message[1+] = call record (defined as CALLR typedef in $BASEPJ/hdrs/callr.h) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-120 8 0x23 - MT_IMT (miscellaneous IMT hooks) This message type is for miscellaneous IMT hooks. The only sub-type currently available is for a debug button (dbut). The button number is provided in the debug button MST message so that more than one button can be administered (through IMT) to convey different meanings. For example, depression of button N could signify the start of the problem symptoms, while depression of button N + X could signify the end of the problem symptoms. Note that the button number being logged represents the position of a button on a particular set type, and will be different depending on set type and module type (feature, coverage, display, ...), etc. The mapping of the button number stored in the IMT_BUT_DEBUG MST message to a position on the set is not trivial, however, the debug buttons can be administered through TCM, debug button filtering enabled through TCM and MST enabled using the ‘enable mst’ command and the resultant messages sent to MST when each button is depressed can be examined for the button data and noted. Message format: Message[1] = 0x01 (debug button sub-type, IMT_BUT_DEBUG) Message[2-3] = button number Message[4-7] = user id 0x40 - internal message tracing of call_p, conn_m, grp_m, serv_d, suser_m Message formats: conn_m, grp_m, and suser_m: Message[1-4] = user identifier Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) Message[7+] = standard message (depends on hook type) serv_d (map-type messages): Message[1-4] = user identifier Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) Message[7] = STIM type Message[8-11] = service identifier Message[12] = port network number Message[13] = endpoint number Message[14] = angel number Message[15] = circuit number Message[16+] = message DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-121 8 serv_d (other serv_d messages): Message[1-4] = user identifier Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) Message[7] = STIM type Message[8-11] = service identifier Message[12-13] = interpreted STIM Message[14-17] = aux data 0 Message[18-21] = aux data 1 Message[22-25] = aux data 2 Message[26-29] = aux data 3 Message[30] = hwtype field Message[31] = hwdata field call_p: Message[1-4] = call identifier Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) Message[7] = supervisor Message[8] = digit prep Message[9+] = message CCMS Message types: 0x30 uplink 0x31 downlink Message format: Message[1] = port network number Message[2] = endpoint number Message[3] = angel number Message[4] = circuit number Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-122 8 Message[7] = message length Message[8] = angel id Message[9+] = standard CCMS message Packet (D92) Message type: 0x32 uplink Message format: Message[1-4] = user identifier Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) Message[7-10] = link identifier Message[11-12] = message type (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/pcd_calls.h) Message[13+] = standard packet message Message type: 0x33 downlink Message format: Message[1] = port network number Message[2] = endpoint number Message[3] = angel number Message[4] = circuit number Message[5-6] = hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h) Message[7-10] = link identifier Message[11+] = standard packet message ASAI ASAI messages listed on the MST screen consist of a 4 octet header and a variable length body. The header contains the ASAI port address encoded with 8 hexadecimal digits. This same encoding is also used for BRI and PRI. In message types other than 50 and 51 (Level 2 Primitives), following the port address is a one octet field called the qualifier. The meaning of the qualifier varies according to the type (as specified by the MST encode) of ASAI message DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-123 8 traced. The body which is a real ASAI message (except for Level 2 Primitives) follows the qualifier. When the display is administered for abbreviated format, the body contains only the initial part of the ASAI message (all information in beginning of message up to and including the Q.931 IE tag) plus the cause IE (if present). 0x50 - ASAI level 2 uplink primitive Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID Message[9] = Uplink encode 0x01 - ASAI Link State 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[10] = R1/R3 Link States: 0x00 - the link has gone down 0x01 - the link has come up 0x02 - the link id has changed 0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive 0x04 - the link has recovered 0x05 - the audit recovery stim 0x06 - the link has been reset 0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs) disconnect 0x08 - broadcast link audit = R1/R3 TEI Management Message 0x01 - Identity request 0x05 - Identity Check Response 0x07 - Identity Verify Request = R1/R3 XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-124 8 R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID Message[11] = Uplink encode 0x01 - ASAI Link State 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[12] = ASAI Link State: 0x00 - the link has gone down 0x01 - the link has come up 0x02 - the link id has changed 0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive 0x04 - the link has recovered 0x05 - the audit recovery stim 0x06 - the link has been reset 0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs) disconnect 0x08 - broadcast link audit = TEI Management Message 0x01 - Identity request 0x05 - Identity Check Response 0x07 - Identity Verify Request = XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response 0x51 - ASAI level 2 downlink primitive Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-125 8 NOTE: The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link ID field will contain 0xff 0x.ff Message[9] = Downlink encode 0x01 - ASAI Link Events 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[10] = ASAI Link Events: 0x02 - link release request 0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by the lower level = TEI Management Message 0x02 - Identity Assigned 0x04 - Identity Check Request 0x06 - Identity Remove = XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response Message[11] = 0xCA - Cancel Byte NOTE: The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not be sent. R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-126 8 NOTE: The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link ID field will contain 0xff 0xff 0xff 0x.ff Message[11] = Downlink encode 0x01 - ASAI Link Events 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[12] = ASAI Link Events: 0x02 - link release request 0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by the lower level = TEI Management Message 0x02 - Identity Assigned 0x04 - Identity Check Request 0x06 - Identity Remove = XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response Message[13] = 0xCA - Cancel Byte NOTE: The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not be sent. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-127 8 0x52 - ASAI maintenance uplink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] =0 Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format 0x53 - ASAI maintenance downlink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI 3 ort Message[5] =0 Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format 0x54 - ASAI unrecognized uplink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = failure cause Failure causes 0x2a (42.) - Overload Controls in Effect 0x32 (50.) - Requested Feature Not Administered 0x45 (69.) - Requested Feature Not Implemented 0x51 (81.) - Invalid CRV 0x5f (95.) - Invalid Message 0x60 (96.) - Mandatory Information Element Missing 0x61 (97.) - Message Non-Existent/Not Implemented 0x63 (99.) - Information Element non-existent 0x64 (100.) - Invalid Information Element Contents 0x6f (111.) - Protocol Error DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-128 8 Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format NOTE: An unrecognized message displayed in abbreviated format may be missing information (such as cause) because the message was not able to be parsed. 0x55 - ASAI unrecognized downlink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = failure reason Failure reasons 1 - link flow controlled 2 - internal software error - see software error log 3 - packet interface problem - see error log Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format 0x56 - ASAI association uplink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = association type Association Type 0 - unknown 1 - call control 2 - domain control 3 - notification 4 - adjunct routing 5 - set value DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-129 8 6 - value query 7 - request feature Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format 0x57 - ASAI Association downlink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = association type Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format 0x58 - ASAI error uplink Message[1] = Port Network Number of ASAI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of ASAI port Message[4] = Port number of ASAI port Message[5] = failure cause Failure causes 1 - 127 are code standard zero cause values 128 - 255 are code standard three cause values (+ 128) Message[6+] = standard or abbreviated ASAI message format DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-130 8 ISDN 0x60 - ISDN PRI uplink Message[1] = Port Network Number of D-channel port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of D-channel port Message[4] = Port number of D-channel port Message[5+] = standard ISDNPRI format NOTE: In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if present) and the channel id Information Element (IE) (if present) are the only IEs present. 0x62 - ISDN PRI downlink Message[1] = Port Network Number of D-channel port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of D-channel port Message[4] = Port number of D-channel port Message[5+] = standard ISDNPRI format NOTE: In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if present) and the channel id IE (if present) are the only IEs present. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-131 8 0x64 - ISDN BRI uplink Message[1] = Port Network Number of BRI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of BRI port Message[4] = Port number of BRI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID Message[9+] = standard ISDNBRI format R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID Message[11+] = standard ISDNBRI format NOTE: In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if present) and the channel id Information Element (IE) (if present) are the only IEs present. 0x66 - ISDN BRI downlink Message[1] = Port Network Number of BRI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of BRI port Message[4] = Port number of BRI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID Message[9+] = standard ISDNBRI format DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-132 8 R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID Message[11+] = standard ISDNBRI format NOTE: In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if present) and the channel id IE (if present) are the only IEs present. An additional cancel byte (0xCA) may be present after the standard ISDNBRI formatted message if the message was not sent. The cancel byte will not be appended if the abbreviated format is selected. 0x68 - ISDN BRI level 2 uplink primitive Message[1] = Port Network Number of BRI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of BRI port Message[4] = Port number of BRI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID Message[9] = Uplink encode 0x01 - BRI Link State 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-133 8 Message[10] = R1/R3 Link States: 0x00 - the link has gone down 0x01 - the link has come up 0x02 - the link id has changed 0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive 0x04 - the link has recovered 0x05 - the audit recovery stim 0x06 - the link has been reset 0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs) disconnect 0x08 - broadcast link audit = R1/R3 TEI Management Message 0x01 - Identity request 0x05 - Identity Check Response 0x07 - Identity Verify Request = R1/R3 XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID Message[11] = Uplink encode 0x01 - BRI Link State 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[12] = BRI Link State: 0x00 - the link has gone down 0x01 - the link has come up 0x02 - the link id has changed 0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive 0x04 - the link has recovered 0x05 - the audit recovery stim 0x06 - the link has been reset 0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs) disconnect 0x08 - broadcast link audit = TEI Management Message 0x01 - Identity request 0x05 - Identity Check Response 0x07 - Identity Verify Request = XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-134 8 0x6A - ISDN BRI level 2 downlink primitive Message[1] = Port Network Number of BRI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of BRI port Message[4] = Port number of BRI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID NOTE: The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link ID field will contain 0xff 0xff Message[9] = Downlink encode 0x01 - BRI Link Events 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[10] = BRI Link Events: 0x02 - link release request 0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by the lower level = TEI Management Message 0x02 - Identity Assigned 0x04 - Identity Check Request 0x06 - Identity Remove = XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response Message[11] = 0xCA - Cancel Byte NOTE: The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not be sent. R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-135 8 NOTE: The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link ID field will contain 0xff 0xff 0xff 0x.ff Message[11] = Downlink encode 0x01 - BRI Link Events 0x02 - TEI Management Message 0x03 - XID Message Message[12] = BRI Link Events: 0x02 - link release request 0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by the lower level = TEI Management Message 0x02 - Identity Assigned 0x04 - Identity Check Request 0x06 - Identity Remove = XID Messages 0x01 - XID Request 0x02 - XID Response Message[13] = 0xCA - Cancel Byte NOTE: The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not be sent. 0x6C - ISDN PRI level 2 uplink primitive Message[1] = Port Network Number of D-channel port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of D-channel port Message[4] = Port number of D-channel port Message[5] = change type R1/R3 change types: 0x01 - session up notification 0x02 - Session down notification 0x6D - ISDN PRI level 2 downlink primitive (not implemented) Message[1] = Port Network Number of D-channel port Message[2] = Reserved DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-136 8 Message[3] = Carrier Address of D-channel port Message[4] = Port number of D-channel port Message[5] = change type R1/R3 change types: 0x01 - link establish request 0x02 - link release request 0x6E - ISDN PRI Unrecognized Messages Message[1] = Port Network Number of D-channel port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of D-channel port Message[4] = Port number of D-channel port Message[5] = type of failure Types of failure: 0x01 - outgoing ISDNPRI 0x02 - incoming ISDNPRI Message[6+] = standard ISDN format 0x6F - ISDN BRI Unrecognized Messages Message[1] = Port Network Number of BRI port Message[2] = Reserved Message[3] = Carrier Address of BRI port Message[4] = Port number of BRI port Message[5] = SAPI Message[6] = TEI R1: Message[7,8] = Link ID Message[9] = type of failure Types of failure: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-137 8 0x01 - outgoing ISDN 0x02 - incoming ISDN Message[10+] = standard ISDNBRI format R3: Message[7-10] = Link ID Message[11] = type of failure Types of failure: 0x01 - outgoing ISDN 0x02 - incoming ISDN NOTE: In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if present) and the channel id IE (if present) are the only IEs present. An additional cancel byte (0xCA) may be present after the standard ISDNBRI formatted message if the message was not sent. The cancel byte will not be appended if the abbreviated format is selected. General 0x71 - GAP marker Message[1] = GAP reason Message[2] = GAP count (since last clear - high byte) Message[3] = GAP count (since last clear - low byte) GAP reasons: 0x01 - disabled, disable mst command executed 0x02 - disabled, mst timer expired 0x03 - disabled, buffer full on no-wrap 0x04 - disabled, restart occurred 0x05 - disabled, by stop trigger or count 0x06 - disabled, audit error 0x07 - not disabled, stopped by stop trigger or count DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-138 8 0x72 - Time changed while trace enabled Message[1] = 0x00 Message[2] = timestamp indication timestamp indication: 0x00 - MST timestamp is old time 0x01 - MST timestamp is new time X.25 Application Data The processor channel number is the R1/R3 term, and R2 calls it the port number. The processor channel number is equal to the Application port number in R1. In R3, the processor channel admin screen should be inspected to determine the mapping. 0xA0 - X.25 outgoing application message Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = sequence number Message[3] = buffer id Message[4] = 0x00 Message[5+] = application message1 1. Application messages will contain the session layer data headers and the data. In abbreviated mode, the application message is not saved. 0xA1 - X.25 incoming application message Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = sequence number Message[3+] = application message In abbreviated mode, the application message is not saved. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-139 8 Application Control 0xA2 - X.25 application error or notification NOTE: The ’X.25 application error message’ category contains notifications as well as errors. 0xA2, 0xF0 and 0xF2 messages will be turned on by responding ’y’ to the ’Application Errors?’ field. Version 1: Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = application error/notification Version 2: Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = application error/notification Message[3+] = pm stimulus ignored (For message[2] == 0x10 only) Errors/Notifications: R1/R3: 0x01 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 - no outgoing buffer available - pvc session down - pvc session up - pvc session connect - pvc session restart - message buffer overload uplink - message buffer overload downlink - message buffer exhaustion - max # of outgoing msgs allowed - bad msg type in message buffer routine - no message buffers available - message buffer pointer error - pm state table stimulus ignored - bad session connect message Session Layer Control NOTE: The session layer header is considered part of the session layer message. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-140 8 0xB0 - X.25 outgoing session layer control message Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = session layer message type Message[3] = buffer id Message[4] =0 Message[5+] = session layer message session layer message type: 0x00 - session connect 0x01 - session accept 0x02 - session reject 0x03 - session disconnect 0x04 - reserved 0x05 - reserved 0x06 - resynch 0x07 - reserved 0x08 - resynch acknowledge In abbreviated mode, the session layer message is not saved. 0xB1 - X.25 incoming session layer control message Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = session message type Message[3+] = session message session message type: 0x00 - session connect 0x01 - session accept 0x02 - session reject 0x03 - session disconnect 0x04 - reserved 0x05 - reserved 0x06 - resynch 0x07 - reserved 0x08 - reserved In abbreviated mode, the session layer message is not saved. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-141 8 0xCF - message confirmation This confirmation is X.25 far end confirmation. Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = internal buffer id Message[3] = count of outgoing buffers confirmed Processor Channel Control 0xD0 - outgoing control message Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = message event Message events for R1: 0x00 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x0A 0x0B - Request Reset of Logical Channel - Ack. Reset of Logical Channel - Flow Control Uplink - Release Uplink Flow Control - Flow Control Downlink - Release Downlink Flow Control Message events for R3: 0x00 - Request Reset of Logical Channel 0x08 - Connect Processor Channel 0x09 - Disconnect Processor Channel 0xD1 - X.25 incoming control message Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = message event R1 Message events: 0x01 - Performed Requested Reset of Logical Channel 0x06 - Resetting Logical Channel 0x0A - Level 3 Restart1 R3 Message events: 1. If this event occurs, one restart for each logical channel will be written into the MST trace. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-142 8 0x01 - Performed Requested Reset of Logical Channel 0x06 - Resetting Logical Channel 0x08 - processor channel connected 0x09 - processor channel disconnected Link Control 0xD2 - link control Message[1] = interface link number Message[2] = message event R1 Message events: 0x00 - Busy Out Link 0x01 - Release Busied Out Link 0x0A - Level 3 Restarting R3 Message events: 0x00 - Stop Link 0x01 - Start Link 0x0A - Level 3 Restarting 0xD3 - link status (R3 Only) Message[1] = interface link number Message[2] = message event R3 Message events: 0x02 - Session Down 0x03 - Session Up Session Sanity 0xE2 - X.25 Session Timer Expirations Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = timer Timers: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-143 8 0x00 - ST2(session connect) 0x01 - ST3(retransmission) Message[3] = countdown from A1 0x02 - ST4(resynchronization) No count 0x03 - ABT1(abort session 1) Message[3] = protocol machine state where timeout occurred 0x04 - ABT2(abort session 2) Message[3] = protocol machine state where timeout occurred 0x05 - State Timer Message[3] = protocol machine state where timeout occurred 0x06 - Message Timer Message[3] not used Protocol Machine States: BAD_STATE 0x00 /* 0 is very common, don’t use as a state */ PT_UNALLOC 0x01 /* port is un-allocated */ QUIESCENT 0x02 /* quiescent - allocated but not used */ ENTER_wSA 0x03 /* entering wSA - reset issued, not ABT/CON */ W_ACCEPT 0x04 /* Waiting for Session Accept*/ DATA_XFER 0x05 /* Data Transfer State*/ DATA_RESYNC 0x06 /* Resynchronization state */ PRI_ALLOC 0x07 /* pri port allocated but not yet used */ PRI_CONN 0x08 /* pri port connected */ HIGH_STATE 0x08 /* Highest value a port state can be*/ DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list mst Page 8-144 8 X.25 Errors 0xF0 - X.25 Error Message (Outgoing Message Lost) Note that 0xA2, 0xF0 and 0xF2 messages will be turned on by responding ’y’ to the ’Application Errors?’ field. Version 1: Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = sequence number Message[3+] = message Version 2: Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = sequence number Message[3] = reason code Message[4+] = message Reason Codes: 0x00 /* message lost */ /* 1 reserved */ 0x02 /* message ignored, sequence number is within window but less * than expected */ 0x03 /* message ignored, bad sequence number */ 0x04 /* message ignored, other port has sent a disconnect message */ 0x05 /* message ignored, send request is rejected*/ 0x06 /* message ignored, from ig_l3 */ 0x07 /* message ignored, from l3_err */ 0x08 /* sequence number is within window but less * than expected (resync) */ 0x09 /* bad sequence number (resync) */ In abbreviated mode, the application message is not saved. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list suspend-alm-orig Page 8-145 8 0xF1 - Unrecognized X.25 Messages Message[1] = processor channel number Message[2] = Failure type Message[3+] = session message Failure types: 0x00 - Reserved 0x01 - Unknown session layer message type 0x02 - unrecognized control message 0xF2 - BX.25 Error Message (DIP ICOM Record Aborted) R2 only list suspend-alm-orig This command lists active entries in the Suspend Alarm Origination table. Even though this command only lists active entries, an entry that expires during the list process still appears in the output. If the Suspend Alarm Origination table is empty, the output contain only the title and field headings. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list suspend-almorg print Report sent to printer. none none schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft Examples: list suspend-alm-orig list suspend-alm-orig print list suspend-alm-orig schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list testcalls Page 8-146 8 Output list suspend-alm-orig Suspend Alarm Origination Entries Physical Board Expires At 01C03 01E0407 01E0406 off-only on-and-off on-and-off 06/11/15:06 06/11/17:26 06/12/45:34 list testcalls This command generates an Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) report. The ATMS allows the voice and data trunk facilities to be measured for satisfactory transmission performance. The performance of the trunks is evaluated according to measurements produced by a series of analog tests and are compared against user-defined threshold values. The purpose of the report is to provide measurement data to help determine the quality of trunk lines. The measurement report contains data on trunk signal loss, noise, singing return loss, and echo return loss. The measurements are produced by a set of analog trunk tests. The tests are initiated by a maintenance demand test or by a set of scheduled tests. The largest portion of these measurements are generated through scheduled testing during system quiet hours (hours where the traffic volume is low). Each trunk test performed by the system stores the results in a database. The trunk measurements in this database reflect the state of each trunk at the time of its last test. Action/Object Qualifiers/Options Qualifier/Option Description list testcalls detail summary Detailed measurement report displayed Summary measurement report displayed grp group number Measurements for a specific trunk group displayed. When used with the to-grp option, this option is the starting trunk group in a range of user-specified trunk groups. to-grp group number Measurements for all trunk groups from 1 to the specified "to-grp" trunk group are displayed. When used with the grp option, this option is the ending trunk group in a range of user-specified trunk groups. mem member number Measurements for a specific trunk group member displayed. When used with the to-mem option, this option is the starting trunk group member in a range of user-specified trunk group members. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list testcalls Page 8-147 8 Action/Object 1. Qualifiers/Options Qualifier/Option Description to-mem member number Measurements for all trunk group members from 1 to the specified "to-mem" trunk group member displayed. When used with the mem option, this option is the ending trunk group member in a range of user-specified trunk group members. port location Measurements for a specific trunk circuit (port) displayed result result identifier This option is used to filter out all measurement results that do not match the user-specified result, that is, only measurement results that match the user specified result are displayed. Examples of results are pass, marg, fail, etc. not-result result identifier This option is used to filter out all measurement results that do match the user-specified result, that is, only measurement results that do not match the user specified result are displayed. Examples of results are pass, marg, fail, etc. count count number This option is used to specify (limit) the number of records displayed. print Report sent to printer schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Examples list testcalls detail list testcalls detail print list testcalls detail grp 78 list testcalls detail grp 78 result marg count 3 schedule list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 print list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 not-result pass list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 count 2 schedule list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 to-mem 5 list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 to-mem 5 count 3 print list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 to-mem 5 count 3 result pass list testcalls detail mem 1 count 3 result pass list testcalls detail to-grp 78 to-mem 4 count 3 result pass list testcalls detail to-mem 3 result pass list testcalls detail port 1c1504 list testcalls detail port 1c1504 count 5 schedule list testcalls detail port 1c1504 count 5 not-result marg print list testcalls summary list testcalls summary grp 78 list testcalls summary grp 78 print list testcalls summary grp 78 count 5 list testcalls summary grp 78 count 5 schedule list testcalls summary grp 78 to-grp 80 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list testcalls Page 8-148 8 list testcalls summary grp 78 to-grp 80 count 3 list testcalls summary to-grp 78 list testcalls summary to-grp 78 count 7 schedule Output The following example is of the output for the list testcalls detail grp 80 command. list testcalls detail grp 80 Page 1 SPE A ATMS MEASUREMENT REPORT Group: 80 Type: co THRESHOLD VALUES Vendor: TTL Type: 105-w-rl Loss dev at 1004Hz-loss 404Hz 2804Hz C-msg C-ntch Min Max - + - + Noise Noise Marginal -2 21 9 9 9 9 55 74 Unacceptable -2 21 9 9 9 9 55 74 Trk Test Test Test -16dBm 0dBm Mem Date Time Rslt NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SRL LO 0 0 SRL HI 0 0 ERL 0 0 NE FE NE FE NE FE press CANCEL to quit -- press NEXT PAGE to continue Detail report field descriptions Group The trunk group number selected. Type The trunk group type. Vendor The vendor of this trunk group. TTL Type The kind of test line for this trunk group. Threshold Values The list of marginal and unacceptable threshold values defined on the trunk group form. The following fields appear on the lower section of the form. Many of the column headings contain the abbreviations "FE" for far end and "NE" for near end. These abbreviations define which end took the measurements. Trk Mem The trunk member within the trunk group. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids list testcalls Page 8-149 8 Test Date The month and day this trunk was tested. Test Time The time of day this trunk was tested. Tst Rslt This field describes the results of the trunk transmission test. 1004Hz-loss Min Far-to-near and near-to-far measurements of 1004-Hz loss from low-level tone. 1004Hz-loss Max Far-to-near and near-to-far measurements of 1004-Hz loss at 0 dBm. Loss dev at 404Hz Transmission tests at low frequency. These tests measure a maximum positive and negative deviation of +9 and -9 dB from the 1004-Hz loss measurements. Loss dev at 2804Hz Transmission tests at high frequency. These tests measure a maximum positive and negative deviation of +9 and -9 dB from the 1004-Hz loss measurements. C-msg Noise Maximum noise interference (in dBrnC: decibels above reference noise, which is B(EQ)10 sup -12E(EQ) watts) terminating on a voice terminal within the voice-band frequency range (500 to 2500 Hz) between 15 and 55 dBrnC. C-ntch Noise Maximum signal-dependent noise interference on a line between 34 and 74 dBrnC. SRL-LO Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit (repeater) gains and the sum of the circuit losses. SRL-LO occurs most often in the frequency range of 200 to 500 Hz. SRL-HI Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit (repeater) gains on a circuit and the sum of the circuit losses. SRL-HI occurs most often in the frequency range of 2500 to 3200 Hz. ERL Echo return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the level of signal strength transmitted and the level of signal strength reflected. ERL occurs most often in the frequency range of 500 to 2500 Hz. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids mark port Page 8-150 8 The following example is the output from the list testcalls summary grp 80 command. list testcalls summary grp 80 SPE A ATMS MEASUREMENT SUMMARY REPORT Trk Grp Num Num Of Trks 80 19 Last Test Date Last Test Time Trunks Passed Transm Test Trunks Failed Marginal Threshld 0 0 Trunks Failed Unaccept Threshld 0 Trks Trks In- Not Use Test 0 19 Busied Out Trunks 19 Command successfully completed Summary report field descriptions Trk Grp Num The trunk group number which is being summarized. Only outgoing or two-way analog trunks will be listed. Num Of Trks The total number of members per trunk group. Last Test Date The date of the oldest measurement in the trunk group. Last Test Time The time of the oldest measurement in the trunk group. Trunks Passed Transm Test The number of trunks that have passed the trunk transmission tests. Trunks Failed Marginal Threshld The number of trunks that failed a marginal threshold, but not an unacceptable threshold according to the threshold values defined on the trunk group form. Trunks Failed Unaccept Threshld This is taken from the unacceptable threshold administered on the Trunk group form. Trks In-Use The number of trunks that were in-use at the time of testing. Trks Not Test The number of trunks that were not tested due to error conditions. Busied Out Trunks The number of trunks that were busied out at the time. This could be due to hardware problems, incorrect threshold values, etc. mark port The mark port command marks faulty ports as defective to prevent their use in other administrative operations (for example, adding a data-module or station). Ports on any type of circuit pack may be marked except for installed circuit packs that are administered automatically (for example, Tone Detector, Tone Generator, Announcement, Speech Synthesizer, Call Classifier and DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor bcms Page 8-151 8 Maintenance/Test circuit packs). If the port can be administered manually, and it is unassigned, the port is marked as faulty. The clear port command reactivates the port. The list marked-ports command displays marked ports in a list format. All marked port information is saved as part of translations. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions mark port location Physical location: PCSSpp init inads craft none none Examples: mark port 1c0208 mark port 2a1001 monitor bcms The monitor bcms command displays output for agents and splits and summarizes the bcms condition. This on-line status report automatically updates every 30 seconds (or by pressing the Update key) until the command is canceled by pressing the Cancel key. Three display options are available: skill, split, and system. Action/Object Qualifier monitor bcms split split number system system number skill skill number Qualifier Description see below Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none Qualifier Description split Specifies that the command display status information for a specified split number (an ACD hunt group). split number The split’s identity to the switch and BCMS; an ACD hunt group number (split number). This parameter is entered only when the "split" parameter is entered. system This specifies that the command display split queue status as well as cumulative split information for all the BCMS measured splits. system number ACD hunt group numbers (split numbers) separated by spaces and/or split number ranges separated by a hyphen ("-"). skill This specifies that the command display status information for a specified skill number. skill number The skill’s identity to the switch and BCMS; an ACD hunt group number (skill number). This parameter is entered only when the "skill" parameter is entered. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor bcms Page 8-152 8 Output The following examples shows the output from the monitor bcms system command. monitor bcms system Page 1 of 1 BCMS SYSTEM STATUS Date: SPLIT Service Sales CALLS WAIT 3 5 OLDEST CALL 1:03 :33 AVG ANSW SPEED :45 :15 14:02 THU OCT 17 1991 AVAIL AGENT 0 0 # ABAND 3 11 AVG ABAND TIME :30 :45 # ACD 20 36 AVG AVG AFTER TALK CALL 2:30 1:25 1:32 :35 Field descriptions Date: The current date and time which is updated every 30 seconds or when the UPDATE key is pressed. SPLIT The name of the split being reported, if no name is administered then the split extension is displayed in the form "EXTxxxxx". Splits are displayed in split number order. This field is translation data. CALLS WAIT The number of calls currently waiting in this split’s queue. If any of these calls are Direct Agent Calls, the field is preceded by an asterisk. This field is real-time status data. OLDEST CALL The amount of time that the oldest call has waited in queue. This field is real-time status data. AVG ANSW SPEED The average speed of answer for this split during the current period. This includes time in queue and time ringing at the agent’s voice terminal. Calls that intraflow (calls that overflow from one ACD split to another split) d not have queue time from previous splits included in the average. The calculation is Total Answer Time/Total Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Calls. This field is measurement data and includes only those calls that have completed (terminated). AVAIL AGENT The number of agents in this split currently available to receive an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call from this split. This field is real-time status data. # ABAND The number of calls that have abandoned during the current period. This field is measurement data. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor bcms Page 8-153 8 AVG ABAND TIME The average time abandoned calls waited in queue before abandoning during the current period. The calculation is Total Abandon Time/Total Calls Abandoned. This field is measurement data and includes only those calls that have completed (terminated). # ACD The number of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current period. This includes calls that intraflow into the split. This field is measurement data. AVG TALK The average talk time for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current period. This does not include ring time at the agents’ voice terminal. The calculation is Total ACD Talk Time/Number of ACD Calls. This field is measurement data and includes only those calls that have completed (terminated). AVG AFTER CALL The average After Call Work (ACW) time for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current period. ACD calls with no ACW time are included in the average. Time spent on direct incoming or outgoing calls while in ACW are not included in the average. The calculation is (Total ACW Time Total ACW Incoming Time - Total ACW Outgoing Time)/Total ACD Calls. This field is measurement data and includes only those calls that have completed (terminated). The second example shows the output from the monitor bcms split 1 command. monitor bcms split 1 Page 1 of 1 SPE A BCMS SPLIT (AGENT) STATUS Split: 1 Split Name: hunt group 1 Date: 9:02 TUE OCT 22 1991 Calls Waiting: 0 Oldest Call: 0:00 0=Staffed 0=Avail 0=ACD 0=ACW 0=AUX 0=Extn 0=OtherSplit AGENT EXT STATE TIME ACD EXTN IN EXTN OUT CALLS CALLS CALLS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor bcms Page 8-154 8 Field descriptions Split: The number of the split requested. This field is translation data. Split Name: The name of the split requested. If no name exists the split extension is displayed in the form “EXT xxxxx”. This field is translation data. Date: The current date and time which is updated every 30 seconds or when the UPDATE key is pressed. Calls Waiting: The number of calls currently waiting in this split’s queue. If any of these calls are Direct Agent Calls, the field is be preceded by an asterisk. This field is real-time status data. Oldest Call: The time in minutes:seconds that the current oldest call has waited in this split’s queue. This field is real-time status data. Staffed The number of agents currently logged into this split. This field is real-time status data. Avail The number of agents currently available to receive an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call in this split. Agents are in either the Auto-in or Manual-in work modes and are not currently on a call. If the agent is on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for another split, this agent is not considered available and is not recorded here. This field is real-time status data. ACD The number of agents in this split currently on an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call for this split. This includes ACD calls that are being handled by this split that arrive as coverage from another split. This field also includes outbound calls (Outgoing Call Manager) that are distributed through the ACD. Note that if an agent puts an ACD call on hold, but does not enter another state (for example, the agent does not enter the AVAIL state), the agent is still seen as in the ACD state. This field is real-time status data. ACW The number of agents in this split currently in After Call Work (ACW) for this split. This field is real-time status data. AUX The number of agents in this split currently in AUX work for this split. If an agent is on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for another split, this agent is not considered in AUX work and is not be recorded here. This field is real-time status data. Extn The number of agents in this split currently on non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls, either incoming or outgoing directly to or from their extensions. If the agents are also in After Call Work (ACW) or AUX they is recorded as Extn rather than ACW or AUX. This field is real-time status data. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor health Page 8-155 8 OtherSplit The number of agents in this split on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for another split. Only used if agents belong to multiple splits. This field is real-time status data. AGENT The name of the agent associated with the extension. If no name exists this field is left blank. This field is translation data. EXT The extension of the agent. This field is translation data. STATE The current state of the agent for this split. This possible states are Avail, ACD, ACW, AUX, Extn In, Extn Out, OtherSplit, and Unstaff. If an agent is staffed, the agent must also be in one of the above states. This field is real-time status data. TIME The clock time that the agent entered the current state in hours:minutes. This field is real-time status data. ACD CALLS The number of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls (inbound and outbound), that the agent has completed for this split during the current period (half hour or hour). The maximum number of calls is 255, and if this maximum is exceeded, 255 is displayed. This field is measurement data. EXTN IN CALLS The number of non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls that the agent has received (incoming) and completed during the current period. The maximum number of calls is 255, and if this maximum is exceeded, 255 is displayed. This field is measurement data. EXTN OUT CALLS The number of non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls that the agent has made (outgoing) and completed during the current period. The maximum number of calls is 255, and if this maximum is exceeded, 255 is displayed. This field is measurement data. monitor health This command displays the current system alarm summary, maintenance busy summary, user summary, critical system status, and cabinet status that are updated each minute. After this command terminates, all users are logged off. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor health Page 8-156 8 Action/Object Qualifier monitor health Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults init inads craft cust nms browse none Feature Interactions If standby SPE Emergency Transfer Select Switches change and handshakes are down, the displayed Emerg Trans field is incorrect until handshake reintializes. When the monitor health command terminates, users are logged off of the system. Output The following example is a display of the monitor system health command. status health ALARM SUMMARY Major: 0 Minor: 9 Warning: 4 CABINET STATUS Emerg Alarms Cab Trans Mj Mn Wn 1 off 0| 7| 0 2 off 0| 0| 4 3 n.a. 0| 2| 0 4 off 0| 0| 0 PNC up up up up/up BUSY-OUT SUMMARY Trunks: 0 Stations: 0 Others: 0 PROCESSOR OCCUPANCY STATUS Static: 3% SM: 6% CP: 10% Idle: 81% CRITICAL SYSTEM STATUS Active SPE: A/auto Duplicated? SPE:n SPE Power: commercial Time Source: external 9:33 TUE JAN 29 1991 # Logins: 2 - Press CANCEL to quit - Field descriptions Major The number of logged major alarms (0 – 200). Minor The number of logged minor alarms (0 – 200). Warning Number of warnings logged in the alarm file (0 – 200). Trunks Number of busied out maintenance trunks. Stations Number of busied out maintenance stations. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor health Page 8-157 8 Others Combined number of busied out maintenance objects excluding trunks and stations. Static Proportion of the CPU currently dedicated to high priority items. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore 0 percent means that the occupancy is less than one half of a percent. SM Proportion of the CPU currently dedicated to system management or periodic and scheduled maintenance. If large amounts of periodic or scheduled maintenance testing performs, this occupancy percentage can be high without affecting service. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore 0 percent means that the occupancy is less than one half of a percent. CP Proportion of the CPU currently dedicated to call processing. This occupancy has priority over SM and IDLE occupancy categories and takes processor time away from these occupancy categories, if needed. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore 0 percent means that the occupancy is less than one half of a percent. Idle Proportion of the CPU currently available. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore 0 percent means that the occupancy is less than one half of a percent. Active SPE A or B indicate the currently-active processor complex. When the active processor complex is locked on-line with lock switching on DUPINT, the “lock” option displays; otherwise, “auto” displays. Duplicated? Duplication status of SPE components are indicated. Duplication = “y”; no duplication = “n”. SPE Power Current power source for the processor complex. The normal state is “commercial”. When commercial power is unavailable, in-use battery backup is indicated with “backup”. Time Source Current timing source is displayed. The display values for this field vary according to timing sources selected. If the site administers the optional Stratum-3 hardware, “external” displays and “internal” displays when an internal source, such as a tone clock, is used. Primary and secondary timing sources must be administered when using the Stratum-4 option. “primary” = primary administered source is in use “secondary” = secondary administered source is in use. “local” = neither the primary or secondary sources are in use. # Logins Number of current users. Cab Assigned cabinet number, ranging from 1 to the highest cabinet number in the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor security-violations Page 8-158 8 Emerg Trans Current setting of the emergency transfer switch for each cabinet. Five options are available: auto-on (“auto+” or “a+”), auto-off (“auto-” or “a-”), “on”, “off”, and “n.a.”. If “auto+” or “auto-” option are enabled, emergency transfers automatically activate when cabinets fail (“+” indicates that emergency transfer is activated, while “-” indicates that emergency transfer is inactive). When “on” is displayed, emergency transfer automatically activates. The “off” option shows that cabinets cannot activate emergency transfers. In duplicated SPE systems, switch settings for both processors of the PPN (cabinet 1) display. In this case, “auto+” is abbreviated “a+”, “auto-” is d “a-”, and “off” is “of”. “on” does not changed. If “n.a.” displays, emergency transfer switch settings are not available. Mj Number of major alarms associated with the cabinet. An asterisk fills the field when the number exceeds 99. Mn Number of minor alarms associated with the cabinet. An asterisk fills the field when the number exceeds 99. Wn Number of warnings associated with the cabinet. An asterisk fills the field when the number exceeds 99. PNC Displays current Port Network Connectivity (PNC) status for each port network within a cabinet. When multiple port networks exist within a cabinet, a slash separates Carriers A, B, and C (listed first) from Carriers D and E (up/up). Availability of the Expansion Archangel Link (EAL) determines the PNC status of a port network. “Up” denotes EAL availability. When the EAL is not available, then “dn” (down) displays. Time of Day Displays current time of day acquired from the system. monitor security-violations This command displays information about failed attempts to access the system, including the time of the violation, the login entered, and the port accessed during the failed login attempt. The system logs trunk group numbers, members, and extensions for remote access violations. The system logs remote and local invalid access attempts with a total of 16 entries maintained for each access type. This online status report automatically updates every 30 seconds until the command is canceled by pressing the CANCEL key. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions monitor securityviolations print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none Examples: monitor security-violations monitor security-violations print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor security-violations Page 8-159 8 Output The following example is a display of the monitor security-violations command. monitor security-violations SPE A SECURITY VIOLATIONS STATUS Date: 9:12 MON DEC 30 1991 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT VIOLATIONS Date 12/30 12/30 12/30 Time 09:12 09:12 09:12 Login init init init Port MGR1 MGR1 MGR1 Ext REMOTE ACCESS VIOLATIONS Date 12/30 Time 12:42 TG No. 80 Mbr 1 Ext 1111 Field descriptions Date: Current date and time. Date Date of the logged security violation shown as MM/DD (where MM = month and DD = day). Time Time of the logged security violation shown as HH:MM (where HH = the hour and MM = minute of the invalid access attempt). Login Login ID entered for the login violation attempt. Port Type of port used when login violation occurred. The following is a table of valid port types: MGR1 MGR1 represents a connection to a system SAT port. Connections are either hardwired or dialed-up. Ext Extension assigned to the data module that failed during “logging in” session. If a data module is not used, this field is blank. Date Date of the logged security violation shown as MM/DD (where MM = month and DD = day). Time The time of the logged security violation shown as HH:MM (where HH = the hour and MM = the minute). TG No. The trunk group number associated with the trunk from the failed remote access attempt (remote access violations only). Mbr The trunk group member number associated with the trunk from the failed remote access attempt (remote access violations only). Ext Extension that interfaces with remote access features (remote access violations only). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor system Page 8-160 8 monitor system The monitor system view1 and view2 commands summarize the system’s condition. This on-line status report automatically updates every minute (or by pressing the UPDATE key) until the command is canceled by pressing the CANCEL key. For security reasons, the cancel command automatically logs of technicians. Overall system status is available with either view option. “View1” displays attendant, maintenance, and traffic status. Attendant and maintenance status update every minute and traffic status updates hourly. “View2” displays all “view1” items, except hunt group measurements that are omitted from traffic status portions. These screens contain simplified high-level information about the system’s health. The monitor system conn command displays connection’s status in the connection manager process. Data is collected frequently in the connection manager for key information items used to create this report. The single option to the command line entry, is monitor system conn and its parameter is pnn. The command line parameter pnn indicates the desired 3 pnns. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions monitor system view 1 view 2 conn pnn ### pnn ### pnn ### see below init inads craft cust nms browse none none Examples: monitor system view1 monitor system view2 monitor system conn monitor system conn pnn 1 5 7 Qualifier Description view1 This screen displays attendant status, maintenance status, last hour’s measurement of trunk groups, hunt groups, attendant groups, and the time of day. view2 This screen displays a subset of view1 form entries. It includes view1 forms except the last hour’s hunt group measurements. conn This option displays the connection monitor output for key information. entering no options Omitting “pnn # # #” arguments on the command line displays the default configuration of Pnn’s 1, 2 and 3. pnn # # # Entering “pnn # # #” (where a pnn number from 1 to 3 replaces “#”, and displays data for specified pnns. entering no options Omitting the “pnn # # (# argument on the command line displays default configurations of Pnn’s 1, 2 and 3. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor system Page 8-161 8 pnn # # # Entering “pnn # # #”, where “#” is replaced by a pnn number from 1 to 3, displays data for specified pnns. Output Below are displays of monitor system view 1 and monitor system view 2. monitor system view1 ATTENDANT STATUS Console no. Activated: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Deactivated: 7 8 MAINTENANCE STATUS # of alarms for trunks: # of alarms for stations: # of alarms for other res: First OSS number has been informed? 4 2 1 n TRAFFIC STATUS Measurement Hour: 1800 Trunk Group Measurement Hunt groups Measurement (4 grps with highest %time ATB) (4 grps with highest # of qued calls) Grp no: 78 Grp no: 16 Grp dir: Calls qued: 2 Calls qued: 1 Calls aban: 1 %Out blkg: Attendant Group Measurement %Time ATB: Calls qued: 1 Calls aban: 0 16:06 WED MAR 6 1996 - press CANCEL to quit - monitor system view2 ATTENDANT STATUS Console no. Activated: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Deactivated: 7 8 MAINTENANCE STATUS # of alarms for trunks: # of alarms for stations: # of alarms for other res: First OSS number has been informed? TRAFFIC STATUS Measurement Hour: 1800 Trunk Group Measurement (4 grps with highest %time ATB) Grp no: 78 Grp dir: Calls qued: 1 %Out blkg: %Time ATB: Attendant Group Measurement Calls qued: 1 Calls aban: 0 16:08 WED MAR 6 1996 - press CANCEL to quit - 4 2 1 n DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor system Page 8-162 8 Field descriptions Console # A list of console numbers that are activated or deactivated. Activated: The attendant console is active. An attendant console activated if: ■ its handset/headset is plugged in ■ it is not busied out, and the system is in day service and the console is a day or day/night or principle console, or the system is in night service and the console is a night or day/night console. Deactivated: The attendant console is inactive. The attendant console deactivated if it does not meet activated conditions. # of alarms for trunks The number of existing minor and major trunk port alarms. # of alarms for other resources The number of existing minor and major alarms on all maintainable objects in the system, except trunks and stations. First OSS number has been informed? Questions if the first OSS telephone number reports and acknowledges alarms. If “Alarm Origination” is disabled or there are no active alarm, the field is “n”. Measurement Hour The starting time for taking measurements. For example, if the measurement hour is shown as 1800, traffic status data display is the time period from 6 PM to 7 PM (The measurement is taken hourly). Grp no A number between 1 and the maximum trunk or hunt group number. Grp dir Group direction: incoming, outgoing or two way. Calls qued Total calls that arrive and are placed in the trunk group queue. Calls aban Total abandoned calls by the caller. %Out blkg: The ratio of outgoing calls that are not carried (due to overload conditions) on a trunk group to outgoing calls offered. % Time ATB: The percentage of time within polling intervals that all trunks in the trunk group are unavailable for use. Time of day The current time of day acquired from the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor system Page 8-163 8 The following example is a display of the monitor system conn command. Time Slot Status Bus Status Pnn Bus State *Idle Count Pnn Bus State 10 0 Maint 0 10 0 Avail 10 1 Normal 233 10 1 Avail 10 0 Maint 0 22 0 Avail 10 1 Normal 233 22 1 Avail 22 0 Maint 0 1 0 Avail 22 1 Normal 233 1 1 Avail 22 0 Maint 0 22 1 Normal 233 *Callrate: 20 1 0 Maint 0 *Interval: 60 1 1 Normal 233 *Max_callrate:45 1 0 Maint 0 *Next_hour: 70 1 1 Normal 233 tot_ts_req :0F24 0000 3CE2 ts_count :0010 0920 0200 Requests-TN748 ts_denied :0E46 3CE2 0000 ts_total :0000 0090 0028 Requests-TN748 tot_fts_req:0000 53D2 2231 fts_count:02E0 0910 0784 Requests-TN744 fts_total:0320 0192 7048 Requests-TN744 Requests-TN744 MFCs :0082 Note: * Denotes Base 10, All Other Figures are in Base 16 TTRs :0014 CPTRs:0041 CPTRs:0082 TTRs :0082 Field descriptions Time Slot Status 4 numbers are associated with time slot status for each specified pnn; the two buses (0 and 1) have a maintenance and a normal state, and a number of idle counts. These fields represent real-time status data. Bus Status Two numbers are associated with the two buses for each pnn. Shown are the pnn number; the associated bus (0 or 1); and the bus’s state (avail or unavail). These fields represent real-time status data. Callrate The callrate field represents call rates currently executing on the switch. This is a counter that is bumped for each call attempt. This field represents real-time status data. Interval This field represents the interval applied to the call rate. It is normally a 36 second time period. This field represents constant status data. Max_callrate This field represents the maximum call rate achieved since the last hour. If, at 20 minutes past 12:00, the system executes this command, the maximum call rate obtained during the past 20 minutes displays. This field represents real-time status data. Next_hour This field contains a value of 0 or 1 depending related to measurements taken this hour or the next. This hour reflects maximum call rates. When this flag is set, statistics accumulate for the next hour and shortly thereafter. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor system Page 8-164 8 tot_ts_req This field holds the total time slots in use during the time period elapsed since the top of the last hour. Data is internally collected every 100 seconds. When the timer fires and the data collection occurs, a check is made as to how many time slots are currently in use. That’s where the total comes from. There are three numbers displayed for this field on the form; one for each of the pnns requested. This field represents real-time status data. ts_denied This field records total time slots requests denied since the beginning of the last hour. Data is collected internally every 100 seconds. Three numbers display for this field; one for each requested pnn. This field represents real-time status data. tot_fts_req This field represents the total number of requested fiber time slots. This field increments each time a fiber time slots is allocated since the last top of the hour measurement polling. Three values display; one for each requested pnn. This field represents real-time status data. ts_count The value in this field represents the requests for time slots during the last 100 second interim. An internal timer initiates polling every 100 seconds. Three numbers display for this field on the form; one for each requested pnn. This field represents real-time status data. ts_total This field represents the total number of time slots requested since the top of the last hour. This field represents real-time status data. fts_count The value in this field represents the requests for fiber time slots during the last 100 second interim. An internal timer initiates polling every 100 seconds. Three numbers display for this field; one for each requested pnn. This field represents real-time status data. fts_total This field indicates the total number of fiber time slots during the last 100 second interim. This field represents real-time status data. Requests-TN74 8 TTRs This field reflects the total number of requested touch tone receivers that are currently-active. It decrements when tone receivers are freed and increments when they are requested. This field applies strictly to the TN748 board. This field represents real-time status data. Requests-TN74 8 CPTRs This field reflects the total number of requested call progress tone receivers that are currently active. It decrements when call progress tone receivers are freed and increments when they are requested. This field applies strictly to the TN748 board. This field represents real-time status data. Requests-TN74 4 CPTRs This field reflects the total number of requested call progress tone receivers that are currently active. It decrements when call progress tone receivers are freed and increments when they are requested. This field applies strictly to the TN744 board. This field represents real-time status data. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor traffic Page 8-165 8 Requests-TN74 4 TTRs This field reflects the total number of requested touch tone receivers that are currently active. It decrements when tone receivers are freed and increments when they are requested. This field applies strictly to the TN744 board. This field represents real-time status data. Requests-TN74 4 MFC This field reflects the total number of requested multi-frequency receivers that are currently active. It decrements when multi-frequency receivers are freed and increments when they are requested. Note that this field applies strictly to the TN744 board. This field represents real-time status data. monitor traffic This command provides information on the number of trunk group and hunt group calls waiting to be serviced, and the time the oldest call in the group has been waiting for service. Action/Object monitor traffic Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions trunk-groups see below none Examples: monitor traffic trunk-groups monitor traffic trunk-groups 4 monitor traffic hunt-groups init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none hunt-groups Qualifier Description trunk-groups The number of trunk group calls waiting to be serviced, members in the group, and number of members that are active on calls in the group. This field displays up to 60 administered trunk groups. Technicians specify the starting trunk group. If technicians enter 5, the displayed trunks start at 5. Numbers 1-4 do not appear. hunt-groups This field displays the waiting time for oldest call in each hunt group. Screen data updates every minute; only changed fields refresh. Unadministered hunt groups have blank values. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor traffic Page 8-166 8 Output The following output example is a display of the monitor traffic hunt-groups command. monitor traffic hunt-groups # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 S 15 (#: Group; A 10 HUNT GROUP STATUS Q W LCIQ 10 0 20 S: Grp Size; 22:49 SAT DEC 31 1988 # S A Q W LCIQ 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 10 5 0 0 10 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 A: Active Members; Q: Q Length; W: Calls Waiting) (LCIQ: Longest Call In Queue in seconds) Field descriptions # Group number for trunk group or hunt group. S Number of members administered for each trunk or hunt group. A Number of group members that are active on a call. This does not include busied out members. Q The length of queues administered for groups. W Number of calls waiting in group queues to be serviced. LCIQ The longest call in queue (LCIQ) indicates the time in seconds the oldest call in the hunt group queue has been waiting to be serviced. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids monitor trunk Page 8-167 8 monitor traffic trunk-groups # 1 2 9 65 99 S 15 22 31 5 12 A 10 21 12 5 0 (#: Group; Q 0 10 20 10 0 TRUNK GROUP STATUS 22:49 SAT DEC 311988 W # S A Q W # S A Q W # S A Q 0 10 0 8 0 S: Grp Size; A: Active Members; Q: Q Length; W W: Calls Waiting) monitor trunk This command displays internal software status information. This command helps to locate facilities to which the trunk is communicating. If a trunk group number is entered without a member number, and with or without “/”, it is member 1. If a trunk group and member number are both entered, status for specified members displays. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions monitor trunk group 1 – 99. If a group number is entered with out a member number, the member number defaults to 1. init inads craft cust rcus bcms browse 1 (one) none member 1 – 99. If a member number is entered, the member status displays. Examples: monitor trunk 78 monitor trunk 80/ monitor trunk 78/1 monitor trunk 80/2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids recycle carrier Page 8-168 8 Output The following example shows the output from the monitor trunk 78/1 command. monitor trunk 78/1 TRUNK STATUS Trunk Group/Member: 078/001 Port: 01C1505 Signaling Group ID: Connected Ports: Service State: in-service/idle Maintenance Busy? no CA-TSC State: Field descriptions Trunk Group/Member Trunk group and group member number. (1-99/1-99). Port The port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for trunks. Signaling Group ID If the trunk is ISDN, this field contains the number of the ISDN Signaling Group. Otherwise, this field is blank.( ) Connected Ports Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the trunk. Service State In-service/active, in-service/idle, out-of-service, out-of-service-NE (Near End), out-of-service-FE (Far End), maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, maint-FE/idle, pending-in-service, pending-maint, or disconnected. NE (Near End) and FE (Far End) refer to the “end” of the trunk that has placed the facility in its current state. Maintenance Busy This field identifies maintenance testing that occurs on the trunk. CA-TSC State The state of temporary signaling connections. (connection set up to pass call information over PRI signaling links). recycle carrier This command recycles power for specified carriers. When power units are replaced in carriers, this command recycles that carrier’s power. Processor carriers and their duplicates and EPN control carriers or SCC carriers cannot be recycled. Carriers with active, recycled EIs, experience disrupted communications with their cabinets. Carriers with active, recycled tone-clock boards experience disrupted service for ports in port networks. For more details on recycling and trouble shooting power units, refer to “Troubleshooting Control Carrier Power Units” in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids recycle carrier Page 8-169 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout mis location Physical location of desired carrier. init inads craft cabinet = 1 see below Carrier b-e. (b not applicable for SPE duplex PPNs) none for carrier Feature Interactions Carrier “a” cannot recycle its power. When carrier “b” of the PPN contains SPE duplication hardware, it cannot recycle its power. Recycling maintenance objects results in: Recycled component Result Port Carriers Interrupted service Carriers with active EIs Disrupted communication with that cabinet Carriers with active tone-clock boards Interrupted service for ports port network The list configuration command causes circuit packs to display red LEDs and NO BOARDs. Carrier The test tdm command accelerates retirement of these problems. Output The following output example displays the recycle carrier c command. recycle carrier c TEST RESULTS Port 01C Maintenance Name CARR-POW Alt. Name Test No. Result 126 PASS Command successfully completed Error Code DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids refresh spe-standby Page 8-170 8 Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier) for tested maintenance objects. This field displays cabinet and carrier values. Maintenance Name CARR-POW. Alt. Name Not applicable. Test Number T126. Test Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. refresh spe-standby This command immediately places Standby SPEs into Standby Mode. This command preempts in-progress Standby SPE maintenance activity, resets the Standby SPE Processor, and refreshes the Standby SPE’s DRAM memory (that is, all of Active SPE DRAM memory is shadowed to the Standby SPE memory). Refresh reactivates memory shadowing that is disabled while standby SPE is in maintenance mode When Standby SPEs return to Standby Mode, their memory up-date with Active SPE memory. Because it preempts Standby SPE maintenance activities, the refresh spe-standby command should be used judiciously. The following potential side-effects can occur: Action/Object ■ Tests that detect faults and/or lack of faults on Standby SPE components might not run. Accordingly, alarms are not raised or retired. ■ Translation saves might not execute so translations data on Active and Standby SPE mass storage devices do not reflect the changes made since the last translation save. Qualifier Qualifier Description refresh spe-standby Permissions Defaults init inads craft none Feature Interactions Standby SPEs must be in maintenance mode before the refresh command can be invoked. release access-endpoint This command removes all ports associated with the specified access endpoint from a maintenance busy state. Periodic and scheduled tests subsequently resume on the released ports. Maintenance completes background initialization testing on the released ports. For details of the test sequence, refer to [3]. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release board Page 8-171 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release access-endpoint extension number associated with desired access endpoint. init inads craft nms none none Examples: release access-endpoint 25012 release access-endpoint 77868 Output The following example shows the output from the release access-endpoint 22502 command and assumes that the access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6. release access-endpoint 22502 page 1 of 1 COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt. Name Result 01C1101 WAE-PORT 22502 PASS 01C1102 WAE-PORT 22502 PASS 01C1103 WAE-PORT 22502 PASS 01C1104 WAE-PORT 22502 PASS 01C1105 WAE-PORT 22502 PASS 01C1106 WAE-PORT 22502 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of released maintenance. Maintenance Name The type of released maintenance object. (wideband access point =WAE-PORT, single port access endpoint = TIE-DS1. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. This field contains the extension number of the access endpoint. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release board This command activates administered maintenance objects on the circuit pack at specified locations. Tests are executed to ensure its usability. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release board Page 8-172 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release board location Physical location: PCsspp init inads craft nms none none Examples: release board 01c11 release board 02c15 Output The following example shows the output from the release board 1c07 command and assumes that the board in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7 is an analog board with three ports administered. release board 01C07 COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C07 ANL-BD 01C0702 ANL-LINE 01C0701 ANL-LINE 01C0703 ANL-LINE Alt. Name 51001 Result PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of released maintenance object. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being released. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release cdr-link Page 8-173 8 release cdr-link This command removes maintenance objects associated with specified call detail recording (cdr)-links from a maintenance busy state. These links provide asynchronous data connections from switches to peripherals; they are composed of a: ■ Far end data module ■ Simulated data channel on a PKTINT board ■ Manager that initiates and maintains the link ■ Controller/protocol that services the link For information on what a CDR link is and does, see the description of the ‘‘status cdr-link’’ command. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release cdr-link link-id primary init inads craft none none secondary Examples: release cdr-link primary release cdr-link secondary Output The following example shows the output from the release cdr-link primary command. release cdr-link primary COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name PRI-CDR Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Not applicable. ( ) Maintenance Name Type of released maintenance object. (primary cdr-link = PRI-CDR, secondary cdr-link = SEC-CDR) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release data-module Page 8-174 8 Alt. Name Not applicable. ( ) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release data-module This command activates the specified data module (or data channel). Hardware tests are executed to verify that the equipment is functioning. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release data-module extension Extension number associated with desired data module or data channel. init inads craft cust nms none none Examples: release data-module 310 Output The following example shows the output from the release data-module 300 command. release data-module 310 COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C1103 DIG-LINE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance object that is busied out or released, or the number of the data channel. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being busied out or released. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release journal-printer Page 8-175 8 Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. Alt. Name If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release journal-printer This command activates maintenance objects associated with a specified pms-log or wakeup-log link. Hardware tests are executed to verify that the equipment is functioning. For general information on journal printer links, see the description of the ‘‘busyout pms-link’’ command. For information on journal printers, see the description of the ‘‘status journal-link’’ command. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release journal-printer pms-log releases links to pms printers. (1) none see below wakeup-log Releases links to wakeup logging facilities. (0) init inads craft nms Examples: release journal-printer pms-log release journal-printer wakeup-log Feature Interactions Specific component maintenance performed on a link sometimes conflicts with link maintenance, itself. (busied out objects create link setup failure) Frequent link re-setup attempts may delay faulty component recovery. For best results, technicians should use busyout to disable attempted link re-setup. Output The following output example is a display of the release journal-printer wakeup-log command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release link Page 8-176 8 release journal-printer wakeup-log COMMAND RESULTS Port 0 Maintenance Name JRNL-LINK Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of busied out or released maintenance object. (wakeup log = 0; pms log = 1) Maintenance Name Type of busied out or released maintenance object. Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release link The release link command activates MOs associated with a specified link. Hardware tests are executed to verify that equipment is functioning properly. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release link link-id Number associated with each link (1–8). init inads craft none none 1through 4 reside on Processor Interface circuit packs “1a1” or “1b1” 5 through 8 reside on Processor Interface circuit pack “1a2” or “1b2.” Examples: release link 1 release link 8 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release mis Page 8-177 8 Output The following output example is a display of the release link 1 command. release link 1 COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C0301 PI-LINK Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the busied out or released maintenance object. Port address represents the link-id. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being released. Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release mis The release mis command activates management information systems. Hardware tests are executed to verify that equipment is functioning properly. Action/Object release mis Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft cust rcust none none DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release modem-pool Page 8-178 8 Output The following output example is a display of the release mis command. release mis COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name MIS Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Not applicable. Maintenance Name MIS Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release modem-pool The release modem-pool command deactivates specified modem pool groups or group members. Specifying group numbers, member numbers releases single group members. Specifying modem pool group numbers releases members in a modem pool group. Action/Object release modem-pool Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions group 1-5. none pair of analog and digital line ports (or two pair for the Integrated modem-pool case). 1-32. init inads craft none member Examples: release modem-pool 1 release modem-pool 4/3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release packet-control Page 8-179 8 Output The following example shows the output from the release modem-pool 1 command. release modem-pool 1 SPE B COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01C0701 01C0703 Alt. Name MODEM-PT MODEM-PT Result Error Code PASS PASS Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of busied out maintenance object. Maintenance Name MODEM-PT. Alt. Name This field is not applicable to this command. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release packet-control This command activates the packet-control circuit pack, and reestablishes each terminated point-to-point signaling link on this packet-control. This command is the complement to the busyout packet-control command. (deactivates packet control and destroys terminated point-to-point signaling links). Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults release packet-control location simplex = location parameter not used. init inads craft simplex = cabinet 1, carrier A. Duplicated = packet control carrier (1A or 1B) Examples: release packet-control 1A release packet-control 1B duplex = cabinet 1. (no default carriers.) Feature Interactions see below DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release pms-link Page 8-180 8 Feature Interactions High or Critical Reliability Systems disallow attempts to release the packet-control that resides in the standby control complex. When packet-controls in the active control complex are released from previous busied-out states, connectivity across Packet Buses reestablish. ISDN-BRI point-to-point signaling links reestablish with the release packet-control command. Output The following output example is a display of the release packet-control 1A command. release packet-control 1A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 1A PKT-CTRL Alt. Name Result Error Code PASS Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Cabinet-Carrier where Packet-Control resides. Maintenance Name PKT-CTRL. Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL). Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release pms-link The release pms-link command deactivates MOs that are associated with a property management system link. These links provide asynchronous data connections from switches to peripherals; they are composed of a: ■ Far end data module ■ Simulated data channel on a NETCON board DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release port Page 8-181 8 Action/Object ■ Manager that initiates and maintains the link ■ Controller/protocol that services the link Qualifier Qualifier Description release pms-link Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft none see below Feature Interactions Specific component maintenance performed on a link sometimes conflicts with link maintenance, itself. (busied out objects create link setup failure) Frequent link re-setup attempts may delay faulty component recovery. For best results, technicians should use busyout to disable attempted link re-setup. Output The following output example is a display of the release pms-link command. release pms-link COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name PMS-LINK Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port This field is left blank. Maintenance Name PMS-LINK Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release port The release port command deactivates specified ports on circuit packs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release pri-endpoint Page 8-182 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release port location Physical location: PCsspp init inads craft none none Examples: release port 01c1101 release port 02c1501 Output The following output example is a display of the release port 1c0701 command. Assume that the port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7, circuit 1 is an analog port. release port 01C0701 COMMAND RESULTS Port 01C0701 Maintenance Name ANL-LINE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of released maintenance object. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being released. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release pri-endpoint The release-PRI endpoint command removes PRI endpoint ports (B-channels) associated with specified PRI endpoint from maintenance busy states. Periodic and scheduled tests resume on released ports. The switch attempts to negotiate DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release sp-link Page 8-183 8 with the far-end PRI terminal adapter activating PRI endpoint port (B-channel). Maintenance does background initialization testing on released ports. For details of the test sequence, refer to [3]. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release pri-endpoint extension extension number associated with desired PRI endpoint. init inads craft nms none none Output The following output example is a display of the release pri-endpoint 22501 command. Assume that the PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 20, circuit 1 to 6. release pri-endpoint 22501 page 1 of 1 COMMAND RESULTS Port 01B2001 01B2002 01B2003 01B2004 01B2005 01B2006 Maintenance Name Alt. Name PE-BCHL 22501 PE-BCHL 22501 PE-BCHL 22501 PE-BCHL 22501 PE-BCHL 22501 PE-BCHL 22501 Result PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of released maintenance object. Maintenance Name PE-BCHL. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. (PRI endpoint extension) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release sp-link The release sp-link command reactivates busied out system printer links and resolves active alarms for system printer links. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release sp-link Page 8-184 8 The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer. Administering system printer extensions to call system printers creates the links. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description release sp-link Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft none none Output The following output example is a display of the release sp-link command. release sp-link SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name SYS-PRNT Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of busied out maintenance objects. ( ) Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being busied out. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release spe-standby Page 8-185 8 release spe-standby The release spe-standby command removes busyout statuses of standby SPEs. Memory shadowing restores, a memory refresh of the standby SPE occurs, and 1 minute later the equivalent of scheduled standby SPE maintenance returns the standby SPE’s Fault Severity Level to its appropriate value. Standby SPE releases are allowed if communication to the standby is down. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description release spe-standby Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft none see below Feature Interactions When standby SPEs release a memory, a refresh executes and the standby Fault Severity Level lowers to its appropriate level. One minute later, the equivalent of scheduled standby SPE maintenance executes and a spontaneous SPE interchange might occur, depending of Fault Severity Levels of the two SPE’s. If the standby SPE is in poor health, memory shadowing must not enable (communication to the standby is impossible, if it is enabled). Then the standby SPE releases successfully. Output The following output example is a display of the release spe-standby command and assumes that the standby SPE is located in carrier “B.” release spe-standby SPE A COMMAND RESULTS Port 01B Maintenance Name STBY-SPE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address displays the standby SPE’s cabinet and carrier location. (01A or 01B) Maintenance Name STBY-SPE DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release station Page 8-186 8 Alt. Name Not applicable. ( ) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release station This command removes specified administered voice terminal extensions from a maintenance busy state. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release station extension extension number associated with the desired voice terminal init inads craft cust none none Examples: release station 10020 release station 32770 Output The following output example is a display of the release station 1002 command. release station 1002 COMMAND RESULTS Port 01C1102 Maintenance Name DIG-LINE Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the released maintenance object. Maintenance Name Type of released maintenance object. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. This field contains an extension when the object is a station. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release tdm Page 8-187 8 release tdm This command removes specified tdm buses from a maintenance busy state. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults release tdm portnetwork pn number specifies the Port Network number of the TDM bus to be released. init inads craft none bus bus ("a" or "b") specifies desired half of the TDM bus. Each 512 time slot TDM bus is configured as two duplicate 256 time slot buses. This division allows for duplication of control channels and dedicated tone time slots. The default control bus (carrying the control channel) is the "a" bus, while the default tone bus (carrying dedicated tones) is the "b" bus. (1 - 3) Feature Interactions System tears down busied out buses. No new calls can be administered on busied out buses Examples: release tdm port-network 1 bus a release tdm port-network 1 bus b Output The following output example is a display of the release tdm port-network 1 bus a command. release tdm port-network 1 bus a COMMAND RESULTS Port PN 01A Maintenance Name TDM-BUS Alt. Name Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port network number (preceded by “PN”) and bus (“A” or “B”) associated with the TDM bus. Maintenance Name TDM-BUS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release tone-clock Page 8-188 8 Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. release tone-clock This command removes specified tone/clocks from maintenance busy states. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release tone-clock location Physical location: PCsspp init inads craft 1 (one) none Examples: release tone-clock c Output The following output example is a display of the release tone-clock 1a command. release tone-clock 1a COMMAND RESULTS Port 01A 01A 01A Maintenance Name TONE-PT TDM-CLK TONE-BD Alt. Name Result PASS PASS PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port The tone clock circuit pack maintenance object displays the cabinet and carrier of the specified tone/clock board. Maintenance Name TONE-PT, TDM-CLK and TONE-BD Alt. Name Not applicable. Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids release trunk Page 8-189 8 release trunk The release trunk command removes specified trunk groups or trunk group members from a maintenance busy state. Specifying the group number, releases a single group member and the member number. Specifying the trunk group number releases members in a trunk group. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions release trunk group Group number (1–99) none none member Member number (1–99) init inads craft Examples: release trunk 78 release trunk 78/1 Output The following output example is a display of the release trunk 78/1 command. release trunk 78/1 COMMAND RESULTS Port 01C1505 Maintenance Name CO_TRK Alt. Name 78/01 Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the released maintenance object. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being released. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids reset board Page 8-190 8 reset board This command performs a soft reset of every specified, administered port on the port circuit pack. Ports must be busied out before the port circuit pack resets. ! WARNING: This command is service disrupting and may cause extraneous alarms. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions reset board location Physical location: PCsspp carrier = 1 none repeat number Number of times each board reset repeats (1– 00) init inads craft nms repeat number = 1 Examples: reset board 01c11 reset board c08 reset board 03d12 r 3 Output The following output example is a display of the reset board 1c07 command and assumes that the board in port network 1, carrier c, slot 7 is an analog board with three ports administered. reset board 1C07 TEST RESULTS Port 01C07 Maintenance Name ANL-BD Alt. Name Test No. Result 53 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the reset maintenance object. Maintenance Name Type of reset maintenance object. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids reset interface Page 8-191 8 Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. Alt. Name If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) private CO line P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. reset interface This command resets the Processor Interface circuit pack, reads its associated software from tape, restarts applications processes, re-establishes permanent switched calls, and sets up each enabled link. If the interface cannot be established, a Major alarm raises on the interface and all enabled links deactivate. When the Message Server Adjunct (MSA), Distributed Communications System (DCS), Audio Information Exchange (AUDIX), or Call Management System (CMS) are initially administered, links for these applications and submitting the form restarts the interface. Before Processor Interface circuit packs are replaced, technicians must power down the switch and restart it. (unless the system is equipped with High or Critical Reliability) For troubleshooting, see status interface, status link, and status processor-channel commands to locate problems before performing a reset interfaces. (link traffic is interrupted) ! WARNING: The interface command interrupts operation of the AP, DCS, AUDIX, CMS or ISDN-PRI. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions reset interface location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface (PI board). The position determines cleared processor interface circuit pack. first processor interface = 1 init inads craft none none second processor interface = 2 Examples: reset interface 01a1 reset interface a2 reset interface 01b1 reset interface 01b2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids reset maintenance Page 8-192 8 reset maintenance This command resets technician-specified EPN maintenance circuit packs. Specifying cabinets 2 or 3 resets EPN maintenance circuit packs in carrier “a” of the specified cabinet. This command also drops a SAT terminal session on the reset EPN maintenance circuit pack. If this command runs from a EPN maintenance SAT terminal, reset results do not display. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults reset maintenance location Physical location of the EPN maintenance circuit pack (carrier number). init inads craft none Examples: reset maintenance 02 reset maintenance 2 reset maintenance 3a Feature Interactions SAT is dropped before reset results can display, when command runs from EPNSAT. Examine error and alarm logs for “MAINT” entries to determine reset success. Output The following output example is a display of the reset maintenance 02a command. reset maintenance 02A TEST RESULTS Port 02A Maintenance Name MAINT Alt. Name Test No. 306 Result PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the reset MO. Maintenance Name MAINT Alt. Name Not applicable. ( ) Result Success status of a busied out object (PASS, ABORT, FAIL) Test No. 306. Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids reset spe-standby Page 8-193 8 reset spe-standby The reset spe-standby command converts standby SPEs from standby mode to maintenance mode with the defined restart level. This command applies to high or critical reliability systems. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions reset spe-standby level 1 = Warm Restart 2 = Cold-2 3 = Cold1 4 = Reboot 5 = Extended Reboot init inads craft none see below Examples: reset spe-standby 1 reset spe-standby 2 reset spe-standby 3 Feature Interactions This command invokes standby SPE initialization like low level maintenance. Software never escalates requested reset levels. Technicians always determine reset levels. If the standby SPE contains a software memory card and the requested restart level is 4 or 5, the standby SPE reloads system software before rebooting. reset system This reset system command is increasingly destructive as reset levels increase. This command switches control from currently-active SPEs to standby SPEs in a High or Critical Reliability System through HOT restart interchanges. Once planned interchanges start, they cannot abort from the CANCEL key. If reset system interchange commands are rejected because standby SPE Fault Severity Levels are higher than active SPEs, the health-override command can force a HOT interchange. The reset system interchange command does not disrupt in-progress calls. However, it drops links (including CDR and PMS) to local and remote administration terminals. It also drops and re-establishes connections on the Network Control Circuit Pack data channels. During the interchange, callers cannot place calls, but current calls are unaffected. When a system restart occurs with the corresponding vector bit set, a core dump is written to memory card, only if the memory card is the special core dump card), the vector is cleared, and the requested restart is performed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids reset system Page 8-194 8 All successful reset system commands log users off. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions reset system level interchange health-override See below init inads craft none see below level Examples: reset system 1 reset system 2 reset system interchange health-override Reset levels are entered numerically: 1 = Warm Restart 2 = Cold-2 3 = Cold1 4 = Reboot 5 = Extended Reboot interchange Maintenance Object System control passes to standby SPEs as active and standby SPEs change roles. The optional “health-override” qualifier can be entered to bypass Fault Severity Levels of standby SPEs to force an interchange. SPE alarm components determine Fault Severity levels. Each component is assigned a severity level, and the most severe SPE alarm defines Fault Severity Levels for SPEs. The following table lists maintenance objects, their alarms, severities and interchange restart levels that affect SPE Fault Severity Levels. Alarm Level On/Off Board Fault Severity Level Restart Level STBY-SPE WARNING OFF 120 None MEM-BD MAJOR or MINOR ON 110 Hot or Warm MEMORY MAJOR or MINOR ON 110 Hot or Warm STBY-SPE MAJOR ON 100 None PROCR MAJOR ON 70 Hot or Warm SW-CTL MAJOR ON 65 Cold 2 MEM-CARD MAJOR OFF 65 Cold 1 12V-PWR MIN ON 65 Hot DUPINT MAJOR ON 61 Hot CARR-POW MAJOR ON 61 Cold 2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids reset system Page 8-195 8 Maintenance Object Alarm Level On/Off Board Fault Severity Level Restart Level SHDW-CIR MAJOR ON or OFF 60 Warm SHDW-LINK MAJOR ON 60 Warm SW-CTL MINOR ON 40 Hot PR-MAINT MINOR ON 30 Hot PI-BD MAJOR or MINOR ON 20 Hot PKT-CTRL MAJOR ON or OFF 20 Hot PKT-CTRL MINOR ON or OFF 15 Hot PI-PT MAJOR ON 15 Hot DATA-CHL MINOR ON 15 Hot DATA-CON MINOR ON 15 Hot DATA-BD MINOR ON 15 Hot MEM-CARD MINOR ON or OFF 10 Hot PR-MAINT MINOR OFF 8 Hot A reset system interchange command aborts if: healthoverride ■ The standby SPE is down ■ The active SPE is locked active ■ Communication to the standby SPE is not possible ■ Memory shadowing to the standby SPE is not functioning ■ The standby SPE is not fully refreshed ■ The standby SPE is busied out If HOT restart interchanges fail because Fault Severity Levels of standby SPEs are higher than active SPEs, the health-override command tries to force a switch. If the switch occurs, new active SPE Fault Severity Level raises to prevent a software-initiated HOT SPE interchanger. This artificial raising of active Fault Severity Levels lasts for one hour, then Fault Severity Levels of both SPEs returns to their normal values. Feature Interactions ■ The reset command invokes system initialization like low level maintenance. Software never escalates requested reset levels. Technicians determine the levels. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids restore announcements Page 8-196 8 ■ Two hardware switches are associated with active and standby SPEs. These hardware switches override demand maintenance activities requested by system technicians. If active SPEs are locked active with these hardware switches, interchanges do not occur until the active is unlocked. ■ Successful SPE interchanges logoff PPNSAT terminals. ■ Restart levels null the effect of the health-override option. restore announcements This command copies announcement data from the active MSS devices to announcement boards. Action/ Object restore announcements Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults print Report sent to printer. schedule] Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 init inads craft cust rcust Tape-based: Announcement copies from active processor’s tape to the announcement board. Feature Interactions see below Card-mem based: Announcement data copies from active processor’s to the announcement board. Examples: restore announcements 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions ! WARNING: Manager I is blocked for other activities until the command completes (up to 45 minutes) ■ If no announcement data module and no NETCON data module are administered, the system denies the command. ■ If the announcement data module port is out of service or active (for example, performing an announcement playback), the system denies the command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids restore announcements Page 8-197 8 ■ If users are in integrated announcements sessions, the system denies the command. ■ If the board is currently uploading or downloading, the system denies the command. Users cannot save or restore announcement after the restore announcements command commences. ■ If no tape is in the tape drive when users attempt a copy, the command aborts. ■ If the MSS is in use by another user or maintenance, the restore announcements command is not allowed. ■ Unsaved or corrupted announcement files on the MSS, disallow the restore announcements command. To prepare for a failure, users should copy announcement files to announcement boards. If errors result from hardware or firmware failures, MSS software logs hardware errors with maintenance. When errors occur, the system continually attempts to download boards in 10-minute intervals until a download succeeds, announcements record, or downloads initiate from the SAT. Then, error messages display indicating corrective action. If errors result from hardware or firmware failure, MSS software logs a hardware error with maintenance. Maintenance software invokes tests to diagnose and attempt to correct the problem. If maintenance software fails to correct problems, alarms raise indicating additional corrective action. When the system crashes and/or a spontaneous processor interchange occurs, the restore operation fails. Valid announcement files do not appear on the announcement board. To copy the announcements from the active processor’s MSS device to the announcement board, restart the command on the newlyactive processor. When announcements completely copy to announcement boards, calls do not connect to announcements on the ANN board. When announcement boards are plugged in or reset, maintenance performs a series of tests, including a DRAM Checksum test. Tests fail due to power losses to boards, resulting in automatic downloading of announcement files. Output The following output example is a display of the restore announcements command on a simplex SPE system. restore announcements Page 1 of 1 SPE A RESTORE ANNOUNCEMENTS Processor SPE-A Command Completion Status Success Error Code 0 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids resume hardware-group Page 8-198 8 Field descriptions Processor Displays the processor that houses the MSS device used to copy announcement data. Command Completion Status Specifies successful completion of the command. Error Code System-generated description of a command failure. resume hardware-group The resume hardware-group command resumes the previous test hardware-group command its canceled position. Entering another test hardware-group disables the resume hardware-group command. A canceled test hardware-group command appears as “canceled” on the status hardware-group screen. A resumed test hardware-group command appears as “active” on the status hardware-group screen. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description resume hardware-group Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads none none Feature Interactions Cancel hardware-group Cancelling a test hardware-group command deactivates the test command. The status hardware-group screen displays the state as “canceled”. When the resume hardware-group command is entered to resume a previously-canceled test hardware-group command, the state of the test command changes to ’active’ on the status hardware-group screen. save announcements This command copies announcement data from the announcement board to the MSS. The Card-Mem stores announcements for the system. By default, announcement data writes to the MSS device in a simplex processor (SPE) system, or to both MSS devices in a High or Critical Reliability System. Also, the save announcements command can write to the MSS device on either processor, in a High or Critical Reliability System. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids save announcements Page 8-199 8 If there integrated announcement boards exist, this command is allowed. The system denies the save announcement command if no announcement data modules and no NETCON data modules are administered. Simplex In a simplex system, no options for the save announcements command exist. This command saves announcement files to the MSS device. Duplex If no options are specified, the system saves announcements to both processors’ MSS devices. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions save announcements spe-active forces the system to write announcement data to specified devices in active processors. none see below spe-standby forces the system to write announcement data to specified device s in standby processors. init inads craft cust rcust Examples: save announcements save announcements spe-active save announcements spe-standby Feature Interactions ! WARNING: Manager I is blocked for other activities until the command completes. (up to 45 minutes). ■ If no announcement and no NETCON data module are administered, the system denies the command. ■ If the announcement data module port is out of service or active (performing an announcement playback), the system denies the command. ■ If no announcements are on the board or a user is in an integrated announcements session, the system denies the command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids save announcements Page 8-200 8 ■ If the board is currently uploading or downloading, the system denies the command. Users cannot record integrated announcements after the save announcements command commences even though 15 channels are available for announcement playback (one is reserved for uploading and downloading). ■ If no tape is in the tape drive or the tape is write-protected, the command aborts during a save. The command also aborts if no NETCON data module is available. ■ The save announcements command is not allowed if the MSS is in use. The MSS may be in use by either another user or by maintenance. ■ The standby processor must be in service with shadowing enabled, so that the system can save announcements to the standby processor. ■ When MSS devices on both processors in High or Critical Reliability Systems are specified, the save announcements command saves announcement data from announcement boards to active MSS devices, then to standby MSS devices. The system reports the status of each save operation to users separately. When one save operation fails, the save operation to another device continues, causing saved announcement data to be inconsistent between MSS devices. ■ In case of a failure, technicians make announcement files consistent across both MSS devices. Files become inconsistent due to hardware failures or spontaneous processor interchanges. If announcement files are inconsistent due to hardware failures that occur during the save announcements command, error messages display indicating corrective action. Maintenance software that monitors hardware logs hardware errors to maintenance. Then, maintenance software invoke tests to diagnose and attempt corrective action. If maintenance software fails to correct the problem, an alarm raises displaying corrective action. ■ The save announcements command writes two time-stamped, identical copies of announcement data to selected devices. The time-stamp for both copies is the same. Each copy contains a timestamp and the state of the copy. (good or bad) ■ If good copies of announcement files are not available, the restore announcements command cannot execute until the save announcements command completes. Announcements on the board are still usable. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids save translation Page 8-201 8 Output The following output example is a display of save announcements command on a simplex SPE system. save announcements Page 1 of 1 SPE A SAVE ANNOUNCEMENTS Processor SPE-A Command Completion Status Success Error Code 0 Field descriptions Processor Displays processors when announcement data writes to its devices. (SPE-A and SPE-B) Command Completion Status This field specifies if the command succeeded. Error Code Successful save = 0. Failed save = 2. save translation This command allows users to save to tape or memory card the in-memory translation data. This command runs as part of scheduled maintenance and/or on demand by the technician. All translation data in memory during system operation is volatile, meaning that if the switch goes down, the system loses all data. Simplex The system defaults to save translation to the tape/memory-card on SPE_A. Duplex The system defaults to save translation to the tape/memory-card on both SPE-A and SPE-B. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set expansion-link Page 8-202 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults save translations spe-active identifies that save translations should occur on the active processor’s MSS device. init inads craft cust spe standby identifies that save translations should occur on the standby processor’s MSS device. Simplex = SPE A; Duplex = SPE A & SPE B Feature Interactions Command cannot be performed if data is being changed by an administrative command. Examples: save translation save translation spe-active save translation spe-standby Output The following output example is a display of the save translation command on a duplex system. save translation SAVE TRANSLATION Processor SPE-A SPE-B Command Completion Status Success Success Error Code 0 0 Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions . Processor Identifies the processor carrier where translation data saves. (SPE-A, or SPE-B.) Command Completion Status Displays a variety of messages, identifying the success or failure of the command. set expansion-link The set expansion-link command sets the Expansion-Interface Link between: ■ the PPN and an EPN ■ two EPNs to a specific Interface Link circuit pack between PPN and EPN. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set options Page 8-203 8 NOTE: This command can corrupt any active data links between the PPN and an EPN or between two EPNs. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set expansion-link linkidentifier 1A01, 1A02, 1B01, 1B02, 2A01, 2A02, 2B03, 3A01, 3A02, 3AB02, 3B03). init inads craft none none Examples: set expansion-link 02a01 set expansion-link 3a02 set options This command enables the technician (that is, remote user with INADS permission) to select which types of maintenance categories report alarms automatically and which types require customer call-in. Judicious use of this command can reduce the number of ineffective alarms to the TSC. For effective results, technicians should use the set options command default settings specified in this section. Technicians should not change these settings. Special circumstances (for example, special studies) may require temporary changes under the guidance of Tiers 3 and 4. NOTE: Alarms do not upgrade. Action/Object set options Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults init inads see below Feature Interactions none DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set options Page 8-204 8 Form Input The following example is a display of the set options command. set options Page 1 of 8 ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS On-board Off-board On-board Off-board On-board Off-board On-board Off-board On-board Station Alarms: Off-board Station Alarms: Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 1): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 1): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 2): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 2): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 3): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 3): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 4): Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 4): On-boar Adjunct Alarms: Off-board Alarms: Off-board DS1 Alarms: Off-board PI-LINK Alarms: Off-board Alarms (Other): Memory Card Capacity Alarms: Major w w y w w w w w w w w w w w w Minor w w y w w w w w w w w w w w w y set options Page 2 of 8 TRUNK GROUP ALARM OPTIONS (Alarm Group) 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 31: 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 61: 62: 63: 64: 65: 66: 67: 68: 69: 70: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 71: 72: 73: 74: 75: 76: 77: 78: 79: 80: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 81: 82: 83: 84: 85: 86: 87: 88: 89: 90: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 91: 92: 93: 94: 95: 96: 97: 98: 99: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NOTE: Remaining Trunk Group information displays on pages 3-8, and is not documented in this Manual. The first page of the Alarm Reporting Options Form, provides the following alarm options: the four trunk alarm severity groups, the adjunct alarms, off-board DS1 alarms, and PI-LINK alarms, memory card translation capacity alarms, and other off-board alarms. The second page, known as the Alarm Reporting Options Form, provides alarm severity groups to each trunk group. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set options Page 8-205 8 1. The following alarm options are available: ■ Minor Maintenance testing discovers raised alarms, downgrades them to minor alarms, and deactivates alarmed resources. LEDs on the port board and maintenance board follow standard minor alarm LED protocol and call receiving OSSs. ■ Warning Maintenance testing discovers raised alarms, downgrades them to warnings and deactivates alarmed resources. The Alarm Log pinpoints customer-reported trunk or station problems. Alarm LEDs light on the port circuit pack and Maintenance circuit pack as before, but no attendant LEDs or stations reporting alarms are affected. No call is placed to INADS. ■ Report The report option treats alarms the same as warnings with one exception: alarms report to INADS with a special WARNING category. When this type of alarm is received, INADS logs the occurrence and creates a trouble ticket or closes it immediately. Retry strategy for this type of call is similar to normal Major or Minor alarm reports. However, the acknowledgment LED on the attendant console or alarm reporting station does not reflect the status of the call. ■ Yes Alarms raise normally without filtering alarm data. ■ No Alarms that raise on trunks, stations, or adjuncts in this category drop. Error information displays as before, but alarm is evident. LED is inactive and calls are not sent to INADS. Because resources are deactivated without any record, this option is recommended only when other options do not provide desired results. Technicians can administer alarm options on a system-wide basis for the following categories: ■ Major on-board station alarms ■ Minor on-board station alarms ■ Major off-board station alarms ■ Minor off-board station alarms Trunk alarms have four alarm severity groups with administrable alarm options in the categories listed below. For G1, technicians can administer alarm options on a system-wide basis for the following categories: ■ Major on-board trunk alarms ■ Minor on-board trunk alarms DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set options Page 8-206 8 ■ Major off-board trunk alarms ■ Minor off-board trunk alarms Technicians assign alarm severity options to the following Adjunct categories: ■ Major on-board adjunct alarms ■ Major off-board adjunct alarms ■ Minor on-board adjunct alarms ■ Minor of-board adjunct alarms Technicians can administer options for Minor off-board DS1 Interface circuit pack alarms and Minor off-board Memory Card Capacity Alarms on a system-wide basis. The system inspects alarm reporting options information in the Alarm Reporting Options Form as translation data and preserves it through all restart levels. This command affects the MO alarming listed below. Neither the trunk nor the station category applies to alarms raised on the common portion of the circuit pack. If the option associated with the alarm type is set to “n,” the system drops the alarm report. Alarm error information remains intact, but no records of alarms and no LEDs light on the port circuit pack, the Maintenance circuit pack, the attendant console, or alarm reporting station to indicate a problem. If technicians set the option “warning” or “report,” port circuit pack LEDs and LEDs on the Maintenance circuit pack are affected the same as warning alarms. Default parameters are: ■ The system downgrades all station, trunk (except on-board trunk alarms), and Minor DS1-BD alarms to warning alarms. ■ On-board Major and Minor trunk alarms, and the Memory Card Capacity alarm continue to raise alarms and report to INADS. Station MOs Affected By This Command NOTE: Although alarms on some MOs appear as warnings, they should be investigated with user-reported problems. ■ Analog Lines (ANL-LINE, ANL-NE-L, ANL-16-L) ■ Digital Lines (DIG-LINE) ■ Hybrid Lines (HYB-LINE) ■ MET Lines (MET-LINE) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set options Page 8-207 8 ■ ISDN-BRI Lines (BRI-PORT, BRI-SET) If more than 75% of the members of the trunk group alarm, minor alarms escalate to major alarms. If the trunk category option is set to “warning,” “minor,” “report,” or “no,” this no longer happens. Maintenance reactivates individual trunk members according to Major and Minor alarm criteria. Trunk MOs Affected By This Command: NOTE: Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should be investigated with user-reported problems. ■ Auxiliary Trunks (AUX-TRK) ■ Central Office Trunks (CO-TRK) ■ Direct Inward Dialing Trunks (DID-TRK) ■ Direct Inward and Outward Dial Trunks (DIOD-TRK) ■ DS1 Central Office Trunks (CO-DS1) ■ DS1 Direct Inward Dialing Trunks (DID-DS1) ■ DS1 Tie Trunks (TIE-DS1) ■ ISDN Trunks (ISDN-TRK) ■ Tie Trunks (TIE-TRK) Circuit Pack MOs Affected By This Command NOTE: Although alarms on some MOs appear as warnings, the alarms should be investigated with user-reported problems. NOTE: The alarm severity of group one downgrades trunks that are not members of Trunk Groups, (for example, PCOLs). ■ DS1 Interface Circuit Pack (DS1-BD) Adjunct-Related MOs Affected By This Command NOTE: Although alarms on some MOs appear as warnings, the alarms should be investigated with user-reported problems. ■ ASAI Adjunct (ASAI-ADJ) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set options Page 8-208 8 ■ AT&T Adjunct Port (ATT-PORT) ■ Ethernet ASAI Port (LGATE-PT) ■ Ethernet ASAI Adjunct (LGATE-AJ) ■ Ethernet AT&T Port (ATTE-PT) ■ Ethernet AT&T Adjunct (ATTE_AJ) ■ ISDN-BRI Ports connected to Adjuncts (ABRI-PORT) Adjuncts are administered as stations; however, the administration of alarm severity for the station alarm group does not affect alarm severity levels for adjuncts. Similarly, the administration of alarm severity for the adjunct alarm group does not affect the alarm severity levels for other stations. PI-Link and Associated Link MOs Affected by this Command: NOTE: Although alarms on some MOs appear as warnings, the alarms should be investigated with user-related problems. ■ See Processor Interface Link [“PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)”] for other associated Link Maintenance Objects. Memory Card MOs Affected by This Command NOTE: While this option does not automatically downgrade CAP-MEM alarms, changes to this options may downgrade alarms to warnings. This alarm raises when memory card translation capacity exceeds 98% and is intended to alert Services that larger flash cards may be required. ■ Memory Card Capacity (CAP-MEM) Other MOs Affected by this Command NOTE: Although alarms on some MOs appear as warnings, the alarms should be investigated with user-related problems. ■ EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack (MAINT) ■ Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) ■ ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISN-SGR) ■ Journal Printer (JNL-PRNT) ■ PMS Link (PMS-LINK) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set signaling-group Page 8-209 8 ■ PMS log printer (PMS-LOG) ■ Primary CDR Link (PRI-CDR) ■ Secondary CDR Link (SEC-CDR) ■ SPE Select Switches (SPE-SELEC) ■ Synchronization (SYNC) ■ System Communication Interface (PI-SCI) ■ System Printer (SYS-PRNT) ■ TDM Clock (TDM-CLK) ■ Tone Generator Circuit Pack (TONE-BD) set signaling-group This command upgrades secondary D-channel in specified signaling groups to primary D-channels. Current primary D-channel then revert to secondary D-channels. A signaling group is a collection of B-channels that designate single D-channels or a set of D-channels signals over an ISDN-PRI. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set signaling-group group identifier administered number associated with each signaling group. init inads craft none none Examples: set signaling-group 1 set signaling-group 2 set synchronization This command sets DS1 trunks or active tone/clock circuit packs that supply references for synchronization. The set synchronization command works after the disable synchronization command disables synchronization. Technicians may administer DS1 trunks or active tone/clocks with the set synchronization command. DS1 or tone/clocks remain synchronization references until the set synchronization command runs with another board or until the enable synchronization command runs. After the enable synchronization command runs, administered primary or secondary synchronization sources become synchronization references. If no primary or secondary source is administered, synchronization uses active tone/clock boards as synchronization references after synchronization is enabled. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set tdm Page 8-210 8 The synchronization subsystem provides error-free digital communication between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. System components involved in synchronization include: TDM bus clock, DS1 trunk board, maintenance and administration software resident in the SPE. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set synchronization location Physical location: PCsspp (DS1 trunk or active tone/clock) that supplies a synchronization reference. init inads craft none none Examples: set synchronization 01c08 set synchronization 02a01 set synchronization 01a set synchronization 02c set tdm This command establishes the TDM bus on a port network that houses control channels and dedicated tones. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set tdm port network specifies the Port Network number of the TDM bus. none see below pn number bus (“a” or “b”) specifies desired half of the TDM bus. Configure each 512 time slot TDM bus as two duplicate 256 time slot buses, allowing duplication of control channels and dedicated tone time slots. A port network number (1 - 3) init inads craft bus override forces the setting of a deactivated bus, or a bus whose dedicated tone time slots are active. Examples: set tdm port-network 2 bus a set tdm port-network 2 bus b override Feature Interactions New calls go to time slots reserved for tones on the bus that have not other time slots when: ■ Time slots on a specified bus are in use ■ Dedicated tone time slots are on the other half of the bus DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set time Page 8-211 8 A set command to buses that have calls on dedicated tone time slots drops these calls. set time This command allows system technicians to change the day of the week, the day of the month, the month, year, hour, and minute. The second field resets to zero (0) whenever the time on the clock is altered, but cannot be modified by the technician. The day of the week, entered as a text string, translates to an integer for internal storage. The system clock time remains the same if no changes are entered on the form. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description set time Permissions Defaults init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse The system assigns a time, if the system clock is not set Output The following example is a display of the set time command. set time Page 1 of 1 DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week: _________ Day of the Month: __ Month: _________ Year: ____ TIME Hour: __ Minute: __ Second: Field descriptions Day of the Week: Monday through Sunday. Day of the Month: 1-31. The system also checks for leap year. Month: January through December. Year: 1970-2999 Feature Interactions The date and time are available to software from a system primitive. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set tone-clock Page 8-212 8 Hour: 0-23. Minute: 0-59 Second: The system sets this field to zero when the time of day clock is set. set tone-clock This command sets the active tone/clock for a PN that has a duplicated tone/clock circuit pack. Technicians should reset the default active tone clock in each PN after using the set tone-clock command. If it is not in use, a single failure can cause an unnecessary service outage. The schedule maintenance tone-clock switch option does not reset the tone-clock to the default active if it was not active at the beginning of the test. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set tone-clock location Physical location (PC) of the tone/clock to be tested 1 (one) none override Forces the set command into effect regardless of the tone/clock circuit pack’s health. init inads craft Examples: set tone-clock 01b set tone-clock 1b set tone-clock 01b override set tone-clock a set vector This command specifies restart levels for core dumps. This command places core dumps on primary Mass Storage System (a tape in a tape system and core dump memory cards in a memory card system) devices for later examination. The set vector command allows technicians to tailor restart levels that copy memory to primary Mass Storage System devices. NOTE: Software never requests an extended reboot. To force an immediate core dump, in a simplex or duplex system, technicians should set the appropriate bit using this command, then enter the reset system command at a level that forces core dumps corresponding to set vector bits. When a system restart occurs in a simplex Switch Processing Element (SPE) system with the corresponding vector bit set, the core dump writes to secondary storage (the primary MSS device). Once core dumps write, the vector clears and the restart executes. This command disrupts service in a simplex system. The active SPE executes a core dump when: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids set vector Page 8-213 8 ■ A system restart occurs on the active SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system with the corresponding vector bit set. ■ The active SPE-active option is selected when the vector bit is set. ! CAUTION: This command disrupts service in a simplex system. The active SPE executes a core dump when: ■ A system restart occurs on the active SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system with the corresponding vector bit set. ■ The SPE-standby option is selected when the vector bit is set. The active SPE executes a core dump when: ■ A system restart occurs on the active SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system with the corresponding vector bit set. ■ The active SPE-maint option is selected when the vector bit is set. The vector clears after all core dumps. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set vector spe-standby spe-active spe-maint see below. init inads craft spe-standby none SIMPLEX SYSTEM Examples: set vector f set vector 9 DUPLEX SYSTEM Examples: set vector f spe-standby set vector f spe-active set vector f spe-maint set vector 9 Vector-Condition Mapping value WARM COLDII COLDI REBOOT 0 n n n n 1 y n n n 2 n y n n 3 y y n n 4 n n y n 5 y n y n 6 n y y n (High or Critical Reliability Systems) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status access-endpoint Page 8-214 8 Vector-Condition Mapping value WARM COLDII COLDI REBOOT 7 y y y n 8 n n n y 9 y n n y a n y n y b y y n y c n n y y d y n y y e n y y y f y y y y spe-standby The default option for a High or Critical Reliability System. If a restart occurs on active SPEs and the corresponding vector bit is set, a core dump occurs on the standby SPE (after the standby SPE has performed a memory refresh). spe-active Option for a High or Critical Reliability System; default for simplex SPE systems. If a restart occurs on active SPEs and the corresponding vector bit is set, core dumps occur on the active SPE. This option disrupts service. spe-maint Available for High or Critical Reliability Systems. If restarts occur on active SPEs and the corresponding vector bit is set, core dumps occur on standby SPEs without the standby SPE a memory refresh. status access-endpoint This command displays diagnoses internal software and helps to locate facilities with which Access Endpoints communicate. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status access-endpoint extension extension number of the access endpoint none none print prints reports to SAT printers. init inads craft cust nms browse Examples: status access-endpoint 25012 status access-endpoint 77868 status access-endpoint 66078 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status access-endpoint Page 8-215 8 Output The following output example is a display of the status access-endpoint 22502 command. Assume that access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6 — that access endpoints are connected on an active call to ports 7 to 12 of the board in location 1B19 (cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 19). This means that port 01C1101 connects to 01B1907, port 01C1102 connects to 01B1908, and port 01C1103 connects to 01B1909. status access-endpoint 22502 page 1 of 1 ACCESS-ENDPOINT STATUS Extension: (Starting) Port: Communication Type: Width: 22502 01C1101 wideband 6 Service State: in-service/active Connected Ports: 01B1907 01B1908 01B1909 01B1910 01B1911 01B1912 Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Extension The extension of the access endpoint to be displayed. (Starting) Port Port locations of the access endpoint. For wideband access endpoint, the location shown is that of the starting port. Communication Type The valid voice and data communication type that the access endpoint is administered. The options are: 56k-data, 64k-data, voice-grade-data, and wideband. Width For communication types of 56k-data, 64k-data, and voice-grade data, the width value is 1. For communication type of wideband, this field displays the number of DS0s that makes up the access endpoint. Service State Whether the access endpoint is in-service or out-of-service. One of the following states displays: in-service/active, in-service/idle, and out-of-service. Connected Ports Port location connected to the access endpoint for an active call. For wideband access endpoint connection, all ports connected to the wideband access endpoint are listed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status administered-connection Page 8-216 8 status administered-connection The status administered-connection provides automatic end-to-end connections between two access/data endpoints. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status administeredconnection ac number number assigned to an administered connection. none none print reports print to SAT printers. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse Examples: status administered-connection 1 status administered-connection 50 status administered-connection 128 print Output The following output example is a display of status administered-connection 3 command. status administered-connection 3 page 1 of 1 ADMINISTERED-CONNECTION STATUS Connection Number: Enabled? Originator: Destination: Connection State: Failure Cause: Number of Retries: Auto Restorable? Field descriptions Connection Number: Number assigned to the administered connection. Enabled? Is administered connection enabled? (y or n). Originator: Extension of originating access/data endpoint. Destination: Destination address used to route administered connections. Connection State: Current status of the administered connection. (connected, restored, failed, waiting to retry, attempting to restore, attempting to connect, not scheduled, and disabled. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status attendant Page 8-217 8 Failure Cause: Reason that the administered connection is attempting to connect, to restore, or failed to restore. If the administered connection was scheduled to be active but is disconnected, this field shows the most recent failure reason. Number of Retries: Number of consecutive failed establishment attempts. Auto Restorable? When an administered connection is connected, this field indicates if auto restoration attempts when a failure occurs. status attendant This command diagnoses internal software. This command help to locate facilities to which the attendant console communicates. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status attendant console number number assigned to an attendant (1 –16). none none print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse Examples: status attendant 1 status attendant 2 status attendant 2 print Output The following output example is a display of the status attendant 1 command. status attendant 1 ATTENDANT STATUS Console Number: 1 Port: 01C1106 Connected Ports: Service State: in-service/night service Maintenance Busy? no Command successfully completed Field descriptions Console Number Number assigned to the attendant (1-16). Port Port location of the attendant (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). Service State In-service/idle, in-service/active, out of service, or disconnected. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-218 8 Usage State Idle or active. Maintenance Busy State Is maintenance testing the object? (y or n) Connected Ports Port locations to which the attendant is communicating (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). status audits This command displays results of Data Relation Audits that are built into the switch. Data Relation Audits check for inconsistencies between selected data items in the switch, and report inconsistencies. Data Relation Audits are useful during development and testing phases of projects to uncover software errors. In the field they help the switch to recover from data corruption before service is interrupted. This command displays the date and time that the requested interval begins, the number of times that the full sequence of audits executes (audit cycles), and status information about each audit that detected a problem or aborted during the interval. The status information contains: ■ The name of the audit ■ The number of times that an audit ran and corrected an error ■ The number of times that an audit ran and detected an irreparable error ■ The number of times that an audit ran and aborted ■ The date and time that the audit first detected a problem (only for cumulative) ■ The time of the most recent error detected by the audit (only for cumulative). Audit data information cumulates from the last reboot or the last clear audits cumulative command, and for peak hours since the last reboot or the last clear audits peak-hour or clear audits cumulative commands. NOTE: Single process restarts, warm starts, cold 2 restarts, cold 1 restarts, or processor interchanges do not clear this data. Audits can execute directly using the “test MO” command (for example, test MO l 8192 p 512 t 0 executes the Station Connections Audits, audit lnames and numbers (pnames) included in the Table Of Audits.) When the “test MO” command executes an audit, report results display on the screen. In general, errors discovered from a demand tests are not logged in the error logs. To be consistent with other error logging, and to avoid confusion, errors that are discovered from a demand test that executes an audit are not displayed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-219 8 The screen does not automatically update. It reflects the system at the time of the request. Action/ Object status audits Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions peak-hour Data collected since the last reboot or since the last clear audits cumulative command. init inads none see below cumulative Data for the peak hour since the last reboot or since the last clear audits cumulative or clear audits peak-hour command. Determined by summing Prints report. print schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Examples: status audits cumulative status audits cumulative print status audits cumulative schedule status audits peak-hour status audits peak-hour print status audits peak-hour schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions The clear audits command affects the data displayed by status audits cumulative and status audits peak-hour. The clear audits cumulative command clears data collected to date, resets the start time kept for that data, and clears peak hour data. The clear audits peak-hour command clears data kept for the peak hour so that a new peak hour can be established. When the schedule option is specified, a scheduling form is displays allowing the technician to schedule command execution. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification [3] for details about the scheduling form. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-220 8 Output The following example is a display of the status audits command. status audits cumulative AUDIT STATUS INFORMATION Start Date: 13:00 MON MAR 19 1990 Audit Name # Cycles Fixed Data # Cycles Could Not Fix Data HTLK 0 CR-AUDIT 135 HU-CALLS 2 SE-CALLS 1 TTR-SID 1 CO-CALLS 1 DE-CALLS 1 TR-QUE 1 CTRK 0 AT-ADM 1 CO-ADM 1 PC-ADM 1 PRI-USR (SCH) 1 # of Audit Cycles Completed: 67532 # Cycles Audit Aborted First Error 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03/22/10:14 03/22/10:12 03/22/10:12 03/22/10:13 05/01/02:17 05/01/02:16 03/22/10:12 04/05/13:05 03/22/10:12 03/22/10:12 03/22/10:13 04/05/15:05 03/22/10:14 ***** 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Most Recent Error 06/24/16:03 06/10/19:17 03/22/10:20 03/22/19:14 05/01/02:17 05/01/02:16 03/22/10:12 04/05/13:05 03/22/10:12 03/22/10:12 03/22/10:13 04/05/15:05 03/22/10:14 Command successfully completed status audits peak-hour AUDIT STATUS INFORMATION Start Date: 10:00 MON MAR 22 1990 Audit # Cycles Name Fixed Data HTLK 0 HU-CALLS 2 CR-AUDIT 1 DE-CALLS 1 CTRK 0 AT-ADM 1 CO-ADM 1 SE-CALLS 0 PRI-USR (SCH) 1 # of Audit Cycles Completed: # Cycles Could Not Fix Data 25 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 25 # Cycles Audit Aborted 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Command successfully completed Audit information displays with one line of data displayed audit that has detected an error or aborted. Audits that did not detected any errors or aborted do not display. The output sorts in descending order, based on the sum of the values in the # Cycles Fixed Data, # Cycles Could Not Fix Data, and # Cycles Audit Aborted fields. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-221 8 Field descriptions Start Date Date and time that interval begins. “cumulative” = date and time of the last reboot or execution of the “clear audits cumulative” command. “peak-hour” = date and time of the beginning of the peak hour since the last reboot or execution of a “clear audits cumulative” or “clear audits peak-hour” command. # of Audit Cycles Completed Number of audit cycles completed in the specified interval. (0 – 999999) Asterisks indicate numbers that exceed 999999. The switch executes audits in a set order. After all audits execute, the switch restarts the sequence. NOTE: Since this field shows the number of completed audit cycles, it is possible that individual audit values, can be larger than the values described below (if the switch is partially through another audit cycle.) Audit Cycles numbers do not apply to these audits that execute as part of scheduled maintenance. Audit Name Audit’s name that detected an error or aborted. A few audits do not run in the normal audit sequence. Instead, they execute as part of scheduled maintenance and are marked with “(SCH)” following the audit name. # Cycles Fixed Data Number of times that the audit ran, in the specified interval, and found a fixable problem. (0–65534) Asterisks are used form numbers that exceed 65534. # Cycles Could Not Fix Data Number of times that the audit ran, in the specified interval, and found an unfixable problem. The audited switch data is inconsistent when this happens. (0–65534) Asterisks are used for numbers that exceed 65534. # Cycles Audit Aborted Number of times that the audit ran, in the specified interval, and aborted due to an internal error. (0–65534) Asterisks are for numbers that exceed 65534. First Error Date and time that the audit first detected fixed data, could not fix data or audit aborted problems since the last “clear audits cumulative” command. Format: MM:DD:hh:mm (for example, 03/27/14:31 for 2:31 pm, March 27th). This field appears with the "status audits cumulative" display. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-222 8 Most Recent Error Date and time that the audit last detected fixed data, could not fix data or audit aborted problems since the last "clear audits cumulative" command. Format: MM:DD:hh:mm (for example, 03/27/14:31 for 2:31 pm, March 27th). This field appears with the “status audits cumulative” display. Table of Audits The following table shows the names of the audits that are run as part of time available maintenance, the audit number (pname) and a short description of each audit. These audits execute using lname MO_DR_AUDIT (8192). These audits may execute using the test MO command with lname 8192, pname “audit number,” and test number 0 (for example, test MO l 8192 p 607 t 0 executes the AC state audit). Audit Name Audit Number Description AC-ISG 607 AC state audit ADJUSR 595 Adjunct user record audit ADMTRM 559 Administration terminal audit ANUR-A 589 Announcement user record audit AN-ADM 574 Announcement group administration audit AN-CALLS 572 Announcement group calls audit AN-QUE 577 Announcement group queue audit AQSA 545 ACB queue slot allocation audit ASLINK 606 ASAI link status audit ASYLED 605 ASAI yellow LED audit ATACT 558 Attendant active audit ATAV 557 Attendant availability audit ATDRCNT 576 Attendant resource count audit AT-ADM 529 Attendant group administration audit AT-CALLS 515 Attendant group calls audit AT-QUE 523 Attendant group queue audit AUR-A 540 Attendant user record audit AU-CIDP 596 Announcement user cid/port audit Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-223 8 Audit Name Audit Number Description AWOH-UR 614 Admin Without Hardware Split User Record Audit B2B-TAB 617 Board-to-Board Link Audit BR-CALLS 629 Bridged extensions audit BUTLK 560 Button lock audit CALK 569 Coverage answer member lock audit CATT 527 Attendant connections audit CCTRTAB 624 Call Classifier Tone Receiver Table Audit CCTR-SID 600 Call classifier tone receiver audit CDM 528 Data module connections audit CO-ADM 530 Coverage group administration audit CO-CALLS 516 Coverage group calls audit CPROC 585 Call process/call record audit CPTRTAB 623 Call Progress Tone Receiver Table Audit CPTR-SID 601 Call progress tone receiver audit CPWAKEUP 586 Wake up call process audit CR-AUDIT 513 Call processing data audit CSR-A 544 Connection service record audit CSTAT 512 Station connections audit CTRK 526 Trunk connections audit DA-CALLS 583 DAP call record audit DA-MSG 584 DAP message buffer audit DE-ADM 531 Data extension group administration audit DE-CALLS 517 Data extension group calls audit DMLK 563 Data module lock audit DUR-A 543 Data user record audit DXLK 567 Data extension member lock audit EI-TAB 621 Expansion Interface Table Audit FHT 554 Facility status hundreds table audit FTED 553 Facility status tracked user audit Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-224 8 Audit Name Audit Number Description FTING 552 Facility tracking user audit FTSRA 593 Fiber time-slot record allocation audit GIP-TIMER 609 GIP Timer Audit HTLK 568 Hunt member lock audit HU-ADM 532 Hunt group administration audit HU-CALLS 518 Hunt group calls audit HU-QUE 524 Hunt group queue audit IAP-CALLS 590 IAP call record audit IAP-URB 591 IAP user record audit IM-HMM 579 HMM image table audit INST-LNK 604 Instigator/down-link user link audit ISGR-A 594 ISG call record audit LOG-A 570 MDM error/alarm log audit MAP-HMM 580 HMM map status table audit MCT-ADM 561 Malicious call trace administration audit MIS-FAC 587 MIS facility state audit MP-ADM 575 Modem pool group administration audit MP-CALLS 573 Modem pool group calls audit MSGQ-HMM 582 HMM map request queue audit MST-LOG 549 MST Logging Buffer Audit MST-STATE 546 MST State Audit MS-CALLS 588 MISAP call record audit MUV 555 Message user verification audit MWIA 550 Message waiting indicator audit MWL-NOAP 599 Message waiting lamp no AP audit PA-ADM 533 Paging group administration audit PA-CALLS 519 Paging group calls audit PCLK 566 PCOL member lock audit PC-ADM 535 Personal CO line group administration audit Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status audits Page 8-225 8 Audit Name Audit Number Description PC-CALLS 521 Personal CO line group calls audit PINC-TAB 612 Packet Inter-Port Network Connection Sub-Table audit PI-ADM 534 Pickup group administration audit PLIP-LNK 602 LIP link audit PN-HMM 578 HMM pname table audit PRI-CR 598 PRI call record audit PRI-TBUF 592 TSCUUI buffer audit PUR-A 541 Phantom user record audit SDSBUF 581 Service dispatcher stim buffer audit SDSID 571 Service dispatcher SID audit SE-ADM 538 Terminating extension group administration audit SE-CALLS 537 Terminating extension group calls audit STNLK 562 Station lock audit SUR-A 539 Station user record audit S-INC-TAB 611 Service Inter-Port Network Connection Sub-Table audit S-PT-TAB 610 Service-Port Connection Sub-Table audit S-TAB 620 Service Table Audit TEGLK 565 TEG member lock audit TKLK 564 Trunk lock audit TONE-TS 608 Tone Time Slot Subtable Audit TR-ADM 536 Trunk group administration audit TR-CALLS 522 Trunk group calls audit TR-QUE 525 Trunk group queue audit TSC-PRI 520 ISDN-PRI TSC resource audit TSRA 547 Time slot record allocation audit TTI-STATE 618 TTI State Audit TTI-TRANS 619 TTI Translation Audit TTR-SID 514 Touch tone receiver audit Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-226 8 Audit Number Audit Name Description TTR-TAB 622 Touch Tone Receiver Table Audit TUR-A 542 Trunk user record audit T-TS-TAB 613 Tone Time Slot Connection Sub-Table Audit UGMA 551 User group membership audit UPUSR-LNK 603 Up-link user link record audit URMB 548 User record maintenance busy audit X25-CHAN 615 X.25 Channel Status Audit X25-LINK 616 X.25 Link Status Audit Continued on next page The following table shows the names of audits that run as part of scheduled maintenance, the audit number (pname) and a short description of each audit. These audits execute using lname MO_SCH_AUDIT (8193). These audits may execute using the test MO command with lname 8193, pname “audit number,” and test number 0 (for example, test MO l 8193 p 556 t 0 executes the Message Waiting Lamp Audit audit). Audit Name Audit Number Description MWL 556 Message Waiting Lamp Audit PRI-USR 597 PRI user record audit SUR-FREE 625 Station User Record Free List Audit status bri-port This command displays the service state, maintenance state and layer 1 state of an ISDN-BRI port. This form also displays information about point-to-point signaling links that transport over the port. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status bri-port location Physical location: PCsspp none none print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust nms browse Examples: status bri-port 1c0701 status bri-port 1c0701 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-227 8 Output The following example shows the output from the status bri-port 1c1701 command. status bri-port 1c1701 Page 1 of 1 SPE A STATUS BRI-PORT Port: 01C1701 Service State: in-service Maintenance Busy?: no Layer 1 State: activated TEI Value Link1 64 Layer2 State 13-established Endpt Extension 1010 Endpt SPID Service SPID? 1010 Link2 Link3 Field descriptions Port: ISDN-BRI port address. Service State: ISDN-BRI port is "in-service" or "out-of-service." Maintenance Busy?: specifies if maintenance testing is executing on the ISDN-BRI port ("yes" or "no"). Layer 1 State: BRI Layer 1 (physical) state on the port. Valid states are "activated," "pend-activation," and "deactivated." TEI Value ■ "activated" state = layer 1 frames are passing between the port and BRI endpoints. ■ "pend-activation" state = the port is in-service, the layer 1 interface device is on, layer 1 frames are sending to the BRI endpoints connected to this port, but BRI endpoints are not responding. ■ "deactivated" state = the layer 1 interface device on the BRI is off, because the port goes out-of-service. Layer 2 addressing parameter used by the switch to exchange information over point-to-point signaling links between BRI endpoints. Each point-to-point signaling link has an associated TEI. This field displays the addressing parameter value. (0–127) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-228 8 Layer2 State: Point-to-point signaling link layer 2 state. Valid states are "un-assigned," "assigned," "established," "l3-established" or "hyperactive." ■ "un-assigned" = the link is in TEI-UNASSIGN state at Layer 2. ■ "assigned" state = the link is in the AWAIT_EST (Await Establish) state at layer 2. (If BRI endpoints support TEI allocation procedures, they successfully execute and a TEI is assigned to the endpoint by the switch. ■ "established" = the link is in the MF_EST_NORM (Multi-Frame Established Normal) state at layer 2. The switch successfully initiates the link can now exchange layer 3 frames with the endpoint. If the endpoint does not support SPID initialization procedures, the endpoint extension associated with the link also displays. This is the normal state for the link in the point-to-point wiring configuration. ■ "l3-established" = link is in the MF_EST_NORM state at layer 2 and SPID initialization procedures successfully complete. The endpoint extension associated with the link also displays. This is the normal state for the link in the multi-point wiring configuration. ■ "hyperactive" = traffic on this link goes over threshold. The link suspends and is deemed hyperactive. Endpt Extension Voice/data endpoint extension associated with the link if the link is in the "established" (point-to-point configuration) or "l3-established" (multipoint configuration) layer 2 state. Otherwise, this field is blank. Endpt SPID This field displays the SPID administered on the voice/data endpoint associated with the link. Note that this information is displayed only if the link is in either the "established" (point-to-point configuration) or the "13-established" (multipoint configuration) layer 2 state. Otherwise this field is blank. Service SPID Indicates if the link is associated with the Service SPID. If the link is associated with Service SPIDs, the field contains a "yes" and the endpoint extension field is blank; otherwise, this field is blank. Service SPID checks building wiring between the switch and the BRI endpoint. Status Interpretation The following table provides information on the status bri-port form. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-229 8 Table 8-3. Endpoint Types ASAI, BRI Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation TEI Range 0-126 Layer 2 State Assigned Voice Extension Service SPID blank blank Description / Recommendation Transitory state for BRI endpoints and ASAI adjuncts. The switch attempts link establishment. 1. Check endpoints and wiring by following SPID Facility Test Procedures described in the BRI-SET (ISDN-BRI Set/ASAI Adjunct) Maintenance documentation. 2. Verify repairs by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that L2 state of the signaling link is “L3-Established” for ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints supporting MIM (management information messages) initialization, and “Established” for fixed TEIBRI endpoints and automatic TEIBRI endpoints not supporting MIM initialization. NOTE: A MIM is a level-3 message that conveys management and maintenance information between communications systems and BRI terminals. ASAI 0-63 Established blank blank Transitory state for ASAI adjuncts. ASAI signaling is connects at Layer 2. Layer 3 Restart procedure does not complete between switch and adjunct. 1. Check the adjunct by following the manufacturer’s recommended repair procedures. 2. Verify repairs by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-230 8 Table 8-3. Endpoint Types Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued TEI Range Layer 2 State Voice Extension Service SPID Description / Recommendation BRI 0-126 Established ext blank Normal state for non-MIM initializing, fixed and automatic TEIBRI endpoints. BRI, ASAI 64-126 Established blank blank Transitory state for automatic TEIBRI endpoints which support MIM initialization. 1. Verify that SPID administration on the switch and endpoint are consistent. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Otherwise, proceed to Step 2. 2. Try to replace the endpoint. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. BRI 64-126 L3-Established ext blank Normal state for automatic TEIBRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization. BRI, ASAI 64-126 L3-Established blank yes Technicians conduct SPID facilitation tests on the port. Links are not associated with BRI port endpoints. See description of SPID Facility Test Procedures in the ‘‘BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT’’ Maintenance documentation. BRI 64-126 L3-Established ext yes Technicians conduct SPID facilitation tests on the port. Links are associated with port endpoints. See description of SPID Facility Test Procedures in the ‘‘BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT’’ Maintenance documentation. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-231 8 Table 8-3. Endpoint Types BRI Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued TEI Range 0-126 Layer 2 State L3-Established Voice Extension Service SPID blank blank Description / Recommendation Invalid SPID assigned to link. 1. Change the SPID value in the BRI endpoint to match the SPID administered to the BRI endpoint on the port. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the BRI endpoint is L3-Established. BRI (cont’d) 0-126 L3-Assigned ext blank Transitory state for BRI endpoints which support MIM initialization. 2. Wait for five seconds and repeat the command. If the state has not changed, continue with Step 2. 3. Make sure SPID administration on the switch and endpoint are consistent. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Otherwise, go to Step 3. 4. Try to replace the endpoint. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status bri-port Page 8-232 8 Table 8-3. Endpoint Types BRI (cont’d) Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued TEI Range 0-126 Layer 2 State L3-Assigned Voice Extension Service SPID ext yes Description / Recommendation Transitory state for BRI endpoints which support MIM initialization when SPID Facility Test initializes the station. 5. Wait for five seconds and repeat the command. If the state has not changed, continue with Step 2. 6. Make sure SPID administration on the switch and endpoints are consistent. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Otherwise, go to Step 3. 7. Try to replace the endpoint. Verify the repair by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. ASAI BRI 0-126 Hyperactive ignore ignore Link has sent too many messages per unit time. Signaling suspends. System timeouts in 60 seconds and attempts reactivate the link. If links remain in this state while no activity occurs at BRI endpoints: 1. Ensure that SPID switch administration and endpoints are consistent. Verify repairs by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. 2. Replace the endpoint. Verify repairs by executing the status bri-port PCSSpp command. Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status card-mem Page 8-233 8 Table 8-3. Endpoint Types Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued TEI Range Layer 2 State Voice Extension Service SPID Description / Recommendation ASAI 0-126 L3-Restarting ext The switch sends a Restart message to the adjunct but has not received a Restart Acknowledgment message from the adjunct. ASAI 0-126 L3-Restarted ext After receiving a Restart Acknowledgment message, the switch sends a Heartbeat message to the adjunct and awaits a response. ASAI 0-126 L3-Established ext Normal state for ASAI adjunct. Continued on next page status card-mem Memory cards are portable, compact memory cards that contain banks of flash EPROM chips. Non-volatile memory cards are eraseable and randomly programmed with user data. Main memory stores system software in its “flash” section. Memory cards that save translations do not contain copies of the system software. During system reboot or system power down conditions, in-core system maintenance hardware error logs temporarily save in memory cards before the system goes down. Then, the error logs file reads back when the system restarts. The Hard Patch feature also uses the memory card as temporary storage when LMM applies patched files to the system software. The status card-mem command displays the following memory card information located at active or standby SPEs: ■ Is a valid memory card in place? ■ Is the memory card write-protected? ■ What is the capacity of the inserted memory card? ■ What kind of system configuration - small or medium? ■ What is the number of pulses counted in the last erase operation? ■ What is the percentage of translation storage space used? ■ What are the names of files stored in the memory card, and what is date and time (if available) when it was saved? DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status card-mem Page 8-234 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status card-mem location Physical carrier position where the memory card resides in a High or Critical Reliability System Simplex switch configurations=not required. Duplex switch configuration= "A" for control carrier A in Processor Port Network (PPN), or "B" for control carrier B in PPN. init inads craft cust rcust nms bcms browse none see below print Report sent to printer. Examples: status card-mem status card-mem A status card-mem b print Feature Interactions If the Announcement feature is unavailable in the system features configuration, the “Data Present” field is always “n” for the “announcements” file. The Announcement feature requires a memory card with a minimum capacity of 4 MB. If the memory card is less than 4 MB, Announcements cannot be save in the memory card. Core Dump features require 10 MB memory cards for saving core dumps. If the memory card has a capacity less than 10 MB, the core dump operation fails. Output For following output example is a display of the status card-mem command. status card-mem MEMORY CARD STATUS Location: 01A Write Protection: Status: inserted Capacity (MB): System Size: Medium Number of Erase Pulses: Translation Storage Space Used (%): File Name Data Present translation y announcements y Command successfully completed Date 2/17/91 2/15/91 Time 9:00 20:30 off 4 Series 1 78 21 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status card-mem Page 8-235 8 Field descriptions Location Physical location (carrier) of the memory card.Simplex system = 01A for carrier A of Processor Port Network. High or Critical Reliability Systems = 01A or 01B. System Size System configuration (Small or Medium). This information catches errors such as incorrectly-sized memory card inserted into the system. Capacity Inserted memory card capacity and the series number of the memory card. (a 3-digit format for the memory card size and a 1-digit format for the series number). Three memory card capacities are used in the DEFINITY D92 system. Memory card file contents are described below. Capacity of Memory Card Card Size User Customer File Names 1 Mb Small w/o Announcements translation 4 Mb Medium w/o Announcements translation 4 Mb Small and Medium with Announcements translation announcements 10 Mb Maintenance (core dump) translation announcements core_ dump 10 Mb System Upgrade system_software Field descriptions Status “inserted” = valid memory card is in the memory card slot. When the status is “inserted,” the switch can perform I/O operation to the memory card “no card” = no memory card is inserted or the inserted memory card has a bad connection “unformatted”= the inserted memory card is unformatted or the switch cannot recognized it. Write-Protection “on” = the write-protection toggle on the memory card is on. “off” = the write-protection toggle on the memory card is off. If the “Write-Protection” field is “on,” the switch cannot store files to the memory card. Number of Erase Pulses Number of pulses counted in the last erase operation on a Series 1 memory card. This field is blank for Series 2 memory cards due to different algorithm of erase operations between the two series. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status cdr-link Page 8-236 8 Percentage of reserved storage space for storing translation files in the memory card that saves translations to the memory card. Translation Storage Space Used (%) NOTE: This percentage is valid for the specific memory card used in the most recent save translation operation (which is implemented with the save translation command or with scheduled maintenance and save translation enabled). If the memory card is replaced with another card, or if no save translation is performed on the new memory card, the percentage does not indicate the translation storage space used in the new card. File Name Each formatted memory card has reserved a fixed space in the card for each file. The starting address and size of each reserved slot is pre-determined according to the capacity of the memory card. The file name as defined in Table "Capacity of Memory Card" is shown in this field. Data Present The "Data Present" field is "y" when the file contains valid data. Otherwise, the "Data Present" field has a value of "n." Date Time This field shows the date and time when the file was saved into the memory card. For the "Software Upgrade" type of memory card, this field contains the system software release number instead of the time stamp. Due to the restriction of "core dump" file format, the year information is not available in the date/time string. status cdr-link This command displays the status of call detail recording (CDR) links. Link up or down status displays. If a link is down, the system displays the number of times the switch attempts link setup. Call detail recording (CDR) links physically link SPEs to a recording device (for example, printer) for sending CDR call records. CDR link are composed of a data channel on the NETCON board or EIA port on the processor circuit pack, a digital port and a data module. Two CDR links can exist in the system. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status cdr-link print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust nms bcms browse none none Examples: status cdr-link status cdr-link print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status cleared-alarm-notif Page 8-237 8 Output The following example is a display of the status cdr-link command. status cdr-link CDR LINK STATUS Primary Link State: up Number of Retries: 0 Maintenance Busy? no Secondary extension not administered Field descriptions Up, down, or unadministered extension. Link State “up” = link is up and available to the application. (normal state) “down” = link is physically down. “Extension not administered” = administer system cdr feature form. Number of Retries The number of times the switch tries to initialize the link. Maintenance Busy “yes” = maintenance object is busied out. “no” = maintenance object is not busied out. status cleared-alarm-notif Expert systems use the status cleared-alarm-notif command to detect chronic alarming conditions. If this command displays “Feature is suspended”, Expert Systems can identify open trouble tickets as chronic problems for special consideration. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults cleared-alarmnotif 1 First OSS telephone number status of Cleared Alarm Notification. 2 Second OSS telephone number status of Cleared Alarm Notification. init inads craft cust rcust first OSS telephone number for the Cleared Alarm Notification status. Examples: status cleared-alarm-notif status cleared-alarm-notif 1 status cleared alarm-notif 2 Feature Interactions none DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-238 8 status conference Technicians use the status conference command to solve the following multimedia problems: 1. A user cannot join or remain connected to a conference. 2. Automatic algorithms — audio AUTO mode and the Px64 video picture specifications downgrade the conference, causing poor video quality. 3. A user does not receive full service. 4. An audio add-on user cannot join or remain connected to a conference. 5. A conferee is not seen by other users due to interworking problems. 6. Users cannot participate in Multipoint Communications Service conferences. 7. Continuous conferences do not move endpoints in or out of quadrants. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults status conference status conference Stored conference data. status conference 2 print Conference 2 data (current or last completed). Sends report to SAT-linked printer. init inads craft conference-ID = all (all stored data). Examples: status conference status conference 2 print status conference [all \ conference-ID] [print \ schedule] status conference [all \ conference-ID] [endpoint \ endpoint id] Feature Interactions none DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-239 8 Output Screen 8-1. status conference: page 1 of 2 It is possible for several records to display. Active conferences display first (in order of conference-ID), followed by completed conferences (most recently completed first). Conferences that have not begun have no data or information. Conference data displays in 2 parts: the first screen describes the status of the conference and indicates the modes and levels of the conference. It also identifies in-use endpoints that cause conference operating modes to change. This screen is similar to the administration screens. The remainder of the screens display endpoint level data (up to 8 endpoints per screen), revealing ports and drop reasons. Screen 8-1 shows page 1 of a typical administration screen. The first screen appears when status conference is entered and at least 1 valid conference is found. Field descriptions (status conference, page 1) status Current status of the conference (active, in-use, complete) conference name (MMCH DYNAMIC) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-240 8 conference mode (Voice-activated) password Not Applicable password scope Not Applicable cascade mode Conference cascade mode (blank) audio mode Current operating audio mode (G.711-A, G.711-mu, G.728. G.722) class Conference type (dedicated) data mode Conference data mode capability (none, any-mlp, ww-pcs) MLP rate Conference MLP Data Rate (blank). start time/date Conference start time in 24-hour notation with month and day. stop time/date End of conference in 24-hour notation with month and day. It is the actual end time if Status is complete; otherwise, it is blank. admin bandwidth Channel bandwidth administered on the Conference Record form. (64k) no of channels Number of channels required for each Px64 endpoint (2) Chair Current chair token holder. ( ) conf bandwidth Current operating channel conference bandwidth. Different from the administered bandwidth because of Rate Adaptation. Rate adaptation Does this conference support Rate Adaptation? (n, y) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-241 8 Format (in/out) The video format for single-screen conferences: CIF, QCIF, QCIF/CIF, H.CTS, H.CTX+, and SG4. non-H.261 conferences = input and output formats are always symmetric and the mode is the same for input and output. (H.CTX, H.CTX+, and SG4). H.261 mode non-continuous presence conferences = symmetric format (CIF and QCIF). Non-presentation, continuous presence conference in single-screen = symmetric format (CIF and QCIF). Presentation mode H.261 single screen continuous presence capable conferences = symmetric input and output formats QCIF/CIF (displayed as CIF) or asymmetric QCIF/CIF, if the administered format is upgradeable. For quad-screen conferences = the format is QCIF/CIF to reflect the QCIF input from all participants and output of CIF to all participants. For presentation mode quad-screen conference = the format is QCIF/CIF to reflect the input/output of all participants except the presenter. In quad-screen mode, presenter input is always CIF. FPS The CIF frame rate (frames per second) - ‘-‘, 30, 15, 10, 7.5. FPS indicates the rate that endpoints can receive frames. The MCU cannot detect maximum transmit frame rates or current frame rates. Frame rates change due to the amount of motion in the input image. QFPS The ACIF frame rate (frames per second) (‘ - ‘, 30, 15, 10, 7.5). The rate that an endpoint can generate/receive frames. Quad-screen VAS conferences = QFPS reflects the highest common QCIF frame rate of all endpoints and the video mixer board rate, that is lower than the rest of the participants. QCIF calculation accounts for the highest common CIF frame rate declared by all conference participants, since the QCIF rate cannot be greater than that of the highest common CIF rate. Quad-screen presentation conferences = QFPS reflects the highest common QCIF frame rate of all participants and the video mixer board rate. QFPS cannot be greater than the CIF frame rate that is announced by the presenter. QFPS field is blank for proprietary modes. lo/hi interworking Does this conference support Low Speed/High Speed Interworking? This field defaults to n. Type The type of conferee — Audio/Video (P64), Audio Add-on (AUD), Cascade Link (CAS), BONDing Call (BOND), BONDing Cascade Link (BCAS), UCC Controller (UCC), or Dedicated Access (DA). BONDing calls use up to 12 channels to form a single multimedia pipe. Ext Administered endpoint extension. ( ). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-242 8 Meet-me number The Meet-Me Number administered for the Meet-Me Extension. ( ) Dial Type “in” = dial-in to join endpoint to conference. “out” = dial-out to join endpoint to conference. In Use “y” = the endpoint is in use and is fully-connected on all media in an active conference. “c” = the endpoint is in use and is fully-connected; however, the endpoint has changed conference audio or video capability or conference rate due to rate adaptation. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify reduced capability. “e” = the endpoint is in use but has capability problems. The endpoint lacks one of the required capabilities (Vid, Bhl, MLP) to fully participate. For MLP capabilities, see the “T120” field. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability. “f” = the endpoint is in use but not connected to all media. The endpoint declared all required capabilities (channel/video/ audio/data) but is not fully connected to all conference media. This endpoint may be connecting, failed to connect, or is not a valid video source. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify the problem. “n” = the endpoint disconnected during a conference or unsuccessfully attempted to connect to a conference. “blank” = the field is blank until the first call from or to the endpoint. Chl “y” = the endpoint has the required number of channels. “e” = the endpoint does not declare support for the correct number of channels and cannot participate fully in the conference. “n” = the endpoint declares the correct number of channels, but not all join the conference, due to a network or endpoint problem. “blank” = Audio add-on endpoints set the Chl field to blank. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-243 8 Aud “y” = the endpoint has the required audio capability. Audio add-on endpoints always set the Aud field to y when the endpoint joins the conference. “c” = the endpoint is PCM only and it changes the conference video quality by changing the operating audio from G.728 to G.711. If administered audio modes are auto and the administered bandwidth is 112 kbps (56 k/channel) or 128 kbps (64 k/channel), the system initiates with the highest common audio, G.728. When the administered bandwidth is greater than 128 kbps, the system initiates with the highest common bandwidth, 7 kHz. “e”= A PCM-only endpoint that could not support the administered audio mode, G.728 (such as a data conference), or G. 278/G.711 endpoint that could not support the administered audio mode, 7 kHz. Such endpoints operate with PCM audio and interwork with current operating audio modes. blank = blank until the first call from or to the endpoint. Vid “y” = the endpoint has the required video capability and should be receiving video if the Chl, Aud, and Dat fields are y. “c” = downgraded conference video quality from changing CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate. The conference video mode defaults to CIF If QCIF-only endpoints join the conference, the entire conference operates in QCIF, with downgraded video clarity. The conference frame rate is initially set to the highest frame rate that can be reduced by any endpoint. If the conference video mode is not administered with upgrade capability, the video parameters for a conference are “downgraded.” They are not “upgraded” until all endpoints disconnect from the conference. “e” = the endpoint doe not declare video capability in its cap-set. “n” = audio only, not receiving video, due to audio or data problems. “blank” = Audio add-on endpoint defaults the Vid field to blank. Mlp Control Link to the ESM (T.120 stack terminator) status, the endpoint MLP data capability, and the state of the data connection in the T.120 stack. This field defaults to blank, indicating that the Data Mode for the conference is none. Gx “y” = This endpoint has Still Frame Graphics capability. e = This endpoint does not have Still Frame Graphics capability. The conference retains still frame graphics capability when non-compliant endpoints join the conference. blank = This endpoint never joined the conference. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-244 8 Rate Adpt Rate adaptation/Interworking indicator (5, 6, y, c, e, n, blank). 5 and “6” apply to Low Speed/High Speed Interworking. All other values apply to Rate Adaptation. “5” = 56-kbps (Low Speed) endpoint joins a High Speed (128 kbps or above) conference. This endpoint connects with audio only capability but is not a valid video source and destination. “6” = 64-kbps (Low Speed) endpoint joins a High Speed (128 kbps or above) conference. This endpoint connects with audio only capability but is not a valid video source and destination. “y” = Endpoint joins the conference at 64 kbps, but because rate adaptation to 56 kbps is triggered by another endpoint, this endpoint rate adapts to 56 kbps. “c “ = The administered conference bandwidth is 64 kbps. This endpoint joins the conference at 56 kbps. The first 56 kbps endpoint that joins 64 kbps rate adaptable conferences triggers rate adaptation (see Join Time below). “n” = Another endpoint triggers a 64-kbps conference to rate adapt to 56 kbps. This endpoint joins the conference at 64 kbps, but encounters problems in rate adapting to 56 kbps. This endpoint may have audio and may be receiving video, but is not a valid video source. “blank” Rate adaptation was not triggered by any endpoint. If this endpoint is in use and connected, it joins the conference at the administered bandwidth. Bond Mode BONDing Mode = blank for calls that are unrelated to bonding. Ts “t” = The endpoint detects voice energy (talking). “m” = The endpoint indicates to the MCU that it is muted. It is possible for an endpoint to mute, but not send any indication to the MCU. In this situation the MCU does not display a mute indication. “M” = UDD/CRCS Agent interface mutes the endpoint’s audio. Both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent must mute the endpoint audio. “S” = The solo-audio state set by UCC/CRCS Agents mutes the endpoint’s audio. While in solo-audio state, new endpoints that join the conference automatically mute. “blank” = Voice energy (talking) is not detected from the endpoint. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-245 8 Vs MCU endpoint video state (a, b, B, c, i, r, R, s, S, u, U, v, blank). Quad-screen conferences = an * appears before the Vs value indicating that an endpoint belongs to the mixed image. # appears before Vs values indicating that an endpoint is set to be in the mixed image (via administration or UCC/CRCS Agent), but instead, Fill video displays in its place. This occurs when videos of an endpoint that are set in a quadrant cannot be used as a video sources, because the endpoint is not joined to the conference, suppresses its video, or has invalid video for its video source. Up to four endpoints may have an * or # before the Vs field value. Quad-screen conferences in VAS mode = Mixed images broadcast to all endpoints. Quad-screen conferences in presentation mode = Mixed images are return videos to the presenter. Vs (cont’d.) a = Applies to quad-screen conferences. *a indicates that an endpoint belongs to the mixed image and is administered to one of the quadrants, but is not currently connected (Fill image displays). b = Applies to full-screen conferences. This endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. This conference is in VAS, broadcast, or presentation mode. Quad-screen VAS conferences are prefix with an * indicating that this endpoint’s video belongs to the mixed image. Quad-screen presentation conferences, (b without an asterisk) identify the presenter as the broadcaster. B = The UCC roll call feature causes the endpoint’s video to broadcast to other sites. The UCC roll call feature performs in full-screen mode. “c” = This endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. The conference is in chair mode and the chair designates the broadcaster. Chair features perform in full-screen mode. “i” = The endpoint is not a valid video source. #i represents continuous presence conferences with endpoints that are set in particular quadrants. “r” = For full-screen conferences, the endpoint’s video is the return video to the broadcaster. For continuous presence conference in presentation mode, *r represents a VAS quadrant that belongs to the mixed image. “R” = The UCC browse feature causes the endpoint’s video to return video to the broadcaster. UCC Browse feature perform in full-screen mode. “s” = The endpoint suppresses this endpoint’s video. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, #s represents endpoints that are fixed in a particular quadrant. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-246 8 Vs “S” = UCC/CRCS Agent interface suppresses this endpoint’s video. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, #S represents endpoints that are fixed in a particular quadrant S displays when both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent suppress the endpoint video. (cont’d) “u” = For full-screen conferences, this endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. The conference is in VAS mode and the UCC/CRSCS Agent interface designates the broadcaster. For quad-screen conferences, UCC/CRCS Agents designate this endpoint as set in a quadrant. An *u represents endpoints that belong to the quad image, and #U represents disconnected endpoints. “U” = For quad-screen conferences UCC/CRCS Agents designate quadrants as VAS. *U indicates that this endpoint belongs to the quad image. “v” This endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. The conference is in VAS mode but the endpoint asks to be a broadcaster with the “See-Me” request and is granted a MCV (Multipoint Command Visualize) token. The See-Me feature performs in full-screen mode. “blank” = The endpoint’s video is not broadcast, return, video, or part of the mixed-image, but it is a valid video source. status conference page 2 of 2 STATUS OF CONFERENCE: Sum Grp: Group1 L1: L2: Ext Join Time Drop Time Drop Reason Group2 Group 4 AC --------Ports--------- Sum Num Trunk Video Aud/Esm Grp 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Screen 8-2. Group3 status conference: page 2 of 2 Software DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-247 8 Field descriptions (status conference, page 2) Sum Grp The VD audio Level 1 (L1) and Level 2 (L2) summer group parts for each assigned group (1-4). Summer parts are assigned only for conferences with over 6 participants. When a conference operates at an audio mode of 7 kHz (administered audio mode is 7 kHz, or auto with the bandwidth greater than 128 kbps), the system allocates “primary” and “secondary” L1 and L2 summer parts. Primary and secondary parts are allocated as adjacent port slots on the same board. Status conferences display primary summer ports. Secondary summer ports are one slot higher than displayed primary summer ports. Join Time Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel joins the conference. Drop Time Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel disconnects. If the first channel has a drop time, the endpoint is inactive. If a drop time exists without a join time, the call disconnects without joining the conference. Drop Reason Channel’s disconnect because: “2-pri” = Administration errors cause mismatches in primary-secondary designation for cascade linking. This mismatch indicates that both MCUs are administered as primaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). “2-sec” = Administration errors cause mismatches in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This mismatch indicates that both MCUs are administered as secondaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). “Agent” = The reservation agent causes the call to disconnect. “Bandwidth” = A mismatch occurs between a call and the conference it attempts to join. “BondHshake” = Information channel parameters are unsupported or invalid, parameter negotiations terminate out of sequence, timers expire because secondary channels do not establish, or BONDing framing is undetected for one of the other channels. “Busy” = MCU detects that the conferee’s terminal equipment is busy. This drop reason is detected by ISDN cause values (for example h0). See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. “Chair” = Chair Command Disconnect (CCD) or Chair Command Kill (CCK) signals disconnects the endpoint. “Conf End” = The conference ends when it reaches the stop time for a reserved conference or an active conference converts to file. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-248 8 Drop Reason (cont’d) Endpoint Clearing received from DS1. The endpoint causes the disconnect. The endpoint notifies the MCU that it intends to disconnect. Far-end Clearing received from DS1. The network or endpoint cause the disconnect. “Handshake” = Framing is not located or is lost for over 40 seconds and the endpoint disconnects. (The endpoint cannot complete initialization due to problems with finding Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), Multi Frame Alignment (MFA) and getting a corrected coded cap-set.) “IDtimeout” = The H.320 sends three unsuccessful responses to the MCU regarding the UIN/password Query. Timeout periods exist for each period. “Internal” = MCU cannot allocate the necessary trunk resources to route the dial-out call for the specified dial-numbers. This problem can be associated with routing patterns or trunk associated translations, or it can indicate insufficient trunk resources. “Network” = Clearing received from DS1. The network causes the disconnect. The endpoint with disconnect notification capability disconnects without notifying the MCU. “Not-MCU” = The dial-out destination number(s) of the “CAS” extension terminates to a number that is not a dial-in cascade MCU extension. “No-ring” = Calls are up for 30 seconds without ringing. “Reorder” = The MCU CPTR resources detects that no network trunks are available to place the call. See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-249 8 Drop Reason (cont’d) “Pre-AnsDrop” = The call disconnects before an endpoint answers. The network, an endpoint, or a terminal adapter may cause the disconnect. This drop reason differs from ‘No-answer,’ which indicates that a 60-second timeout occurs during alerting. In this case, the call drops before the 60-second timer expires. Some busy endpoints connected through terminal adapters display this behavior. “Resource” = MCU cannot provide resources (VC or MMI) when the call arrives or loses the resources during the call. This can occur when they are Out of Service, busied out by craft, or in use by system maintenance. This drop reason can also occur if the DS1/MMI cable disconnects. If a resource problem exists when the call arrives, it gets a reorder (fast busy) and the MCU does not disconnected it. “Password” =The user entered a wrong password or the audio add-on user did not enter it within the specified time period. The audio add-on user has one attempt to enter a correct password and has about 10 seconds between digits (inter-digit timing). “System” = MCU restarts (level 2) disconnect all calls. “UIN-Inv” The user enters an invalid User Identification Number. “Unknown” = The system cannot determine the disconnect cause. “Wrong Num” The MCPTR resources SDN cause value detects an incorrectly-dialed destination number. See “Dial-out” for details. “UCC” = The controller intentionally disconnects the endpoint. AC Num Administered Connection Number. (1–128) AC numbers further diagnose problems by combining status conference information with the status administered connection command, and data stored in error and alarm logs. Ports Trunk The data endpoint used by the channel. Ports Video The MMI port for the channel. Ports Aud If the endpoint type is not “UCC,” the VC audio encoder port (which is always paired to a decoder port) for the channel (only the first channel). appears together with the ESM data port in the endpoint’s channel 1 port slot position of the Port Aud/ESM column. For “UCC” endpoints, channel 1 port slot positions display allocated Call Classifier resources. Ports ESM Expansion Service Module MMI data port. This field defaults to blank. Sum Grp Endpoint’s assigned summer group number. The summer group port assignments are on screen 1. software For Lucent Technologies use only. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-250 8 Field descriptions (status conference endpoint) The status conference x endpoint y command specifies that the conference is found. Data relevant for each endpoint displays in 6 pages. If technicians use the endpoint-ID all, every specified endpoint displays. Page 1 - Status Conference Endpoint status conference endpoint page 1 of 6 STATUS OF CONFERENCE ___ ENDPOINT: __ Status: ________ Ext: _____ Type: ____ Manufacturer/Country: ____/____ Product: _____ Terminal Name: _______________ Data Mode: _________ MLP Rate: ____ Admin Bandwidth: ____ Rate Adaptation: _ Conf Bandwidth: ____ Lo/Hi Interworking: _ Meet-Me Number: ____________________ Dial Out #1: _______________________ Sum Grp: _ L1: ______ L2: ______ #2: _______________________ Quadrature: ______ ________ ENDPOINT STATES/CAPABILITIES/MODES In Enh ----Capability---- Rate Bond Use BAS Chl Aud Vid Mlp Gx Adpt Mode Ts Vs - - Help line enter command: Screen 8-3. Page 1 of 6: status conference x endpoint y Field descriptions Endpoint Slot number associated with the endpoint on the conference forms. Product Product identification number obtained from the endpoint. Manufacturer/ Country Manufacturer identification number and manufacturer’s country code obtained from the endpoint. Terminal Name Blank. Sum Grp Endpoints belong to this Summer group number and the VC Audio Level (L1) and Level 2 (L2) summer ports for this group. These fields supply entries for conferences with over 6 participants. Dial Out #1 Dial Out #2 Blank Blank DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-251 8 In Use Is the endpoint participating in the conference or connecting to the conference? - y, c, e, f, n, blank. “y” = The endpoint is in use and fully-connected on all media in an active conference. “c” = The endpoint is in use and fully-connected; however, the endpoint changes the conference audio or video capability, or the rate of the conference due to rate adaptation. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify the reduced capability. “e” = The endpoint active, but has capability problems. The endpoint lacks one of the required capabilities (Vid, Bhl, MLP) to be a full participant. For MLP capabilities, see the “T120” field. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability. “f” = The endpoint is active, but is not connected to all media. The endpoint declared all required capabilities (channel/video/ audio/data) but is not fully-connected to all conference media. This endpoint may be connecting, failed to connect, or is not a valid video source. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify the problem. “n” = The endpoint connects then disconnects in a conference, or unsuccessfully attempts to connect to a conference. “blank” = Blank until the first call is made from or to the endpoint. Enh BAS Enhanced Basic Service Flag - n, y “y” = The endpoint supports the enhanced BAS commands/caps; “n” = The endpoint supports the basic BAS commands/caps. Chl Data on the quantify and quality of channels (transfer rate)? - y, e, n, blank “y” = The endpoint has the required number of channels. “e” = The endpoint does not declare support for the correct number of channels and cannot participate fully in the conference. “n” = The endpoint declares the correct number of channels, but not all channels join the conference, due to network or endpoint problems. “blank” = Audio add-on endpoints set the Chl field to blank. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-252 8 Aud Does it have the required audio capability? - y, c, e, blank “y” = The endpoint has the required audio capability. Audio add-on endpoints set the Aud field y when the endpoint joins the conference. “c” = This PCM-only endpoint changes conference video quality by changing the operating audio from G.728 to G.711. If the administered audio mode is auto and the administered bandwidth is 112 kbps (56 k/channel) or 128 kbps (64 k/channel), the system begins with the highest common audio, G.728. When the administered bandwidth is greater than 128 kbps, the system begins with the highest common bandwidth, 7 kHz. “e” = A PCM-only endpoint that could not support the administered audio mode, G.728 (such as a data conference), or G. 278/G.711 endpoint that could not support the administered audio mode, 7 kHz. Such endpoints operate with PCM audio and interwork with operating audio modes. “blank” = Blank until the first call is made from or to the endpoint. Vid Does it have required video capability and is it receiving video? - y, c, e, n, blank “y” = The endpoint has the required video capability and receives video if the Chl, Aud, and Dat fields are y. “c” = The endpoint downgrades the conference’s video quality from CIF to ACIF, or by decreasing the frame rate. The conference video mode defaults to CIF, and if a QCIF-only endpoint joins the conference, the entire conference operates in QCIF, with downgraded video clarity. The conference frame rate is initially set to the highest frame rate that can be reduced by any endpoint. If the conference video mode is not administered with upgrade capability, the video parameters for a conference downgrade. They do not upgraded until all endpoints disconnect from the conference. “e” = The endpoint does not declare video capability in its cap-set. “n” = Audio only, not receiving video, due to an audio or data problem. “blank” = Audio add-on endpoints set the Vid field to blank. Mlp The relationship between the Control Link and the ESM (T.120 stack terminator), the endpoint MLP data capability, and the state of the data connection in the T.120 stack. This field defaults to blank, indicating that the Data Mode for the conference is none. Gx “y” This endpoint has Still Frame Graphics capability. “e” = This endpoint did not have Still Frame Graphics capability. The conference retains still frame graphics capability when a non-compliant endpoint joins the conference. “blank” = This endpoint never joins the conference. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-253 8 Rate Adpt Rate adaptation/Interworking indicator = 5, 6, y, c, e, n, blank. 5 and 6 apply to Low Speed/High Speed Interworking. All other values apply to Rate Adaptation. “5”= 56-kbps (Low Speed) endpoints join High Speed (128 kbps or above) conferences. This endpoint connects with audio only capability, but is not a valid video source and destination. “6” = 64-kbps (Low Speed) endpoints join High Speed (128 kbps or above) conferences. This endpoint connects with audio only capability, but is not a valid video source and destination. “y” = This endpoint joins the conference at 64 kbps, but because another endpoint triggers rate adaptation to 56 kbps, this endpoint rate adapts to 56 kbps. “c” = 64 kbps endpoints join the conference at 56 kbps. The first 56 kbps endpoint that joins 64 kbps rate adaptable conferences triggers rate adaptation (see Join Time below). “n” = Another endpoint triggers a 64-kbps conferences to rate adapt to 56 kbps. This endpoint joins the conference at 64 kbps, but encounters problems with rate adapting to 56 kbps. This endpoint may have audio and may be receiving video, but is not a valid video source. “blank” = No endpoint triggers rate adaptation. If this endpoint is active, it joins the conference at the administered bandwidth. Bond Mode BONDing Mode - blank. This field is blank for calls that are not related to bonding. Ts The talking state of the endpoint - t, m, M, S, blank. “t” = The endpoint detects voice energy (talking). “m” = The endpoint indicates that it is muted to the MCU. Endpoints may mute, but not send an indication to the MCU. “M” = UDD/CRCS Agent interface mutes the endpoint’s audio. M displays when both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent mute the endpoint audio. “S” = the solo-audio state set by UCC/CRCS Agent mutes the endpoint’s audio. While in solo-audio state, new endpoints joining the conference automatically mute. “blank” = The endpoint does not detect voice energy (talking). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-254 8 Vs The MCU video state for this endpoint. a, b, B, c, i, r, R, s, S, u, U, v, blank. Quad-screen conferences = * appears before V values indicating that an endpoint belongs to the mixed image. A # appears before the V values indicating that an endpoint belongs to the mixed image (by administration or UCC/CRCS Agent). Instead, a Fill video displays in its place. This occurs when an endpoint’s video that is set in a quadrant cannot be used as a video source because the endpoint is not connected to the conference, suppresses its video, or has invalid video for its video source. Up to four endpoints have an * or # before the Vs field value. Quad-screen conference in VAS mode = The mixed image broadcasts to all endpoints. For quad-screen conference in presentation mode, the mixed image is return video to the presenter. “a” = This value applies to quad-screen conferences. *a indicates that an endpoint belongs to the current mixed image and is administered to one of the quadrants. *a indicates that the endpoint is fixed in a quadrant, but is not currently connected (Fill image displays). “b” = For full-screen conferences, this endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. This conference is in VAS, broadcast, or presentation mode. For quad-screen VAS conference are prefixed an asterisk indicating that this endpoint’s video is part of the mixed image because of VAS. For quad-screen presentation conferences, b identifies the presenter as the broadcaster. “B” = The UCC roll call feature causes the endpoint’s video to broadcast to other sites. The UCC roll call feature performs in full-screen mode. “c” = This endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. The conference was in chair mode and the chair designates the broadcaster. Chair features perform in full-screen mode. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-255 8 Vs (cont’d.) “i” = The endpoint is not a valid video source. For continuous presence conference, #i represents endpoints that are is fixed in a particular quadrant. “r” For full-screen conferences, t he endpoint’s video is the return video to the broadcaster. For continuous presence conferences in presentation mode, *r represents a VAS quadrant that is part of the mixed image. “R” = The UCC browse feature causes the endpoint’s video to be the return video to the broadcaster. UCC Browse feature performs in full-screen mode. “s” = The endpoint suppresses its video. For continuous presence conferences with fixed quadrant participants, #s represents an endpoint that is fixed in a particular quadrant. “S” = UCC/CRCS Agent interface suppresses the endpoint’s video. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, #s represents an endpoint that is fixed in a particular quadrant. S displays when both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent suppress the endpoint video. “u” = For full-screen conferences, this endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. The conference is in VAS mode and the UCC/CRSCS Agent interface designates the broadcaster. For quad-screen conferences, the UCC/CRCS Agent designates this endpoint as fixed in a quadrant. *u represents an endpoint that is part of the quad image, and #u represents a disconnected endpoint. “U” = For quad-screen conferences, UCC/CRCS Agents designate a quadrant as VAS. *U indicates that this endpoint is part of the current quad image. “v” = This endpoint’s video broadcasts to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode, but the endpoint asks to be a broadcaster with the “See-Me” request and is granted a MCV (Multipoint Command Visualize) token. The See-Me feature performs in full-screen mode. “blank” = The endpoint’s video is not broadcast, return, video, or part of the mixed-image, but it is a valid video source. Page 2 - Endpoint Channel Information This section describes fields specific to endpoint-level command output. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-256 8 status conference endpoint page 2 of 6 ENDPOINT CHANNEL INFORMATION Chan. No. 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: Join Time _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Drop Time _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ----Drop---Reason Code _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ _________ __ AC Num ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ------------Ports---------Trunk Video Aud/ESM BONDng ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Fr Err ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Software ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Help line enter command: Screen 8-4. Page 2 of 6: status conference x endpoint y Field descriptions Join Time Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel joins the conference. Drop Time Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel disconnects. If the first channel has a drop time, the endpoint is inactive. If a drop time occurs without a join time, the call disconnects without joining the conference. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-257 8 Drop Reason Channels disconnect because: “2-pri” = Administration errors cause mismatches in primarysecondary designations for cascade links. This mismatch indicates that both MCUs are administered as primaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). “2-sec” = Administration errors cause mismatches in primarysecondary designations for cascade links. This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as secondaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). “Agent” = Reservation agents cause calls to disconnect (for example, agents change connected dial-out destination numbers). “Bandwidth” = Mismatches occur when bandwidths of calls and the conferences they attempt to join are inconsistent. “BondHshake” = Unsupported Information channel parameters or invalid, parameter negotiations that terminate out of sequence, timers that expire because secondary channels do not establish, or BONDing framing that goes undetected for another channels. “Busy” = The MCU detects that the conferee’s terminal equipment is busy. An ISDN cause value detects this drop reason (for example h0). See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. “Chair” = Chair Command Disconnect (CCD) or Chair Command Kill (CCK) signals disconnect the endpoint. “Conf End” = The conference ends when the stop time is reached for a reserved conference or an active conference converts to file. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-258 8 Drop Reason (cont’d) “Endpoint” = Clearing received from DS1. The endpoint initiates the disconnect. The endpoint notifies the MCU that it intends to disconnect. “Far-end” = Clearing received from DS1. The network or endpoint initiate the disconnect. “Handshake” = Framing is never found or is lost for over 40 seconds and the endpoint is disconnected. (the endpoint could not complete initialization due to problems with finding Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), Multi Frame Alignment (MFA) and corrected coded cap-sets) “IDtimeout” = The H3.20 user unsuccessfully (three times) sends MCU responses regarding the UIN/password Query. Each timeout period is administered. “Internal” = MCU has a problem allocating the necessary trunk resources to route dial-out calls for specified dial-numbers. This problem is associated with routing patterns or trunk-associated translation (for example, TAC specified in the dial-out number or routing pattern points to a trunk group without members), or indicates a lack of trunk resources (for example, all trunk members are maintenance busy or all in-service members are busy on a call). “Network” = Clearing received from DS1. The disconnects the endpoint. The endpoint with the disconnect notification capability disconnects without notifying the MCU. “Not-MCU” = The dial-out destination numbers of the “CAS” extensions terminate to numbers that are not dial-in cascade MCU extensions. “No-ring” = The is up for 30 seconds and no ringing is detected. “Reorder” The MCU CPTR resources detect that no network trunks are available to place the call. See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-259 8 Drop Reason (cont’d) “Pre-AnsDrop” = The call disconnects an endpoint answers. The network, an endpoint, or a terminal adapter may cause the disconnect. This drop reason differs from ‘No-answer,’ which indicates that a 60-second timeout occurs during alerting. In this case, the call drops before the 60-second timer expires. Some busy endpoints that are connected through terminal adapters display this behavior. “Resource” = MCU cannot provide resources (VC or MMI) when calls arrive or lose their resources during the call. Calls can lose resources when they are Out of Service, busied out by craft, or in use by system maintenance. If the DS1/MMI cable is disconnected, this drop reason can also occur. If a resource problem exists when the call arrives, it gets reorder (fast busy) and is not disconnected by the MCU. “Password” = The user enters a wrong password or the audio add-on user does not enter it within the specified time period. The audio add-on user gets one attempt to enter a correct password and has about 10 seconds between digits (inter-digit timing). “System” = MCU restarts (level 2) disconnect all calls. “UIN-Inv” = Users enter invalid User Identification Numbers. “Unknown” = The system cannot determine the disconnect cause. “Wrong-num” = The MCU CPTR resources SDN cause values detect an incorrectly-dialed destination number. See “Dial-out” for details. “UCC” = The controller intentionally disconnects the endpoint. Drop Code A detail code complementing the Drop Reason. Additional bonding-related information is available from the supplementary BONDing Drop Codes described above. AC Num Administered Connection Numbers. (1–128) AC numbers can further diagnose problems by combining status conference information with the status administered connection command, and data stored in the error and alarm logs. Ports Trunk The data endpoint that the channel is using. Ports Video The MMI port for the channel. Ports Aud If the endpoint type is not “UCC,” the VC audio encoder port (which is always paired to a decoder port) for the channel (only the first channel). appears together with the ESM data port in the endpoint’s channel 1 port slot position of the Port Aud/ESM column. For “UCC” endpoints, the channel 1 port slot position displays allocated Call Classifier resources. Ports ESM Expansion Service Module MMI data port. This field is always blank. Ports BONDng The MMI port used for channel BONDing. Fr Err Frame error counter. A circular hex counter (0-FF) to indicates framing error occurrences. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-260 8 Page 3 - Conference Information This section describes fields that are specific to endpoint-level command output. status conference endpoint CONFERENCE INFO: ---------CMD STAT ----- ---XRATE: y AUDIO: n 56/64: y VIDEO: n MLP: y H-MLP: y LSD: y HSD: y CRYPT: y S/M: y page 3 of 6 Broadcaster: xx (See-Me) Return Vid: xx MODE COMMANDS/COMMUNICATION MODES ------| EPT MISC | ------- FAW -CONF EPT-IN EPT-OUT |------ I O | CH1 CH2 ------------ ------------- -------------| AIM: y n | --- --384 384 384 | VIS y n | A-OUT: y n G728 neutral G728 | MIS: n | A-IN: y n derestrict derestrict derestrict | MCV: n | M-FRM: y n H.261 H.261 H.261 |-------------| MFA: y n MLP-off MLP-off MLP-off | TALK: y 05 | MFN: y n H-MLP-off H-MLP-off H-MLP-off | VFCV: y 01 | FAS: y n LSD-off LSD-off LSD-off | BCTK: n 02 |MCUFAL: 00 00 HSD-off HSD-off HSD-off | RTTK: y 01 | FEFAL: 00 00 encrypt-off encrypt-off encrypt-off | BCLS: n | N-comp-6B-H0 N-comp-6B-H0 N-comp-6B-H0 | RTLS: n | | HYPR: n 00 | |DMUTE: n 00 | |H.261: n 00 | | VFMT: n 00 | Help line enter command: Screen 8-5. Page 3 of 6: status conference x endpoint y Conference Info. This information primarily applies to full-screen conferences. The Broadcaster field applies to quad-screen presentation mode conferences. Field descriptions Broadcaster The current broadcaster endpoint number. The following keywords qualify the broadcaster: “Broadcast” = A broadcast mode broadcaster. “Chair” = The chair designates the broadcaster. “See-Me” = The endpoint initiates a MCV broadcaster request. “Presenter” = A presentation mode broadcaster. “Rollcall” = The UCC designates the broadcaster by the Rollcall feature. “UCC” = The UCC designates the broadcaster. “VAS” = A Voice Activated Switching broadcaster. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-261 8 Next Broadcaster The endpoint number that is selected to be the next broadcaster. Return Vid The endpoint number that is the current return video. The return video is qualified with the following keywords: “blank” = VAS, Chair action, UCC action, or endpoint MCV requests force the previous broadcaster to be the return video. The broadcaster qualifier identifies the action that forced this endpoint to become return video. “Autoscan” = Auto scan return video, when conference mode broadcasts with auto scan. “Browse” = The UCC designates the return video with the Browse feature. “VAS” = A Voice Activated Switching return video. Next Return Vid Indicates the endpoint number selected to be the next return video. Mode Commands/Communication Modes. This is a collection of incoming and outgoing bandwidth allocations for the multiplex. The Incoming data is the rate at which the MCU thinks the endpoint is communicating based on the Bit-rate Allocation Signal (BAS) codes received from the endpoint/codec and the capabilities the MCU has declared. The Outgoing data is the rate from the MCU toward the endpoint. The following are column definitions for this section of page 3. Field descriptions CONF The desired conference operating mode. This may differ from the endpoint in (EPT-IN) or endpoint out (EPT-OUT) modes. CMD Labels for the various types of mode commands STAT Conference and incoming mode compatibility. “y” = mode compatibility “n” = modes incompatibility. EPT-IN defines the communication modes coming in from an endpoint. EPT-OUT Defines the communication modes sent to an endpoint based on the number of connected channels and the endpoint’s capabilities. The following are field definitions for the Mode Commands/Communication Modes section of Page 3. XRATE One of the supported rates in Table 8-4: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-262 8 Table 8-4. Supported Transfer Rates s XRATE Bandwidth of the Call 2x64 2B (2x56 or 2x64) 128 112kbps or 128kbps 196 168kbps or 196kbps 256 224kbps or 256kbps 320 280kbps or 320kbps 384 336kbps or 384kbps 512 512kbps 768 768kbps 1472 1472kbps 1536 1536kbps‘ 1920 1920kbps Continued on next page Field descriptions XRATE (cont’d.) AUDIO XRATE may be 64 when the endpoint dials in, or in the event that problems occur. It implies that only one B channel is in use. Conference and endpoint Audio rates (kbps bandwidth) must be the same. Their modes are not necessarily the same. When the audio rate of the conference and the endpoint differ, the endpoint’s audio interworks, but the endpoint’s video is invalid. MCU may or may not send video to such an endpoint. Table 8-5 summarizes expected endpoint audio modes with different transfer rate configurations, facility bandwidths, and conference modes. It includes endpoints that support the highest common audio mode (HC audio) when the administered mode is auto. The highest common conference mode depends on the administered bandwidth. A ‘-’ in the table indicates ‘does not apply.’ DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-263 8 Table 8-5. Audio Mode Configurations Admin Mode (HC Audio) All Support HC Audio Xfer Rate Facility BW auto (G.728) yes <=128k - auto (G.728) no <=128k auto (G.728) no auto (G.722) Conf Mode Expected Endpoint Mode G.728 G.728 64k G.711-A-56k G.711-A-56k B.711-Mu-56k <=128k 56k G.711-A-48k G.711-A-48k G.711-MU-48k - >128k 64k G.722-56k G.722-56k G.711-A-56k G.711-Mu-56k auto (G.722) - >128k 56k G.722-48k G.722-48k G.711-A-48k G.711-Mu-48k G.728 - - G.728 G.728 G.711 - - 64k G.711-A-56k G.711-A-56k G.711-Mu-56k G.711 - - 56k G.711-A-48k G.711-A-48k G.711-Mu-48k G.722 - - 64k G.722-56k G.722-56k G.711-A-56k G.711-mu-56k G.722 - - 56k G.722-48k G.722-48k G.711-A-48k G.711-Mu-48k Continued on next page Field Descriptions AUDIO (cont’d.) 56/64 Other possible AUDIO mode values include neutral (neutralized I-channel), Au-off, and Frm (no audio signal) which never match conference modes and are unsupported by MCU. The 65/64 field derestricts when operating at 64kbps, 128kbps, 192kbps, 256kbps, 320kbps, 384kbps, 512kbps, 768 kbps, 1472kbps, 1536kbps, or 1920kbps per channel speeds; it restricts when operating at 56kbps, 112kbps, 168kbps, 224kbps, 280kbps, 336kbps, 448kbps, and 672kbps per channel speeds. If technicians configure the conference for Nx56kbs operations, endpoint may signal by capabilities or modes that operate at the proper rate. In such a case, when technicians receive derestrict commands while they are in the restrict mode, that do not match conference communication modes, (MISC capability has restrict displayed on Page 4) the STAT 56/64 is y indicating 56/64 compatibility between the conference and the endpoint. VIDEO The Video mode: H.261 (recommended), H.CTX (proprietary), H.CTX+ (proprietary), or SG4 (proprietary) indicate that video is on in the direction indicated; and video-off when the video is off. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-264 8 Multi Layer Protocol data mode. When technicians administer Data Modes as any-mlp or ww-pcs, MLP modes should be var-MLP. Other values affect video status. MLP MLP modes should be MLP-off when technicians administer Data Modes as none. Other values in this mode affect video status. H_MLP The High Speed MLP mode. The HMLP mode should be H-MLP-off. Other values in this mode affect video status. LSD Low Speed Data mode. The LSD mode should be LSD-off. Other values in this mode affect video status. HSD High Speed Data mode. The HSD mode should be HSD-off. Other values in this mode affect video status. CRYPT Encryption mode. The CRYPT mode should be encrypt-off. Other values in this mode affect video status. S/M Single/Multi channel interoperability mode. 6B-H0-comp indicates that the sender is interoperating multiple channels and a single channel (for example, 6B and H0). Not-comp-6B-H0 indicates that the sender is not interoperating between 6B and H0. Normally this value is Not-comp-6B-H0. Other values in this mode affect video status. Endpoint Miscellaneous (EPT MISC) Information. EPT MISC contains miscellaneous states and counters for an endpoint. Flags can y or n. Counters start with 0x00, increment to 0xff, and wrap around to 0x01. AIM and VIS are BAS commands that can be sent as input to MCU from an endpoint or as output from MCU to an endpoint Field descriptions . AIM Audio Indicate Mutes. “y” = For input, this endpoint mutes its audio. MCU does not VAS to an endpoint displaying mute. For output, all other endpoints in the conference mute their audio (have sent AIM to MCU). MCU in turn tells this endpoint (by sending it AIM) that there is no audio output from MCU. “n” = For input, this endpoint does not mute (only if endpoint audio mode is turned on). For output, an audio path opens across the bridge. VIS Video Indicate Suppressed. “y” = For input, this endpoint suppresses its video (video is muted). For output, the MCU is not sending video to this endpoint because there is no video broadcaster (broadcaster does not join or broadcaster’s video is invalid). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-265 8 MIS Multipoint Indicate Secondary-status. “n” = For output, the endpoint is a valid source (not necessarily at this moment). n is the correct state for the video. “y” = MIS was sent to an endpoint considered to be a secondary endpoint. The endpoint is included in the audio, but not video portion of the conference. Video is not sent. MCV Multipoint Command Visualize. “y” = For input, an endpoint requests to become a broadcaster. This is used during Still Frame Graphics and to force “presentation” mode. TALK “y” = The VC board detects voice energy from the endpoint. The TALK counter indicates the number of starts or stops. VRCV “y” = The endpoint is receiving video (MCU is sending video to the endpoint). The VRCV counter counts the number of times video sends or does not send to this endpoint. BCTK Single screen and quad-screen presentation mode conferences. “y” = The endpoint is the video broadcast source. The BCTK counter tallies the number of times this endpoint is the video broadcast source. RTTK Single screen conferences. “y” = The endpoint is the return video source. The RTTK counter tallies the number of times this endpoint is the return video source. BCLS Single and quad-screen presentation mode conferences. “y” = The endpoint is watching the video of the broadcast source. RTLS Single screen conferences. “y” = The endpoint is watching the video of the return source. HYPR “y” = Endpoint hyperactivity (MCU isolates endpoints from the MMCH conference due to “thrashing” behavior) affects the endpoint’s status as a video source (for 5 seconds of hyperactivity timer). The HYPR counter tallies the number of times this endpoint is hyperactive. DMUTE “y” = The VC board or the software in the MCU mute the decoder. VC boards mutes the decoder when it loses MMI or endpoint framing, when it receives invalid audio code words, and when endpoints are hyperactive. MCU software mutes the endpoint decoder of all endpoints besides the broadcaster. (when a mode of a conference is “broadcastw/scan” ,broadcast with auto scan) The DMUTE counter tallies the number of times the VC board mutes this endpoint’s decoder. VFMT Quad-screen conferences. This field always defaults to n, indicating QCIF format. H.261 “y” = Video framing loss. The H.261 counter tallies the number of times framing is lost. Frame Alignment Word (FAW) Information. The FAW section of page 3 provides channel Frame Alignment Word information for the communication DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-266 8 paths labeled CHL 1 and 2. For 2B calls, both CHL 1 and 2 are used. For 1-channel calls (112,bps, 128kbps, 168kbps, 196kbps, 224kbps, 256kbps, 280kbps, 320kbps, 336kbps, 384kbps, 768kbps, 1472kbps, 1536kbps, and 1920kbps) only CHL 1 is used. A-OUT, A-IN, M-FRM, MFA, and MFN are flags with y or n. Field descriptions A-OUT MCU has endpoint framing. A-IN Endpoint has MCU framing M-FRM Multichannel frame alignment of both channels in 2B is present. MFA Multiframe alignment word is present (required in 2B call). MFN Multiframe numbering is present (required in 2B call). FAS Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) channel number (1 or 2). This number should match the column header. MCUFAL MCU Frame Alignment Loss (MCUFAL). Counts the number of times the MCU reports lost endpoint FAW or multichannel synchronization (M-FRM) to the endpoint. The MCU a-bit toggles when the MCU gains or loses endpoint multichannel synchronization. This counter starts with 0x00, increments to 0xff, then wraps around to 0x01. The MCUFAL count also displays in the Fr Err field on Page 2 FEFAL Far End Frame Alignment Loss (FEFAL). Counts of the number of changes the MCU detects in the endpoint’s a-bit (A-OUT). The endpoint a-bit toggles when an endpoint gains or loses MCU framing. This counter starts with 0x00, increments to 0xff, then wraps around to 0x01. Page 4 - Endpoint Capability Information This section describes fields specific to endpoint-level command output. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-267 8 status conference endpoint page 4 of 6 ENDPOINT CAPABILITY INFORMATION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------VID | vfmt: QCIF cmpi: 30 H.CTX SG4 imp | da_sfg qmpi: 7.5 H.CTX+ SG4_sfg -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------MISC | derestrict S/M mbe dcomp cic -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------XR | 64 64x2 64x3 64x4 64x5 64x6 384 384x2 384x3 384x4 384x5 | 128 192 256 320 512 768 1152 1472 1536 1920 -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------AUD | ntrl 711m 711a g728 g722_64 g722_48 -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------LSD | var 300 1200 4800 6400 8000 9600 14.4k 16k 24k 32k 40k 48k 56k 62.4k 64k -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------HSD | var 64k 128k 192k 256k 320k 348k 512k 768k 1152k 1536k -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------MLP | var 4k 6.4k 14.4k 16k 22.4k 24k 30.4k 32k 38.4k 40k 46.4k 62.4k -----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------HMLP | var 62.4k 68k 128k 192k 256k 320k 384k -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Screen 8-6. Page 4 of 6: status conference x endpoint y Endpoint Capability Information. Fields on this page display if an endpoint declares specific capability. For example, if an endpoint does not declare VID H.CTX capability, the H.CTX field does not display. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-268 8 Field descriptions VID Video and frame rate types that the endpoint supports. “vfmt” = Does not display if the endpoint has no video capability. All values are blank if an active call or audio-only endpoint exists. Otherwise, values for this field include: MISC ■ FCIF for full CIF ■ QCIF for quarter CIF. CIF support implies QCIF support. For larger screens, CIF typically displays sharper resolution video, ZCIF is blocked, but may run at higher frame rates with less clarity. Differences are less observable on very small displays. ■ cfps and qfps are maximum frame rates (frames/second) that the endpoint can receive video for CIF and QCIF operating modes. CIF frame rate values are 30fps, 15fps, 10fps, and 7.4fps. If the endpoint does not support CIF (that is, the vfmt field is QCIF), the cfps value should be blank. ■ da_sfg indicates support for H.261 Still Frame Graphics transfers. ■ H.CTX, H.CTX+ and SG4 are proprietary video format capabilities. ■ SG4_sfg indicates support for SG4 Still Frame Graphics The restrict field and the 56/64 command mode with a restrict value indicate that endpoints operate at 56 kbps per channel. Endpoints on 56 kbps conferences must send one or both 2 indications that they are operating at 56 kbps before they become a video source in a 56 kbps conference. If they signal that they are operating at 56 kbps in a 64 kbps or 384 kbps conference, they become an audio-only source, but the MCU continues to send Selected Communication Mode (SCM) toward them when possible. A MISC capability of derestrict and a 56/64 command of derestrict together indicate that an endpoint operates at 64 kbps. If either is restrict, the conference operates at 56 kbps. Other field values include: ■ dcomp indicates support for WorldWorx PCS data compliance. ■ mbe indicates support for Multi Byte Extension. MBE exchanges passwords, terminal names, and other special capabilities, such as, WorldWorx PCS specific features support. ■ cic (Chair Indicate Capability) indicates chair control capability. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-269 8 XR Transfer rate capabilities. Endpoint speeds over current connections and Px64 Multiplexes. For 384 kbps (H0) calls, endpoints indicate 384 kbps support, that displays as 384. On 336 kbps calls, endpoints must signal 384 kbps support. If an endpoint does not indicate support for 384 kbps on a 384/336 kbps conference, the MCU provides Audio Only Communications Mode (ACOM). For a 2B conference, the MCU sets the rate to 2x64, expecting the endpoints to do likewise (64x2 displays; if this is not displayed, no 64x2 capability exists). Endpoints may remove 2x64 (or the current channel rate: 384, 768, 1472, 1536) from their capability. This is Mode 0 forcing and is a normal procedure. The MCU provides AOCM if the endpoint does not signal support that matches the conference configuration. AUD Audio. Audio protocols that the endpoint supports. 711m and 711a are PCM (G.711) and support Mu and A-law, respectively. Endpoints require at least one. The g728 field indicates if G.728 is supported (LB_CELP). This value depends upon the endpoint type and configuration. The g722_48 field indicates endpoint support for G.722 (7 kHz) at both 48 kbps and 56 kbps. The g722_64 field indicates endpoint support for G.722 at 64 kbps in an unframed (unsupported by the MCU) mode. LSD Low Speed Data conferencing capabilities. HSD High speed Data conferencing capabilities. MLP Multi Layer Protocol Data capabilities. HMLP High Speed MLP data conferencing capabilities. Page 5 - Endpoint Call Status Information This page summarizes call-related status for per-channel join counts, join/drop times, drop reasons, drop codes, and auxiliary bonding drop codes. In addition, it contains drop codes and software fields from the previous call. The data on the page is retained. The Endpoint Call Status Information section groups all call-related fields. The only new field in this section is Join Count; all other fields are described in Screen 8-3 and Screen 8-4. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-270 8 status conference endpoint page 5 of 6 ENDPOINT CALL STATUS INFORMATION Join Chan Count 1: __ 2: __ 3: __ 4: __ 5: __ 6: __ 7: __ 8: __ 9: __ 10: __ 11: __ 12: __ Screen 8-7. Join Time _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Drop Time _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ -------------- Drop -------Reason Code BondCode __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ __________ __ __ --- Previous ----DropCode Software __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ __ ________ Page 5 of 6: status conference x endpoint y Field descriptions Join Count Tallies the number of times this endpoint joins this conference during this session. This counter starts with 0, increments to 64, and wraps around back to 1. Page 6 - Administered Connections This page summarizes information for administered connections associated with this endpoint. This data can be viewed while the conference is active. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-271 8 status conference endpoint page 6 of 6 ADMINISTERED CONNECTIONS INFORMATION Chan 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: AC Num ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Screen 8-8. Dial-out Number _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ Connection State _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ Retry Count __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Failure Cause __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Page 6 of 6: status conference x endpoint y Field descriptions Dial-out number Numbers that are dialed out by administered connections for each channel in the call. The dial Out #1 and #2 on page 1 of the forms display the DCP endpoint number. This is particularly useful with bonding dial-out calls. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-272 8 Connection State The call state of the AC. The following are connection states associated with dial-out ACs: “enabled” = Transient in nature indicating that an AC is about to enter the “attempting to connect” state. “disabled” = one of three options: ■ The AC reaches an administered retry threshold, and all retries are stopped. To verify this, check the Error Log to see if an error type of 9 is logged against the AC. ■ The AC is in a connected state with the far end disconnected. ■ The initial channel call is not connected. No dial out call attempt is made for the additional channels until the initial channel has reaches a connected state. “not scheduled” = Transient in nature, indicating that an AC is about to enter the “attempting to connect” state. “waiting to retry” = The AC is inactive, waiting for the retry timer to expire. Once the timer expires, the AC sends a dial out call and enters the “attempting to connect” state. In this state, dial out calls fail at least once. “attempting to connect” = The AC is active, but has not connected. “connected” = The call associated with the AC is answered and joins cut-thru to the conference. Retry Count Tallies the attempted retries for this AC during join attempts and does not clear when the AC connects. However, it clears when the Redial feature attempts a new join. This differs from the Join Count which counts the number of times the channel joins the conference during this conference session. Failure Cause An ISDN or CPTR cause value (values lower than 0x7f) records when the last dial out call drops. Values above 0x7f are generated internally. Table 8-6 lists all possible failure cause values displayed by this field and its associated description. The Failure Cause value logs in the Error Log and displays with the display errors command. (Err Type is normally displayed as a decimal.) Table 8-6. Status AC - Failure Cause Values Failure Cause (hexadecimal) Description 0x00 (0t0) N/A 0x01 (0t1) Incorrect destination address 0x02 (0t2) Reason unknown Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status conference Page 8-273 8 Table 8-6. Status AC - Failure Cause Values — Continued Failure Cause (hexadecimal) Description 0x06 (0t6) Reason unknown 0x10 (0t16) Normal call clearing 0x11 (0t17) Endpoint not available 0x12 (0t18) ISDN timer expired 0x15 (0t21) Reason unknown 0x12 (0t22) Destination address changed 0x1C (0t28) Bad destination or access denied 0x1D (0t29) Access denied 0x1F (0t31) Reason unknown 0x22 (0t34) Trunks unavailable 0x26 (0t38) Temporary or facility failure 0x29 (0t41) Temporary or facility failure 0x2A (0t42) Resources unavailable 0x2C (0t44) Resources unavailable 0x32 (0t50) Access denied 0x34 (0t52) Access denied 0x36 (0t54) Access denied 0x3A (0t58) Resources unavailable 0x41 (0t65) Required capability not implemented 0x42 (0t66) Required capability not implemented 0x45 (0t69) Required capability not implemented 0x51 (0t81) ISDN protocol error 0x52 (0t82) Required capability not implemented 0x58 (0t88) Incorrect destination number 0x60 (0t96) ISDN protocol error 0x61 (0t97) ISDN protocol error 0x62 (0t98) ISDN protocol error 0x64 (0t100) ISDN protocol error 0x66 (0t102) ISDN timer expired 0x7f (0t127) Reason unknown Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status data-module Page 8-274 8 Table 8-6. Status AC - Failure Cause Values — Continued Failure Cause (hexadecimal) Description 0xC2 (0t194) Ring no answer 0xC8 (0t200) Hi and dry - no feedback detected 0xC9 (0t201) Cascade link administered wrong 0xCA (0t202) CPTR not available to detect failure Continued on next page status data-module This command displays internal software state information for diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities to which the data module is communicating. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions busyout mis extension data module extension none Report prints if a printer is linked to the SAT. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none print Examples: status data-module 30000 status data-module 32770 status data-module 32770 print Output For the following output example, the command that was entered is “status data-module 301". status data-module 301 DATA-MODULE STATUS Data Ext/Stn Ext for Stn DM: 301 Port/Channel Number: 01C1103 CF Destination Ext: Connected Ports: Service State: out-of-service Maintenance Busy? no DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status hardware-group Page 8-275 8 Field descriptions Data Ext/Sta Ext for Stn DM The data module extension number. The DTDM is an exception: the connected station extension is shown. Port/Channel Number The port location of the data module (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). If the data module specified is a data channel, the channel number is shown instead. Service State This entry displays the status of the data module; valid states are: — In-service/idle — The data module is present but not in use. — In-service/active — The data module is present and is in use. — Out-of-service — The data module has been removed from service — Disconnected — The data module no longer appears to be present CF Destination Ext This entry displays the call forwarding destination, if any, of the station. Maintenance Busy? Whether maintenance is testing the object, "yes" or "no". Connected Ports Port locations to which the data module is connected (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). status hardware-group Summary information for the active or last hardware group test displays. This display includes the number and percentage of tested maintenance objects, the percentage of tests passed, failed, and aborted, the time elapsed since initiating the hardware group test, the specific hardware group test command (see ‘‘test hardware-group’’ command) initiated, and the state (active/canceled/complete) of the hardware-group test. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status hardware-group print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none Examples: status hardware-group status hardware-group print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status hardware-group Page 8-276 8 Output The following output example is a display of the status hardware-group command. status hardware-group page 1 of 1 HARDWARE GROUP STATUS Hardware Group Command State: active Number of MOs Tested: 11070 Total Number of MOs to be Tested: 12300 Percent Complete: 90% Elapsed Test Time (hr:min:sec): 0:15:30 Repetition Number: 1 Percentage of Tests Passed: 82% Percentage of Tests Failed: 11% Percentage of Tests Aborted: 7% ENTERED HARDWARE GROUP COMMAND Command: Test sequence: Test repetition: Output Options: Hardware Options: test hardware-group system short repeat 3 failures SPE-interchange Field descriptions Hardware Group Command State: “active” = testing in progress, “canceled” = testing canceled, “complete” = command completed; no testing occurring. Number of MOs Tested: Number of MOs in the specified group (refer to test hardware-group command) that the hardware-group command tests, including MOs that were tested or aborted due to resource contention. Total Number of MOs to be Tested: Number of MOs in the group specified in the test hardware-group command. Percent Complete: Ratio of the completed MOs to the MOs to test in the command. Elapsed Test Time: It tracks completion time for the hardware-group command. If a test cancels, then restarts, the time for the cancel period is excluded. The time displays in HH:MM:SS format. Repetition Number Number of completed iterations that correspond to the ’repeat’ or ’continuously’ option. Percentage of Tests Passed: Percentage of tests that passed. Percentage of Tests Failed: Percentage of tests that failed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status health Page 8-277 8 Percentage of Tests Aborted: Percentage of aborted tests Command: Hardware-group action objects and qualifiers. Test sequence: Short or long. Test repetition: Displays continuously or the keyword repeats with the entered repeat value. Output options: Selections that were chosen on the input form: auto-page, background, or failures. Hardware options: Selections that were chosen on the input form: all-ports, or SPE-interchange. status health This command displays the current system alarm summary, maintenance busy summary, user summary, critical system status, and cabinet status. This same page displays with the monitor health command, except that the status health output page does not update periodically. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults status health print Report prints to SAT-linked printer. init inads craft cust nms browse none Examples: status health status health print Feature Interactions High or Critical Reliability Systems = If standby SPE Emergency Transfer Select Switches change and handshakes are down, the displayed Emerg Trans field is incorrect until handshakes reactivate. Output The following output example is a display of the status health command. status health SPE: PNC: Pwr: Cab 1 2 3 A/Auto B/functional OCC: ST: 9% Cp: 25% Sm: 10% Idl:66% A-PNC/Auto B-PNC/functional ALARM:Maj: 0 Min: 2 Wrn: 9 Comm Sync:local Logins:4 BUSYOUTS:Trk: 0 Stn: 0 Oth: 0 EmTr Mj Mn Wn PNC Cab EmTr Mj Mn PNC Cab EmTr Mj Mn Wn PNC off 0| 7| 0 up off 0| 0| 4 up nia 0| 2| 0 up -Press CANCEL to quit 9:33 THU APR 16 :1993 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status health Page 8-278 8 Field descriptions Major Number of logged major alarms. (0–200) Minor Number of logged minor alarms. (0–200) Warning Number of warnings logged in the alarm file. (0–200) Trunks Number of maintenance busied out trunks. Stations Number of maintenance busied out stations. Others Combined number of maintenance busied out objects excluding trunks and stations. Static Proportion of the CPU that is dedicated to high priority items (for example, the operating system). This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that the occupancy is less than one half of a percent. SM Proportion of the CPU that is dedicated to system management or periodic and scheduled maintenance. If many periodic or scheduled maintenance tests perform, this occupancy percentage can be high without affecting service. This percentage rounds to the nearest integer; therefore, a percentage of 0=the occupancy is less than one half of a percent (for example, an 89.6% occupancy displays as 90%). CP Proportion of the CPU that is dedicated to call processing. This occupancy has priority over SM and IDLE occupancy categories, and if needed, takes processor time from these occupancy categories. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer. Idle Available proportion of the CPU. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer. Active SPE A or B indicate the active processor complex. When the active processor complex is locked on-line with lock switching on DUPINT, the “lock” option displays; otherwise, “auto” displays. Duplicated? Duplication status of the SPE component. “y” = duplication; “n” = no duplication. SPE Power Power source for the processor complex. (commercial) When commercial power is unavailable, battery backup is in use and is indicated with “backup”. Time Source The current timing source. Display values for this field vary according to timing sources selected. “external” = For Stratum-3 hardware, “internal” = an internal source, such as a tone clock. Primary and secondary timing sources must be administered for the Stratum-4 option. “primary”= the primary administered source is in use, “secondary” = the administered secondary source is in use. “local” = neither the primary or secondary sources are in use. # Logins Number of current users. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status interface Page 8-279 8 Cab Assigned cabinet number (1 to the highest system cabinet number). Emerg Trans Settings for emergency transfer switches on the maintenance board for each cabinet. Available options are: auto-on (“auto+” or “a+”), auto-off (“auto-” or “a-”), “on”, “off”, and “n.a.”. The system defaults to “auto+” or “auto-”. In this state, emergency transfer activate automatically if the cabinet fails (“+”=emergency transfer is activate, “-” = emergency transfer is inactive). “on” = emergency transfer automatically activates. “off” = the cabinet cannot activate emergency transfers. Duplicated SPEs systems = switch settings for both processors of the PPN (cabinet 1) display. In this case, “auto+” is abbreviated “a+”, “auto-” is abbreviated “a-”, and “off” is abbreviated “of”. “on” does not change. “n.a.” = the emergency transfer switch setting is unavailable. Mj Number of major alarms associated with the cabinet. Asterisks are used to fill fields when numbers exceed 99. Mn Number of minor alarms associated with the cabinet. Asterisks are used to fill fields when numbers exceed 99. Wn Number of warnings associated with the cabinet. Asterisks are used to fill fields when numbers exceed 99. PNC Port Network Connectivity (PNC) status for each port networks within a cabinet. When multiple port networks exist, Carriers A, B, and C are listed first and separated from Carriers D and E by a slash (for example, up/up). Availability of the Expansion Archangel Link (EAL) determines PNC status of a port network. “up” denotes that the EAL is available. “dn” denotes that the EAL is unavailable. Time of Day Current time of day acquired from the system. status interface This command displays the number of counters maintained by the PI. (a front end processor implementing packet layers and link layers of the BX.25 protocol and the integrated services digital network (ISDN) procedure-D protocols. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status interface location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface (PI board). 1 = the first processor interface in the carrier; 2 = the second processor interface in the carrier. 1 (one) none print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse Examples: status interface a1 status interface 01a2 status interface 01b1 status interface b2 status interface b2 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status isdn-testcall Page 8-280 8 Output The following example is a display of the status interface a1 command. status interface a1 PROCESSOR INTERFACE STATUS Base Level Occupancy(low): Base Level Occupancy(high): Primary Queue Audit Error: Secondary Queue Audit Error: Translation Audit Error: Protocol Timer Audit Error: Hardware Sanity Timeout: Hardware Resource Error: Hardware Overload Error: 10 25 4 10 12 0 1 12 8 status isdn-testcall The status isdn-testcall command displays the progress of an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call. The status form displays the tested ISDN-PRI B-channel port number, bit error rate, number of bits transmitted, block error rate, number of blocks transmitted, start time, duration specified, duration of test call and reason of termination. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status isdn-testcall group number administered number associated with each trunk group. none see below group member administered number identifying a particular trunk within a trunk group. init inads craft number print Report prints to SAT-linked printer. Examples: status isdn-testcall 80/1 status isdn-testcall 78/1 print Feature Interactions If the bit error rate or block error rate is greater than zero, the ISDN-PRI trunk may be in trouble. The statistical information displayed on the terminal may deactivate the ISDN trunk. This is subjective because the ISDN trunk may be used for data or voice. If the trunk is used for data and the rates are high, the trunk should be deactivated. If the trunk is used for voice, the trunk may not be deactivated. Also, high rates be at risk for some type of power hit. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status isdn-testcall Page 8-281 8 Output The following output example is a display of the status idsn-testcall 80/1 command. status isdn-testcall 80/1 Page 1 of 1 SPE A ISDN TESTCALL STATUS Port Bit Number Block Number Error Of Error Of Start Rate Bits Rate Blocks Time 1B1401 0EE0 4EE7 0EE0 6EE2 Duration Duration Of Specified Test 25/12:36 120 100 Reason Of Termination in progress Field descriptions Port (cabinet/carrier/slot/circuit) of the ISDN-PRI B-channel. Bit Error Rate The measured bit error count based on the comparison between sent and received bit patterns. (Number displays in scientific notation) Number of Bits Number of bits generated. (Number displays in scientific notation) Block error Rate The measured block error count based on the comparison between sent and received bit patterns. (Number displays in scientific notation). Number of Blocks Number of blocks generated. (Number displays in scientific notation) Start Time Test call start time. (dd/hh:mm). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status journal-link Page 8-282 8 Duration Specified Specified run time for the test call. (1-120 minutes, or blank = default of 10 seconds). Duration of Test Run time for the test call, listed in minutes. “blank” = a default time. Reason of Termination Reason that the test call terminates: “finished,” “canceled,” “overflow,” “no bits,” “transmission,” “internal fail,” “data corrupt,” “call dropped,” “call rejected,” and “in progress.” “finished” = the test finishes in the specified time. “canceled” = the test call cancels with the clear isdn-testcall command. “overflow” = the transmitted bits overflow buffer allocation. “no bits” = no bits are received because the ISDN-PRI test call circuit connection is bad. “transmission” = a data transmission interrupts, probably from a power hit. “call dropped” = the call drops due to an abnormal termination, or inability to cut-through to the other side. “call rejected” = the originating call is not set up properly. “internal fail” = an internal error on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. “in progress” = the test is still running; “data corrupt” = any other error condition. status journal-link The status journal-link command displays if the link is up or down. If the link is down, the system displays the number of times the switch tries to initialize the link. A journal printer documents automatic wake-up events, emergency access to attendant events, and housekeeping events when the property management system is not functional. A journal printer may also generate reports for automatic wake-up events and emergency access events at a scheduled time. If system configuration includes two printers, one is for housekeeping events only and the other is for automatic wake-up events and emergency access events. For general information on journal printer links, see the description of the ‘‘busyout journal-printer’’ command. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status journal-link wakeuplog printer that handles automatic wakeup and emergency access to attendant events and scheduled reports. none none pms-log printer that handles pms down events. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse print Reports print to SAT-linked printer. Examples: status journal-link wakeup-log status journal-link pms-log status journal-link pms-log print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-283 8 Output The following example is a display of the status journal-link wakeup-log command. status journal-link wakeup-log JOURNAL LINK STATUS Link State: up Maintenance Busy? no Field descriptions Link State If extensions are administered in the System Parameters Hospitality form, wakeup-logs or pms-log links are considered to be administered only. Maintenance Busy Is maintenance testing performing on the link? status link The status link command displays the operational status associated with a specified processor interface link. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status link link number A link number (1-8) associated with a specific link. none none print Report sent to printer. init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse Examples: status link 1 status link 8 status link 4 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-284 8 Definitions Link A synchronous connection between the system and an adjunct or another switch. The link consists of three protocol levels. The change communications-interface links command specifies the link number. Level 1 Physical connection of a port on a Processor Interface board to hardware that serves the same purpose on the adjunct or switch (for example, a PI board or an SCP board on Audix). Several components can exist between these two endpoints (modems, DS1 facilities, cables, and so forth). Level 2 Logical protocol that allows data communication between two endpoints. BX.25 = LAPB (Link Access Protocol on the B-channel) protocol. Level 2 = Frames sent. Protocol establishment requires one end to send a SABM (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame and the other to respond with a UA (User Acknowledgment) frame. Both sides send SABMs until they receive a UA. (level 2 is up and the Link Status field displays “restarting”) This should be a temporary condition, because level 3 comes up immediately. Level 3 Logical protocol that allows multiplexing of many channels to one level 2 link. BX.25 specifies that this is the X.25 data phase protocol. Packets are sent at level 3, included in level 2 frames. This protocol establishes after level 2 establishes when one end sends a Restart packet, and the other sends a Restart Confirm packet. Processor channel Connection of an application running inside the SPE to a specified channel on a specified link. A number on the change communication-interface processor-channel form identifies processor channels. The link and level channel numbers and the application are specified on the link (for example, dcs) that uses the processor channel. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-285 8 Output status link 1 PI LINK STATUS Link Number: 1 Link Status: in-service Destination: ISDN-LNK Dest Status: standby Port: 1B1624 Sig Grp: 8 ERROR COUNTERS Hardware Device Check (receive): Hardware Device Check (transmit): Far-End MOOS Count: Far-End FRMR: Far-End DISC: Timeout: Software Initiated Link Down: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Level 2 I-frames retransmitted: Level 2 Reset (SABM): Invalid Frame Count: Far-End SABM(E)/DM: Protocol Error Detected: Local Busy Out: Firmware Initiated Link Down: 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS 1/ status link 1 PI LINK STATUS Link Number: 1 Link Status: in-service Destination: ISDN-TRK Port: 1B1623 Dest Status: in-service/active Trk/Mem: 20/01 ERROR COUNTERS Hardware Device Check (receive): Hardware Device Check (transmit): Far-End MOOS Count: Far-End FRMR: Far-End DISC: Timeout: Software Initiated Link Down: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Level 2 I-frames retransmitted: Level 2 Reset (SABM): Invalid Frame Count: Far-End SABM(E)/DM: Protocol Error Detected: Local Busy Out: Firmware Initiated Link Down: LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS 1/1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-286 8 status link 1 PI LINK STATUS Link Number: 1 Link Status: in-service Destination: TIE-DS1 Port: 1B0123 Dest Status: in-service/active Trk/Mem: 02/04 ERROR COUNTERS Hardware Device Check (receive): Hardware Device Check (transmit): Far-End MOOS Count: Far-End FRMR: Far-End DISC: Timeout: oftware Initiated Link Down: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Level 2 I-frames retransmitted: Level 2 Reset (SABM): Invalid Frame Count: Far-End SABM(E)/DM: Protocol Error Detected: Local Busy Out: Firmware Initiated Link Down: 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS 1/ status link 1 PI LINK STATUS Link Number: 1 Link Status: in-service Destination: PDMODULE Dest Status: in-service/active Port: 1C0303 Ext: 4002 ERROR COUNTERS Hardware Device Check (receive): Hardware Device Check (transmit): Far-End MOOS Count: Far-End FRMR: Far-End DISC: Timeout: Software Initiated Link Down: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Level 2 I-frames retransmitted: Level 2 Reset (SABM): Invalid Frame Count: Far-End SABM(E)/DM: Protocol Error Detected: Local Busy Out: Firmware Initiated Link Down: LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS 1/ 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-287 8 status link 1 PI LINK STATUS Link Number: 1 Link Status: in-service Destination: TDMODULE Dest Status: in-service/active Port: 1C0303 Ext: 4002 ERROR COUNTERS Hardware Device Check (receive): Hardware Device Check (transmit): Far-End MOOS Count: Far-End FRMR: Far-End DISC: Timeout: oftware Initiated Link Down: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Level 2 I-frames retransmitted: Level 2 Reset (SABM): Invalid Frame Count: Far-End SABM(E)/DM: Protocol Error Detected: Local Busy Out: Firmware Initiated Link Down: 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS 1/ Field descriptions Link Number Processor Interface link number (1-8). Link Status Valid link states: — in-service — PI link is up and providing service. — maintenance busy — system technician busies out the PI link. — disconnected — PI link is down. Check the Hardware Error Log for more information. Destination Character string identifying the link destination type. Valid types are: “ISDN-LNK”, “ISDN-TRK”, “TIE-DS1”, “PDMODULE”, “TDMODULE”, and “EIA LINK”. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-288 8 Dest Status The status of the link destination. Valid states are: "in-service", "in-service/idle", "in-service/active", and "out-of-service", "manual OOS", "standby", "awaiting call", "disconnected", "out-of-service-NE", and "out-of-service-FE". Port The destination port, this port is logically connected to the Processor Interface. Destination Information Field One of the following is present depending on the type of link destination. — Sig Grp — The signaling group number, valid for "ISDN-LNK". — Trk/Mem — The trunk group/member, valid for "ISDN-TRK" and "TIE-DS1". — Ext — The data module extension, valid for "PDMODULE" and "TDMODULE". The following fields represent counter values read from the Packet Interface board. These counters do not initialize on board insertion. To get a reliable readout, the clear link command should be issued for read counters. Field descriptions Hardware Device Check (receive) When 40 to 80 seconds transpire without received link traffic, the timeout counter increments. This condition indicates that the link is down on the far end system. The SABM (Set Asynchronous Balance Mode) count also increments. Hardware Device Check (transmit) When 40 to 80 seconds transpire without received link traffic, the timeout counter increments. This condition indicates possible PI faults. The link is down and the SABM count increases. If the link is down at the near end and the far end, this counter increments along with the Hardware Device Check (receive) counter. Far-End MOOS Count Number of times that the switch attempts to restart the link and the Far-End responds with the link status “manual-out- of-service.” This condition occurs on ISDN-PRI Nonfacility Associated Signaling (NFAS) with D-channel backup. When this occurs, contact the Network and ask them to release the link. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status link Page 8-289 8 Far-End FRMR Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Far-End DISC Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Timeout Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Software Initiated Link Down Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Level 2 I-frames retransmitted Number of retransmitted frames in the LAPD (Link Access Procedure D) or X.25 layer 2. In general, this measures link quality. This count, which could indicate a very noisy link or synchronization problem, iincrements normally if a Hot Start PEI executes locally. Level 2 Reset (SABM) Number of X.25 SABMs or LAPD SABMs that are transmitted. SABMs to establish links. Every time this count increments a link establishment attempt fails. If the link is active and the count is not zero (after the clear link link-no command clears it) this condition indicates that the link goes down in that interval. Check the Hardware Error Log for additional information. Invalid Frame Count Number of received, invalid frames. This count measures link quality and could indicate a very noisy link or a synchronization problem. This might increment normally if a Hot Start PEI executes locally. If an administration error exists, this counter can increment with the Level 2 Reset counter. This counter may increment by message retransmissions. Far-End SABM(E)/DM Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Protocol Error Detected Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status pms-link Page 8-290 8 Local Busy Out Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Firmware Initiated Link Down Informational only. No action is necessary. It is one of eight counters that tells the link’s down history since the last clear link command. Please consult SCI-BD or PROTOCOL errors to determine the cause. LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS Local/remote processor channel pairs. Each pair consists of a processor channel on the local machine and a processor channel on the remote machine that is connected in the communication session. NOTE: For “ISDN-LNK” links, no correlation between the local and remote processor channels exists. Therefore, only the local processor channel is shown (the remote processor channel is blank). status pms-link This command displays the status of the property management system interface link. If the link is up, whether or not a data base swap is taking place between the switch and the property management system (PMS), is displayed. If the link is down, the number of times the switch has tried to set up the link is displayed. A PMS is a standalone computer system that can be integrated with the switch to enhance the service capability for a hotel/motel. For general information on PMS links, see the description of the ‘‘busyout pms-link’’. Action/ Object status pms-link Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions print Report sent to printer init inads craft cust browse none none Examples: status pms-link status pms-link print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status pri-endpoint Page 8-291 8 Output The following example shows the output from the status pms-link command. status pms-link PMS LINK STATUS Physical Link State: Protocol State: Number of Retries: Maintenance Busy? down down 3 no Field descriptions Physical Link State Up, down, or extension not administered; link is considered administered only if an extension is given in the System Hospitality form. Protocol State up, down, or blank if not administered. Number of Retries Number of times the switch has tried to set up the link (only displayed when the link is down; range 1-999) Maintenance Busy yes or no (technician has or has not busied out the link), blank if PMS link not administered. status pri-endpoint This command displays internal software state information for diagnosis and can help locate facilities with which a PRI endpoint is communicating. Status information for each of the B-channels making up the PRI endpoint display in addition to some overall PRI endpoint information. Action/ Object status pri-endpoint Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions extension PRI endpoint extension to be displayed (see dial-plan). none none print Report sent to printer init inads craft nms browse Examples: status pri-endpoint 25012 status pri-endpoint 77868 status pri-endpoint 66078 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status pri-endpoint Page 8-292 8 Output The following example shows the output for the status pri-endpoint 22501 command and assumes the following: ■ PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 20, circuit 1 to 6. ■ The ports 1 to 3 of the specified PRI endpoint are connected on an active call to ports 13 to 15 of board in location 1B19 (cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 19). ■ Ports 4 and 5 of the specified PRI endpoint are idle. ■ Port 6 of the specified PRI endpoint is out of service, and background maintenance testing is being performed on the port. NOTE: A PRI endpoint can initiate and receive a call on any one or more of the B-channels making up the PRI endpoint. status pri-endpoint 22501 page 1 of 1 PRI-ENDPOINT STATUS Extension: 22501 Signaling Group ID: 3 Originating Auto Restoration? n Port 01B2001 01B2002 01B2003 01B2004 01B2005 01B2006 Service State in-service/active in-service/active in-service/active in-service/idle in-service/idle out-of-service-NE Width: 6 B-Channels Active: 3 B-Channels Idle: 2 Test In Progress n n n n n y Connected Port 01B1913 01B1914 01B1915 Command Successfully Completed Note that the line listing of each B-channel’s status may continue onto the next page. The user is prompted to press the NxtPg key to continue the display. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status processor-channel Page 8-293 8 Field descriptions Extension PRI endpoint extension Width Administered number of B-channels associated with the specified PRI endpoint Signaling Group ID ID number of the signaling group that handles the signaling for the ports in the specified PRI endpoint Originating Auto Restoration Administered option for the auto restore feature (restores calls originated from this PRI endpoint in the case of network failure): y = restoration option enabled n = restoration option disabled B-Channels Active The number of B-channels active on a call B-Channels Idle The number of B-channels in the in-service/idle state Port Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for each of the B-channels making up the PRI endpoint. Service State Service state of the B-channels: in-service/active, in-service/idle, out-of-service-NE, out-of-service-FE, maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, and maint-FE/idle. NE (Near End) and FE (Far End) refer to which “end” of the B-channel has placed the facility in the current state. NE refers to the switch and FE refers to the PRI terminal adapter (or any device that terminates the D-channel signaling on the facility). Test In Progress Whether or not there is any current maintenance testing on the port. Connected Port Connected port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for each of the B-channels active on a call. status processor-channel This command displays the status of the specified processor channel and the values of its various counters. A processor channel is 1 of 64 logical channels associated with an SCI link. Each processor channel terminates in the switch processing element with a session. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status processor-channel Page 8-294 8 Action/ Object status processorchannel Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions channel number Processor channel number (1-64). none none print Report sent to printer init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse Examples: status processor-channel 1 status processor-channel 10 status processor-channel 64 status processor-channel 64 print Output The following example shows the output from the status processor-channels 1 command. status processor-channels 1 PROCESSOR CHANNEL STATUS Channel Number: Channel Status: Reset Count: Message Buffer Number: Link Number: Retransmission Count: 1 6: In data transfer state 3 1 4 5 Field descriptions Channel Number The processor channel number 1-64. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status signaling-group Page 8-295 8 Channel Status State the channel is in: 1. Channel is not administered. 2. Channel is administered but not used. 3. Channel is in a state entering “wait session accept” (WSA). 4. Channel is in a state waiting for a “session accept” message from the far end. 5. Channel is waiting for action. 6. Channel is in data transfer state (channel up and running). 7. Channel is in resynchronization state. 8. Channel is waiting for acknowledge of disconnect message. 9. ISDN-PRI Channel is currently down. 10. ISDN-PRI Channel is in the data transfer state (that is, channel is up and running). Reset Count Number of times reset has been issued for this channel Message Buffer Number Number of message buffers currently used for communication on this channel. Link Number Physical SCI link (i1-8) associated with the channel Retransmission Count Number of times that message retransmission has occurred status signaling-group This command displays the state, type, port location, and state of the Primary and Secondary D-channels within the group. A signaling group is a collection of B-channels signaled for by a designated single D-channel or set of D-channels over an ISDN-PRI. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status signalinggroup group identifier Administered group identifier number (1-8) none none print Report sent to printer init inads craft cust browse Examples: status signaling-group 1 status signaling-group 2 print Output The following output example shows the output from the status signaling-group 1 command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status signaling-group Page 8-296 8 status signaling-group 1 Page 1 of 1 SPE A STATUS SIGNALING-GROUP Group ID: 1 Type: facility associated signaling Group State: in-service Primary D-Channel Link: 1 Port: 01C1924 Level 3 State: in-service Secondary D-Channel Link: Port: Level 3 State: Field descriptions Group ID: Numerical ID of the signaling group (1-8) Type: facility associated signaling: all members are on a single DS-1 facility. Facility associated signaling groups support only the simplex D-channel configuration. non-facility associated signaling: members can be carried by multiple DS-1 facilities. The DS-1 facility is identified across the ISDN-PRI using an explicit facility identifier. In a simplex configuration one D-channel is used to signal for B-channel members, while in a duplex configuration two D-channels are used to signal for B-channel members (one channel is active and the other is used as a backup to the active channel). Group State: in-service: one of the D-channels signaling for the group is in service out-of-service: neither D-channel in the group is in service NOTE: If there is no D-channel backup and the primary D-channel is out-of-service, then the signaling group is in an out-of-service state. Link: Link transporting the D-channel Port: Address of the port transporting either the primary or secondary D-channel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status sp-link Page 8-297 8 State of the primary or secondary D-channels: Level 3 State: in-service: a D-channel is “in-service” when it is in the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2 carrying normal call-control signaling at layer 3. standby: a D-channel is “standby” when it is in the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2, and not carrying any layer 3 call-control messages on logical link 0,0. wait: a D-channel is in a “wait” state when an attempt has been made by one side of the interface to establish layer 3 peer communications as part of the process of going to the “in-service” state, which is transitional in nature. Only when the ISDN SERVICE message is sent over the interface, and the far end of the interface responds with a SERVICE ACKnowledge message is the D-channel placed in the “in-service” state. maintenance-busy: a D-channel is “maintenance-busy” when it is not in the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2. This state is entered automatically when an active D-channel is declared failed. A D-channel that has been placed in the “maintenance-busy” state may be placed in the “out-of-service” state without system technician intervention. manual-out-of-service: a D-channel is “manual-out-of-service” when system technician intervention has caused it to be placed in the TEI-assigned state at layer 2. System Technician intervention is required to retrieve a D-channel from this state. out-of-service: a D-channel is “out-of-service” when it is in the TEI-assigned state at layer 2, but is periodically requested by layer 3 to attempt to establish the link. no-link: no link is administered for the D-channel status sp-link This displays a page of output summarizing the operational status of the system printer link: its link state, number of retries, and whether the link is maintenance busy. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status sp-link print Report sent to printer init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none Examples: status sp-link status sp-link print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status station Page 8-298 8 Output The following example shows the output for the status sp-link command. status sp-link SPE A SYSTEM PRINTER LINK STATUS Link State: up Number of Retries: Maintenance Busy? no Field descriptions Link State: Operational mode of the link: up: the link is administered and a call is setup between the switch and the system printer. down: the link is administered, but a call is not setup between the switch and the system printer. extension not administered: the link (no system printer extension) is not administered Number of Retries: Number of times the switch has tried to set up the link since a request to set up the link was received (1-999); if more than 999 retries have occurred, 999 still displays. (This field displays only if the Link State: field is down.) Maintenance Busy? Whether any maintenance testing is being performed on the system printer link: yes and no: system printer link is administered blank: system printer link is not administered. status station This command displays the internal software state information for diagnosis and to help locate the facilities to which the station is communicating. Action/ Object status station Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions extension Station extension (per dial-plan) none none print Report sent to printer init inads craft cust browse Examples: status station 10020 status station 83277 status station 83277 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status station Page 8-299 8 Output The following example shows the output for the status station 1002 command. status station 1002 GENERAL STATUS Type: Extension: Port: Call Parked? Ring Cut Off Act? CF Destination Ext: Message Waiting: Connected Ports: 7405D 1002 01C0702 no no ACD STATUS Agent Logged In Service State: Maintenance Busy? SAC Activated? User Cntrl Restr: Group Cntrl Restr: in-service/on-hook no no none none HOSPITALITY STATUS Work Mode AWU Call At: User DND: not activated Group DND: not activated Room Status: non-guest room On ACD Call? no Field descriptions Type Administered station type Extension Station or attendant extension Port Port location: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Call Park Whether the station has a call parked (yes or no) Ring Cut Off Activated Whether ring cut off is activated (yes or no) CF Destination Ext Call forwarding destination extension, if any. Message Waiting Whether there is a message waiting for the station. "AP-SPE", "AUDIX", "PMS" or blank if no messages are waiting. Connected Ports Port locations of the facilities to which the station is connected: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Agent Logged In Displays (underneath) the hunt groups (up to 3) that the agent is logged into On ACD Call? Whether the agent is on an ACD call currently (yes or no). Work Mode Work mode of each hunt group that an agent is logged into DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status synchronization Page 8-300 8 Service State In service/on-hook, in service/off-hook, out of service, or disconnected. Maintenance Busy State Whether maintenance is testing the object (yes or no) SAC Activated Whether send all calls is activated (yes or no) User Cntrl Restr One or two of the following: none, total, stat-stat, outward or terminate. Group Cntrl Restr One or two of the following: none, total, stat-stat, outward or terminate. AWU Call at Time that Automatic Wakeup Call is scheduled User DND Status of the do not disturb feature. Group DND Status of the group do not disturb feature. Room Status Whether a room is occupied or not (non-guest room, vacant, or occupied). status synchronization This command displays the location of the DS1 or tone-clock circuit pack that is used for an on-line synchronization reference. The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. The subsystem is made up of: TDM bus clock, DS1 trunk board, maintenance and administration software resident in the SPE. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status synchronization print Report sent to printer init inads craft cust browse none none Examples: status synchronization status synchronization print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-301 8 Output The following example shows the output for the status synchronization command. status synchronization SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS Stratum Level:4 Maintenance Name: TONE-BD Switching Capability: Enabled Excessive Reference Switching: No Physical Location: 01A Field descriptions Stratum Level Synchronization stratum level (3 or 4) Maintenance Name: Either TONE-BD, DS1-BD, or STRAT-3. Physical Location Board location of the selected DS1 or tone-clock circuit pack (cabinet-carrier-slot for a DS1; cabinet-carrier for a tone-clock) Switching Capability Whether the on-line reference for synchronization can be switched (Enabled or Disabled) Excessive Reference Switching High-level description of how many times the synchronization reference has been switched. If excessive reference switching is taking place (sync error 1793 is at threshold), this field displays Yes; otherwise No displays. status system This command displays the status, mode, and operational attributes of the SPE(s), TDM and Packet busses, tone-clock circuit pack(s), expansion interface links (exp-links), and emergency transfer switch of single or all cabinets in the system. ! CAUTION: The purpose of this command is to provide general information about the cabinet status. This information may not display correctly when the cabinet is in a transient period. In this case, wait for 1 minute and enter the command again. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-302 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status system cabinet 1st-cabinet: PPN 2nd-cabinet: 1st EPN 3rd-cabinet: 2nd EPN1 all-cabinets: 3-pg. output - 1 for each cabinet 2 init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none Examples: status system 1st-cabinet status system 2nd-cabinet status system 3rd-cabinet status system all-cabinets 1. For PPN, and 1st and 2nd EPNs, one page of output displays. 2. The status displayed for a cabinet is always related to that cabinet except in the case of status for EPNs and the SPE attributes. SPE attributes always refer to PPN status regardless of which cabinet is being displayed. Output The following example shows the output from the status system all-cabinets command. status system all-cabinets Page 1 of 3 SPE B SYSTEM STATUS CABINET 1 SPE MODE 1A busyout/not-refreshed 1B active TDM 1A 1B SERVICE STATE in in EMERGENCY TRANSFER 1A 1B CONTROL CHANNEL y n SELECT SWITCH auto-off auto-off SELECT SWITCH auto auto DEDICATED TONES n y SPE ALARMS MAJOR MINOR n y n n PKT 1 TONE/ CLOCK 1A 1B SERVICE STATE in in SERVICE BUS ALARMS STATE MAJOR MINOR in n n SERVICE EXP-LINK STATE 01A01-02A01 out 01B01-02B02 in 01A02-03A01 in 01B02-03B02 in SYSTEM TONE standby active BUS OPEN BUS FAULTS LEADS 0 0 CABINET MODE TYPE down SCC active active standby Field descriptions SPE SYSTEM CLOCK standby active Switch Process Element (SPE) identifier: 1A or 1B DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-303 8 MODE SPE modes are different for simplex systems than for duplicated systems. See SPE Modes section that follows. SELECT SWITCH SPE select switch position: ■ auto: the switch is in the middle position and automatically switches SPE depending upon conditions ■ spe-a: spe-a position ■ spe-b: spe-b position ■ always appears for the 1A and 1B SPE in a simplex system. In a system with High or Critical Reliability, blank implies a hardware problem with the Duplication Interface circuit pack. PE ALARMS MAJOR Number of Major alarms associated with the SPE complex that affect the fault severity level of this SPE. If the system is simplex system, then the 1B SPE always shows blank. SPE ALARMS MINOR Number of Minor alarms associated with the SPE complex that affect the fault severity level of this SPE. If the system is simplex system, then the 1B SPE always shows blank. TONE/CLOCK Location of the tone-clock circuit pack. Valid locations are 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B. SERVICE STATE SYSTEM CLOCK ■ in: Tone-Clock is installed and is in-service ■ out: Tone-Clock failed certain maintenance tests and has been removed from service ■ In simplex systems there is no B-carrier Tone-Clock, and this field displays blank. Shows which Tone-Clock supplies the system clock for the cabinet displayed: ■ active: Tone-Clock active and supplying system clock ■ standby: Tone-Clock is standby and ready to supply the system clock for this cabinet if the active clock fails. ■ down: Tone-Clock failed some maintenance activity and cannot supply the system clock for this cabinet. ■ unavail: EPN is currently down ■ If simplex, then the 1B Tone-Clock for the PPN displays blank; if no EPN, then both the 1A and 1B Tone-Clock for this EPN display blank. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-304 8 SYSTEM TONE Shows which Tone-Clock circuit pack supplies the system tones for the cabinet being displayed. ■ active: Tone-Clock active and supplying system tones ■ standby: Tone-Clock is standby and ready to supply the system tones for this cabinet if the active clock fails. ■ down: Tone-Clock failed some maintenance activity and cannot supply the system tones for this cabinet. ■ unavail: EPN is currently down ■ If simplex, then the 1B Tone-Clock for the PPN displays blank. If the system does not have an EPN, then both the 1A and 1B Tone-Clock for this EPN display blank. TDM The TDM Bus identifier (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B) SERVICE STATE Operational state of the TDM Bus circuit pack: ■ in: TDM Bus installed and is in-service ■ out: TDM Bus failed certain maintenance tests and has been removed from service CONTROL CHANNEL Whether the control channel is on this TDM Bus (y or n) DEDICATED TONES Whether the dedicated tones are on this TDM Bus (y or n) PKT Packet Bus identifier (same as the cabinet number: 1, 2, or 3). If the system is running on a X75XE cabinet, all the PKT fields are blank and the following message displays: S75XE does not support Packet Refer to Packet Bus Maintenance descriptions for more information. SERVICE STATE The operational state of the Packet Buses: ■ in: Packet Bus in-service and operating normally. ■ out: Packet Bus failed certain maintenance tests and has been removed from service. ■ reconfig: Maintenance/Test circuit pack has swapped one or more signal leads because of lead faults detected during testing (High or Critical Reliability only). ■ open lds: Maintenance/Test circuit pack cannot correct all of the Packet Bus faults. There are open leads, but the Packet Bus is still at least partly functional (High or Critical Reliability System only). ■ unavail: EPN is currently down. ■ System does not have the Packet Bus feature. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-305 8 BUS ALARMS-MAJOR Whether Major alarms exist for packet bus components (y or n) BUS ALARMS-MINOR Whether Minor alarms exist for packet bus components (y or n) BUS FAULTS Number of faulty bus leads (defined as shorted to another lead, stuck at some value, or an open lead: 0 - 24). This field may take on any integer between 0 and 24. This field displays blank if: OPEN BUS LEADS EMERGENCY TRANSFER ■ Maintenance/Test circuit pack not present ■ Packet Bus port of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been taken out-of-service ■ System does not have the Packet Bus feature Number of open bus leads between the Maintenance/Test circuit pack and bus terminator (0 - 24). This could mean physical damage to the backplane or its connectors or a missing bus terminator. This field displays blank if: ■ Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not present ■ Packet Bus port of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been taken out-of-service ■ System does not have the Packet Bus feature. Location of the Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack containing the Emergency Transfer Select Switch (1A and 1B for the PPN, and 2A or 3A for the EPNs) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-306 8 SELECT SWITCH EXP-LINK SERVICE STATE Emergency Transfer Switch position on the Processor(s) or the EPN maintenance circuit pack and the state of Emergency Transfer in the cabinet display: ■ on: If this is a Simplex PPN or an EPN, then designated analog phones in this cabinet are cut through to CO trunk lines only in an emergency situation. In a High or Critical Reliability System, the Emergency Transfer Switches on both SPEs in the PPN must be in the on position before Emergency Transfer is invoked for the PPN. ■ off: Regardless of Simplex or Duplex, PPN, or EPN, Emergency Transfer is off and cannot be invoked. The switch should only be in this state when a service technician is on sight. ■ auto-on: The switch is in the or auto position, however, because of a serious system fault, system software has invoked Emergency Transfer. ■ auto-off: Switch in the auto position; because system has no serious faults, system software has not invoked Emergency Transfer ■ unavail: EPN is down ■ If the system is Simplex, then the 1B Emergency Transfer indication for the PPN displays a blank. If the system does not have an EPN, then both the 1A and 1B Emergency Transfer indications for the EPN displays a blank. Expansion Links that originate from this cabinet and the locations of the two Expansion Interface circuit packs that make up the link. If the Expansion Link does not exist in the system then a dash (-) displays. ■ Expansion Link identifiers for the PPN or Cabinet 1: 1A01-2A01, 1B01-2B02, 1A02-3A01, 1B02-3B02 ■ Expansion Link identifiers for the first EPN or Cabinet 2: 1A01-2A01, 1B01-2B02, 2A02-3A02, 2B03-3B03 ■ Expansion Link identifiers for the second EPN or Cabinet 3: 1A02-3A01, 1B02-3B02, 2A02-3A02, 2B03-3B03 Operational state of the Expansion Interface Link: ■ in: Expansion Interface Link installed and is in-service ■ out: Expansion Interface Link failed certain maintenance tests and has been removed from service ■ Expansion Interface Link does not exist DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-307 8 MODE CABINET TYPE ■ active: Expansion Interface Link is in-service and providing the active connectivity between the two cabinets. ■ standby: Expansion Interface Link is in-service and ready to provide connectivity between the two cabinets should the active link fail. ■ down: Expansion Interface Link is out-of-service and cannot provide connectivity between the two cabinets. ■ Expansion Interface Link does not exist ■ MCC: Medium Carrier Cabinet (up to 5 carriers, simplex or duplex as a PPN) ■ SCC: Single Carrier Cabinet (up to 4 carriers, simplex or duplex as a PPN) ■ EMCC: Enhanced Medium Carrier Cabinet (up to 5 carriers, can only be a simplex or duplex PPN cabinet) ■ ESCC: Enhanced Medium Carrier Cabinet (up to 4 carriers, can only be a simplex or duplex PPN cabinet) ■ MICRO: Micro or wall-mounted cabinet (always exists alone as an A carrier in a simplex PPN) SPE Modes Simplex SPE Modes active 1A SPE in a simplex system is always the active SPE blank No 1B SPE in a simplex system Duplex Active SPE Modes active This SPE is the active SPE. active/ override-on This the active SPE; however, it was forced active through a reset system interchange health-override command. This is the active SPE; however, the SPE select switches do not allow this to become the standby SPE. Duplex Standby SPE Modes Standby Mode selected standby SPE is held reset, memory shadowed from the active SPE, and ready to take over as the active SPE. Busyout Modes busyout/idle SPE busied out and there is no current maintenance activity. The active SPE can be either active or selected. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-308 8 busyout/entering SPE busied out and in the process of restarting the switch software on this SPE. After the switch software finishes its initialization, the standby SPE is available for maintenance functions on the standby SPE. busyout/testing SPE busied out, however, the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is currently in the process of executing a test command. busyout/ not-refreshed SPE busied out, however, the busyout spe-standby command was executed at a time when the standby memory was not refreshed. The standby SPE is not able to perform any maintenance or SAT-requested activities until a successful refresh spe-standby command is executed. busyout/ list-config SPE busied out, however, the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is currently executing a list configuration command. busyout/status SPE busied out, however, the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is currently in the process of executing a status card-mem command. Maintenance Modes1 maint/init SPE in maintenance mode (system restarted within the last 10 minutes). During this time, the standby SPE is not placed into standby mode just in case a core dump is being written to the tape or memory card on the standby SPE. maint/idle SPE in maintenance mode, but no current maintenance activity. The active SPE can be either active or selected. maint/entering SPE currently restarting the switch software on this SPE. After the switch software on this SPE finishes its initialization, the standby SPE is available to perform maintenance functions. maint/testing SPE in maintenance mode executing a test command. maint/ not-refreshed SPE in maintenance mode executing a destructive background maintenance test that has temporarily left the standby memory not refreshed. After the current test finishes, background maintenance refreshes the standby SPE. maint/not-tested SPE in maintenance mode because previously the active SPE had been selected with the SPE select switches. Since the active SPE was not selected, the standby has not been tested to ensure the standby can enter standby mode. Once the standby is tested successfully, the standby returns to standby mode. maint/list-config SPE in maintenance mode and currently executing a list configuration command. maint/save~trans SPE in maintenance mode and is currently executing a save translation command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status system Page 8-309 8 maint/ save~announce SPE in maintenance mode and currently executing a save announcement command. maint/status SPE in maintenance mode and currently executing a status card-mem command. maint/patching SPE in maintenance mode and currently applying a software patch to the standby SPE memory. maint/periodic SPE in maintenance mode and currently performing periodic background maintenance (performed every two hours if some component of the standby SPE is alarmed). maint/scheduled SPE in maintenance mode and currently performing daily scheduled background maintenance. maint/analysis SPE in maintenance mode and currently performing background maintenance testing in response to a reported trouble by some component in the active or standby SPE complex that relates to the standby SPE. maint/upgrade SPE in maintenance mode and currently performing a software upgrade. Down Modes2 down/bad_upgrade SPE in down mode (software upgrade attempt failed). The standby SPE remains in down mode until a successful software upgrade is performed. down/idle SPE in down mode, however, no maintenance activity is currently taking place. The active SPE could be either active or selected. down/entering SPE in down mode, but is currently trying to restart the switch software on this SPE. As soon as the switch software on this SPE finishes its initialization, the standby SPE is ready to perform background or SAT requested maintenance activity. down/mismatch_ soft SPE in down mode because the software vintage in flash memory of the standby SPE does not match the vintage in the active SPE. The standby SPE remains in down mode until a successful software upgrade is performed. down/testing SPE in down mode attempting to execute a test command. down/ not-refreshed SPE in down mode executing a destructive background maintenance test that has temporarily left the standby memory not refreshed. After the current test finishes, background maintenance refreshes the standby SPE. down/analysis SPE in down mode and currently performing background maintenance testing to determine if the problem has been corrected. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status trunk Page 8-310 8 1. 2. Maintenance modes occur when the standby SPE is taken out of standby mode to perform a maintenance or SAT requested function. Unlike the busyout and down modes, being in maintenance mode implies this SPE can be returned to standby mode when the requested activity is completed, assuming there are no faults in the standby SPE complex. The active SPE could be either active or selected when the standby SPE is in one of the Maintenance modes. The standby SPE is placed in down mode when a fault occurs in the standby SPE complex that would prevent that SPE from performing system functions. Down mode is always associated with STBY-SPE alarms and errors. The active SPE could be either active or selected when the standby SPE is in one of the Down modes. status trunk This command displays internal software state information for diagnosis and can help locate facilities to which the trunk is communicating. If a trunk group number is entered without a member number, a list showing the status for each member in the specified group displays. If a both the trunk group and member numbers are entered, the status for only the specified member is displays. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status trunk group Administered group number (1 - 99). If group number entered without a member number, a list showing the status of each member in the group displays. none none member Administered member number within a trunk group (1 - 99) init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse print Report sent to printer. Examples: status trunk 78 status trunk 80 status trunk 78/1 status trunk 80/2 status trunk 80/2 print Output Group/member The following example shows the output for the status trunk 78/1 (trunk group/member) command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status trunk Page 8-311 8 status trunk 78/1 TRUNK STATUS Trunk Group/Member: 078/001 Port: 01C1505 Signaling Group ID: Connected Ports: Service State: in-service/idle Maintenance Busy? no CA-TSC State: Field descriptions (group/member) Trunk Group/Member Trunk group number/group member number (1-99/1-99) Port Port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Signaling Group ID If trunk is ISDN, then this field displays the number of the ISDN Signaling Group to which this group belongs; otherwise, the field is blank. Connected Ports Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the trunk Service State Trunk service state: in-service/active, in-service/idle, out-of-service-NE, out-of-service-FE, maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, and maint-FE/idle. NE (Near End; switch) and FE (Far End; PRI terminal adapter or any device that terminates the D-channel signaling) refer to which “end” of the B-channel has placed the facility in the current state. Maintenance Busy Whether any maintenance testing is being performed CA-TSC State State of the temporary signaling connection (used to pass call information over PRI signaling links) Group only The following example shows the output from the status trunk 78 (trunk group only) command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status tsc-administered Page 8-312 8 status trunk 78 TRUNK GROUP STATUS Member Port Service State 078/001 078/002 01C1505 in-service/idle 01C1506 in-service/idle Mtce Connected Ports Busy no no Field descriptions Member Trunk group number/group member number (1-99/1-99). Port Port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Service State Trunk service state: in-service/active, in-service/idle, out-of-service-NE, out-of-service-FE, maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, and maint-FE/idle. NE (Near End; switch) and FE (Far End; PRI terminal adapter or any device that terminates the D-channel signaling) refer to which “end” of the B-channel has placed the facility in the current state. Mtce Busy Whether any maintenance testing is being performed Connected Ports Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the trunk status tsc-administered The status tsc-administered command displays the operational status of TSC’s administered for an administered signaling group. The status represents the state of the TSC according to switched services. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status tscadministered signaling group Administered signaling group number none none #/tsc index Number associated with each TSC in a signaling group init inads craft print Report sent to printer Examples: status tsc-administered 1 status tsc-administered 1/1 status tsc-administered 1/2 print DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status tti Page 8-313 8 Output The following example shows the output for the status tsc-administered 1/1 command. status tsc-administered 1/1 ADMINISTERED NON-CALL-ASSOCIATED TSC STATUS TSC Index 1 TSC State inactive Establish as-needed Enabled yes Congested no Field descriptions TSC Index The administered TSC index (1-64). TSC State State of the administered TSC: Establish ■ inactive: the administered TSC is not functioning (for example, D-channel out-of-service, or disabled) ■ active: indicates that the administered TSC is up and user information can be exchanged end-to-end. ■ pending-inactive: shows that the TSC is being released. ■ pending-active: the TSC is about to come up The switch responsible for the origination of the administered TSC: ■ as-needed: TSC is established on an as needed basis ■ permanent: TSC is permanently established Enabled Indicates if the administered TSC’s have been enabled ("yes" or "no"). Congested Administered TSC congestion history (whether or not the network can handle the receipt of USER INFORMATION messages for the administered TSC): ■ yes: TSC is congested ■ no: TSC is not congested ■ clear: TSC congestion was cleared during its active period status tti This command displays the status (active/not active) of the tti background maintenance task, and, if it is active, it displays whether tti ports are being generated or removed, the number of tti-supported boards that have processed, DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status tti Page 8-314 8 and the number of tti-supported boards that have not yet been processed. The display also includes the elapsed time since the background maintenance task started. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults status tti print Report sent to the printer init inads craft cust nms browse none Examples: status tti status tti print Feature Interactions TTI background maintenance task is activated by enabling the TTI system parameter on the System-parameters Features form. Output The following example shows the output for the status tti command. status tti Page 1 of 1 TTI STATUS TTI Background Task State: TTI State: # of Boards Completed: # of Boards Left to Process: Percent Complete: Elapsed Time since Task Started: generating tti ports voice 30 120 25 0:15 Field descriptions TTI Background Task State: TTI State: State of the tti background maintenance task: ■ generating tti ports: ■ removing tti ports: ■ suspended: ■ not active: ■ completed - all ports translated: the last execution of the background task completed normally ■ completed - some ports not translated: the task completed due to resource exhaustion with some ports left untranslated The tti state: displays off (TTI feature not enabled for the system), or if enabled, then the field displays what kind of tti ports are being generated or removed (voice, data). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids status tti Page 8-315 8 # of Boards Completed: Number of TTI-supported boards that have been processed by the background maintenance task: ■ completed: board has either had all its unadministered ports translated as TTI ports or its TTI ports have been removed and are now unadministered ports. This depends on whether the TTI background task is generating or removing tti ports. # of Boards Left to Process: Number of TTI-supported boards that have not yet been processed by the background maintenance task. Percent Complete: Ratio of the of number of boards completed compared to the number of boards left to process. Elapsed Time since Task Started: Elapsed time since the TTI background task was started. If the task is “not active”, then this field is blank. If the task is “completed” it indicates the length of time (hh:mm format) it took to complete the task. If the task is “suspended”, then it displays the elapsed time at the point the task was suspended. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test access-endpoint Page 8-316 8 test access-endpoint This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on all port circuits that are associated with the specified access endpoint extension. Action/ Object test accessendpoint Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults extension Access endpoint extension (# of digits determined by dial-plan) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft nms Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number clear schedule Feature Interactions none How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Examples: test access-endpoint 25012 test access-endpoint 45002 sh test access-endpoint 45892 l test access-endpoint 24389 sh r 4 test access-endpoint 34899 l r 6 test access-endpoint 34912 l r 5 schedule test access-endpoint 93483 r 2 test access-endpoint 10022 c test access-endpoint 92349 schedule 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test alarms Page 8-317 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test access-endpoint 22502 command, and assumes the access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6. The responses are displayed on a port-by-port and test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test access-endpoint 22502 short page 1 of 1 TEST RESULTS Port 01C1101 01C1102 01C1103 01C1104 01C1105 01C1106 Maintenance Name WAE-PORT WAE-PORT WAE-PORT WAE-PORT WAE-PORT WAE-PORT Alt. Name Test No. Result 22502 36 PASS 22502 36 PASS 22502 36 PASS 22502 36 PASS 22502 36 PASS 22502 36 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object (wideband access endpoint = WAE-PORT; single port access endpoint = TIE-DS1) Alt. Name The extension number of the access endpoint Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test alarms This command allows automatic testing all of the hardware associated with the active alarms in the alarm log. This command provides an initial query form to help the user narrow the selection of alarmed objects. After submitting the query form, the system tests the hardware associated with the selected alarm log entries. The results display in standard test output and status information display on the message line as the command progresses. Several alarms may be logged against a single maintenance object, each alarm representing a different problem. Even if there are multiple entries in the alarm DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test alarms Page 8-318 8 log for a single object, the test alarms command only tests each physical object once. Action/ Object test alarms Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults autopage New screen displays when current screen fills1 failures Only the failures (hardware, aborts, conflicts, EPN-down) display init inads craft nms Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 step Allows “stepping” to the next or previous alarm (current alarm not tested)2 short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.3 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.4 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test alarms test alarms step failures test alarms long clear auto-page test alarms long failures 1. If auto-page option is not specified, the screen does not refresh once filled, and testing stops until the user presses PAGE (continue) or CANCEL (halts testing). 2. Press CANCEL to abort the command, ENTER to test the currently displayed alarm, NEXT ALARM (function key) to move to the next alarm, and PREV ALARM (function key) to move to the previous alarm without testing the currently displayed alarm. If this option is entered, then the NEXT ALARM (function key) or PREV ALARM (function key) can be pressed at any time during the command, even during test results. If NEXT ALARM or PREV ALARM is pressed during a test, the test is aborted, testing of the current alarm stops, and the next or previous alarm displays. If the first alarm is displayed and PREV ALARM is pressed, then the last alarm is displayed. If the last alarm is currently displayed and the NEXT ALARM is requested, then the first alarm displays. The only way to terminate this command is to press CANCEL. 3. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNINGS BELOW. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. 4. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test alarms Page 8-319 8 ! WARNING: Executing a clear with short option may not clear all alarms, even if all tests pass. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. Feature Interactions With the enhancement of multiple maintenance users, there may be a possibility of two users attempting to test the same physical hardware (for example, one using the test alarms command and another using the test board command). If this command attempts to test a board that is currently being tested by another user, a error message displays. Options form After entering the test alarms command, you are presented with an options form for alarm selection. test alarms repeat 1 HARDWARE TEST ALARM QUERY The following options control which alarms will be tested. ALARM TYPES Major? y_ REPORT PERIOD Interval: m_ Minor? y_ Warning? y_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one, if any, of the following ) Cabinet: __ Port Network: __ Board Number: ____ Port: ______ Category: ________ Extension: _____ Trunk ( group/member ): __/__ DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test alarms Page 8-320 8 Field descriptions (Hardware Test Alarm Query) Alarm Types The type of alarm to be tested: put y or n in the field(s) to selects one or a combination of alarms. Interval Tests alarms for the last hour (h), last day (d), last week (w) or all (a) [default]. From Test alarm from the specified time specified (mm/dd/hh/mm). If no from date is entered, then no checking is done and the alarms active since a month prior to the current time are reported. To Test alarms associated with records to the specified time specified (mm/dd/hh/mm). If no to date is entered, any alarm active after the from date is selected. Equipment Type The technician can choose between five different equipment types. If there is no input to any of these fields, the system defaults to all the equipment. The user can select one of the following fields: ■ Cabinet: tests alarms associated with a particular cabinet (1-3). ■ Port Network: tests all alarms associated with a particular port network (1-3). ■ Board Number: tests all alarms associated with a particular circuit pack (PCss, default cabinet = 1). ■ Port: tests all alarms associated with a particular port on a circuit pack (PCsspp, default cabinet = 1). ■ Category: Alarms for a particular equipment category ■ Extension: Alarms associated with an extension number ■ Trunk (group/member): tests all alarms associated with a particular trunk group or trunk group member, XX/YY, where the group identifier tests all alarms associated with a trunk group (XX/__), and the group identifier and member identifier are both entered to test all alarms associated with a specific trunk group member (XX/YY). Output The following example shows the output from the test alarms command (query form left empty by pressing ENTER). The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test alarms Page 8-321 8 test alarms Page Port Maintenance On Alt Name Brd? Name 01C03 UDS1-BD Port ALARM ENTRY Alarm Svc Type State n Maintenance Name Ack? 1 2 WARNING 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 press CANCEL to quit -- Alarm Count 03/06/16:48 1/4 TEST RESULTS Alt. Name Test No. Result 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD 01C03 UDS1-BD Testing completed for this object. Date Alarmed 1 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Error Code BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD press NEXT PAGE to continue Field descriptions When encountering errors in preparing a particular object to be tested (not inserted, contention, etc.), an error message display in the TEST RESULTS section of the output form. ALARM ENTRY section Port Port location of alarmed object (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit); same identifier as alarm log Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object On Board Fault detected is on the associated circuit pack (y) or off board (o). Alt Name Terminal extension numbers or trunk group numbers Alarm Type Major, Minor, or Warning Service State Current service state of the station and trunk ports: RDY (ready for service), OUT (out of service), or IN (in service). Ack Whether alarm has been acknowledged by the first and second OSS telephone numbers, respectively. Date Alarmed Day, hour, and minute of alarm. Alarm Count Count of the current alarm entry versus the total number of alarms to be tested. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test analog-testcall Page 8-322 8 Test results section Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Fail, Pass, Abort, or No Board. If this field has conflict, another user may be testing this hardware. If this field has epn-down, the epn is inaccessible at this time. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test analog-testcall The test analog-testcall command performs facility diagnostic tests on an entire trunk group, an individual trunk group member, an individual trunk port or on all trunks on a board, depending on the options entered. The type of test call, the far-end test line number, and the various other parameters must be administered on the trunk group form before executing the command. Normally, the user should only invoke the full or supervision test. The other options are provided primarily for testing when setting up an ATMS schedule. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test analog-testcall Page 8-323 8 Action/ Object test analogtestcall Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults full Executes the most comprehensive test call available using the administered test set type. init inads craft cust Test sequence = long; repeat = 1 no supervision no-selftest no-returnloss no-st-or-rl repeat number schedule Executes a supervision-only test call (approx. 10 sec.) and confirms the presence of the test set at the far end. Executes the “full” test (skips any self-test sequences), saving about 20 seconds on the type 105 transmission test and has no effect on type 100 or 102 transmission tests. Executes the “full” test (skips any return loss sequences), saving about 20 seconds on the type 105 transmission test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 transmission tests. Executes the “full” test (skips all self test and return loss sequences), saving about 40 seconds on the type 105 transmission test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 transmission tests. How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Examples: test analog-testcall trunk 78 f test analog-testcall trunk 78 f schedule test analog-testcall trunk 80/1 s r 2 test analog-testcall trunk 80/1 s r 2 schedule test analog-testcall trunk 78/2 no-selftest r 10 test analog-testcall trunk 78/2 no-selftest r 10 schedule test analog-testcall trunk 78 r 4 test analog-testcall trunk 78 r 4 schedule test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-st-or-rl r 4 test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-st-or-rl r 4 schedule test analog-testcall board 2a15 test analog-testcall board 2a15 schedule test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-return-loss test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-return-loss schedule te an t 80 te an t 80 schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions See below DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test analog-testcall Page 8-324 8 Feature Interactions ■ Additional data is available after running a test. See the ‘‘list measurements’’ command with the test-call option for details on how to access the additional data. ■ If the trunk is in use by call processing, the test aborts. ■ If the trunk is in use by maintenance, the test queues and runs when the current maintenance activity finishes. Output The following example shows the output for the test analog-testcall trunk 78 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test analog-testcall trunk 78 TEST RESULTS Port 01C1505 01C1507 Maintenance Name CO-TRK CO-TRK Alt. Name Test No. Result 78/1 845 PASS 78/2 845 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance object that is being tested. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested. Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains trunk xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) Test No. The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Fail, Abort, Disabled, No Board, or Extra Board. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test board Page 8-325 8 test board This command performs a set of hardware diagnostic tests on a specified circuit pack. The system first validates that the board exists at the specified location. Then, based on the logical type of board (for example, Analog, Digital, Hybrid, and others), a series of tests perform diagnostics on the board and then returns results of the test along with any possible error codes. Some of the tests can be disabled by administering forms on the administration terminal. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test board location Physical location of the board PCSS short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft nms Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test board 01c11 l test board 01c11 l schedule test board 02e15 sh r 2 test board 01c08 test board 02d12 r 4 test board 02d12 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions Destructive long tests on a Switch Node Interface (SNI) board are not allowed unless the board has first been busied out. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test board Page 8-326 8 Output The following example shows the output from the test board 1c07 short command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test board 01C07 short TEST RESULTS Port 01C07 01C07 01C0703 01C0703 01C0703 01C0701 01C0701 01C0701 01C0702 01C0702 01C0702 Maintenance Name ANL-BD ANL-BD ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE Alt. Name Test No. Result 51 PASS 52 PASS 35 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS 35 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS 35 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Fail, Abort, Disabled, No Board, or Extra Board. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test card-mem Page 8-327 8 test card-mem This command executes a sequence of tests on the memory card in the specified switch processor element. The test sequences in order for both long and short options are listed in the following table: Test Short Long 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) X X Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) X X Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) X X Memory Card Match Test (#697) X X Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) X X Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) X X Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) X Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) X Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014) X Flash Data Consistency Test (#421) X1 1. The “Flash Data Consistency Test” is not executed in simplex systems. These tests verify the sanity of the memory card device, the basic read/erase/write operations to the memory card, the integrity of the translation data stored in the memory card, the function of 12 volt power supply in TN777B NETCON circuit pack used for memory card erase/write operations, the translation capacity of the memory card, and the consistency of data stored in both memory cards in a High or Critical Reliability system. This command can also help troubleshoot the following hardware errors: CARD-MEM, 12V-PWR, CAP-MEM, and FL-DATA. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test card-mem Page 8-328 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test card-mem location Carrier location where memory card resides: High or Critical Reliability (a or b)1; duplicated (a, A, b, or B) init inads craft Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.2 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.3 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test card-mem test card-mem a l test card-mem b sh r 2 test card-mem a sch test card-mem a c 1. Carrier location required on command line 2. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 3. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” option clears all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. Feature Interactions The test card-mem long command invokes the Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test. This means that the save translation and save announcement commands are rejected while the write-to-memory-card operation is active. This test also DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test card-mem Page 8-329 8 invokes the Memory Card Capacity Test which determines whether the memory card is more than 98% full. This test is also invoked after the save translation command. In a High or Critical Reliability System, running test card-mem command for a memory card in the standby SPE means that the standby SPE is put into the maintenance mode and no SPE interchange is allowed through the reset system interchange command or scheduled SPE interchange. Output The following example shows the output from the test card-mem a long command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test card-mem a long SPE A TEST RESULTS Port 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A Maintenance Name 12V-PWR CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CAP-MEM FL-DATA Alt. Name Test No. Result 701 PASS 695 PASS 696 PASS 697 PASS 698 PASS 699 PASS 694 PASS 693 PASS 1014 PASS 421 PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit): cabinet 1, carrier is A (control carrier A in a simplex system) and either A or B (control carriers A and B in a duplex system). The slot and circuit fields in the port address for the 12V-PWR, CAP-MEM, and CARD-MEM maintenance objects are always blank. The port address for maintenance object FL-DATA is blank. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test card-mem Page 8-330 8 Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested: ■ CARD-MEM for the memory card ■ 12V-PWR for 12-volt power supply in TN777B NETCON board ■ CAP-MEM for memory card capacity ■ FL-DATA for the data consistency stored in memory cards (duplicated switch) Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Fail, or Abort Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test cdr-link Page 8-331 8 test cdr-link This command first validates that the Call Detail Recording (CDR) link has been administered and exists in the switch. Then individual diagnostic tests run on the link and return results of the test along with any possible error codes. For information on what a CDR link is and does, see the description in ‘‘status cdr-link’’ section of this manual. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test cdr-link link-id Link-id = primary or secondary short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test cdr-link primary l test cdr-link secondary sh r 2 test cdr-link primary test cdr-link secondary test cdr-link secondary c test cdr-link primary schedule 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following example shows the output for the test cdr-link primary command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test cdr-link Page 8-332 8 test cdr-link primary short TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name PRI-CDR Alt. Name Test No. Result 215 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Not applicable (always blank) Maintenance Name The type of MO being tested: primary cdr-link= PRI-CDR; secondary cdr-link = SEC-CDR Alt. Name Not applicable (always blank) Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test customer-alarm Page 8-333 8 test customer-alarm This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the leads of the Processor and EPN maintenance circuit packs, used for customer-provided alarms by closing the appropriate relay for 1 minute. Failure is verified by checking the customer alarm attached to the specified circuit pack. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test customer-alarm location Extension of the data module or data channel to be tested (per dial-plan) init inads craft See below short Runs test number 115 long Runs test number 115 (same as short test option) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test customer-alarm test customer-alarm schedule test customer-alarm 02 r 2 test customer-alarm 01b r 25 test customer-alarm 01b r 25 schedule test customer-alarm 2a test customer-alarm 2a sh test customer-alarm 01b l schedule test customer-alarm 3 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test data-module Page 8-334 8 Defaults The default cabinet is cabinet 1. The default carrier is carrier “a,” except for SPE duplex system PPNs. In this case the carrier has no default and either “a” or “b” must be entered. The default for the remaining parameter is a repeat of 1. Output The following example shows the output from the test customer-alarm 02a command. test customer-alarm 02A TEST RESULTS Port 02A Maintenance Name CUST-ALM Alt. Name Test No. Result 115 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field Definitions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) Maintenance Name The maintenance name (always CUST-ALM) Alt. Name Not applicable Test No. The test number (always 115) Result Test result: Pass, Abort, or Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test data-module This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a data module or data channel. Test results are determined by the interface to the digital switch-data line port, digital line port, or network control data channel. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test data-module Page 8-335 8 Action/ Object test data-module Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults extension Extension of the data module or data channel to be tested (per dial-plan) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft cust nms Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test data-module 30000 l test data-module 30000 test data-module 32000 sh r 2 test data-module 33000 l r 25 test data-module 33000 l r 25 schedule test data-module 30000 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test ds1-loop Page 8-336 8 Output The following example shows the output from the test data-module 300 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test data-module 300 TEST RESULTS Port 01C1103 Maintenance Name PDMODULE Alt. Name Test No. Result 17 PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field Definitions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Fail, Abort, No Board Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test ds1-loop This command validates that the board exists at the specified location and that the board is a TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 Interface board. Long-duration loopback tests execute for an extended period of time until manually terminated. Short-duration loopback tests return the result of the test to the screen after executing. The list measurements ds1 summary command can be used to monitor the status of a long-duration loopback/span test. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test ds1-loop Page 8-337 8 Action/ Object test ds1-loop Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults location Physical location of board (PcSS) cpe-loopbackjack-test-begin Long-duration loopback test setup through the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) Loopback Jack. Allows user to specify a loop-up code for the CPE loopback jack if it differs from the default (0x47F). The loop-up code is entered by specifying the number of bits in the loop-up code as well as the actual hexadecimal bit-pattern.1 init inads craft super-user other3 ds1/csuloopbac k-tests far-csu-loopback - test-begin Long-duration loopback test tsetup through the far-end Channel Service Unit (CSU) one-way-spantest-begin Long-duration one-way span test end-loopback/ span-test Terminates long-duration one-way span and loopback testing inject-single-biterror Single bit error sent within an active framed 3-in-24 test pattern used in long-duration loopback and span testing ds1/csuloopback-tests Sequentially executes the following loopback tests: DS1 Board LoopBack, CSU Module Equipment LoopBack, and CSU Module Repeater LoopBack.2 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test ds1-loop 01c08 test ds1-loop 1-3c03 cpe-loopback-jack test ds1-loop 1-3c03 cpe test ds1-loop 10c03 end test ds1-loop 02d12 fa test ds1-loop 02d12 inj 1. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards only. The test aborts if the board has not been taken out of service with the busyout command. 2. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards 3. Logins with Maintain Switch Circuit Packs permissions enabled. Feature Interactions ■ Loopback or span tests are not allowed on DS1 boards unless the board has been busied out. ■ Only one of the CPE Loopback Jack, far-end CSU, one-way span, or DS1/CSU loopback tests may be active at any given time on a DS1 span. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test duplication-interface Page 8-338 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test ds1-loop 1c07 command, and assumes that the board in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7 is a TN767E DS1 board. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test ds1-loop 01C07 ds1/csu-loopback-tests TEST RESULTS Port 01C07 01C07 01C07 Maintenance Name DS1-BD DS1-BD DS1-BD Alt. Name Test No. Result 1209 PASS 1210 PASS 1211 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, or Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test duplication-interface This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the indicated duplication interface circuit pack, under the control of the active SPE that tests the SHDW-CIR, SPE-SELECT, and DUPINT maintenance objects. ■ SHDW-CIR is associated with that portion of the duplication interface circuit pack that handles memory shadowing from the active to the standby SPE ■ SPE-SELECT is associated with the SPE Select switch located on the front of the circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test duplication-interface Page 8-339 8 ■ Action/ Object test duplicationinterface DUPINT is associated with the duplication interface circuit packs other functions, including SPE-to-SPE communication, SAT connection, and environmental maintenance leads. Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults location SPE location of the duplication interface circuit pack (1a, 1b, a, or b) init inads craft short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. Text sequence = short; repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (includes a destructive test) repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions Duplicationinterface failures may prevent SPE switching. Examples: test duplication-interface a test duplication-interface b sh test duplication-interface a l r 25 test duplication-interface 1b l r 25 schedule test duplication-interface 1a l c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test eda-external-device-alrm Page 8-340 8 Output The following example shows the output from the test duplication-interface 1A command, where A is the active carrier in an SPE duplex system. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test duplication-interface a long SPE A TEST RESULTS Port 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A Maintenance Name SHDW-CIR SHDW-CIR SHDW-CIR SPE-SELE DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT DUPINT Alt. Name Test No. Result 285 PASS 283 PASS 284 PASS 278 PASS 315 PASS 275 PASS 276 PASS 280 PASS 271 PASS 277 PASS 272 PASS 274 PASS 273 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field Definitions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier); always 01A or 01B Maintenance Name Always SHDW-CIR, SPE-SELE, or DUPINT. Alt. Name Not applicable Test No. The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, or Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test eda-external-device-alrm This command performs a hardware diagnostic test on all or specific port’s administered external device alarms. The test PASSES if the external device is not reporting an external device alarm and FAILS if the external device is DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test eda-external-device-alrm Page 8-341 8 reporting an external device alarm. If you are entering a specific port, it must already be administered as an external device alarm port on a maintenance or an analog line port carrier board. Action/Objec t test eda-externaldevice-alrm Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults physical location In addition to the word physical, you must enter the physical location (PCSSpp for an administered external device alarm analog line port).1 init inads craft Repeat =1 all Tests all administered external device alarm ports on analog line and maintenance boards. repeat How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.2 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.3 Feature Interactions none Examples: test eda-external-device-alrm all test eda-external-device-alrm all schedule test eda-external-device-alrm physical 1major r 10 test eda-external-device-alrm physical 2c1101 c 1. 2. 3. Since the “maintenance board” alarm connections connect to control carrier boards that are in unnumbered slots, the standard port format cannot be used to designate these alarm connections. The special ports Pmajor and Pminor are used designate the major or minor maintenance board alarm connection for cabinet P. The major/minor designation specifies the pair of wires, not the alarm level associated with the connection (the “major” port can be administered as a major, minor or warning alarm and the “minor” port can be administered as a major, minor or warning alarm). If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test eda-external-device-alrm Page 8-342 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test external-device-alarm all command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test eda-external-device-alrm all TEST RESULTS Port 03major 03A2102 01major 01minor 01c1201 03A2101 01c1202 03minor 04major Maintenance Name Alt. Name Test No. Result EXT-DEV EXT_DEV EXT-DEV EXT-DEV EXT-DEV EXT_DEV EXT-DEV EXT-DEV EXT-DEV CMS1 CMS2 UPS1 UPS1 UPS1 CC temp Audix1 Audix2 unknown 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 Error Code PASS FAIL PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS FAIL FAIL Command successfully completed Field definitions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object, in this case, the administered (descriptive) name of the external device alarm. Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, or Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test environment Page 8-343 8 test environment This command performs hardware diagnostic tests of the environment monitoring and control, and emergency transfer functions of both Processor Port Network (PPN) cabinets and Expansion Port Network (EPN) cabinets. Circuit packs involved are the Processor circuit pack (PPN simplex systems), the Duplication Interface circuit pack (PPN duplex systems), and EPN Maintenance circuit packs. The tone/clock circuit pack is involved in tests of the ring generator. There are 8 Maintenance Objects involved in this testing: 1. DC-POWER tests power availability, battery charging and temperature functions in SCC cabinets only. 2. EMG-XFER tests emergency transfer status 3. EXT-DEV tests external (AUDIX, for example) alarm status for both the SCC and MCC cabinet systems. 4. POWER tests battery backup 5. AC-POWER tests AC power availability 6. CARR_POW tests carrier DC power availability. The long test of CARR_ POW includes a power recycle test for non-Processor Element (SPE) carriers and is destructive. There is one instance of CARR_POW for each carrier in the cabinet. 7. CABINET tests air flow and temperature 8. RING_GEN tests ringing voltage are tested in MCC cabinets only. NOTE: The processor carrier and its duplicate if present as well as any EPN control carrier or an SCC carrier is not recycled. All port carriers are recycled, and service is interrupted for each port carrier. If a carrier containing an active EI is recycled, communications with that cabinet is disrupted. If a carrier containing an active tone-clock board is recycled, all ports in the cabinet or port network are service disrupted. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test environment Page 8-344 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test environment location Cabinet (1-3); 1 = PPN, 2-3 = optional EPN. short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Cabinet = 1; test sequence = short; repeat =1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test environment test environment schedule test environment 1 sh test environment 1 l r 25 test environment 01 l r 25 test environment 01 l r 25 schedule test environment 2 l c test environment 3 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions The long test recycles power in some specified cabinet on non-SPE and maintenance board carriers and is destructive. Specifically, the ’a’ carrier of PPNs and EPNs does not have power recycled. In PPNs containing duplicated SPEs the ’b’ carrier also does not have power recycled. All port carriers are recycled, and service is interrupted for each port carrier. If a carrier containing an active EI is recycled, communication with that cabinet is disrupted. If a carrier containing an active tone-clock board is recycled, all ports in the cabinet or port network are service disrupted. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test environment Page 8-345 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test environment 1 command to test a MCC/PPN cabinet. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test environment 1 TEST RESULTS Port 01 01 01A 01B 01C 01D 01E 01 01 01 01 Maintenance Name POWER AC-POWER CARR-POW CARR-POW CARR-POW CARR-POW CARR-POW EMG-XFER CABINET EXT-DEV RING-GEN Alt. Name Test No. Result 5 PASS 79 PASS 127 PASS 127 PASS 127 PASS 127 PASS 127 PASS 124 PASS 122 PASS 120 PASS 118 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier). For all but the CARR-POW maintenance object, only the cabinet value is displayed. For the CARR-POW maintenance object, both the cabinet and carrier values display. Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Not applicable Test No. The test being executed. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test hardware-group Page 8-346 8 The following example show the output for the test environment 2 command, where cabinet 2 is an SCC cabinet. test environment 2 TEST RESULTS Port 02 02 02 02 02 Maintenance Name DC-POWER EMG-XFER EXT-DEV RING-GEN RING-GEN Alt. Name Test No. Result 5 PASS 124 PASS 120 PASS 117 PASS 118 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed test hardware-group This command allows a user to perform a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the whole system, a carrier, cabinet, spe, or board. The tests vary according to the configuration of the system and the specified command options. This command runs a series of tests on all the hardware on the entire system, an individual carrier, cabinet, spe, or board. The tests vary depending on options chosen and board types. Each test exercises diagnostics on all the hardware in the specified hardware group and reports results of the test along with any possible error codes. Concurrent testing is done to enhance performance, therefore, test results display on the SAT in the order they are received. Consequently, test results of one maintenance object may be intermixed with test results of other maintenance objects. Because the tests for this command are not destructive, the tests performed on a particular maintenance object with either the short or the long option may not be the same as the corresponding demand tests. A hardware-group command executing in the foreground may be cancelled by either pressing the CANCEL key or by entering the cancel hardware-group command at a different SAT. However, if the technician wants to cancel a test hardware-group command running in the background, the cancel hardware-group command can be entered on any SAT. A canceled test hardware-group command can be resumed at the point it left off by entering the resume hardware-group command. Restarts are not allowed for test hardware-group commands entered with either the all-ports option or the spe-interchange option. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test hardware-group Page 8-347 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test hardware-group system System-wide test of all hardware-groups init inads carrier location Carrier address: cabinet (1-3), carrier (A-E)1 Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 cabinet location Cabinet address (1-3)2 board location Board address in PCSS format3 print Output sent to printer schedule Command validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.4 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test hardware-group system test hardware-group system print test hardware-group carrier 1a test hardware-group carrier 1a schedule test hardware-group cabinet 2 test hardware-group board 01c07 test hardware-group board 01c07 schedule test hardware-group spe test hardware-group spe print test hardware-group spe schedule 1. The type of carrier may be port, or processor. In the case of a port carrier, all universal port and tone-clock boards (see reference 4) and its affiliated MOs residing in the specified carrier are tested. For a processor carrier, all SPE complex and tone-clock boards and its affiliated MOs are tested. 2. All PN and PNC related MOs plus cabinet specific MOs, including maintenance boards and environment (ring generator, battery, power, emergency transfer, external alarms, fans, and temperature) are tested if they reside in the specified’cabinet location’. 3. All MOs on the specified ’board location’ including ports are tested. 4. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions test hardware-group Only one test hardware-group command can be active at any given time. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test hardware-group Page 8-348 8 TTI If the test hardware-group command is issued with the all-ports option when the TTI background task is active, some unadministered ports may not be tested. In addition, active alarms on line ports may be cleared by this task. The status tti command can be used to determine the state of the TTI background task. Add Station If a add station command is entered for an untranslated port at the same time as it is being tested as part of the test hardware-group command with the all-ports option, the error message, Object in use; please try later displays, and the request fails. Trunk administration If an attempt is made to add an unadministered trunk port to a trunk group at the same time as it is being tested as part of the test hardware-group with the all-ports option, the error message, Object in use; please try later displays, and the request fails. Save translation If the test hardware-group with the all-ports option while a translation save operation is active, some unadministered ports may not be tested. All other hardware are tested normally. Hardware alarms When a hardware error is detected by the test hardware-group command, the hardware goes through the standard escalation strategy. Alarms are raised on hardware that manifest ’hard’ errors. This alarming strategy is the same, regardless of whether the ports are translated or not. System interaction The performance of test hardware-group is affected by call processing traffic, administration activity, choice of the short or long option, whether the all-ports option is chosen, whether the spe-interchange option is chosen, and other demand maintenance activity. Scheduled and periodic maintenance While executing the test hardware-group command, all scheduled background maintenance, periodic background maintenance, and data audits activity is suspended until the command completes. When the test hardware-group command is canceled or completes, all suspended periodic, scheduled, and data audits background maintenance activity are restarted where it left off. Setting the Test Parameters Once the user has entered the desired action (test hardware-group) and the object (board, carrier, etc.), then an options form displays. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test hardware-group Page 8-349 8 test hardware-group system Page 1 of 1 TEST HARDWARE-GROUP SELECTIONS Select the desired options for the specified test. Test sequence: short Test repetition: repeat count: 1 Output OPTIONS: Auto-page? n Background? n Failures? n HARDWARE OPTIONS: All-ports? n SPE-interchange? n Field descriptions Test sequence Short (nondestructive) or long (more comprehensive, still nondestructive) test sequence Test Repetition repeat - (1-99) each test is executed the number of times specified on each physical object. continuously -all tests on all the specified hardware run until cancelled by either pressing the CANCEL key or by executing the cancel hardware-group command. count: Repeat test sequence value (1-99). If the Test sequence field is set to continuously, then this field disappears from the screen; if this field is set to repeat, then the field appears. Auto-page? Provides a new screen every time the SAT screen fills with test results. (n / y). The screen does not scroll to accommodate new results; instead a new screen is provided after the current screen fills up. If the auto-page option is not selected, the SAT screen does not refresh once it is filled, and testing stops until the user enters the PAGE key to continue or the CANCEL key to cancel the testing. This option is not allowed if the background option is selected. Background? Run the command in the background, thus freeing the SAT (n / y). The error results are tabulated in the error log, but no results display on the terminal. This option cannot be used if either the continuously or the auto-page options are selected. Failures? Only failing test results display (n / y). Test results that pass or abort are not displayed. The failures option has no effect if entered with the background option. All-ports? Tests all customer translated line and trunk ports as well as a set of untranslated line and trunk ports for boards listed in Table 8-7 (n / y). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test hardware-group Page 8-350 8 Table 8-7. Board Number Test of ‘all ports’ option for the following boards: Description Board Number Description TN413 Digital Line TN746 16 port Analog Line TN417 Auxiliary Trunk TN747B Central Office Trunk TN429 Direct Inward/ Outward Dialing Trunk TN753 Direct-Inward-Dial Trunk TN436 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk TN754 Digital Line TN437 Tie Trunk TN760C Tie Trunk TN438 Central Office Trunk TN762B Hybrid Line TN439 Tie Trunk TN763C Auxiliary Trunk TN447 Central Office Trunk TN767 DS1 Interface TN458 Tie Trunk TN769 Analog Line with Message Waiting TN459 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk TN784 Digital Line TN464C Universal DS1 TN785 16 port Analog Line TN465 Central Office Trunk TN2135 Italian 16 Port Analog Line TN467 8 port Analog line TN2136 Digital Line TN468 16 port Analog line TN2138 International Central Office Trunk TN479 16 port Analog line TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk TN497 Tie Trunk TN2140 Tie Trunk TN556 ISDNBRI Line TN2144 Analog Line TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk TN726B Data Line TN2147 Central Office Trunk TN735 MET Line TN2149 Analog Line TN742 8 port Analog Line TN2180 16 port Analog line Continued on next page SPE-interchange? Allow for planned interchange of duplicated SPEs and subsequent testing of both the active and standby SPEs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test hardware-group Page 8-351 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test hardware-group system command and assumes that the board in port network 1, carrier c, slot 7 is an analog board with three administered ports and test sequence repeat = 3. Responses to this command running in the foreground display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test hardware-group system TEST RESULTS Port 01C07 01C07 01C0703 01C0702 01C0703 01C0701 01C0702 01C0703 01C0702 01C0701 01C0701 Maintenance Name ANL-BD ANL-BD ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE Alt. Name Test No. Result 51 PASS 52 PASS 35 PASS 35 PASS 48 PASS 35 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS 36 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS Error Code Testing system, 11070 of 12300 (90%) MOs tested for repetition 1 Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects. If the Object is The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Test No. The test being executed Result Test result: No Board, Extra Bd, Disabled, or Skipped Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. The following example shows the output for the test hardware-group system with the background option selected. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test inads-link Page 8-352 8 test hardware-group system Command started in background mode test inads-link This command attempts to make a call over the inads port on the maintenance board to verify the INADS alarm notification process. In the default settings, the system test the link to the first OSS telephone number. If there is an alarm pending to be reported or the call is in progress or up, then the test aborts. If the alarm origination to the OSS telephone number to be tested is disabled, then the test generates an informative error and the test continues. The test waits 2 minutes before dialing the call to allow the remote maintenance technician to logoff, thus freeing the line. A local SAT user entering the test inads-link command does not need to log off for the system to place the call, but the two-minute delay still exists. Once the call is answered by INADS, the system sends a message with a test alarm type. INADS acknowledges receipt of the message and creates a trouble ticket. The trouble ticket is closed immediately and has a “INADS LINK TEST” message entered in the description field. If an alarm is raised while the test call is up, the system does not send an alarm message over the existing link. The normal retry mechanism is followed, which means an attempt to make a call to INADS to report the error takes place 7 minutes later. An INADS trouble ticket is created only if the connection is successfully established and a message is sent to the system acknowledging that INADS received the system message. The Maintain Process Circuit Packs field must be set to yes on the inads and technician permission forms. This provides permissions to execute the test inads-link command. This field can be changed by executing a change permission login command. No alarms are raised on the system and attendant alarm and acknowledgment lamp states are not changed as a result of the test inads-link command. The test does not run during periodic or scheduled maintenance. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test inads-link 1 First OSS telephone number 2 Second OSS telephone number init inads craft nms 1st OSS number Examples: test inads-link test inads-link 1 test inads-link 2 Feature Interactions none DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test inads-link Page 8-353 8 Output Command successfully completed Test passed Command failed Link was up, there was an active alarm that the switch needs to report, or there was a problem with the call. NOTE: An entry is made in the error log describing why the inads-link test failed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test interface Page 8-354 8 test interface This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the specified processor interface circuit pack. In addition to testing the PI board, the tests examine the protocol and link interface that is transmitted over the board. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test interface location Location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface (position 1 = first processor interface in the carrier, 2 = second) init inads craft nms Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test interface 01a1 l test interface 01b2 s r 2 test interface 01b2 s r 2 schedule test interface b1 l r 25 test interface a2 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test isdn-testcall Page 8-355 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test interface a1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test interface a1 TEST RESULTS Port 01A1 01A1 Maintenance Name PI-SCI PI-BD Alt. Name Test No. Result 231 PASS 52 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address: cabinet-carrier-slot (the carrier associated with the particular processor interface board) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, or Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test isdn-testcall This command starts an outgoing, asynchronous ISDN-PRI test call in the asynchronous method from a specified trunk. If the test results are PASS, the test call is started. A test result of ABORT means that a resource wasn’t available, for example, B-channel or a Maintenance/Test circuit pack. A test result of FAIL denotes that the outgoing ISDN-PRI test call was not established. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test isdn-testcall Page 8-356 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test isdn-testcall group number The administered group number associated with each trunk group member number The administered member number identifying a particular trunk within a trunk group. init inads craft duration = 8.4 or 9.6 sec minute number Duration of the test call in minutes (1-120) schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test isdn-testcall 80/1 test isdn-testcall 80/1 schedule test isdn-testcall 78/2 minutes 10 test isdn-testcall 78/3 minutes 100 schedule 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions ■ Use the status isdn-testcall command for details on how to access the additional data available after running the test. ■ Only one ISDN trunk can be tested per port network at a time. Once testing is completed, another ISDN trunk can be tested in that port network. ■ The maximum number of asynchronous outgoing test calls running depends upon the number of Maintenance/Test circuit packs in the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test journal-printer Page 8-357 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test isdn-testcall 80/1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test isdn-testcall 77/1 SPE A TEST RESULTS Port 01B1501 Maintenance Name ISDN-TRK Alt. Name Test No. Result 077/001 258 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object being tested. Alt. Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object: trunk object xxx/yyy, where xxx = trunk group number, yyy = member number Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, or Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test journal-printer This command performs hardware diagnostics on the link between the switch and one of the specified journal printer links. There are two types of journal printer links: pms-log and wakeup-log. For general information on journal printer links, see the second paragraph in the “Description” section of the “busyout pms-link” manual pages. For information on what a journal printer is and does, see the second paragraph in the ‘‘Output’’ section of the ‘‘status journal-link’’ manual pages. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test journal-printer Page 8-358 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test journal-printer pms-log Tests the link to the pms logging printer (maintenance name = PMS-PRNT) init inads craft wakeup-log Tests the link to the wakeup logging printer (maintenance name = JNL-PRNT) Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test journal-printer pms-log l test journal-printer pms-log l schedule test journal-printer wakeup-log r 2 test journal-printer wakeup-log r 2 schedule test journ pm r 3 test journ pm r 3 schedule 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions The maintenance of a particular component on a link sometimes interferes with the maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may delay the recovery of a faulty component due to the maintenance test of a component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test led Page 8-359 8 technician needs to be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. Use of the busyout command causes the link to be torn down. If the link is already down, the busyout command stops periodic re-setup trys on the link. Output The following example shows the output for the test journal-printer pms-log command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test journal-printer pms-log short TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name JRNL-LINK Alt. Name Test No. Result 215 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Not applicable (always blank) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested: PMS-PRINT for testing the pms-log printer link JNL-PRNT for testing the wakeup-log printer link Alt. Name Not applicable (always blank) Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test led This command performs a test on all the LEDs in a specified cabinet. Once the cabinet is validated and the range of circuit packs determined, the test led command turns on all LEDs on the circuit packs contained in each carrier until all affected carriers are lit. Once all the LEDs are on, there is a 2-second pause, and then all the LEDs are turned off in the same order. Once all of the repeat cycles are completed, all affected LEDs are restored to the current status. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test led Page 8-360 8 On a duplex PPN, only the long option tests the leds in the standby SPE. When executing the test led long command, the standby Processor, Memory, and Packet Control circuit pack LEDs can take up to 20 seconds to light. The following LEDs are NOT lighted by the test led command: ■ SPE Select LEDs on the Duplication Interface Circuit Packs ■ Power Unit LEDs ■ Yellow (amber) LED on the tape drive Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test led all All LEDs in all carriers are tested cabinet number Cabinet number (each carrier tested sequentially) init inads craft short Simplex: short and long option are identical and turn on and off all leds in the specified port network. Duplex: short option does not affect the leds in the standby SPE carrier in the PPN. all; repeat = 1; test sequence = short in a duplex system long Simplex: short and long option are identical and turn on and off all leds in the specified port network. Duplex: long option does affects the leds in the standby SPE carrier in the PPN. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) Feature Interactions none Examples: test led test led all r 2 test led cabinet 1 test led c 1 test led 1 long Output If the command is successful, Command successfully completed displays. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test link Page 8-361 8 test link This command validates that a specified link is administered and then performs a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the link. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test link link-id Link number (1-8; assigned via the communication-interface links form) init inads craft short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. Test sequence = short; repeat =1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test link 1 test link 1 schedule test link 3 l test link 2 sh test link 2 r 2 test link 2 l c 1. 2. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test maintenance Page 8-362 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test link 1 long command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test link 1 long TEST RESULTS Port 01AXX01 01AXX01 01AXX01 01AXX01 Maintenance Name PI-LINK PI-LINK PI-LINK PI-LINK Alt. Name Test No. Result 182 PASS 183 PASS 234 PASS 233 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address on the Processor Interface board associated with the link-id being tested. Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test maintenance This command tests the EPN maintenance circuit pack in any Expansion Port Network control carrier. Specifying cabinets 2 - 3 allows testing of any connected EPN maintenance circuit packs. The test sequence checks the SAT interface, EI DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test maintenance Page 8-363 8 link, reset, and sanity functions on the EPN maintenance circuit pack. The long test resets the EPN maintenance circuit pack, causing the EPNSAT link to be dropped and is destructive. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test maintenance location Physical location of the maintenance circuit pack: (2-3) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test sequence = short; repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test maintenance 2 test maintenance 3 schedule test maintenance 2 sh test maintenance 2 l c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions The last test in the long test sequence on EPN maintenance circuit packs drops the EPNSAT link. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test maintenance Page 8-364 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test maintenance 2 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test maintenance 2 TEST RESULTS Port 02A 02A 02A 02A Maintenance Name MAINT MAINT MAINT MAINT Alt. Name Test No. Result 106 PASS 229 PASS 303 PASS 337 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that is being tested. For this maintenance object, only the cabinet and carrier values display. Maintenance Name The maintenance name (always MAINT) Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No. The test being executed Result The result of the individual test: Pass, Abort, Fail, Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test memory Page 8-365 8 test memory This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on any or all memory circuit packs in the specified carrier. Both short and the long test are nondestructive when testing memory. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test memory location Physical location of the memory circuit pack: cabinet number (optional, but always 1 if entered) and carrier letter (either a or b for duplex, a for simplex) init inads craft nms See below short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive test series (all nondestructive for this command). repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test memory test memory a test memory a schedule test memory 1a2 test memory b1 sh test memory b l r 25 test memory a l c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test modem-pool Page 8-366 8 Defaults The cabinet default is always 1. For SPE simplex systems, the default carrier is the “a” carrier; for SPE duplex systems, there is no default carrier. The defaults for the remaining parameters are short with a repeat of 1. Output The following example show the output for the test memory 1b command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test memory 1b TEST RESULTS Port 01B 01B Maintenance Name MEM-BD MEM-BD Alt. Name Test No. Result 87 PASS 631 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested is MEMORY. Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No. The test being executed Result The result of the test: Pass, Abort, or Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test modem-pool This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the specified modem pool group or an individual member of a specified group (Combined or Integrated). A Combined modem-pool group consists of pairs of Analog and Digital Line ports. One pair of Analog and Digital Line ports used for modem-pooling is called a conversion resource. An Integrated group consists of modem-pool circuit packs, each containing two conversion resources. Therefore, when a member number is specified for a Combined modem-pool group, one conversion resource is tested, and when a member number is specified for an Integrated modem-pool group, two conversion resources are tested. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test modem-pool Page 8-367 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test modem-pool group number The administered group number (1-5) member number The administered member number (1-32). A member is a pair of analog and digital line ports (two pair for the Integrated modem-pool). init inads craft Test Sequence = short; repeat = 1 short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test modem-pool 1 test modem-pool 1 schedule test modem-pool 1/3 l r 2 test modem-pool 1/3 l r 2 schedule test modem-pool 2 r 2 test modem-pool 2 l 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test modem-pool Page 8-368 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test modem-pool 1/3 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test modem-pool 1/3 short SPE B TEST RESULTS Port 01C0701 01C0701 Maintenance Name MODEM-PT MODEM-PT Alt. Name Test No. Result 98 PASS 99 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object (always MODEM-PT) Alt. Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test network-control Page 8-369 8 test network-control This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a specified network control circuit pack. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test network-control location Network control board carrier location in a High or Critical Reliability System (a or b). init inads craft short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. Cabinet 1, carrier a, test sequence repeat = 1. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test network-control test network-control a l test network-control b sh r 2 test network-control b l r 25 test network-control a test network-control a c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test network-control Page 8-370 8 Output The following example shows the output from the test network-control a command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test network-control a TEST RESULTS Port 01A 01AXX01 01AXX01 01AXX01 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A Maintenance Name DATA-BD DATA-CHL DATA-CHL DATA-CHL SW-CTL SW-CTL SW-CTL SW-CTL 12V-PWR CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM CARD-MEM Alt. Name Test No. Result 52 PASS 4001 109 PASS 4001 110 PASS 4001 111 PASS 95 PASS 92 PASS 94 PASS 324 PASS 701 PASS 695 PASS 696 PASS 697 PASS 698 PASS 699 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address: cabinet (always 1)-carrier-slot-circuit. For the DATA-BD, SW-CTL, 12V-PWR, and CARD-MEM maintenance objects, the slot and circuit fields of port address are blank. DATA-CHL (administered data channel) uses XX as the slot address and has a circuit number between 01 and 04. The carrier field has a value A for the control carrier A in a simplex system, and A or B for control carriers A and B in a duplex system. Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object: ■ DATA-BD for Network Control board ■ SW-CTL for Switch Control Archangel ■ DATA-CHL for administered data channel ■ 12V-PWR for 12 volt power supply unit on the Network Control board ■ CARD-MEM for flash memory card on Network Control board ■ 12V-PWR and CARD-MEM (shown only when the Network Control board is TN777B) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test network-control Page 8-371 8 Alt. Name Extension number of the DATA-CHL, if administered. For other maintenance objects, this field is not applicable and, therefore, empty. Test No The test being executed. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test packet-control Page 8-372 8 test packet-control This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the specified packet-control circuit pack. Action/ Object test packetcontrol Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults location Applies only to duplicated configurations: if simplex, parameter is not used and thus is not valid; if duplicated, “location” represents the carrier in which the packet-control resides (1A or 1B). init inads craft nms Simplex: location optional, cabinet=1, carrier A. short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions See below Duplex: cabinet=1, no default for the carrier. Examples: test packet-control test packet-control A test packet-control B test packet-control 1A test packet-control 1B test packet-control a short test packet-control a s repeat 5 test packet-control b s r 5 test packet-control b long clear test packet-control b l r 25 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pkt Page 8-373 8 Feature Interactions The reset packet-control test (#586) does not run on the active packet-control. This test is part of the standby packet-control test sequence, illustrated in the screen output section below. Output The following example is the screen output for the test packet-control 1B long command. Note that carrier B is the active carrier in this example. test packet-control 1B l TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name 01B 01B 01B PKT-CTRL PKT-CTRL PKT-CTRL Alt. Name Test No. 583 584 585 Result Error Code PASS PASS PASS Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object. Alt. Name Not applicable Test No. The test number run on the packet-control. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test pkt The test pkt runs a series of tests on the Packet bus of the specified PPN or EPN. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pkt Page 8-374 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test pkt port-network pn number The Packet bus to be tested: nn (1-3) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test pkt port-network 1 l test pkt port-network 2 sh r 2 test pkt port-network 2 sh schedule test pkt port-network 1 l r 25 test pkt port-network 2 test pkt port-network 1 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. Output The following example is the output for the test pkt port-network 1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pms-link Page 8-375 8 test pkt port-network 1 TEST RESULTS Port PN 01 PN 01 PN 01 Maintenance Name PKT-BUS PKT-BUS PKT-BUS Alt. Name Test No. Result 571 PASS 572 PASS 573 PASS Error Code Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port A port network number (1-3). Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested. Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No The test being executed. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test pms-link This command performs the specified property management system link tests on the specified pms link by checking to see if the link is accessible and then performing a reset on the link (long test only). For general information on PMS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pms-link Page 8-376 8 links, refer to the description of the ‘‘busyout pms-link’’ command. For information on what a PMS is and does, refer to the description of the ‘‘status pms-link’’ command. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test pms-link short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test pms-link sh r 5 test pms-link l test pms-link test pms-link c test pms-link c sch 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Feature Interactions The maintenance of a particular component on a link may interfere with the maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may delay the recovery of a faulty component due to the maintenance test of a component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the technician needs to be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The busyout command is used to do this and causes the link to be torn down. If the link is already down, the busyout command stops periodic re-setup tries on the link. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pms-link Page 8-377 8 Output The following example shows the output for the test pms-link long command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test pms-link long TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name PMS-LINK Alt. Name Test No. Result 214 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Always blank Maintenance Name Always PMS-LINK Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No The test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test port Page 8-378 8 test port This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an individual port circuit. In most cases, tests are performed on hardware connected to the port. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test port location PCSSpp short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test port 01c1101 l test port 01c1101 l schedule test port 02e1502 sh r 2 test port 02d1201 r 4 test port 01c1101 c 1. 2. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pri-endpoint Page 8-379 8 Output The following example is the output for the test port command and assumes that the port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7, circuit 1 is an analog port. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test port 01c0701 short TEST RESULTS Port 01C0701 01C0701 01C0701 Maintenance Name ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE Alt. Name Test No. Result 35 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object. Alt. Name The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. If the Object is a The field contains station trunk extension xxx/yyy (xxx = trunk group number and yyy = member number) P/xxx (xxx = private CO line group number) private CO line Test No Test being executed. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test pri-endpoint This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on all port circuits (B-channels) that are associated with the PRI endpoint extension. The test pri-endpoint command performs hardware diagnostic tests on all port circuits (B-channels) that are associated with the specified PRI endpoint. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pri-endpoint Page 8-380 8 Action/Objec t test pri-endpoint Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults extension PRI endpoint extension to be tested (must conform to dial-plan) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft nms Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test pri-endpoint 25012 test pri-endpoint 45002 sh test pri-endpoint 45892 l test pri-endpoint 24389 sh r 4 test pri-endpoint 34899 l r 6 test pri-endpoint 34912 l r 5 schedule test pri-endpoint 93483 r 2 test pri-endpoint 10022 c test pri-endpoint 92349 schedule 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following output example is for the test pri-endpoint 22501 command and assumes that the PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 20, circuits 1 to 3. The responses display on a port-by-port and test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test pri-endpoint Page 8-381 8 test pri-endpoint 22501 short page 1 of 1 TEST RESULTS Port 01B2001 01B2001 01B2001 01B2001 01B2002 01B2002 01B2002 01B2002 01B2003 01B2003 01B2003 01B2003 Maintenance Name PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL PE-BCHL Alt. Name 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 22501 Test No. Result 36 PASS 255 PASS 256 PASS 257 PASS 36 PASS 255 PASS 256 PASS 257 PASS 36 PASS 255 PASS 256 PASS 257 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance object that is being tested. Maintenance Name The maintenance object name for the PRI endpoint port is PE-BCHL. Alt. Name The specified extension number of the PRI endpoint. Test No The actual test being executed. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test processor Page 8-382 8 test processor This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a specified processor circuit pack. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test processor location Cabinet number (optional for simplex) and carrier letter (optional a for simplex; a or b for duplex). init inads craft See below short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test processor test processor schedule test processor a test processor 1a test processor b sh test processor a l c 1. 2. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Defaults For SPE simplex systems, the location is optional and defaults to cabinet 1, carrier a. For SPE duplex systems, the cabinet default is again cabinet 1, but there is no default for the carrier. Defaults for the remaining parameters are short with a repeat of 1. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test shadow-link Page 8-383 8 Output The following output example is for the test processor a command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test processor a SPE B TEST RESULTS Port 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A Maintenance Name PROCR PROCR PROCR PR-MAINT PR-MAINT PR-MAINT PR-MAINT PR-MAINT MEMORY MEMORY Alt. Name Test No. Result 77 PASS 80 PASS 82 PASS 102 ABORT 103 ABORT 106 PASS 228 PASS 229 ABORT 87 PASS 631 PASS Error Code 1018 1018 1018 Command successfully completed Field descriptions Port The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that is being tested. Maintenance Name Maintenance object being tested is MEMORY. Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No. Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test shadow-link This command performs hardware diagnostics for the shadow link between the two duplication-interface circuit packs. This command works only with High or Critical Reliability systems. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test shadow-link Page 8-384 8 Action/Objec t Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test shadow-link short | long Both the short and long test sequence execute only Test #318. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test shadow-link l test shadow-link sh r 2 test shadow-link sh r 2 schedule test shadow-link c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following output example is for the test shadow-link command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test shadow-link TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name SHDW-LNK Alt. Name Test No. Result 318 PASS Command Successfully Completed Error Code DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test shadow-link Page 8-385 8 Field descriptions Port The port address is always blank. Maintenance Name The maintenance name is always SHDW-LNK for this command. Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No The test number is always 318. Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test signaling-group Page 8-386 8 test signaling-group This command validates that the specified signaling group is administered and runs a series of diagnostic tests that return results of the test along with possible error codes. A signaling group is a collection of B-channels signaled for by a designated single D-channel or set of D-channels over an ISDN-PRI. Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test signaling-group group identifier The station extension (must conform to dial-plan) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test signaling-group 1 test signaling-group 1 repeat 10 test signaling-group 2 short test signaling-group 4 long test signaling-group 4 long clear test signaling-group 2 schedule 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test sp-link Page 8-387 8 Feature Interactions Additional data is available after running a test. See the status signaling-group command for how to access the additional data. Output The following output example is for the test signaling-group 1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test signaling-group 1 SPE A TEST RESULTS Port 1 1 1 Maintenance Name ISDN-SGR ISDN-SGR ISDN-SGR Alt. Name Test No. Result 636 PASS 639 PASS 637 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The signaling group number (1-8) of the signaling group that is being tested. Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested. Alt. Name Not Applicable. Test No Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test sp-link The test sp-link command validates that the system printer link is administered and runs a series of diagnostic tests that return results of the test along with possible error codes. The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer over which jobs can be printed. This link is created by administering the system printer extension and setting up a call to the system printer. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test sp-link Page 8-388 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions test sp-link short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. short none long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 Examples: test sp-link test sp-link sh test sp-link l test sp-link schedule test sp-link sh sch 1. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following output example is for the test sp-link command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test sp-link SPE A TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name SYS-PRNT SYS-PRNT Alt. Name Test No. Result 215 PASS 213 PASS Command Successfully Completed Error Code DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test spe-standby Page 8-389 8 Field descriptions Port Not applicable. Always blank. Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object. Alt. Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This field contains the extension when the object is a data module. Test No Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test spe-standby This command allows the technician to perform hardware diagnostic tests on the standby Switch Processing Element (SPE) in a duplex SPE system. This command tests all MOs in the standby MO. The STBY-SPE MO itself does not have any defined tests. Instead, tests are run on the following MOs when the test spe-standby command is run. MEMORY DUPINT PROCR FL-DATA SHDW-LNK DATA-BD PR-MAINT PI-BD SHDW-CIR DATA-CHL 12V-PWR PI-PT SPE_SELEC SW-CTL CARD-MEM PKT-CTRL Refer to these MOs for more details. This command is only for a High or Critical Reliability systems. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test spe-standby Page 8-390 8 Action/Object Qualifiers Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test spe-standby short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 Feature Interactions See below Examples: test spe-standby long test spe-standby l test spe-standby s r 2 test spe-standby c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. Feature Interactions Testing the standby SPE maintenance object makes the standby SPE unavailable to take over for the active SPE. Output The following output example for the test spe-standby command assumes that the standby SPE is located in carrier B. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test station Page 8-391 8 test spe-standby SPE A TEST RESULTS Port 01B 01B 01B 01B . . . Maintenance Name Alt. Name Test No. Result SHDW-CIR 285 SHDW-CIR 284 SPE-SELECT 278 DUPINT 315 . . . . . . Error Code PASS PASS PASS PASS . . . Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested. Alt. Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This field contains the extension when the object is a data module. Test No Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test station This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an individual port circuit assigned to that extension. The technician must specify the extension and a translation is automatically done to the physical port location. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test station Page 8-392 8 Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test station extension The station extension (must conform to dial-plan) short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft cust nms Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test station 81709 l test station 85136 s r 2 test station 85036 l r 25 test station 85036 l r 25 schedule test station 84297 r 4 test station 81709 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. SEE WARNING BELOW. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. ! WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass, it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. Output The following screen is an example of the output from the test station 81902 short command with the assumptions that port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7, circuit 1 is an analog port and extension 81902 is connected to that port. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test synchronization Page 8-393 8 test station 81902 short TEST RESULTS Port 01C0701 01C0701 01C0701 Maintenance Name ANL-LINE ANL-LINE ANL-LINE Alt. Name Test No. Result 35 PASS 48 PASS 36 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested. Alt. Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This field contains the extension when the object is a station. Test No Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test synchronization This command updates all the boards with the correct synchronization source and parameters. The system sends a downlink message to the tone clock, DS1, and Expansion Interface boards to place them in the correct synchronization configuration, providing error-free digital communication between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test synchronization Page 8-394 8 Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test synch short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedul e Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test synchronization r 3 test synchronization sh r 1 test synchronization sh r 1 schedule test synchronization l 1. 2. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data displayed for each test result. The following screen is an example of the output for the test synchronization short command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test synchronization Page 8-395 8 test synchronization short TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name SYNC Alt. Name Test No. Result 417 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Not applicable Maintenance Name Maintenance object name Alt. Name Not applicable Test No. Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test tdm Page 8-396 8 test tdm This command tests all the time slots on a bus associated with a PPN or an EPN. Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test tdm pn number nn = number of the port network to have its TDM bus tested. Both halves (“a” and “b”) of the TDM bus are tested. init inads craft Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test tdm port-network 1 l test tdm port-network 2 sh r 2 test tdm port-network 2 sh sch test tdm port-network 1 l r 25 test tdm port-network 2 test tdm port-network 1 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test tone-clock Page 8-397 8 Output The following screen is an example of the output for the test tdm port-network 1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test tdm port-network 1 TEST RESULTS Port PN 01A PN 01A PN 01A PN 01B PN 01B PN 01B Maintenance Name TDM-BUS TDM-BUS TDM-BUS TDM-BUS TDM-BUS TDM-BUS Alt. Name Test No. Result 294 PASS 296 PASS 297 PASS 294 PASS 296 PASS 297 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port For TDM-BUS maintenance object the port network number and the bus (A or B) is displayed. Maintenance Name Maintenance object name Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No Test being executed Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, Extra Bd. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test tone-clock The test tone/clock command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a technician-specified tone or clock circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test tone-clock Page 8-398 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test tone-clock location PCSS short Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. init inads craft long Option for a longer, more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. Test Sequence = short; Repeat = 1 repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test tone-clock 01a l test tone-clock 01b l schedule 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence is run only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. The following is the output for the test tone-clock 1a command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test trunk Page 8-399 8 test tone-clock 1a TEST RESULTS Port 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A 01A Maintenance Name TONE-BD TONE-BD TONE-PT TONE-PT TDM-CLK TDM-CLK TDM-CLK TDM-CLK TDM-CLK Alt. Name Test No. Result 46 PASS 52 PASS 40 PASS 41 PASS 148 PASS 149 PASS 150 PASS 151 PASS 574 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Maintenance Name Maintenance object name: TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK. Alt. Name Not applicable. Test No Test being executed Result Test result: PASS, ABORT, FAIL, NO BOARD, DISABLED, EXTRA BD. Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted. Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO. test trunk This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an entire trunk group or an individual trunk group member, depending on the options entered. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test trunk Page 8-400 8 Action/ Object test trunk Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults group number Administered group number (1-99) member number Administered number identifying a particular trunk within a trunk group (1-99). init inads craft cust Test Seq. = short; Repeat = 1 short Command executes a series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. long Command executes a more comprehensive and longer version of the both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests. repeat number How many times each test in the sequence is repeated (1-100) clear This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the alarm (if any) is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails.1 schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.2 Feature Interactions none Examples: test trunk 78 l test trunk 80/1 sh r 2 test trunk 78/2 l r 25 test trunk 78/2 l r 25 schedule test trunk 80 test trunk 80 schedule test trunk 78 r 4 test trunk 78 c 1. If no alarms are registered against the maintenance object then the test sequence exercises once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence. 2. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. The following screen is an example of the output for the test trunk 78 command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test tsc-administered Page 8-401 8 test trunk 78 TEST RESULTS Port 01C1505 01C1505 Maintenance Name CO-TRK CO-TRK Alt. Name Test No. Result 078/001 3 PASS 078/001 36 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port The port address: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested. Alt. Name The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. If the object is a trunk, the field contains xxx/yyy (where xxx = trunk group number, yyy = member number). If the object is a private CO line, the field contains P/xxx (where xxx = private CO line group number). Test No The test number being executed Result The result of the individual test: PASS, ABORT, FAIL, NO BOARD, DISABLED, and EXTRA BD. Error Code A system-generated number indicating the reason that the test for the named MO failed or aborted. test tsc-administered This command submits a switched services request to run the Temporary Signaling Connection’s heartbeat test for all administered TSCs on a signaling group. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids test tsc-administered Page 8-402 8 Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults test tsc-administered signaling group number/ Signaling group number (1–8) init inads craft repeat =1 tsc index The number associated with each TSC in a signaling group. repeat number The number of times each test in sequence is repeated. schedule Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.1 1. Feature Interactions Additional data available after running the test. See status tsc-admini stered for how to access additional data. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details. Output The following is an example of the output from the test tsc-administered 1/1 command. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. test tsc-administered 1/1 TEST RESULTS Port 1/1 Maintenance Name TSC-ADM Alt. Name Test No. Result 604 PASS Error Code Command Successfully Completed Field descriptions Port Port address of the administered temporary signaling connection (format = signaling group no./tsc index) Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object Alt. Name Not applicable Test No. The test number being executed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids upgrade software Page 8-403 8 Result Test result: Pass, Abort, Fail, No Board, Disabled, or Extra Bd. Error Code A system-generated number indicating the reason that the test for the named MO failed or aborted. upgrade software This command upgrades the software text image, the flash component of the LMM firmware, the MTP firmware, the Packet Control (PACCON), and the Processor Interface (PI) firmwares. Depending on whether the system is simplex (Standard reliability) or Duplex (High or Critical reliability), the processes for the upgrade are different: System Description of Upgrade Simplex (Standard reliability) The command verifies that a software card-mem is present and then, if present, proceeds to reprogram the flash memory and perform a level-4 restart. During the restart of the system, the system technician is prompted to replace the software card-mem with the translation card-mem. Service is provided upon completion of the system restart. Service down time is 5-12 minutes. Duplex (High or Critical reliability) The command verifies that a software card-mem is present in the standby SPE, programs the flash memory, resets the standby SPE, and prompts the system technician to replace the software card-mem with the translation card-mem. An interchange of SPEs is performed upon completion of a successful standby upgrade. At the same time, the old active SPE is upgraded automatically with the new software through similar swapping of card-mems. The service disruption time is 1-4 minutes. ! WARNING: Be sure to save translations before this executing this command. It may also be helpful to read the Feature Interactions for this command before upgrading the system software. Action/Object Qualifier upgrade software none Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions init inads craft none See below DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids upgrade software Page 8-404 8 Feature Interactions System Restarts An upgrade causes a system restart: simplex systems perform a Level-4 restart, and duplex systems perform a Level-2 SPE-interchange after the standby is upgraded through a Level-4 restart. Initcauses Executing display initcauses shows the software upgrade and the system reset level. Multi-User Contention When this command is executing, all other maintenance commands are blocked. Exceptions to these are most of the status or display commands. All administration commands are not blocked. It is the user’s responsibility to make sure that no new translations are added between the last save translation operation and the completion of the upgrade software command. Recent Change History Log The upgrade software command does not log for both simplex and duplex systems. This is due to the clearing of memory during the level 4 reset. Periodic and Scheduled Maintenance Periodic and scheduled maintenance is suspended during the upgrade. Error and Alarm Log Error and alarm logs before the software upgrade are lost. Demand Busyout Objects Maintenance objects that have been demand busyout are released when the processor reboots or interchanges during the software upgrade. If the command is cancelled before the actual reboot or interchange starts, then all demand busyout objects status are preserved. Data Consistency between SPEs Data consistency alarms are generated if the software in the active and standby SPE are not consistent. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids upgrade software Page 8-405 8 Disabled Objects All disabled objects retain their “disabled” status after a software upgrade according to the status recorded in the last save translation command. Output The following is the output from the upgrade software command and a successful simplex upgrade. INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE MEM-CARD CHECKSUM PASSED REPROGRAMMING MTP PASSED ERASING MEMORY PASSED REPROGRAMMING SPE PASSED FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM PASSED UPGRADE COMPLETE REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD Explanations and error recoveries to the above steps follow: INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE: The system is upgrading the software. MEM-CARD CHECKSUM: If the card-mem checksum fails, the system reboots without performing the upgrade. Retry the command with another software card-mem. REPROGRAMMING MTP: If the MTP programming fails, the Manager I does not function anymore, meaning that the rest of the upgrade (if it occurs) are not visible and the MTP will not be present to monitor the health of the processor. The only recovery procedure is to power down and power up the system, since the presence of a software card-mem will cause a software upgrade. ERASING MEMORY: The rest of the memory is being erased. REPROGRAMMING SPE: This shows the status of the reprogramming. A total of 7 Mbytes has to be reprogrammed. If the reprogramming fails in the midst of upgrade, it will take the system into SPE-down mode. In this mode, the system technician can only reset the system or display alarms. The system should be reset and another upgrade attempted due to the detection of a software card-mem in the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids upgrade software Page 8-406 8 FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM: If the checksum fails, the software may or may not be healthy, but it will try to run for as long as it can until further system reset through system technician intervention. REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD: The system technician is prompted by a beep and this text string on the Manager I to replace the software card-mem with the translation card-mem. The system boots without translation if the replacement is not done within 2 minutes. The only way to recover from this is to replace the card-mem and issue a reset system 3 to read in the translations again. UPGRADE COMPLETE: The software upgrade is complete. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction General Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction 9 Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-1 9 General This chapter describes the fault isolation/correction procedures for the Packet Bus and for the various MOs that use the Packet Bus. Because the Packet Bus is shared by all circuit packs that must communicate on it, a faulty circuit pack can disrupt communication over the Packet Bus. In addition, a circuit pack that does not use the Packet Bus can cause service disruptions if the physical configuration of the switch is being modified (this is discussed in more detail later). For these reasons, isolating the cause of Packet Bus failure can be complicated. In this chapter, a flowchart is provided to aid in this isolation effort, as are detailed discussions of the tools and procedures used in the fault isolation and correction. This chapter is organized into several sections that provide introductory information, as well as packet bus fault isolation and correction procedures. The sections of the chapter are as follows: ■ ‘‘Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance’’ discusses the strategy and the requirements for performing remote maintenance and on-site maintenance for the Packet Bus. ■ ‘‘Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ discusses the tools that are needed to isolate and correct Packet Bus faults. ■ ‘‘Packet Bus’’ describes the Packet Bus, its use, and the types of faults that can occur on the Packet Bus. A diagram that shows the physical and logical connections between circuit packs connected to the Packet Bus is also included. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-2 ■ ‘‘Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus’’ describes the various circuit packs, ports, and endpoints that use the Packet Bus. The section discusses how these maintenance objects interact, how a failure of one maintenance object can affect another, and also the failure symptoms of these maintenance objects. ■ ‘‘Maintenance of the Packet Bus’’ describes the Packet Bus maintenance software strategy. Similarities and differences between the Packet Bus and the TDM Bus are discussed. An overview of the Fault Isolation and Correction Procedures is also presented. ■ ‘‘The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)’’ discusses the use of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack in normal switch maintenance, as well as its role in Packet Bus fault isolation. The standalone mode of the Maintenance/Test (which is used to perform the Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction procedures on-site) is discussed in detail. ■ ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart’’presents a flowchart that is used to isolate a Packet Bus problem. This flowchart is the starting point for this process, and it is used to determine if a failure of service is caused by the Packet Bus itself or by another maintenance object on the Packet Bus. ■ ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Correction’’ presents the procedures required to correct either a problem with the Packet Bus itself or one that is caused by a circuit pack connected to the Packet Bus. The Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart is intended to be the normal starting point for isolating and resolving Packet Bus problems. However, anyone who is unfamiliar with Packet Bus maintenance should read the introductory sections to gain a good understanding of the Packet Bus maintenance and the procedures involved. Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance Most packet bus fault isolation and repair procedures require a technician to be on-site. This is true because a packet bus failure is caused by a hardware failure of the packet bus itself or by a circuit pack that is connected to it. However, initial diagnoses can be made via use of the flowchart presented in the ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart’’ section of this chapter. However, before implementing the Maintenance/Test Standalone Mode Procedure (described later) and the Packet Bus Fault Correction Procedure, a technician must be on-site. The flowchart as presented refers to the repair procedures in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, for various MOs. When one of the decision points is reached, a remote technician can refer to the appropriate section and attempt to resolve any fault conditions. In addition, the remote technician can examine some of the other MOs on the flowchart. Keep in mind that if an MO that appears early on the flowchart fails, this failure can cause alarms with MOs that appear later in the flowchart. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-3 The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port (described in detail later in this chapter) can give the remote technician information about the state of the packet bus. This information can be obtained via the status system command and via the PKT-BUS test sequence. As described later, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack may or may not be present at a customer site, depending on system configuration. If a Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not present, one must be taken to the customer site. In a high or critical reliability system, a Processor Interchange may resolve the packet bus problem. This operation can be done remotely, and is discussed in the ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Correction’’ section in this chapter. Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The following list discusses several tools that are (or may be) required to perform Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction. The technician should be provided with these tools at the customer site: ■ TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack for use in standalone mode, as well as the required connectors and cables. (Refer to the ‘‘The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)’’ section in this chapter.) ■ Replacement TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack may be needed. Conditions for requirement, and the relevant implementation steps are documented in the ‘‘Special Precaution Concerning the TN771’’ section in this chapter. ■ Backplane pin-replacement kit may be required in the procedures described in the ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Correction’’ section of this chapter. If the kit is not available, replacement of a carrier may be required. Packet Bus Each port network has its own packet bus, and, accordingly, there is one packet bus MO in each port network. The packet bus is not duplicated, as is the TDM Bus. However, there are several spare leads on the packet bus and, in high and critical reliability systems, these spare leads are used to recover from some failures on the packet bus. Packet Bus Usage The packet bus carries ISDN-BRI signaling information for ISDN-BRI stations and data modules and for ASAI adjunct connections. The TN556 ISDN-BRI circuit pack is used for these connections. The SPE interface to the packet bus is the TN778 Packet Control (in high and critical reliability systems, there is one TN778 in each SPE). For systems with multiple port networks, the TN570 Expansion Interface is used to pass messages from the packet bus in one port network to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-4 the packet bus in its neighbor. The TN771 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (discussed in detail later) provides packet bus maintenance testing and reconfiguration capabilities. Packet Bus Faults Two types of packet bus failures can occur: ■ Shorts. A short occurs when leads on the packet bus become connected together. Such a connection can occur due to component failures on the packet bus interface of a circuit pack, a failure of the cables between carriers or the TDM/LAN terminators, or by pins being bent together on the backplane. Usually, a failure that occurs during normal operation is caused by a circuit pack failure. However, if the system configuration is being modified (for example, circuit packs are being moved), the cause of a subsequent packet bus failure is probably bent pins. ■ Opens. An open occurs when there is a break on the packet bus such that the electrical path to the termination resistors is broken. Usually, this break is caused by a failed TDM/LAN cable or by a failed TDM/LAN terminator. The break can also be caused by a failure in the backplane of a carrier, although this is unlikely. Shorts on the packet bus occur much more often than do opens. This is because the incorrect insertion of a circuit pack can cause leads to be shorted together. It is possible for a circuit pack to be the cause of a packet bus fault but still exhibit trouble-free operation. For example, the insertion of a TDM-only circuit pack (TN754B Digital Line) could bend the packet bus pins on the backplane. However, since the circuit pack does not communicate on the packet bus, the pack is not affected by the problem. Packet bus faults do not necessarily cause service interruptions. However, most packet bus shorts do cause these interruptions. Depending on what leads are defective, the system may be able to recover and continue to communicate. This can be detrimental because it makes isolating the fault difficult. The Maintenance/Test circuit pack provides the capability to detect, and, in some cases, correct packet bus faults. Packet Bus Connectivity Various circuit packs communicate on the packet bus (see next section). For details on ISDN-BRI and ASAI connectivity, refer to “BRI-PORT” and “BRI-SET/ASAI-ADJ” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. For details on Expansion Interface connectivity, refer to “EXP-INTF”. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-5 Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus Four circuit packs can use the packet bus. The following list identifies and discusses each circuit pack. An explanation of how each circuit pack assists in packet bus maintenance is also included. NOTE: The MOs involved with each circuit pack are listed in brackets. Documentation for each maintenance object is provided in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. ■ TN778 Packet Control [PKT-CTRL] provides the SPE interface to the packet bus, just as the TN777 Network Control does to the TDM Bus. All traffic on the packet bus passes through the packet control. The packet control can detect failures of certain control leads on the bus. Such failures are indicated by an inability to transmit data. The packet control can also detect data errors on the packet bus. ■ TN570 Expansion Interface [EXP-INTF] is used to connect the PNs in the system. For systems that use the packet bus, all Port Network connections must be made with TN570 circuit packs. All packet traffic between PNs passes through a pair of TN570s (one in each port network). The Expansion Interface can detect a subset of control lead failures (though not as many as the packet control), and it can detect many data lead failures via parity errors on received data. ■ TN556, TN2198 and TN2208 ISDN-BRI circuit packs [BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ] provides connections for ISDN-BRI station sets and data modules and for ASAI adjuncts. The Packet Bus is used to carry signaling information for sets and data modules. The Packet Bus passes signaling information and ASAI messages between the SPE and the ASAI adjunct. The ISDN-BRI circuit pack has the same fault detection capabilities as the TN570 Expansion Interface. ■ TN771D (or later) Maintenance/Test circuit pack is the workhorse of packet bus maintenance. This circuit pack can detect all packet bus failures for the PN in which it resides. In High and Critical Reliability systems, the circuit pack enables the reconfiguring of the packet bus around a small number of failed leads. The TN771D circuit pack provides a standalone mode (that is, one that does not involve communication with the SPE) for inspecting the packet bus for faults. This is a critical tool for the packet bus fault correction procedures, which are described later. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-6 Effect of Circuit Pack Failures on the Packet Bus A failure of any of the circuit packs described in the previous section can disrupt traffic on the Packet Bus. Some failures cause actual Packet Bus failures with corresponding alarms, while others cause service outages without alarming the Packet Bus (although the failed circuit pack(s) should be alarmed). The following list discusses the effects on the Packet Bus of a failure on each circuit pack that uses the Packet Bus. ■ TN778 Packet Control. A failure of the Packet Control typically causes all Packet traffic in the system to fail. As a result, ISDN-BRI sets are not able to make or receive calls, and communication with an ASAI adjunct fails. A failure of the Packet Control may also cause a failure of the Packet Bus itself if the failure is on the interface circuitry. Otherwise, only the Packet Control is alarmed. In a High or Critical Reliability system, there is one TN778 Packet Control in each SPE. If a Packet Control failure in the active SPE causes a Packet Bus disruption, performing an SPE interchange may restore service. In some cases, circuit pack failures may require that the circuit pack be replaced before service is restored. ■ TN570 Expansion Interface. A failure of the Expansion Interface typically causes all Packet traffic in the connected EPN to fail. If the failure is on the Packet Bus interface, the Packet Bus may be alarmed as well. In a High or Critical Reliability system, there is one EPN link in each control carrier for each EPN. If an active Expansion Interface failure causes a Packet Bus disruption, performing an Expansion Link switch may restore service. In some cases, circuit pack failures may require that the circuit pack be replaced before service is restored. ■ TN556 ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack. A failure of the ISDN-BRI circuit pack typically causes some or all ISDN-BRI sets and data modules and/or an ASAI adjunct connected to the circuit pack to fail to function. If the failure is on the Packet Bus interface, the Packet Bus may be alarmed as well. ■ TN771 Maintenance/Test. A failure of the Maintenance/Test may cause an incorrect indication of a packet bus failure or the inability to detect such a failure. A failure of the packet bus interface of the circuit pack may cause the packet bus to be alarmed. A failure of the packet bus interface on any of the circuit packs discussed can cause the packet bus to be alarmed. This is true because such a failure may result in shorting packet bus leads together. This typically disrupts ALL packet bus traffic in the affected port network. A failure of the packet bus in the PPN affects packet traffic in the EPNs as well. Also, packet bus failures that do not affect all endpoints on that packet bus may occur. Therefore, a packet bus failure should not be ruled out even if some packet service is still present. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Maintenance of the Packet Bus Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-7 A circuit pack can fail in a manner such that it transmits bad data on the Packet Bus. If the Packet Control fails in such a fashion, all Packet traffic is disrupted (because all traffic requires the Packet Control). Likewise, such a failure on the Expansion Interface may disrupt all Packet traffic in that port network. However, if an ISDN-BRI circuit pack fails such that it transmits bad data, all devices connected to the circuit pack fail to function. This failure may also disrupt the entire Packet Bus whenever the circuit pack tries to transmit data. Such a disruption may be indicated by Packet Bus alarms that occur and go away, intermittent failures of other Packet circuit packs, and/or interference with other connected endpoints. The failures mentioned are difficult to isolate because of their intermittent nature. In most cases, the failed circuit pack is usually alarmed, and all connected endpoints on the circuit pack are out of service until the circuit pack is replaced. These symptoms help in isolating the fault. Maintenance of the Packet Bus The following topics are discussed: ■ Comparison between the Packet Bus and the TDM Bus ■ Packet Bus Maintenance Software ■ Overview of Fault Correction Procedures Packet Bus and TDM Bus: a Comparison Although the Packet Bus is similar to the TDM Bus in many ways, there are some important differences. For example, there are two physical TDM Busses in the switch (refer to the TDM-BUS section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, for more information), and one of these busses can fail without affecting the other (although half of the call-carrying capacity is lost in this case). On the other hand, there is only a single Packet Bus in the switch, and a failure of that bus can disrupt all traffic on the Packet Bus. In High or Critical Reliability systems, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack provides Packet Bus reconfiguration capabilities. This allows the Packet Bus to remain in service with up to three lead failures. There is no corresponding facility on the TDM Bus, where the second physical TDM Bus continues to carry traffic until repairs are completed. In addition, the system response varies according to the type of bus failure. Specifically, a catastrophic TDM Bus failure (one that affects both TDM Buses) disables ALL traffic in the system, while a catastrophic Packet Bus failure affects only Packet traffic. This means that all TDM traffic is unaffected, while all BRI and ASAI traffic does not work. The significance of this distinction depends on the customer’s application. (For example, a customer whose primary application requires ASAI would consider the switch to be out of service, while a customer DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Issue 1 August 1997 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Maintenance of the Packet Bus Page 9-8 with a large number of Digital/Analog/Hybrid sets and a small number of ISDN-BRI sets would probably not consider the Packet Bus failure a catastrophic problem.) The only way a Packet Bus failure can affect TDM traffic is via possible impact on system response time in a large switch due to ISDN-BRI endpoint maintenance running. This should rarely happen because the Packet Bus maintenance software is able to prevent this impact for most Packet Bus faults (see the next section). ! CAUTION: Since the correction procedures and some of the fault isolation procedures for the Packet Bus are highly destructive to service throughout the system (inasmuch as the procedures primarily involve removing circuit packs), particular attention must be paid to nondestructive fault isolation. Also, for the same reason, the time taken with destructive procedures must be minimized. This is the major reason that maintenance of the Packet Bus and of the Packet maintenance objects is described in such detail. Packet Bus Maintenance Software Packet Bus maintenance software involves the traditional set of error conditions, tests, and alarms relevant to Packet Bus faults. These are described in the PKT-BUS section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and they are similar in design to the maintenance strategy for most maintenance objects. In addition, because a Packet Bus failure can cause all BRI/ASAI endpoints in the affected Port Network (and their associated ports and circuit packs) to report failures, special care must be taken to ensure that the flood of error messages from the affected maintenance objects does not overload the system and interfere with TDM Bus traffic. When such a failure occurs, maintenance of Packet circuit packs is affected in the following manner: ■ ISDN-BRI circuit pack (BRI-BD) in-line errors indicating possible Packet Bus failures are placed into the error log, but are not acted upon. ■ ISDN-BRI port (BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT) in-line errors indicating possible Packet Bus failures are neither placed into the error log nor acted upon. ■ ISDN-BRI endpoint (BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ) in-line error are neither placed into the error log nor acted upon. ■ Circuit pack and port in-line errors that are not related to the Packet Bus, or that indicate a circuit pack failure, are acted upon in the normal fashion. ■ Normal background maintenance (periodic and scheduled) is not affected. ■ Foreground maintenance (for example, commands executed on the Manager I terminal) are not affected. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Issue 1 August 1997 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Maintenance of the Packet Bus Page 9-9 These interactions allow normal, non-Packet, system traffic to continue unaffected, and they reduce the number of extraneous entries into the Error/Alarm Logs. If the Packet Bus failure is caused by a failed circuit pack, the circuit pack should appear in the Error/Alarm Logs, which aids in fault isolation. The following events indicate a Packet Bus failure that requires the actions in the previous paragraph to occur: ■ In-line errors that indicate a possible Packet Bus failure reported by two or more Packet circuit packs ■ Packet Bus Uncorrectable report from the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port (M/T-PKT) ■ Packet Bus Interface Failure from the Packet Control (PKT-CTRL) If such a failure occurs, this information will be available in an Error Log entry for PKT-BUS. Refer to the PKT-BUS section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, for more detailed information. Overview of Fault Correction Procedures This section gives an overview of the procedures used to (1) isolate the cause of Packet Bus faults and to (2) correct the Packet Bus faults. These procedures are applicable to High and Critical Reliability systems, and they are detailed fully later in this chapter: 1. The first procedure attempts to determine if a circuit pack that interfaces to the Packet Bus is the cause of the Packet Bus problem. The error and alarm logs are examined for entries for these circuit packs, and the normal maintenance procedures for those circuit packs are attempted. 2. If the Packet Bus problem still exists, port circuit packs (those in the purple slots) are removed to look for circuit pack(s) that have failed and/or have damaged the Packet Bus pins (a diagram of the backplane pins is provided later). 3. If the Packet Bus problem is still not resolved, the same procedure is attempted for the control complex circuit packs. 4. If the problem is still not resolved, or if the Packet Bus faults are known to have open leads, a procedure is undertaken in which the bus terminators and cables are replaced. If this does not resolve the problem, the carrier connectivity of the port network is reconfigured to attempt to isolate a faulty carrier. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-10 The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Description Packet bus reconfiguration is available only in high and critical reliability systems. In such systems that use the packet bus, a Maintenance/Test is required in each port network. In other configurations (for example, Standard Systems, no packet bus use), the circuit pack is optional. ! CAUTION: All TN771 circuit packs must be of TN771D vintage or later. Normal Packet Functionality The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port provides the packet bus testing and reconfiguration capabilities. When the port is in service, the port continuously monitors the packet bus for faults (or recovery from faults), and it reports this information to packet bus maintenance. The yellow LED on the TN771D Maintenance/Test circuit pack provides a visual indication of the state of the packet bus, as follows: ■ Blinking at a rate of 1 per sec — the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port cannot swap leads to correct a Packet Bus fault (that is, there are too many faults). The Packet Bus may be unusable. If the failures detected by the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port are open lead failures, the Packet Bus may still be operating. ■ On steady — the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has swapped leads on the Packet Bus. The Packet Bus is still operating. NOTE: Because the yellow LED on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack can also be on steady when the other ports on the circuit pack are in use, the ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack used for ISDN-PRI trunk testing must be busied out before the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is used to help resolve Packet Bus faults. This is done via the busyout port PCSS02 and busyout port PCSS03 commands. Also, be sure to release these ports when the process is completed. ■ Off — there is no Packet Bus fault present. NOTE: It takes 5 to 10 seconds for the LED to respond to a change in the state of the Packet Bus. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Issue 1 August 1997 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Page 9-11 In normal switch operation, the Maintenance/Test provides the visual feedback of the Packet Bus state. When standalone mode (described in the next section) is in effect, these visual indications are still provided; however, the Packet Bus is never reconfigured, and, as a result, the yellow LED either blinks or is off. Standalone Mode The TN771D Maintenance/Test provides a standalone mode for detecting Packet Bus faults. In the standalone mode, a terminal is connected to the Maintenance/Test circuit pack via the Amphenol™ connector on the back of the cabinet. This setup allows the System Technician to determine the state of the Packet Bus without having to access the Manager I terminal to provide these functions, even if the switch is not in service. Note that the Maintenance/Test does not reconfigure the Packet Bus when it is operating in standalone mode. Standalone mode is used in the Packet Bus Fault Correction procedures. As a result, a TN771 and a corresponding terminal must be available to the technician who is to perform such procedures. A High or Critical Reliability system has a TN771 in each port network. However, the customer of a system that does not have High or Critical Reliability may have purchased a TN771 for ISDN-PRI trunk testing, or to increase the system’s ability to detect Packet Bus failures. The list configuration command is used to check for the presence of a circuit pack in the system. If a circuit pack is not present in the system, one must be taken to the customer site. The ‘‘Special Precaution Concerning the TN771’’ section in this chapter discusses the special cases when a spare TN771 must be taken to the customer site. NOTE: When in standalone mode, the yellow LED on the TN771 blinks if there is a Packet Bus fault. If there is no such fault, the yellow LED is off. This is true because Packet Bus reconfiguration cannot occur in standalone mode. Required Hardware for Standalone Mode In addition to the TN771, the following equipment is required to use the standalone mode: 1. Terminal or PC with terminal-emulation software. The EIA-232 (RS-232) port should be configured at 1200 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and one stop bit. This is not the same configuration as for the Manager I terminal. Therefore, if the Manager I can be used for this operation (and this depends on the switch configuration and on customer requirements), remember to restore the original communication parameters before returning the Manager I to service. 2. 355A EIA-232 Adapter (COMCODE 105 012 637). 3. 258B Six-Port Male Amphenol Adapter (COMCODE 103 923 025). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-12 4. D8W 8-wire modular cable of an appropriate length to connect the 258A on the back of the cabinet to the 355A adapter. The relevant COMCODE is determined by the length of the cable, as follows: ■ 103 786 786 (7 feet) ■ 103 786 802 (14 feet) ■ 103 786 828 (25 feet) ■ 103 866 109 (50 feet) Slot Selection for Standalone Mode When selecting a carrier slot to use for standalone mode in a port network that does not already contain a TN771, keep the following points in mind: ■ A port circuit slot (indicated by a purple label) should be used. ■ -5 volt power supply must be available in the carrier. This section describes the power supply configurations that provide this power supply. ■ It is preferable that the slot chosen is in the A carrier if a free slot that matches the criteria presented in the first two items of information in this list is available. Entering and Exiting Standalone Mode NOTE: When in standalone mode, the red LED on the TN771 is lit. This function is correct, and it serves as a reminder to remove the TN771 from standalone mode. ! CAUTION: The TN771 in standalone must be the ONLY TN771 in the port network. If a TN771 is already in the port network, place that TN771 in standalone mode. Do not insert a second TN771 into standalone mode. System behavior is rendered as undefined if this is done. In addition, the system is not able to detect the extra circuit pack in this case because a TN771 in standalone mode is invisible to the SPE. ! CAUTION: If the TN771 Packet Bus port has reconfigured the Packet Bus in a switch with a High or Critical Reliability system, (indicated by error type 2049 against PKT-BUS), placing the Maintenance/Test in standalone mode causes a loss of service to the Packet Bus. This is true because reconfiguration is not performed in standalone mode. Therefore, this procedure should be considered a service-disrupting procedure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-13 If the system has a TN771 installed in the Port Network to be examined, use the following steps to enter the standalone mode: 1. Ensure that Alarm Origination is suppressed either at login time or via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form. 2. Attach the 258B Six-Port Male Amphenol Adapter to the Amphenol connector for the TN771’s slot. Connect one end of a D8W 8-wire modular cable to port 1 of the 258B. Connect the other end of the cable to a 355A EIA-232 Adapter. Plug the EIA-232 Adapter into the terminal to be used, and turn the terminal on. 3. Reseat the TN771 circuit pack. NOTE: In a High or Critical Reliability system, this causes a Minor, Off-board alarm to be raised against the Packet Bus. This alarm is not resolved until the TN771 (in particular, the Packet Bus port is returned to service. To ensure that Packet Bus alarms have been cleared, it may be necessary to restore the TN771 to normal mode. If there is no TN771 in the Port Network, use the following steps to enter the standalone mode: 1. Attach the 258A Six-Port Male Amphenol Adapter to the Amphenol connector for the slot into which the TN771 is to be inserted. Connect one end of a D8W 8-wire modular cable to port 1 of the 258A. Connect the other end of the cable to a 355A EIA-232 Adapter. Plug the EIA-232 Adapter into the terminal to be used, and turn the terminal on. 2. Insert the TN771 circuit pack into the slot. The system does not recognize the presence of the circuit pack. If the standalone mode is entered successfully, the following is displayed on the connected terminal: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-14 TN771 STANDALONE MODE (Type "?" at the prompt for help) Command: Figure 9-1. Normal Standalone Mode Display ! CAUTION: If the display in Figure 9-1 does not appear, be sure to check the wiring between the terminal and the TN771, and also the terminal parameters. If these are correct, the TN771 may be defective. In such a case, follow the procedures to exit standalone mode (described in the next paragraph). Then test the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. NOTE: If the TN771 fails while in standalone mode, the message TN771 circuit pack failed is displayed, and no further input is accepted on the terminal. The circuit pack must be replaced. Use the following procedures to exit standalone mode: 1. Remove the 258A Adapter from the Amphenol connector. 2. If the TN771 was installed for this procedure, remove it. Otherwise, reseat the TN771. 3. Be sure that alarm origination is re-enabled on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form if it was disabled there (if it was disabled at login, it is automatically re-enabled at logoff). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-15 Using Standalone Mode in Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction When the TN771 is in standalone mode, three commands can be used at the terminal: ■ ds displays the current state of the Packet Bus leads. ■ dsa toggles auto-report mode on and off. In auto-report mode, the state of the Packet Bus leads are displayed and the terminal beeps whenever a change occurs. ■ ? displays the available commands. Figure 9-2 presents an example of a standalone mode display. In the display, an ‘S’ indicates a shorted lead, an ‘O’ indicates an open lead, and a blank indicates no fault. L L L L L L L L L L H H H H H H H H H H S S S L 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S F B F _P____________________________________________________________________________________________________ S S O Command: Figure 9-2. Example Standalone Mode Display The information within a standalone mode display is used in the Packet Bus Fault Correction procedures that follow. The TN771 display indicates the specific leads on the backplane to examine for bent or damaged pins. Figure 9-3 shows the location of the packet bus leads on the backplane as viewed from the front of the carrier, while Figure 9-4 shows the same slot as viewed from the back of the carrier. NOTE: This information is available only from the standalone mode and with an on-site connected terminal. This information is not available from the Manager I, and, thus, it is not available remotely. This is not a concern, inasmuch as this information cannot be used effectively if testing is not on site. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Page 9-16 SLOT XXX Backplane Separation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. Figure 9-3. +5v L0 GND L3 GND L6 GND HP H1 GND H3 GND H5 GND LF GND GND GND +5v +5v .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... ... +5v LP L1 L2 L4 L5 L7 L8 H0 SB H2 H4 SF H6 H7 H8 GND SS GND GND +5v +5v .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane - Front View Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Page 9-17 SLOT XXX Backplane Separation Figure 9-4. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. +5v LP L1 L2 L4 L5 L7 L8 H0 SB H2 H4 SF H6 H7 H8 GND SS GND GND +5v +5v .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . +5v L0 GND L3 GND L6 GND HP H1 GND H3 GND H5 GND LF GND GND GND +5v +5v .. .. .. Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane - Back View DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D) Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-18 Special Precaution Concerning the TN771 NOTE: A new TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack must be taken to the customer site whenever the following is true: ■ Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port indicates that a Packet Bus fault is present. NOTE: Such a fault is indicated by a Major or Minor alarm against the Packet Bus. A Major alarm is indicated in the error log by Error Type 513, while a Minor alarm is indicated by Error Type 2049. ■ Test #572 of the PKT-BUS test sequence is the only test that fails. This precaution is taken because certain failures of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack can appear as Packet Bus failures. To ensure that the problem is indeed with the Packet Bus, implement the following steps: 1. Refer to the M/T-PKT Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Correct any problems with the TN771 Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port as described in that section. If the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is replaced during the correction process, enter the test pkt P long command to determine if the Packet Bus faults have been resolved. If there are still Packet Bus problems, correct them by using the procedures in the sections that follow. 2. If the Maintenance/Test circuit pack was not replaced, enter the test pkt P command. Record the results (PASS/FAIL/ABORT) and error codes for Test #572. 3. Enter the status system P command. Record the information listed for the Packet Bus. 4. Busyout the Maintenance/Test circuit pack by entering the busyout board PCSS command. 5. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack with the new circuit pack. 6. Release the Maintenance/Test circuit pack by entering the release board PCSS command. 7. Enter the test pkt P and status system P commands as described in Steps 2 and 3. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-19 8. If the data matches the previously recorded data, a Packet Bus problem exists. The original TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not defective, and it does not need to be returned to the factory. Replace the original TN771, then correct the Packet Bus problem by using the procedures in the sections that follow. 9. If the data does not match the previously recorded data, the original TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is defective. If there are still indications of Packet Bus problems, correct them by using the procedures in the sections that follow. Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart The flowchart in this section presents the steps to be taken for isolating and resolving Packet Bus problems. The order in which the maintenance objects should be examined can be determined by assessing how wide-spread the failure is. For example, since all ISDN-BRI devices communicate with the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack, this MO should be examined early in the sequence. On the other hand, a failure of a TN570 circuit pack in an EPN may cause ISDN-BRI failure in an EPN, but it could not be the cause of a failure in the PPN. Whenever the flowchart refers to the Maintenance documentation for a specific MO, keep in mind that the repair procedure for that MO may in turn refer to another MO’s repair procedure. The flowchart tries to coordinate these procedures so that a logical flow is maintained if the Packet Bus problems are not resolved via the first set of repair procedures. However, a Packet Bus failure can lead to a somewhat haphazard referencing of various MO procedures that may result in your implementing steps that either have already been completed or are not necessary. If this occurs, return to the flowchart at the step that follows the reference to Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and then continue. NOTE: The following status commands can also help diagnose Packet Bus problems: ■ status system ■ status packet-control ■ status bri-port ■ status station ■ status data-module For a description of these commands, refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. The commands provide information about the service state of various Packet maintenance objects. This information can be useful for remote maintenance, inasmuch it can explain the impact of the failure(s) on the system. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart Page 9-20 The Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart appears on the following two pages. NOTE: See the ‘‘Flowchart Description and Supplement’’ section following the flowchart for a description of the flowchart as well as for supplementary information, the availability of which is indicated by the uppercase letters that appear in the flowchart. DIAL ARS/AAR ACCESS CODE FACILITY IS ORIGINATION OR OUTWARD RESTRICTED -- OR -USER IS CONTROLLED OUTWARD OR TOTAL RESTRICTED AAR INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT, ATTENDANT OR EXTENSION ARS *TREATMENT DEPENDS ON RESTRICTION AND ADMINISTRATION. SECOND DIAL TONE IF "AAR/ARS DIAL TONE" IS ENABLED ON THE FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS FORM. A CONVERT TO AAR OR ARS CALL ARS OR AAR CALL AAR ARS ANALYZE ARS NUMBER (NOTES 3 & 4) ANALYZE AAR NUMBER (NOTE 4) B Figure 9-5. Processing of Packet Bus Problems (Page 1 of 2) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart B Page 9-21 MATCH FOUND ? NO INTERCEPT YES DIGIT CONVERSION ? NO C YES CONVERSION LIMIT EXCEEDED? YES INTERCEPT NO MODIFY DIGIT STRING (CONVERT) FURTHER CONVERSION ALLOWED? NO YES INCREMENT CONVERSION COUNTER ANALYZE RESULT AS SPECIFIED BY ‘‘NET’’ DISABLE CONVERSION AAR, ARS A EXT DIAL PLAN Figure 9-6. Processing of Packet Bus Problems (Page 2 of 2) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Issue 1 August 1997 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart Page 9-22 Flowchart Description and Supplement An uppercase letter in bold (for example, A, B, C, etc.) indicates that there is supplemental information with details about the relevant process that could not fit into the appropriate box or diamond. NOTE: Due to space restrictions, individual error codes and alarms are not detailed on the flowchart. The maintenance object descriptions in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, discuss which errors and alarms could cause or be indicative of Packet Bus problems. In general, unless an error, alarm, or test refers explicitly to the TDM Bus, the error, alarm, or test should be considered a possible cause of Packet Bus problems. The following paragraphs supplement the corresponding letter in the flowchart. a. Problems with the system clock (TDM-CLK) can cause service disruptions on the Packet Bus as well as on the TDM Bus. Therefore, if there are alarms active against TDM-CLK, these alarms should be resolved before any other Packet Bus fault isolation is attempted. NOTE: All TDM-CLK problems should be resolved before the process is continued, even if the problems refer only to the TDM Bus. (This is an exception to the previous note.) This is recommended because a Packet Bus problem cannot cause a TDM-CLK problem, while a TDM-CLK problem can cause a Packet Bus problem. b. The question ‘‘Are the Packet Bus problems resolved?’’ appears several times on the flowchart. This is a general question that can involve several checks. The basic question is ‘‘Are the problems that caused you to use this flowchart resolved?’’ Some of the more specific questions might be: ■ Are all Packet Bus alarms resolved? ■ Are all Packet circuit pack (port, endpoint) alarms resolved? NOTE: If all alarms are resolved, issue the clear pkt command. This command attempts to put the switch back into the service state by resolving any BRI problems that exist. Refer to Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, for more information. ■ Are all ISDN-BRI stations/data modules and/or ASAI adjuncts in service? ■ Does the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port (in normal or standalone mode) still indicate a Packet Bus fault? DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-23 c. If only a single EPN is affected, the Packet Control is probably not the source of the problem. However, if all of the ISDN-BRI circuit packs are located in a single EPN, assume that the answer to this question is ‘‘No,’’ and check the Packet Control. d. A Packet problem that affects more than one port network is probably caused by either a Packet Control failure or a PPN Packet Bus failure. The Packet Control is checked before the Packet Bus Fault Correction procedures are implemented. e. Because the Packet Bus in each port network is physically separate, each affected port network must be checked individually. The PPN should be checked first, however, since any EPN Packet problems are usually resolved once the PPN Packet problem is resolved. After resolving the problem in one port network, be sure to check if the problems in other port networks have also been resolved. f. This step applies only when an attempt to resolve an EPN Packet Bus problem is made. When checking the Expansion Interfaces in an EPN, be sure to check the corresponding ones in the PPN. Also, recall that all Expansion Interfaces in 286 systems, 386 systems, or later systems that are using the Packet Bus must be TN570s. Using TN776s results in an EPN where TDM traffic works but Packet traffic does not work. g. If a TN771 is not present, one must be installed to accommodate the standalone mode, which is discussed earlier in this chapter. h. If a TN771 is present, it can fail in such a fashion that it eventually disrupts the Packet Bus or misinterprets a Packet Bus problem. i. If work is being done on-site, follow the procedures described earlier in this chapter for placing the TN771 into standalone mode. If work is not being done on-site, go to the next step. j. The answer is ‘‘Yes’’ if the TN771 in standalone mode indicates any faulty leads. The answer is also ‘‘Yes’’ if Test #572 in the PKT-BUS test sequence fails, and/or if the status system display indicates that faulty leads are present and the TN771 in the port network is known to be functioning correctly. k. If the non-functional endpoints are isolated to a single circuit pack, the circuit pack is probably the cause of the problem. l. The procedures that must be executed are determined by which maintenance objects on the circuit packs are alarmed. Start with the procedures for the circuit pack errors/alarms, then continue with those for the port. Finally, execute the procedures for the endpoint. m. Follow the procedures outlined later in this chapter. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-24 Packet Bus Fault Correction Using and Interpreting Results from the Status System Command The status system command can be issued to retrieve information about the Packet Bus. This command is described fully in the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. The status system command provides the service state, alarm status, and (if the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port is activated) the number of faulty and open leads. This information can be used to determine the urgency of the repair. In general, a service state of ‘‘out’’ indicates extreme urgency, while a service state of ‘‘reconfig’’ indicates moderate urgency. ! CAUTION: Ultimately, the urgency of a repair is determined by the customer’s requirements. A customer who uses ISDN-BRI for station sets probably considers a Packet Bus failure critical. However, a customer with only a small percentage of ISDN-BRI service may consider even an uncorrectable Packet Bus fault to be of minor importance and may prefer to delay performing repairs, due to their destructive nature. NOTE: If maintenance is actively running on the Packet Bus at the time the status system command is issued, the data reported for the Packet Bus may be inconsistent. The reason is that this data is updated by the maintenance tests that are running. If the data seems inconsistent, enter the command again. If test results or the results of the status system command indicate that there are 24 faults on the Packet Bus, the problem is probably caused by faulty cables between carriers, or by defective bus terminators. However, before proceeding, make sure that the report is not being falsely given by the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port. Accordingly, look for an M/T-PKT error in the error log. Then test the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port by entering the test port command. Refer to the ‘‘Special Precaution Concerning the TN771’’ section earlier in this chapter if any problems are suspected. If the carrier into which a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is installed does not have a -5 volt power supply, the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port reports 24 open leads on the Packet Bus (via the status system command and via Test #572 of the PKT-BUS test sequence). No failure of the TN771 is indicated in this case because the TN771 is not defective. Refer to CARR-POW maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and ensure that a -5 volt power supply is available. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-25 Considerations for High and Critical Reliability Systems If a High or Critical Reliability system is involved, special considerations involving the features of this type of system must be kept in mind. In particular, if a Packet Bus problem is caused by a duplicated component, switching to the standby component may both alleviate the problem and isolate the faulty circuit pack. Therefore, the commands in the following list should be executed first in a High or Critical reliability system. For more information on these commands, refer to Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’. ■ reset system interchange If this command resolves the Packet Bus problem, the problem is with the Packet Control in the (new) standby SPE. Refer to PKT-CTRL maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. ■ set exp-link If this command resolves the Packet Bus problem, the problem is with either the (new) standby EI Link or the EIs at either end. Refer to EXP-INTF maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. ■ set tone-clock If this command resolves the Packet Bus problem, the problem is with the (new) standby Tone-Clock. Refer to TDM-CLK maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. NOTE: Keep in mind that, even though the steps discussed in the previous list may fail to resolve the problem, the steps are not necessarily fault-proof. Continue with the procedures in the next section. Troubleshooting Procedures As we discussed earlier in this chapter, Packet Bus faults are usually caused by a defective circuit pack connected to the backplane, by bent pins on the backplane, or by defective cables/terminators that make up the Packet Bus. The first two faults cause shorts, while the third fault causes either shorts or opens. There are four procedures for correcting Packet Bus faults. The number of procedures that are to be used to correct faults depends upon a number of factors relevant to system performance and to the content of the procedures themselves. For example, if the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port is activated, and if there is an indication of open leads on the Packet Bus (either via the status system command or via Test #572 failure), go directly to Procedure 4. The reason for this is that Procedures 1 through 3 try to locate faulty circuit packs or bent pins behind circuit packs. Since these types of failures can never cause open faults, Procedures 1 through 3 need not be implemented in this case. However, if there are both shorts and opens, execute Procedure 4, then return to Procedure 1 if there are still shorts after the open lead problems are resolved. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-26 ! CAUTION: Since Packet Bus fault isolation procedures involve removing circuit packs and possibly disconnecting entire carriers, these procedure have a profound effect on service. Therefore, if possible, implement these procedures after hours or during hours of minimum system use. NOTE: Each of these procedures contains one or more steps that require a determination as to whether the Packet Bus problem has been resolved. Accordingly, several condition checks must be performed. We can present each such check in the form of a question, as follows: ■ Did the Maintenance/Test circuit pack standalone mode initially indicate the existence of faulty leads, and are these leads no longer indicated? ■ Have all alarms against the Packet Bus and Packet circuit packs been resolved? NOTE: If all alarms are resolved, issue the clear pkt command. This command attempts to put the switch back into the service state by resolving any BRI problems that exist. Refer to Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, for more information. ■ Are all ISDN-BRI stations and data modules as well as any relevant ASAI adjuncts in service? Note that if one of these conditions is not yet met, the others need not be checked. The following sections discuss the four procedures for correcting Packet Bus faults. Procedure 1 Procedure 1 determines if any circuit packs that use the Packet Bus have faults. For each circuit pack type (see Table 9-1), perform the following steps: NOTE: The circuit packs need not be checked in the order presented if the flowchart in this chapter has been followed. However, if newly added circuit packs are involved, check these packs first, inasmuch as the packs are most likely to have caused a problem. 1. Display the Error and Alarm Logs for the circuit pack via the display errors and display alarms commands. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Page 9-27 2. If there are errors for the circuit pack, refer to the appropriate maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and follow the recommended maintenance procedure to resolve the errors. Note that some of these procedures may refer to PKT-BUS maintenance as the cause of the fault; if so, implement these Packet Bus Fault Correction procedures at that point. 3. After implementing the repair procedure for the circuit pack (and regardless of whether this procedure succeeds or fails), determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. 4. If the Packet Bus fault is still present, implement Procedure 1 for the next circuit pack. 5. If there are no more circuit packs in the list, go to Procedure 2. 6. If the Packet Bus fault has been resolved, the procedures are completed. Table 9-1. Packet Circuit Packs Circuit Pack Name Circuit Pack Code Associated Maintenance Objects ISDN-BRI TN556 BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ Maintenance/Test TN771 M/T-BD, M/T-PKT Packet Control TN778 PKT-CTRL Expansion Interface TN570 EXP-INTF Procedure 2 Procedure 2 removes and reinserts port circuit packs (those in the purple slots) one or several at a time. Use Procedure 2 for each port circuit pack in the port network until either (1) the problem is resolved or (2) there are no more circuit packs in the port network. NOTE: This procedure should also be used for the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack in a standard system. For a High or Critical Reliability system, refer to Procedure 3 for the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Also, refer to Procedure 3 for the TN768 or TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack in a switch with a High or Critical Reliability system. ! CAUTION: The Expansion Interface circuit pack should be the last one checked in this procedure, since removing this circuit pack disconnects its EPN. The Tone-Clock circuit pack should be the next-to-last one checked. In addition, the TN771 must be reseated after the Tone-Clock is reinstalled. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-28 If the Packet Bus problem is present when the circuit pack is inserted, but is resolved when the circuit pack is removed, either the circuit pack or the backplane pins in that slot caused the problem. If the backplane pins are intact, replace the circuit pack. NOTE: In a multiple failure situation, the circuit pack could be one cause of the Packet Bus problem. However, there could also be other failures that are causing Packet Bus faults. In Procedure 2, an option of working either with one circuit pack at a time or with multiple circuit packs simultaneously is available. In view of this, determine the level of service interruption to be allowed during this procedure. If causing a disruption to all users in the port network is deemed permissible, large groups of circuit packs should be worked with. This option allows faster job completion. However, if large service disruptions are to be avoided, work with one circuit pack at a time. This option is slower, but it disrupts only the users of a single circuit pack. ! CAUTION: If the TN771 Standalone mode does NOT indicate Packet Bus faults, perform Procedure 2 for ONLY the port (purple) slot Packet circuit packs listed in Table 9-1. Also, problems with the backplane pins need not be checked for. Determining if the problem is resolved by removing circuit packs is sufficient. Steps for Procedure 2: 1. Remove one or several circuit packs as appropriate, according to the considerations presented in the previous paragraphs. Any circuit pack(s) (whether Packet or non-Packet) that have been recently inserted should be checked first. It is likely that such a circuit pack caused a new problem. Keep in mind that Packet circuit packs should be checked before non-Packet circuit packs. If the decision is made to remove multiple circuit packs, consider working with an entire carrier at a time to ensure a good granularity. 2. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. 3. If the Packet Bus fault is still present: ■ Determine if the backplane pins in the removed circuit pack’s slot are bent. Use the output from the Maintenance/Test standalone mode and Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4. ■ If the backplane pins are bent, power down the carrier (refer to the "Removing Power" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’, straighten or replace the pins, reinsert the circuit pack, restore power (refer to the ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section in Chapter 5, and repeat Procedure 2, beginning with Step 2, for the same circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction ! Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-29 WARNING: If this is a High or Critical Reliability system, and if the slot is in the Active control carrier, perform an SPE interchange before changing the circuit pack. Follow the procedures presented in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. ■ If the backplane pins are not bent, reinsert the circuit pack(s), and perform Procedure 2 for the next set of circuit packs. 4. If the Packet Bus fault is not present, do the following: ■ Reinsert a circuit pack. If multiple circuit packs have been removed, reinsert the circuit packs one at a time, and repeat the following substeps until all of the circuit packs have been reinserted. ■ Determine if the Packet Bus fault has returned. ■ If the Packet Bus fault has returned, the reinserted circuit pack is defective. Replace the circuit pack and then continue. ■ If the Packet Bus fault does not return when all of the circuit packs have been reinserted, the procedure is completed. Continue with Procedure 3 if all the port circuit packs have been checked, but the Packet Bus fault is still not resolved. Procedure 3 Procedure 3 removes and reinserts control carrier circuit packs one at a time. The Packet Control, Tone-Clock, and Expansion Interface circuit packs are the only processor complex circuit packs that communicate on the Packet Bus. In addition, the Memory 1 and EPN Maintenance Board circuit packs are connected to the Packet Bus in the backplane (while the Memory 2 circuit pack is not). Therefore, these are the only processor complex circuit packs that are likely to cause a Packet Bus problem in a stable system. As a result, Procedure 3 should be performed only on the Packet Control, Memory 1, and EPN Maintenance Board circuit packs in all systems, and on the Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock circuit packs in High and Critical Reliability systems. ! CAUTION: If the TN771 Standalone mode does NOT indicate Packet Bus faults, perform Procedure 3 for ONLY the Packet Control, Expansion Interface, and Tone-Clock circuit packs. Also, problems with the backplane pins need not be checked for. Determining if the problem is resolved by removing circuit packs is sufficient. In a system without High or Critical Reliability, do the following: 1. Power down the control carrier. Refer to the ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-30 2. Remove the suspect circuit pack. 3. As in Procedure 2, determine if the backplane pins in the removed circuit pack’s slot are bent. 4. If the backplane pins are bent, do the following: a. Straighten or replace the pins b. Insert the same circuit pack 5. If the backplane pins are not bent, replace the circuit pack (reinsert the circuit pack if a replacement is not available). 6. Turn the power back on to reboot the system. Refer to the ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 7. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. 8. If the Packet Bus fault is still present, do the following: a. If the circuit pack was reinserted in Step 5, replace the circuit pack, and repeat Procedure 3. b. If the circuit pack was replaced in Step 5, repeat Procedure 3 for the next processor complex circuit pack. 9. If the Packet Bus fault does not recur, the procedure is completed. If Procedure 3 fails to identify the cause of the problem, go to Procedure 4. In a High or Critical Reliability System, do the following: 1. If the circuit pack to be replaced is in the SPE, perform an SPE interchange by entering the reset system interchange command. For an Expansion Interface circuit pack, enter the set exp-link command to switch to the standby expansion link. For a Tone-Clock circuit pack, enter the set tone-clock command to switch to the standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. 2. Remove the newly-inactive suspect circuit pack. For a circuit pack in the processor complex, use the procedures in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. 3. As in Procedure 2, determine if the backplane pins in the removed circuit pack’s slot are bent. 4. If the pins are bent, do the following: a. Power down the carrier. Refer to the ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. b. Straighten or replace the pins. c. Insert the same circuit pack. d. Restore power to the carrier. Refer to the ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 5. If the backplane pins are not bent, insert or replace the circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-31 6. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. 7. If the Packet Bus fault is still present, do the following: a. If the circuit pack was reinserted in Step 5, replace the circuit pack. Then repeat Procedure 3, starting at Step 2. b. If the circuit pack was replaced in Step 5, continue with Step 9. 8. If the Packet Bus fault does not recur, then the procedure is completed. 9. If the suspect circuit pack has been tested in the other control carrier, go to Step 10. Otherwise, implement Step 1, then Steps 2 through 8. 10. Repeat the procedure in the previous step for the next suspect circuit pack. If all processor complex circuit packs have been checked and the problem is not resolved, continue with Procedure 4. Procedure 4 Procedure 4 tries to isolate the failure to a particular set of carriers. Only the circuit packs in those carriers are checked. Procedure 4 is used if the preceding procedures fail, because it can help locate multiple circuit pack failures as well as failures of the carrier hardware. The procedure is also used if there are open leads on the Packet Bus. (The faults detected by Procedures 1 through 3 cannot cause open leads.) In Procedure 4, the TDM/LAN Cable Assemblies and TDM/LAN termination resistor packs are replaced. If this action does not resolve the Packet Bus fault, the carriers are reconfigured by moving the termination resistor packs in such a manner that certain carriers are disconnected from the bus. This is done by moving the termination resistors on the carrier backplanes. To terminate the Packet Bus at the end of a particular carrier, first unplug the cable that connects the carrier to the next carrier and then replace the cable with a termination resistor (see Figure 9-6). When the length of the Packet Bus is modified via this procedure, circuit packs that are essential to system operation (for example, Processor Complex, Tone-Clock) must still be connected to the new ‘‘shortened’’ Packet (and TDM) Bus. In addition, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack (in standalone mode) must be connected to the ‘‘shortened’’ bus. ! WARNING: Power must be removed from the entire port network before any cables or terminators are removed. Failure to do so can cause damage to circuit packs and power supplies and can be hazardous to the technician. After cabling changes are made and verified, power must be restored to the port network. Use the TN771 Standalone mode to determine if the Packet Bus fault is resolved. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Page 9-32 ! CAUTION: Circuit packs in carriers that are not part of the shortened bus are not inserted. As a result, these circuit packs are not alarmed. Ignore these alarms for now. All alarms should be resolved when the cabinet is restored to its original configuration. Terminator TDM/LAN Cable Control Carrier Normal Cabinet (Rear View) Figure 9-7. Modified Cabinet (Rear View) Carrier Rewiring Example Procedure 4 is organized into two parts, as follows: Part 1: 1. Power down the PN. See ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 2. Replace all of the TDM/LAN cables and both TDM/LAN terminators. 3. Restore power to the PN. See ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 4. Determine if the packet bus fault is still present. 5. If the fault is present, go to Part 2. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-33 Part 2: Processor Port Network: 1. Terminate the Packet Bus so that it extends only from the Active control carrier (that is, the carrier that contains the Active SPE) to the carrier that contains the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. To allow this procedure to isolate the failure to the smallest possible number of carriers, place the Maintenance/Test circuit pack into a carrier that contains a processor complex, if possible. 2. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. If so, and if there are shorts on the Packet Bus, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in those carriers that are connected to the ‘‘shortened’’ Packet Bus. (Procedure 2 is performed for port circuit packs, and Procedure 3 is performed for processor complex circuit packs.) 3. If the Packet Bus fault is not present, extend the Packet Bus to another carrier, and repeat the procedure in the previous step. When a carrier that causes the fault to recur is added, and if there are shorts, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in that carrier. 4. If the Packet Bus fault recurs as the Packet Bus is extended, and if Procedures 2 and 3 (if performed) do not resolve the problem, the added carrier(s) that caused the problem to recur are defective and must be replaced. Other Port Networks: 1. Terminate the Packet Bus so that it extends only from the carrier that contains the Active Expansion Interface to the nearest carrier that contains the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. Place the Maintenance/Test circuit pack into a carrier that contains an Expansion Interface circuit pack in order to allow the procedure to isolate the failure to the smallest possible number of carriers. 2. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. If so, and if there are shorts on the Packet Bus, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in those carriers that are connected to the ‘‘shortened’’ Packet Bus. 3. If the Packet Bus fault is not present, extend the Packet Bus to another carrier, and repeat the procedure in the previous step. When a carrier that causes the fault to recur is added, and if there are shorts, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in that carrier. 4. If the packet bus fault recurs as the packet bus is extended, and if Procedures 2 and 3 (if performed) do not resolve the problem, the added carrier(s) that caused the problem to recur are defective and must be replaced. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction Packet Bus Fault Correction Issue 1 August 1997 Page 9-34 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures Escalation Procedures Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 10 Page 10-1 10 For Maintenance Objects on the DEFINITY Wireless Business System (DWBS), refer to the appropriate documentation that accompanies the DWBS. Trouble-clearing is based on the type of indication received, system-alarmed troubles, or user-reported troubles. When viewing the Alarm Log, all major alarms display first, followed by minor alarms, and warning alarms. Resovle the first alarmed entry first because it may affect the rest of the alarmed entries. System-alarmed and user-reported troubles may exist at the same time. Always clear the alarmed troubles first. This often clears the user-reported faults without additional maintenance. Escalation Procedures This document is not intended to solve all troubles. When the limits of these procedures are reached and the problem is not resolved, it is the technician’s responsibility to escalate to a higher level of technical support. Escalation must conform to the procedures in the Technical and Administration Plan. Cabling Precautions ! CAUTION: Do not cut or bend fiber optic cables. Doing so may adversely affect communication between the EPN and the PP N cabinets. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures Cabling Precautions Page 10-2 ! CAUTION: To avoid damaging the cable-to-connector interface when removing any Inter-Carrier Cable, grasp the cable connector, not the cable itself. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Page 10-3 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO 12V-PWR MINOR test card-mem sh 12 Volt Power Supply 12V-PWR WARNING test card-mem sh 12 Volt Power Supply The 12 Volt Power Supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack is required for programming flash memory devices in circuit packs such as the TN786B or TN790 Processor circuit pack and the removable translation card. During the erase and write operations of a flash memory or translation card, the 12 volt power supply must be turned on under the instruction of software. For the read-only operation, the 12 volt power supply is not required. If the 12-volt power supply cannot be turned on, all the erase and write operations to a flash device fail. Features such as "save translation," "save announcements," "system upgrade," "hard patching," and "core dump" always fail in this case. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-1. 12 Volt Power Supply Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test card-mem 12 Any 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) MINOR ON test card-mem 2573 Any 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) WARNING ON test card-mem 1. 2. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Software cannot turn on the 12 volt power supply to provide 12 volt power to the flash memory or to the translation card. Software can turn on the 12 volt power supply, and 12 volt power is available. However, the software cannot turn the power supply off after operations are completed. The 12 volt power remains on. This error does not affect the normal operations involved in accessing the memory or the translation card. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Page 10-4 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table. By clearing error codes associated with the 12 Volt Power Supply Test for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The 12 Volt Power Supply Test can be initiated via either the test card-mem command or the test network-control command. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence X X ND X X ND Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (a) X X ND Memory Card Match Test (#697)2 X X ND Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698)2 X X ND Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699)2 X X ND Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694)2 X ND Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693)2 X ND Order of Investigation 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) 1. 2. 2 Reset Board Sequence D/ND 1 D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Refer to “CARD-MEM (Memory Card)” information for a description of this test. 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) This test is nondestructive. The purpose of the test is to diagnose the 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. No erase and write-to-memory operations are started or verified during the test. The contents of flash memory and of the memory card should not be changed. The test turns on the power supply, and it verifies that 12 volt power appears by reading the control register in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. After the power supply is turned on, the maintenance software waits for three seconds before verifying the appearance of 12 volt power. After the 12 volt power supply can be turned on and verified, the test turns the power supply off and then verifies that the power is off. The control register in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack is read again for the verification. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Page 10-5 If, while this test is running, an application attempts to erase or write a flash memory or a memory card, this test remains active, and the application is barred. Table 10-2. Error Code 1192 12 Volt Power Supply Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation 12 volt power supply is being used by other applications or by maintenance. 1. The 12 volt power supply is in use. Retry the test card-mem command after the maintenance operation application is completed. 2106 ABORT 2114 2108 Internal system error 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. ABORT The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. 109 FAIL The 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack cannot be turned on by the software. 1. Retry the test card-mem command one more time to verify the operation of the 12 volt power supply in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. If the failure indicated by Error Code 109 persists, the TN777B NETCON circuit pack must be replaced with a new circuit pack. Follow the standard procedure for replacing the NETCON circuit pack from the SPE control carrier. 3. After the new TN777B circuit pack is inserted, enter the test card-mem command to verify the operations of the 12 volt power supply in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. The alarm is resolved after the test passes twice. 110 FAIL The 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack cannot be turned off by the software. 1. Retry the test card-mem command one more time to verify the operation of the 12 volt power supply in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. If the failure indicated by Error Code 110 persists, the TN777B NETCON circuit pack should be scheduled for replacement during the next regular maintenance visit. This failure does not cause any service disruption. PASS The 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack is functioning correctly. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-6 ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) ABRI-PORT ABRI-PORT 1. 2. 2 Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MAJOR(b) test port PCSSpp l ASAI ISDN-BRI Port MINOR test port PCSSpp l ASAI ISDN-BRI Port Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., and so forth); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The alarm level for ABRI ports may be administered using the set options command. The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to MAJOR for all ABRI ports in the system. NOTE: Refer to "BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)" for repair procedures. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Page 10-7 AC-POWER AC Power for AC-Powered Systems MO Name (in Alarm Log) AC-POWER 1. Alarm Level WARNING Initial Command to Run1 test environment P Full Name of MO AC Power Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. NOTE: For environment maintenance, PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects in a high or critical reliabilty system are irrelevant. The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet configuration and the type of powering. Also refer to the DC-POWER (DC Power) for environment maintenance strategy. The AC Power MO represents the AC power provided to the system from a wall outlet. The AC power comes from the wall outlet, through the Power Distribution Unit (PDU), if installed, and is then distributed to the various cabinets. The battery charger monitors AC power via fuse F3. See Figure 10-1. If no PDU is installed, the power is supplied directly to each cabinet from each individual wall outlets. When the system loses power (for example, a power outage in the building), a Major alarm is logged against AC Power and the system goes on battery backup, which is known as Nominal Power Holdover (NPH). If power is restored before the NPH time expires, the alarm is resolved. Each basic control cabinet has separate batteries for NPH. The nominal power holdover provided is as follows: ! ■ The batteries power the system for 10 seconds in a PPN cabinet, for 15 seconds in an EPN cabinet, and for 10 minutes in the control carrier in a standard reliability system. ■ The batteries also provide system power for five minutes in the control carrier in high and critical reliability systems. WARNING: Before powering down a cabinet or carrier that contains DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs (TN566), first power down the AUDIX unit to avoid damaging the AUDIX software. Instructions for powering down this unit are in the "DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", on the circuit pack, and in DEFINITY AUDIX documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Page 10-8 CONVENIENCE OUTLET F3 CONVENIENCE OUTLET F6 20A F8 20A 2A F7 15A FUSE F7 IS FOR CONVENIENCE OUTLETS BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FUSE LOCATIONS FUSE LOCATIONS THE 3 FANS ARE ACTUALLY A H D 1 ON BACK OF CABINET AND S4 ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM S4 FRONT OF CABINET. A FILTER I AC R 631 CARRIER B DA AC F3 F 631 L DB F6 O 631 W CARRIER A 631 DB DA NOTE: THE 631AR AND 631BR MAY BE USED AS POWER DISTRIBUTION THE CARRIER POWER UNIT BATTERY & AC RING BATTERY DIST. GENERATOR PROVIDED A TN736 OR TN752 POWER UNIT CIRCUIT CHARGER S3 UNIT PACK IS IN SAME CARRIER FRONT VIEW Figure 10-1. Small Cabinet Environment Components (AC-POWER) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Page 10-9 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-3. Error Type AC Power Error Log Entries Aux Data Alarm Level Associated Test On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 513 Any AC Power Query Test (#78) WARNING OFF test environment P sh r 1 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. AC Power Query Test (#78) Table 10-4. Error Code 1000 TEST #78 AC Power Query Test Test Result ABORT Description / Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Resolve all DC-POWER alarms. Then, repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 Error Code, resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a high or critical reliability system PPN, PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Repeat the test. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Table 10-4. Error Code 1 Page 10-10 TEST #78 AC Power Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description / Recommendation NOTE: For a Global AC MCC (J58890CH) use the procedures outlined in step 2. The switch is currently without AC power. ! WARNING: Turn off power to the 397C Battery Charger before removing Fuse F5. 1. Check for AC at the wall outlet. a. If there is no AC power at the wall outlet, then the problem is not with the system itself. Power must be restored to the wall outlet. b. If there is AC power at the wall outlet, then there could be a problem with the Battery or Battery chargers. Resolve all alarms logged against POWER (Battery & Battery Charger), and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the fuse F5 may have opened. Replace fuse F5 and rerun the test. If the test still fails, then the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a high or critical reliability system PPN, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system may be incorrectly reporting the problem. c. alarms against these MOs, and rerun the test. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Page 10-11 TEST #78 AC Power Query Test — Continued Table 10-4. Error Code Test Result 1 FAIL (cont’d.) (cont’d.) Description / Recommendation 2. Procedures for a Global MCC (J58890CH): a. For a nominal holdover system if there is no AC power at the wall outlet, then the problem is not with the system itself. Power must be restored to the wall outlet. b. If there is AC power at the wall outlet, then there could be a problem with the Rectifiers (RM850), Battery Interface Unit, or battery. Resolve all alarms logged against the POWER Maintenance Object, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the BIU may be defective. Check to see if the BOD alarm LED is “on”, on the BIU. If the BOD LED is “on” replace the Battery Interface Unit (BIU). If the BOD LED is “off” and the BOK LED is “on” then the SYSAM or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack may be incorrectly reporting the problem. Resolve all alarms against these Maintenance Objects and rerun the test. 100 FAIL The switch is currently without AC power, and AC Power maintenance is in the middle of timing the NPH interval. 1. Follow the repair steps outlined above for Error Code 1. PASS The PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system has reported that the switch has AC power. If there is no AC power at the wall outlet, then look for and resolve all alarms against the appropriate MO listed. Continued on next page AC Power for DC-Powered Systems MO Name (in Alarm Log) AC-POWER 1. Alarm Level WARNING Initial Command to Run1 test environment P Full Name of MO AC Power Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. NOTE: For environment maintenance, the PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects in a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Page 10-12 The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet configuration and the type of powering. Refer to the "DC-POWER (Single-Carrier Cabinet Power)" information for environment maintenance strategy. In a DC-powered multicarrier cabinet system, the AC-POWER maintenance object still exists, but serves no functional purpose. Because the system cannot determine the type of powering provided, all AC-POWER tests should always either pass or abort. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-5. Error Type 0 1 513 1. AC Power Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 Any AC Power Query Test (#78) WARNING OFF test environment P sh r 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table. By clearing error codes associated with the AC Power Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-6. System Technician-Demanded Tests: AC-Power Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) (b) X X ND Order of Investigation Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Table 10-6. Page 10-13 System Technician-Demanded Tests: AC-Power — Continued Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) (b) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c) X X ND Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) (d) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Notes: a. Refer to "POWER" for a description of this test. b. Refer to "CARR-POW" for a description of this test. c. Refer to "EMG-XFER” for a description of this test. d. Refer to "CABINET" for a description of this test. e. Refer to "EXT-DEV ADMIN? N” or "EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y" for a description of this test. f. Refer to "RING-GEN" for a description of this test. AC Power Query Test (#78) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of AC power to the switch. In a DC-powered system, this test should never fail. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures AC-POWER Table 10-7. Error Code Page 10-14 TEST #78 AC Power Query Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. any FAIL The Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system is incorrectly reporting a problem with AC power. If this test fails, the problem is with the circuit pack and not with AC-POWER. The suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. PASS All that can be inferred is that the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system is working properly. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADM-CONN (Administered Connection) Page 10-15 ADM-CONN (Administered Connection) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ADM-CONN MAJOR status administered-connection N Administered Connection ADM-CONN MINOR status administered-connection N Administered Connection ADM-CONN WARNING status administered-connection N Administered Connection 1. Where N is an appropriate Administered Connection number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. An Administered Connection provides an end-to-end connection between two access endpoints or data modules. This connection is automatically established when the administered connection is administered and is due to be active. An error is logged when an administered connection cannot be established or when an established administered connection fails. An alarm is logged when a connection cannot initially be established or fails and cannot be reestablished. An alarming strategy is supported on a per administered connection basis. An alarm is raised for a connection when either the number of consecutive failed attempts to establish the connection reaches the alarm threshold or it can be determined that a failed attempt to establish was due to an administered error. The alarm raised ("major," "minor," "warning," or "none") is specified in the "Alarm Type" field of the Administered Connection Administration Form. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-8. Administered Connection Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 (a)(b)(c)(k) Any None Any OFF None 1 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e) Any None Any OFF None 2 (a)(b)(c)(f) Any None Any OFF None 6 (a)(b)(c)(g) Any None Any OFF None 16 (a)(b)(c)(k) Any None Any OFF None 17 (a)(c)(h) Any None Any OFF None 18 (a)(b)(c)(i) Any None Any OFF None Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADM-CONN (Administered Connection) Table 10-8. Page 10-16 Administered Connection Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 21 (a)(b)(c)(g) Any None Any OFF None 22 (a)(b)(c)(d)(j) Any None Any OFF None 28 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e) Any None Any OFF None 29 (a)(b)(c)(k) Any None Any OFF None 31 (a)(b)(c)(g) Any None Any OFF None 34 (a)(b)(c)(l) Any None Any OFF None 38 (a)(b)(c)(m) Any None Any OFF None 40 (a)(b)(c)(l) Any None Any OFF None 41 (a)(b)(c)(m) Any None Any OFF None 42 (a)(b)(c)(l) Any None Any OFF None 43 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 44 (a)(b)(c)(l) Any None Any OFF None 50 (a)(b)(c)(d)(n) Any None Any OFF None 52 (a)(b)(c)(d)(o) Any None Any OFF None 54 (a)(b)(c)(o) Any None Any OFF None 58 (a)(b)(c)(l) Any None Any OFF None 65 (a)(b)(c)(d)(p) Any None Any OFF None 66 (a)(b)(c)(d)(p) Any None Any OFF None 69 (a)(b)(c)(d)(p) Any None Any OFF None 81 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 82 (a)(b)(c)(r) Any None Any OFF None 88 (a)(b)(c)(d)(s) Any None Any OFF None 91 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 95 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 96 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 97 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 98 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 99 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 100 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 102 (a)(b)(c)(i) Any None Any OFF None Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADM-CONN (Administered Connection) Table 10-8. Page 10-17 Administered Connection Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 111 (a)(b)(c)(q) Any None Any OFF None 127 (a)(b)(c)(g) Any None Any OFF None Continued on next page Notes: a. These errors have no specific test associated with them. Refer to Notes b through p for an explanation and appropriate action. b. These errors are valid only for administered connection established over ISDN facilities; only error 127 is valid for administered connection established over non-ISDN facilities (or between two endpoints on the same switch). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Aux Data 1—Administered connection establishment failed Aux Data 2—Active administered connection failed; attempting reestablishment via auto restoration Aux Data 3—Auto restoration failed Aux Data 4—Active administered connection failed; attempting reestablishment via fast retry Aux Data 5—Fast retry failed c. These errors are typically associated with administrative problems and are not expected to be of a temporary nature. Therefore, the administered connection is not retried and the failure is alarmed immediately (the alarm threshold specified by the customer is ignored). d. The address of the destination endpoint is: an unassigned number (1); has an invalid number format (28); or is restricted form terminating calls ("Access Denied") [due to COR (Class of Restriction)]. Verify that the destination address is correct and that the destination endpoint is administered. The destination endpoint is not administered on the switch where this error is logged. e. A request has been made to use a transit network or common carrier that cannot be accessed. Check the routing pattern used by this Administered Connection and verify that the inter-exchange carrier specified is correct. f. The exact failure cause is unknown or has been mapped to one of these values. If this is not a temporary condition, try reversing the direction of the Administered Connection (that is, originate the Administered Connection from the destination switch). This may yield another failure cause. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADM-CONN (Administered Connection) Page 10-18 g. The destination endpoint is not available. Check the status of the destination endpoint (using status access-endpoint or status data-module) and verify that the endpoint is not busy or otherwise unavailable (for example, out-of-service). The status for the destination endpoint is not available on the switch where this error is logged. h. This switch sent an ISDN message to another switch, which either did not respond (18) or did not respond within the allotted time (102). This could be due to link failure or congestion or outage at the other switch. i. The address of the destination endpoint has changed. Verify that the new address is correct and change the Administered Connection accordingly. The destination endpoint is not administered on the switch logging this error. j. Indicate that a resource (for example, a circuit or bearer capability) required by the administered cConnection is not presently available. k. A network failure (38) or temporary failure (41) has occurred. Error Log entries for other maintenance objects (for example, DS1-BD or ISDN-LNK) may indicate a local problem. l. A request to use a network service has been denied because the service has not been purchased. Check the routing pattern used by this Administered Connection and verify that the service type is correct. If the service type appears correct, check with the customer or network provider or both to determine what services have been purchased by the customer. m. Indicate that outgoing calls may be barred on the originating switch (52) or that incoming calls may be barred on the destination switch (54). To restore an administered connection failure, issue the status administered connection command for current administered connection state (observe the retry count). If the administered connection state is "failed," then verify and correct the Administered Connection Administration Form. n. The requested bearer capability (65), channel type (66), or facility (69) is not implemented or is unknown to the network. Check the address of the destination endpoint and the routing pattern used by this Administered Connection, and verify that they are correct and available. o. These errors indicate that an ISDN protocol error has occurred. p. The destination endpoint (or some intermediate facility) is not compatible with the originating endpoint. Check the BCC fields of the routing pattern used by this Administered Connection. Also, check if the originating and destination endpoints are compatible (for example, the originating access endpoint is voice-grade data, and the destination access endpoint is 64k data). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack) Page 10-19 ADX8D-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) ADX8D-BD 1. Alarm Level MINOR or WARNINGS Initial Command To Run1 test board PCSS sh Full Name of MO AUDIX Circuit Pack UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). The ADX8D-BD maintenance object represents a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack (sometimes called Embedded AUDIX) operating in digital-port (DP) mode. For circuit pack problems, see “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)”. Port level problems are covered by ADX8D-PT. DEFINITY AUDIX consists of two circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port cabinet. The tests described in this manual apply only to switch-side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-20 ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command To Run1 Full Name of MO ADX8D-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp l AUDIX Digital Port ADX8D-PT WARNING test port PCSSpp sh AUDIX Digital Port 1. UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). pp is the two digit port number (01, 02, ...). The ADX8D-PT maintenance object represents a port on a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack (sometimes called Embedded AUDIX) operating in digital-port (DP) mode. The maintenance strategy for ports on the TN566 operating in control-link mode is described in ADX16A-PT. The tests described in this section apply only to switch-side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs: the TN566 Multifunction Board (MFB) and the TN2169 Alarm Board (ALB). Because of its size this combination occupies 5 slots, but only 1 slot is functional as far as the switch is concerned. The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as ‘‘AUDIX-reserved’’ slots (or ADXDP-RS/ADX8D-RS.) In DP mode the TN566 pack supports up to 8 voice ports, each with a primary information channel and a secondary information channel. Ports are administered in increments of two. When a call to a station with an AUDIX login is not answered, AUDIX answers the call using one of the available voice ports. Unlike other AUDIX systems, DEFINITY AUDIX is not an adjunct. ! CAUTION: Never do any of the following without first shutting down AUDIX. Follow instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate: ■ Remove DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs ■ Cycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs ■ Remove power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-21 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-9. Error Type 1 DEFINITY AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board 0 Any Any 1(a) 40987 None WARNING OFF 1(b) 1 to 20 None WARNING OFF 15(c) Any None 18(d) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF 23(e) 0 None WARNING OFF None WARNING ON WARNING OFF 0 130(f) 257(g) 40971 None 513(h) Any None 1537(i) 40968 None Any ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2049 NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) MIN/WRN2 None 3840(k) 40965 None 3840(l) 41029 None 2. test port PCSSpp sh test port PCSSpp l r 3 MIN/WRN 1. release port PCSSpp ON Voice & Ctrl. Local Loop Test (#13) 40967 test port PCSSpp sh r 1 2 1793 2305(j) Test to Clear Value Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. The user may experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem that is detected by the port circuit. If this problem exists, replace the circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). Once the problem is resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined time. b. At least 15 off-board problems have been detected with the link to the voice port. When an error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is incremented. Also see Note (a). c. This is an internal type error that occurs when an audit request fails. d. The port is busied-out by command. You can release the port via the release port PCSSpp command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-22 e. The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed. The alarm will clear when a circuit pack is inserted. f. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the AUDIX circuit pack (see pcaution at the beginning of this section). g. Something is interfering with transmitting to the voice port. This is usually an on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are received. h. AUDIX is not available to the switch, possibly due to a busyout on the AUDIX system. Check out the AUDIX system referring DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110, if necessary. i. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to some problem with the link to the voice port. This can be ignored if no user complaints are received. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack (see precaution at the beginning of this section). Once the problem is resolved, the alarm is retired after a certain period of time. j. The link between the circuit pack and the voice port is successfully reset. No craft action is necessary. k. No voice ports are connected to the DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack. No maintenance action is required. l. The message buffer in the circuit pack is full. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when you are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13) X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) X ND Order of Investigation 1. Short Test Sequence D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NO-OP Tests The maintenance strategy for DEFINITY AUDIX emulates the one for DIG-LINE. The tests listed below apply only to DIG-LINE and not to DEFINITY AUDIX. These are referred to as NO-OP tests, and they always return PASS. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-23 ■ Electronic Power Feed Test (#11) ■ Station Lamp Updates Test (#16) ■ Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17) NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) This test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence, and it takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Crosstalk testing is performed on both the primary information channel (voice) and on the secondary information channel (data) associated with each DEFINITY AUDIX port. If this test fails on either channel, the voice port is taken out-of-service. Table 10-10. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code 1 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may not have been available. Also, the port may have been busy during the test. 1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, you must wait until the port is idle. When the port is idle, try (a). 2 ABORT System resources may not have been available, or the port may have been busy during the test. Try (a). 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, you must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Try (a). 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Try (a). 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if it is not handling heavy traffic, try (a). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-24 Table 10-10. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 1003 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. Try (a). 1004 ABORT The port was put in use during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until the port is idle before testing. 1020 ABORT Test disabled by background testing. Use the status station command to determine when the voice port is available for testing. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. Try (a). 1 2 FAIL The NPE of the tested port is transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. Failure code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the primary channel. Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the secondary channel. 1. Replace the circuit pack . PASS The port is using its allocated time slots correctly. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections. Continued on next page Note: a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13) This test checks the information and control channels between the Switch Processing Element (SPE) and the DEFINITY AUDIX port circuit. First, the primary information (voice) channel loop back test is run. While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel Loop Around Test is performed. The Loop Around Test for the secondary information (data) channel is then performed. This test is the same as the primary information channel loop around test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-25 Next, a Conference Test is implemented for the primary information channel. This test is the same as Conference Test #6. Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the four tests run. If any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped. Table 10-11. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error. Try (a). 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, you must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Try (a). 1001 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. Try (a). 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or may have time slots that are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors, and is not handling heavy traffic, try (a). 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. 3. If neither condition exists, try (a). 1004 ABORT The port was put in use during the test. Use the display port PCSSpp to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, you must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Try (a). 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. Try (a). 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-26 Table 10-11. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation 7 FAIL Conference Test failed on the primary channel. Some users may not notice a disruption in service. In extreme cases, the conferencing feature may not work at all. 14 FAIL The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port. 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port. This failure could also be disruptive to other users. 16 FAIL The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port. None FAIL The test failed for reasons external to the DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack by using the test board PCSS s command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and if the test still fails, replace the AUDIX circuit pack (see precaution at the beginning of this section). PASS Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All channels are transmitting properly. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to 10 times and see if it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-B (16 Port AUDIX Circuit Pack) Page 10-27 ADX16D-B (16 Port AUDIX Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command To Run1 Full Name of MO ADX16D-B MINOR test board PCSS sh AUDIX Circuit Pack ADX16D-B WARNING test board PCSS sh AUDIX Circuit Pack 1. UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). The ADX16D-BD maintenance object represents a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack combination operating in 16 port mode digital (DP). For circuit-pack-level problems, see “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)”. Port-level maintenance is covered by ADX16D-PT. DEFINITY AUDIX consists of 2 circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port carrier. The tests described in this manual apply only to switch-side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy of its own that is described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack) Page 10-28 ADX16A-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) ADXCL-BD or \ADX16A-BD 1. Alarm Level MINOR, or WARNINGS Initial Command To Run1 test board PCSS sh Full Name of MO AUDIX Circuit Pack UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). The ADX16A-BD maintenance object represents a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack combination operating in control-link (CL) mode. For circuit-pack-level problems, see “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)”. Port-level maintenance is covered by ADX16A-PT. DEFINITY AUDIX consists of 2 circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port carrier. The tests described in this manual apply only to switch-side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-29 ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) ADX16D-P 1. Alarm Level MINOR or WARNINGS Initial Command To Run1 test port PCSSpp l Full Name of MO AUDIX Digital Port UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2-44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). pp is the two digit port number (01, 02, ...). ! CAUTION: Never do any of the following without first shutting down AUDIX. Follow the instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate: ■ Remove DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs ■ Cycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs ■ Remove power to a carrier or cabinet containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack. The ADX16D-P maintenance object represents a port on a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack operating in digital-port (DP) mode. The maintenance strategy for ports on the TN566 operating in control-link mode is described in ADX16A-PT. The tests described in this section apply only to switch-side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs: the TN566 Multifunction Board (MFB) and the TN2169 Alarm Board (ALB). Because of its size this combination occupies 5 slots, but only 1 slot is functional as far as the system is concerned. The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as ‘‘AUDIX-reserved’’ slots (or ADX16-RES/ADX16D-RS). In 16 Port DP mode, the TN566 pack supports up to 16 voice ports, each with a primary information channel and a secondary information channel. Ports are administered in increments of two. When a call to a station with an AUDIX login is not answered, AUDIX answers the call using one of the available voice ports. Unlike other AUDIX systems, DEFINITY AUDIX is not an adjunct. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-30 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-12. DEFINITY AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries Error Type 0 1 Aux Data 0 Associated Test Any Alarm Level Any On/Off Board Any 1(a) 40987 None WARNING OFF 1(b) 1 to 20 None WARNING OFF 15(c) Any None 18(d) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF 23(e) 0 None WARNING OFF None WARNING ON 130(f) 257(g) 40971 None 513(h) Any None 1537(i) 40968 Test to Clear Value test port PCSSpp sh r 1 release port PCSSpp test port PCSSpp sh None WARNING OFF 1793 Voice and Control Local Loop TEST (#13) MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2049 NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2305(j) 40967 None 3840(k) 40965 None 3840(l) 41029 None 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. The user may experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem that is detected by the port circuit. If this problem exists, replace the circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). Once the problem is resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined time. b. At least 15 off-board problems have been detected with the link to the voice port. When an error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is incremented. Also see Note a, above. c. This is an internal type error that occurs when an audit request fails. d. The port is busied-out by command. Release the port with the release port PCSSpp command. e. The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed. The alarm will clear when a circuit pack is inserted. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-31 f. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reseat or replace the AUDIX circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). g. Something is interfering with transmitting to the voice port. This is usually an on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are received. h. AUDIX is not available to the switch, possibly due to a busyout on the AUDIX system. Refer to DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110, if necessary. i. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to some problem with the link to the voice port. This can be ignored if no user complaints are received. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). Once the problem is resolved, the alarm is retired after a certain period of time. j. The link between the circuit pack and the voice port is successfully reset. No craft action is necessary. k. No voice ports are connected to the DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack. No maintenance action is required. l. The message buffer in the circuit pack is full. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13) X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) X ND Order of Investigation 1. Short Test Sequence D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NO-OP Tests The maintenance strategy for DEFINITY AUDIX emulates the one for DIG-LINE. The tests listed below apply only to DIG-LINE and not to DEFINITY AUDIX. These tests always return PASS. ■ Electronic Power Feed Test (#11) ■ Station Lamp Updates Test (#16) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-32 ■ Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17) ■ Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test (1201) NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) This test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence, and it takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Crosstalk testing is performed on both the primary information channel (voice) and on the secondary information channel (data) associated with each DEFINITY AUDIX port. If this test fails on either channel, the voice port is taken out-of-service. Table 10-13. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code 1 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may not have been available. Also, the port may have been busy during the test. 1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for this test. Wait until the port is idle (a). 2 ABORT System resources may not have been available, or the port may have been busy during the test. 1. Check if port is being used try (a) 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Refer to “Status” commands in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states. Wait until the port is idle before testing. 1. If the port status is idle, try (a) 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Try (a) 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if it is not handling heavy traffic, try (a) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-33 Table 10-13. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 1003 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log. 1004 ABORT The port was put in use during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Refer to “Status” commands in Chapter 8 for explanations of all possible states. Wait until the port is idle before testing. 1020 ABORT Test disabled via background testing. Use the status station command to determine when the voice port is available for testing. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period (a). 1 2 FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. Failure code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the primary channel. Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the secondary channel. 1. Replace the circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). PASS The port is using its allocated time slots correctly. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections. Continued on next page Note: a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13) This test checks the information and control channels between the Switch Processing Element (SPE) and the DEFINITY AUDIX port circuit. The SPE sends a message to loop around both the information and control channels for the port. First, the primary information (voice) channel loop back test is run. While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel Loop Around Test is performed. The Loop Around Test for the secondary Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-34 information (data) channel is then performed. This test is the same as the primary information channel loop around test. Next, a Conference Test is implemented for the primary information channel. This test is the same as Conference Test #6. Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the four tests run. If any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped. Table 10-14. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error (a) 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Refer to “Status” commands in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for explanations of all possible states. Wait until the port is idle before retesting, then try (a). 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available; try (a). 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots that are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and if it is not handling heavy traffic, try (a). 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. Try (a). 1004 ABORT The port was put in use during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp to determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Try (a). 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. Try (a). 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port) Page 10-35 Table 10-14. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation 7 FAIL Conference Test failed on the primary channel. In some cases, users may not notice a disruption in service. In extreme cases, the conferencing feature may not work at all. 14 FAIL The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port. 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and AUDIX is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port. This failure could also be disruptive to other users. 16 FAIL The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port. None FAIL The test failed for reasons external to the AUDIX. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the tone detector circuit pack by using the test board PCSS s command. 2. Resolve any problems detected on the tone generator circuit pack or tone detector circuit pack. 3. If the tone generator and tone detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and if the test still fails, replace the AUDIX (see caution at the beginning of this section). PASS Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All channels are transmitting properly. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to 10 times and see if it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections. Continued on next page Notes: a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-36 ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command To Run1 Full Name of MO ADXCL-PT or ADX16A-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp l AUDIX Analog Line/ Control Link ADXCL-PT or ADX16A-PT WARNING test port PCSSpp sh AUDIX Analog Line/ Control Link 1. UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). pp is the two digit port number (01, 02, ...). ! CAUTION: Never do any of the following without first shutting down AUDIX. Follow the instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate: ■ Remove DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs ■ Cycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs ■ Remove power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs The ADX16A-PT maintenance object represents a port on a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack that is operating in control-link (CL) mode. For circuit-pack-level problems (ADX16A-BD or ANL-16-BD), see “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)”. For port-level problems with AUDIX operating in digital-port mode, see ADXDP-PT/ADX8D-PT. The tests described in this section apply only to switch-side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs: the TN566 Multifunction Board (MFB) and the TN2169 Alarm Board (ALB). Because of its size this combination occupies 5 slots, but only 1 slot is functional as far as the switch is concerned. The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as ‘‘AUDIX-reserved’’ slots. In CL mode the TN566 pack supports up to 16 voice ports. When a call to a station with an AUDIX login is not answered, AUDIX answers the call using one of the available voice ports. Unlike other AUDIX systems, DEFINITY AUDIX is not an adjunct. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-37 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-15. DEFINITY AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link Error Log Entries Error Type 0 1 Aux Data 0 Associated Test Any Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 release station extension 1(a) 40977 None 18 0 busyout station WRN ON 23(b) 0 None WRN OFF None WRN ON test port PCSSpp sh 130(c) 257(d) 40973 None 513(e) Any None 1025(f) Loop Around Test (#161) MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 1281 Conference Test (#7) MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 1537 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This indicates that no terminal equipment was present when ringing was attempted. Execute the short test port PCSSpp command. b. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically installed. The alarm will be cleared when the circuit pack is installed. c. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reseat or replace the circuit pack. d. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This error indicates that ringing voltage is absent. If only one analog circuit pack in the system has this problem, then replace the circuit pack. If only analog circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error, then the ringing generator may not be connected to this carrier. If analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error, check the ringing generator. e. AUDIX is not available to the switch. Check the AUDIX system, referring to DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-38 f. The TDM bus is out of service. See the “TDM-BUS” section. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Loop Around Test #161 for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Loop Around Test (#161) X ND Conference Test (#7) X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Order of Investigation 1. Short Test Sequence D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NO-OP Tests The maintenance strategy for DEFINITY AUDIX emulates the one for ANL-16-L. The tests listed below apply only to ANL-16-L and not to DEFINITY AUDIX. These tests always return PASS. ■ Battery Feed Test (#35) ■ Audits and Updates Test (#36) ■ Station Present Test (#48) Tests 36 and 48 ABORT when AUDIX is not running. NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) This test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of the long test sequence and takes about 25 seconds to complete. Table 10-16. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-39 Table 10-16. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before testing. Try (a). 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. Try (a). 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, then try (a). 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. Then, try (a). 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before testing. Try (a). 1005 ABORT This condition indicates that the test is not applicable when the analog port is used in a combined modem pool. This error can be ignored. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. 1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter the change station command and change the ‘‘Test?’’ field on the Station Form from ‘‘n’’ to ‘‘y.’’ 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2012 ABORT System could not respond to this request. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-40 Table 10-16. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. Continued on next page Note: a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times Conference Circuit Test (#7) This test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. Table 10-17. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. (a) 1000 ABORT System resources required to run test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle before retesting.(a) 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle before testing. Try (a). 1018 ABORT Test disabled by administration. This only applies to analog stations. 1. To enable the test for the analog station being tested, enter the change station command and change the ‘‘Test?’’ field on the Station Form from ‘‘n’’ to ‘‘y.’’ 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-41 Table 10-17. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code Any Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Note: a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Loop Around Test (#161) This test is designed to check the on-board transmission capabilities of the NPE on the analog port. Table 10-18. TEST #161 Loop Around Test Error Code 1000 Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle before testing. 1. If the port status is idle, try (a). 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, try (a). Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link) Page 10-42 Table 10-18. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 1003 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. 3. If neither condition exists, try (a). 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until the port is idle before testing. Try (a). 1018 ABORT Test disabled by administration. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter the change station command and change the ‘‘Test?’’ field on the Station Form from ‘‘n’’ to ‘‘y.’’ 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a). FAIL The reflective Loop Around Test failed. This causes noisy or unreliable connections or other users calling this port may hear an echo. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station equipment. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. Continued on next page Note: a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ALARM-PT (ALARM PORT) Page 10-43 ALARM-PT (ALARM PORT) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ALARM-PT MIN test port PCSSpp l Alarm-Port ALARM-PT WRN test port PCSSpp sh Alarm-Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The Alarm Port Maintenance Object provides on-board maintenance for an analog line port that is administered as an external device alarm port. Tests are provided to verify the analog line port’s ability to detect an external device alarm. The External Device Alarm (EXT-DEV) Maintenance Object is used for the off-board external device alarm. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-44 ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ANL-16-L MIN test port PCSSpp l 16-Port Neon Analog Line ANL-16-L WRN test port PCSSpp sh release station 16-Port Neon Analog Line 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The following are 16-Port Analog Line circuit packs: TN746 TN746B TN468 [G3iV2-386] TN749 [G3iV2-386] TN468B [G3iV2-386] TN2135 [G3iV2-386] TN2144 [G3iV2-386] TN2149 [G3iV2-386] These circuit packs provide 16 ports for analog voice terminals. The TN746, TN468, and TN749 support only single-line, on-premises/in-building, analog voice terminals, and not off-premises stations, since these circuit packs are not equipped with lightning protection. The TN746B, TN2144, TN2149, and TN468B support both on-premises and off-premises (that is, out-of-building) analog voice terminals. The TN468, TN468B, TN479, TN2135, TN2144, and TN2149 do NOT support the neon message waiting feature. Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment, it should be disabled via the change station command. However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #7, #161, and #35 as well as Test #48. No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 16-Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack is performed, except to determine whether or not the terminal is connected. Failures of the neon message waiting lamp power and the common ringing application circuitry are reported as part of the Common Port Circuit Pack errors (see errors 1281 and 1793 in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-45 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-19. 16-Port Neon Analog Line Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test 0 Any 1 (a) 40960 40977 none 15 (b) Any Audits and Updates Test (#36) 18 0 0 130 (c) 257 (d) 40973 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 busyout station WRN ON release station None WRN ON test port PCSSpp sh none 513 (e) Station Present Test (#48) WRN OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 2 769 Battery Feed Test (#35) MIN/WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 1025 Loop Around Test (#161) MIN/WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 1281 Conference Test (#7) MIN/WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 1537 1. 2. NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MIN/WRN Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This indicates that no terminal equipment was present when ringing was attempted. Execute the short test port PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for the results of Test #48. ■ 40960—indicates that too many simultaneous incoming ringing attempts were made on this board. Only four ports on a board may be ringing simultaneously. A fifth incoming call will cause an inline error from the board. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) ■ Page 10-46 40977—indicates that no terminal equipment was connected when ringing was attempted. Run the short Test via the test port PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for the results of Test #48. b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. d. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This error indicates that ringing voltage is absent. If only one Analog circuit pack in the system has this problem, then replace the circuit pack. If only Analog circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error, then the ringing generator may not be connected to this carrier. If Analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error, then it is probably a problem with the ringing generator. e. Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment, it should be disabled using the change station command. However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #7, #161, and #35 as well as Test #48. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery Feed Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery Feed Test (#35) X X ND Station Present Test (#48) X X ND Loop Around Test (#161) X ND Conference Test (#7) X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND X ND Order of Investigation Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-47 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-20. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-48 Table 10-20. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 1003 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for a particular station being tested, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from 'n' to 'y.' 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-49 Table 10-20. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code Any Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation. 3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails. 0 PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-50 instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Table 10-21. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from 'n' to 'y.' Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-51 Table 10-21. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 2. If there are no TONE-PT errors in the error log, retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Issue the display port and the status station commands to determine if the station is idle. If the station is found to be idle, issue the test port command for this port. 2. If the test continues to fail, issue the busyout port and the release port commands, and then retest the port. 3. If the test still fails, replace the board. 0 PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-52 Battery Feed Test (also called Port Diagnostic Test) (#35) The battery feed chip provides power to the telephone equipment, signaling, rotary dial pulsing, transmission, and balance. This test checks the signaling and switchhook capabilities of the battery feed chip by terminating the port, applying battery, and by trying to detect a current. NOTE: For the TN746B 16-Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack, Test #35 always "passes." No actual testing is performed on the TN746B while the test is running. Test #35 operates in the normal manner for TN746. Table 10-22. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-53 Table 10-22. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test — Continued Error Code 1018 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from 'n' to 'y.' 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. FAIL The port's battery feed chip is unable to supply sufficient power to the terminal equipment. This could be a marginal test, and the terminal equipment may be operating satisfactorily. 1. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, determine whether the customer is experiencing problems on this line. Replace the circuit pack only if the customer is experiencing problems. 0 PASS The port’s battery feed chip is able to provide power to the station equipment to detect on-/off-hook, but may not be able to supply power for touch-tones. If touch-tones are inoperative on this station, then replace the circuit pack because this port is inoperative. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-54 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36) This test updates the Analog port’s message lamp state (if it has one) and translations (such as station type, dial type, network connection) with information kept in the software. The software is updated with the switchhook state reported by the port processor. When the ringer is in the off state, this test also turns off the station’s ringer to prevent constant ringing caused by defective hardware. Table 10-23. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 1006 ABORT This port has been busied out by command, or taken out-of-service by the failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test. 1. Look in the error log for error type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error is present, release the port with the release station extension command, and run the test again. 2. Look in the error log for error type 1025 (NPE crosstalk test failed) for this port. If this error is present, investigate the errors associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test 6. 3. Make sure that the terminal is connected and in service, and then retest. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-55 Table 10-23. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test — Continued Error Code 1 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation This does not indicate a hardware problem. The switchhook audit failed. The other updates were not performed because of this failure. This may occur when the audit is performed at the same time that the terminal equipment goes off-hook. Use the status station command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. When the port becomes available for testing, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem. However, there may be an internal software error. The message waiting lamp update failed. The translation and ringer updates were not performed because of this failure. 7 FAIL The translation update failed. This does not indicate a hardware problem. However, there may be an internal software error. The ringer update was not performed because of this failure. 8 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem. However, there may be an internal software error. The ringer update failed. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 0 PASS The software and the port processor have the same status. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Station Present Test (also called Ringing Application Test) (#48) This test provides a burst of ringing current to the terminal equipment and detects that current flows. This test ascertains whether terminal equipment is connected to the port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-56 This test may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment, it should be disabled using the Tests field of the station administration screen form. However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #7, #161, and #35 as well as Test #48. Table 10-24. TEST #48 Station Present Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 1008 ABORT Could not allocate a ringing circuit. Either all the ringing circuits are in use or the ringing generator is defective or it is not wired correctly. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN errors in the Error Log. If an ABORT 1008 occurs for this test on other circuit packs as well, then the ringing generator may be defective or is not wired correctly (see errors for RING-GEN). If it doesn’t occur on other ports, then all four ring phases are in use. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-57 Table 10-24. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued Error Code 1018 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the brief ringing disturbance that this test may cause). 1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from 'n' to 'y.' 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. FAIL The terminal equipment is not connected to the circuit pack. Some terminal equipment such as modems may fail even when connected properly. 1. Remotely test the equipment. 2. If the test fails again, look for RING-GEN errors in the error log. If present, refer to the RING-GEN (analog ring generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. Check all of the wiring between the station equipment and the switch. Then, run the test again. 4. If the test still fails, the set may be defective. Check the set, and replace it, if necessary. 5. Some terminal equipment could fail even when it is connected properly. If this is the case, disable the test using the change station extension command (enter 'n' into the Test field). Note that this action also disables tests 6, 7, 161, and 35 on this port. PASS The station is connected properly to the switch. This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far from the switch. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-58 Table 10-24. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Loop Around Test (#161) Each Analog port consists of: ■ an NPE for port connectivity and gain, and conferencing functionality ■ a code that converts the digital signals of the TDM Bus to analog signals ■ a battery feed chip that provides power to the telephone set for signaling, dial pulsing, transmission, and balance This test is designed to check the on-board transmission capabilities of the NPE, the codec, and the battery feed chip of the analog port. A Tone Detector and a Tone Generator talk and listen on the same pair of time slots as the Analog Port. The Analog Port is then instructed to go into loop around mode (see the following below). The test passes if the signal measured by the Tone Detector is within acceptable limits. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-59 BFC COD TONE LEVEL MEASUREMENT TONE SOURCE NPE TDM BUS * BFC - BATTERY FEED CHIP Figure 10-2. Analog Loop Around Test Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-60 Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the "TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test is not run because the port is administered as either an External Alert or Announcement port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-61 Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 1018 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from 'n' to 'y.' 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The reflective loop around test failed. This could cause noisy or unreliable connections, or users calling this port may hear an echo. The problem can also be off-board, as described below. 1. Since the test may be affected by a line seizure, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the tone detector circuit pack by using the test board PCSS short command. 3. Resolve any problems that are detected on the tone generator circuit pack or the tone detector circuit pack. 4. If the tone generator and tone detector circuit packs are functioning properly and the test still fails and a voice terminal is connected and wired properly, replace the analog line circuit pack. PASS The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station equipment. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-62 Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-63 ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ANL-BD MIN test board PCSS sh 8-Port Analog Line Circuit Pack ANL-BD WRN test board PCSS sh 8-Port Analog Line Circuit Pack ANL-BD MIN test board PCSS sh 8-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack ANL-BD WRN test board PCSS sh 8-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack ANL-BD MIN test board PCSS sh 16-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack ANL-BD WRN test board PCSS sh 16-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or [G.1] 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also "ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)", and "ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)" Maintenance documentation for related line information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-64 ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ANL-LINE MIN test port PCSSpp l 8-Port Analog Line ANL-LINE WRN test port PCSSpp sh 8-Port Analog Line ANL-NE-L MIN test port PCSSpp l 8-Port Neon Analog Line ANL-NE-L WRN test port PCSSpp sh 8-Port Neon Analog Line 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The 8-Port Analog Line circuit packs are: TN742 TN431 [G3iV2-386] TN769 TN443 [G3iV2-386] TN712 TN467 [G3iV2-386] TN411 [G3iV2-386] These circuit packs provide eight ports for single line on-premises or off-premises analog endpoints such as analog voice terminals, queue warning level lamps, recorded announcements, dictation machines, PagePac™ paging equipment, external alerting devices, modems, facsimile machines, and AUDIX voice ports. The TN769 supports a neon message waiting lamp. The other eight-port analog lines do not support the lamp. Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment, it should be disabled using the Tests field of the station administration screen. However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #47, and #35 as well as Test #48. Test #47 may cause a false alarm when the port is connected to off-premises equipment, some non-voice terminal equipment, and some loop equipment. If this is the case, then the test should be disabled using the Tests field of the change station command. No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 8-Port Analog Line circuit pack or 8-Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack is performed, except to determine whether or not the terminal is connected. Failures of the neon message waiting lamp power (for ANL-NE-L only) and the common ringing application circuitry are reported as part of the Common Port Circuit Pack errors (see errors 1281 and 1793 in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-65 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-26. 8-Port Analog Line Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test 0 Any 1 (a) 40960 40975 40977 None 15 (b) Any Audits and Updates Test (#36) 18 0 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 busyout station WRN OFF release station 130(c) None WRN ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 (d) Station Present Test (#48) WRN OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 3 513 Battery Feed Test (#35) MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 769 (e) Loop Around and Conference Test(#47) 1025 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) 0 test port PCSSpp l r 3 MIN/WR N2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 1281 (f) 1793 (f) 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. These are in-line errors and can only be resolved over time. ■ ■ 40960—indicates that too many simultaneous incoming ringing attempts were made on this board. Only four ports on a board may be ringing simultaneously. A fifth incoming call will cause an inline error from the board. 40975—indicates that the terminal equipment was on-hook when ring-tip was detected during ringing. This usually indicates a failure in the terminal equipment or the type of terminal has a low ringer impedance. Call the terminal equipment and verify that the terminal Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-66 rings. If the terminal doesn’t ring, then replace it. Otherwise, issue the test port PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for Test #48. ■ 40977—indicates that no terminal equipment was connected when ringing was attempted. Run the Short Test via the test port PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for the results of Test #48. b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate errors (if any). c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. d. Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment, it should be disabled via the change station command. However, on some releases of the software, this disables Tests #6, #47, and #35 as well as Test #48. e. Test #47 may cause a false alarm when the port is connected to off-premises equipment, some non-voice terminal equipment, and some loop equipment. If this causes a false alarm, then disable the test by changing the Tests field of the change station command to "no." f. Refer to "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery Feed Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery Feed Test (#35) X X ND Station Present Test (#48) X X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Loop Around and Conference Test (#47) X ND X ND Order of Investigation Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-67 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-68 Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 1004 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result under either of the following conditions: 1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 2. The circuit pack is one of the following: — TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15 — TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. The default for the 'Test' field on the 'Station' form is 'y'; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to 'n' on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’ 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the companding modes could be out of synchronization. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-69 Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code Any Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation. 3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises. NOTE: This test always passes for Analog circuit packs TN712 prior to Vintage 14 and TN742 prior to Vintage 4. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-70 Battery Feed Test (also called Port Diagnostic Test) (#35) The battery feed chip provides power to the telephone equipment, signaling, rotary dial pulsing, transmission, and balance. This test checks the signaling and switchhook capabilities of the battery feed chip by terminating the port, applying battery, and trying to detect a current. Table 10-28. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result under either of the following conditions: 1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 2. The circuit pack is one of the following: — TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15 — TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-71 Table 10-28. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test — Continued Error Code 1018 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Test disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’ 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the companding modes could be out of synchronization. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The port’s battery feed chip is unable to supply sufficient power to the terminal equipment. This may occur when the test is performed at the same time that the terminal equipment goes off-hook. 1. Use status station to determine when the port is available for testing. When the port becomes available for testing, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a minimum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, determine whether the customer is experiencing problems on this line. Replace the circuit pack only if the customer is experiencing problems. PASS The port’s battery feed chip is able to provide power to the station equipment to detect on-/off-hook. However, the battery feed chip may still be unable to provide power for touch-tones. If tones are heard when buttons are pressed, then the battery feed chip is functioning correctly; otherwise, replace the circuit pack because this port is defective. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises. NOTE: This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to Vintage 14 and TN742 prior to Vintage 6. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-72 Table 10-28. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36) This test updates the analog port’s message lamp state (if it has one) and translations (such as station type, dial type, network connection) with information kept in the software. The software is updated with the switchhook state reported by the port processor. When the ringer is in the off state, this test also turns off the station’s ringer to prevent constant ringing caused by defective hardware. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-73 Table 10-29. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test Error Code 1004 Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result under either of the following conditions: 1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 2. The circuit pack is one of the following: — TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15 — TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5 1006 ABORT This port has been busied out by command or taken out-of-service by the failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error is present, then release the port with the release station extension command and run the test again. 2. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 1025 (NPE Crosstalk Test failed) for this port. If this error is present, then investigate the errors associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) first. 3. Make sure that the terminal is connected and in service, and then retest. ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-74 Table 10-29. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test — Continued Error Code 1 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation This does not indicate a hardware problem. The switchhook audit failed, and the other updates were not performed because of this failure. This condition may occur when the audit is performed at the same time that the terminal equipment goes off-hook. Use the status station command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. When the port becomes available for testing, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem but may indicate an internal software error. The message waiting lamp update failed. The translation and ringer updates were not performed because of this failure. 7 FAIL The translation update failed. The ringer update was not performed because of this failure. This does not indicate a hardware problem but may be an internal software error. 8 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem but may be an internal software error. The ringer update failed. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. PASS The software and the port processor have the same status. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises. NOTE: This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to Vintage 14 and TN742 circuit packs prior to Vintage 6. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-75 Loop Around and Conference Test (#47) Each Analog Port consists of: ■ an NPE for port connectivity and gain, and conferencing functionality ■ a code that converts the digital signals of the TDM Bus to analog signals ■ a battery feed chip that provides power to the telephone set for signaling, dial pulsing, transmission, and balance. This test is designed to check the on-board transmission capabilities of the NPE, the code, and the battery feed chip of the Analog Port. A Tone Detector and a Tone Generator talk and listen on the same pair of time slots as the Analog Port. The Analog Port is then instructed to go into loop around mode (see Figure 10-2). The test passes if the signal measured by the Tone Detector is within acceptable limits. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. As part of Test #47, the operation of the port conference circuits in the NPE for three and four parties is also tested. In addition, a test is run to measure noise. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. The noise test is performed by filtering out the tone, and then measuring inherent port noise. NOTE: This Loop Around Test is sensitive to the length of the loop, the equipment in the loop, or the equipment terminating the loop, such as off-premises stations. If this test is causing a false alarm, then disable the test by changing the Tests field to "no" using the change station command for this station. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-76 B CO TONE LEVEL MEASUREMENT TONE N SOURCE TDM BUS * BFC BATTERY FEED AND HYBRID CHIP Figure 10-3. Analog Loop Around and Conference Test Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 7 ABORT The port was seized by a user for a valid call. 1. Enter display port PCSSpp to determine the station’s extension. Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it will be unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. 2. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-77 Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. (This could be a Music-on-Hold port.) 1. Enter display port PCSSpp to determine the station’s extension. Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it will be unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. 2. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized for a valid call during the conference or noise test. Use the status station command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. If the circuit pack is a TN742 with vintage 10 or less, this test is not valid. Otherwise, proceed with #2. 2. When the port is available for testing, retry the command at 1-minute intervals, a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-78 Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued Error Code 1005 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result under either of the following conditions: 1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 2. The circuit pack is one of the following: — TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15 — TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. The default for the 'Test' field on the 'Station' form is 'y'; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to 'n' on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’ 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the companding modes could be out of synchronization. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 7 FAIL The conference test or the noise test failed. This could cause noisy or unreliable connections, or users calling this port may hear an echo. The problem can also be off-board, as described below. 13 The reflective loop around with gain set to low and the 600-ohm balance failed. This will cause noisy or unreliable connections. 14 The reflective loop around test (with the gain set to high, using RC balance) failed. This could cause noisy or unreliable connections. The problem can also be off-board, as described below. 15 The nonreflective loop around test failed. This could cause noisy or unreliable connections, or users calling this port may hear an echo. The problem can also be off-board, as described below. More information continues on the next page. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-79 Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued Error Code 7 13 14 15 Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 1. Disconnect the terminal equipment from the circuit pack at the cross-connect and run the test again. 2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack and reconnect the terminal equipment. If the test passes the second time, then the test results were affected by the terminal equipment connected to the port; in this case, ignore the results of this test if all other tests pass or abort and the station is operating properly. Failure of test 47 does not cause an alarm. If there are failures of other tests, then investigate those errors. User reported troubles with this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, and by examining the station to ensure that it is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises. (cont’d.) NOTE: If the loop around and conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack. If the test fails on more than 1 port, check for errors on the TONE-BD or the TONE-PT. If errors, take appropriate actions. When the tone errors are cleared, rerun the test. PASS The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station equipment. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises. NOTE: This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to Vintage 14 and TN742 circuit packs prior to Vintage 6. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-80 Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Station Present Test (also called Ringing Application Test) (#48) This test provides a burst of ringing current to the terminal equipment and detects that current flows. This test is to ascertain whether or not terminal equipment is connected to the port. This test may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment, it should be disabled using the Tests field of the station administration screen. However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #47, and #35 as well as Test #48. Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-81 Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp to determine the station’s extension. Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it will be unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times. 2. Check for phone left off-hook or for wiring problems. 1004 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result under either of the following conditions: 1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold). 2. The circuit pack is one of the following: — TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15 — TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5 1008 ABORT Could not allocate a ringing circuit for one of the following reasons: ■ All the ringing circuits are in use, or ■ The ringing generator is defective, or ■ It is not wired correctly. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN errors in the Error Log. If an ABORT 1008 occurs for Test #48 on other circuit packs as well, then the ringing generator may be defective or not wired correctly. If it does not occur on other ports, then that circuit pack is currently using all four ringing phases. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-82 Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued Error Code 1018 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing). 1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’ 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the companding modes could be out of synchronization. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The terminal equipment is not connected to the circuit pack or the ringing generator may have failed. 1. Remotely test the equipment. 2. If the test fails again, look for RING-GEN errors in the error log. If present, refer to the RING-GEN (analog ring generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. Check all of the wiring between the station equipment and the switch. Then, run the test again. 4. If the test still fails, the set may be defective. Check the set, and replace it, if necessary. 5. Some terminal equipment (such as a modem) could fail even when it is connected properly. If this is the case, disable the test using the change station extension command (enter 'n' into the 'Test' field). Note that this action also disables tests 6, 7, 161, and 35 on this port. PASS The station is connected properly to the switch. This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located far from the switch (that is, it is off-premises). User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises. NOTE: This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to Vintage 14 and TN742 circuit packs prior to Vintage 6. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line) Page 10-83 Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-84 ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ANN-BD MINOR test board PCSS l Announcement Circuit Pack ANN-BD WRN test board PCSS l Announcement Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). The TN750 Announcement circuit pack is a service circuit which provides a DEFINITY Generic 3 customer with an integrated means for recording announcements that can be played back on demand by call processing as part of a calling feature (for example, announcements on hunt group calls). There are 16 Announcement Ports on the Announcement circuit pack. Each port can play any integrated announcement, independently of the other ports. In addition to the 16 Announcement Ports, the Announcement circuit pack also has one Data Line Circuit Port (port 17). The Data Line Circuit Port is used for uploading/downloading the announcement memory to/from the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2]. If there are any errors associated with port 17, refer to "DAT-LINE (Data Line)" Maintenance documentation. If there are any errors associated with any other port, refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation. NOTE: TN750C is required if your system will have multiple announcement boards. To use multiple announcement boards, you must have G3V4 software, and at least one TN750C (up to ten are allowed). Only one TN750A/B may be present in the system when a TN750C is used. The announcements from a TN750A/B can be saved and restored to a TN750C — but once the announcements are recorded onto a TN750C, they are not backward compatible with the TN750A/B. The Announcement circuit pack has two processors on it. The first processor, or Angel, controls the circuit pack and communicates with the switch via the control channel on the TDM Bus. The second processor, or Speech Processor (SP), controls the speech memory and announcements. Digital speech is converted from its TDM Bus form to an internal storage form (for recording) and vice versa (for playbacks) by the 140AY device on the circuit pack, which has 16 channels (one for each Announcement Port). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-85 General Notes Here are a few very important general notes that apply to any problem on the Announcement circuit pack. The user should read this before attempting to work on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack or Announcement Ports, especially if the circuit pack needs to be replaced. 1. The Announcement circuit pack retains all integrated announcements as long as the circuit pack has power. For this reason, whenever there is a problem with either the Announcement circuit pack or an Announcement Port that may require the circuit pack to be reset, it is always best to try to reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command first. If that does not work, replace the circuit pack. Announcements are preserved through a software reset, but they are lost when the circuit pack is reseated. 2. If a customer has announcements on the Announcement circuit pack that cannot be rerecorded easily, then announcements must be saved on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] to ensure that they are not lost. This should be done as soon as the announcements are recorded on the circuit pack (or whenever they are changed), assuming that the circuit pack is in proper working order (see Note). NOTE: Unlike translations, announcements are NEVER automatically saved to the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2]. 3. The administration terminal save announcements command replaces the announcement file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] the Announcement circuit pack speech memory. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command and, as a result, destroy a valid file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2]. 4. The restore announcements command replaces the Announcement circuit pack speech memory with the announcement file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2]. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command, destroying valid speech memory (especially if the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] does not have a valid announcement file on it). 5. Whenever the Announcement circuit pack is replaced, announcements must always be rerecorded or downloaded to the new circuit pack. Otherwise, call processing is not able to use the pack. 6. If announcement speech memory is corrupted, announcements should not be saved [that is, if the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) fails, or if the speech sounds corrupted on playback]. This can ruin a good announcement file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-86 [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] and potentially cause errors/alarms on any circuit pack to which the new file is downloaded. However, if the customer does not have a valid announcement file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2], announcements can be saved in an effort to try to retain some of them (all of the announcements recorded may not be corrupted). 7. Due to a hardware fault in the TN750 announcement board, the following sequence of events my cause the announcement file to become corrupted and unusable: ■ Fill the board with recorded announcements. ■ Delete the last few announcements recorded. ■ Re-record the announcements deleted. If the announcement file becomes corrupted, the only solution is to re-record all announcements. To do this, follow these steps: a. Remove the announcement board. b. Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive. Do this so that announcements are not automatically restored from tape. c. Re-insert the announcement board. d. Re-record all announcements. e. Insert the tape cartridge in the tape drive. f. Issue the save announcements command to save all the announcements on the tape. This hardware fault is fixed in the TN750B announcement board. However, the TN750B board will not automatically correct an announcement file which has previously been corrupted by a TN750 board. The only way to correct an announcement file corrupted by the TN750 board is to follow the steps above. Announcement Administration A brief description of the integrated announcement administration is given here to aid in troubleshooting the Announcement circuit pack and its ports. In many cases, it is necessary to record, play back, and/or delete announcements to resolve an alarm. It may also be necessary to save and restore announcements as part of the maintenance procedures. For a complete description of integrated announcement administration, please refer to the following manuals: 1. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation, 555-230-653 2. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 System Management, 555-230-500 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-87 3. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 V2 Traffic Reports, 555-230-511 4. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Voice Terminal Operations, 555-230-701 Announcement Session Announcements can be recorded, played back, and deleted from an announcement session. A station’s COS needs to include console permissions in order for that station to be able to enter an announcement session. To enter an announcement session, go off-hook on a station that has console permissions and enter the appropriate Feature Access Code (FAC), administered as Announcement access code on the FACs form. Dial tone should be returned at this point. Enter the extension of the announcement that needs to be recorded, deleted, or played back. Again, dial tone should be heard. To record an announcement, press station keypad digit 1, record after the tone, and hang up when done. To play back an announcement, press 2. To delete an announcement, press 3 (confirmation tone is given if the delete worked). Announcements can also be played back by simply calling the announcement extension associated with them. Uploading/Downloading Announcements Integrated announcements on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack can be uploaded to the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] with the administration terminal save announcements command. Likewise, integrated announcements can be downloaded to the Announcement circuit pack with the restore announcements command. Both of these commands require a free data module of NETCON type to be administered, a data module of announcement type (on the Announcement circuit pack) to be administered, and a tape cartridge to be in the system’s tape drive (must not be write-protected) or a memory card (must not be write-protected). These commands are useful in maintaining the customer’s recorded announcements. Depending on system traffic, announcement uploads and/or downloads take between 30 and 45 minutes. The system automatically tries to download the Announcement circuit pack five minutes after it is inserted. This automatic download procedure is aborted if: 1. An announcement is recorded within 10 minutes of circuit pack insertion. 2. An announcement download is invoked sooner with the administration terminal restore announcements command. 3. No announcement and/or NETCON data module is administered. 4. Either the announcement data module is busy or all the administered NETCON data modules are busy. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-88 5. No tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] is in the system. 6. The tape or memory card in the system does not have a valid announcement file saved on it. NOTE: Unlike translations, there is no provision in the Generic 3 system for automatically saving announcements to the system tape or memory card. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-32. Announcement Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level (See WARNING message below) On/Off Board 01 0 Any Any Any 1(a) 0 Circuit pack removed or SAKI Test (#53) MINOR ON 2(p) Test to Clear Value test board PCSS sh r 1 None 14(b) 1 to 64 Announcement Checksum Test (#209) 18 0 busyout board PCSS WARNING OFF 23(c) 0 None WARNING OFF None MINOR ON 125(d) 170(e) 0 None MINOR ON 217(f) 0 None WARNING OFF 257 65535 Control Channel Test (#52) MINOR ON 257(g) Any None 267(f) 0 None WARNING OFF 513(h) Any None 1025(i) 4363 NPE Audit Test (#50) 1281(j) 17699 None release board PCSS test board PCSS l r 20 test board PCSS l Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-89 Table 10-32. Announcement Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data 1538(k) Any 1793 17680 2049(l) (m) Alarm Level (See WARNING message below) On/Off Board None MINOR ON Angel-SP Handshake Test (#208) MINOR ON test board PCSS l r 3 MINOR ON test board PCSS sh r 3 Associated Test In-line Error Clock Match Inquiry Test (#212) 17674 Test to Clear Value In-line Error 2305 140AY Loop Around Test (#210) MINOR ON test board PCSS sh r 3 2561 Super Frame Match Inquiry Test (#211) MINOR ON test board PCSS sh r 3 MINOR ON test board PCSS sh r 3 17676 2817(l) In-line Error Announcement Checksum Test (#209) 17682 In-line Error 17699 (m) In-line Error 3840(n) Any None 3999(o) Any None Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. ! WARNING: All alarms are upgraded to MAJOR when the BASE Tone Generator is set to 12. (France). Notes: a. Error Type 1 This error indicates the circuit pack totally stopped functioning or it was physically removed from the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-90 NOTE: The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed and/or SAKI Test (#53) fails. If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on, follow the instructions for "Red (alarm)" in the "Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs" section in Chapter 7, "LED Interpretation". NOTE: The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed and/or SAKI Test (#53) fails. ! WARNING: Reseating and/or replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. b. Error Type 14 Whenever the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) fails, this error is logged. The Aux Data indicates the number of the first defective announcement found. This number corresponds to the announcement numbers on the announcement form. The extension relating to the announcement can be determined by the display announcement command. This error only appears in the Error Log in conjunction with Error Type 2817. Follow the procedures for Error Type 2817 to troubleshoot Error Type 14. c. Error Type 23The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically installed. The alarm is cleared when the circuit pack is installed. d. Error Type 125A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the change circuit-pack command to readminister this slot to match the circuit pack inserted. e. Error Type 170Announcement board is not allowed in slot A03 for a system with Enhanced SCC cabinet. The red led of announcement board is turned on and the error message "Announcement board is not allowed in slot A03" is shown on SAT when test/busyout/release board A03 commands are entered. The announcement board must be removed and inserted into a different slot. f. Error Type 217 and 267 Indicate that there is more than one TN750 Announcement circuit pack inserted in the system. Remove the alarmed circuit pack.. g. Error Type 257This error indicates transient communication problems with this circuit pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-91 h. Error Type 513This error, when reported with Aux Data in the range of 4352 to 4358, indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure on the circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced. ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. i. Error Type 1025This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. j. Error Type 1281The SP found a fault in the speech main memory (SMM) (that is, it found one or more faulty memory locations). Whenever this error is logged, error 2817 is also logged [see Note (k)], which causes the maintenance system to run the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) to determine if the bad memory location was being used by an announcement. k. Error Type 1538 The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: 1. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a NO-BOARD. 2. A busyout/release of the circuit pack has no effect on test results. 3. A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are properly installed. The system tries to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. If the error recurs after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. (Refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures".) l. Error Type 2049 and 2817These errors are logged in conjunction with Error Type 1281, Aux Data 17699. Since that error [see Note (j)] means that a defective speech memory location was found, the announcement checksum error is also logged. This causes the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) to run, which determines if the defective memory location has corrupted any recorded announcements. If the Checksum Test passes, the faulty memory location is currently not being used, and the SP marks the location as faulty to ensure that future announcements do not attempt to use it. NOTE: As memory locations are marked faulty, the amount of available memory decreases, which decreases the total amount of announcement time available on the circuit pack. m. Error Type 2049A transient error that does not cause an alarm can occasionally occur during a SPE, TDM BUS, or Tone Clock interchange. It is possible for a marginal Tone-Clock circuit pack to cause this error Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-92 against the ANN-BD without alarming the TONE-BD. If this error occurs again, replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack may clear up this error. See the FAIL case in the Clock Match Inquiry Test (#212). n. Error Type 3840 This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. o. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated 50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it. p. Error Type 2Check the Class of Restriction (COR) administered for the Data Line extension assigned to the TN750 for uploading and downloading announcements. The extension can be found by using list data-module. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in Table 10-33 when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Control Channel Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-33. System Technician-Demanded Tests: ANN-BD Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D/ND1 Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a) X ND Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test (#208) X ND Clock Match Inquiry (#212) X X ND Super Frame Match Inquiry (#211) X X ND 140AY Loop Around Test (#210) X X ND Announcement Checksum Test (#209) X X ND X ND Network Processor Element (NPE) Audit Test (#50) (a) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-93 Table 10-33. System Technician-Demanded Tests: ANN-BD — Continued Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence SAKI Test (#53) (a) Reset Board Sequence D/ND1 X D Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Note: a. For a complete description of these tests, refer to the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation. Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test (#208) This test checks the integrity of the communication link between the two processors on the Announcement circuit pack. Failure of this test indicates that the Speech Processor is insane and results in the loss of all integrated announcements on the circuit pack. Table 10-34. TEST #208 Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-94 Table 10-34. TEST #208 Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed. Circuit pack cannot be used. Announcement speech memory is cleared when this test fails. Therefore, when the problem has been resolved, announcements must be rerecorded or downloaded to the circuit pack. Refer to "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance documentation. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack and then run this test again. 2. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works. ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance documentation. PASS The communications link between the two processors on the Announcement circuit pack is functioning properly. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests. Continued on next page Announcement Checksum Test (#209) Associated with every recorded announcement is a checksum. In this test, the SP checks a stored global checksum covering all recorded announcements against a calculated one and returns the results to the maintenance system. If the global checksum failed, maintenance requests the SP to check each individual announcement’s checksum. If the test fails, then it returns the total number of defective announcements found. In addition, associated with each failure is an error in the Error Log (Error Type 14). The Aux Data indicates the number of the first defective announcement found. This number corresponds to the announcement numbers on the announcement form. The extension relating to the announcement can be determined by the display announcement command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-95 Table 10-35. TEST #209 Announcement Checksum Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 0 ABORT An error code of 0 indicates that the announcement file has been corrupted due to a hardware fault in the TN750 board. Follow step #7 under "General Notes" at the beginning of this section. 1023 ABORT There are no announcements currently recorded on the circuit pack. 1024 ABORT This abort code is given for the following reasons: 1. An announcement upload or download is in progress. 2. An announcement upload or download is requested when this test is running. 3. A record is in progress. 4. A record request comes in when this test is running. If an announcement upload or download is in progress, a status data-module command should show that the announcement data port is connected to a NETCON data channel, and [for G3iV1.1-286] the tape drive should be active or [for G3sV2, G3iV2-386, or G3vsV2] the "card-in-use" amber LED for the memory card is on (to determine the extension of the announcement data module, use the list data-module command). See Note (a) at end of table for more information. 1. Wait until the blocking event is finished, and then run this test again. An upload or download could take up to 45 minutes to complete, and a recording session is finished as soon as the station that was making the recording is placed on-hook. 2. If the test continues to abort, and a record or upload/download is not in progress, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-96 Table 10-35. TEST #209 Announcement Checksum Test — Continued Error Code 0-256 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed. The error code indicates the total number of defective announcements that were found. When TEST #209 fails with error code 0, the Global Checksum failed on the board, but no individual Checksum failed. NOTE: Since the announcements are recorded digitally, it is possible for the Announcement Checksum Test to fail but still have all the announcements sound uncorrupted. When an individual announcement fails the Checksum Test, always listen to the announcement first before taking any action (an announcement can be played back by dialing the announcement extension associated with the announcement number). If the announcement sounds corrupted, then rerecord it or delete it. 1. Look in the Error Log to determine the number of the first defective announcement. Play back the announcement. If the announcement sounds defective, rerecord it or delete it. If the error code was greater than one (indicating that there is more than one defective announcement), run this test again and repeat this step. 2. If after deleting and rerecording all defective announcements, the checksum test still fails, reset the circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command and run this test again. 3. If the test still continues to fail, reseat the circuit pack and restore all announcements with an appropriate time estimate (for example, 40 minutes.) Then rerecord the lost announcements (that is, those recorded since the last save operation) and run this test again. 4. If the test still continues to fail, replace the circuit pack, and run this test again. ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. PASS All recorded announcements checksum correctly, indicating that the speech main memory is functioning properly. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-97 Notes: a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow recording. If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack will be unusable by software, one of which is the record port. Also, save/restore announcements will not work, since the record port looks busy to the circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this, and attempts to use the ports. If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are observed: 1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the proper record tone, but the announcement do not record (they do not know it until the announcement is played back). 2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state yield the following abort codes: ■ Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024 ■ Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000 ■ Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024 3. The save/restore announcements command times out with: Error encountered, can’t complete request The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by performing a soft reset to the circuit pack: ■ busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on the Announcement circuit pack) ■ reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command ■ release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command 140AY Loop Around Test (#210) This test checks the integrity of the record channel on the Announcement circuit pack (Announcement Port 1). The main function of the 140AY device is to accept Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)/Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) samples and compress/expand the samples using ADPCM. This test connects a Tone Generator to one port (Announcement Port 1, the recording port), and a Tone Detector to another port (Announcement Port 9). A tone is generated by the Tone Generator on the first port and looped through the 140AY device to the second port. The Tone Detector then responds with a tone present/absent message. The 140AY Loop Around Test is repeated at three different speech compression rates. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-98 Since this test involves sending a tone through two different ports, the Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test (#206) [see ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test] is run on the two ports first to make sure that they are working properly. Table 10-36. TEST #210 140AY Loop Around Test Error Code 1-3 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. The error code indicates at which speech compression rate the test aborted (one being the first rate tested, three being the last). 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 10 ABORT The PSMA Test (#206) failed on Announcement Port 1. 90 ABORT The PSMA Test (#206) failed on Announcement Port 9. 1. Refer to"ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation, Test #206. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. This test needs Announcement Ports 1 and 9 to run. One of the ports may be in use on a valid call. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and Ports 1 and 9 are not in use, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the "TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-99 Table 10-36. TEST #210 140AY Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 1007 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Announcement circuit pack thinks that Port 1 or Port 9 is busy. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, follow the Announcement Port maintenance procedures for Ports 1 and 9. 3. If the Announcement Ports pass all their tests, escalate the problem. 1024 ABORT Announcement circuit pack blocked the test because an announcement download is in progress. If an announcement download is in progress, a status data-module command should show that the announcement data port is connected to a NETCON data channel, and [for G3iV1.1-286] the tape drive should be active or [for G3sV2, G3iV2-386, or G3vsV2] the "card-in-use" amber LED for the memory card should be on (to determine the extension of the announcement data module, use the list data-module command). See Note (a) at end of table for more information. 1. Wait until download is finished (can take up to 45 minutes), and then run the test again. 2. If the test continues to abort and there is no download in progress, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this error type. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2007 ABORT The Announcement circuit pack thinks that Port 1 or Port 9 is busy. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, follow the Announcement Port maintenance procedures for Ports 1 and 9. 3. If the Announcement ports pass all their tests, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-100 Table 10-36. TEST #210 140AY Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 1-3 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed. The error code indicates at which speech compression rate the test actually failed (one being the first rate tested, three being the last). 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test still fails, replace the circuit pack (see Warning) and run this test again. 2. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning). ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. PASS The record channel on the Announcement circuit pack is functioning properly. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests. Continued on next page Notes: a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow recording. If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack will be unusable by software, one of which is the record port. Also, save/restore announcements will not work since the record port looks busy to the circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this, and attempts to use the ports. If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are observed: 1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the proper record tone, but the announcement does not record (they do not know it until the announcement is played back). 2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state yields the following abort codes: ■ Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024 ■ Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000 ■ Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024 3. The save/restore announcements command times out with: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-101 Error encountered, can’t complete request The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by performing a soft reset to the circuit pack: ■ busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on the Announcement circuit pack) ■ reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command ■ release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command Super Frame Match Inquiry Test (#211) The super frame is a means by which the SP synchronizes with the 140AY device on the Announcement circuit pack. If the super frame is not synchronized, the SP is not able to properly process record/playback requests. Both the SP and the hardware generate a super frame pulse. When these two pulses are out of synch, the SP sets a flag to indicate the mismatch. When this test is run, the state of this flag is returned. Table 10-37. TEST #211 Super Frame Match Inquiry Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-102 Table 10-37. TEST #211 Super Frame Match Inquiry — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed. Announcement playbacks should sound corrupted. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see Warning). 2. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning). ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. PASS The SP can properly process record/playback requests. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests. Continued on next page Clock Match Inquiry Test (#212) This test is supported to determine the state of the clock generation circuitry on the Announcement circuit pack. This circuitry is used for controlling various pieces of the hardware, like the 140AY device. It is also used to synchronize the Announcement circuit pack with the clock that is on the backplane. Table 10-38. TEST #212 Clock Match Inquiry Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-103 Table 10-38. TEST #212 Clock Match Inquiry Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed. Announcements recorded or played back while the clock circuitry is not functioning properly sound distorted. The ANN-BD may be defective or the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD) in the same Port Network as the ANN-BD may be marginal and is causing this test to fail. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, proceed to Step 2 or 3 as applicable. 2. If this is a High or Critical Reliability system, determine the Active TONE-BD in this Port Network via the status system command and make the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack active via the set tone-clock PCSS command. Rerun the test. If the test passes, then replace the now Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. If the test continues to fail, replace the ANN-BD circuit pack. ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Page 10-104 Table 10-38. TEST #212 Clock Match Inquiry Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 3. If this is a Standard system (that is, not a High or Critical Reliability system), replace the ANN-BD. Rerun the test. If the test continues to fail, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack located in the same Port Network as the ANN-BD. ! WARNING: Replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack causes a standard system PPN to perform a COLD 2 reset or an EPN to reset. See the "How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack" section in the "TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation. Replacing the ANN-BD results in loss of integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. 4. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing, replace the ANN-BD even if the previous steps were successful. ! WARNING: Replacing the TONE-BD causes a standard system PPN to perform a COLD 2 reset or an EPN to reset. Replacing the ANN-BD results in loss of integrated announcements. See the "General Notes" section near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. PASS Announcement record/playbacks should have clear sound quality. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit packs and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-105 ANN-PT (Announcement Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ANN-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp l Announcement Port ANN-PT WRN test port PCSSpp l Announcement Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). The TN750 Announcement circuit pack is a service circuit pack that provides a customer with an integrated means for recording announcements that can be played back on demand by call processing as part of a calling feature (that is, announcements on hunt group calls). There are 16 Announcement Ports on the Announcement circuit pack. Each port can play any integrated announcement, independently of the other ports. In addition to the 16 Announcement Ports, the Announcement circuit pack also has one Data Line Circuit Port (Port 17). The Data Line Circuit Port is used for uploading/downloading the announcement memory to/from the system tape. If there are any errors associated with Port 17, refer to "DAT-LINE (Data Line)" Maintenance documentation. If there are any errors associated with the circuit pack, refer to "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation. The Announcement circuit pack has two processors on it. The first processor, or Angel, controls the circuit pack, and communicates with the switch via the control channel on the TDM Bus. The second processor, or SP, controls the speech memory and announcements. Digital speech is converted from its TDM Bus form to an internal storage form (for recording) and vice versa (for playbacks) by the 140AY device on the circuit pack, which has 16 channels (one for each Announcement Port). General Notes Here are a few very important general notes that apply to any problem on the Announcement circuit pack. The user should read this before attempting to work on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack or Announcement Ports, especially if the circuit pack needs to be replaced. 1. The Announcement circuit pack retains all integrated announcements as long as the circuit pack has power. For this reason, whenever there is a problem with either the Announcement circuit pack or an Announcement Port that may require the circuit pack to be reset, it is always better to try to reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command first and, if that does not work, then try to reseat it. Announcements are preserved through a software reset, but they are lost when the circuit pack is reseated. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-106 2. If a customer has announcements on the Announcement circuit pack that cannot be re-recorded easily, then announcements must be saved on the system tape to ensure that they are not lost. This should be done as soon as the announcements are recorded on the circuit pack (or whenever they are changed), assuming that the pack is in proper working order (see Note). This should be done as soon as the announcements are recorded on the circuit pack (or whenever they are changed), assuming that the pack is in proper working order (see Note). NOTE: Unlike translations, announcements are NEVER automatically saved to the system tape. 3. The administration terminal save announcements command replaces the announcement file on tape with the Announcement circuit pack speech memory. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command, thereby destroying a valid file on tape. 4. The terminal restore announcements command replaces the Announcement circuit pack speech memory with the announcement file on the system tape. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command, thereby destroying valid speech memory (especially if the system tape does not have a valid announcement file on it). 5. Whenever the Announcement circuit pack is replaced, announcements must always be re-recorded or downloaded to the new circuit pack. Otherwise, call processing is not able to use the circuit pack. 6. If announcement speech memory is corrupted, announcements should not be saved, that is, if the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) fails or if the speech sounds corrupted on playback. This can ruin a good announcement file on tape and potentially cause errors/alarms on any circuit pack to which the new file is downloaded. However, if the customer does not have a valid announcement file on tape, then announcements can be saved in an effort to try to retain some of them (all of the announcements recorded may not be corrupted). 7. Although Announcement Port 5 and Data Line Circuit Port 17 on the Announcement circuit pack are logically two separate ports, they are physically the same port. Therefore, if one of the ports is in use, the other one will be busy. Also, if Announcement Port 5 is out-of-service, the Data Line Circuit Port is taken out-of-service. However, if the Data Line Circuit Port is out-of-service, the Announcement Port remains in-service. Announcement Administration A brief description of the integrated announcement administration is given here to aid in the troubleshooting of the Announcement circuit pack and its ports. In many cases, it is necessary to record, play back, and/or delete announcements DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-107 to resolve an alarm. It may also be necessary to save and restore announcements as part of the maintenance procedures. For a complete description of integrated announcement administration, please refer to the following manuals: 1. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation, 555-230-653 2. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Voice Terminal Operations, 555-230-701 3. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 System Management, 555-230-500 4. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 V2 Traffic Reports, 555-230-511 Announcement Session Announcements can be recorded, played back, and deleted from an announcement session. A station’s COS needs to include console permissions in order for that station to be able to enter an announcement session. To enter an announcement session, go off-hook on a station that has console permissions and enter the appropriate FAC (administered as Announcement access code on the FACs form). Dial tone should be returned at this point. Enter the extension of the announcement that needs to be recorded, deleted or played back. Again, dial tone should be heard. To record an announcement, press station keypad digit 1, record after the tone, and hang up when done. To play back an announcement, press station keypad digit 2. To delete an announcement, press station keypad digit 3 (confirmation tone is given if the delete worked). Announcements can also be played back by simply calling the announcement extension associated with them. Uploading/Downloading Announcements Integrated announcements on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack can be uploaded to the system tape with the administration terminal save announcements commands. Similarly, integrated announcements can be downloaded to the Announcement circuit pack with the administration terminal restore announcements command. Both of these commands require a free data module of NETCON type to be administered, a data module of announcement type (on the Announcement circuit pack) to be administered, and a tape cartridge to be in the system’s tape drive (must not be write-protected). These commands are useful in maintaining the customer’s recorded announcements. Depending on system traffic, announcement uploads/downloads take between 30 and 45 minutes. The system automatically tries to download the Announcement circuit pack five minutes after it is inserted. This automatic download procedure is aborted if: 1. An announcement is recorded within 10 minutes of circuit pack insertion. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-108 2. An announcement download is invoked sooner with the administration terminal restore announcements command. 3. There is no announcement and/or NETCON data module administered. 4. Either the announcement data module is busy or all the administered NETCON data modules are busy. 5. There is no tape in the system. 6. The tape in the system does not have a valid announcement file saved on it. NOTE: Unlike translations, there is no provision in the system for automatically saving announcements to the system tape. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-39. Announcement Port Error Log Entries Aux Data Alarm Level On/Off Board Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test (#206) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 3 The port was busied out WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 130 (a) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test (#205) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 3 Error Type 0 1 0 1 18 0 17667 513 769 (b) Test to Clear Value In-line error 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test (#222) 17684 1. Associated Test In-line error None Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-109 b. This error is logged and the port is alarmed when an alarm is raised on the Announcement circuit pack because of a faulty condition with a common circuit pack resource. Any one of the following alarmed errors on the Announcement circuit pack causes this error to be logged against the Announcement Port: 1793, 2049, 2305, 2561. Follow the ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation to resolve these alarms. When the corresponding circuit pack alarm is cleared, this alarm clears. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test (#205) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test (#206) X X ND 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test (#222) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test (#205) This test is a memory device that stores information used to control the 140AY device. The Angel asynchronously feeds the CAMA with the control information. During the CAMA test, the Angel writes patterns into the CAMA, reads them back, and verifies that they match. If the patterns do not match, the test fails. This test is run periodically by the switch maintenance and by the Announcement circuit pack in the background. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-110 Table 10-40. TEST #205 Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the circuit pack is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. See Note (a) at end of table for more information. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-111 Table 10-40. TEST #205 Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed. Announcements played back on this port may sound corrupted. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see Warning). 2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning). ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. Refer to "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. PASS This test verifies that the Angel processor can properly set up this port for playbacks. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other port and circuit pack tests. (Refer to "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the circuit pack tests.) Continued on next page Notes: a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow recording. If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack (one of which is the record port) will be unusable by software. Also, save/restore announcements will not work since the record port looks busy to the circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this and attempts to use the ports. If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are observed: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-112 1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the proper record tone, but the announcement does not record (they do not know it until the announcement is played back). 2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state yields the following abort codes: ■ Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024 ■ Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000 ■ Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024 3. The save/restore announcements command times out with: Error encountered, can’t complete request The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by performing a soft reset to the circuit pack: ■ busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on the Announcement circuit pack) ■ reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command ■ release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test (#206) The PSMA test checks the integrity of a playback channel’s interface to the speech memory and the TDM Bus. The SP has an internal buffer that contains a specific 256-byte sequence. During this test, the byte sequence is "played" through the 140AY device onto the TDM Bus. A General Purpose Tone Detector is used to confirm that the proper sequence was played. This test is very important. It is the only test that actually checks an Announcement Port’s ability to play back an announcement on the TDM Bus. If the test fails, the Tone Detector returns the number of bytes that did not match the expected sequence. The larger the number, the more severe the problem with that port. If this test fails, announcements played over this port should sound corrupted. It is the only test that actually checks an Announcement Port’s ability to play back an announcement on the TDM Bus. If the test fails, the Tone Detector returns the number of bytes that did not match the expected sequence. The larger the number, the more severe the problem with that port. If this test fails, announcements played over this port should sound corrupted. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Table 10-41. Error Code 1000 Page 10-113 TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the pack is not in use, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-114 Table 10-41. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test — Continued Error Test Code Result Description/ Recommendation 1024 ABORT Announcement circuit pack blocked the test because an announcement download is in progress. If an announcement download is in progress, a status data-module command should show that the announcement data port is connected to a NETCON data channel, and the tape drive should be active. (To determine the extension of the announcement data module, use the list data-module command.) See Note (a) at end of table for more information. 1. Wait until download is finished (could take a maximum of 45 minutes), and then run the test again. 2. If the test continues to abort and there is no download in progress, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-115 Table 10-41. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test — Continued Error Test Code Result Description/ Recommendation 1 to 254 FAIL Test failed. The error code indicates the number of byte count errors found by the Tone Detector. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see Warning). 2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning). ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. Refer to "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. 255 FAIL Test failed. The Announcement Port and the Tone Detector never synchronized. Check for active GPTD-PT errors, and refer to "GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR)]" Maintenance documentation to diagnose them first. 1. If there are no active GPTD-PT errors, reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see Warning). 2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning). ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. Refer to "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Page 10-116 Table 10-41. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test — Continued Error Test Code Result Description/ Recommendation PASS This port can cleanly play announcements. User-reported troubles on this pack should be investigated using other port and circuit pack tests. Refer to "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the circuit pack tests. Continued on next page Notes: a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow recording. If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack (one of which is the record port) will be unusable by software. Also, save/restore announcements will not work, since the record port looks busy to the circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this and attempts to use the ports. If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are observed: 1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the proper record tone, but the announcement does not record (they do not know it until the announcement is played back). 2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state yields the following abort codes: ■ Ports 1 and 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024 ■ Ports 1 and 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000 ■ Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024 3. The save/restore announcements command times out with: Error encountered, can’t complete request The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by performing a soft reset to the circuit pack: ■ busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on the Announcement circuit pack) ■ reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) ■ Page 10-117 release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test (#222) The Angel keeps a sanity status bit for each of the 16 channels on the 140AY device. This test queries the Angel to determine the status for a particular channel. If a channel is insane, that implies that announcements cannot be played back on that channel. Table 10-42. Error Code TEST #222 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Test failed. Announcements cannot be played back over this port. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see Warning). 2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning). ! WARNING: Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements. Refer to "General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANN-PT (Announcement Port) Table 10-42. Error Code Page 10-118 TEST #222 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation Announcements can be played back over this port. User-reported troubles on this pack should be investigated using other port and circuit pack tests. Refer to the "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the circuit pack tests. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANNOUNCE (Announce) Page 10-119 ANNOUNCE (Announce) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Initial Command to Run Alarm Level ANNOUNCE none none Full Name of MO ANNOUNCEMENT The ANNOUNCE MO logs an error in the hardware error log if at least one of the following is true: ■ The save announcements or restore announcements command does not complete successfully, or the ■ System fails to restore announcements from the memory card [386 system] or tape [286 system] at boot time. Figure 10-4 shows the connection of the Announcement Circuit Pack to the system. To save or restore announcements, an ANNOUNCEMENT Data Extension must be administered, and at least one DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) must be in the in-service/idle state. SWITCH SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS DATA-CHL SOFTWARE DATA-CHL SOFTWARE DATA-CHL SOFTWARE DATA-CHL SOFTWARE PR-MAINT TAPE DRIVE PROCESSOR MEMORY BUS NETWORK CONTROL DATA CHL1 DATA CHL2 DATA CHL3 DATA CHL4 CARD-MEM TDM BUS ANNOUNCEMENT CIRCUIT PACK Figure 10-4. Connection of Announcement Circuit Pack to the System Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANNOUNCE (Announce) Page 10-120 Hardware Error Log Entries ANNOUNCE Error Log Entries Aux Data Error Type Associated Test 1(a)(f) any None 257(b)(f) any None 513(c)(f) 0 None 769(d)(f) 0 None 1025(e)(f) any None Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Notes: a. Error occurred while saving announcements. (See Table 10-42 in the next section for an explanation of Aux Data and for recommended repair actions.) b. Error occurred while saving announcements to the standby SPE. (See Table 10-42 in the next section for an explanation of Aux Data and for recommended repair actions.) c. User pressed cancel while announcements were being saved by the active PE. d. User pressed cancel while announcements were being saved by the standby PE. e. Error occurred while restoring announcements. (See Table 10-42 in the next section for an explanation of Aux Data and for recommended repair actions.) f. The port field for this error contained the active PE complex when the error occurred. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANNOUNCE (Announce) Page 10-121 Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended Repair Procedures Table 10-43. Aux Data 9000 through 9031 Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended Repair Procedures Description/ Recommendation CARD-MEM [386 systems] errors. Check and resolve CARD-MEM [386 systems] errors and alarms. 30001 through 30054 Tape [286 systems] errors. Check and resolve TAPE [286 systems] errors and alarms. 32001 Internal system error. 1. Check other ANNOUNCE errors and take corrective action. If there are no other ANNOUNCE errors, do the following: 2. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three times. 3. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate the problem. 32002 Announcement circuit pack is in use. 1. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three times. 2. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate the problem. 32003 Announcement port is in use. 1. Wait for all Announcement ports to become available. 2. Enter the save/restore announcements command. 32004 There are no announcements recorded on the Announcement Circuit Pack. The save announcements command is not allowed to prevent the destroying of the announcement file on tape [286 systems] or on the memory card [386 systems]. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANNOUNCE (Announce) Page 10-122 Table 10-43. Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended Repair Procedures — Continued Aux Data Description/ Recommendation 32005 Integrated announcement circuit pack is not present. The Announcement Circuit Pack is not inserted, or it is defective. 1. Enter the list config command to check for the presence of the circuit pack in the system. 2. If the Announcement Circuit Pack is present, use the test board PCSS command to check the status of the Announcement Circuit Pack. 32006 Announcement Data Module not available. 1. Use the status command to check the status of the Announcement Data Module. 32007 Announcement Data Module out of service. 1. Use the status command to check the status of the Announcement Data Module. 32008 Announcement data is being saved or loaded. 1. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three times. 2. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate the problem. 32009 Required DATA-CHL is not administered or out of service. (A DATA-CHL is required to save or restore announcements.) 1. Add a DATA-CHL if none is administered. 2. If a DATA-CHL is administered, use the status command to check the status of all DATA-CHLs. At least one DATA-CHL should be in the in-service/idle state. 32010 32013 DATA-CHL is not administered, or it is unavailable. (A DATA-CHL is required to save or restore announcements.) 1. Add a DATA-CHL if none is administered. 2. If a DATA-CHL is administered, use the status command to check the status of all DATA-CHLs. At least one DATA-CHL should be in the in-service/idle state. 32012 Required Announcement Data Module is not administered. 1. Add an Announcement Data Module and repeat the command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ANNOUNCE (Announce) Page 10-123 Table 10-43. Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended Repair Procedures — Continued Aux Data Description/ Recommendation 32014 Command timed out on the standby processor [286 systems]. This could present problems. 1. Check the error and alarm logs for errors and alarms that are logged against the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) [286 systems]. 32015 Time of day not set. 1. Set the time of day, and reenter the save/restore announcements command. 32016 Internal System errors. Check for any other ANNOUNCE errors and take corrective action.If there are no other announcements errors, do the following: 1. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three times. 2. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board) Page 10-124 ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run 1 Full Name of MO ASAI-BD MIN test board PCSS sh ASAI-BD ASAI-BD WRN test board PCSS sh ASAI-BD 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth). Maintenance testing of the common circuit pack is handled by on-board firmware and SPE-controlled tests. Maintenance software queries the firmware for error and alarm information, status, and test results. Firmware automatically reports error conditions that result in SPE-controlled testing. For MAPD board insertion, the switch makes an additional board query if any of the following circuit packs are inserted: Circuit Pack Vintage TN754 49 TN556 49, 80 or greater TN800 any For any of the above initial board uplinks, the switch queries the board for administration data, as well as reporting the switch software release and the system type. For the native mode, the response to the board query downlink messages consists of several CCMS uplink messages that identify the true board code, vintage, suffix, emulation type, and number of reserved slots needed. NOTE: Refer to LAN-BD Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also ASAI-PT/ASAI-EPT (BRI Line) maintenance documentation for related line information. See the following exceptions listed below: ■ Hyperactivity: currently, the common circuit pack is considered "hyperactive" if the Service Dispatcher receives 200 uplink messages from the circuit pack in a 10-second period. Since MAPD has 32 ports, the hyperactivity limit increases to 500 uplink DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board) Page 10-125 messages per 10 seconds. The switch issues an alarm when the limit reaches 400; when it reaches 500 up-link messages in 10 seconds, the board is taken out of service. ■ LED use: the LED Control Message 038x requests the Angel to drive the red, yellow, and green LEDs on the face plate of a typical port board on or off. On the MAPD, only the red LED is controlled by this message. Yellow and green change requests received from the switch by the MAPD drive LCD behavior rather than LED behavior. The DEFINITY switch continues to send the same LED control messages to the MAPD that the DEFINITY switch currently sends to all other port boards. The MAPD handles proper interpretation of these messages. You should note that the PC on the MAPD and the switch itself control the LEDs and the LCD on the MAPD. ■ Port Administration: in Administration Without Hardware (AWOH), the switch allows administration of up to 8 ports in any of the first 12 ports. If the port type later reported by the board does not match the existing type, the switch assumes it to be a MAPD board with a different configuration and rejects the board. NOTE: Refer to the LAN-BD documentation for circuit pack level errors. For related information, see ASAI-PT and ASAI-EPT maintenance documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-126 ASAI-EPT MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level ASAI-EPT 1. MAJOR 1 Initial Command to Run test station extension Full Name of MO ASAI-Adjunct The alarm level for ASAI adjuncts is administered using the set options command. The alarm level can be set independently for off-board and on-board alarms to WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI adjuncts in the system. The maintenance strategy for this endpoint MO is built on maintenance facilities offered in the Lucent ISDN-BRI protocol and in the ASAI adjuncts. Currently there are no facilities in the protocol that provide for maintenance of set data features. The TN800 is a PC-based platform that allows interaction of multiple applications with DEFINITY at any time. DEFINITY Release 5 software (Native mode) supports emulation of three types of port MOs on this board. The type of ports to be emulated is defined by the applications running on the TN800. NOTE: If the TN800 is emulating BRI, the software/firmware supports a maximum of 12 ports, but only 8 of the 12 ports can be administered at any one time. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-44. ASAI-EPT Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test 0 Any 2 (a) 2-102 None 257 (b) Any 351 (c) Alarm Level ASAI-EPT On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test ASAI-ADJ BRI Layer 3 Query MAJ/WNG2 OFF test station ext r 2 test data-module ext r 2 0 none WARNING OFF busyout and release station 513 (d) 0 None 769 (e) 0 None MAJOR OFF 0 2561 (f) 0 None 25622566 (g) 0 None Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-127 Table 10-44. ASAI-EPT Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test 2567 (h) 0 None 2568 (i) 0 None 3329 (j) Any Signaling Link Status (626) 35843839 (k) 0, 1 None 3841 (l) 4095 0 None Alarm Level ASAI-EPT MAJ/WNG† On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value OFF Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. Errors of this type indicate violations of the ISDN-BRI signaling protocol. Timers associated with certain Layer 3 messages have expired before a required response was received. In the following table, the aux data column indicates which timer has just expired. For more information, refer to the Lucent ISDN-BRI Specification. Aux Data Timer Type 2 First T303 (SETUP timer) 3 Second T303 (SETUP timer) 4 T305 (DISConnect timer) 5 First T308 (RELease timer) 6 Second T308 (RELease timer) 10 T316 (RESTart timer) 12 T309 (Layer 2 Failure timer) 16 TM100 (Management Information Message timer 1) 17 TM200 (Management Information Message timer 2) 102 TASAI (ASAI Routing Timer) The switch sent a message to an endpoint that did not respond in the allotted time. This may be due to failure of the point-to-point signaling link or because of a problem in the ASAI adjunct. To repair: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-128 ■ Execute the test station extension command and perform the associated repair procedures for those tests. b. An endpoint is not responding to the service state query message sent to the adjunct or to the endpoint. This error causes an alarm to be raised. The alarm is retired when the switch receives a response to the service state query to the endpoint or to the adjunct. When this error occurs for an ASAI adjunct, the Aux Data field indicates the state of the ASAI link and whether an invalid response or no response was received to the query from the switch, as shown in the following table: Aux Data ASAI Link State Error 102 13-restarting No response to RESTART message 104 13-restarting Invalid response to RESTART message 152 13-restarted No response to Layer 3 query 154 13-restarted Invalid response to Layer 3 query 202 13-established No response to Layer 3 query 204 13-established Invalid response to Layer 3 query See "status bri-port" in Chapter 8 for an explanation of the ASAI link states. For ASAI or Lucent adjuncts, the switch queries the adjunct every two minutes. The Layer 3 Query Test is not executed for ASAI or Lucent adjuncts through a command issued from the management terminal. While alarmed for this error, the switch takes the associated port out-of-service for five seconds every 15 minutes. This action attempts to stimulate recovery actions to be taken by the adjunct. When this error occurs for an ASAI or Lucent adjunct, the service technician should: 1. Execute the test station extension command and perform the associated repair procedures for those tests. 2. Check the health of the adjunct by following the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer of the adjunct if the preceding step does not resolve the problem. c. This error and associated warning alarm are logged against an ASAI endpoint when the adjunct has asked the switch to suspend maintenance on the ASAI endpoint. Busying out and releasing the ASAI station clears this alarm. d. This error occurs when the endpoint sends more messages than the switch can handle. The switch suspends the reception of messages from the endpoint for a short period of time. There is no repair procedure for this error. If the condition persists, replace the endpoint. e. This error occurs when the signaling link associated with the ASAI endpoint has too much link-establishment related traffic. This occurs if the signaling link is alternating between assigned and established states. If this problem persists, replace the endpoint. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-129 f. This error occurs when the ASAI-EPT message is not transmitted because the PKT-CTRL (packet control circuit pack) transmit buffers are exhausted. Frequent or persistent occurrence of these events may indicate a hardware problem or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the signaling link, or the ASAI adjunct. Resolve the problem by following the repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL. If these attempts fail, re-engineering the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary. g. The ASAI message is not transmitted because the transmit buffer for the ASAI link is full, causing the link to be flow-controlled. Frequent or persistent occurrence of these events may indicate a hardware problem or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the signaling link, or the ASAI adjunct. Resolve the problem by following the repair procedures issued by the manufacturer of the adjunct. If these attempts fail, re-engineering of the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary. h. This version of ASAI is not supported. Check the software version that is running on the ASAI adjunct. i. The adjunct identification is invalid. Check the vendor ID or software running on the ASAI adjunct. j. This occurs when the point-to-point signaling link to the endpoint goes down, except when the link goes down because either a system technician has busied out the PKT-CTRL or the PKT-BUS, or they have failed. This error raises an alarm against the endpoint or adjunct. Execute the test station extension short command and note the results of the Signaling Link Status Test (#626). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #626. The alarm is retired when the signaling link is re-established to the endpoint or adjunct. k. The switch software logs certain ASAI cause values. The cause value is determined from the following formulas: — If the error type is greater than 3712, then the ASAI cause value is equal to the error type minus 3712. The switch sent this value to the adjunct. — If the error type is less than 3712, then the ASAI cause value is equal to the error type minus 3584. The switch sent this value to the adjunct. Table 10-44 contains a description of the various ASAI cause values and recommended system technician actions associated with the cause value. The ISDN-BRI Specification (AT&T PUB 801-802-100) contains further information. In addition, the Aux Data field of the Error Log entry contains additional diagnostic information. l. The switch software logs certain ASAI cause values. The cause value is determined from the following formula: — If the error type is greater than 3968, then the ASAI cause value is equal to the error type minus 3968. The switch sent this value to the endpoint. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-130 — If the error type is less than 3968, then the ASAI cause code is equal to the error type minus 3840. The switch sent this value to the endpoint. Table 10-45. ASAI Cause Values Code 0 Explanation Unrecognized ASAI Protocol Operation. Recommendation Requested ASAI protocol is not implemented by switch or adjunct. Aux data field of error log entry contains protocol identifier for unrecognized operation. 1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine which set of operations is supported by switch and the adjunct. Adjunct administration turning off operations not implemented by the switch may resolve the problem. 34 No circuit or channel available A resource on the switch is unavailable for a call. For BRI endpoints, this cause value is not logged. For ASAI, this condition means that there are no available trunks for an outgoing call request. 1. Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the trunk capabilities of the switch. 2. Investigate trunk group status by issuing the status trunk command from the SAT or by requesting trunk group query(ies) from the adjunct. 3. Perform trunk diagnostic procedures outlined in this manual. 40 Resources not available. No available internal resources to service switch or adjunct request. Exceeds system transaction capacity for adjunct or switch. 1. May require re-engineering of adjunct services. 50 Requested facility not subscribed Requested facility is implemented, but not administered. Potential administration problem with endpoint or adjunct. For BRI endpoints: 1. Verify the switch administration of endpoint using either the display station or display data-module commands. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, refer to the endpoint’s service manual and verify administration on the endpoint. For ASAI adjuncts: 1. Display the Customer Optional Features Form (administration screen) on the switch to determine which ASAI capabilities are turned on in the switch. 2. Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the identical capabilities as the switch. If there is a mismatch in the administered capabilities, then readminister the switch and/or the adjunct to establish a consistent set of desired capabilities on both the switch and the adjunct. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-131 Table 10-45. ASAI Cause Values — Continued Code Explanation Recommendation 58 Bearer capability not presently available Requested bearer capability is implemented, but not administered. No B-channel administered. See code 50 above. 63 Service or option not available Requested ASAI capability or resource is not available on the switch or adjunct. More than one adjunct may be contending for the same switch resource. Potential administration mismatch between the resource domains administered on the switch and those administered on the adjunct. 1. Verify that no overlapping administration of switch resources (for example, requesting notifications on a single domain by multiple adjuncts attempting to control a single call) exists across all adjuncts connected to the switch. If overlaps exist, then re-administer the adjuncts to ensure that each adjunct is associated with a unique set of switch resources. 65 Bearer service not implemented Requested service not implemented in switch or endpoint. 69 Requested facility not implemented Requested service not supported in switch or endpoint. Service or option not implemented Requested service or option (or combination of selected options) is not supported (implemented) in switch or the adjunct. Invalid CRV An invalid CRV was sent by the adjunct. 79 81 1. Consult switch and endpoint documentation to determine service support. 1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine ASAI service and options supported by both switch and adjunct. Re-administration of the switch-administered capabilities (see Customer Optional Feature Form) or those of the adjunct may be necessary to correct the problem. 1. This may indicate a CRV inconsistency between the switch and the adjunct. See the CallVisor protocol reference manual. 87 Internal switch audit There is an inconsistency in switch data records. 1. There is no action needed, since the switch has corrected the data inconsistency. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-132 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes When inspecting errors in the system, always investigate errors associated with the circuit pack and port first. Clearing these error codes first may also clear errors generated against the endpoint. When all circuit pack and port errors have been cleared, but errors still exist against the endpoint, investigate errors in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Signaling Link Status Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Signaling Link Status Test (#626) 1. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629) This test is not used by the ASAI-ADJ maintenance object. For information about this test, see BRI-SET in the maintenance documentation. Signaling Link Status Test (#626) This test determines the current status of the signaling link. This test passes if the link is "bound" to an endpoint and fails if the link is "not bound." The definition of the term "bound" for a link depends upon the type of endpoint and may depend on the successful completion of procedures at both Layers 2 and 3 of the protocol. The definition of "bound" for ASAI type of endpoint is: ■ ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints not administered for MIM initialization (point-to-point): For endpoints of this type, the signaling link is "bound" when the link is connected at Layer 2 (L2 established). Table 10-46. TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test Error Code 1139 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-EPT Page 10-133 Table 10-46. TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test — Continued Error Code 1141 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Refer to PKT-CTRL maintenance documentation. 1144 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN. 2. Execute the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1113 FAIL The signaling link is not "bound" to the adjunct. For ASAI adjuncts this error indicates that the link is disconnected at Layer 2. Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint has been identified by administration, the link is only "unbound" from the endpoint when it is disconnected. 1. Execute the status bri-port PCSSpp command and refer to the associated procedures for this command contained in “BRI-PORT”. PASS The signaling link is connected at Layer 2 and "bound" to the ASAI adjunct. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-134 ASAI-PT MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ASAI-PT MAJOR 2,3 test port PCSSpp l ASAI ISDN BRI Port ASAI-PT WARNING test port PCSSpp l ASAI ISDN BRI Port 1. 2. 3. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth). The alarm level for ASAI adjunct ports may be administered using the set options command. The alarm level can be set independently for off-board and on-board alarms to WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI adjunct ports in the system. All alarming for an ASAI adjunct and off-board alarming for an ASAI port is disabled if the ASAI adjunct asks the switch to suspend maintenance. When this occurs, an error and a WARNING alarm is logged against the ASAI adjunct. Check the Hardware Error and Alarm Logs to see if the adjunct has disabled alarming. Unless otherwise stated, all maintenance actions contained in this section apply to ASAI-PT and ISDN-BRI ports connected to ASAI adjuncts. This port type is administered as an ASAI-BD on the TN800 circuit pack. The TN800 circuit pack is a PC-based platform that allows interaction of multiple applications with DEFINITY at any time. DEFINITY Release 5 software (Native mode) will support emulation of three types of port MOs on this board. The type of ports to be emulated are defined by the applications running on the TN800. The TN800 can support a maximum of 32 ports (time slots) at a time. The TN800 connects to the switch through a single slot in the backplane, however its width is not limited to one slot. The number of slots occupied by the TN800 is supplied by the board during its insertion. The TN800 in Release 5 is 3 slots wide. The blank (reserve) slots are to the left of the functional slot. In non-native mode the TN800 is recognized as TN556, TN2181, TN754, or TN746 based on the switch software and the application running on the TN800. In non-native mode only one type of port MOs will run at any time, and the port type depends on the application running on the TN800. If the TN800 fails diagnostics in non-native mode, the system’s alarm and error logs would show a failure for the board type the TN800 is emulating. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-135 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-47. ASAI-PT Port Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level ASAI-PORT On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 (a) (a) Level 1 Status Inquiry (#621) MAJ2 OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 2 513 (b) 0 none (b) ON MAJ2 OFF 0 1537 (c) 46210 CRC Error Counter (#623) 3841 (d) 46208 None 3844 (e) 46223 None 3845 (f) 3846 (g) None TEI None Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major and Minor alarms may be downgraded to warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. This error occurs when the Level 1 Status Inquiry fails or when the BRI circuit pack detects that Level 1 has been deactivated on the port. The aux data field contains one of the following values: Blank This indicates that the Level 1 Status Inquiry failed. 32773 This is a message from the ASAI-Line circuit pack indicating Level 1 has been deactivated. Refer to the repair procedures for Test #621. b. The circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the Packet Bus, thus affecting the conveyance of signalling information over D-channel. This error occurs when the Packet Bus transmit FIFO buffer overflows. This condition probably indicates a hardware problem as well. The ASAI-PORT alarm level is MAJOR with aux data 0. Use troubleshooting procedures for both on-board hardware problems and potential off-board Packet Bus problems. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-136 c. The port received an invalid frame over the D-channel. When the Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) errors exceed 5 within 15 minutes, the port is taken out of service for 5 seconds. If 5 more CRC errors are received within 15 minutes of the first set of 5 errors, the port is taken out of service for one minute. If 5 more CRC errors are received within 15 minutes of the last 5, the port is taken out of service for 15 minutes. This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring to the set or adjunct, interference on the wiring due to a noise source, or no termination (an open circuit). It usually does not indicate a problem with the circuit pack. ■ Check the wiring to the endpoints or the adjunct. ■ If the problem persists, replace the endpoints or adjuncts. d. This error occurs when a Layer 1 Transmission error is detected for the port. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624). e. This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive buffers. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of the Receive FIFO Overflow Counter Test (#625). f. This error occurs when the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test (#618) fails. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of Test (#618). g. The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) administered for the ASAI endpoint most likely does not match the TEI administered in the ASAI adjunct. Check the switch administration of the TEI against that of the adjunct, and make sure that both are using the same TEI. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. For example, by clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence ASAI Port Local LAN Looparound Test (#618) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D X ND CRC Error Counter Test (#623) X ND Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624) X ND Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621) X Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test (#625) Clear Error Counters (#270) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X X ND X ND Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-137 BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test (#618) This test is destructive. This test verifies the connectivity of a BRI port across the LAN Bus and executes only if the port is out-of-service. The test aborts if calls associated with the port are in-progress. Failures of this test indicate either on-board faults associated with the ASAI-PT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the LAN Bus, which is used to form connectivity between the switch and the ASAI-PT. The dotted lines in Figure 10-5 show how a Looparound Test is performed across the Packet Bus for the D-channel. PACKET INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRI LINE CIRCUIT PACK Figure 10-5. BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Path PACKET BUS Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-138 Table 10-48. TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Error Code 1015 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The port is not in the out-of-service state. 1. Display the Port Status form using the status bri-port PCSSpp command to determine which stations or adjuncts are on this port. 2. Use the extension shown on this form in the status station command to determine if the station or adjunct is in use. 3. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle, and use the busyout port PCSSpp command to place it in the out-of-service state and repeat this test. ! WARNING: Since the "busyout" command is destructive, using this command prior to the port being idle causes all transactions associated with the ASAI on the port to be torn down. Note that third party calls established by an ASAI adjunct remain connected even though the port is taken out-of-service. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL. 2. Issue the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair. 1144 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. Issue the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-139 Table 10-48. TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Looparound — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The Looparound test has failed. 1. If the test fails repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports on the board are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test fails again, execute test pkt P on the management terminal. If this fails, follow the failure procedures the in PKT-BUS section. 3. If the tests executed in Step 2 pass, the problem is local to the BRI board. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The BRI Port Local LAN Looparound test has passed. Continued on next page Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621) This test determines the state of the transmission facility of a BRI port at the Level 1 (L1) or physical layer. L1 can be in one of two possible states: Activated or Deactivated. The Activated state is the correct state for an ISDN-BRI port. In this state the Level 1 interface can communicate with the BRI endpoint or ASAI adjunct administered on this port. This test passes if the state of L1 is activated. This test also passes if software has taken this port out of service. The Deactivated state indicates a problem with the ASAI circuit pack. When in this state, the Level 1 interface is idle and is not trying to communicate with the BRI endpoints or adjunct. When an ASAI port is placed in the out-of-service state, Level 1 is also put into the deactivated state. This could be due either to the system detecting a fault with the port or in response to a busyout port PCSSpp request. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-140 Table 10-49. TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry Error Code 1187 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The board, port, or station may have been busied-out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port and ASAI-BD (board busied out). If this error type is present for ASAI-PT only, then release the port using the release port pp command and run the test again. If the error is present for both ASAI-BD and ASAI-PT, then release the board with the release port PCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release a port, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 2. Make sure the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times, reset the circuit pack using the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3 FAIL Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated; the port is out-of-service. 1. Issue the status bri-port PCSSpp command to verify that the service state of the port is out-of-service. If the port is not out-of-service, proceed to Step 2. 2. If the port has been placed out-of-service using the busyout port PCSSpp command, try releasing the port by executing the release port PCSSpp command. Then issue the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of Level 1 Status Inquiry test. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 3. 3. After executing the test port long PCSSpp command, review the results of all the tests. Follow the repair procedures for any tests that fail. Verify repair of the problem by executing the test port PCSSpp command and by determining that the Level 1 Status test passes. PASS This test indicates that Level 1 is activated, or that software has taken the port out of service. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-141 Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624) This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Layer 1 Transmission error counter maintained on the ASAI circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when it detects a Layer 1 transmission problem. The test passes if the value of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is not zero, the test fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field. This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring or adjunct (verify that the wiring meets the configuration rules defined in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111). It does not indicate a problem with the TN800 circuit pack. This test is useful for verifying the repair of the problem Table 10-50. TEST #624 Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test Error Code 2000 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times, reset the circuit pack using the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The TN800 circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The Error Code field contains the value of this counter. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, review the results of other tests in the Long Test Sequence. Note the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test. Follow the repair procedures for any of the executed tests if they fail. Otherwise, go to the next step. 3. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The Layer 1 Transmission error counter was read correctly and has a value of 0. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-142 Receive FIFO Error Counter Test (#625) This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Receive FIFO error counter maintained on the TN800 circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when it detects an overflow of its receive buffers. The test passes if the value of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is not zero, the test fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field. This error can occur if signaling frames are being received from a Packet Bus at a rate sufficient to overflow the receive buffers on the circuit pack for a port or if hardware fault is causing the receive buffers not to be emptied properly. This test is useful for verifying the repair of the problem. . Table 10-51. TEST #625 Receive FIFO Error Counter Test Error Code 2000 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test. Any FAIL The TN800 circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The Error Code field contains the value of this counter. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, review the results of other tests in the Long Test Sequence. Note the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test. Follow repair procedures for any of the tests that fail. Otherwise, go to the next step. 3. If the tests for the endpoints or adjunct pass and the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test continues to fail, check the wiring to the endpoints or adjunct. PASS The Layer 1 Transmission error counter was read correctly and has a value of 0. Continued on next page Clear Error Counters Test (#270) There are various error counters associated with each ASAI-PT. This test clears those counters and triggers the auditing of Layer 3 reinitialization. This test is used only to send messages to the ASAI-PT and, therefore, should neither abort nor fail. ASAI uses a fixed TEI value of 1. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-PT Page 10-143 Table 10-52. TEST #270 Clear Error Counters Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation Any ABORT This test should never abort. Any FAIL This test should never fail. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The message to clear the error counters of the ASAI-PT has been sent. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ASAI-RES/E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot) Page 10-144 ASAI-RES/E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO ASAI-RES NONE NONE TN800 ASAI reserve slot E-DIG-RES NONE NONE TN800 DIG reserve slot There are no tests associated with these MOs. Both the test board and busy out board commands abort when either is attempted on a reserved slot. An error message indicates the slot is associated with the circuit pack that the TN800 is emulating, but the requested operation is not valid. The TN800 MAPD (Multi-Application Platform for DEFINITY) circuit pack connects to the switch through a single slot in the backplane. The number of slots occupied by the MAPD pack is supplied by the board when inserted. The TN800 in R5EM is 3 slots wide. The TN800 requires 2 reserve slots to its left. The reserve (blank) slots are to left of the functional slot and are place holders on the switch, and do not have any interaction with the switch. Each instance of these MOs represents a reserve slot associated with respective circuit pack mode in which the MAPD is working. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-145 BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO BRI-BD MAJOR test board PCSS l ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack BRI-BD MINOR test board PCSS l ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack BRI-BD WARNING test board PCSS sh ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack LGATE-BD MAJOR test board PCSS l DEFINITY Lan Gateway LGATE-BD MINOR test board PCSS l DEFINITY Lan Gateway LGATE-BD WARNING test board PCSS sh DEFINITY Lan Gateway 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.). NOTE: Some of the information in this section is reserved for future use. ! CAUTION: A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart, along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in resolving problems that involve more than a single station or circuit pack. Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction", in addition to the relevant MO documentation. ISDN-BRI Line is a packet port circuit pack that provides access to ISDN-BRI endpoints. The ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack supports 12 ports, each of which provides access to ISDN stations. Voice and circuit-switched data from the ISDN stations are carried on the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. Signaling is carried over the Packet Bus. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-146 LEDS The ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack performs extensive initialization tests and lights both the red and green LEDS during the initialization testing. See Chapter 7, "LED Interpretation", for more details on circuit pack status LEDs. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-147 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-53. BRI-BD Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any 1(a) Any None MINOR ON 18(b) 0 busyout board PCSS WARNING OFF 23(c) 0 None WARNING OFF 257(d) 65535 Control Channel Loop Test (#52) MINOR ON test board PCSS r 20 513(e) 4352 to 4357 769(f) 4358 1025(g) 4363 NPE Audit Test (#50) 1293 to 1294 (h) 46088 to 46096 SAKI Sanity Test (#534) MINOR ON See footnote (h) 1537 to 1538 (i) 46082 MINOR ON 1793 (j) 46080 MINOR ON 1794 (j) 46094 MINOR ON 1795 (j) 46085 MINOR ON MINOR OFF 0 2306 (j) test board PCSS sh r 1 release board PCSS LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test (#595) 3330 (k) 46083 3840 (l) 4096 to 4101 3843 (m) 46097 3999 (n) Any None Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates the circuit pack totally stopped functioning or it was physically removed from the system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-148 NOTE: The alarm is logged approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed and/or SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails. If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on, then follow the instructions for "Red (alarm)" in the "Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs" section in Chapter 7, "LED Interpretation". (Also, refer to the "Handling Control Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". b. This circuit pack has been busied out via the busyout board PCSS command. c. Port(s) has(have) been administered on this circuit pack but the circuit pack is not physically present. d. This error indicates transient communication problems between the switch and this circuit pack. Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to the repair procedures for the Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52). e. An on-board hardware failure has been detected by the circuit pack. The reported aux data values correspond to the following detected errors: 4352 External RAM error 4353 Internal RAM error 4355 ROM Checksum error 4357 Instruction set error Reset the circuit pack by executing the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. When it is reset, the circuit pack executes a set of tests to detect the presence of any of the above faults. The detection of one of these errors during initialization causes the circuit pack to lock-up and appear insane to the system. See the repair procedure in footnote (a) for error type 1. f. This error is reported by the circuit pack when it detects a program logic error. While no action is required, this error may lead to errors of other types being reported against this circuit pack. g. This error is reported by the circuit pack when it cannot update NPE memory and read it back. This error type can be ignored, but may lead to errors of other types being reported against this circuit pack. h. A critical hardware failure has been detected on the circuit pack. Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) passes, then the on-board circuitry is healthy. Retire the alarm via the test board PCSS long clear command. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) fails, replace the circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-149 The reported error types correspond to the following detected errors: 1293 On-board auxiliary processor insane 1294 Internal memory access error i. These error types are reported when the following errors are detected: 1537 Frame overrun at Packet Bus interface. This condition may be caused by an on-board fault or by faulty data received on one of the circuit pack’s external ports. If any of the ports on this circuit pack are alarmed, refer to the repair procedures for those maintenance objects. 1538 Circuit packet is hyperactive; that is, it is flooding the switch with messages sent over the control channel. The circuit pack is taken out-of-service when a threshold number of these errors is reported to the switch. Clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS long clear, release board PCSS. If the error recurs within 10 minutes, then replace the circuit pack. j. These errors indicate that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the Packet Bus. 1793 Parity errors are detected when transmitting data to the Packet Bus. 1794 Overflow of Packet Bus transmit buffers has occurred. 1795 Circuit pack cannot find end of frame when transmitting to Packet Bus. Clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS long clear, release board PCSS. If the error recurs within 10 minutes, then replace the circuit pack. 2306 This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an error in a received frame from the packet bus. These errors are most likely caused by a packet bus problem, but may be due to a circuit pack fault.An invalid Link Access Procedure Data (LAPD) frame error occurs if the frame contains a bad Cyclical Redundancy Checking (CRC), is greater than the maximum length, or violates the link level protocol.When bus parity errors are reported, the LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test (#595) should be performed to determine if the condition had cleared. Refer to the "PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)" Maintenance documentation to determine if the problem is isolated to this circuit pack or if the problem is caused by Packet Bus faults. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-150 k. A critical failure has been detected in the Packet Bus interface of the circuit pack. This failure may be due to either a Packet Bus fault or an on-board fault. If the Packet Bus is alarmed, refer to the "PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)" section and Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" for recommended repair procedures. The probability of this error being related to Packet bus problems increases with the number of ISDN-BRI circuit packs displaying this error. If the Packet Bus is not alarmed, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) passes, then the on-board circuitry is healthy. Retire the alarm via the test board PCSS long clear command. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) fails, replace the circuit pack. If the problem persists after complying with the above instructions, then follow normal escalation procedures. l. These errors are not service-affecting. No action is required. These errors are reported by the circuit pack when it receives a bad control channel message from the switch. The auxiliary data identifies the following error events: 4096 Bad major heading 4097 Bad port number 4098 Bad data 4099 Bad sub-qualifier 4100 State inconsistency 4101 Inconsistent downlink message m. This error is not service-affecting. No action is required. 3843 Bad translation RAM detected, but call continues by using another translation location. n. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated 50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-151 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Control Channel Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND NPE Audit Test (#50) X ND LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test (#595) X ND Order of Investigation Control Channel Loop-Around Test (#52) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Audit Test (#50) Refer to the repair procedure described in the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation as NPE Audit Test (#50). Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) Refer to the repair procedure described in the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation as Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52). SAKI Sanity Test (#53) Refer to the repair procedure described in the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation as SAKI Sanity Test (#53). LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test (#595) This test is destructive. The test reads and clears the LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter on the circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when it detects a parity error in data received from the Packet Bus. These errors may be indicative of a circuit pack problem, Packet Bus problem, or a problem with another circuit pack on the bus. This test is useful for verifying the repair of the problem. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-152 Table 10-54. TEST #595 LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test Error Code 2000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1-10 FAIL The circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The error code indicates the value of the on-board error counter. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, verify the validity of the Packet Bus. Run the Packet Bus maintenance test with the test pkt P long command. If any Packet Bus tests fail, refer to the"PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)" Maintenance documentation for recommended repair procedures. 3. If the Packet Bus test passes, check the validity of the circuit pack. Execute a test that involves data transmission onto the Packet Bus. For example, the BRI may use the connectivity tests of the port-level maintenance object (BRI-PORT) by executing the test port PCSSpp command. Refer to the repair procedures for the executed test if it fails. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. 4. Other circuit packs on the Packet Bus may be the cause of the parity error. Use the display errors command to check the Error Log for other circuit packs that are alarmed. If any alarms are present for the other circuit packs, retire those alarms also. Then, rerun the LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test (#595) on this circuit pack. PASS No errors detected by circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-DAT (ISDN-BRI) Page 10-153 BRI-DAT (ISDN-BRI) MO Name (in Alarm Log) BRI-DAT 1. Alarm Level WARNING1 Initial Command to Run test data-module Full Name of MO ISDN-BRI Standalone Data Module The alarm level for ASAI adjuncts may be administered using the set options command. The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI adjuncts in the system. Refer to BRI-SET (ISDN-BRI Set) Maintenance documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-154 BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level BRI-PORT MINOR BRI-PORT WARNING 23 MAJOR , ABRI-PORT 23 Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO test port PCSSpp l ISDN-BRI Port test port PCSSpp sh ISDN-BRI Port test port PCSSpp l ASAI ISDN-BRI Port ABRI-PORT WARNING , test port PCSSpp l ASAI ISDN-BRI Port ATT-PORT MAJOR2, 3 test port PCSSpp l AT&T Adjunct ISDN-BRI Port ATT-PORT WARNING2, 3 test port PCSSpp l AT&T Adjunct ISDN-BRI Port test port PCSSpp l Ethernet ASAI Port test port PCSSpp l Ethernet ASAI Port LGATE-PORT LGATE-PORT 2 3 MAJOR , 2 3 WARNING , 2 3 ATTE-PT MAJOR , test port PCSSpp l Ethernet AT&T Adjunct Port ATTE-PT WARNING2, 3 test port PCSSpp l Ethernet AT&T Adjunct Port 1. 2. 3. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The alarm level for ASAI and AT&T adjunct ports may be administered using the set options command. The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI and AT&T adjunct ports in the system. All alarming for an ASAI and AT&T adjunct and OFF-BOARD alarming for an ASAI or AT&T port is disabled if the ASAI or AT&T adjunct asks the switch to suspend maintenance. When this occurs, an error and a WARNING alarm is logged against the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. The Hardware Error and Alarm Logs should be checked to see if the adjunct has disabled alarming. NOTE: Some of the information in this section is reserved for future use. ! CAUTION: A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart, along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in resolving problems that involve more than a single station or circuit pack. Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" in addition to the relevant MO documentation. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) ! Page 10-155 WARNING: If a significant Packet Bus failure occurs, errors and alarms may not be logged as expected for BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT. Conditions under which this occurs are detailed in the "Maintenance of the Packet Bus" section of Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". The TN2208 LGATE MFB provides DEFINITY with the interface to Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI) and AT&T adjuncts (for example, CONVERSANT®. Voice System). The circuit pack contains 12 ports of line circuit interface (although only 8 are usable by the switch), each of which operates with two B-channels (referred to as B1 and B2 throughout this section) and one D-channel as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification. In this context, the term "ISDN-BRI port" is used to refer collectively to ports on the TN2208 circuit pack which are connected to ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The TN556 and TN2198 ISDN-BRI Line circuit packs provide DEFINITY with the interface to ISDN-BRI end points, Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI) and AT&T adjuncts (for example, CONVERSANT®. Voice System). The circuit packs contain 12 ports of line circuit interface, each of which operates with two B-channels (referred to as B1 and B2 throughout this section) and one D-channel as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification. In this context, the term "ISDN-BRI port" is used to refer collectively to ports on the TN556 an TN2198 circuit packs which are connected to either BRI endpoints or ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. For BRI endpoints, each B-channel may support voice or circuit-switched data and may be circuit-switched simultaneously. The B-channels are not used on ports connected to ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The D-channel is used for conveying signaling between the switch and a BRI endpoint(s) or ASAI or AT&T adjunct. Each ISDN-BRI D-channel is connected to the switch processor and the ISDN-BRI port through the Packet Control circuit pack and the Packet Bus. ISDN-BRI endpoints are available in various configurations. All endpoints require the D-channel to convey signaling information to the switch. Only one B-channel is required for a voice-only set or a stand-alone data module (BRI-DAT). A voice and data-capable set requires both B-channels (one for voice and one for data). Therefore, each TN556 or TN2198 port can support either two voice-only sets, two stand-alone data modules (BRI-DAT), or one voice and data-capable set. Only a single ASAI or AT&T adjunct may be connected to an ISDN-BRI port. Multiple adjuncts per line are not supported. Figure 10-6 illustrates the physical connection (solid line) between an ISDN-BRI Port and its associated ISDN-BRI set(s). Each physical connection allows for two B-channels and one D-channel. Each ISDN-BRI circuit pack can support up to 12 of these physical connections to different voice and voice/data sets or ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. On a TN2198 each ISDN-BRI circuit pack can support up to 12 physical connections to a NT1, which, in turn, connects to 2 terminals. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-156 This section covers the maintenance documentation for ISDN-BRI ports. Some of the results of maintenance testing of ISDN-BRI ports may be affected by the health of the ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack (BRI-BD), BRI endpoint (BRI-SET), or ASAI adjunct (ASAI-AJ/LGATE-AJ) or AT&T adjunct (ATT_AJ/ATTE-AJ). These interactions should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of ISDN-BRI port problems. For more information on the circuit pack and endpoints, refer to the BRI-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation, the BRI-SET (ISDN-BRI Endpoint) Maintenance documentation, and ASAI-AJ (Adjunct-Switch Application Interface) Maintenance documentation, ATT-AJ (AT&T Adjunct) Maintenance documentation, LGATE-AJ (Ethernet Adjunct-Switch Application Interface) Maintenance documentation, and ATTE-AJ (Ethernet AT&T Adjunct) Maintenance documentation. VOICE OR DATA TERMINAL BRI LINE CIRCUIT PACK D-CHANNEL DEFINITY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM P O R T B-CHANNEL B-CHANNEL VOICE OR DATA TERMINAL LOGICAL CONNECTION PHYSICAL CONNECTION Figure 10-6. ISDN-BRI Port Interactions Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-157 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-55. ISDN-BRI Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level BRI-PORT Alarm Level ABRI-PORT ATT-PORT LGATE-PORT ATTE-PT On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 (a) (a) Level 1 Status Inquiry (#621) WRN MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 2 busyout port PCSSpp WRN OFF release port PCSSpp WRN ON test port PCSS sh test port PCSSpp sh r 1 18 130 (b) 257 (c) (c) EPF Inquiry (#622) WRN MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF 513 (d) (d) none (d) (d) ON 769 (e) 0 none WRN MAJ OFF 1281 (f) 1537 (g) 46210 1793 (h) 2 NPE Crosstalk (#617) MIN/ WRN CRC Error Counter (#623) WRN BRI Port Local TDM MIN/ WRN 2 ON MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 test port PCSSpp l r 2 OFF ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 Loop Around (#619) 3841 (i) 46208 None 3842 (j) 0 None 3843 (k) 0 None 3844 (l) 46223 None Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-158 Table 10-55. ISDN-BRI Port Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test 3845 (m) Alarm Level BRI-PORT Alarm Level ABRI-PORT ATT-PORT LGATE-PORT ATTE-PT On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value None 3846 (n) TEI None 3847 (o) 0 None Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description, and follow the recommended procedures. Major and Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. This error occurs when the Level 1 Status Inquiry fails or when the BRI circuit pack detects that Level 1 has been deactivated on the port. The aux data field contains one of the following values: ■ blank - this indicates that the Level 1 Status Inquiry failed. ■ 32773 - this is a message from the BRI-LINE circuit pack indicating Level 1 has been deactivated. Refer to the repair procedures for Test #621. b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, replace or reinsert the circuit pack. c. This error occurs when the EPF Status Inquiry fails due to an overcurrent condition or when the BRI-LINE circuit pack detects that the EPF is in an over current condition. The aux data field contains one of the following values: ■ blank - this indicates that the EPF Status Inquiry failed due to an overcurrent condition. ■ 40988 - this indicates that the BRI-LINE circuit pack has detected an overcurrent condition and has turned the EPF off. Execute the Short Test Sequence and see the repair procedures for Test #622. d. This error indicates that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the Packet Bus, thus affecting the conveyance of signaling information over the D-channel. With Aux Data 46222, this error occurs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-159 when the Packet Bus transmit buffers overflow. This condition probably indicates a hardware problem. The BRI-PORT Alarm Level for the error with Aux Data 46222 is "MIN/WRN," and the ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT Alarm Level is "MAJ/MIN/WNR." With Aux Data 0, this error occurs whenever the Packet Bus transmit FIFO buffers overflow. This condition can be caused by an on-board hardware problem as well as by problems on the Packet Bus that disrupt the BRI circuit pack’s ability to transmit data onto the Packet Bus. Use troubleshooting procedures for both on-board hardware problems and potential off-board Packet Bus problems. See the "PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)" Maintenance section in this chapter as well as Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" for more details on Packet Bus troubleshooting procedures. The BRI-PORT Alarm Level for the error with Aux Data 0 is "MINOR," and the ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT Alarm Level is "MAJOR." e. This error occurs when the NPE Crosstalk Test (#617) fails. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the results of Test #617. f. This error occurs when broadcast signaling links associated with this port have too much link establishment related traffic. This could occur if an endpoint on this port is sending link establishment traffic on a port level broadcast link, or if there are Level 1 problems on the port. Check the error logs for Level 1 errors. If Level 1 problems exist, follow the repair procedures listed for test #621. Software will suspend activity to this port for 75 minutes when the port is alarmed due to this error (note that service suspension does not occur if the port is an ABRI-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT/ATT-PORT). If this problem persists, replace the endpoint or endpoints associated with this port. If replacing the endpoints does not fix the problem, follow normal escalation procedures. g. This error occurs when the port receives an invalid frame over the D-channel. When CRC errors exceed five within 15 minutes, the port is taken out of service for five seconds. If five more CRC errors are received within 15 minutes of the first set of five errors, the port is taken out of service for one minute. If five more CRC errors are received within 15 minutes of the last five, the port is taken out of service for 15 minutes. This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring to the set or adjunct, interference on the wiring due to a noise source or no termination (an open circuit). It usually does not indicate a problem with the circuit pack. ■ Check the wiring to the endpoints or the adjunct. ■ If the problem persists, replace the endpoints or adjuncts, or escalate the problem. h. This error occurs when the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test (#619) fails. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the results of Test #619. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-160 There are no Test to Clear Values for the following error types. The error types are simply provided as additional data that may prove useful while troubleshooting. i. This error occurs when a Layer 1 Transmission error is detected for the port. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the results of the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624). j. A BRI port supports up to three Terminal Endpoint Identifiers (TEIs). This error occurs when the switch receives a request for a fourth TEI on a port. Check the number of endpoints administered for this port. k. This error occurs when an SPID initialization request is made from an endpoint and the switch determines that the SPID value is invalid or is a duplicate of another SPID that is already initialized at Layer 3 on the port. Check the administration of the endpoints. l. This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive buffers. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the results of the Receive First In First Out (FIFO) Overflow Error Counter Test (#625). m. This error occurs when the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test (#618) fails. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the results of Test #618. n. This error most likely occurs when the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) administered for the ASAI or AT&T endpoint does not match the TEI administered in the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. Check the switch administration of the TEI against that of the adjunct, and make sure that both are using the same TEI. o. Indicates that sets on the port do not support Layer 3 initialization. Consult the Service Set documentation. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#617) X D BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test (#618) X D BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test (#619) X D Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Page 10-161 Electronic Power Feed Restoral Test (#620) X X ND Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621) X X ND Electronic Power Feed Inquiry Test (#622) X X ND CRC Error Counter Test (#623) X ND Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624) X ND Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test (#625) X ND X ND Clear Error Counters (#270) 1. X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NOTE: The NPE Crosstalk Test and the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test are not executed for ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT. NPE Crosstalk Test (#617) This test is destructive. One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Crosstalk testing is performed on both B-channels (B1 and B2) associated with a BRI port. If this test fails on either channel, any endpoints connected to the port are taken out-of-service. This test is not executed for ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT because the B-channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-162 Table 10-56. TEST #161 Loop Around Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status bri-port PCSSpp command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) Wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station command for the station associated with this port and determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT This test is not valid for this type of translation. Ports administered as “ASAI” or “ADJK” can not run this test, because the B channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or AT&T Adjunct Links. This is a normal condition. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1, 2 FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. Error code 1 indicates that the NPE Crosstalk Test failed on Channel B1. Error code 2 indicates that the NPE Crosstalk Test failed on Channel B1. 1. Replace circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist, examine the station, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-163 BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test (#618) This test is destructive. This test, which verifies the connectivity of a BRI port across the LAN Bus, executes only if the port is out-of-service. The test aborts if calls associated with the port are in-progress. Failures of this test indicate either on-board faults associated with the BRI-PORT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the LAN Bus, which is used to form connectivity between the switch and the BRI-PORT. The dotted lines in Figure 10-7 show how a Loop Around Test is performed across the Packet Bus for the D-channel. PACKET INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PACKET BUS BRI LINE CIRCUIT PACK Figure 10-7. Path of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-164 Table 10-57. TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Error Code 1015 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port is not in the out-of-service service state. 1. Display the BRI Port Status form via the status bri-port PCSSpp command to determine which stations or adjuncts are on this port. 2. Use the extension shown on this form in the status station command to determine if the station or adjunct is in use. 3. If it is in use, wait until it is idle, and then busyout the port (using the busyout port PCSSpp command) to place it in the out-of-service state and repeat this test. ! WARNING: Since the "busyout" command is destructive, execution of this command prior to the port being idle causes all calls associated with BRI endpoints and all transactions associated with ASAI or AT&T adjuncts on the port to be torn down. Note that third party calls established by an ASAI or AT&T adjunct remain connected even though the port is taken out-of-service. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1144 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-165 Table 10-57. TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Loop Around Test has failed. 1. If the test fails repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports on the board are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test fails again, execute test pkt P on the G3MT terminal. If this fails, follow failure procedures in PKT-BUS section. 3. If tests executed in Step 2 pass, the problem is local to the BRI board. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test has passed. Continued on next page BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test (#619) This test is destructive. This test verifies the connectivity of a BRI port across the TDM Bus. It aborts if calls associated with the port are in progress. Failure of this test indicates an on-board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack. This Loop Around Test runs a series of individual tests on the two B-channels (B1 and B2) associated with the port. It is a collection of the following: ■ A Loop Around Test across the TDM Bus for B1. ■ A Conference Circuit Test for B1. ■ A Loop Around Test across the TDM Bus for B2. ■ A Conference Circuit Test for B2. The tests are run in the above order. If one fails, the remaining tests in the sequence are not executed. An error code is returned at that point. This test is not executed for ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT because the B-channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The dotted lines in Figure 10-8 show how a Loop Around Test is performed for the B-channels. The figure shows a terminal connected to a BRI line board using a TN556. If a TN2198 is used, the terminal would be connected to a NT1, and the NT1 to the BRI board. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Tone Generator Page 10-166 Tone Detector TDM Bus BRI Line Board Figure 10-8. Path of the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Table 10-58. TEST #619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status bri-port PCSSpp command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) Wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-167 Table 10-58. TEST #619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around — Continued Error Code 1002 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station command for the station associated with this port and determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT This test is not valid for this type of translation. Ports administered as “ASAI” or “ADJK” can not run this test, because the B channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or AT&T Adjunct Links. This is a normal condition. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the BRI-LINE circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands. 2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-168 Table 10-58. TEST #619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around — Continued Error Code 2103 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not make the conference connection for the test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1, 2 FAIL As stated previously, this test runs a TDM Loop Around Test on each B-channel. This indicates that the loop around failed on one of the channels. Error Code 1 indicates that the TDM Loop Around Test failed on B1. Error Code 2 indicates that the TDM Loop Around Test failed on B2. 7, 8 FAIL As stated previously, this test runs a Conference Circuit Test on each B-channel. A failure here indicates that one of these conference tests failed; Error Code 7 means that the test failed on B1; Error Code 8 means that the test failed on B2. 1. If the test fails repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports on the circuit pack are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test has passed. Continued on next page Electronic Power Feed Restoral Test (#620) This test attempts to restore the Electronic Power Feed (EPF) on an ISDN-BRI port twice. In this test, the processor requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port. An attempt is made to turn on the power unit to the station or adjunct. If no current is being drawn by a station, this probably indicates that the station is not connected. No current being drawn by an adjunct is the normal condition. If an overcurrent condition is sensed (that is, too much current is being drawn), this condition may indicate a short in the wiring to the endpoint or adjunct. Depending on what condition is sensed, a message is returned stating that either the EPF was turned on successfully with no problems or that an overcurrent condition is sensed. This response is reported by the Electronic Power Feed Inquiry (#622), which follows in the testing sequence. EPF Restoral is attempted again by this test five seconds later. This test always passes for the TN2198 because it has no EPF. This test will always abort when run on the TN2208. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-169 Table 10-59. TEST #620 Electronic Power Feed Restoral Error Code Test Result Description / Recommendation 1005 ABORT This test is not valid for this port type. The TN2208 does not have an electronic power feed, and the test will abort. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS The EPF Test passed. The message to turn on the power feed to the station or the adjunct was successfully sent to the port. 1. Although this test should not return a fail result, after running this test, the Error Log should be checked for any entries with error type 257 to examine the real results of this test. 2. An error type of 257 in the Error Log indicates some problem with the power to the station or the adjunct. Check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a defective voice terminal or adjunct, or an incorrect type of terminal. Continued on next page Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621) This test determines the state of the transmission facility of a BRI port at the physical layer (that is, Level 1). Level 1 can be in one of three possible states: Activated, Pending Activation, or Deactivated. The Activated state is the correct state for an ISDN-BRI port. In this state the Level 1 interface can communicate with the BRI endpoint or ASAI or AT&T adjunct administered on this port. This test passes if the state of Level 1 (L1) is Activated. This test also passes if software has taken this port out of service. See the description of the Level 1 "Deactivated State" below for more details. The Pending Activation state indicates a problem with the endpoints or adjunct, the wiring to the sets or adjunct, or the BRI-LINE circuit pack. When in this state, the Level 1 interface is either not receiving any L1 framing from the endpoint or adjunct (Endpoint Idle), or it is communicating with the endpoint or adjunct but cannot transition to the Activated state (Endpoint Active). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-170 The Deactivated state indicates a problem with the BRI-LINE circuit pack. When in this state, the Level 1 interface is idle and is not trying to communicate with the BRI endpoints or adjunct. When an ISDN-BRI port is placed in the out-of-service state, Level 1 is also put into the Deactivated state. This could be due either to the system detecting a fault with the port or to a busyout port PCSSpp request. Table 10-60. TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry Error Code 1187 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The board, port or station may have been busied out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port and BRI-BD (board busied out). If this error type is present for BRI-PORT only, then release the port via the release port pp command and run the test again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the board via the release port PCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release a port, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 2. Make sure the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-171 Table 10-60. TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry — Continued Error Code 1 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Received a status of Level 1 Pending Activation-Endpoint Idle which indicates a problem with the BRI endpoint or ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the wiring to the endpoint or adjunct, or the ISDN-BRI port. For the TN2198, received a status of Level 1 Pending Activation. U interface down, which indicates a problem with a connection between the switch and the NT1. NOTE: An NT1 is a 2- to 4-wire converter that is used to connect 4-wire AT&T terminals to a 2-wire TN2198 circuit pack. The NT1 also has status lamps to determine the health of the unit. 1. For the TN556 or TN2208, verify that an endpoint is connected to the port. If an endpoint is connected to the port, then proceed to step 2. For the TN2198 verify that the connections are good between the switch and the NT1. Verify that the NT1 has power. 2. As necessary, check and repair the wiring between the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct. If a TN2198 is used, the set must have been plugged in for at least 15 seconds before it will stabilize. Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test to verify the repair. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 3. 3. For BRI endpoints, replace the BRI endpoint(s) connected to the port or the NT1 if a TN2198 is used. For ASAI or AT&T adjuncts, follow the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer for link communication problems. For the NT1, follow the manufacturers repair procedures. Then execute the test port PCSSpp command and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test to verify repair. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 4. 4. Escalate the problem to the next tier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-172 Table 10-60. TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry — Continued Error Code 2 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation For the TN556 or TN2208, received a status of Level 1 Pending Activation-Endpoint Active which indicates a problem with the BRI endpoint or ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the wiring to the endpoint or adjunct, or the ISDN-BRI port. For the TN2198, received a status of Level 1 Pending Activation. U interface up S/T interface down, which indicates a problem with the NT1 or the wiring between the NT1 and the BRI endpoint (S/T interface). 1. As necessary, check and repair the wiring between the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct. Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify the repair. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 2. 2. For BRI endpoints, try replacing the BRI endpoint(s) connected to the port. For ASAI or AT&T adjuncts, follow the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer for link communication problems. For the NT1, follow the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer. Then execute the test port PCSSpp command, and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify repair. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 3. 3. Escalate the problem to the next tier. 3 FAIL Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated; the port is out-of-service. 1. Issue the status bri-port PCSSpp command to verify that the service state of the port is out-of-service. If the service state of the port is not out-of-service, escalate the problem to the next tier. Otherwise, proceed to Step 2. 2. If the port has been placed out-of-service via the busyout port PCSSpp command, try releasing the port by executing the release port PCSSpp command. Then issue the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of Level 1 Status Inquiry test. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 3. 3. After executing the test port long PCSSpp command, review the results of all the tests. Follow the repair procedures for any tests that fail. Verify repair of the problem by executing the test port PCSSpp command and by determining that the Level 1 Status test passes. If the test continues to fail for this reason, proceed to Step 4. 4. Escalate the problem to the next tier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-173 Table 10-60. TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry — Continued Error Code 4 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation For the TN2198 only: Received a status of Level 1 Pending Activation, the NT1 has a loss of power indicating a problem with the NT1. 1. For the NT1 follow the manufacturers recommended repair procedures. 2. Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify the repair. If the test is still failing proceed to Step 3. 3. Escalate the problem to the next tier. PASS This test indicates that Level 1 is activated, or that software has taken the port out of service. Continued on next page Electronic Power Feed Inquiry (#622) This test queries the BRI-LINE circuit pack for the status of the Electronic Power Feed (EPF) supplied to a BRI endpoint or an ASAI or AT&T adjunct. If the EPF is on and no overcurrent condition exists, this test passes. All other states are not normal and indicate a problem with the endpoint or adjunct, the wiring to the endpoint or adjunct, or the BRI-LINE circuit pack. This test is not run on the TN2208 circuit pack or the TN2198 and will always return a pass for a TN2198. The TN2208 has no power feeds. Table 10-61. TEST #622 Electronic Power Feed Inquiry Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1005 ABORT This test is not valid for this port type. Ports on the TN2208 cannot run this test because this board does not have an electronic power feed. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-174 Table 10-61. TEST #622 Electronic Power Feed Inquiry — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1 FAIL The BRI-LINE circuit pack reports that it has detected an overcurrent condition and has turned off the EPF. 1. As necessary, check and repair the wiring between the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct. Check the endpoints and replace one or both sets if the sets are drawing too much current. Execute the test port PCSSpp command and review the results of the EPF Inquiry Test to verify the repair. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step 2. 2. Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test. If this test is also failing, then follow the repair procedure for the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test. Otherwise, escalate this problem to the next tier. 2000 PASS The Electronic Power Feed Inquiry Test reports that the EPF is on. ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. Continued on next page Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624) This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Layer 1 Transmission error counter maintained on the BRI-LINE circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when it detects a Layer 1 transmission problem. The test passes if the value of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is not zero, the test fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field. This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring or the endpoint or adjunct (verify that the wiring meets the configuration rules defined in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111). It does Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-175 not indicate a problem with the ISDN-BRI circuit pack. This test is useful for verifying the repair of the problem. Table 10-62. TEST #624 Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test Error Code 2000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. value FAIL The BRI-LINE circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The Error Code field contains the value of this counter. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, review the results of other tests in the Long Test Sequence. Pay particular attention to the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test. Follow repair procedures for any of the executed tests if they fail. Otherwise, go to the next step. 3. If the tests for the endpoints or adjunct pass and the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test continues to fail, check the wiring to the endpoints or adjunct. If the wiring appears to be fine, escalate the problem. PASS The Layer 1 Transmission error counter was read correctly and has a value of 0. Continued on next page Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test (#625) This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Receive FIFO Overflow error counter maintained on the BRI-LINE circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when it detects an overflow of its receive buffers. The test passes if the value of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is non-zero, the test fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-176 This error can occur if signaling frames are being received from the Packet Bus at a rate sufficient to overflow the receive buffers on the circuit pack for a port OR if a hardware fault is causing the receive buffers not to be emptied properly by the circuit pack. This test is useful for verifying the repair of the problem. Table 10-63. TEST #625 Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test Error Code 2000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. 2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. value FAIL The BRI-LINE circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The Error Code field contains the value of this counter. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, run the Long Test Sequence and pay particular attention to the Loop Around Tests (#618 and #619). See the repair procedures for the executed test if it fails. Otherwise, go to the next step. 3. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The Receive FIFO Overflow error counter was read correctly and has a value of 0. Continued on next page Clear Error Counters Test (#270) This test is not an actual test in the strict sense of the word. There are various error counters associated with each BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT. This test clears those counters and triggers the auditing of Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) values and layer 3 reinitialization. This test is used only to send messages to the BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT and, therefore, should neither abort nor fail. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port) Page 10-177 Table 10-64. TEST #270 Clear Error Counters Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation Any ABORT This test should never abort. Any FAIL This test should never fail. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS The message to clear the error counters of the BRI-Port/ABRI-Port/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT has been sent. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-178 BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO BRI-SET WARNING2 test station extension l, test data-module extension ISDN-BRI Set ASAI-ADJ MAJOR2 test station extension ASAI-Adjunct ASAI-ADJ MAJOR2 test data-module extension ASAI-Adjunct 3 test data-module extension ASAI-Adjunct ATT-ADJ MAJOR 2 test station extension AT&T-Adjunct ATT-ADJ MAJOR2 test station extension AT&T-Adjunct ATT-ADJ WARNING3 test station extension AT&T-Adjunct test station extension Ethernet ASAI-Adjunct test station extension Ethernet ASAI-Adjunct ASAI-ADJ LGATE-AJ LGATE-AJ WARNING MAJOR 2 MAJOR 2 3 LGATE-AJ WARNING test station extension Ethernet ASAI-Adjunct ATTE-AJ MAJOR2 test station extension Ethernet AT&T-Adjunct ATTE-AJ 2 test station extension Ethernet AT&T-Adjunct test station extension Ethernet AT&T-Adjunct ATTE-AJ MAJOR WARNING BRI-DAT 1. 2. 3. 3 test data-module Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The alternate name field contains the extension of the endpoint. This field is used to distinguish between endpoints on the same port. The alarm level for ASAI and AT&T adjuncts may be administered using the set options command. The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI and AT&T adjuncts in the system. Alarming for an ASAI and AT&T adjuncts is disabled if the adjunct asks the switch to suspend maintenance. When this occurs, an error and a WARNING alarm are logged against the endpoint. Busying out and releasing the ASAI station or ADJLK station will clear the alarm. ! CAUTION: A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart, along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in resolving problems that involve more than a single station or circuit pack. Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" in addition to the relevant MO documentation. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT ! Page 10-179 WARNING: If a significant Packet Bus failure occurs, errors and alarms may not be logged as expected for BRI-SET/BRI-DAT/ASAI-ADJ/ATT-ADJ/ LGATE-AJ/ATTE-AJ. Conditions under which this occurs are detailed in the ""Maintenance of the Packet Bus" section of Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". The TN2208 ESAI MFB provides DEFINITY with an Ethernet interface to Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI) and AT&T adjuncts (for example, CONVERSANT® Voice System). This circuit pack contains 8 ports of line circuit interface, each of which operates with two B-channels (referred to as B1 and B2 throughout this section) and one D-channel as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification. In this context, the term ‘ ‘ISDN-BRI port’’ is used to refer collectively to ports on the TN2208 MFB circuit pack which is connected to ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The TN2208 ESAI MFB is handled by switch software as it is an ISDN BRI compatible board and all maintenance actions referring to ASAI and AT&T Adjunct Links in this section apply. In G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386, two types of ISDN-BRI endpoints may be connected to ISDN-BRI (ISDN Basic Rate Interface Line) TN556 and TN2198 circuit packs: ISDN-BRI station endpoints, ASAI (Adjunct-Switch Application Interface) and AT&T adjuncts (for example CONVERSANT® Voice System). These circuit packs contain 12 ports of line circuit interfaces, each of which operates at 192 kilobits per second (kbps) with two B-channels and one D-channel as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI specification (PUB 801-802-100). For BRI endpoints, each B-channel may support voice or circuit-switched data and may be circuit-switched simultaneously. The B-channels are not used by ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The D-channel is used for conveying signaling between the switch and a BRI endpoint(s) or ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. Each ISDN-BRI D-channel is connected to the switch processor and the ISDN-BRI port through the PKT-CTRL (Packet Control) and the PKT-BUS (Packet Bus). ISDN-BRI endpoints come in a number of configurations. All endpoints require the D-channel to convey signaling information to the switch. A voice-only set requires only one B-channel. A voice and data-capable set requires both B-channels (one for voice and one for data). Therefore, each TN556 port can support either two voice-only sets or one voice and data-capable set. Only a single ASAI or AT&T adjunct may be connected to an ISDN-BRI port. Multiple adjuncts per line are not supported. Figure 10-9 illustrates the physical connection (solid line) between an ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack and a voice or voice/data set. Each physical connection allows for two B-channels, as stated above, plus one D-channel. Each ISDN-BRI circuit pack can support up to 12 of these PHYSICAL connections to different voice and voice/data sets or ASAI and AT&T adjuncts. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-180 VOICE or DATA SET BRI Line Circuit Pack P O PBX R T D-Channel B-Channel B-Channel PHYSICAL CONNECTION VOICE or DATA SET Logical Connection Physical Connection Figure 10-9. ISDN-BRI Set Interactions This section contains the ISDN-BRI Set, ASAI Adjunct, and AT&T Adjunct Maintenance documentation. Some of the results of maintenance testing of the ISDN-BRI Set or the ASAI and AT&T Adjunct may be affected by the health of the ISDN-BRI circuit pack and Port. These interactions should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of ISDN-BRI Set problems. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-181 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-65. BRI-SET/ASAI-ADJ Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test 01 0 Any 2(a) 2-102 None 18 0 busyout station ext 130(b) Alarm Level BRI-PORT Alarm Level ABRI-PORT ATT-PORT LGATE-PORT ATTE-PT On/ Off Board Any Any Any test BRI-SET or ASAI-ADJ ATT-ADJ LGATE-AJ ATTE-AJ WARNING MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF release station ON test port PCSS sh MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF test station ext r 2 test data-module ext r 2 WARNING OFF busyout and release station WARNING MAJOR OFF WARNING MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF WARNING 257(c) Any BRI Layer 3 Query (#629) 351(d) 0 None 513(e) 0 None 769(f) 0 None 2561(g) 0 None 25622566(h) 0 None 2567(o) 0 None 2568(p) 0 None 2817(i) 0 XID Test (#628) WARNING Test to Clear Value test station ext r 2 test data-module ext r 2 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-182 Table 10-65. BRI-SET/ASAI-ADJ Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Alarm Level BRI-PORT Associated Test 3073(j) 0 BRI Remote Loop Back (#627) WARNING 3329(k) Any Signaling Link Status (626) WARNING 3584 0, 1 None 35853839(i) 0 None 38404095(m)( n) 0 None Alarm Level ABRI-PORT ATT-PORT LGATE-PORT ATTE-PT MAJOR/ WARNING2 On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value OFF test station ext l r2 test data-module ext l r 2 OFF † Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. Errors of this type indicate violations of the ISDN-BRI signaling protocol; timers associated with certain Layer 3 messages have expired before a required response was received. In the following table, the aux data field indicates which timer has just expired. (For more information, refer to the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification.) Aux Data Timer Type 2 First T303 (SETUP timer) 3 Second T303 (SETUP timer) 4 T305 (DISConnect timer) 5 First T308 (RELease timer) 6 Second T308 (RELease timer) 10 T316 (RESTart timer) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-183 Aux Data Timer Type 12 T309 (Layer 2 Failure timer) 16 TM100 (Management Information Message timer 1) 17 TM200 (Management Information Message timer 2) 102 TASAI (ASAI Routing Timer) The switch sent a message to the endpoint which did not respond in the allotted time. This can happen occasionally due to failure of the point-to-point signaling link or because of a problem in the BRI endpoint or ASAI adjunct or AT&T adjunct. Execute the test station extension sh command and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #629. b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, replace or reinsert the circuit pack. c. This error occurs when the endpoint does not respond to the service state query message sent to the adjunct or the endpoint. This error causes an alarm to be raised. The alarm is retired when the switch receives a response to the service state query to the endpoint or the adjunct. For BRI endpoints, the Aux Data field for this error contains "0." When it occurs, execute the test station extension sh command and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #629. When this error occurs for an ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the Aux Data field indicates the state of the ASAI link or AT&T link and whether an invalid response or no response was received to the query from the switch, as shown in the following table: Aux Data ASAI Link State Error 102 13-restarting No response to RESTART message 104 13-restarting Invalid response to RESTART message 152 13-restarted No response to Layer 3 query 154 13-restarted Invalid response to Layer 3 query 202 13-established No response to Layer 3 query 204 13-established Invalid response to Layer 3 query (See "Status BRI-Port" in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for an explanation of the ASAI link states.) For ASAI or AT&T adjuncts, the switch automatically queries the adjunct every two minutes (and therefore the Layer 3 Query Test is not executed for ASAI or AT&T adjuncts via a command issued from the G3MT DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-184 terminal). While alarmed for this error, the switch momentarily (for five seconds) takes the associated port out-of-service every 15 minutes. This action is taken in an attempt to stimulate recovery actions to be taken by the adjunct. When this error occurs for an ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the service technician should: 1. Execute the test station extension command, paying particular attention to any tests which fail, and perform the associated repair procedures for those tests. 2. Check the health of the adjunct by following the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer of the adjunct if the preceding step does not resolve the problem. 3. The alarm condition persists and, if the above steps do not resolve the problem, follow normal escalation procedures. d. This error and associated WARNING alarm are logged against an ASAI or AT&T endpoint when the adjunct has asked the switch to suspend Maintenance on the ASAI or AT&T endpoint. Busying out and releasing the ASAI station or ADJLK station will clear this alarm. e. This error occurs when the endpoint sends more messages than the switch can handle. The switch suspends the reception of messages from the endpoint for a short period of time. There is no repair procedure for this error. If the condition persists, replace the endpoint. f. This error occurs when the signaling link associated with a BRI endpoint has too much link establishment related traffic. This could occur if the signaling link is bouncing between assigned and established states. Software will suspend activity to this endpoint for 75 minutes when the endpoint is alarmed due to this problem (note that service suspension does not occur if the endpoint is an ASAI or AT&T adjunct). If this problem persists, replace the endpoint. If replacing the endpoint does not fix the problem, follow normal escalation procedures. g. This error occurs when the ASAI-ADJ or ATT-ADJ or LGATE-AJ or ATTE-AJ message is not transmitted because the PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) transmit buffers are exhausted. Frequent or persistent occurrence of these events may indicate a hardware problem or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the signaling link, or the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. Attempt to resolve the problem by following the repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL. If these attempts fail, the problem should be escalated because re-engineering of the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary. h. This error occurs when the ASAI message is not transmitted because the transmit buffer for the ASAI link is full, causing the link to be flow controlled. Frequent or persistent occurrence of these events may indicate a hardware problem or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the signaling link, or the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. Attempt to resolve the problem by following the repair procedures issued by the manufacturer of the Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-185 adjunct. If these attempts fail, the problem should be escalated because re-engineering of the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary. i. This error indicates a problem with Layer 2 over the D-channel between the switch and the endpoint. When this error occurs, an alarm is raised against the station or adjunct. Execute the test station extension short command and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI XID Test (#628). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #628. j. This error indicates a problem with the B-channel connection between the switch and the endpoint. When this error occurs, a warning alarm is raised against the endpoint. Execute the test station extension l command, and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI Remote Loop Back Test (#627). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #627. k. This error occurs whenever the point-to-point signaling link to the endpoint goes down (except when it goes down because either the PKT-CTRL or the PKT-BUS has failed or has been busied out by system technician). When this error occurs, an alarm is raised against the endpoint or adjunct. Execute the test station extension short command and pay particular attention to the results of the Signaling Link Status Test (#626). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #626. The alarm is retired when the signaling link is reestablished to the endpoint or adjunct. l. Certain ASAI protocol-specific cause codes are logged by switch software. The cause code can be determined from the following formula: If the error type is greater than 3712, then the ASAI cause code is equal to the error type minus 3712. This code was sent to the adjunct by the switch. If the error type is less than 3712, then the ASAI cause code is equal to the error type minus 3584. This code was sent to the switch by the adjunct. A description of the various ASAI cause values is contained in the Table 10-64. This table also contains recommended system technician actions associated with the cause value. Further information can also be found in the AT&T ASAI Specification (AT&T PUB 288-500-03). In addition, the Aux Data field of the Error Log entry contains additional diagnostic information. Table 10-66. ASAI Cause Values Code Explanation Recommendation Service or Option Not Available Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-186 Table 10-66. ASAI Cause Values — Continued Code 0 Explanation Unrecognized ASAIProtocol Operation Recommendation Requested ASAI protocol operation is not implemented by the switch or adjunct. Aux Data field of Error Log entry contains protocol identifier for unrecognized operation. 1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine which set of operations is supported by the switch and the adjunct. Adjunct administration turning off operations not implemented by the switch may resolve the problem. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. 40 Resources not available No available internal resources to service switch or adjunct request. System transaction capacity for adjunct or switch is exceeded. 1. Re-engineering of adjunct services my be required. If problem persists, escalate problem to the next tier. 63 Service or Option Not Available Requested ASAI capability or resource is not available on the switch or adjunct. More than one adjunct may be contending for the same switch resources. Potential administration mismatch between the resource domains administered on the switch and those administered on the adjunct. 1. Verify that no overlapping administration of switch resources (e.g., requesting notifications on a single domain by multiple adjuncts or multiple adjuncts attempting to control a single call) exists across all adjuncts connected to the switch. If overlaps exist, then readminister the adjuncts to guarantee that each adjunct is associated with a unique set of switch resources. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-187 Table 10-66. ASAI Cause Values — Continued Code Explanation Recommendation Service or Option Not Implemented 79 Service or Option Not Implemented Requested service or option (or combination of selected options) is not supported (implemented) in switch or the adjunct. 1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine ASAI service and options supported by both switch and adjunct. Readministration of the switch-administered capabilities (see Customer Optional Feature Form) or those of the adjunct may be necessary to correct the problem. 2. If Step 1 does not provide the set of desired services due to deficient implementation, escalate the problem to the next tier. Switch Error Conditions 87 Internal Switch Audit There is an inconsistency in switch data records. 1. There is no action needed since the switch has corrected the data inconsistency. 2. If a number of these errors continue to occur, then escalate to next tier. Continued on next page m. Certain ISDN-BRI cause codes are logged by switch software. The cause code can be determined from the following formula: If the error type is greater than 3968, then the ISDN-BRI cause code is equal to the error type minus 3968. This code was sent to the endpoint by the switch. If the error type is less than 3968, then the ISDN-BRI cause code is equal to the error type minus 3840. This code was sent to the switch by the endpoint. A description of the various ISDN-BRI cause values is contained in Table 10-65. This table also contains recommended system technician actions associated with the cause value. Further information can also be found in the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification (AT&T PUB 801-802-100). In addition, the Aux Data field of the Error Log entry contains additional diagnostic information. n. Error 3847 indicates that sets on the port do not support level 3 initialization. Consult the Set Service documentation Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-188 o. For the Error 2567 indicates that the version of ASAI is not supported, check version of the software running on the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. p. For Error 2568 indicates that the adjunct id is invalid, check the vender id or software running on the AT&T adjunct. Table 10-67. ISDN-BRI Cause Values Code Explanation Recommendation Channel in Use 1 Requested channel is in use by another station on the BRI-PORT. (Not applicable for ASAI or AT&T adjuncts.) For BRI endpoints: 1. Try to originate a call to or from this port. 2. If the error persists, busy out and release the port. 3. If the problem still persists, replace stations on the port. 4. If the problem still persists, escalate to the next tier. SWITCH RESOURCES NOT AVAILABLE 34 No circuit or channel available A resource on the switch is unavailable for a call. For BRI endpoints: This cause value is not logged. For ASAI or AT&T Adjuncts: This condition means that there are no available trunks for an outgoing call request. 1. Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the trunk capabilities of the switch. 2. Investigate trunk group status by issuing status trunk commands from the SAT or by requesting a trunk group query or queries from the adjunct. 3. Perform trunk diagnostic procedures outlined in this manual. 4. If step 3 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-189 Table 10-67. ISDN-BRI Cause Values — Continued Code 42 Explanation Switch Equipment Congestion Recommendation Switch takes control to limit received traffic. For BRI endpoints: This cause value is not logged. For ASAI or AT&T Adjuncts: 1. See CallVisor protocol reference manual. 2. If step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. Service or Option Not Available Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-190 Table 10-67. ISDN-BRI Cause Values — Continued Code 50 Explanation Requested Facility Not Subscribed Recommendation Requested facility is implemented, but not administered. Potential administration problem with endpoint or adjunct. For BRI endpoints: 1. Verify the switch administration of endpoint using either the display station or display data-module commands. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, refer to the endpoint’s service manual and verify administration on the endpoint. 3. If Step 2 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. For ASAI adjuncts: 1. Display the Customer Optional Features Form (administration screen) on the switch to determine which ASAI capabilities are turned on in the switch. 2. Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the identical capabilities as the switch. If there is a mismatch in the administered capabilities, then readminister the switch and/or the adjunct to establish a consistent set of desired capabilities on both the switch and the adjunct. 3. If Step 2 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. For AT&T adjuncts: 1. Display the Customer Optional Features Form (administration screen) on the switch to determine if the AT&T adjunct is set enabled on in the switch. 2. If error type 2567 or 2568, verify the AT&T adjunct version, and readminister if needed. 3. If step 2 does not fix the problem, escalate to the next tier of support. 58 Bearer Capability Not Presently Available Requested bearer capability is implemented, but not administered. No B-channel administered. See recommendation 50 above. Service or Option Not Implemented Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-191 Table 10-67. ISDN-BRI Cause Values — Continued Code Explanation Recommendation 65 Bearer Service Not Implemented Requested service not implemented in switch or endpoint. 69 Requested Facility Not Implemented Requested service not supported in switch or endpoint. 1. Consult switch and endpoint documentation to determine service support. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. ADJUNCT/SWITCH ERROR CONDITIONS 81 Invalid CRV An invalid CRV was sent by the adjunct. 1. This may indicate a CRV inconsistency between the switch and the adjunct. See the CallVisor protocol reference manual. 2. If step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. Continued on next page System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes When inspecting errors in the system and deciding which ones to address, always investigate errors associated with the circuit pack and port first. Clearing these error codes first may also clear errors generated against the endpoint. When all circuit pack and port errors have been cleared, and errors still exist against the endpoint, always investigate errors in the order they are presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Signaling Link Status Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-68. System Technician-Demanded Tests: BRI-SET Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Signaling Link Status Test (#626) X X ND BRI XID Test (#628) X X ND X (a) X (a) ND Order of Investigation BRI Layer 3 Query (#629) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-192 Table 10-68. System Technician-Demanded Tests: BRI-SET — Continued Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X (a) ND X (a) ND BRI Vendor ID Test (#631) X (a) ND BRI Model/Vintage ID Test (#632) X (a) ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence BRI Remote Loop Back (#627) BRI Set Audits (#630) X (a) Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Note: a. Will execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. Signaling Link Status Test (#626) This test determines the current status of the signaling link. This test passes if the link is "bound" to an endpoint and fails if the link is "not bound." The definition of the term "bound" for a link depends upon the type of endpoint and may depend on the successful completion of procedures at both Layers 2 and 3 of the protocol. The definition of "bound" for each type of endpoint is as follows: ■ BRI endpoints administered for MIM (management information messages) initialization (multipoint): NOTE: An MIM is a level 3 message that conveys management and maintenance information between a communications system and a BRI terminal. For endpoints of this type, the signaling link is "bound" when the link is connected at Layer 2 and the link has been associated with an endpoint, [that is, the endpoint has completed SPID initialization (L3 established)]. ■ ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints not administered for MIM initialization (point-to-point): For endpoints of this type, the signaling link is "bound" when the link is connected at Layer 2 (L2 established). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-193 For all endpoint types, a signaling link becomes "unbound" when it is disconnected at Layer 2. For BRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization, a signaling link may also become "unbound" if a subsequent attempt to perform SPID initialization on a "bound" link fails, (that is, wrong SPID is entered into the endpoint by the user). Table 10-69. TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test Error Code 1139 Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. 1144 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-194 Table 10-69. TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test — Continued Error Code 1187 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out ) for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET. 2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then release the station via the release station command. a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and BRI-SET, then release the port via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only, then release the circuit pack via the release port PPCSS command and run the test again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release the circuit pack, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 3. Make sure the terminal is connected. 4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-195 Table 10-69. TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test — Continued Error Code 1113 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The signaling link is not "bound" to the adjunct or endpoint. For BRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization, this error indicates that the endpoint has not been bound to a signaling link (that is, SPID initialization has not been completed). Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint is not identified until SPID initialization completes, this error does not imply that the signaling link is connected or disconnected at Layer 2 nor does it provide the status of TEI assignment for the endpoint. For ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints not supporting MIM initialization, this error indicates that the link is disconnected at Layer 2. Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint has been identified via administration, the link is only "unbound" from the endpoint when it is disconnected. 1. Execute the status bri-port PCSSpp command and refer to the associated procedures for this command contained in the BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port) Maintenance documentation. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1113 PASS The signaling link is connected at Layer 2 and "bound" to the BRI endpoint or ASAI adjunct. FAIL The signaling link is not "bound" to the adjunct or endpoint. For BRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization, this error indicates that the endpoint has not been bound to a signaling link (that is, SPID initialization has not been completed). Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint is not identified until SPID initialization completes, this error does not imply that the signaling link is connected or disconnected at Layer 2 nor does it provide the status of TEI assignment for the endpoint. For ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints not supporting MIM initialization, this error indicates that the link is disconnected at Layer 2. Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint has been identified via administration, the link is only "unbound" from the endpoint when it is disconnected. 1. Execute the status bri-port PCSSpp command and refer to the associated procedures for this command contained in the BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port) Maintenance documentation. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. Continued on next page BRI Remote Loop Back Test (#627) This test checks the integrity of a circuit switched B-channel connection between the switch and the endpoint. In this test, the endpoint is put in the "maintenance busy" state to prevent the switch from issuing calls to the endpoint during the test. An application message containing a loop back activate request for the appropriate B-channel is sent to Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-196 the endpoint. The endpoint responds with a loop back activated response. Maintenance then sends data to the endpoint over the B-channel under test. Since the B-channel is looped back at the endpoint, maintenance should receive the data that it sent. If no data is detected, the test fails. An application message containing a loop back deactivate request is then sent to the endpoint to terminate the remote loop back test. The endpoint responds with an MIM message containing a loop back deactivate response. Maintenance then releases the endpoint so that it is available to terminate calls. This test is not executed for ASAI adjuncts because adjuncts do not support MIMs upon which this test is based. Table 10-70. TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not seize the endpoint or B-channels for test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The endpoint’s MIMs Supported field is administered to "no." 1. Use the change station extension command to change parameter only if the endpoint documentation reflects support for ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance Procedures. 1113 ABORT The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint is down. 1. Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear any errors which prevent establishment of the signaling link. 2. Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test (#626) which is run as part of this command. If this test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #626. 3. If the XID Test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-197 Table 10-70. TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back — Continued Error Code 1144 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1187 ABORT The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out ) for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET. 2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then release the station via the release station command. a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and BRI-SET, then release the port via release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only, then release the circuit pack via the release port PPCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release the circuit pack, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 3. Make sure the terminal is connected. 4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2068 ABORT The endpoint has rejected the switch sent application message. This indicates that the endpoint does not support the ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance Procedure for Loop Back Testing. 1. Use the change station extension command and change the MIMs Supported field to "no." Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-198 Table 10-70. TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2069 ABORT The endpoint has returned an error response to the application message sent by the switch. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 FAIL No loop back activation or deactivation response is received from the endpoint. 1. Consult the endpoint documentation to determine if ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance Procedures are supported. If not supported, use change station extension command to change the MIMs Supported? field to "no." Use the busyout station extension and release station extension commands to busyout and release the endpoint to resolve any endpoint alarms resulting from failure of this test. 2. If the endpoint supports these procedures and the test continues to fail, assume the endpoint is defective and replace it. 2071 FAIL No data is detected on Channel B1 during loop back. 2072 FAIL No data is detected on Channel B2 during loop back. 1. Replace the endpoint and repeat test. 2. If test continues to fail, check the wiring between the endpoint and the switch and repeat the test. 3. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1000 PASS The endpoint has responded to the switch activate and deactivate loop back application messages. Data has been detected on the looped back channels. ABORT Could not seize the endpoint or B-channels for test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page BRI XID Test (#628) This test checks the D-channel connection between the SPE and the endpoint or adjunct. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-199 In this test, a D-channel XID frame is sent to the endpoint or adjunct over the point-to-point signaling link. The test passes if the endpoint or adjunct responds with a Layer 2 XID-RESPONSE frame. This test must be administered to not run in the station administration form for ports on a TN2208. Table 10-71. TEST #628 BRI XID Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, ATT-ADJ, LGATE-AJ, ATTE-AJ is busy. The test cannot be executed at this time: 1. Pause momentarily (30 seconds) and re-execute at this time. 2. If this problem persists, escalate this problem. NOTE: A BRI-PORT can also be busy. When using this for BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT tests, the words "BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, ATT-ADJ, " can be changed to "BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, ATT-ADJ." 1005 ABORT The endpoint is not administered to support XID Testing. 1. If the endpoint documentation reflects support XID testing, use the change station extension command to change the XID Testing? field on the form to "yes." 1113 ABORT The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint is down. 1. Use the test port PCSSpp l command to clear any errors which prevent establishment of the signaling link. 2. Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test (#626) which is run as part of this command. If this test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #626. 3. If the XID test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-200 Table 10-71. TEST #628 BRI XID — Continued Error Code 1144 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1187 ABORT The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out ) for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET. 2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then release the station via the release station command. a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and BRI-SET, then release the port via release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only, then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release the circuit pack, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 3. Make sure the terminal is connected. 4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-201 Table 10-71. TEST #628 BRI XID — Continued Error Code 2000 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The XID-RESPONSE message was not received from the endpoint. 1. Consult the endpoint documentation to determine if the Layer 2 XID and XID-RESPONSE messages are supported. If the documentation reflects no support for these messages, change XID Testing? field to "no" using the change station extension command. 2. If the endpoint supports these Layer 2 messages and the test continues to fail, assume the endpoint is defective and replace it. 3. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS The switch can successfully pass messages over the D-channel to the BRI endpoint. Continued on next page BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629) This test is used to check the application layer communications between the switch and the endpoint or adjunct. For BRI endpoints, an application message containing the appropriate endpoint service state is sent by the switch to the endpoint. The endpoint responds with an acknowledgment to the application message. For ASAI and AT&T adjuncts, this test is not executed from the administration terminal. Rather, a query message is automatically sent by the switch every two minutes. Failure of the switch to receive a response to a query from the adjunct is logged in the Hardware Error Log. Table 10-72. TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query Error Code 1005 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The endpoint’s MIMs Supported? field is administered to "no." 1. Use the change station extension command to change the parameter only if the endpoint documentation reflects support for ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance Procedures. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-202 Table 10-72. TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query — Continued Error Code 1113 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint or adjunct is down. 1. Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear any errors which prevent establishment of the signaling link. 2. Examine the results of Test #626, which is executed with the command. If this test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for the Signaling Link Status Test. 3. Escalate problem if BRI Layer 3 Query Test continues to abort. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Consult the repair procedure for PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. 1144 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-203 Table 10-72. TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query — Continued Error Code 1187 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out ) for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET. 2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then release the station via the release station command. a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and BRI-SET, then release the port via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only, then release the circuit pack via the release port PPCSS command and run the test again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release the circuit pack, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 3. Make sure the terminal is connected. 4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-204 Table 10-72. TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query — Continued Error Code 2068 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The endpoint has rejected the switch sent application message. This indicates that the endpoint does not support the ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance Procedure for Endpoint Service Messages. 1. Use the change station extension command and change the MIMs Supported? field to "no." 2069 ABORT The endpoint has returned an error response to the switch sent application message. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 FAIL No response is received from the endpoint or the adjunct. For BRI endpoints: 1. Consult the endpoint documentation to determine if ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance Procedures are supported. If not supported, use the change station extension command to change the "MIMs Supported?" field to "no." Use the busyout station extension and release station extension commands to busyout and release the endpoint to resolve any endpoint alarms resulting from failure of this test. 2. If the endpoint supports these procedures and the test continues to fail, assume the endpoint is defective and replace it. PASS The endpoint has successfully responded to the switch’s application message. Continued on next page BRI Set Audits Test (#630) This is a series of two tests which are classified as audits. The switch sends messages to the BRI endpoint to perform the following tests: ■ Ringer Audit - This audit ensures that both the switch and the endpoint agree as to the current state of the endpoint’s ringer. ■ Lamps Audit - This audit ensures that both the switch and the endpoint agree as to the current state of the endpoint’s lamps. ■ Call Activity Audit - This audit ensures that the state of calls is consistent between the switch and the endpoint. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-205 This test is not executed for ASAI or AT&T adjunct because adjuncts do not employ ringers or lamps, or establish calls on the B-channels associated with the BRI interface. Table 10-73. TEST #630 BRI Set Audits Error Code 1113 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint is down. 1. Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear any errors which prevent establishment of the signaling link. 2. Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test (#626) which is run as part of this command. If this test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #626. 3. If the BRI Set Audits test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. 1141 ABORT The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service. 1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to the next tier. 1144 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN. 2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-206 Table 10-73. TEST #630 BRI Set Audits — Continued Error Code 1187 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied out by a technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out ) for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET. 2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then release the station via the release station command. a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and BRI-SET, then release the port via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again. NOTE: When you release the circuit pack, you release all ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out. 3. Make sure the terminal is connected. 4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page SPID Facility Test This test is used to verify the wiring and operation of the signaling link between the switch and a endpoint or adjunct on a BRI interface. This test is not executed from the administration terminal, but rather is executed by using a BRI test set equipped with a display. The test set may replace the BRI set, ASAI or AT&T adjunct under test by plugging it into the same jack or by bridging it onto the wiring at some point between the switch and the endpoint (or adjunct), thereby creating a pseudo-BRI multipoint configuration. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-207 When plugged into the port in this manner, the test set establishes a signaling link connection with the switch and attempts to complete SPID initialization by using the Service SPID administered for the system (see the System Maintenance Administration Form). If the test set displays the correct administered port address for the endpoint or adjunct under test, the test passes (see Service SPID Display which follows). If after one-minute nothing is displayed on the test set, the test fails. Table 10-74. SPID Facility Test Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation No response is received from the endpoint. 1. Check the physical wiring between the switch and the endpoint or adjunct. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate to the next tier. FAIL Display does not match administered port address for the endpoint or adjunct. 1. Change station administration for endpoint or adjunct to match displayed port address. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Display matches administered port address for the endpoint or adjunct. For BRI endpoints: 1. Verify that the SPID values administered in the switch and the endpoint are consistent. 2. If the SPID values are correct, replace the endpoint. 3. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. For ASAI adjuncts: 1. Verify that the TEI values administered in the switch and the adjunct are consistent. 2. If the TEI values are correct, consult the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer for the adjunct. 3. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT Page 10-208 The abbreviations used in (Service SPID Display) have the following meanings: P port network (1,2, ...) C Carrier (A,B,C, ...) SS Slot (01, 02, ...) pp port (01-12) ext extension one and two (one through 99999) SPID service order profile identifier Restricted Service Starting Display Column 1 PCSSpp 8 - ext1 14 - SPID111111 25 - ext2 31 - SPID222222 Bound to First Endpoint Translation Starting Display Column 1 PCSSpp 8 * ext1 14 * SPID111111 25 - ext2 31 - SPID222222 Bound to Second Endpoint Translation Starting Display Column 1 PCSSpp 8 - ext1 14 - SPID111111 25 * ext2 31 * SPID222222 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-209 CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO CABINET MAJOR test environment P Cabinet Sensors CABINET MINOR2 test environment P Cabinet Sensors 1. 2. Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log. If a minor alarm occurs for a variable speed fan, the fan should be checked for a dirty filter. If the filter is not dirty, the fan should be replaced. NOTE: CABINET is valid only in a multicarrier cabinet system. For information concerning single-carrier cabinet systems, refer to the DC-POWER (Single-Carrier Cabinet Power) Maintenance documentation. Each multicarrier cabinet is equipped either with six non-variable speed fans or with six variable speed fans. Non-Variable Speed (Standard) Fan Option. A non-variable speed (standard) fan is indicated by one of the following Product Codes: "ED67077 G1," "ED67077 G2," or "ED67077 G3." Multicarrier cabinets with non-variable speed fans contain a fan speed control unit known as the AHD1 circuit pack. This circuit pack is designed to keep the temperature within the cabinet below 650 C (1490 F). Air is drawn in by the three fans located in the front of the cabinet. The air is channeled upwards through a filter, then through carriers A, B, and C and out the top of the cabinet. Air is drawn in by the three fans located in the back of the cabinet as well. The air is channeled down through a filter, then through carriers D and E and out the bottom of the cabinet. The AHD1 circuit pack monitors five of the six temperature sensors located throughout the multicarrier cabinet, and it uses the output of these sensors to adjust fan speed and to report air flow problems. The Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack, a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system directly monitor the sixth sensor (S1) to report temperature problems. The Cabinet Sensors maintenance object represents the air flow and temperature problems reported by the AHD1 circuit pack and by the Maintenance/Tape Processor, the Duplication Interface circuit pack, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in the multicarrier cabinet systems. The fans and the AHD1 circuit pack obtain their power from the -48 volt DC power supply of the 631 DB DC power unit in the A carrier. In a PPN cabinet for a High or Critical Reliability system, the 631 DB DC power unit in the B carrier can also provide power to the fans. The power goes from the power unit(s) to the current limiter card (982LS), over a wiring harness from the A carrier to the back of the fan unit, through the AHD1 circuit pack, and then to the fans. The front fans DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-210 are wired in parallel with a rear fan. The repair scenarios that follow rely on the technician’s ability to distinguish between high fan speed and low fan speed. The only way to distinguish between the fan speeds is by the sound of the fans. When operating at high speed, the fans make a higher pitched sound than when they run at low speed. The technician probably knows from prior experience what the fans sound like at low speed as well as at high speed. Figure 10-10 shows a multicarrier cabinet system and the location of the temperature sensors S1 through S4 (there are actually two S3 sensors and two S4 sensors) as well as the location of the fans, the AHD1 circuit pack, and the filters. The figure also shows other environment-related components of a multicarrier cabinet system and can be ignored for this section on Cabinet Sensors. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-211 S2 S3 S1 A AC 631 CARRIER C DA I 631 R DB AC F2 F3 F L CARRIER B 631 DA 631 F1 O 631 W DB 631 CARRIER A DA DB AC FILTER A H S4 S4 FANS -3 FRONT 3 BACK D 1 FILTER AC 631 CARRIER D DA A 631 I DB R F5 AC F4 F 631 CARRIER E DA L 631 O DB W DC FUSE F1-F7 F7 BATTERY & BATTERY DC CHARGER POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Figure 10-10. AC RING ON BACK OF GENERATOR PDU, FUSE F6 F9 ON FRONT DIST. S3 OF PDU F9 Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components (CABINET) [Non-Variable Speed Fan Option] Sensor S1 informs the Maintenance/Tape Processor, the Duplication Interface circuit pack, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack when the temperature at the top of the cabinet reaches 650 C (1490 F). Sensor S2 is not monitored by any circuit pack. However, when the temperature at the top of the cabinet reaches 700 C (1580 F), this sensor causes the Power Distribution Unit to shut down power to the entire cabinet. At this point, Emergency Transfer is invoked, and no other system functions are provided. The S3 and S4 sensors constantly report the temperature at the air exhaust in the cabinet (top and bottom S3 sensors) and at the air intake (S4 sensors). The AHD1 circuit pack uses this information to determine fan speed and air flow alarm state. If there is at least a 15 0C (27 0F) air temperature difference between DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-212 the air exhaust and air intake, and if the air exhaust temperature is greater than 50 0C (122 0F), all the fans are turned up to high speed. If this condition exists, the AHD1 circuit pack reports an air flow problem which results in a Minor alarm against the Cabinet Sensors. Variable Speed Fan Option. A variable speed fan is indicated by the Product Code "ED67077 G‘x,"’ where ‘x’ is ‘4’ or a number greater than ‘4.’ A variable speed fan contains Thermal Speed Control and an alarm circuit. As a result, the AHD1 circuit pack is not required in this type of fan. A variable speed fan has two connectors: a two pin connector for the -48 volt input power for backward compatibility, and the five pin Molex connector for speed control and alarm circuitry. The -48 volt power circuitry is isolated from the speed control and the alarm circuitry. An alarm lead from all six variable speed fans is tied to a single lead leading to the processor circuit pack. Three fans on the front of the system are connected to an S3 sensor, which monitors the exhaust air temperature above carrier position "C." Three fans on the back of the system are connected to another S3 sensor, which monitors the exhaust air in the power distribution unit. The speed of the variable speed fans is determined by the temperature detected by the S3 sensors. Thus, the fans’ speed changes continuously according to the temperature of the exhaust air. If the fan speed drops below the preset limit, or if the fan fails, the fan alarm circuit reports an air flow problem, which results in a minor alarm. A multicarrier cabinet containing variable speed fans is presented in Figure 10-11. Note that the two S4 sensors that are included with non-variable speed fans are not required with variable speed fans. NOTE: The new variable speed fans are backward compatible to the carriers for the non-variable speed fans. However, the carriers for the variable speed fans are not backward compatible to cabinets configured for the carriers for the non-variable speed fans. Finally, the carriers for the non-variable speed fans are not forward compatible to cabinets configured for the carriers for variable speed fans. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-213 S2 S3 S1 A AC 631 CARRIER C DA I 631 R DB AC F2 F3 F L CARRIER B 631 DA 631 F1 O 631 W DB 631 CARRIER A DA DB AC FILTER A H S4 S4 FANS -3 FRONT 3 BACK D 1 FILTER AC 631 CARRIER D DA A 631 I DB R F5 AC F4 F 631 CARRIER E DA L 631 O DB W DC FUSE F1-F7 F7 BATTERY & BATTERY DC CHARGER AC RING ON BACK OF GENERATOR PDU, FUSE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Figure 10-11. F6 F9 ON FRONT DIST. S3 OF PDU F9 Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components (CABINET) [Variable Speed Fan Option] Replacement Procedures for AHD1 Fan Speed Controller Circuit Packs and Fans AHD1 Fan Speed Controller Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure NOTE: The procedures in this section pertain only to non-variable speed (standard) fans. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-214 1. Refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", for details on removing power from the system. 2. Remove the fan assembly cover by pulling the cover outward. 3. Loosen and remove the retaining screw nearest the power plug on the front fan located to the extreme left. 4. Disconnect the power plug from the fan. 5. Loosen and remove the other retaining screw on the fan. 6. Remove the fan from the fan assembly. ! CAUTION: DO NOT TOUCH! Resistors on the circuit pack are hot. 7. Lift the latch on the AHD1 fan speed controller circuit pack. 8. Using the latch as a handle, pull the circuit pack up and out of its holder. 9. Insert a replacement AHD1 circuit pack, and push down on the latch until the latch snaps in place. 10. Position the fan, and reconnect the fan power plug. 11. Insert and tighten the retaining screws. 12. Replace the fan assembly cover. 13. Refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", for details on restoring power to the switch. Fan Replacement Procedure NOTE: The procedures in this section pertain to both non-variable speed (standard) fans and variable speed fans. First, determine which fans are defective: NOTE: The following instructions are for servicing a Medium Cabinet. For a Small Cabinet (only two fans in the rear), follow Step 2A below, but start from the rear of the cabinet. 1. If any fan is not rotating, a more detailed inspection is required to determine why the fan has stopped operating. The fact that a fan is not spinning is not always proof that it is damaged. Since each front fan is electrically in parallel with a rear fan, an internal short circuit in a front fan prevents power from reaching the rear fan (and vice versa). Remove the fan assembly cover by pulling the cover outward. Remove the power connector from each inoperative front fan. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-215 2. The following must be done to determine if the front fan or the rear fan has failed: a. Test the front fan: Measure the input impedance between the (+) and (-) input terminals of the front fan with an ohmmeter. IMPORTANT: Attach the "common" lead of the ohmmeter to the fan’s (-) input terminal and the "ohms" or "+" lead of the ohmmeter to the fan’s (+) input terminal. Follow the guidelines in the table below: Input Impedance Fan Analysis Action Next Step 2.0M < ohms < 20M Good None Go to Step 2B ohms < 2.0M Short Circuit Replace Go to Step 3 ohms > 20M Open Circuit Replace Go to Step 3 b. Test the "paired" rear fan: From the front of the cabinet, use a voltmeter to measure the DC voltage across the two female contact pins in the connector housing of the fan wire harness removed from the inoperative front fan in Step 1. (This voltage is the same voltage seen across the input terminals of the paired fan in the rear of the assembly.) Follow the guidelines in the table below: Input Impedance Fan Analysis Action VDC > 25V Good (AHD1 or Front Fan failed) VDC < 25V Short Circuit Replace Next Step Go to Step 3 3. To replace a fan located at the front of the switch cabinet, remove the fan assembly cover by pulling the cover outward. To replace a fan located at the rear of the switch cabinet, use a No. 10 slot screwdriver or 5/16-inch (8mm) wrench and remove the panel covering the fan assembly. 4. Loosen and remove the retaining screw nearest the power plug on the defective fan. ! DANGER: 48-volt power is present on the fan plug. 5. Disconnect the power plug from the defective fan. 6. Loosen and remove the other retaining screw on the fan. 7. Remove the fan from the fan assembly. 8. Position the replacement fan and reconnect the fan power plug. 9. Insert and tighten the retaining screws. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-216 10. Replace the fan assembly cover or panel. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Cabinet Sensors Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 1 Any Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) MINOR ON test environment P sh r 3 257 Any Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) MAJOR ON test environment P sh r 3 0 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-75. System Technician-Demanded Tests: CABINET Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) (c) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (d) X X ND Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) X X ND Order of Investigation Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-217 Table 10-75. System Technician-Demanded Tests: CABINET — Continued Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Notes: a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC-Power) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. c. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for AC- and DC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. d. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. This test shows up in the test sequence only if there is a TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested. Cabinet Temperature Query Test [for Non-Variable Speed Fans] (#122) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN for the status of the cabinet sensors in the cabinet that contains non-variable speed fans. NOTE: The descriptions for Error Codes 1 and 2 (FAIL) in the following table are reversed for Generic 1 systems that use a TN731B maintenance circuit pack . That is, Error Code 1 indicates an "over temperature" problem while Error Code 2 indicates and "air flow" problem. If you are servicing a Generic 1 system, be sure to follow the proper service strategy. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-218 Table 10-76. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable Speed Fans] Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier cabinet system or DC-POWER alarms in a single-carrier cabinet system. Then, repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to ABORT with a Error Code 2000, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a Duplicated Option PPN, PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to ABORT with a Error Code 2000, escalate the problem. 2029 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-219 Table 10-76. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable Speed Fans] — Continued Error Code 1 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The AHD1 circuit pack has reported an air flow problem. The temperature difference between the air intake and the air exhaust is at least 150 C (27 0 F) and the absolute temperature at the top of the cabinet is at least 500 C (122 0F) (referred to as the 150 C/500 C criteria). The fans should be running at high speed. 1. If none of the fans are running, then: a. Look for and resolve all alarms against the CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit). b. Verify -48 volt DC power is available to the fan units. Check the fan unit wiring harness connector. Check that there is 48 volt DC between pins 3, 9, 11 and 2, 8, 10. ■ If there is -48 volt DC power at the connector, there should be power to the fans. If the fans are not running, replace the AHD1. If the fans still do not run, escalate the problem. ■ If there is no -48 volt DC power at the connector, then the current limiter card (982LS) is probably defective. Replace the current limiter card. If the fans still do not run, escalate the problem. 2. If only a few of the fans are not running, replace the defective fans. 3. If all the fans can be started, wait five minutes and rerun the test. If the test fails again, proceed to Step 4 or 5 as applicable. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-220 Table 10-76. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable Speed Fans] — Continued Error Code 1 Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 4. If the fans are not at high speed, measure the cabinet temperature at the air intake and the air exhaust at the top of the cabinet. a. If the 150 C/500 C criteria is met, there is a problem with either the AHD1 circuit pack or the fans that is preventing the fans from operating at high speed. Replace the AHD1 circuit pack and/or the fans. If this succeeds in getting the fans to run at high speed, wait five minutes to give the cabinet time to cool down and, rerun the test. If the problem persists, go to step 5. b. If the 150 C/500 C criteria is not met, the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack is incorrectly reporting this condition. Look for and resolve all errors on these maintenance objects first, then rerun the test. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. 5. If the fans are running at the high speed, check the items on list that follows. Any on of the items could be restricting or redirecting the flow of air within the cabinet. a. Check both filters. If a filter is dirty or clogged it should be cleaned or replaced. The filters can either be washed with soap and water or vacuumed. b. Make sure there is nothing (other than circuit packs) in the carrier slots that could be restricting the air flow. c. Make sure there are no missing (blank) circuit pack or carrier faceplates. Install and/or replace them as necessary. d. Make sure the cabinet door is properly closed. The door must be closed for the fans to be able to properly cool the cabinet. Wait five minutes to give the fans a chance to cool the cabinet. Rerun the test. If the tests still fails, proceed to Step 6. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-221 Table 10-76. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable Speed Fans] — Continued Error Code 1 Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 6. At this point, there should be nothing impeding the air flow, and the fans should be running at high speed. Check the temperatures for the 150 C/500 C criteria. a. If the 150 C/500 C criteria exists, a temperature problem exists, and the fans (at high speed) should cool down the switch. Wait five minutes and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the ambient room temperature is probably too high, and the room should be cooled. b. If the 150 C/500 C criteria does not exist, the AHD1 circuit pack, the fans, or the S3 or S4 sensors are defective. Replace these items one at a time (in the order listed). Rerun the test between each replacement. Failures can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, the Duplication Interface, and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. If this does not clear the problem, follow normal escalation procedures. 2 FAIL The PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack has reported a temperature problem because the S1 sensor has detected a temperature of at least 650 C (1490 F). The entire cabinet is in danger of being powered down if the temperature reaches 70 0C (1580 F). 1. If none of the fans are running: a. Look for and resolve all alarms against the CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit). b. Verify that 48 volt DC is available to the fan units. Check the fan unit wiring harness connector. Verify that there is 48 volt DC between pins (3, 9, 11 and 2, 8, 10). ■ If there is 48 volt DC at the connector, there should be power to the fans. If the fans are not running, replace the AHD1. If the fans still do not run, follow normal escalation procedures. ■ If there is not 48 volt DC at the connector, the current limiter card (982LS) is probably defective. Replace the current limiter card. If the fans still do not run, escalate the problem. 2. If only a few of the fans are not running, replace the defective fans. 3. If all the fans can be started, wait five minutes, and rerun the test.If the test fails again, proceed to Step Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Page 10-222 Table 10-76. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable Speed Fans] — Continued Error Code 2 Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 4. Check the temperature at the top of the cabinet. If the temperature is at least 650 C (1490 F), the ambient room temperature is too high, and the fans cannot cool the system. Unless the room temperature is reduced, the system is going to shut down soon. If the temperature is less than 650 C, then: a. The PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may be incorrectly reporting this condition. First, look for and resolve all errors on these MOs, then rerun the test. If this test fails again, return to Step 1. If there are no errors, continue. b. The sensor S1 may be incorrectly reporting the temperature at the top of the cabinet. Replace sensor S1, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. 3 FAIL The AHD1 circuit pack has reported both air flow and temperature problems. Resolve the airflow error first, then, correct the temperature error as described previously. PASS The AHD1 circuit pack has not reported any temperature or air flow problems. The temperatures at the air exhaust at the top of the cabinet and the air intake at the bottom of the cabinet can be measured and the results compared against the criteria described previously. If a problem has been reported, troubleshoot this problem by using the procedures for the "FAIL" cases described previously. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity) Page 10-223 CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity) MO Name (in Alarm Log) CAP-MEM 1. Alarm Level MINOR/ WARNING1 Initial Command to Run test card-mem long Full Name of MO Memory Card Capacity The WARNING alarm is generated when the alarm is downgraded by using the set option command. Memory Card Capacity tracks the percentage of used translation storage space on the memory card. Whenever translation space usage on the memory card reaches 98% of capacity, an alarm is generated. This alarm serves to inform the user that a larger flash card may be required for the system. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-77. Memory Card Capacity Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data 1 (a) 112 Associated Test Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014) Alarm Level MINOR/ WARNING (b) On/Off Board Test to Clear Value OFF test card-mem long Notes: a. The memory card translation storage space is at least or more than 98% full. b. This alarm has been downgraded by the set option command. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table that follows when you are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the "Memory Card Capacity Test," for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The "Memory Card Capacity Test" can be initiated via either the test card-mem long command or after a save translation command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity) Page 10-224 Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (a) X X ND Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) (b) X X ND Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (b) X X ND Memory Card Match Test (#697) (b) X X ND Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) (b) X X ND Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) (b) X X ND Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) (b) X ND Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) (b) X ND Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014) X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014) This test is a nondestructive test. The purpose of the test is to verify that the percentage of translation storage space used in the memory card is less than 98%. This test can be initiated through a system technician demanded test card-mem long command, or it can be executed as part of a maintenance test sequence after the save translation operation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity) Page 10-225 Table 10-78. TEST #1014 Memory Card Capacity Test Error Code 112 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Memory Card Translation storage is at least 98% full. 1. Inform the user that it may be necessary to upgrade to a larger flash card. 2. Replace the memory card with a larger one, or downgrade the alarm to WARNING by using the set option command. 3. Rerun the test. 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 ABORT 2108 ABORT Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for repairing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem long command. 2110 ABORT No Memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. PASS The Memory Card Translation storage is less than 98% full. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-226 CARD-MEM (Memory Card) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO CARD-MEM MAJOR1 CARD-MEM MINOR test card-mem long Memory Card CARD-MEM WARNING test card-mem sh Memory Card 1. Memory Card The "MAJOR" alarm occurs only at power-up time or on a Reset System 3, 4, or 5 when the switch cannot load all translations from the memory card. A memory card contains a set of flash EPROM memory devices. The data can be stored in a memory card and can remain nonvolatile, even when the power is off. The memory card is installed into the TN777B NETCON circuit pack to save the translations, announcements, and core dumps. During the system reboot or a system power down condition, the in-core system maintenance hardware error logs are temporarily saved in the memory card before the system goes down. When the system is restarted, the error logs file is read back from the memory card. The Hard Patch feature also uses the memory card as temporary storage when LMM applies an update file to the in-core system software. The system software is stored in the "flash" section of main memory. The memory card used for saving translations doesn’t contain a copy of the system software. The recommended size of a memory card for each configuration is described in the following table. Memory Card Size Usage File Names 1 Megabyte Without Announcements translation 4 Megabyte With Announcements translation announcements 10 Megabyte With Announcements translation announcements 10 Megabyte Maintenance translation announcements core_dump 10 Megabyte System Upgrade system_software Customers can have either 1 MB, 4 MB, or 10 MB memory cards for the normal operations. 10 MB memory cards are also used for maintenance and software upgrades. The software upgrade memory card cannot be used for saving translations. Always use 4 MB memory Cards, 10 MB memory cards should only be used when a 4MB card gives an error in the CAP-MEM Maintenance Object Test #1014 (Memory Card Capacity Test). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-227 A memory card has a write-protection switch along its edge. If the write-protection switch is enabled, the memory card cannot be written to. The 12 volt power supply unit located in TN777B NETCON circuit pack supports the erase and write operations of flash memory devices in the TN786B or TN790 Processor circuit pack. The unit also supports the memory card inserted in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. If the 12 volt power supply unit cannot be turned on to supply 12 volts, all erase and write operations fail. Refer to 12V-PWR (12 volt power supply) Maintenance documentation for a detailed description. To write data (for example, translations) onto a memory card, the system software first erases the memory card and then writes the data. An erased bit can be written again, but a written bit cannot be changed or written again until after the next erasure. Software erase and write operations on a memory card take longer as the card usage increases. A memory card that cannot be erased or written to by software should be replaced. Removing A Memory Card From The Slot A memory card can be removed from the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack only when the fourth yellow LED with a label "card-in-use" is not glowing. Otherwise, the memory card operation might be interrupted abnormally, and the files stored in the memory card may become corrupted. Resolving an Alarm Raised Against a Memory Card The list that follows discusses the procedures for resolving an alarm that is raised against a memory card: 1. Remove the inserted memory card from the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack while the "card-in-use" amber LED on TN777B is not glowing. 2. Insert the new formatted memory card firmly into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 3. Enter the test card-mem command to verify the new memory card. 4. If the alarm cannot be resolved by replacing the memory card, do the following: a. Remove the memory card from the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. b. Replace the TN777B NETCON circuit pack in the appropriate control carrier. Since the TN777B is in the SPE control complex, follow the standard procedures for replacing an SPE circuit pack. c. Insert the memory card back into the slot at the TN777B circuit pack. d. Enter the test network-control [long] command to verify the new TN777B and the memory card. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-228 5. Once the alarm is resolved, enter the save translation command to store the current system translations to the memory card. 6. If applicable, enter the save announcements command to store the current announcements to the memory card. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-79. Mrmory Card Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any Any test card-mem 1(a) Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) MINOR OFF test card-mem 257(b) Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) MINOR OFF test card-mem Memory Card Match and Read Test (#697) WARNING OFF test card-mem Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) WARNING OFF test card-mem 0 0 Associated Test 513(c) Any 769(d) 1025(e) 104 105 106 107 108 Memory Card Dir. Recovery Test (#699) MINOR OFF test card-mem 1281(f) Any Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) MINOR OFF test card-mem long 1537(g) 104 105 106 107 108 Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) MINOR OFF test card-mem long 3329(h) any None MINOR/ MAJOR OFF 3841(i) Any Save Translation MINOR OFF save translation 3843(j) Any Save Translation MINOR OFF save translation Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-229 Notes: a. System detects that no memory card is inserted in the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. If a memory card is in place, the memory card may have a bad physical connection. b. System software cannot recognize the inserted memory card because the inserted memory card is not formatted or the directories in the memory card are corrupted. The system cannot use this memory card. The memory card must be replaced with a good memory card. c. The inserted memory card does not have enough storage space to support system operations, such as saving translations and, if applicable, announcements; or, the memory card is a system-upgrade memory card that cannot be used for saving translations. This hardware error raises a WARNING/OFF_BOARD alarm. The memory card should be replaced with one of the recommended size. The "Aux Data" field contains the following error codes: ■ 101: Inserted memory card is a system-upgrade memory card ■ 102: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card ■ 103: The inserted memory card is a system-upgrade memory card, and, while the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card. ■ 116: The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. ■ 118: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. ■ 132: System translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space. ■ 134: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card, and system translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space. ■ 148: The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration, and system translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space. ■ 150: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. Also, the system translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space. d. The write-protection switch of the memory card is in the "protected" position. A write-protected memory card can not be erased or written. Before entering the test command to resolve the alarm, follow the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-230 standard procedure for taking the memory card out of the slot. Then, change the "write-protection" switch to the "not-protected" position. Finally, insert the memory card back into the slot. e. The memory card has been detected with a broken directory. A MINOR/OFF_BOARD alarm is raised when maintenance cannot restore the broken directory. The memory card must be replaced before the test to resolve the alarm is run. The "Aux Data" field contains the following error codes: ■ 104: Directories on the memory card are corrupted and cannot be recovered. ■ 105: "0" cannot be written into the memory card before an erase operation. ■ 106: Memory card cannot be erased. ■ 107: Data cannot be written into a memory card after an erasure. ■ 108: 12 volt power supply for directory recovery can’t be turned on. The 12 volt power supply on TN777B NETCON circuit pack may be defective. Follow the standard procedure to replace the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. f. The translations file stored in the memory card is corrupted with a checksum error during the read operation. The memory card can no longer hold the written data. Enter the save translation command to restore the translations. Then, run the test command to clear the alarm. If the error occurs repeatedly, replace the memory card. g. The maintenance test "Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test" failed. Enter the status card-mem command to verify that a user’s memory card is inserted and that the write-protection switch of the memory card is off. Rerun the test card-mem command to verify that the 12 volt power supply is functional. Enter the test card-mem long command again to verify the test result of the "Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test." If the test still fails, the memory card should be replaced. After the new memory card is inserted, enter the test card-mem long command again to resolve the alarm. The "Aux Data" field contains the same error codes as for Error Type "1025." See Note (e). h. There was an error while translations were being loaded. The relevant alarm occurs at power-up or on a Reset System 3, 4, or 5 if the switch cannot load translations. In a standard system, the alarm invokes Emergency Transfer. The repair procedure for a standard system is provided in the list that follows: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-231 NOTE: Follow this procedure only if there are no other memory card errors or alarms. If such errors or alarms exist, resolve them before trying to resolve this alarm. 1. After you resolve all other memory card problems, issue the reset system 3 command. 2. After the system is restarted, issue the status card-mem command. 3. If the "translation" is not present, insert a backup memory card and then issue the reset system 3 command. NOTE: In a High or Critical Reliability System where the problem is in the Standby SPE, use the procedure above substituting reset spe-standby 3 and status card-mem a/b for the Standby SPE. i. The "save translation" operation failed. The reasons for failure are described in the "Aux Data" field and include the following: Aux Data Description 1 Directory file on the memory card failed the checksum test 2 NETCON is not a TN777B circuit pack 3 Too many commands are running 4 Command has been aborted 5 Command has collided with a current command 6 Software controller is idle 7 Memory card has been erased 8 Only one good directory is on the card 9 All directories are corrupted, and the memory card needs reformatting 10 Hard patch file is full 11 Hardware fault: data can’t be written into the memory card 12 Software error: passed parameters were out of range 13 Command has been aborted 14 Magic number is illegal 15 Driver was trapped when reading the memory card 16 No memory card is inserted Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-232 17 Second directory in the memory card could not be found 18 File in the memory card is not available 19 Memory card does not match the system usage 20 Memory card is too small for the system usage 21 Broken directory couldn’t be recovered 22 System upgrade card is inserted 23 Illegal write is requested 24 Generic software failure 25 Driver timed out 26 Driver is unable to program "O’s" in the memory card 27 Memory card can’t be erased 28 Memory card is write-protected 29 12 volt power supply could not be turned on 109 Standby SPE does not respond to the request from the Active SPE 124 Can’t access Standby SPE for saving translation Continued on next page A MINOR/OFF_BOARD alarm is raised when two consecutive "save translation" operations fail. The alarm is resolved only when the translation is saved onto the memory card successfully. j. The save translations failure is due to other hardware failures. Enter the test card-mem long command and resolve other card-mem failures first. After the all test card-mem pass message is received, use the save translation command to resolve this error. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-233 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Memory Card Insertion Test for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (a) X X ND Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) X X ND Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) X X ND Memory Card Match Test (#697) X X ND Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) X X ND Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) X X ND Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) X ND Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) X ND Order of Investigation 1. Reset Board Sequence D/ND1 D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Note: a. Refer to 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) The purpose of this test, which is nondestructive, is to verify the erase, write, and read operations. The test erases the backup copy of the translation file stored in the memory card, and it verifies that the erase operation works. The test then writes the primary copy of the translation file from the same memory card to the erased flash segment, and it verifies that the translation file is written successfully. This test can be initiated through a system technician demanded test card-mem long command, or it can be executed as part of a maintenance test sequence when the save translation and save announcements operations fail. The test and relevant applications (for example, saving translations, saving announcements) cannot be executed at the same time. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-234 Table 10-80. TEST #693 Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test Error Code 1192 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Applications are accessing the memory card. 1. Wait 10 minutes for the applications to complete. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. 2110 ABORT No memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2111 ABORT Inserted memory card cannot be recognized. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2112 ABORT Internal system error The inserted memory card is a "system-upgrade" memory card. 1. Replace the inserted memory card with a user’s memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2115 ABORT The memory card is write-protected. 1. Take the memory card out, and change the "write-protection" switch to the "not-protected" position. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2113 ABORT The inserted memory card has only one directory file. 1. Enter the test card-mem command, and verify that the "Memory Card Directory Recovery Test" (#699) passes. If the directory file cannot be recovered, replace the memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-235 Table 10-80. TEST #693 Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test — Continued Error Code 2117 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation No translation file has been saved onto the memory card. 1. Enter the save translation command, and verify that the translations are saved onto the memory card successfully. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 104 FAIL Directories on the memory card are corrupted and cannot be recovered. 105 FAIL "0" cannot be written into memory before an erase operation. 106 FAIL Memory card cannot be erased. 107 FAIL Data cannot be written onto a memory card after an erasure. 1. Replace the memory card and re-run the test. 108 FAIL 12 volt power supply for the Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test can’t be turned on. The 12 volt power supply on TN777B NETCON circuit pack may be defective. 1. Re-enter the test card-mem command, and verify the result of Test 701 for the 12 Volt Power Supply. 2. If Test 701 fails, follow the Standard Repair Procedure to replace the TN777B NETCON circuit pack with a new TN777B circuit pack. 3. Retry the command a 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) This test, which is nondestructive, verifies the integrity of the translation file stored in the memory card by reading (without any PREC updates) the translation file from the memory card and by then performing a checksum error checking. The calculated checksum value is compared with the recorded checksum value in the translation file. If these two values are different, this indicates that the translation file is corrupted. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-236 Table 10-81. TEST #694 Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test Error Code Test Result 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. 2110 ABORT No memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2111 ABORT Inserted memory card cannot be recognized. 1. Insert a new formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2112 ABORT Internal system error The inserted memory card is a "system-upgrade" memory card. 1. Replace the inserted memory card with a user’s memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL A checksum error is detected in the translation file that is stored in the inserted memory card. 1. Enter the save translation command, and verify that translations can be successfully saved onto the memory card. 2. Rerun the test. 3. If the test fails again, replace the memory card, and repeat Steps 1 and 2. PASS No checksum error is found in the translation file. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-237 Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) This test, which is nondestructive, verifies whether a memory card is inserted into the memory card slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack and also whether the system can detect its existence. Table 10-82. TEST #695 Memory Card Insertion Test Error Code Test Result 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. FAIL No memory card is inserted in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack, or the inserted memory card has a bad connection. 1. Insert a memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. If a memory card is already inserted, take the memory card out and examine the connectors of the memory card and the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. Insert the memory card into the slot again. 3. When a memory card is pushed into the slot, make sure that the memory card is inserted firmly into the slot. 4. Re-enter the test card-mem command. If the test still fails, replace the memory card, and then repeat this step one more time. 5. If the test still fails after you replace the memory card, replace the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for a memory card. PASS A memory card is inserted into the TN777B NETCON circuit pack, and the system can recognize its existence. Continued on next page Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) This test is a nondestructive test. The memory card must be formatted before an application. The test reads the directory file from the memory card, and it verifies the integrity of the directory file. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-238 Table 10-83. TEST #696 Memory Card Format and Read Test Error Code Test Result 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. 2110 ABORT No memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2113 ABORT One of the two directories in the memory card is corrupted. 1. Re-enter the test card-mem command, and verify that Test #699 passes. 2. If the test is aborted again with this error code, replace the memory card. FAIL System software cannot recognize the inserted memory card. The memory card is not formatted, or the directories of the memory card are corrupted. 1. Replace the memory card with a new formatted memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS System recognizes the inserted memory card, and it can read the directories from the memory card. Continued on next page Memory Card Match Test (#697) This test is a nondestructive test. The test verifies the inserted memory card for consistency with the system configuration. The test helps answer the following questions: ■ Is the inserted memory card a system software upgrade card? ■ Does the size of the inserted memory card match the capacity of the system configuration? Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-239 ■ Does the inserted memory card contain the Announcement file for a system with an Announcement circuit pack? ■ Does the size of the translations in the system reach 98% of the reserved storage space on the memory card? If the answer to any of these questions is "yes," maintenance raises a WARNING alarm for service attention. A new memory card is usually required. Table 10-84. TEST #697 Memory Card Match Test Error Code Test Result 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. 2110 ABORT No memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. 2111 ABORT Inserted memory card is not formatted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. 101 FAIL The inserted memory card is a system-upgrade memory card. 1. Replace the memory card with a user’s memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 102 FAIL The inserted memory card does not contain an Announcements file, and the system is configured with the Announcement feature. 1. Replace the memory card with a 10 MB memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-240 Table 10-84. TEST #697 Memory Card Match Test — Continued Error Code 103 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The memory card is a system-upgrade memory card and, while the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 116 FAIL The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 118 FAIL While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 132 FAIL Translation reaches 98% of the memory card reserved storage space. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 134 FAIL While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card, and system translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 148 FAIL The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration, and system translation reaches 98% of the memory card reserved storage space. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-241 Table 10-84. TEST #697 Memory Card Match Test — Continued Error Code 150 Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. Also, system translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space. 1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system configuration guidelines. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The inserted memory card matches the system configuration, and the card has enough space for saving translations and (if applicable) announcements. Continued on next page Memory Card Write-Protection Test (#698) This test, which is nondestructive, verifies whether the write-protected switch on the memory card is turned on. The memory card cannot be erased or written to when the write-protected switch is on. Table 10-85. TEST #698 Memory Card Write-Protected Test Error Code Test Result 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-242 Table 10-85. TEST #698 Memory Card Write-Protected Test — Continued Error Code 2110 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation No memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2111 ABORT Inserted memory card is not formatted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The Write-Protect switch of the inserted memory card is set to the protect position. 1. Take the memory card out, and move the write-protect switch to the "not-protected" position. 2. Insert the memory card back into the slot. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The inserted memory card is not write-protected. Continued on next page Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) This test is a nondestructive test. All memory cards, except the memory card for system software upgrade, have two copies of both directory files and translation files to ensure that there is at least a good translation file in the memory card at any time, especially during the "save translation" operation. If one of the two directory files (for example, the directory file) is missing or broken (for example, the directory file has a bad checksum), maintenance can build the directory file. The Memory Card Directory Recovery Test ■ Verifies the integrity of both active and backup directory files in a memory card, and ■ Requests a rebuilding of the directory file if the file is missing or corrupted. When the test passes, both directories are sane. If the memory card is a system-upgrade memory card, the test is aborted. If the test fails, the broken or missing directory cannot be rebuilt. As a result, all subsequent "write-to-memory card" operations are blocked. When an alarm is raised and Error Type 1025 for "CARD-MEM" is active, replace the memory card. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-243 Table 10-86. TEST #699 Memory Card Directory Recovery Test Error Code 1192 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Contention error. Applications are accessing the memory card. 1. Wait 10 minutes for the applications to complete. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2012 2106 2114 ABORT 2013 2100 none ABORT 2108 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack. 1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack. 2. Re-enter the test card-mem command. 2110 ABORT No memory card is inserted. 1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2111 ABORT Inserted memory card cannot be recognized. 1. Insert a new formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2112 ABORT Internal system error The inserted memory card is a "system-upgrade" memory card. 1. Replace the inserted memory card with a user’s memory card. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2115 ABORT The memory card is write-protected. 1. Take the memory card out, flip the "write-protection" switch to the "not-protected" position, and insert the memory card back into the slot. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Page 10-244 Table 10-86. TEST #699 Memory Card Directory Recovery Test — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 104 FAIL Directories in the memory card are corrupted and cannot be recovered. 105 FAIL "0" cannot be written into memory before an erase operation. 106 FAIL Memory card cannot be erased. 107 FAIL Data cannot be written into a memory card after the erase operation. Maintenance cannot restore the missing or broken directory file in the inserted memory card. 1. Replace the memory card with a new, formatted one. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 108 FAIL 12 volt power supply for directory recovery can’t be turned on. The 12 volt power supply on TN777B NETCON circuit pack may be defective. 1. Re-enter the test card-mem command, and verify the result of Test 701 for 12 Volt Power Supply. 2. If Test 701 fails, follow the Standard Repair Procedure to replace the TN777B NETCON circuit pack with a new TN777B circuit pack. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS Both directory files in the inserted memory card are sane. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-245 CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems MO Name (in Alarm Log) CARR-POW 1. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run1 recycle carrier PC Full Name of MO Carrier Port Power Unit Recycle the carrier indicated by the PORT field in the Alarm Log. DEFINITY Generic 1 offers two basic cabinet type configurations: (1) the multicarrier cabinet system and (2) the single-carrier cabinet system. Both cabinet system configurations may be powered by either an external AC or DC power source. NOTE: For environment maintenance, the aspects of a PPN configuration for a High or Critical Reliability system or of an EPN cabinet configuration are irrelevant. The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet configuration and the type of powering. Therefore, refer to the following list to find the appropriate MO section(s). ■ For a single-carrier cabinet system, refer to the "DC-POWER" Maintenance documentation for environment maintenance strategy. ■ For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external AC power source, refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections: "AC-POWER", "CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems". ■ For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source, refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections: "AC-POWER (AC Power) for DC-Powered Systems", "CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for DC-Powered Systems". Every carrier in the system must be supplied with +5 volt, -48 volt, and -5 volt DC power for the various circuit packs to operate properly. This power is supplied to the carriers as follows: AC from a wall outlet comes into the PDU, which distributes the power via a set of fuses (F1 to F7) to the power units. Each carrier in the system is equipped with two power units: the 631 DA AC power unit and the 631 DB AC power unit, which together supply the required voltages to the carrier. Figure 10-12 illustrates the position of the power unit and the power distribution unit (PDU) and shows which power unit each fuse controls (Figure 10-12 also shows other Environment maintenance-related items that can be ignored for this section on Carrier Port Power Unit). Figure 10-13 illustrates the position of the power unit and the PDU and shows which power unit each fuse DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-246 controls in a small cabinet (from a System 75 R1V3 upgrade). Figure 10-14 shows the position of the fuses on the PDU and describes how to replace a fuse. The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages on the backplane pins. For more information, refer to the "Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems" section found in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". The power unit has two LEDs: if the yellow LED is lit it means the power unit is operating as normal; if the red LED is lit it means the power unit has a fault; and if neither is lit it LED means no external power is being supplied. The CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) MO represents the pair of power units that power each carrier in a multicarrier cabinet system. If a problem is reported by hardware for a power unit on a port carrier, the system can recycle the pair of power units in a port carrier; however, if the problem is reported on a control carrier, the system cannot recycle the pair of power units in a control carrier. In a standard multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN) carrier A is the control carrier, and carriers B, C, D, and E are the port carriers. In a High or Critical Reliability system multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN), carriers A and B are the control carriers, and carriers C, D, and E are the port carriers. However, carrier B can be recycled only if the Active Expansion Interface Link and Active Tone-Clock circuit pack are in the A carrier. Loss of the 631 DB Carrier Port DC Power Unit in the active control carrier (the A carrier for a standard system and either the A or B carrier for a High or Critical Reliability system) causes loss of the administration terminal. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the Active SPE should switch to the Standby SPE if there is a CARR-POW alarm. Recycling a carrier turns off the pair of power units, and turns them back on two seconds later. ! WARNING: Recycling carriers disrupts service for all circuit packs on the carrier. The DEFINITY Generic 1 can also support neon message waiting lamps on analog telephones. If this is required, then the carrier(s) that contains the TN769 Analog Neon circuit packs must also be supplied with 165 volt to power the neon lights. The 165 volt can only be supplied by a TN752 or a TN755B power unit circuit pack. The following table lists all power unit and power-related circuit packs for the system and indicates the voltages they can supply. Figure 10-12 through Figure 10-17 show a schematic of each power unit type. The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-247 on the backplane pins. Refer to Chapter 2 in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104. Power Supply +5 -48V -5V 165V Cabinet Position 631 WA yes no no no Left Side 631 WB no yes no no Right Side 631 AR yes no no no Left Side 631 BR no yes no no Right Side 631 DA yes no no no Left Side 631 DB no yes yes no Right Side TN736 no no yes no - TN752 no no yes yes - TN755B no no no yes - Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems S2 S3 Page 10-248 S1 A AC 631 CARRIER C DA I 631 R DB AC F2 F3 F L CARRIER B 631 DA 631 F1 O 631 W DB 631 CARRIER A DA DB AC FILTER A H S4 S4 FANS -3 FRONT 3 BACK D 1 FILTER AC 631 CARRIER D DA A 631 I DB R F5 AC F4 F 631 CARRIER E DA L 631 O DB W DC FUSE F1-F7 F7 BATTERY & BATTERY DC CHARGER POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Figure 10-12. ON BACK OF RING AC GENERATOR F6 PDU, FUSE F9 ON FRONT DIST. S3 OF PDU F9 Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components (CARR-POW) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-249 CONVENIENCE OUTLET F3 CONVENIENCE OUTLET F6 20A F8 20A 2A F7 15A FUSE F7 IS FOR CONVENIENCE OUTLETS BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FUSE LOCATIONS FUSE LOCATIONS THE 3 FANS ARE ACTUALLY A H D 1 ON BACK OF CABINET AND S4 ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM S4 FRONT OF CABINET. A FILTER I AC R 631 CARRIER B DA AC F3 F 631 L DB F6 O 631 W CARRIER A 631 DB DA NOTE: THE 631AR AND 631BR MAY BE USED AS POWER DISTRIBUTION THE CARRIER POWER UNIT BATTERY & AC RING BATTERY DIST. GENERATOR PROVIDED A TN736 OR TN752 POWER UNIT CIRCUIT CHARGER S3 UNIT PACK IS IN SAME CARRIER FRONT VIEW Figure 10-13. Small Cabinet Environment Components (CARR-POW) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-250 F9 F4 F1 2A 20A 20A AC AC F5 AC F2 20A 20A AC AC MAIN AC F3 F6 20A 20A DC AC CIRCUIT BREAKER F7 20A DC BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FUSE F8 (5A AC) IS LOCATED ON THE BACK OF THE PDU ABOVE THE CONVENIENCE OUTLET AND IS NOT SHOWN FUSE TIP FUSES F1-F7 ARE ILLUSTRATED AT THE LEFT. WHEN REPLACING ONE OF THESE FUSES, CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO INSTALL THEM FUSE TIP FIRST. FUSES F8-F9 ARE SYMMETRICAL AND CAN BE FUSE INSERTED EITHER WAY. RETAINER Figure 10-14. Multicarrier Cabinet Fuse Location and Replacement Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-251 STATUS LEDS RED AMBER LOCKING LEVER POWER CORD LOCKING SLIDE OUTLET Figure 10-15. 631WA or 631WB AC Power Unit Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-252 CIRCUIT BREAKER ON OFF STATUS LED LOCKING LEVER POWER CORD LOCKING SLIDE OUTLET Figure 10-16. 631AR or 631BR AC Power Unit Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-253 STATUS LEDS RED AMBER LOCKING LEVER POWER CORD LOCKING SLIDE OUTLET Figure 10-17. 631DA or 631DB AC Power Unit Power Unit Replacement Procedures The procedures for replacing the various power units are given below: Replacing a 631AR or 631BR AC Power Unit If the power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN system, refer to "Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", before replacing the power unit. To replace the power unit, implement the following steps: 1. Set the power switch to OFF, and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the locking slide on the power unit to its leftmost position and unlatch the locking lever. 3. Remove the power unit from the carrier. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-254 4. Before installing the replacement power unit in the carrier, turn the power unit on its side and operate rocker switches 1 through 4 on the dip switch as follows: Switch 631AR Position 631BR Position 1 open open 2 closed closed 3 open open 4 closed open NOTE: In the open position, the rocker is down on the side opposite the number. In the closed position, the rocker is down on the side adjacent to the number. 5. Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left position and open the locking lever. 6. Insert the power unit into the carrier until some resistance is felt. 7. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches. 8. Move the locking lever slide on the power unit to the extreme right position. 9. Connect the power cord and set the power switch to ON. Replacing a 631DA or 631DB AC Power Unit If the power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN system, refer to "Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures" before replacing the power unit. To replace the power unit, follow the procedure below: 1. Unplug the power cord. 2. Move the locking slide on the power unit to the extreme left position and unlatch the locking lever. 3. Remove the power unit from the carrier. 4. Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left position and open the locking lever. 5. Insert the power unit into the carrier until some resistance is felt. 6. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches. 7. Move the locking lever slide on the power unit to the extreme right position. 8. Connect the power cord and set the power switch to ON. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-255 Replacing a TN736 or TN752 Power Unit Circuit Pack If the TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is in a control carrier of a PPN system, then refer to the "Handling Control Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". Replacing either power unit interrupts the -5 volt supply to the carrier. This causes all the analog circuit packs in the carrier to fail their Loop Around Tests and may cause failures in circuit packs in the control complex. After the power unit has been replaced, look for alarms against these maintenance objects. If ANL-LINE alarms exist, refer to Test #47 (Loop Around and Conference Test) in ANL-LINE Maintenance documentation. For CO-TRK alarms, refer to Test #33 (Loop Around and Conference Test) in CO-TRK Maintenance documentation. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Carrier Port Power Unit Error Log Entries Error Type 0 1 1(a)(b) 1. Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 0 or 1 Power Unit Query Test (#127) MAJOR ON test environment P r 2 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. Where P is an appropriate port network number taken for the PORT field of the Error Log. b. Run the Power Unit Query Test (#127) first using the test environment P r 2 command. Then, if a carrier must be recycled to clear the CARR-POW alarm, use the recycle carrier PC command to run the Power Unit Recycle Test (#126). The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is not included in either the long or Short Test Sequences. ! WARNING: The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is destructive. For more information, refer to the description of this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-256 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c) X X ND Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) (d) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. c. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. d. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. This test only shows up in the test sequence if there is a TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-257 Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) This test is destructive. This test is destructive because it requires all circuit packs in the recycled carrier to be removed and inserted. These actions cause all calls originating or terminating on circuit packs in this carrier to be dropped. The pair of power units in the specified carrier is recycled. Both power units in the carrier are turned off for two seconds and then back on again. After the power units have been turned back on, the test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of pair of power units in the specified carrier. If both power units are on and functioning, then the test passes. If both power units are not on and functioning, the test fails, and BOTH power units are turned off. Table 10-87. TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1129 ABORT Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates that the Active Tone-Clock for the EPN is in carrier 2B. 1. Issue the set tone-clock 2A command. 2. Rerun the test. 1130 ABORT Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates that the Active Expansion Interface Link for the EPN is in carrier 2B. 1. Issue the set expansion-link A01 command. 2. Rerun the test. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2029 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-258 Table 10-87. TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test — Continued Error Code 1 (Carrier E) 2 (Carrier D) 4 (Carrier A) 8 (Carrier B) 16 (Carrier C) Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation There is a problem with one or both Power Unit(s) on the recycled carrier. 1. Since the Power Unit Recycle Test failed, both Power Units in the recycled carrier should have been powered off by the system software. Both power units should be showing a red status LED, instead of a green one. Since the Power Unit Query Test is a subset of the Power Unit Recycle Test, the Power Unit Query Test (#127) should also fail. Run the Power Unit Query Test by using the test environment P command where P is the appropriate port network number. 2. If the test fails, follow the repair procedures described for Test #127. If problem persists, follow normal escalation procedures. PASS Both power units in the recycled carrier were found to be healthy by the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system after the power units were powered down and back up. If the status LEDs on both power units are not showing green, then the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have incorrectly reported the state of the power units. Look for and resolve any alarms on these MOs. Continued on next page Power Unit Query Test (#127) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of pair of power units in the specified carrier. If both power units are on and functioning, then the test passes. If both are not on and functioning, it fails. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-259 Table 10-88. TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier cabinet system or DC-POWER alarms in a single-carrier cabinet system. Then, repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a Duplicated Option PPN, PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, escalate the problem. 2029 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-260 Table 10-88. TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation There is a problem with one or both power units on the tested carrier. 1. For each power unit that has all sttus LEDs OFF, check the AC input to the power unit at the power unit outlet (see Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13). If there is no AC, then check the appropriate fuses (see Figure 10-14) for the affected power unit. If the fuses are blown out, replace the fuses (see ). If the fuses blow out again or AC does not show up at the power unit outlet, then there is probably a power wiring problem in the cabinet. Follow normal escalation procedures. 2. At this point AC should be present at the power unit outlet. If the carrier being tested is the 1A or 2A carrier or the 1B carrier in a High or Critical Reliability system, refer to "Troubleshooting Control Carrier Power Units" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". Otherwise, use the recycle carrier PC command (where PC is the appropriate port network and carrier) in an attempt to bring back the power units for this carrier. If the test passes, the trouble is cleared. If the test does not pass, one power unit, or both, in the tested carrier is defective. If only one power unit is defective, the status LEDs on the healthy power unit light green for a moment. When the recycle test determines that both power units are defective, the software turns off power to both the good and defective power units. This causes the status LED(s) on the good power unit to light red. 3. Unplug both power units, and wait about one minute to allow the power units to cool down. Plug in the power units. If either power unit is operating properly (that is, the status LEDs show green), then replace the defective power unit(s). See "Power Unit Replacement Procedures" in this section. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-261 Table 10-88. TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 4. If the replaced power unit still does not operate properly, then a circuit pack or a defective telephone connected to a circuit pack in the affected carrier may be causing an electrical load which is preventing the power unit from operating properly. Unseat all the circuit packs in the carrier and reissue the recycle carrier command. a. If the recycle passes, then the power units are healthy, and the problem is with one of the circuit packs. Reinsert the circuit packs one at a time. If the status LED shows red after reinserting a circuit pack, replace the defective circuit pack. If the status LED still shows red, remove the Amphenol. connector on the back of the slot containing this circuit pack and reissue the recycle carrier command. If the status LED shows green, the problem is with one of the telephones or the wiring to one of the telephones on this slot. If the status LED still shows red, escalate the problem. b. If either power unit still shows a red status LED, check for bent pins and cable placement in the affected carrier. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. If no other problems can be found, escalate the problem. PASS Both power units in the tested carrier were found to be healthy by the Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system. If the status LEDs on both power units are not showing green, the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have incorrectly reported the state of the power units. Look for and resolve any alarms on these MOs. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-262 CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems MO Name (in Alarm Log) CARR-POW 1. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run1 recycle carrier PC Full Name of MO Carrier Port Power Unit Recycle the carrier indicated by the Port field in the Alarm Log. Generic 1 offers two basic cabinet type configurations: (1) the multicarrier cabinet system and (2) the single-carrier cabinet system. Both cabinet system configurations may be powered by either an external AC or DC power source. NOTE: For environment maintenance, the PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects for a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant. The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet configuration and the type of powering. Therefore, refer to the following list to find the appropriate MO section(s). ■ For a single-carrier cabinet system, refer to the "DC-POWER (Single-Carrier Cabinet Power)" Maintenance documentation for environment maintenance strategy. ■ For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external AC power source, refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections: "AC-POWER (AC Power) for AC-Powered Systems", "CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems". ■ For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source, refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections: "AC-POWER (AC Power) for DC-Powered Systems", "CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for DC-Powered Systems". Every carrier in the system must be supplied with +5 volt, -48 volt, and -5 volt DC power for the various circuit packs to operate properly. A multicarrier system can be supplied by an external AC power source or an external DC power source. In a DC-powered system, power is supplied to the carriers as follows: DC power from an external device comes into Power Distribution Units (PDU J58890CF and PDU J58890CF-1), which distribute the power via circuit breakers (CB1-CB12 for PDU J58890CF, CB1-CB6 for J58890Cf-1) to the carrier power units. Each carrier in the system is equipped with two power units, the 644A and the 645B, which together supply the required voltages to the carrier. Figure 10-17 illustrates the position of the carrier power units and PDU J58890CF and shows which power unit each circuit breaker controls (Figure 10-17 also shows other Environment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-263 maintenance-related items that can be ignored for this section on Carrier Port Power Unit). Figure 10-18 shows the position of the circuit breakers on the PDU J58890CF. Figure 10-19 illustrates the position of the carrier power units and PDU J58890CF-1 and shows which power unit each circuit breaker controls (Figure 10-19 also shows other Environment maintenance-related items that can be ignored for this section on Carrier Port Power Unit). Figure 10-20 shows the position of the circuit breakers on the PDU J58890CF-1. The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages on the backplane pins. Refer to Chapter 2 in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104. The CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) MO represents the pair of power units for each carrier in a multicarrier cabinet system. If a problem is reported by hardware for a power unit on a port carrier, the system can recycle the pair of power units in a port carrier; however, if the problem is reported on a control carrier, the system cannot recycle the pair of power units in a control carrier. In a standard multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN), carrier A is the control carrier, and carriers B, C, D, and E are the port carriers. In a High or Critical Reliability system multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN), carriers A and B are the control carriers, and carriers C, D, and E are the port carriers. However, carrier B in the EPN can be recycled only if the Active Expansion Interface Link and Active Tone-Clock circuit pack are in the A carrier. The carrier port power unit has one LED: the yellow LED on means operating as normal and the LED off means no external power is being supplied or that the power unit has a fault. Loss of the 645B Carrier Port Power Unit in the active control carrier (the A carrier for a standard system and either the A or B carrier for a High or Critical Reliability system) causes loss of the administration terminal. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the Active SPE should switch to the Standby SPE if there is a CARR-POW alarm. Recycling a carrier turns off the pair of carrier power units and turns them back on two seconds later. ! WARNING: Recycling carriers disrupts service for all circuit packs on the carrier. Generic 1 can also support neon message waiting lamps on analog telephones. If this is required, then the carrier(s) that contains the TN769 Analog Neon circuit packs must also be supplied with 165 volt DC power to power the neon lights. The 165 volt DC power can only be supplied by a TN752 or a TN755B power unit circuit pack. The following table lists the power units and power-related circuit packs that can be used in a DC-powered system and indicates the voltages they can supply. Figure 10-21 and Figure 10-22 show a schematic of the 644A and 645B power supplies, respectively. The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages on the backplane pins. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-264 Refer to Chapter 2 in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104. Power Supply +5V -48V -5V 165V Cabinet Position 644A yes no no no Left Side 645B no yes yes no Right Side TN736 no no yes no - TN752 no no yes yes - TN755B no no no yes - Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems S2 S3 Page 10-265 S1 A CB10 644A CARRIER C I CB3 645B R F L CB9 CARRIER B 644A O CB2 645B W CB8 CB1 CARRIER A 644A 645B FILTER A H S4 FANS -3 FRONT S4 3 BACK D 1 FILTER CB11 CB4 A CARRIER D 644A 645B I R F CB12 L CARRIER E 644A O CB5 645B W CIRCUIT BREAKERS CB6 DC CB7 Figure 10-18. RING CB1-CB12 ARE GENERATOR LOCATED ON THE DISTRIBUTION S3 BACK OF THE PDU Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU8890CF) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems list measurements occupancy summary Page 10-266 Page 1 command: list measurements trunk group summary Command Line Figure 10-19. Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU 58890CF) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems S2 S3 S1 Carrier C a i r 644A Carrier B f l o w 644A Carrier A 644A Page 10-267 645B CB3 CB1 CB2 645B 645B CB1 Filter A H D 1 S4 Fans 3 Front 3 Back S4 Filter 644A Carrier D a i r Carrier E f l o w 645B CB5 CB4 644A CB6 DC Distribution Ring Generator 645B Circuit Breakers CB1-CB5 are located on the back of the PDU S3 Power Distribution Unit Figure 10-20. Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU8890CF-1) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-268 Power Distribution Unit Main On/Off Switch ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 2A Ring Generator Circuit Breakers Front View ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6 CB7 CB8 CB9 CB10 CB11 CB12 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FLTA OFF FLTB OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A-R B-R C-R D-R E-R A-L B-L C-L D-L E-L TB2 -48VDC Return -48VDC A -48VDC B Back View Figure 10-21. Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU 58890CF-1) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-269 STATUS LEDS RED AMBER LOCKING POWER LEVER CORD LOCKING SLIDE OUTLET Figure 10-22. 644A Port Carrier Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-270 STATUS LEDS RED AMBER ON OFF LOCKING LEVER POWER CORD OUTLET LOCKING SLIDE Figure 10-23. 645B Port Carrier Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems Port Carrier Power Unit Replacement Procedures The procedures for replacing a 644A or 645B carrier DC power unit are given below. If the port carrier power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN system, refer to the "Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" sections in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures" before replacing the port carrier power unit. To replace the port carrier power unit, follow the procedure below: 1. If this is a 645B power unit, set the power switch to OFF. 2. Unplug the power cord. 3. Move the locking slide on the power unit to the extreme left position, and unlatch the locking lever. 4. Remove the power unit from the carrier. 5. Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left position and open the locking lever. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-271 6. Insert the power unit into the carrier until some resistance is felt. 7. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches. 8. Move the locking lever slide on the power unit to the extreme right position. 9. Connect the power cord. 10. If this is a 645B power unit, set the power switch to ON. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Carrier Port Power Unit Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 1(a)(b) 0 or 1 Power Unit Query Test (#127) MAJOR ON test environment P r 2 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. Where P is an appropriate port network number taken for the Port field of the Error Log. b. Run the Power Unit Query Test (#127) first using the test environment P r 2 command. Then, if a carrier must be recycled to clear the CARR-POW alarm, use the recycle carrier PC command to run the Power Unit Recycle Test (#126). The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is not included in either the long or Short Test Sequences. ! WARNING: The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is destructive. For more information, refer to the description of this test. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-272 Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c) X X ND Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) (d) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. c. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. d. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. NOTE: This test only shows up in the test sequence if there is a TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested. Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) This test is destructive. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-273 This test is destructive because it requires all circuit packs in the recycled carrier to be removed and inserted. These actions cause all calls originating or terminating on circuit packs in this carrier to be dropped. The pair of port carrier power units in the specified carrier is recycled. Both port carrier power units in the carrier are turned off for two seconds and then back on. After the port carrier power units have been turned back on, the test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of the pair of port carrier power units in the specified carrier. If both port carrier power units are on and functioning, then the test passes. If both port carrier power units are not on and functioning, the test fails, and BOTH port carrier power units are turned off. Table 10-89. TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1129 ABORT Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates that the Active Tone-Clock for the EPN is in carrier 2B. 1. Issue the set tone-clock 2A command. 2. Rerun the test. 1130 ABORT Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates that the Active Expansion Interface Link for the EPN is in carrier 2B. 1. Issue the set expansion-link A01 command. 2. Rerun the test. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2029 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-274 Table 10-89. TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test — Continued Error Code 1 (Carrier E) 2 (Carrier D) 4 (Carrier A) 8 (Carrier B) 16 (Carrier C) Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation There is a problem with one or both port carrier power units on the recycled carrier. 1. Since the Power Unit Recycle Test failed, both port carrier power supplies in the recycled carrier should have been powered off by the system software. Both port carrier power units should be showing a red status LED, instead of a green one. Since the Power Unit Query Test is a subset of the Power Unit Recycle Test, the Power Unit Query Test (#127) should also fail. Run the Power Unit Query Test by using the test environment P command where P is the appropriate port network number. 2. If the test fails, follow the repair procedures described for Test #127. If the problem persists, follow normal escalation procedures. PASS Both port carrier power units in the recycled carrier were found to be healthy by the Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system after the port carrier power units were powered-down and powered up again. If the status LEDs on both port carrier power units are not showing green, then the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have incorrectly reported the state of the port carrier power units. Look for and resolve any alarms on these MOs. Continued on next page Power Unit Query Test (#127) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of the pair of port carrier power units in the specified carrier. If both port carrier units are on and functioning, the test passes. If both are not on and functioning, the test fails. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-275 Table 10-90. TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2029 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL There is a problem with one or both port carrier power units on the tested carrier. 1. For each port carrier power unit that has all status LEDs OFF, check the DC input to the port carrier power unit at the port carrier power unit outlet (see Figures 11-19 through 11-22). If there is no DC, then check the appropriate circuit breakers for the affected port carrier power unit. If the circuit breaker has tripped (that is, it is in the down position), reset the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker trips again or DC is not present at the port carrier power unit outlet, there is probably a power wiring problem in the cabinet. Follow normal escalation procedures. 2. At this point, DC should be present at the port carrier power supply outlet. If the carrier being tested is the 1A or 2A carrier, or the 1B carrier in a High or Critical Reliability system, refer to"Troubleshooting Control Carrier Power Units"" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". Otherwise, use the recycle carrier PC command (where PC is the appropriate port network and carrier) in an attempt to bring back the power units for this carrier. If the test passes, the trouble is cleared. If the test does not pass, one port carrier power unit, or both, in the tested carrier is defective. If only one port carrier power unit is defective, the status LEDs on the healthy port carrier power unit light green for a moment. When the recycle test determines that both port carrier power units are defective, the software turns off power to both the good and defective port carrier power units. This causes the status LED(s) on the good port carrier power unit to light red. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-276 Table 10-90. TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 3. Unplug both port carrier power units, and wait about one-minute to allow the port carrier power units to cool down. Plug in the port carrier power units. If either port carrier power unit is operating properly (that is, the status LEDs show green), then replace the defective port carrier power unit(s). See "Port Carrier Power Unit Replacement Procedures" in this section. 4. If the replaced port carrier power unit(s) still does (do) not operate properly, then a circuit pack or a defective telephone connected to a circuit pack in the affected carrier could be causing an electrical load which is preventing the port carrier power unit from operating properly. Unseat all the circuit packs in the carrier, and reissue the recycle carrier command. a. If the recycle passes, then the port carrier power units are healthy, and the problem is with one of the circuit packs. Reinsert the circuit packs one at a time. If the status LED shows red after reinserting a circuit pack, replace the defective circuit pack. If the status LED still shows red, remove the Amphenol connector on the back of the slot containing this circuit pack and reissue the recycle carrier command. If the status LED shows green, the problem is with one of the telephones or the wiring to one of the telephones on this slot. If the status LED still shows red, escalate the problem. b. If either port carrier power unit still shows a red status LED, check for bent pins and cable placement in the affected carrier. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. If no other problems can be found, escalate the problem. PASS Both port carrier power units in the tested carrier were found to be healthy by the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system. If the status LEDs on both port carrier power units are not showing green, the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have incorrectly reported the state of the port carrier power units. Look for and resolve any alarms on these MOs. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit Pack) Page 10-277 CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO CLSFY-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Call Classifier Circuit Pack CLSFY-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Call Classifier Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) Maintenance documentation for related port information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) Page 10-278 CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO CLSFY-PT(a) MAJOR test port PCSSpp sh Call Classifier Port Maintenance CLSFY-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp sh Call Classifier Port Maintenance CLSFY-PT WARNING release port PCSSpp Call Classifier Port Maintenance 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (e.g., A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (e.g., 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (e.g.., 01). The TN744 Call Classifier (CLSFY-BD) circuit pack is a service circuit pack that enables usage of the Outbound Call Management (OCM) and the Inbound Call Management (ICM) features. On a G3iV2-386 system, the TN744 also enables usage of R2-MFC signaling for incoming and outgoing feature operation. There are eight ports (CLSFY-PTs) on the Call Classifier circuit pack. Each port can handle call classification, touch-tone reception, or, for G3iV2-386 systems, MFC tone generation and detection or touch-tone reception. The CLSFY-PT maintenance feature defines a set of tests to ensure that the Call Classifier circuit pack ports are capable of detecting tones for call classification, and detecting and generating necessary tones for correct MFC feature operation. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-91. Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data any 18 257 (b) 17666 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 2 Port has been busied out by system technician WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp Test (#43) MAJOR/ MINOR(a) ON test port PCSSpp r 3 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) Page 10-279 Table 10-91. Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type 513 (c) Aux Data any Associated Test Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) Alarm Level On/Off Board MAJOR/ MINOR (a) Test to Clear Value ON test port PCSSpp r 3 Continued on next page Notes: a. There are two possible alarm levels for this error type: major alarm and minor alarm. A major alarm is raised if the total number of call classifier ports currently in-service is less than or equal to 1/2 of the administered threshold number. Otherwise, a minor alarm is raised. In either case, run the short test sequence against the port and follow the error code procedures for the individual tests. The threshold number of call classifier ports for service is administered using the change system-parameters maintenance command. For details, refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". b. The call classifier port lost its translation. Testing the call classifier port is sufficient to reload its translation. If testing the call classifier port does not clear the error, then the call classifier circuit pack containing the defective call classifier port should be replaced. c. This error indicates the call classifier port is having problems detecting system tones (DTMF, etc.) or detecting and generating necessary R2-MFC tones. This error should accompany some percentage of failed calls. If this error type is persistently logged, then the call classifier circuit pack containing the defective call classifier port should be replaced. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tone Detection Verification Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) X X ND Tone Detection Audit/Update Test (#43) X X ND Order of Investigation Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) 1. Page 10-280 D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) This test checks out each port in both the touch-tone receiver mode and in the R2-MFC tone detection/generation mode. During the first half of the test, the touch-tone receiver mode is tested. In the second half of the test, each port is put into the R2-MFC mode. During this portion of the test, each port’s ability to accurately detect and generate all forward and backward MFC tones is verified. Table 10-92. TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation none ABORT The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test OR there was an Internal System Error. 1 ABORT The system could not allocate all the resources needed to test the tones. 1001 ABORT The system was unable to put the Call Classifier port in the appropriate mode to test it. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test connection. This situation could occur when the system is heavily loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded, then test the TDM-BUS via the test tdm [1|2] command. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation for details. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a Tone-Clock circuit pack for the test connection. This situation could occur when the system is heavily loaded or if a Tone-Clock circuit pack is not present in the port network when this test is executed. 1. Verify the existence of a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the same port network. 2. If a Tone-Clock circuit pack is missing, install one in the same port network. 3. Allow approximately one minute for the Tone-Clock circuit pack maintenance to run on the newly inserted Tone-Clock circuit pack. 4. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) Page 10-281 Table 10-92. TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued Error Code 2006 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This abort code indicates that the active Tone-Clock circuit pack might not be functioning properly. If there is more than one Tone Detector circuit pack in the system, then the problem can be either with the Tone-Clock circuit pack or the Tone Detector circuit pack. This could also be caused by the companding mode administered for the system not matching that of the Tone Detector circuit pack [G3iV2-386]. 1. [G3iV2-386] Make sure that the companding mode of the system matches that of the Tone Detector (TN748 for Mu-law systems and TN420 for A-law systems). 2. Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network. This test is being executed via the test tone-clock qualifier system technician command. ("qualifier" is the carrier of the active Tone-Clock circuit pack to be tested. Valid qualifiers are: a, b, 1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b.) Refer to the TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1-3 FAIL DTMF digits were not detected correctly. This may or may not impact reception of R2-MFC calls. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but system capacity will be reduced. In order to restore system performance to normal, replace the Call Classifier circuit pack containing the defective CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port). 101-122 FAIL Forward or Backward MFC signals were not correctly generated or detected. This impacts reception of incoming MFC calls. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but system capacity will be reduced. In order to restore system performance to normal, replace the Call Classifier circuit pack containing the defective CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port) Page 10-282 Table 10-92. TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued Error Code Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation Tone Detection Verification is successful. The Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) is able to detect/generate all necessary tones. Continued on next page Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) A sanity audit is performed on the CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port). Table 10-93. Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) Error Code none Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test. 1. Wait one-minute, and repeat the command a maximum of five times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Hardware audit failed. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but system capacity will be reduced. In order to restore system performance to normal, replace the CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier circuit pack) containing the defective CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port). PASS The (CLSFY-PT) Call Classifier Port has passed the sanity inquiry. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack) Page 10-283 CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO CO-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack CO-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Maintenance documentation for related trunk information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-284 CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO CO-DS1 MAJOR1 test trunk l DS1CO Trunk CO-DS1 MINOR test trunk l DS1CO Trunk CO-DS1 WARNING test trunk DS1CO Trunk 1. A Major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. A DS1CO (central office) trunk provides a communications channel between the system and a central office switch through either a 1.544 Mbps or a 2.048 Mbps [G3iV2-386] DS1 link. A 24 channel DS1 link consists of 24 digital DS1CO trunks. A 32 channel DS1 link [G3iV2-386] consists of 30 digital DS1CO trunks. A DS1CO trunk can be used for both voice and data communication. The DS1CO Trunk Maintenance provides a strategy in the system to maintain a CO trunk via a port on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The TN767 and TN464 [G3iV2-386] DS1 Interface circuit packs support the low level CO trunk signaling interfaces, ground-start and loop-start. This strategy covers the in-line errors log, initialization tests, periodic tests, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm resolution and escalation. Three trunk service states are specified in the DS1CO trunk maintenance. They are: out-of-service in which the trunk is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or outgoing calls; in-service in which the trunk is in an activated state and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls; disconnect (ready-for-service) in which the trunk is in an activated state but can only be used for an incoming call. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service, then all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack are also in the out-of-service state, and a Warning alarm is raised for each trunk. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-94. DS1 CO Trunk Error Log Entries Error Type 01 Aux Data 0 Associated Test Any Alarm Level Any On/Off Board Any Test to Clear Value test trunk / Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-285 Table 10-94. DS1 CO Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 1 (a) 57408 1 (a) 57487 15 (b) Any Port Audit and Update Test (#36) 18 (c) 0 busyout trunk / WARNING OFF release trunk / None WARNING ON test trunk / OFF 130 (d) 257 (e) 57392 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) MIN/MAJ2 513 (f) 57393 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) MIN/MAJ2 OFF 769 (g) 57484 1025 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) WARNING OFF test trunk / 1281 Conference Circuit Test (#7) MAJ/MIN/ WRN3 ON test trunk / r 4 1537 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MAJ/MIN/ WRN3 ON test trunk / r 3 ON test board PCSS l 1793 (h) 2562(i)) 16665 2817(j) 52992 3840 (k) Port Audit and Update Test (#36) Continued on next page 1. 2. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service, then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm. Minor alarms on this maintenance object (MO) may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, the Minor alarm is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this group are alarmed. Notes: a. Error Type 1—Aux Data 57408—No tip ground is detected on an outgoing call. Aux Data 57487—PBX could not get "loop close" signal (TN767). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-286 The DS1 Interface circuit pack detected a hardware fault. These errors cause the Dial Tone Test (#314) to run and are only considered a problem if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1025 also shows up). In this case, the trunk may be put in ready-for-service state (shown as "disconnected" by status command), which allows only incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#314) and follow its outlined procedures. b. Error Type 15—This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. Error Type 18—System Technician has busied-out the trunk to the out-of-service state. No calls can be made on this trunk except the Facility Access Test Call. For details on this feature, refer to "Facility Test Calls" section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". d. Error Type 130—This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. e. Error Type 257—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault. The Aux Data field contains the following error type: 57392—no external release on PBX disconnect [E030]. Escalate the problem. f. Error Type 513—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault. The Aux Data field contains the following error type: 57393—belated external release on PBX disconnect [E031]. Escalate the problem. g. Error Type 769—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault. The Aux Data field contains the following error type:—57484, fault is detected on tip/ring [E08C]. Escalate the error. h. Error Type 1793—DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. Refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details. i. Error Type 2562—Retry Failure error. This error is logged only. It is not a hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any alarms. This error comes from call processing and is generated when a second attempt (retry) to seize an outgoing trunk fails. j. Error Type 2817—Glare error. This error is logged only. It is not a hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any alarms. This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a two-way trunk from both the near-end and the far-end. Attempt to place the call again. If the error persists, execute the Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) and follow those procedures. k. Error Type 3840—Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an internal system error. Enter the status trunk command to verify the status of the trunk. If the trunk is out-of-service, then enter the release trunk command to put it back into in-service. Retry the test command. If the test continues to abort, then escalate the problem. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-287 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence DS1CO Trunk Seizure Test (#314) X X ND Port Audit and Update Test (#36) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) resides on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-95. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-288 Table 10-95. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-289 Table 10-95. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 1004 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1 circuit pack: loss of signal (1281), blue alarm (1793), red alarm (2049), yellow alarm (2305), or hyperactivity (1537). 1. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-290 Table 10-95. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive (see note below). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. NOTE: Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above. If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board (when there really is a board), then the busyout board and the release busy board commands will not work (even though the reset board command will work). The software will put the hyperactive board back in service after the hyperactivityclears. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-291 Table 10-96. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT The test was aborted. System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The test was aborted. The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM bus) maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors may be out of service. Issue the list measurements tone-receiver command to display basic information about the system’s tone receivers. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TTR-LEV maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-PT maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-292 Table 10-96. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code 1004 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT The test was disabled via translation. You may want to determine why the test has been disabled before you enable it. 1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk Administration’ screen is set to 'n.’ To enable the test, change the trunk administration and enter 'y' into the 'Maintenance Test' field. 2. Repeat the test. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1 circuit pack: loss of signal (1281), blue alarm (1793), red alarm (2049), yellow alarm (2305), or hyperactivity (1537). 1. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-293 Table 10-96. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation 1. Enter the ’list configuration board UUCSS’ command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9, replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later.The error log may have error type 1281 entries. 2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one fails, this could be an off-board problem (such as an incoming seizure or an off-hook port seizure during the test). Retest the board. 3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see Note below). 4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD or TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the appropriate action. When the TONE errors have cleared, rerun the test. 5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported, coordinate isolation with the CO. Make sure that the switch, the CO, and any NTCE equipment (the CSU’s) have the correct administration. 6. Replace the circuit pack. NOTE: If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance Documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance Documentation. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-294 Table 10-96. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This result could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive (see note below). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. NOTE: Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above.If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board (when there really is a board), then the busyout board and the release busy board commands will not work (even though the reset board command will work). The software will put the hyperactive board back in service after the hyperactivity clears. Continued on next page Port Audit and Update Test (#36) This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of trunk kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and in the switch software. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-295 Table 10-97. TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT The test was aborted because system resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Issue the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the error log table for a descriptionof this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. FAIL Test failed due to internal system error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run, but returns to PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter status trunk command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2. 2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-296 Table 10-97. TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This result could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive (see note below). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above. If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board (when there really is a board), then the busyout board and the release busy board commands will not work (even though the reset board command will work). The software will put the hyperactive board back in service after the hyperactivity clears. Continued on next page DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test checks the trunk’s signaling capability provided by the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The maintenance software initiates the test by sending a "seizure" message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack and expects an "active" reply from the DS1 interface circuit pack. If the "active" message is received, then the test passes. If no message is received and the timer expires, the test is aborted. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack sends a "reorder" message back to maintenance software, then the test fails. The test CANNOT be run on a trunk if one of the following cases is true: a. The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk. b. The trunk has been seized by a normal trunk call. c. The trunk is administered with maintenance test disabled. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-297 Table 10-98. TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT The test was aborted because system resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The test was aborted because the port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Test failed due to incompatible configuration administered in trunk group form. 1. Verify the following fields on the trunk group administration screen: Is trunk direction incoming only? Is trunk the port 24 of the DS1 Interface circuit pack while common control channel signaling is specified? Is trunk group type the automatic CO (for example, FX)? 2. If the trunk has been administered using the above information, then this test should abort. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-298 Table 10-98. TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued Error Code 1018 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Thest is disabled via tranlsation. You may want to determine why the test has been disabled before you enable it. 1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk Group’ form is set to ’n’. To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command (x equals the number of the trunk group to be tested). Then, change the entry in the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the form to ’y’. 2. Repeat the test. 1020 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. 1. Look for DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. Retry the command. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1040 ABORT The test was aborted because this port may be an access endpoint. 1. Verify that this port is an access endpoint by issuing the display port command. 2. If the port has been administered as an access endpoint, then this is a normal abort. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2012 ABORT The test was aborted due to an internal system error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-299 Table 10-98. TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call. This could cause in-line failures to be reported against the trunk (no answer would report error type 257 with auxiliary data 57487 in the error log). 1. Verify that the Trunk Type field on the trunk administration screen form matches the trunk type administered on far end switch. 2. Look for DS1-BD/UDS1-BD errors in Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to the appropriate DS1-BD/UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 3. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 2000 FAIL Response to the seizure message was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Enter the list configuration board PCSS command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9, a failure of test 314 causes a subsequent failure of test 7 due to a firmware bug. Eventually, the board and all of its ports will be taken out of service and extraneous on-board alarms will be generated. Replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later. 2. Verify that the ’Trunk Type’ field on the ’Trunk Administration’ screen matches the trunk type administered on far-end switch. 3. Look for DS1-BD or UDS1-BD errors in the hardware error log. If present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 trunk circuit pack) maintenance documentation or to the UDS1-BD (UDS1 trunk circuit pack) maintenance documentation. 4. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 5. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 2053 FAIL At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1 circuit pack: loss of signal (1281), blue alarm (1793), red alarm (2049), yellow alarm (2305), or hyperactivity (1537). 1. Look for these error types in the hardware error log and then follow the procedures given in the maintenance documentation that is appropriate for the error type that was found. PASS The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk) Page 10-300 Table 10-98. TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive (see Note below). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. NOTE: Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above. If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board (when there really is a board), then the busyout board and the release busy board commands will not work (even though the reset board command will work). The software will put the hyperactive board back in service after the hyperactivity clears. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-301 CO-TRK (CO Trunk) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO CO-TRK MAJOR2 test port PCSSpp l CO Trunk CO-TRK MINOR test port PCSSpp l CO Trunk CO-TRK WARNING test port PCSSpp l CO Trunk 1. 2. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); c is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.). A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. NOTE: If ATMS testing is enabled, check the error log for ATMS Errors #3840 and #3841. If the error log indicates that measurements exceeded acceptable thresholds, and if no other trouble is found with the test trunk command, run the ATMS test call with the test analog-testcall port UUCCSSpp full command. Central Office (CO) trunks are 2-wire analog lines to the CO which support both incoming and outgoing calls. A CO trunk circuit pack provides an interface between the 2-wire analog line from the CO and the system’s (4-wire) Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. The CO Trunk circuit packs include: ■ TN747B (United States), 8 port loop start or ground start CO, foreign exchange (FX), or Wide Area Telecommunications (WATS) trunks. ■ TN438B (Australia), 8 port loop start. ■ TN447 (United Kingdom), 8 port ground start. ■ TN465 (multiple countries), 8 port loop start. ■ TN2138 (Italy), 8 port loop start. ■ TN2147 (multiple countries), 8 port loop start and United Kingdom Earth Calling or Loop Calling Guarded Clearing. LOOP START AND UK LOOP CALLING GUARDED CLEARING OPERATION Idle State - Tip _ ground, Ring = CO Battery A. Outgoing Call 1. PBX Off-Hook (Seize Message): Closes the Tip-Ring Loop a. CO Response: DC loop current + Dial tone DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-302 2. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note) B. Incoming Call 1. CO Applies Ringing Voltage a. PBX Response: Detect ringing current 2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current 3. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note) NOTE: Except for the Netherlands Loop Start and UK Loop Calling Guarded Clearing trunks, CO does not normally provide an On-Hook (Disconnect) signal. GROUND START AND UK EARTH CALLING OPERATION Idle state - Tip _ open, Ring = CO Battery A. Outgoing Call 1. PBX Off-Hook(Seize Message): Places ground on Ring a. CO Response: Places ground on Tip b. PBX Response: close the loop c. CO Response: provide loop current d. PBX response: dial out digits 2. PBX On-Hook first (Drop Message): Open the Tip-Ring Loop, no loop current a. CO Response: Open circuit on Tip 3. CO On-Hook first (Disconnect): Open circuit on Tip, no loop current. a. PBX Response: Open Tip-Ring loop B. Incoming Call 1. CO Off-Hook (Seizure): CO applies ground on Tip, CO applies ringing voltage a. PBX Response: Detect ringing, ring destination 2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-303 3. PBX On-Hook first (Drop Message): Open the Tip-Ring Loop, no loop current a. CO Response: Open circuit on Tip 4. CO On-Hook first (Disconnect): Open circuit on Tip, no loop current Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-99. CO Trunk Error Log Entries Aux Data Error Type 1 Associated Test 0 Any 1 (a) 57347 None 15 (b) any Port Audit Update Test (#36) 18 0 0 130(c) Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 busyout trunk / WARNING OFF release trunk / None WARNING ON test trunk / 257 (a) 50176 None 513 (a) 57364 None MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON 769 (a) 57392 None MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF 1025 (e) Any Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF test port PCSS sh r 2 1281 (e) Any Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSS sh r 3 1537 Dial Tone Test (#0) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF test port PCSS l r 2 1793 Loop Around and Conference Test (#33) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSS l r 3 2049 NPE Cross Talk Test (#6) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSS l r 3 2561 (d) 57345 None 2817 (a) 57360 None 2817 (a) 57393 None Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-304 Table 10-99. CO Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test 2817 (d) 57484 Dial Tone Test (#0) 3073 (d) 57376 None 3329 (d) 57408 None 3329 (d) 57484 Dial Tone Test (#0) 3585 (d) 57424 None 3840 (f) 8000 Analog Transmission (#844-848) 3841 (f) Analog Transmission (#844-848) Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF test port PCSS l r 1 MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF test port PCSS l r 1 OFF MINOR OFF test analog testcall UUCSS pp r 2 Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set-options values, the Minor alarm is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Notes: a. These are in-line errors that have no specific test associated with them. Refer to Table 10-93 for an explanation and appropriate action. b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. d. Aux data 57345 -- Single polarity ringing current Aux data 57376 -- No loop current on incoming call Aux data 57408 -- No tip ground detected on outgoing call Aux data 57424 -- No loop current on outgoing call Aux data 57484 -- No dial tone on outgoing call These errors cause the Dial Tone Test (#0) to run and are only considered a problem if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1537 also shows up). In this case, the trunk may be put in "Ready-for-Service" state (shown as "disconnected" by status command), which allows only incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#0) and follow its outlined procedures. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-305 If error count associated with this error type is very high (that is, 255) and if Alarm Status on the Hardware Error Report is "n" (not alarmed), then the existence of this error type indicates that, despite the fact that many in-line error messages have been received, all Call Seizure Tests have passed. Problems at the CO may cause this condition rather than problems with the PBX. e. These errors are logged for all versions of the CO-TRK/CO-BD. However, no MINOR alarms are generated for Central Office Trunks [TN747B] with vintages V8 or greater. Any failures received by this test are still logged as Error type 1025/1281 as additional information for the system technician person. The system technician person should check for the use of MFT/Range extenders. If there are extenders present, and there are no other complaints or maintenance errors against this trunk, then there is a good chance that Test #3 failed due to excessive loop current and may be ignored. f. Test calls made by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) returned measurements that were outside the acceptable limits. Use the list testcall detail command to examine specific transmission parameters that are out of spec, and investigate the trunk for that kind of noise. If the noise is acceptable, the limits administered on the "change trunk" screen should be changed. Table 10-100. Error Type 1 CO Trunk Errors with NO Tests Aux Data 57347 Description and System Action Port error. Ringing without ground. This error is detected on an incoming call on a ground-start CO trunk. The CO trunk circuit pack has not detected a Tip ground before ringing current is detected. This may indicate that the ground detector is not working. However, the call is accepted. System Technician Action See Note 1 at end of table. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-100. Error Type Page 10-306 CO Trunk Errors with NO Tests — Continued Aux Data Description and System Action System Technician Action 257 50176 Battery reversal detected. This is usually caused by the CO (often seen with step-by-step and cross-bar offices in connection with outgoing calls). This is detected if the direction of the loop current changes from normal to reverse for at least 40 msec. Could occur if the trunk was just installed and for some reason the Tip and Ring wires were reversed at the PBX. If battery reversals occur during dialing, wrong numbers may result. The CO should be asked to remove the battery reversal option. Refer problem to CO. 513 57364 Ground detector stuck active. After several occurrences, an on-board minor alarm is generated. Run short test. If test aborts with Error Code 1000, disconnect Tip and Ring and repeat short test. If test still aborts, replace circuit pack. If test passes, refer problem to CO. If any other error code is received, pursue that problem. 769 57392 CO not releasing after call is dropped from PBX end (off-board alarm after several occurrences), or the loop is not open after a disconnect (on-board alarm after several occurrences). For off-board alarm, refer problem to CO. For on-board alarm, the circuit pack has an on-board problem (for example, stuck relay) and should be replaced. 2561 57345 Single polarity ringing current. This error results from abnormal ringing current, but does not prevent the incoming call from being accepted. One cause could be that the reverse current detector associated with the port is failing. (Will not be detected by any tests.) Another cause could be that normal current is not detected. In this case, neither incoming nor outgoing calls can be completed, and the dial tone test also fails. The last cause could be that certain types of noise are present on the CO line during the silent period of ringing. Check for other errors first and then see Note 4 at end of table. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-100. Error Type Page 10-307 CO Trunk Errors with NO Tests — Continued Aux Data Description and System Action System Technician Action 2817 57360 Ground but no ringing. This error occurs on an incoming call on a ground-start trunk. If ringing is not detected within 5 seconds of the Tip being grounded, the call is still accepted. If the CO is of the No. 5ESS. switch type, ringing delays of more than 5 seconds during heavy traffic are fairly common. Check for other errors. 2817 57393 On the TN465, the loop is opening too slowly after a disconnect. This error indicates an on-board problem, although the trunk may be functional. On the TN2138, CO released the trunk at least 4 minutes after the PBX dropped the call. This error code is log-only and causes no other testing to occur. No alarm is generated. Check for other errors. 3073 57376 No loop current on incoming call. The incoming destination has already answered and no loop current has been detected. If this is a hard fault, the dial tone test and all outgoing calls should also fail. Check for other errors. 3329 57408 Trunk error. No Tip ground detected on outgoing call. This error occurs when an attempt is made to seize a ground-start CO trunk for an outgoing call and Tip ground is not detected or the caller hangs up before Tip ground is detected. See Notes 1 and 2 at end of table. 3585 57424 No loop current on outgoing call. This error occurs on attempt to seize a loop or ground-start trunk for an outgoing call. An error occurs if loop current is not detected or the caller hangs up before it is detected. See Note 3 at end of table. Continued on next page Notes: 1. At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long Test Sequence. Observe the test results. If any tests fail, refer to the description of the tests and the associated error codes. Release the port. If users continue to report troubles, check for other errors and make test calls to determine whether the problem should be escalated or referred to the CO. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-308 2. At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long Test Sequence. If Dial Tone Test #0 passes, ignore this error. Release the port. 3. At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long Test Sequence. If CO Demand Diagnostic Test #3 passes and this error keeps occurring, refer problems to CO. Release the port. 4. If the error count associated with this error type is very high (that is, 255) and all tests pass, then either the reverse current detector is defective or the CO line is noisy. If the CO line is suspected, Tip and Ring observations should be made. If the line is determined to be noisy, the problem should be referred to the CO. If the reverse current detector is defective, ignore this error. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Dial Tone Test (#0) X ND X ND X ND X (c) ND Order of Investigation CO Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) (a) Short Test Sequence X Loop Around and Conference Test (#33) Audit Update Test (#36) Analog Transmission Test (#844-848) (b) 1. X (c) D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. A demand test of Diagnostic Test (#3) always returns a PASS indication for CO-TRK/CO-BD [TN747B] version 8 or greater. However, any errors produced as a result of this test are logged and produce no alarms. If errors logged by Test #3 are the only complaints against this trunk, then the system technician person should check if MFT/Range Extenders are being used. If extenders are present, then there is a good chance that there is excessive loop current, which causes Test #3 to log errors. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-309 However, all else being normal, these errors should not affect the customer. b. Refer to TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. c. ATMS test are not part of either sequence. They are run either on demand with the test analog-testcall command or via the ATMS schedule. Dial Tone Test (#0) This test attempts to seize a port and checks for the return of a dial tone. Table 10-101. Error Code TEST #0 Dial Tone Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the command display port PCSSpp to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-101. Error Code 1004 Page 10-310 TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Trunk has been administered as incoming-only; dial tone can only be obtained on outgoing trunks. This is a normal condition. 1018 ABORT Test has been disabled via administration. 1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk Group Form is set to "n". To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command where "x" equals the number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the form to "y." 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-101. Error Code Page 10-311 TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Trunk was seized, but dial tone could not be detected. 1. Test all administered outgoing ports on the board. Failure of 1 indicates a problem toward the CO. 2. If all fail, see note below. 3. Check for errors on the TONE-BD or TONE-PT. Clear any errors found, and repeat the test. 4. If the error has still not cleared, refer the problem to the CO. 5. If no service problems exist on the port, continue to use the port until the circuit pack can be replaced (as a last resort). Perform a trunk test call to see if the trunk is operable. NOTE: If the dial tone test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. 2002 FAIL Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem. Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk. 1. If the CO Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) also failed, display the Hardware Error Log. If the CO Demand Diagnostic Test failed because it could not detect ground (indicated by Error Type 1281 in the Hardware Error Log) AND Error Type 3329 or 3585 appears in the Hardware Error Log (with the same last occurred time as Error Type 1281 and 1537), replace the circuit pack. 2. Check trunk wiring to ensure good connection; repeat test if wiring correction made. 3. Locate another identical CO trunk and swap its wiring with one under test. Repeat test on both trunks and determine if problem follows trunk or remains at original port. If problem follows trunk, refer problem to CO. If problem remains at port, replace circuit pack and repeat test. 4. If replacing circuit pack does not clear failure, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-101. Error Code Page 10-312 TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued Test Result 1009 0 Description/ Recommendation PASS Detected tone was not pure dial tone. [G1, G3iV1.1-286] No action required. PASS Trunk was seized, and dial tone was detected. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page CO Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) For ground start trunks only, port circuit pack relays are operated and checks are made to see if the port can detect and apply ground on the Tip lead. This test also verifies that there is no external ground on the Ring lead. In the absence of other failures, the circuit pack should be replaced only if this test fails with the CO line disconnected. For the TN2147 World Class Central Office circuit pack, this test also checks the on-board programmable transmission circuitry that allows the circuit pack to support the transmission characteristics of several countries. Table 10-102. Error Code TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-102. Error Code 1000 Page 10-313 TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Test inapplicable to present configuration. This is a normal condition. 1018 ABORT Test has been disabled via administration. 1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk Group Form is set to "n". To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command where "x" equals the number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the form to "y." 2000 ABORT Response to the request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-102. Error Code Page 10-314 TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Failure to detect ground or faulty ground detected on Ring lead. Display the hardware errors for this trunk, to determine if the fault was on- or-off board. Look for Error Type 1025 or 1281 (if both appear in the Hardware Error Log, pick the most recent error). Error Type 1025 indicates a faulty ground detected on Ring lead (an off-board fault) and Error Type 1281 indicates failure to detect (internally generated) ground (an on-board fault). Faulty ground detected on Ring lead (Error Type 1025): NOTE: On TN747B vintage 8 and greater circuit packs, an incoming seizure during this test may cause it to fail with an off-board fault. 1. Repeat test. If test passes, ignore the original failure. If test aborts, follow the recommended procedures. 2. Repeat test with CO line removed. 3. If test fails, replace the circuit pack. 4. If test passes, refer problem to CO. Failure to detect ground (Error Type 1281): 1. Run the long test sequence. If the CO Demand Diagnostic Test fails, the Dial Tone Test (#0) fails with Error Code 2002, AND Error Type 3329 or 3585 appears in the Hardware Error Log (with the same last occurred time as Error Type 1281 and 1537), replace the circuit pack. 2. Repeat test with CO line removed. 3. If test fails, replace the circuit pack. 4. If test passes, the CO may be drawing too much current. Refer problem to CO. 57481 FAIL On-board test of programmable transmission circuitry failed. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS This test verifies that the port is able to apply ground for outgoing calls and detect ground for incoming calls; however, it does not provide information on whether a CO line is actually connected. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-102. Error Code Page 10-315 TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result 0 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s long test sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-103. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-103. Error Code 1000 Page 10-316 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the Error Log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. Check the CO wiring, check for excessive loop current, and check the trunk translations. (If the trunk is translated incorrectly, this test will abort.) 2. If the port status is idle, busyout and release the trunk, and then retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test still aborts, replace the circuit pack. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM-Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-103. Error Code Page 10-317 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. 0 PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33) This test checks the reflective loop around and conference capabilities of a CO port circuit. The test uses 404-Hz, 1004-Hz, and 2804-Hz tones. Each tone is transmitted separately through the loop and checked. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-318 Table 10-104. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 7 ABORT Conference Circuit Test aborted. 129 ABORT The 404-Hz reflective loop around test aborted. Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 131 The 1004-Hz reflective loop around test aborted. Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 133 The 2804-Hz reflective loop around test aborted. Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 769 (see the Error Log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-319 Table 10-104. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code 1003 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized force. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT The test was disabled via administration. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk Group’ form is set to ’n’. To enable the test, issue the ’change trunk-group x’ command (x equals the number of the trunk group to be tested). Then, change the entry in the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the form to ’y’. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-320 Table 10-104. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code 7, Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The conference capabilities of the port failed (Error Code 7). 129, The reflective 404-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission was detected to or from the port (Error Code 129). 131, or The reflective 1004-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission was detected to or from the port (Error Code 131). 133 The reflective 2804-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission was detected to or from the port (Error Code 133). FAULT ISOLATION: Proceed as follows unless power or tone problems are suspected (see notes on the next page). 1. To make sure the problem is on-board, disconnect the port from the CO and retry the test. Coordinate this with the CO, or do it after busy hours; otherwise, the CO may put the connection out of service. 2. If the retry fails, replace the circuit pack. 3. If the retry passes and no troubles have been reported, disable the test. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported, refer the problem to the CO. NOTE: If the loop around and conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack. If the test fails on more than 1 port, check for errors on the TONE-BD or the TONE-PT. If errors, take appropriate actions. When the tone errors are cleared, rerun the test. If the test fails again, see FAULT ISOLATION above. PASS CO Trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is successful. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-321 Table 10-104. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 0 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Port Audit Update Test (#36) This test sends updates of the CO port translation for all ports on the circuit pack that have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against possible corruption of translation data contained on the circuit pack. No response message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation updates. The port translation data includes: ground or loop start trunk, tone or rotary dialing trunk, rotary dialing inter-digit timing, network balance R/RC, and disconnect timing. Table 10-105. Error Code TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-105. Error Code 1006 Page 10-322 TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port has been placed out of service, perhaps by craft busyout. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal system error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS This test passed. Translation information was successfully updated on the circuit pack. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run, but returns PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2. 2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Page 10-323 Transmission Test (#844-848) This test is non-destructive. NOTE: Tests #844-848 are not supported on a International switch. These tests are run by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS). They are not part of the long or short trunk test sequences. Instead, they are run on demand with the test analog-testcall command or as part of ATMS scheduled testing. The test call is run from an analog port on a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack. It attempts to seize a port and make a call to a terminating test line (TTL) on the trunk’s far end. Transmission performance measurements are made and compared to administered thresholds. Errors are generated when results fall outside of ‘‘marginal’’ or ‘‘unacceptable’’ thresholds. Detail and summary measurement reports are obtainable via the list testcalls command. Table 10-106. Error Code 1000 TEST #844-848 Transmission Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the "status trunk" command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port unavailable for this test. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description all possible states). You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate timeslots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have timeslots out of service due to TDM bus errors. Refer to TDM Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM bus errors. 1. If system has no TDM bus errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-106. Error Code 1004 Page 10-324 TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status trunk to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Trunk has been administered as incoming-only; transmission tests can only be run on outgoing trunks. 1115 ABORT The near end test line on the TN771 circuit pack could not be allocated. 1. Verify that the TN771 circuit pack is in service and that port 1 is administered and in service with the status port command. 2. retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 3. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1900 ABORT The test completion message was not received from the TN771 circuit pack. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1901 ABORT This error occurs when the TN771 circuit pack uplinks a message that is not the proper response for this test. The anticipated uplink messages are seize, ring or answer. 1. Verify that the Trunk is administered properly. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1905 ABORT Intercept tone detected from far end. 1. Get the test line data from theand verify it with the far end. Dial the test number manually to see if the TTL is reached. If it is not, then either the number is wrong, or the far end is administered incorrectly. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1906 ABORT Reorder tone detected from far end. 1. See actions for error code 1905. 1907 ABORT Other unexpected tone detected from far end. 1. See actions for error code 1905. 1913 ABORT Audible Ring detected from far end. 1. See actions for error code 1905. 1914 ABORT Unidentified interrupted tone detected from far end. 1. See actions for error code 1905 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-106. Error Code 1915 Page 10-325 TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Busy tone detected from far end. 1. Since the test line at the far end was busy. Try the test again. 2. If the test continues to abort, the problem is with the far end system. 1918 ABORT Test progress tone not removed from far end (type 105 test line only). 1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or ADFTC). 1919 ABORT Unexpected far end release 1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or ADFTC). 1920 ABORT No response from far end. 1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or ADFTC). 1921 ABORT No data returned from far end. 1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or ADFTC). 1922 ABORT Steady, unidentifiable tone from far end 1. See actions for error code 1905. 1923 ABORT Broadband energy detected from far end (such as voice or announcement). 1. See actions for error code 1905. 1924 ABORT No test tone from far end 1. See actions for error code 1905. 1938 ABORT Near-end self test failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1939 ABORT Loss self check at 0dBm at 1004 Hz failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1940 ABORT Far end noise self check failed. 1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or ADFTC). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-106. Error Code 1941 Page 10-326 TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation High frequency singing return loss self check failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1942 ABORT Echo return loss self check failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1943 ABORT Singing return loss self check failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1944 ABORT Loss self check at -16 dBm at 1004 Hz failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1945 ABORT Loss self check at -16 dBm at 404 Hz failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1946 ABORT Loss self check at -16 dBm at 2804 Hz failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 1947 ABORT Noise with tone self check failed. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT The test timed out while waiting for a response from the TN771 circuit pack. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT An internal software error occurred. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT The test call could not be established, but no information on why is available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Table 10-106. Error Code 2056 Page 10-327 TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation An error occurred while trying to obtain results from the TN771 circuit pack. 1. Test the TN771 circuit packs. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 8000 FAIL Measured transmission performance was in the unacceptable range as administered on the trunk group form. Retrieve a measurement report via the list testcalls command. Make sure that ATMS thresholds are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group form. Besides the facility, test failures can be caused by faulty test lines or switch paths. If the measurements point to a facility problem, report the results to the trunk vendor. FAIL Measured transmission performance was in the marginal range as administered on the trunk group form. This generally means that the trunk is usable but has an undesirable amount of noise or loss. If the user does not report unacceptable effects, it may not be necessary to take any action. Retrieve a measurement report via the list testcalls command. Make sure that ATMS thresholds are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group form. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Page 10-328 CONFIG (System Configuration) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level CONFIG Initial Command to Run none none Full Name of MO System Configuration The System Configuration maintenance object (MO) oversees logical insertion and removal of circuit packs in the system. When Switch Control detects that a circuit pack is present in a port slot, it informs System Configuration and System Configuration queries the circuit pack to determine the type and vintage of the circuit pack. Similarly, when Switch Control detects that a circuit pack has been removed from a port slot, it informs System Configuration. There are no alarms or tests for System Configuration, but three types of errors are logged to the Hardware Error Log (see below). Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values System Configuration Error Log Entries Aux Data Error Type Associated Test 01 0 Any 2-117(a) 0-2 none 257(b) Any On/Off Board Any Test to Clear Value none none 1002-1117(c) 1. Alarm Level 0-2 none Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates that a Port circuit pack in the system did not respond to a circuit pack type inquiry. Follow the procedures outlined in (b) to determine if there is an error. b. This error indicates that less than 25% of Trunk Group is available. c. This error indicates that a Port circuit pack in the system did not respond to a vintage inquiry. As a result of either of these errors, a Port circuit pack may be physically inserted in a Port slot, but the system may not recognize its existence. The Error Type and Aux Data fields specify the location of the port circuit pack that caused the error as indicated in Table 10-100. If the Error Type field is greater than 1000, subtract 1000 from the Error Type field before consulting the table. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Page 10-329 If more than one CONFIG error is logged with an Aux Data of 1 at the same time, investigate any EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface) errors before proceeding. Once the Port circuit pack location has been determined from Table 10-100, use the list configuration all command to determine if the circuit pack is inserted. If not, insert the pack. If the circuit pack has already been inserted but the error persists, replace the circuit pack. Table 10-107. System Configuration Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 1 0 GAMUT Circuit Pack1 1 1 GAMUT Circuit Pack1 2 0 1E01 2 1 2E01 2 2 3E01 3 0 1E02 3 1 2E02 3 2 3E02 4 0 1E03 4 1 2E03 4 2 3E03 5 0 1E04 5 1 2E04 5 2 3E04 6 0 1E05 6 1 2E05 6 2 3E05 7 0 1E06 7 1 2E06 7 2 3E06 8 0 1E07 8 1 2E07 8 2 3E07 9 0 1E08 9 1 2E08 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-330 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 9 2 3E08 10 0 1E09 10 1 2E09 10 2 3E09 11 0 1E10 11 1 2E10 11 2 3E10 12 0 1E11 12 1 2E11 12 2 3E11 13 0 1E12 13 1 2E12 13 2 3E12 14 0 1E13 14 1 2E13 14 2 3E13 15 0 1E14 15 1 2E14 15 2 3E14 16 0 1E15 16 1 2E15 16 2 3E15 17 0 1E16 17 1 2E16 17 2 3E16 18 0 1E17 18 1 2E17 18 2 3E17 19 0 1E18 19 1 2E18 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-331 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 19 2 3E18 20 0 1E19 20 1 2E19 20 2 3E19 21 0 1E20 21 1 2E20 21 2 3E20 24 0 1B Network Control 25 0 1B Network Control 26 0 1A Network Control 26 1 Maintenance Circuit Pack 27 0 1A Network Control 27 1 2A Tone-Clock 28 0 1A Tone-Clock 28 1 2A01 28 2 3A01 29 0 1A Tone-Clock 29 1 2A02 29 2 3A02 30 0 1A01 30 1 2A03 30 2 3A03 31 0 1A02 31 1 2A04 31 2 3A04 32 0 1A2 Processor Interface 33 0 1B2 Processor Interface 34 0 1D01 34 1 2D01 34 2 3D01 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-332 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 35 0 1D02 35 1 2D02 35 2 3D02 36 0 1D03 36 1 2D03 36 2 3D03 37 0 1D04 37 1 2D04 37 2 3D04 38 0 1D05 38 1 2D05 38 2 3D05 39 0 1D06 39 1 2D06 39 2 3D06 40 0 1D07 40 1 2D07 40 2 3D07 41 0 1D08 41 1 2D08 41 2 3D08 42 0 1D09 42 1 2D09 42 2 3D09 43 0 1D10 43 1 2D10 43 2 3D10 44 0 1D11 44 1 2D11 44 2 3D11 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-333 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 45 0 1D12 45 1 2D12 45 2 3D12 46 0 1D13 46 1 2D13 46 2 3D13 47 0 1D14 47 1 2D14 47 2 3D14 48 0 1D15 48 1 2D15 48 2 3D15 49 0 1D16 49 1 2D16 49 2 3D16 50 0 1D17 50 1 2D17 50 2 3D17 51 0 1D18 51 1 2D18 51 2 3D18 52 0 1D19 52 1 2D19 52 2 3D19 53 0 1D20 53 1 2D20 53 2 3D20 56 0 1A03 56 1 2A05 56 2 3A05 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-334 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 57 0 1A04 57 1 2A06 57 2 3A06 58 0 1A05 58 1 2A07 58 2 3A07 59 0 1A06 59 1 2A08 59 2 3A08 60 0 1A07 60 1 2A09 60 2 3A09 61 0 1A08 61 1 2A10 61 2 3A10 62 0 1A09 62 1 2A11 62 2 3A11 63 0 1A10 63 1 2A12 63 2 3A12 66 0 1B01 66 1 2B01 66 2 3B01 67 0 1B02 67 1 2B02 67 2 3B02 68 0 1B03 68 1 2B03 68 2 3B03 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-335 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 69 0 1B04 69 1 2B04 69 2 3B04 70 0 1B05 70 1 2B05 70 2 3B05 71 0 1B06 71 1 2B06 71 2 3B06 72 0 1B07 72 1 2B07 72 2 3B07 73 0 1B08 73 1 2B08 73 2 3B08 74 0 1B09 74 1 2B09 74 2 3B09 75 0 1B10 75 1 2B10 75 2 3B10 76 0 1B11 76 1 2B11 76 2 3B11 77 0 1B12 77 1 2B12 77 2 3B12 78 0 1B13 78 1 2B13 78 2 3B13 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-336 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 79 0 1B14 79 1 2B14 79 2 3B14 80 0 1B15 80 1 2B15 80 2 3B15 81 0 1B16 81 1 2B16 81 2 3B16 82 0 1B17 82 1 2B17 82 2 3B17 83 0 1B18 83 1 2B18 83 2 3B18 84 0 1B19 84 1 2B19 84 2 3B19 85 0 1B20 85 1 2B20 85 2 3B20 88 1 2A13 88 2 3A13 89 1 2A14 89 2 3A14 90 1 2A15 90 2 3A15 91 1 2A16 91 2 3A16 92 1 2A17 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-337 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 92 2 3A17 93 0 1B Tone-Clock 93 1 2A18 93 2 3A18 94 0 1A1 Processor Interface 94 1 2A19 94 2 3A19 95 0 1B1 Processor Interface 98 0 1C01 98 1 2C01 98 2 3C01 99 0 1C02 99 1 2C02 99 2 3C02 100 0 1C03 100 1 2C03 100 2 3C03 101 0 1C04 101 1 2C04 101 2 3C04 102 0 1C05 102 1 2C05 102 2 3C05 103 0 1C06 103 1 2C06 103 2 3C06 104 0 1C07 104 1 2C07 104 2 3C07 105 0 1C08 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-338 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 105 1 2C08 105 2 3C08 106 0 1C09 106 1 2C09 106 2 3C09 107 0 1C10 107 1 2C10 107 2 3C10 108 0 1C11 108 1 2C11 108 2 3C11 109 0 1C12 109 1 2C12 109 2 3C12 110 0 1C13 110 1 2C13 110 2 3C13 111 0 1C14 111 1 2C14 111 2 3C14 112 0 1C15 112 1 2C15 112 2 3C15 113 0 1C16 113 1 2C16 113 2 3C16 114 0 1C17 114 1 2C17 114 2 3C17 115 0 1C18 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CONFIG (System Configuration) Table 10-107. Page 10-339 System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Port Circuit Pack Location 115 1 2C18 115 2 3C18 116 0 1C19 116 1 2C19 116 2 3C19 117 0 1C20 117 1 2C20 117 2 3C20 other - Unknown Circuit Pack Continued on next page 1. Development Laboratory only Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device) Page 10-340 CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device) MO Name (in Alarm Log) CUST-ALM 1. Alarm Level none Initial Command to Run1 test customer-alarm PC Full Name of MO Customer-Provided Alarming Device Where PC is an appropriate port network number and carrier (for a High or Critical Reliability system, specify 1a or 1b). The system provides customers a way to connect their own alarm indication device to a switch. The CUST-ALM maintenance object represents this Customer-Provided Alarming Device (CPAD). When an alarm occurs at least to the level to which the CPAD is administered, the CPAD in the Processor Port Network (PPN) and in the Expansion Port Network (EPN) are activated. The CPAD is administered by the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form (CPE Alarm Activation Level field). The CPAD is connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor in the PPN (in a High or Critical Reliability system, the CPAD is connected to both Maintenance/Tape Processors) and to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN. The valid levels to which to set the CPE Alarm Activation Level are: none, warning, minor, or major. The CPAD is also activated within a cabinet whenever Emergency Transfer is invoked within that cabinet. The CUST-ALM MO is not maintained by the system, and does not generate any alarms. If a problem is suspected with the CPAD, it may be tested using the test customer-alarm command, which activates the device by closing the relay on either the Maintenance/Tape Processor or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack (whichever is specified) for 1 minute. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the CPAD on the PPN is connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor on both carrier A and carrier B, and the test customer-alarm command can specify which Maintenance/Tape Processor should close its relay. The repeat parameter may be used to close the relay for a longer length of time (5 minutes is the suggested repeat value). The CPAD is also activated within a cabinet whenever Emergency Transfer is invoked within that cabinet. The CUST-ALM MO is not maintained by the system, and does not generate any alarms. If a problem is suspected with the CPAD, it may be tested using the test customer-alarm command, which activates the device by closing the relay on either the Maintenance/Tape Processor or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack (whichever is specified) for 1 minute. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the CPAD on the PPN is connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor on both carrier A and carrier B, and the test customer-alarm command can specify which Maintenance/Tape Processor should close its relay. The repeat parameter may be used to close the relay for a longer length of time (5 minutes is the suggested repeat value). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device) Page 10-341 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-108. Error Type none Customer Provided Alarming Device Error Log Entries Aux Data none Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value none System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes There are no errors associated with the CPAD CUST-ALM MO. The test customer-alarm PC command is provided to allow a technician to check that the customer-provided alarming device is correctly installed and functional. It is recommended that this test be run at least once after both the switch and the customer alarm have been installed. Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test (#115) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test (#115) This test closes the relay that activates the CPAD for 1 minute only within the port network specified. If it takes longer than 1 minute to check that the CPAD has been activated, the Repeat field on the test customer-alarm PC command can be used to close the relay for up to 99 minutes. Note that when the repeat option is used, the results for Test #115 come back immediately and, for each test that passed, the CPAD is kept on for that many minutes. The CPAD does not go off after 1 minute and then come back on. Instead, the CPAD is kept on continuously for the entire time. If the CPAD is being activated and deactivated in a flickering fashion, there is a problem with either the CPAD, or the Maintenance/Tape Processor, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device) Table 10-109. Page 10-342 TEST #115 Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test Error Code Test Result (blank) 1000 2029 ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Try the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The switch software successfully sent the request to the Maintenance/Tape Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack to turn on the CPAD. The CPAD must be physically inspected to verify that it is working. If the CPAD is working and the customer has complained that the CPAD did not indicate a system alarm when it occurred, then check the administered levels for turning on the CPAD via the Display System-Parameter Maintenance screen form. Compare these levels with the customer’s specifications. If Test #115 passes, and the CPAD is not being activated, check the connection of the CPAD to the Maintenance/Tape Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If the CPAD can be activated but cannot be deactivated, first check to make sure Emergency Transfer is not activated in the affected port network via the status system command. Emergency Transfer can be forced to manual OFF by the Emergency Transfer switch on the Maintenance/Tape Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If Emergency Transfer is OFF and the CPAD still cannot be deactivated, check the administered levels for the CPAD via the Display System-Parameter Maintenance screen form and compare against the alarm levels currently present in the system (display alarms command). Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-343 DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO DATA-BD WARNING test network-control Network Control Circuit Pack DATA-BD MINOR test network-control Network Control Circuit Pack DATA-BD WARNING test network-control Network Control Circuit Pack The TN777 or TN777B Network Control circuit pack contains the following objects: the SW-CTL (Switch Control), four DATA-CHLs (Network Control Data Channels), the DATA-CON (Network Control Driver), and the generic hardware that interfaces with the TDM Bus (that is, DATA-BD). The generic hardware DATA-BD is described here. All circuit packs that have an interface with the TDM Bus have a common set of generic hardware that provides the TDM Bus interface. Consequently, these circuit packs share a common set of tests that verify the integrity of the generic hardware. The circuit packs and common set of tests that they share are described in XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Because the Network Control circuit pack has this common set of hardware, it is classified in the XXX-BD Maintenance documentation as a service port circuit pack. A DEFINITY system with a single SPE has a single Network Control circuit pack. A High or Critical Reliability system has two Network Control circuit packs: one that resides in the Active SPE control carrier, and one that resides in the Standby SPE control carrier. Refer to Chapter 6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid", and the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of High and Critical Reliability systems. Because the Network Control circuit pack is a SPE circuit pack, it has two important characteristics that make maintenance on the DATA-BD MO different from the maintenance on other XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) MOs. First, because the Network Control circuit pack has the SW-CTL (Switch Control) on it, it must always be physically installed in the system. Therefore, the DATA-BD MO is always logically administered. Second, because the Network Control circuit pack is a SPE circuit pack, it has no PCSS designation. Therefore, the DATA-BD MO cannot be accessed by system technician via the test board PCSS, reset board PCSS, busyout board PCSS, or release board PCSS commands. The only system technician access to the DATA-BD MO is via the test network-control [a | b] [short | long] command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-344 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-110. Error Type Network Control Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test data-module sh r 1 1 (a) 0 Data Channel Reset Test (#107) MINOR ON test data-module l 23 (b) 0 None WARNING OFF 257 Any Control Channel Test (#52) MINOR ON 257 (c) 0 None 513 (d) Any None 769 (e) 4358 None 1025 (f) 4363 NPE Audit Test (#50) 1538 (g) Data Channel Reset Test (#107) 3840 (h) Any None 3841(i) Any None 3999(j) Any None 1. test network-control [a | b] sh r 20 test network-control [a | b] sh MINOR ON test data-module l Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates the DATA-BD portion of the Network Control circuit pack stopped functioning. Since the Network Control circuit pack cannot be reset via the reset board PCSS command, the Data Channel Reset Test (#107) in the Long Test Sequence for the DATA-CHLs and DATA-CON must be used to reset it as follows: 1. Issue the list data command to determine if one, or more, Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) is administered. NOTE: A Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is identified by a "type" value of "netcon." 2. If a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is not administered, use the add data-module [ | next] command to administer a DATA-CHL. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-345 3. From the form resulting from the list data command, choose a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) whose port field value indicates that it is on the same carrier (A or B) as the Network Control circuit pack to be reset. 4. Issue the test data-module long command using the extension for the DATA-CHL chosen in Step 3. ! WARNING: Issuing this command drops all data channel extensions. See DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Maintenance documentation first. If the red LED stays on, then replace the circuit pack. b. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically installed. The alarm is cleared when the circuit pact is installed. c. This error indicates transient communications problems with this circuit pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. d. This error indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure on the circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced. e. This error can be ignored, but look for other errors on this circuit pack. f. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. g. This error indicates the DATA-BD portion of the Network Control circuit pack is out-of-service. Since the Network Control circuit pack cannot be reset via the reset board PCSS command, the Data Channel Reset Test (#107) in the Long Test Sequence for the DATA-CHL and DATA-CON must be used to reset it as follows: 1. Issue the list data command to determine if one or more Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) are administered. NOTE: A Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is identified by a "type" value of "netcon." 2. If a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is not administered, use the add data-module [ | next] command to administer a DATA-CHL. 3. From the form resulting from the list data command, choose a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) whose port field value indicates that it is on the same carrier (A or B) as the Network Control circuit pack to be reset. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-346 ■ Refer to “DATA-CHL” before issuing the test networkcontrol [a | b] long command to determine if CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Links are using the DATA-CHLs and how to busyout these links prior to running destructive tests on the DATA-CHLs. ■ Refer to “SW-CTL” before issuing the test network-control [a | b] long command to determine the consequences of running the Switch Control Reset Test (Test #93). 4. Issue the test data-module long command using the extension for the DATA-CHL chosen in Step 3. If the error happens again within 15 minutes, then replace the circuit pack. h. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. i. In a High Critical Reliability system, the vintage number of the TN777B Network Control circuit pack must be greater than or equal to 17. The aux value for error 3841 indicates the vintage of the current TN777B installed. j. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated 50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Audit Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence NPE Audit Test (#50) (a) Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND X ND Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-347 Note: a. Refer to “DATA-CHL” and “SW-CTL” for other tests associated with DATA-BD maintenance. NPE Audit Test (#50) The system sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to update the network connectivity information for all the NPEs on the circuit pack. Table 10-111. Error Code TEST #50 NPE Audit Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1019 ABORT Test already in progress. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The circuit pack’s NPEs have been updated with their translation. Continued on next page Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) This test queries the circuit pack for its circuit pack code and vintage and verifies its records. Table 10-112. Error Code TEST #52 Control Channel Loop Around Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-348 DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) MO Name (in Alarm Log) DATA-CHL1 DATA-CHL 1. 2. 3. 2 Alarm Level MINOR WARNING Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO test data-module l test data-module sh Network Control Data Channel 3 Network Control Data Channel The test data-module long command drops all sessions on all of the Network Control ports. Refer to Data Channel Reset Test (#107). is the extension of the Data Channel to be tested. The extension can be determined by issuing the list data-module command from the administration terminal. The resulting form provides a mapping from the 1CXXpp designation of the Data Channel to its corresponding extension, where pp indicates which one of the four Data Channels is alarmed (01, 02, 03, or 04) and C indicates the carrier on which the alarmed Data Channel resides (A for carrier A or B for carrier B). The test data-module long command drops all sessions on all of the Network Control ports. Refer to Data Channel Reset Test (#107). The TN777 or TN777B Network Control circuit pack contains the following objects: the SW-CTL (Switch Control), four Data Channels, the Driver, and the generic hardware that interfaces with the TDM Bus (that is, DATA-BD). The Data Channels are the subject of this section. The Driver is also described. Together, the four DATA-CHLs and the DATA-CON provide a data communications interface that allows data terminal equipment connected to port circuit packs to communicate with software applications running on the system. The DATA-CON represents the interface to the control channel of the TDM Bus. Each DATA-CHL represents a dial-up/dial-out asynchronous communications port that interfaces to the TDM Bus. The DATA-CON supports the signaling required to establish and tear down a connection between the terminal equipment and a software application. Data is transported between the terminal equipment and the software application over the connection established over the DATA-CHL. A system with a single SPE has a single Network Control circuit pack (DATA-BD). Thus, there is single set of four DATA-CHLs. A High or Critical Reliability system has two Network Control circuit packs: one that resides in the Active SPE control carrier, and one that resides in the Standby SPE control carrier. Refer to Chapter 6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid", and the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for descriptions of High and Critical Reliability systems. Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) may be used to support the following features and functions: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-349 ■ Establishment of a connection over which to log CDR data to a printer or other storage unit. This connection is called PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link). ■ Establishment of connection(s) over which to log PMS, Automatic Wakeup, and Emergency Access to Attendant data to a Journal printer. This connection is called PMS-PRINT/JRNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link). ■ Establishment of a connection to a customer-owned PMS. This connection is called the PMS-LINK. ■ Establishment of a connection to system printer. This connection is called the System Printer Link (SYS-PRNT). ■ Establishment of connection(s) for up to two secondary administration terminals. ■ Saving announcements from the ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) to tape. ■ Restoring announcements from tape to the ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack). ■ Maintenance testing of the DATA-CHLs and DATA-CON. From the viewpoint of administration, the four DATA-CHLs on a Network Control circuit pack are numbered 01 through 04. In a system with a single SPE or in the Active SPE of a system with High or Critical Reliability, each DATA-CHL may be assigned a unique extension using the add data-module [ | next ] command. These extensions are called active extensions. When assigning an active extension to a DATA-CHL XX (where XX is 01, 02, 03, or 04) the Add Data-Module form also requires the user to assign a unique maintenance extension to the corresponding Standby SPE DATA-CHL XX. The maintenance extension is required even when the system does not High or Critical Reliability; that is, even when there are no Standby SPE DATA-CHLs. In a High or Critical Reliability system, a Standby SPE DATA-CHL is tested by using its maintenance extension to identify it. NOTE: If a DATA-CHL or the DATA-CON becomes defective on the Network Control in a system with a single SPE, the Network Control circuit pack cannot be replaced without powering down the system. Figure 10-24 illustrates the logical decomposition of DATA-CHL (Network Control Channel) and the DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) into software and hardware components. The figure also shows the interface to the switch software via the memory bus and to terminal equipment via the TDM Bus and port circuit packs. As indicated in the figure, DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common Dual Port RAM (DPR) and TDM Bus interface hardware, and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4 share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if DATA-CHL 1 is defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice versa. Similarly, if DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-350 DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4 is likely to be defective and vice versa. 1. Determine if CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Links are using the DATA-CHLs and busyout these links if it is necessary to use the test network-control [a | b] long command. 2. Refer to SW-CTL (Switch Control) Maintenance documentation before executing the test network-control [a | b] long command to determine the consequences of running the Switch Control Reset Test (Test #93). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-351 SWITCH SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS DATA-CHL SOFTWARE DATA-CHL SOFTWARE DATA-CON DATA-CHL SOFTWARE DATA-CHL SOFTWARE MEMORY BUS NETWORK CONTROL CIRCUIT PACK(TN773) DATA-CON DPR DATA-CHLs 1&2 DPR DATA-CHLs 3&4 DPR DATA-CON HARDWARE DATA-CHLs 1&2 HARDWARE DATA-CHLs 3&4 HARDWARE SWITCH CONTROL (SW-CTL) GENERIC TDM BUS INTERFACE (DATA-BD) DATA-CON AND DATA-CHLs TDM BUS DATA LINE CIRCUIT PACK (TN726) POOLED MODEM CIRCUIT PACK (TN758) ASYNCHRONOUS DATA UNIT Figure 10-24. PRINTER OR TERMINAL DIGITAL LINE CIRCUIT PACK (TN754 OR TN754B) PROCESSOR DATA MODULE OR TRUNK DATA MODULE OR DIGITAL TERMINAL DATA MODULE DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) ANNOUNCEMENT CIRCUIT PACK (TN750) PRINTER OR TERMINAL DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-352 Status of Network Control Data Channels In order to perform maintenance testing on the Network Control DATA-CHLs, the DATA-CHLs cannot be busy with one of the functions described previously. A series of system technician commands can be used to determine if the DATA-CHLs are busy and, if so, to determine the function for which they are being used. This series of system technician commands is described below and should be done before testing the DATA-CHLs. Issue the list data-module command to determine the extensions for the administered Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). NOTE: A Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is identified by a "type" value of "netcon." For each Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) on the Active SPE, determine if the DATA-CHL is busy by issuing the status data-module command using the DATA-CHL’s extension. If the DATA-CHL is busy, the Service State field in the resulting form will be in service/active. However, the form does not indicate the reason the DATA-CHL is busy. This must be determined using other system technician commands. Use the procedures below to determine whether busy Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) are being used for CDR, Journal Printer, or PMS Links. If a DATA-CHL is busy with one of these links then, in order to test the DATA-CHL, the link must be busied out using busyout smdr-link, busyout journal-printer wakeup-log, busyout journal-printer pms-log, or busyout pms-link command, respectively. Do not issue any of these busyout commands unless instructed to do so while investigating Error Codes according to the "System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes" subsection. If one of these links must be busied out to perform maintenance testing, restore the link to service according to PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link), PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link), and PMS-LINK Maintenance documentation, respectively. If a DATA-CHL is busy but is not being used for one of these links, then it is being used for a secondary administration terminal connection or for maintenance testing. If it is being used for a secondary administration terminal connection, then in order to test the DATA-CHL that the connection is using, the DATA-CHL must be busied out using the busyout data-module command. NOTE: The busyout data-module command causes the connection over the associated DATA-CHL to be dropped. Do not issue this command unless instructed to do so. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-353 If the DATA-CHL must be busied out in order to perform maintenance testing, the secondary administration terminal connection must be re-established by redialing the DATA-CHL. CDR Links 1. Issue the status smdr-link command to see if an CDR Link has been established. If the Link State field is "Up," then the CDR Link may be using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 2. Issue the display system features command and go to the CDR subsection on Page 2 of the resulting form. Note the values in the Primary Output Extension and Secondary Output Extension fields. If the values are extensions, then the CDR Link is using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 3. For each of the extensions in the Primary Output Extension and Secondary Output Extension fields, issue the status data-module command using the extension. Note the value in the Connected Ports field of the resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, then the indicated port is a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL). 4. Issue the list data-module command, locate each port indicated in the Connected Ports fields, and determine if that port has a "type" value of "netcon." If so, then there is an CDR Link over that DATA-CHL. System Printer Links 1. Issue the status sp-link command to see if a System Printer Link has been established. If the Link State field is "Up," then the System Printer Link may be using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 2. Issue the display system features command and go to the System Printer subsection on Page 2 of the resulting form. Note the values in the Primary Output Extension and Secondary Output Extension fields. If the values are extensions, then the System Printer Link is using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 3. For each of the extensions in the Primary Output Extension and Secondary Output Extension fields, issue the status data-module command using the extension. Note the value in the Connected Ports field of the resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, then the indicated port is a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL). 4. Issue the list data-module command, locate each port indicated in the Connected Ports fields, and determine if that port has a "type" value of "netcon." If so, then there is a System Printer Link over that DATA-CHL. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-354 Journal Printer Links 1. Issue the status journal-link wakeup-log and status journal-link pms-log commands to see if one or both of these Journal Printer Links have been established. If the Link State field is "Up" for either of these, then that Journal Printer Link may be using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 2. Issue the display system hospitality command and note the values in the Extension of Journal/System Printer and Extension of PMS Log Printer fields. If either of these values are extensions, then that Journal Printer Link is using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 3. For each of the extensions in the Extension of Journal/Schedule Printer and Extension of PMS Log Printer fields, issue the status data-module command using the extension. Note the value in the Connected Ports field of the resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, then the indicated port is a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL). 4. Issue the list data-module command, locate each port indicated in the Connected Ports fields, and determine if that port has a "type" value of "netcon." If so, then there is a Journal Printer Link over that DATA-CHL. PMS Link 1. Issue the status pms-link command to see if a PMS Link has been established. If the Link State field is "Up," the PMS Link may be using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 2. Issue the display system hospitality command and note the value in the Extension of the PMS field. If this value is an extension, the PMS Link is using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). 3. For the extension in the Extension of PMS field, issue the status data-module command using the extension. Note the value in the Connected Ports field of the resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, the indicated port is a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL). 4. Issue the list data-module command, locate the port indicated in the Connected Ports field, and determine if that port has a "type" value of "netcon." If so, there is a PMS Link over that DATA-CHL. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-355 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-113. Error Type Network Control Data Channel Error Log Entries Aux Data Alarm Level Associated Test On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01(a) 0 Any Any Any test data-module sh r 1 1 Any Local Loop Back Test (#111) MINOR ON test data-module sh r 3 18 (b) 0 busyout data-module WARNING OFF release data-module None WARNING ON test data-module sh 130 257 Any Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109) MINOR ON test data-module sh r 5 513 Any Crosstalk Test (#110) MINOR ON test data-module sh r 3 769 Any Dual Port RAM Test (#108) MINOR ON test data-module l r 3 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. b. In a system with the duplication option, a busyout of the DATA-CHL is preserved across an SPE interchange. When an SPE interchange occurs, and the DATA-CHL is busied out, the busyout state is transferred to the corresponding DATA-CHL on the new active SPE while the DATA-CHL on the former active SPE is released. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes There are two system technician test commands that include the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). The test data-module [short | long] command tests the single DATA-CHL that has the extension specified by . The test network-control [a | b] [short | long] command tests each administered DATA-CHL that resides on the Network Control circuit pack in the specified carrier. Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Data Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-356 Channel Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 Data Channel Reset Test (#107) (a) X D Data Channel Dual Port Ram Test (#108) (a) X D Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109) X X ND Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (#111) X X ND Data Channel Crosstalk Test (#110) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Note: a. Determine if CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Links are using the DATA-CHLs and busyout these links if it is necessary to use the test network-control [a | b] long command. Table 10-114. System Technician-Demanded Tests: DATA-CHL Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND X ND Data Channel Reset Test (#107) X D Data Channel DPR Test (#108) X D Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Control Channel Test (Common Port Circuit Pack) (#52) (a) NPE Audit Test (Common Port Circuit Pack) (#50) (a) X Data Channel Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109) X X ND Data Channel Crosstalk Test (#110) X X ND Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (#111) X X ND Switch Control Reset Test (#93) (b) X D EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#325) (b) X D Time-of-Day Clock Test (#95) (b) X X ND Control Channel Interface Test (#92) (b) X X ND Control Channel Transmission Test (#94) (b) X X ND EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#324) (b) X X ND 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (c) X X ND Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-114. Page 10-357 System Technician-Demanded Tests: DATA-CHL — Continued Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) (c) X X ND Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (c) X X ND Memory Card Match Test (#697) (c) X X ND Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) (c) X X ND Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) (c) X X ND X ND Order of Investigation Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) (c) Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) (c) X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Notes: a. Refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. b. Refer to SW-CTL (Switch Control) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. c. Refer to the CARD-MEM MO section for information on this test. Data Channel Reset Test (#107) This test is destructive. This test resets the entire data communications interface provided by the DATA-CON and the four DATA-CHLs. All existing connections over the DATA-CHLs are dropped. Table 10-115. Error Code 1000 TEST #107 Data Channel Reset Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Try the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-115. Error Code Page 10-358 TEST #107 Data Channel Reset Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 2011 2012 2013 2016 2017 2020 2022 2030 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are unavailable. ABORT An ABORT has one of two different meanings: 1. System resources required to run this test are not available. 2. Internal system error 10704 ABORT Internal system error 1. Try the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The circuit pack failed to reset. 1. Execute the command again. 2. If the problem persists, replace the TN777 Network Control circuit pack. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. If this is a high or critical reliability system, set the Time-of-Day clocks as described in Chapter 6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid", to ensure that the clocks on both Network Control circuit packs are synchronized. PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly. Continued on next page Data Channel Dual Port RAM Test (#108) This test is destructive. This is a coordinated test of the dual port RAM that is shared between the hardware and software composing the DATA-CON. Control messages and data are passed through this dual port RAM to establish and tear down connections over the DATA-CHLs. This test requests each side to read and write the dual port RAM, first one at a time and then simultaneously in alternate locations. This test prevents any control stimuli from being received from or sent to the TDM Bus control channel preventing the establishment of new connections over the DATA-CHLs. However, existing connections are not (and cannot) be dropped. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-116. Error Code 1000 Page 10-359 TEST #108 Data Channel Dual Port RAM Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2020 ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. FAIL The DATA-CON dual port RAM is not functioning correctly. Either the software cannot correctly read from it and/or write to it or the hardware cannot correctly read from it and/or write to it. Connections cannot be established over the DATA-CHLs. 1. Execute the command again. 2. If the problem persists, replace the TN777 Network Control circuit pack. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. PASS The DATA-CON dual port RAM is functioning. Connections can be established over the DATA-CHLs. Continued on next page Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109) This test verifies the integrity of the entire DATA-CHL (that is, the software, dual port RAM, and hardware that compose it). It verifies that a connection can be established over the DATA-CHL and that the DATA-CHL can correctly send and receive data over the connection (that is, over the TDM Bus). The test actually involves two DATA-CHLs: the DATA-CHL that is the target of the test and a second, arbitrary, unbusy DATA-CHL. A connection is set up by placing a call out from the arbitrary DATA-CHL and into the target DATA-CHL. Data is looped over the connection in each direction (that is, the target DATA-CHL is tested as both a sender of data and a receiver of data). The test checks that the data received by one DATA-CHL is the same as the data that was sent by the other DATA-CHL. Because it establishes a connection between two Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) across the TDM Bus, this test does more than just verify the integrity of the target DATA-CHL. It also verifies the integrity of the DATA-CON (by establishing the connection) and of the TDM Bus and Tone-Clock circuit pack (by sending and receiving data). If this test aborts or fails, it is impossible to determine from this test alone whether the defective DATA-CHL is the target DATA-CHL or the arbitrarily chosen DATA-CHL, or if the problem lies with the DATA-CON, TDM Bus, or Tone-Clock Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Page 10-360 circuit pack. The results of running Tests #107, #108, #110, and #111 on the DATA-CHL can be used to determine whether the target DATA-CHL is defective. Finally, recall from the description of that DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common Dual Port RAM (DPR) and TDM Bus interface hardware and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4 share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 1 is defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice versa. Similarly, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4 is likely to be defective and vice versa. NOTE: If an Error Code is encountered recommending that an CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Link be busied out, restore each busied out link to service according to PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link), SYS-PRNT (System Printer Link), JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link), or PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Maintenance documentation, respectively, before concluding work on the problem. Table 10-117. Error Code 4 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation For this test, an Error Code of 4 can have 1 of 2 different meanings: a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use. b. Internal system error Note the results of Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the target DATA-CHL. If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both PASS, then there is a high probability that the target DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL: 1. Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL. 2. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the function (CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only). 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS Link to service before moving on to another activity. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code Page 10-361 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result 30 31 32 33 40 41 70 75 ABORT 1000 ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. For this test, an Error Code of 1000 can have one of several different meanings: a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use. b. No other DATA-CHLs are administered and, therefore, not available to place the call to the target DATA-CHL. c. All other DATA-CHLs are busy and, therefore, not available to place the call to the target DATA-CHL. d. System resources required to run this test are not available. e. Internal system error Note the results of Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the target DATA-CHL. If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both PASS, then there is a high probability that the target DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL: 1. Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL. 2. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the function (CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code Page 10-362 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result 1000 Description/Recommendation 3. Issue the list data-module command to determine if other DATA-CHLs are administered. If no other DATA-CHLs are administered, administer at least one at this time. (cont’d.) 4. Determine if the DATA-CHLs OTHER THAN the target DATA-CHL are all in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of Network Control Data Channels" section. If so, and if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL, use the following preference guidelines to free one of the DATA-CHLs for testing. a. If a DATA-CHL is being used for a secondary administration terminal connection, busyout that DATA-CHL. b. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a PMS Link, busyout the PMS Link. c. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a Journal Printer Link, busyout the Journal Printer Link. d. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for an CDR Link, busyout the CDR Link. e. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a System Printer Link, busyout the System Printer Link. 5. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 6. Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS Link to service before moving on to another activity. 1006 ABORT For this test, an Error Code of 1006 can have one of several different meanings: a. No other DATA-CHLs are administered and, therefore, not available to place the call to the target DATA-CHL. b. All other DATA-CHLs are busy and, therefore, not available to place the call to the target DATA-CHL. c. System resources required to run this test are not available. d. Internal system error Note the results of Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the target DATA-CHL. If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both PASS, then there is a high probability that the target DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL: Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code Page 10-363 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result 1006 Description/Recommendation 1. Issue the list data-module command to determine if other DATA-CHLs are administered. If no other CATA-CHLs are administered, administer at least one at this time. (cont’d.) 2. Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL. a. If a DATA-CHL is being used for a secondary administration terminal connection, busyout that DATA-CHL. b. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a PMS Link, busyout the PMS Link. c. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a Journal Printer Link, busyout the Journal Printer Link. d. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for an CDR Link, busyout the CDR Link. e. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a System Printer Link, busyout the System Printer Link. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS Link to service before moving on to another activity. 1016 ABORT Resources for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. 2003 ABORT Internal system error 2004 ABORT Internal system error 1. Check the dial plan to make sure that the extensions of the data channel are set up as local extensions rather than remote or UDP extensions. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code Page 10-364 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 2011 2012 2013 2016 2017 2020 2022 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 40 41 2000 2003 2004 FAIL In the case of Error Codes 40 and 41, the Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test failed because the data received over the connection did not match the data sent over the connection (data was corrupted). In the case of Error Codes 2000, 2003, and 2004, the Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test failed because the data looped over the connection was not received (data was lost). However, because it involves two DATA-CHLs, the test’s failure is not sufficient to indict either one of the two DATA-CHLs as defective. 1. Check the dial plan to make sure that the extensions of the data channel are set up as local extensions rather than remote or UDP extensions. 2. Determine which of the DATA-CHLs is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described in the "Status of Network Control Data Channels" section. 3. Note the test results for Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the target DATA-CHL and refer to Steps 4, 5, and/or 6 to determine the appropriate actions to take based on those results. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code 40 41 2000 2003 2004 Page 10-365 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 4. If the result of Test #110 is PASS and the result of Test #111 is PASS for the target DATA-CHL, then the most likely problem is that the arbitrarily chosen DATA-CHL is defective. ■ Run the Short Test Sequence for each DATA-CHL that is not in use for some other function. Note the test results for Tests #110 and #111 for each of them. ■ If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both FAIL for at least one of the other DATA-CHLs, investigate the possibility of a defective arbitrarily chosen DATA-CHL. (cont’d.) a. Issue the remove data-module for each DATA-CHL for which the results of Tests #110 and #111 were both FAIL to remove the DATA-CHL from operation. b. Repeat the test. c. Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest convenience. Replace the circuit pack as described in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. ■ If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are not both FAIL for any one of the other DATA-CHLs that are not in use for some other function, investigate the possibility of a defective TDM Bus as described in Step 5. 5. If the result of Test #110 is FAIL and the result of Test #111 is PASS for the target DATA-CHL, then the most likely problem is that the TDM Bus or Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective. ■ Check for the existence of TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms. If they exist: a. Refer to the corresponding Maintenance documentation to clear the errors and alarms. b. Repeat the test. ■ If TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms do not exist, investigate the possibility that the target DATA-CHL, the DATA-CON, or the Network Control circuit pack is defective as described in Step 6. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code 40 41 2000 2003 2004 Page 10-366 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 6. If the result of Test #110 is either PASS or FAIL and the result of test #111 is FAIL for the target DATA-CHL, then the most likely problem is that the target DATA-CHL is defective, the DATA-CON is defective, or the TN777 Network Control circuit pack is defective. ■ (cont’d.) Busyout all functions that are using the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). ! CAUTION: All functions must be busied out because Test #107 is destructive and terminates all established connections over the DATA-CHLs. ■ Issue the test data-module long for the target DATA-CHL. Note the test results for Test #107 and #108. a. If the result of Test #107 is FAIL, then the TN777 Network Control circuit pack is defective. ■ Replace the Network Control circuit pack immediately. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. ■ Repeat the test. b. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is FAIL, then the DATA-CON is defective. 40 41 2000 2003 2004 (cont’d.) ■ Although all DATA-CHLs are unusable, the SW-CTL is still operational. Based on the customer’s use of DATA-CHLs, replace the Network Control circuit pack at the customer’s convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. ■ Repeat the test. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is PASS, then the target DATA-CHL is defective. ■ Issue the remove data-module for the target DATA-CHL to remove it from operation. ■ Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. 7. Restore any busied out CDR, Journal Printer, System Printer, or PMS Link to service before moving on to another activity. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-117. Error Code Page 10-367 TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/Recommendation The target DATA-CHL, DATA-CON, TN777 Network Control circuit pack, TDM Bus (TDM-BUS), and Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, TDM-CLK) are functioning. Connections can be established over the DATA-CHLs. Continued on next page Data Channel Crosstalk Test (#110) This test verifies the integrity of the entire DATA-CHL, that is, the software, dual port RAM, and hardware that composes it. However, unlike the Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109), this test only involves the single DATA-CHL that is the target of the test. A loop around connection is established over the TDM Bus from the DATA-CHL back to itself. Data is looped over the connection in each direction, that is, the DATA-CHL is tested as both a sender of data and a receiver of data. The test checks that the data received by the DATA-CHL is the same as the data that was sent by the DATA-CHL. Because it establishes a loop around connection from the Network Control DATA-CHL back to itself across the TDM Bus, this test does more than just verify the integrity of the target DATA-CHL. It also verifies the integrity of the DATA-CON (by establishing the connection) and of the TDM Bus and Tone-Clock circuit pack (by sending and receiving data). If this test aborts or fails, it is impossible to determine from this test alone whether the target DATA-CHL is defective or if the problem lies with the DATA-CON, TDM Bus, or Tone-Clock circuit pack. The results of running Tests #107, #108, and #111 on the DATA-CHL can be used to determine whether the target DATA-CHL is defective. Finally, recall from the description of that DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4 share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 1 is defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice versa. Similarly, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4 is likely to be defective and vice versa. NOTE: If an Error Code is encountered that recommends that an CDR Link, System Printer Link, PMS Log Printer, Wakeup-Log Printer Link, and/or PMS Link be busied out, restore each busied-out link to service according to the PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link), SYS-PRNT, or PMS-LINK Maintenance documentation, respectively, before concluding work on the problem. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-118. Error Code 4 Page 10-368 TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation For this test, an Error Code of 4 can have one of two different meanings: a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use. b. Internal system error Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL: 1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the function (CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only ). 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS Link to service before moving on to another activity. 40 70 75 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-118. Error Code 1000 Page 10-369 TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation For this test, an Error Code of 1000 can have one of several different meanings: a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use. b. System resources required to run this test are not available. c. Internal system error Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL: 1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only). 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. Restore any busied out PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK MOs to service before moving on to another activity. 1002 ABORT For this test, an Error Code of 1002 can have one of two different meanings: 1. System resources required to run this test are not available. 2. Internal system error 1006 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1016 ABORT Resources for the test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. 2000 ABORT Resources for the test are not available. 2003 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-118. Error Code Page 10-370 TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 2011 2012 2013 2016 2017 2020 2022 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) for a description of these error codes. 14 16 40 2000 2003 2004 FAIL In the case of Error Code 40, the Crosstalk Test failed because the data received over the connection did not match the data sent over the connection (data was corrupted). In the case of Error Code 2000, 2003, and 2004, the crosstalk test failed because the data looped over the connection was not received (data was lost). 1. Determine which of the DATA-CHLs are in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of Network Control Data Channels" section. 2. Note the test result for Test #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the target DATA-CHL and refer to Steps 3 and/or 4 to determine the appropriate actions to take based on those results. 3. If the result of Test #111 is PASS, then the most likely problem is that the TDM Bus or Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective. a. Check for the existence of TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms. If they exist: 1. Refer to the corresponding Maintenance documentation to clear the errors and alarms. 2. Repeat the test. b. If TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms do not exist, investigate the possibility that the target DATA-CHL, the DATA-CON, or the Network Control circuit pack is defective as described in Step 4. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-118. Error Code 14 16 40 2000 2003 2004 (cont’d.) Page 10-371 TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 4. If the result of Test #111 is FAIL, then the most likely problem is that the target DATA-CHL is defective, the DATA-CON is defective, or the TN777 Network Control circuit pack is defective. Busyout all functions that are using the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). ! CAUTION: All functions must be busied out because Test #107 is destructive and terminates all established connections over the DATA-CHLs. a. Issue the test data-module long command for the target DATA-CHL. Note the test results for Tests #107 and #108. 1. If the result of Test #107 is FAIL, then the TN777 Network Control circuit pack is defective. (a).Replace the Network Control circuit pack immediately. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. (b).Repeat the test. 2. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is FAIL, then the DATA-CON is defective. (a).Although all DATA-CHLs are unusable, the SW-CTL is still operational. Based on the customer’s use of DATA-CHLs, replace the Network Control circuit pack at the customer’s convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. (b).Repeat the test. 3. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is PASS, then the target DATA-CHL is defective. (a).Issue the remove data-module command for the target DATA-CHL to remove it from operation. (b).Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. 5. Restore any busied out function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) to service before moving on to another activity. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-118. Error Code Page 10-372 TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/Recommendation The target DATA-CHL, DATA-CON, TN777 Network Control circuit pack, TDM Bus (TDM-BUS), and Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, TDM-CLK) are functioning. Connections can be established over the target DATA-CHL. Continued on next page Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (#111) This test verifies the integrity of the dual port RAM that is shared between the software and hardware that composes the DATA-CHL. The dual port RAM is placed in local loop back mode such that data to be sent by the DATA-CHL is instead looped back to be received by the DATA-CHL. The loop back is done within the dual port RAM, that is, the data is never sent over the TDM Bus. The test checks that the data received by the DATA-CHL is the same as the data that was sent by the DATA-CHL. This test actually does more than just verify the integrity of the target DATA-CHL. Because it is the DATA-CON that actually puts the Dual Port RAM in local loop back mode and loops the data from the Dual Port RAM back into the Dual Port RAM, the test also verifies the integrity of the DATA-CON. If this test aborts or fails, it is impossible to determine from this test alone whether the target DATA-CHL is defective or if the problem lies with the DATA-CON. The results of running Tests #107 and #108 on the DATA-CHL can be used to determine whether the target DATA-CHL is defective. Finally, recall from the description of that DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common Dual Port RAM (DPR) and TDM Bus interface hardware and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4 share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 1 is defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice versa. Similarly, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4 is likely to be defective and vice versa. NOTE: If an Error Code is encountered that recommends that an CDR Link, System Printer Link, PMS Log Printer, Wakeup-Log Printer, and/or PMS Link be busied out, restore each busied-out link to service according to the PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link), SYS-PRNT (System Printer Link), PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link), or PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Maintenance documentation, respectively, before concluding work on the problem. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-119. Error Code 4 Page 10-373 TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation For this test, an Error Code of 4 can have one of two different meanings: a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use. b. Internal system error Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL. 1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only). 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. Restore any busied out PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK MOs to service before moving on to another activity. 40 70 75 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-119. Error Code 1000 Page 10-374 TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation For this test, an Error Code of 1000 can have one of several different meanings: a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use. b. System resources required to run this test are not available. c. Internal system error Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL: 1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only). 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. Restore any busied out PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK MOs to service before moving on to another activity. 1006 ABORT For this test, an Error Code of 1006 can have one of several different meanings: a. System resources required to run this test are not available. b. Internal system error. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1016 ABORT Resources for the test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. 2000 ABORT Internal system error 2003 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-119. Error Code Page 10-375 TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 2011 2012 2013 2016 2017 2020 2022 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 40 2000 2003 2004 FAIL In the case of Error Code 40, the Local Loop Back Test failed because the data received over the connection did not match the data sent over the connection (data was corrupted). In the case of Error Code 2000, 2003, and 2004, the Local Loop Back Test failed because the data looped over the connection was not received (data was lost). 1. Determine which of the DATA-CHLs are in use for some other function (that is, PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK or secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of Network Control Data Channels" section. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Table 10-119. Error Code 40 2000 2003 2004 Page 10-376 TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation 2. The most likely problem is that the target DATA-CHL is defective or the DATA-CON is defective. Busyout all functions that are using the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). (cont’d.) ! CAUTION: All functions must be busied out because Test #107 is destructive and terminates all established connections over the DATA-CHLs. 3. Issue the test data-module long command for the target DATA-CHL. Note the test results for Tests #107 and #108. a. If the result of Test #107 is FAIL, then the TN777 Network Control circuit pack is defective. 1. Replace the Network Control circuit pack immediately. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. 2. Repeat the test. b. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is FAIL, then the DATA-CON is defective. 1. Although all DATA-CHLs are unusable, the SW-CTL is still operational. Based on the customer’s use of DATA-CHLs, replace the Network Control circuit pack at the customer’s convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. 2. Repeat the test. FAIL c. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is PASS, then the target DATA-CHL is defective. 1. Issue the remove data-module command. ■ Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest convenience. After the TN777 Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command. 2. Restore any busied out function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) to service before moving on to another activity. PASS The target DATA-CHL and DATA-CON are functioning. Connections can be established over the target DATA-CHL. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) Page 10-377 DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) MO Name (in Alarm Log) DATA-CON Alarm Level MINOR Initial Command to Run none Full Name of MO Network Control Driver The TN777B Network Control circuit pack contains the following objects: the SW-CTL (Switch Control), four DATA-CHLs (Data Channels), the DATA-CON (Network Control Driver), and the generic hardware that interfaces with the TDM Bus (DATA-BD). The DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) is the subject of this section. The DATA-CHLs (Network Control Channels) are also described. Together the four DATA-CHLs and the DATA-CON provide a data communications interface that allows DTE equipment connected to port circuit packs to communicate with software applications running on the system. The DATA-CON represents the interface to the control channel of the TDM Bus. Each DATA-CHL represents a dial-up/dial-out asynchronous communication port that interfaces to the TDM Bus. The DATA-CON supports the signaling required to establish and tear down a connection between the terminal equipment and a software application. Data is transported between the terminal equipment and the software over the connection established over the DATA-CHL. A system with a single SPE has a single Network Control circuit pack. Thus, there is a single DATA-CON. A High or Critical Reliability system has two Network Control circuit packs, one in each of the two SPEs. Thus, there is a DATA-CON on the Network Control circuit pack that resides in the Active SPE control carrier and a DATA-CON on the Network Control circuit pack that resides in the Standby SPE control carrier. Refer to Chapter 6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid", and the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for discussions of High and Critical Reliability systems. From an external (user) point of view, the DATA-CON is not directly accessible via a system technician command; that is, there is no object command word that represents it. Instead, the DATA-CON is tested under the guise of the DATA-CHLs that it controls. The test data-module [short | long] command tests the DATA-CON along with the DATA-CHL designated by but all Test Results are associated with the DATA-CHL Maintenance Name. From an internal (system software) point of view, the DATA-CON uses the same set of tests as the DATA-CHLs. Therefore, the DATA-CON assumes the same Error Type and Aux Data values as the DATA-CHLs in the Hardware Error Log. It is also alarmed at the same Alarm Level (that is, MINOR, ON BOARD) in the Alarm Log. In both logs, the Maintenance Name is DATA-CON. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) Page 10-378 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-120. Error Type 01 Network Control Driver Error Log Entries Aux Data 0 1 257 Any 513 769 1. Any Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value (a) Any Any Any none Local Loop Back Test (#111) MINOR ON none Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109) MINOR ON none Crosstalk Test (#110) MINOR ON none Dual Port RAM Test (#108) MINOR ON none Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Note: a. As previously described, the DATA-CON is not directly accessible via a system technician command so there is no Test to Clear value that can be used to directly clear errors and alarms raised against the DATA-CON. However, since the DATA-CON and the DATA-CHLs share the same set of tests (that is, test the same set of hardware, firmware, and software), DATA-CON errors and alarms are accompanied by DATA-CHL errors and alarms. Therefore, the strategy to clear DATA-CON errors and alarms is to first clear all DATA-CHL errors and alarms. After DATA-CHL errors and alarms have been cleared, allow about 60 minutes for maintenance software to run internally and to automatically clear the DATA-CON errors and alarms. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Because the DATA-CON uses the same set of tests as the DATA-CHLs, refer to the "System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes" in the DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Maintenance documentation for a description of the tests and their associated error codes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Page 10-379 DAT-LINE (Data Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DAT-LINE MINOR test port PCSSpp l Data Line DAT-LINE WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Data Line 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). The TN726 Data Line circuit pack is a port circuit that provides connectivity from the system to asynchronous CPE having RS232-compatible serial interfaces. There are eight data lines (DAT-LINEs) on the Data Line circuit pack. If there are errors associated with the DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack), refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Data Lines are administered via the administration terminal add data-module command. The data module type is data-line. The list data-module command lists all administered data modules in the system. The TN750 Announcement circuit pack has one Data Line on it. The Data Line is used for saving and restoring announcements. For a description of this feature, refer to ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Also, if there are errors associated with the Announcement circuit pack, refer to the ANN-BD Maintenance documentation. NOTE: If the tests for the Data Line in question pass and there are still user-reported problems, there is probably an external problem. Test the ADU, following the procedures outlined in User Manual Z3A Asynchronous Data Unit, 555-401-701. If the ADU appears to be working properly, check the external wiring and, finally, check the customer equipment. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Page 10-380 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value s Table 10-121. Data Line Error Log Entries Error Type 01 Aux Data 0 1 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 Digital Loop Around Test (#171) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 15(a) Any Audit Update Test (#36) 18 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 130 (b) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 Conference Circuit Test (#7) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 513 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 769(a) 1. Any (c) None Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate errors (if any). b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. c. This error is logged when the Data Line circuit pack finds an error with the transmit/receive circuitry of an administered Data Line on circuit pack insertion. Perform the following procedure: 1. Issue the busyout board PCSS command to busyout the Data Line circuit pack on which this port resides. 2. Issue the reset board PCSS command. Check the Hardware Error Log to determine if Error Type 769 is logged again for the DAT-LINE MO. NOTE: When displaying errors, set the Active Alarms Only field to "n." If Error Type 769 reappears, replace the DAT-LINE circuit pack. If Error Type 769 does not reappear, proceed to Step 3. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Page 10-381 3. Issue the release board PCSS command to release the Data Line circuit pack on which this port resides. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Digital Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND X ND Order of Investigation Digital Loop Around Test (#171) Audit Update Test (#36) 1. X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-122. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Table 10-122. Error Code 1002 Page 10-382 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type 769). 1. Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769. If Error Type 769 still occurs on this port, replace the circuit pack. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests, examining the ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Page 10-383 Conference Circuit Test (#7) The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Table 10-123. Error Code TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for testing. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type 769). 1. Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769. If Error Type 769 still occurs on this port, replace the circuit pack. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The conference circuit test failed (possible off-board problem). 1. Busyout and release the port (data line), and then retest. 2. Replace the circuit pack if the test continues to fail. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests, examining the ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment. Continued on next page Audit Update Test (#36) This audit makes sure that the hardware state of the Data Line is consistent with the system translations. When this audit is run, the port is queried for the switchhook state, and the software state is updated according to the returned value. Also, the data line options are sent down to the port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Table 10-124. Error Code 1006 Page 10-384 TEST #36 Audit Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type 769). 1. Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769. If Error Type 769 still occurs on this port, replace the circuit pack. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 7 FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The hardware port state is consistent with the software state. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests, examining the ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment. Continued on next page Digital Loop Around Test (#171) The Digital Loop Around Test checks the Data Line’s ability to transmit and receive data on the TDM Bus. Data is sent through Network Control Data Channel 3 (data channel port 3) over the TDM Bus, internally looped through the Data Line back onto the TDM Bus, and received again by Network Control Data Channel 3. If data channel 3 is in use or not administered, this test aborts. This test may fail if Network Control Data Channel 3 is not functioning properly. If there are any DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log, refer to the DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation to clear them up first. This test passes regardless of any customer equipment that may be connected to the port, as long as the port is not in use by the equipment. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Table 10-125. Error Code Page 10-385 TEST #171 Digital Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 1007 ABORT Network Control Data Channel 3 is not administered. This port is required to run this test. 1. Verify that data channel 3 is not administered with the list data-module command. Administer data channel 3 with the add data-module command, and run this test again. 1016 ABORT Network Control Data Channel 3 is busy. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type 769). 1. Reseat the circuit pack and look in the Error Log. If Error Type 769 still occurs on this port, replace the circuit pack. 2003 ABORT Failed to receive an off-hook from the Data Line. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2004 ABORT Failed to receive an off-hook from the Network Control Data Channel. 2005 ABORT The handshake between the data channel and the data line port failed. 1. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test still aborts, replace the circuit pack. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DAT-LINE (Data Line) Table 10-125. Error Code Page 10-386 TEST #171 Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The test failed because the data received did not match the data sent. This would indicate that there is a fault somewhere in the transmit/receive path to the TDM Bus, which probably results in data corruption over this port. This test may fail if Network Control Data Channel 3 is not functioning properly. 1. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. Repeat this test. 3. If the test fails again, replace the Data Line circuit pack. 2000 FAIL The test failed waiting for the transmitted data to be looped back. 1. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. Repeat this test. 3. If the test fails again, replace the Data Line circuit pack. PASS The port can correctly transmit/receive data. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by examining the ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DC-POWER Page 10-387 DC-POWER Single-Carrier Cabinet Power MO Name (in Alarm Log) DC-POWER 1. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run1 test environment P Full Name of MO Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Where P is an appropriate port network number determined from the PORT field of the alarm log. NOTE: For environment maintenance, the high or critical reliability system, PPN, or EPN cabinet configuration aspects are irrelevant. The DC-POWER MO represents all the environmental maintenance for a single-carrier cabinet system. It includes an external power unit and all the port power units in the Port Network. The external power unit can be either a DC or an AC power source. If the external power unit is AC, then the Carrier Port Power Units must be WP-91153 power units. If the external power unit is DC, then the Carrier Port Power Units must be 676B power units. If the hardware detects a problem with any one of these elements, it reports the information to the system software through a single lead. The system software cannot differentiate between different environmental failures. All environmental alarms on a single-carrier cabinet system are logged as a major DC-POWER alarm. Therefore, it is possible to get a DC-POWER alarm when there is still power to the system. The yellow LED on the power unit means operating as normal. If the LED is off, no external power is being supplied or that the power unit has a fault. NOTE: Physically removing a Carrier Port Power Unit from a single-carrier cabinet system does not raise a DC-POWER alarm. The removal of the power unit is equivalent to the carrier being physically absent since DC-POWER maintenance cannot distinguish between these two situations. A single-carrier cabinet system powered by an AC external power source with WP-91153 Carrier Port Power Units has a minimal Nominal Power Holdover (NPH) for the PPN only in standard, high, and critical reliability systems. There is no NPH for a DC- powered PPN or for an AC- or DC-powered EPN. NPH in the PPN of an AC-powered system without high or critical reliability provides full powering for 0.25 seconds, and power to the control complex for an additional two minutes. ! WARNING: Before powering down a cabinet or carrier that contains DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs (TN566), first power down the AUDIX unit to avoid damaging the AUDIX software. Instructions for powering down this unit are in the Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DC-POWER Page 10-388 "DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", on the circuit pack, and in DEFINITY AUDIX documentation. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-126. Error Type Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 1 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 513 0 Single-Carrier Cabinet MAJOR ON test environment P r 2 0 Power Query Test (#79) 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table. By clearing error codes associated with the Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Test descriptions and recommended maintenance procedures follow for all errors that can occur during system technician-demanded testing. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test (#79) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (a) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (b) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (c) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (c) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to “EMG-XFER” for a description of this test. b. Refer to “EXT-DEV” for a description of this test. c. Refer to “RING-GEN” for a description of this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DC-POWER Page 10-389 NOTE: Tests #117 and #118 only show up in the test sequence if there is a TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested. Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test (#79) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor (in a PPN) or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack (in an EPN) about the status of the power in a single-carrier cabinet system. This test can only detect power problems in carriers in the Port Network for which the Carrier Port Power Unit is physically present. Table 10-127. Error Code 1000 TEST #79 Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A cabinet (PPN or EPN). Resolve all DC-POWER alarms. Then, repeat the test. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 Error Code, resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) errors in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DC-POWER Table 10-127. Error Code 1 Page 10-390 TEST #79 Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation There is a problem with the environment of the power system. 1. The power unit for any one of the cabinets may have been lost. a. Verify and, if necessary, restore power units for each cabinet. b. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed to Step 2. 2. Either the WP-91153 AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit for one of the cabinets could be defective. Refer to the "Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" sections in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". a. If the yellow LED on the WP-91153 AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit is off, replace the power unit. b. If the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack loses power, the system performs a Cold-2 restart to finish (the login prompt appears at the administration terminal). c. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed with Step 3. 3. The DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), or the MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) could be incorrectly reporting this error. Resolve all alarms on these MOs, and rerun the test. There are failures that can occur on the Duplication Interface and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. PASS The DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), or the MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) has reported no problem with the power. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DETR-BD Page 10-391 DETR-BD MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DETR-BD MINOR test board PCSS Tone Detector Circuit Pack DETR-BD WARNING test board PCSS Tone Detector Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for EPN2); C is the carrier number (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). G1, G3iV1.1-286, and those G3iV2-386 systems that use the Mu-law companding mode use TN748 Tone Detector circuit packs or TN756 combination Tone Detector-Tone-Clock circuit packs. G3iV2-386 systems that use the A-Law companding mode use TN420B (and higher suffixes) Tone Detector circuit packs. The companding mode of the DETR-BD circuit pack must match that administered for the system for proper tone detection. The companding mode is administered on the System-Parameters Country-Options form. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation, 555-230-653. For all DETR-BD circuit pack level errors, refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Board) Maintenance documentation. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack) Page 10-392 DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) 1. Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DID-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack DID-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or; C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Maintenance documentation for related trunk information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Page 10-393 DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO DID-DS1 MAJOR1 test trunk / l Direct Inward Dial Trunk DID-DS1 MINOR test trunk / l Direct Inward Dial Trunk DID-DS1 WARNING test trunk / Direct Inward Dial Trunk 1. A major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. The DID-DS1 trunk provides a digital DID trunk from a CO switch into the system through a DS1 link. A 24 channel DS1 link can support up to 24 DID-DS1 trunk calls simultaneously. A 32 channel DS1 link [G3iV2-386] can support up to 30 DID-DS1 trunk calls simultaneously. A DID-DS1 trunk can be used for both voice and data communications with appropriate DS1 signaling mode (for example, common channel signaling). Only the TN767 and TN464 [G3iV2-386] DS1 Interface circuit packs support the DID-DS1 trunk call processing signalings, wink-start, and immediate-start. DID-DS1 trunk maintenance provides a means to maintain a DID trunk on a port of DS1 Interface circuit pack. Information included covers the in-line errors log, initialization tests, periodic tests, system technician demand tests, and alarms escalation and elimination. Two trunk service states are specified in the DID-DS1 trunk maintenance. They are: out-of-service, the trunk is in a deactivated state and can’t be used for incoming calls; in-service, the trunk is in an activated state and can be used for incoming calls. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service, then all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack are put into out-of-service state and a Warning alarm is raised. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-128. DID-DS1 Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data 01 0 1 (a) Any 15 (b) Any Associated Test Any Alarm Level Any On/Off Board Any Test to Clear Value test trunk / sh r 1 Port Audit and Update Test (#36) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-128. Error Type DID-DS1 Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test 18 (c) 130 (d) 257 (e) 57474 57473 513 (f) 57392 769 (g) Page 10-394 57393 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value WARNING OFF release trunk /mbr> None WARNING ON test trunk / None MIN/MAJ2 OFF 2 OFF None MIN/MAJ 1281 Conference Circuit Test (#7) MAJ/MIN/ WRN3 ON test trunk / l 1537 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MAJ/MIN/ WRN3 ON test trunk / l ON test board PCSS l 1793 (h) 2305(i) 50944 3840 (j) None MIN/MAJ 2 OFF Port Audit and Update Test (#36) Continued on next page 1. 2. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service, then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, the Minor alarm is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Notes: a. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field contains the Error Type: 57476, on-hook before wink; 57477, on-hook before ready to receive digits; 57485, wink too short for valid signal. Escalate the error. b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate errors (if any). c. System Technician has busied out the trunk to out-of-service state. No calls can be made on this trunk. d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Page 10-395 e. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field contains the Error Type: 57474, rotary dial rate above 12 pulses per second; 57473, rotary dial rate below eight pulses per second. Escalate the error. f. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field contains the Error Type: 57392, no external release on PBX disconnect. Escalate the error. g. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field contains the Error Type: 57393, belated external release on PBX disconnect. Escalate the error. h. DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for DS1-BD errors in Hardware Error Log. Refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details. i. Error Type 2305—This error indicates that a signaling change was detected by the PBX trunk circuit pack which is inconsistent with the present state of the trunk. j. Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an internal system error. Enter status trunk command to verify the status of the trunk. If the trunk is out-of-service, then enter the release trunk command to put it back to in-service. Retry the test command. If the test continues to abort, then escalate the problem. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND Port Audit and Update Test (#36) X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Page 10-396 talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-129. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the Error Log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM BUS error. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-129. Error Code 1003 Page 10-397 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal, 1793—Blue Alarm, 2049—Red Alarm, 2305—Yellow Alarm, 1537—Hyperactivity. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-129. Error Code ANY Page 10-398 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The test failed. This can be due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-PN and EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for EXP-PN and/or EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the EXP-PN and the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation. 3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD and the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 4. Retest when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails. 0 PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the lIst config command and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to see that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Page 10-399 instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passed. Table 10-130. Error Code TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the Error Log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors may be out of service. Issue the list measurements tone-receiver command to display basic information about the system’s tone receivers. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-130. Page 10-400 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 1004 ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Issue the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT The test was disabled via translation. You may want to determine why the test has been disabled before you enable it. 1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk Administration’ screen is set to ’n’. To enable the test, change the trunk administration and enter ’y’ into the ’Maintenance Test’ field. 2. Repeat the test. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack: 1281— Loss of signal, 1793—Blue Alarm, 2049—Red Alarm, 2305—Yellow Alarm, 1537—Hyperactivity. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-130. Error Code Page 10-401 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This can cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Enter the list configuration board UUCSS command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9, replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later. The error log may have error type 1281. 2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one fails, this could be an off-board problem (such as an incoming seizure or an off-hook port seizure during the test). Retest the board. 3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see note below). 4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD or TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the appropriate action. When the TONE errors have cleared, rerun the test. 5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported, coordinate isolation with the CO. Make sure that the switch, the CO, and any NTCE equipment (the CSUs) have the correct administration. 6. Replace the circuit pack. NOTE: If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the ’CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance Documentation’. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the ’CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance Documentation’. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NOTE: This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to Vintage 14 and for TN742 prior to Vintage 4. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-130. Error Code 0 Page 10-402 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the lIst config command and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to see that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Port Audit and Update Test (#36) This test sends port level translation data from the switch processor to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of the trunk as kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and in the switch software. Table 10-131. Error Code TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-131. Error Code 1000 Page 10-403 TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port may be busy with a valid call. Issue the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the error log for error type 1025 (see the Error Log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the trunk is out of service. 1. Use the status trunk command to verify that the trunk is out of service. 2. If the trunk is out of service, determine why. 3. If it is OK to put the trunk back in service, issue the release trunk command to put the trunk back in service, and then retry the test. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem FAIL Test failed due to Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run, but returns PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2. 2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk) Table 10-131. Error Code 0 Page 10-404 TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to see that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Page 10-405 DID-TRK (DID Trunk) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DID-TRK MAJOR2 test port PCSSpp l DID Trunk DID-TRK MINOR test port PCSSpp l DID Trunk DID-TRK WARNING test port PCSSpp l DID Trunk 1. 2. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks coming from the Central Office (CO) allow outside parties to call directly to an extension in the system. DID Trunk circuit packs include: TN753 [G1, G3iV1.1-286, G3iV2-386] United States TN2146 [G3iV2-386] Belgium and the Netherlands TN2139 [G3iV2-386] Italy TN 436 [G3iV2-386] Australia TN459 [G3iV2-386] United Kingdom The DID Trunk circuit packs support eight, incoming-only, ports. Each port provides an interface between the 2-wire analog line from the CO and the DEFINITY system. The DID port receives 3 to 5 digits from the CO that is used to directly connect an outside caller to the called station without assistance from an attendant. See Figure 10-25. 1 "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM CENTRAL DID TRUNK OFFICE 8 INCOMING CALLS ONLY Figure 10-25. DID Trunk Interactions SWITCH DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Page 10-406 For each call, the CO switch signals the system by opening and closing individual DID loops (one of the eight ports) and causing the starting or stopping of loop current. A DID trunk operation involves three significant aspects: 1. Transmission—deals with the interface requirements regarding all AC signals. Transmission includes gain, analog to digital encoding, and digital to analog decoding. 2. Signaling—involves interpretation of DC signals appearing on Tip and Ring to and from the CO. These signals include off-hook, on-hook, and dial pulse detection. 3. Switch Connection—involves the connection between the trunk circuitry and the TDM Bus of the system. It operates the switchhook connection to the TDM Bus. Four tests are implemented to diagnose the health of a DID trunk. All of them test on-board circuitry only. They are: 1. Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test—verifies the transmission operation of the circuit pack (loop around within the port), and checks the conference capabilities of all ports. This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines. Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power company. To temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this test, the test may be disabled from trunk administration Test field. (This also disables the port diagnostic test). 2. NPE Crosstalk Test—verifies the switch connection operation of the circuit pack. The test also verifies that the trunk circuitry only talks on the selected time slot on the TDM Bus and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. 3. Port Diagnostic Test—the battery feed circuitry is tested for hook detection. 4. Port Audit Update Test—updates the DID translation information on individual ports of the DID trunk. The port translation data consists of signaling parameters whose values depend on the CO switch connected to the trunk. These parameters include: ■ wink (signal indicating PBX is ready to receive digits) or immediate start ■ dial tone or rotary dialing trunk ■ rotary dialing inter-digit timing ■ network balance R/RC ■ disconnect timing Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Page 10-407 Additional in-line testing is performed while a call is in progress. Thus, in-line errors may occur during operation. See Error Log table for a description of these errors. These errors may be reproduced by using the trunk (that is, placing a call) and checking their occurrence in the Hardware Error Log. Problems detected during signaling may be caused by faults off-board (in the CO switch or connections) for which a Warning alarm is raised. Before a maintenance test can be run on a port, the port must be idle. If an incoming call seizes the port which is being tested by maintenance, the test is aborted, and the incoming call proceeds. For transmission and signaling standard specification, refer to Digital PBX Standards document RS4648. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-132. DID Trunk Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board 0 Any Any Any 1 (a) Any None WRN OFF 1 (b) 57476 None WRN OFF 1 (c) 57477 None WRN OFF WRN OFF 0 Test to Clear Value test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 (d) 57483 None 15 (e) Any Port Audit Update (#36) 18 0 busyout trunk WRN OFF release trunk None WRN ON test trunk / 130 (f) 257 (g) 57472 None WRN OFF 257 (h) 57473 None WRN OFF 257 (i) 57474 None WRN OFF 257 (j) 57475 None WRN OFF 513 (k) 57392 None MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 OFF MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON 510 (l) 57393 None 769 Any Port Diagnostic (#35) test port PCSSpp r 3 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-132. Error Type Page 10-408 DID Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 1025 Loop Around and Conference (#33) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp r 3 1281 NPE Crosstalk (#6) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp r 3 OFF test port PCSSpp r 3 1537 Any Port Diagnostic (#35) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 1793 (m) 57489 None None Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set-options values, the Minor alarm is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Notes: A common trouble on DID trunks, which reports no errors or alarms, occurs when the CO busies out the port (disconnects port). This situation occurs when the CO thinks there are problems with the DID port. In this case, no incoming calls are possible through this port. In addition to complaints received from outside callers trying unsuccessfully to call in, this problem can be diagnosed by listing measurements on lightly used trunks. If a particular port is detected as not in use, a call to the CO is necessary to get the connection back in service. a. This condition occurs when the tone detector times out waiting for digits. 1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter. 2 – Verify the dial type. 3 – Refer problem to the CO. b. Rotary dial before wink – This condition occurs when the CO starts dialing before the PBX sends wink on a wink-start trunk. 1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter. 2 – Refer problem to CO. c. Rotary dial too early – This condition occurs when the CO starts dialing too soon after seizure on an immediate-start trunk. 1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter. 2 – Refer problem to CO. d. Rotary dial pulse during wink – This condition occurs when the CO sends rotary dial digits too soon after seizure on a wink-start trunk. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Page 10-409 1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter. 2 – Refer problem to CO. e. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). f. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. g. Rotary dial pulse on-hook longer than 105 msec – Break between rotary pulses is too long. 1 – Test trunk by performing an incoming test call. 2 – Refer problem to CO. h. Rotary dial rate below eight pulses/sec – More than 135 msec between two successive breaks. 1 – Verify trunk administered interdigit-timing parameters. 2 – Refer problem to CO. i. Rotary dial rate above 12 pulses/sec – Less than 75 msec between two successive breaks. 1 – Verify trunk administered interdigit-timing parameters. 2 – Refer problem to CO. j. Digit detection – Co is starting new rotary dial digit within 150 msec of previous digit. 1 – Verify trunk administered interdigit timing parameters. 2 – Refer problem to CO. k. Loop current active – CO not releasing trunk after PBX disconnect. Occurs when the PBX end drops first and the CO does not release the trunk within four minutes. 1 – Verify the interface to the network with a hand telephone set. If calls are placed correctly, then refer problem to the CO. 2 – If unable to place calls or this equipment is not available, check the status on port using the status trunk command. If active but not connected, disconnect bridging clips at the network interface. Check status on the trunk. If trunk went idle, then replace clips. If trunk is still active but unable to place calls, refer problem to the CO. l. Late CO trunk release – This event only happens after the occurrence of Error Type 513. The CO released the trunk four minutes after the PBX dropped the call. This event decrements the severity (error count) of Error Type 513, or may mean the problem related to Error Type 513 has been fixed. 1 – Verify that Error Type 513 does not occur again. Refer to Error 513. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Page 10-410 m. Incomplete Dial timer expired. This error applies only to the TN459. Problem with incoming dialing stream. Refer problem to the CO. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the DID-TRK Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from subsequent tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Order of Investigation NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) Port Diagnostic Test (#35) X Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33) Port Audit Update Test (#36) 1. X Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 X ND X ND X ND X ND D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-133. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-133. Error Code 1000 Page 10-411 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), then check the Error Log for Error Type 513 (see Error Log table for description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-133. Error Code 1004 Page 10-412 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation. 3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails.. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-133. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result 0 Page 10-413 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33) This test checks the reflective and non-reflective loop around and conference capabilities of a DID port circuit. The test that uses 404-Hz, 1004-Hz, and 2804-Hz tones is an on-board test only. Each tone is separately transmitted to and from the port (loop around within the port) and verified. This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines. Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power company. To temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this test, the test may be disabled from trunk administration Test field. (This also disables the port diagnostic test. Table 10-134. Error Code TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-134. Error Code 1000 Page 10-414 TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), check the Error Log for Error Type 513 (see Error Log table for description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk Group Form is set to "n." To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command where "x" equals the number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the form to "y." 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-134. Error Code 2100 Page 10-415 TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. This may be due to the port being seized. 1. This abort code is usually associated with tone-clock (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) resources. First, clear any tone errors in the error log. 2. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 FAIL The nonreflective 1004 Hz tone test of the port failed. An echo was detected from the port. Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem may be off-board. 7 The conference capabilities of the port failed. Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem may be off-board. 129 The reflective 404-Hz tone test failed. Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem may be off-board. 131 The reflective 1004-Hz tone test failed. Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem may be off-board. 133 The reflective 2804-Hz tone test failed. Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem may be off-board. ! CAUTION: The port may still be operational, or the fault may be off-board (connections or CO). Off-board problems also include incoming seizures or off-hook port seizures during the test and, perhaps somewhat unlikely, noise induced by adjacent electric power lines. Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power company to temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this test. The test may be disabled from trunk administration ’Test’ field. This turns off all testing for that trunk group except for tests 6 and 36. More information continues on the next page. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-134. Error Code 3 7 129 131 133 Page 10-416 TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation FAIL (cont’d.) FAULT ISOLATION: Proceed as follows unless power or tone problems are suspected (see note below). 1. To make sure the problem is on-board, disconnect the port from the far-end and retry the test. Coordinate this with the CO, or do it after busy hours. (cont’d.) 2. If the retry fails, replace the circuit pack. 3. If the retry passes and no troubles have been reported, disable the test in the trunk group administration. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported, coordinate isolation with the CO. NOTE: If the loop around and conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack. If the test fails on more than 1 port, check for errors on the TONE-BD or the TONE-PT. If errors, take appropriate actions. When the tone errors are cleared, rerun the test. If the test fails again, see ’FAULT ISOLATION’ above. PASS DID Trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is successful. This port is functioning properly. 1. If users are reporting troubles, examine loop connections to the port and refer problem to the CO. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-134. Error Code Page 10-417 TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result 0 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Port Diagnostic Test (#35) This test checks a port’s battery feed circuitry. The battery feed circuitry is tested for on-/off-hook detection, battery shutdown, and battery reversal (WINK) capabilities. Table 10-135. Error Code TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test were not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-135. Error Code 1000 Page 10-418 TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls), then check the error log for error type 513 (refer to the Error Log table for a description of this error and required actions). The port may be locked up. 2. If the port status is idle, busyout and release the trunk, and then retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, check for wiring errors toward the CO which may cause the trunk to lock up. 4. If the wiring is OK and the test continues to abort, replace the TN753. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test has been disabled by trunk group administration. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk Group Form is set to "n." To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command where "x" equals the number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the form to "y." 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-135. Error Code 61446 Page 10-419 TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Battery feed test failed. A loop current fault was detected. This is most probably an incoming CO-line problem. This failure code is only reported by the TN2139 Italian DID circuit pack. 1. Check the incoming CO-line for loop current. If none is detected refer the problem to the CO. 2. If the CO-line checks out OK, the failure must be on the DID port. Replace the circuit pack. 61456 FAIL Battery feed test failed. An on-board problem was detected. This port is out-of-service. 1. Replace circuit pack. 61472 FAIL Battery feed test failed. A problem with the incoming CO-line was detected. 1. Check the incoming CO-line for proper operation. If warranted, refer the problem to the CO. 2. If the CO-line checks out OK, the failure must be on the DID port. Replace the circuit pack. PASS Current flow was detected for this port. 1. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining connections. 2. Refer problem to the CO. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Port Audit Update Test (#36) This test sends updates of the DID port translation for all ports on the circuit pack that have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against possible corruption of translation data contained on the circuit pack. No response message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Page 10-420 updates. The port translation data includes: wink or immediate start trunk, dial tone or rotary dialing trunk, rotary dialing inter-digit timing, Network balance R/RC, and disconnect timing. Table 10-136. Error Code TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1006 ABORT The port has been placed out of service, perhaps by craft busyout. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is out of service, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is in service and idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is in service and idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run the test. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS This test passed. Translation information was successfully updated on the circuit pack. 1. If signaling troubles are reported (Error Types 1, 257, or 513 in Error Log table), verify translation information for this port. 2. Refer problem to the CO. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run, but returns PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2. 2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Table 10-136. Error Code 0 Page 10-421 TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Translate the board, if necessary. 2. Issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-422 DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DIG-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Digital Line Circuit Pack DIG-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Digital Line Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Maintenance documentation for related line information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-423 DIG-LINE (Digital Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DIG-LINE MINOR test port PCSSpp l Digital Line DIG-LINE WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Digital Line 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). DIG-LINE maintenance monitors and tests ports on Digital Line circuit packs and the hardware connected to those ports for lines administered as a digital station. These include stations with just a digital voice terminal and stations with a digital voice terminal and a linked data module. Stand-alone data modules, and data adaptors in stand-alone mode, are covered by the PDMODULE and TDMODULE maintenance objects. Circuit pack-level maintenance is covered by DIG-BD whose strategy is described in the XXX-BD section of this chapter. The following circuit packs support digital lines: Table 10-137. Code Digital Line Circuit Packs Ports Type Companding TN413 8 4-wire DCP A-law TN754 8 4-wire DCP mu-law TN754B 8 4-wire DCP A-law/mu-law TN2181 16 2-wire IDCP A-law/mu-law TN2224 24 2-wire IDCP A-law/mu-law TN2136 8 2-Wire IDCP A-law/mu-law TN2177 16 2-wire IDCP A-law/mu-law TN2181 16 2-wire IDCP A-law/mu-law TN2224 24 2-wire IDCP A-law/mu-law Endpoints 7400 series digital voice terminals, attendant consoles, 510D personal terminals, MT515 BCTs, DCP data modules Data Adaptors (DA), Italtel Digital Telephone Models 1 and 2 (IDT1/2). G3r V1 systems support only TN754 and TN754B. TN413 and TN754 are found only in upgraded cabinets. Each digital line port supports two 64 kbps information channels (primary and secondary) and one 8kbps signaling channel. Digital voice terminals always use the primary information channel. Thus only one voice terminal can be connected to each port. The secondary information channel can be used to connect a data terminal via a Digital Terminal Data Module (DTDM) or a Data Adaptor (DA). All other devices currently supported by Digital Line circuit packs communicate on Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-424 the primary information channel. Figure 10-26 shows examples of digital line connectivity. Only the TN754B or TN2136 should be used in out-of-building applications. For important information pertaining to protection required for out-of-building digital voice terminals, see DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104. It should be noted that TN2181 and TN2224 supports both modes as shown in Figure 10-26 and Figure 10-27. Port TN413, TN754/B Digital Line Circuit Pack . . . . . . . Digital Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Physical Connection . . . . .. . .. Port . . . . .. .. . ... . ... .. .. ... Control Channel (Signaling) . . . . . . Digital . . . . . . Voice . . Port .. . Terminal . . . Primary Information Channel (Voice) . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . DTDM . Data .. . . .. Terminal . .. . . Port .. .. Secondary Information Channel (Data) .. . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. Figure 10-26. .. .. .. Digital Line Connectivity Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-425 TN2136 Digital Line Circuit Pack Digital Line Port .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. Physical Connection . . . .. . . .. . Data Italtel . . . Port . . Digital Adaptor . . .. Control Channel (Signaling) . IDCP Telephone . (Linked .. .............. .. . Model 1/2 . . Mode) . . . . . .. . . Port .. . Primary Information Channel (Voice) . . . CCITT . . .. . . Data V24-V28 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. Terminal . .. . .. .. Port Secondary Information Channel (Data) .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ....................................................................................................... . . . Physical Connection .. . .. Italtel Port Control Channel (Signaling) . .. Digital . . Telephone . .. Primary Information Channel (Voice) . Model 1/2 .. . . . . (Secondary Information Channel Unused) .. . .. ....................................................................................................... . . . . .. .. .. Figure 10-27. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . .. .. Digital Line Data Adaptors operating in stand-alone mode are treated as PDMODULE Maintenance Objects. Digital Line Connectivity Only 2-wire Italtel Digital Telephone Models 1 and 2 (IDT1/2) or DAs can be directly connected to a TN2136. AT&T DCP (4-wire) digital voice terminals and data modules can be connected to these circuit packs via Italtel’s 2/4-wire adapter. DAs can operate in either of two modes which are covered by different maintenance objects: DA Mode Administered as: Endpoint Maintenance Object Stand-alone PDM Data endpoint only PDMODULE Linked DTDM IDT1/2 and optional data terminal DIG-LINE Digital Line maintenance interacts with Digital Line circuit pack (DIG-BD) maintenance, and results of DIG-LINE testing can be affected by the health of the Digital Line circuit pack. Keep this in mind when investigating reported Digital Line problems. There are instances where the service state of a station is mentioned. It is helpful to understand what os ment by the different service states that may exist. The DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-426 different service states which apply to digital line station are explained as follows.: Out-of-Service The port, and thus the station, have been removed from service. Busyouts put the port in the out-of-service state. Ready-for-Service The port on the circuit pack has been put into service, but the voice terminal has not yet established signaling communications with the port. In-Service The voice terminal has established signaling communications with the port, and the system is ready to process calls to and from that station. A terminal in the ready-for-service state will progress to the in-service state if it is functioning normally. It can also be forced into the in-service state by going off-hook. Downloading of Terminal Parameters Programmable Terminals The following information is presented as background information to help understand how maintenance software interacts with terminal parameter downloading. Terminal Types: The following terminals can be downloaded for Definity G3V3 and later versions: a. 84xx multibutton digital voice terminals (8403D01A, 8410B, 8410D02A, 8434D01A) with optional expansion module. b. 603A1 and 603D1 Callmaster terminals for telemarketing applications. c. 302B1 attendant console. Circuit Packs: 1. 8400x, 302B1 Terminals a. TN754 (4-wire, Mu-law) Minimum usable vintage for 8410D and 8434D terminals - V11 b. TN413 (4-wire, A-law) c. TN754B (4-wire, A-law/Mu-law selectable) d. TN2177 (2-wire, 16-port, A-law/Mu-law selectable) e. TN2181 (2-wire, 16-port, A-law/Mu-law selectable) f. TN2224 (2-wire, 24-port, A-law/mu-law selectable) 2. 603A1/D1 Terminals Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-427 a. TN754 (4-wire, Mu-law), b. TN413 (4-wire, A-law) c. TN754B (4-wire, A-law/Mu-law selectable) Downloadable Terminal Parameters The following parameters are downloaded to programmable terminals: Table 10-138. Downloadable Parameters Parameter Scope Terminal International Flags (A-law/Mu-law, Display Mode, DLI Voltage level) System level 84xx, 603x, 302B1 Primary Levels (Transmission & Sidetone) System level 84xx, 603x, 302B1 Adjunct Levels (Transmission & Sidetone) System level 84xx Handset Expander Option System level 84xx Administrable Options (Speakerphone & Mute Button) Per-terminal 84xx Administrable Softkeys Per-terminal, System level 8410D, 8434D Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory is used to store downloadable parameters in programmable terminals. Therefore, once the terminal has been downloaded, it is not be necessary to download it again, even if power is removed from the terminal. If the nonvolatile memory fails with power still present, the terminal will revert to its default factory settings except for its A-law/Mu-law companding settings which are stored in RAM. If power is removed after the nonvolatile memory fails, the terminal will revert to its factory default settings. Mu-law companding is assigned as a default setting at the factory, so, for domestic use, a programmable terminal can place calls even though it has not been downloaded from the PBX. Download Actions There are several different scenarios that will cause a terminal to be downloaded. As described below, these can occur as part of background maintenance activity or on demand from the System Access Terminal or from a station. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-428 For the background actions described below, the terminal will be downloaded automatically if a download retry flag for the terminal is set in software. This flag is set at the time translation is loaded at boot time, when translation which affects the parameters of a terminal is changed as part of system administration actions, and when a port is inserted in software as a result of board insertion or translation change. Automatic Download Actions 1. System Reboot/Restart A global download action is started when periodic maintenance tests start after a system reboot/restart regardless of whether the parameters have been downloaded previously. 2. Periodic Tests If the download flag is still set when periodic tests are run on a terminal, a download action will occur. This operation is required in case a terminal could not be downloaded previously because it was off-hook at the time the system first booted or because the terminal was off-hook at the time translation associated with downloadable parameters was changed. Note that it may take more than an hour for periodic tests to reach the terminal that needs to be downloaded. 3. Terminal Administration A downloadable terminal is automatically downloaded when translation changes associated with downloadable parameters are made as part of system administration. As shown in Table 10-128, these changes can be for a specified terminal or may be system-wide. If the change is for system-level parameter, a background global update request is made to download all programmable terminals. This global update may take more than an hour for a system with several thousand programmable terminals. 4. Port Insertion Whenever maintenance software initiates a request to place a port into service, a terminal download action is started on that terminal if that terminal is programmable. This port insertion action occurs under the following circumstances: a. A digital line circuit pack that is physically inserted into the system has ports currently administered for programmable terminals. If more than 20 port insertion requests are received within a few seconds, a global download request is started up as a background task. This action updates all programmable terminals instead of just those being inserted. This is done to avoid system overload for situations where there is massive board insertion. This could occur when connectivity to an EPN is reestablished after that EPN was down. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-429 b. A station port is added to the system by a "add station" or "change station" command. c. A TTI port is activated. 5. Audits As part of periodic maintenance, the hardware status audit test queries programmable terminals to determine which levels and/or options are being used. If the reported values are not equal to the administered values, the system will initiate a terminal download action. This audit does NOT check the parameters used for softkeys. 6. Activation of TTI A terminal is downloaded automatically when it is activated using the Terminal Translation Initialization feature. Therefore, no special user actions are required for TTI. NOTE: Plugging the station cord into a terminal does not automatically cause the terminal to be downloaded. If this terminal has factory defaults or if the terminal has been previously downloaded with parameters different than those desired, use one of the demand download actions described below to download the terminal. Demand Download Actions 1. Busyout/Release Command A maintenance demand busyout/release request for a station will cause the terminal to be downloaded regardless of its previous download status. 2. Feature Access Code A Refresh Terminal Parameters Feature Access Code can be used to request a terminal download action. When this code is followed by a "#", the programmable parameters for the current terminal are downloaded when the terminal goes on hook. When this code is followed by an extension, the programmable parameters for the specified station are downloaded. This Refresh Terminal Parameters Feature Access Code is assigned on the second page of the "feature-access-codes" screen. A confirmation is returned if the download request is accepted. A busy tone is returned if the request is made from a different station when the target station is off-hook. The first three green call appearance LEDs on the 84xx 603x terminal will be turned on for three seconds if the station was successfully downloaded as a result of an entry of a Refresh Terminal Parameters Facility Access Code. This is not true for the 302B1 terminal. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-430 There is no visible display on a station for the other background or demand download actions. As described below, the "status station" and "status attendant" screens can be used to check the download status of a specified terminal. Status of Parameter Downloads The "status station" and "status attendant" screens display the current download status of individual 84xx, 603, and 301B1 terminals in the Download Status field. The possible download states are: Table 10-139. Terminal Download Status Status Terminal Down Load State Complete Terminal successfully downloaded sometime in the past. Pending System waiting to download the terminal. This may require the execution of a background periodic test which could take more than an hour. A demand download as described above may also be used to initiate an immediate download. Not Applicable Not a programmable terminal. Possible reasons for terminal being not downloaded include: — Terminal is off-hook. — Terminal detected a bad checksum. — Terminal detected a bad or missing EEPROM (refer to hardware error log). — Terminal is busy programming data from a previous PROGRAM message. — Terminal is in the Programming Disabled state. — Terminal is in the Local Program Options Mode. — Terminal is disconnected or out of service (use status station command). Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-140. DIG-LINE Error Log Entries Error Type 0 1 1 (a) Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board 0 Any Any Any 40987 None WARNING OFF Test to Clear Value test port PCSSpp sh r 1 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-140. Page 10-431 DIG-LINE Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 1 (b) 1 to 20 None WARNING OFF 18 (c) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF rel port PCSSpp None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh test port PCSSpp sh r 6 130 (d) 257 (e) 40971 None 513 0 Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17) WARNING( o) OFF 767 (f) 40964 None WARNING OFF 769 (g) 40963 40988 None WARNING OFF NONE WARNING OFF Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17) WARNING OFF 1026(o) 1281 Any 1537 (h) 40968 test port PCSSpp sh r 4 None WARNING OFF 1793 Voice & Ctrl. Local Loop Test (#13) MINOR/ WARNING2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2049 NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) MINOR/ WARNING3 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2304 (n) None 2305 (i) 32770 None 2305 (h) 40967 None 3840 (k) 40965 None 3840 (l) 40989 None 3841 (m) 41029 None Continued on next page 1. 2. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. Could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem detected by the port circuit. Check for defective wiring, a defective voice terminal, or move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-432 wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm will be retired after a predetermined amount of time. b. This Error Type and Aux Data will occur when at least 15 off-board problems have been detected with the link to the terminal. When an error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is incremented. The user could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem detected by the port circuit. Check for defective wiring, a defective voice terminal, or move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm will be retired after a predetermined amount of time. c. This error type is logged when the port in question is busied out by maintenance personnel. Make sure port is released from busyout via the release port PCSSpp command. d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. e. Problems transmitting to the voice terminal. This problem can be caused by defective wiring. Defective wiring can cause varying degrees of problems on different types of sets. Sets such as the 7410 appear to be more susceptible to wiring problems than other sets. This is usually an on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are received. f. This is an in-line event that produces this error type when a favorable response is received from running the Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test (#11). No craft action is necessary. This alarm will be resolved with the passing of time. g. With Aux Data 40963, this error type is a result of an unfavorable response to the Electronic Power Feed/ Positive Temperature Coefficient Test (#11). With Aux Data 40988, this error type indicates that the EPF/PTC circuit has been turned off due to an overcurrent condition. For TN754 vintage 13 or earlier and TN413, the EPF circuit senses an overcurrent condition at the voice terminal. Check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, an incorrect type of voice terminal, or a defective voice terminal. For TN754 vintage 14 or later, TN754B and TN2136, the PTC will open if there is a short on the power line for 1/2 second or longer. The voice terminal is probably not operating properly. Unplug the voice terminal for 30 seconds and then plug it back in. If the voice terminal still does not operate, then check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, an incorrect type of voice terminal, or a defective voice terminal. Once the problem has been resolved, it may take up to 1 hour for the alarm to clear due to ‘‘leaky bucket’’ strategy. If the problem cannot be resolved by one of the steps above, then replace the circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-433 h. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to some problem with the link to the voice terminal. This can be ignored if no user complaints are received. Otherwise, make sure the voice terminal is connected, check for defective wiring, check for a defective voice terminal, and move voice terminal to a jack that is closer to the switch (in terms of feet of wiring between the jack and the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm will be retired after a predetermined amount of time. i. This indicates that the station went off-hook while it was in the ready-for-service state. Use the status station command to determine the state of the station. The off-hook should have moved the station to ready-for-service. No craft action is necessary. j. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No craft action is necessary. k. No terminal is connected to the Digital Line board. No maintenance action is required. l. An uplink message has been logged indicating that the Electric Power Feed (EPF) is on with no load on it. No action is necessary. m. The circuit pack’s message buffer is full. This may be caused by having many display phones with heavy traffic connected to the circuit pack. No action is necessary. n. Internal system error. No action is necessary. o. There is a problem with the voice terminal EEPROM. When the voice terminal is repaired the alarm will be resolved with the passing of time. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-141. System Technician-Demanded Tests: DIG-LINE Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test (#1201) X D Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13) X ND Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) X ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-141. Page 10-434 System Technician-Demanded Tests: DIG-LINE — Continued Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test (#11) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test (#16) X X ND Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test (#1201) This test checks the integrity of the connection between the SPE and the attached Digital Terminal and the ability of the terminal and the associated port to send and receive data. This test is based, in principal, on procedure 622 used in system 85 to help isolate digital terminal problems. A request is presented to the terminal to go into loop back mode. Then data is sent to the terminal and when received back, checked for consistency. This test is run as a part of the craft command "test long" procedure. It is not included in any error recovery strategy and generates no Error Log entries or alarms. To begin the test, Maintenance will ask Call Processing to make the associated end point and port “ Maintenance Busy”. This test will succeed if the endpoint is "idle". If the reserve request fails then the test will abort. If the request succeeds then the SPE sends a message to loop around both information channels for the digital terminal. First the primary information (voice, Information Channel 1 or I1) channel loop back test is run. The test is performed by sending a digital count from the Tone/Clock circuit pack on the primary information channel time slot and receiving the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector. If the primary information channel test is successful, the loop around test for the secondary information (data, Information Channel 2 or I2) channel is then performed. This test is the same as the primary information channel loop around test and is performed only if a DTDM is administered, which is also the case for a linked DA. Only one value (Pass. Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the two tests run. If any test fails aborts, the sequence is stopped. Upon completion of this test the associated endpoint and port are moved back into the previous service state. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-142. Error Code Page 10-435 TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain test. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before re-testing. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM-Bus) Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present refer to TTR-LEV (TTR-Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exist, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-142. Error Code 1004 Page 10-436 TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display portPCSSpp command to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain test. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before resetting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT The installed circuit pack does not support this operation. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Make sure terminal is connected and repeat test. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3. If test fails replace terminal and repeat test. 4. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 14 FAIL The primary channel (voice, Information Channel 1 or I1) is not operating properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use the port. Check the results of Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13). If that test fails, suspect the Digital Line circuit pack. If that test passes then replace the terminal. If both tests fail and component replacement does not change the results, then: 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit pack are functioning properly, and the tests still fail, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-142. Error Code Page 10-437 TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1015 ABORT The system will not allow this test to be run because the station is/has not been busied out. Busy out the station with the busyout station command. 16 FAIL The secondary channel (data Information Channel 2 or I2 is not operating properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this terminal. Check the results of Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13). If that test fails, suspect the Digital Line circuit pack. If that test passes then replace the terminal. If both test fail, and component replacement does not change the results, then: 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit pack are functioning properly, and the tests still fail, escalate the problem. PASS Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All channels are transmitting properly. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of ten times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints persist (noisy connections for voice. corrupted data transfer for data), examine the station, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Crosstalk testing is performed on both the primary information channel (voice) and the secondary information channel (data) associated with each digital station port. If this test fails on either channel, the station and the DTDM are taken out-of-service. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-143. Error Code 1 Page 10-438 TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may not have been available. Also, the port may have been busy during the test. 1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for this test. You will have to wait until the port is idle. 2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command a 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2 ABORT During testing of DTDM, system resources may not have been available. Also, the port may have been busy during the test. 1. Check if port is being used. If possible, disconnect by toggling disconnect button on DTDM. Retry command after 1 minute. ! WARNING: This action will drop the call in progress. 2. If the test continues to abort after 5 attempts, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-143. Error Code 1002 Page 10-439 TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1020 ABORT Test disabled via background testing. Use status station command to determine when station is available for testing. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1 2 FAIL The Network Processing Element (NPE) of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. Failure code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the primary channel. Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the secondary channel. 1. Replace circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-143. Error Code Page 10-440 TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page Digital Line Electronic Power Feed/Positive Temperature Coefficient/PPF Test(#11) For TN413, and TN754 vintage 13 or earlier, this is an Electronic Power Feed (EPF) restoral test. In this test, the processor requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port, and an attempt is made to turn on the power supply to the station. If no current is drawn, the station is probably not connected. If an overcurrent condition is sensed, there may be a short in the loop. A message is returned reporting that either the EPF was successfully turned on, or that an overcurrent condition was sensed. This test is repeated again 5 seconds later. For TN754 vintage 14 or later, TN754B and TN2136 this is a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) restoral test. In this test, the processor requests that the PTC be turned on for a given port, and an attempt is made to turn on the power supply to the station. If an overcurrent condition is sensed, there is probably a short on the power line that causing the PTC to open and disconnect the voice terminal. Since the PTC does not have self-restoral capability, the voice terminal must be manually unplugged for 30 seconds and then plugged back in to restore the PTC. A message is returned reporting that either the PTC was successfully turned on successfully with no problem or an overcurrent condition was sensed. This test is repeated again 5 seconds later. TN2181 and TN2224 boards carry a Protected Power Feed (PPF) relays, one for each port. Therefore this will be a Protected Power Feed restoral test. The test procedure and its response is same as that of EPF. One of differences between EFP and PPF is that, if the port goes into a overcurrent state, PPF does not report this change of state because it is a transient state which will not last more than 50ms. If the over current persists the power will be shut off automatically and an EPF_off_overcurrent message is sent uplink. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-144. Error Code Page 10-441 TEST #11 Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS Electronic Power Feed Test passed. The message to turn on the power to the station was successfully sent to the port. 1. Although this test will never actually return a FAIL result except for the Internal System Error (naught/FAIL ) described above, it will log an error indicating the real results of the test. Check the Error Log for any entries with Error Types 767 or 769 after the test completes. 2. If Error Type 767 appears in the Error Log, this should indicate that the test sensed no problems with the power to the station. To verify that the station is powered up correctly, run a self-test on the station, if available, and check that all the feature buttons are operating. 3. If Error Type 769 appears in the Error Log, this indicates some problem with the power to the station. Check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a defective voice terminal, or an incorrect type of terminal. Continued on next page Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13) These tests check the information and control channels between the Switch Processing Element (SPE) and the Digital Line port circuit. The SPE sends a message to loop around both the information and control channels for the port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-442 First, the primary information (voice) channel loop back test is run. The test is performed by sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack on the primary information channel time slot and receiving the same digital count with a general purpose Tone Detector. While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel Loop Around Test is performed. This test consists of sending four different transparent patterns to the on-board microprocessor, receiving them back, and comparing them. The Loop Around Test for the secondary information (data) channel is then performed. This test is the same as the primary information channel loop around test and is performed only if a DTDM is administered. A Conference Test is done next for the primary information channel. This test is the same as Conference Test #6. Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of four tests run. If any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped. Table 10-145. Error Code TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-145. Error Code 1002 Page 10-443 TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-145. Error Code Page 10-444 TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 7 FAIL Conference Test failed on primary channel. In some cases, users may not notice disruption in service. In extreme cases, conferencing feature may not work at all. 14 FAIL The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port. 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and digital circuit pack is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use the port. Could also be disruptive to other users. 16 FAIL The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack. PASS Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All channels are transmitting properly. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints persist (noisy connections for voice, corrupted data for data transfer), examine the station, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test (#16) This test lights all lamps on the terminal as specified. The lamp updates will run only if the station is in-service. The status of the station is checked and the lamp updates are blocked from taking place if the station is not in the in-service state. This test does not affect the status of the Message Waiting lamp. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-146. Error Code Page 10-445 TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1 ABORT This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, then release the port via the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 ABORT Station may be in ready-for-service or out-of-service state. 1. Use status station command to verify state of station. 2. Make sure the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1392 ABORT This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it. 1. Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command (the display shows that the port is a TTI port) or the list config command (the display shows a t for the port). 2. If either list config or display port indicates that the port is not a TTI port, escalate the problem. If both commands indicate that the port is a TTI port, the abort is correct, and no action is necessary. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-146. Error Code Page 10-446 TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS The message to light all of the station lamps was sent successfully to the port. 1. Observe the station lamps being lit when running the test. If all lamps do not light successfully, the other Digital Line test results may indicate related problems that will not allow the lamps to light. 2. Investigate by using other Digital Line port tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Digital Station Audits Test (#17) This is a series of six tests which are classified as audits. The SPE sends messages to the on-board microprocessor to perform the following tests. These audits run only if the station is in-service. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Switchhook Inquiry Test — This is an update of the SPE records according to the circuit pack’s records. This inquiry is sent all the way to the voice terminal. Bad Scan Inquiry Test — A message is sent uplink which contains a count that is generated due to certain events relating to the link conditions. This can be an indication of communications problems between the Processor and Digital Port circuit pack. EPF/PTC Inquiry Test — For a TN413 or a TN754 vintage 13 or earlier, the status of the Electronic Power Feed (EPF) is sent uplink. Possible conditions are: EPF-on-ok, EPF-off, and EPF-no-load. For TN754 vintage 14 or later, TN754B or TN2136, TN2181, TN2224, the status of the Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) is sent uplink. Possible conditions are: PTC-on-ok, PTC-off, and PTC-no-load. ID Request Test — A request is made to the station for its status. The station sends its configuration information and health information back. This information is checked and a pass/fail result is provided. Ringer Update Test — This updates the digital telephone ringer state according to the processor records. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) ■ Table 10-147. Error Code Page 10-447 DTMF Administration Update Test — This is a message to the digital station to refresh the default value which causes the station to send touch-tones only in the primary information channel. This value is set initially when the station is put in-service and every time the station’s state changes from other states to in-service. TEST #17 Station (Digital) Audits Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1 ABORT Switchhook audit timed out. 2 ABORT ID request fails, health bit returned from voice terminal is bad. 1. Make sure voice terminal is connected and repeat test. 2. If test fails, replace voice terminal and repeat test. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 ABORT The EPF/PTC has detected an overcurrent condition. 1. For a TN754 vintage 13 or earlier Digital Line circuit pack, issue the test PCSSpp long command. If Test #11 passes, then the EPF/PTC condition has been cleared. Rerun the Short Test Sequence. If Test #11 does not pass, follow the repair procedures described for Test #11. 2. Look for Error Type 769 logged against DIG-LINE and follow the procedures in the associated footnote. If any additional problems are found after completion of maintenance procedures, rerun the test. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 4 ABORT Internal System Error 1. Resolve any outstanding circuit pack maintenance problems. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 5 ABORT Ringer update aborted due to station being in ready-for-service or out-of-service state. 6 ABORT This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, the release the port via the release station 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Table 10-147. Error Code 1392 Page 10-448 TEST #17 Station (Digital) Audits Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it. 1. Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command (the display shows that the port is a TTI port) or the list config command (the display shows a t for the port). 2. If either list config or display port indicate that the port is not a TTI port, escalate the problem. If both commands indicate that the port is a TTI port, the abort is correct, and no action is necessary. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. FAIL Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Station Audits passed. This Digital Port circuit pack is functioning properly. 1. If complaints persist, investigate by using other port tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Page 10-449 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Page 10-450 DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) 10 MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run DIOD-DS1 MAJOR1 test trunk group# member# l DS1 DIOD Trunk DIOD-DS1 MINOR test trunk group# member# l DS1 DIOD Trunk DIOD-DS1 WARNING test trunk group# member# DS1 DIOD Trunk 1. Full Name of MO A Major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. For more information on the set options command, see Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids". NOTE: Many trunk problems are caused by incorrect settings of parameters on the trunk group administration form. Settings must be compatible with the local environment and with parameter settings on the far-end. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 V2 Implementation, 555-230-653, for information on how to administer trunks. The Application Notes section of that book shows the correct settings for administrable timers and other parameters on a country-by-country basis. A DS1 DIOD trunk provides a link for digitized voice or data communications between the system and a central office switch. There are two types of DS1 interfaces: ■ 24 DS0 channels on a 1.544 Mbps link ■ 31 DS0 channels + 1 framing channel on a 2.048 Mbps link ■ 32-channel mode is supported only on TN464 circuit packs and on G3r V2 systems. The DS1-DIOD maintenance object monitors and maintains a DIOD trunk port on a TN464 UDS1 Interface circuit pack. See UDS1-BD in this chapter for more information about this circuit pack. The DS1 circuit pack supports low level CO trunk signaling interfaces for both ground-start and loop-start trunks. This maintenance strategy covers the in-line errors log, initialization tests, periodic tests, scheduled tests, demand tests, and alarm resolution and escalation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Page 10-451 Three trunk service states are specified by DS1 DIOD trunk maintenance: out-of-service The trunk is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or outgoing calls. in-service The trunk is in an activated state and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls. disconnect (ready-for-service) The trunk is in an activated state but can only be used for an incoming call. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-148. Error Type 0 1 DS1 DIOD Error Log Entries Aux Data 0 Associated Test Any On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test trunk / busyout trunk / WARNING OFF release trunk / None WARNING ON test trunk / 1(a) 57408 1(a) 57487 57476 57477 57485 15(b) Any Port Audit and Update Test (#36) 18(c) 0 130(d) Alarm Level 2 257(e) 57392 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) MIN/MAJ OFF 513(f) 57393 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test (#136) MIN/MAJ2 OFF 769(g) 57484 1025(h) 51200 1025 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) MIN/ WRN3 OFF test trunk / r 2 1281 Conference Circuit Test (#7) MIN/ WRN3 ON test trunk / l r 4 1537 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MIN/ WRN3 ON test trunk / l r 3 1793(i) test board PCSS l Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-148. Page 10-452 DS1 DIOD Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data 2049(j) 57473 57474 57475 2305(k) 50944 2562(l) 16665 2817(m) 52992 3840(n) Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Port Audit and Update Test (#36) Continued on next page 1. 2. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service, then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm. Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. Error Type 1—Aux Data 57408—No tip ground is detected on an outgoing call. Aux Data 57476—Rotary Dial before Wink. Aux Data 57477—Rotary Dial pulse too early. Aux Data 57485—Wink too short for a valid signal. Aux Data 57487—PBX could not get ‘‘loop close’’ signal The DS1 Interface circuit pack detected a hardware fault. These errors will cause the Dial Tone Test (#314) to run and are only considered a problem if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1025 will also show up). In this case, the trunk may be put in the ready-for-service state (shown as ‘‘disconnected’’ by the status command), which allows only incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#314) and follow the procedures. b. Error Type 15—This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. Error Type 18—System Technician has busied out the trunk to the out-of-service state. No calls can be made on this trunk except the Facility Access Test Call. For details on this feature, refer to "Facility Test Calls" section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Page 10-453 d. Error Type 130—This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. e. Error Type 257—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault. Aux Data 57392 indicates no external release on PBX disconnect. Escalate the problem. f. Error Type 513—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault. Aux Data 57393 indicates belated external release on PBX disconnect. Escalate the problem. g. Error Type 769—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault. The Aux Data field contains the following error type:—57484, fault is detected on tip/ring. Escalate the error. h. The DS1Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault, and the Aux Data field contains the following error type: 51200, port is unavailable. Run the Dial Tone Test (#314) and follow procedures. i. Error Type 1793—DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for UDS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log if the port is on a TN464 UDS1 board. Refer to the UDS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details j. Error Type 2049—With the following Aux Data: Aux Data 57473—Rotary dial rate below 8 pulses per second. Aux Data 57474—Rotary dial rate above 12 pulses per second. Aux Data 57475—Rotary Dial interdigit time is too short. The DS1 interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on the DS1 DIOD trunk. The trunk can not communicate with the far-end because it is unable to interpret digits sent from the far-end switch. Check with the far-end switch or Operating Company for proper trunk connection. k. Error Type 2305—Recorder message, trunk could not be seized (Aux Data 50944). Run Test #314 and follow the outlined procedures. l. Error Type 2562—Retry Failure error. This error is logged only. It is not a hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any alarms. This error comes from call processing and is generated when a second attempt (retry) to seize an outgoing trunk fails. m. Error Type 2817—Glare error. This error is logged only. It is not a hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any alarms. This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a two-way trunk from both the near-end and the far-end. Attempt to place the call again. If the error persists, execute the Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) and follow those procedures. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Page 10-454 n. Error Type 3840—Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an internal system error. Enter the status trunk command to verify the status of the trunk. If the trunk is out-of-service, then enter the release trunk command to put it back into in-service. Retry the test command. If the test continues to abort, then escalate the problem. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence DS1 Dial Tone Test (#314) X X ND Port Audit and Update Test (#36) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) resides on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464 UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips.) The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-149. Error Code Page 10-455 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. The status health command can be used to determine if the system is experiencing heavy traffic. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. The list measurements tone-receiver command will display information on the system’s tone receivers. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-149. Error Code 1020 Page 10-456 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal 1793—Blue Alarm 2049—Red Alarm 2305—Yellow Alarm 1537—Hyperactivity Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464 UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips). The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-150. Error Code Page 10-457 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. This only applies to analog stations. 1. To enable test, set the Test field on the station administration screen for the particular analog station being tested to ‘‘y.’’ Use the change station extension command. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal 1793—Blue Alarm 2049—Red Alarm 2305—Yellow Alarm 1537—Hyperactivity Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-150. Error Code Page 10-458 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Port Audit and Update Test (#36) This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of trunk kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and in the switch software. Table 10-151. Error Code TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-151. Error Code Page 10-459 TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Test failed due to internal system error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is busied out, the test will not run but will return PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter the status trunk command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to step 2. 2. Enter the release trunk command to put the trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test checks the trunk’s signaling capability provided by the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The maintenance software initiates the test by sending a ‘‘seizure’’ message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack and expects an ‘‘active’’ reply from the DS1 interface circuit pack. If the ‘‘active’’ message is received, then the test passes. If no message is received and the timer expires, the test is aborted. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack sends a ‘‘reorder’’ message back to maintenance software, then the test fails. This test cannot be run on a trunk in any of the following conditions: ■ The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk. ■ The trunk has been seized by a normal trunk call. ■ The trunk is administered with maintenance test disabled. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-152. Error Code Page 10-460 TEST #314 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Test failed due to incompatible configuration administered in trunk group form. 1. Look at the trunk group administration form and see whether the trunk is incoming only, port 24 on a DS1 Interface with common control channel signaling, or an automatic CO type such as FX. Under any of these conditions this is a normal abort. 1018 ABORT Test has been disabled via administration. 1. Verify that the ‘‘Maintenance Tests’’ field on the Trunk Group Form is set to ‘‘n.’’ To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command where ‘‘x’’ equals the number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change the entry in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests’’ field on the form to ‘‘y.’’ 2. Repeat the test. 1020 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. 1. Look for UDS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to the UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. Retry the command. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk) Table 10-152. Error Code 2053 Page 10-461 TEST #314 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal 1793—Blue Alarm 2049—Red Alarm 2305—Yellow Alarm 1537—Hyperactivity Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types. FAIL The trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call. 1. Verify that the Trunk Type field on the trunk administration screen form matches the trunk type administered on far end switch. 2. Look for UDS1-BD errors in Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to the UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 3. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk), DIOD-BD (DIOD Circuit Pack) [G1.2SE] DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk), DIOD-BD (DIOD Circuit Pack) [G1.2SE] MO Name (in Alarm Log) DIOD-BD2 1. 2. Alarm Level MINOR Initial Command to Run1 test port PCSS s Full Name of MO DIOD Circuit Pack Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for the second EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.) Where 1 is Long, s is Short, and r is repeat. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Board) Maintenance Documentation. Page 10-462 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Page 10-463 DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DIOD-TRK MAJOR2 test port PCSSpp l DIOD Trunk DIOD-TRK MINOR test port PCSSpp l DIOD Trunk DIOD-TRK WARNING test port PCSSpp l DIOD Trunk 1. 2. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for the second EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.). A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Direct Inward and Outward Dial (TN429 DIOD) trunks are 2-wire analog lines to the CO which support the following services: ■ both incoming and outgoing CO calls ■ DID trunk ■ DID Trunk and 1-way Outgoing DIOD The DIOD Trunk circuit pack provides eight ports for loop-start CO. The circuit pack is an interface between the 2-wire analog line from the CO and the system’s (4-wire) TDM Bus. LOOP START OPERATION Idle State - Tip = ground, Ring = CO Battery A. Outgoing Call 1. PBX Off-Hook (Seize Message): Closes the Tip-Ring Loop a. CO Response: DC loop current + Dial tone 2. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note) B. Incoming Call 1. CO Applies Ringing Voltage a. PBX Response: Detect ringing current 2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Page 10-464 3. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note) C. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 1. CO Applies Ringing Voltage a. PBX Response: Detect ringing current and close loop b. CO Response: Send DTMF digits c. PBX Response: Acknowledge of Number dialed and open loop 2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current 3. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note) NOTE: CO does not normally provide an On-Hook (Disconnect) signal. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-153. DIOD Trunk Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test 0 Any 15 (b) any Port Audit Update Test (#36) 18 0 busyout trunk / 769 (a) 57392 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any None MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON 1537 Dial Tone Test (#0) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSS l r 2 1793 Loop Around and Conference Test (#33) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSS l r 3 2049 NPE Cross Talk Test (#6) MAJ/MIN/ WRN2 ON test port PCSS l r 3 0 2561 (a,d) 57345 None 2817 (a,e) 57393 None test port PCSSpp sh r 1 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-153. Error Type Page 10-465 DIOD Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test 3073 (a,c) 57376 None 3073 (a,c) 57424 None 3585 (a,c) 57424 None Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set-options values, the Minor alarm is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Notes: a. These are in-line errors that have no specific test associated with them. Refer to the following table for an explanation and appropriate action. b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. Aux data 57376 - No loop current on incoming call Aux data 57424 - No loop current on outgoing call These errors cause the Dial Tone Test (#0) to run and are only considered a problem if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1537 also shows up). In this case, the trunk may be put in "Ready-for-Service" state (shown as "disconnected" by status command), which allows only incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#0) and follow its outlined procedures. d. Single polarity ringing current - This error results from abnormal ringing current, but does not prevent the incoming call from being accepted. This error code is only logged as an informational event and causes no other testing to occur. e. Late CO Trunk release - This error indicates that the CO releases the trunk at least four minutes after the PBX dropped the call. This error code is only logged as an informational event and causes no other testing to occur. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-154. Error Type Page 10-466 DIOD Trunk Errors with NO Tests Aux Data Description and System Action System Technician Action 769 57392 CO not releasing after call is dropped from PBX end (TN747B), or the loop is not open after a disconnect (TN765). After several occurrences, an off-board (TN747B) or on-board (TN465) warning alarm is generated. Refer problem to CO. 2561 57345 Single polarity ringing current. This error results from abnormal ringing current, but does not prevent the incoming call from being accepted. One cause could be that the reverse current detector associated with the port is failing. (Will not be detected by any tests.) The other cause could be that normal current is not detected. In this case, neither incoming nor outgoing calls can be completed, and the dial tone test also fails. Check for other errors. 2817 57393 CO released the trunk at least four minutes after the PBX dropped the call. This error code is log only and causes no other testing to occur. No alarm is generated. Check for other errors. 3073 57376 No loop current on incoming call. The incoming destination has already answered and no loop current has been detected. If this is a hard fault, the dial tone test and all outgoing calls should also fail. Check for other errors. 3585 57424 No loop current on outgoing call. This error occurs on attempt to seize a loop or ground-start trunk for an outgoing call. An error occurs if loop current is not detected or the caller hangs up before it is detected. See Note at end of table. Continued on next page NOTE: At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long test. If Dial Tone Test #0 passes, ignore this error. Release the port. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Page 10-467 For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Dial Tone Test (#0) X ND Loop Around and Conference Test (#33) X ND X ND Order of Investigation Audit Update Test (#36) 1. Short Test Sequence X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Dial Tone Test (#0) This test attempts to seize a port and checks for the return of a dial tone. Table 10-155. Error Code TEST #0 Dial Tone Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the command display port PCSSpp to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-155. Error Code 1002 Page 10-468 TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test has been disabled via administration. 1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk Group Form is set to "n." To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x command where "x" equals the number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the form to "y." 1005 ABORT Trunk has been administered as incoming-only; or DID trunk group type; dial tone can only be obtained on outgoing trunks. This is a normal condition. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Trunk was seized, but dial tone could not be detected. 1. Check for errors on TONE-BD or TONE-PT. Clear any errors found and repeat test. 2. If error has still not cleared, refer problem to CO. 2002 FAIL Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem. Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk. 1. Check trunk wiring to ensure good connection; repeat test if wiring correction made. 2. Locate another identical CO trunk and swap its wiring with one under test. Repeat test on both trunks and determine if problem follows trunk or remains at original port. If problem follows trunk, refer problem to CO. If problem remains at port, replace circuit pack and repeat test. 3. If replacing circuit pack does not clear failure, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-155. Error Code TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued Test Result 1009 Page 10-469 Description/ Recommendation PASS Detected tone was not pure dial tone. No action required. PASS Trunk was seized, and dial tone was detected. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. Continued on next page NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s long test sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-156. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-156. Error Code 1001 Page 10-470 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM-Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-156. Error Code Page 10-471 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. Continued on next page Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33) This test checks the reflective loop and conference abilities of a CO port circuit. The test uses 404 Hz, 1004 Hz, and 2804 Hz tones. Each tone is transmitted separately through the loop and checked. Table 10-157. Error Code TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate system resources to run this test. 7 ABORT Conference Circuit Test aborted. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-157. Error Code 2100 Page 10-472 TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 7 FAIL 1. Check for errors on TONE-BD or TONE-PT. If there are errors, take the appropriate actions. 2. If the Reflective Loop Around Test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, check the circuit pack for a red LED. If the red LED is on, then replace the appropriate power unit circuit pack. If neither the TN736 nor the TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, then the OLS631DB AC power unit may be defective. The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack OR an OLS631DB AC power unit, BUT NOT BOTH TYPES OF POWER UNITS. NOTE: To investigate problems with an OLD631DB AC power source, refer to CARR-POW Maintenance documentation. 3. Rerun the test. 4. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS CO Trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is successful. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. Continued on next page Port Audit Update Test (#36) This test sends updates of the CO port translation for all ports on the circuit pack which have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against possible corruption of translation data contained on the circuit pack. No response message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation updates. The port translation data includes: ground or loop start trunk, tone or rotary dialing trunk, rotary dialing inter-digit timing, network balance R/RC, and disconnect timing. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE] Table 10-158. Error Code Page 10-473 TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run the test. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS This test passed. Translation information was successfully updated on the circuit pack. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run, but returns PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2. 2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DLY-MTCE (MO-DAILY) Page 10-474 DLY-MTCE (MO-DAILY) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO DLY-MTCE MINOR NONE DLY-MTCE DLY-MTCE MAJOR NONE DLY-MTCE The DLY-MTCE maintenance object monitors daily translation saves. If a translation save times out or fails to run, an error is logged against this maintenance object. If the save fails three times in a row, a MINOR alarm is raised; if the save fails for seven consecutive attempts, a MAJOR alarm is raised. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-475 DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DS1-BD MAJOR test board PCSS sh DS1 Interface Circuit Pack DS1-BD MINOR test board PCSS l DS1 Interface Circuit Pack DS1-BD WARNING test board PCSS sh DS1 Interface Circuit Pack 1. UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). The DS1 Interface circuit pack provides an interface to an external DS1 facility and supports 24 DS0 channels carried on a 1.544 Mbps DS1 link. These DS0 channels can be administered as either trunks to other switches or lines to off-premises stations. The TN464C and later suffix Universal DS1 Interface also supports a 32-channel interface on a 2.048Mbps link. The functions and maintenance strategy for the TN464 circuit packs are covered under a separate maintenance object, UDS1-BD. DS1-BD maintenance logs in-line errors reported by the DS1 Interface circuit pack, runs tests for error diagnosis and recovery, and raises and clears alarms. The following table shows the capabilities of each DS1 circuit pack. The TN722 and TN722B are not supported on G3r V1 or later systems. Circuit Pack Code 24 Channel 32 Channel Tie Trunk Signaling CO Trunk Signaling DID Trunk Signaling OPS Line Signaling TN722/B x x TN767/B/C/D/E x x x x x TN464C/D/E/F x x x x x (24-chl only) x ISDN-PRI Trunk signaling (for example, Q.921, Q.931) requires a TN464D and is handled by system software. The TN464 is covered in the "UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)" section of Chapter 9. Each trunk and line have their own maintenance strategies. However, they all depend on the health of the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Refer to the following sections for details: TIE-DS1, CO-DS1, DID-DS1, OPS-LINE, ISDN-TRK, and ISDN-PLK. Signaling over the DS1 link must be synchronized between the transmitting and receiving ends to ensure error-free communication. Refer to "SYNC (Synchronization)" for details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-476 The TN767E circuit pack combined with AT&T’s new 120A1 CSU Module forms an Enhanced Integrated CSU. The new 120A1 CSU Module, when combined with the functionality provided by the TN767E hardware and firmware, and new switch software, provides functionality equivalent to an external stand-alone AT&T ESF T1 CSU. The 120A1 CSU Module connects to the TN767E circuit pack on the I/O connector panel on the back of the port carrier. The new CSU Module, thus becomes an integrated part of the DEFINITY. system. Throughout the document, the term 120A1 will mean a 120A1 or later suffix CSU Module. The Enhanced Integrated CSU is for use in the United States of America with 1.544 Mbps DS1 service. For further details on the 120A1 CSU Module see DEFINITY. Communications System Generic 1, Generic 2, and Generic 3 V1 and V2 - Integrated CSU Module Installation and Operation, 555-230-193. The TN767E and 120A1 CSU Module support on-demand loopback tests that assist in the detection of faults between the TN767E circuit pack and the CSU Module, between the Integrated CSU and the optional Customer Premises Loopback Jack, or between the Integrated CSU and remote CSU. These loopback tests are explained in detail later in this DS1-BD section, but Figure 10-28 gives a high level overview of the loopback points. The following list of acronym definitions are for Figure 10-28: ■ PLB = Payload Loopback ■ BLB = Board Loopback ■ ELB = Equipment Loopback ■ LLB = Line Loopback ■ RLB = Repeater Loopback ■ CLJ = Loopback Jack Loopback ■ R-LLB = Remote Line Loopback ■ SMRT = Smart Jack ■ LPBK = Loopback For more information about DS1 interfaces, see the DEFINITY Communications System DS1/CEPT1/ISDN-PRI Reference, 555-025-107. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-477 NETWORK ENVIRONMENT DS1 BRD CPE LPBK JACK CSU MOD NET SMRT JACK NETWORK NET SMRT JACK CPE LPBK JACK CSU MOD DS1 BRD Remote end Local end CSU module to CSU module DS1 BOARD PLB CPE LPBK JACK CSU MOD BLB ELB LLB RLB NETWORK SMRT JACK CLJ-LB Local end loop backs NETWORK SMRT JACK CPE LPBK JACK CSU* MOD DS1 BOARD R-LLB Remote end loop backs (* CSU or External CSU) Figure 10-28. High Level Overview Of Loopback Points Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-159. Error Type 1 DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any 1 (a) 0 Circuit pack removed or SAKI Test (#53) MIN/WRN2 ON 18 (b) 0 busy-out board PCSS WARNING OFF release board PCSS 23 (c) 0 WARNING OFF add ds1 PCSS 0 test board PCSS Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-159. Error Type Page 10-478 DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data 12 5(d) Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board None MINOR ON MINOR ON MINOR ON Test to Clear Value 257 65535 Control Channel Loop Test (#52) test board PCSS l r 20 257 (e) Any None 513 (f) Any 769 (g) 4358 1025 (e) 4363 NPE Audit Test (#50) 1281 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS 1300 (h) Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) WARNING OFF test board PCSS 1301 (i) Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) WARNING OFF test board PCSS 1302 (j) Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS 1303 (k) Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MIN/WRN3 ON test board PCSS 1310 (l) Any Board Loopback Test (#1209) MINOR ON test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests 1311 (m) Any Equipment Loopback Test (#1210) MIN/WRN3 OFF test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-test 1312 (n) Any Repeater Loopback Test (#1211) MIN/WRN3 OFF test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests 1313 (o) Any CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212) MIN/WRN3 OFF test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test 1314 (p) Any Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213) MIN/WRN3 OFF test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test 1320 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS 1321 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS 1322 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MINOR ON test board PCSS 1323 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-159. Error Type Page 10-479 DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data 1324 Any 1538 (q) Any 1793 Any 1794 Associated Test On/Off Board Test to Clear Value WARNING OFF MINOR ON Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139) MAJ/MIN/ WRN ** OFF test board PCSS Any Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139) MAJ/MIN/ WRN ** OFF test board PCSS 1795 Any Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139) MAJ/MIN/ WRN ** OFF test board PCSS 2049 Any Red Alarm Inquiry Test (#140) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS 2305 Any Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141) MINOR OFF test board PCSS 2306 Any Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141) MINOR OFF test board PCSS 2561 Any Major Alarm Inquiry Test (#142) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS Minor Alarm Inquiry Test (#143) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS 2817 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) Alarm Level test board PCSS 3073 to 3160 (r) Any Slip Alarm Inquiry Test (#144) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS r 6 3329 to 3345 (s) Any Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test (#145) MIN/WRN3 OFF test board PCSS r 6 3840(t) Any None 3900(u) Any CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212) 3901(v) Any Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213) 3902(w) Any One-Way Span Test (#1214) 3999 (x) Any None Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. If ports are assigned to the circuit pack, then a minor alarm is raised. If no ports are assigned to the circuit pack, then a warning alarm is raised. The alarm is raised after the circuit pack has been missing for 15 minutes. Warning alarms are also raised against any ports administered on the circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) 3. Page 10-480 Off-board minor alarms on this maintenance object may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. This error indicates that the circuit pack has stopped functioning or is not completely administered. The alarm is logged about 15 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed or 11 minutes after the SAKI Test (#53) fails. To be completely administered, a DS1 circuit pack must meet all 3 of the following conditions: 1. Have an entry in the circuit plan via the change circuit pack command 2. Be administered via the add ds1 PCSS command 3. Be physically inserted in the appropriate slot If the circuit pack has an entry in the circuit plan and either of the other two conditions are not met, a MINOR alarm is logged. To resolve the error either 1. Make sure all conditions for administration are met and that a functioning DS1 circuit pack is inserted in the correct slot. 2. Completely remove the DS1-BD from the system using the following steps: a. Remove any administered DS1 trunks or access endpoints associated with the circuit pack from their trunk groups. b. Execute the remove ds1 PCSS and change circuit pack PCSS commands. If all the administration conditions are met for this circuit pack and the red LED is still on, follow the instructions for LED Alarms with Error Type 1 in Chapter 7. b. The DS1 Interface circuit pack has been busied out by a busy-out board PCSS command. c. The DS1-BD circuit pack is not completely administered. A completely administered DS1-BD circuit pack should have an entry in the circuit plan via the change circuit pack command, should have been administered via the add ds1 PCSS command, and should have been inserted into the appropriate port slot. d. The circuit pack in the slot does not match the type administered to that position. Either replace the circuit pack with one of the type administered, or use change circuit-pack to readminister the slot. This error may also indicate that the 24/32-channel selection on the DS1 administration form does not match the configuration of the circuit pack. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-481 e. This error is associated with the Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance Test. Refer to "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" for details. f. The DS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware problem (for example, external RAM failure, internal RAM failure, internal ROM failure, or instruction set failure). This error will disappear when no faults are detected for 30 minutes. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the type of hardware problem. However, when this error is reported with Aux Data in the range of 4352 to 4358, it indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure such that the circuit pack should be replaced. g. The DS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware logic error (for example, program logic inconsistency). This error will disappear when no faults are detected for 100 minutes. The value in Aux Data field indicates the type of hardware problem. h. CSU Module missing. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the 120A1 CSU Module is not physically connected (or is improperly connected) to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier. If using the 120A1 CSU Module, plug (or replug) the CSU Module into the TN767E circuit pack’s connector on the I/O connector panel on back of the carrier. Otherwise, change the Near-End CSU Type field using the change ds1 form to other. If this error remains after plugging the CSU Module into the board’s connector, there could be a problem with the I/O connector panel. i. CSU Module not expected. The 120A1 CSU Module is physically connected to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier but the Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has not been administered as integrated. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, use the change ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to integrated. Otherwise, physically remove the 120A1 CSU Module from the back of the port carrier. j. DS1 configuration error. Attempting to use the 120A1 CSU Module with a TN767E circuit pack that is configured for 32-channel (2.048 Mbps) operation. The CSU Module only works with a DS1 board configured for 24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation in the United States of America. k. DS1 circuit pack suffix incorrect for CSU Module. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the DS1 circuit pack is not a TN767E or later suffix DS1 board. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, remove the circuit pack and replace it with a TN767E or later suffix board. Otherwise, use the change ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to other. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-482 l. BLB failure. This error occurs when the DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) demand test fails. Repeat the test using the following commands: busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, release board PCSS. If the BLB test continues to fail, then the TN767E circuit pack needs to be replaced. m. ELB failure. This error occurs when the Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Equipment Loopback (ELB) test fails. This test is executed by the I-CSU during I-CSU power-up/reset (i.e., TN767E board physically inserted and 120A1 CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The ELB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, and release board PCSS. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN767E board, the CSU Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate where the failure is occurring by re-executing the test by replacing one piece of hardware at a time. n. RLB failure. This error occurs when the Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Repeater Loopback (RLB) test fails. This test is executed by the I-CSU during I-CSU power-up/reset (i.e., TN767E board physically inserted and 120A1 CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The RLB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, and release board PCSS. If the RLB test continues to fail, then the CSU Module needs to be replaced. o. CPE Loopback Jack deactivation error. This error occurs when the TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a CPE Loopback Jack loopback. Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test, and release board PCSS. If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loopback Jack loopback continues to fail, other steps must be taken to deactivate the loopback. p. Far CSU Loopback deactivation error. This error occurs when the TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a far-end CSU loopback on power-up/reset or upon software request. Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test, release board PCSS. If the attempt to deactivate the Far CSU loopback continues to fail, then escalate the problem. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-483 q. The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: 1. The common circuit pack level tests such as Test #51 and/or Test #220 are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning NO BOARD. 3. A busy-out/release of the circuit pack has no affect on test results. 4. A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are properly installed. The circuit pack is isolated from the system and all trunks of this circuit pack are placed into the out-of-service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are then returned to the in-service state. If the error recurs after 15 minutes, then replace the circuit pack. r. For later releases of G3V4 and beyond, only error 3073 will show that this board is receiving Slips and the AUX data shows the last Slip count that was reported. s. For later releases of G3V4 and beyond, only error 3329 will show that this board is receiving misframes and the AUX data shows the last misframe count that was reported. t. This error is not service-affecting and can be ignored. u. Error 3900 is used to give status information on a CPE Loopback Jack Test. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the loopback test. 1 — Test is currently running. 2 — Test failed because loopback could not be activated. 3 — Test failed because test pattern could not be detected. 4 — Test has been terminated. v. Error 3901 is used to give status information on a Far CSU Loopback Test. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the loopback test. 1 — Test is currently running. 2 — Test failed because loopback could not be activated. 3 — Test failed because test pattern could not be detected. 4 — Test has been terminated. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-484 w. Error 3902 is used to give status information on a One-Way Span Test. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the span test. 1 — Test is currently running. 2 — Test has failed because test could not be activated. 3 — Test pattern was not received from the far end. 4 — Test has been terminated. x. Error type 3999 indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated 50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in Table 10-145. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Connection Audit Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 10-160. System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence test ds1-loop Command D/ND1 NPE Connection Audit Test (#50) X ND Control Channel Loop Test (#52) X ND Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) X X ND Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139) X X ND Red Alarm Inquiry Test (#140) X X ND Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141) X X ND Major Alarm Inquiry Test (#142) X X ND Minor Alarm Inquiry Test (#143) X X ND Slip Alarm Inquiry Test (#144) X X ND Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-160. Page 10-485 System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD — Continued Reset Board Sequence test ds1-loop Command Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test (#145) X X ND Translation Update Test (#146) X X ND ICSU Status LEDs Test (#1227) X X ND D/ND1 SAKI Sanity Test (#53) X D Internal Looparound Test (#135) X D DS1/CSU Loopback Tests X D DS1 Board Loopback Test (#1209) X D CSU Equipment Loopback Test (#1210) X D CSU Repeater Loopback Test (#1211) X D CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212) X D Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213) X D One-Way Span Test (#1214) X D Inject Single Bit Error (#1215) X D End Loopback/Span Test (#1216) X D Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive NPE Connection Audit Test (#50): The system sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to update the network connectivity translation for all the Network Processing Elements (NPEs) on the circuit pack. Table 10-161. Error Code None 2100 TEST #50 NPE Connection Audit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-161. Error Code 1019 Page 10-486 TEST #50 NPE Connection Audit Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Test already in progress. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 0 PASS The circuit pack’s NPEs have been updated with their translation. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. Issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Control Channel Looparound Test (#52) This test queries the circuit pack for its circuit pack code and vintage and verifies its records. Table 10-162. Error Code None 2100 TEST #52 Control Channel Looparound Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-162. Error Code Page 10-487 TEST #52 Control Channel Looparound Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The test failed because the circuit pack did not return the circuit pack code or vintage. NOTE: Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as Test 138 and Test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test result. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. 1. Retry the command for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the problem continues, check for hyperactivity. Resolve the problem, as appropriate. 3. If there is no longer hyperactivity, retry the command for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack. PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-162. Page 10-488 TEST #52 Control Channel Looparound Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 0 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page SAKI Sanity Test (#53) This test is destructive. This test resets the circuit pack. Table 10-163. Error Code None TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT Wrong circuit pack configuration to run this test. This error applies only to DS1 Interface circuit packs. It means the DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system and, therefore, it cannot be reset without major system disruptions. 1. If the circuit pack needs to be reset, then set synchronization to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack and try again. Refer to "SYNC (Synchronization)". Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-163. Error Code 1015 Page 10-489 TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Port is not out-of-service. 1. Busyout the circuit pack. 2. Execute the command again. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL The circuit pack failed to reset. 2 FAIL The circuit pack failed to restart. 1. Execute the command again. 2. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack. PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Internal Looparound Test (#135) This test is destructive. The Internal Looparound Test is run by looping the transmitted DS1 bit stream back into the DS1’s board receiver. The loop occurs just before the DS1 facility Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-490 interface. The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician-demanded reset board PCSS command. All trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busy-out board command before running the Internal Looparound Test. When the Internal Looparound Test is initiated, maintenance software sends appropriate messages to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The test uses the Tone Generator and Tone Detector to exercise a bit pattern consistency test for all ports. If the transmitted and received bit patterns on a trunk are different, the test fails. When the test is complete, the maintenance software sends a stop loop around message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to put the circuit pack back into the normal operation mode. All trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is entered Table 10-164. Error Code 2012 TEST #135 Internal Looparound Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1004 ABORT Received an incoming call on a port of the DS1 circuit pack during the test. 1. Enter the busy-out board PCSS command to put all trunks of DS1 Interface circuit pack to out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1015 ABORT Ports on DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out. 1. Enter the busy-out board PCSS command to put all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-164. Error Code 1039 Page 10-491 TEST #135 Internal Looparound Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Therefore, it cannot be reset without major system disruption. 1. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 2000 ABORT ■ Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. ■ Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. ■ Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. The test was aborted. Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as Test 139 and Test 140) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-164. Error Code Page 10-492 TEST #135 Internal Looparound Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation DS1 Interface circuit pack failed in the Internal Looparound Test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is TN767, enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement. Otherwise, skip this step. 3. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. 4. Check the physical connectivity of DS1 Interface circuit packs and cable. 5. If all of the above are OK, replace the local DS1 Interface circuit pack and repeat the test. 6. Contact T1 Network Service to diagnose remote DS1 endpoint. 0 PASS All administered trunks of DS1 Interface circuit pack pass the Internal Looparound Test. The bit pattern consistency test is executed successfully over the path that covers a DS1 port, cable, and the external NCTE device. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138) This test verifies the synchronization status and continuity of the DS1 link. The Loss of Signal alarm indicates that the DS1 Interface circuit pack is unable to derive the synchronization clock from the DS1 facility. When the DS1 Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-493 circuit pack detects a Loss of Signal alarm, it stops providing the synchronization clock for the system if it is administered as a timing source and transmits a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint. When the Loss of Signal alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The inquiry test will run every 10 minutes until the loss of signal has been restored. The DS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Loss of Signal alarm after the signal has been lost for about 1second. It will not retire the alarm until the signal has returned for about 10 seconds. This test is also used to maintain the new 120A CSU Module. This Module, when combined with the functionality provided by the TN767E circuit pack, provides functionality equivalent to an external standalone ESF T1 CSU. If a TN767E circuit pack detects certain ICSU hardware errors, it will notify maintenance. When the maintenance subsystem receives notification of the I-CSU error, it will execute this Loss of Signal Inquiry test. The test, in addition to querying for a Loss Of Signal alarm condition, will also query the TN767E board to confirm the I-CSU error. A Minor or Warning alarm will be raised depending on the severity of the ICSU error. The trunks on the board may be taken out of service if the ICSU error is deemed serious. If a Loss Of Signal alarm and an ICSU error co-exist, the Loss Of Signal alarm condition will take priority and the board and all trunks on the board will be put in the out-of-service state. Errors will be logged, however, for both. When the maintenance subsystem receives notification that the ICSU hardware error condition no longer exists, maintenance will restore the board and all trunks to their previous service state if the alarm can be cleared (no other ICSU errors or Loss Of Signal alarm exist) Table 10-165. Error Code 2100 TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-165. Error Code 2000 Page 10-494 TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. FAIL DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Loss of Signal alarm. The physical link is broken or the remote DS1 endpoint is down. All trunks or ports of this DS1 interface circuit pack are out-of-service. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is designated as the supplier of the system synchronization source, then the system synchronization maintenance will adopt a source elsewhere. Refer to "SYNC (Synchronization)" section for details. 1. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 2. Check the physical connection of the DS1 Interface circuit pack and the cable. If a 120A1 CSU Module is physically connected to a TN767E board on the back of the port carrier, check the physical connection of the CSU Module and make sure the Network Interface cable is plugged into the CSU Module’s NETWORK jack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-165. Error Code 1300 Page 10-495 TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The CSU Module is missing. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the 120A1 CSU Module is not physically connected to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier. 1. If using the 120A1 CSU Module, plug the CSU Module into the TN767E circuit pack’s connector on the I/O connector panel on back of the carrier. Otherwise, change the Near-End CSU Type field using the change ds1 form to other. 2. Run the test again. 1301 FAIL The 120A1 CSU Module is physically connected to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier but the Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has not been administered as integrated. 1. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, use the change ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to integrated. Otherwise, physically remove the 120A1 CSU Module from the back of the port carrier. 2. Run the test again. 1302 FAIL Attempting to use the 120A1 CSU Module with a TN767E circuit pack that is configured for 32-channel (2.048 Mbps) operation. The CSU Module only works with a DS1 board configured for 24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation in the United States of America. 1. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, physically remove the TN767E circuit pack and reconfigure for 24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation. 2. Reinsert the circuit pack and run the test again. 1303 FAIL The DS1 circuit pack Suffix is incorrect for CSU Module administration. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the DS1 circuit pack is not a TN767E or later suffix DS1 board. 1. If the CSU Module is to be used, and the Near-End CSU Type field is set to integrated, to allow for CSU module administration, remove the circuit pack and replace it with a TN767E or later suffix board. Otherwise use the change ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to other. 1310 FAIL The DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) demand test (#1209) failed. 1. Repeat the test using the test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command. 2. If the BLB test continues to fail, then replace the TN767E circuit pack. 3. Run this test again. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-165. Error Code 1311 Page 10-496 TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Equipment Loopback (ELB) test (#1210) failed. This test is executed by the ICSU during ICSU power-up/reset (TN767E board physically inserted and 120A CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A CSU Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The ELB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 2. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN767E board, the CSU Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate the problem to one of these areas. Begin by replacing the CSU Module and running the test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command again. 3. If the ELB test continues to fail, then replace the TN767E board and run test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests again. 4. If the ELB test continues to fail, the problem could be in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module. 1312 FAIL The Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Repeater Loopback (RLB) test (#1211) failed. This test is executed by the ICSU during ICSU power-up/reset (TN767E board physically inserted and 120A CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The RLB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 2. If the RLB test continues to fail, then replace the CSU Module. 3. Run this test again. 1313 FAIL The TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a CPE Loopback Jack loopback. 1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test. 2. If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loopback Jack is not successful, check the cabling and investigate the problem at the CPE Loopback Jack. 3. Run the test again. 1314 FAIL The TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a far-end CSU loopback. 1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-165. Error Code 1320 Page 10-497 TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation A 120A1 CSU module hardware failure or an ICSU serial interface audit failure was detected by the TN767E DS1 circuit pack. 1. Replace the CSU module, and then run the test again. 2. If the test continues to fail with this error code, replace the TN767E and run the test again. 3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module. 1321 FAIL DTE LOS (loss of signal) was detected between the TN767E DS1 board and the 120A1 CSU Module. Either the TN767E board, the 120A1 CSU Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate the problem to one of these areas. 1. Replace the CSU Module and run the test again. 2. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then replace the TN767E board and run the test again. 3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module. 1322 FAIL No 5 volts power detected from the TN767E circuit pack to the 120A1 CSU Module. Problem probably due to an open fuse on the DS1 board or a faulty ICSU. NOTE Do not swap DS1 boards as this may open the fuse on the new board. 1. Remove the TN767E from the system and reinsert. 2. Run the test again once the board has finished its reset. 3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then replace the CSU Module and run the test again. 4. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then replace the TN767E board and run the test again. 5. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module. 1323 FAIL A service affecting CSU Module audit failure was detected by the TN767E DS1 circuit pack. All administered ports on the DS1 circuit pack are affected and maintenance software will place the ports into the out-of-service state. 1. Replace the 120A1 CSU Module. 1324 FAIL A non-service affecting CSU Module audit failure was detected by the TN767E DS1 circuit pack. No ports should be affected. No immediate action is required. These errors indicate that the CSU Module hardware may have a problem, and that it should be replaced when practical to avoid further deterioration. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-165. Error Code 0 Page 10-498 TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation PASS DS1 signal is present and the physical link is healthy. In addition, no Integrated CSU errors are detected. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139) The Blue Alarm is a signal sent by the remote DS1 endpoint when it is out-of-service. The Blue Alarm Inquiry Test checks the blue alarm status of the remote DS1 endpoint. When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Blue Alarm signal from the remote DS1 endpoint, the circuit pack will transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint and send a BLUE ALARM message to the maintenance software. When the Blue alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The inquiry test will be run every 10 minutes until the Blue alarm is cleared. The DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 2 seconds to recognize and report a Blue alarm and 16 seconds to recognize and report the resolution of a Blue alarm. When the Blue alarm is cleared, the DS1 Interface circuit pack stops transmitting the Yellow alarm and places the trunks back into the service state before the Blue alarm occurs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-499 Line Loopback Alarm The Line Loopback (LLB) is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the ICSU or DS1 into a loopback mode. When the ICSU or DS1 Board is in the LLB mode, the arriving bit pattern is regenerated and sent back. Line Loopback (LLB) Alarm is activated when the in-band activate LLB bit pattern has been arriving continuously for 5 seconds on the DS1 line. LLB is deactivated when the in-band deactivate LLB bit pattern has been arriving continuously for 5 seconds on the DS1 line. Since LLB is a maintenance condition rendering all DS0 channels unavailable for signaling or bearer traffic, maintenance software treats this the same as a Blue Alarm. Payload Loopback Alarm The Payload Loopback (PLB) is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the switch DS1 into a loopback mode. PLB Alarm is activated when a network protocol activate bit pattern arrives over the 4-Kbps ESF data link on the DS1 line. PLB is deactivated when a network protocol deactivate bit pattern arrives over the 4-Kbps ESF data link on the DS1 line. Since PLB is a maintenance condition rendering all DS0 channels unavailable for signaling or bearer traffic, maintenance software treats this the same as a Blue Alarm Table 10-166. Error Code 2100 TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-166. Error Code 2000 Page 10-500 TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. FAIL The remote DS1 endpoint is out-of-service. 1. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote endpoint. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 1794 FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Line Loopback Alarm (LLB). 1. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 3. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a line-side terminating device (for example, a PRI terminal adapter), call the vendor of the terminating device to diagnose the equipment. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-166. Error Code 1795 0 Page 10-501 TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Payload Loopback Alarm (PLB). If the DS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a leased T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack connects directly to another DS1 board, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. PASS Remote DS1 endpoint is in-service. Neither a Blue alarm nor a Line Loopback alarm nor a Payload Loopback alarm is detected in the DS1 Interface circuit pack. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Red Alarm Inquiry Test (#140) DS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Red alarm when the framing pattern of the incoming DS1 bit stream has been lost. The Red Alarm Inquiry Test checks the framing status of a DS1 Interface circuit pack. DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 3 seconds to recognize and report a Red alarm and 10 seconds to recognize and report the resolution of a Red alarm. When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Red alarm, the circuit pack will transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint and send a RED ALARM message to the maintenance software. After the Red alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks of the circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The inquiry test will be run every 10 minutes until the Red alarm is cleared. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-502 When the Red alarm is cleared, the DS1 Interface circuit pack will stop transmitting the Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint. The maintenance software restores all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack to the service state before the Red alarm occurs. Loss of Multiframe Alarm: If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is administered using DMI-BOS signaling, the DS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Loss of Multiframe Alarm (LMA) when it cannot interpret the incoming signaling bits to synchronize to the multiframe pattern received in the 24th channel. Once DS1 Interface circuit pack detects an LMA, the circuit pack will transmit a Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA) to the remote DS1 endpoint. Maintenance software handles both Red alarm and LMA alarm(s) using the same mechanism. Table 10-167. Error Code 2100 TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-167. Error Code Page 10-503 TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Red alarm. An out-of-frame condition occurs on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. DS1 Interface circuit pack will transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint until the Red alarm is retired. 1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. Likewise, verify that any intermediate CSU’s are administered correctly. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 4. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test. 1 FAIL The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a loss of multiframe alarm (LMA). An out of frame condition occurred on the DS1 interface circuit pack. The DS1 interface circuit pack will transmit a remote multiframe alarm (RMA) to the remote DS1 endpoint until the LMA is retired. 1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. Likewise, verify that any intermediate CSU’s are administered correctly. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 4. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test. PASS No Red alarm is detected on DS1 Interface circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-167. Error Code 0 Page 10-504 TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141) Receiving a Yellow alarm from remote DS1 endpoint indicates that the remote DS1 endpoint has an out-of-frame condition. The Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test is used to determine whether the remote DS1 endpoint is transmitting a Yellow alarm. The DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 500 msec to recognize and report a Yellow alarm and 500 msec to recognize and report that a Yellow alarm condition is cleared. When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Yellow alarm from the remote DS1 endpoint, it will send a YELLOW-ALARM uplink message to the maintenance software. After the maintenance software receives the YELLOW-ALARM message, the Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test is run to confirm the Yellow alarm. Once the Yellow alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks on the circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The Inquiry Test will be run every 10 minutes until the Yellow alarm is cleared. When the Yellow alarm is cleared, the maintenance software restores all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack back to their previous service state before the Yellow alarm is raised. This Yellow Alarm corresponds to the yellow F2 state documented in CCITT recommendation I.431. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-505 Remote Multiframe Alarm: Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA) indicates that the remote DS1 endpoint is in a Loss of Multiframe Alarm condition while the DS1 Interface circuit pack is administered using the DMI-BOS common channel signaling. The RMA is handled as a Yellow alarm. Yellow F5 State Alarm: For 32-channel E1 operation with CRC4 on, the F5 fault state is defined as a fault in the user-network interface, specifically in the direction from the user (PBX) to the network. Refer to CCITT recommendation I.431 Table 10-168. Error Code 2100 TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may appear. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-168. Error Code Page 10-506 TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation FAIL The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a yellow alarm sent by the remote DS1 endpoint. An out of frame condition occurred at the DS1 endpoint. 1 FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Remote Multiframe Alarm sent by the remote DS1 endpoint. An out-of-frame condition occurs on the remote DS1 endpoint. 2 FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack is reporting a yellow F5 State alarm. There is a fault in the user-network interface from the user (PBX) to the network. 1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. Likewise, verify that any intermediate CSUs are administered correctly. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 4. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test. 0 PASS No Yellow alarm nor Remote Multiframe Alarm nor F5 State Alarm is received from the remote DS1 endpoint. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-507 Major Alarm Inquiry Test (#142) The Major alarm raised by a DS1 Interface circuit pack indicates that the average bit error rate on the DS1 facility is greater than 1/1000. The Major Alarm Inquiry Test is used to determine that the received DS1 bit error rate is greater than 1/1000. When D4 framing mode is selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 16 seconds to recognize and report a Major alarm and 16 seconds to recognize and report that a Major alarm condition is cleared. If ESF framing mode is selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 10 seconds to recognize and report a Major alarm and 10 seconds to recognize and report that a Major alarm condition is cleared. When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Major alarm, it will send a MAJOR-ALARM message to the maintenance software. After the maintenance software receives a MAJOR-ALARM message, the Major Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to confirm the Major alarm on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The Inquiry Test will be run every 10 minutes until the Major alarm is cleared. The maintenance software places all trunks on the circuit pack in the out-of-service state if the Major alarm persists for more than 20 minutes. When the Major alarm is cleared, the maintenance software restores all trunks on the circuit pack to their previous service state before a Major alarm occurs. Table 10-169. Error Code 2100 TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-169. Error Code 2000 Page 10-508 TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Major alarm. The DS1 bit error rate is greater than 1/1000. 1. The performance of DS1 link between DS1 Interface circuit pack and remote DS1 endpoint is very poor. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is TN767, enter list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement. 2. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. 3. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 4. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 5. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test. PASS No Major alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-169. Error Code 0 Page 10-509 TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Minor Alarm Inquiry Test (#143) The Minor alarm raised by a DS1 Interface circuit pack indicates that the average bit error rate on the DS1 facility is greater than 1/1,000,000, but less than 1/1000. The Minor Alarm Inquiry Test is used to determine that the received DS1 bit error rate is greater than 1/1,000,000 and less than 1/1000. When D4 framing mode is selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 41 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 41 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition is cleared. If ESF framing mode is selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 10 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 10 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition is cleared. When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm condition, it will send a MINOR-ALARM message to the maintenance software. After the maintenance software receives a MINOR-ALARM message, the Minor Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to confirm the Minor alarm. All trunks on the circuit pack are kept in the in-service state after the Minor alarm is confirmed. The Minor Alarm Inquiry Test is run every 10 minutes until the Minor alarm is cleared. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-170. Error Code 2100 Page 10-510 TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-170. Error Code Page 10-511 TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm. The DS1 bit error rate is greater than 1/1,000,000 and less than 1/1000. 1. The performance of DS1 link between DS1 Interface circuit pack and remote DS1 endpoint is poor. If DS1 Interface circuit pack is TN767, enter list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement. 2. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. 3. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 4. Check the physical connection of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 5. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test. 0 PASS No Minor alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Slip Alarm Inquiry Test (144) Slips occur when transmitter and receiver are not running at precisely the same clock rate. The DS1 Interface circuit pack can detect both positive and negative slips on the DS1 facility. The Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is used to acquire the total number of slips occurred on a DS1 link. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-512 When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a slip condition, the circuit pack will increase the on-board slip counter by 1. A SLIP-COUNT message is spontaneously sent to the system software after the counter reaches a threshold (for example, 88). When the maintenance software receives the SLIP-COUNT message, the Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to query the slip counters on DS1 Interface circuit pack and total the slip counts in the maintenance software. If the count of slips is over the threshold, a Minor alarm is raised against the DS1 Interface circuit pack. All trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are still in the in-service state. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is used to supply the system synchronization source, the MINOR alarm will initiate a synchronization source switch. See “TDM-BUS” and "SYNC (Synchronization)" for details. Table 10-171. Error Code 2100 TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-171. Error Code 1 to 88 Page 10-513 TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a slip alarm. The error code equals the number of slips detected by the DS1 interface circuit pack since the last slip alarm inquiry test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN767, enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement. 3. Verify that both endpoints and all intermediate equipment of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. 4. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 5. Check the active alarm and error logs for recent alarms and errors against the synchronization (SYNC). Follow the suggested repair procedure for these errors. 6. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 7. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test. 0 PASS No Slip alarm is detected on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-514 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test (#145) Misframe Alarm indicates that framing bits observed on a DS1 Interface circuit pack are in error. Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test queries the total number of misframes that occurred on a DS1 Interface circuit pack since the last inquiry. When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a misframe error, it will increase its misframe counter by 1. If the counter reaches the threshold, a MISFRAME-COUNT message is automatically sent to the switch maintenance software. After the maintenance software receives the MISFRAME-COUNT message, the Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to collect the misframe counts from the DS1 Interface circuit pack. When the threshold of misframes is reached, if the DS1 Interface circuit pack is supplying the system synchronization source, then a switching synchronization source message is sent to the TDM Bus Clock. See TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation for details. A Minor alarm against the DS1 Interface circuit pack is raised, but all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are still in the in-service state. Table 10-172. Error Code 2100 TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-172. Page 10-515 TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 2000 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may appear. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-172. Page 10-516 TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued Error Code Test Result ANY FAIL Description/ Recommendation The test failed because the DS1 interface circuit pack detected errors in the received framing bits pattern. The error code equals the number of misframes detected by the DS1 interface circuit pack since the last misframe alarm inquiry test. Major bit and minor bit error rate (error types 2561 and 2817) error logs often accompany misframe alarms. Clearing the cause of these error logs may clear the misframes which are occurring. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN767, enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement. 3. Verify that both endpoints and all intermediate equipment of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. 4. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint. 5. Check the active alarm and error logs for recent alarms and errors against the synchronization (SYNC). Follow the suggested repair procedure for these errors. 6. Check the physical connection of the DS1 pack and of the cable. 7. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test. 0 PASS No Misframe alarm is detected on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-517 Translation Update Test (#146) The Translation Update Test sends the circuit-pack-level information specified by System Administration to the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Translation includes the following data administered for a DS1 Interface circuit pack (see output of display ds1 PCSS command): DS1 Link Length between two DS1 endpoints, Synchronization Source Control, All Zero Suppression, Framing Mode, Signaling Mode, Time Slot Number of 697-Hz Tone, Time Slot Number of 700-Hz Tone, etc. If a TN767E or later DS1 circuit pack is combined with a 120A CSU Module to form and Integrated CSU Module, this test will also send the administration for this Integrated CSU to the circuit pack to assure the board’s translations are correct. The administration of the CSU Module is done using the DS1 circuit pack administration form. Translation for the CSU Module includes the following data: Transmit LBO, Receive ALBO, Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power?, and so forth. Table 10-173. Error Code TEST #146 Translation Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL Internal system software error. 1. Enter the display ds1 PCSS command to verify the DS1 Interface circuit pack translation. 0 PASS Translation data has been downloaded to the DS1 Interface circuit pack successfully. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-518 DS1 Board Loopback Test (#1209) This test is destructive. The DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) Test causes a loopback at the TN767E DS1 board edge and tests DS1 board internal circuitry. The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the BLB Test. When the BLB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board will set up the BLB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern is different, the test fails. When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is entered Table 10-174. Error Code TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT DS1 Board Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this Test, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter busyout board PCSS to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-174. Error Code 1039 Page 10-519 TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this test could cause major system disruption. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. 2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. 3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. 1950 2100 ABORT Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback). The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test. ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-174. Error Code 2000 Page 10-520 TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. FAIL DS1 Interface circuit pack failed the DS1 Board Loopback Test. 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 2. If the BLB test continues to fail, then replace the DS1 circuit pack. PASS The BLB test executed successfully. The test pattern was transmitted and received successfully up to the TN767E DS1 board edge. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-174. Error Code 0 Page 10-521 TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page CSU Equipment Loopback Test (#1210) This test is destructive. The CSU Equipment Loopback (ELB) Test causes a loopback at the near-edge of the local 120A CSU Module and tests the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the CSU Module (DS1 board edge interconnecting cable, and CSU Module edge). This test will only be performed if the 120A CSU Module is present, administered, and connected to a 1.544Mbps TN767E DS1 circuit pack on the back of the port carrier. The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the ELB Test. When the ELB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board sets up the ELB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern is different, the test fails. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-522 In addition, the DS1 circuit pack hardware applies a DC current while the test is running in order to detect any broken wires which may not be detected by the loopback pattern. When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is entered. Table 10-175. Error Code TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT CSU Equipment Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this test, the Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to integrated and the "Bit Rate" field must be set to "1.544" (24-channel operation). 1. Use the change ds1 PCSS command to set the Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form to integrated, and/or change the "Bit Rate" field to "1.544" if the board is to be used in the 24-channel configuration. 2. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 1039 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this test could cause major system disruption. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. 2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. 3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-175. Error Code Page 10-523 TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1950 ABORT Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback). The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test. 1951 ABORT The CSU Equipment Loopback Test could not be executed because the 120A CSU Module was not physically installed. Physically connect the 120A CSU Module to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier. ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 2100 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-175. Error Code Page 10-524 TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation DS1 Interface circuit pack failed the CSU Equipment Loopback Test. 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 2. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN767E board, the CSU Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate the problem to one of these areas. Replace the CSU Module and running test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests again. 3. If the ELB test continues to fail, then replace the TN767E board and run test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests again. 4. If the ELB test continues to fail, the problem could be in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module. 0 PASS The ELB test executed successfully. The test pattern was transmitted and received successfully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the near-edge of the 120A1 CSU Module. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page CSU Repeater Loopback Test (#1211) This test is destructive. The CSU Repeater Loopback (RLB) Test causes a loopback at the far-edge of the local 120A CSU Module and tests the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to and including the CSU Module circuitry. This test will only be performed Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-525 if the 120A CSU Module is present, administered, and connected to a 1.544 Mbps TN767E DS1 circuit pack on the back of the port carrier. The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the RLB Test. When the RLB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board will set up the RLB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern is different, the test fails. In addition, the DS1 circuit pack hardware applies a DC current while the test is running in order to detect any broken wires which may not be detected by the loopback pattern. When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is entered Table 10-176. Error Code TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT CSU Repeater Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this test, the Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1circuit pack administration form must be set to integrated and the "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" (24-channel configuration). 1. Use the change ds1 PCSS command to set the Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form to integrated, and/or change the "Bit Rate" field to "1.544" if the board is to be used in 24-channel configuration. 2. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-176. Error Code 1015 Page 10-526 TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 1039 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this test could cause major system disruption. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. 2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. 3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. 1950 ABORT Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback). The hardware error log indicates whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test. 1951 ABORT The CSU Repeater Loopback Test could not be executed because the 120A CSU Module was not physically installed. Physically connect the 120A1 CSU Module to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-176. Error Code 2100 Page 10-527 TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. FAIL DS1 Interface circuit pack failed the CSU Repeater Loopback Test. 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests. 2. If the RLB test continues to fail, and the CSU Equipment Loopback Test (#1210) passed, then replace the CSU Module. PASS The RLB test executed successfully. The test pattern was transmitted and received successfully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the far-edge of the 120A1 CSU Module. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-176. Error Code 0 Page 10-528 TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212) This test is destructive. The CPE Loopback Jack (CLJ-LB) Test causes a loopback at the CPE Loopback Jack and tests the building wiring connection between the TN767E DS1 board and the CPE Loopback Jack. The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin [number-of-bits bit-pattern] command. The System technician has the choice of entering a loopback activation code on the command line or using the default code (0x47F). All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the CPE Loopback Jack Test. The CPE Loopback Jack Test has the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack transmit a loopback activation code to the CPE Loopback Jack, waits up to 10 seconds for return of the code to verify the loopback has been established, transmits a framed 3-in-24 test pattern, begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern, and returns a PASS result to indicate that the pattern was successfully Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-529 sent. If the loopback is not established within the 10 seconds, the test returns FAIL. The status of the CPE Loopback Jack test will be available in the hardware error log via error type 3900. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user information of the status of the test. The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being passed through the loopback cleanly, the number of bit errors should be very low. The command will also display the type of loopback/span test executing (Test field), the type of pattern generated for the loopback/span test (Pattern field), and whether the pattern (3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized Field). To terminate the test, enter test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command or the release board. Using the release board command restores all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in-service state. Table 10-177. Error Code TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT CPE Loopback Jack Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this Test, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 1039 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this test could cause major system disruption. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. 2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. 3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-177. Error Code 1950 2100 Page 10-530 TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback). The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test. ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-177. Error Code 2 Page 10-531 TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The CLJ-LB test failed because it was not set up properly. The DS1 interface pack could not successfully put the CPE loopback jack into loopback mode. 1. Rerun the test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin command. 2. If the test continues to fail, the problem could be with the TN767E board, the CPE loopback jack equipment, or somewhere between. Run the test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command to determine if the loopback tests that are closer to the TN767E board are successful. If any of these tests fail, follow the maintenance strategy that is associated with the test that fails. 3 FAIL The CPE Loopback Jack Test was not set up properly. The framed 3-in-24 test pattern, generated by the DS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through the CPE Loopback Jack, could not be detected properly by the DS1 circuit pack. 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin. 2. If the CPE Loopback test continues to fail, the problem could be with the TN767E board, the CPE Loopback Jack equipment, or somewhere in between. Run test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests to see if the loopback tests closer to the TN767E board are successful. If any of those loopback tests fail, follow the maintenance strategy associated with those loopbacks. 0 PASS The CPE Loopback Jack test has successfully began executing. The test will continue to run until the system technician enters the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command or the release board PCSS command. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-532 Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213) This test is destructive. The Far CSU Loopback (R-LLB) Test causes a loopback at the far-end CSU and tests all circuitry and facilities from the local TN767E DS1 board to the far-end CSU. The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin command. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the Far CSU Loopback Test. If the far-end CSU is not a 120A CSU Module, and the DS1 is administered for ami-zcs line coding, one’s density protection must be disabled on the CSU during the test due to the large number of zero’s in the 3-in-24 test pattern. The Far CSU Loopback Test has the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack transmit a loopback activation code to the remote CSU, waits up to 15 seconds for return of the code to verify the loopback has been established, transmits a framed 3-in-24 test pattern, begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern, and returns a PASS result. If the loopback is not established within the 15 seconds, the test fails. The status of the Far CSU Loopback test will be available in the hardware error log via error type 3901. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user information of the status of the test. The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being passed through the loopback cleanly, the number of bit errors should be very low. The command will also display the type of loopback/span test executing (Test field), the type of pattern generated for the loopback/span test (Pattern field), and whether the pattern (i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized field). To terminate the test, enter test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test or the release board command. Using the release board command will restore all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in-service state. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-178. Error Code Page 10-533 TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT Far CSU Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 1039 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this test could cause major system disruption. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. 2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. 3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. 1950 2100 ABORT Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback). The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test. ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-178. Error Code 2000 Page 10-534 TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-178. Error Code Page 10-535 TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2 FAIL The far CSU Loopback Test was not set up properly. The DS1 Interface circuit pack could not put the far-end CSU into loopback mode. 3 FAIL The far CSU Loopback Test was not set up properly. The framed 3-in-24 test pattern, generated by the DS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through the far-end CSU, could not be detected by the DS1 circuit pack. 1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin. 2. If the Far CSU Loopback test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be with the TN767E board, the far-end CSU equipment, or somewhere in between. Run test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin to see if the CPE Loopback Jack test which is closer to the TN767E board is successful. (If a CPE Loopback Jack device is not being used, then run test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests to see if these even closer loopback tests succeed). If the closer loopback test fails, follow the maintenance strategy associated with that loopback 0 PASS The Far CSU Loopback test has successfully began executing. The test will continue to run until the system technician enters test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test or the release board PCSS. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page One-Way Span Test (#1214) This test is destructive. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-536 The One-Way Span Test allows one-way span testing to and from remote test equipment or another DEFINITY communications system. This will test all circuitry and facilities from the local TN767E DS1 board to the remote test equipment or other DEFINITY communications system. The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS one-way-span-test-begin command. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the One-Way Span Test. The One-Way Span Test has the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack transmit a framed 3-in-24 test pattern and attempt to receive and verify the pattern. If the TN767E board receives a framed 3-in-24 test pattern sent from another DEFINITY G3V3 or test equipment at the far-end of the DS1, it will begin counting bit errors within the received pattern. The status of the One-Way Span test will be available in the hardware error log via error type 3902. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user information of the status of the test. The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being sent cleanly over the span from the far-end, the number of bit errors should be very low. The Test Duration field will show 0 until the test pattern is received from the far-end. Upon receiving the test pattern, the board will begin calculating the test duration and number of bit errors. The command will also display the type of loopback/span test executing (Test field), the type of pattern generated for the loopback/span test (Pattern field), and whether the pattern (i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized field). To terminate the test, enter the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command or the release board command. Using the release board command will restore all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in-service state. Table 10-179. Error Code TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS one-way-span-test-begin command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-179. Error Code Page 10-537 TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1005 ABORT One-Way Span Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 1039 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this test could cause major system disruption. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence: 1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command. 2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command. 3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command. 1950 2100 ABORT Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback). The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test. ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-179. Error Code 2000 Page 10-538 TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. PASS The One-Way Span test has successfully began transmitting a framed 3-in-24 test pattern. The test will continue to run until the system technician enters the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command or the release board PCSS command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-179. Error Code 0 Page 10-539 TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Inject Single Bit Error Test (#1215) This test is destructive. The Inject Single Bit Error Test will cause a single bit error to be sent within an active framed 3-in-24 test pattern. The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS inject-single-bit-error command. An attempt to use this command will be rejected if none of the three long-duration DS1 loopback/span tests (CPE Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, One-Way Span Test) are active on a TN767E circuit pack. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the Inject Single Bit Error Test. The list measurements ds1 summary command displays the number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). Injecting this single bit error should increment the bit error count of the loopback/span test by one. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-180. Error Code Page 10-540 TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS inject-single-bit-error command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 2100 ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. PASS A single bit error has been successfully injected into an active framed 3-in-24 test pattern. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-180. Error Code 0 Page 10-541 TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page End Loopback/Span Test (#1216) This test is destructive. The End Loopback/Span Test will terminate an active loopback or span test on a TN767E DS1 circuit pack. Bit error counting against the received test pattern stream is terminated and sending of the framed 3-in-24 test pattern is halted. If either the CPE Loopback Jack or the far-end CSU is looped, the appropriate loopback deactivate code is sent. If the loopback could not be deactivated, then the test will FAIL and a MINOR alarm will be noted in the alarm log until the loopback is cleared. The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician demanded test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command. Since only one of these three different long-duration loopback/span tests can be active at a time, the TN767E circuit pack knows which loopback/span test to terminate. All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running this End Loopback/Span Test. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-542 The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test ran (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). To restore the trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in-service state, execute the release board command. Table 10-181. Error Code TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT End Loopback/Span Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run this, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation. 1015 ABORT Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command. 2100 ABORT Internal system error ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-181. Error Code 2000 Page 10-543 TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited. 1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result. 3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results. 4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed. NOTE: When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. 1313 FAIL The TN767E DS1 circuit pack could not deactivate the loopback through the Customer Loopback Jack. 1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 1314 FAIL The TN767E DS1 circuit pack could not deactivate the loopback through the far-end CSU. 1. Make sure that the far-end DS1 is installed if the far-end CSU is a 120A CSU Module. 2. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. PASS The active long-duration loopback or span test on the TN767E circuit pack was successfully terminated. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-181. Error Code 0 Page 10-544 TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page ICSU Status LEDs Test (#1227) The TN767E DS1 circuit pack has four status LEDs on the faceplate in addition to the three standard faceplate LEDs. These four status LEDs are associated with the 120A1 Channel Service Unit (CSU) Module that can be connected to the TN767E board via the I/O connector panel on the back of the port carrier. This test is a visual test. It will light the four status LEDs red for 5 seconds, then light them green for 5 seconds, then light them yellow for 5 seconds, then turn the LEDs off and returns control of the status LEDs to the circuit pack. This test will only be executed on TN767E or later suffix DS1 circuit packs administered for 24-channel operation (1.544 bit rate). If the 1201 CSU Module is not installed, the status LEDs are always off and this test aborts. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-182. Error Code Page 10-545 TEST #1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT The ICSU Status LEDs test can not be executed for the current configuration. The test applies only to TN767E or later DS1 circuit packs administered for 24-channel operation (1.544 bit rate). 1. If the circuit pack is a TN767E or later suffix DS1 circuit pack, then retry the command. 1951 ABORT The ICSU Status LEDs Test can not be executed because a 120A1 or later suffix CSU Module is not physically installed. If using a 120A1 CSU Module, physically connect it to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier otherwise, ignore this abort. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2500 ABORT Internal system error. 1. Retry the command. PASS The ICSU Status LEDs test executed successfully. A PASS result, however, does not necessarily mean that the status LEDs behaved properly. It only means that the software successfully attempted to light the status LEDs. This is a visual test. The service technician must visually exam the behavior of the LEDs while the test is running. The LEDs are functioning properly if the four status LEDs are lit red for 5 seconds, then lit green for 5 seconds, then lit yellow for 5 seconds. If the LEDs behave differently, the board should be replaced at the customer’s convenience. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-182. Error Code 0 Page 10-546 TEST #1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered. 2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board. 3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 4. Issue the reset board command. 5. Issue the release busy board command. 6. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-547 DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DT-LN-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Data Line Circuit Pack DT-LN-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Data Line Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also DAT-LINE (Data Line Circuit Port) Maintenance documentation for related line information. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] Page 10-548 DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DTMR-PT MAJOR test port PCSSpp sh Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) DTMR-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp sh Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) DTMR-PT WARNING release port PCSSpp Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (DTMR), also known as the Touch-Tone Receiver (TTR), resides on the Tone Detector circuit pack (TN748, TN420) or the TN756 Tone-Clock circuit pack. There are four Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver (DTMR-PT) ports and two General Purpose Tone Detector (GPTD-PT) ports on a Tone Detector circuit pack. The DTMR port is used to detect touch-tone digits that are placed on the TDM bus. Examples of touch-tone digits are digits 0 through 9, digit #, and digit *. The ability of the DTMR port to detect touch-tone digits is essential for maintenance of other circuit packs (for example, Tone-Clock circuit pack) and in placing a station-to-station call. Calls originating from a hybrid station do not require a DTMR port. The Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port maintenance object defines a set of tests to verify that the DTMF digits detection capability of the DTMR port is functioning properly. For all Tone Detector circuit pack level errors (DETR-BD), refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] Page 10-549 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 (b) 17664 Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 2 18 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING ON release port PCSSpp None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 130 (d) 257 (c) 17666 Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 3 513 Any Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 3 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. There are two possible alarm levels for this error: Major alarm and Minor alarm. A Major alarm is raised if the total number of DTMR ports currently in service is less than or equal to one half of the administered threshold number. Otherwise, a Minor alarm is raised. In either case, run the Short Test Sequence against the DTMR port and follow the error code procedures for the individual tests. The threshold number of DTMR ports for service is administered using the change system-parameters maintenance command. b. This error indicates the DTMR port is having problems detecting touch-tone digits. If this error is being constantly logged, then the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port should be replaced. c. The DTMR port lost its translation. Testing the DTMR port is sufficient to reload its translation. If testing the DTMR port does not clear the error, then the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port should be replaced. d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for at least 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] Page 10-550 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tone Detection Verification Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) X X ND Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) This test verifies the "touch-tone digits detection" capability of the DTMR port is functioning properly. Table 10-183. Error Code TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation none ABORT The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test or there was an Internal System Error. 1 ABORT The system could not allocate all the resources needed to test the DTMR port. 1001 ABORT The system was unable to put the DTMR port in the appropriate mode to test it. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test connection. This could happen when the system is heavily loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded, then test the TDM Bus via the test tdm [a|b] command. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation for details. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] Table 10-183. Error Code 1003 Page 10-551 TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a Tone Generator for the test connection. This could happen when the system is heavily loaded or there is not a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network when this test is being executed. 1. Make sure there is a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the same port network. 2. If a Tone-Clock circuit pack is missing, install one in the same port network. 3. Allow about one-minute for the Tone-Clock maintenance to run on the newly inserted Tone-Clock circuit pack. 4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2006 ABORT DTMF detection failed. This could be caused by the administered companding mode of the system not matching that of the Tone Detector circuit pack. 1. Make sure that companding mode of the system matches that of the Tone Detector. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1-3 FAIL DTMF digits were not correctly detected. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence: test port PCSSpp sh r 1. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but system capacity will be reduced. In order to restore the system performance to normal, replace the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port. PASS The DTMR port is able to detect all the touch-tone digits. Continued on next page Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) The DTMR port is refreshed with all time slot information and sanity audit is performed on the DTMR port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)] Table 10-184. Error Code Page 10-552 TEST #43 Tone Detector Audit/Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test. 1. Wait one minute and try again. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Hardware audit failed. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence: test port PCSSpp sh r 1. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but system capacity is reduced. In order to restore the system performance to normal, replace the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port. PASS The DTMR port has been successfully refreshed with its translation. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-553 DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DUPINT MAJOR test duplication 1C Duplication Interface Circuit Pack DUPINT WARNING test duplication 1C Duplication Interface Circuit Pack 1. Alarms on Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier are always major alarms and alarms on Duplication Interface circuit pack in the B carrier are always warning alarms. Determine the carrier to test via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. In a High or Critical Reliability PPN system, there are two Duplication Interface circuit packs: one in carrier A and one in carrier B. Together, Duplication Interface circuit pack A and Duplication Interface circuit pack B provide memory shadowing (see “SHDW-CIR” for a full description) and communication between software on the Active and Standby SPEs. By itself, Duplication Interface circuit pack A provides control of the duplicated Processor circuit pack, environmental maintenance monitoring and control, and administration terminal connection. Duplication Interface circuit pack A controls a lead that lets the Tone-Clock circuit packs know which of them is supposed to be active and additional leads that control which SPE is active. The system software can request that either the SPE Select lead or Tone-Clock lead be changed. Duplication Interface circuit pack A controls and monitors the same environment leads that the Maintenance/Tape Processor does in a PPN a system without High or Critical Reliability. Duplication Interface circuit pack A also supports the serial channel to the PPN administration terminal in a high or critical reliability PPN. The administration terminal connects to Duplication Interface circuit pack A via a connector on the back of carrier A labeled DOT. At any time, the administration terminal may be disconnected from Duplication Interface circuit pack A and connected directly to the active Maintenance/Tape Processor by attaching the administration terminal to the connector marked TERM on the active carrier. This connection should only be made if the administration terminal fails to function since a problem with the Duplication Interface circuit pack A may be present. The Duplication Interface circuit packs communicate over the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC). The ICC connects the Duplication Interface circuit packs via pin fields on the backplane. The ICC consists of two 25-pin connector cables known as ICC-A and ICC-B. (Note: A single-carrier cabinet system has an ICC-C also.) The pin fields where ICC-A and ICC-B connect are clearly labeled on the backplane near the pin fields for the Duplication Interface circuit packs. The ICC carries several important leads related to maintaining a high or critical reliability system. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-554 NOTE: The ICC carries the following leads and their respective information: Tone-Clock select lead that indicates which Tone-Clock circuit pack is active; SPE Select Switch State leads which indicate the position of the SPE Select Switch; Emergency Transfer leads which indicate whether Emergency Transfer is on or off in the PPN cabinet; leads to tie INADS, CDR, and Customer-Provided Alarming Device. Without the ICC properly attached, the system cannot function as a high or critical reliability system or as a standard system. Figure 10-29 depicts the interconnection of the Duplication Interface circuit packs with the rest of the system. The dotted lines show the logical serial channel rather than actual physical implementation of the serial channel. For clarity, the UARTs are not shown. The following abbreviations are used in the figure: ■ DUPINT for Duplication Interface circuit pack ■ PR MAINT for Maintenance/Tape Processor ■ PROCR for 80286 Processor circuit pack ■ MEM BD for Memory Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-555 TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD SPE SELECT LEAD D P M N U R E E P O M T I C O C R R O Y N S S N H E T A R C D I T O A R W L L T N B CARRIER C L K P TN772 TN773 TN770 TN777 I MBUS TDMBUS A TN765 DUP-A TO ICC-B B PACKET BUS* (SCC ONLY) DUP-DUP TN765 MBUS S C H E T A R R D I L O A D W L U TN772 TN773 U PKT CTRL S TDMBUS A TN770 TN777 I TN768 OR TN780* 1 P P I N T R DUP-A TO MTP-A O C R M N T E E N M T O C C R O L Y N K M SPE SELECT LEAD R 1 TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD * G1.2 ONLY. MCC ONLY. (IN A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION, THERE CAN BE EITHER 0 or 1 PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK. IN A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION, THERE CAN BE 0, 1, OR 2 PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACKS.) Figure 10-29. TN778 P S G M PKT CTRL ICC-C T D TN778 MTP-B ICC-A TN768 OR TN780* 1 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Interactions A CARRIER B Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-556 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-185. Error Type 01 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Aux Data 0 1 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any Any test dup 1C sh r 1 Sanity Circuit Test (#273) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C l r 1 108 (a) Any None 109 (a) Any None 257 SAT Loop Back Test (#274) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 3 513 SPE A Loop Back Test (#275) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 3 769 SPE B Loop Back Test (#276) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 3 1025 Sanity Maze Test (#277) MAJOR /WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 3 1281 (b) Any Dupint Status Query Test (#315) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 6 1537 (c) Any Background Test Query Test (#271) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 3 1793 (d) Any MBUS Time-Out Query Test (#285) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C l r 3 Inter-Dupint Loop Around Test (#280) MAJOR/ WRN ON test dup 1C sh r 3 2049 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates that an unexpected hardware reset has occurred on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. Appropriate action has been taken by the software to prevent malfunction. However, if this type error occurs with regular frequency, the DUPINT circuit pack may need to be replaced. b. There are several possible Aux Data fields for this error, including blank. All indicate loss of contact with the indicated Duplication Interface circuit packs. The following table summarizes the Aux Data fields. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Aux Data Page 10-557 Description 1 or 3 Duplication Interface circuit pack A lost handshaking with Duplication Interface circuit pack B. 2 MTP lost handshaking with the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 221 Duplication Interface circuit pack reported the trouble. 65315 or 65503 Duplication Interface circuit pack A lost contact with Duplication Interface circuit pack B. Blank, 65313, or 65501 If reported against Duplication Interface circuit pack A, Duplication Interface circuit pack A lost handshaking with Maintenance/Tape Processor A. If reported against Duplication Interface circuit pack B, Duplication Interface circuit pack A lost handshaking with Maintenance/Tape Processor B. c. An Aux value of blank or 65317 is valid. The 65317 aux value means the Duplication Interface circuit pack reported the trouble, while the blank means the software detected the trouble. d. This could be caused by mismatched numbers of Processor Interface (TN765) or Packet Control (TN778) circuit packs in the two SPEs or by a defective Duplication Interface (TN772) Circuit Pack. If the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack is defective and becomes part of the Standby SPE, then memory shadowing does not work. Follow the procedures given for the FAIL case of Common Shadow Circuit M-Bus Time-Out Query Test (#285) in the SHDW-CIR section. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-186. Page 10-558 System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD Order of Investigation Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND X D Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test (#273)(a) Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#277) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test (#275) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test (#276) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Administration Terminal Loop Back Test (#274)(a) X X ND Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test (#280) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query Test (#271) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test (#272) X X ND X ND Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-out Query Test (#285) (b) Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) (b) X X ND Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) (b) X X ND SPE Select Switch Query Test (#278) (c) X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Notes: a. When running the Long Test Sequence on Duplication Interface circuit pack A, the results of Test #273 may overwrite the results of Test #274. b. Refer to “SHDW-CIR” (Common Shadow Circuit) for a description of this test. c. Refer to “SPE-SELEC” (SPE Select Switch) for a description of this test. Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query (#271) This test queries the Duplication Interface circuit pack for the results of its background tests. The response indicates the results of the last time the following background tests were run: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-559 ■ ROM Checksum Test: This test verifies the correctness of the Duplication Interface circuit pack firmware. ■ RAM Test: This tests verifies that the RAM on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is functioning properly. Table 10-187. TEST #271 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query Test Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2008 2009 2010 FAIL One or both background tests failed on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. Error Code 2008 means the ROM test failed. Error Code 2009 means the RAM test failed. Error Code 2010 means both tests failed. 1. Follow the procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to reply to handshaking from either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or from Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). Continued on next page Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test (#272) The Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test sets the threshold for the number of bad checksum errors the Duplication Interface circuit pack detects before reporting the problem to maintenance and queries the Duplication Interface circuit pack for the number of checksum errors detected. The error threshold is set to 10. The query causes Duplication Interface circuit pack firmware to clear its bad checksum error counter. This test is run on both circuit packs, but has little meaning on Duplication Interface circuit pack B and should always pass. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-560 Table 10-188. TEST #272 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The Duplication Interface circuit pack is receiving an abnormal number of corrupted messages. 1. First investigate other Duplication Interface circuit pack tests that are not passing. 2. If this is the only test that fails, investigate and resolve all alarms against PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor). 3. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, follow the procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 4. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The Duplication Interface circuit pack has not received any bad messages from either Maintenance/Tape Processor or the other Duplication Interface circuit pack. All serial links are operating fine. Continued on next page Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test (#273) This test is destructive. This test checks the sanity hardware of a Duplication Interface circuit pack. The Duplication Interface circuit pack processor is instructed to allow the on-board circuit pack sanity timer to expire, which should cause the circuit pack to reset itself. The software then allows the Duplication Interface circuit pack 15 seconds to reset. After this time, the Duplication Interface circuit pack is queried for the results of its background tests (see Test #271). If the Duplication Interface circuit Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-561 pack responds to this query, then the reset passes. If performed on Duplication Interface A, this test can cause an SPE interchange to the SPE in the B carrier if the A carrier SPE was active when the test was executed. The B carrier Tone-Clock circuit pack is also selected on Duplication Interface circuit pack A processor reset. This test is run only when demanded by software and can be performed on either Duplication Interface circuit pack. There is no service-disruption when this test is run on Duplication Interface B. Table 10-189. TEST #273 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1037 ABORT The active Tone-Clock circuit pack is currently the one in the A carrier. If the Duplication Interface circuit pack is allowed to be reset at this time, an unscheduled tone/clock switch would take place resulting in a Cold 2 restart. 1. Check for alarms against TONE-BD in the B carrier and refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) to resolve these alarms. 2. When there are no alarms against TONE-BD in the B carrier, force the -one-Clock circuit pack to be active by issuing the set tone-clock b command. 3. Verify the B carrier Tone-Clock circuit pack is active by using the status system command. 4. Rerun the Duplication Interface circuit pack test. 1185 ABORT Only occurs when attempting to reset Duplication Interface A when SPE A is active and SPE A has not been selected by the SPE Select switch. In this case, resetting Duplication Interface A causes a warm start SPE-interchange to SPE B. 1. Issue the reset system interchange command to make SPE A the Standby SPE. 2. Repeat the test. 2018 ABORT Applicable only when testing Duplication Interface A. (1) Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of this error. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-562 Table 10-189. TEST #273 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test — Continued Error Code 2052 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Only occurs when attempting to reset Duplication Interface A. If SPE B is not in Standby Mode, ready to take over, then this test aborts. 1. Resolve all “STBY-SPE” errors and alarms. 2. Use refresh spe command to place SPE B in Standby Mode. 3. Repeat the test. 2000 FAIL The software timed out waiting for Duplication Interface circuit pack to respond to the background test query. 1. Rerun the test. 2. If the test fails with a 2000 again, then deal with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) results first. FAIL The sanity timer circuit on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective. The Duplication Interface circuit pack should be replaced. 1. Follow the procedure for replacing Common Control circuit packs, and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The Duplication Interface circuit pack successfully reset. The Duplication Interface circuit pack may still have problems related to any of the other Duplication Interface circuit pack tests. Follow up on any other test failures. Continued on next page Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Administration Terminal Loop Back Test (#274) This test loops back data through the UART used to communicate with administration terminal. The data is generated by the Duplication Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-563 Table 10-190. TEST #274 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Administration Terminal Loop Back Test Error Code Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective. 1. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A, then the circuit pack must be replaced to restore duplication. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack B, then this failure has no real impact on the system. However, since this Duplication Interface circuit pack can never be used in the A carrier, it should be replaced at some point. 2. Follow the procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs, and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 3. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The administration terminal UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is good. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack A should be able to communicate with the administration terminal. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack B has a good UART. If there are problems bringing up the administration terminal, check the following: 1. Verify the terminal is connected to the connector labeled DOT on the back of carrier A and that the connector is securely fastened. 2. Verify the terminal is set up for 9600 baud. 3. If the terminal still does not work, replace the administration terminal. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-564 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test (#275) This test loops data back through the UART used to communicate with Maintenance/Tape Processor A. The data is generated by the Duplication Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC. Table 10-191. Error Code TEST #275 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective. 1. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A, then the circuit pack must be replaced to restore duplication. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack B, then this failure has no real impact on the system. However, since this Duplication Interface circuit pack can never be used in the A carrier, it should be replaced at some point. 2. Follow general procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs, and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 3. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The SPE A UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is good. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack A should be able to communicate with SPE A. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack B has a good UART. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-565 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test (#276) This test loops back data through the UART used to communicate with Maintenance/Tape Processor B. The data is generated by the Duplication Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC. Table 10-192. Error Code TEST #276 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective. 1. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A, then the circuit pack must be replaced to restore duplication. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack B, then this failure has no real impact on the system. However, since this Duplication Interface circuit pack can never be used in the A carrier, it should be replaced at some point. 2. Replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 3. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or with Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The SPE B UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is good. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack A should be able to communicate with SPE B. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack B has a good UART. Continued on next page Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#277) This test tests the Duplication Interface circuit pack processor’s ability to write through the maze circuit. The Sanity Maze is a piece of circuitry on the Duplication Interface circuit pack that the Duplication Interface circuit pack Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-566 Processor must write through to get access to leads controlled by the Duplication Interface circuit pack (Tone-Clock Select Lead, 80286 Processor circuit pack Select Leads, etc.). This maze circuitry ensures that the processor on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is sane before any of these leads are changed. The Duplication Interface processor is instructed to write bit patterns through the maze circuit. The Duplication Interface processor examines the output of the maze circuit and compares it with the input. Table 10-193. Error Code TEST #277 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The Sanity Maze Circuit or the processor on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective, which implies the Duplication Interface circuit pack can no longer be relied upon to control and support a High or Critical Reliability system. The Duplication Interface circuit pack needs to be replaced. 1. Follow general procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or with Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The Duplication Interface circuit pack Sanity Maze is good. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack can correctly control the SPE Select and Tone-Clock Lead. Continued on next page Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test (#280) This test loops back data through the UART used to communicate with the other Duplication Interface circuit pack. The data is generated by the Duplication Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-567 done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC. Table 10-194. Error Code TEST #280 Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective. 1. Replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack B has failed to reply to handshaking either from Duplication Interface circuit pack A. 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315). PASS The Inter-DUPINT UART on the tested Duplication Interface circuit pack is good. Continued on next page Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) This test is used to detect the presence of Duplication Interface circuit packs A and B. To determine the status of Duplication Interface circuit pack B, a query is sent to the Duplication Interface circuit pack A. To determine the status of Duplication Interface circuit pack A, a query is sent to the Maintenance/Tape Processor on the active carrier. The response to either query indicates the status of the handshake to the appropriate Duplication Interface circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-568 Table 10-195. TEST #315 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT The software timed out waiting for the reply message. 1. Rerun the test. 2. If the message times out again, then continue to the next step. If the query fails with a NO BOARD, then refer to NO BOARD on the next page of this table. 3. No response is being received from the Duplication Interface circuit pack or Maintenance/Tape Processor. If Duplication Interface circuit pack A is under-test, then check for and resolve all alarms against the active PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor). If Duplication Interface circuit pack B is under test, then enter the test dup a system technician command and resolve problems with Test #315 for Duplication Interface circuit pack A first. 4. Rerun the test. If it still aborts, then a problem may exist with one of the serial links. If carrier B is active or Duplication Interface circuit pack B is under test, then the serial link to get to Duplication Interface circuit pack B is being carried by the ICC. Check for damage to the ICC, and verify that all four connectors for the ICC are plugged in. If the ICC has to be replaced, the system must be powered down. 5. If the ICC is not the problem, then that portion of the serial link wired into carrier A and/or carrier B may be defective, and the carrier pack may need to be replaced. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-569 Table 10-195. TEST #315 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The handshake to one of the Duplication Interface circuit packs has stopped. The circuit pack may be defective or communication to the circuit pack is hampered. 1. Look in the Hardware Error Log for error types against TAPE. If TAPE error types are present, resolve them since TAPE error types can cause Test #315 to fail. Refer to TAPE Maintenance documentation for recommended repair strategy. 2. After any TAPE error types are resolved, issue the test duplication-interface command on the suspect Duplication Interface circuit pack. If Test #315 fails on Duplication Interface A, Duplication Interface A is defective. Replace the Duplication Interface A circuit pack. If Test #315 fails on Duplication Interface B, Duplication Interface circuit pack A or Duplication Interface circuit pack B may be defective. In this case, it is necessary to determine which Duplication Interface circuit pack (A or B) is the defective one. To do this, issue the test duplication-interface A command. If Test #280 fails on Duplication Interface A, (and Test #315 has just failed on Duplication Interface B), Duplication Interface circuit pack A is defective and should be replaced. If Test #280 passes on Duplication Interface A (and Test #315 has just failed on Duplication Interface B), replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack B. 3. Reissue the test duplication-interface command on the Duplication Interface circuit pack that was replaced. If Test #315 still fails, check for problems with the Inter-Carrier Cables (ICCs). If any of the ICCs is defective, replace it. 4. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or with Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Follow the FAIL directions above. PASS The tested Duplication Interface circuit pack is present and sane enough to handshake. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board) Page 10-570 E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO DIG800-BD MIN test board PCSS sh MO800DIG-BD DIG800-BD WRN test board PCSS sh MO800DIG-BD 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...). The maintenance strategy for DIG800-BD is the same as the one described for MO-COMBD (MO-XXX-BD). Maintenance testing of the common circuit pack is handled by on-board firmware and SPE controlled tests. Maintenance software queries the firmware for error and alarm information, status, and test results. The firmware automatically reports error conditions that will result in SPE-controlled testing. Board Insertion The switch makes an additional board query if any of the following circuit packs are inserted: Circuit Pack Vintage TN754 49 TN556 49, 80 or greater TN800 any For any of the above initial board up-links, the switch sends queries requesting additional data from the board for administration purposes, while also telling the board the switch software release and the system type. For the native mode, the response to the board query downlink messages consists of several CCMS uplink messages that identify the true board code, vintage, suffix, emulation type, and the number of reserved slots it needs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board) Page 10-571 Hyperactivity The common circuit pack is considered "hyperactive" if the service dispatcher receives 200 up-link messages from the circuit pack in a 10-second period. Since MAPD has 32 ports, the hyperactivity limit is increased to 500 up-link messages per 10seconds. An alarm is issued and the board taken out of service when the limit reaches 400 or when it hits 500 up-link messages in 10 seconds. LED Use The LED Control message 038x requests the Angel to drive the Red, Yellow, and Green LEDs on the face plate of typical port board on or off. On the MAPD, only the Red LED is controlled by this message. Yellow and Green change requests received from the switch by the MAPD drive LCD behavior rather than LED behavior. The switch continues to send the same LED control messages to the MAPD that it currently sends to all other port boards. The MAPD will handle proper interpretation of these messages. You should note that the PC on the MAPD, as well as the switch itself, can control the LEDs and the LCD on the MAPD. Port Administration In administration without hardware, the switch allows administration of up to 32 MAPD ports of any port type. If the port type later reported by the board does not match the existing type, the switch assumes the board is a MAPD board with a different configuration and rejects the board. MAPD_DCP_STA and MAPD_ ASAI_STA are the only two types of terminals are allowed on a MAPD board. Therefore, while administering ports on MAPD using add station form, it will allow only the terminals mentioned above. NOTE: Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also DIG-LINE maintenance documentation for related line information. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot) E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot) See ASAI-RES. Page 10-572 Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Page 10-573 E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Initial Command to Run1 Alarm Level Full Name of MO E-DIG-STA MINOR test port PCSSpp l Emulated Digital St. E-DIG-STA WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Emulated Digital St. 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...). There are 4 tests in the Emulated Digital Line station maintenance test sequence and only one test path in the test sequence. Once the test sequence is started, all tests in the test sequence are executed. E-DIG-ST maintenance monitors and tests ports on the TN800 MAPD circuit pack and the hardware connected to those ports for lines administered as a digital station. These include stations with an emulated digital voice terminal and stations with an emulated digital voice terminal and a linked data module. Stand-alone data modules and data adaptors in stand-alone mode are not supported by the TN800 circuit pack. Circuit pack maintenance is covered by E-DIG-BD. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-196. Error Type Digital Line Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 18 (a) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WNG OFF rel port PCSSpp 130 (b) None WNG ON test port PCSSpp sh 1793 (c) Voice and Control Local Loop Test (#13) MIN/ WNG2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2049 (d) NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) MIN/ WNG2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2305 (e) 32770 None Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-196. Page 10-574 Digital Line Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data 3840 (f) 40965 None 3841 (g) 41029 None 2304 (h) Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value None Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. Maintenance personnel has busied out the port in question. Make sure that the port is released from busyout by using the release port PCSSpp command. b. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. c. The local loop test failed. Each failure increments the counter by 1 when the local loop test fails. The counter is decremented when the loop test passes. When the counter reaches a threshold of 3, an on-board MINOR alarm is raised. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No technician action is necessary. d. The NPE Cross talk test failed. The counter is incremented by 1 when the NPE Cross talk test fails. The counter is decremented by 1 when the NPE Cross talk test passes. When the counter reaches a threshold of 3, an on-board MINOR alarm is raised and the board is taken out of service. e. The station went off-hook while it was in the ready-for-service state. Use the status station command to determine the state of the station. The off-hook should have moved the station to ready-for-service. No technician action is necessary. f. No terminal is connected to the Digital Line board. No maintenance action is required. g. The circuit pack’s message buffer is full. This may be caused by having many display phones with heavy traffic connected to the circuit pack. No action is necessary. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Page 10-575 h. Internal system error; no action is necessary. The error counters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 do not have any significance for this MO. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13) X D NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) X ND Station Lamp Updates Test (#16) X ND Order of Investigation 1. Short Test Sequence D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Crosstalk testing occurs on both the primary information channel (voice) and the secondary information channel (data) associated with each digital station port. If this test fails on either channel, the station and the DTDM are taken out-of-service. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-197. Error Code 1 Page 10-576 TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may not have been available or the port was busy during the test. 1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for this test. You will have to wait until the port is idle. 2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2 ABORT During testing of DTDM, system resources may not have been available or he port was busy during the test. 1. Check if port is being used. If possible, disconnect by toggling the disconnect button on DTDM. Retry the command after 1 minute. ! CAUTION: This action drops the call in progress. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system is under heavy traffic conditions or has time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-197. Error Code 1003 Page 10-577 TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system is oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors are out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. 1. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. 2. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. 3. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1020 ABORT Test disabled by background testing. Use the status station command to determine when the station is available for testing. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.. 1 2 FAIL The Network Processing Element (NPE) of the tested port is transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. Failure code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the primary channel. Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the secondary channel. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. 1. To ensure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test a maximum of 10 times. 2. If complaints persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Page 10-578 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13) These tests check the information and control channels between the Switch Processing Element (SPE) and the Digital Line port circuit. The SPE sends a message to loop around both the information and control channels for the port. First, the primary information (voice) channel loopback test sends a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack on the primary information channel time slot and receives the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector. While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel Loop Around Test sends four different transparent patterns to the on-board microprocessor, receives them back, and compares them. The Loop Around Test for the secondary information (data) channel is the same as the primary information channel loop around test and is performed only if a DTDM is administered. Next, a Conference Test checks the primary information channel. This test is the same as Conference Test #6. The four tests will generate only one resulting value (Pass, Fail, or Abort). If any test fails or aborts, the test sequence stops. Table 10-198. Error Code TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-198. Error Code 1002 Page 10-579 TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system is under heavy traffic conditions or it has time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system is oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors are out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-198. Error Code Page 10-580 TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 7 FAIL Conference Test failed on primary channel. In some cases, users may not notice disruption in service. In extreme cases, conferencing feature may not work at all. 14 FAIL The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port. 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and digital circuit pack is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use the port. This could disrupt other users. 16 FAIL The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly and the test still fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack. PASS The test passed, and all channels are transmitting properly. 1. To ensure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to 10 times. 2. If noisy connections for voice or corrupted data for data transfer persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page Station Lamp Updates Test (#16) This test lights all lamps on the terminal as specified. The lamp updates will run only if the station is in-service. The status of the station is checked and the lamp updates are blocked from taking place if the station is not in the in-service state. This test does not affect the status of the Message Waiting lamp. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-199. Error Code Page 10-581 TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 ABORT System technician may have busied out the port. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, then release the port with the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3 ABORT Station may be in ready-for-service or out-of-service state. 1. Use the status station command to verify state of station. 2. Make sure the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port is busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1392 ABORT This is currently a TTI port, and the test cannot execute on it. 1. Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command (the display shows that the port is a TTI port) or the list config command (the display shows a t for the port). 2. If either list config or display port indicates that the port is not a TTI port, escalate the problem. If both commands indicate that the port is a TTI port, the abort is correct, and no action is necessary. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line) Table 10-199. Error Code Page 10-582 TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The message to light all of the station lamps was sent successfully to the port. 1. Observe the station lamps being lit when running the test. If all lamps do not light successfully, the other Digital Line test results may indicate related problems that will not allow the lamps to light. 2. Investigate by using other Digital Line port tests and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EMG-XFER Page 10-583 EMG-XFER Emergency Transfer (SCC Cabinets) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO EMG-XFER MAJOR test environment P Emergency Transfer EMG-XFER WARNING test environment P Emergency Transfer 1. Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. The system provides the ability to cut designated analog phones through to CO trunks if the switch cannot provide even minimal phone service. This ability is known as Emergency Transfer. Each port network PPN and EPN can have a separate Emergency Transfer capability. The EMG-XFER MO tracks the control of Emergency Transfer. There is one EMG-XFER MO for each port network. Emergency Transfer can be controlled by the system or can be manually controlled within each port network via the Emergency Transfer switch(es) which is (are) located on the Processor circuit pack and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If the Emergency Transfer switch or switches in a high or critical reliability system on the Processor circuit pack or EPN Maintenance circuit pack are in a manual position, the system cannot change the state of Emergency Transfer within that port network. A manual ON position (to the right) generates a Major alarm. A manual OFF position (to the left) generates a Warning alarm. Unless a technician is currently working on the system, the switches should be left in the auto position (). On a high or critical reliability system, the switches on BOTH Processor circuit packs must be in the ON position to manually invoke Emergency Transfer. However, if EITHER switch is in the OFF position, Emergency Transfer cannot be controlled by the system and is in the manual OFF state. The status system system technician command displays the current state of the Emergency Transfer switches in the system. Valid states for the switches are: manual ON, manual OFF, auto ON (the switch is in the auto position and the system has invoked Emergency Transfer), or (the switch is in the auto position and the system has invoked Emergency Transfer), or auto OFF (the switch is in the auto position and the system has not invoked Emergency Transfer). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EMG-XFER Page 10-584 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-200. Error Type Emergency Transfer Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 1 Any Emergency Transfer Query (#124) MAJOR ON test environment P r 3 257 0 Emergency Transfer Query (#124) WARNING ON test environment P r 3 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Single Carrier System Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Power Query Test (#79) (a) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (b) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (c) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (c) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to “DC-POWER” for a description of this test. b. Refer to “EXT-DEV” for a description of this test. c. Refer to “RING-GEN” for a description of this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EMG-XFER Page 10-585 NOTE: These tests only show up in the test sequence if there is a TN768 Tone-Clock Board in the port network being tested. Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) This test queries the hardware for the state of the Emergency Transfer switch (or switches in a High or Critical Reliability system) and reports the result. If the switch(es) is (are) in a position where the system software can control Emergency Transfer, then the test passes. If the switch(es) is (are) in a position where the system software cannot control Emergency Transfer, then the test fails. In the PPN, the Maintenance/Tape Processor controls Emergency Transfer and, in the EPN, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack controls Emergency Transfer. The system software does not have control of Emergency Transfer within a cabinet if the switch(es) is (are) in the manual ON or manual OFF state for that cabinet. Table 10-201. Error Code 1000 TEST #124 Emergency Transfer Query Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Resolve all DC-POWER alarms. Then, repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Repeat the test. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL Emergency Transfer is manually turned OFF via the Emergency Transfer switch(es). 2 FAIL Emergency Transfer is manually turned ON via the Emergency Transfer switch(es). 1. Place the switch (or switches in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system) in the AUTO position. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EMG-XFER Table 10-201. Error Code Page 10-586 TEST #124 Emergency Transfer Query Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/Recommendation The system software has control of Emergency Transfer within this port network. If Emergency Transfer is invoked, then there can be a Major alarm in the system that is invoking Emergency Transfer. The following table lists the error types and MOs that may cause Emergency Transfer. If any or all of these errors appear in the log, then refer to the appropriate Maintenance documentation and resolve those problems first. If none of these errors appear in the log, then check the Emergency Transfer hardware. Specifically, on the EPN, if Emergency Transfer is invoked while call processing is permitted, verify that the current limiter card (982LS) is in the correct slot on the backplane. If the current limiter card is not in the correct slot, move it to the correct location and rerun this test. Continued on next page Table 10-202. Test #124 Error Log Entries That Cause Emergency Transfer MO Name Error Type Aux Data SW-CTL 1 SW-CTL 2 TONE-BD 1 0 TONE-BD 2305 0 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit) Page 10-587 EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit) MO Name (in Alarm Log) EPN-SNTY Alarm Level None Initial Command to Run None Full Name of MO EPN Sanity Audit The EPN Sanity Audit feature enhances the system’s ability to recover from failure conditions that disable an entire EPN. In such situations, not only is the affected EPN unable to provide service to the system, but the system itself has not detected the condition. The EPN Sanity Audit feature recognizes an EPN as unable to provide service when the software cannot receive control messages from EPN circuit packs. When such a failure is detected by the EPN Sanity Audit, a sequence of recovery actions is triggered to restore the EPN to service. For a Standard system, the recovery sequence is as follows: 1. TDM Bus Switch 2. EPN Reset For a duplicated system, the recovery sequence is as follows: 1. TDM Bus Switch 2. Expansion Interface Link Switch 3. Tone/Clock Switch within the EPN 4. EPN Reset The EPN Sanity Audit feature activates only when all existing maintenance operations have failed to detect the EPN problem. Therefore, the EPN Sanity Audit serves as a safety net for the EPN. NOTE: It is not clear why certain types of EPN problems activate this feature. Thus, error log entries related to these problems do not specify which hardware to replace. The error log entries only indicate that some drastic recovery action occurred due to an unknown problem. However, clues as to the root cause of the EPN outage may be present in the Error Logs and the Alarm Logs of the following MOs: Switch Control (SW-CTL), TDM Bus (TDM-BUS), Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF), and TDM Bus Clock (TDM-CLK). Therefore, it is recommended that you refer to these maintenance sections during trouble shooting operations. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit) Page 10-588 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-203. EPN-SNTY Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test 0 Any 8801 (a) Any None 8802 (b) Any None 8803 (c) Any None 8804 (d) Any None 9901 (e) Any None 9902 (f) Any None 9903 (g) Any None 0 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value None Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control messages and the control channel of the TDM Bus in the EPN has been switched as part of the recovery procedure. b. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control messages, and an EI link switch is invoked as part of the recovery procedure. c. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control messages and the EPN Tone-Clock is switched as part of the recovery procedure. d. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control messages and the EPN has been reset as part of the recovery procedure. e. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control messages, but recovers after the control channels of the TDM Bus in the EPN are switched. f. This error occurs whenever EPN is unable to send up-link control messages, but recovers after the Expansion Interface Links to the EPN are switched. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit) Page 10-589 g. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control messages, but recovers after the active Tone-Clock in the EPN is switched. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ERR-LOG (Error Log) Page 10-590 ERR-LOG (Error Log) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level ERR-LOG none Initial Command to Run none Full Name of MO Error Log Functional Description The ERR-LOG MO is responsible for the sanity of the Alarm Log, the Hardware Error Log, and the Software Error Log. If an inconsistency is detected in any one of these logs, all logs are re-initialized and a hardware error is logged against ERR-LOG indicating the time of inconsistency. There are no tests and no alarms for the Error Log MO. This MO exists solely for the purpose of allowing errors to be logged against it. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 Any Any Any Any none 510 (a) Any none none none none 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates that an inconsistency was detected in either the Alarm Log, the Hardware Error Log, or the Software Error Log. To recover from this error, all of the logs were cleared and re-initialized. Any alarms that were active at the time of this error have been cleared. There is no associated test for this error. If the error persists, escalate the problem. The Aux data value indicates when the inconsistency was found: 0 Found during a periodic audit of the Error Log 1 Found after an extended reboot 2 Found after a reboot 3 Found after a Reset System 3 (Cold_1) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ERR-LOG (Error Log) Page 10-591 4 Found after a Reset System 2 (Cold_2) 16 Found after a Warm Start 100 Found after an internal software audit Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) Page 10-592 ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ETR-PT(a) MAJOR test port PCSSpp sh Enhanced Tone Receiver Port ETR-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp sh Enhanced Tone Receiver Port ETR-PT WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Enhanced Tone Receiver Port 1. P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 - 3 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). NOTE: Replacing the tone/clock circuit pack requires a special procedure which is described in the documentation for TONE-BD. This section also describes the LED display for this board. The TN2182 is a combined Tone Generator/Tone Detector board. It provides 8 Enhanced Tone receiver (ETR) ports. Each of these ports provides the functions previously found individually on DTMR-PTs, GPTD-PTs and CLAS-PTs ports. Thus each port on the TN2182 may be used for any tone detection function that was previously done by TN748, TN420 or TN744 Tone detection boards. The TN2182 provides Mu-law or A-law tone detection capability. Since the TN2182 also provides Tone/Clock function only one (or two if your system is duplicated) TN2182 circuit packs may be present in a port network. Thus if more tone detection resources are needed, the additional resources must be provided by TN748, TN420 or TN744 circuit packs. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-204. Error Type 1 18 Enhanced Tone Receiver Port (ETR-PT) Error Log Entries Aux Data any Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 2 busyout port WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) Table 10-204. Page 10-593 Enhanced Tone Receiver Port (ETR-PT) Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data 257 (b) 17666 Tone Detection Audit Update Test (#43) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 3 513 (c) any Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) MAJOR/ MINOR (a) ON test port PCSSpp r 3 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Continued on next page Notes: a. There are two possible alarm levels for this error type: major alarm and minor alarm. These alarm levels are dependent on the administered thresholds for TTR, CPTR and CCTR. Each ETR port is capable of operating an any of these. A major alarm is raised if the total number of ports capable of TTR, CPTR or CCTR detection currently in-service is less than or equal to 1/2 of the administered TTR, CPTR or CCTR threshold number. Otherwise, a minor alarm is raised. In either case, run the short test sequence against the port (ETR-PT) and follow the error code procedures for the individual tests. The threshold number of ports for service is administered using the change system-parameters maintenance command. For details, refer to ‘‘Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures". b. The ETR-PT lost its translation. Testing the ETR-PT is sufficient to reload its translation. If testing the ETR port does not clear the error, then the TN2182 circuit pack containing the defective ETR port should be replaced at a time when it is convenient to remove a clock board from the system. Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. c. This error indicates the (ETR-PT) Enhanced Tone Receiver port is having problems detecting touch tones, call progress or MFC tones. If this error type is persistently logged, then the TN2182 circuit pack containing the defective ETR-PT should be replaced at a time it is convenient to remove a clock board from the system. Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. d. The ETR-PT lost its translation. Testing the ETR-PT is sufficient to reload its translation. If testing the ETR port does not clear the error, then the TN2182 circuit pack containing the defective ETR port should be replaced Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) Page 10-594 at a time when it is convenient to remove a clock board from the system. Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tone Detection Verification Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) X X ND Tone Detection Audit/Update Test (#43) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) This test checks out a single ETR port in the touch-tone receiver mode MFC tone detection/generation mode and general purpose tone detection mode. During the first portion of the test, the touch-tone receiver mode is tested. Then general purpose call progress and maintenance tones are tested and lastly MFC tones are tested. Table 10-205. Error Code TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation none ABORT The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test OR there was an Internal System Error. 1 ABORT The system could not allocate all the resources needed to test the tones. 1001 ABORT The system was unable to put the ETR-PT in the appropriate mode to test it. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) Table 10-205. Error Code 1002 Page 10-595 TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test connection. This situation could occur when the system is heavily loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded, then test the TDM-BUS via the test tdm command. Refer to TDM-BUS for details. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a Tone-Clock for the test connection. This may be caused by a heavy load on the system or by a faulted Tone-Clock. 1. Check to see if there are any alarms against the Tone-Clock in the port network where the test aborted. If so refer to the recommended procedures for TONE-BD or TONE-PT. 2. If a new Tone-Clock has been inserted, allow about 1 minute for maintenance to run on the newly inserted circuit pack. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Circuit Pack’s response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2006 ABORT This abort code indicates that the active Tone-Clock circuit pack or a Tone Detector circuit pack may not be functioning properly. On G3r V2 systems, this abort can also be caused by a mismatch between the companding mode administered for the system and that of the Tone Detector circuit pack. 1. [G3r V2] Make sure that the companding mode of the system matches that of the Tone Detector: mu-law for TN748; A-law for TN420. 2. Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network with the test tone-clock PC command and refer to the TONE-BD section for failures. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) Table 10-205. Error Code 1-122 Page 10-596 TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation DTMF digits were not detected correctly. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but capacity will be reduced. To restore performance to normal, replace the circuit pack containing the defective ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port). Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. 102 FAIL 2225 Hz Modem Answer Tone was not detected correctly. This will impact call-classification operation. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system can still operate properly but capacity will be reduced. In order to restore performance to normal, replace the circuit pack containing the defective port. Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. 130 FAIL Forward or Backward MFC signals were not correctly generated or detected. This will impact MFC calls. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system can still operate properly but capacity will be reduced. In order to restore performance to normal, replace the TN2182 circuit pack containing the defective ETR-PT. Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. PASS Tone Detection Verification is successful. The ETR Port is able to detect/generate all necessary tones. Continued on next page Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) A Digital Signal Processor sanity audit is performed on the ETR-PT. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port) Table 10-206. Error Code none Page 10-597 TEST #43 Tone Detector Audit/Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test. 1. Wait 1 minute, and repeat the command a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Hardware audit failed. 1. Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command. 2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating properly but system capacity will be reduced. In order to restore system performance to normal, replace the circuit pack containing the defective ETR-PT. Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack. PASS The ETR Port has passed the sanity inquiry. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-598 EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO EXP-INTF MAJOR test board PCSS sh Expansion Interface Circuit Pack EXP-INTF MINOR test board PCSS sh Expansion Interface Circuit Pack EXP-INTF WARNING test board PCSS sh Expansion Interface Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number 1, 2, or 3, C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth). ! CAUTION: A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart, along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in resolving problems relevant to the Packet Path of the TN570 Expansion Interface. Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" in addition to the relevant MO documentation. The TN570 or the TN776 Expansion Interface circuit pack is used to provide connectivity between the Processor Port Network (PPN) and either Expansion Port Network (EPN) (network 2 or 3) or between the two Expansion Port Networks. The TN776 Expansion Interface is used in G1 systems to provide connectivity between the Processor Port Network and the (single) Expansion Port Network. This connectivity is provided via a 32 Mbps fiber optic cable. The TN776 supports circuit-switched connections and the control channel to and from the EPN. The TN570 also supports packet-switched connections for those systems that use the Packet Bus. The TN776 and TN570 circuit packs must only be used in matched pairs. A TN776 circuit pack does not function if connected via fiber to a TN570 circuit pack and vice versa. The EPN(s), if present, are always under the control of the TN777 Processor circuit pack in the PPN. Therefore, if the Expansion Interface circuit packs to the EPN are not functioning correctly, service may be unavailable in that EPN, but is available in the PPN. If the Expansion Interface circuit packs between EPNs are not functioning properly, there is service in all networks, but connectivity between EPN and EPN is not available. A system with EPN(s) may have one or two pairs of Expansion Interface circuit packs connecting any two cabinets. If two pairs exist, one pair operates as the Active pair and provides the required connectivity. The second pair acts as a hot Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-599 Standby. When a problem arises on the Active pair, the Standby pair may be called upon to take over and provide continuous service with stable calls being preserved. The Expansion Interface circuit packs must be inserted into fixed slots. The valid slots for Expansion Interface circuit packs are: 1A01, 1A02, 1B01, 1B02, 2A01, 2A02, 2B02, 2B03, 3A01, 3A02, 3B02, or 3B03. It is also a requirement that the fiber cables be connected according to the following table: Table 10-207. 1. Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Connections EXP-INTF in slot connected to EXP-INTF in slot 1A01 2A01 Network 1 to Network 2 1B01 2B02 Network 1 to Network 2 (Duplicated Link) 1A021 3A01 Network 1 to Network 3 1B021 3B02 Network 1 to Network 3 (Duplicated Link) 2A02 1 3A02 Network 2 to Network 3 2B03 1 3B03 Network 2 to Network 3 (Duplicated Link) Description G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386 only. NOTE: If Expansion Interface circuit packs are connected in any other way, they do not function properly. The Active Expansion Interface Link may be selected by system technician via the set expansion-link PCSS command, where PCSS is the address of either Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. System Technician may prevent the system from switching Expansion Interface Links by using the busyout board PCSS command, where PCSS is the address of either Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. These two commands are described later in greater detail in the "Expansion Interface Link Switch Command" section (located at the end of this EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation). A G3MT terminal connected to an EPN [G3i] provides the same maintenance and administrative capabilities as the local administration terminal, but at a slower transmission speed. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack also provides Emergency Transfer and environmental monitoring functions for the EPN. The abbreviations have the following meanings: ■ PROC The TN773 Processor circuit pack (the Active TN773 Processor circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system) ■ NETCON The SW-CTL portion of the Network Control circuit pack (the Active Network Control circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-600 ■ TDM BUS The Time Division Multiplex Bus that connects circuit packs within a cabinet ■ EXP-INTF The Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit pack ■ FIBER The optical fiber used to connect Expansion Interface circuit packs ■ MAINT EPN Maintenance (MAINT) circuit pack ■ PKT-BUS The Packet Bus used to carry ISDN-BRI signalling information ■ MGR 1 The local administration terminal To determine which Expansion Interface Link is active and which is standby for each Expansion Interface pair, the status system command can be used. Alternately, visual inspection shows that the Active Expansion Interface circuit packs have the yellow LED on solid or blink a pattern two seconds on, 200 milliseconds off. The Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs have the yellow LEDs off. Condition LED on LED off Fiber Out-of-Frame (a) 0.1 second 0.1 second In frame, No Neighbor (b) 0.5 second 0.5 second Expansion Interface Active (c) 2 second 0.2 second Expansion Interface Active (d) solid on never off Expansion Interface Standby (e) never on solid off Notes: a. This flashing code corresponds to error codes 769 and 770 from the Hardware Error Log and indicates a failure of Test #238. These error codes are usually accompanied by error code 1281 (no Expansion Interface detected on opposite end of fiber). This condition may be caused by the absence of the opposite end Expansion Interface circuit pack, a broken or missing fiber, or a missing lightwave transceiver on either Expansion Interface circuit pack. b. This flashing code corresponds to error code 1281 from the Hardware Error Log and indicates a failure of Test #237. This condition is usually due to a failed Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber. c. This is the normal state for an EPN Active Expansion Interface circuit pack that is also the bus master in the EPN. d. This is the normal state for an Active Expansion Interface circuit pack that is not the bus master. It is also the state of the TN776 Expansion Interface circuit pack immediately after circuit pack initialization when the system has not yet assigned a role to it (that is, Active or Standby). To distinguish between these two situations, use the status system command. If the link DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-601 which contains this Expansion Interface circuit pack is in-service (up), the Expansion Interface circuit pack is active; if it is out-of-service (down), the Expansion Interface circuit pack is neither active nor standby. e. This is the normal state for a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. It is also the state of the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack immediately after circuit pack initialization when the system has not yet assigned a role to it (that is, Active or Standby). To distinguish between these two situations, use the status system command. If the link which contains this Expansion Interface circuit pack is in-service (up), the Expansion Interface circuit pack is standby; if it is out-of-service (down), the Expansion Interface circuit pack is neither active nor standby. When testing Expansion Interface circuit packs to investigate problems, tests should always be run on both circuit packs of an Expansion Link. This provides a better indication of where a problem is located. Hardware errors for all Expansion Interface circuit packs (EXP-INTF) may be displayed by using the category "infc" on the Display Errors form. In the EPN, the EPN TN775 Maintenance (MAINT) circuit pack monitors the sanity of the Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack should cycle between sane and insane several times, the Maintenance circuit pack holds the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset. If a new Expansion Interface circuit pack is installed in the EPN, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack should be removed because it may attempt to hold the new Expansion Interface circuit pack reset. The Maintenance circuit pack may be reinstalled after the Expansion Interface circuit pack has been inserted and the Expansion Interface circuit pack’s red LED has gone off. The Active Expansion Link is also involved in synchronization between the two cabinets. The Expansion Interface circuit pack reports slip errors if the two cabinets are not correctly synchronized. When diagnosing synchronization problems, the Expansion Interface circuit packs should be examined as a possible cause. Relationship Between Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit Packs The Expansion Interface fiber link depends on the system clock that is provided by the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack on each network. (See TDM-CLK and TONE-BD Maintenance documentation.) Each Expansion Interface circuit pack transmits over the fiber at a rate derived from the system clock on its network. If the Active Tone-Clock is defective to the point where the system clock frequency it produces is out of the specified range ("out of spec"), an Expansion Interface Link might go down even though the Expansion Interface circuit packs are healthy. In a High or Critical Reliability system, both links could go down if there is a defective Active Tone-Clock. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-602 Whether or not a link goes down, depends on certain characteristics of the Expansion Interface circuit packs. An Expansion Interface circuit pack should not be replaced if the link on which it resides goes down because of a defective Active Tone-Clock circuit pack. The defective Tone-Clock circuit pack should be replaced instead. The Expansion Interface circuit packs are more sensitive to a defective system clock than the rest of the components of the system. Therefore, testing of the Tone-Clock circuit pack might not reveal a problem. The symptoms of the problem in which an invalid system clock causes an Expansion Link to go down are as follows: 1. If the Active PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing an invalid system clock: a. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks quickly. (Fiber Out-of-Frame condition). If the EPN is up, Test #238 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit pack. b. The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks slowly. (In-frame, No Neighbor condition). Test #237 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit pack, but Test #238 passes. 2. If the EPN Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing an invalid system clock: a. The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks quickly (Fiber Out-of-Frame condition). Test #238 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit pack. b. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks slowly (In-frame, No Neighbor condition). If the EPN is in-service, Test #237 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit pack, but Test #238 passes. These symptoms can also be the result of other problems (for example, one half of the fiber being unable to transmit data). If the system exhibits these symptoms, execute the following procedure: 1. Verify that the EPN stays down for at least one minute. If the Expansion Interface Link comes back in service after a short time, without switching the Active Tone-Clock, the problem probably was the on-line synchronization source became invalid (see SYNC Maintenance documentation for more information). However, if the Expansion Interface Link(s) has not come back into service after one minute, the synchronization source is not the cause of the problem. Proceed to Step 2. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-603 2. Check for errors via the display errors command with the Category field set to "tone" and the Active alarms field set to "n." Some of the alarms on EPN objects might have been resolved if the EPN went down. Refer to the appropriate MO Maintenance documentation for descriptions of any of the errors occurring at about the same time as the EXP-LINK errors. Resolve any active alarms. Also, if Error Type 18 was logged against the SYNC MO when the EPN went down, the problem was probably that the synchronization on-line reference became invalid. Since reference switching was disabled, the Tone-Clock did not switch from the invalid reference. Therefore, the Tone-Clock circuit pack put out a system clock that was "out of spec." Issue the enable synchronization-switch command. If the EPN is down, reseat the Tone-Clock circuit packs on the EPN. This action should restore the EPN to service. Execute Steps 3 and 4 in the order most convenient to you and least destructive to the customer. 3. Check if the fiber optic cable is transmitting properly via the following procedure on one of the out-of-service links: a. Carefully record the symptoms (yellow LED pattern and tests failing) that were occurring on the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack and the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. Clearly indicate which symptoms are occurring on which Expansion Interface circuit pack. ! WARNING: Before proceeding, note which is the current transmit fiber and which is the current receive fiber for proper reconnection. b. Disconnect the transmit and receive fiber pair from the lightwave transceiver on the back of the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack slot (see Figure 10-30 on page 10-657). c. Connect what was formerly the transmit fiber to the receive jack. d. Connect what was formerly the receive fiber to the transmit jack. e. Perform Steps b, c, and d on the opposite end of the fiber and the lightwave transceiver on the back of the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack slot. NOTE: If it is more convenient for you, execute Steps b, c, and d on the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack first. f. If the symptoms which were formerly occurring on the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack are now occurring on the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack and vice versa, the fiber is defective and should be replaced. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-604 4. Determine if the problem is due to a defective Active Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to the preceding list of symptoms to decide which network contains the suspect Active Tone-Clock. See Warning. ! WARNING: If you remove the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack that is active or that was active when the EPN was last in-service, then the 2A/3A Tone-Clock circuit pack becomes the Active Tone-Clock. This characteristic can be deceiving. Replacing or reseating the Active EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack might restore the Expansion Interface Links temporarily. However, if the 2B/3B Tone-Clock circuit pack was really the source of the problem and not the Expansion Interface circuit pack, then the Expansion Interface Link(s) goes down again the next time a Tone-Clock switch to the 2B/3B Tone-Clock is attempted (probably when the scheduled Tone-Clock switch occurs). ! WARNING: If, after all the Expansion Interface Links are restored, you suspect the problem might have been due to a defective Tone-Clock circuit pack, switch to this Tone-Clock at an appropriate time. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack was the cause of the problem and the same Expansion Interface circuit packs are in place, the same Expansion Interface Link(s) goes down again. a. On a High or Critical Reliability system in which the network containing the suspect Tone-Clock circuit pack is in-service: Switch to the Standby Tone-Clock on this network. If the suspect Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective, the Expansion Interface Link(s) should be restored to service at this point. Switching back to the defective Tone-Clock should make the same Expansion Interface Link(s) go out-of-service. Such a Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective and should be replaced as soon as possible. If switching Tone-Clocks does not bring up the EPN, then this Tone-Clock is not the source of the problem. Make sure to switch back to the original Tone-Clock. ! WARNING: If the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack is left as the Standby Tone-Clock, then a scheduled Tone-Clock switch causes the same Expansion Link(s) to go out-of-service again. b. On a system in which the EPN containing the suspect Tone-Clock circuit pack is out-of-service: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-605 Replace the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack on this network. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the Active Tone-Clock is the Tone-Clock circuit pack whose yellow LED is: 1) blinking and 2) blinking slower if both Tone-Clocks have blinking yellow LEDs. If the Expansion Interface Link(s) comes up after replacing this Tone-Clock circuit pack, then this Tone-Clock circuit pack should be replaced as soon as possible. See Warning. ! WARNING: If the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack is left as the Standby Tone-Clock, then a scheduled Tone-Clock switch causes the same EPN to go out-of-service again. If replacing the Active Tone-Clock did not bring up the Expansion Interface Link(s), then this Tone-Clock circuit pack is not the source of the problem. c. On a standard system in which the PPN contains the suspect Tone-Clock circuit pack: Replace the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack at a time when bringing down the system is most convenient to the customer. ! WARNING: Replacing the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack stops call processing on that network and also brings down stable calls. This action eventually causes a Reset System 2 (Cold 2 restart). If replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack restores the Expansion Interface Link(s), then the Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective and should be replaced. Otherwise, the problem is not with the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack. Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Procedure This procedure is to be used when an Expansion Interface circuit pack cannot be tested by software. This is usually when the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN and the EPN is down. A spare length of fiber jumper cable is required for this procedure. If this procedure is run on both Expansion Interface circuit packs of a link, and both check out fine, then the failure is most likely in the fiber itself if neither Expansion Interface circuit pack is busied out, but the link remains inactive. 1. Busyout the Expansion Interface circuit pack using the busyout board PCSS command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-606 2. Disconnect the transmit and receive fiber pair from the lightwave transceiver on the back of the Expansion Interface circuit pack slot. Note which is the transmit fiber and which is the receive fiber for proper reconnection at the end of this procedure. 3. Using a spare fiber jumper cable, interconnect the transmit and receive jacks of the lightwave transceiver as shown in Figure 10-30 on the following page. 4. Go to the front of the cabinet and inspect the yellow LED. ■ If the yellow LED is on steady, this Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are functioning properly. ■ If the yellow LED is off, reseat the circuit pack. For the TN776, if the yellow LED comes on steady after the red LED has gone off, the Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are functioning properly. For the TN570 [G1V5], if the yellow LED is off steady after the red and green LEDs have gone off, the Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are functioning properly. ■ If the yellow LED flashes on at a rate of once per second, the Expansion Interface circuit pack or transceiver should be replaced. ■ If the yellow LED flashes on at a rate of five times per second, the Expansion Interface circuit pack or the lightwave transceiver may need replacement. This condition may also be due to a faulty system clock on the network containing this Expansion Interface circuit pack. Refer to the procedure described in the preceding "Relationship Between Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit Packs" on page 10-651 section for further details. 5. Replace faulty component(s) and reconnect the original fiber. Be sure to reconnect the fibers properly as noted in Step 3. 6. Release Expansion Interface circuit pack with the release board PCSS command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-607 BACK SKIN OF CABINET LIGHTWAVE TRANSCEIVER Tx Rx FIBER JUMPER Figure 10-30. Interconnection of Lightwave Transceiver Transmit/Receive Jacks Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-208. Error Type 0 1 1 Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Aux Data Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test board PCSS Any Expansion Interface Local TDM Loop Around Test (#240) MAJ ON test board PCSS r 2 Expansion Interface Local TDM Loop Around Test (#240) MAJ ON test board PCSS r 2 busyout board PCSS WNG OFF release board PCSS 2 18 (a) Associated Test 0 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-208. Error Type 23 (b) Page 10-608 Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data 0 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board None WNG OFF 125 (c) None MIN ON 131 (d) None MINOR/ WNG2 OFF Test to Clear Value 257 (e) Any None MINOR/ WNG2 OFF 513 (f) 5-7 None MAJ ON 769 113 Expansion Interface FOOF Query Test (#238) WRN OFF test board PCSS r 1 Expansion Interface FOOF Query Test (#238 WRN OFF test board PCSS r 1 Expansion Interface Control Channel Test (#316) MAJ ON test board PCSS r 1 1281 Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test (#237) MINOR/ WNG2 OFF test board PCSS r 1 1537 Expansion Interface 2-way Transmission Test (#241) MAJ OFF test board PCSS r 4 1538 (g) None MIN ON 1793 Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test (#242) MAJ ON test board PCSS l r 1 reset board PCSS r 1 770 1025 Any 2049 (h) Any Reset Test (#336) MIN ON 2305 (i) 118 None WRN OFF 25611 (j) Any None MIN ON 1 Any None MIN ON 1 3073 Any Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589) MIN OFF test board PCSS rep 3 30741 (l) 2 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589) MINOR/ WRN2 OFF test board PCSS rep 3 30751 (l) 1 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589) MINOR/ WRN2 OFF test board PCSS rep 3 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589) MINOR/ WRN2 OFF test board PCSS rep 3 None WRN ON 2817 (k) 30761 33301 (m) Any Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-208. Error Type Page 10-609 Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 3585 (n) 0 None WRN OFF 3841 (o) Any None MIN OFF (See Note q.) 3842 (p) Any None MIN OFF (See Note q.) 10000 (r) 0 None 10001 (s) 0 None 10002 (t) 0 None 10003 (u) 0 None 10004 (v) 0 None 11000 (w) 0 None 11000 (x) 2 None 11000 (y) 3 None 11000 (z) 4 None 11000 (aa) 5 None 11000 (ab) 8 None 11001 (ac) 0 None Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. Expansion Interface (EI) circuit pack has been busied out by system technician. b. EI circuit pack has been administered on the Circuit Pack form, but has not been physically inserted into the system. Insert the circuit pack. c. A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the change circuit-pack command to re-administer this slot to match the circuit pack inserted. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-610 d. This alarm is raised after an EI circuit pack has been removed from a slot for 11 minutes. The alarm is resolved when the EI circuit pack is inserted into this slot. Another way to resolve or prevent this alarm is to use the change circuit pack command to remove the EI circuit pack administrative entry for this slot after the EI circuit pack has been removed from the slot. Or, if the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on, then follow the instructions for "Red (alarm)" in the "Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs" section in Chapter 7, "LED Interpretation". e. Error Type 257 with Aux Data 85 through 88 indicates that this EI circuit pack is detecting incorrect data on the incoming fiber bit stream. The data is originating at the opposite EI circuit pack. These errors could result from a bad timing reference on the network which contains the EI circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber. For example, if the error is logged against the 1B01 (PPN) EI circuit pack, then the bad timing reference is on the EPN. Resolve any EXP-INTF errors 2305, 769, or 770. Resolve any TONE-BD, TDM-CLK, or SYNC errors. Finally, if the errors continue to occur, perform the following procedure: 1. If the EI circuit pack reporting the error is part of the Active link and a Standby link exists, switch to the Standby link. 2. Reset the EI circuit pack at the opposite end of fiber. 3. Issue the test board PCSS repeat 10 command, where PCSS is the address of the EXP-INTF circuit pack reporting the error. If Tests #241 or #316 fail even once, follow the procedures associated with the failures. 4. Wait 15 minutes. Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of type 257 have been detected. 5. If errors are present, reset the EI circuit pack reporting the errors. 6. Wait five minutes. Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of type 257 have been detected. 7. If errors are present, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver at the opposite end of the fiber. 8. Wait 15 minutes. Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of type 257 have been detected. 9. If errors are present or if this error occurs intermittently (over one week’s time), replace the EI circuit packs or transceivers on this link. f. Error Type 513 with Aux Data 5 through 7 indicates an ON BOARD hardware failure of the circuit packs RAM or ROM. Replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver. g. Error Type 1538 indicates a hyperactive EI circuit pack that is generating an abnormal amount of control messages to the Processor circuit pack. When this error was generated, the EI was automatically reset by the system. If this system does not have duplicate EI Links, service to the EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-611 is disrupted. If this system does have duplicate EI Links, the system should have switched to the Standby EI Link. Reset the EI. If error 1538 is detected again, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver. h. Error Type 2049 indicates that the last time the EI circuit pack was reset, its initialization tests failed. The number in the Aux Data field is the error code with which Reset Test (#336) failed. Follow the procedure specified in the Reset Test (#336) FAIL section for this error code. i. Error Type 2305 with aux data 118 indicates that the EI circuit pack has detected slips on the incoming fiber data stream. Thus, the EPN and PPN are not synchronized. Examine the Error Log for any SYNC, TDM-CLK, TONE-BD, and DS1-BD errors. If these errors exist, refer to the appropriate MO for repair procedures. If the errors do not exist, refer to “SYNC” for general information on diagnosing synchronization problems. If there are no active EI circuit pack errors with Error Types 769 and 770, Error Type 2305 resolves when fewer than nine slips are detected in a 5to 10-minute period (that is, Error Type 2305 resolves within 10 minutes of the last slip.) If the Error Log has an active EI error with type 769 or 770, then Error Type 2305 is resolved when Error Types 769 and 770 are resolved. NOTE: These errors may be ignored if they occur during clock interchanges. j. Error Type 2561 indicates an on-board failure of EI circuitry related to handling packet data from the fiber interface and from the Packet bus interface. If this error has generated a minor alarm, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver. k. Error Type 2817 indicates an on-board failure of EI circuitry related to transmission of data to the fiber interface. If this error has generated a minor alarm, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver. l. Error Type 3074 and 3075 indicates failures of EI circuit pack packet path tests. These packet path tests do exercise circuitry on both EI circuit packs of the expansion link. If Error Type 3075 is present without Error Type 3074, the fault probably lies with the EI circuit pack that reported the error. Replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver. If Error Type 3074 exists with or without 3075, the fault is probably on the neighbor of the EI circuit pack that reported this error. Replace the neighbor EI circuit pack or transceiver. NOTE: Certain Packet Bus failures can cause this error. In that case the EI is not defective. If PKT-BUS errors are also present, refer to Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" and the PKT-BUS section for fault isolation procedures. If PKT-BUS errors are not present and replacing the EI does not solve the problem this error can still be the result of a Packet Bus failure. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-612 m. Error Type 3330 indicates a failure of a diagnostic component on the Expansion Interface circuit pack. The failed component does not impair service, but it may leave the EI circuit pack in a state where the EI circuit pack cannot detect errors. n. Error Type 3585 indicates that the EI circuit pack experienced a series of very short out-of-frame conditions within several minutes. This may indicate transmission difficulties over the fiber link. If this is a duplex system, and if no other alarms exist, the system should have switched away from the fiber link using this EI circuit pack. If this condition ceases, the warning alarm should be resolved within 15 minutes. In the meantime, make sure all lightwave transceivers are firmly secured to the back of the cabinet. Thereafter, if the alarm is not resolved during the next four 15-minute segments, replace the following (the first after the first 15-minute segment, the second after the second 15-minute segment, and so forth): 1. Lightwave transceiver attached to the EI reporting the alarm 2. Lightwave transceiver on the opposite end of the fiber 3. Expansion Interface board reporting the alarm 4. Expansion Interface board on the opposite end of the fiber Since the counter is active only due to a transient condition, there is no test that can be run to clear the counter. However, the counter automatically decrements by one every five minutes. Once the condition causing the transient Fibers Out-of-Frame (FOOFs) has been fixed, it will take 15 minutes for the counter to be cleared if the alarm was raised. o. Error Type 3841 indicates that the EI (TN570 only) has reported a loss of lock with the backplane system clock. p. Error Type 3842 indicates that the test that queries the EI (TN570 only) for the state of the lock to the system clock has failed. This means that a loss of lock condition is present. A link switch is then attempted, and the alarm is raised. When both links report this error, the link switch is not attempted because, in this case, the problem is more likely to occur with the backplane clock than with the Expansion Interface circuit pack. q. The counter associated with Error Types 3841 and 3842 is cleared when the query for the state of the lock-to-system-clock passes. Once the alarm is raised, this test is run every five minutes. However, the test is not part of any sequence that can be run on demand. r. Error Type 10000 is a report from the EI circuit pack that its internal data has become corrupted. The EI circuit pack has lost track of control messages destined for the EPN. When this error is detected, the system automatically resets the EI circuit pack and brings the EPN down. Service to the EPN is unavailable for several minutes after detection of this error. No system technician action is required. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-613 s. Error Type 10001 is a report that the EI circuit pack dropped one control message to the EPN. This condition may have been observed as a call that did not complete correctly. No system technician action is required. t. In response to Error Type 10002, the system denied all calling services for up to 10 seconds. If EI Error Type 257 is logged at the same time against an Expansion Interface circuit pack on this link, first try to resolve this error. The error associated with Error Type 257 could be the cause of this error. If Error Type 257 is not logged at the same time as this error, then Error Type 10002 indicates that heavy call traffic was encountered involving EPN endpoints. No system technician action is required; however, should this error recur frequently, the system should be examined for traffic engineering. The PPN and EPNs may not be equipped with sufficient trunks and Tone Detectors for the number of stations in each cabinet. u. Error Type 10003 indicates that heavy call traffic involving EPN endpoints has returned to normal levels. This Error Type should always appear after Error Type 10002 or 10004. No system technician action is required. v. Error type 10004 indicates that an extreme backup of traffic was present on the EI circuit pack. The EPN served by this link was most probably not providing service when this error was logged. If this is a high or critical reliability system, the system should have switched to the Standby Expansion Link in order to restore service. Error type 11000 with an Aux value of 5 should have been logged against EXP-INTF to indicate this condition. In a standard system, the system should have reset the EPN in order to restore service. EXP-LINK Error Type 122 with an Aux value of 6 should have been logged to indicate this condition. w. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 0 appears when an EI Link switch takes place. Data calls between the PPN and EPN may have experienced some data loss or, in severe cases, the data calls may have dropped. The link that became active is the link with the circuit pack address given in the Error Log entry. The link switch may have occurred for several reasons: 1. System Technician demanded the Expansion Interface Link switch. This can be verified by using the list history command. 2. The Expansion Interface Link switch may have been scheduled. Check the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form. 3. An Expansion Interface circuit pack error may have been detected. Examine the Error Log for other EI circuit pack errors with the same approximate time as this error. 4. An EPN Maintenance circuit pack error may have been detected. Examine the Error Log for MAINT errors with the same approximate time as this error. MAINT Error Type 2561 indicates that the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack on the EPN could not DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-614 communicate with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. MAINT Error Type 3329 means the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot talk to the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack in the A carrier. MAINT Error Type 3585 means the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot talk to the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack in the B carrier. 5. Synchronization (SYNC) maintenance may have detected an inability of the Active Expansion Interface Link to provide synchronization between cabinets. Examine Error Log for SYNC Error Type 2305 with the same approximate time as this error. x. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 2 appears when a system technician-demanded Expansion Interface Link Switch is issued. No further action is required. y. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 3 appears when a scheduled EI Link Switch has occurred. No further action is required. z. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 4 appears when an Expansion Interface Link Switch has occurred due to a Special EPN recovery strategy. The software has forced an Expansion Interface switch because the new Expansion Interface Link contains new features which support EPN recovery in case of a bad tone/clock board. This error code appears when there is a periodic/scheduled tone/clock switch. aa. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 5 appears when the system has detected an excessive backup of traffic on the Active Expansion Link. This condition may have been due to communication difficulties on the Expansion link. To restore normal service, the system switched Expansion Links to the link identified in the Error Type 11000 with an Aux Data value of 5. Error Type 10004 should be present against the Expansion Interface circuit pack that reported the traffic congestion. ab. Error type 11000 with an Aux value of 8 indicates that the EI link was switched as part of the recovery action taken by EPN-SNTY. This error should be accompanied by EPN-SNTY error 8802 0. If EPN-SNTY error 9902 0 is also present, this indicates that the switching of the EI link was the recovery action that restored sanity to the EPN. In this case, the fault was with the link that was switched away from. The relevant EIs and connections should be tested and examined to determine the cause of the problem. Look for EPN-SNTY errors in the error log, and refer to the EPN Sanity Audit (EPN-SNTY) section for more details. ac. Error Type 11001 occurs when an Expansion Link switch was attempted but for unknown reasons could not be completed. Expansion Interface LED Usage The EI circuit pack has the standard red, green, and yellow LEDs. The red and green LEDs have the traditional use, where red means some alarm condition and green indicates maintenance testing in progress. The yellow LED is used to Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-615 provide useful visual status information. The state of the yellow LED is very important when executing the EI Manual Loop Back Procedure previously described. Upon power-up, the TN776 red LED comes on and off, followed by the yellow LED coming on solid. The TN570 red and green LEDs comes on and off. The yellow LED remains off. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Expansion Interface Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336) Expansion Interface Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test (#238) D/ND1 D X Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Interface Loop Around Test (#242) X ND X D Expansion Interface Control Channel Test (#316) X X ND Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test (#237) X X ND Expansion Interface Local Loop Around Test (#240) X X ND Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test (#241) X X ND TN570 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test (#237) The Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test is a request to an EI circuit pack to determine if it has established communication with the EI circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-209. Error Code Page 10-616 TEST #237 EI Neighbor Query Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. Someone may be doing something on this Port Network Interface. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2027 FAIL The EI circuit pack has contact with the opposite EI circuit pack, but it is the incorrect EI circuit pack. 1. Check Expansion Interface circuit packs and lightwave transceivers to verify that they are placed in the correct slots described above. 2. If working with duplicate Expansion Interface Links, check for crossed fiber pairs such as 1A01 connected to 2B02 or 1B01 connected to 2A01. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-209. Error Code Page 10-617 TEST #237 EI Neighbor Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The Expansion Interface circuit pack under test cannot make contact with opposite end Expansion Interface circuit pack. 1. If Test #238 passes (yellow LED not blinking at a rate of five times per second), the Expansion Interface circuit pack is detecting the framing signal and an Expansion Interface circuit pack is at least physically present on the opposite side. a. Reset the OPPOSITE Expansion Interface circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command where PCSS is the address of the OPPOSITE Expansion Interface circuit pack. b. If the reset command returns the message "EPN is unavailable," use the change circuit-pack command to add a TN776/TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack to the correct EPN slot. Then, repeat the reset board command. c. If the reset command returns the message "Board not Assigned," the EPN Maintenance circuit pack may be holding the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset. First, try to reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack using the test maintenance long command. Then, repeat the reset board command on the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. d. If the reset does not pass, refer to the Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336). e. If the reset passes, execute the test board PCSS command on the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack. Resolve all problems on the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack before proceeding. f. If this test still does not pass, try replacing the Expansion Interface circuit pack on which this test is failing. 2. If Test #238 fails (yellow LED is blinking at a rate of five times per second), refer to the procedures for Test #238. PASS The Expansion Interface circuit pack has successfully established a link with the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack. 1. If the status system command still indicates that this link is down, it is possible that one or both of the Expansion Interface circuit packs have been busied out. 2. If the link still does not come up, reset one or both Expansion Interface circuit packs on the link. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-209. Error Code 0 Page 10-618 TEST #237 EI Neighbor Query Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/Recommendation No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Expansion Interface Fiber Out-of-Frame (FOOF) Query Test (#238) This test is a request to an Expansion Interface circuit pack to determine if it is currently detecting the framing sequence on the incoming fiber data stream. If it cannot detect this framing signal, the Expansion Interface circuit pack is not able to establish a link with the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack. Table 10-210. Error Code TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2026 ABORT Expansion Interface circuit pack responded with an unknown reply. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-210. Error Code Page 10-619 TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation Expansion Interface circuit pack could not detect framing sequence. 1. Check if the Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber is present and if its cabinet has power. 2. Verify that the lightwave transceiver is connected to the correct slot on the back of the cabinet and that the fiber is connected to the lightwave transceiver. Verify this connection on both ends of the fiber. Check that an Expansion Interface circuit pack detects its lightwave transceiver by executing the reset board PCSS command, where PCSS refers to the Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the reset passes, the Expansion Interface circuit pack detects a lightwave transceiver. Refer to the description of the Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336) if the reset fails. 3. Verify that fiber transmit and receive ends have not been crossed when connected to the lightwave transceiver. 4. The problem may be due to a synchronization timing loop. Use the status sync command to determine which circuit pack is the synchronization reference. If the reference is a DS1 Interface circuit pack, use the set sync command to make a Tone-Clock circuit pack the reference. If this action causes the Expansion Interface to go into frame, synchronization must be examined for a possible timing loop. Refer to SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for repair procedures. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is not a reference, and the Expansion Interface circuit pack that is failing Test #238 is in the PPN, run tests on Tone-Clock circuit pack in the PPN to determine if clocks are present. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack that is failing Test #238 is in the EPN, and the red LEDs are ON on a large number of circuit packs, then reseat any Tone-Clock circuit packs in the EPN. More information follows. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-210. Error Code Page 10-620 TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/Recommendation 5. Execute the test tone-clock PC command where P is the port network which contains the Expansion Interface circuit pack’s neighbor Expansion Interface on the OPPOSITE end of the fiber and C refers to the carrier which contains the Active Tone-Clock on port network P. Also, look for SYNC errors in the Error Log. If there are any tests failing or errors found, resolve these problems and then rerun Test #238. If the test still fails and the system has a Standby Tone-Clock, switch the Active Tone-Clock on this network (set tone-clock PC command, where P is the port network containing the Expansion Interface circuit pack on the OPPOSITE end of the fiber and C is the carrier containing the Standby Tone-Clock). Also, if the EPN is down, replace the EPN Tone-Clock circuit pack in carrier A of the EPN. 6. Check for errors using the display errors command with the Category field set to "tone" and the Active alarms field set to "n." Some of the alarms on EPN objects might have been resolved if the EPN went down. Refer to the documentation for descriptions of any of the error types occurring at about same time as the EXP-LINK error types. Resolve any active alarms. Also, if Error Type 18 was logged against the SYNC MO when the EPN went down, the problem was probably that the Synchronization on-line reference became invalid. Since, reference switching was disabled, the Tone-Clock did not switch away from the invalid reference. Therefore, the Tone-Clock put out an "out-of-spec" system clock. Execute the enable synchronization-switch command. If the EPN is down, reseat the Tone-Clock circuit packs on the EPN. This action should restore the EPN to service. 7. Follow the procedure described in "Relationship Between Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit Packs" near the beginning of this section if the symptoms match those described there. PASS The Expansion Interface circuit pack has detected the valid framing signal on the fiber. 1. Refer to errors from other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if the link is still not functioning. 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-621 Expansion Interface Local Loop Around Test (#240) This test is similar to the Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test described in Test #242. A test tone from TDM Bus A is received by the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test, but is not transmitted out to the lightwave transceiver before being looped back onto TDM Bus A again. The test is then repeated using TDM Bus B. Thus, this loop back test is performed on each TDM Bus on the network containing the Expansion Interface circuit pack to verify that the Expansion Interface circuit pack is able to loop back data on each TDM Bus. Since this loop back is internal to the circuit pack, this test does not interfere with the normal fiber data stream. Table 10-211. Error Code TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 ABORT Could not allocate time slot on TDM Bus A. Loop back passed on TDM Bus B. 2 ABORT Could not allocate time slot on TDM Bus B. Loop back passed on TDM Bus A. 1. If there is no reason to doubt that the Expansion Interface circuit pack can transfer data to or from a TDM Bus, then since the test passed on one bus, assume that the test passes on the other bus as well. 2. If EXP-INTF circuit pack Error Types 1, 2, 1537, or 1793 are present in the Error Log and/or if Expansion Interface circuit pack Tests #240, #241, or #242 have failed previously, there is reason to doubt that the Expansion Interface circuit pack can transfer data to or from a TDM Bus. To determine if the test can pass on both TDM Buses, perform the following procedure: For Error Code 1, issue the set tdm PC command, where P is the network containing the Expansion Interface circuit pack being tested and C is the TDM Bus A. Execute the test board PCSS command again. If this test passes or aborts with Error Code 2, this test is considered to have passed. For Error Code 2, issue the set tdm PC command, where P is the network containing the Expansion Interface circuit pack being tested and C is the TDM Bus B. Execute the test board PCSS again. If this test passes or aborts with error code 1, this test is considered to have passed. 3. If this test continues aborting with the same error after setting the TDM Bus as indicated in Step 2, rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Apply the passing criteria for Step 2 to each result. 4. If the test still does not pass on the other TDM Bus, follow the procedure for abort error code 3. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-211. Error Code 3 Page 10-622 TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test on either TDM Bus. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Enter display errors and follow associated repair procedures for TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test on either TDM Bus. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If these errors are present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. Even if there are no TTR-LEV errors, there still may not be a Tone Detector available on the network that contains the circuit pack being tested. Verify that there is at least one Tone Detector on this network. If not, this test always aborts for this Expansion Interface circuit pack. This does not harm the system in any way. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1031 ABORT A query of the Expansion Interface circuit pack aborted. The purpose of this query was to see if the Expansion Interface circuit pack could detect the framing signal. 1. If Test #238 aborted, follow the procedure associated with this abort code. 2. If Test #238 did not abort, rerun Test #240 at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If Test #240 continues to abort without Test #238 aborting, escalate the problem. 1032 ABORT The Expansion Interface circuit pack cannot detect the framing signal and cannot run the test. 1. Refer to the errors for Test #238 to determine why the Expansion Interface circuit pack is out-of-frame. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-211. Error Code Page 10-623 TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL Loop back on TDM Bus A failed. Loop back on TDM Bus B passed. 2 FAIL Loop back on TDM Bus B failed. Loop back on TDM Bus A passed. 3 FAIL Loop back on both TDM Busses failed. 12 FAIL Loop back on TDM Bus B failed. Loop back TDM Bus A aborted because the system could not allocate time slots. 21 FAIL Loop back on TDM Bus A failed. Loop back on TDM Bus B aborted because the system could not allocate time slots. FAIL The test tone was not detected correctly after being looped through the Expansion Interface circuit pack. 1. If error type 2305 has been logged against the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the last 5 minutes, this test could have failed due to the associated slips. If this is the case, first resolve the 2305 error, and then repeat test. 2. Run the tests for the Active Tone-Clock on the Port Network that contains the indicted Expansion Interface circuit pack to verify that dial-tone is being supplied. 3. If the tone-clock is healthy, repeat the short test on the Expansion Interface circuit pack. 4. If this test continues to fail, replace Expansion Interface circuit pack. PASS Test tone was correctly detected after the internal Expansion Interface loop back on both TDM Busses. 1. Refer to other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if the Expansion Interface Link is not functioning correctly. 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-624 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test (#241) This test is a basic connectivity test between the two cabinets. The test first sends a test tone from the cabinet of the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test through the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack to a Tone Detector in the opposite cabinet. The connections are then reversed and the tone is passed in the opposite direction. This test should be run once from each Expansion Interface circuit pack on the fiber. Table 10-212. Error Code TEST #241 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. Even if there are no TTR-LEV errors, there still may not be a Tone Detector available on the network that contains the circuit pack being tested. Verify that there is at least one Tone Detector on this network. If there is not at least one Tone Detector, this test always aborts for this Expansion Interface circuit pack. This does not harm the system in any way. NOTE: G3 systems require that Tone Detector circuit packs (TN768) must be of vintage "B" or newer. If older Tone Detector circuit packs are installed in the system, this test well always abort with this abort code. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-212. Error Code 1033 Page 10-625 TEST #241 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The test cannot run because either one or both of the Expansion Interface circuit packs on this link are busied out or an Expansion Interface circuit pack is not present on the opposite end of the fiber. 1. If Expansion Interface is busied out, issue the release board PCSS command. 2. Examine results of Tests #237 and #238. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 retries. FAIL The test tone was not detected correctly in either direction. 1. Run the test for the Active Tone-Clocks on the Port Networks for which the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test provides a link. This will determine if the dial tone is being supplied. 2. Check for disconnected transmit or receive fiber on both ends of the fiber. Make sure both endpoint circuit packs are inserted and have no on-board alarms. 1 or 2 FAIL The test tone was detected correctly in only one direction. 1. Run the test for the Active Tone-Clocks on the Port Networks for which the defective Expansion Interface circuit pack provides a link. This determines if the dial tone is being supplied. 2. Check for disconnected transmit or receive fibers on both ends of the fiber. 3. If Test #238 is failing, refer to procedures for Test #238. 4. If Error Type 2305 has been logged against this Expansion Interface circuit pack, or the Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of its fiber, in the last five minutes, this test may have failed due to the associated slips. If such errors exist, first resolve them, and then repeat this test. 5. Execute the test board PCSS long command on both Expansion Interface circuit packs and follow procedures for Test #242 to determine if the problem lies with one of the Expansion Interface circuit packs, the lightwave transceivers, or the fiber itself. PASS The tone was successfully transmitted in both directions. Both Expansion Interface circuit packs and their lightwave transceivers are functioning properly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-212. Error Code 0 Page 10-626 TEST #241 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/Recommendation No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test (#242) This test is destructive and requires that the Expansion Interface circuit pack first be busied out. Busying out an Expansion Interface circuit pack denies service to the EPN if the Expansion Interface circuit pack supports a PPN to EPN link and duplicate Expansion Interface Links are not in use. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is part of an EPN to EPN link, service between the two EPNs are denied if duplicate Expansion Interface links are not in use. This test is NOT DESTRUCTIVE if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be busied out is in Standby Mode. This is a two part connectivity test. The first portion of the test applies to both TN776 and TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs. In the first part of the test, a test tone is transmitted from the cabinet of the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test, through the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test, out to its lightwave transceiver. The connection then loops back into the lightwave transceiver through the same Expansion Interface circuit pack again and into the originating cabinet. If the test tone is detected by a tone detector, the first part of the test passes. The second portion of the test applies only to the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack. In this part of the test, a data packet is sent from the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack to the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test; the packet is then looped back through the lightwave transceiver and sent back to the Packet Control circuit pack. If the Packet Control circuit pack receives the same packet it transmitted, the second part of the test passes. If the entire test has passed, the Expansion Interface circuit pack, its backplane wiring, and the electrical portion of the lightwave transceiver are healthy. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-627 NOTE: When the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test is an EPN, the data packet must also pass through the Active Expansion Interface circuit packs of the Active link connecting the EPN to the PPN. This test requires the Expansion Interface circuit pack to ignore incoming data from its neighbor Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber. Thus, this test disturbs any inter-cabinet connections that currently exist and disrupts signaling between the two cabinets. Table 10-213. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. Even if there are no TTR-LEV errors, there still may not be a Tone Detector available on the network that contains the circuit pack being tested. Verify that there is at least one Tone Detector on this network. If there is not at least one Tone Detector, this test always aborts for this Expansion Interface circuit pack. This does not harm the system in any way. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1015 ABORT The system does not allow this test to be run because the Expansion Interface circuit pack has not been busied out. 1. Busyout the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Repeat the test board PCSS long command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-628 Table 10-213. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 1031 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in an EPN and is active and is in slot A01 or B02, this test CANNOT be executed. If the lightwave transceiver loop around is activated, it is impossible to deactivate it. 1. If a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack pair exists, make that pair active via the set expansion-link PCSS command, where PCSS is the address of a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. 2. If the Expansion Interface Link switch is successful, the lightwave transceiver Loop Around Test may now be executed on the original Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in an Expansion Port Network (Port Network 2 or 3) has a major alarm against it. This test needs to use the alarmed port network’s Packet Bus. 1. Resolve the Packet Bus alarm. 2. Retry the command. 1141 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is out-of-service. 1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack is busied out by checking the Hardware Error Log to see if Error Type 18 has been logged against PKT-CTRL. If Error Type 18 is present, release the circuit pack via the release packet-control command, and retry the command. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack is NOT busied out, refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control circuit pack) Maintenance documentation for the recommended repair procedure. 1144 ABORT The Packet Bus in the Processor Port Network has a major alarm active against it. This abort code only appears when the test is run in an EPN. 1. Resolve the alarm in the PPN. 2. Retry the command. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2060 ABORT The link on the Packet Bus being used to perform the test has failed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet Control circuit pack (look for PKT-CTL errors). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-629 Table 10-213. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 2500 Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL The test did not detect the test tone through the loop around connection. NOTE: If the circuit pack is a TN570, the packet portion of this test was not run since the circuit portion failed. 1. Test the Active Tone-Clock on the Port Network that contains the defective Expansion Interface circuit pack to verify that dial tone is being supplied. 2. If the Tone-Clock is healthy, issue the test board PCSS long command on the Expansion Interface circuit pack. 3. If this test continues to fail, replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack or transceiver. Then, reissue the test board PCSS long command on the new Expansion Interface circuit pack. 2 FAIL The test tone was transmitted and detected correctly, but the correct data packet was not detected by the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack. This error only applies to the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack. 1. Test the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack to verify that it is functioning properly. If any tests fail, investigate those tests and repair the Packet Control circuit pack. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack checks out OK, issue the test board PCSS long command on the Expansion Interface circuit pack. 3. If Test #242 continues to fail, replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Then, issue the test board PCSS long command on the new Expansion Interface circuit pack. 4. If Test #242 continues to fail, replace the lightwave transceiver, reset the circuit pack and issue the test board PCSS long command on the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-630 Table 10-213. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code Test Result PASS Description/Recommendation NOTE: If the Expansion Interface is a TN570 and the system does not have the Packet Bus enabled field set to yes on the Maintenance-related system parameters form, then this test does not execute the packet bus portion of the loop around. When this test (#242) and the Expansion Interface Local Loop Around Test #240 pass, this indicates that the Expansion Interface circuit pack is functioning properly, but it does not verify that the optical portion of the lightwave transceiver is functioning properly. Remove the Expansion Interface circuit pack from the busyout state using the release board PCSS command. 1. If duplicate Expansion Interface Links are available, issue the test board PCSS command on the Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs on both ends of fiber. If this test passes from both sides, but other tests fail, such as Test #241, this condition indicates either a faulty lightwave transceiver or a faulty fiber cable. To determine if either a lightwave transceiver or the fiber itself has failed, execute the Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Procedure described in the section preceding the "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" table for this MO. NOTE: This test can only be run from both Expansion Interface circuit packs if they are the Standby pair, and if the Active pair is working properly. 2. If this Expansion Interface circuit pack is failing other tests, the Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Test should be executed. If problems still exist after the Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Procedure indicates that both Expansion Interface circuit packs and both lightwave transceivers are healthy, manually check out the building fiber. Verify that each optical fiber is connected to a transmitter at one end and a receiver at the other. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-631 Table 10-213. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code 0 Test Result NO BOARD Description/Recommendation No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Expansion Interface Control Channel Test (#316) If an Expansion Interface circuit pack is a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack (yellow LED off) or if the Expansion Interface is active in the PPN (yellow LED on), this test queries the Expansion Interface circuit pack for its circuit pack type and vintage information. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is an Active Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN (yellow LED on long, off short), the Expansion Interface Control Channel Test checks to see if the Expansion Interface circuit pack can communicate with other circuit packs in the EPN using the EPNTDM Bus. Table 10-214. TEST #316 Expansion Interface Control Channel Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-632 Table 10-214. TEST #316 Expansion Interface Control Channel Test — Continued Error Code Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Expansion Interface circuit pack responded incorrectly or, if it is the EPN Active Expansion Interface circuit pack, it could not talk to EPN circuit packs. 1. If the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN is failing and a Standby link exists, switch to the Standby link using the set expansion-link PCSS command. 2. Repeat the Short Test Sequence. 3. If test continues to fail, reset the Expansion Interface circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command. 4. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN is failing, check for EPN TDM-CLK, TONE-BD, or SYNC failures in the Hardware Error Log. Clear any EPN clock-related failures and repeat the Short Test Sequence. 5. If test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack or transceiver. PASS The Expansion Interface circuit pack did respond correctly to the test. Communication from software to the Expansion Interface circuit pack is functioning. 1. Refer to other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if Expansion Interface Link is not functioning correctly. 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336) This test is potentially very destructive and requires the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be busied out prior to execution of this test. The Expansion Interface Reset Test, which is not a part of either the Short or the Long Test Sequences, is executed via the reset board PCSS command where PCSS is the address of the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be reset. If the system only has one working Expansion Interface Link between a pair of port networks and one of the Expansion Interface circuit packs must be reset, the Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-633 action of busying out the desired Expansion Interface circuit pack WILL DISRUPT SERVICE TO THE EPN until the Expansion Interface circuit pack is released from the busyout state. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is part of a PPN to EPN link, the EPN WILL BE WITHOUT SERVICE. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is part of an EPN to EPN link CALLS BETWEEN THE TWO EPNs WILL BE DENIED. If the system has working duplicate Expansion Interface Links, and the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be reset is part of the Active Expansion Interface Link, the system does not allow the busyout and instructs system technician to switch Expansion Interface Links via the set expansion-link PCSS command where PCSS is the address of either Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack on the Standby link. After executing the Expansion Interface Link switch, it is possible to busyout and then reset the original Expansion Interface circuit pack. However, if the EPN Maintenance (MAINT) circuit pack determines that the Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit pack is cycling between sane and insane several times within several minutes, MAINT may inhibit operation of the EXP-INTF by holding the Expansion Interface circuit pack in a reset state. This condition may result in an unsuccessful reset of the Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the reset command returns with "EPN is unavailable," execute the following steps: 1. Use the change circuit-pack P command where P is the port network number of the EPN. 2. For the Expansion Interface circuit pack you wish to reset, add an entry to the Circuit Pack form for the TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack. Be sure to enter the appropriate carrier and slot (that is, A01 or B02). 3. Enter the form. 4. Repeat the reset board command. Table 10-215. Error Code TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-215. Error Code 4 Page 10-634 TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not reset EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack over optical fiber since PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack on opposite end of fiber is not inserted. 1. Insert opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack and perform reset again. 1015 ABORT The system does not allow this test to be run because the Expansion Interface circuit pack has not been busied out. 1. Busyout the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Repeat the reset board PCSS command. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 9999 ABORT Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. Could not perform initialization test results query because link to EPN is not up. 1. Execute release board PCSS. Wait one minute. Issue the display error command. If you see Error Type 2049 logged against this Expansion Interface circuit pack, then the Expansion Interface Reset Test has failed with an error code equal to the aux data of this entry. Otherwise, the initialization tests have passed. 12000 ABORT Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. Response to the initialization test results query was not received within the allowable time period. 12100 ABORT Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. System resources required to run initialization test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 12026 ABORT Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. It responded with an unknown reply to the query for the results of its initialization tests. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack or transceiver. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-215. Error Code 1 Page 10-635 TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Expansion Interface did not successfully reset. 1. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN, the EPN Maintenance Board may be holding the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset. Attempt to rectify this condition by executing the test maint P long command on the maintenance board in the same EPN. 2. If Step #1 was not successful in releasing the Expansion Interface circuit pack, temporarily remove the EPN maintenance circuit pack. 3. Repeat the reset board PCSS command. 4. If reset continues to fail, replace circuit pack. 5. Insert EPN maintenance circuit pack if it was removed. 2 FAIL The Expansion Interface circuit pack was successfully reset, but it did not begin running after the reset. 1. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN, temporarily remove the EPN maintenance circuit pack. 2. Repeat the reset board PCSS command. 3. Re-insert the EPN maintenance circuit pack if it was removed. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-215. Error Code 3 Page 10-636 TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The reset over the optical fiber failed. 1. Execute the test board PCSS command on the PPN neighbor Expansion Interface circuit pack located on the opposite end of the fiber from this Expansion Interface circuit pack. If Test #238 does not pass, follow the maintenance procedure associated with this test result. Then perform the reset again. 2. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN, temporarily remove the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. 3. Repeat the reset board PCSS command. 4. Reinsert EPN Maintenance circuit pack if it was removed. 5. Follow the procedure described in the "Relationship Between Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit Packs" section if the symptoms match those described there. 6. Check the Hardware Error Log for the EPN Tone-Clock errors that were resolved about when the EPN went down. These EPN Tone-Clock errors may have been resolved BECAUSE the EPN went down. When there is no Tone-Clock generating the system clock on an EPN, then an Expansion Interface circuit pack can only be reset once. All subsequent reset attempts fail. It is also possible that the system itself may have already tried to reset the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Refer to the TONE-BD (Tone-Clock) Maintenance documentation for recommended maintenance strategy for Tone-Clock problems. 7. If the reset still fails, execute the Manual Loop Back Procedure on the opposite PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. This procedure is described in the section preceding the "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" table for this MO. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are healthy, the problem must lie with the Expansion Interface circuit pack and its lightwave transceiver on the EPN end of the fiber or with the fiber itself. Test the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack with the manual loop back procedure and investigate the test results. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-215. Error Code 5001 Page 10-637 TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Initialization failure: Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully and restarted execution. But the Expansion Interface circuit pack could not synchronize itself during the self-test phase of the hardware initialization. 1. Issue the reset board PCSS command. If the circuit pack is on the Active link, this procedure can be very destructive. If a test board PCSS shows all the tests passing, and there is no Standby link to which you can switch, perform this reset at a time when service is least disrupted by losing use of the EPN. 2. If the reset fails with the same error code, execute the test tone-clock PC command where P is the network that contains this Expansion Interface circuit pack and C is the carrier that contains the Active Tone-Clock on network P. Also look for SYNC and TONE-BD errors. Resolve any SYNC and TONE-BD errors by following the Maintenance documentation for these MOs. Then reissue the reset board PCSS command. 3. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack still fails to reset with the same error code, replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack. 5002 FAIL Initialization failure: Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully and restarted execution. But the Expansion Interface circuit pack has determined that a lightwave transceiver was not attached to the backplane connector when the Expansion Interface circuit pack was last reset. If this system does not have duplicate Expansion Interface Links, all users in the EPN will be without service until this problem is resolved. If this system does have duplicate links, the backup Expansion Interface Link will be unavailable until this problem is resolved. 1. Attach lightwave transceiver to 25-pair backplane connector in slot belonging to Expansion Interface circuit pack. 2. Reset the circuit pack again. 3. If the reset fails with an error code other than 5002, refer to the appropriate Maintenance documentation. 4. If the reset fails again with Error Code 5002, replace the lightwave transceiver, reset the circuit pack, and execute the reset board PCSS command again. 5. If the reset fails again with Error Code 5002, the new lightwave transceiver may be defective, or the Expansion Interface circuit pack may need to be replaced. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-215. Error Code 5016 5017 5018 5019 5032 5033 5048 5064 5080 5096 5112 Page 10-638 TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Initialization failure: Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully and restarted execution. But the Expansion Interface circuit pack detected communication errors during the self-test phase of the hardware initialization. The nature of the failure may prevent the Expansion Interface circuit pack from communicating with its neighbor Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber. The fault itself may be either on the Expansion Interface circuit pack or on the lightwave transceiver. 1. If all other tests on this Expansion Interface circuit pack are passing and no other errors have been logged against this circuit pack, replacement of the lightwave transceiver or the circuit pack are recommended, but not critical. 2. If all other tests on this Expansion Interface circuit pack are not passing or other errors have been logged against this circuit pack, the lightwave transceiver and/or the Expansion Interface circuit pack should be replaced. PASS The Expansion Interface was successfully reset, and it did restart execution. Also, it passed all its initialization tests and detected a lightwave transceiver. Remove the Expansion Interface circuit pack from the busyout state by using the release board PCSS command. 1. Execute test board PCSS short command. Refer to errors for each test. 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589) This test attempts to send a data packet from the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack through any intervening Expansion Interface circuit packs and through the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested. The path the data packet takes is dependent on the location of the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested and whether the Expansion Interface circuit pack is par of the Active link or Standby link. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-639 If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is part of an Active link from PPN to either EPN, the path shown in Figure 10-31 is used. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is on either EPN and is part of a Standby link from PPN to either EPN, the path shown in Figure 10-32 is used. The path in this figure is also used if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is on the PPN. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is part of a link from EPN to EPN, the path shown in Figure 10-33 is used. Packet Bus (PPN) Packet Bus (PN X) ACTIVE LINK EXP-INTF PKTCTRL EXP-INTF LAPD ENDPT Figure 10-31. (Active EXP-INTFs on EPNs Only) Packet Bus (PPN) EXP-INTF Packet Bus (PN X) EXP-INTF PKTCTRL Figure 10-32. (Standby EXP-INTFs on EPNs or PPN EXP-INTFs Only) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Packet Bus ( PPN ) PKTCTRL Page 10-640 Packet Bus ( PN X ) EXP-INTF EXP-INTF EXP-INTF EXP-INTF UNDER TEST Packet Bus ( PN Y ) EXP-INTF EXP-INTF Figure 10-33. Table 10-216. Error Code Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test—EPN to EPN TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1005 ABORT This test does not apply to the current system configuration. Either the system is not administered to have the Packet Bus activated, the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form has the Packet Bus Enabled field set to "n," or the system is administered to have the Packet Bus activated, but there exist TN776 Expansion Interface circuit packs that prevent this test from running. The TN776 Expansion Interface circuit packs do not support Packet Bus capabilities. 1033 ABORT The test cannot run because either one or both of the Expansion Interface circuit packs on this link are busied out or an Expansion Interface circuit pack is not present on the opposite end of the fiber. 1. If Expansion Interface is busied out, issue the release board PCSS command. 2. Examine the results of Tests #237 and #238. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-216. Error Code 1139 Page 10-641 TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Packet Bus in an EPN (Port Network 2 or 3) has a major alarm against it. This test needs to use the alarmed port network’s packet bus. 1. Resolve the Packet Bus alarm. 2. Retry the command. 1140 ABORT Not enough packet ports are available to complete this test. 1. If the port network being tested does not contain any packet circuit packs, ignore the results of this test. 2. If the port network being tested does contain packet circuit packs, determine if any or all of them are faulty by examining the alarm and error logs. 3. If any faulty circuit packs are found, refer to the appropriate Maintenance documentation for the recommended repair procedures and try to resolve any problems. Then, retry the command. 4. If no faulty boards are found, all of the ports are busy. Use the busyout board PCSS command to busyout a packet circuit pack or wait for one to become idle and retry the command. 1141 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is out-of-service. 1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack is busied out. (This is indicated by an Error Type 18 logged against PKT-CTRL.) If it is, release it via the release packet-control command, and retry the command. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack is NOT busied out, refer to PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for the repair procedure for the Packet Control circuit pack. 1144 ABORT The Packet Bus in the PPN has a major alarm active against it. 1. Resolve the alarm in the PPN. 2. Retry the command. 1195 ABORT An EI link switched during this test. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-216. Error Code 1421 Page 10-642 TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This abort code is valid and can appear only when the Expansion Interface circuit pack addressed in the test command is one which terminates the link between two the EPNs. It indicates that the test failed, but that this test was run on the EPN EI circuit pack that: a. is in the same EPN as the circuit pack under test, b. is on the active link and c. terminates the fiber from the PPN. The EI tested is probably not at fault. 1. Enter display alarms and follow the EXP-INTF repair procedures for the EPN EI that: a. is in the same EPN as the circuit pack just tested here b. is on the active link, and c. terminates the fiber from the PPN. 2. If there are no alarms logged against that EI, run Test #589 on it and follow procedures for this test. 3. Try this command again. 2060 ABORT The link on the Packet Bus that is being used to perform the test has failed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet Control circuit pack (look for PKT-CTL errors). 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-216. Error Code Page 10-643 TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The transmitted data packet was not received correctly by the Packet Control circuit pack. If there are any PKT-BUS errors in the Error Log, attempt to resolve those errors before investigating these test failures. PROCEDURE A Use Procedure A if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is in an EPN and is part of an Active link from the PPN to the EPN. 1. Test the Packet Control circuit pack via the test packet-control command. If the Packet Control circuit pack fails any tests, refer to the PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for recommended maintenance procedures. 2. If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass, the failure may be in either the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack or the connected Expansion Interface circuit pack under test or on the EPN Packet Bus. If a duplicate Expansion link exists, make that the Active link, using the set expansion-link PCSS command. Execute the test board long command on the original Expansion Interface circuit pack and the connected PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack and follow the procedures for Test #242. 3. If a duplicate link does not exist, run the Long Test Sequence on the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. If Test #242 fails, follow the procedures for Test #242. If Test #242 passes, the fault is in the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack under test or on the EPN Packet Bus. More information follows. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-216. Error Code Page 10-644 TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation PROCEDURE B Use Procedure B if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is in an EPN and is part of a Standby link from the PPN to the EPN or if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is in the PPN. 1. Test the Packet Control circuit pack. If the Packet Control circuit pack fails any tests, refer to the PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for recommended maintenance procedures. 2. If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass, the failure may be in either the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack or the connected EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the circuit pack being tested is in the PPN and is part of an Active link from the PPN to the EPN and if a duplicate Expansion link exists, make that the Active link, using the set expansion-link PCSS command. Execute the test board long command on the original PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack and the connected EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack and follow the procedures for Test #242. Otherwise, if a duplicate link does not exist, run the Long Test Sequence on the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. If Test #242 fails, follow the procedures for Test #242. If Test #242 passes, the fault is in the connected EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. 3. If the test was not run on an active PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack, issue the test board PCSS long command on both Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs and follow the procedures for Test #242. More information follows. FAIL (cont’d.) PROCEDURE C Use Procedure C if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is part of any link from EPN to EPN. 1. Test the Packet Control circuit pack. If the Packet Control circuit pack fails any tests, refer to the PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for recommended maintenance procedures. 2. If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass, the failure may be in the Expansion Interface circuit packs of the EPN to EPN link or on the EPN Packet Bus. 3. Issue the test board PCSS long command on both EPN to EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs and follow the procedures for Test #242. PASS The data packet was received correctly. 1. Refer to other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if the Expansion link is not functioning correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-216. Error Code 0 Page 10-645 TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation No board was detected by the test. 1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable. 2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so, check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset board PCSS command. 3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad. Replace the board and retest. Continued on next page Expansion Interface Link Switch Command This action is potentially destructive. The Expansion Interface switch command enables system technician to choose which set of Expansion Interface Links should be the Active link when duplicate Expansion Interface Links are available. The command line entry is set expansion-link PCSS, where PCSS is the Expansion Interface address of either Expansion Interface circuit pack on the Standby link. If the status system command indicates that the Standby link is up, the set expansion-link command makes the Standby link the Active link. This action is destructive because it must temporarily disable all connections between PPN and EPN. This break in the connections is not detectable by normal voice users. ! CAUTION: Data connections lose a small amount of data. Depending on the data transmission speed, the lost data is anywhere from zero to several bytes. It is recommended that system technician switch links when it is necessary to run the more destructive tests on Expansion Interface circuit packs. Most significantly, Test #242 requires the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be busied out and, therefore, the link with the Expansion Interface to be tested should be made the Standby link. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-646 To prevent the system from automatically switching Expansion Interface Links during system technician-demanded tests, busyout one or both of the Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs. ! CAUTION: This introduces a small risk. If the remaining Active Expansion Link should fail while the Standby Expansion Link is busied out, service to the EPN is lost. The set expansion-link command has no error codes to return. It displays one of following messages upon completion: 1. Command completed successfully Link switch was successful. This may be verified by visually inspecting the new yellow LED states or by the status system command. 2. Command did not complete successfully This indicates that the system attempted to switch links, but for unknown reasons the software or hardware was unable to complete the action. The system may have switched and determined that the new link could not provide service and thus returned to the original link. 3. Standby EXP-INTF Link is unable to take over Because the Expansion Interface circuit pack pair on the Standby link has enough errors logged against it as to be unable to provide service, the system did not attempt to switch links. 4. EXP-INTF is already on active link The Expansion Interface circuit pack address given in the set expansion-link command is an Active Expansion Interface. The address must be a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack in order to switch links. 5. Address is not a valid Expansion Interface Board The link switch could not be attempted because the address in the set expansion-link command did not correspond to any known Expansion Interface circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link) Page 10-647 EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) EXP-LINK 1. Alarm Level Initial Command to Run MAJOR display errors 1 Full Name of MO Expansion Interface Link Display errors for "infc" category and investigate EXP-INTF errors. The EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link) Maintenance strategy is covered in the EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-217. Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Error Type 0 Aux Data 0 122 (a) Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Any Any Any None MAJOR ON 122 (b) None, 1-10 None MAJOR ON 122 (c) 30-40 None MAJOR ON 122 (d) 6 None MAJOR ON 122 (e) 8 None MAJOR ON Test to Clear Value disp err Notes: a. This alarm is used only to indicate that all Expansion Interface Links between a pair of Port Networks (PNs) are down. This condition is indicated by the EXP-LINK Error Type 122 in the Error Log. When this condition occurs, examine all EXP-INTF errors to resolve the alarm. The pair of PNs is specified in the port fields as follows: 1-2 (PPN to EPN1), 1-3 (PPN to EPN2), and 2-3 (EPN1 to EPN2). b. Aux Data values of blank and 1 through 10 mean that the link is down due to a defective Expansion Interface Link. Look for and resolve Expansion Interface circuit pack errors. c. Aux Data values of 30 through 40 mean that the EPN was reset because of a temporary loss of system timing reference on the EPN. Execute the display errors command with the category "tone" to determine what caused the loss or restoration of the clock. d. The system detected an excessive backup of traffic on the Active Expansion Link. This condition may have been due to communication difficulties on the Expansion Link. To restore normal service, the system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link) Page 10-648 had to reset the Expansion port network served by the Expansion Link. Error type 10004 should have been logged against the Expansion Interface circuit pack that reported the traffic congestion. e. Aux Data value of 8 means that the link is down due to the recovery feature of the EPN Sanity Audit. Look for EPN-SNTY errors in the error log, and refer to the EPN-SNTY section for more details. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm) Page 10-649 EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO EXT-DEV MAJOR test environment UU External Device Alarm EXT-DEV MINOR test environment UU External Device Alarm 1. where UU is an appropriate cabinet number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. NOTE: Use this Maintenance Object when the External Device Alarm Admin? field on the change system-parameters customer-options form is set to (n). In the Standard Reliability PPN the Maintenance Processor (TN786B or TN790) in carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads. In the High or Critical PPN, the Duplication Interface (TN772) circuit pack in carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads, and provides status to the Maintenance processor (TN786B or TN790) in the active SPE. In the EPN the Maintenance Board (TN775) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads. The system only recognizes pairs connected to the 1M and 1m (ALARM MONITOR) leads. Pairs connected to the 2M, 2m, 3M, 3m, and 3w are not recognized by the system. Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111, for more details. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-218. Error Type 0 1 1 or 5 1. 2. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test environment UU r2 or 6 Any External Device Alarm Test (#120) MAJOR MINOR2 OFF test environment UU r 2 or 6 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. One port generates a MAJOR alarm; the other port generates a MINOR alarm. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm) Page 10-650 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Multicarrier Cabinet Tests Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (b) X X ND OLS Query Test (Carrier E) (#127) (c) X X ND OLS Query Test (Carrier D) (#127) (c) X X ND OLS Query Test (Carrier A) (#127) (c) X X ND OLS Query Test (Carrier B) (#127) (c) X X ND OLS Query Test (Carrier C) (#127) (c) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (d) X X ND Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (e) X X ND External Device Alarm Test (MAJOR port) (#120) X X ND External Device Alarm Test (MINOR port) (#120) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) section for a description of this test. b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) section for a description of this test. c. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Supply) section for a description of this test. d. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) section for a description of this test. e. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) section for a description of this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm) Page 10-651 f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) section for a description of this test. Single Carrier Cabinet Tests Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 SCC Power Query Test (#79) (a) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (b) X X ND External Device Alarm Test (MAJOR port) (#120) X X ND External Device Alarm Test (MINOR port) (#120) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (c) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (c) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to DC-POWER (Single Carrier Cabinet Power) section for a description of this test. b. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) section for a description of this test. c. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) section for a description of this test. External Device Alarm Test (#120) The External Device Alarm Test requests the state of the External Device Alarm from the Maintenance circuit pack and reports the results. The test has no effect on the external device itself. Table 10-219. Error Code 1000 TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm) Table 10-219. Error Code 2000 Page 10-652 TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier cabinet or DC-POWER alarms in a single carrier cabinet. Then, repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, check for and resolve all SYSAM errors in a PPN or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, then escalate the problem. 2029 2319 2320 2500 ABORT ANY FAIL Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. The External Device Alarm has been activated by the external device. 1. Clear the major alarm on the external device, and rerun the test. 2. If the test still fails, then disconnect the External Device Alarms from the Maintenance circuit pack and rerun the test. 3. If the test still fails, then there is a problem with the Maintenance circuit pack that is reporting the alarm. This circuit pack should be replaced. There are failures that can occur on Maintenance circuit pack’s that will not be detected by their respective maintenance, but which will cause many environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack should be replaced and the test rerun. 4. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. PASS If there is a problem with the external device, but the Maintenance circuit pack connected to the device reports no alarm, then the External Device may not be properly reporting the problems or the External Device may not be properly connected to the External Device. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm) Page 10-653 EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO EXT-DEV MAJOR test eda-external-device-alrm physical location External Device Alarm EXT-DEV MINOR test eda-external-device-alrm physical location External Device Alarm EXT-DEV WARNING test eda-external-device-alrm physical location External Device Alarm NOTE: Use this Maintenance Object when the External Device Alarm Admin? field on the change system-parameters customer-options form is set to (y). You must have INADS or INIT login permission to administer EXT-DEV Alarm. Generic 3i Maintenance circuit packs each have alarm leads which can be connected to external devices such as Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) or adjuncts such as AUDIX. Certain conditions on the external device close the contacts on the alarm leads to notify the switch which in turn originates an EXT-DEV alarm. The special locations UUmajor and UUminor are used to designate the major or minor maintenance board alarm connection for cabinet UU. The major/minor designation specifies the port, not the alarm level associated with the connection; for example, the “major” port can be administered as a major, minor, or warning alarm, and the “minor” port can be administered as a major, minor or warning alarm. In addition Analog line ports can also be administered as external device alarms. NOTE: An unadministered maintenance board external device alarm port, that is sensing a contact closure will have an entry in the Error Log and in the Alarm Log. INADS will not receive warning alarms. In the Standard Reliability PPN the Maintenance Processor (TN786B or TN790) in carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads. In the High or Critical PPN, the Duplication Interface (TN772) circuit pack in carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads, and provides the status to the Maintenance processor (TN786B or TN790) in the active SPE. In the EPN the Maintenance Board (TN775) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads. The system only recognizes pairs connected to the 1M and 1m (ALARM MONITOR) leads. Pairs connected to the 2M, 2m, 3M, 3m, and 3w are not recognized by the system. Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111, for more details. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm) Page 10-654 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-220. Error Type EXT-DEV ADMIN? Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 0 Any Any Any test eda-external-device-alrm physical location r 2 or 6 1 or 5 Any External Device Alarm Test (#120) Any OFF test eda-external-device-alrm physical location r 2 or 6 NOTE: The loss of -48 volt power will prevent detection of an external device alarm. AC-POWER, CARR-POW, and DC-POWER alarms could indicate the loss of the external device alarm -48 volt power source. ALARM-PT alarms may also indicate a loss of power. When analog line ports are administered as analog line external device alarms loss of -48 volts will prevent detection of an external device alarm. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 External Device Alarm Test (MAJOR port) (#120) X X ND External Device Alarm Test (MINOR port) (#120) X X ND External Device Alarm Test (WARNING port) (#120) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive External Device Alarm Test (#120) The External Device Alarm Test requests the state of the External Device Alarm from a Maintenance circuit pack and reports the results. The test has no effect on the external device itself. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm) Table 10-221. Error Code 1000 Page 10-655 TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 time. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1035 ABORT The Expansion Port Network containing this equipment is not available Look for and resolve all Expansion Port Network problems with this cabinet. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 time. 2. (Maintenance Board) If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier. Look for and resolve all AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier cabinet or DC-POWER alarms in a single carrier cabinet. Then, repeat the test. 3. (Maintenance Board) If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, check for and resolve all maintenance circuit pack errors. Then, repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, then escalate the problem. 2029 2100 2319 2320 2500 ABORT ANY FAIL Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. The External Device Alarm has been activated by the external device. 1. Clear the major alarm on the external device, and rerun the test. 2. If the test still fails, then disconnect the External Device Alarm Leads from the Maintenance circuit pack and rerun the test. 3. If the test still fails, then there is a problem with the analog external device alarm port or the Maintenance circuit pack that is reporting the alarm. This circuit pack should be replaced. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance circuit pack that will not be detected by their respective maintenance, but which will cause many environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack should be replaced and the test rerun. 4. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm) Table 10-221. Error Code Page 10-656 TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation If there is a problem with the external device, but the administered analog line external device alarm, or the administered Maintenance circuit pack connected to the device reports no alarm, then the External Device may not be properly reporting the problems or the External Device may not be properly connected to the External Device Alarm Lead. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Page 10-657 FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO FL-DATA MAJOR test card-mem a|b l Flash Data Consistency FL-DATA MINOR test card-mem a|b l Flash Data Consistency FL-DATA WARNING test card-mem a|b l Flash Data Consistency In systems with high or critical reliability, the software and the hard patch update files are stored in the on-board flash memory in both the Active SPE and Standby SPE. The translations and announcements are stored in the memory cards in both the Active SPE and Standby SPE. Flash Data Consistency flags problems when files become mismatched by monitoring the translations, announcements, update files, and software vintage number in a High or Critical Reliability PPN system. If the software vintage numbers on both SPEs are mismatched, a MAJOR alarm is raised. If the announcement files on both memory cards are mismatched, a WARNING alarm is raised. For all other problems, a MINOR alarm is raised. The software vintage can be displayed via the list configuration software-vintage long command. The Flash Data Consistency Test is run on system technician command and as part of daily Standby SPE maintenance. NOTE: Flash Data Consistency is not applicable to Standard systems. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-222. Error Type Flash Data Consistency Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test card-mem a/b l 8 or 16 8 or 16 Flash Data Consistency Test (#421) WNG OFF test card-mem a/b 1-3, 9-10, 17-18, 32-34, 40-42, 48-50, Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-222. Error Type 64-66, Page 10-658 Flash Data Consistency Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 8 or 16 Flash Data Consistency Test (#421) MINOR OFF test card-mem a/b l 8 or 16 Flash Data Consistency Test (#421) MAJOR OFF upgrade software 72-74, 80-82, 9-15, 17-86, 160, 192, 288, 320, 416, 448 4-6, 12-14, 20-22, 36-38, 44-46, 52-54, 68-70 76-78, 84-86, 132, 164, 196, 260, Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-222. Error Type Page 10-659 Flash Data Consistency Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 292, 324, 388, 420, 452 Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. a. The Aux Data field records which SPE was active at the time the Flash Data Consistency Test failed. An "8" in the log refers to carrier A and a "16" refers to carrier B. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Memory Card Insertion Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (b) X X ND Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) (a) X X ND Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (a) X X ND Memory Card Match Test (#697) (a) X X ND Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) (a) X X ND Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) (a) X X ND Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) (a) X ND Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) (a) X ND Flash Data Consistency Test (#421) (c) X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Page 10-660 Notes: a. See “CARD-MEM” for this test description. b. See “12V-PWR” for a description of this test. c. The Flash Data Consistency Test does not run in a Standard system. Flash Data Consistency Check Test (#421) The software vintage number, translation time stamps, announcement time stamps, and update file time stamps and identifiers are read off of both memory cards or SPEs and then compared. If the comparison shows any discrepancy, FL-DATA is alarmed. This test is only run in a High or Critical Reliability system. The test is run as part of the test card-mem long and as part of the standby PE scheduled maintenance. Table 10-223. Error Code 0 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The test timed out without completing. This error can occur when the system is heavily loaded and the test is not allocated sufficient time to run. 1. Rerun the test when the system is less busy and is not running standby maintenance. 1029 1030 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 9005 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 35498 ABORT Difficulty was encountered trying to send information between the SPEs. 35512 ABORT The Standby SPE cannot be put into maintenance mode. 1. Check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link), SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit), and STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) alarms. 2. Retry the command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code 35514 Page 10-661 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 35534 ABORT Could not allocate the (active or standby) memory card drive because another memory card operation was in progress. 1. Wait 10 minutes, and retry the command. 35535 ABORT Could not access the (active or standby) memory card. 1. The memory card may be damaged or missing. Resolve all problems with all memory card tests in the Long Test Sequence for both memory cards. 2. Repeat the test. 1 FAIL The standby translations are out-of-date. The translations on the Standby SPE (memory card) are older than those on the Active SPE (memory card). 2 FAIL The Active SPE translations are out-of-date. 1. Issue save translations command. If the translation save passes on both SPEs, go to Step 2. 2. Run test card-mem long again to resolve the alarms. 4 FAIL The load vintages are different in both SPEs. 1. Determine the desired software release by issuing the list configuration software long command. Obtain the memory card of the same software release. Follow the upgrade software procedure to upgrade the out-of-date SPE. 2. Run the test card-mem long command again to resolve alarms. 5 FAIL The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. 6 FAIL The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. 2. Issue the save translations command. If the translation save passes on both SPEs, proceed to Step 3. 3. Run the test card-mem long command again to resolve alarms. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code 8 Page 10-662 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements in both SPEs. If the announcement save passes on both SPEs, go to Step 2. 2. Run the test card-mem long again to resolve the alarms. 9 FAIL The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE is the most current. 10 FAIL The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations, and the Active SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Issue the save translations command to save translations in both SPEs. 2. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements in both SPEs. 3. If both the translation save and announcement save pass on both SPEs, run the test card-mem long command again to resolve the alarms. 12 FAIL Load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Codes 4 and 8. 13 FAIL The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Codes 4 and 10. 14 FAIL The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations, and the Active SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. Be sure to issue the save announcements command. 16 FAIL Announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 8. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-663 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 17 FAIL The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 18 FAIL The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The standby SPE is the most current. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 9. 20 FAIL The load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 21 FAIL The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 22 FAIL The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations and announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. Be sure to issue the save announcements command. 32 FAIL The update files are different in both SPEs. The update file on the Active SPE is most current. 1. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update file copy passes, go to Step 2. 2. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms. 33 FAIL The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and translations. 34 FAIL The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations. 1. Issue the save translations command to save translations on both SPEs. 2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the update file from the Active to the Standby SPE. 3. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms. 36 FAIL The update files and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file. 37 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and translations. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code 38 Page 10-664 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code. 40 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and announcements. 1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on both SPEs. 2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the update file from the Active to the Standby SPE. 3. Run the test card-mem long again to resolve the alarms. 41 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, translations, and announcements. 42 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations. 1. Issue the save translations command. 2. Issue the save announcements command. 3. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the update file from the Active to the Standby SPE. 4. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-665 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 44 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and announcements. 45 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, translations, and announcements. 46 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage. Be sure to save the announcements. After running the test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code. 48 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 40. 49 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 50 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations and announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 41. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-666 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 52 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 53 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements. 54 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and the Standby SPE has the most current translations and announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code. 64 FAIL The update files are different in both SPEs. The update file on the Standby SPE is the most current. 1. If you are on site with the switch, replace the Active SPE memory card with the Standby SPE memory card. If you are not on site with the switch, issue the reset system interchange command. This action causes the Standby SPE to become the Active SPE. Refer to the "Reset Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for information on the side effects of a processor interchange. 2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update file copy passes, go to Step 3. 3. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms. 65 FAIL The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file, and the Active SPE has the most current translations. 66 FAIL The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations. 1. Issue the save translations command to save translations on both SPEs. 2. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-667 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 68 FAIL The update files and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file. 69 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file, and the Active SPE has the most current translations. 70 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code. 72 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and the Active SPE has the most current announcements. 1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on both SPEs. 2. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64. 73 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file. 74 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations. 1. Issue the save translations command. 2. Issue the save announcements command. 3. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-668 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 76 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file. 77 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file. 78 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code. 80 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements. 1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on both SPEs. 2. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64. 81 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements. 82 FAIL The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file, translations, and announcements. 1. Issue the save translations command. 2. Issue the save announcements command. 3. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64. 84 FAIL The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements. 85 FAIL The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code 86 Page 10-669 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file, translations, and announcements. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to correct the load vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code. 128 ABORT The Translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing. 132 FAIL The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation memory card is missing in the Active SPE. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to correct the software vintage. 2. Insert the translation memory card in the Active SPE. 3. Run the test card-mem long command again to resolve alarms. 160 FAIL The update file in the Active SPE is more current than the Standby SPE and the translation memory card is missing in the Active SPE. 1. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update file copy passes, proceed to Step 2. 2. Insert the translation memory card in the Active SPE. 3. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms. 164 FAIL The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and the translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing. The update file in the Active SPE is more current. 1. Both load vintages and update files should not be mismatched. 192 FAIL The update file in the Standby SPE is more current and the translation memory card is missing in the Active SPE. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160. 196 FAIL The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and the translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing. The update file in the Standby SPE is more current. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-670 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 256 ABORT Translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE. 260 FAIL The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 132. 288 FAIL The update file in the Active SPE is more current and the translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160. 292 FAIL The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and the translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE. The update file in the Active SPE is more current. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164. 320 FAIL The update file in the Standby SPE is more current and the translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160. 324 FAIL The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs and the translation memory card in the Standby SPE is missing. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164. 384 ABORT The translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. 388 FAIL The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 132. 416 FAIL The update file in the Active SPE is more current, and the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160. 420 FAIL The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. The update file in the Active SPE is more current. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164. 448 FAIL The update file in the Standby SPE is more current, and the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160. 452 FAIL The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. The update file in the Standby SPE is more current. 1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency) Table 10-223. Error Code Page 10-671 TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/Recommendation The load vintages, translations, announcements, and update files are the same. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR)] Page 10-672 GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR)] MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO GPTD-PT MAJOR test port PCSSpp sh General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR) GPTD-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp sh General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR) GPTD-PT WARNING release port PCSSpp General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR) 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The General Purpose Tone Detector (GPTD) Port, also known as Call Progress Tone Receiver (CPTR), resides on the Tone Detector circuit pack (TN748 [all suffixes], TN420B [and greater suffixes], and TN756 combined tone detector and tone clock [all suffixes]). There are two GPTD ports and four Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver (DTMR) ports on a Tone Detector circuit pack. The GPTD port is used to perform level measurements of test tones and to detect call progress tones. Examples of call progress tones are dial tone, ring back, busy, alert, confirmation, and recall dial. The abilities of the GPTD port to perform level measurements of test tones and to detect call progress tones are essential for maintenance of other circuit packs (for example, Tone-Clock). The GPTD maintenance feature defines a set of tests to ensure that the general purpose tone detection capability of the GPTD port is functioning properly. For all Tone Detector circuit pack level errors (DETR-BD), refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-BD (Hybrid Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-673 HYB-BD (Hybrid Line Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO HYB-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Hybrid Line Circuit Pack HYB-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Hybrid Line Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Maintenance documentation for related line information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Page 10-674 HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO HYB-LINE Minor test port PCSSpp l Hybrid Line HYB-LINE Warning test port PCSSpp l Hybrid Line 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). Hybrid Line is the user-friendly name for Hybrid Line, which was previously used to denote the Multifunction Analog Telephone. The Hybrid Line set is also known as an SCS (Small Communications System). The TN762B Hybrid Line circuit pack supports eight of these multifunction analog telephone sets, as shown in the following figure. The Hybrid Line sets use three pairs of wires: an analog voice pair, a transmit/receive pair, and a power pair. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Page 10-675 HYBRID LINE CIRCUIT PACK (1) PORT VOICE TERMINAL PBX (8) PORT VOICE TERMINAL HYBRID LINE Figure 10-34. Hybrid Station Interactions This section refers only to the HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) maintenance that is performed. Please note that the HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) maintenance is closely related to, and interacts with, the HYB-BD (Hybrid Line circuit pack) maintenance in some instances. Some of the results of maintenance testing of the Hybrid Line may be affected by the health of the Hybrid Line circuit pack. This interaction should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of reported Hybrid Line problems. There are instances in this section where "service states" of a station are mentioned. It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service states that may exist. An explanation of these service states follows: ■ Out-of-Service–The port, and thus the station, have been removed from service. A busyout of a port causes it to be out-of-service. ■ Ready-for-Service–Once a port on the circuit pack has been put into service, the voice terminal must communicate that it is present. The time between these two events is the time when the terminal is in the ready-for-service state. ■ In-Service–Once the system has received a message from the voice terminal communicating that it is present, the station is put into the in-service state. The terminal can also be forced into the in-service state if it goes off-hook while it is in the ready-for-service state. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Page 10-676 When the status station command has been run, and the status screen appears, the status is reported as either out-of-service or in-service, which mean exactly as stated in the above list, or disconnect, which means the station is in the ready-for-service state. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-224. Hybrid Line Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any 1 (a) Any None WARNING OFF 15 (b) Any Hybrid Audits Test (#61) 18 (c) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 2 OFF 0 130 (d) test port PCSSpp sh r 1 257 (e) 40988 None MIN/WRN 513 (f) 40965 Hybrid Line Audits Test (#61) WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 4 769 (g) Remote Dig Loop Around Test (#59) WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 3 1025 Hybrid & Conf. Circuits Test (#57) MIN/WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 1281 (h) Local Digital Loop Around Test (#58) WARNING ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 None WARNING OFF TDMNPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MIN/WRN2 ON 1537 (i) 40968 1793 2049 (j) 32770 None 2049 (k) 40967 None test port PCSSpp l r 3 Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Page 10-677 a. Indicates a defective data link. An off-board problem was detected by port circuit. Verify that the Hybrid set is connected and that the EPF test passes. If data transmission problems are experienced, check for defective wiring or a defective voice terminal, or move terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined period of time. b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. This error type is logged when the port in question is busied out by maintenance personnel. Make sure port is released from busyout via the release port PCSSpp command. d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. e. This indicates that the EPF has been turned off due to an overcurrent condition at the voice terminal. Check for defective wiring or a damaged jack, and make sure the voice terminal is a Hybrid set. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined period of time. f. This indicates that the voice terminal has probably been disconnected or that there is a problem in the wiring to the terminal. Make sure that the voice terminal is connected or check for defective wiring to the voice terminal. g. Note that Error Types 769 and 1281 by themselves create Warning alarms only, but if both are present, a Minor alarm is logged. h. This indicates that there is something wrong with the data link to the voice terminal. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning. Ignore it if there are no complaints. Otherwise, make sure the voice terminal is connected, check for defective wiring, check for a defective voice terminal, and move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. i. This indicates that the station went off-hook while in the disconnect state. Use the status station command to determine the state of the station. The off-hook should have moved the station to in-service. No system technician action is necessary. j. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No system technician action is necessary. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Page 10-678 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Local Digital Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-225. System Technician-Demanded Tests: HYB-LINE Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Local Digital Loop Around Test (#58) X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test (#56) X ND Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test (#57) X ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Remote Digital Loop Around Test (#59) X X ND Station Lamp Update Test (#60) X X ND Station Audits Test (#61) X X ND Ringer Update Test (#62) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-226. Error Code Page 10-679 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-226. Error Code 1004 Page 10-680 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. This only applies to analog stations. The default for this field is ‘y,’ so you may want to determine why it has been turned off for this station. 1. To enable test, set the Test field on the station administration screen for the particular analog station being tested to ‘y.’ Use the change station command. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-226. Error Code Any Page 10-681 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation. 3. Retest the board when the faults from steps 1 and 2 are cleared. 0 PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test (#56) In this test, the software requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port. An attempt is made to turn on the power unit from the station. If no current is being drawn, this probably indicates that the station is not connected. If an overcurrent condition is sensed (that is, too much current is being drawn), this may indicate a short in the loop or a defective voice terminal. Depending on what condition is sensed, a message is returned stating that either the EPF was turned on successfully with no problems or that an overcurrent condition is sensed. This test is repeated once more five seconds later. If either test is not successful, the test aborts (see first ABORT entry in the table below). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-227. Error Code Page 10-682 TEST #56 Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS EPF test passed. The message to turn on the power to the station was successfully sent to the port. 1. Although this test never returns a FAIL result, after running this test, the Error Log should be checked for any entries with Error Type 257 to examine the real results of this test. 2. If Error Type 257 does not appear in the Error Log within 10 seconds after completion of this test, it is safe to assume that the test sensed no problems with the power to the station. To verify that the station is powered up correctly, run a self-test on the station, if available, and check that all the feature buttons are operating. 3. If Error Type 257 appears in the Error Log, this indicates some problem with the power to the station. The system technician should check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a defective voice terminal, or an incorrect type of terminal. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-227. Error Code 0 Page 10-683 TEST #56 Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test (#57) This test checks the amount of reflection from the Hybrid loop around circuitry and a Conference Test. Please be aware that if no station is connected to the port being tested, the results of the test are not valid. The Tone-Clock circuit pack places a 1004-Hz tone on a time slot that the port circuit is listening on. A GPTD is connected to another time slot that the same port circuit is talking on. The on-board microprocessor places the port in the loop around mode and the GPTD measures the level of the reflected signal. The Conference Test is performed after the Circuit Test. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE is able to listen to several test tones and correctly conference them together. The test is executed in two parts. The first half of the test checks the operation of the NPE’s first three conference channels. The NPE is put in the loop around mode and instructed to talk on a selected time slot and listen to the 1004-Hz tone using the first three Conference Channels. The signal level and noise level of the conferenced output are then measured using a GPTD and checked to verify that they are within an acceptable range. The second half of the Conference Test checks the operation of the NPE’s remaining four Conference Channels and follows the same procedure as the preceding paragraph. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-228. Error Code Page 10-684 TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-228. Error Code 1004 Page 10-685 TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 7 FAIL Conference Test failed. User may be able to use conference circuit without difficulty in some cases. In other extreme cases, conference calling will be totally restricted. The failure may be due to off-board circumstances, the most common of which is an off-hook occurring during the test. Also, check the error logs against the GPTD-BD, the TONE-BD, and the TONE-PT. 1. This error can be caused by a disconnected terminal. First, ensure that the terminal is connected and the wiring is OK. 2. Then, issue the display port and the status station commands to determine if the station is idle. If it is idle, issue the test port command for this port. 3. If test continues to fail, issue the busyout port and the release port commands, and then retest the port. 4. It is possible that the port may still be functional from a user’s point of view. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-228. Error Code 57 Page 10-686 TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Hybrid Circuit Test failed. This could result in noisy or bad connections. 1. This error can be caused by a disconnected terminal. First, ensure that the terminal is connected and the wiring is OK. 2. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSS short command. 3. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 4. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Hybrid Line circuit pack. NOTE: If the Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, the 631DB AC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain either a TN736 or a TN752 power unit circuit pack OR a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for AC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation. PASS Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test passed. The hybrid circuitry is transmitting properly. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other port tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-228. Error Code TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result 0 Page 10-687 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test (#58) This test checks the control channel between the SPE and the port’s digital circuitry. The SPE sends transparent data to the on-board microprocessor and compares the data echoed back. This test is repeated three times. Table 10-229. Error Code TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-229. Error Code 1000 Page 10-688 TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-229. Error Code 1,2,3 Page 10-689 TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The control channel between the processor and the port is not transmitting properly. This port is not operable. 1. Retry the test. 2. If the failure still occurs, issue the busyout and the release busy commands, and then retest. 3. If the failure is occurring on more than one port on the board, suspect the board. 4. If the failure is occurring on several boards in the same carrier, escalate the problem. 5. If the failure still occurs and appears to be isolated to one port, check all wiring to the set and all set connections. 6. Replace the circuit pack as a last resort. PASS Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test passed. The control channel is transmitting properly. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other circuit pack tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-229. Error Code Page 10-690 TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result 0 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test (#59) This test checks the digital control pair from the port circuit to the terminal. The on-board microprocessor sends a message to the terminal and checks for a proper return message. This test is repeated three times, with two out of the three attempts passing being sufficient for this test to pass. [G1] This test will run if the station is in-service or out-of-service. Table 10-230. Error Code TEST #59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-230. Error Code 1 Page 10-691 TEST #59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation A request for a remote station audit aborted even though all internal resources were correctly allocated. 1. Look in the error log for error type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, release the port via the release port PCSSpp command or the release station extension command, and then run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-230. Error Code 1,2,3 Page 10-692 TEST #59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation No response was received within the allowable time period on one of the transmissions to the terminal. This indicates that something is wrong with the data link to the voice terminal. This could be a sleeping set problem or it may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective set. 1. Check for errors in the error log, for example, error 1537. 2. Remotely issue the busyout and release busy commands, and run the short test sequence on the port to check for other errors associated with the port or terminal. 3. Check the wiring to the set if it appears that the terminal is not responding to any tests; otherwise, replace the terminal and rerun the test. 4. If the test still fails, replace the circuit pack and reconnect the original terminal. PASS Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test passed. The hybrid circuit pack is sending and receiving proper messages to and from the voice terminal. 1. If problems still exist, investigate using other circuit pack tests and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test (#60) For this test, the software lights the lamps on the terminal based on the status record contained in the processor. The lamp updates run only if the station is in-service. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-231. Error Code 1 Page 10-693 TEST #60 Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation A request for a remote station lamp update aborted even though all internal resources were correctly allocated. 1. Look in the error log for error type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, release the port via the release port PCSSpp command or the release station extension command, and then run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 ABORT The station is in a ready for service or an out of service state. This may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective set. 1. Make sure terminal is connected and the wiring is correct. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS Hybrid Line Lamp Updates completed successfully. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other circuit pack tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-231. Error Code 0 Page 10-694 TEST #60 Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Line Audits Test (#61) This is a series of three tests that are classified as audits. These audits abort if attempted on an out-of-service station. The tests are as follows: ■ Switchhook Audit - This is an update of the SPE records according to the circuit packs’ records. ■ Bad Scan Inquiry - A message is sent uplink that contains a count that is generated due to certain events relating to the data link conditions. This is an indication of data transmission problems between the Hybrid circuit pack and the voice terminal. ■ EPF Inquiry - The status of the Electronic Power Feed is sent uplink. Possible conditions are: EPF-on-ok, EPF-off, EPF-no-load, and EPF-on-overcurrent. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-232. Error Code Page 10-695 TEST #61 Hybrid Line Audits Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error 1 ABORT The test was aborted due to an internal system error during the switchhook audit. 2 ABORT Internal System Error occurred during bad scan inquiry audit. 1. Make sure that the station is not in an out of service state. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 ABORT This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, the release the port via the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-232. Error Code 2000 Page 10-696 TEST #61 Hybrid Line Audits Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS Hybrid Line Audits Test passed. 1. Although this test always return a PASS result, it may enter Error Types 257 or 513 into the Error Log. To determine if there are any problems that don’t show up in the test result, look for these error types in the Error Log. 2. If these errors appear in the Error Log, or if user complaints still exist, investigate by using other circuit pack tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Hybrid Line Ringer Update Test (#62) In this update, a "ringer on" or a "ringer off" message is sent to the firmware to start and stop the ringer on the set. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-233. Error Code 3 Page 10-697 TEST #62 Hybrid Line Ringer Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this Error Type is present, the release the port via the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS Hybrid Station Ringer Update passed 1. If complaints still exist, investigate using other circuit pack tests on this circuit pack, and by examining the terminal, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Table 10-233. Error Code 0 Page 10-698 TEST #62 Hybrid Line Ringer Update Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures INADS (INADS Link) Page 10-699 INADS (INADS Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) INADS Alarm Level none Initial Command to Run test inads-link Full Name of MO INADS Link The INADS Link MO represents the software and communications link required by the switch to make a call to the Initialization and Administration System (INADS). The purpose of the INADS Link MO is to check the communications link between the DEFINITY Generic 1 and INADS and verify that the alarm notification process works correctly. An INADS technician can test the process remotely to verify that alarms are reported to INADS, or a system technician may want to test the connection while on-site at installation time or during subsequent service calls. Although the INADS Link MO is never alarmed, the errors are logged. The errors are only logged as a result of the test inads-link command being issued. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values The Hardware Error Log entries are described as part of the INADS Link Test description. Short and Long Test Sequences The test inads-link command is different from other test commands. This command does not have a long or short option, and the test on the INADS Link does not have an associated test number. When the command is different from other test commands. This command does not have a long or short option, and the test on the INADS Link does not have an associated test number. When the test inads-link command is issued, the user immediately sees either the "Command successfully completed" or "Command failed" message command is issued, the user immediately sees either the "Command successfully completed" or "Command failed" message. INADS Link Test (no test number) The INADS Link Test attempts to place a call to INADS (in the background) to verify the communications link to INADS. When the test inads-link command is entered, the user immediately sees either "Command successfully completed" or "Command failed." The "Command failed" message appears when a previously run command is entered, the user immediately sees either "Command successfully completed" or "Command failed" The "Command failed" message appears when a previously run test inads-link command is in progress or the system has active alarms which must be reported to INADS. The "Command successfully completed" means the switch will start the attempt to call INADS in Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures INADS (INADS Link) Page 10-700 two minutes (the test still runs even if Alarm Origination is disabled). The two-minute delay allows a remote INADS technician time enough to hang up the call and thus free up the INADS line so that the switch can call INADS back. As error conditions are encountered, errors are logged against INADS. Error codes 1 through 9 can be logged if the test result was "Command successfully completed" and Error Codes 10 and 11 can be logged if the test result was "Command failed." An error is also logged against INADS if the call to INADS finally succeeds. The INADS software (release 3.2 or later) recognizes this special "test inads" type of alarm and automatically opens and then closes a trouble ticket which indicates that the reason for the trouble ticket is a command is in progress or the system has active alarms which must be reported to INADS. The "Command successfully completed" means the switch will start the attempt to call INADS in two minutes (the test still runs even if Alarm Origination is disabled). The two-minute delay allows a remote INADS technician time enough to hang up the call and thus free up the INADS line so that the switch can call INADS back. As error conditions are encountered, errors are logged against INADS. Error codes 1 through 9 can be logged if the test result was "Command successfully completed" and Error Codes 10 and 11 can be logged if the test result was "Command failed." An error is also logged against INADS if the call to INADS finally succeeds. The INADS software (release 3.2 or later) recognizes this special "test inads" type of alarm and automatically opens and then closes a trouble ticket which indicates that the reason for the trouble ticket is a test inads-link command. The trouble ticket alarm contains a TESTING INADS LINK description field. After entering the command, it may take as long a nine minutes for the switch to place the call and for INADS to respond. The Error Log should be examined (use the category inads) 10 minutes after successfully entering the command to determine if the call was successful. Use the following table to interpret the Error Log entries. Table 10-234. INADS Link Error Log Entries Test Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1 0 The call was successfully placed to INADS. No trouble found. 2 0 Informative error indicating that alarm origination was disabled at the time of the test. The test runs even if alarm origination is disabled. 1. If Alarm Origination is desired, then enable this feature via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form. 2. Repeat the test. 3 0 The INADS connection is currently in use. 1. Wait 10 minutes and retry this command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures INADS (INADS Link) INADS Link Error Log Entries Test — Continued Table 10-234. Error Code 4 Page 10-701 Test Result 0 Description/ Recommendation INADS did not answer the alarm origination call. 1. Verify INADS is up and running. 2. Verify the INADS phone number and switch product id are correct via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form. 3. Enable alarm origination via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form and test the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) by issuing the test processor a|b command. If PR-MAINT Tests #102 and #103 do not pass, then refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation. 4. Retry the command. 5 0 No INADS phone number administered. 1. Administer the INADS phone number via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form. 2. Retry the command. 6 0 INADS did not send the acknowledgment message to the "test inads alarm" message. 1. Verify the INADS phone number and switch product id are correct via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form. 2. Verify INADS is up and running. 3. Retry the command. 7 0 INADS sent a negative acknowledgment to the "test inads alarm" message. 8 0 Internal system error; system received an invalid return code. 9 0 Internal system error 1. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times. 10 0 There is already a test inads-link command in progress. 1. Wait 10 minutes for the present command to finish. 2. Review the results of the present command by viewing the Error Log and selecting the category "inads-link." 11 0 The switch is trying to report alarms to INADS. The test cannot be run at this time. 1. Wait 10 minutes and retry the command. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-702 ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) ISDN-LNK 2 ISDN-LNK 1. 2. Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MINOR test port PCSSpp l ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port WARNING test port PCSSpp sh ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Where ’pp’ is ’24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ’16’ for 32-channel interfaces. For additional repair information, see also DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) or UDS1-BD (Universal DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. NOTE: Use this Maintenance Object (ISDN-LNK) for maintenance tests, alarms, and hardware errors when the “ISDN-PRI over PACCON” option on the system-parameters customer form is set to a “n”. When the ISDN PRI over PACCON is set to “y” use Maintenance Object ISDN-PLK. When the ISDN-PRI over PACCON option is set to “n”, the ISDN-PRI D-channel call control messages are transmitted over the TDM bus to the Processor Interface circuit pack and you must use this Maintenance Object for PRI Link problems. An ISDN-PRI Signaling Link is known as a D-channel. D-channels are used to transmit call control signaling for B-channels. The call control signaling for the B-channels is combined and carried over separate ISDN-PRI D-channels. User information (for example, digitized voice, digital data) channels are known as bearer channels (B-channels); DS1 ISDN Trunks are B-channels and they carry the user traffic. PRI endpoint ports are also B-channels that can carry Wideband traffic. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (ISDN-LNK) and the associated DS1/UDS1 ISDN Trunk (ISDN-TRK) or PRI endpoint port (PE-BCHL) use ports on a TN767 or TN464B or later DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack (the TN722 cannot be used for this application). The TN767 is used for 24 channel 1.544 Mbps systems. The TN464B is used for 32 channel 2.048 Mbps systems. The TN464C or later can be used for either 24 or 32 channel systems. A description of these circuit packs appears in “DS1-BD” or “UDS1-BD”. In a 24 channel system, the DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels) may use any of the first 23 ports. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port must be the 24th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 24th port may be used as a B-channel. Refer to “ISDN-PRI Signaling Group” for further details. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-703 In a 32 channel system, the DS1/UDS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels) may use any of the ports 1-15 or 17-31, but the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port must be the 16th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 16th port may be used as a B-channel. Refer to the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) Maintenance documentation for further details. ISDN-LNK handles maintenance and recovery for the D-channel port on the DS1 carrying the signaling link. A problem with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (D-channel) has an effect on all of the associated DS1 ISDN Trunks or PRI endpoint ports (B-channels) since no call control information can be conveyed to the far-end switch without it. Stable calls may remain operational, but no new calls can be made. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port itself depends on two other entities: the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack it resides on, and the Processor Interface Link that provides the link to the processor. If there are problems with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port, also investigate the DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack and the Processor Interface Link. (PORT 0) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) FRAMING ISDN-TRK • • • PROCESSOR (TN773/TN786) PI CIRCUIT PACK (TN765) TDM BUS UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 15) PRIMARY SIGNALING LINK (PORT 16) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-LNK ISDN-TRK (PORT 17) • • • VOICE OR DATA (PORT 31) PI-LINK Figure 10-35. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Interactions (32-Channel) ISDN-TRK Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-704 SIGNALING ISDN-LNK (PORT 24) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK TDM PI PROCESSOR CIRCUIT (TN773/TN786) PACK BUS (PORT 23) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK (TN765) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 2) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) PI-LINK Figure 10-36. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Interactions (24-Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-705 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-235. Error Type ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 (c) 18 0 busyout port PCSSpp (c) WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp (c) 130 (a) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh (c) 1537 (b) NPE Crosstalk Test #6 MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 (c) 1. Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. Indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. b. The actual alarming level depends on the options chosen via the set options command on the Manager terminal. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port alarms are treated as Station alarms, and their default alarming option is to downgrade all alarms to Warning. The value shown in the preceding table indicates the normal, unfiltered case (option "y" on the Set Options form). c. ’pp’ is ’24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ’16’ for 32-channel interfaces. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The command line entry to test the ISDN-LNK MO is: test port PCSSxx (sh or l), where ‘xx’ is ‘24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ‘16’ for 32-channel interfaces. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) Signaling Link Board Check (#643) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND X ND Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-706 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. This test runs only if the Processor Interface link corresponding to this ISDN-LNK MO is busied out by system technician. The Processor Interface link number can be determined from the Communication-Interface Links form. Table 10-236. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources for this test are not available. The ISDN-PRI link may be up and servicing calls. First obtain the ISDN-PRI link number (lnk-no) from the Communication-Interface Links form by issuing the display communication-interfaces links command. Then, determine the status of the ISDN-PRI link via the status link lnk-no command. If the link is in-service, this test aborts. Therefore, to run this test, the link must be busied out. No new ISDN-PRI calls can be made while the link is in the busied-out state. 1. If the test must be run, busyout the link. 2. Retry the command. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Table 10-236. Error Code 1003 Page 10-707 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the DS1-BD Interface circuit pack. PASS The port is able to communicate over the TDM Bus. Continued on next page Signaling Link Board Check (#643) This ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel depends on the health of the DS1 Interface circuit pack. This test checks the state of the DS1 Interface circuit pack transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Table 10-237. Error Code Page 10-708 TEST #643 Signaling Link Board Check Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this D-channel port is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete test on this port, either: 1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry test command, or 2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering change ds1 PCSS and set the field "Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y." 8 FAIL The DS1 circuit pack is not in-service. 1. Check the Hardware Error Log for entries logged against DS1-BD and consult the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for repair procedures. PASS The DS1 Interface circuit pack transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port is in-service. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-709 ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO ISDN-PLK2 MINOR test port PCSSpp l ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port ISDN-PLK WARNING test port PCSSpp sh ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port 1. 2. Where ’pp’ is ’24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ’16’ for 32-channel interfaces. For additional repair information, see also PKT-CTRL (Packet Control), DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) or UDS1-BD (Universal DS1 Interface Circuit Pack). NOTE: Use this Maintenance Object (ISDN-PLK) for maintenance tests, alarms, and hardware errors when the “ISDN-PRI over PACCON” option on the system-parameters customer form is set to a “y” When the ISDN PRI over PACCON is set to “n” use Maintenance Object ISDN-LNK. The ISDN-PRI over PACCON option allows the PRI Links to be carried over the PACCON (Packet Controller TN778 circuit board), increasing the system ISDN-PRI capacity to the possible number of D-channels. An ISDN-PRI Signaling Link is known as a D-channel. The D-channel is used to transmit call-control signaling for the B-channels. B-channels (User information channels) are known as bearer channels (B-channels for example, transmit digitized voice, digital data); DS1 ISDN Trunks are B-channels and they carry the user traffic. PRI endpoint ports are also B-channels that can carry Wideband traffic. The call control signaling for the B-channels is combined and carried over the separate ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port is the port on a TN464C or later UDS1 Interface circuit pack that carries D-channel messages to the processor. The ISDN-PRI interface uses out-of-band signaling as opposed to robbed-bit, in-band signaling. For G3s, and G3i, this port can be used as an interface to the TDM bus or to the Packet bus. This is controlled by the “ISDN-PRI over PACCON” option. When the option is set to “y” the ISDN-PRI D-channel messages are transmitted over the Packet bus to the Packet Control circuit pack. The associated maintenance object name of the UDS1 port used to carry the D-channel over the Packet Bus is ISDN-PLK. The B-channels associated with a ISDN-PRI D-channel can use ports on the same circuit pack or ports on other TN464C or later or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit packs (the TN722 cannot be used for this application). The TN767 DS1 interfaces is used for 24 channel 1.544 Mbps systems. The TN464C or later can be used for either 24 or 32 channel systems. The 32-channel (31 DS0 channels + 1 framing channel on a 2.048 Mbps link) are only supported DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-710 on TN464 series circuit packs. A description of these circuit packs appears in DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation. In a 24 channel system, the DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels) may use any of the first 23 ports. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port must be the 24th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 24th port may be used as a B-channel. Refer to the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) Maintenance documentation for further details. In a 32 channel system, the DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels) may use any of the ports 1-15 or 17-31, but the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port must be the 16th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 16th port may be used as a B-channel. Refer to the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) Maintenance documentation for further details. ISDN-PLK handles maintenance and recovery for the D-channel port on the DS1 carrying the signaling link. A problem with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (D-channel) has an effect on all of the associated DS1 ISDN Trunks or PRI endpoint ports (B-channels) since no call control information can be conveyed to the far-end switch or Terminal Adapter without it. Stable calls may remain operational, but no new calls can be made. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (ISDN-PLK) itself depends on two other entities: the UDS1 interface circuit pack (TN464) it resides on, and the Packet bus which provides the link to the processor. If there are problems with the ISDN-PLK, also investigate the TN464 UDS1 interface circuit pack (UDS1-BD) and the packet bus (PKT-BUS). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-711 Packet Bus (Port 0) Processor (TN786) Packet Control Circuit Pack (TN778) D-Channel UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack (TN464*) B-Channels Framing Voice or Data (Port 1) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 15) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Primary Signaling Link (Port 16) ISDN-LNK (D-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 17) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 31) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) TDM Bus 32-Channel *TN464 C or later Figure 10-37. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Interactions (32-Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-712 Packet B us Processor (T N 786) Packet C ontrol Circuit Pack (T N778) D -C hannel UD S 1 Interface Circuit Pack (TN 464*) B -C hannels Voice or Data (Port 1) IS DN -T R K (B -Channel) Voice or D ata (Por t 2) IS DN -T R K (B -Channel) Voice or D ata (Por t 23) IS DN -T R K (B -Channel) P rim ary Signaling Link (Port 24) IS DN -P LK (D-Channel) TD M B us 24-Channel Phys ical c onnection Logical connection *T N464 C or later Figure 10-38. FAS ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-713 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-238. Error Type ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp2 18(a) 0 busyout port PCSSpp* WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp2 None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp2 WARNING OFF 130 (b) 1537 (c) 46210 test board PCSSpp21 1793 (d) 3585 (e) 46222 3841 (f) 46211 3842 (g) 46223 3843 (h) 1. 2. MINOR Signaling Port Packet Bus (LAN) Loopback test (#939) ON test port PCSSpp21 Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. pp is 24-channel interfaces and 16 for 32-channel interfaces. Notes: a. The D-channel is demand busied out. No calls can be made over this D-channel. b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. c. “Link error” This error occurs when the port receives an invalid frame over the D-channel. This error normally indicates an off-board problem usually related to transmission errors on the DS1 facility. Execute the list measurements ds1-log command for the UDS1 TN464 circuit pack on which the D-channel resides. If the UDS1 is reporting some errors, then the DS1 facility has experienced transmission problems which could have caused the ISDN-PLK to report a Link Error. If the UDS1 is not reporting errors, execute the long test sequence for the D-channel (ISDN-SGR). Investigate any errors, if there are none execute a long test sequence for the UDS1 circuit pack (UDS1-BD) and investigate any errors. If no errors are reported, the Link Error is probably not affecting service. d. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for and resolve UDS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-714 e. “Transmit FIFO Overflow error” This error indicates that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the Packet Bus, thus affecting the conveyance of signaling information over the D-channel. Specifically, this error occurs when the Packet Bus transmit buffers overflow. This condition probably indicates a hardware problem. The actual alarming level depends on the options chosen via the set options command on the G3-MT terminal. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port alarms are treated as Station alarms, and their default alarming option is to downgrade all alarms to Warning. The value shown in the preceding table indicates the normal, unfiltered case (option "y" on the Set Options form). f. “Bad DLCI error” This error occurs when a LAPD frame is received across the DS1 facility which contains a DLCI which does not have a valid entry in the on-board translation memory. This error normally indicates an off-board problem usually related to a broken endpoint or a state mismatch between a remote endpoint and the local call processing software. Maintenance will not start any testing or generate any alarms in response to this error. g. “Receive FIFO Overflow error” This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive buffers. If it occurs frequently, it may indicate a LAPD parameter mismatch between the two end-points of a packet switched connection. LAPD should be able to recover from this problem, but it may degrade the performance of the Packet Bus. Maintenance will not start any testing or generate any alarms in response to this error. h. This error occurs when the Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback Test (#939) fails. Run the long test sequence and pay particular attention to the results of Test #939. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. REMINDER: The command line entry to test the ISDN-PLK MO is: test port PCSSpp (sh or l), where ‘pp’ is ‘24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ‘16’ for 32-channel interfaces. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Signaling Port Bus Loopback Test (#939) Signaling Link Board Check (#643) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D X ND Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-715 Signaling Link Board Check (#643) This test checks the state of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack (TN464C or later) transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link. Table 10-239. Error Code TEST #643 Signaling Link Board Check Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this D-channel port is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete test on this port, either: 1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry test command, or 2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering change ds1 PCCSS and set the field "Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y." 8 FAIL The UDS1 circuit pack (TN464C or later) is not in-service. 1. Check the Hardware Error Log for entries logged against UDS1-BD and consult the UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for repair procedures. PASS The UDS1 Interface circuit pack transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port is in-service. Continued on next page Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback Test (#939) This test verifies the connectivity of an ISDN-PRI Signaling Port (D-channel) across the Packet Bus, also known as the LAN bus. It will execute only if the port is busied out. Failure of this test indicates a fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Page 10-716 Packet Control Circuit Pack (TN778) Processor (TN786) UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack (TN464*) To far end switch hardware Packet Bus *TN464 C or later Figure 10-39. Table 10-240. Error Code 1015 Signaling Port Packet Bus (LAN) Loopback TEST #939 Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port is not in the out-of-service state. Use the busyout port PCSSpp command to place it in the out-of-service state and repeat this test ! CAUTION: The busyout will prevent new call originations on all B-channels in the signaling group until the port is released. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in this port network is out of service. 1. Follow repair procedures for the Packet Bus 2. Enter test port PCSSpp long and check the results of this test (939). 1141 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is out of service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for PKT-CTRL. 2. Enter test port PCSSpp long and check the results of this test (939). 1144 ABORT The Packet Bus in the PPN is out of service. 1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus. 2. Enter test port PCSSpp long and check the results of this test (939). 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) Table 10-240. Error Code Page 10-717 TEST #939 Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Loopback test has failed. 1. If this test fails repeatedly wait until all of the ports on the board are idle (not in use) and reset the circuit pack. To reset the circuit pack enter the commands busyout board PCSS and reset PCSS. 2. Repeat the test, and if the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack. PASS 1. Connectivity of the D-channel over the Packet Bus is operational. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-718 ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 ISDN-SGR MINOR test sig-group ISDN-PRI Signaling Group ISDN-SGR WARNING test sig-group ISDN-PRI Signaling Group 1. Full Name of MO Where is a number 1-8 and the test sequence can be either s (short) or l (long). An ISDN-PRI Signaling Group is a collection of DS1/UDS1 ISDN Trunks or PRI endpoint ports (B-channels) for which a given ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (D-channel) carries signaling information. ISDN-PRI requires the use of one of the following DS1 interface circuit packs: TN767 24-channel with ISDN-PRI D-channel over PI-BD TN464B 32-channel with ISDN-PRI D-channel over PI-BD TN464C or later 24- or 32-channel with ISDN-PRI D-channel over PI-BD or PKT-CTRL (PACCON) See DS1-BD and UDS1-BD Maintenance documentation for a description of these circuit packs. See DS1/CEPT1/ISDN-PRI Reference, 55-025-101, for more information on ISDN. NOTE: If a ISDN-PRI over PACCON (Packet Control Circuit pack) is to be used then only the TN464C or later may be used for the D-channel Signaling. For 24 channel interfaces, the first 23 ports on the circuit pack are used as B-channels. The 24th port may be used as a B-channel or as a D-channel depending on the type of Signaling Group used, as described below. For 32 channel interfaces, ports 1-15 and 17-31 on the circuit pack are used as B-channels. The 16th port may be used as a B-channel or as a D-channel depending on the type of Signaling Group used, as described below. There are two types of Signaling Groups: ■ Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) (supported by all country protocols) ■ Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) (supported by country protocol 1 only) The figures following this discussion illustrate each of the configurations. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-719 In an FAS Signaling Group, the 24th port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 24 channel interfaces) or the 16th port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 32 channel interfaces) is always the D-channel that carries signaling information for the other ports (B-channels) on the circuit pack. If a Packet Control circuit pack is used then only the TN464C or later circuit pack may be used. In an NFAS Signaling Group, the 24th port of a DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 24 channel interfaces) or the 16th port of a DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 32 channel interfaces) is administered as a D-channel. The D-channel carries signaling information for the other ports (B-channels) on that circuit pack. That D-channel can also carry signaling information for any of the ports on other DS1 Interface circuit packs in the NFAS Signaling Group. As a result, the 24th port on other 24-channel DS1 Interface circuit packs and the 16th port on other 32-channel DS1 Interface circuit packs can be used as B-channels. A D-channel in an NFAS Group can signal for B-channels on a total of 20 DS1 Interface circuit packs. This configuration is known as NFAS Simplex. If a Packet Control circuit pack is used then only the TN464C or later circuit pack may be used to carry the D-channel, however other DS1/UDS1 interface circuit packs may be used to carry only B-channels. In addition to NFAS Simplex, there is another type of NFAS Group called NFAS Duplex. This provides the user with more reliability, which is desirable because NFAS permits the D-channel to signal for so many B-channels. NFAS Duplex allows the administration of a backup D-channel, which remains in a Standby state until the Active D-channel goes down. If the Active D-channel does go down, the backup D-channel takes over and provides signaling for all the B-channels in the signaling group. In the case that a Packet Control circuit pack is used then only the TN464C or later may be used to carry the D-channels. B-channels may be carried by any DS1/UDS1 interfaces. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Group itself depends on three other entities: the DS1 Interface circuit pack on which the D-channel(s) resides, the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port(s), and the interface link that provides connectivity to the processor (either the Processor Interface Link or the Packet Control circuit pack). If there are any problems with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group, also investigate the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port(s), the DS1 Interface circuit pack(s), and either the Processor Interface Link or the Packet Control circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-720 PI VOICE OR CIRCUIT PACK DATA (TN765) (PORT 1) ISDN-TRK D-CHANNEL "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS DS1/UDS1 P INTERFACE O SYSTEM R GENERIC 1 T CIRCUIT TDM BUS PACK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 23) ISDN-TRK PRIMARY SIGNALING LINK ISDN-LNK (PORT 24) LOGICAL CONNECTION PHYSICAL CONNECTION Figure 10-40. FAS ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (24 Channel) over Processor Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-721 (PORT 0) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) PI CIRCUIT PACK (TN765) "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM GENERIC 1 ISDN-TRK • • • D-CHANNEL P O R T FRAMING TDM BUS UDS1* INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 15) PRIMARY SIGNALING LINK (PORT 16) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-LNK ISDN-TRK (PORT 17) • • • VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 31) LOGICAL CONNECTION PHYSICAL CONNECTION * TN464C OR LATER Figure 10-41. FAS ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (32 Channel) over Processor Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-722 VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE PI CIRCUIT CIRCUIT PACK PACK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 23) ISDN-TRK (TN765) PRIMARY D-CHANNEL "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SIGNALING LINK P SYSTEM R GENERIC 1 T ISDN-LNK (PORT 24) O TDM BUS VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 24) LOGICAL CONNECTION PHYSICAL CONNECTION VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 24) Figure 10-42. NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (24 Channel) over Processor Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-723 (PORT 0) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) FRAMING ISDN-TRK • • • UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 15) PRIMARY SIGNALING LINK (PORT 16) PI CIRCUIT PACK (TN765) "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM GENERIC 1 VOICE OR DATA (PORT 17) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 31) TDM BUS (PORT 0) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK ISDN-TRK (PORT 31) LOGICAL CONNECTION (PORT 0) PHYSICAL CONNECTION VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK ISDN-TRK FRAMING ISDN-TRK • • • VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK FRAMING ISDN-TRK • • • VOICE OR DATA (PORT 31) Figure 10-43. ISDN-LNK • • • D-CHANNEL P O R T ISDN-TRK ISDN-TRK NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (32 Channel) over Processor Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-724 VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE PI CIRCUIT CIRCUIT PACK PACK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 23) ISDN-TRK (TN765) PRIMARY PORT "DEFINITY" D-CHANNEL SIGNALING TDM BUS (PORT 24) LINK 1 COMMUNICATIONS ISDN-LNK SYSTEM GENERIC 1 PORT D-CHANNEL 2 VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 24) LOGICAL CONNECTION PHYSICAL CONNECTION VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 23) ISDN-TRK SECONDARY SIGNALING LINK ISDN-LNK (PORT 24) Figure 10-44. NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (24 Channel) over Processor Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-725 (PORT 0) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) FRAMING ISDN-TRK • • • UDS1 VOICE OR DATA INTERFACE ISDN-TRK (PORT 15) CIRCUIT PACK PRIMARY SIGNALING LINK ISDN-LNK (PORT 16) PI CIRCUIT PACK (TN765) "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM GENERIC 1 VOICE OR DATA (PORT 17) ISDN-TRK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 31) ISDN-TRK • • • PORT D-CHANNEL 1 TDM BUS PORT D-CHANNEL 2 (PORT 0) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK ISDN-TRK • • • VOICE OR DATA (PORT 31) LOGICAL CONNECTION (PORT 0) PHYSICAL CONNECTION FRAMING ISDN-TRK FRAMING VOICE OR DATA (PORT 1) ISDN-TRK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 15) ISDN-TRK • • • UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK SECONDARY SIGNALING LINK ISDN-LNK (PORT 16) VOICE OR DATA (PORT 17) ISDN-TRK VOICE OR DATA (PORT 31) ISDN-TRK • • • Figure 10-45. NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (32 Channel) over Processor Interface Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-726 Packet B us P roce sso r (T N78 6) Packet Co ntro l C ircuit Pack (TN7 78 ) D-Ch an ne l UD S 1 Inte rfa ce Circu it Pa ck (T N46 4*) B -Cha nn els Vo ice or D ata (Por t 1 ) IS D N-TRK (B -Cha nn el) Vo ice o r Da ta (Po rt 2) IS D N-TRK (B -Cha nn el) Vo ice o r Da ta (Po rt 2 3) IS D N-TRK (B -Cha nn el) P rim a ry Sign aling L in k (Port 24 ) IS D N-P LK (D-Ch an ne l) TDM B u s 2 4-Ch an ne l P hysica l co nn ectio n L ogical co nn ection *TN4 64 C or later Figure 10-46. FAS ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel) Pa cke t B u s (Po r t 0 ) P ro ce ss or (TN 7 8 6 ) Pa cke t C o n tro l C ircu it Pa ck (TN 77 8 ) D -C h an n e l UDS1 Inte rfa ce C ircu it Pa ck (T N 4 6 4*) B -C h a n n els Vo ice o r D a ta (Po r t 1 ) IS D N -T R K (B -C ha n n e l) Vo ice o r D a ta (Por t 1 5 ) IS D N -T R K (B -C ha n n e l) P rim a r y S ign a lin g L in k (Por t 1 6 ) IS D N -P LK (D -C h a n ne l) Vo ice o r D a ta (Po r t 1 7 ) IS D N -T R K (B -C ha n n e l) Vo ice o r D a ta (Po r t 3 1 ) IS D N -T R K (B -C ha n n e l) TD M B u s 32 -C h a nn e l P hysica l co n ne ction Lo g ica l c o nn e ctio n *T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r Figure 10-47. Fra m in g FAS ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (32 Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-727 P a cke t B us D -C h a n n e l P ro c e s s o r (T N 7 8 6 ) UDS1 In te r fa c e C ir c u it P a ck (T N 4 6 4*) P a ck et C o n tro l C ir c u it P a ck (T N 7 7 8 ) B -C h a n n e ls V o ic e o r D a ta (Po r t 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 2) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 2 3 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) P r im a r y S ig n a lin g L in k (P o r t 2 4 ) IS D N -P L K (D -C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (Po r t 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (P or t 2 4 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (Po r t 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (P or t 2 4 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) D S 1 /U D S 1 In te r fa c e C ir c u it P a ck (T N 4 6 4*) B -C h a n n e ls TDM Bus D S 1 /U D S 1 In te r fa c e C ir c u it P a ck (T N 4 6 4*) P h y s ic a l c o n n e c tio n L o g i c a l c o n n e c tio n * T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r B -C h a n n e ls Figure 10-48. NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-728 Pa cket B u s (P o rt 0 ) F r a m in g V o ic e o r D a ta (P o rt 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) D -C h a n n e l P ro c e s s o r (T N 7 8 6 ) U DS1 I n te r fa c e C ir c u i t Pa ck (T N 4 6 4 *) P acke t C o n tro l C ir c u it Pack (T N 7 7 8 ) (P o rt 1 5 ) P r i m a r y S ig n a l i n g L in k (P o r t 1 6 ) V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 1 7 ) IS D N -P L K ( D - C h a n n e l) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) B - C h a n n e ls V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 3 1 ) (P o r t 0 ) IS D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) F r a m in g V o ic e o r D a ta (P o rt 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 3 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) U DS1 I n te r fa c e C ir c u i t Pa ck (T N 4 6 4 *) B - C h a n n e ls (P o r t 0 ) TD M B us F r a m in g V o ic e o r D a ta (P o rt 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 3 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) U DS1 I n te r fa c e C ir c u i t Pa ck (T N 4 6 4 *) P h y s i c a l c o n n e c t io n L o g ic a l c o n n e c t i o n * T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r B - C h a n n e ls Figure 10-49. NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (32 Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-729 Packet Bus D-Channel Processor (TN786) UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack (TN464*) Packet Control Circuit Pack (TN778) B-Channels Voice or Data (Port 1) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 2) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 23) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Primary Signaling Link (Port 24) ISDN-PLK (D-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 1) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 24) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) DS1/UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack (TN464*) B-Channels (Port 1) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) (Port 2) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) (Port 23) ISDN-TRK (B-Channel) TDM Bus B-Channels Physical connection Logical connection *TN464 C or later D-Channel Packet Bus Figure 10-50. UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack (TN464*) Secondary Signaling ISDN-PLK Link (D-Channel) (Port 24) NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-730 Packet B us (P o r t 0 ) F ra m in g Vo ic e o r D a t a (Po r t 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a t a IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) D -C h a n n e l P ro ce ss o r (T N 7 8 6 ) UDS1 I n t e r fa c e C irc u it Pack (T N 4 6 4 *) Pa c ke t C o n tro l C ir c u it Pack (T N 7 7 8 ) (Po r t 1 5 ) P r im a r y S ig n a lin g L in k (Po r t 1 6 ) V o ic e o r D a t a (Po r t 1 7 ) IS D N -P L K ( D -C h a n n e l) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) B -C h a n n e ls V o ic e o r D a t a (P o r t 3 1 ) (P o r t 0 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) F ra m in g V o ic e o r D a ta (P o r t 1 ) I S D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) Vo ic e o r D a t a (Po r t 3 1 ) I S D N -T R K ( B - C h a n n e l) UDS1 I n t e r fa c e C irc u it Pack (T N 4 6 4 *) B -C h a n n e ls (P o r t 0 ) T D M Bus B -C h a n n e ls P h y s ic a l c o n n e c t io n L o g ic a l c o n n e c t io n * T N 4 6 4 C o r la t e r D -C h a n n e l Packet B us Figure 10-51. UDS1 I n t e r fa c e C irc u it Pack (T N 4 6 4 *) F ra m in g Vo ic e o r D a t a (Po r t 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) V o ic e o r D a t a (Po r t 1 5 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) S e c o n d a r y S ig n a lin g IS D N -P L K L in k ( D -C h a n n e l) (Po r t 1 6 ) V o ic e o r D a t a IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) (Po r t 1 7 ) V o ic e o r D a t a (P o r t 3 1 ) IS D N -T R K ( B -C h a n n e l) NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (32 Channel) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-731 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-241. ISDN-PRI Signaling Group Error Log Entries Error Codes Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any 1 (a) Any none 257 (b) Any none test sig-group 513 (c) Any none test sig-group 769 Any Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#636) test sig-group 1025 Any Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#639) test sig-group 1793 (d) Any Layer 2 Status (Test #647) WARNING OFF test sig-group 2049 (e) Any Layer 2 Status (Test #647) WARNING OFF test sig-group 2305 (f) Any Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637) MINOR OFF test sig-group 3585 (g) port number none 38403928 (h) port number 1. Any test sig-group none none Run the Short or Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This switch sent a message to the far-end switch or terminal adapter, and the far-end did not respond in the allotted time. Possible causes include link failure and congestion or outage at the far-end. The Aux Data field contains Layer 3 protocol information used by internal counters. If no other symptoms are not present, no action is required. If Layer 3 communication is down, there should be indications in the form of alarms and errors for link components. Check out other errors against ISDN-SGR, ISDN-TRK, and other hardware components on the link. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-732 There is no test to clear these errors. The error counter is decremented by 1 every 15 minutes. b. This error indicates that the primary signaling channel connection has been lost for more than 90 seconds. If a secondary signaling channel does not exist or is not in-service, the associated B-channels will be placed in the ISDN Maintenance/Far-End state. The B-channels will not be usable for outgoing calls, although incoming calls will still be accepted. The switch will automatically attempt to recover the signaling link. Pay particular attention to the results of Test #636 (Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check) in the test sequence. When the link does recover, the B-channels will be negotiated back to the In-Service state and their alarms will be retired. When this error occurs, the state of the Signaling Group is changed to out-of-service (verify using the status sig-group command). c. This error indicates that the secondary signaling channel connection has been lost for more than 90 seconds. If the primary signaling channel is not in-service, B-channels will be placed in the ISDN Maintenance/Far-End state. The B-channels will not be usable for outgoing calls, although incoming calls will still be accepted. The switch will automatically attempt to recover the signaling link. Pay particular attention to the results of Test #639 (Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check) in the test sequence. When the link does recover, the B-channels will be negotiated back to the In-Service state and their alarms will be retired. When this error occurs, the state of the Signaling Group is changed to out-of-service (verify using the status sig-group command). d. This error indicates a failure of the Layer 2 Status Query Test for the primary signaling channel e. This error indicates a failure of the Layer 2 Status Query Test for the secondary signaling channel. f. A specific message was sent to the far-end switch, and it did not respond within the allotted time. Investigate elements of the ISDN PRI D-channel(s) (ISDN-LNK, ISDN-PLK, ISDN-SGRP, PI-LINK, PI-PT, PKT-CTRL) for both this switch and the Far-end switch. If Test #637 fails twice in a row, the B-channels will be alarmed and made unavailable for outgoing calls (although incoming calls will still be accepted). When Test #637 succeeds and the Far-end switch starts responding properly, the DS1 ISDN Trunk (B-channels) will be placed back into normal operation and their alarms will be retired. g. A SERV or SERV ACK ISDN D-channel message has been received by a non-US-type interface (country option other than 1 on the DS1 administration form). However, these messages are used only for duplex NFAS signaling which is supported only by country protocol 1. Thus, there may be a mismatch in administration between the local and far-end switches. Consult with the customer’s network provider to determine whether the D-channel is set up correctly on the far-end switch. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-733 h. These error codes are used to report certain error messages received by the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group for one of its associated B-channels. The aux data field shows for which B-channel (port number) the message was received. The error code generated equals 3840+x, where x is a Cause Value defined by the ISDN PRI Specification. Note that there is no Test to Clear Value for these error types; selected ISDN cause values are placed in the log when they are received, but no direct action or alarming is performed solely in response to receiving them. They provide added data that may prove useful when tracking down obscure networking and routing problems. The following table provides more information: Table 10-242. Error Code 3842 3846 Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928 Description Recommendation A request has been made to use a transit network or common carrier that cannot be accessed. 1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the Aux Data field), determine the trunk group against which the error was reported. The far-end switch has indicated that the B-channel (trunk) is not acceptable for use in the call for which it was requested. 2. Check all routing patterns containing this trunk group for validity of interexchange carriers requested (IXC field). This could indicate an administration problem (for example, the local switch and the far-end switch have different B-channels administered), or could reflect the occurrence of a normal race condition (for example, the local switch has requested use of a B-channel which the far-end switch had just reserved for use on another call). 1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the Aux Data field), determine the trunk group against which the error was reported. 2. Issue the status trunk command for the indicated trunk. 3. Refer to the ‘‘DS1 ISDN Trunk Service States’’ and ‘‘ISDN-PRI Trunk Service States’’ sections of ISDN-TRK for recovery suggestions. 3858 The switch sent an ISDN message to the far-end switch or terminal adapter which did not respond in the allotted time. Possible causes include link failure and congestion or outage at the far-end. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Table 10-242. Error Code 3878 3890 Page 10-734 Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928 — Continued Description Recommendation The far-end switch has indicated that the network is not functioning correctly and that the condition may last a relatively long period of time (for example, immediately re-attempting the call may not be successful). 1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the Aux Data field, determine the trunk group against which the error was reported. A request to use a network service (e.g., SDN) has been denied. Administration somewhere on the network has indicated that the requested service has not been subscribed to or purchased for this trunk. This could be a local administration problem only, or a mismatch between the local administration and that of the network provider. 2. Consult with the network provider to determine the nature and expected duration of the out of service condition. 3. Consider modifying all routing patterns containing this trunk group, to route calls around the network which is out of service. 1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the Aux Data field), determine the trunk group against which the error was reported. 2. Display the trunk group form: If the trunk group is Call-by-Call (Service Type is ‘‘cbc’’), check all routing pattern forms containing this trunk group to see if the Service/Feature fields contain the correct network services purchased for this trunk. If the trunk group is not Call-by-Call, check that the Service Type field contains the single network service purchased for this trunk. 3. If local administration appears correct, consult with the customer and/or the network provider to determine the services that the customer has subscribed to for this trunk group. 3892 Protocol detail; may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone. If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints and no other cause can be found, provide the next tier with this Error Log information. 3894 Protocol detail; may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone. First, eliminate any transitory state mismatch problems by issuing the test port PCSSpp command for the trunk port shown in the aux data field. Test #256 (Service State Audit) is the important test in the sequence. If this passes satisfactorily, yet the customer continues to complain of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints and no other cause can be found, provide the next tier with this Error Log information. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Table 10-242. Error Code Page 10-735 Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928 — Continued Description Recommendation 3905 Protocol detail; may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone. If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints and no other cause can be found, provide the next tier with this Error Log information. 3906 Protocol detail; may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone. If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints and no other cause can be found, provide the next tier with this Error Log information. 3909 A request to use a network service has been made, but the network has rejected the request because the requested service is not implemented. Follow the recommendations listed above for error type 3890. 3928 A call was denied because of a basic incompatibility between the type of call and either the facilities selected by the routing pattern or the called user itself. This error might be helpful as a clue if the customer complains of receiving unexpected intercept tone after accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints. Determine the trunk group from the circuit pack and port number (in the aux data field) and then check the BCC fields of the pertinent routing patterns. Also, investigate whether or not the calling and called endpoints are compatible (for example, some ISDN switches may not allow a voice station to call a data extension). Continued on next page System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-736 Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#636) X X ND Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#639) X X ND Layer 2 Query Test (#647) X X ND Remote Layer 3 Query Test (#637) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#636) The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port itself depends on the health of the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack on which it resides. This test will fail if there are problems with either the ISDN-PRI Primary D-channel port or the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack. The ISDN-PRI Primary D-channel also depends on the health of either the Processor Interface Link or the Processor Control circuit pack providing connectivity to the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack. If there are problems with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link, also investigate the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack (DS1-BD/UDS1-BD) and the Processor Interface Link or Packet Control (PI-LINK/PACCON) dependent upon which is used PI DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK TDM CIRCUIT BUS PACK TO FAR-END SWITCH HARDWARE (TN765) Figure 10-52. Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (Test #636) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-737 Packet C o n tro l C ir c u it Pack (T N 7 7 8 ) To fa r e n d s w it c h h a r d w a r e UDS1 I n t e r fa c e C ir c u it Pack (T N 4 6 4 *) Packet B us * T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r Figure 10-53. Table 10-243. Error Code PRI over PACCON Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (Test #636) TEST #636 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this D-channel port is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete test on this port, either: 1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry test command, or 2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering change ds1 PCSS and set the field "Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y". 4 FAIL There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link. No DS1 ISDN Trunk (B-channel) or wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made until the problem is resolved. 1. Display the Communication-Interface Links Form via the to determine which link is down (find the one that matches the DS1 interface circuit pack this ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port is on) and then consult the procedures for Processor Interface Link. 8 FAIL There is a problem with the DS1/UDS1 Circuit Pack, or the ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (D-channel). No DS1 ISDN Trunk (B-channel) or wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made until the problem is resolved. 1. Consult the procedures for DS1/UDS1 Circuit Pack and the ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Table 10-243. Error Code Page 10-738 TEST #636 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The basic physical connectivity of the primary D-channel is intact and functional. Try this test repeatedly to ensure the link is up and to uncover any transitory problems. Continued on next page Remote Layer 3 Query (#637) This test will query the far-end switch or terminal adapter to determine if the signaling connection is functioning properly at Layer 3. It will select a B-channel in the in-service or maintenance service state and send an ISDN Layer 3 SERVice message, which requires a response from the far end (similar to performing Test #256 on an ISDN trunk. The test will not be performed if there are no B-channels in an appropriate ISDN service state (as when none are administered or they are all out of service). NOTE: The service state can be displayed by using the status trunk or status pri-endpoint command. As is the case with Test #256 for an ISDN trunk, a PASS only indicates that a message was composed and sent to the far-end switch or terminal adapter. The ISDN PRI Specification allows up to 2 minutes for a response. Check the Error Log for ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) errors of type 2305 for evidence of a Remote Layer 3 Query failure. Tests #639 and #636 check the health of the D-channels and DS1/UDS1 Interface Circuit Packs. As shown in the figures below, Test #637 goes one step further by checking the communication path from the processor, through the Processor Interface or Packet Control circuit pack over the TDM or Packet Bus through the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack, and on to the far-end switch or terminal adapter. A special ISDN message is sent to the far-end switch or terminal adapter, which must respond within a specified amount of time. This test is designed to ensure that the communication path between the switch and the far-end is up and operational, and that the two endpoints can properly exchange ISDN control messages. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-739 PI CIRCUIT PROCESSOR DS-1 TDM PACK (TN786) INTERFACE CIRCUIT BUS PACK TO FAR-END PROCESSOR (TN765) Figure 10-54. P ro c e s s o r (T N 7 8 6 ) Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637) Packet C o n tro l C ir c u it Pack (T N 7 7 8 ) U D S1 I n t e r fa c e C ir c u it Pack (T N 4 6 4 *) P a cke t B u s * T N 4 6 4 C o r la t e r Figure 10-55. PRI Over PACON Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637) T o fa r e n d s w itc h h a r d w a r e Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Table 10-244. Error Code Page 10-740 TEST #637 Remote Layer 3 Query Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1006 ABORT This is a NORMAL ABORT. For country protocol 1 interfaces (including the USA), either there are no B-channels administered in this signaling group, or all B-channels in this signaling group are either out-of-service or are in a "pending" state (PINS or PMTC, indicating that a B-channel maintenance message for that B-channel has been sent and not yet acknowledged). 1. Administer an ISDN Trunk or PRI Endpoint Port (B-channel) in this signaling group, or use the status trunk TRK-GRP/TRK or status pri-endpoint command to check the state of the ISDN Trunks or PRI Endpoint Ports associated with this signaling group. Refer to ISDN-TRK or PE-BCHL for further details regarding service state definitions and transitions. For systems not using country protocol 1 interfaces, there are no B-channels administered in this signaling group. 1019 ABORT There is already a Remote Layer 3 Query in progress. This is a normal ABORT. 1. Wait two minutes, then follow the procedures for when this test passes. 1113 ABORT The Signaling Link is down. Therefore no messages can be sent to the Far-end switch. 1. Examine the results of Tests #636 and #639 and follow recommendations provided there. 2. If either test passes, it may be because the signaling link was disabled by system technician. Verify this by using the display comm link command. Tests #636 and #639 pass if the signaling link is not enabled. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2500 ABORT Same as ABORT with no error code. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT with no error code. 2500 FAIL Same as ABORT with no error code. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT with no error code. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Table 10-244. Error Code Page 10-741 TEST #637 Remote Layer 3 Query — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation PASS A message was composed and sent to the Far-end switch. The ISDN PRI specification allows up to two minutes for a reply. 1. Check the Error Log for ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) for errors of type 2305 for evidence of a Remote Layer 3 Query failure. If no new errors were logged since this test was run, then this switch and the Far-end switch processor can exchange call control messages. 2. If there is still a problem with a particular DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI Endpoint Port (B-channel), busyout the trunk or port and run the long test sequence, paying particular attention to the results of Test #258 (ISDN Test Call). Continued on next page Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#639) The ISDN-PRI Signaling Group D-Channel port depends on the health of the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack on which it resides. This test will fail if there are problems with either the ISDN-PRI Primary D-channel port or the DS1/ UDS1 circuit pack. If there are problems with the ISDN-PRI Secondary Signaling Channel port (ISDN-LNK or ISDN-PLK), also investigate the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack. PI DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK TDM CIRCUIT BUS PACK TO FAR-END SWITCH HARDWARE (TN765) Figure 10-56. Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check for PRI over PI (Test #639) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-742 Packet C o n tro l C ir c u it Pack (T N 7 7 8 ) P ro c e s s o r (T N 7 8 6 ) To fa r e n d s w itc h h a r d w a r e U D S1 I n t e r fa c e C i r c u it Pack (T N 4 6 4 *) Packet B us * T N 4 6 4 C o r la t e r Figure 10-57. Table 10-245. Error Code Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check for PRI over PACCON (Test #639) TEST #639 Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1132 ABORT The Secondary D-channel is not administered for this Signaling Group. This is a NORMAL ABORT. Only a Primary D-channel must be administered for a Signaling Group. 4 FAIL There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link. No DS1 ISDN Trunk (B-channel) or Wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made until the problem is resolved. 1. Display the Communication-Interface Links Form via the display communication-interface command to determine which link is down (find the one that matches the DS1 Interface circuit pack on which this ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port resides) and then refer to the PI-LINK Processor Interface Link Maintenance documentation. 8 FAIL There is a problem with the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack or the ISDN-PRI Secondary Signaling channel (D-channel). No ISDN Trunk (B-channel) or Wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made until the problem is resolved. 1. Refer to the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack and the ISDN-PRI Signaling channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK) Maintenance documentation. PASS The basic physical connectivity of the Signaling Group’s Secondary D-channel is intact and functional. Try this test repeatedly to ensure the link is up and to uncover any transitory problems. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Page 10-743 Layer 2 Status Test (#647) The Layer 2 Status Test checks the layer 2 status of the ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (D-channel). This test will fail if there is a hardware failure or a facility problem, or if the primary and secondary ISDN-PRI D-channels are not administered correctly. The Primary and Secondary Signaling Link Hardware tests (test 636 and 639) and the Remote Layer 3 Query test (test 637) will detect most problems caused by hardware failures or incorrect administration. However, the Layer 3 test (test 637) cannot detect end-to-end transmission problems with the Standby D-channel since Layer 3 messages are not sent on the standby channel. For G3r, the SYS-LINK Maintenance Object reports Layer 2 ISDN-PRI D-channel problems and for G3i/s/vs, the PI-LINK Maintenance Object reports Layer 2 ISDN-PRI D-channel problems (if the D-channel is connected to the Processor Interface circuit pack). However, the PI-LINK Maintenance Object does not monitor the Layer 2 status of the ISDN-PRI D-channel when the D-channel is connected to the Packet Control circuit pack for the ISDN-PRI over PACCON feature. The Layer 2 Query test is provided to detect D-Channel Layer 2 failures and generate an associated Warning alarm independent of the hardware configuration used for the D-channels. Table 10-246. Error Code 1132 TEST #647 Layer 2 Status Query Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error The port location for the primary ISDN-PRI D-channel is not known. This condition should not be possible since an administered DS1 circuit pack must be specified when a Signaling Group is administered: 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1134 ABORT Internal system error The associated DS1 circuit pack is not administered. This condition should not be possible since an administered DS1 circuit pack must be specified when a Signaling Group is administered. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) Table 10-246. Error Code 1 Page 10-744 TEST #647 Layer 2 Status Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Layer 2 of the primary signaling channel is down: 1. Examine the results of the Primary Signaling Link Hardware Test (#636) and follow recommendations provided there. 2. If test #636 passes, the Layer 2 Query test may still fail if the Signaling Channel at the far end has not been administered correctly or if it has been busied out. Verify that the Primary Signaling Channel (D-channel) at the far end has been administered correctly. Verify that the DS1 port used for the Primary D-channel has not been busied out at the far end. 2 FAIL Layer 2 of the secondary signaling channel is down. 1. Examine the results of Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Test (#639) and follow recommendations provided there. 2. If tests #639 passes, the Layer 2 Query test may still fail if the Signaling Channel at the far end has not been administered correctly or if the Signaling Channel has been busied out. Verify that the Secondary Signaling Channel (D-channel) at the far end has been administered correctly. Verify that the DS1 port used for the Secondary D-channel has not been busied out at the far end. 3 FAIL Both the primary and secondary Channels are down. 1. Examine the results of the Primary and Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Tests (#636 and #639) and follow recommendations provided there. 2. If tests #636 and #639 pass, the Layer 2 Query test may still fail if the Signaling Channels at the far end has not been administered correctly or if the Signaling Channels have been busied out. Verify that the Primary and Secondary Signaling Channel (D-channels) at the far end have been administered correctly. Verify that the DS1 ports used for the Primary and Secondary D-channels have not been busied out at the far end. PASS The Primary Signaling Channel is up and, if administered the Secondary Channel is up. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-745 ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO ISDN-TRK1 MAJOR2 test port PCSSpp l DS1 ISDN Trunk ISDN-TRK MINOR test port PCSSpp l DS1 ISDN Trunk ISDN-TRK WARNING test port PCSSpp sh DS1 ISDN Trunk 1. 2. For additional repair information, refer to the ‘‘DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)’’ maintenance object. A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. A DS1 ISDN Trunk is known as a B-channel. It is a 64 kbps Bearer channel that can be used to transmit digital traffic, be it voice or data. These trunks use a separate channel for signaling (for example, for call setup); this mode of operation is known as out-of-band signaling, as opposed to in-band, robbed-bit signaling, where the signaling traffic flows over the same channel as the voice or data traffic. The separate signaling channel is called a D-channel in ISDN terminology, and it carries all the call control signaling messages for the DS1 ISDN Trunk B-channels. The D-channel for these B-channels is an ISDN-PRI (Primary Rate Interface) Signaling Link Port (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK). On 24-channel interfaces, any of the first 23 ports on the DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack can be a B-channel. The 24th port may be used as a B-channel or as a D-channel depending on the type of ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) to which it belongs. On 32 channel interfaces, any of ports 1-15 and 17-31 on the DS1 interface circuit pack can be a B-channel. The 16th port may be used as a B-channel or as a D-channel depending on the type of ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) to which it belongs. For more details, refer to the ISDN-SGR and DS1-BD/UDS1-BD Maintenance documentation. NOTE: If a Packet Control circuit pack is used instead of a Processor Interface Link as the interface of the PBX SPE to the D-channel, then the signaling link port on the UDS1 circuit pack is referred to as ISDN-PLK and only the TN464C or later may be used to carry D-channel Signaling. The B-channels may be carried by any DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack. If a Processor Interface is used for connectivity then the Signaling Link port is referred to as a ISDN-LNK and the TN767 or TN464B or later DS1 interface circuit pack may be used to carry D-channels Signaling. For interfaces using country protocol 1 on the DS1 Circuit Pack administration form (including US), the signaling protocol used for the maintenance of the B-channel is defined by the AT&T ISDN-PRI Specification. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-746 For interfaces using country protocols other than 1, the signaling protocol used for the maintenance of the B-channel is defined by the CCITT ISDN-PRI Specification. There are five possible SERVICE STATES for a B-channel. The service state is negotiated with the far-end switch, changes over time, and may have a far-end or near-end component. The service state is initialized to Out-Of-Service/Far-End state and an attempt is made to negotiate it to In-Service. NOTE: The service state of a particular DS1 ISDN Trunk B-channel can be displayed by issuing the status trunk system technician command. If a call is present, the Specification defines the permissible CALL STATES as well. There are tests in the Short and Long Test Sequences for DS1 ISDN Trunk designed to audit these states and ensure agreement between both ends of the PRI connection. Alarming Based on Service States A warning alarm is logged against a DS1 ISDN B-channel trunk when it is placed in the Maintenance/Far-End or Out-Of-Service/Far-End states, during which the trunk is unusable for outgoing calls. When a warning alarm is present, use status trunk group#/member# command to determine the exact state. Other alarms can be diagnosed by using the short and/or long test sequences. Note that an ISDN B-channel trunk can be placed in a Far-End service state by either action taken by the far-end switch or by failure of the far-end switch to respond. For example, if the far-end does not respond to a Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637 for ISDN-SGR), the associated DS1 ISDN trunk B-channels will be placed in the Maintenance/Far-End service state. As a port on a DS1 circuit pack (DS1-BD or UDS1-BD), and as part of a signaling group dependent on a D-channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK) for signaling, operation of the ISDN-TRK is dependent on the health of these other maintenance objects. The ISDN D-channel in turn depends on the Packet Bus (PKT-BUS)/Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK) (dependent on setup) for transmission through the system. Keep this hierarchy of dependencies in mind when diagnosing problems. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-747 SIGNALING ISDN-LNK (PORT 24) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK TDM PI PROCESSOR (TN773) CIRCUIT BUS (PORT 23) DS1/UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK PACK (TN765) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 2) VOICE OR DATA ISDN-TRK (PORT 1) PI-LINK Figure 10-58. DS1 ISDN Trunk Interactions (24-channel interface) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-748 Packet Bus Packet C ontrol Circuit Pack (TN778) Processor (TN 786) D-C hannel U D S1 Interface C ircuit Pack (TN 464*) B-C hannels Voice or D ata (Por t 1) ISD N-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 2) ISD N-TRK (B-Channel) Voice or Data (Port 23) ISD N-TRK (B-Channel) Prim ary Signaling Link (Port 24) ISD N-PLK (D -C hannel) TD M Bus 24-Channel *TN 464 C or later Figure 10-59. PRI Over PACCON DS1 ISDN Trunk Interactions (24-channel interface) DS1 ISDN Trunk Service States This section defines the possible service states of a DS1 ISDN trunk, explains the reason for each service state, and provides the recommended recovery procedures (when required). Service States ■ In-Service (INS) The B-channel is in its normal operating state. ■ Out-of-Service/Far-end (OOS/FE) A B-channel is initialized to this state when administered and it may also be in this state if there is a failure on the B-channel attributed to a problem on the far-end switch. The switch sends messages to the far-end to negotiate the B-channel into service. If the far-end does not respond to the messages within a certain time period, then the service state remains out-of-service and maintenance will periodically resend the messages. The trunk is unusable for outgoing calls. On US interfaces, the trunk is unusable for incoming calls, but on non-US interfaces, incoming calls will be accepted. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) ■ Page 10-749 Out-of-Service/Near-end (OOS/NE) This is the state of the trunk when a hardware failure exists on the link, the NPE Crosstalk Test fails, or when the trunk is busied out by system technician. In this state, the trunk is unusable for incoming or outgoing calls. No messages are sent to the far-end until the signaling link comes back into service or the trunk is released by system technician. ■ Maintenance/Far-end (MTC/FE) This state is reached when the far-end does not respond to messages sent over the signaling link for a particular trunk after a certain amount of time. This state is different from OOS/FE since the signaling link must have initially been up and the B-channels in-service. The switch will periodically send messages to the far-end to try to negotiate the trunk (B-channel) into service. The trunk is unusable for outgoing calls but will service incoming call requests from the far-end. Note that transitions into MTC/FE do not drop stable calls. Therefore, if the service state changes from in-service to MTC/FE, then stable calls are unaffected. ■ Maintenance/Near-end (MTC/NE) The trunk (B-channel) is in this state if the signaling link (PI-LINK) is busied out by system technician. The trunk (B-channel) is also temporarily in this state if system technician has issued a test trunk trunk_group/trunk_ member long command. This command will execute the ISDN-PRI test call. This test will change the state of the trunk member to MTC/NE for the duration of the test unless a call request comes in from the far-end. In that case, the test would abort. Note that transitions into MTC/NE do not drop stable calls. Therefore, a system technician- demanded busyout link lnk-no command will not drop stable trunk calls. In this state, the B-channel is not usable for new outgoing calls, but is available for incoming calls and outgoing test calls. ■ Pending States If the near-end is expecting a timed response from the far-end for a request to change the service state of a trunk, then the state of the trunk reflects a Pending State. — Pending-in-service (PINS) The near-end has sent a B-channel maintenance message to the far-end, requesting that the B-channel service state be transitioned to in-service. The far-end has a certain amount of time to respond to the message. The service state will be PINS until either a response is received or the timer expires. — Pending-maintenance (PMTC) This state is supported only by systems using country protocol 1 (including US). The near-end has sent a B-channel maintenance message to the far-end, requesting that the B-channel service state DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-750 be transitioned to maintenance. The far-end has a certain amount of time to respond to the message. The service state will be PMTC until either a response is received or the timer expires. — Call Activity States In addition to the service and pending state, the state of a B-channel also reflects its call activity. If a call is connected over the B-channel, then the state of the trunk will reflect the "active" call state, for example, "in-service/active." If there is no call on the B-channel, then the trunk will reflect the "idle" call state, for example, "OOS/FE-idle." The following diagram of the DS1 ISDN Trunk service states shows the common progression from one service state to another and the event that caused the change of state. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-751 Out-ofService Near End Craft release of B-channel or clearing of near-end problem with DS1-BD, PI-BD, PI-LINK or port. Administer B-channel as member of a trunk group. Craft busyout of signaling link busyout link LINK-NO or transient state for demand long test of the trunk. Out-ofService Far End If D-channel controlling the B-channel is up, send a message requesting transition to In-Service. Received indication from far end that B-channel in/not in service. Failed to receive reply from far end. MTCE will periodically try to resend the message. Out-ofService Far End Pending In-Service Figure 10-60. Maintenance Near End Craft busyout of B-channel (TRK-GRP/MBR), or problem with near en d PI-LINK, DS1-BD, PI-BD, or port. Received acknowledgement or other indication from the far end that B-channel is in service. In-Service Craft release of signaling link, or craft demanded test completed. D-channel has been down for at least 90 seconds, or Remote Level 3 Query failed. Maintenance Far End Failed to receive reply from far end. MTCE will periodically try to resend the message. [Country protocol 1] Failed to receive reply from far end. MTCE will periodically try to resend the message. [country protocol other than 1] Received acknowledgement or other indication from the far end, that B-channel is inservice. If D-channel controlling the B-channel is up, send a message requesting transition to In-Service. Maintenance Far End Pending In-Service Common Progressions in Service States ISDN-PRI Trunk Service States The following chart summarizes each of the different DS1 ISDN Trunk service states that can result when the status trunk command is issued. NOTE: Refer to Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for a layered approach to the processing of ISDN-PRI problems. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-247. Page 10-752 ISDN-PRI Trunk Service States (Test #161 Loop Around Test) Service State Alarm* Possible Cause Possible Solution Warning Trunk is demand busied out. Enter release trunk grp#/mbr#. Minor NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) failed. Replace DS1/UDS1 circuit pack. None DS1 or UDS1 circuit pack lost its signal. Is the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack or cable removed? Is the far-end switch restarting? Check circuit pack using procedures in DS1-BD or UDS1-BD. Warning Unadministered far-end Administer corresponding trunk on far-end switch. Warning The far-end trunk is busied out. Check the status of the far-end switch. pending-in-service, pending-maint None Maintenance message was sent and the switch is waiting up to 2 min. for a reply from the far-end. Wait 2 minutes and check service state after the pending state has cleared. maint-NE None ISDN test call in progress (test trunk long and test isdn-testcall commands) Wait several minutes for test to finish and check status again. None System link has been busied out by command. Check link status. Release link with release link link#. Warning Signaling channel has been down for over 90 sec. Consult ISDN-SGR and/or ISDN-LNK. Far-end signaling channel may be busied out, or the far-end switch may currently be restarting. Warning Repeated failure of far end to respond to messages. Maintenance software will periodically try to resend messages. You can speed the process with test trunk grp#/mbr# and/or test signaling-gr #. Warning The far-end trunk is being tested. Check status of the far-end switch. Wait for testing to finish. None Normal operating state out-of-service/NE out-of-service/FE maint-FE in-service Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-753 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-248. Error Type DS1 ISDN Trunk Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test 01 0 Any 1 (a) Any None 15 (b) Any Audit and Update Test (#36) 18 0 busyout trunk / Alarm Level On/Off Board Any Any Test to Clear Value test port PCSSpp sh r 1 test port PCSSpp sh r 1 release trunk / 129 (c) None WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp 130 (d) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp 257 (e) Any None 513 (f) Any None 769 (e) Any None test port PCSSpp WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp test port PCSSpp 2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 4 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 1281 Any Conference Circuit Test (#7) MIN/ WRN 1537 Any NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MIN/WRN2 1793 (g) Any None test port PCSSpp 3073 (h) Any Service State Audit (#256) test port PCSSpp 3585 (i) Any None None 3841 (j) Any None None 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, then the Minor alarm will be upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed. Notes: a. These error types indicate a disagreement between this switch and the switch at the other end of the trunk connection with regard to the ISDN call state of the DS1 ISDN Trunk. This switch will automatically try to recover by clearing the call, (that is, the call will be torn down). You can use the status trunk command to determine the state of the trunk. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-754 When running the Short Test Sequence of tests, pay close attention to the results of the Call State Audit Test (#257). b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). c. The far-end switch changed its ISDN service state to either out-of-service or maintenance. This may be a temporary condition due to testing of that trunk by the far-end or a hardware problem with the trunk. Outgoing calls will not be allowed over the trunk. To investigate the status of the trunk, issue the status trunk command. d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. e. These error types indicate a disagreement between this switch and the switch at the other end of the trunk connection with regard to the ISDN service state of the DS1 ISDN Trunk. This switch will automatically try to recover by performing a service state audit. You can use the status trunk command to determine the state of the trunk. When running the Short Test Sequence, pay close attention to the results of the Service State Audit Test (#256). f. This trunk is not recognized by the far-end switch. Investigate the trunk administration for both switches and make changes as necessary. g. This error indicates a failure of the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack. When running the Short Test Sequence, the results of the Signaling Link State Check Test (#255) are important. h. Two Service State Audit attempts have failed (see Test #256). The trunks will not be usable for any outgoing calls (although incoming calls will be accepted) until the test passes and the trunk state is changed to in-service (use status trunk trunk_group/trunk_member to investigate trunk status). i. Error Type 3585 appears when the switch receives an ISDN RESTART message for an ISDN trunk. Calls are cleared with the RESTART message. Therefore, this error type may be associated with a dropped call report from a user. The following Aux Data values for Error Type 3585 represent the trunk’s ISDN call state at the time the unexpected request to restart the channel was received from the remote switch. This information can be useful if dropped calls (cutoffs) are being reported by users of the ISDN-PRI trunks. The meanings of the various Aux Data values are shown below. Aux Data values of concern; any others can be ignored. 0 A idle trunk received a restart. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-755 Aux Data values of concern; any others can be ignored. 10 A call in a stable, talking state was cleared unexpectedly by the far-end with an ISDN RESTART message. This state is called the "active" state. 4, 7, 8 260, 263 A call that has not reached the active state, but has at least reached a ringing state, was cleared unexpectedly by the far-end with an ISDN RESTART message. 1, 3, 6 9, 265 A call that has not yet reached a ringing state was cleared unexpectedly by the far-end with an ISDN RESTART message. 11, 12 19, 531, 267, 268 A call that was in the process of clearing anyway has been cleared by the far-end with an ISDN RESTART message. If this condition occurs frequently, it may mean that the far-end is attempting to clear trunks that it thinks are in a "hung" state. The RESTART message brings the trunk to an idle condition. j. An ISDN trunk selected by the near-end has been rejected 10 times by the far-end without a successful call. This may indicate a service state mismatch between the near-end and far-end for this trunk that is effecting the end user (that is, customer receives unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks). This may indicate that the ISDN trunk is not administered on the far-end. The Aux field contains the physical name of the ISDN trunk in decimal. Then, verify that the far-end has this trunk administered. If problems persist, then busy-out the ISDN trunk to take it out of the hunt group. The Warning alarm will be retired automatically whenever an outgoing or incoming call that uses this trunk is answered by the called endpoint. If problems persist, then busy-out the ISDN trunk to take it out of the hunt group. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-249. System Technician-Demanded Tests: ISDN-TRK Order of Investigation NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-249. Page 10-756 System Technician-Demanded Tests: ISDN-TRK — Continued Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) Audit and Update Test (#36) X X ND Signaling Link State Check Test (#255) X X ND Service State Audit Test (#256) X X ND Call State Audit Test (#257) X X ND X ND ISDN Test Call Test (#258) Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. NOTE: The TN464C or later UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips. Table 10-250. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk commands to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-250. Error Code 1002 Page 10-757 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-Bus errors. Refer to TDM-Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-Bus errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status station or status trunk commands to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT Maintenance is disable on this trunk. 1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field on page 2 of the change trunk-group form. 1117 ABORT A service state audit message is outstanding. 1. Wait two minutes and then try again. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. The ISDN-TRK is moved to out-of-service/near-end state. 1. Replace the circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-250. Error Code Page 10-758 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The port is able to communicate over the TDM Bus. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) The Conference Circuit test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. NOTE: The TN464C or later UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips. Table 10-251. Error Code TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk commands to determine when the port is available for testing. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status station or status trunk to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT Maintenance is disabled on this trunk. 1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field on page 2 of the change trunk-group form. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-251. Error Code 1020 Page 10-759 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Audit and Update Test (#36) This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1 interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. The port audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of trunk kept in the DS1 interface circuit pack and in the switch software. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-252. Error Code TEST #36 Audit and Update Test Test Result 1018 Page 10-760 Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal system error ABORT Maintenance is disabled on this trunk. 1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field on page 2 of the change trunk-group form. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL Test failed due to Internal system error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The current trunk states kept in the DS1 interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is busied out, the test will not run, but will return PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service: 1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2. 2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page Signaling Link State Check Test (#255) As noted in the general description for a DS1 ISDN Trunk, it depends on the health of the DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack and the ISDN-PRI D-channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK) trunk for proper operation. This test checks the status of those critical elements. Table 10-253. Error Code TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-253. Error Code 1018 Page 10-761 TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Maintenance is disable on this trunk. 1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field on page 2 of the change trunk-group form. 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 4 FAIL There is a problem with the Signaling Channel. 1. If the Packet Control circuit pack is used consult the procedures for the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR). Further information may also be obtained by consulting the procedures for the ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (ISDN-PLK). 2. If the Processor Interface is used consult the procedures for Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK). 8 FAIL There is a problem with the DS1 interface circuit pack. 1. Consult the procedures for DS1 interface circuit pack (DS1-BD/UDS1-BD). PASS The signaling link hardware is OK. Continued on next page Service State Audit (#256) These trunks may be in one of several service states. This test performs a Service State Audit with the far-end switch. For interfaces using country protocol 1 (including US), the Service State Audit executes in all trunk service states. A message is sent to the far-end switch to ensure that both sides agree on the service state. A PASS for this test simply means that the message has been successfully sent. Two minutes are allowed for a reply. If no reply is received within that 2 minute window, the message is sent out again. If that attempt fails, an error is logged (Error Type 3073) and the switch then attempts another Service State Audit every 15 minutes. If the trunk was initially INS (in-service), it is then placed in the MTC/FE (maintenance state, far-end problem) state. No outgoing calls are placed over this trunk, but incoming calls are accepted. If an incoming call is presented while in such a state, a Service State Audit attempt is immediately attempted (that is, the switch does not wait for the 15-minute cycle, but tries to recover immediately). For interfaces not using country protocol 1, the Service State Audit executes only if the trunk is in the OOF/FE state. A message is sent to the far-end switch to attempt to bring the trunk back into the in-service state. A PASS for this test Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-762 simply means that the message has been successfully sent. Two minutes are allowed for a reply. If no reply is received within that two minute window, the message is sent out once again. If no response is received in the next two minute window, then the trunk remains in the OOS/FE state. The switch will attempt another Service State Audit in another hour. To investigate the service state of the DS1 ISDN Trunk, issue the status trunk trunk-group/trunk-member command. Table 10-254. Error Code 1000 TEST #256 Service State Audit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk to determine when trunk is available for testing. 1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check). 1018 ABORT Maintenance is disable on this trunk. 1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field on page 2 of the change trunk-group form. 1113 ABORT The signaling link has failed, so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk. 1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check). 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1116 ABORT The trunk is not in a service state which is appropriate for running the test. This test is only performed in the OOS/FE state. 1117 ABORT A service state audit message is outstanding. 1. Wait two minutes and then try again. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1113 FAIL The signaling link has failed, so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk. 1. Consult the procedures for ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port) and PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link). FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-254. Error Code Page 10-763 TEST #256 Service State Audit Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation Wait 4 minutes and then check the Error Log for any new errors of type 3073. If there are none, then both sides of the ISDN connection agree on the service state; the negotiation succeeded. If there is a new 3073 error, then the negotiation failed (the far-end switch twice failed to respond within 2 minutes). The switch will automatically retry every 15 minutes. If the trunk was initially in-service, it is now placed in the maintenance/far-end state. Incoming calls will be accepted, but no outgoing calls can be originated. If an incoming call is presented, another Service State Audit will be immediately performed in an attempt to put the DS1 ISDN Trunk in the proper state. Continued on next page Call State Audit Test (#257) If a call is active on the trunk, the switches on both sides of the connection should agree on the ISDN state of the call, as defined in the ISDN Protocol Specification. This test audits internal call state data by querying the far-end switch as to the ISDN state of the call. It can be helpful when trying to clear a hung call. If the internal call state data on the near-end switch is different than that of the far-end switch, then the call will be torn down. As with Test #256 (Service State Audit), a PASS simply means that an appropriate message was composed and sent to the far-end switch. The ISDN Specification allows up to two minutes for a reply. If a reply is not received within the two minute window, a protocol time-out violation will be recorded in the error log against the associated signaling channel (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port, which is listed in the Error Log as ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK; the Error Type is 1). Table 10-255. Error Code 1018 TEST #257 Call State Audit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Maintenance is disable on this trunk. 1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field on page 2 of the change trunk-group form. 1019 ABORT An audit is already in progress. 1. Wait two minutes and try again. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-255. Error Code 1113 Page 10-764 TEST #257 Call State Audit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The signaling link has failed, so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk. 1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check). 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1116 ABORT The trunk is in an out-of-service ISDN service state. 1. A call cannot be present if the trunk is in an ISDN out-of-service state, so a call state audit would be inappropriate. No action necessary. (Use the status trunk 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS This switch sent a call state auditing message to the far-end switch to verify the state of the call active on this trunk. If a call state mismatch is found, then the call will be torn down within two minutes. If no call was active, then no message was sent. Continued on next page ISDN Test Call Test (#258) This test performs a far-end loop around to a far-end switch over an ISDN trunk. The trunk’s service state must be in-service, maint-NE, or out-of-service/NE, and no call can be active on the trunk. The test call can be initiated as part of a long test sequence, or as an individual test, as described below. This test is valid only for systems using country protocol 1 (including US), or when the far end has loop-around capability. A test call connection is established to a far-end switch over the ISDN trunk to be tested. The digital port on a TN711D Maintenance/Test circuit pack generates a test-pattern bit stream which is sent to the far-end switch and echoed back. The received pattern is then compared to the sent pattern and checked for errors that indicate a loss of integrity on the communications path. If a test call is running when scheduled maintenance starts, the green LED is turned off. To determine if a test call is still running, use the list isdn-testcall and status isdn-testcall commands. A lit yellow LED on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack also indicates that a test call is running. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-765 There are two methods available to place an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call in G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386. In the first method, the test call connection is established over the TDM Bus of the transmit and receive sides of the ISDN-PRI trunk to a data channel. This method is selected when no Maintenance/Test circuit pack resides in the system. In the second method, the test call connection is established over the TDM Bus of the transmit and receive sides of the ISDN-PRI trunk to a digital trunk testing port on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port generates a pseudo bit stream. A pictorial description of the outgoing ISDN-PRI test call connectivity is contained in the following figure. PI (TN765) or PACCON (TN778) NETCON SPE B-channel D-channel Setup B-channel TDM BUS M/T DS1/UDS1 TN7771B Figure 10-61. ISDN-PRI Outgoing Test Call Synchronous Commands You can demand a synchronous outgoing test call by using the following maintenance commands: ■ test trunk trunk-group-no/member-no long [repeat number] ■ test board board-location long [repeat number] ■ test port port-location long [repeat number] Whenever a circuit translates to an ISDN-PRI trunk during a Long Test Sequence, an outgoing test call is invoked. If the B-channel is unrestricted (B8ZS or HDB3) Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Page 10-766 the default duration of the test call is 8.6 seconds. Otherwise, if the B-channel is restricted (ZCS) the default duration of the test call is 9.4 seconds. Once the test call completes, the bit error rate is retrieved from the Maintenance/Test Digital Port. A bit error rate greater than zero is reported as a failure to the Manager I terminal (MGRI). A failure indicates the need to run further diagnostics, such as the test isdn-testcall command. If no Maintenance/Test circuit pack exists, the outgoing ISDN-PRI test call is established over a high speed data channel on the Network Control (NETCON) circuit pack (DATA-BD). Asynchronous Commands You can start, query, and stop an outgoing test call by using the following maintenance commands: ■ test isdn-testcall trunk-group-no/member-no [ minutes ] This command enables you to start an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call for a maximum of two hours (120 minutes). ■ status isdn-testcall trunk-group-no/member-no This command displays the progress of the outgoing test call by reporting the bit and block error rates of the tested B-channel specified by the "trunk group no/member no" identifier. ■ clear isdn-testcall trunk-group-no/member-no This command enables you to stop an outgoing test call already in progress. The trunk-group-no/member-no identifier specifies the B-channel used to stop the test call. The measurements are not cleared until the next test call begins. NOTE: Only one trunk can be tested in a given port network, until the test call is canceled or completes. Table 10-256. Error Code 4 TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link. 1. Refer to PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link). 8 ABORT There is a problem with the DS1 interface circuit pack. 1. Refer to DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-256. Error Code 1004 Page 10-767 TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation B channel in use. 1. Determine if a call is active on this DS1 ISDN Trunk via the status trunk 2. When the service state indicates in-service/idle, retry the test. 1005 ABORT Bad Configuration (that is, no Maintenance/Test circuit pack) Issue the test trunk command and make sure there is a DATA-CHL (NETCON channel) administered. 1018 ABORT Test call is disabled. 1. Enable Maintenance on the Trunk Group form. 1019 ABORT Another Test call is in progress. 1. Issue the list isdn-testcall command to locate the test call. 2. Issue the status isdn-testcall command to find out the duration and start time of the test call. 3. Issue the clear isdn-testcall command to stop the test call from running. 1020 ABORT There is a problem with DS1 Interface Circuit Pack. 1. Refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk circuit pack). 1024 ABORT Maintenance/Test Digital Port in use. 1. Wait until yellow and green LEDs are turned off on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. 2. Retry the test. 1113 ABORT The signaling link has failed. Therefore, the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk. 1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check Test). 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1116 ABORT The switch could not appropriately change the ISDN service state. 1. Determine if a call is active on this DS1 ISDN Trunk (use the status trunk 2. If not, check the Error and Alarm Logs for problems with this ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) MO. 1117 ABORT ISDN B-channel maintenance message is already outstanding. 1. Wait two minutes. Then try again. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-256. Error Code 1118 Page 10-768 TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Far-end of ISDN trunk is not administered. 1. Check the administration of the far-end ISDN trunk. 2. Issue the status trunk 3. Try the test again. 1119 ABORT The test call was aborted due to a normal call attempt on this trunk. The test call is performed only if the trunk is idle. 1. Either wait for the normal call to terminate normally, or force it to be dropped by using the busyout trunk 1120 ABORT The DS1 ISDN Trunk is in the ISDN out-of-service/far-end state. 1. Try to change the service state via Test #256 (Service State Audit Test). Then retry this test. However, the trunk may be in the out-of-service/far-end state due to problems at the far-end switch. If that is the case, no remedial action can be taken at this end. 1122 ABORT There is no test line number for the far-end switch. 1. Check the Trunk Group Administration form. 1123 ABORT There is no Feature Access Code administration for this Facility Test. 1. Check the Dial Plan and Feature Administration forms. None 2012 2000 ABORT 2035 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The call has timed out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources. 1. Wait 1 minute and try again. 2036 2037 ABORT 2038 2039 ABORT 2040 ABORT Internal system error 1. Follow the recommendation for ABORT code 2012. A problem occurred while trying to read the test data. 1. Wait 1 minute and then try again. Internal system error 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012. 2041 ABORT The call has timed out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035. 2066 ABORT Could not establish test call. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-256. Error Code 2067 Page 10-769 TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The call has timed out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035. 2074 ABORT Bit and Block Error query failed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, there may be a serious internal problem with Maintenance/Test Digital Port. 2075 ABORT Internal system error 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2104 ABORT Call dropped or could not be originated. 1. Make sure service is provisioned by the network. 2. Check the administration of the far-end test line extension on the trunk group administration form. 3. Check the administration of the test call BCC (Bearer Capability Class) on the trunk group administration form. 4. Check the reason for termination with status isdn-testcall. 5. For further instructions see "Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Call Problems" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 6. Try the test again. 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 ABORT 2206 ABORT Internal system error 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2100. 2208 ABORT Internal system error 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012. 2209 2210 ABORT 2211 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2100. Internal system error 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-256. Error Code 2212 Page 10-770 TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Call terminated by unexpected disconnect. 1. Wait 1 minute and then try again. 2213 ABORT The call has timed-out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035. 2214 ABORT Call terminated by unexpected disconnect. 1. Wait 1 minute and then try again. 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 ABORT 2220 ABORT Internal system error 1. Follow recommendations for ABORT code 2012. Call terminated prematurely. 1. Wait 1 minute and try again. 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 ABORT 2227 ABORT Internal system error 1. Follow recommendations for ABORT code 2012. Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2100. 2042 FAIL This is the main purpose of the test. The comparison of the data sent with the data received indicates a loss of integrity on the communications path. 1. The trunk should be taken out-of-service and the quality of the DS1 line should be investigated. The investigation should include an in-depth analysis of the DS1 facility including the transmission facility and any external equipment such as DACs, CSUs, etc. If the test isdn-testcall command is invoked, then the investigation should include getting the bit and block error rates by invoking the status isdn-testcall command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) Table 10-256. Error Code Page 10-771 TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The call worked. A test pattern was sent and received properly; the communications path is OK if the synchronous test call command was issued. If the test isdn-testcall command was issued, a PASS indicates that the test call was established. A status isdn-testcall command must be invoked to query the bit and block error rates to determine if the test call passed. An in-depth analysis of the DS1 facility including the transmission facility and any external equipment such as DACs, CSUs, etc., should take place if the bit and block error rates are not acceptable. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation) Page 10-772 LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation) MO Name (in Alarm Log) LOG-SVN 1. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run1 enable login Full Name of MO Login Security Violation Where is the AT&T services login ID for which the security violation was detected. The Alt Name field indicates the login ID associated with the security violation and the major alarm. The Security Violation Notification (SVN) feature provides notification when the number of failed attempts to access the system administration/maintenance interface meets or exceeds customer administered threshold parameters. A major alarm is logged whenever a security violation is detected involving an AT&T services login ID and that login ID has been disabled as a result of the security violation. The capability to disable a login ID following detection of a security violation involving that login ID is administrable on a per login ID basis. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Version 5 Implementation, Issue 1 (555-230-656) for information on administration required for the Security Violation Notification feature and the option to disable a login ID following detection of a security violation involving the affected login ID. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-257. Error Type 1-15 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value Aux Data None Associated Test None Alarm Level Major On/Off Board OFF Test to Clear Value enable login General Information about log-svn Error Log Entries a. The number (1 - 15), that appears in the error type field, corresponds to the location the login in the internal login data structure. b. The Alt Name field on the alarm report indicates the login ID associated with the security violation and major alarm. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation) Page 10-773 c. These errors/alarms are associated with a number of failed attempts to access the system management/maintenance interface using an AT&T services login ID that meet or exceed the customer administered threshold parameters. The associated alarm is immediately raised as a major alarm. d. The affected login ID will be disabled as a result of detection of the security violation, unless it is the last enabled INADS type login on the system. The provision to disable a login ID following detection of a security violation involving that login ID is administrable on a login ID basis. e. The enable login command is used to both enable a login that has been disabled, and to retire any login security violation alarms associated with the login ID. f. Use of the enable login command to enable a login and/or retire alarms must be executed using a login ID with greater service level hierarchy permissions. g. Access to the enable login command is controlled through the Administer Permissions field on the Command Permission Categories form. This field (Administer Permissions) must be set to "y" to access the enable login command. h. The Port alarm report field will set to the port where the final invalid login attempt, involving the alarmed login ID, was detected. Valid port values for G3i products include: — MGR1 — Dedicated manager 1 or G3 management terminal connection — NET-n — Network controller dial up port — INADS — INADS port — EPN — EPN maintenance EIA port — EIA — Other EIA port Valid port value for G3r products include: — SYSAM_LOC — Local administration port — YSAM_RMT — Remote administration port — SYS_PORT — — MAINT — Maintenance port i. The Svc State alarm report field will be set to OUT if the login ID is in the disabled state as a result of detection of a security violation involving the login ID. Once the login ID has been enabled, the field will be set to IN. j. The source or reason of the failed login attempts should be identified and the cause corrected prior to re-enabling a login ID and/or retiring any alarms associated with the login ID. The cause may be something as DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation) Page 10-774 innocuous as the failure of AT&T services automatic login software, to something as insidious as a hacker attempting to gain access to the switch system management interface. The login ID associated with that alarm is displayed in the Alt Name field of the alarm report. Prior to retiring an SVN alarm and enabling the associated login ID, the monitor security-violations login command can be used to access information about the invalid login attempts that caused the security violation. This information can be useful in determining the source of the invalid attempts and analyzing why they occurred. The list logins command provides status information about logins on the system. If a login has been disabled as a result of a security violation, the status will be "svn-disabled." Procedure to Retire an SVN Alarm To retire a SVN alarm: 1. Enter the command enable login . The login ID associated with that alarm is displayed in the Alt Name field of the alarm report and the alarm is retired. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link) Page 10-775 JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PMS-PRNT/JNLPRNT MINOR test journal pms-log/wakeup-log Journal Printer Link PMS-PRNT/JNLPRNT WARNING test journal pms-log/wakeup-log Journal Printer Link NOTE: Since the maintenance strategy for both the JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link) and PMS-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) MO is the same, both of these MOs are described in the PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT Maintenance documentation. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures LGATE-AJ LGATE-AJ See BRI-SET LGATE-BD See BRI-BD LGATE-PT See BRI-PT Page 10-776 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-777 MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO MAINT MINOR test maintenance sh EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack MAINT MAJOR test maintenance l EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack The EPN Maintenance circuit pack monitors and supports environmental maintenance for the EPNs. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack provides the switch software, a mechanism to enable and disable Emergency Transfer in the EPN (assuming the Emergency Transfer Switch is in the AUTO position). The EPN Maintenance circuit pack invokes Emergency Transfer when the EPN loses contact with the PPN or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack loses contact with all Expansion Interface circuit packs. When AC power fails in the EPN cabinet, no power holdover is available. If an Expansion Interface circuit pack goes insane and is reset six times within 15 minutes, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack holds the Expansion Links reset (which prevents the Expansion Interface circuit pack from running). The EPN Maintenance circuit pack provides system level alarm LEDs which indicate the absence or presence of Major, Minor, and Warning alarms within the entire system (PPN and EPN). The EPN Maintenance circuit pack supports a G3MT terminal which runs at 9600 baud. However, the system software throttles the rate of data flow to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack for display on the terminal to about 1200 baud. All system commands can be executed via the EPN terminal. However, due to the slow speed at which the software runs the terminal, it is recommended that the EPN terminal’s primary use be for system maintenance rather than system administration. The PPN communicates with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack using the following path (messages from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to the PPN take exactly the reverse path). From the PPN, TN773 Processor circuit pack, EPN Maintenance circuit pack messages are passed to the Switch Control on the Network Control circuit pack over the Memory Bus (MBUS) and then over the TDM Bus to the Active PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. The Active PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack passes the message across the fiber to the Active EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. The Active EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack then passes the message over a serial link to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Figure 10-62 illustrates this path. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-778 In Figure 10-62, PROCR means a TN790 for a RISC Processor circuit pack, NETCON is the NEtwork Control circuit pack (TN777B) (the Active NETCON circuit pack in a high or critical reliability system), and MB stands for the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Figure 10-62 shows the connectivity for a system with duplicated Expansion Interface Links. PPN EPN E E X X P FIBER P I I P R O C R N N E T T TDM C BUS N F F O E E N X X P Figure 10-62. SERIAL LINK T FIBER M M A G I R N SERIAL LINK 1 T P I I N N T T F F EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Message Flow The EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be physically inserted into the dedicated slot marked Maintenance in the A carrier of the EPN. The serial links from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to the Expansion Links physically connect from this dedicated slot to slots 2A01 and 2B02 (2B02 is used only if there are redundant Expansion Links). The serial link from slot 2A01 to the maintenance slot is hard-wired into the backplane of carrier A, whereas the serial link from slot 2B02 to the maintenance slot is a ribbon cable connecting the two slots. The serial link from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to the terminal is also a ribbon cable which plugs into a connector labeled TERM on the back of carrier A. The maintenance strategy for the EPN Maintenance circuit pack consists of checking the integrity of the communications path to/from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, testing individual hardware components on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, and keeping the system level LEDs up-to-date. The individual hardware components include the serial interfaces which handle the serial links connected to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. There are three serial interfaces, one for each possible Expansion Interface circuit pack and one for the Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-779 Since the EPN Maintenance circuit pack supports environmental maintenance in the EPN, trouble with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can cause environmental maintenance to falsely detect problems. These environmental MOs include DC-POWER, EMG-XFER, EXT-DEV, and CUST-ALM. Since communication to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack flows through the SW-CTL (Switch Control) and the EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface) circuit packs, any problems with these MOs can prevent communication with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If a repair procedure calls for the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to be replaced, and the EPN has redundant Expansion Links, use the following procedure to prevent an Expansion Links switch when the new EPN Maintenance circuit pack is plugged in. 1. Determine the Standby Expansion Links by using the status system command. 2. Busyout the Standby Expansion Links by issuing the busyout board PCSS command where PCSS is the 4-character circuit pack address of the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN on the Standby link. 3. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. 4. Release the Standby Expansion Links by issuing the release board PCSS command, where PCSS is the 4-character circuit pack address of the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN on the Standby link. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-258. Error Type 1 EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test maintenance sh r 1 1 (a) 0 1 EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset Test (#306) MINOR ON test maintenance l 513 (a) 0 1 MGR I Channel Loop Test (#228) MINOR ON test maintenance sh r 3 769 (b) Any Sanity Handshake Test (#106) 1537 (a) 0 1 Sanity Maze Test (#303) MINOR ON test maintenance sh r 3 2561 (a) 0 1 Sanity Handshake Test (#106) MINOR ON test maintenance sh r 3 0 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued Table 10-258. Error Type Page 10-780 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 2817 (a) 0 (b) 1 Serial Channel Loop Test (#229) MINOR ON test maintenance sh r 3 3073 (a) 0 1 Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test (#104) MAJOR/ OFF test maintenance l WARNI NG2 3329 (c) Any Serial Link Test (#337) MINOR/ WARNI NG2 OFF test maintenance sh r 3 3585 (d) Any Serial Link Test (#337) MINOR/ WARNI NG2 OFF test maintenance sh r 3 Continued on next page 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major and Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. A value of 0 indicates the Expansion Link in the A carrier was active when this error occurred. A value of 1 indicates the Expansion Link in the B carrier was active when this error occurred. To clear this problem, make sure the Active Expansion Link is the same as that indicated by the Aux Value. b. Multiple values can appear in the Aux Data field. There are other errors in the log if there is a real problem. Use these other errors to troubleshoot the problem. c. The serial link between the Expansion Link in the A carrier and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective. d. The serial link between the Expansion Link in the B carrier and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-781 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Sanity Handshake Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test (#104) (a) X D EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset Test (#306) X D X ND X D Order of Investigation Sanity Handshake Test (#106) Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test (#229) X MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test (#228) EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#303) X X ND EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test (#337) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Note: a. If you are invoking the Long Test Sequence from the EPN terminal, Test #104 causes the system technician terminal to be logged off, and Test #306 is not run as part of the test sequence. Test #104, however, causes Test #306 to run in an attempt to bring the EPN Maintenance circuit pack back to a known state. After the test sequence runs, the Error Log should be examined for MAINT errors of type 1 and 3073 to determine if the Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test and EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset Test failed. If you are invoking the Long Test Sequence from the PPN, all tests listed are run and their results are displayed on the PPN terminal. The EPN terminal is still logged off. Network Control Circuit Pack Dual Port Ram (DPR) Test (#104) This test is destructive. When executed, this test drops the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal login. The login prompt reappears if the test passes successfully. The Dual Port Ram (RAM), memory shared by the TN777 Processor circuit pack and the Network Control circuit pack, is tested to ensure that it can be read from and written to. EPN Maintenance circuit pack maintenance utilizes the DPR on Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-782 the Network Control circuit pack for placing messages that eventually get passed along to the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN cabinet and subsequently to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN cabinet. Table 10-259. Error Code TEST #104 Network Control Circuit Pack Dual Port Ram (DPR) Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1030 ABORT Internal system error 2028 ABORT Internal system error 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 10401 ABORT Test disabled using a software patch. FAIL The test failed. 1. Since a portion of the Network Control circuit pack (the Dual Port Ram) is actually being tested here, run the Short Test Sequence against the Network Control circuit pack (SW-CTL) and follow the maintenance procedures for Test #325. 2000 FAIL Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The communication to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is good at least up to the Network Control circuit pack. If there are still problems communicating with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, then these problems must be with either the EXP-LINK (Expansion Links), EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack. Continued on next page Sanity Handshake Test (#106) This test checks the EPN Maintenance circuit pack’s ability to respond to queries. A message is sent to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack which then sends a message back. If the response message is received, then the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is queried for the EPN cabinet type. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack reads pins on the backplane of carrier A that identify the type of cabinet and report this information. If a valid cabinet type is returned, then the test passes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-260. Error Code Page 10-783 TEST #106 Sanity Handshake Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to cabinet query was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2046 ABORT The EPN Maintenance circuit pack reported an invalid cabinet type. Not knowing the cabinet type of the EPN prevents all EPN environment maintenance from running. 1. Retry the command. 2. If the test continues to abort with 2046, then either the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective, or the EPN cabinet wiring is defective. First, replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. 3. If the test continues to abort with 2046, then the EPN cabinet wiring is defective in the A carrier and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot read the backplane pins to determine the cabinet type. 10601 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. FAIL EPN Maintenance circuit pack did not respond to Sanity Handshake and the test timed out. 1. Verify that the carrier A power units are good. If the -5 volt unit is defective in the A carrier, then communication with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is not possible. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-260. Error Code Page 10-784 TEST #106 Sanity Handshake Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/Recommendation 2. If the -5 volt unit is good and this test continuously fails, background maintenance automatically escalates to an EPN Maintenance circuit pack Reset (Test #306). Otherwise, you can manually invoke an EPN Maintenance circuit pack Reset by issuing the test maintenance long command and evaluating any generated error codes from Test #306. If Test #306 passes, this test should also PASS. Otherwise, use the following steps to determine if the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, or the serial link to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, is defective: ■ Duplicated Expansion Links: 1. Determine which serial link is the standby by issuing the status system system technician command. 2. Switch Expansion Links by entering set expansion-link PCSS where PCSS is the 4-character Expansion Interface circuit pack location for the Standby link. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence against the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If Test #106 still fails, replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and retest. Otherwise, follow the error routines for any errors that are logged by this Short Test. ■ Single Expansion Interface Link Switch: 1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and invoke the Short Test Sequence. 2. If error persists, replace the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack, at a time when the EPN can go down with minimal inconvenience. 3. If the error still persists, the problem is with the actual serial link in A carrier backplane and not with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. PASS The communications path to and from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is sane, and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can read and report the correct EPN cabinet type. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack may still have problems related to Tests #228, #229, #303, or #306. Continued on next page MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test (#228) This test is destructive. This test checks the on-board circuitry of the EPN Maintenance circuit pack associated with the serial link for the terminal connection. This test does not cause the terminal to become disconnected. However, any data being displayed Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-785 on the terminal while the test is running is lost. Figure 10-63 shows the three serial interfaces on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and is meant to clarify that only the one dealing with the EPN terminal is being tested. ACTIVE LINK M G EXPANSION INTERFACE R CIRCUIT PACK SERIAL INTERFACES 1 STANDBY LINK MGR 1 SERIAL INTERFACE EPN MAINTENANCE CIRCUIT PACK Figure 10-63. Table 10-261. Error Code EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT Connection TEST #228 MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2034 ABORT Background EPN Maintenance circuit pack maintenance is running the MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test. 1. Wait 30 seconds and retry the test a maximum of 5 times. 22801 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-261. Error Code Page 10-786 TEST #228 MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation Test failed which means the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal is not usable. 1. Run the test three more times. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack if the test continues to fail. PASS The serial interface circuitry on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack which controls the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal is functioning properly. If there are still troubles with the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal, the problem may be one of the following: 1. The EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal is not configured properly. The connection between the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be set up at 9600 baud. 2. The serial link from the back of carrier A to the EPN management terminal may be defective. The serial link consists of the connector on the back of carrier A labeled TERM and the ribbon cable running to the EPN terminal. 3. The EPN terminal may be defective. Try another terminal. 4. Since this test is not 100 percent accurate, there may still be problems with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Continued on next page Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test (#229) This test checks the on-board circuitry of the EPN Maintenance circuit pack associated with the serial links to the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Figure 10-64 shows the three serial interfaces on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and is meant to clarify that the two dealing with the Expansion Links are being tested. A request is sent to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack over the Active link via the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack serial interface circuitry to test the serial interface circuitry of the standby Expansion Interface circuit pack link. If a response is received, then by definition the serial interface circuitry associated with the Active link is good. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-787 ACTIVE LINK M G EXPANSION INTERFACE R CIRCUIT PACK SERIAL INTERFACES 1 STANDBY LINK MGR 1 SERIAL INTERFACE EPN MAINTENANCE CIRCUIT PACK Figure 10-64. Table 10-262. Error Code EPN Expansion Links Connections TEST #229 Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2034 ABORT Background EPN Maintenance circuit pack maintenance is running the Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test. 1. Wait 30 seconds, and retry the test a maximum of 5 times. 22901 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-262. Error Code Page 10-788 TEST #229 Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The on-board circuitry associated with the Standby serial link is defective. Since the EPN Maintenance circuit pack reported this failure, the on-board circuitry associated with the Active serial link is functional. 1. This test checks the circuitry on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack associated with the Standby Expansion Interface link. PASS ■ In a switch without duplicated Expansion Links, current service is not affected because the circuitry failing is not being used. Nevertheless, a Minor alarm remains in the Alarm Log against MAINT. Therefore, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be replaced. ■ In a switch with duplicated Expansion Links, service is not affected as long as you DO NOT SWITCH LINKS; otherwise, the connection to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is lost. Losing the EPN Maintenance circuit pack connection means loss of the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT and EPN Environment maintenance. If an Expansion Links switch does occur, the software probably switches the links back, based on the relative health of each link. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be replaced to correct this problem. The on-board circuitry associated with both Expansion Interface circuit pack serial links is good. If there is still a problem communicating with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, check the following: 1. The cable comprising the serial link (B carrier Expansion Interface circuit pack to EPN Maintenance circuit pack only) may be defective. 2. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack may actually be defective. NOTE: This test may not be 100 percent accurate. 3. The Expansion Interface circuit pack on the Standby link may be defective. Continued on next page EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#303) The EPN Maintenance circuit pack processor has direct access to special registers in the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. These registers are tied to such things as the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset leads and Carrier Port Power Unit reset leads (which enable the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to recycle carriers). To prevent an insane EPN Maintenance circuit pack from inadvertently controlling these external devices, a special interface called the Sanity Maze is provided that must first be navigated by the EPN Maintenance circuit pack Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-789 processor prior to any register access. There are two parts to the test. Part 1 involves navigating the Sanity Maze to toggle an unused lead. Part 2 attempts to toggle an unused lead without first navigating the Sanity Maze. The Sanity Maze test passes if Part 1 is successful and Part 2 fails. Table 10-263. Error Code TEST #303 EPN Maintenance CP Sanity Maze Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT FAIL 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The Sanity Maze of the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective. 1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. PASS The Sanity Maze is working properly, and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can access the unused register. If recycle carrier commands (for EPN carriers) do not work, the following problems may still exist: 1. The Carrier Port Power Unit or wiring to the Carrier Port Power Unit may be defective. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) Maintenance documentation. 2. Since this test only tests the EPN, there is a very small probability that the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot access those registers that deal with EPN devices. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack may need to be replaced. Continued on next page EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset Test (#306) This test is destructive. The EPN management terminal is dropped and, if the Emergency Transfer switch is in the AUTO position, Emergency Transfer is disabled for the duration of the test. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack is reset by the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack. After the Expansion Interface circuit pack reports that the EPN Maintenance circuit pack has reset, a handshake message is sent to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If the EPN Maintenance circuit pack responds to the handshake, the test passes. If not, it fails. If the test passes, the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT is brought back up, and Emergency Transfer is restored to its previous state. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-264. Error Code 1000 Page 10-790 TEST #306 EPN Maintenance CP Reset Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. 2000 ABORT Response to the reset request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, look for and resolve all problems associated with the Expansion Interface circuit pack (EXP-INTF). 2028 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2030 ABORT EPN is down. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence against the Expansion Interface circuit pack (test board PCSS) where PCSS is the 4-character address of the active Expansion Interface circuit pack), and refer to the maintenance procedures outlined for that circuit pack. 2031 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2032 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-264. Error Code Page 10-791 TEST #306 EPN Maintenance CP Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation Expansion Interface circuit pack could not reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. For duplicated Expansion Links in the EPN: 1. The Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack may be defective and, thereby, preventing the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack from resetting the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Unplug the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack, and attempt to reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack using the test maint long command. If Test #306 passes, replace the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack, and attempt the reset test again. If Test #306 fails, then replace the Standby EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. 2. The Active Expansion Interface circuit pack may be defective and unable to reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. To determine which is the Standby link, enter the status system command from the Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal. Switch links by entering the set expansion-link command followed by the 4-character Expansion Interface circuit pack location for the Standby link. Now reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack again by using the test maintenance long command. If the test passes, the problem is with the known Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. Repeat Step 2 to determine if the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack should be replaced. 3. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, and run the test again. If the test passes, the problem is with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Switch Expansion Links, and run the test again. The test should pass with both Expansion Interface circuit packs being active. 4. If the B carrier Expansion Interface circuit pack is active, the ribbon cable connecting the Expansion Interface circuit pack and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack may be defective. Check the ribbon cable to make sure it is connected properly and is not damaged. For single Expansion Links in the EPN: 1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, and run the test again. If it passes, the problem is with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. 2. If the test fails, replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the tests passes, the problem is with the Expansion Interface circuit pack. 3. If the test still fails, the problem is with the serial link wired into the backplane of carrier A. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-264. Error Code 2005 Page 10-792 TEST #306 EPN Maintenance CP Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset passed, but the EPN Maintenance circuit pack did not respond to subsequent handshake message. Retry this command three more times. If it continues to fail, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack, or the serial link is defective. To determine which is defective, follow the appropriate procedures outlined below. ■ Duplicated Expansion Links: 1. Determine which serial link is the Standby by issuing the status system system technician command. 2. Switch Expansion Links by entering set expansion-link PCSS where PCSS is the 4-character Expansion Interface circuit pack location for the Standby link. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence against the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If Test #306 still fails, replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and retest. Otherwise, follow the error routines for any errors that are logged by this Short Test Sequence. ■ Single Expansion Interface Link Switch: 1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and invoke the Short Test Sequence. 2. If the error persists, replace the EI circuit pack, at a time when the EPN can go down with minimal inconvenience. 3. If the error still persists, the problem is with the actual serial link in A carrier backplane and not with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. PASS The Active Expansion Interface circuit pack can reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. This implies the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack, and Active serial link are sane. There could still be a problem with the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack and Standby serial link in a High or Critical Reliability system. Continued on next page EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test (#337) This test is destructive. This test checks the serial link from the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If there is no Standby link, or the Standby link is down at the time of the test, this test aborts. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Page 10-793 NOTE: The status of the link is changed to "down" when the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack begins initialization tests (for example, after being reseated). The link status is then updated at the conclusion of these tests. Table 10-265. Error Code 1030 TEST #337 EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The active Expansion Link to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is not running. 1. Follow up on the test results of the EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Handshake Test (#105). 2. When problems associated with this test are resolved, rerun Test #337. 1035 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1036 ABORT There is no Standby Expansion Link running. Either the system only has one Expansion Link, the Standby Expansion Link is down due to Expansion Link, or the Expansion Interface circuit pack problems. 1. Issue the status system command and determine if the Standby Expansion Link is down or does not exist. If it does not exist, dashes are shown. Otherwise, the link status is shown. If there is no Standby link, this test always aborts. 2. If there is a Standby link and it is down, then refer to EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and resolve all alarms on the link. 3. Rerun the test. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack) Table 10-265. Error Code Page 10-794 TEST #337 EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The Serial Link between the current Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective. If the Standby link is on the A carrier, errors of type 3329 are logged; however, if the Standby link is on the B carrier, errors of type 3585 are logged. 1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. If the test continues to fail, replace the Standby EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. 3. Rerun the test. If the test continues to fail and the Standby link is on the B carrier, then replace the ribbon cable that carries the serial link from Expansion Interface circuit pack B to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. 4. Rerun the test. PASS The serial link from the Standby Expansion Link to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is working. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEM-BD (Memory) Page 10-795 MEM-BD (Memory) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO MEM-BD MAJOR test memory l c Memory MEM-BD (a) WARNING test memory sh c Memory MEMORY (b) MAJOR test memory a/b sh c Memory NOTE: For memory problems on systems with a TN790 RISC processor circuit pack, see “PR-MEM.” Notes: a. Non-TN790 is on the processor circuit pack and not on a separate memory circuit pack. The maintenance object is "MEMORY" and not "MEM-BD." However, all references to MEM-BD in this section are applicable to "MEMORY" as well. The Memory contains the DEFINITY software and firmware. The Processor circuit pack is the most critical component of all system operations. b. Non-TN790 systems contain memory that is integrated with the processor. For testing purposes, the circuit pack is logically separated into PR-MAINT, PROCR, and MEMORY. This means that a memory problem on 386 systems requires that the Processor be replaced. 386 systems contain two types of memory: Flash ROM and DRAM. Flash ROM is permanent memory that contains the boot image, PI firmware, and PACCON firmware. This type of memory is not erased during circuit pack resets. It can be reprogrammed only via the upgrade software command. DRAM is used for software data storage, and it changes constantly. DRAM loses its value during circuit pack resets. Both types of memory are present on the Processor circuit pack. The diagnostics run appropriate tests on both memories. For all system activity, the Processor must be able to access the Memory. If the Processor cannot do this, the system goes into SPE-down mode. In SPE-down mode, fatal Memory errors may show up as Processor errors. This merely indicates that the Processor and the Memory are very closely linked as a matter of course. If the initialization diagnostics fail, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode" section in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’. Memory faults usually indict the Processor circuit pack (TN790) or the CPP1 circuit pack, however the problem may be on the TN786B. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEM-BD (Memory) Page 10-796 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-266. Error Type 1 MEM-BD (Memory) Memory Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test memory a/b l r 1 1-256 Any Read All Memory Test (#85) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 5 257-512 (b) Any Read All Memory Test (#85) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 1 513 (c) 0 Memory Detection/ Test (#87) MAJOR ON test memory a/b r 3 769 (d) Any Text Checksum Test (#86) MAJOR OFF/ON test memory a/b l r 2 1025 (e) Any Memory Functional Test (#332) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 1 0 Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The "clear" option can replace the "repeat" option in a test memory command. For a High or Critical Reliability system, the carrier (a or b) must be specified. In all other systems, there is no need to specify the carrier. b. The Read All Memory Test (#85) failed. Refer to the FAIL section of this test. The error is associated with MEM-BD 1. c. The Memory Error Detection Test (#87) failed. Refer to the FAIL section of this test. The error is associated with MEM-BD 1. d. The Text Checksum Test (#86) failed. Refer to the FAIL section of this test. The error is associated with MEM-BD 1 and is an ON board alarm. e. There are Functional Test errors against both the Processor circuit pack and Memory. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEM-BD (Memory) Page 10-797 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate errors in the order in which they are presented in Table 10-267. By clearing error codes associated with the Read All Memory Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-267. MEM-BD (Memory) Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82)(a) X X ND Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80) (a) X X ND Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) (a) X X ND X D Order of Investigation Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) (a) MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (b) X X ND MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (b) X X ND MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (b) X X ND MTPSAT Loop Around Test (#228) (b) X X ND MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (b) X X ND MTP Reset Test (#101) (b) X D MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (b) X D Read All Memory Test (#85) X ND X ND Text Checksum Test (#86) X ND Memory Functional Test (#332) (c) X D X ND Memory Error Detection Test (#87) Memory Board Check Test (#631) X X Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to PROCR (Processor) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests [386 systems only]. b. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests [386 systems only]. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEM-BD (Memory) Page 10-798 c. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command. Read All Memory Test (#85) This test is a nondestructive test. The test reads every memory location in memory and writes it back. A failure of this test indicates a failure in the Processor or Memory circuit pack. Table 10-268. Error Code TEST #85 Read All Memory Test Test Result Description/Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1 FAIL If the system can still provide service, this indicates that the Processor circuit pack or Memory has a problem, but can still function. The error code "1" indicates that MEM-BD 1 is failing the test. 1. Replace the PROCR (Processor circuit pack). ! WARNING: If the Processor circuit pack must be replaced, and if there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot immediately to the right of the Processor circuit pack), remove the blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged. PASS The Memory is healthy. Continued on next page Text Checksum Test (#86) This test is a nondestructive test. The test computes the checksum of the DEFINITY software text module, and it validates the operation of the flash ROM. A failure of this test indicates corruption of the Text. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEM-BD (Memory) Table 10-269. Error Code 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 Page 10-799 TEST #86 Text Checksum Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. FAIL The system may or may not continue to operate correctly. The system may fail later when some action requires access to the corrupted area of the Text. 2. For a 386 system, the flash ROM should be reprogrammed by 3. the upgrade software command. The memory card should contain the same vintage software that is currently in the system. Refer to the "Software Upgrade" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. 2058 FAIL (G3iV1.1-286 system only). PASS The checksum is correct. Continued on next page Memory Error Detection Test (#87) This test is a nondestructive test. This test determines if the parity circuitry is working. Accordingly, the test determines if parity errors can be detected. The parity circuitry is used to detect DRAM memory failures. Memory Functional Test (#332) This test is destructive. This test ensures that every DRAM memory location can be accessed and changed independently. Running this test wipes out all data in DRAM memory. This test is performed during a reset system 4 or reset system 5. If the test fails during a reset system command, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode" section of Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’, for the recommended maintenance strategy. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEM-BD (Memory) Table 10-270. Error Code 1000 Page 10-800 TEST #332 Memory Functional Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of three times. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. FAIL The Standby SPE Memory is defective. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. The Processor circuit pack should be replaced. PASS The Standby SPE Memory circuit pack(s) is healthy. Continued on next page Memory Board Check Test (#631) This test always passes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MEMORY Page 10-801 MEMORY MO Name (in Alarm Log) MEMORY Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run test memory a/b l c Full Name of MO memory Refer to MEM-BD (Memory Circuit Pack) for circuit pack level errors. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-BD (MET Line Circuit Pack) Page 10-802 MET-BD (MET Line Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MET-BD MIN test board PCSS sh MET Line Circuit Pack MET-BD WRN test board PCSS sh MET Line Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also MET-LINE (MET Line) Maintenance documentation for related line information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Page 10-803 MET-LINE (MET Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MET-LINE MINOR test port PCSSpp l MET Line MET-LINE WARNING test port PCSSpp sh MET Line 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). Electronic Station is the user-friendly term to denote the MET (Multibutton Electronic Telephone) Station Set. The MET sets were originally introduced for use in earlier PBX systems but can now be used in Generic 1 switches. The TN735 MET Line circuit pack supports four of these Multifunctional Electronic Sets. Each MET set uses three pairs of wires: an analog voice pair, a transmit pair, and a receive pair. Power is sent over the transmit and receive pairs. The MET Line circuit pack supports all 10-, 20-, and 30-button sets. MET Line interactions are shown in Figure 10-65. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Page 10-804 MET LINE CIRCUIT PACK (1) PORT MET LINE VOICE TERMINAL PBX (4) PORT MET LINE VOICE TERMINAL MET LINE Figure 10-65. MET Line Interactions A change in the use of the Recall button on the MET set needs to be noted. Instead of being used as it was in earlier PBX systems, the Recall button is used in this system as a self-test button and, when pressed, lights all of the lamps on the MET set and runs the ringer update. This section refers only to the MET-LINE (MET Line) maintenance that is performed. Note that MET-LINE (MET Line) maintenance is closely related to, and interacts with, the MET-BD (MET Line circuit pack) maintenance in some instances. Some of the results of maintenance testing of the MET Line may be affected by the health of the MET Line circuit pack. This interaction should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of reports of MET Line problems. There are instances in this section where service states of a station are mentioned. It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service states that may exist. An explanation of these service states follows: ■ Out-of-Service—The port, and thus the station, have been removed from service. A busyout of a port causes it to be out-of-service. ■ Ready-for-Service—Once a port on the circuit pack has been put into service, the voice terminal must communicate that it is present. The time between these two events is the time when the terminal is in the ready-for-service state. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) ■ Page 10-805 In Service—Once the system receives a message from the voice terminal communicating that it is present, the station is put into the in-service state. The terminal can also be forced into the in-service state if it goes off-hook while it is in the ready-for-service state. When the status station command has been run, and the status screen appears, the status is reported as either out-of-service, in-service (as stated in the preceding list), or disconnect (the station is in the ready-for-service state). Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MET Line Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 (a) 40987 None 18 (b) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 2 OFF 130 (c) 257 (d) 40988 None MIN/WRN 513 (e) 40965 Hybrid Line Station Audits Test (#61) WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 4 769 Port Diagnostic Test (#35) MIN/WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 1025 Hybrid & Conf. Circuits Test (#57) MIN/WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 None MIN/WRN2 OFF TDMNPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MIN/WRN2 ON 1537 (f) 40968 1793 2049(g) 32770 2049(h) 40967 3840(i) 40989 1. 2. test port PCSSpp l r 3 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command. Notes: a. Indicates a defective data link. An off-board problem detected by port circuit. Make sure the MET set is connected, and that the EPF test passes. If data transmission problems are experienced, check for defective wiring, DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Page 10-806 check for a defective voice terminal, and move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired due to the passing of time. b. This error is logged when the port in question is busied out by maintenance personnel. Make sure port is released from busyout. c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. d. This indicates that the EPF has been turned off due to the overcurrent condition at the voice terminal. Check for defective wiring, check for a damaged jack, and make sure the voice terminal is a MET set. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired due to the passing of time. e. The particular station audit that causes this error type to be produced is the EPF inquiry audit. If the EPF inquiry receives an "epf-no-load" message a certain number of times, this error occurs and, if the EPF inquiry receives an "epf-on-ok" or an "epf-off-ok" message, it contributes to the resolution of this alarm. This indicates that the voice terminal has probably been disconnected or that there is a problem in the wiring to the terminal. Make sure that the voice terminal is connected or check for defective wiring to the voice terminal. f. This indicates that something is wrong with the link to the voice terminal. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board Minor alarm. Ignore if there are no complaints. Otherwise, verify that the voice terminal is connected, check for defective wiring, check for a defective voice terminal, and move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. g. This indicates that the station went off-hook while it was in the ready-for-service state. Use the status system command to determine the state of the station. The off-hook should have moved the station to ready-for-service. No action is necessary. h. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No action is necessary. i. An uplink message being logged that the EPF is one with no load on it. No action is necessary. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Page 10-807 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Port Diagnostic Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Port Diagnostic Test (#35) X ND MFAT Electronic Power Feed Test (#56) X ND Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test (#57) X ND Order of Investigation Station Lamp Update Test (#60) X X ND Station Audits Test (#61) X X ND Ringer Update Test (#62) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-271. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-271. Error Code 1000 Page 10-808 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-271. Error Code 1004 Page 10-809 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration. This only applies to analog stations. The default for this field is ‘y,’ so you may want to determine why it has been turned off on this station. 1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter the change station extension command and change the 'Test' field on the 'Station' form from 'n' to 'y.' 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-271. Error Code Any Page 10-810 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation. 3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails. 0 PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Port Diagnostic Test (#35) This test checks a port’s battery feed circuitry. The battery feed circuitry is tested for proper battery voltage by testing the switchhook state. In response to the test message, the on-board firmware terminates the line and checks for switch-hook presence. The termination is then removed, and a check is made for no switch-hook presence. The MET set must be on-hook for the test to execute. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-272. Error Code Page 10-811 TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-272. Error Code 1004 Page 10-812 TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. NOTE: The battery feed circuitry is tested for proper battery voltage by testing the switchhook state. In response to the test message, the on-board firmware terminates the line and checks for switch-hook presence. The termination is then removed, and a check is made for no switch-hook presence. The MET set must be on-hook for the test to execute. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. 1. Escalate to next tier level. 2000 ABORT This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, then release the port via the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-272. Error Code 2100 Page 10-813 TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Battery Feed Test failed. This port is out-of-service. 1. Other ports on this circuit pack are not affected. Place user on a different port, if available, until a replacement circuit pack can be obtained. 2. Replace circuit pack when available. PASS Battery Feed Test passed. Current flow is properly detected for this port. 1. If users are reporting problems, examine connections to the port. 2. Escalate the problem. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Page 10-814 MET Electronic Power Feed (#56) In this test, the software requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port. An attempt is made to turn on the power unit to the station. If no current is being drawn, this probably indicates that the station is not connected. If an overcurrent condition is sensed (that is, too much current is being drawn), this may indicate a short in the loop or a defective voice terminal. Depending on what condition is sensed, a message is returned stating that either the EPF was turned on successfully with no problems or that an overcurrent condition is sensed. This test is repeated once more five seconds later. If either test is not successful, the test aborts. Although this test will never actually return a fail result (except for the internal system error), an error type 257 entry will be made in the error log when the test has completed if the overcurrent case is detected by the hardware. Table 10-273. Error Code TEST #56 MET Electronic Power Feed Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was aborted due to an internal system error on a software request to the board. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL The test failed with an internal error while it was attempting to turn on the EPF. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-273. Error Code Page 10-815 TEST #56 MET Electronic Power Feed Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation EAF Test passed. The message to turn on the power to the station was successfully sent to the port. 1. Although this test never returns a FAIL result, after running this test, the Error Log should be checked for any entries with Error Type 257 to examine the real results of this test. 2. If Error Type 257 does not appear in the Error Log within 10 seconds after completion of this test, it is safe to assume that the test sensed no problems with the power to the station. To verify that the station is powered up correctly, run a self-test on the station, if available, and check that all the feature buttons are operating. 3. If Error Type 257 appears in the Error Log, this indicates some problem with the power to the station. The system technician should check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a defective voice terminal, or an incorrect type of terminal. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test (#57) The MET Circuit Test checks the amount of reflection from the MET loop around circuitry and a Conference Test. The Tone-Clock circuit pack places a 1004-Hz tone on a time slot that the port circuit is listening on. A General Purpose Tone Detector (GPTD) is connected to another time slot that the same port circuit is talking on. The on-board microprocessor places the port in the loop around mode and the GPTD measures the level of the reflected signal. The Conference Test is performed after the Circuit Test. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE is able to listen to several test tones and correctly conference them together, and the test is executed in two parts. The first half of Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Page 10-816 the test checks the operation of the NPE’s first three conference channels. The NPE is put in the loop around mode and instructed to talk on a selected time slot and to listen to the 1004-Hz tone using the first three conference channels. The signal level and noise level of the conferenced output are then measured using a GPTD and checked to verify that they are within an acceptable range. The second half of the Conference Test checks the operation of the NPE’s remaining four conference channels and follows the same procedure as above. Table 10-274. Error Code TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-274. Error Code 1003 Page 10-817 TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2103 ABORT The system could not make the conference connection for the test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-274. Error Code 7 Page 10-818 TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The conference circuit test failed. The conference circuit test is performed only if the hybrid test passes. The conference circuit test verifies that the network processing element (NPE) is able to correctly conference several test tones together. The test is executed in two parts. The first half of the test verifies the operation of the NPE’s first three conference channels, while the second half verifies the NPE’s remaining four conference channels. The test puts the NPE in loop around mode and instructs it to talk on a specified time slot while listening to a 1004 Hz tone, using the conference channels. A GPTD then measures the signal and noise levels of the conferenced output and reports whether or not these are within an acceptable range. The failure may be due to off-board circumstances, the most common of which is an off-hook occurring during the test. It is possible that the port may still be functional from a user’s point of view. Also, check the error logs against the GPTD-BD, the TONE-BD, and the TONE-PT. 1. This error can be caused by a disconnected terminal. First, ensure that the terminal is connected and the wiring is OK. 2. Then, issue the display port and the station status commands to determine if the station is idle. If it is idle, issue the test port command for this port. 3. If test continues to fail, issue the busyout port and the release port commands, and then retest the port. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-274. Error Code 57 Page 10-819 TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Hybrid Circuit Test failed. This could result in noisy or bad connections. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack, using test board PCSS short command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the MET Line circuit pack. NOTE: If the MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain either a TN736 or a TN752 power unit circuit pack OR a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB power unit, refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for AC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B power unit, refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation. PASS Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test passed. The hybrid circuitry is transmitting properly. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other port tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-274. Error Code TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result 0 Page 10-820 NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test (#60) For this test, the software lights the lamps on the terminal based on the status record contained in the processor. The lamp updates run only if the station is in-service. Table 10-275. Error Code 1 TEST #60 MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, then release the port via the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-275. Error Code 2 Page 10-821 TEST #60 MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 ABORT Station is in ready-for-service or out-of-service state. This may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective set. 1. Make sure terminal is connected and the wiring is correct. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS MET Line Station Lamp Updates completed successfully. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other circuit pack tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-275. TEST #60 MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued Error Code 0 Page 10-822 Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page MET Line Station Audits Test (#61) This is a series of three tests that are classified as audits. These audits abort if attempted on an out-of-service station. The tests are as follows: ■ Switchhook Audit—This is an update of the SPE records according to the circuit packs’ records. ■ Bad Scan Inquiry—A message is sent uplink that contains a count that is generated due to certain events relating to the link conditions. This is an indication of data transmission problems between the MET Line circuit pack and the voice terminal. ■ EPF Inquiry—The status of the EPF is sent uplink. Possible conditions are: EPF-on-ok, EPF-off, EPF-no-load, and EPF-on-overcurrent. Although this test will never actually return a fail result (except for the internal system error), it is possible that it will enter error types 257 (over current) or 513 (open circuit) into the error log. To determine if there are any problems that do not show up in the test result, look for these error types in the error log. If these errors appear in the error log or if user complaints still exist, investigate by using other circuit pack tests and by examining the station, the wiring, and the connections. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-276. Error Code 1 Page 10-823 TEST #61 MET Line Station Audits Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error. ABORT The test was aborted due to an internal system error during the switchhook audit. 2 The test was aborted due to an internal system error during the bad scan inquiry. 3 The test was aborted due to an internal system error during the EPF audit inquiry. 1. Make sure that the station is not in an out-of-service state. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-276. Error Code 2000 Page 10-824 TEST #61 MET Line Station Audits Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL The test failed due to an internal system error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS Hybrid Line Station Audits passed. 1. Although this test always returns a PASS result, it may enter Error Types 257 or 513 into the Error Log. To determine if there are any problems that don’t show up in the test result, look for these error types in the Error Log. 2. If these errors appear in the Error Log, or if user complaints still exist, investigate by using other circuit pack tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and connections. 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page MET Line Ringer Update Test (#62) In this update, a "ringer on" or a "ringer off" message is sent to the firmware to start and stop the ringer on the set. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-277. Error Code 3 Page 10-825 TEST #62 MET Line Ringer Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This port may have been busied out by system technician. 1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If this error type is present, then release the port via the release station command and run the test again. 2. Make sure that the terminal is connected. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status station, status attendant, or status trunk command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out. 1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS Hybrid Station Ringer Update passed. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate using other circuit pack tests, and by examining the terminal, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MET-LINE (MET Line) Table 10-277. Error Code 0 Page 10-826 TEST #62 MET Line Ringer Update Test — Continued Test Result NO BOARD Description/ Recommendation The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MIS (Management Information System) Page 10-827 MIS (Management Information System) MO Name (in Alarm Log MIS Alarm Level WRN Initial Command to Run release mis Full Name of MO Management Information System The Management Information System (MIS)/Call Management System (CMS) MO is used only for administering MIS translations, such as trunks and stations. There are no hardware failures associated with this MO. NOTE: To diagnose MIS link hardware errors and alarms, see PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) and PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) maintenance information. The MIS/CMS is an adjunct processor that collects ACD data sent from the system. To change MIS translations, a system administrator must first enter a busyout mis command at the terminal. When the MIS is busied out, the system stops sending ACD data to the MIS, and a Warning alarm is raised. When finished, a release mis command should be entered at the terminal. This clears the Warning alarm and allows the switch to send ACD data to the MIS. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Management Information System Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any release mis 18(a) 0 busyout mis WARNING ON release mis 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Note: a. When the busyout MIS command is issued, no data is sent to the MIS/CMS regardless of the link state. To allow data to be sent to MIS/CMS, a release mis command must be issued from the terminal. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-BD (Modem Pool Circuit Pack) Page 10-828 MODEM-BD (Modem Pool Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MODEM-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Modem Pool Circuit Pack MODEM-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Modem Pool Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Maintenance documentation for related port information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-829 MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) MODEM-PT 1. Alarm Level MINOR Initial Command to Run1 test port PCSSpp sh Full Name of MO Modem Pool Port Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The Modem Pool Port provides an interface for digital and analog data communication devices or ports connected to the PBX. It may be thought of as a PBX data communications "conversion resource" because it converts analog modem signals typically used in the telephone network into digital signals that are compatible with the internal PBX network and vice versa. There may be a number of these conversion resources available in the PBX, each assigned to one of five available Modem Pool Groups. Only one conversion resource is used per data connection. The PBX software usually adds the conversion resource into a data connection if it determines that it is necessary for the call. Typical connections that include Modem Pool conversion resources include data calls from Analog Line or Central Office Trunk ports to any digital port or Digital Line or Trunk ports to any analog port. An example of a Data Module to Central Office Trunk connection using a Modem Pool conversion resource is shown in Figure 10-66. When a local data call originates from an analog port normally used for voice service only and terminates on a digital port, a Data Origination access code must be dialed before the extension number for the Modem Pool conversion resource to be included in the connection. Refer to Figure 10-66 on page 10-830 while reading the following paragraph. Each Modem Pool conversion resource contains two ports. One of these, an Analog Line Port, is connected (via the PBX network) to the Analog Line or Central Office Trunk Port that is the source of the modem signal. The second port is referred to as the digital port and is connected (again through the PBX network) to the Digital Line or Trunk port associated with the Data Module in the connection. The analog modem signals enter the analog port of the conversion resource in standard Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) format but are converted into Data Communications Protocol (DCP) format before going to the Digital Line or trunk in the connection. There are two primary types of Modem Pool conversion resources available: an Integrated Pooled Modem and a Combined Modem Pool. The integrated TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack contains two independent 300 or 1200 baud conversion resources. Each conversion resource contains two interfaces to the PBX digital network: an analog port and a digital port. The analog port is Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-830 connected through the PBX network to the analog line or trunk port containing the analog modem signals. The digital port connects through the PBX network to the digital line or trunk port in the call. Figure 10-66 shows a typical end-to-end connection using a conversion resource on the integrated Pooled Modem circuit pack. Terminal Data Module DCP Digital Line (TN754) Pooled Modem Conversion Resource DCP Digital Line Port Analog Line Port DCP PBX Digital Network PCM (TN758) Telephone Network TIP/Ring Analog Central Office Trunk (TN747B) PCM Analog Modem Host Computer Figure 10-66. Typical Modem Pool Switched Connection with Integrated Pooled Modem DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-831 The Combined Modem Pool conversion resource is the second type available. The function served by the Combined Modem Pool is similar to that of the integrated Pooled Modem circuit pack, but the physical implementation is much different. It has the advantage of supporting any speed the external modem can support. The integrated Pooled Modem circuit pack can only support 300 or 1200 baud transmission rates. The Combined Modem Pool conversion resource consists of a port on a TN742 or TN746 Analog Line circuit pack, an external modem, a Data Module, and a port on a TN754 Digital Line circuit pack. The tip and ring interface of the Analog Line is connected to the modem, the EIA 232C interface of the modem connects to the Data Module, and the DCP interface on the Data Module is connected to the Digital Line port. The analog modem signals pass through the Analog Line port to the modem. The modem converts these to EIA 232C signals which are passed on to the Data Module. The Data Module further converts the signals to the DCP protocol for the Digital Line port which passes the signals on to the PBX network. See Figure 10-67. Certain customer-reported troubles may provide important information for troubleshooting Modem Pool problems. For example, if the customer tries to make a data call requiring a Modem Pool conversion resource, and the Modem Pool and Data Module speeds or other options don’t match, they receive a "CHECK OPTIONS" error message on the terminal. If this happens, the Modem Pool administration and customer Data Module option settings should be checked. In addition, if the Modem Pool is a Combined type, option settings should be checked on the external Modem and Data Module making up the Combined Modem Pool. The cabling and connections between the Digital Line port, Data Module, Analog Line port, and Modem should be checked between the Combined Modem Pool components. There are three types of commands that can be used to test Modem Pool circuits: test port, test modem-pool #, and test board. The test port command is generally the first test to run after the Error Log is evaluated and an entry is found for a Modem Pool port. The test modem-pool # command runs the same tests as the test port short command performed on a Modem Pool port. However, the test modem-pool # command can automatically test all ports in the Modem Pool group number specified in #. The test board command performs the same tests as test port and test modem-pool # plus additional tests for circuits common to the entire circuit pack. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for information on additional tests performed with test board (#50, #52, and #53). If the Modem Pool port or group being tested with test modem-pool # contains Combined Modem Pools, the ports on the associated TN742 or TN746 Analog Line circuit pack and the TN754 Digital Line circuit pack are tested as a group. Note, however, that Combined Modem Pools are not tested with the tests described in this section and the repair information related to Tests # 96, 97, 98, and 99 is not applicable. The Analog port of the Combined Modem port is tested with Analog port tests (that is, Tests #6, #47, #35, #48 and #36), and the Digital port of the Combined Modem port is tested with TDMODULE/PDMODULE tests Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-832 (that is, Tests #9, #13, #17 and #175). Therefore, use the repair procedures outlined in the ANL-LINE, ANL-16-L, ANL-NE-L, and TDMODULE/PDMODULE Maintenance documentation when interpreting the results of the execution of the test modem-pool # command on Combined Modem Pools. Terminal Data Module DCP Data Module RS-232C Digital Line (TN754) Digital Line (TN754) DCP DCP PBX Digital Network Combined Modem Pool Modem TIP/Ring Telephone Network Analog Analog Line (TN742,TN746) Central Office Trunk (TN747B) PCM PCM Analog Modem Host Computer Figure 10-67. Typical Modem Pool Switched Connection with Combined Modem Pool Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-833 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Modem Pool Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 18 0 busyout PCSS WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 130 (a) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 Conversion Resource Loop Test (#98) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 3 513 Modem Conference Test(#97) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 769 Modem NPE Crosstalk Test (#96) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Note: a. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Modem Pool Conference Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The tests in this section do not apply to Combined Modem Pool conversion resources. The standard Digital Line and/or Analog Line port tests are run on the ports associated with the Combined Modem Pool. The test descriptions for those maintenance objects (MOs) should be consulted when repairing Combined Modem Pool arrangements. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The tests in this section do not apply to Combined Modem Pool conversion resources. The standard Digital Line and/or Analog Line port tests are run on the ports associated with the Combined Modem Pool. The test Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-834 descriptions for those maintenance objects (MOs) should be consulted when repairing Combined Modem Pool arrangements. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test (#96) X D Modem Pool Conference Test (#97) X D Order of Investigation Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test (#98) X X ND Modem Pool Audits Test (#99) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test (#96) This test is destructive. This NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that the NPE is connected only to the desired time slot and is not crosstalking on other time slots. This test operates exactly like Test #6 for other types of port circuits but is performed twice in order to test both NPEs in the Modem Pool Port. Table 10-278. Error Code TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Determine whether the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-278. Error Code 1002 Page 10-835 TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Determine whether the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or because of a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine the Hardware Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the previously existing errors. 2000 ABORT A response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-278. Error Code 6000 Page 10-836 TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources needed to complete the test could not be allocated for the digital section of the Modem Pool conversion resource. Ordinarily, this means the conversion resource or other hardware used during the test was in use. 1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 2. If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion resource, the call must be dropped by issuing a busyout port PCSS command against the conversion resource. Issue the release port PCSS command. The busyout and release of the port drop any existing calls on that port. 3. Run the test again. 4. If the same error occurs while the conversion resource is idle, busyout and release both Modem Pool conversion resources on the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack containing the conversion resource under test. This action drops any existing calls on that circuit pack. 5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 6. If the test continues to abort with this error code after circuit pack replacement, escalate the problem. 6001 ABORT System resources needed to complete the test could not be allocated for the analog section of the Modem Pool conversion resource. 1. Follow the test procedures for the previous error code. NONE FAIL The test failed. This error is internal to the Pooled Modem circuit pack and does not involve external equipment or interfaces. 1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem conversion resources on the circuit pack containing the failing conversion resource. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate the problem. ANY FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This condition causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (that is, yellow LED is off), attempt to reset the circuit pack. Then repeat the test. 2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-837 Modem Pool Conference Test (#97) This test is destructive. This test checks most of the switching and gain control functions provided by the NPE circuit in the analog section of the conversion resource. This test conferences a 1004-Hz tone through the NPE, looping it back so that it can be verified with a Tone Detector circuit. Table 10-279. Error Code TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Determine whether the port is available for testing. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Determine whether the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-279. Error Code 1020 Page 10-838 TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or because of a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine the Hardware Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the previously existing errors. 2000 ABORT The response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2012 ABORT Internal System Error. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 2103 ABORT The system could not make the conference connection for the test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 4000 ABORT System resources needed to complete the test could not be allocated. Ordinarily, this means the conversion resource or other hardware used during the test was in use. 1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 2. If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion resource, the call must be dropped by issuing a busyout port PCSS command against the conversion resource. Issue the release port PCSS command. The busyout and release of the port drop any existing calls on that port. 3. Run the test again. 4. If the same error occurs while the conversion resource is idle, busyout and release both Modem Pool conversion resources on the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack containing the conversion resource under the test. This action drops any existing calls on that circuit pack. 5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 6. If the test continues to abort with this error code after circuit pack replacement, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-279. Error Code 65515 Page 10-839 TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. Issue the test port long command on the port on which the test aborted. If any test aborted or failed, follow recommended maintenance strategy for the appropriate port type (for example, ANL-LINE, DIG-LINE). 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. NONE FAIL The test failed. This error is internal to the Pooled Modem circuit pack and does not involve external equipment or interfaces. 1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem conversion resources on the circuit pack containing the failing conversion resource. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate the problem. ANY FAIL The Network Processing Element (NPE) of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (that is, yellow LED is off), attempt to reset the circuit pack. Then repeat the test. 2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test (#98) The Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test is set up as follows: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Page 10-840 TN758 Pooled Modem Circuit Pack TS-A Data Channel TS-B Network Control (TN727) Digital Portion Analog Portion TS-C Modem Pool Conversion Resource (One of Two) TS = Time Slot Figure 10-68. Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test Set-up Test data patterns are transmitted from the Network Control Channels 1 or 3 over network time slot A through the digital port, looped around through the analog port via time slot C back to the Network Control Channel circuit via time slot B where the patterns are checked for accuracy. Finally, the test forces a disconnect by breaking the connection between the Data Channel and Modem Pool Port (time slot A) and verifying that the Data Channel and Modem Pool Port go on-hook within the proper time. This test attempts to allocate a Network Control Channel, Modem Pool Port, and other internal resources. If any of these allocation attempts fail, the test cannot be completed and a specific abort error is reported. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-280. Error Code NONE Page 10-841 TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Wait one-minute and try the test again. 2. If the error occurs again, escalate the problem. 5000 ABORT System resources needed to complete the test could not be allocated for the digital section of the Modem Pool conversion resource. Ordinarily, this means the conversion resource or other hardware used during the test was in use. 1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 2. If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion resource, the call must be dropped by issuing a busyout port PCSS command against the conversion resource. Issue the release port PCSS command. The busyout and release of the port drop any existing calls on that port. 3. Run the test again. 4. If the same error occurs while the conversion resource is idle, busyout and release both Modem Pool conversion resources on the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack containing the conversion resource under test. This action drops any existing calls on that circuit pack. 5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 6. If the test continues to abort with this error code after circuit pack replacement, escalate the problem. 5001 ABORT A Network Control Channel could not be allocated for this test. This error is more closely related to the Data Channels (1 or 3 only) on the DATA-CHL circuit pack used for this test than the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack itself. Therefore, any hardware testing or replacement activities focus on the DATA-CHL circuit pack. However, the Data Channels on the DATA-CHL circuit pack normally should not be busied out, tested with the test data-module command, or reseated in the carrier to clear this error, since this may drop other data calls that may be active at the time. The administration of Data Channels 1 and 3 should be checked if this error occurs. 1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 2. If the same error persists after five attempts at one-minute intervals, escalate the problem. 5002 ABORT The Network Control Channel allocated for this test could not be set to "maintenance busy" status. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-280. Error Code 5003 Page 10-842 TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was not able to establish a connection for the digital portion of the Modem Pool Port. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000. 5004 ABORT The test was not able to allocate the analog portion of the Modem Pool Port. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000. 5005 ABORT The test was not able to establish a connection for the analog portion of the Modem Pool Port. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000. 5006 FIL The Modem Pool Port did not respond to the "maintenance activate" message. This error is internal to the Modem Pool circuit pack and does not involve external equipment or interfaces. The test failed. This error is internal to the Pooled Modem circuit pack and does not involve external equipment or interfaces. 1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem conversion resources on the circuit pack containing the failing conversion resource. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate the problem. 5007 ABORT The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did not respond to the incoming call indication. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001. 5009 ABORT The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did not handshake correctly. 1. Attempt the test again. 2. If the same error occurs, test the DATA-CHL circuit pack using the test data-module command (refer to the DATA-CHL maintenance strategy). 3. If the DATA-CHL circuit pack tests pass, escalate the trouble report. 5010 FAIL The Data Loop Around Test failed, indicating a probable problem with the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack. 1. Follow the repair procedure for Error Code 5006. 5011 ABORT The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did not disconnect properly. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-280. Error Code 5012 Page 10-843 TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The digital portion of the tested Modem Pool Port did not disconnect properly. 1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000. 5013 FAIL The Modem Pool Port did not respond with an on-hook message when the connection to the Data Channel was broken, indicating a likely problem with the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack. 1. Follow the repair procedure for Error Code 5006. 5014 ABORT The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did not respond correctly to the setup message sent to it after the connection was established. 1. Attempt the test again. 2. If the same error occurs, test the DATA-CHL circuit pack using the test data-module command (refer to the DATA-CHL maintenance strategy). 3. If the DATA-CHL circuit pack tests pass, escalate the problem. 5015 ABORT Data Channels 1 and/or 3 have not been administered. 1. Administer the Data Channels and retest. Continued on next page Modem Pool Audit Test (#99) This audit updates the Modem Pool conversion resource status contained in the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack’s microprocessor. It does not actually test the Pooled Modem circuit pack; therefore, there are no FAIL codes. The audit can only be performed on idle conversion resources. If the conversion resource is in use, the audit aborts. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Table 10-281. Error Code NONE Page 10-844 TEST #99 Modem Pool Audit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system was not able to allocate all the necessary resources to execute this test. An ABORT simply indicates that the conversion resource was in use when the audit was performed. No repair action is necessary unless it was known that the conversion resource was actually idle during the test (yellow in-use LED was off) or was busied out before the test was run. If this is the case, a TN758 failure condition may exist and the following procedure should be used: 1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem conversion resources on the circuit pack containing the failing conversion resource. 2. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest. 3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate the problem. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-845 MMI-BD MO Name (in Alarm Log) MMI-BD MMI-BD MMI-BD 1. 2. 2 Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MAJOR test board PCSS l r# Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack MINOR test board PCSS l r# Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack WARNING test board PCSS s r# Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Board). The Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack (TN787D or later) provides a number of H.221 protocol terminations for bit streams received from the TDM bus. The Multimedia Interface demultiplexes the H.221 bit stream (audio, video, data, control, and indication signals) and transmits the bit streams onto the TDM bus so that the appropriate circuit packs can process them. The Multimedia Interface circuit pack is commonly referred to as the MMI pack for H.221 protocol termination. It is also called the MMCH circuit pack. There are 32 ports (also called resources) on the circuit pack. See MMI-PT for maintenance of these resources. The MMI circuit pack contains 4 digital signal processors that manage the 32 resources. NOTE: Refer to ‘‘Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)’’ in Chapter 5 for MMCH troubleshooting information. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-846 Figure 10-69. TN787 Multimedia Interface (MMI) Circuit Pack Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-847 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-282. Error Type 1 MMI-BD Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Of f Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any 1 (a) Any None MIN ON 18 (b) 0 Busyout board PCSS WNG OFF 217 (c) 0 None WNG ON 257 (d) 65535 Control Channel Loop Test (#52) MIN ON 513 (e) 4352 to 4357 Uplink error from pack 769 (f) Any MMI Synchronization Status Test (#1123) None 1281 (g) Any Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) MAJ ON 1538 (h) Any Software detected error MIN ON 1793 (i) ANY TSI XTalk (#6) MIN ON test board PCSS l r 3 2049 (j) Any TSI Loop (#1108) MAJ ON test board PCSS l r 3 0 1. test board PCSS sh r 1 release board PCSS test board PCSS r 3 Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The circuit pack stopped functioning or it was physically removed from the system. The alarm logs approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed and/or the SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails. If the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on, follow the instructions for a red alarm in ‘‘Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs’’ in Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’. Also, see “Handling Common Port Circuit Packs.” b. This circuit pack has been busied out using the busyout board PCSS command. c. There are more than four MMI circuit packs in the system. Remove the circuit pack that generated the error in the error log by locating the slot indicated by the error. d. Indicates transient communication problems between the switch and this circuit pack. Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to the repair procedures for the Control Channel Looparound Test (#52) in the XXX-BD section. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-848 e. The circuit pack detected an Angel on-board hardware failure. The reported aux data values correspond to the following detected errors: 4352 - External RAM error 4253 - Internal RAM error 4355 - ROM Checksum error 4357 - Instruction set error Reset the circuit pack by using the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, and release board PCSS commands. When reset, the circuit pack executes a set of tests to detect the presence of any of the above faults. The detection of one these errors during initialization causes the circuit pack to lock up and appear insane to the system. See the repair procedures in note b for Error Type 1. f. This MMI circuit pack reported a loss of MMI synchronization. Refer to Test (#1123) for repair procedures. g. A failure of the time slot interchanger has been detected. Reset the circuit pack using the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, and release board PCSS commands. If the reset passes, then the on-board circuitry is healthy. Retire the alarm using the test board PCSS long clear command followed by release board PCSS. h. The circuit pack is hyperactive; that is, it is flooding the switch with messages sent over the control channel. The circuit pack is taken out of service when a threshold number of these errors is reported to the switch. Clear the alarm using the following commands: busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS long clear, release board PCSS. If the error recurs within 10 minutes, replace the circuit pack. i. The TSI Cross Talk Test (#6) failed. See the description of this test and follow the repair procedures. j. The TSI Looparound Test (#1108) failed. See the description of this test and follow the repair procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Code Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the TSI Crosstalk Test (#6), for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-849 Table 10-283. System Technician-Demanded Tests: MMI-BD Short Test Sequence Order of Investigation Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D/ND 1 TSI Crosstalk (#6) X ND TSI Looparound Test (#1108) X ND MMI SYNC Status Test (#1123) X MMI SYNC Status Test (#1122) 2 Control Channel Looparound Test (#52) SAKI Sanity Test (#53) X ND X ND X ND 2 X D Continued on next page 1. 2. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Refer to the repair procedure described in XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) for a description of this test. TSI Crosstalk Test (#6) This test is non-destructive. The Time Slot Interchanger (TSI) chip controls connectivity to the TDM bus. The TSI Cross Talk Test verifies that this TSI talks on the selected TDM bus time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the TSI is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may occur. If the test passes, then the TSI is able to communicate over the TDM bus. This test is part of the circuit pack’s demand and scheduled long test sequence, and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-284. Error Code TEST #6 TSI Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test, the traffic load on the system is very high, or the time slots are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-850 Table 10-284. Error Code 1003 TEST #6 TSI Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test. The system is oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors are out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the MMI-BD circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, followed by the release board PCSS commands. 2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. This is an abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The TSI was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The TSI is correctly using its allocated time slots. Continued on next page TSI Looparound Test (#1108) This test is non-destructive. During this test, the MMI’s Time Slot Interchanger (TSI) is listens to a TDM timeslot. A digital count tone loops back in the TSI and onto another TDM timeslot without passing through any resource hardware. A tone detector port verifies the looped data. If the digital count is correct, then the test passes. The test is done for both TDM buses. Failures indicate that the TSI is unreliable. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-851 Table 10-285. Error Code TEST #1108 TSI Looparound Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. Either the traffic load on the system is very high or time slots is out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log. 2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the Tone Detector circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack (if the other ports are not in use). Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSSpp and the reset board PCSSpp commands followed by the release board PCSS command. 2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. This is an abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The TSI was found to be transmitting in error, causing noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The TSI is correctly using its allocated time slots. Continued on next page MMI Synchronization Status Test (#1122 and 1123) This test is non-destructive. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-852 To support applications involving multiple MMI circuit packs, the appropriate MMI circuit packs must be synchronized with one another. One such circuit pack is designated as the master sync source, which provides the synchronization signal onto the TDM bus. The other MMI circuit packs in the system listen to this signal. This test monitors this synchronization state. The test fails if the MMI circuit pack is not in sync. The test passes with auxiliary code 1100 if the MMI circuit pack is in sync and is providing the synchronization signal for the system. The test also passes with an auxiliary code of 1101 if the MMI circuit pack is in sync and listening to the sync signal. MMI circuit packs do not lose the synchronization signal unless an MMI circuit pack is either pulled out of the system or reset by using a technician command. Test #1122 runs when the long option of the test board command is entered, initiating the recovery of synchronization. Test #1123 runs when the short option of the test board command is entered, giving the status of the synchronization. You need not necessarily run the long option since synchronization signal recovery should be taking place within software running in the background. Use the long option only if synchronization is not established within 5 minutes of investigating the problem. Table 10-286. Error Code TEST #1122/1123 MMI Synchronization Status Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT A response to the test was not received from the MMI circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If this result occurs repeatedly and the MMI circuit pack is idle, reset the circuit pack using busyout board PCSS, then reset board PCSS, followed by release board PCSS. 2. Rerun the test; if the same result occurs again, replace the MMI circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. This is an abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-BD Page 10-853 Table 10-286. Error Code TEST #1122/1123 MMI Synchronization Status Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation The MMI circuit pack is out of MMI synchronization. Run the long option of the test board command. 1. Wait up to 5 minutes, and then reset the circuit pack with these commands: busyout board PCSS, then reset board PCSS, followed by release board PCSS. 2. Rerun the test; if the same result occurs again, replace the circuit pack. 1100 PASS The MMI circuit pack is providing the synchronization correctly. This MMI circuit pack is designated as the Master Sync source. 1101 PASS The MMI circuit pack is listening to the synchronization signal correctly. Continued on next page Control Channel Looparound Test (#52) Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) maintenance documentation as Control Channel Looparound Test (#52). SAKI Sanity Test (#53) Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) maintenance documentation as SAKI Sanity Test (#53). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level) Page 10-854 MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level) MO Name (in Alarm Log) MMI-LEV Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run See ‘‘Resolving MMI-LEV Errors/Alarms’’ (below) Full Name of MO MMI-LEV The Multimedia Interface Resource Level MO monitors MMI efficiency by tracking the number of MMI ports that are in-service, and then comparing that number with the value entered in the MMIs field on the System-Parameters Maintenance form. This MMIs field is located under the Minimum Maintenance Threshold section. The MMIs field contains the minimum number of MMI ports needed for the Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature to run efficiently and is an administrable field. This field must contain a minimum threshold number for MMI port capacity of between 0-128. The MMCH feature must be enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options form before the MMIs field can be changed to a number greater than zero. The algorithm for determining that a low level of MMI resources exists uses the value entered in the MMIs field, and the number of MMI ports that are in-service in the system. Each MMI circuit pack contains a maximum of 32 ports. If the number of in-service MMI ports falls below the minimum port capacity (value entered on the System Parameters Maintenance form under the Minimum Maintenance Threshold section and in the MMI field), a MMI-LEV error is logged. If this outage continues for 15 minutes, a MAJOR alarm is raised. Resolving MMI-LEV Errors/Alarms MMI ports are a key part of the MMCH feature, and any loss in the number of ports available for use degrades the MMCH customer-defined service level. If a MMI circuit pack or port is busied out using the busyout board or busyout port commands, these out-of-service ports are not included in the MMI level calculation, thus allowing a technician to busy out a MMI circuit pack for maintenance reasons without causing a MAJOR alarm to be raised. However, if all of the ports on the MMI circuit pack are not made busy and the circuit pack is removed, an alarm is raised. NOTE: When diagnosing a MMI-LEV problem, begin by resolving any alarms raised against MMI-BD or MMI-PT maintenance objects. Clearing MMI-BD or MMI-PT alarms may clear the MMI-LEV alarm. The MMI circuit pack is maintained by the software like the Tone Detector circuit pack, which can be removed and reinserted in any port board slot without administration. Similarly, if a MMI circuit pack is removed from service logically Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level) Page 10-855 by failing the Archangel sanity scan test or is removed from service physically by removing the circuit pack from the carrier, no error/alarm is raised against either the MMI-BD or the MMI-PT maintenance objects. Therefore, if a MMI-LEV error/alarm exists, yet no alarms have been raised against MMI-BD or MMI-PT maintenance objects, a MMI circuit pack may have been removed from service causing the MMI-LEV error/alarm. To resolve a MMI-LEV MAJOR alarm, restore the number of MMI ports available for service to be equal to or greater than the calculated port capacity. To determine how many MMI circuit packs are needed for the MMCH feature: 1. Using the display system-parameters maintenance command, locate the number listed in the Minimum Maintenance Thresholds (MMIs) field and record this number. 2. Use the list configuration command to verify the number of MMI ports. 3. Compare this number with the value listed in the MMI field on the System-Parameters Maintenance form (number listed in step 1 a minimum thresholds number for MMI ports of between 0-128). Each MMI circuit pack contains a maximum of 32 ports. If the number in the MMIs field is less than or equal to 32, one MMI circuit pack is needed. If this number is 64, then two MMI circuit pack are needed. 4. Use the list configuration command to verify that the number of MMI circuit packs listed agrees with the required minimum port capacity (from step 1). If the number of MMI circuit packs listed in the step 2 differs from the calculated number, restore the number of MMI circuit packs to the correct value, in order to resolve the MMI-LEV alarm. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-287. 1 1. MMI-LEV Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data 1 Any Associated Test None Alarm Level MAJOR On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value OFF The number of MMI resources in the system that are in service has fallen below the calculated minimum value. If the number of in-service MMI ports falls below the MMCH port capacity (value entered in the Minimum Maintenance Thresholds for MMIs field) on the System-Parameters Maintenance form, a MMI-LEV error is logged. If this outage continues for 15 minutes, a MAJOR alarm is raised. To resolve this alarm, correct the out-of-service problem by following these procedures: 1. See “MMI-PT” and “MMI-BD” and resolve any associated alarms. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level) Page 10-856 2. If a MMI-LEV error/alarm exist and none has been raised against MMI-BD or MMI-PT maintenance objects, an MMI circuit pack may have been removed from service causing the MMI-LEV error/alarm. To resolve a MMI-LEV MAJOR alarm, restore the number of MMI ports available for service to be equal to or more than the calculated port capacity. See the ‘‘Resolving MMI-LEV Errors/Alarms’’ section above for details. 3. If the error contines to alarm, escalate the problem. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Code There are no System Technician-Demanded tests for MMI-LEV. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-PT Page 10-857 MMI-PT MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO MMI-PT MAJOR test port PCSSpp l r# Multimedia Interface Port MMI-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp l r# Multimedia Interface Port MMI-PT WARNING test port PCSSpp l r# Multimedia Interface Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth). NOTE: Refer to ‘‘Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)’’ in Chapter 5 for MMCH troubleshooting information. The Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack provides a number of H.221 protocol terminations for bit streams received from the TDM bus. The Multimedia Interface demultiplexes the H.221 bit stream (audio, video, data, control, and indication signals) and transmits the bit streams onto the TDM bus to be processed by the appropriate circuit packs. Each Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack contains 32 separately maintained “ports,” more commonly referred to as "resources." MMI-PT represents one of these 32 resources. At system boot or when the circuit pack is inserted, 32 resources are inserted into the system. The MMI circuit pack contains 4 Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) which manage the 32 resources. These resources are directly mapped to DSPs: Resource Direct Map 1-8 DSP1 9-16 DSP2 17-24 DSP3 25-32 DSP4 All 8 resources that the circuit pack controls may be placed out of service by the failure of one of these DSPs. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-PT Page 10-858 Figure 10-70. TN787 MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE (MMI) CIRCUIT PACK Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-PT Page 10-859 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-288. Error Type 1 MMI-PT Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test 0 Any 1 (a) Any Uplink error from pack 18 (b) 0 130 (c) Alarm Level On/ Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 Busyout port PCSSpp WNG OFF release port PCSSpp Any Software generated WNG ON 257 (d) Any None MAJ/ MIN ON 513 (e) Any Resource Loopback Test (#1111) MIN ON 1025 (f) Any Uplink error from pack 3841 3844 (g) Any Uplink error from pack 0 1. test port PCSSpp sh r 3 Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The customer endpoint connected on a conference sent too many messages to the VSP-MCU in a specified amount of time. Check the “status conference” forms to correlate which customer had the problem. This is a customer endpoint problem and not a VSP-MCU problem. b. This port has been busied out by the busyout port PCSSpp command. c. Indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, replace or reseat the circuit pack. d. This error occurs if the MMI circuit pack detects a DSP Error. Maintenance software will reset the DSP when this error is received. This error is logged for all 8 resources connected to this particular DSP. If this DSP continues to fail sanity, a Minor alarm is raised. Replace the circuit pack. e. This error occurs when the Resource Looparound Test (#1111) fails. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of Test #1111. f. This error occurs if either the MMI or Voice Conditioner (VC) circuit packs reports a loss of framing on the service channel between these two circuit packs. When a customer endpoint establishes a call to the VSP-MCU, a channel is established between the MMI resource and the VC port. If this channel is detected to go down by either circuit pack, an uplink message is sent. This error is then forwarded to maintenance for both circuit packs. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-PT Page 10-860 Run the Long Test Sequence for this MMI resource, and if any of the tests fail, follow the repair procedures for that test. If all tests pass, the cause of the problem might be with the VC pack. See the “VC-DSPPT” repair procedures. g. These errors are not related to VSP-MCU. They could be caused by network problems or from the customer endpoints. They are presented here for logging purposes only: Code Description 3841 CRC4 Error (Frame checksum error) 3842 Correctable BAS (Control msg single or double bit error, but correctable) 3843 Uncorrectable BAS (Control msg bit error -three or more bit, uncorrectable) 3844 Protocol Error (H.221 Protocol error from endpoint detected) System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Order of Investigation Resource Looparound Test (#1111) 1. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X D D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Resource Looparound Test (#1111) This test is destructive. This test checks the connectivity of the resource within MMI circuit pack and out to the TDM bus. The object is to test the circuitry that an H.221 bit stream comes in contact with when that stream is demultiplexed, pre-processed, written to the TDM bus and then reread (looped in the TSI), post-processed, multiplexed, and then written back to the TDM bus for verification. The video, audio, and data components of the bit stream are tested separately. If any one of these tests fails, then the resource is taken out of service. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-PT Page 10-861 Table 10-289. Error Code 1000 TEST #1111 Resource Looparound Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. Use the status conference command to determine if there is an active conference. If a call is active, the test cannot be run until the conference call terminates. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The traffic load on the system may be very high or time slots may be out-of-service due to TDM-Bus errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test. The system is oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors are out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to “TTR-LEV.” 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to “TONE-PT”. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 1004 ABORT The resource has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status conference command to verify that there is a conference call active. 1. If there are no conference calls, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the Tone Detector circuit pack within the allowable time period. 1. If this result occurs repeatedly, reset the circuit pack, if the other ports are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSSpp and the reset board PCSSpp commands, followed by the release board PCSS command. 2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. Abnormal abort. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-PT Page 10-862 Table 10-289. Error Code 0, 1, 2 TEST #1111 Resource Looparound Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation This resource cannot guarantee data integrity and is out-of-service. The following error codes indicate failure of a particular media loop: 0 = video 1 = audio 2 = low-speed data 1. Replace the circuit pack PASS The resource is functioning normally. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-SYNC Page 10-863 MMI-SYNC MO Name (in Alarm Log) MMI-SYNC 1. Alarm Level MINOR Initial Command to Run1 test board PCSS l r# Full Name of MO Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth). NOTE: Refer to ‘‘Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)’’ in Chapter 5 for MMCH troubleshooting information. Each Port Network (PN) must have a TN787D or later MMI circuit pack assigned as the Multimedia Interface (MMI) master synchronization source for that PN. If one or more MMI circuit pack is administered in a PN, one MMI circuit pack is designated as the master synchronization source for all MMI circuit packs within that PN. The MMI circuit pack generates a synchronization signal and puts that signal on the TDM bus. Other MMI packs or any other circuit pack within a PN can listen to this signal and “synchronize up” to it. The first MMI circuit pack inserted in a PN is normally designated as the master. As subsequent MMI packs are inserted, they are instructed to listen and synchronize to the time-slot of the master MMI. In the unlikely case of an MMI losing this reference, an uplink message is sent from the MMI circuit pack that lost the signal to maintenance, which also clears the “event” counter on this MMI with a downlink message. This forces the MMI circuit pack to return the current state of the synchronization signal. If the signal is still lost, then the recovery algorithm is entered. Note that during this time, the MMI circuit pack synchronizes to its internal clock, and there should be no service disruption. A loss of synchronization is usually the result of a circuit pack failure. The maintenance strategy is to switch the master source away from the bad pack to another healthy MMI circuit pack within the PN. A synchronization switch takes place if half or more of the MMI circuit packs in a PN report a loss of synchronization. For example, a PN with two MMIs reporting a loss of sync source switches immediately, three and four MMIs switch if two report the loss, and so forth. A healthy MMI circuit pack becomes the master synchronization source providing the signal on a new timeslot. The other MMI circuit packs within the PN are instructed to listen to this new signal, and the old master stops providing the signal and now listens to the new master MMI. If an MMI is physically removed from the system, then the remaining MMIs report the loss of synchronization. The first MMI with no alarms present becomes the new master of that PN. Once a synchronization switch has occurred, another switch is Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures MMI-SYNC Page 10-864 not allowed for 15 minutes to avoid hyperactive switching. If all the MMIs have alarms, then no switch is made. If the MMI circuit pack that provides synchronization is craft busied out, it will not affect the PN synchronization. The signal is still provided by the busied-out pack. There is no affect on synchronization if the technician issues a release of the busied-out MMI. Synchronization is not affected by a warm start of the system (reset system 1). For all other restarts (reboot through cold 2), MMI synchronization recovers during board insertion. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-290. Error Type MMI-SYNC Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test 1 Any None 257 Any None 1. 2. Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value See note 1 MINOR OFF See note 2 An MMI synchronization switch was successful. Refer to MMI-BD errors for the reason for the switch. The requested MMI synchronization switch failed. Resolve all MMI-BD alarms. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes There are no system technician-demanded tests for MMI-SYNC. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Page 10-865 M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO M/T-ANL Minor test port PCSSpp l Maintenance/Test Analog Port M/T-ANL Warning release port PCSSpp Maintenance/Test Analog Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). The Maintenance/Test Analog Port is port number 1 on the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack. This port is used by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) as an Originating Test Line (OTL) or Terminating Test Line (TTL) for test calls over analog trunks. Figure 10-71 shows a typical ATMS configuration. M/T-ANL maintenance ensures that the analog trunk’s testing function is operating correctly. An alarm against M/T-ANL can reduce service, but it will not block it. To accurately measure performance and health of analog trunks, the TN771 should be replaced when a new circuit pack is available. PBX originating the test call PBX terminating the test call TN771 TN771 Originating Test Line (OTL) Terminating Test Line (TTL) Tie Trunk Facilities TDM Bus Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Figure 10-71. ATMS Tie Trunk Test Call TDM Bus Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Page 10-866 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values M/T-ANL Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 (a) 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp 1 (b) 41018 none MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 18 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 257 Any NPE Crosstalk test (#9) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 513 Any Analog Port Sanity Test (#963) MINOR ON test port PCSS01 r 2 769 Any Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test (#13) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp r 3 3840(c) Any Hook State Inquiry test (#566) 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error code appears in the Error Log only if the MTB circuit pack has been removed since the Error Log was last cleared. Verify that the circuit pack has been reinserted. b. This error indicates a hardware failure on the Analog Port circuitry. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack if the alarm is not resolved by the command above. c. This error indicates that call processing records did not agree with on-board records for the hook state (on-/off-hook) of the Maintenance/Test Analog Port. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Page 10-867 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Analog Port Sanity Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Analog Port Sanity Test (#963) X X ND Digital Loop Around Test (#13) X X ND X ND X ND X ND Order of Investigation NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) Hook State Inquiry (#566) Clear Error Counters (#270) 1. X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. One or more Network Processing Elements (NPE) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity, gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. If the NPE is not working correctly, one way and/or noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s long test sequence and takes approximately 10 to 20 seconds to complete Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Table 10-291. Error Code 1000 Page 10-868 TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid ATMS trunk test call. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. A system is considered under heavy traffic when the Call Processing Occupancy is greater than 50% or when the System Management and the Call Processing Occupancies together exceed 65%. To view the system occupancy measurements enter the command status system health on the system technician terminal. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a valid ATMS test call. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use on a valid ATMS Test Call, escalate the problem. To determine whether the port is in use by an ATMS Test Call enter status station ext where ext is the assigned ATMS station number. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Table 10-291. Error Code 2000 Page 10-869 TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This will cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (yellow LED is off), try to reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, release board PCSS command sequence. Then repeat the test. 2. If the test fails again, replace circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test (#13) This test is a modification of the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test used by Digital Station (DIG-LINE) maintenance. This test does not perform the control channel and secondary information channel loop around tests as described for DIG-LINE, as these data paths do not exist for the Maintenance/Test Analog Port. The primary information channel is tested by first looping back the data channel onto the TDM Bus, and then sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack and receiving the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector. A conference test is done next for the primary information channel. This test is the same as Conference Test (#6). Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the two tests. If either fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Table 10-292. Error Code Page 10-870 TEST #13 Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT The port is in use on a valid ATMS Test Call. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use on a valid ATMS Test Call, escalate the problem. To determine whether the port is in use by an ATMS Test Call enter status station ext where ext is the assigned ATMS station number. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. A system is considered under heavy traffic when the Call Processing Occupancy is greater than 50% or when the System Management and the Call Processing Occupancies together exceed 65%. To view the system occupancy measurements enter the command status system health on the system technician terminal. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Table 10-292. Error Code 1004 Page 10-871 TEST #13 Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid ATMS Test Call. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use on a valid ATMS Test Call, escalate the problem. To determine whether the port is in use by an ATMS Test Call enter status station ext where ext is the assigned ATMS station number. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 7 FAIL Conference test failed on the primary information channel. 1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone/Clock (TONE-BD) circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack via the test board PCSS command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone/Clock (TONE-BD) circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. See the section on Tone Generator circuit pack. 3. If the Tone/Clock and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. 14 FAIL The primary information channel is not transmitting properly. User may not notice any interruption in service or may not be able to use this port. 1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using test board PCSS. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. See the section on Tone Generator circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack. PASS The Maintenance/Test Analog Port analog trunk testing capability is operating correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Page 10-872 Clear Error Counters (#270) The ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack continually run self-tests, whenever the port is idle. The Angel uses a counter so that the Background Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once (this keeps a failed port/circuit pack from flooding the SPE with a string of messages). Many circuit packs have counters in the Angel firmware. These counters are used so that Control Channel Message Set (CCMS) messages are not continuously sent uplink. Using this method, the message will be sent once, when the counter reaches some preset threshold, and then not sent again until the counter is cleared. This test is used to clear the counter, so that if the port continues to fail during or after SPE-demanded testing, the Angel will send a message to indicate that fact. This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack. Therefore, this test should never abort or fail. Table 10-293. Error Code TEST #270 Clear Error Counters Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The message to clear the Maintenance/Test circuit pack’s counter for Background Maintenance Failures has been sent. Continued on next page Hook State Inquiry (#566) This test ensures that the Maintenance/Test Analog Port maintenance software and call processing agree on the on-/off-hook status of the Maintenance/Test Analog Port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Table 10-294. Error Code 1 Page 10-873 TEST #566 Hook State Inquiry Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Switch hook audit timed out. No response was received from the circuit pack for information about the switch hook state. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack and repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to fail reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, release board PCSS command sequence. 3. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Call processing and Maintenance/Test Analog Port maintenance software agree on the Maintenance/Test Analog Port hook state. Continued on next page Analog Port Sanity Test (#963) This test verifies that the port circuitry involved in the analog trunk testing on the Maintenance/Test Analog Port is functioning properly. This test will abort if an ATMS Test Call is in progress on the Maintenance/Test Analog Port when the test is requested. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port) Table 10-295. Error Code Page 10-874 TEST #963 Analog Port Sanity Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 50 FAIL The switch was unable to communicate with the port circuitry used for analog trunk testing. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, release board PCSS command sequence. 2. Test the port again via the test port PCSS01 l command. 3. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The Maintenance/Test Analog Port analog trunk testing capability is operating correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-BD (Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack) Page 10-875 M/T-BD (Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO M/T-BD MIN test board PCSS l Maintenance Test Circuit Pack M/T-BD WRN release board PCSS Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). ! CAUTION: In G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386, a TN771D (or later vintage) Maintenance/Test circuit pack must be used. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) and M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) Maintenance documentation for related digital port and Packet Bus port information, respectively. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Page 10-876 M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO M/T-DIG Minor test port PCSSpp l Maintenance/Test Digital Port M/T-DIG Warning release port PCSSpp Maintenance/Test Digital Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 or, 3 for EPN-1 and 3 for EPN-2); C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The Maintenance/Test Digital Port is a port on the TN771D (or later vintage) Maintenance/Test circuit pack, which is required for G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386. Ports 2 and 3 are Digital Ports. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port provides the ability to perform digital (that is, ISDN-PRI) trunk testing via the TDM Bus. For an ISDN-PRI test call, connections are set up in the system as shown in Figure 10-72. When the Maintenance/Test Digital Port is participating in an ISDN-PRI test call, the port sends a stream of pseudo-random data along the connected B-channel. The far end loops back this data, and the Maintenance/Test Digital Port compares the data to that which was sent. Errors are recorded on a bit and block basis. Refer to ISDN-TRK (DS1ISDN Trunk) Maintenance documentation for more information on ISDN-PRI test calls. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port maintenance ensures that the digital trunk testing function is operating correctly. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port is alarmed if maintenance determines that the digital port is operating incorrectly. NOTE: An alarm on the Maintenance/Test Digital Port reduces service, but does not block it since the ISDN-TRK has other means to determine the health of the ISDN-PRI trunk facility. However, to accurately measure the error performance and to ensure accuracy of the health of the ISDN-PRI trunk, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack should be replaced when a new circuit pack is available. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Page 10-877 PI CIRCUIT PACK SPE (TN765) D-CHANNEL TDM BUS DIGITAL DS-1 PORT INTERFACE CIRCUIT MAINT/TEST PACK CIRCUIT PACK (TN767) TN771B/C ISDN-PRI B-CHANNEL FACILITY FAR END Figure 10-72. ISDN-PRI Outgoing Test Call Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Page 10-878 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values M/T-DIG Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp 1 (a) 41018 none MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 18 (b) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 257 (c) Any NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 513 (d) Any Digital Port Sanity Test (#565) MINOR ON test port PCSS02 r 2 769 (e) Any Digital Port Loop Around Test (#13) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp r 3 3840 (f) Any Hook State Inquiry Test (#566) 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates a hardware failure on the Digital Port circuitry. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack if the alarm is not resolved by the command above. b. The port has been busied out via the busyout port PCSSpp command. c. This error indicates that Maintenance/Test Digital Port is talking on more than just its assigned time slot. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. d. This error indicates that the Maintenance/Test Digital Port has failed its self-test. Since the Digital Port Sanity Test runs only on Port 2, but tests both Ports 2 and 3, both ports are alarmed when the test fails. Note that the command above indicates to test Port 2, even if the error is logged against Port 3. e. This error indicates that the Maintenance/Test Digital Port has been unable to successfully loop data from a tone generator to a tone detector. f. This error indicated that call processing records did not agree with on-board records for the hook state (on-/off-hook) of the Maintenance/Test Digital Port. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Page 10-879 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Digital Port Sanity Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Digital Port Sanity Test (#565) X X ND Digital Port Loop Around Test (#13) X X ND X ND X ND X ND Order of Investigation NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) Hook State Inquiry (#566) Clear Error Counters (#270) 1. X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) This test is a modified version of the Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test used by DIG-LINE maintenance. One or more NPE reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity, gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one way and/or noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s long test sequence and takes approximately 10 to 20 seconds to complete. This test is a modified version of the Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test used by DIG-LINE maintenance. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-296. Error Code 1000 Page 10-880 TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid ISDN-PRI test call. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine if the port is in use (if the port is listed in the M/T Port column). If it is in use, either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields in the above display), or abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the above display. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-296. Error Code 1004 Page 10-881 TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port has been seized by a valid ISDN-PRI test call. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields of the above display), or abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the above display. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (yellow LED is off), try to reset the circuit pack. Then repeat the test. 2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. Continued on next page Digital Port Loop Around Test (#13) This test is a modification of the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test used by Digital Station (DIG-LINE) maintenance. This test does not perform the control channel and secondary information channel loop around tests as described for DIG-LINE, as these data paths do not exist for the Maintenance/Test Digital Port. The primary information channel is tested by first looping back the data channel onto the TDM Bus, and then sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack and receiving the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector. A conference test is done next for the primary information channel. This test is the same as Conference Test #6. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Page 10-882 Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the two tests. If either fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped. Table 10-297. Error Code TEST #13 Digital Port Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT The port is in use on a valid ISDN-PRI Test Call. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields in the above display), or abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the above display. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-297. Error Code 1003 Page 10-883 TEST #13 Digital Port Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid ISDN-PRI Test Call. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields of the above display), or abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the above display. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-297. Error Code 7 Page 10-884 TEST #13 Digital Port Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Conference test failed on the primary information channel. In most cases, the user may not notice a disruption in service. 1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack via the test board PCSS command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. 14 FAIL The primary information channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from nothing to not being able to use this port. 1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using test board PCSS. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack. PASS The Maintenance/Test Digital Port digital trunk testing capability is operating correctly. Continued on next page Clear Error Counters (#270) This test is not an actual test in the strict sense of the word. Many circuit packs have counters in the Angel firmware. These counters are used so that Control Channel Message Set (CCMS) messages are not continuously sent uplink. Using this method, the message is sent once, when the counter reaches some preset threshold, and then not sent again until the counter is cleared. The ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack continually run self-tests, whenever the port is idle. The Angel uses a counter so that the Background Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once (this keeps a failed port/circuit pack from flooding the SPE with a string of messages). This test is used to clear the counter, so that if the port continues to fail during or after SPE-demanded testing, the Angel sends a message to indicate that fact. This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack. Therefore, this test should never abort or fail. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-298. Error Code Page 10-885 TEST #270 Clear Error Counters Test Result Description/ Recommendation Any ABORT This test should never abort. Any FAIL This test should never fail. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS The message to clear the Maintenance/Test circuit pack’s counter for Background Maintenance Failures has been sent. Continued on next page Digital Port Sanity Test (#565) This test verifies that the port circuitry involved in the digital trunk testing on the Maintenance/Test Digital Port is functioning properly. This circuitry is common to both Maintenance/Test Digital Ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. Therefore, this test is only run for Port 2. The test aborts when run on Port 3, as described in Table 10-299. This test operates by connecting the two Maintenance/Test Digital Ports on the TDM Bus so that they talk and listen to each other. Then four self-tests are attempted: (a) sending data from Port 2 to Port 3 in asynchronous mode; (b) sending data from Port 3 to Port 2 in asynchronous mode; (c) sending data from Port 2 to Port 3 in synchronous mode; and (d) sending data from Port 3 to Port 2 in synchronous mode. The test passes if all four of these self-tests are successful. The test stops as soon as any one of these self-tests fails. This test aborts if an ISDN Test Call is in progress on either Maintenance/Test Digital Port when the test is requested, or if an ISDN Test Call is initiated while the Digital Port Sanity Test is in progress. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-299. Error Code 1000 Page 10-886 TEST #161 Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation One of the Maintenance/Test Digital Ports is busy with background maintenance. 1. Either wait for the port to become idle, or busyout both Maintenance/Test Digital Ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack via the busyout port PCSS02 and busyout port PCSS03 commands, respectively. 2. Release the ports (if they were busied out) via the release port PCSS02 and release port PCSS03 commands, respectively. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid ISDN-PRI Test Call. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields of the above display), or abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the above display. 1019 ABORT An ISDN Test Call is in progress using this Maintenance/Test circuit pack. The Maintenance/Test circuit pack cannot perform a self-test on one of its Digital Ports while an ISDN Test Call is using either of the Digital Ports. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is using the port (form the M/T Port column). Either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields of the above display), or abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the above display. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-299. Error Code 1138 Page 10-887 TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation This test does not run on Port 3 of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. This test runs only on Port 2. Look at the results of the Digital Port Sanity Test for Port 2. 1. Run the command again for Port 2 via the test port PCSS02 or test port PCSS02 l command. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 50 FAIL The switch was unable to communicate with the port circuitry used for digital trunk testing. 100 FAIL Data was not sent from Port 2 to Port 3 successfully in asynchronous mode. 101 FAIL Data was not sent from Port 3 to Port 2 successfully in asynchronous mode. 102 FAIL Data was not sent from Port 2 to Port 3 successfully in synchronous mode. 103 FAIL Data was not sent from Port 3 to Port 2 successfully in synchronous mode. 1. Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, release board PCSS command sequence. 2. Test the port again via the test port PCSS02 l command. 3. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The Maintenance/Test Digital Port digital trunk testing capability is operating correctly. Continued on next page Hook State Inquiry (#566) This test ensures that the Maintenance/Test Digital Port maintenance software and call processing agree on the on-/off-hook status of the Maintenance/Test Digital Port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386] Table 10-300. Error Code 1 Page 10-888 TEST #161 Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Switch hook audit timed out. No response was received from the circuit pack for information about the switch hook state. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack and repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL Internal System Error. This test should never return a failure. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, release board PCSS command sequence. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Call processing and Maintenance/Test Digital Port maintenance software agree on the Maintenance/Test Digital Port hook state. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) Page 10-889 M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO M/T-PKT Minor test port PCSSpp l Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port M/T-PKT Warning release port PCSSpp Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is a port (always Port #4) on the TN771D (or later vintage) Maintenance/Test circuit pack, which is required for G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386. The Packet Bus port provides the following Packet Bus maintenance functions: ■ Packet Bus fault detection - the ability to detect faults (for example, shorts, open leads) on the Packet Bus autonomously (that is, without SPE involvement). ■ Packet Bus reconfiguration - the ability to swap faulty leads with spare leads autonomously so that the Packet Bus remains operational. This is accomplished by sending messages to all Packet circuit packs [for example, ISDN-BRI (TN556)] telling them which spare leads to use on the Packet Bus. Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port maintenance ensures that these maintenance functions are operating correctly. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is alarmed if maintenance determines that the port’s maintenance functions are operating incorrectly. When Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port maintenance determines that the Packet Bus Port is defective, the Packet Bus fault detection and Packet Bus reconfiguration functions provided by the port are turned off. Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port maintenance interacts with Packet Bus maintenance. Therefore, there may be alarms on the Packet Bus when there is a fault on the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port. Refer to PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Maintenance documentation for further information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) Page 10-890 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values M/T-PKT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp 1 (a) 41018 none MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 18 (b) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 257 (c) Any none MINOR ON 513 (d) Any Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test (#567) MINOR ON 1. test port PCSSpp r 3 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error indicates a hardware failure with the port circuitry which provides the Packet Bus maintenance functions. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack if the alarm is not resolved by the test command above. b. The port has been busied out via the busyout port PCSSpp command. c. This error indicates that the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port has reconfigured the Packet Bus (that is, swapped a bad lead to a spare). Note that this error is sent up whenever the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is initialized (since the Packet Bus Port reconfigures the Packet Bus to whatever state it determines the Packet Bus is in). This occurs if the circuit pack is inserted, if the system is restarted, or if the port is released from a busyout state. Therefore, it is normal for this error to be present in the error log. If the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port reconfigures the Packet Bus 12 times within 15 minutes, a Minor alarm is raised. When the Minor alarm is raised, this is an indication that the Packet Bus maintenance functions are not operating correctly, or that many changes are taking place on the Packet Bus (that is, circuit pack insertion or removal). If the system has been in a stable state for more than 15 minutes, try the following procedures: 1. Reset the Maintenance/Test circuit pack from the Manager I terminal, as follows: ■ Enter the busyout board PCSS command. ■ Enter the reset board PCSS command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) ■ Page 10-891 Enter the release board PCSS command. 2. Wait 15 minutes. 3. If the error recurs, replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. When this alarm is active, the yellow LED is in one of three states: ■ If there is no activity on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack, the yellow LED is off. It is OK to replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. ■ If there is an indication of an uncorrectable fault on the Packet Bus, the yellow LED will be blinking at a rate of 1 Hz. It is OK to replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. Ignore the Packet Bus error indication, since the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been determined to be defective. ■ If there is other activity on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack (that is, ISDN Test Call), or if there is an indication of a correctable fault on the Packet Bus, the yellow LED will be on steady. If there is an ISDN Test Call in progress, it must be halted via the clear isdn-testcall grp/member command prior to replacing the circuit pack. Ignore the Packet Bus error indication, since the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been determined to be defective. d. This error indicates a failure of the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test. Either the Packet Bus Port has reported a self-test failure, or the SPE is able to communicate with the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack but not with the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Packet Bus Port. Refer to the description of the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test, and follow the instructions indicated for the failure code that matches the Aux Data field. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) Order of Investigation Page 10-892 Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND X ND Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test (#567) Clear Error Counters (#270) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Clear Error Counters (#270) This test is not an actual test in the strict sense of the word. Many circuit packs have counters in the Angel firmware. These counters are used so that CCMS (Control Channel Message Set) messages are not continuously sent uplink. Using this method, the message are sent once, when the counter reaches some preset threshold, and then not sent again until the counter is cleared. The ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack continually run self-tests, whenever the port is idle. The Angel uses a counter so that the Background Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once (this keeps a failed port/circuit pack from flooding the SPE with a string of messages). This test is used to clear the counter, so that if the port continues to fail during or after SPE-demanded testing, the Angel sends a message to indicate that fact. This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. Therefore, this test should never abort or fail. Table 10-301. Error Code TEST #270 Clear Error Counters Test Result Description/ Recommendation Any ABORT This test should never abort. Any FAIL This test should never fail. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS The message to clear the Maintenance/Test circuit pack’s counter for Background Maintenance Failures has been sent. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) Page 10-893 Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test (#567) This test verifies that the Packet Bus fault detection maintenance function of the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is functioning properly. This is done by having the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port perform a self-test. If this self-test passes, then the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test passes. If the self-test fails, or the SPE cannot communicate with the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port, then the test fails. Table 10-302. Error Code TEST #567 Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT System resources necessary to run this test are not available. 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2059 FAIL The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port has reported a failure of the on-board self-test. 2060 FAIL The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port has reported an invalid state for the Packet Bus. 2061 FAIL The SPE cannot communicate with the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port, but is able to communicate with the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack. 1. Retry the command. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack and retry the command. 3. If the test continues to fail, refer to PKT-BUS Maintenance documentation to determine if the M/T-PKT failure is being caused by a Packet Bus fault. PASS The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port Packet Bus fault detection capability is operating correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Page 10-894 OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO OPS-LINE MINOR test station l DS1OPS Line OPS-LINE WARNING test station DS1OPS Line An analog Off-Premises Station (OPS) can be connected to the system through a DS1 link. A TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack supports up to 24 DS1OPSs. Since the DS1OPS is an analog telephone set, a channel multiplexer is necessary as the remote DS1 endpoint that converts the digital signal of a DS1 port to the OPS Line and vice versa. See Figure 10-73 for details. The DS1OPS Line Maintenance provides a strategy to maintain an OPS Line via a port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The strategy covers initialization tests, periodic tests, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm resolution and escalation. Two service states are specified in a DS1OPS Line maintenance. They are: out-of-service in which the line is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or outgoing calls; in-service in which the line is in an activated state and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service, then all lines on the DS1 Interface circuit pack are put into the out-of-service state, and a Warning alarm is raised. For maintenance of the remote DS1 endpoint (for example, Channel Division Multiplexer, D4 Channel Bank), refer to the maintenance documentation from its vendor for details. ANALOG STATION "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM CHANNEL DS1 DS1 LINK MULTIPLEXER ANALOG STATION Figure 10-73. DS1 OPS Line Interactions Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Page 10-895 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values DS1 OPS Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test 01 0 Any 15 (a) Any Audit and Update Test (#36) 18 (b) 0 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test station sh r 1 busyout station WARNING OFF release station 130 (c) None WARNING ON test station 1281 Conference Circuit Test (#7) MINOR ON test station l 1537 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MINOR ON test station l 1793 (d) 1. test circuit pack PCSS l Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors (if any). b. The DS1OPS Line has been busied out by a busyout station command. No calls can be made on this line. c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. d. Error Type 1793 indicates a problem with the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Since there is no error against the OPS-LINE port, no alarm is raised against the OPS-LINE port. However, there should be errors logged against the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Look for DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log and follow procedures provided in the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Page 10-896 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test (#312) X X ND Audit and Update Test (#36) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-303. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate system resources to run this test or an internal system error (software) occurred. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-303. Error Code 1001 Page 10-897 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The test was aborted because the port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an an already existing error on the specific port or due to a more general error on the circuit pack. 1. Examine the error log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. (Error code 1793 indicates a problem with the DS1 interface board, and any problems on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD should be resolved first.) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-303. Error Code 2000 Page 10-898 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity problem should be dealt with first. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The test failed. This can be due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. 1. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 2. Retest when the faults from step 1 are cleared. 0 PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Page 10-899 Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Table 10-304. Error Code TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The test was aborted because the system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system might be under heavy traffic conditions, or it might have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. (The status health command may be used to determine whether the system is experiencing heavy traffic.) Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors, is not handling heavy traffic, and the port status is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-304. Error Code 1003 Page 10-900 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors may be out of service. Issue the list measurements tone-receiver command to display basic information about the system’s tone receivers. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1018 ABORT The test was disabled via translation. 1. You may want to determine why the test has been disabled before you enable it. 2. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter the ’change station extension’ command, and then change the ’Test’ field on the ’Station’ form from ’n’ to ’y.’ 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or due to a more general error on the circuit pack. 1. Examine the error log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. (Error code 1793 indicates a problem with the DS1 interface board, and any problems on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD should be resolved first.) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-304. Error Code 2000 Page 10-901 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was aborted because response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity problem should be dealt with first. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This can cause noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Enter the list configuration board PCSS command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9, replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later. The error log may have error type 1281 entries. 2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one fails, this could be an off-board problem (such as an incoming seizure or an off-hook port seizure during the test). Retest the board. 3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see note below). 4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD or TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the appropriate action. When the TONE errors have cleared, rerun the test. 5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported, coordinate isolation with the far-end PBX. Make sure that the near-end and far-end switches and any NTCE equipment (the CSUs) have the correct administration. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-304. Error Code Page 10-902 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (con’t.) Description/ Recommendation 6. Replace the circuit pack. NOTE: If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack. 0 PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external wiring. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Audit and Update Test (#36) This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Page 10-903 parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of the trunk as kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and in the switch software. Table 10-305. Error Code TEST #36 Audit and Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT The test was aborted because system resources required to run this test were not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the station is out of service. This condition may be accompanied by an error type 18 entry in the error log. You may want to determine why the station was taken out of service. (When stations are taken out of service by maintenance software, the problems that preceded that point must be cleared.) 1. Use the status station command to check the service state of the port. If the port is indeed out of service, enter the release station command to bring the station back into service. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort and the service state indicates that the station is in service and idle, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT The test was aborted because response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity problem should be dealt with first. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-305. Error Code 2100 Page 10-904 TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 7 or 8 FAIL Test failed due to internal system error. Do not replace port board. ■ Error code 7: the failure occurred during station translation download (to DS1 Interface circuit pack). ■ Error code 8: the failure occurred during station ringer update. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 0 PASS Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page DS1 OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test (#312) This test initiates the Switchhook Audit Test. The test queries the switchhook state of the Off-Premises-Station in switch software. If the state in switch software disagrees with the state on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The state in the switch software is updated to match the state on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-306. Error Code Page 10-905 TEST #312 DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Test failed due to incompatible configuration administered in station administration. 1. Verify the station administration is the station assigned to Port 24 of the DS1 Interface circuit pack while common channel signaling is specified. 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the station is out of service. This condition may be accompanied by an error type 18 entry in the error log. You may want to determine why the station was taken out of service. (When stations are taken out of service by maintenance software, the problems that led up to that must be cleared.) 1. Use the status station command to check the state of the port. If the port is indeed out of service, enter the release station command to bring the station back into service. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 3. If the test continues to abort, and the station is in the in-service/idle state, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. 1. Look for DS1-BD errors in Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. Retry the command. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line) Table 10-306. Error Code 2000 Page 10-906 TEST #312 DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was aborted because response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity problem should be dealt with first. 3. If the test continues to abort and the board is OK, escalate the problem. 2012 ABORT The test was aborted due to a system error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1 FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Look for DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. 2. If a channel multiplexer is used as the remote DS1 endpoint to which the station connects, refer to the multiplexer vendor’s maintenance document for diagnosis. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 0 2012 PASS The station hook states in both switch software and DS1 Interface circuit pack are consistent. NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted. 1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list config command, and resolve any problems that are found. 2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout board command. 3. Issue the reset board command. 4. Issue the release busy board command. 5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-907 PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO PDMODULE2,3 MINOR test port PCSSpp l Processor Data Module PDMODULE WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Processor Data Module MINOR test port PCSSpp l Trunk Data Module WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Trunk Data Module TDMODULE TDMODULE 1. 2. 3. 2,3 Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The DTDM is considered to be part of the DIG-LINE MO. Refer to the Digital Line testing section for DTDM or linked Data Adapter (DA) failures. Some of the alarms that are logged due to PDMODULE and TDMODULE test failures may be related to circuit pack problems reported during the Common Port Circuit Pack testing phase. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for information about testing the Digital Line circuit packs. As illustrated in Figure 10-74, data modules provide an interface between the system TN754, TN784, TN413 [G3iV2-386], or TN754 [G3iV2-386] Digital Line circuit pack and data equipment such as terminals, host computers, and modems. Data modules are used for both dial-up and permanent circuit-switched data calls. DA data modules provide this interface when the system uses a TN2136 [G3iV2-386] Digital Line circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-908 "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM LOOP TDM (DIGITAL LINK BUS INFORMATION AND MODULAR PROCESSOR DATA MODULE SIGNALING CHANNELS) TERMINAL DIGITAL LINE CIRCUIT MPDM PACK MODULAR TRUNK DATA MODULE DIGITAL LINE CIRCUIT MTDM HOST COMPUTER PACK Figure 10-74. Typical Data Module Application The MPDM provides an interface for Data Terminal Equipment (terminals), and the MTDM (see Note) provides an interface for Data Communications Equipment (transmission equipment such as modems). NOTE: Early versions of these data modules were referred to as PDMs and TDMs, respectively. Later models are designed to provide various customer interfaces through the use of interchangeable interface modules and, therefore, are called modular data modules. Both versions are supported by the tests described in this section. The PBX loop or digital link between a data module and the Digital Line port supports two logical information channels and one signaling channel. MPDMs and MTDMs use the primary information channel for data communications and the signaling channel for dialing and call supervision. The secondary information channel can be used to support a second data module on a shared digital port. Data modules are not only used for data calls between terminals, computers, and data communications equipment, but are also used as interfaces to equipment associated with system features such as System Administration, CDR, MCS, ACD, DCS, and AUDIX. Maintenance tests for data modules associated with DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-909 those services are covered by tests other than those described here. (See PI-LINK, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, and PMS-LINK Maintenance documentation.) Maintenance of MPDMs and MTDMs is closely related to, and interacts with, the Digital Line circuit pack maintenance in some instances and some of the results of testing MPDMs and MTDMs may be affected by the health of the Digital Line circuit pack. This interaction should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of reported data module problems. Data modules provide a variety of option switches to allow the customer to select data rates, parity, keyboard dialing, local, and remote loop back, etc. An incorrect setting of those switches does not affect error and alarm information or test results described in this section, but it may result in an inoperable condition. Refer to the Installation Manual provided with the data module for more information about those options. The DA data module provides an AT (Hayes) type interface that allows the customer to select data rates, parity, local, interface mode (linked to digital phone or stand-alone), and remote loop back, etc. An incorrect selection does not affect error and alarm information or test results described in this section, but it may result in an inoperable condition. There are instances in this document where the service state of a data module is mentioned. It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service states that may exist. An explanation of these service states follows: ■ Out-of-Service—The port, and thus the data module, have been removed from service. A busyout of a port or removal of the associated Digital Line circuit pack causes the data module to be placed in the out-of-service state. Failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test (Test #9) also takes a port out-of-service. ■ Disconnected—The port is administered but the associated digital link does not respond. An administered port is put in a disconnected state after system booting or circuit pack insertion, until a "link reset pass" message is received from firmware on the associated circuit pack. ■ In-Service—Once the PBX software has received a "link reset pass" message from the Digital Line port, the port is placed in the in-service state. In case the "link reset pass" message is missed, and an off-hook message is received while the port is in the disconnected state, maintenance software runs an ID request test and the port is put back in service if a correct response is received. If the link is disconnected, the port returns to the disconnect state. Note that it takes a few minutes (less than five) for the state of a data module port to change from in-service to disconnected after the data module is disconnected from the local PBX loop. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-910 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values PDMODULE and TDMODULE Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Alarm Level On/Off Board 01 0 Any Any Any 1 (a) 40987 None WARNING OFF 1 (b) 1 to 20 None WARNING OFF 15 (c) Any None 18 (d) 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 257 (e) 40971 None 0 Data Module Audits Test (#17) WARNING (j) OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 6 769 (f) 40988 None WARNING OFF 1281 Any Data Module Audits Test (#17) WARNING OFF 1537 (g) 40968 None WARNING OFF 1793 Information Channel and Control Channel Loop Around Test (#13) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 2049 NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 test port PCSSpp l r 5 513 2 Associated Test 2305 (h) 32770 None 2305 (i) 40967 None 2561 Data Module Internal Loop Around Test (#175) WARNING OFF 2817 (k) Link GPP Loop (183) Against Links MAJOR ON 3841 (l) NONE 1. 2. Test to Clear Value test port PCSSpp sh r 1 test port PCSSpp sh r 4 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386 only. Notes: a. Could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem detected by the port circuit. Check for faulty wiring, check for a defective DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-911 data module, or reduce the cabling distance between the data module and the PBX (5000 feet for 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge wire; see Note). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired automatically within 60 minutes. The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface (DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in stand-alone mode. NOTE: Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111. b. This error type and auxiliary data occur when at least 15 off-board problems have been detected with the link to the data module. When an error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is incremented. The user could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem detected by the port circuit. Check for faulty wiring, check for a faulty data module, or reduce the cabling distance between the data module and the PBX (5000 feet for 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge wire; see the next Note). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired automatically within 60 minutes. The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface (DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in stand-alone mode. NOTE: Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111. c. This is an internal type error that occurs when an audit request fails. d. This error type is logged when the port in question is busied out by maintenance personnel. Make sure that the port is released from busyout. e. There are problems with transmitting to the data module. This is usually an on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are received. Otherwise, check for faulty wiring. f. This error indicates that EPF has been turned off due to the overcurrent condition at the data module. Make sure that the data module is connected. Look for faulty wiring or a defective data module, or reduce the cabling distance between the data module and the PBX (5000 feet for DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-912 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge wire; see Note). If the problem still exists, it may be due to the fact that the PTC is in the "tripped" position due to a short on the power line. This can be corrected by removing the short, unplugging the data module from the wall for about 30 seconds, and plugging it back in. If the problem persists, replace the Digital Line circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined period of time since this counter uses a "leaky bucket" strategy. The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface (DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in stand-alone mode. NOTE: Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111. g. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to some problem with the link to the data module. This can be ignored if no user complaints are received. Otherwise, make sure the data module is connected, check for faulty wiring, check for a defective data module, or reduce the cabling distance between the data module and the PBX (5000 feet for 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge wire, see Note). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired automatically within 90 minutes. The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface (DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in stand-alone mode. NOTE: Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111. h. This indicates that the data equipment went off-hook while the associated link was being initialized (in a disconnected state). Use the status data-module command to determine the state of the data module. The off-hook should have changed the service state to in-service. No system technician action is necessary. i. This is the resulting code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack and the data module is successfully reset. The link is normally reset when the circuit pack associated with an administered port is first plugged in (assuming that the data module is already in place and connected to the associated port), when a port is first administered Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-913 (assuming the associated circuit pack is plugged in and that the data module is connected to the associated port), or when a data module is first connected to an administered port. No system technician action is necessary. j. This warning off-board alarm occurs only for G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386. The alarm occurs when it appears to the system that a DCP endpoint has been disconnected. k. A DCP endpoint may have been disconnected. l. This endpoint is part of processor link. Link initialization has failed (or demand test for #183 for PI links has failed) and is indicating the associated PDM as the cause. Check the PDM, the wiring to the PDM and the link to the far end (i.e. AUDIX DCS, etc.) to resolve the problem. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Data Module Internal Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Data Module Internal Loop Around Test (#175) X ND Network Processing Element Crosstalk Test (#9) X ND Information and Control Channel Loop Around Test (#13) X ND X ND Order of Investigation Data Module Audits Test (#17) 1. Short Test Sequence X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. If a secondary data module is assigned, it is Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-914 tested after the primary data module. If either test fails, both data modules are taken out of service This test usually runs only during the Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-307. Error Code 1 TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may not have been available. 1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port. Use the station status command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for this test. You must wait until the port is idle. 2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the extension of the data module port. Use the status data-module command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states). You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-307. Error Code 1002 Page 10-915 TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the extension of the data module port. Use the status data-module command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full description of all possible states). You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-307. Error Code Page 10-916 TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1020 ABORT Test disabled via background testing. Use status data-module command to determine when the data module is available for testing. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem. 2500 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1,2 FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in Error Log. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. Failure Code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk Test failed on the primary channel. Failure Code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk Test failed on the secondary channel. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times and verify that it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist, examine the data module, connections, and wiring. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-917 Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13) This is a set of four tests that check the operation of the information and control channels used between the SPE and the Digital Line port circuit. NOTE: This is an Internal Loop Around test only and does not check building wiring. Use Test #175 for external loop around tests to the data module. 1. The SPE first sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to loop around both the information and control channels for the port. Then, the primary information channel loop back test is run. The test is performed by sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack on the primary channel time slot and receiving the same digital count with a GPTD. The digital count looks like transparent data to the on-board microprocessor. 2. With the port still in loop around mode, the S channel Loop Around Test is performed next. This test consists of sending four different transparent patterns to the on-board microprocessor, receiving them back, and comparing them. 3. The third test is a Loop Around Test for the secondary (alternate) channel. It is not performed for data modules since this channel is not used by MPDMs, MTDMs, and stand-alone DA’s [G3iV2-386]. 4. A Conference Test is done next for the primary channel. This test is the same as the Analog Line Terminal/Port Conference Test (#6). Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of four tests run. If any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped. Table 10-308. Error Code TEST #13 Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-308. Error Code 1000 Page 10-918 TEST #13 Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run test are not available. Port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp command to determine the data module extension. Then use status data module command with the extension number to determine the service state of the data module. If the service state indicates that the data module is in use, then port is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until port is idle before retesting. 1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at one-minute intervals for a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the data module extension. Then use status data module command with the extension number to determine the service state of the data module. If the service state indicates that the data module is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-308. Error Code 2000 Page 10-919 TEST #13 Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Rerun the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2500 ABORT Internal System Error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and Digital Line circuit pack is not transmitting properly. This can cause a wide range of effects. The user may notice nothing or the port may be totally unusable. This could also disrupt other users. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator and the Tone Detector circuit packs using the test board UUCSS short command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-308. Page 10-920 TEST #13 Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 7 FAIL Conference test failed on the primary information channel. In some cases, user may not notice disruption in service. In extreme cases, conferencing feature may not work at all. 14 FAIL The primary information channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port. 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and Digital Line circuit pack is not transmitting properly. This can cause a wide range of effects. The user may notice nothing or the port may be totally unusable. This could also disrupt other users. 1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator and the Tone Detector circuit packs using the test board UUCSS short command. 2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack. 3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack. 16 FAIL The secondary information is not transmitting properly. This can cause a wide range of effects. The user may notice nothing or the port may be totally unusable. 1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass. 2. If complaints still exist (poor data transmission), examine the data module, connections, and wiring. PASS Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test passed. All channels are transmitting properly. Continued on next page Data Module Audits Test (#17) This is a series of six tests that are classified as hardware audits. The processor sends messages to the on-board microprocessor to perform the following tests. [G1] The audits run only if the station is in-service. ■ Switchhook Inquiry — This is an update of the processor’s software records based on the on-hook/off-hook status of the data module. ■ Bad Scan Inquiry — A message is sent uplink that contains a count generated by certain events relating to the digital loop’s (link) conditions. This could be an indication of communication problems between the processor and digital port circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-309. Error Code 1 Page 10-921 ■ EPF inquiry — The status of the EPF is sent uplink. EPF is not used for data modules. ■ ID Request — A request is made to the data module for its status. The data module sends its configuration information and health information back. This information is checked and a pass/fail result is provided. ■ Ringer Update — This updates the data module’s ringer state according to processor records. ■ Translation Update — This is a message normally used with digital stations to refresh the default value that causes the station to send touch-tones only in the primary information channel. This test is not used with data modules. TEST #17 Data Module Audits Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Switchhook audit timed out. 1. Verify the data module is connected to the PBX and repeat the test. 2. If the test aborts, replace the data module and repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack and repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2 ABORT ID request fails, health bit is defective, or no response from on-board microprocessor. 1. Verify that the correct data module type (PDM versus TDM) is administered. 2. If the test aborts, replace the data module and repeat the test. 3. If the test aborts, replace the circuit pack and repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 3 ABORT No response from EPF audit. 4 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Resolve any outstanding circuit pack maintenance problems. 2. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-309. Error Code 5 Page 10-922 TEST #17 Data Module Audits Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Ringer update aborted (data module not in the in-service state). 1. Verify that the data module is powered (power LED on). 2. Make sure data module is connected to the building wiring, check for faulty wiring, check for faulty data module. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. Replace the Data Module and repeat the test. 5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Digital Line circuit pack and repeat the test. 6. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 6 ABORT Data module translation update aborted. 1. Verify the data module is connected to the PBX. 2. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Data Module Audits passed. This digital port circuit pack is functioning properly. 1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other port tests, and by examining the data module options, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Data Module Internal Loop Around Test (#175) This test verifies that a data message can be sent from the PBX, through the building wiring, through an internal looparound path in the data module under test, and back to the PBX. Figure 10-75 shows the hardware configuration used for this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Page 10-923 "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM TDM BUS NETCON CIRCUIT PACK DATA MODULE (MPDM OR MTDM) DIGITAL LINE DATA CIRCUIT EQUIPMENT PACK Figure 10-75. Internal Loop Around Test A signaling message is sent through the digital port circuit pack to the data module under test to request it to enter loop around mode. A test pattern is then sent from the SPE through the Network Control circuit pack (Netcon), over the TDM Bus, through the digital port circuit pack, to the data module where the message is looped around, and sent back through the digital port circuit pack, the TDM Bus, the Network Control circuit pack, and to the SPE where it is checked for consistency. This test aborts if no terminal or communications equipment is connected to the data module. It also aborts if a number of local PBX resources are not available. These resources include a network control channel from the Network Control circuit pack (there are a maximum of four channels administered as Netcon-type data modules), two TDM time slots (one for each direction of the loop around message), and an idle digital port circuit associated with the data module under test. Failure to allocate any of these resources causes the test to abort with a specific error code for that resource. A "yes/no" parameter on each data module (MPDM, MTDM, or stand-alone DA only) administration form is required to specify if the Data Module remote Loop Around Test is supported by the data module endpoint. If the parameter is "n" (no), the test does not run. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-310. Error Code 1000 Page 10-924 TEST #175 Data Module Internal Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not get translation information for port. 1. Verify that port circuit is administered. 2. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 3. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT This test is not applicable to the given hardware configuration. 1. This abort message can be ignored. 1020 ABORT Internal Software Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1030 ABORT Internal software group identifier for data module not valid. 1. Verify that port circuit is administered correctly. 2. If administration data correct, escalate the problem. 1031 ABORT Extension number not valid. 1032 ABORT Extension number not correct length. 1. Verify that the data module extension is administered correctly. 2. If the administration data is correct, escalate the problem. 1071 ABORT No auxiliary port on Netcon circuit pack available to test with. 1. Check that the Netcon data channels are administered (the list data-modules command should show at least one Netcon-type data module). 2. Test the Network Control (Netcon) circuit pack using the test data-module command for the Netcon circuit pack. 3. If administration data is correct, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Data module disconnected. 1. Verify that the data module is powered (power LED on). 2. Make sure data module is connected to the building wiring. Check for faulty wiring and faulty data module. 3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. Replace the Data Module and repeat the test. 5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Digital Line circuit pack and repeat the test. 6. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-310. Error Code 2500 Page 10-925 TEST #175 Data Module Internal Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 3004 ABORT 1. This error could be caused by the switch setting of the PDM. Verify that the switch on the PDM is set to the "remote loop" position. When the remote loop around test is completed, return the switch to the "off" position. 2. This error could be caused by the Network Control Data Channel. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Hardware Error Log. 3. This error could also result if no data equipment is connected to the data module. Verify that (a) the data equipment is properly connected to the data module, (b) that power is available to the data equipment, and that (c) the data equipment is powered on. 4. This error could also occur if the baud rate of the data module is set to 19.2 Kbps since the Network Control circuit pack used by this test does not support baud rates greater than 9600 bps. Verify that the baud rate of the data module is set to 9600 bps or less. 1040 FAIL Data received from remote loop back does not match data sent. 1. Check for faulty wiring. 2. Replace the data module and repeat the test. 3. If the test fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack associated with the data module and repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1070 FAIL Internal software response. 1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 2. If the same error persists after five attempts in one-minute intervals, escalate the problem. 1072 FAIL Poor response from auxiliary channel. 1. Test the Network Control (Netcon) circuit pack using the test data-module command. 2. If the test fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack. 3. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1073 FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again. 2. If the same error persists after five attempts in one-minute intervals, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module) Table 10-310. Error Code 1074 Page 10-926 TEST #175 Data Module Internal Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Make sure that the data equipment connected to the data module is powered. 2. For an (M)PDM, verify that the Data Terminal "Ready" LED is ON, or for an (M)TDM, verify that the Data Set Ready LED is ON. If it is not on, check the cable from the data equipment to the data module. 3. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 1075 FAIL Unknown message received during test. 1. Attempt the test again. 2. If the same error occurs, test the Network Control Data Channel using the test data-module command and a known working data module. 3. Replace the Digital Line circuit pack and repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. 2040 FAIL Internal System Error. 2095 FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Repeat the test. 2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS Data Module Loop Around Test passed. This digital port circuit pack is functioning properly. 1. If problems persist, investigate by using other port tests and by examining the data module options, wiring, and connections. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-927 PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PE-BCHL1 MINOR test port PCSSpp l PRI Endpoint Port PE-BCHL WARNING test port PCSSpp sh PRI Endpoint Port 1. For additional repair information, see also UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack) maintenance documentation and ‘‘Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems’’ in Chapter 5. A PRI Endpoint provides ISDN-PRI (Primary Rate Interface) connections for customers with application equipment or terminal adapters that terminate ISDN-PRI. The equipment or terminal adapters are connected to the switch via the UDS1 interface circuit pack. PRI Endpoint Port (PE-BCHL) maintenance provides a strategy to maintain PRI Endpoint Port hardware circuitry on the UDS1 circuit pack. The maintenance strategy involves logging PRI Endpoint Port hardware errors, running tests for port initialization, periodic and scheduled maintenance, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm escalation and resolution. Wideband Switching The Wideband Switching capability supports end-to-end connectivity between customer endpoints at data rates from 128 to 1536 kbps over T1 facilities and to 1984 kbps over E1 facilities. DEFINITY switching capabilities are extended to support wideband calls comprised of multiple DS0s that are switched end-to-end as a single entity. The Wideband Switching capability is designed for ISDN application equipment (for example, ISDN video codecs), but it retains provisions for non-ISDN application equipment by using PRI terminal adapters. In the same sense that a DEFINITY data module acts as a DCP or BRI terminal adapter between endpoint data (for example, V.35) and dialing (for example, RS-366) interfaces and a DCP interface, a PRI terminal adapter acts as a wideband terminal adapter between endpoint data and dialing interfaces and DEFINITY’s line-side ISDN PRI interface. The Wideband Switching Capability introduces PRI Endpoints on DEFINITY line-side interfaces. A PRI Endpoint consists of one or more contiguous B-channels on a line-side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility, and it has an extension number. Endpoints initiate and receive calls using ISDN SETUP messages that indicate the data rate and specific B-channels to be used, and they communicate all other call status information via standard ISDN messages. Any DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-928 DEFINITY ISDN signaling set (for example, AT&T, CCITT, ECMA) may be used for a line-side ISDNPRI facility. Multiple PRI Endpoints on a one line-side facility are separate and distinct within the facility. Non-overlapping contiguous sets of B-channels are associated with each PRI Endpoint, and the endpoint equipment is expected to initiate calls within these boundaries. The endpoint application equipment must be able to do the following: use standard ISDN-PRI signaling, adhere to the PRI Endpoint boundaries as administered on DEFINITY when initiating calls, and handle incoming calls appropriately based on the PRI Endpoint. Signaling and B-channel States These ports use a separate channel for signaling (for example, for call setup). This mode of operation is known as out-of-band signaling. The separate signaling channel is called a D-channel in ISDN terminology, and it carries all the call control signaling messages for the PRI Endpoint Port B-channels. The D-channel for these B-channels is an ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (ISDN-LNK). The signaling protocol used on the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel is defined by one of the four selectable ISDN-PRI Specifications: AT&T, CCITT, ECMA, and ANSI. The ISDN-PRI Specification defines the possible SERVICE STATES for a B-channel. The service state is negotiated with the far-end terminal adapter, and it changes over time. Also, the service state may have a far-end or near-end component, and it is initialized to the Out-Of-Service/Far-End state. An attempt is made to negotiate the service state to In-Service. NOTE: The service state of a particular PRI Endpoint Port B-channel can be displayed by issuing the status pri-endpoint system technician command. If a call is present, the ISDN-PRI Specification defines the permissible CALL STATES as well. There are tests in the short and long test sequences for PRI Endpoint Port that are designed to audit these states and to ensure agreement between both ends of the PRI wideband connection. Alarming based on Service States: A PRI Endpoint Port B-channel is alarmed with a WARNING if it is placed into a Maintenance/Far-End or Out-Of-Service/Far-End state. While in such a state, the port is unusable for calls to the terminal adapter. However, the user can still use the other remaining ports in the PRI Endpoint to make calls to and from the terminal adapter. When a WARNING alarm is raised, the status pri-endpoint command should be used to determine the exact state of the port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-929 Other alarms can be diagnosed by using the short and/or long test sequences. Note that a PRI Endpoint Port B-channel can be placed into a Far-End Service State either by direct action of the far-end terminal adapter or by inaction of the far-end terminal adapter. For example, if they do not respond to a Remote Layer 3 Query (see Test #260 for ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port), the associated PRI Endpoint Port B-channels are placed into the Maintenance/Far-End service state. A PRI Endpoint Port is a port on a UDS1 interface circuit pack. Therefore, this port depends on the health of the UDS1 interface circuit pack for proper operation (see Figure 10-76). As noted earlier, a PRI Endpoint Port B-channel also depends on an ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel (ISDN-LNK) to carry the signaling traffic. If there is a problem with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port, the PRI Endpoint Port is affected. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port, in turn, depends on the PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link). Processor Interface Link problems affect the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port. Keep this hierarchy of dependencies in mind when diagnosing problems. ISDN-LNK SIGNALING (PORT 24) UDS1 INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK (TN464C) TERMINAL ADAPTER DATA PE-BCHL (PORT 23) .. .. .. .. . .. . . PE-BCHL PI CIRCUIT PACK (TN765) PROCESSOR (TN773) .. .. .. .. . .. . . DATA (PORT 1) TDM BUS Figure 10-76. PRI Endpoint Port Interactions [INTEL] PRI Endpoint Port Service States This section defines the possible service states of a PRI Endpoint Port, and it explains the reason for each service state. This section also provides the recommended recovery procedures (when required). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-930 Service States ■ In-Service (INS) The B-channel is in its normal operating state. ■ Out-of-Service/Far-end (OOS/FE) A B-channel is initialized to this state when administered. The switch sends messages to the far-end terminal adapter to negotiate the B-channel into service. If the far-end terminal adapter does not respond to the messages within a certain time period, the service state remains out-of-service, and maintenance periodically resends the messages. The port is unusable for calls incoming to the switch and outgoing to the terminal adapter (although other ports in the PRI Endpoint can still be used for incoming and outgoing calls). ■ Out-of-Service/Near-end (OOS/NE) This is the state of the port whenever one of the following is true: a hardware failure exists on the signaling link, the NPE Crosstalk Test fails, or the port is busied out by system technician. In this state, the port is unusable for calls incoming to the switch or outgoing to the terminal adapter (although other ports in the PRI Endpoint can still be used for incoming and outgoing calls). No messages are sent to the far-end terminal adapter until the signaling link comes back into service or until the port is released by system technician. ■ Maintenance/Far-end (MTC/FE) This state is reached when the far-end terminal adapter does not respond to messages sent over the signaling link for a particular port after a certain amount of time. This state is different from OOS/FE inasmuch as the signaling link must be up initially and the B-channels must be in-service. The switch periodically sends messages to the far-end terminal adapter in an attempt to negotiate the port (B-channel) into service. The port is unusable for calls outgoing to the terminal adapter. However, the port services incoming call requests from the far-end (although other ports of the PRI Endpoint can still be used to answer calls incoming to the switch or to place outgoing calls to the terminal adapter). Note that transitions into MTC/FE do not drop stable calls. Therefore, if the service state changes from in-service to MTC/FE, stable calls are unaffected. ■ Maintenance/Near-end (MTC/NE) The port (B-channel) is in this state if the signaling link (PI-LINK) is busied out by system technician. The port (B-channel) is also temporarily in this state if the system technician has issued a test port PCSSpp l or a test pri-endpoint l command. Note that transitions into MTC/NE do not drop stable calls. Therefore, a system technician-demanded busyout link lnk-no command does not drop stable wideband calls. In this state, the B-channel is not usable either for new calls incoming to the switch or for new calls outgoing to the terminal adapter. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) ■ Page 10-931 Pending States (PEND) If the near-end is expecting a timed response from the far-end for a request to change the service state of a port, the state of the port reflects a Pending state. For example, if the port is out-of-service/far-end and if an in-service message is sent to the far-end, the service state of the port is OOS/FE-PEND/INS (that is, out-of-service/far-end-Pending/in-service). The far-end has a certain amount of time to respond to the message. The service state reflects this pending state until the timer expires. The following diagram of the PRI Endpoint Port service states shows the common progression from one service state to another and the event that caused the change of state. OUT-OFSERVICE NEAR END CRAFT RELEASE OF A B-CHANNEL OR NEAR-END LINK PROBLEM (PI-LINK OR SYS-LINK) CLEARS UP ADMINISTER B-CHANNEL AS MEMBER OF A PRI ENDPOINT MAINTENANCE NEAR END CRAFT BUSYOUT OF B-CHANNEL BUSYOUT PORT/PRI-ENDPOINT, LINK PROBLEM AT NEAR END (PI-LINK OR SYS-LINK), DS1 BOARD NOT INSERTED, OR DS1 BOARD FAILURE. CRAFT BUSYOUT OF SIGNALING LINK "BUSYOUT LINK LINK-NO", OR TRANSIENT STATE FOR CRAFT-DEMANDED LONG TEST OF THE PORT. CRAFT RELEASE OF SIGNALING LINK D-CHANNEL HAS BEEN DOWN FOR AT LEAST 90 SECONDS. OUT-OFSERVICE FAR END IN-SERVICE FAILED TO RECEIVE REPLY FROM FAR END. MTCE WILL PERIODICALLY TRY TO RESEND THE MESSAGE IF D-CHANNEL CONTROLLING THE B-CHANNEL IS UP, SEND A MESSAGE REQUESTING TRANSITION TO IN-SERVICE RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM THE FAR END MAINTENANCE FAR END FAILED TO RECEIVE REPLY FROM FAR END. MTCE WILL PERIODICALLY TRY TO RESEND THE MESSAGE RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM THE FAR END OUT-OFSERVICE FAR END PENDING IN-SERVICE Figure 10-77. Common Progressions in Service States IF D-CHANNEL CONTROLLING THE B-CHANNEL IS UP, SEND A MESSAGE REQUESTING TRANSITION TO IN-SERVICE MAINTENANCE FAR END PENDING IN-SERVICE Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-932 PRI Endpoint Port Service States The following table summarizes each of the different PRI Endpoint Port service states that can result when the status pri-endpoint command is issued. From the results of the status command, match the service state to the corresponding column. Proceed down the column until an "X" is found. The left column indicates possible reasons why the port is in this state, and the right column suggests possible recovery mechanisms. If an alarm against PE-BCHL is present, it is indicated below the "X." NOTE: Refer to "Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for a layered approach to the processing of PRI Endpoint problems. Table 10-311. INS maint-FE Pend- ins maint- FE maint-NE O/S- FE Pend- ins O/S-FE O/S-NE Possible Problem Source PRI Endpoint Port Service States Possible Recovery Route X ISDN wideband calls being completed. Normal Operation. Port busied out by system technician? X Warn Alarm Release port by the release pri-endpoint extension or release port PCSSpp. NPE Crosstalk Test failed? X Minor Alarm Replace UDS1 Interface CP. DS1 circuit pack lost signal? X UDS1 Interface CP removed? DS1 cable disconnected? Terminal adapter problems? Far-end terminal adapter restarting? Faulty UDS1 Interface CP? Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-311. PRI Endpoint Port Service States — Continued Check UDS1-BD. Far-end problems? Service Message sent, waiting for reply from far-end terminal adapter (2 minutes). Processor Interface Link busied out by system technician? Check link status. [MIPS only]. INS maint-FE Pend- ins maint- FE maint-NE O/S- FE Pend- ins O/S-FE O/S-NE Possible Problem Source Page 10-933 Possible Recovery Route Refer to UDS1-BD for repair procedures. X Warn Alarm Check administration and the status of the corresponding port on the far-end terminal adapter. X X X Wait a couple minutes until Pending State not present, check service state. Release link by the release link lnk-no. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-311. PRI Endpoint Port Service States — Continued INS maint-FE Pend- ins maint- FE maint-NE O/S- FE Pend- ins O/S-FE O/S-NE Possible Problem Source Page 10-934 Possible Recovery Route Signaling link has been down for over 90 seconds? X Warn Alarm See ISDN-SGRP, ISDN-LNK, PI-LINK and/or SYS-LINK and follow repair procedures. Is far-end terminal adapter currently restarting? Repeated failure of far-end to respond to messaging? X Warn Alarm Periodically Maintenance will try to resend messages. To speed process, run system technician-demanded test test port PCSSpp (Test #256). X Warn Alarm Check status of far-end terminal adapter. Far-end port busied out (OOS/FE). Far-end port being tested (MTCE/FE). X Warn Alarm Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-935 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-312. PRI Endpoint Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data 1 0 Any 1 (a) Any None 15 (b) Any Audit and Update Test (#36) 18 (c) 0 busyout pri-endpoint busyout port WARNING OFF release pri-endpoint release port 129 (d) None WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 1 130 (e) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 0 Associated Test Alarm Level Any On/Off Board Any Test to Clear Value test port PCSSpp sh r 1 test port PCSSpp sh r 1 257 (f) Any None test port PCSSpp sh r 1 513 (g) Any None 76 9 (f) Any None 1281 (h) Any Conference Circuit Test (#7) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 4 1537 (i) Any NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 3 1793 (j) Any None test port PCSSpp sh r 1 3073 (k) Any Service State Audit (#256) test port PCSSpp sh r 2 3585 (l) Any None None WARNING OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 1 test port PCSSpp sh r 1 Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error type indicates a disagreement between the switch and the terminal adapter at the other end of the connection with regard to the ISDN call state of the PRI Endpoint Port. This switch automatically tries to recover by clearing the call (that is, the call is torn down). The status pri-endpoint command can be used to determine the state of the port. When running the Short Test Sequence of tests, pay close attention to the results of the Call State Audit Test (#257). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-936 b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate the associated errors (if any). c. The PRI Endpoint Port has been busied out by a busyout pri-endpoint command or by a busyout port command. No wideband calls can be made to this port (although wideband calls can still be made to other ports within this PRI Endpoint if others ports are in service). d. The far-end terminal adapter changed its ISDN service state to either "out-of-service" or "maintenance." This may be a temporary condition due to the testing of this port by the far-end terminal adapter or by a hardware problem with the port. Outgoing calls to the terminal adapter are not allowed over the port (although calls can still be made to other ports that are in service within the same PRI Endpoint). To investigate the status of the port, issue the status pri-endpoint command. e. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. f. This error type indicates a disagreement between this switch and the terminal adapter at the other end of the connection with regard to the ISDN service state of the PRI Endpoint Port. This switch tries to recover by performing a service state audit. The status pri-endpoint command can be used to determine the state of the port. When running the Short Test Sequence, pay close attention to the results of the Service State Audit Test (#256). g. This port is not recognized by the far-end terminal adapter. Investigate the PRI Endpoint administration for both the switch and the terminal adapter and make changes as necessary. h. The Conference Circuit Test (#7) failed on this port. See Test #7 for the repair procedures. i. The NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) failed on this port. See Test #6 for the repair procedures. j. This error indicates a failure of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack. When running the Short Test Sequence, the results of the Signaling Link State Check Test (#255) are important. k. Two Service State Audit attempts have failed (see Test #256). The port is not usable for any outgoing calls to the terminal adapter (although incoming calls from the terminal adapter are accepted over this port, other ports in the PRI Endpoint can still be used for both incoming and outgoing calls to and from the terminal adapter) until the test passes and the port state is changed to in-service (use the status pri-endpoint command to investigate the port status). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-937 l. This error type appears when the switch receives an ISDN RESTART message for an ISDN port that is not idle. Usually, calls are not cleared via the RESTART message. Therefore, this error type may be associated with a dropped call report from a user. The following Aux Data values for Error Type 3585 represent the port’s ISDN call state at the time that the unexpected request to restart the channel is received from the remote terminal adapter. This information can be useful if dropped calls (cutoffs) are being reported by users of the PRI Endpoint. The following list contains important Aux values. Any other such values can be ignored. 10 A call in a stable, talking state was cleared unexpectedly by the far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message. This state is called the "active" state. 4, 7, 8, 260, 263 A call that did not reach the active state but at least reached a ringing state was cleared unexpectedly by the far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message. 1, 3, 6, 9, 265 A call that has not yet reached a ringing state was cleared unexpectedly by the far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message. 11, 12, 19, 531, 267, 268 A call that was in the process of clearing has been nonetheless cleared by the far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message. If this condition occurs frequently, it may mean that the far-end terminal adapter is attempting to clear ports that it thinks are in a "hung" state. The RESTART message brings the port to an idle condition. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-313. Page 10-938 System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD Long Test Sequence D/ND1 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Audit and Update Test (#36) X X ND Signaling Link State Check Test (#255) X X ND Service State Audit Test (#256) X X ND Call State Audit Test (#257) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots that are reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s long test sequence, and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-314. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use status pri-endpoint commands to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-314. Error Code 1002 Page 10-939 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM Bus errors. The status health command can be used to determine if the system is experiencing heavy traffic. Refer to TDM Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors. 1. If system has no TDM Bus errors, and if it is not handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be out-of-service. The list measurements tone-receiver command displays information on the system’s tone receiver. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If errors are present, refer to TTR-LEV. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If errors are present, refer to TONE-PT. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status pri-endpoint commands to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1117 ABORT A service state audit message is outstanding. 1. Wait 2 minutes and then try again. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2020 ABORT The test did not run due either to an already existing error on the specific port or to a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-314. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result Any Page 10-940 FAIL Description/Recommendation The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. The PE-BCHL is moved to the out-of-service/near-end state. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is able to communicate over the TDM Bus. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464C UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips.) The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and it provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The Conference Circuit test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and to conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Table 10-315. Error Code TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the status pri-endpoint command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status pri-endpoint command to determine when the port is available for testing. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due either to an already existing error on the specific port or to a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or against the circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-315. Error Code Page 10-941 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. Even though wideband calls do not use the conferencing feature on the NPE, this failure indicates problems with the circuit pack hardware. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using the other port tests and by examining the terminal adapter or the external wiring. Continued on next page Audit and Update Test (#36) This test sends port level translation data from the switch processor to the UDS1 interface circuit pack to ensure that the port’s translation is correct. The port audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of the port that is kept in the UDS1 interface circuit pack and in the switch software. Table 10-316. Error Code TEST #36 Audit and Update Test Test Result Description/Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The test failed due to Internal system error. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-316. Error Code Page 10-942 TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/Recommendation The port translation has been updated successfully. The current port states kept in the UDS1 interface circuit pack and in the switch software are consistent. If the port is busied out, the test does not run, but returns PASS. To verify that the port is in-service: 1. Enter status pri-endpoint to verify that the port is in-service. If the port is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the port is out-of-service, go to Step 2. 2. Enter the release pri-endpoint command or the release port command to put the port back into in-service. 3. Retry the test command. Continued on next page Signaling Link State Check Test (#255) As is noted in the general description for a PRI Endpoint Port, the operation of the PRI Endpoint Port depends on the health of the UDS1 interface circuit pack and of the TN765 Processor Interface Link. This test checks the status of those critical elements. Table 10-317. Error Code TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete the test on this port, do one of the following: 1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter, or 2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering the change ds1 PCSS command, and set the field "Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y." Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-317. Error Code 4 Page 10-943 TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation There is a problem with the Signaling Channel and/or with the Processor Interface Link. 1. Consult the procedure for the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-GRP) and/or the procedures for Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK). Further information may also be obtained by consulting the procedures for the ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (ISDN-LNK). 8 FAIL There is a problem with the UDS1 interface circuit pack. 1. Consult the procedures for UDS1 interface circuit pack (UDS1-BD). PASS The signaling link hardware is okay. Continued on next page Service State Audit (#256) As is noted in the general description for PRI Endpoint Port, these ports may be in one of several service states as defined by the ISDN-PRI Specification. This test performs a service state audit with the far-end terminal adapter to ensure that both sides agree on the service state. A PASS for this test simply means that an audit message was successfully composed and sent out to the far-end terminal adapter. The ISDN Specification allows up to two minutes for a reply. If no reply is received within that two minute window, this switch automatically tries once again. If that attempt fails, an error is logged (Error Type 3073), and the switch attempts a recovery by automatically retrying approximately every 15 minutes. If the port was initially in the INS (in-service) state, it is now placed into the MTC/FE (maintenance state, far-end problem) state. Until a Service State Audit attempt is successful, no outgoing calls are placed over this port, but incoming calls are be accepted. The service state of this port does not affect the service state of other ports in the PRI Endpoint. If an incoming call that uses this port is presented while in such a state, a Service State Audit attempt is immediately attempted (that is, the switch does not wait for the 15 minute cycle, but instead tries to recover immediately). To investigate the status of this PRI Endpoint Port, issue the status pri-endpoint command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Table 10-318. Error Code 1113 Page 10-944 TEST #256 Service State Audit Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The signaling link has failed. As a result, the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this port. 1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check). 1117 ABORT A service state audit message is outstanding. 1. Wait two minutes and try again. 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete the test on this port, do one of the following: 1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter, or 2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering the change ds1 PCSS command, and set the field "Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y." 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS Wait 4 minutes and then check the Error Log for any new occurrences of Errors Type 3073. If there are no occurrences of this error, both sides of the ISDN connection agree on the service state, and the negotiation succeeded. If there is a new occurrence of Error Type 3073, the negotiation failed (that is, the far-end terminal adapter twice failed to respond within the mandatory two minute window). This switch automatically retries approximately every 15 minutes. If the port was initially in the INS (in-service) state, it is now be placed into the MTC/FE (maintenance, far-end problem) state (refer to the "Service States" section, which precedes the PE-BCHL "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" table). Incoming calls are accepted, but no outgoing calls are originated from this port. If an incoming call is presented, another Service State Audit is immediately performed in an attempt to bring the PRI Endpoint Port to the proper state. Continued on next page Call State Audit Test (#257) If a call is active on the port, the switches on both sides of the connection should agree on the ISDN state of the call as defined in the ISDN Protocol Specification. This test audits internal call state data by querying the far-end terminal adapter Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port) Page 10-945 about the ISDN state of the call. It can be helpful when trying to clear a hung call. If the internal call state data on the near-end switch is different than that of the far-end terminal adapter, the call is torn down. As with Test #256 (Service State Audit), a PASS simply means that an appropriate message was composed and sent to the far-end terminal adapter. The ISDN Specification allows up to two minutes for a reply. If a reply is not received within the two minute window, a protocol time-out violation is recorded in the error log against the associated signaling channel (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port, which is listed in the Error Log as ISDN-LNK; the Error Type is 1). Table 10-319. Error Code 1019 TEST #257 Call State Audit Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation An audit is already in progress. 1. Wait two minutes and try again. 1113 ABORT The signaling link has failed. As a result, the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this port. 1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check). 1116 ABORT The port is in an out-of-service ISDN service state. 1. A call cannot be present if the port is in an ISDN out-of-service state. As a result, a call state audit would be inappropriate, and no action is necessary. (Use the status pri-endpoint command to investigate the ISDN state of the port). 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete the test on this port, do one of the following: 1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter, or 2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering the change ds1 PCSS command, and set the field "Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y." 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times. PASS This switch sent a call state auditing message to the far-end terminal adapter to verify the state of the call active on this port. If a call state mismatch is found, the call is torn down within two minutes. If no call was active, no message was sent. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-946 PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) PI-BD Alarm Level MINOR PI-BD Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO test interface PCS sh Processor Interface Circuit Pack test interface PCS sh Processor Interface Circuit Pack WARNING 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN only); C is the carrier designation (for example, A or B for processor complex circuit packs); and S is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 1 or 2 for either the first or second Processor Interface circuit packs). The TN765 Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack provides a front-end processor to the TN777 Processor circuit pack. The PI circuit pack implements the packet layer and link layer of the X.25 protocol (DCS, AUDIX, CMS, OCM links) as well as the link layer of the ISDN-PRI protocol (ISDN links). A system without high or critical reliability supports up to two circuit packs. A high or critical reliability system supports up to four Processor Interface circuit packs, two in each carrier. Only one pair of the circuit packs on a single carrier can be active at a given time. The other two are in Standby mode. The TN765 is a downloadable circuit pack. This means that at reboot, system power-up, or via system technician command, Processor Interface firmware is downloaded to the circuit pack. For other restarts, a Checksum Test is performed on the firmware. If the Checksum Test fails, then the firmware is downloaded again. The firmware can be automatically downloaded at any time using the reset interface PCS system technician command. On the Active SPE complex or in an unduplicated system, Processor Interface maintenance is used for alarming the circuit pack. If System Communication Interface (PI-SCI) finds an error or alarm condition that can be associated with an on-board problem with the Processor Interface (PI-BD) circuit pack, then it alarms both the System Communication Interface and the Processor Interface circuit pack. Processor Interface circuit pack maintenance is also used to test the common circuit pack functions on the circuit pack. If these tests fail, a circuit pack level alarm is raised on the Processor Interface circuit pack (PI-BD). Port level alarms are raised against PI-PT. See PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Maintenance documentation for details. On the Standby SPE complex, the testing of the Processor Interface circuit pack is different. The Standby Processor Interface circuit pack is tested daily via scheduled maintenance or on system technician demand. These tests are to check the Standby PIs hardware and firmware so that if an SPE interchange takes place, the Processor Interface communication links (DCS, ISDN, or AUDIX, for example) recover on the new Active Processor Interface circuit pack in a Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-947 short time. If the firmware checksum fails during scheduled maintenance, then the circuit pack can be downloaded again at this time instead of during the SPE interchange. The Processor Interface firmware can be unconditionally downloaded to the Standby SPE circuit pack via the reset interface PCS command, where PCS is the carrier/slot of a Standby PI. The command executes the Standby Processor Interface Board Test (#423), but with a download option. The Active Processor Interface circuit pack is tested in the PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Maintenance documentation. Refer to that section for details. The test command is test interface PCS where PCS is the port network number, carrier, and slot of one of the Standby Processor Interface circuit packs. If the Standby Processor Interface circuit pack is tested, the test sequence for the Standby Processor Interface is followed. If the Active Processor Interface circuit pack’s PCS is given, then tests in the Active Processor Interface test sequence are run. On the Active PI, if there are no enabled Processor Interface links on the Communication-Interface Links Form, only the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) tests execute. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-320 indicates entries that may be found in the Error Log for Processor Interface circuit packs. Since the Processor Interface circuit pack has common port board functionalities, then cross reference XXX-BD (common port board) maintenance information for more information. Test #423 is the only test described in this section. XXX-BD maintenance describes the other tests mentioned in the following table. Table 10-320. Error Code 1 PI-BD Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any 1 (a) 0 Circuit pack removed or SAKI Test (#53) MINOR ON 23 (b) 0 None WARNI NG OFF 54 (c) 0 None MAJOR ON test interface PCS l 124 (d) Any None MAJOR ON test interface PCS l None MINOR ON MINOR ON 0 125 (e) 257 65535 Control Channel Test (#52) 257 (f) Any None test interface PCS sh r 1 test interface PCS Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-320. Error Code Page 10-948 PI-BD Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 513 (g) Any None 769 (h) 4358 None 1025 (i) 4363 NPE Audit Test (#50) 1538 (j) Any None MINOR ON 3585 (d) Any None Test (#423) MAJOR ON reset interface PCS l 3840 (i) Any None 3841 Any Standby PI Circuit Pack Test (#423) MAJOR ON test interface PCS sh 3999(k) Any None test interface PCS sh Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. ! WARNING: The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and cause all ISDN-PRI and BX.25 links to come down. Notes: a. Indicates the circuit pack totally stopped functioning or it was physically removed from the system. NOTE: The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed and/or SAKI Test (#53) fails. If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on, then replace the circuit pack. ! CAUTION: Reseating the circuit pack may cause a system restart if the circuit pack is located on an Active SPE complex. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-949 If this is a Duplicated Option system, verify that there is an equal number of Processor Interface circuit packs in each SPE complex. If there is not an equal number of Processor Interface circuit packs, this condition could cause alarms on the STBY-SPE, DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, as well as the PI-BD. b. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically installed. If this alarm remains active for more than 30 minutes, follow normal escalation procedures. DO NOT PHYSICALLY RESEAT THE CIRCUIT PACK! The alarm is cleared when the circuit pack is installed and initialization maintenance runs on it. The Standby Processor Interfaces alarm is cleared when Standby maintenance runs on it. c. Processor Interface-SCI detected an error while trying to reset the TN765 PI circuit pack. This error indicates a loss of communication with the circuit pack. If this error continues, then replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. See PI-SCI Maintenance documentation for additional errors. d. PI-SCI logged errors that resulted in an error being logged and an alarm being raised against PI-BD. Refer to the PI-SCI Maintenance documentation and resolve all alarms against PI-SCI. If this alarm resulted in an SPE-interchange, issue the test interface PCS sh command to try to resolve the PI-BD alarm. e. A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the change circuit-pack command to re-administer this slot to match the circuit pack inserted. f. This error indicates transient communication problems with this circuit pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. g. This error, when reported with Aux Data in the range of 4352 to 4358, indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure on the circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. h. This error can be ignored, but look for other errors on this circuit pack. i. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. j. The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms: 1. The common circuit pack level tests such as Test #51 and/or Test #220 are aborting with Error Code 2000. 2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a NO-BOARD. 3. A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are properly installed. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-950 The system tries to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. If the error recurs after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. (Refer to the "Handling Control Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.) k. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated 50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it. System Technician Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test (#423) X X ND Standby Processor Interface Port Test (#404) (a) X X ND Control Channel Loop Test (#52) X X ND NPE Audit Test (#50) X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Note: a. This test is repeated up to four times since there are four ports on the circuit pack. Cross-reference PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Maintenance documentation for information about these tests. Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation as Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Page 10-951 NPE Audit Test (#50) Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation as NPE Audit Test (#50). Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test (#423) This test is run only in a High or Critical Reliability system. This test is run on Processor Interface circuit packs that are currently in Standby Mode and thus no active calls are up on these circuit packs. It is very important to periodically test the Standby Processor Interface circuit packs to ensure their health in case of an SPE-interchange. This test is run either by system technician demand (test interface PCS or reset interface PCS) or during scheduled maintenance. The test resets the circuit pack. The main purpose of this test is to perform a Checksum Test on the downloadable firmware or to download new Processor Interface firmware if the reset interface PCS command is used. If the checksum fails, then the firmware is downloaded again from the tape. Table 10-321. Error Code 9,10 TEST #423 Standby PI Board Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1029 1030 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. 1124 ABORT There are currently no enabled Processor Interface links in the system. 1. Wait and run this test when links are enabled and the PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) has been started up. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Table 10-321. Error Code 1 Page 10-952 TEST #423 Standby PI Board Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/Recommendation Could not reset the Processor Interface circuit pack. 1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the command. 2. If this test continues to fail, replace TN765 Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. 16 80 94 102 FAIL 23 199 FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If problem still exists, redownload firmware using the reset interface command. Download of Processor Interface firmware failed. 1. Wait 1 minute and retry. A tape access problem could be present. Check that tape is in tape drive. 2. If the problem persists and Standby TAPE is idle when command is entered, then a problem could exist in either the Standby TAPE or the Processor Interface circuit pack. Replace the tape with a new tape that contains Processor Interface firmware. Retry the command. 3. If the problem still exists, then refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation for possible TAPE errors. If there are no TAPE errors, repeat the test command up to five times. If problem still exists, replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. 4. If problem still exists with new TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack, replace TAPE drive. 9000s FAIL Processor Interface Download failed. 1. Refer to TABLE A, Tape Unit Data Table, and follow the repair recommendations. PASS TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack initialized correctly. Processor Interface links (X.25 and ISDN) should recover now. See “PI-LINK” for more information if links do not recover. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-953 PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PI-LINK MINOR test link lnk-no l Processor Interface Link PI-LINK WARNING test link lnk-no l Processor Interface Link NOTE: Reference lnk-no using the display communication-interface links command. The Processor Interface (PI) Communication Link is the physical link that connects DEFINITY to an adjunct such as AUDIX, another node in a DCS network, or an ISDN-PRI connection. These links are either X.25 (DCS, AUDIX, or MIS) or ISDN (ISDN-PRI). The system supports up to four of these links per TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. PI-LINK maintenance actually monitors several hardware devices: Processor Interface ports, TN754 or TN784 Digital Line ports, PDMs, TDMs, MTDMs, MPDMs, and DS1 facilities. Henceforth, "data module" refers to either PDM, TDM, MPDM, or MTDM. In much of the following link documentation, the repair procedures described mention various hardware configurations. Choose the procedure appropriate to your configuration. The Processor Interface circuit pack provides an EIA connection. This connection can be administered only on Link 1 in a system without High or Critical Reliability. The EIA port is used when an adjunct (AUDIX, for example) is near (less than 25 feet) or further if a modem is used. The EIA port can also be used to connect two PBXs together via DCS. The EIA port cannot be used in a High or Critical Reliability system. The Processor Interface Link can be in three different states. These states can be seen using the status link lnk-no system technician command. If the link is in a maintenance busy state, then the system technician had instructed the Processor Interface to be in maintenance busy by entering the busyout link lnk-no command or the Processor Interface Link is not established and maintenance is trying to bring it up. This probably means that an error condition is occurring somewhere on the link that keeps the link from being logically connected and carrying data. If the link is busied out, then it can be put back into service by issuing a release link lnk-no command. This restarts the link. If the link is for DCS, then it may speed the recovery of the link if busyout link lnk-no and release link lnk-no are executed on the switch that is establishing the connection (see the Communication-Interface Links form). The link can be in a disconnected state if the link cannot be started up. In this case, maintenance tries to establish the link periodically. If the link is up and data is being sent successfully, then the link is in the in-service state. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-954 NOTE: When an ISDN-PRI link is busied out via a system technician command, the associated B-channels (ISDN-TRK) are moved to the maintenance and/or far-end state. As a result, stable calls are NOT dropped, but the trunks are removed from the trunk hunt group to prevent them from being selected for outgoing calls. See ISDN-TRK Maintenance documentation. Up to two Processor Interface circuit packs can be active on the same carrier in the system. Thus, there can be a maximum of eight Processor Interface links in service at any one time. If an error or alarm is detected by PI-LINK that can be associated with a physical port on the Processor Interface circuit pack, then the Processor Interface Port MO is alarmed, which indicates a defective port on the circuit pack. Refer to the PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Maintenance documentation for details. It is useful to use the status processor-channel channel-no command when troubleshooting the PI-LINK. A processor channel corresponds to a processor application (also called a session) and more than one may be using the same physical link (only for X.25 links). The relevant field of the status screen is the "channel status:" which can be in 1 of 7 different states (see the following table). State 6 is normal state for the processor channel for X.25 links and state 10 is normal state for ISDN links. States 9 and 10 are only applicable to ISDN links. States Description 1 Incorrect translations or channel not assigned. 3 Attempting to reset the channel but no response from the other end. Getting stuck in this state may be caused by hardware problems, a DS1 synchronization problem or a DCE/DTE conflict in the Communication-Interface Link Form (one end of the link must be DCE and the other must be DTE). 4 The other end acknowledged the channel reset (the two ends are physically connected) but a processor channel connection has not occurred yet. Getting stuck in this state may indicate that translations are incorrect, such as remote processor channel mismatch. To recover from this situation, execute the busyout link lnk-no and release link lnk-no commands. If this is unsuccessful, then use the reset interface command (note that this is a destructive command that tears down all four links). This problem may also be caused by a noisy link or DS1 synchronization problems. 6 This is the normal state of the channel. The link is in the data transfer state which means that the application is able to send data over the link. 7 One or more unexpected messages have arrived; software is attempting to resynchronize the two ends. Usually it takes up to five minutes for the software to recover once it is in this state. 9 ISDN-PRI link is currently down. It is periodically restarted or can be forced to restart via busyout/release link lnk-no. 10 ISDN-PRI link is up. This is the normal state of the channel. The link is in data transfer state, which means that ISDN data can be sent over the link. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-955 Figure 10-78 shows the Processor Interface Communications Link (PI-LINK) Interactions. TO EIA PORT X.25 X.25 LINK LINK MEM. BUS PROCESSOR TN773 PI CIRCUIT PACK TN765 X.25/ ISDN LINK DIGITAL LINE CIRCUIT PACK TN754 OR TN754B TN767 OR TN722 DS-1 PORT TDM BUS Figure 10-78. PDM TDM TO AN ADJUNCT (AUDIX, MIS, OCM) OR DCS TO ANOTHER PBX DCS SIGNALING TO REMOTE PBX TO REMOTE PBX VIA ISDN-PRI OR DCS Processor Interface Link Interactions Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-322. Error Code 1 PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test link sh 1 (a) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 18 0 busyout link lnk-no WARNING OFF release link lnk-no 257 (b) Any none MINOR/ WARNING2 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 263 (c) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 513 (d) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 0 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Table 10-322. Error Code Page 10-956 PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 769 Any PI Loop Around Test (#182) WARNING ON test link lnk-no l r 2 1025 Any TDM Loop Around Test (#183) WARNING OFF test link lnk-no l r 2 1281 (n) Any none WARNING/ MAJOR3 OFF test link lnk-no sh r 2 1537 (e) Any none WARNING/ MAJOR3 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 1793 (f) Any none WARNING OFF busyout/release link link no. 2049 (g) Any none WARNING/ MAJOR3 OFF test link lnk-no sh r 9 2305 (h) Any none WARNING OFF test link lnk-no sh r 9 2561 (i) Any none WARNING OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 2817 (j) Any none NONE OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 3073 (k) Any none WARNING OFF test link lnk-no sh r 9 3585 (l) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING2 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no 3841 (m) Any none MINOR/ WARNING2 OFF busyout/release link lnk-no Continued on next page 1. 2. 3. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Major and Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. This error type initially raises a warning alarm. If this error type persists, and alarms are not downgraded on this MO due to the values of set options, then, after a period of time, a Major alarm is raised. Notes: a. A permanent switched call was dropped. Check the "Link Recovery" section. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-957 b. The TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack detected an error on a specific link via background maintenance. If the link is down, busyout and then release the link. If this fails, check all connections. If the error reappears consistently, see "Link Recovery" section. c. Processor Interface software or firmware detected an error condition on this link. Internal software should initiate the recovery for the link. If the link is still down, see the "Link Recovery" section. Aux values of concern; any others can be ignored. 0 Processor Interface circuit pack indicates that the ISDN-PRI link is down. 1 An internal software audit indicates that this link has been in overload for at least 20 seconds and is hung. 2 No internal software buffers are available to process a link transition (that is, down to up, or up to down). The transition is lost. 17 The allocation of a new software write buffer to the Processor Interface circuit pack failed. d. Translation Error—check all administration for the link. Possibly the destination DS1-BD or DIG-BD is not inserted. Busyout and then release the link to restart it. This is not a Processor Interface hardware problem. Aux values of concern; any others can be ignored. 2 Link translation error. If the communication-processor link form indicates this link’s destination is a tac+extension, then bring up the dial plan form. If an extension exists with the same first digit as the tac, then this PI link will not establish. To alleviate this problem, either remove the extension on the dial plan form, or change the destination field on the communication-processor link form to use a UDP extension to dial the far-end. 8 Port not administered in software. e. This error occurs when the Processor Interface link fails to be established. Check all connections and administration. This could also occur as a result of another error, the failure of Test #182, for example. If the other error on the link can be cleared, then this error may also clear. See the "Link Recovery" section DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-958 . 1, 2 System error. 7 System error. If this error is occurring on all administered links with the same Aux Data and all links are alarmed, then execute the reset interface command to restore all the links. 12 One of the two Loop Around Tests failed (#182 or #183). See the "Link Recovery" section. 13 Hardware problem with DS1 facility is affecting ISDN links. Refer to DS1-BD Maintenance documentation. 19 A transient state associated with the D-channel backup protocol. The link is being held in the busy state until call control can be moved to the new active link. No action needs to be taken. 32771 32772 The remote endpoint indicates that the call is up and the local PBX cannot complete the call. Check trunk status (on the remote end and local end) if a DS1 trunk is used, or check the status of the data module if a data module is used in the link. The commands are status trunk trk-grp/ member or status data-module . If the destination is in-service/active, then the commands are busyout trunk trk-grp/member and release trunk trk-grp/member (on both sides of the link if this is a DCS link). If a data module is used in the link, then use a busyout data-module command followed by a release data-module command. Busy out the Processor Interface Link prior to busying the trunk or data module. Release the Processor Interface Link via release link lnk-no command and the Processor Interface Link re-starts. If this fails, check the status of the TN765 port using status data where is the extension of the port from the interface extension in the Display Communication Link form; if the state is "in-service/idle" then manually call the TN765 port and transfer the call to appropriate destination, either a DS1 Trunk Access Code or the data module extension. See "Link Recovery" if error still occurs. See "Link Recovery" if error still occurs and link does not establish. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-959 32779 32782 32801 Administration problem; check that the Processor Interface data module extension exists via the status data-module command. Verify that the destination extension exists and that the correct routing pattern is used. In addition, check that the Processor Interface data module and the destination extension are administered on the COS and/or COR forms. 32813 Administration problem; check all administration. 32815 The off-premise call timed-out. Check the "Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval" on the Feature-Related System Parameters Form. The time-out is administered between 6 and 25 seconds. No response was received from the remote destination. Check the status of the remote destination. This might also indicate possible synchronization problems. Network synchronization sources should be checked on all networked switches. Also see the SYNC Maintenance documentation. 32814 Call was answered but not by a remote data module. Check the remote destination extension and verify that this is a data module. 32841 Call went over the trunk and received ring back but did not receive modem answer tone. Check the remote destination for automatic answering. 65528 Administration problem; check all administration. 65532 Call setup timed out; retry, and check destination. If the destination is an adjunct (CMS, AUDIX, etc.), then check if the terminal ready light is lighted on the PDM. If not, then the adjunct is down. If the destination is another PBX, then the PBX might be restarting. Retry. 65535 Link specified is out-of-range (1 through 8). Continued on next page f. This error message indicates that the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack could not transmit the message the software sent to it. See the "Link Recovery" section if the error continues. This is a normal error during "hot start" SPE-interchanges. g. Excessive resets on the link. Usually indicates that the remote end is down or the physical connection is broken. A warning alarm is raised initially, followed by a Major alarm if the problem is not cleared. See the "Link Recovery" section. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-960 h. Excessive I-frame retransmission. Could indicate a noisy link. Recover as in previous note. Aux values indicate the retransmission rate per minute. See the "Link Recovery" section. i. If the Aux Data value is 9, then the destination circuit pack (DIG-BD or DS1-BD) is not inserted. Otherwise, DS1 maintenance detected a hardware failure. (DS1 cable disconnected, loss of signal, DS1-BD problems.) Not a Processor Interface Link problem. Check DS1-BD maintenance. Only applicable to ISDN links. Aux value useless. Once the DS1 signal is restored, maintenance automatically restarts the Processor Interface Link. To hasten this process, test the appropriate DS1 Interface circuit pack via test board PCS command. When Test #138 (loss of signal) passes, the Processor Interface Link recovers shortly. In addition to an indication that the link failed to establish the PI-LINK 2561 AUX_Data, the hardware error log is also updated. This error may indicate two possible conditions: 1. A failure to detect the DTR from the peripheral. When the DTR is not detected by the data module the AUX_Data is set to 40. This indicates that the problem is most likely with the peripheral or the connection to the peripheral. 2. A time-out on the EIA interface query request to the data module. When the data module fails to respond to the EIA interface (query request) the AUX_Data is set to 41. This may indicate problems with the data module or connection to the data module. Other errors specific to the data module may also be logged if this is the case. j. TN765 PI-BD determined that the ISDN link went down. Check connectivity with the other end. Busyout and then release the link to recover. Occurs if DS1 maintenance detected a problem or the remote end is busied out or is down. This also occurs if the ISDN link is unstable or if there is excessive noise on the line. See the "Link Recovery" section. k. Excessive LAPD (link-access procedure on the D-channel) invalid frame errors. Could be a noisy line or problems with the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Also check DS1-BD Maintenance documentation. See the "Link Recovery" section. l. Occurs 90 seconds after a 2817 Error Code if link does not recover. At this time, all ISDN trunks associated with this link are put into a maintenance far-end state (see ISDN-TRK for details). See the "Link Recovery" section. m. The application level process associated with the link has failed to establish a data connection with the far end. This problem prevents data from being processed. The condition may exist even if the link is in a data transfer state. Busyout, and release the link to restart it. This is not a Processor Interface hardware problem. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-961 Aux values of concern; any others can be ignored. 433 OCM application did not start correctly. Reboot the OCM adjunct. 435 Application level process could not connect to session layer process. n. Excessive (over threshold) HDLC transmit or receive error rates were reported. Aux Data is the HDLC error rate reported. See the Link Recovery section for troubleshooting this problem Link Recovery This section describes the general procedure to take to recover from link errors and alarms. Refer to the "Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’, before proceeding with this "Link Recovery" strategy. 1. Determine the link status using the status link command. If the link status is "in-service" and (for X.25 links) all the pairs of processor channels are complete under "LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS" (that is, every "/" is followed by a processor channel number, not a blank), then the link is operating correctly and no further action should be taken. If the link status is not "in-service," then go to Step 2. If the link status is "in-service" and (for X.25) some of the processor channel pairs are incomplete (remote channel not specified, meaning that the processor channels are not connected), then look at the status of "status processor-channel" for the local processor channels that are not connected. 2. Look for active PI-SCI alarms and follow the procedure for those alarms if there are any. If there are no PI-SCI problems, go on to the next step. 3. If the link is still down, restart the link via the busyout link lnk-no system technician command followed by the release link lnk-no command. This sequence tears down the call and then tries to bring it back up. If the link is for DCS, it may speed the recovery of the link if busyout link lnk-no and release link lnk-no commands are executed on the switch that is establishing the connection (see Communication Link form). If the link does not recover, go on to the next step. 4. Check the status of the remote endpoint. a. If the link is busied out, release it. b. Is the switch down or restarting? DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-962 5. If link was never brought up: a. Using DEFINITY Communications System, Generic 1 and System 75 Administration and Measurement Reports, 555-200-500 and DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administrationand Feature Descriptions, for instructions as needed, verify that the administration is correct as follows: — Enter the display ds1 PCSS command. Check the compatibility of the DS1 parameters with the far-end and the CSU. — Enter display communication-interface links command. — Enter the display communication-interface processor-channels command. Enter the display communication-interface hop-channels command (if hop-channels are being used). — Enter the display trunk / command (if DS1 is being used for DCS). — Enter the status sync command (if DS1 is being used)— make sure the primary synchronization is administered. 6. If link is an EIA link: — Verify via the Communication-Interface Links form that the information for the EIA connection is correct on the local and remote PBXs. 7. Try to isolate the problem in the link if hardware is at fault. Test the link via the test link lnk-no long system technician command. a. If Test #182 fails three times, replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. b. If Test #182 passes and Test #183 fails, replace the TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or the TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack, whichever is used in the link. If Test #183 still fails, replace the TN765 PI-BD. Refer to Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’. 8. If the preceding tests pass: Check the physical transmission link: a. Are all the circuit packs physically installed? b. Are the cables still connected throughout? c. Check DS1-BD error section for possible connectivity problems if DS1-BD is used in link connection. d. Check CSU options. 9. Finally, restart the Processor Interface circuit pack via reset interface PCS. This resets the circuit pack and restarts ALL the links on it. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-963 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the PI Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. REMINDER: The command line entry to test the PI-LINK MO is: test link lnk-no (s or l). Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Processor Interface Loop Around Test (#182) X D TDM Loop Around Test (#183) X D ISDN Hardware Test (#234) X ND X ND X ND Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9) X ND Port Circuit Information Channel and Control Channel Loop Around Test (#13)2 X ND X ND Order of Investigation Link Quality Test (#233) Short Test Sequence X Data Module Internal Loop Around Test (#175)2 2 Data Module Audits Test (#17)2 1. 2. X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive If the PI-LINK under test is BX.25 and if there is an MPDM or an MTDM as part of the link, then the PI-LINK test sequence is expanded to include the tests on the data module. These tests are run via the PDMODULE or TDMODULE maintenance object. Refer to the PDMODULE TDMODULE (Data Module) Maintenance documentation for descriptions and details of these tests. Processor Interface Loop Around Test (#182) This test is destructive. The Processor Interface Loop Around Test is an on-board Loop Around Test. The test requires that the system technician issue a busyout link lnk-no command before this test is run. This means that the DCS, AUDIX, or ISDN link, for example, is torn down. It does not access the TDM Bus at all. When the circuit pack is put into local loop around mode, frames are looped internally on the circuit pack. If the test fails, the Processor Interface circuit pack reports the failure. It is a good check of most of the working hardware on the Processor Interface circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Table 10-323. Error Code 1 Page 10-964 TEST #182 Processor Interface Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Link was not busied out via system technician. 1. Busyout the link via the busyout link lnk-no command. 2. Retry the test command. 2 4 9 ABORT 16 80 84 85 93 94 102 ABORT 12 FAIL 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Internal system error or possible TN765 PI-BD failure. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, then reset the PI-BD via the test interface PCS long system technician command. 3. If problem still exists, replace the TN765 PI-BD. PI-BD reported that Loop Around Test failed. 1. Retry the test. 2. If it continues to fail, try resetting the circuit pack by the test interface PCS long command. This TEARS down all other links on this circuit pack (DCS, AUDIX, ISDN, etc.). 3. If the problem still exists, replace the TN765 circuit pack. 13 PASS The on-board Loop Around Test on the TN765 circuit pack passed. Most of the hardware on the circuit pack was tested except for the TDM Bus buffers. If problem is isolated to TN765 and this test passes, then replace TN765 circuit pack since TDM Bus buffers could be at fault. ABORT The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to abort with error code 13, then check status of all BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI links on this TN765 via the status link lnk-no command. If all links are not in-service, then reset the TN765 using the test interface PCS long command. 3. If the TN765 fails to reset, refer to the PI-SCI section of this manual. 4. Retry the test link lnk-no command. 5. If the test still aborts with error code 13 or from step 2, and some links are in-service and an error code is still present, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-965 TDM Loop Around Test (#183) This test is destructive. This test requires that you enter the busyout link lnk-no command before running the test. This means that the DCS, AUDIX, or ISDN link, for example, are torn down. This test checks the health of the TN754 or TN784 DIG-LINE or the TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack. This depends on which circuit pack is used on the link. The TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or DS1 Interface circuit pack is put into loop around mode while the PI-BD is instructed to go into remote loop around. If this test fails, and the previous Test #182 passes, then the TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or the DS1 Interface circuit pack should be replaced. It is not run on ports administered as EIA. Table 10-324. Error Code 1 TEST #183 TDM Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Link was not busied out via system technician. 1. Busyout the link via the busyout link lnk-no command. 2. Retry the test command. 2 4 8 ABORT 6 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 9 ABORT TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack is not installed. 1. Install circuit pack and retry the test. 13 ABORT The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to abort with error code 13, then check status of all BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI links on this TN765 via the status link lnk-no command. If all links are not in-service, then reset the TN765 using the test interface PCS long command. 3. If the TN765 fails to reset, refer to the PI-SCI section of this manual. 4. Else, retry the test link lnk-no command. 5. If the test still aborts with error code 13 or from step 2, and some links are in-service and a error code is still present, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Table 10-324. Error Code Page 10-966 TEST #183 TDM Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 16 80 84 85 93 94 102 ABORT Internal system error 1005 ABORT The test is not applicable if the EIA port is being used as part of the link. 12 FAIL PI-BD reported that Loop Around Test failed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, then reset the PI-BD via the test interface PCS long command. 3. If problem still exists, replace the TN765 circuit pack. 1. Retry the test. 2. If Test #182 fails, see section for Test #182 first. 3. If Test #182 passes and Test #183 continues to fail, replace either the TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or the TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack. 4. If Test #183 still fails, replace the TN765 PI-BD. PASS The loop around from the TN765 PI-BD to the Digital Line or DS1 Interface circuit pack and then back to the PI-BD passed. Continued on next page Link Quality Test (#233) This test queries the TN765 circuit pack for the latest error rates (number/minute) for certain counters that are kept by the TN765. The test passes if all the error rates are below a certain threshold. The counters that are queried are the Level 2 Reset SABM(E) [Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode (Extended)] counter, the Level 2 I-frame Retransmission counter, and the invalid LAPD frame counter. Table 10-325. Error Code 3 11 24 TEST #233 Link Quality Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Table 10-325. Error Code 13 Page 10-967 TEST #233 Link Quality Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to abort with error code 13, then check status of all BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI links on this TN765 via the status link lnk-no command. If all links are not in-service, then reset the TN765 using the test interface PCS long command. 3. If the TN765 fails to reset, refer to the PI-SCI section of this manual. 4. Else, retry the test link lnk-no command. 5. If the test still aborts with error code 13 or from step 2, and some links are in-service and a error code is still present, escalate the problem. 4 16385 FAIL 16386 Excessive Level 2 resets (SABM) on link. Excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmission. Possible noisy link. 1. See “PI-LINK”. 16388 FAIL Excessive LAPD invalid frame errors. Could be a noisy link or problems with the near-end Processor Interface circuit pack or with the far-end. 1. See “DS1-BD” for DS1 Interface circuit pack problems. 2. See “PI-LINK”. 16387 FAIL Excessive Level 2 resets and excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmission. 16389 FAIL Excessive Level 2 resets and excessive LAPD invalid frame errors. 16390 FAIL Excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmissions and excessive LAPD invalid frame errors. 16391 FAIL Excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmissions, excessive LAPD invalid frame errors, and excessive Level 2 resets. 1. See PI-LINK ( Processor Interface Link) Maintenance documentation for this maintenance object. 16392 FAIL HDLC receive rate exceeded the threshold. 16400 FAIL HDLC transmit rate exceeded the threshold. 1639316425 FAIL Other combinations of above individual failures can be calculated as follows: 16384 = 0X4000 16385 = 0X4001 16386 = 0X4002 16388 = 0X4004 16316 = 0X4010 PASS PI-LINK currently does not have any of the above errors. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Page 10-968 ISDN Hardware Check Test (#234) This test checks the status of the ISDN hardware which is the DS1 Interface circuit pack and cabling. Status of the DS1 port is kept by the system. The state of the port can be in-service or out-of-service. This state is updated by DS1 Interface circuit pack maintenance. If DS1 maintenance detects a problem with the physical medium near-end or far-end, the Processor Interface Link maintenance is instructed to restart the link. Therefore, if this test fails, the port is considered out-of-service and the link cannot be brought up until DS1 maintenance changes the state to in-service. This is more of a status inquiry than a test. Thus, the only recovery procedure is to refer to DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. Table 10-326. Error Code TEST #234 ISDN Hardware Check Test Test Result ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT This test only runs for ISDN-PRI links. This link is a BX.25 link and, thus, aborts. FAIL Indicates that there is a physical problem with the DS1 facility link. 1. Cross-reference DS1 Interface circuit pack errors for possible reason. Refer to “DS1-BD”. 2. Retry the test. It continues to fail until the DS1 problem is cleared up. PASS DS1 facility is functioning correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Page 10-969 PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO PI-PT MAJOR test interface PCS sh Processor Interface Port PI-PT WARNING release data-module Processor Interface Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN only); C is the carrier designation (for example, A or B for processor complex circuit packs); and S is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 1 or 2 for either the first or second Processor Interface circuit packs). PI-PT is the physical port on the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. If the Processor Interface Link (PI LINK) MO raises an alarm that can be correlated to an on-board port problem, then PI-PT is alarmed. In a system without High or Critical Reliability, there are no tests that run directly on Processor Interface port. The PI-LINK MO is responsible for the testing of the TN765 ports along with DCS links, AUDIX links, ISDN links, etc. Refer to the PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Maintenance documentation for details. In a High or Critical Reliability system, Processor Interface port is used to test the ports on the Standby Processor Interface circuit packs. If the test fails, a Major alarm is raised. More importantly, if a software requested SPE-interchange takes place and an alarm is raised on the Processor Interface port, then the interchange may abort due to alarm severities. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-327. Error Type 0 1 Processor Interface Port PI-PT Error Log Entries Aux Data 0 1 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any Any test interface PCS sh r 1 Standby PI Port Test (#404) MAJOR ON test interface PCS sh 18 0 busyout data-module WARNING OFF release data-module 123 (a) Any None MAJOR ON test link lnk-no Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Table 10-327. Error Type Processor Interface Port PI-PT Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data 130 (b) 257 (a) Page 10-970 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value None Any None MAJOR ON test link lnk-no l Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. PI-LINK raised this alarm against PI-PT. The Processor Interface Loop Around test failed on one of the ports. Refer to PI-LINK Maintenance documentation for details on resolving this alarm. If this error resulted in an SPE-interchange, then issue the test interface PCS sh command on the Standby Processor Interface to try to resolve the alarm. b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes PI-PT can be tested by issuing the test interface PCS command on the Standby Processor Interface circuit pack. If the Active TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack is tested, then the active test sequence is run (which is DESTRUCTIVE). [Refer to PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Maintenance documentation for details on these tests]. Only the Standby Processor Interface test sequence runs tests directly on PI-PT. Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Standby Processor Interface Port Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Table 10-328. Page 10-971 System Technician-Demanded Tests: PI-PT Standby Processor Interface Short Test Sequence Order of Investigation Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND NPE Audit Test (#50) (a) Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a) X X ND Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test (#423) (b) X X ND Standby Processor Interface Port Test (#404) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Notes: a. Refer to “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)” for information about these tests. b. Refer to “PI-BD” for information about this test. Table 10-329. System Technician-Demanded Tests: PI-PT Active Processor Interface Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence SCI Start (#176) (a) SCI Self Test (#231) (a) X NPE Audit Test (#50) (b) Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (b) X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D X ND X ND X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive Notes: a. Refer to the “PI-SCI” for information about these tests. b. Refer to “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)” for information about these tests. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Page 10-972 Standby Processor Interface Port Test (#404) This test is the same as Test #182 in the Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK) Maintenance documentation. However, this test only runs on the Standby Processor Interface circuit pack. It is an on-board loop around test. This test checks the health of physical port on the circuit pack. If the test fails, then a Major alarm is raised on the circuit pack. When the circuit pack is put into local loop around mode, frames are looped internally on the circuit pack. If the test fails, the Processor Interface circuit pack reports the failure. It is a good check of most of the working hardware on the Processor Interface circuit pack. Table 10-330. Error Code TEST #404 Standby Processor Interface Port Test Test Result 2 9 16 80 84 85 93 94 102 ABORT 1124 ABORT Description/Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The PI link for this port is currently disabled. This test does not run on disabled PI links. 1. Retry this test if the PI link is re-enabled. Enter the display communication-interface link command to verify that this link has been disabled. 1125 ABORT The Processor Interface Loop Around Test on this port could not be executed since the Processor Interface circuit pack is not in the correct state. 1. Check PI-BD for possible errors and resolve them first. 2. Rerun the test interface PCS sh command. 3. If the test continues to abort while the PI-BD Test (#423) passes, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Table 10-330. Error Code Page 10-973 TEST #404 Standby Processor Interface Port Test — Continued Test Result Description/Recommendation 1029 1030 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 12 FAIL Processor Interface circuit pack reported that the Loop Around Test failed. 1. Retry the test. If the test continues to fail, try resetting the circuit pack via the reset interface PCS command. 2. If test continues to fail, replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. PASS TN765 Processor Interface Circuit Pack Loop Around Test passed. The hardware associated with this port is functioning properly. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-974 PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) MO Name (in Alarm Log) 2 PI-SCI 1. 2. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run1 test interface PCS Full Name of MO System Communication Interface Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN only); C is the carrier designation (for example, A or B for processor complex circuit packs); and S is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 1 or 2 for Processor Interface circuit packs 1 or 2). For additional repair information, see also PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. ! WARNING: The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and causes all ISDN-PRI and BX.25 links to come down. The PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) MO is used to put the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack into a state such that BX.25 (DCS, AUDIX, etc.) and ISDN links can be established. The TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack has downloadable firmware. It is the responsibility of PI-SCI to download the firmware to the TN765 circuit pack during initialization. Failures while communicating with the TN765 circuit pack are logged against the PI-SCI MO. There can be up to two SCIs. There is a one-to-one correlation of PI-SCI to Processor Interface circuit packs. In a High or Critical Reliability system, there can be four Processor Interface circuit packs, but only two on the same carrier are active at any one time. If errors against the SCI can be related to the Processor Interface circuit pack, then the circuit pack MO is alarmed (PI-BD). See also PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) and PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. When investigating BX.25 (DCS, AUDIX, etc.) and ISDN link problems, resolve PI-SCI errors initially, since they might clear up the Processor Interface link problems. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-975 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-331. Error Type PI-SCI System Communication Interface Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test interface PCS sh r 1 1 (a) 2055 2056 2057 2058 none none none none 257 (b) Any none MAJOR ON test interface PCS l2 769 (c) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 1025 (d) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 1281 (e) Any Sci Start Test (#176) MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 1793 (f) Any none MAJOR ON test interface PCS l2 2049 (g) 90xx Sci Start Test (#176) MAJOR ON test interface PCS l2 2305 (f) Any Sci Self Test (#231) MAJOR ON test interface PCS sh r 2 2561 (h) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 2817 (i) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 2818 (j) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 3073 (f) Any none MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF test interface PCS l2 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. See WARNING below. ! WARNING: 3. The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and causes all ISDN-PRI and BX.25 links to come down. Major alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-976 Notes: a. An error occurred during a hot start processor element interchange that caused the associated Processor Interface links (BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI) to go down temporarily. If these errors reoccur and there are no other errors against PI-BD or PI-SCI, resolve the other alarm first. 2055 The checksum of the PI memory was not able to be retrieved. 2056 The PI was not able to be put into a stable state such that the switch to the new active PI failed to keep the existing PI links up. 2057 The active PI was unable to copy the image of its memory to the standby PI. 2058 System software error. b. This error indicates a possible hardware failure on the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. If the error persists, and the SCI is unstable (resets often), type in test interface PCS long command. The Processor Interface firmware is redownloaded if the checksum fails. If the problem still exists, automatically redownload the Processor Interface firmware by typing reset interface PCS. If this doesn’t work, then replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. These errors also raise alarms against the PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack). NOTE: To replace an SPE complex circuit pack in a Duplication Option System follow the procedures in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. For a Non-Duplication Option System follow procedures in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for instructions on how to replace the Processor circuit pack (TN786 or TN790). Use the following steps for G3i-386 and later systems where the Processor Interface firmware resides in the flash ROM memory in the Processor circuit pack (i.e. TN786 or TN790) instead of Tape as in G3i-286. If the firmware can't be successfully downloaded into the Processor Interface circuit pack after entering the "reset interface PCS" command, then use the following steps: 1. Replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack: 2. After the new TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack has been inserted successfully, enter "test interface PCS long" command to verify the results of tests. If the error still indicates the failure for downloading the firmware into Processor Interface circuit pack, then it's possible that the firmware stored in the Processor circuit pack (TN786 or TN790) is corrupted. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-977 3. Follow the Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ Software Upgrade procedure to load the system software from the Memory Card with the correct software release number. After the system software is successfully loaded into Processor circuit pack, boot the system up with the customer translation memory card in slot. If the failure for downloading the firmware into Processor Interface circuit pack persists after the system reboot, it's possible that the flash ROM chips in Processor circuit pack (TN786 or TN790) may be defective. 4. Replace the Processor circuit pack and repeat the step (3) to load the system software into the Processor circuit pack. Boot the system up again. If the failure for downloading the firmware into Processor Interface circuit pack persists after the system reboot, it's possible that the M-BUS at the backplane of control carrier may be defective. Replace the control carrier. c. Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack. The software lost handshake with the Processor Interface circuit pack. See Note (b) for recovery. d. Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack. See Note (b) for recovery. This error can also be caused by line problems. Investigate possible transmission errors or noise on the associated line. e. An Aux Data value of 23 indicates that the software failed to open the tape in order to download the Processor Interface firmware. Check if the tape is currently in use (that is, if it is spinning or if the yellow LED is on). When the tape is idle, reissue the test interface PCS long command. If the test still fails or if the Aux Data value was other than 23, then refer to Test #176 (Sci Start Test) for details on recovery. For all other Aux Data values, reissue the test interface PCS long command, and refer to Test #176 (SCI Start Test) for details on recovery. NOTE: For G3i-386 and later, see Note (b) for recovery. f. Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack. See Note (b) for recovery. These errors also raise alarms against the PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack). g. Download of Processor Interface firmware failed. If this error persists, then replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. This error also raises an alarm against PI-BD if the threshold is reached. h. An audit of the firmware failed. If BX.25 and ISDN links are still up, no action is needed. If Processor Interface circuit pack is reset continuously, recover as in Note (b). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-978 i. Error while communicating with TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. See Note (b) for recovery. System software problem internal to the process that monitors Processor Interface link activity. Escalate the problem if error causes the Processor Interface to be reset (loss of service is noticed). j. This error indicates that the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack did not clear up the overload condition within one minute of logging the initial 2817 error (overload detected). The circuit pack was reset and all Processor Interface links on that circuit pack were also reset. Short and Long Test Sequences The SCI and Processor Interface circuit pack are both tested via the same system technician command. The system technician command is test interface PCS l or sh where PCS is an active Processor Interface circuit pack. ! WARNING: The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and causes all ISDN-PRI and BX.25 links to come down. For information about testing the Standby Processor Interface circuit pack, see PI-BD Maintenance documentation. If the Active Processor Interface has no enabled links (see Communication-Interface Links Form in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, only XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) tests execute. System Technician Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the SCI Start Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-979 . Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence SCI Start Test (#176) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D SCI Self Test (#231) X X ND Control Channel Loop Test (#52) (a) X X ND X ND NPE Audit Test (#50) (a) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive a. For information about these tests, refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. These tests are run on the PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance object. SCI Start Test (#176) This test is destructive. This test restarts the System Communication Interface. This implies all BX.25 (DCS, AUDIX, mis, etc.) and ISDN links are restarted. The checksum of the downloadable firmware is tested. If the checksum fails, the firmware is redownloaded from tape. If it passes, SCI Start completes and the associated BX.25 and ISDN Links are started up. If a circuit pack needs to be replaced, refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on replacing an SPE circuit pack. The Processor Interface circuit pack firmware is downloaded from the flash ROM memory of Processor circuit pack. If the checksum test fails, then the firmware is re-downloaded again from Processor circuit pack. If it passes, SCI Start completes and the associated BX.25 and ISDN links are started up. If the checksum failure persists, refer the footnote (b) of Hardware Error Table for repair procedure. Table 10-332. TEST #176 SCI Start Test Error Code Test Result 9 10 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Table 10-332. Page 10-980 TEST #176 SCI Start Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 1 FAIL Description/ Recommendation Could not reset the Processor Interface circuit pack. 1. Wait one minute, and retry the command. 2. If test continues to fail, replace TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. 16 80 94 102 FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If problem still exists, redownload firmware using the reset interface command. 3. See note (b) of Hardware Error Table for repair procedure. 200 FAIL Checksum of Processor Interface failed. 1. Wait 1 minute and retry. 2. If the test continues to fail with a checksum failure, there could be corruption on the tape. Replace the tape with a new tape that contains Processor Interface firmware. Retry the command. For G3i-386 and later, see note (b) of Hardware Error Table for repair procedure. 3. In G3i-286 if the problem continues to exist after replacing the tape, then replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions about replacing an SPE complex circuit pack. Retry the command. 23 199 9000s FAIL Processor Interface Download failed. Refer to TABLE A Tape Unit Aux Data Table and follow the repair recommendations. 1. Wait one minute and retry. See note (b) of Hardware Error Table for repair procedure 2. If problem persists and TAPE is idle when command is entered, then a problem may exist in either the TAPE or the Processor Interface circuit pack. Replace the tape with a new tape that contains Processor Interface firmware. Retry the command. PASS TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack initialized correctly. Processor Interface links (BX.25 and ISDN) should recover now. See PI-LINK for more information if links do not recover. Continued on next page SCI SELF TEST Test (#231) This is an on-board test which checks the basic functionality of the TN765 circuit pack. This test runs in the background periodically, or it can be invoked via the test interface PCS command. If this test continuously fails, then replace the Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Page 10-981 TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. Table 10-333. Error Code 11 TEST #231 SCI Self Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 13 ABORT The TN765 PI circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort with error code 13, then reset the TN765 via "test interface PCS long". ! CAUTION: Resetting the TN765 will cause all BX.25 (Audix, cms, etc.) and ISDN-PRI links to be briefly torn down. 3. If TN765 fails to be reset, refer to test 176 section description. 4xxx FAIL Hardware on the TN765 Processor Interface failed. 1. 4000 - Assigned data link hardware failure. 2. 4001 - Unassigned data link hardware failure. 3. 4002 - CPU function test failed - hardware failure. 4. 4003 - Local Processor Interface RAM memory test failed - hardware failure. 5. 4004 - Local EPROM memory test failed - hardware failure. 6. For all of the above errors, retry the test. If it fails again, the Communication Interface should be restarted. Type in a reset interface command. If the reset is successful, retry the test interface command. If Test #231 still fails with error codes other than 4001, then replace TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. If test fails with Error Code 4001, then an on-board failure is associated with a non-used port on Processor Interface circuit pack. TN765 circuit pack should be replaced if this port will be used in the future. PASS TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack passed self-test. On-board hardware is functioning correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Page 10-982 PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO PKT-BUS MAJOR test pkt P l r 2 Packet Bus PKT-BUS MINOR test pkt P l Packet Bus PKT-BUS WARNING test pkt P l Packet Bus 1. Where P is an appropriate port network number determined from the PORT field on the Alarm or Error Log. The Packet Bus consists of a single bus, and one such bus appears in each port network. The Packet Bus in each port network is physically independent. Therefore, there is one instance of the Packet Bus maintenance object for each port network. In DEFINITY, the Packet Bus is used to carry ISDN-BRI and ASAI signaling information. The SPE interface to the Packet Bus is in the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack (PKT-CTRL). Packet Bus maintenance is performed only when the Packet Bus is enabled on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form. Packet Bus testing is dependent on the Packet Bus port of the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack, the TN778 Packet Control Circuit Pack (PKT-CTRL), the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack (EXP-INTF), and on the ISDN-BRI circuit packs (BRI-BD). Packet Bus tests may abort if some of this hardware is not present in the system. Also, these tests may yield inconsistent results if some of this hardware is defective. The interactions between the Packet Bus and the circuit packs that use the bus are complex. For this reason, the Packet Bus can be alarmed due to a circuit pack failure and, conversely, circuit packs can be alarmed due to a Packet Bus failure. Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ describes Packet Bus maintenance and also the interactions of the bus with the Packet circuit packs. The chapter discusses fault isolation and correction procedures, and it should be referenced for all procedures and required decisions. The "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section of Chapter 9 is the normal starting point in the chapter for experienced technicians. However, technicians who are unfamiliar with the Packet Bus and its use should refer to the introductory material. This section on PKT-BUS is limited to a description of the Error and Alarm Log entries for the Packet Bus maintenance object and to a description of the Packet Bus test sequence. A failure of one or more circuit packs that use the Packet Bus can cause a Packet Bus alarm. In addition, a Packet Bus failure can cause loss of service to one or more such circuit packs, as well as to the ports and endpoints associated with the ISDN-BRI circuit pack (BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, and DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Page 10-983 ASAI-ADJ). These interactions are discussed in the "Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus" section of Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’. The following list summarizes some of the important points to consider when working with the Packet Bus. ■ The Maintenance/Test circuit pack (TN771) is a critical tool for isolating Packet Bus faults. This circuit pack is present in each port network of a high or critical reliability system that is using the Packet Bus. In a standard system, the circuit pack may be included as a customer option. If a TN771 is not present, one must be taken to the customer site to allow for proper fault isolation. (A determination as to whether a TN771 circuit pack is in the system is made by entering the list configuration command.) Use of the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port facilities is described under "The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771)" in Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’. Also, in the same chapter, the section entitled "Special Precaution Concerning the TN771" describes other circumstances when a TN771 must be taken to the customer site. ■ Certain catastrophic Packet Bus failures have an effect on Packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance. The following list summarizes the impact of such failures in this regard. ■ ISDN-BRI circuit pack (BRI-BD) in-line errors indicating possible Packet Bus failures are placed into the error log, but are not acted upon. ■ ISDN-BRI port (BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT) in-line errors indicating possible Packet Bus failures are neither placed into the error log nor acted upon. ■ ISDN-BRI endpoint (BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ) in-line errors are neither placed into the error log nor acted upon. ■ Circuit pack and port in-line errors that are not relevant to the Packet Bus or that indicated a circuit pack failure are acted upon in the normal fashion. ■ Normal background maintenance (periodic and scheduled) is not affected. ■ Foreground maintenance (for example, commands executed on the Manager I terminal) are not affected. The actions in the previous list serve to reduce the system load, which could become excessive if too many maintenance objects are affected by a Packet Bus failure. However, such an excessive load should in no way impede the isolation and the correction of the faults. When the actions in the list are implemented, Error Type 3329 is logged against PKT-BUS, and a Warning alarm is raised (although other Packet Bus errors in many cases raise more severe alarms, thereby overriding the Warning alarm). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Page 10-984 A Packet Bus failure in the Processor Port Network (PPN) causes Packet traffic (ISDN-BRI, ASAI) in the Expansion Port Networks (EPNs) to fail, even though there is no Packet Bus failure in the EPN. This is true because all Packet traffic requires communication with the Packet Control (PKT-CTRL) circuit pack in the PPN. Due to this requirement, a PPN Packet Bus failure must be investigated first whenever Packet Bus failures occur in multiple port networks. ■ Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-334. Error Type PKT-BUS Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test pkt 1 (a) 1-2 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test (#570) MAJOR ON test pkt P l r 2 257 (b) Any Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test (#571) MAJOR ON test pkt P l r 2 513 (c) 1-24 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572) MAJOR ON test pkt P l r 2 1793 (d) Any none 2049 (e) 1-3 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572) MINOR ON test pkt P l r 2 2305 (f) 1-24 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572) 3329 (g) 1-7 or 1000-1007 none WARNING ON test pkt P l 3585 (h) Any none MINOR ON test pkt P l 3841 (i) Any none MINOR OFF 1. test pkt P l Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. NOTE: For PKT-BUS, an ON-BOARD alarm indicates a problem with the Packet Bus itself. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Page 10-985 Notes: a. Within the last minute, packet circuit packs have reported errors that indicate a possible Packet Bus failure. The Aux Data value is 1 or 2, indicating that only one or more than one Packet circuit pack (respectively) have reported a possible Packet Bus failure. b. Packet Bus maintenance has been unable to perform loop around tests from the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack (PKT-CTRL) to itself. This could indicate faults on the Packet Control circuit pack rather than on the Packet Bus. Examine the Error and Alarm Logs for any such errors. c. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port for this port network has determined that there are more Packet Bus faults than the port can correct. The Aux Data value indicates the number of faulty leads. d. Packet circuit packs have detected possible Packet Bus failures via in-line error or background test failure. Examine the Error and Alarm logs for more specific PKT-BUS errors. e. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has caused Packet Bus leads to be swapped to spare leads. This error appears only in a High or Critical Reliability system. The Aux Data value indicates the number of faulty leads. If this is the only active error against the Packet Bus, the Packet Bus is still in service. Therefore, due to the disruptive nature of the Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction procedures, repairs should be deferred until a time when these procedures cause the least interruption in service. This matter is resolved via consultation with the customer. However, be sure not to delay repairs for too long, since the switch is not able to recover from another Packet Bus failure until the existing one is resolved. The procedure described in the section entitled "Special Precaution Concerning the TN771" in Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ is used to ensure that the Maintenance/Test is giving correct information. This procedure may require that a new TN771 be taken to the customer site. f. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has detected open leads on the Packet Bus. The Aux Data value indicates the number of open leads. g. Packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance has been disabled due to a Packet Bus failure. The Aux Data value indicates which sources have reported errors that have caused maintenance to be disabled. These sources include the following: ■ In-line errors from Packet circuit packs. ■ Packet Bus Uncorrectable report from the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port. ■ Packet Bus Interface Failure report from the Packet Control. ■ In an EPN, packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance will be disabled if a Packet Bus failure occurs in the PPN. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Page 10-986 The Aux Data values that indicate these sources are identified in the following table: Aux Data 1/1001 Packet Circuit Pack X X X 4/1004 5/1005 X X 6/1006 7/1007 Packet Control X 2/1002 3/1003 Maint/Test Circuit Pack X X X X X X If the Aux Data value is in the range 1000-1007, then Packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance has been disabled in the EPN due to a PPN Packet Bus failure. If the value is greater than 1000, then there is also a failure of the packet Bus in this EPN and the source of the other information can be determined from the table above. NOTE: It is important to remember that problems reported by Packet circuit packs may be caused by any circuit pack. However, only Packet circuit packs can detect such problems (inasmuch as TDM-only circuit packs are not affected by these problems). h. Include Packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance has been disabled due to more than one circuit pack reporting in-line errors. If this occurs more than three times in 15 minutes (that is, if maintenance is disabled due to errors and then re-enabled because no more errors are reported), a Minor alarm is raised against the Packet Bus. Note that this error may still be present in the error log even if the "Circuit Pack Audit Test" reports that only one circuit pack has indicated a problem. This occurs if more than one circuit pack reported errors with in any one minute interval since the Packet Bus fault occurred. NOTE: Because alarms against a Maintenance Object are not resolved until all alarming has been cleared, an alarm due to a missing Maintenance/Test Packet Bus must be cleared by installing a Maintenance/Test circuit pack before it can be determined if other Packet Bus alarms have been resolved. i. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port for this port network is not in service. This error appears only in a High or Critical Reliability system, and it can occur in the following cases: Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Page 10-987 ■ The Packet Bus port has been busied out (indicated by an Error Type 18), and a Warning alarm is active in the same port network. Release the port by entering the release port PCSS04 command. ■ The Packet Bus port has failed. Resolve any alarms. ■ The Maintenance/Test circuit pack was not recognized by the system at the last system restart. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. There is no Maintenance/Test circuit pack installed in this port network. One must be installed. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when you are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test (#573) X X ND Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572) X X ND Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test (#571) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test (#571) This test uses circuitry on the Packet Control circuit pack (TN778) to look for faults on the Packet Bus. If the Packet Control circuit pack has detected parity errors on the Packet Bus, or if it is unable to loop back data to itself, the test fails. The test passes if no parity errors are detected and if data is successfully looped back. This test provides information only for the PPN of a standard system. If the test is run in an EPN or in the PPN of a High or Critical Reliability system, the test aborts. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Table 10-335. Page 10-988 Test #571 Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result 1022 ABORT Description/ Recommendation No Packet Control circuit pack exists in this port network. 1. This test gives information only for the PPN. Ignore results from this test whenever it is run in other port networks. 1024 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is in use by Packet Control maintenance at this time. The test cannot be completed until the Packet Control circuit pack becomes available. 1. Wait for Packet Control maintenance to finish using the Packet Control circuit pack. (The green LED goes out.) 2. Re-enter the command. 1141 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is out-of-service. 1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack is busied out (this is indicated by an Error Type 18 logged against PKT-CTRL). If the pack is busied out, release the pack by entering the release packet-control command. Then re-enter the command. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack is NOT busied out, refer to PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for recommended repair procedures. 1143 ABORT This test is run only in high or critical reliability systems. 1. Ignore results from this test when it is run in a high or critical reliability system. 2000 ABORT The test timed-out while waiting for the packet to be returned from the loop around. 1. Re-enter the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet Control (look for PKT-CTRL errors in the Error and Alarm Logs). 2076 ABORT The parity error check circuitry on the Packet Control circuit pack is not functioning correctly. 1. Run the test again. 2. If the same abort occurs again, refer to PKT-CTRL to attempt to correct the fault. 2060 ABORT The link on the Packet Bus that is being used to perform the test has failed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet Control (look for PKT-CTRL error in the Error and Alarm Logs). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Table 10-335. Page 10-989 Test #571 Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 2100 ABORT Maintenance could not allocate all of the necessary system resources to perform this test. 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. Description/ Recommendation 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL The Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test failed (parity errors were detected from the test packet). 2 FAIL The Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test failed (the Packet Control circuit pack could not bring up a loop around link on the Packet Bus). 1. Refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to determine the cause of the test failures. PASS No faults have been detected on the Packet Bus by the Packet Control circuit pack. This indicates that the Packet Bus is operating correctly. Continued on next page Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572) This test queries the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port about the state of health of the Packet Bus. If the Maintenance/Test circuit pack indicates that the Packet Bus has faults, the test fails. The corresponding failure code describes the severity, type, and number of faults. The test passes if the Packet Bus is fault-free. NOTE: A Maintenance/Test circuit pack is usually not present in a Standard system unless the customer has purchased this circuit pack to use for ISDN-PRI test calls, or to enhance the system’s ability to quickly recognize a Packet Bus failure. Table 10-336. Error Code 1006 TEST #572 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Packet Bus port of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is out of service. 1. Determine if the port is busied out. If so, release the port by entering the release port PCSS04 command. Re-enter the test command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Table 10-336. Error Code 1142 Page 10-990 TEST #572 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation No Maintenance/Test circuit pack Packet Bus port is in service in this port network. 1. If this system has High or Critical Reliability, either (a) the Maintenance/Test circuit pack for this port network has failed, and should be replaced, (b) the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been busied out, and should be released, or (c) there is no Maintenance/Test circuit pack in this port network, and one must be installed. 2. In a system without High or Critical Reliability, the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port may not be present. If the port is present, and if it is busied out or has failed, release or replace the circuit pack. If there is no Maintenance/Test circuit pack, ignore the results of this test for this port network. 2000 ABORT The test timed-out while waiting for an uplink CCMS response from the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port . 2059 ABORT The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has reported a hardware failure. 1. Re-enter the test command. 2077 ABORT The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query located more than one Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port in the port network. NOTE: The software should not allow this to occur. This is an Internal system error. Attempt the following work-around steps. 1. Remove all Maintenance/Test circuit packs from the port network. 2. Insert one Maintenance/Test circuit pack (there should not be more than one in a port network). 3. Re-enter the test command. 2100 ABORT Maintenance could not allocate all of the necessary system resources to perform this test. 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. XYZZ 1xxx FAIL The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has detected faults on the Packet Bus. The error code is encoded as follows: The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has reconfigured the Packet Bus around the faulty leads. This occurs only in high or critical reliability systems. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Table 10-336. Error Code Page 10-991 TEST #572 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2xxx The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port is unable to correct all of the Packet Bus faults it has detected. x0xx None of the Packet Bus faults are open faults. x1xx At least some of the Packet Bus faults are open faults. Look for Error Type 2305 in the Error Log. The Aux Data value indicates the number of open leads. xxZZ The last 2 digits of the error code indicate the total number of faulty Packet Bus leads detected by the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port. 1. Refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to determine the cause of the failures. PASS No faults have been detected on the Packet Bus by the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. This indicates that the Packet Bus is operating correctly. Continued on next page Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test (#573) This test determines whether Packet circuit packs have reported Packet Bus-related in-line errors within the last minute. If so, the failure code indicates whether one or more circuit packs have reported failures within the last minute. Due to the one minute time constraint included as part of this test, the test is designed to delay 15 seconds before returning a result in cases where the test has failed within the last five minutes. This procedure helps ensure that a repeated sequence of the test does not always yield the same result. If no failure has occurred in the last five minutes, a PASS is returned immediately. Table 10-337. Test #573 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test Error Code Test Result 2500 ABORT Description/ Recommendation An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL One Packet circuit pack has reported Packet Bus-related in-line errors within the last minute. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-BUS (Packet Bus) Table 10-337. Page 10-992 Test #573 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 2 FAIL Description/ Recommendation More than one Packet circuit pack has reported Packet Bus-related in-line errors within that last minute. 1. Refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to determine the cause of the error reports. PASS No Packet circuit packs have reported Packet Bus-related in-line errors within the last minute. This indicates that the Packet Bus is healthy, or that a Packet Bus fault is transient or is being caused by a faulty Packet circuit pack. If this test passes while there are other signs of a Packet Bus failure (as indicated, for example, in the Error/Alarm Logs or by other test failures), refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to isolate the problem. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-993 PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run C1 Full Name of MO PKT-CTRL MAJOR reset packet-control PKT-CTRL MINOR test packet-control C2 Packet Control Circuit Pack PKT-CTRL WARNING release packet-control C Packet Control Circuit Pack 1. 2. Packet Control Circuit Pack If the specified Packet Control circuit pack is in the active SPE, it must first be busied-out via the busyout packet-control C command. After testing has completed, the Packet Control circuit pack should be released from the busyout state via the release packet-control C command. Where C is the carrier designation (A or B) and should be specified only in a High or Critical Reliability system. ! CAUTION: A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included in Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’. This flowchart, along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in resolving problems that are not isolated to the Packet Control. Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference Chapter 9 in addition to the MO documentation for Packet Bus. The TN778 Packet Control circuit pack is the hardware component that serves as the interface between the SPE and the Packet Bus. It terminates the Link Access Procedure D (LAPD) protocol and provides support for thousands of signaling links. As shown in Figure 10-79, a Packet Control link generally terminates on the Packet Control circuit pack and a packet endpoint which is connected to a Packet circuit pack. An ASAI adjunct is an example of a packet endpoint, and a TN556 is an example of a Packet circuit pack. In G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386, the following Packet circuit packs (packs that can connect to the Packet Bus) are available: ■ TN556 ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack ■ TN570 Expansion Interface Circuit Pack ■ TN771 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack ■ TN778 Packet Control Circuit Pack Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-994 Packet Bus Endpoint 1 Packet Packet Circuit Control Pack Endpoint N Figure 10-79. Hardware Configuration The Packet Control circuit pack is not administered in the normal manner; there is no add or remove command associated with it. However the "Packet Bus Activated?" field on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form indicates if the Packet Control circuit pack is "administered." If the "Packet Bus Activated?" field is set to "yes," a Packet Control circuit pack should be installed in the system, since the Packet Control circuit pack is required in systems which use the Packet Bus. If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed, and the "Packet Bus Activated?" field is set to "yes," a major on-board alarm is raised against the PKT-CTRL MO. This alarm indicates that the Packet Control circuit pack is "missing." Refer to the "Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for more information on the "Packet Bus Activated?" field. Note that the Packet Control circuit pack is listed by the list configuration all or list configuration control commands only if the Packet Control circuit pack is physically inserted into its slot and the Packet Bus is activated by setting the "Packet Bus Activated?" field to "yes" on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form. If the Packet Control circuit pack is physically inserted into its slot but the Packet Bus is not activated, then the Packet Control circuit pack will not appear in the output of the list configuration all or list configuration control commands. The status packet-control C command provides useful information about the Packet Control circuit pack. This command displays the service state of the Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-995 circuit pack and various link-related information. The service state "out" indicates that service is not being provided and users are being disrupted. Maintenance takes the Packet Control circuit pack out-of-service due to certain faults, or as a result of the busyout packet-control C command being run. Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for more information on the status packet-control command. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-338. Error Type Packet Control Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 1(a) Any None MAJOR ON reset packet-control C (k) 18 0 busyout packet-control C WARNING OFF release packet-control C 257 (b) Any None MAJOR ON reset packet-control C (k) 513 (c) 0 None 769 (d) Any Loop Around Test (#585) 1025 (e) 1 Parity Circuitry Test (#584) MINOR ON test packet-control C l 1281 (f) 0 None 1537 (g) 0 None 1793 (h) 0 None 2049 (i) 0 None 2305 (j) Any Download Test (#581) MAJOR OFF reset packet-control C Notes: a. This error occurs when maintenance software resets the Packet Control circuit pack due to an in-line error or certain test failures. Once a threshold number of these errors occur, maintenance places the Packet Control circuit pack into an out-of-service state, and a major on-board alarm is raised on the Packet Control circuit pack. b. This error occurs due to certain in-line errors and test failures. This error is very serious, and when it occurs maintenance software immediately escalates testing to the destructive reset test (#586). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-996 c. This error indicates that a loss of communication was detected between the SPE software and the Packet Control circuit pack. No alarm is raised. However, if this error occurs repeatedly, software testing escalates to the Reset Test (#586) so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can be determined. d. This error occurs when the Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585) fails because a link cannot be established or because the Packet Control circuit pack cannot send and receive data correctly. No alarm is raised. However, if this error occurs repeatedly, software testing escalates to the Reset Test (#586) so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can be determined. e. This error occurs when the Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test (#584) fails, thus indicating a possible fault with the parity circuitry in detecting Packet Bus parity errors. If this error occurs a number of times exceeding a defined threshold, a minor on-board alarm is raised. f. This error occurs when a certain circuit pack-level diagnostic test fails, thus indicating a transient fault (which has been recovered) existed on the Packet Control/Packet Bus interface. No alarm is raised because the error does not isolate the fault to the Packet Control circuit pack. However, if the error occurs repeatedly, software testing escalates to the Reset Test (#586) so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can be determined. g. This error occurs when a certain circuit pack-level diagnostic test fails, indicating there is a fault on the Packet Control/Packet Bus interface. No alarm is raised because the Packet Bus may be the source of problem. When this error occurs, Packet Bus maintenance is notified, thereby causing appropriate tests to run. h. This error occurs when a parity error is detected by the Packet Control circuit pack, indicating some data sent over the Packet Bus is corrupted. No alarm is raised against the Packet Control circuit pack because the problem may be associated with the Packet Bus. When this error occurs, Packet Bus maintenance is notified, thereby causing appropriate tests to run. i. This error occurs when the Packet Control circuit pack receives a threshold number of frames with invalid address. No alarm is raised because there is no direct indication of a Packet Control fault. The frames may be corrupted by the sending side or by the Packet Bus. No maintenance activity is triggered by this error. No action is required. j. This error occurs when the Packet Control Download Test (#581) fails. Once a threshold number of these errors occur, a major off-board alarm is raised. Maintenance software retries the download test repeatedly until it passes. Since the reset packet-control C command causes the firmware to be downloaded and provides additional diagnostics on this error type, this command should be used when a download failure has occurred. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-997 k. If the specified Packet Control circuit pack is in the active SPE, it must first be busied-out via the busyout packet-control C command. After testing has been completed, the Packet Control circuit pack should be released from the busyout state via the release packet-control C command. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes When inspecting errors in the system and deciding which ones to address, always investigate errors in the order they are presented in the tables below. By clearing error codes associated with the Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Table 10-339. Active PKT-CTRL Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Packet Control Reset Test (#586) D Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test (#584) Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585) X Packet Control Error Counter Read and Clear Test (#583) 1. D/ND1 X ND X ND X ND D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Table 10-340. Standby PKT-CTRL Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 Packet Control Reset Test (#586) X X ND Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585) X X ND Packet Control Error Counter Read and Clear Test (#583) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Packet Control Error Counter Read and Clear Test (#583) This test involves reading and clearing the error counters on the Packet Control circuit pack. The test is performed by sending multiple maintenance requests to the Packet Control circuit pack and waiting for the response to each of the "read and clear" commands from the circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-341. Error Code Page 10-998 TEST #583 Packet Control Error Counter Read/Clear Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1141 FAIL The Packet Control circuit pack is not operational. A busied-out Packet Control circuit pack can still be operational. 1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack has an active major alarm (via the display alarm command). If it does, follow the recommended repair procedures to retire the alarm. Once the alarm is retired, the original command can be retried. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack does not have an active major alarm, wait one minute and retry the original command. If the Error Code 1141 is again observed, go to the next step. 3. If the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE and is not currently busied-out, issue the busyout packet-control C command. Issue the reset packet-control C command. If the reset command fails, follow the recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the reset command passes, issue the release packet-control C command (if the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and reissue the original command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-341. Error Code TEST #583 Packet Control Error Counter Read/Clear Test — Continued Test Result 1 Page 10-999 FAIL Description/ Recommendation Software was unable to read and clear the Packet Control circuit pack error counters. 1. Retry the command. 2. If the same error code is observed, and the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE and is not currently busied-out, issue the busyout packet-control C command. Issue the reset packet-control C command. If the reset command fails, follow the recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the reset command passes, issue the release packet-control C command (if the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and then reissue the original command. PASS The Packet Control circuit pack succeeded in servicing the read and clear error counter requests. Continued on next page Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test (#584) This test checks the error detection capability of the Packet Control circuit pack’s circuitry by verifying that it correctly identifies frames on the Packet Bus with parity errors. NOTE: This test aborts in a High or Critical Reliability system, or in a system with an alarmed PPN Packet Bus. Table 10-342. Error Code 1024 TEST #584 Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Packet Control circuit pack’s parity circuitry is currently being used by another maintenance test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1139 ABORT The PPN Packet Bus is alarmed. 1. Try to retire the alarm associated with the PKT-BUS (Packet Bus). Refer to the Alarm log via the display alarm command. 2. Retry the command when the alarm associated with the Packet Bus circuit pack is retired. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-342. Error Code 1141 Page 10-1000 TEST #584 Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Packet Control circuit pack is not operational. NOTE: A busied-out Packet Control circuit pack can still be operational. 1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack has an active major alarm (via the display alarm command). If it does, then follow the recommended repair procedures to retire the alarm. Once the alarm is retired, the original command can be retried. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack does not have an active major alarm, then wait one minute and retry the original command. If the Error Code 1141 is observed again, go to the next step. 3. If the Packet Control is not currently busied-out and is on the active SPE, issue the busyout packet-control C command. Issue the reset packet-control C command. If the reset command fails, follow the recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the reset command passes, issue the release packet-control C command (if the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and then reissue the original command. 1143 ABORT The test should not be run in a High or Critical Reliability system. 1. No action is required since the parity circuitry is not used to monitor the Packet Bus in a High or Critical Reliability system. 2100 ABORT Was unable to allocate necessary resources. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL The Packet Control parity circuitry is malfunctioning. 1. Issue test packet-control C long command to retry the test. 2. This could be caused by a Packet Bus fault. Refer to Chapter 9 for the procedures to be followed. 3. The Packet Control circuit pack needs to be replaced. However, it is likely that the Packet Control is providing service, and only its ability to maintain the Packet Bus is affected by the fault. If the Packet Control appears to be providing service (packet endpoints are functioning and/or the status packet-control C command indicates that links are established), it is not critical to replace the circuit pack immediately, and a time may be chosen to minimize customer down-time. PASS The Packet Control parity circuitry is functioning properly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Page 10-1001 Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585) This test checks whether the Packet Control circuit pack can send and receive data correctly. The test performs the following major functions: 1. Establishes an LAPD link from the Packet Control circuit pack to itself. (See Figure 10-80.) 2. Transmits and receives test data over the testing link. Packet Bus Packet Control Figure 10-80. Test Configuration Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-343. Error Code Page 10-1002 TEST #585 Packet Control Loop Around Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus is alarmed. 1. Try to retire the alarm associated with the Packet Bus. Refer to the Alarm Log via the display alarm command. 2. Retry the command when the alarm associated with the Packet Bus circuit pack is retired. 1141 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is not operational. NOTE: A busied-out Packet Control circuit pack can be operational. 1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack has an active major alarm (via the display alarm command). If it does, follow the recommended repair procedures to retire the alarm. Once the alarm is retired, the original command can be retried. 2. If the Packet Control circuit pack does not have an active major alarm, wait one minute and retry the original command. If the Error Code 1141 is again observed, go to the next step. 3. If the Packet Control circuit pack is not currently busied-out and is on the active SPE, issue the busyout packet-control C command. Issue the reset packet-control C command. If the reset command fails, follow the recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the reset command passes, issue the release packet-control C command (if the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and then reissue the original command. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-343. Error Code 1-3 Page 10-1003 TEST #585 Packet Control Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Maintenance was unable to establish a loop around link from the Packet Control circuit pack back to itself, or was unable to receive the data that was sent out over one side of the loop around link. 1. Issue test packet-control C short command to retry the test. 2. If the same error code is observed, maintenance software automatically escalates the testing. No specific action is required. PASS The Packet Control circuit pack can send and receive data correctly. Continued on next page Packet Control Reset Test (#586) This test resets the Packet Control circuit pack, downloads Packet Control circuit pack firmware form tape, and then causes the Packet Control circuit pack to begin operation. ! WARNING: This test is destructive and disrupts service when run on the Packet Control circuit pack in the Active SPE. This test is not destructive when run on the Packet Control circuit pack in the Standby SPE of a High or Critical Reliability system. When this test is run on the Packet Control circuit pack on the Active SPE, the "busyout packet-control C" command must be executed first. Once testing has been completed, a busied-out Packet Control should be released via the release packet-control C command. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-344. Error Code Page 10-1004 TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1015 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack is not busied out. 1. Retry the command after running the busyout packet-control C command. 1152 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack hardware was successfully reset and the circuit pack was successfully put back into service. However, a new image of Packet Control circuit pack firmware was not able to be downloaded from the tape, because the tape was unavailable. Nonetheless, the existing firmware on the circuit pack is valid, and there is no need to repeat this test. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1-3 FAIL The reset test failed. 1. Retry the command. 2. If it fails again with the same error code, replace the Packet Control circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-344. Error Code 5 Page 10-1005 TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The SPE could not communicate with the Packet Control circuit pack. This indicates that either the Packet Control circuit pack is not installed or that it has failed. 1. Examine the appropriate carrier to determine if there is a Packet Control circuit pack in the correct slot. If there is, go to the next step. If there isn’t, the problem is that the Packet Control circuit pack is administered (that is, the "Packet Bus Activated?" field on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form is set to "y") but the circuit pack isn’t installed. If the system is supposed to have a Packet Control circuit pack, the system must be upgraded appropriately (see upgrade documentation). If the system is not supposed to have a Packet Control circuit pack, then the Packet Control circuit pack should be unadministered by setting the "Packet Bus Activated?" field on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form to "n." Refer to the "Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for more information on the "Packet Bus Activated?" field. 2. Retry the command. 3. If it fails again with the same error code, replace the Packet Control circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-344. Error Code 1150 1188 1189 1190 Page 10-1006 TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Packet Control circuit pack was not successfully downloaded, and the Packet Control circuit pack currently does not contain valid downloadable firmware. The error codes have the following meanings: 1150- Generic tape error (not any of the following three errors) 1188- Internal system error 1189- Tape currently in use 1190- No tape cartridge in tape drive 1. Verify that there is a tape cartridge in the tape unit. 2. If the tape unit is in use (the yellow LED on the tape drive is on and there is tape cartridge motion), wait until the first request is complete. If there does not appear to be tape motion and/or the yellow LED on the tape drive is not on, then go to the next step. 3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of three times. 4. Verify that the tape unit is not alarmed. Use the display alarm command and refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation for recommended repair procedures to retire the alarm, if one exists; otherwise go to the next step. 5. If the test has failed consistently with the 1150 error code, then escalate the problem. If the test has failed consistently with the 1188 error code, replace the tape cartridge and then retry the reset command. If the test failed consistently with the 1189 error code, escalate the problem. If the test failed consistently with the 1190 error code, then replace both the tape cartridge and the tape drive. 2064 FAIL The downloaded firmware cannot be executed with this hardware vintage of the Packet Control circuit pack. 1. Retry the command. 2. If it fails again with the same error code, replace the tape cartridge and retry the reset command. 2065 FAIL The tape does not contain valid Packet Control circuit pack firmware. 1. Retry the command. If the same error code is returned, replace the tape and then retry the command. 2073 FAIL After being downloaded from the tape, the Packet Control circuit pack does not contain valid downloadable firmware in its memory. 1. Retry the command. 2. If the tests fails again with the same error code, then the tape may contain corrupted Packet Control circuit pack firmware. Replace the tape and retry the command. If the test still fails with this error code, then replace the Packet Control circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack) Table 10-344. Error Code 2102 Page 10-1007 TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation As the Packet Control circuit pack firmware was being downloaded from system tape, a block of data could not be read from the tape. This indicates a problem with the tape unit, and not with the Packet Control circuit pack. 1. Test the TAPE with the long option and with a repeat option of 3. If any of the tests fail, or if there are any tape alarms, refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation and follow the recommended repair procedures. If a tape problem is detected and then fixed, then retry the reset command. 2. If no tape problem was detected in the previous step, then there may be a problem with the area on the tape where the Packet Control circuit pack firmware resides. Replace the tape cartridge and then retry the reset command. 2500 FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The reset command passed and the Packet Control circuit pack is operational. If the Packet Control circuit pack was busied-out, it needs to be released (via the release packet-control C command) before it can be considered in service. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1008 PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PMS-LINK MINOR test pms l PMS Link PMS-LINK WARNING test pms PMS Link Property Management System (PMS) is a stand-alone computer system that a hotel/motel-type and a hospital-type environment use for services such as reservations, registration, messaging, housekeeping, night audit, billing, and inventory. The PMS Link provides a communications channel between DEFINITY Generic 1 or Generic 3iV2 and a customer-owned PMSs so that the PMS can interrogate the system about the information related to the following features: ■ Message Waiting Notification ■ Controlled Restriction ■ Housekeeping Status ■ Check-in/Check-out ■ Room Change/Room Swap Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Feature Description, 555-230-204 for details on the PMS feature. The PMS Link is administered to a data extension that provides a standard EIA 232C interface to the PMS. A PMS can be connected through a data module (PDM, MPDM, DTDM) and a port on the TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, or through an ADU and a port on the TN726 Digital Line circuit pack. PMS Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between DEFINITY Generic 1 and Generic 3iV2 and a PMS device. The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis, detection of errors during normal operation, actions for troubleshooting, and raising alarms for serious problems. PMS Link Maintenance uses a "try-and-wait" mechanism for maintaining the PMS Link. If a PMS Link is torn down due to an error, PMS Link Maintenance attempts to bring up the link immediately. If the trial of "Link Setup" fails, PMS Link Maintenance waits for five minutes before the next retry. If the number of retries reaches the value of a threshold (12), a Minor alarm is raised for service attention. PMS Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements composing the PMS physical link [the external PMS device, Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM), and Digital Line Port of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, ADU and Data Line Port of TN726 Data Link circuit pack, and Data Channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack]. If PMS Link Maintenance cannot restore the PMS Link, then the maintenance tests of these individual components of the PMS Link must be executed to diagnose faults. If system technician-demanded test pms-link command fails, no alarm is generated. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1009 Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link 1. Determine the status of the PMS Link. Enter status pms command and make sure that the PMS Link is not busied out for maintenance. If the link is "down," then continue with the next step. 2. Where does the PMS Link connect? Enter display system hospitality and find out the destinations of the PMS Link. 3. Determine the status of the data extension. Enter status data command and verify whether the data extension is in in-service/idle state. If the data extension is NOT available, then look for the extension number in Alt Name field of Hardware Error Log. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for resolutions. 4. Is a data channel on Network Control circuit pack in in-service/idle state? Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data channels on Network Control circuit pack. Enter status data command and make sure that at least one data channel is in in-service/idle state. If no data channel is available, then look for DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to the DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation; if not present, escalate the error. 5. Is the external PMS device available? Make sure that the PMS device is ON-LINE and ready for service. Check the physical connectivity between Data Module and the PMS device. It is recommended that you busy out the PMS Link before executing maintenance tests over objects composing the PMS Link. If the PMS Link is busied out, then all PMS Link maintenance actions are deactivated. The interference to tests of other MO is off. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1010 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values PMS Link Maintenance Error Log Entries Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Error Type Aux Data Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test pms sh r 1 18 (a) 0 busyout pms-link WARNING OFF release pms-link 257 (b) 0-6, 99, 255 Link Retry Test (#215) MINOR/ WARNING2 OFF test pms-link l 513 (c) 0-6,255 None 769 (d) 0-6,255 None 1025 (e) 4x3 None 1281 (f) 1x3 None 3 None test pms-link 1537 (g) Nx 1793 (h) 0-6,255 None 2049 (i) 0-6,255 None 2305 (j) 5x3 None release pms-link or test pms-link 2561 (k) 0-6,255 None test pms-link 2817 (l) 10x3 20x 3 test pms-link None 30x3 3073 (m) 3841 (n) 1. 2. 3. 7x3 None 3 None 2x Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Is any integer. Notes: a. The PMS Link has been busied out for system technician-demanded maintenance via the busyout pms-link command. The link is torn down. Enter the release pms-link command to restore the link. b. The Link Retry Test (#215) fails. The Aux Data field contains either the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04) or an Error Type of 99 indicating no data channels are available for setting up DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1011 the link, or an Error Type of 255 for the internal system error generated upon initialization or power-up. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’ section for resolution. c. The PMS physical link is down due to the following causes: cable to the PMS device is disconnected; the PMS device is powered off; or the data extension to which the PMS device connects has been busied out. The Aux Data field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04) or an Error Type of 255 for the internal system error generated upon initialization or power-up. Check the connectivity of wire and cable among wall jacket, data module, and the PMS device. Enter status data and verify that the data extension of the PMS device is in in-service/idle state. If the data extension is not available, then refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’ section for recommended repair strategy. d. No communication between DEFINITY Generic 1 or Generic 3iV2 and PMS for a period of time (the time is specified in "system hospitality" administration). The PMS Link is torn down. To clear this error, refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’ section. e. The link was taken down because the switch could not receive an incoming message from the PMS. The message from the PMS repeatedly had corrupted data or the switch received requests for acknowledgment but never received a message to be processed. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. f. The link was taken down because the switch could not send an outgoing message. The message, which was sent but not acknowledged, was flushed. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. g. The PMS has been busied out for maintenance at the request of the PMS. The PMS Link is torn down. The reason code (N), if present, is that supplied by the PMS in the request message. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. No alarm is raised against this error. h. PBX buffer overflows due to either heavy call traffic or PMS protocol message rate being faster than the PMS/PBX protocol specifications allow. The PMS Link is torn down. PMS Link maintenance software waits for five minutes before attempting to set up the link again. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), advise the customer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1012 call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log (see Note). NOTE: The PMS should be checked for adherence to message rate defined in the PMS/PBX protocol specifications. No alarm is raised against this error. i. The attempt to swap the database between PBX and PMS failed three times consecutively due to excessive PMS/PBX protocol violations, buffer overflows, or PMS Link outages. The PMS Link is NOT torn down. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. No alarm is raised against this error. j. The PMS Link has been busied out for system technician-demanded maintenance via the busyout pms-link command or has been brought down via the test pms-link long command. The PMS Link is torn down, and PMS Link maintenance stops attempting to reestablish the link in the case where the busyout pms-link command has been used. When the test pms-link long command has been used, PMS Link maintenance continues to try to reset the link. To restore the PMS Link after use of the busyout pms-link command, issue the release pms-link command. To restore the PMS Link after use of the test pms-link long command, issue the test pms-link command. k. The PMS Link is physically established, but the protocol has not been started by the PMS before the protocol timer expires. The PMS Link is NOT torn down. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. NOTE: The PMS should be checked to make sure that it attempts to start the protocol according to the PMS/PBX protocol specifications. No alarm is raised against this error. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1013 l. Error Type 2817: Aux values of concern: 10x The PMS violated the application protocol. The first message after a request to initiate a database exchange was not the start of a database exchange. The message is processed. If this error type with this aux data value recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. See Note. 20x The PMS violated the application protocol. The start of a database exchange was received in a state in which it was not expected. The message is ignored. If this error type with this Aux data value recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. See the next Note. 30x The PMS violated the application protocol. The end of a database exchange was received when no exchange was in progress. The message is ignored. If this error type with this Aux Data value recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log. NOTE: The PMS should be assessed for adherence to the PMS/PBX protocol specifications. No alarm is raised against this error. m. The link was taken down by the switch because the threshold for application protocol violations has been exceeded by the PMS. The protocol never started and messages were received and/or messages were received in a state in which they were not expected. (Refer to Error Type 2817 for recommended strategy.) n. Link was taken down by the switch because the threshold for link protocol violations has been exceeded by the PMS. PMS is sending "garbage" to the switch. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1014 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Link Retry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Link Tear Down Test (#213) Link Retry Test (#215) 1. X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D X ND D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Link Tear Down Test (#213) This test is destructive. This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external PMS device. If the link has been disconnected already, then this test just returns "PASS." All resources allocated for a PMS Link are released after this test. Table 10-345. TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result 40 50 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1010 ABORT The PMS Link has been busied out and placed in the out-of-service state. 1. Enter release pms-link command to release the PMS Link from busyout state. 2. Retry test pms long command to execute the test. FAIL Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. PASS The PMS Link is torn down. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link) Page 10-1015 Link Retry Test (#215) This test sends a message to the PMS software process to make a data call to the extension where the PMS device connects. If the PMS Link is already up, then this test passes without making any data call. Table 10-346. Error Code 10 20 TEST #215 Link Retry Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 30 ABORT Internal System Error. 1. Refer back to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’ section for resolution. 1010 ABORT The PMS Link has been busied out and placed in the out-of-service state. 1. Enter release pms-link command to release the PMS Link from busyout state. 2. Retry test pms command to execute the test. FAIL The PMS Link CANNOT be established. 1. Refer back to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’ section for restoring the PMS Link. PASS The PMS Link is up. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Page 10-1016 PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PMS-PRNT/JNLPRNT MINOR test journal pms-log/wakeup-log l PMS Printer/ Journal Printer PMS-PRNT/JNLPRNT WARNING test journal pms-log/wakeup-log PMS Printer/ Journal Printer NOTE: PMS-PRNT stands for the pms-log printer. JNL-PRNT stands for the wakeup-log printer. Since the maintenance strategy for the both the JNL-PRNT and PMS-PRNT MOs is the same, both of these MOs are described in this section. In DEFINITY Generic 1 and Generic 3iV2, there are up to two journal printers. They are identified as the wakeup-log printer which is shared between the Automatic Wakeup feature and the Emergency Access to Attendant feature to print scheduled reports and log of events, and the pms-log printer which is used as a backup of the PMS output device to print the audit trail data of all PMS transactions executed by the system and the PMS Housekeeping Status Change events while the PMS Printer Link is not available. The journal printer link is administered to a data extension that provides a standard EIA 232C interface to the printer. The printer can be connected through a data module (PDM, MPDM, DTDM) and a port on the TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, or through an ADU and a port on the TN726 Data Line circuit pack. PMS Printer Link Maintenance provides a strategy in the system for maintaining the link between the system and a PMS device (an external Journal Printer device). The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis, detection of errors during normal operation, actions for troubleshooting, and raising alarms for serious problems. PMS Printer Link Maintenance uses a try-and-wait mechanism for maintaining the PMS Printer Link. If a PMS Printer Link is torn down due to an error, PMS Printer Link Maintenance intends to bring the link up immediately. If the trial of Link Setup fails, PMS Link Maintenance waits for five minutes before the next retry. If the number of retries reaches the value of a threshold (15), a Minor alarm is raised for service attention. PMS Printer Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements composing the journal printer physical link, for instance, the external printer device, Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM) and Digital Line Port of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, ADU and Data Line Port of TN726 Data Line circuit pack, and Data Channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack. If PMS Printer Link Maintenance cannot restore the PMS Printer Link, then the maintenance tests of these individual components of the PMS Link must be executed to diagnose faults. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Page 10-1017 Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link 1. Determine the status of the PMS Printer Link. Enter status journal-printer wakeup-log|pms-log command and make sure that the journal printer link is not busied out for maintenance. If the link is down, then continue to the next step. 2. Where does the journal printer link connect? Enter display system hospitality and find out the destinations of the PMS Printer Link. 3. Determine the status of the data extension. Enter status data extension command and verify whether the data extension is in the in-service/idle state. If the data extension is NOT available, then look for the extension number in Alt Name field of Hardware Error Log. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for resolutions. 4. Is a data channel on Network Control circuit pack in the in-service/idle state? Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data channels on Network Control circuit pack. Enter status data extension command and make sure that at least one data channel is in the in-service/idle state. If no data channel is available, look for DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to “DATA-BD”. 5. Is the external printer device available? Make sure that the printer device is ON-LINE and ready for service. Check the physical connectivity between Data Module and the printer device. It is recommended that you busyout the PMS Printer Link before executing maintenance tests over objects composing the PMS Printer Link. If the PMS Printer Link is busied out, then all PMS Printer Link maintenance actions are deactivated. The interference to tests of other MOs is off. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Page 10-1018 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-347. PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT Link Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test journal wakeup-log|pms-log sh 18 (a) 0 busyout journal wakeup-log/ pms-log WARNING OFF release journal wakeup-log|pms-log 257 (b) 0, 3 to 6 255 Link Retry Test (#215) MINOR/ WARNING 2 OFF test journal wakeup-log|pms-log 1 513 (c) 0, 3 to 6 255 test journal wakeup-log|pms-log 769 (d) 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Both PMS Printer and Journal Printer are administered to the same extension, and the printer is not connected. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for resolution. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. System Technician busied out the Journal Printer Link. The link is torn down. Enter release command to restore the link. b. Link Retry Test (#215) fails. Physical link cannot be set up, usually because of hardware problems such as power off or cable disconnect. The Aux Data field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04), an Error Code 255 for the Internal system error, or 0 which indicates that the data module connected to the PMS Printer Link is out-of-service. Refer to ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for resolution. c. Physical link cannot be set up, usually because of hardware problems such as power off or cable disconnect. The PMS Printer Link physical link is down due to the following causes: cable to the printer device is disconnected, the printer device is powered off, or the data extension where the printer device connects to has been busied out. The Aux Data field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04). Check the connectivity of wire and cable among wall jacket, Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Page 10-1019 data module, and the printer device. Enter status data and verify that the data extension of the printer device is in the in-service/idle state. If the data extension is not available, then refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for resolution. d. Link idle timer; link comes down. This error indicates that the printer device is in an off-line state, for example, paper jam or paper out for a printer device. Check the printer device and act promptly to put it back to on-line state. Enter test journal wakeup-log|pms-log command to set up the printer link. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Link Retry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Link Tear Down Test (#213) Link Retry Test (#215) 1. X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D X ND D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Link Tear Down Test (#213) This test is destructive. This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external printer device. If the link has been disconnected already, this test just returns PASS. All resources allocated for a PMS Printer Link are released after this test. Table 10-348. Error Code TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 40 ABORT Internal system error 50 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Table 10-348. Error Code TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test — Continued Test Result 1010 Page 10-1020 ABORT Description/ Recommendation The link has been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter release journal wakeup-log|pms-log command to release the link from busyout state. 2. Retry test journal wakeup-log|pms-log l command to execute the test. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The link is torn down. Continued on next page Link Retry Test (#215) This test sends a message to the journal printer management software process to make a data call to the extension where the printer device connects to. If the journal printer link is already up, this test passes without making any data call. Table 10-349. Error Code TEST #215 Link Retry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 10 ABORT Internal system error 20 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 30 ABORT Internal system error 1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for instructions. 1010 ABORT The PMS Printer Link has been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter release journal wakeup-log|pms-log command to release the link from busyout state. 2. Retry test journal wakeup-log|pms-log l command to execute the test. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Table 10-349. Error Code Page 10-1021 TEST #215 Link Retry Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The link CANNOT be established. 1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for instructions. PASS The link is up. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-1022 POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems MO Name (in Alarm Log) POWER 1. Alarm Level MINOR Initial Command to Run1 test environment P Full Name of MO Battery & Battery Charger Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log. Generic 1 and Generic 3iV2 offer two basic cabinet type configurations: (1) the multicarrier cabinet system and (2) the single-carrier cabinet system. Both cabinet system configuration may be powered by either an external AC or DC power source. NOTE: For environment maintenance, PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects for a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant. The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet configuration and the type of powering. Therefore, refer to the following list to find the appropriate section(s). ■ For a single-carrier cabinet system, refer to the DC-POWER (Single-Carrier Cabinet Power) Maintenance documentation for environment maintenance strategy. ■ For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external AC power source, refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections: AC-POWER (AC Power) for AC-Powered Systems, CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems, or POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems. ■ For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source, refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections: AC-POWER (AC Power) for DC-Powered Systems, CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems, or POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for DC-Powered Systems. The G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386 multicarrier cabinet is equipped with rechargeable batteries that can span short AC power outages. In a multicarrier PPN system with High or Critical Reliability, the cabinet can be powered for 10 seconds from the batteries. After this time, all port carrier power is shed and the control carrier is powered for another 10 minutes. In a High or Critical Reliability PPN system, these times are cut to five seconds and five minutes, respectively. In an EPN multicarrier cabinet, the entire cabinet can be powered for 15 seconds from the batteries, after which time the entire cabinet is powered down. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-1023 In a multicarrier cabinet system, the POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) MO represents the battery charger and the battery which are located in the lower left corner of the cabinet. Should anything go wrong with the battery or charger, they must be replaced using the procedure described in ‘‘Replacing the Battery and Battery Charger’’ below. The system detects one of the following three problems with the batteries or charger: 1. Reserve Fault—The charger has detected a problem within itself or the batteries and has notified the system. 2. High Charge Rate—The batteries are charging at a high charge rate. This means that batteries with a low charge are being recharged or that a problem may exist with the batteries or the charger. 3. Prepare to Disconnect (Low Battery)—The batteries are in danger of being drained to a point where the batteries would be damaged. This warning often occurs after multiple power failures. The batteries take 30 hours to fully charge after being drained. A fully charged battery pack should bridge two power failures without causing a low battery warning to occur. Replacing the Battery and Battery Charger Use the procedure below to replace the Battery and Battery Charger: 1. Move the power switch on the battery charger to OFF. ! WARNING: Always turn off the battery charger before replacing the batteries. Failure to do so results in damage to the 397B battery charger. 2. Disconnect the cord from the outlet on the front of the battery charger. 3. Remove the screw at the top left of the cover and open the cover to access the charger. 4. Check the battery voltages at the test points. The test points on the CE Distribution Unit check all 3 batteries wired in series (the voltages should read 144 volts, 3X48 volts = 144 volts) . NOTE: An ordinary voltmeter can be used to check battery voltages at the test points, but it may not produce valid results. If the battery voltage readings are below 48 volts (the voltages at test points should read 144 volts, 3X48 volts = 144 volts), the battery is probably defective. However, a normal voltage reading does not necessarily mean the battery is good; under load, a defective battery with a normal reading on the voltmeter may discharge rapidly. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-1024 5. Check the battery dates and replace the batteries if they are more than four years old or if a POWER alarm is present. NOTE: If any defective batteries are found, replace all of them. Batteries are ordered in sets of three and should be replaced as such. 6. If no defective batteries are found, replace the entire charger. 7. Close the cover and secure it with the screw. 8. Reconnect the cord and move the power switch to ON. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Battery & Battery Charger Error Log Entries Error Type 1 Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 1 Any Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (Error Code 8) MINOR ON test environment P sh r 1 257 Any Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (Error Code 4) MINOR ON test environment P sh r 1 769 Any Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (Error Code 2) MINOR ON test environment P sh r 1 3840 1005 or 1028 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) ON test environment P sh r 1 0 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. a. Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-1025 generated from other tests in the testing sequence. During this test, the status LED on the battery charger is lit and extinguished if the status of the battery charger is reported as normal. This event is a result of checking that the battery charger is connected. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (a) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) (b) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c) X X ND Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (d) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test c. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. d. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. NOTE: This test only shows up in the test sequence if there is a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Page 10-1026 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN for the status of the battery pack and battery charger, and reports the result. During this test, the status LED battery charger is lit and extinguished if the status of the battery charger is reported as normal. This event is a result of checking that the battery charger is connected. Table 10-350. Error Code 1000 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT Battery Charger is not connected. 1. If the system has a UPS supplying the power, ignore this error since the UPS supplies the power, not the battery and battery charger. 2. The batteries probably need charging and may be drained if there were power outages. Reconnect the battery charger to allow the batteries to recharge. If Test #5 is run before the batteries are completely charged, the test fails. 3. Wait 24 hours and rerun the test. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000, check for system powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier cabinet system or DC-POWER alarms in a single-carrier cabinet system. Repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a Duplicated Option PPN, PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Repeat the test. 4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, escalate the problem. 2028 ABORT Internal System Error prevented the extinguishing of the Battery Charger status LED. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Table 10-350. Error Code 2029 Page 10-1027 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System Error. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2 FAIL The system is in nominal power holdover, and the battery is currently so low that the system disconnects power very shortly. 1. If power returns, the port carriers in the PPN should power up again. All the circuit packs should be reinserted, and the system should continue to operate normally. There will probably be a Minor alarm against Battery & Battery Charger because the batteries are recharging. 2. If power does not return, the system shuts down to prevent damage to the batteries. If power is restored, the system reboots. No manual intervention is required. 3. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN could be reporting this condition incorrectly. Resolve all alarms on these MOs and rerun the test. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that ARE NOT be detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. If the test still fails, follow normal escalation procedures. 4 FAIL The battery is currently being charged at the high charge rate. 1. After 30 hours, the battery should be fully charged, and this error should disappear. 2. If after 30 hours the battery is still in the high charge rate, an alarm is raised. Display the Error Log with the display errors command and select the category "environ" to display only environment-related errors. Look for POWER errors of type 257. The FIRST OCCURRENCE of this error indicates the time when the battery started charging. Use this time as the starting point to determine if the battery has been charging for 30 hours. If the battery has been charging for 30 hours, then replace the battery. ! CAUTION: Read the section, ‘‘Replacing the Battery and Battery Charger’’ before proceeding. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Table 10-350. Error Code 4 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) 6 Page 10-1028 FAIL Description/ Recommendation 3. If the batteries were replaced, it can take up to 24 hours for the new batteries to be charged (new batteries are shipped uncharged). If Test #5 is run again before the batteries are completely charged, the test fails. If the charger was replaced, some time must be allowed for the new charger to recharge the batteries. Therefore, in either case, wait at least 24 hours and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication) Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN could be reporting this condition incorrectly. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that ARE NOT be detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. Resolve all alarms on these MOs, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. This indicates that Error Codes 2 and 4 have occurred. Refer to these descriptions. Also, refer to the description for Error Code 14 for this test. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Table 10-350. Error Code 8 Page 10-1029 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation NOTE: For a Global AC MCC (J58890CH) use the procedures outlined in step 3. There is a reserve power fault. A problem exists with the battery charger (more probable) or the battery (less probable). 1. Replace the battery charger or the battery. The fault should disappear. However, the test fails with Error Code 4 if the battery is charging. ! WARNING: Always turn off the battery charger before replacing the batteries. 2. Rerun the test. If the test still fails with an error code other than 4 (that is, there is something wrong besides the battery needing charging), the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN could be reporting this condition incorrectly. Resolve all alarms on these MOs and rerun the test. There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that ARE NOT be detected by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. If the test still fails, then follow normal escalation procedures. 8 FAIL (cont’d.) (cont’d.) 3. Procedures for a Global MCC (J58890CH): a. Look to see if any “red” LEDs are “on” on any of the rectifier modules or the BIU (Battery Interface Unit) located in the Power Distribution Unit (J58890CH). b. If the BTW (Battery Temp Warning) LED on the BIU is “on” check the batteries for a over temp condition(a) if temp is normal(a) replace the BIU, If the test still fails replace the battery in a small battery system. For a large battery system escalate the problem. c. If the BIF (Battery Interface Unit) LED is “on” replace the battery interface unit. d. If the BNA (Battery Not Available) LED is “on” check the battery connections including connector J20. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems Table 10-350. Error Code Page 10-1030 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation e. If you have an alarm and all LEDs are ok (PWR OK and BOK) on the rectifier modules, and the BIU (Battery Interface Unit), make sure the BIU and the RM0850 rectifiers are seated properly (plugged in). If the BOK LED on the BIU is ok use the following information to check the number of rectifiers serving this cabinet: Number of carriers Number of rectifiers per cabinet per cabinet ----------------------------|--------------------------------1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 4 If the number of rectifiers is correct replace the maintenance circuit pack in the EPN or PPN. 4. If the test still fails, then follow normal escalation procedures. 10 FAIL This indicates that Error Codes 2 and 8 have occurred. Refer to these descriptions. Also, refer to the description for Error Code 14 for this test. 12 FAIL This indicates that Error Codes 4 and 8 have occurred. Refer to these descriptions. Also, refer to the description for Error Code 14 for this test. 14 FAIL This indicates that Error Codes 2, 4, and 8 have occurred. Refer to these descriptions. NOTE: This could also indicate that the detection logic on the DUPINT (Duplication Interface), PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), or EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack is defective. Such an error will not be detected by the respective maintenance. If many environment tests are failing, replace the suspect circuit pack (depending on system configuration). PASS The Maintenance/Tape Processor in a multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN have reported that the status of Battery & Battery Charger is good. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-1031 POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems MO Name (in Alarm Log) POWER 1. Alarm Level MINOR Initial Command to Run1 test environment P Full Name of MO Battery & Battery Charger Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log. NOTE: For environment maintenance, the PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects for a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant. The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet configuration and the type of powering. Refer to the DC-POWER (DC Power) Maintenance documentation for environment maintenance strategy. In a DC-powered cabinet, the POWER MO still exists, but serves no functional purpose. Because the system cannot determine the type of powering provided, all POWER tests should always pass or abort. Since the tests should never fail, POWER alarms should not be raised. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-351. Power Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data 01 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 1 Any Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (Error Code 8) MINOR ON test environment P sh r 1 257 Any Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (Error Code 4) MINOR ON test environment P sh r 1 Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems Table 10-351. Page 10-1032 Power Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data 769 Any Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (Error Code 2) 3840 (a) 1005 or 1028 Assoc. Test Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board MINOR ON Test to Clear Value test environment P sh r 1 ON Continued on next page 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Note: a. This error occurs only in a multi-carrier cabinet and can be ignored but not cleared for DC-powered systems. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Test (#5) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (a) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c) X X ND Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (d) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f) X X ND Order of Investigation Battery & Battery Charger Query 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems Page 10-1033 Notes: a. Refer to “AC-POWER” (AC Power) for a description of this test. b. Refer to “EMG-XFER” (Emergency Transfer) for a description of this test. c. Refer to “CABINET” (Cabinet Sensors) for a description of this test. d. Refer to “EXT-DEV” (External Alarm) for a description of this test. e. Refer to “RING-GEN” for a description of this test. NOTE: This test shows up in the test sequence only if there is a TN768 or TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested. Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a standard PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN for the status of the battery pack and battery charger, and reports the result. In a DC-powered system, this test should never fail. During this test, the status LED on the battery charger is lit and extinguished if the status of the battery charger is reported as normal. This event is a result of checking that the battery charger is connected. Table 10-352. Error Code 1000 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1005 ABORT Battery charger is not connected since the system uses DC power and the battery charger and battery are for AC-powered systems. 1. Ignore this error in DC-powered systems. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2028 ABORT Internal system error prevented the extinguishing of the Battery Charger status LED. 1. Although this test is not relevant for DC-powered systems, this error should trigger close monitoring of the system as this error means that internal system problems exist. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems Table 10-352. Error Code any Page 10-1034 TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system is incorrectly reporting a problem with power. If this test fails, the problem is with the circuit pack and not with POWER. 1. The suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun. PASS All that can be inferred is that the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system is working properly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Page 10-1035 PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) MO Name (in Alarm Log) MIN1 PR-MAINT 1. Alarm Level Initial Command to Run test processor a/b sh/l Full Name of MO Maintenance Processor Alarms on the PROCR and PR-MAINT maintenance objects are indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack. The TN790 Processor circuit pack is comprised of the RISC Processor (PROCR), the Maintenance Processor (PR-MAINT), and the Memory (PR-MEM). PR-MAINT is responsible for monitoring the sanity of the RISC Processor. PR-MAINT contains the hardware required for controlling the environmental conditions. The Maintenance/Tape Processor provides the serial interfaces for the administration terminal and DCE port. The Maintenance Processor also provides the communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote maintenance capability. INADS connectivity is through the internal or external modem. The external modem is connected to the DCE port. When the external modem is the administered modem option the internal modem is disabled. The TN790 has a higher speed 9600 baud internal modem or can support an external modem connected to the DCE port. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-353. Error Type 0 2 PR-MAINT Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value1 0 Any Any Any test processor a/b sh r 1 1(a) Any MTP Reset Test (#101) MIN ON test processor a/b l r 3 257(b) Any MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) 513(c) Any MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) MIN ON test processor a/b r 8 769(d) Any MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) MIN ON test processor a/b l r 3 1025(e) Any MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) MIN OFF test processor a/b r 5 test processor a/b r 2 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-353. Error Type Page 10-1036 PR-MAINT Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value1 1537(f) Any MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) MIN ON test processor a/b r 3 1793(g) Any MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) MIN ON test processor a/b r 3 2049(h) Any External Modem Present Test (#230) MIN OFF test processor a/b r 2 Continued on next page 1. 2. The MTP Reset Test (#101) logs you off. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) can also log you off. Manually repeat the command with the ‘‘long’’ option for the designated number of times when testing from the PPN SAT. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The MTP Reset Test (#101) has failed. b. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) has failed. c. The MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) has failed. d. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) has failed. An error of 769 with an aux data of 5 indicates a hardware problem and testing cannot clear it. Replace the circuit pack. e. The MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) has failed. f. The MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) has failed. g. The MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) has failed. h. The External Modem Present Test (#230) has failed. NOTE: Refer to the FAIL section of each test that fails for further instructions. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the MTP Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The following table is for the TN790 [RISC] System. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Processor Cache Test (#895)(a) Page 10-1037 Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Processor Cache Audit (#896)(a) X X ND Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82)(a) X X ND Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80)(a) X X ND Processor Write Buffer Test (#900)(a) X X ND Memory Burst Read Test (#908)(a) X X ND X ND X ND Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86)(a) X ND Memory Functional Test (#332) (b)(c) X D Read All Memory Test (#85)(a) Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87)(a) X MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102)(d) X X ND External Modem Present Test (#230)(d)(e) X X ND MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103)(d) X X ND MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) X X ND MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) X X ND MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) X X ND MTP Reset Test (#101) X D MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104)(d) X D Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor) for a description of these tests. b. Refer to PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) for a description of these tests. c. This test is run only on the standby SPE in a high or critical reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command. d. This test only runs on the active SPE. e. This test aborts if an external modem is not administered. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Page 10-1038 MTP Reset Test (#101) This test is destructive. The test resets the Maintenance Processor. The destructive nature of this test causes the following: Table 10-354. ■ System Access Terminal to log off ■ DCE port to terminate data transmission ■ Any current memory card access to terminate and also to tear down any remote access INADS connection TEST #101 MTP Reset Test Error Code Test Result 100 ABORT Description/ Recommendation The requested test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1196 FAIL The MTP did not respond to being reset. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. 1197 FAIL The Maintenance Processor was reset, but it responded with a NOT PASS status, indicating that it did not pass initialization correctly. The MTP is not functioning correctly. The system continues to function. Environmental monitoring is lost, as is communication with the Standby Processor. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-354. Error Code Page 10-1039 TEST #101 MTP Reset Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The Maintenance Processor was reset, and it passed initialization correctly. The other MTP tests should be examined to verify that the MTP is functioning correctly. 1. Enter test processor a/b and verify that the MTP is functioning correctly. Continued on next page MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) This test is a nondestructive test.When the internal modem is administered, the test validates the correct operation of the remote access CO trunk used by INADS. The MTP first goes off-hook, then on-hook on this trunk. If the loop current is detected, the test passes. If the external modem is administered the MTP sends an AT command sequence that will cause the external modem to go OFF-HOOK and wait for dial-tone. If the modem detects dial-tone, the test passes. This test is not allowed if the remote access line is in use. Table 10-355. TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test Error Code Test Result 100 ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. 1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and set the test remote access port field to ‘‘y.’’ (If you have an INADS line, set the field to ‘‘y.’’ 2. Rerun the test. 1030 ABORT This test is not run on the Standby SPE. 1131 ABORT INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or because INADS is dialed into the system. 1. If INADS is communicating with the switch the INADS trunk is working. There is no need to run this test. 2. Or if required. Wait about ten minutes (until the INADS session is terminated) and then re-enter the command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-355. Page 10-1040 TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 1000 ABORT Description/ Recommendation System software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1050 ABORT System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is administered. 1. Enter the change system-parameters maintenance command. Verify that the ‘‘Test Remote Access Port?’’ field is set to ‘‘y.’’ 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2500 Internal system error 2033 Could not send MTP message. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT MTP did not respond to the test request. 1. Repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long command in order to reset MTP and to examine the results of the MTP Reset Test (#101). 3. Replace the Processor circuit pack. 4. If only the MTP outpulse relay test is aborting, escalate problem. FAIL MTP reported test failure. No loop current detected. The following steps apply to either an internal or external modem ( Some additional steps apply to an external modem only). 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. For an external modem, if the test continues to fail: a. If Test #230 failed, use the external modem recommendations listed in Test #230. b. If Test #230 passes, the MTP most likely received a NO DIAL TONE response to the ATD command sent from the MTP. This problem is between the modem and the INADS trunk. 3. Examine the INADS trunk for connectivity, and manually check for loop current. 4. If there is no INADS trunk, this test should be disabled. To disable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and change the Test Remote Access Port field to ‘‘n.’’ 5. If the INADS trunk checks out okay, but the test still fails, check the backplane connector wiring. 6. If the backplane wiring checks out okay, replace the Processor circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-355. Error Code Page 10-1041 TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation MTP detected a loop current on the remote access port. 1. If the system cannot call INADS, or INADS cannot contact the system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct. Approved external modems with factory default settings are expected to work if administered correctly using the change system-parameters command. Continued on next page MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) This test is a nondestructive test. The test does a loop around by using the MTP INADS channel. Test data is sent through the modem out toward the INADS trunk. The data is looped around before the actual trunk, and it comes back into the on-board modem. The data is then verified for integrity. The internal modem is tested when the internal modem is selected. The external modem is tested when the external modem is selected. When an external modem is administered in place of the internal modem, the test loops data in the MTP DUART ahead of the connection to the external modem. This test also causes the MTP DUART to verify that Clear-To-Send (CTS) is being supplied by the modem. NOTE: The test does not send any data onto the INADS trunk. However, to pass, the test does require the trunk to be present Table 10-356. Error Code 100 TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-356. Error Code 1018 Page 10-1042 TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test has been disabled via administration. 1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and set the Test Remote Access Port field to ‘‘y.’’ 2. Rerun the test. 1030 ABORT This test is not run on the Standby SPE. 1050 ABORT System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is administered. 1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance command, and verify the entry for the Test Remote Access Port field. 2. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1131 ABORT INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or because INADS is dialed into the system. 1. If INADS is communicating with the switch the INADS trunk is working. There is no need to run this test. 2. Or if required. Wait about ten minutes (until the INADS session is terminated) and then re-enter the command. 1000 ABORT 2033 System software resources required to run this test are not available. Internal system error 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT MTP did not respond to the test request. Repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. If only the MTP Analog Loop Around Test is aborting, escalate the problem. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long command in order to reset MTP, and examine the results of the MTP Reset Test (#101). 2500 ABORT Internal system error Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-356. Error Code Page 10-1043 TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation MTP reported test failure. The system is not able to reliably contact INADS with alarm data. However, the system continues to provide good service. 1. For an internal modem: a. If MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) is also failing, check for the presence of the INADS trunk, and resolve any INADS trunk problems. b. If Test #102 passes, the fault is on the Processor circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced. 2. For an external modem: a. Check the power to the modem. b. Check the RS-232 cable connections from the DCE terminal on the switch to the DTE connector on the modem. Transmit, Receive, RTS, and CTS signals must be communicating between the MTP DUART hardware and the modem hardware c. The MTP DUART or related circuitry on the processor circuit pack may have failed. The circuit pack should be changed at your convenience. PASS For an internal modem—MTP detected correct data through the loop back connection. For an external modem—The test detected correct data through the loop back in the MTP DUART hardware ahead of the RS232 connection to the modem, and received a CTS signal from the external modem. 1. If the system cannot call INADS, or if INADS cannot contact the system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct. Continued on next page MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) This test is destructive. The test terminates any PPN SAT session, and it is a coordinated test of the MTP dual port ram (DPR). The DPR is a section of memory that is shared by the MTP and by the RISC Processor circuit pack. Control messages and data are passed through the DPR. The test forces both sides to read and write the DPR simultaneously in alternate locations. The DPR test causes the PPN SAT to log off before the test result is displayed. The test result is determined according to the terminal from which the test is run. If the test is run from the PPN SAT, system technician should log back in and examine the Error Log for an error against PR-MAINT, with Error Type 769, no Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Page 10-1044 Aux Data. This error entry indicates that the MTP DPR Test failed and that the Processor circuit pack should be replaced. NOTE: If the test is being run from a terminal other than the PPN SAT (for example, EPN SAT, remote access, etc.), the test results are displayed on the screen. NOTE: A dial-up (through the INADS port) does not display the results discussed in the previous paragraph. However, a dial-up through data channels does display these results. Table 10-357. Error Code 100 TEST #104 MTP Dual Port Ram Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1030 ABORT This test in not run on the Standby SPE. 2000 ABORT The response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2028 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The dual port RAM is not functioning correctly. Communication between the processor and MTP is lost. The system is not able to report environmental alarms, communicate with the Standby SPE, or reboot from tape, if necessary. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS Dual port RAM is functioning. Communication exists between the Processor circuit pack and the MTP. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Page 10-1045 MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) This test is a nondestructive test. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test is simply a query from a maintenance process to the MTP. The MTP must reply for the test to pass. Table 10-358. Error Code 100 TEST #106 MTP Sanity Handshake Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. 2000 ABORT The response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The MTP did not respond to the Sanity Handshake Query. 1. Re-enter command with the ‘‘long’’ option. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The MTP responded to the Sanity Handshake Query. Continued on next page MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) This test is a nondestructive test. The test places the SAT channel of the MTP into a loop around mode, and it verifies the data integrity of the channel. Although the test is nondestructive, it causes loss of keyboard input from the PPN SAT. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-359. Error Code 100 Page 10-1046 TEST #228 MTP SAT Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. 2000 ABORT The response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 2034 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The SAT channel failed the Loop Back Test. The SAT is probably unusable for administration or maintenance. The EPN SAT, if available, or remote access can still be used. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The SAT channel passed the Loop Back Test. 1. If the PPN SAT is not usable, check the SAT itself, along with the cabling. Continued on next page MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test (#229) This test is a nondestructive test. The test places the Auxiliary channel of the MTP into a loop around mode, and it verifies the data integrity of the channel. The Auxiliary channel is used as the CDR output port Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-360. Error Code 100 Page 10-1047 TEST #229 MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1000 ABORT The system software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. The change system-parameters cdr command needs to administer CDR. (Refer to the Implementation Manual for more information on administering this port.) 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2033 Internal system error 2034 Port busy 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2500 ABORT The system software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1048 ABORT An External Modem is administered to this port. FAIL The Auxiliary channel failed the Loop Back Test. The AUX port may not be sending any auxiliary data to the auxiliary collection device. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The Auxiliary channel passed the Loop Back Test. The auxiliary port is functioning correctly. 1. If no auxiliary data is being recorded, check the auxiliary collection device, and verify that it has been set up and connected correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Page 10-1048 MTP External Modem Present Test (#230) This test is a nondestructive test on the remote access line, and will run only if the channel is idle. The test validates the presence of an external modem with a firmware invoked AT command. The test will pass if the modem responds with “OK” to the AT command. Table 10-361. Error Code 100 TEST #230 External Modem Present Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. 1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and set the Test Remote Access Port field to ‘‘y.’’ 2. Rerun the test. 1030 ABORT This test is not run on the Standby SPE. 1131 ABORT INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or because INADS is dialed into the system. 1. If INADS is communicating with the switch the INADS trunk is working. There is no need to run this test. 2. Or if required. Wait about ten minutes (until the INADS session is terminated) and then re-enter the command. 1000 ABORT 2033 System software resources required for this test are not available. Internal system error 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1049 ABORT External Modem is not administered. 1050 ABORT System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is administered. 1. Enter the change system-parameters maintenance command, and verify the entry for the Test Remote Access Port field. 2. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2000 ABORT MTP did not respond to the test request. 1. Repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long command in order to reset MTP, and examine the results of the MTP Reset Test (#101). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems]) Table 10-361. Error Code 2500 Page 10-1049 TEST #230 External Modem Present Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal System software Error 1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL MTP reported test failure. The system is not able to reliably contact INADS with alarm data. However, the system continues to provide good service. The MTP did not receive an OK response after sending the AT command to the modem. 1. If test #103 failed, follow the external modem recommendations for that test failure. 2. If Test #103 passes: a. Check the RS-232 connections from the DCE terminal on the switch to the DTE terminal on the modem. RTS and CTS signals are being communicated between the MTP DUART hardware and the modem hardware. Transmit and receive signals may not be communicated correctly. b. Check the modem administration using the change system-parameters maintenance command, especially changes from default parameters. c. Check the modem settings, especially changes from factory defaults. ! CAUTION: The fault may be on the Processor circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced. PASS MTP detected correct data from the external modem. The MTP received an OK response after sending the AT command to the modem. 1. If the system cannot call INADS, or if INADS cannot contact the system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct. If an external modem is being used instead of the internal MTP modem, modem settings may be wrong. Approved external modems with factory default settings are expected to work if administered correctly using the change system-parameters maintenance command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Page 10-1050 PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) MO Name (in Alarm Log) PR-MAINT 1. Alarm Level Initial Command to Run MIN test processor a/b sh/l Full Name of MO Maintenance/Tape Processor1 The full Name of the MO in a 386 system is Maintenance Processor. NOTE: For systems with a TN790 Processor Circuit Pack use maintenance object PR-MAINT (MainTenance Processor TN790 RISC Systems). The 80386 Processor, Memory, and MainTenance Processor comprise the TN786B Processor circuit pack [386 systems]. The TN786B Processor circuit pack is comprised of the 80386 Processor (PROCR), the MainTenance Processor (PR-MAINT), and the Memory (MEMORY). On the TN786B circuit pack, PR-MAINT is responsible for monitoring the sanity of the 80386 Processor. The major difference between the two circuit packs is that on the TN786B circuit pack, there is no tape for PR-MAINT to control and Memory is on the circuit pack. The rest of the functionality is the same. On both circuit packs, PR-MAINT contains the hardware required for controlling the environmental conditions. The Maintenance/Tape Processor provides the serial interfaces for the administration terminal and CDR ports. The Maintenance/Tape Processor also provides the communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote maintenance capability. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Page 10-1051 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-362. Error Type Maintenance/Tape Processor Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value1 02 0 Any Any Any test processor a/b sh r 1 1 (a) Any MTP Reset Test (#101) MIN ON test processor a/b l r 3 257 (b) Any MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) 513 (c) Any MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) MIN ON test processor a/b r 8 769 (d) Any MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) MIN ON test processor a/b l r 3 1025 (e) Any MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) MIN OFF test processor a/b r 5 1537 (f) Any MTP Manager I Loop Around Test (#228) MIN ON test processor a/b r 3 1793 (g) Any MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) MIN ON test processor a/b r 3 1. 2. test processor a/b r 2 You must manually repeat the command with the "long" option the designated number of times from the administration terminal or from a remote administration terminal because the Sanity Timer Test (#83) logs you off. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The MTP Reset Test (#101) has failed. b. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) has failed. c. The MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) has failed. d. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) has failed. An error of 769 with an aux data of 5 indicates a hardware problem and testing will not clear it. The circuit pack should be replaced. e. The MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) has failed. f. The MTP Manager I Loop Around Test (#228) has failed. g. The MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) has failed. NOTE: Refer to the FAIL section of each test that fails for further instructions. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Page 10-1052 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the MTP Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) (a) X X ND Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80) (a) X X ND Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) (a) X X ND Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) (a) X D MTP Reset Test (#101) X D MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) X D Order of Investigation MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) X X ND MAP Manager I Loop Around Test (#228) X X ND MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) X X ND MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) X X ND MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) X X ND X ND X ND Text Checksum Test (#86)(b) X ND Memory Functional Test (#332) (b) X D X ND Read All Memory Test (#85)(b) Memory Error Detection Test (#87)(b) Memory Board Check Test (#631) (b) 1. X X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to PROCR for a description of these tests. b. Refer to MEMORY [386 systems only] for a description of these tests. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Page 10-1053 MTP Reset Test (#101) This test is destructive. The test resets the Maintenance/Tape Processor. The destructive nature of this test causes the following: Table 10-363. Error Code ■ Administration terminal to log off ■ CDR port to terminate data transmission ■ Any current tape access to terminate and also to tear down any remote access INADS connection TEST #101 MTP Reset Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 10102 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 10104 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 10105 FAIL The MTP did not respond to being reset. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. 10106 FAIL The Maintenance/Tape Processor was reset, but it responded with a NOT PASS status, indicating that it did not pass initialization correctly. The MTP is not functioning correctly. The system should continue to function, but it will not have the ability to save translation to tape, or to read tape if the system needs to be rebooted. Environmental monitoring is lost, as is communication with the Standby Processor. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Table 10-363. Error Code Page 10-1054 TEST #101 MTP Reset Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation The Maintenance/Tape Processor was reset, and it passed initialization correctly. The other MTP tests should be examined to verify that the MTP is functioning correctly. 1. Enter test processor a/b and verify that the MTP is functioning correctly. Continued on next page MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) This test is a nondestructive test. The test validates the correct operation of the remote access CO trunk used by INADS. The MTP first goes off-hook, then on-hook on this trunk. If the loop current is detected, the test passes. This test is not allowed if the remote access line is in use. Table 10-364. Error Code TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. 1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and set the test remote access port field to "y." (If you have an INADS line, set the field to "y." If you are testing the Standby PR-MAINT, a refresh spe-standby command must be successfully executed before you proceed to Step 2. 2. Rerun the test. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Table 10-364. Error Code 1131 Page 10-1055 TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or because INADS is dialed into the system. 1. Wait about ten minutes and then re-enter the command. 10201 ABORT System software resources required to run this test are not available. 10202 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 10203 ABORT MTP did not respond to the test request. 1. Repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long command in order to reset MTP and to examine the results of the MTP Reset Test (#101). 3. Replace the Processor circuit pack. 4. If only the MTP outpulse relay test is aborting, escalate the problem. 10204 FAIL MTP reported test failure. No loop current detected. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, examine the INADS trunk for connectivity, and manually check for loop current. 3. If there is no INADS trunk, this test should be disabled. To disable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and change the Test Remote Access Port field to "n." If this test is failing on the Standby SPE, issue the refresh spe-standby command, and rerun the test. 4. If the INADS trunk checks out okay, but the test still fails, check the backplane connector wiring. 5. If the backplane wiring checks out okay, replace the Processor circuit pack at your earliest convenience. PASS MTP detected a loop current on the remote access port. 1. If the system cannot call INADS, or INADS cannot contact the system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct. 10205 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retryt the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Table 10-364. Page 10-1056 TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued Error Code Test Result 10206 ABORT Description/ Recommendation System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is administered. 1. Enter the change system-parameters maintenance command. Verify that the "Test Remote Access Port?" field is set to "y." 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 10208 ABORT The remote access port is busy. INADS is probably dialed into the switch. 1. If INADS is dialed in, the INADS trunk is working. There is no need to run the test. Continued on next page MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) This test is a nondestructive test. The test does an on-board loop around by using the MTPINADS channel. Test data is sent through the on-board modem out toward the INADS trunk. The data is looped around before the actual trunk, and it comes back into the on-board modem. The data is then verified for integrity. NOTE: The test does not send any data onto the INADS trunk. However, in order to pass, the test does require the trunk to be present. Table 10-365. Error Code 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation (Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes.) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Table 10-365. Error Code 1018 Page 10-1057 TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test has been disabled via administration. 1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command, and set the Test Remote Access Port field to "y". If you are testing the Standby PR-MAINT, a refresh spe-standby command must be successfully executed before you can proceed to Step 2. 2. Rerun the test. 1131 ABORT The INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or because INADS is dialed into the system. 1. Wait about 10 minutes and then re-enter the command. 10301 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 10302 10309 ABORT Internal system error 10303 10310 ABORT 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. MTP did not respond to the test request. 1. Repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If only the MTP Analog Loop Around Test is aborting, escalate the problem. 3. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long command in order to reset MTP, and examine the results of the MTP Reset Test (#101). 10305 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 10306 ABORT System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is administered. 1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance command, and verify the entry for the Test Remote Access Port field. 2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 10308 ABORT The remote access port is busy. INADS is probably dialed into the switch. 1. Wait until INADS session is terminated and then re-enter the command. 10311 ABORT Test #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test failed. 1. Refer to Error Code 10204 of the MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) for directions. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Table 10-365. Error Code 10304 Page 10-1058 TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation MTP reported test failure. The system is not able to reliably contact INADS with alarm data. The system continues to provide good service. 1. If MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) is also failing, check for the presence of the INADS trunk, and resolve any INADS trunk problems. 2. If Test #102 passes, the fault is on the Processor circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced at your convenience. PASS MTP detected correct data through the loop back connection. 1. If the system cannot call INADS, or if INADS cannot contact the system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct. Continued on next page MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) This test is destructive. The test terminates any PPN Manager I session, and it is a coordinated test of the MTP dual port ram (DPR). The DPR is a section of memory that is shared by the MTP and by the 80286/386 Processor circuit pack. Control messages and data are passed through the DPR. The test forces both sides to read and write the DPR simultaneously in alternate locations. The DPR test causes the PPN Manager I to log off before the test result is displayed. The test result is determined according to the terminal from which the test is run. If the test is run from the PPN Manager I terminal, system technician should log back in and examine the Error Log for an error against PR-MAINT, with Error Type 769, no Aux Data. This error entry indicates that the MTPDPR Test failed and that the Processor circuit pack should be replaced. ! WARNING: If the TN786B circuit pack must be replaced, and if there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove the blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged. If the test is being run from a terminal other than the PPN Manager I (for example, EPN Manager I, remote access, and so forth), the test results are displayed on the screen. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Page 10-1059 NOTE: A dial-up (through the INADS port) does not display the results discussed in the previous paragraph. However, a dial-up through data channels does display these results. Table 10-366. Error Code TEST #104 MTP Dual Port Ram Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT (Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes.) 1000 ABORT System software resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1030 ABORT The component on which the test was to be run is on the Standby SPE. This test may be run on this component only when it resides on the Active SPE. 1. For a recommended maintenance procedure, refer to ABORT Error Code 1030 in STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2028 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available. 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The dual port RAM is not functioning correctly. Communication between the processor and MTP is lost. The system is not able to report environmental alarms, communicate with the Standby SPE, or reboot from tape, if necessary. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS Dual port RAM is functioning. Communication exists between the 80286/386 Processor circuit pack and the MTP. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Page 10-1060 MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) This test is a nondestructive test. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test is simply a query from a maintenance process to the MTP. The MTP must reply for the test to pass. Table 10-367. Error Code TEST #106 MTP Sanity Handshake Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1000 ABORT System software resources required to run this test are not available. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The MTP did not respond to the Sanity Handshake Query. 1. Re-enter command with the "long" option. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The MTP responded to the Sanity Handshake Query. Continued on next page MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test (#229) This test is a nondestructive test. The test places the Auxiliary channel of the MTP into a loop around mode, and it verifies the data integrity of the channel. The Auxiliary channel is used as the CDR output port. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor) Table 10-368. Error Code Page 10-1061 TEST #229 MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1000 ABORT The system software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration. The change system-parameters cdr command needs to administer CDR. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 2034 ABORT Internal system error 22902 ABORT 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The system software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 22903 FAIL The Auxiliary channel failed the Loop Back Test. The AUX port is probably not sending any auxiliary data to the auxiliary collection device. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The Auxiliary channel passed the Loop Back Test. The auxiliary port is functioning correctly. 1. If no auxiliary data is being recorded, check the auxiliary collection device, and verify that it has been set up and connected correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Page 10-1062 PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PR-MEM 1 MAJOR test memory a/b lo c TN790 RISC Memory PR-MEM 1 MINOR test memory a/b sh c TN790 RISC Memory 1. The MO is ‘‘PR-MEM’’ because all of the Memory used by the Processor is on the TN790 Processor circuit pack. The TN790 RISC Memory contains the DEFINITY software and firmware. The Processor circuit pack is the most critical component in the system. For testing purposes, the circuit pack is logically separated into PR-MAINT, PROCR, and PR-MEM. This means that a memory problem requires that the Processor be replaced. These systems contain two types of memory: Flash ROM and DRAM. Flash ROM is memory that contains the boot image, part of the low-level maintenance firmware, PI firmware, and PACCON firmware. This type of memory is not erased during circuit pack resets. It can be reprogrammed via the upgrade software command or a Reset System 4/5 using a software memory card. One section of the Flash ROM (BOOTPROM) containing the system initialization functions and the low-level diagnostic programs is programmed at the factory and is not reprogrammed by the upgrade software command. DRAM is used for software data storage, and it changes constantly. Both types of memory are present on the Processor circuit pack. The diagnostics run appropriate tests on both memories. DRAM is replaceable and installed in 3 Single In-line Memory Module (SIMM) sockets on this circuit pack. Replacement of these SIMMs is described in "Install the SIMM on the TN790 Processor Circuit Pack" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. For all system activity, the Processor must be able to access the Memory. If the Processor cannot do this, the system goes into SPE-down mode. In SPE-down mode, fatal Memory errors may show up as Processor errors. This merely indicates that the Processor and the Memory are very closely linked as a matter of course. If the initialization diagnostics fail, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode" section in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Page 10-1063 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-369. Error Type 1 Memory Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test memory a/b l r 1 1 Any Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 5 3(a) Any Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 5 1025 Any Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87) MINOR ON test memory a/b r 3 1281 Any Memory Burst Read Test (#908) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 2 1793 Any (b)(c) Read All Memory (#85) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 1 2049(d) Any (b)(c) Memory Functional Test (#332) MAJOR ON test memory a/b l r 1 0 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error (3) indicates that a software patch has been applied and either the software patch is bad or was installed incorrectly. 1.Back out the software patch and run the test memory UUCS long command to verify that the problem has been cleared. 2.If the PBX system is equipped with High Reliability or Critical Reliability option (i.e. with duplicated SPEs), and this error occurs, a SPE interchange will occur if the health of the standby SPE permits the interchange. b. The following Aux Data indicate SIMM Failures 1.SIMM A 2.SIMM B 3.SIMM A & SIMM B 4.SIMM C 5.SIMM A & SIMM C 6.SIMM B & SIMM C 7.SIMM A, SIMM B, & SIMM C Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Page 10-1064 c. Aux Data of 100 is an LMM Flash Checksum initialization failure. d. There are Functional Memory Test errors against the Processor circuit pack. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate errors in the order in which they are presented in the table that follows when you are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Read All Memory Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Processor Cache Test (#895)(a) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Processor Cache Audit (#896)(a) X X ND Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82)(a) X X ND Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#897)(a) X X ND Processor Write Buffer Test (#900)(a) X X ND Memory Burst Read Test (#908) X X ND X ND X ND Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86) X ND Memory Functional Test (#332) (b) X D Read All Memory Test (#85) Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87) X MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (c) X X ND MTP External Modem Present Test (#230) (c) X X ND MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (c) X X ND MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (c) X X ND MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) (c) X X ND MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (c) X X ND MTP Reset Test (#101) (c) X D MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (c) X D Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Page 10-1065 Notes: a. Refer to PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. b. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command. c. Refer to PR-MAINT (MainTenance Processor) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. Read All Memory Test (#85) This test is a nondestructive test. The test reads every memory location in memory. A failure of this test indicates a DRAM failure in the Processor circuit pack. DRAM is replaceable and installed in 3 Single Inline Memory Module (SIMM) sockets on this circuit pack. Replacement of these SIMMs is described in the "Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure" section. Table 10-370. Error Code 100 TEST #85 Read All Memory Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The requested test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Table 10-370. Error Code 1-7 Page 10-1066 TEST #85 Read All Memory Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation If the system can still provide service, this indicates that the Processor circuit pack has a problem with memory or the RISC processor, but can still function. At the customers convenience run the destructive “reset system 4” command to boot the system and write to all of the memory locations. This will clear transient parity errors and test for permanent parity errors. This complete memory testing during initialization will cause “SPE DOWN” if a parity error is detected and the PROCR circuit pack should be replaced. If parity errors reoccur within several weeks, record the error code information indicating which memory modules failed, together with the extended interval between failures. After recording the information and at the customers convenience replace the PROCR circuit pack. PASS The Memory is healthy. Continued on next page Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86) This test is a nondestructive test. The test computes the checksum of the DEFINITY Generic 3 software and firmware loaded from the Software Memory Card (SOFTWARE MEM-CARD). A failure of this test indicates corruption of the Flash Memory. However, this failure does NOT always indicate a hardware problem. DO NOT REPLACE the Processor circuit pack when this is the only error. A system restart via the reset system 4 command starting with inserting the Software Memory Card for this system followed by re-inserting the Translation Memory Card memory card should be implemented at the customer’s earliest convenience. In a High or Critical Reliability system, an upgrade software command can be used with the Software Memory Card for the system followed by re-inserting the Translation Memory Cards as directed by this upgrade procedure. This command performs the same operation as the reset system 4 command but is much less service-disruptive. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Table 10-371. Error Code 100 Page 10-1067 TEST #86 Text Checksum Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. 1-7 FAIL The system may or may not continue to operate correctly. The system may fail later when some action requires access to the corrupted area of the Text. 1. The Flash ROM should be reprogrammed via the upgrade software command. The memory card should contain the same vintage software that is currently in the system. Refer to the "Software Upgrade" section in this manual. 2. If the test continues to fail, replace the TN790 Processor circuit pack and repeat step 1. PASS The checksum is correct. Continued on next page Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87) This test is a nondestructive test. The test is run on a few reserved locations in memory. A failure of this test indicates a failure on the Processor circuit pack. This test determines if the parity circuitry is working. Accordingly, the test determines if parity errors can be detected. The parity circuitry is used to detect DRAM memory failures. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Table 10-372. Error Code 100 Page 10-1068 TEST #87 Memory Parity Error Detection Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. 1-7 FAIL The parity detection circuitry is not working correctly. If the system can still provide service, this indicates that the Processor circuit pack has a problem but can still function. 1. The TN790 Processor circuit pack should be replaced. The failure is identifying the PROCR as being bad and only the PROCR circuit pack needs to be replaced. PASS The parity detection circuitry is working. Memory Functional Test (#332) This test is destructive. This test ensures that every DRAM memory location can be accessed and changed independently. Running this test wipes out all data in DRAM memory. This test is performed during a reset system 4 or reset system 5. If the test fails during a reset system command, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode" in the Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’ for the recommended maintenance strategy. This test can be run as a long demand test on the standby SPE. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Table 10-373. Error Code 100 Page 10-1069 TEST #332 Memory Functional Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1-7 FAIL The Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is defective. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test still shows a failure, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is healthy. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) Page 10-1070 Memory Burst Read Test (#908) This test verifies that the Memory Burst Read function works properly on the Processor circuit pack. Table 10-374. Error Code 100 TEST #908 Memory Burst Read Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1022 1335 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1-7 FAIL The Burst Read circuit is not functioning properly. 1. Retry the command. 1. If the test fails, replace the Processor and retry the test. PASS The Burst Read portion of the Processor circuit pack is operating correctly. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Page 10-1071 PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR MINOR test cdr-link primary/secondary l CDR Link PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR WARNING test cdr-link primary/secondary CDR Link The CDR feature records detailed call information on all incoming and outgoing calls on specified trunk groups and sends this information to an CDR output device. The two physical links can be administered for connecting external CDR output devices to the system. They are identified as the primary CDR (PRI-CDR) link and the secondary CDR (SEC-CDR) link. The CDR link can be administered to a data extension or the EIA port on the system TN773 Processor circuit pack which provides a standard EIA-232C interface. The external CDR output devices are: ■ 94A Local Storage Unit (LSU) ■ TELESEER CDR Unit ■ Call Accounting System (CAS) ■ Call Detail Recording Unit (CDRU) ■ Printer ■ Host computer ■ Personal computer (PC) ■ Customer-provided equipment Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and Feature Description, for details of the CDR feature. CDR Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between the system and an external CDR output device. The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis, detection of errors during normal operation, actions for troubleshooting, and raising alarms for serious problems. CDR Link Maintenance uses a try-and-wait mechanism for maintaining the CDR link. If the CDR link is torn down due to an error, CDR Link Maintenance intends to bring the CDR link up. If the Link Setup trial fails, CDR Link Maintenance waits 30 seconds before the next retry. If the number of retries reaches the value of a threshold (two), a Minor alarm is raised for service attention. The following physical configurations are supported for the CDR link: ■ From the EIA port of Processor circuit pack to an CDR output device through the standard EIA-232C interface. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) ■ Page 10-1072 From a data channel on TN777 Network Control circuit pack to a data extension where the CDR output device connects via the standard EIA 232C interface. The data extension can be a PDM, MPDM, DTDM, or ADU. The PDM, MPDM, and DTDM connect to a Digital Line Port of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack; ADU connects to a Data Line Port of TN726 Data Link circuit pack. NOTE: In duplicated systems it is possible for a failure on one of the processor circuit packs to bring down the CDR link even if it is the standby processor. This problem can not be resolved by interchanging processors because the CDR ports on each of the processor circuit packs are connected via WIRE-OR. CDR Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements composing the CDR physical link, which are as follows: ■ External CDR output device ■ EIA port on Processor circuit pack ■ Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM) and Digital Line Port of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack ■ ADU and Data Line Port of TN726 Data Link circuit pack ■ Data Channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack If CDR Link Maintenance cannot restore the CDR link, then the maintenance tests of these individual components of the CDR link must be executed to diagnose faults. Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link 1. Get the status of CDR links. Enter status cdr-link command and make sure that the CDR links are not busied out for maintenance. If the link is down, then continue to the next step. 2. Where does the CDR link connect to? Enter display system feature and find out the destinations of CDR links. Continue to the next step. 3. Is the destination an extension or the EIA port? If the destination is an extension number, then enter the status data extension command and verify whether the data extension is in the in-service/idle state. If the data extension is NOT available, then look for Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Page 10-1073 the extension number in Alt Name field of Hardware Error Log and refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for resolutions. If the destination is "eia," then look for PR-MAINT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation. 4. Is a data channel on TN777 Network Control circuit pack in the in-service/idle state? Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack. Enter status data extension command and make sure that at least one data channel is in the in-service/idle state. If no data channel is available, then look for DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack). 5. Is the external CDR output device available? Make sure that the CDR output device is on-line and ready for service. Check the physical connectivity between Data Module and the CDR output device or between the EIA port on backplane of the switch and the CDR output device. It is recommended to busy out the CDR link before executing maintenance tests over the CDR link. If the CDR link is busied out, then all CDR link maintenance actions are deactivated. The interference to tests of other MO is off. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Page 10-1074 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-375. Error Type CDR Link Maintenance Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test cdr-link primary|secondary sh 18 (a) 0 busy out cdr WARNING OFF release cdr-link primary|secondary MINOR/ WARNING 2 OFF test cdr-link primary|secondary l primary|secondary 25 (b) 0 3 to 6 9 99 255 513 (c) 0 3 to 6 9 Link Retry Test (#215) test cdr-link primary|secondary 1025 (d) 1281 (e) 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. Notes: a. System Technician has busied out the CDR link to out-of-service state. The CDR link is torn down. b. Link Retry Test (#215) fails. The Aux Data field contains either the Channel ID of Data Channels on the TN777 circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04, and 9 for EIA port) or an Error Code of 99 indicating that no data channels are available for setting up the link, or an Error Type of 255 indicating an internal system error. Refer to the preceding ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’ for resolution. c. The CDR physical link is down due to the following causes: cable to the CDR output device is disconnected; CDR output device is powered off, the data extension where the CDR output device connects to has been busied out or there is a scheduled daily interchange. The Aux Data field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on the TN777 circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04, and 9 for EIA port). Check the connectivity of wire and cable among wall jacket, data module, and the CDR output device. Enter status data Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Page 10-1075 extension and verify that the data extension of the CDR output device is in the in-service/idle state. If the data extension is not available, then refer to the preceding ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’ for resolution. Issue the display system-parameters-maintenance command to see the start time of daily maintenance. If the error occurs and is resolved during the interval of daily maintenance, then the error can be ignored. d. This error indicates that the CDR output device is in an off-line state, for example, paper jam or paper out for a printer device. The CDR link is torn down. Check the CDR output device and act promptly to put it back to on-line state. Enter test cdr-link primary|secondary command to set up the CDR link. e. Software detects an overflow of CDR records generated in the switch due to the heavy trunk traffic and low speed CDR output device. If both primary and secondary links are ON, the secondary link is torn down temporarily for two minutes to speed up the output process to the primary link. No action is necessary for this error type. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Link Retry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Link Tear Down Test (#213) Link Retry Test (#215) 1. X Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 X D X ND D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Link Tear Down Test (#213) This test is destructive. This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external CDR output device. If the link has been disconnected already, this test just returns PASS. All resources allocated for an CDR link are released after this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Table 10-376. Page 10-1076 TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result 40 ABORT Internal system error 50 ABORT Internal system error Description/ Recommendation 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1010 ABORT The CDR link has been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter the release cdr-link primary|secondary command to release the CDR link from busyout state. 2. Retry the test cdr-link primary|secondary long command to execute the test. FAIL Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The CDR link is torn down. Continued on next page Link Retry Test (#215) This test sends a message to the CDR software process to make a data call to the extension where the CDR output device connects to or opens the EIA port to the CDR output device. If the CDR link is already up, this test is passed without making any data call or opening the EIA port. Table 10-377. Error Code TEST #215 Link Retry Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 10 ABORT Internal system error 20 ABORT Internal system error. Internal error in Maintenance Action Process (MAP). MAP returns an error back to maintenance script (HMM). Timer expires while waiting for the reply from MAP. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 30 ABORT Internal system error 1. Refer to ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Table 10-377. Error Code 1010 Page 10-1077 TEST #215 Link Retry Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The CDR link has been busied out to out-of-service. 1. Enter release cdr-link primary|secondary command to release the CDR link from busyout state. 2. Retry test cdr-link primary|secondary long command to execute the test. FAIL The CDR link CANNOT be established. 1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’ for instructions. PASS The CDR link is up. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROC-SAN (Process Sanity Audits) Page 10-1078 PROC-SAN (Process Sanity Audits) MO Name (in Alarm Log) PROC-SAN Alarm Level none Initial Command to Run none Full Name of MO Process Sanity Audits The Process Sanity Audits MO is responsible for monitoring the sanity of software processes in the system. If the Process Sanity Audits MO detects that a process has gone insane (does not respond to a sanity message within an allotted time period), the process is restarted. If the Process Sanity Audits MO detects that multiple processes (or a single key process) do not respond to sanity messages within an allotted time period, a system recovery action is initiated. The Process Sanity Audits MO has no alarms and no tests. Certain errors are logged to the Hardware Error Log for information purposes only. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-378. Error Type Process Sanity Audits Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any none 10 (a) 0 none none none none 204 (a) any none none none none 1. Look for other errors of the same type and deal with them accordingly. Notes: a. These errors indicate that a system recovery action has been taken because one or more software processes failed to respond to a sanity audit in a timely fashion. As a result of the recovery action, the system may have temporarily suspended service for a period of time surrounding the error. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1079 PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) PROCR Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO test processor a/b sh r/c Processor Circuit Pack NOTE: For systems with a TN790 RISC Processor circuit pack see maintenance object ‘‘PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)’’. NOTE: Alarms on the MEM-BD [386 systems only], PROCR and PR-MAINT maintenance objects (MOs) are indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack. The TN786B has an 80386 processor that uses on-board flash ROM and DRAM memory. The TN786B Processor circuit pack is comprised of the 80386 Processor (PROCR), the MainTenance Processor (PR-MAINT) and Memory (MEM-BD). The TN786B Processor circuit pack is responsible for the execution of the DEFINITY software. This includes all of the call processing, maintenance, and administration functions. The Processor circuit pack is the most critical component to proper operation of the system. The PR-MAINT is responsible for monitoring the sanity of the Processor circuit pack as well as the environmental conditions. The PR-MAINT provides the serial interfaces for the administration terminal and for the Call Detail Recording (CDR) ports. The PR-MAINT also provides the communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote maintenance capability. In High and Critical Reliability systems, the PR-MAINT is part of the communications path between the Active Processor Element and the Standby Processor Element. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1080 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-379. Error Type 80286/386 Processor Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value1 02 0 Any Any Any test processor a/b r 1 1 (a) 0 Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 3 769 (b) 0 ROM Checksum Test (#80) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 5 1025 (c) 0 Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 2 1281 (d) 0 Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) MAJOR ON test processor a/b l r 2 1. 2. Software does not accept the repeat option on the TN773 circuit pack [G3iV1.1-286]. The repeat option is valid only on the TN786B circuit pack. You must manually repeat the command with the long option the designated number of times from the administration terminal and from a remote SAT because the Sanity Timer Test (#83) logs you off. In G3iV1.1-286, if the test processor long System Technician command is executed six times back-to-back, the system goes into SPE-DOWN mode. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this test for further action. b. The ROM Checksum Test (#80) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this test for further action. c. The Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this test for further action. d. The Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this test for further action. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1081 System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when you are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) X X ND Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80) X X ND Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) X X ND X D Order of Investigation Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (a) X X ND MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (a) X X ND MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (a) X X ND MTPSAT Loop Around Test (#228) (a) X X ND MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (a) X X ND MTP Reset Test (#101) (a) X D MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (a) X D Read All Memory Test (#85)(b) X ND X ND Text Checksum Test (#86)(b) X ND Memory Functional Test (#332) (c)(b) X D X ND Memory Error Detection Test (#87)(b) Memory Board Check Test (#631) (b) 1. X X D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. b. Refer to MEMORY [386 systems only] Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1082 Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) This test is a nondestructive test. The test verifies if the 80286/386 Processor can exercise the three types of software-initiated interrupts: Table 10-380. ■ Divide by zero ■ Single step ■ One byte interrupt instruction. TEST #77 Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test Error Code Test Result 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. FAIL The processor did not detect the software interrupt condition. As a result, the processor executed the incorrect interrupt vector. The system may or may not continue to operate correctly. Description/ Recommendation 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be replaced. ! WARNING: If the TN786B circuit pack [386 systems only] must be replaced, and if there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove the blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged. PASS The processor detected the software interrupt condition, and it executed the correct interrupt vector. The system continues to operate correctly. Continued on next page Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80) This test is a nondestructive test. The test computes the checksum of the processor’s bootstrap ROM, and it compares this checksum to a predetermined value stored within the ROM. A failure of this test indicates corruption of the ROM. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Table 10-381. Error Code 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 Page 10-1083 TEST #80 Processor ROM Checksum Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. FAIL The computed checksum did not match the ROM checksum. The system may or may not continue to operate correctly. The system may fail later when some action requires access to the corrupted area of the bootstrap ROM. 1. The Processor circuit pack should be replaced. ! WARNING: If the TN786B circuit pack [386 systems only] must be replaced, and if there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove the blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged. PASS The computed checksum matched the ROM checksum. The system continues to operate normally. Continued on next page Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) This test is a nondestructive test. The test is used to verify that the 80286/386 Processor can detect and respond to non-maskable interrupts. For example, the processor intentionally causes a BUS TIMEOUT EXCEPTION (BTE) and then verifies if it vectors to the correct interrupt routine. This is basically a test of the internal operation of the 80286/386 CPU chip. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Table 10-382. Error Code 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 Page 10-1084 TEST #82 Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. FAIL The interrupt was not detected or acted upon. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be replaced. ! WARNING: If the TN786B circuit pack [386 systems only] must be replaced, and if there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove the blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged. 3. If replacement of the Processor circuit pack still results in test failure, the following circuit packs should be replaced, one at a time in the order provided: TN770 Memory [G3iV1.1-286 only] Expansion Memory [G3iV2-386 only] TN765 Processor Interface, TN777B Network Control, TN778 Packet Control, and TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs. The test should then be repeated. 4. If the test still fails after you replace all the circuit packs discussed in the previous step, the problem must be in the control carrier, and the carrier should be replaced. PASS The interrupt was correctly detected. The 80286/386 CPU chip is functioning correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1085 Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) This test is destructive. This test causes service to be disrupted for about seven seconds on the TN773 and for about one second on the TN786B. During this time, the system does not respond to any user action. This test checks to see if the 80286/386 processor watch-dog sanity timer is functioning correctly. The processor intentionally allows the sanity timer to time out. If the processor detects itself being reset, the test passes, and the processor continues to execute normally. If the processor does not detect a reset, the test has failed. If this test continues to fail, the processor pack should be replaced as soon as possible. The sanity timer is not critical to system operation, but it is needed for processor recovery if the processor stops functioning. Table 10-383. Error Code 1000 TEST #83 Processor Sanity Timer Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation System software resources required for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. FAIL The sanity timer did not time out as expected. The system continues to function normally. If the processor gets into an infinite loop, the reset CANNOT be detected, and the system DOES NOT reboot itself to clear the problem. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be replaced as soon as possible. PASS The sanity timer went off as expected. The system continues to function normally. If the processor gets into an infinite loop, the reset IS detected, and the system reboots itself to clear the problem. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1086 PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PROCR MAJOR test processor a/b lo r/c TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack PROCR MINOR test processor a/b sh r/c TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack NOTE: For systems with the TN786B Processor circuit pack, see maintenance object, ‘‘PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)’’. NOTE: Alarms on the PR-MEM, PROCR and PR-MAINT maintenance objects (MOs) are indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack. This section applies to the TN790. The TN790 has a RISC processor (PROCR) that uses on-board Flash ROM and DRAM memory (PR-MEM). This circuit pack also contains the MainTenance Processor (PR-MAINT). The RISC Processor circuit pack portion is responsible for the execution of the DEFINITY Generic 3 software package. This includes all of the call processing, maintenance, and administration functions. The RISC Processor circuit pack is the most critical component to the correct operation of the system. The PR-MAINT (MainTenance Processor for RISC systems) is responsible for monitoring the sanity of the RISC Processor circuit pack and the environmental conditions. The PR-MAINT provides the serial interfaces for the SAT and for the Digital Communications Equipment (DCE) ports. The PR-MAINT also provides the communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote maintenance capability. In High and Critical Reliability systems, the PR-MAINT is part of the communications path between the Active Processor Element and the Standby Processor Element. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1087 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-384. Error Type RISC Processor Circuit Pack Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value1 02 0 Any Any Any test processor a/b r 1 1(a) Any BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 5 Processor Write Buffer Test (#900) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 1 513 1025(b) Any Processor Cache Audit (#896) MINOR ON test processor a/b r 2 1281 Any Processor Cache Test(#895) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 1 Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82) MAJOR ON test processor a/b r 2 1793(c) 2049(d)(e) Any Processor Sanity Timer Test MINOR ON test processor a/b l c 2305(d)(f) Any Address Matcher Test none ON test processor a/b l c 1. 2. The MTP Reset Test (#101) logs you off. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) can also log you off. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. The BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this test for further action. b. A parity error was detected in the processor’s data cache or instruction cache. Aux Data indicates the difference in the number of parity errors since the last report. c. The Processor Bus Time-out Test (#82) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this test for further action. d. Aux Data of 100 is an LMM initialization failure. e. The Processor Sanity Timer Test failed during a reset level 4 or 5 initialization. reset system 4 at the customers convenience and if the alarm occurs again, replace the processor circuit pack. The system runs with this failure, but it is not protected if the system software has a sanity problem. The test processor a/b long clear command clears this alarm, but the sanity timer is only tested during initialization so the alarm occurs again and the system is not protected against insane software. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1088 f. The Address Matcher Test failed during a reset level 4 or 5 initialization. This is not alarmed because the address matcher is only used for high level debugging. Replace the processor circuit pack if the Address Matcher is needed for troubleshooting. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Processor Cache Test (#895) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Processor Cache Audit (#896) X X ND Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82) X X ND Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80) X X ND Processor Write Buffer Test (#900) X X ND Memory Burst Read Test (#908)(a) X X ND X ND X ND Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86)(a) X ND Memory Functional Test (#332) (a) (b) X D Read All Memory Test (#85)(a) Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87)(a) X MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (c) X X ND MTP External Modem Present Test (#230) (c) X X ND MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (c) X X ND MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (c) X X ND MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) (c) X X ND MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (c) X X ND MTP Reset Test (#101) (c) X D MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (c) X D Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1089 Notes: a. Refer to “PR-MEM” for a description of these tests. b. There are Functional Memory Test errors against the Processor circuit pack. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a high or critical reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command. c. Refer to “PR-MAINT” for a description of these tests. Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80) This test is a nondestructive test. This test computes the checksum of the Processor’s bootstrap BOOTPROM. A failure indicates the BOOTPROM is corrupt. Table 10-385. Error Code 100 Test #80 Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. FAIL The computed checksum did not match the BOOTPROM checksum. The system may not continue to operate correctly. The system may fail at some future date when the corrupted area the bootstrap BOOTPROM is accessed. 1. Replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The computed checksum matched the BOOTPROM checksum. This part of the Processor will continue to operate normally. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1090 Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82) This test is a nondestructive test. The test is used to verify that the RISC Processor can intentionally cause a BUS TIMEOUT EXCEPTION (BTE) and then verifies if it vectors to the correct interrupt routine. This is basically a test of the internal operation of the RISC Processor chip and the bus time-out circuitry. Table 10-386. Error Code 100 Test #82 Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. FAIL The interrupt was not detected or acted upon. 1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be replaced. The replacement must have enough memory for this system. 3. If replacement of the Processor circuit pack still results in test failure, the following circuit packs should be replaced, one at a time in the order provided: TN765 Processor Interface, TN777B Network Control, TN778 Packet Control, and TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs. The test should then be repeated. PASS The interrupt was correctly detected. The RISC Processor is functioning correctly. Continued on next page Processor Cache Test (#895) This test is a nondestructive test. This test overwrites the contents in the Instruction and Data Caches, requiring them to be refilled during normal execution. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Page 10-1091 This test verifies that the Processor Instruction and Data Caches are functional. Some errors in the caches will simply reduce performance by forcing instructions or data to be read from memory more often than would normally be necessary. In any case, cache problems are serious and the Processor circuit pack must be replaced as soon as possible if they are detected. Table 10-387. Error Code 100 Test #895 Processor Cache Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. FAIL The Processor cache is not functioning correctly. 1. Replace the Processor circuit pack immediately. PASS The cache portion of the Processor circuit pack is operating correctly. Continued on next page Processor Cache Audit (#896) This nondestructive audit checks the state of the Cache Parity bit maintained by the RISC CPU. If this bit is set, there may be problems with either the CPU, the Instruction, or Data Cache. An indication of bad cache parity won’t itself mean that the system won’t operate, but minor to severe performance degradation may be present. For example, a single bad bit in either cache could cause this bit to be set. If the faulty word is seldom accessed, the impact will be small. If the bit is accessed frequently, there could be serious problems with much, or all, of the cache (stuck data bit) with the only direct indication again being the cache parity error or cache test error. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Table 10-388. Error Code 100 Page 10-1092 Test #896 Processor Cache Audit Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. FAIL The Cache Parity Error bit is set, there may be problems with either the CPU or the Instruction or Data Cache. 1. Retry the command. 2. If the test continues to fail, run test processor a|b long. 3. If the Processor Cache test (#895) or the Processor Cache Audit (#896) fails, replace the Processor circuit pack. PASS The Processor has not detected any parity errors in the Instruction and Data Caches since the last time this audit was run. Continued on next page Processor Write Buffer Test (#900) This test is a nondestructive test. This test verifies that the Write Buffer operates properly on the Processor circuit pack. Failure of this test is serious. The Processor circuit pack must be replaced as soon as possible. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack) Table 10-389. Error Code 100 Page 10-1093 Test #900 Processor Write Buffer Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test did not complete within the allowable time period. 1. Retry the command. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command. FAIL The Processor Write Buffer is not operating correctly. 1. Replace the Processor circuit pack immediately. PASS The Write Buffer portion of the Processor circuit pack is operating correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Page 10-1094 RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) MO Name (in Alarm Log) RING-GEN 1. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run1 test environment P Full Name of MO Analog Ring Generator Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log. All analog phones in DEFINITY Generic 1 cabinets must be provided with a voltage that allows them to ring. The Analog Ring Generator MO represents the device that provides the ringing voltage for analog phones in a multicarrier or single carrier cabinet system. In a multicarrier cabinet system, the Analog Ring Generator resides in the PDU. Figure 10-81 shows the position of the PDU and illustrates that fuse F9 is used for the Analog Ring Generator. Figure 10-82 shows the position of the fuses on the PDU and describes how to replace a fuse. In a single carrier cabinet system, the Analog Ring Generator is part of the WP-91153 power unit, and each carrier in the single carrier cabinet contains its own Analog Ring Generator. A ringing voltage generator failure means that no ringing will occur on analog phones; however, ringing on digital and hybrid phones will still occur. The ringing voltage is monitored by the Tone-Clock circuit pack. In a port network with duplicated Tone-Clocks, it is the active Tone-Clock that performs this function. In an EPN made up of single-carrier cabinets, the Tone-Clock monitors only the ringing voltage in the carrier that contains the tone clock. Also, if the TN2182 Tone-Clock is installed in the Processor Interface slot, the ringing voltage is not monitored. The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages on the backplane pins. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) S2 Page 10-1095 S3 S1 A AC 631 CARRIER C DA I 631 R DB AC F2 F3 F L CARRIER B 631 DA 631 F1 O 631 W DB 631 CARRIER A DB DA AC FILTER A H S4 S4 FANS -3 FRONT 3 BACK D 1 FILTER AC 631 CARRIER D DA A 631 I DB R F5 AC F4 F 631 CARRIER E DA L 631 O DB W DC FUSE F1-F7 F7 BATTERY & BATTERY DC CHARGER POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Figure 10-81. AC RING ON BACK OF GENERATOR PDU, FUSE F6 F9 ON FRONT DIST. S3 OF PDU F9 Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Page 10-1096 F9 F4 F1 2A 20A 20A AC AC F5 AC F2 20A 20A AC AC MAIN AC F3 F6 20A 20A DC AC CIRCUIT BREAKER F7 20A DC BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FUSE F8 (5A AC) IS LOCATED ON THE BACK OF THE PDU ABOVE THE CONVENIENCE OUTLET AND IS NOT SHOWN FUSE TIP FUSES F1-F7 ARE ILLUSTRATED AT THE LEFT. WHEN REPLACING ONE OF THESE FUSES, CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO INSTALL THEM FUSE TIP FIRST. FUSES F8-F9 ARE SYMMETRICAL AND CAN BE FUSE INSERTED EITHER WAY. RETAINER Figure 10-82. Multicarrier Cabinet Fuse Location and Replacement Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Page 10-1097 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Error Type Aux Data 01 0 1 1. Analog Ring Generator Error Log Entries Alarm On/Off Associated Test Level Board Test to Clear Value Any Any Any test environment UU Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) MAJOR ON test environment UU r 3 Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Multicarrier Cabinet Short Test Order of Investigation Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND 1 Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) X X ND Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a) X X ND AC Power Query Test (#78) (b) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (Carrier E) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (Carrier D) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (Carrier A) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (Carrier B) (#127) (c) X X ND Power Unit Query Test (Carrier C) (#127) (c) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (d) X X ND Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (e) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (f) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Page 10-1098 Notes a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. c. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC- and DC-Powered Systems Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. d. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. e. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. f. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. Single-Carrier Cabinet Short Test Order of Investigation Sequence Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) X Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X ND Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) X X ND Single-Carrier Power Query Test (#79) (a) X X ND Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (b) X X ND External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (c) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to DC-POWER (Power) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. b. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. c. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Page 10-1099 Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) The TN768, or TN780 will report an error to the system software if the ringing voltage falls to low (only if system software has made a request to the TN768, or TN780 to monitor the voltage). The Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test sends a request to the TN768, or TN780. If there are redundant tone/clock circuit packs in the port network, then the request is sent only to the active tone/clock. Table 10-390. Error Code 1 1000 1001 1003 1115 2012 2100 TEST #117 Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system software is unable to determine the active tone/clock circuit pack, unable to allocated the resources necessary to run the test, or unable to send a down link message. 1. Wait for the green LED on the active tone/clock to go out; use the status port-network command to determine the active Tone/Clock circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. If the test aborts again, refer to TDM-CLK Maintenance documentation. 2000 ABORT Response to the request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Look for TDM-CLK errors and alarms. Resolve all other Tone/Clock problems first. 2. Rerun the test. 1005 ABORT The tone/clock is unable to read the analog ringing voltage level when the tone/clock is in the Processor Interface slot. This test is not available for the Processor Port Network in this configuration. PASS The active Tone/Clock has successfully been enabled to monitor the ringing voltage level. Continued on next page Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) This test requests the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack to check the ringing voltage. The tone/clock circuit pack replies with PASS if the ringing voltage is adequate to ring the analog phones. If not, the active tone/clock circuit pack replies with a FAIL. The Analog Ring Generator Query Test then reports the result. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Table 10-391. Error Code Page 10-1100 TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test Test Result 1 1000 1001 1003 1115 2012 2100 ABORT 2000 ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not seize the resources to run the test. Other maintenance is running on the active tone/clock circuit pack. 1. Wait for the green LED on the active tone/clock circuit pack to go out; (use the status port-network command to determine the Active tone/clock circuit pack). 2. Rerun the test. If the test aborts again, refer to TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation. Response to the request was not received within the allowable time period. 1. Look for TDM-CLK errors and alarms. Resolve all other tone/clock problems first. 2. Rerun the test. 1005 ABORT The tone/clock is unable to read the analog ringing voltage level when the tone/clock is in the Processor Interface slot. This test is not available for the Processor Port Network in this configuration. FAIL Ringing voltage is below acceptable levels. PROCEDURE FOR A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM. 1. If this is a High or Critical Reliability system, determine the active Tone-Clock circuit pack by issuing a status port network command. Make the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack active via the set tone-clock PC command and rerun the test. a. If the test passes, the trouble is with the new Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to the TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details on replacing the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. After the circuit pack is replaced, make this Tone-Clock active again by issuing the set tone-clock PC command and rerun the test. b. If the test fails, then proceed with Step 2. 2. Look for and resolve CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Supply Unit) alarms first, and then rerun the test. 3. Check fuse F9 on the Power Distribution Unit. Replace F9 if it is blown, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, then an Analog Line circuit pack could be defective and causing the Analog Ring Generator and/or fuse F9 to fail. 4. Unseat all Analog circuit packs in the affected cabinet, and replace fuse F9 again if needed. Rerun the test. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Table 10-391. Error Code Page 10-1101 TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 5. If the test passes, then the Analog Ring Generator is healthy, and one of the Analog circuit packs is defective. Replace the Analog circuit packs one at a time, and rerun the test to determine which circuit pack is causing the problem. When the defective Analog circuit pack is found, replace it. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed with Step 6. 6. Since the test still fails, the Analog Ring Generator is defective. Replace the Analog Ring Generator as follows: a. Open the PDU compartment door. The door is hinged on the right and has a magnetic latch on the left. b. If the reset button on the Analog Ring Generator is out, press it in. c. Originate calls to several analog stations on different port circuit packs in different carriers in the affected port network. d. If called stations ring, the fault is cleared. Proceed to Step f. If no stations ring, replace the Analog Ring Generator. To replace the Analog Ring Generator, first disconnect the output (P6) and input (P7) connectors from the Analog Ring Generator and then remove the two screws at the base of the Analog Ring Generator. e. Replace the Analog Ring Generator, secure it with the two screws at the base, and replace the P6 and P7 connectors (P6 goes on top). f. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed to Step 7. 7. The active tone/clock may be faulty and incorrectly reporting the level of the ringing voltage. Replace the Active tone/clock and rerun the test. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details on replacing the tone/clock. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Table 10-391. Error Code Page 10-1102 TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation PROCEDURE FOR A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM. This failure indicates that there is no ringing voltage in the carrier where the active tone/clock circuit pack resides. Other carriers may or may not have ringing voltage. 1. If this is a Duplicated Option system, then determine the active Tone-Clock circuit pack by issuing a status port-network command. Make the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack active via the set tone-clock PC command and rerun the test. a. If the test passes, then the trouble is with the "new" Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details on replacing the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. After the circuit pack is replaced, make this Tone-Clock active again by issuing the set tone-clock PC command and rerun the test. b. If the test fails, then proceed with Step 2. 2. Unseat all analog circuit packs in the cabinet that contains the Active Tone/Clock circuit pack and rerun the test. 3. If the test passes, then the Analog Ring Generator is healthy and one of the analog circuit packs is defective. Replace the analog circuit packs one at a time, and rerun the test to determine which circuit pack is causing the problem. When the defective analog circuit pack is found, replace it. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, go to Step 4. 4. Replace the WP-91153 power unit for the affected carrier, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, go to Step 5. 5. The active tone/clock may be faulty and incorrectly reporting the level of the ringing voltage. Replace the active tone/clock and rerun the test. Refer to TONE-BD Maintenance documentation for details on replacing the active tone/clock circuit pack. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, escalate the problem. PASS FOR A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM. The analog ringing voltage level is acceptable. FOR A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM. For a single-carrier cabinet stack, ringing voltage is acceptable in the cabinet containing the active tone/clock circuit pack. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack) Page 10-1103 S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO S-SYN-BD MIN test board PCSS sh Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack S-SYN-BD WRN test board PCSS sh Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors. See also S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Maintenance documentation for related port information. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1104 S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO S-SYN-PT MAJOR test port PCSSpp sh Speech Synthesis Port S-SYN-PT MINOR test port PCSSpp l Speech Synthesis Port S-SYN-PT WARNING test port PCSSpp sh Speech Synthesis Port 1. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.). The TN725 Speech Synthesis circuit pack provides four independent Speech Synthesis Ports which may be connected to any of the voice time slots on the TDM Bus. Each Speech Synthesis Port consists of a speech synthesizer device (SSD) and is managed by a custom-coded programmable speech synthesizer (PSS) controller. The PSS controller is, in turn, controlled by the on-board microprocessor via a command interface specifically designed for this application. The PSS controller’s main function is the orderly transfer of encoded speech from the speech vocabulary read-only memory (ROM) to the SSDs. The SSDs decode it and produce 64 kb/s 5-255 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) speech. The encoded speech is stored in up to 512K bytes of on-board read-only memory (ROM). In addition, each Speech Synthesis Port has an associated dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) receiver to receive touch-tone digits from a station set connected to the port via a voice time slot. The station set may be connected to the Speech Synthesis Port through either a line or trunk circuit. When there is an incoming call to a port, the "listen" network time slot is connected to the DTMF receiver input and the "talk" network time slot is connected to the SSD output. This enables the Speech Synthesis Port to support speech synthesis features or touch-tone input with voice response features. Some of the features that use the Speech Synthesis Port’s capabilities include Leave Word Calling, Automatic Circuit Assurance, Automatic Wakeup (hotel-motel), and do Not Disturb (hotel-motel). The Speech Synthesis circuit pack should not be confused with the Announcement circuit pack as different voice features are supported by each circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1105 Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Speech Synthesis Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test 01 0 Any 1(a) 17672 None 18 0 Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCsspp 130(b) None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test (#168) MAJOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 513 17922 Speech Synthesis Memory Test (#166) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 769 17664 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry Test (#164) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 1025 17670 Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test (#167) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 1281 Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test (#165) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 1537 Speech Synthesis Memory Test (#166) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 1793 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Test (#163) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 2049(c) Conference Circuit Test (#7) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 2305 NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) MINOR ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 3840(d) 1. Any None Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. An in-line failure of the on-board microprocessor/PSS handshake has occurred. Refer to Test #168 for repair procedures. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1106 b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack. c. A transient error that does not cause an alarm can occasionally occur during a SPE, TDM BUS, or Tone Clock interchange. Test the port and follow the instructions for conference Test (#7). d. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) X ND Conference Circuit Test (#7) X ND Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Test (#163) X ND Order of Investigation Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test (#168) Speech Synthesis Memory Test (#166) X X ND Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test (#165) X X ND Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test (#167) X X ND Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry Test (#164) X X ND Speech Synthesis Parameter Update Test (#169) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1107 other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may occur. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Table 10-392. Error Code TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any Active TDM-BUS errors. 1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service. 1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. 2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation. 3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Table 10-392. Error Code 1004 Page 10-1108 TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port was seized by a valid call during the test and the test has been aborted. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining the Error Log. Continued on next page Conference Circuit Test (#7) One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Table 10-393. Page 10-1109 TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test and the test has been aborted. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the problem. 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error. 1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This causes noisy and unreliable connections. 1. Retry the test. 2. If the Test continues to fail then replace the circuit pack. PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining the Error Log. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1110 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Test (#163) A series of DTMF tones are conferenced from the TDM Bus into the port’s DTMF receiver and checked to see if the correct tones have been detected during the correct intervals. If all the DTMF tones were detected correctly, the test passes. If any of the tones were not detected correctly, the test fails. Table 10-394. Error Code TEST #163 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL DTMF tones were not detected. This type of failure may cause features using touch-tone input to the Speech Synthesis Port to malfunction. 1. Verify that the Tone-Clock circuit pack is functioning correctly by checking the Error Log and using the test tone-clock long command. 2. If the test fails again, replace the Speech Synthesis circuit pack. PASS The port has detected all DTMF tones correctly. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry Test (#164) This test determines the sanity of the port’s DTMF receiver. The on-board microprocessor tests the port’s DTMF receiver and determines if it is in a sane (test passes) or insane (test fails) condition. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Table 10-395. Error Code Page 10-1111 TEST #164 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The DTMF receiver for this port is insane. 1. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack. PASS The DTMF receiver for this port is sane. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test (#165) The digital signal processor (DSP) associated with each port can generate a 440-Hz tone whose presence can be detected by TN748 General Purpose Tone Detector circuit packs. A 440-Hz tone is generated for 500 msec on a specified time slot which is being listened to by the detector circuit. If the detector determines the tone is present on the time slot, the test passes; otherwise, it fails. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Table 10-396. Error Code Page 10-1112 TEST #165 Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1001 1002 1003 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1021 ABORT The 440-Hz tone was not detected by the Tone Detector circuit and inter-digit time-out has occurred on the Tone Detector circuit. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, verify all Tone Detector circuit packs in the system are functioning correctly by checking the Error Log and using the test board PCSS long command. Replace any faulty Tone Detector circuit packs and repeat the test. 3. If the test continues to abort, replace the Speech Synthesis circuit pack. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The 440-Hz tone was not detected by the Tone Detector circuits. 1. If the test fails again, verify all Tone Detector circuit packs in the system are functioning correctly by checking the Error Log and using the test board PCSS long command. Replace any faulty Tone Detector circuit packs and repeat the test. 2. If the test fails again, replace the Speech Synthesis circuit pack. PASS The 440-Hz tone has been detected correctly. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1113 Speech Synthesis Memory Test (#166) The encoded speech for the Speech Synthesis circuit pack is stored in on-board read-only memory. A checksum is computed for each 32K speech memory block and compared against a known checksum value. If all computed checksum values are successfully compared against the stored checksum values, the test passes. If, while testing the speech complex memory, the on-board microprocessor finds a memory error, the test is terminated and a failure is reported. This type of failure may affect other ports on the Speech Synthesis circuit pack, resulting in errors or alarms on each port. Table 10-397. Error Code TEST #166 Speech Synthesis Memory Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1019 ABORT Test is already running on a different port, possibly due to background maintenance activity. Only one of these tests may be active on a circuit pack at a time. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The computed checksum from the speech vocabulary read-only memory did not compare correctly with the stored checksum. This type of failure may cause features using the Speech Synthesis Port’s speech services to malfunction and result in degradation of synthesized speech quality ranging from insignificant to major. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The computed checksum values were successfully compared against the stored checksum values. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1114 Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test (#167) This test determines the sanity of the specified port’s Speech Synthesis Device (SSD). The on-board microprocessor tests the port’s SSD and determines if it is in a sane (test passes) or insane (test fails) condition. Other ports on the Speech Synthesis circuit pack continue to function correctly during this type of failure. Table 10-398. Error Code TEST #167 Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The SSD is insane. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The SSD is sane. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test (#168) This test verifies control functionality between the on-board microprocessor and PSS controller. A failure occurs if either of the following events occur: ■ The on-board microprocessor times out while waiting for the PSS controller to respond. ■ An invalid command is received by the on-board microprocessor from the PSS controller. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Page 10-1115 This type of failure affects all four ports on the Speech Synthesis circuit pack, resulting in errors or alarms on each port. Table 10-399. Error Code TEST #168 Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL The on-board microprocessor has timed out while waiting for the PSS controller to respond or an invalid command has been received by the on-board microprocessor from the PSS controller. This type of failure may cause features using the Speech Synthesis Port’s speech services to malfunction. 1. Replace the circuit pack. PASS The on-board microprocessor/PSS handshake is working correctly. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Speech Synthesis Parameter Update Test (#169) This test updates the DTMF interdigit time-out parameter used by the Speech Synthesis circuit pack to be consistent with that specified by the switch processing element (SPE). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port) Table 10-400. Error Code Page 10-1116 TEST #169 Speech Synthesis Parameter Update Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting. 1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. Any FAIL An internal system error has occurred. 1. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem. PASS The DTMF interdigit time-out parameter has been updated. 1. User-reported troubles should be investigated using other tests and by verifying that other ports on this circuit pack are working correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link Maintenance) Page 10-1117 SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link Maintenance) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR MINOR test cdr-link primary/secondary l CDR Link PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR WARNING test cdr-link primary/secondary CDR Link The SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link) maintenance strategy is covered in the PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Maintenance documentation. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Page 10-1118 SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) MO Name (in Alarm Log) SHDW-CIR1 1. Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run test duplication 1C sh Full Name of MO Common Shadow Circuit Determine the carrier to test via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log. The Common Shadow Circuit is that portion of the Duplication Interface circuit pack that is responsible for memory shadowing in a High or Critical Reliability system. All memory writes on the active SPE are detected by the Common Shadow Circuit on the active Duplication Interface circuit pack via the Memory Bus (M-BUS—bus used by control complex circuit packs to write/read memory and to communicate with one another). The write information is then passed to the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby Duplication Interface circuit pack via the ICC which then executes the write into the Standby Memory circuit pack via the Standby M-BUS. In this way, the Standby SPE is kept up-to-date with the Active SPE and, as a result, is always ready to take over for the Active SPE. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for a detailed description of SPE-to-SPE connectivity and STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of how the Standby SPE is maintained. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Page 10-1119 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-401. Error Type 01 Common Shadow Circuit Error Log Entries Aux Data 0 1 Alarm Level On/Off Board Any Any Any test duplication 1C sh r 1 Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) MAJOR ON test duplication 1C r 3 Associated Test Test to Clear Value 257 Any Common Shadow Circuit Time-Out Query Test (#285) MAJOR OFF test duplication 1C l r 3 513 1,2 Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) MAJOR ON test duplication 1C r 3 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) (a) Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND X D Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test (#273) (a) Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#277) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test (#275) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test (#276) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Manager I Loop Back Test (#274) (a) X X ND Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Page 10-1120 Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test (#280) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query Test (#271) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test (#272) (a) X X ND X ND Order of Investigation Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query Test (#285) Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) X X ND Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) X X ND SPE Select Switch Query Test (#278) (b) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for description of this test. b. Refer to SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) Maintenance documentation for description of this test. Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) This test allows maintenance to loop data through the common shadow circuit and examine the results. The test is designed to test the shadow data and shadow address portions of the common shadow circuit. The test is done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The Common Shadow Circuit is put into Maintenance Mode before the test is run. Maintenance software writes data into an address in the maintenance address space. This data is routed through the common shadow circuit and put into the FIFO bank of the common shadow circuit. Maintenance reads the contents of the FIFO bank and compares them with the value written to the maintenance address space. The test is repeated with another address in the maintenance address space. This test does not disable the common shadow circuit and can be run with no disruption in service. The test must be executed from control carrier B to test the Duplication Interface B Common Shadow Circuit and from control carrier A to test the Duplication Interface A Common Shadow Circuit. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Table 10-402. Error Code Page 10-1121 TEST #283 Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 1030 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1022 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The Common Shadow Circuit portion of the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective and the Duplication Interface circuit pack must be replaced. 1. Follow the "Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability" section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. NO BOAR D The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or from Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) in DUPINT. PASS Part of the Common Shadow Circuit is operating properly; however, Tests #284 and #285 must pass before the Common Shadow Circuit on this Duplication Interface circuit pack is considered sane. Continued on next page Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) This test verifies the operation of the shadow address decoder portion of the common shadow circuit. Software writes data into memory locations that should not be shadowed. The maintenance register of the common shadow circuit is examined to determine if the shadow address decoder permitted the write to be shadowed. The test fails if the writes were shadowed. This test is run only when demanded by maintenance software and can be run on both Duplication Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Page 10-1122 Interface circuit pack A and Duplication Interface circuit pack B. The same addresses used in the Common Shadow Circuit Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) are used. Table 10-403. TEST #284 Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test Error Code 1029 1030 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2051 1022 Test Result Description/ Recommendation ABORT Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. ABORT Internal system error ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. FAIL The Common Shadow Circuit portion of the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective and the Duplication Interface circuit pack must be replaced. 1. Follow the "Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability" in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. 2. Rerun the test. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) in DUPINT Maintenance documentation. PASS Part of the Common Shadow Circuit is operating properly; however, Tests #283 and #285 must pass before the Common Shadow Circuit on this Duplication Interface circuit pack is considered sane. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Page 10-1123 Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query Test (#285) An M-BUS time-out occurs when the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby SPE attempts a memory write to the Memory circuit pack via the M-BUS and the write fails. The Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query first tries to refresh the Standby SPE memory and then queries the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby Duplication Interface circuit pack for the number of M-BUS time-outs. If there were any M-BUS time-outs, the test fails. Table 10-404. Error Code TEST #285 Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 1030 2011 2012 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2051 2054 ABORT Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2013 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Table 10-404. Error Code Page 10-1124 TEST #285 Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The tested Common Shadow Circuit is experiencing time-outs while trying to write to the Memory circuit pack over the M-BUS. 1. Verify that there are the same number of PI (Processor Interface) circuit packs in each carrier. 2. Verify that there are the same number of PKT-CTRL (Packet Control) circuit packs in each carrier. 3. Resolve all other DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit), and PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) alarms before addressing this problem. 4. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, then the Memory circuit pack on the tested carrier is defective or the M-BUS is defective on the Standby carrier. Refer to the "Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability" section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and replace the Memory circuit pack. 5. Rerun the test. 6. Test the Standby SPE with the test standby-pe short command, and address all Duplication Interface circuit pack, Common Shadow Circuit, and Maintenance/Tape Processor tests that do not pass. NO BOARD The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B). 1. Refer to NO BOARD for a description of the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) in DUPINT Maintenance documentation. PASS Part of the Common Shadow Circuit is operating properly. However, Tests #283 and #284 must pass before the Common Shadow Circuit on this Duplication Interface circuit pack is considered sane. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Page 10-1125 SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) MO Name (in Alarm Log) SHDW-LNK Alarm Level MAJOR Initial Command to Run test shadow-link Full Name of MO Memory Shadowing Link A High or Critical Reliability system contains two SPEs. One is known as the Active SPE and is the SPE that is currently responsible for all call processing, administration, and maintenance activities being performed by the system. The other SPE is known as the Standby SPE. The role of the Standby SPE is to be ready to take over as the Active SPE in the event that the current Active SPE fails. The Standby SPE is usually in a mode known as Standby Mode in which it is ready to assume the role of the Active SPE. To do this, Standby SPE Memory (MEM-BD) must be an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. This is accomplished via the memory shadowing mechanism described below. The SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) on the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack (DUPINT, TN772) detects all memory writes that the Active SPE Processor (PROCR) makes to Active SPE Memory. The Active SPE Common Shadow Circuit sends this information to the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack via the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC). The Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack then writes the data to Standby SPE Memory. This logical connection between Active SPE Memory and Standby SPE Memory is known as the SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link). Although most of the components comprising the Memory Shadowing Link (that is, Active SPE Memory, both sets of Common Shadow Circuit, and Standby SPE Memory) may be tested individually, it is useful to test the integrity of the entire logical connection to verify that the shadowing mechanism is functional and that Standby SPE Memory is the same as Active SPE Memory. Therefore, this testing is done under the guise of the Memory Shadowing Link. The logical connection between the Memory circuit packs of the two SPEs of a High or Critical Reliability system is shown in Figure 10-83. This connection includes the A carrier memory bus, the A carrier TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack, the shadow extension in the ICC, the B carrier TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack, and the B carrier memory bus. The dotted lines in Figure 10-83 represent important logical connections between components. The following abbreviations are used in Figure 10-83: ■ DUPINT for Duplication Interface Circuit Pack ■ PR MAINT for Maintenance/Tape Processor ■ PROCR for 80386 Processor Circuit Pack ■ NETCON for Network Control Circuit Pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) ■ PACKET BUS for Packet Control Pack ■ TN CLK for Tone-Clock Circuit Pack ■ TDM-BUS for Time Division Multiplexing Bus ■ M-BUS for Memory Bus ■ ICC for Inter-Carrier Cable Page 10-1126 Please refer to the DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, MEM-BD, PROCR, PR-MAINT, and STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for more detailed descriptions of these components. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Page 10-1127 TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD SPE SELECT LEAD D P M N U R E E P O M T I C O C R R O Y N S S N H E T A R C D I T O A R W L L T N B CARRIER C L K P TN772 TN773 TN770 TN777 I MBUS TDMBUS A TN765 DUP-A TO ICC-B M PKT CTRL ICC-C B PACKET BUS* (SCC ONLY) DUP-DUP TN765 MBUS TN778 U PKT CTRL S TDMBUS A P S S C H E T A R R D I L O A D W L U TN772 TN773 TN770 TN777 I TN768 OR TN780* 1 P P I N T R DUP-A TO MTP-A O C R M N T E E N M T O C C R O L Y N K A CARRIER M G SPE SELECT LEAD R 1 TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD * G1.2 ONLY. MCC ONLY. (IN A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION, THERE CAN BE EITHER 0 or 1 PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK. IN A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION, THERE CAN BE 0, 1, OR 2 PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACKS.) Figure 10-83. T D TN778 MTP-B ICC-A TN768 OR TN780* 1 SHDW-LNK Interactions for a High or Critical Reliability System B Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Page 10-1128 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-405. Error Type 01 Standby SPE Error Log Entries Aux Data Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value Any Any Any test shadow-link 2047 Shadow Link Test (#318) MAJOR OFF test shadow-link 2048 Shadow Link Test (#318) MAJOR OFF test shadow-link 2049 Shadow Link Test (#318) MAJOR OFF test shadow-link 2050 Shadow Link Test (#318) MAJOR OFF test shadow-link 1. 0 Associated Test Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below . By clearing error codes associated with the Shadow Link Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The Short and Long Test Sequences for Memory Shadowing Link are identical. Only one test (Test #318) tests the Memory Shadowing Link. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X X ND Shadow Link Test (#318) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Shadow Link Test (#318) Interactions One interaction with the Standby SPE that results when testing the Memory Shadowing Link is as follows: If the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode because a previous test command on a Standby SPE component was issued within the last three minutes, the Active SPE takes the Standby SPE out of Maintenance Mode and puts it in Standby Mode when the Shadow Link Test is run. Therefore, issuing another test DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Page 10-1129 command on a Standby SPE component requires that the Standby SPE be put into Maintenance Mode again before the test is run. Thus, the user notices a 1- to 20-minute delay when running another Standby SPE test after executing the Shadow Link Test. NOTE: In most cases, the delay lasts only one to two minutes. However, a 20-minute delay is possible. Another interaction that the Memory Shadowing Link has with the Standby SPE is that if the Shadow Link Test fails, an error of type 67 is logged, and an alarm is raised against the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE). This is because the failure of the Shadow Link Test implies that Standby SPE Memory may not be an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory and, therefore, that the Standby SPE may not be ready to take over as the Active SPE. Refer to "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" section of STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for more details. Test Description Because of the number and nature of steps that it performs, the Shadow Link Test takes from 1 to 5 minutes to run, depending on the load that the system is experiencing at the time. The Shadow Link Test performs the following activities to verify the integrity of the Memory Shadowing Link: For a 286 based system: ■ Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory (MEM-BD) to Standby SPE Memory. ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor (PR-MAINT) to release the Standby SPE processor (PROCR) for the Standby SPE Processor to clear Standby SPE Memory (zero all memory locations). ■ Waits for Standby SPE Processor to report that Standby SPE Memory was successfully cleared. ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the Standby SPE processor reset. ■ Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a refresh operation). ■ Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory. ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to release the Standby SPE Processor for the Standby SPE Processor to perform a RAM checksum test on Standby SPE Memory (just updated by the refresh operation). ■ Waits for Standby SPE Processor to report the results of the RAM checksum test. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Page 10-1130 ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the Standby SPE Processor reset. ■ Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a refresh operation). For a flash-based system: ■ Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory (MEM-BD) to Standby SPE Memory. ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor (PR-MAINT) to release the Standby SPE processor (PROCR) for the Standby SPE Processor to clear a magic area in Standby SPE Memory. ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the Standby SPE processor reset. ■ Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a refresh operation). ■ Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory. ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to release the Standby SPE Processor for the Standby SPE Processor to perform a verification on the magic area in Standby SPE Memory (just updated by the refresh operation). ■ Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the Standby SPE Processor reset. ■ Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a refresh operation). NOTE: The shadowing verification method used for 80386 systems does not do a complete RAM checksum. It only clears a special magic area in the Standby SPE’s memory and then updates that area by shadowing. It then verifies the value in that magic area based on the Active SPE’s value. Thus, the test is not as comprehensive in terms of testing the memory aspect of shadowing as is the 80286 method. The reason for this is the inability to shadow flash memory. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Page 10-1131 Management Terminal Message Line Errors In addition to Shadow Link Test (#318) Error Codes, the following Manager I (G1) or G3MT message line errors may be displayed when attempting to run this test. They are: ■ "Standby SPE not available; for information use status system" This message line error corresponds to Error Code 2020. It is displayed if the Shadow Link Test is attempted within the first five minutes of a restart of the Active SPE (that is, prior to the Active SPE holding the Standby SPE reset and refreshing it). ■ "Standby SPE busy with another task; for information use status system" This message line error corresponds to Error Code 2018. It is displayed if the Shadow Link Test is attempted while the Active SPE is performing some Maintenance Mode activity on the Standby SPE other than system technician-demanded maintenance. ■ "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later" This message line error is displayed when test shadow-link has been issued and subsequently canceled and then refresh spe-standby is issued while maintenance software is in the process of performing the Shadow Link Test. Allow up to three minutes for the Shadow Link Test to complete before issuing the refresh spe-standby command again. In either case, the following actions should be taken: 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 2. Repeat the command. 3. Issue the test spe-standby long command. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code Page 10-1132 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1029 2011 2012 2013 2014 2018 2020 2024 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes. 2047 FAIL The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE processor with a request to clear Standby SPE Memory; Standby SPE Memory was not successfully cleared. 1. Check for Standby SPE Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PROCR (80286 Processor Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD (Memory) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 3. If all problems found in Steps 1 and 2 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 5. If no problems were found in Steps 1 and 2, proceed with Step 4. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code Page 10-1133 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 4. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if no error types are logged against STBY-SPE, the problem is either the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack or the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack. 2047 (cont’d.) FAIL ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7. ■ If neither red LED is on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7. ■ If neither red LED is on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7. ■ If neither red LED is on AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem (the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory circuit packs have been replaced), escalate the problem. 5. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 6. Repeat the test. 7. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2048 (cont’d.) Page 10-1134 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE Processor with a request to perform the RAM Checksum Test on Standby SPE Memory and the RAM checksum was determined to be incorrect. This indicates that a problem exists with one or more components that make up the Memory Shadowing Link such that Active SPE Memory was not accurately shadowed to Standby SPE Memory. 1. Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE Common Shadow Circuit errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD (Memory) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 3. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6. 4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, or 3 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 9. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, or 3, proceed with Step 5. 5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2048 (cont’d.) Page 10-1135 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation 6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 82 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. 7. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 85 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem may be the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack. Replace the Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. 8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if no error types are logged against STBY-SPE, the problem is either the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, or the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack, or the carrier B Duplication-Interface circuit pack, or the carrier A Duplication-Interface circuit pack. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack is on, replace the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. 9. If the red LED on the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack is on, replace the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11 Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2048 (cont’d.) Page 10-1136 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Refer to Chapter 6 to understand how to correctly replace the Duplication-Interface circuit pack. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the fourth attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit packs have already been replaced), replace the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. NOTE: The Duplication Interface circuit pack must be made to reside in the Standby SPE before it can be replaced. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2048 (cont’d.) Page 10-1137 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Refer to Chapter 6 to understand how to correctly replace the Duplication-Interface circuit pack. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear the problem (the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and both Duplication Interface circuit packs have been replaced), escalate the problem. 10. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 11. Repeat the test. 12. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2049 Page 10-1138 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE processor with a request to perform the RAM Checksum Test on Standby SPE Memory. The RAM checksum was correct; however, a significant discrepancy was detected between two special Standby SPE Memory locations that should contain the same time stamp value as the one shadowed over from the Active SPE. This indicates that a problem exists with one or more components that make up the Memory Shadowing Link such that Active SPE Memory was not accurately shadowed to Standby SPE Memory. 1. Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE Common Shadow Circuit errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD (Memory) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 3. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. Also if intermittent problems are occurring inspect the Inter-Carrier Cable for cuts or broken leads. If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6. 4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, or 3 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 9. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, or 3, proceed with Step 5. 5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. 6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 82 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. 7. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 85 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem may be the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack. Replace the Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code Page 10-1139 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result 2049 FAIL (cont’d.) (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if no error types are logged against STBY-SPE, the problem is either the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, or the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack, or the carrier B Duplication-Interface circuit pack, or the carrier A Duplication-Interface circuit pack. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is lit, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack is lit, replace the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If the red LED on the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack is lit, replace the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. NOTE: The Duplication Interface circuit pack must be made to reside in the Standby SPE before it can be replaced. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2049 (cont’d.) Page 10-1140 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Refer to the "Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 6 to understand how to correctly replace the Duplication-Interface circuit pack. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the fourth attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit packs have already been replaced), replace the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. NOTE: The Duplication Interface circuit pack must be made to reside in the Standby SPE before it can be replaced. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code 2049 Page 10-1141 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation Refer to the "Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 6 to understand how to correctly replace the Duplication-Interface circuit pack. ■ If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear the problem (the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and both Duplication Interface circuit packs have been replaced), escalate the problem. 9. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 10. Repeat the test. 11. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components. 2050 FAIL The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE Processor with a request to perform the RAM Checksum Test on Standby SPE Memory. The RAM checksum was correct and the two special Standby SPE Memory locations contain the same time stamp value as the one shadowed over from the Active SPE; however, that time stamp value is significantly different from the value of the Standby SPE’s Time-of-Day clock. This indicates that either the Active SPE Time-of-Day clock has never been set (for example, at system installation time) or that the Active SPE Time-of-Day clock was set (with a significant change) while shadowing to the Standby SPE was disabled. 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 2. Issue the set time command and set the Time-of-Day clock. 3. Repeat the test. Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Table 10-406. Error Code Page 10-1142 TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued Test Result PASS Description/ Recommendation When the Shadow Link Test passes, the integrity of the Memory Shadowing Link has been verified and as long as memory shadowing is enabled, Standby SPE Memory is an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. This test also provides a positive indication of the functionality of Active SPE Memory, both sets of Common Shadow Circuit, and Standby SPE Memory. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) Page 10-1143 SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 Full Name of MO SPE-SELEC MAJOR test duplication-interface 1C sh SPE Select Switch SPE-SELEC WARNING test duplication-interface 1C sh SPE Select Switch 1. Where C is the carrier determined by the Port field in the error or alarm log. The SPE Select Switch MO tracks the state of the SPE Select Switches in a High or Critical Reliability system. The switches are located on the Duplication Interface circuit pack and can be used to hard-select the active processor in a High or Critical Reliability system. Each switch has three positions: SPE-A (the left position), AUTO (the middle position), and SPE-B (the right position). To hard-select SPE-A, both switches must be in the SPE-A position. To hard-select SPE-B, both switches must be in the SPE-B position. Any other combination of SPE Select Switches leaves control of the active SPE to the software. Whenever a switch is out of the AUTO position, a Warning alarm is raised. If both switches are out of the AUTO position for six hours, a Major alarm is raised. Duplication Interface circuit pack B reports the state of the SPE-SELEC Switch B to Duplication Interface circuit pack A which, in turn, reports the state of SPE-SELEC Switch A directly to the system software. NOTE: Each switch is a separate MO. If both switches are out of the AUTO position, then both switches are alarmed. It is also possible to get an "init cause" of the SPE-SELEC Switch if SPE B is active and power to carrier B is lost. In this case, an SPE switch to SPE A occurs, and the "init cause" shows either "SPE-Select Switch" or "SPE-Down." Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) Page 10-1144 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-407. SPE Select Switch Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test duplication-interface 1C sh r 1 1 Any SPE Select Query Test (#278) WARNING/ MAJOR2 OFF test duplication-interface 1C sh r 257 any SPE Select Query Test (#278) WARNING/ MAJOR2 OFF test duplication-interface 1C sh r 2 1. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. This error type initially raises a Warning alarm. If this error type persists and alarms are not downgraded on this MO due to the values of set options, then, after a period of time, a Major alarm is raised. Notes: a. The Warning alarm is upgraded to Major if the error is not resolved in six hours. b. Determine the carrier (a or b) by the Port field in the Error or Alarm Log. For SPE-SELEC, the Port field is 1A (test duplication interface a) or 1B (test duplication interface b). System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) (a) Long Test Long Test Sequence Sequence D/ND1 X Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test (#273) (a) X ND X D Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#277) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test (#275) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test (#276) (a) X X ND Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) Order of Investigation Page 10-1145 Long Test Long Test Sequence Sequence D/ND1 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Manager I Loop Back Test (#274) (a) X X ND Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test (#280) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query Test (#271) (a) X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test (#272) (a) X X ND X ND Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-out Query Test (#285) (b) Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) (b) X X ND Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) (b) X X ND SPE Select Switch Query Test (#278) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Notes: a. Refer to the DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for description of this test. b. Refer to the SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Maintenance documentation for description of this test. SPE Select Query Test (#278) This test queries the Duplication Interface circuit pack for the state of SPE Select Switch. The test passes if the switch is in the AUTO position. The test fails if the switch is not in the AUTO position or if the Duplication Interface circuit pack is not present. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) Table 10-408. Error Code Page 10-1146 TEST #278 SPE Select Query Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available. 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period. 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1 FAIL The switch currently selects SPE-A active. 2 FAIL The switch currently selects SPE-B active. 1. Move the switch to the AUTO position. 2. Rerun the test. 3 FAIL The Duplication Interface circuit pack is not present or not functioning. 1. Resolve all alarms logged against the Duplication Interface circuit pack (DUPINT). 2. Rerun the test. PASS The Duplication Interface circuit pack has reported that the SPE Select Switch is in the AUTO position. 1. If a visual inspection shows the SPE Select Switch is not in the AUTO position, then resolve all alarms logged against Duplication Interface circuit pack (DUPINT). 2. Repeat the test. 3. If Duplication Interface circuit pack B is being tested and a visual inspection shows that the switch is not in the normal position, Duplication Interface circuit pack A may be incorrectly reporting the state of SPE-Select Switch B. Replace Duplication Interface circuit pack A, and rerun the test. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1147 STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO STBY-SPE WARNING status system 1 Standby SPE STBY-SPE MAJOR test spe-standby Standby SPE A high or critical reliability system contains two switch processing elements (SPEs). The first such element is known as the Active SPE. The Active SPE is currently responsible for all call processing, administration, and maintenance activities that are being performed by the system. The other SPE is known as the Standby SPE. The Standby SPE becomes the Active SPE whenever the current Active SPE fails. The Standby SPE does not perform call processing or administration activities. However, it does perform maintenance activities, but these activities are carried out completely under the direction of the Active SPE in order to monitor and maintain the health of the Standby SPE. NOTE: Verify that the Standby SPE is functional (no duplication alarms exist and the SPE has returned to the Standby Mode) by running the status system 1 command. If the standby SPE is in the maint/idle mode with no standby alarms, use the standby refresh command to put the standby SPE into the standby mode. Verify the results by using the status system 1 command. The Standby SPE is always in one of three modes: Standby, Maintenance, or Down. Usually, the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode. In this mode, 1. The Switch Control (SW-CTL) on the Standby SPE Network Control circuit pack is isolated from the TDM Bus so that it does not interfere with attempts by the Switch Control on the Active SPE Network Control circuit pack to control the TDM Bus 2. The Standby SPE (PKT-CTRL) Packet Control circuit pack is isolated from the Packet Bus to prevent interference with the activity on the Active SPE Packet Control circuit pack 3. The Standby SPE (PROCR) Processor is held in a reset state so that it does not run software 4. The 12 volt power supply on the Standby SPE Network Control circuit pack (TN777B) can not be turned on when the Standby SPE Processor is held in the reset state 5. Standby SPE Memory (MEMORY in a 386) is shadowed from Active SPE Memory. This means that Standby SPE Memory is updated to reflect every change in Active SPE Memory (for example, calls and administration changes). DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1148 In certain circumstances, the Standby SPE is put into Maintenance Mode by the Active SPE. In this mode, the SW-CTL and PKT-CTRL on the Standby SPE are still isolated from the TDM Bus and Packet Bus, memory shadowing is disabled, and its processor is no longer held in a reset state. Data Channels on the standby SPE Network Control circuit pack can access the TDM bus, and the maintenance testing can be executed in this maintenance mode. The 12 volt power supply on the standby SPE Network Control circuit pack can also be turned on for Memory Card maintenance testing. In Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE accepts maintenance activity requests from the Active SPE to perform testing on Standby SPE components. For many of the requested activities, maintenance software on the Standby SPE is restarted in order to conduct the activity. Translation saves and announcement saves may be performed on the Standby SPE when it is in Maintenance Mode. While in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE is not as readily available to assume the role of the Active SPE, but it may do so depending upon the severity of the Active SPE fault(s). Whenever the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode from Maintenance Mode, its DRAM Memory is refreshed. This means that the Active SPE DRAM Memory is shadowed over to Standby SPE DRAM Memory. The flash ROM memory in the Standby SPE is not refreshed, and the shadowing circuit cannot write data into the flash ROM memory. The refresh is necessary because, while in Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing to the Standby SPE is disabled and Standby SPE Memory is not updated to reflect changes in Active SPE Memory. After the refresh, Standby SPE Memory once again is an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. The Standby SPE goes into Down Mode whenever certain error conditions are detected. These error conditions are described in detail in the "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" section. Once the error condition(s) that cause(s) the Standby SPE to go into Down Mode are corrected, the Standby SPE is first put into Maintenance Mode to conduct testing on Standby SPE components. It is then returned to Standby Mode. The current mode of the Standby SPE can be determined by issuing the status system command. Components in Standby SPE Complex The Standby SPE maintenance object is actually a composite of all the circuit packs in the Standby SPE. The TN778 Packet Control circuit pack, the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack(s), and the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack are used. ! WARNING: Verify that there is an identical set of SPE complex circuit packs in each SPE. For example, there should be the same number of Memory circuit pack(s) in each SPE. If there are Processor Interface circuit pack(s) (one or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1149 two) in the Active SPE, the same number of PI circuit packs must be present in the Standby SPE. If one SPE has a Packet Control Circuit Pack, the other SPE must also have one. If the set of circuit packs in each SPE is not identical, alarms could result against the STBY-SPE, DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, PI-BD, PKT-CTRL, PROCR, MEM-BD and MEMORY maintenance objects. The accessing and testing of the Standby SPE may be affected by the health of the circuit packs through which the Active SPE communicates with the Standby SPE. These circuit packs include the Active SPE Processor circuit pack, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier, and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack. Additionally, the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC) and the backplane affect the ability of the Active SPE to communicate with the Standby SPE. The ability to shadow Active SPE memory into Standby SPE memory is affected by the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the B carrier, and the Memory circuit pack(s) in the Standby SPE. Additionally, the Active SPE Memory Bus, the ICC, backplane, and the Standby SPE Memory Bus affect the ability to correctly shadow Active SPE memory into Standby SPE memory. These dependencies can be seen in Figure 10-84 for the TN790. These figures depict the interconnection between the two SPEs of a high or critical reliability system. The following abbreviations are used in the figures: ■ DUPINT for Duplication Interface circuit pack ■ PROCR/MEM for TN786B or TN790 Processor Circuit Packs with Memory ■ PROCR for Processor Circuit Pack ■ MEMORY for Memory Circuit Pack(s) ■ MTP for Maintenance Processor in Processor Circuit Pack ■ NETCON for Network Control Circuit Pack ■ MEM CARD for Memory Card Plugged in the Network Control Circuit Pack ■ PI for Processor Interface Circuit Pack(s) ■ PKT CTRL for Packet Control Circuit Pack ■ TN CLK for Tone-Clock Circuit Pack ■ TDM BUS for Time Division Multiplex Bus ■ PACKET BUS for Packet Bus ■ M-BUS for Memory Bus ■ ICC for Inter-Carrier Cable ■ SCC for Single-Carrier Cabinet The dashed lines in the figure represent important logical connections between components. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1150 Refer to the DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, MEM-BD, MEMORY, PROCR, PR-MAINT, TDM-BUS, PKT-BUS, TDM-CLK, PI-BD, PI-SCI, PKT-CTRL, SW-CTL, DATA-CHL, 12V-PWR, CARD-MEM and STBY-SPE for descriptions of the individual components. ............................................................................................... . . . . . . . . Tone/Clock Select Lead . . . . . . . . . . TN768 . . SPE Select Lead . . or . . . . TN772 TN786 CPP1(*) TN777B TN765 TN778 TN780 . . . . . . . . P . . D P M N P T . . . . I . . U R E E A N . . . . P O M T C . . . . I C O C C C . . . . . . N R R O M L O . . E . . T / Y N N K . . Shadow/ M . . . . Serial/ M * . . . . Control C E . . . . A . . M . . R . . D . . . . . . . . . . M-BUS . . . . ............................................................................................... B C A R R I E R DUP-A to MTP-B TDM-BUS A ICC-A ICC-B ICC-C DUP-A (SCC-only) to TDM-BUS B DUP-B PACKET-BUS ............................................................................................... . . . . . . M-BUS .. .. . . .. .. Shadow/ . . Serial/ .. .. Control . . . . P D P M N P T . . . I DUP .. . U R E E A N . .. TERM . P O M T C . . .. .. I C O C M C C . . . . N R R O O L . . E . . . . T DUP-A / Y N M N K .. .. to M * . . . . MTP-A C E .. .. A . . M .. .. R . . . . D . . . . TN772 TN786 CPP1(*) TN777B TN765 TN778 TN768 . . .. .. or . . SPE Select Lead TN780 .. .. . . .. .. . . Tone/Clock Select Lead . . . . ............................................................................................... A C A R R I E R M G R I (*) G3iV2-386 System Only Figure 10-84. STBY-SPE Interactions for a Duplex 386 System Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1151 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-409. Error Type 1 Standby SPE Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test spe-standby l See note (n). 0 2014 2016 2017 2022 2024 2025 Inability to Do Standby SPE Maintenance Activity MAJOR ON test spe-standby sh 18 any Standby SPE busied out WNG 58 (b) Any Standby SPE in Down Mode test processor [[0]1] a | b sh See note (n). 67 (c) Any Memory Shadowing Link Failure Detected test shadow-link See note (n). 80 (d) Any Handshake Loss With Carrier A Dupint test duplication-interface a sh test duplication-interface b sh See note (n). 81 (e) Any Handshake Loss With Standby SPE Processor test duplication-interface a sh test duplication-interface b sh See note (n). 8 (f) Any Handshake Loss Between Dupints test duplication-interface a sh test duplication-interface b sh See note (n). 85 (g) Any Timeouts Detected While Shadowing test duplication-interface a l test duplication-interface b l See note (n). 98 (h) Any Active SPEMTP DPR Failure Detected test processor [[0]1] a | b sh See note (n). 99 (i) Any Active SPEMTP Insanity Detected test processor [[0]1] a | b sh See note (n). 106 (j) Any Standby SPE Memory Failure Detected test memory [[0]1] a | b l See note (n). 139 Any See note (k). See note (k). 149 (l) any See note (l). refresh spe-standby See note (n) 0 1(a) See note (n). OFF release spe-standby Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-409. Page 10-1152 Standby SPE Error Log Entries — Continued Error Type Aux Data 257 (n) 0 2014 2015 2017 2021 2024 2048 2049 2050 2051 2054 Standby SPE Not Put Into Standby Mode 801 (o) any No response from Standby SPE after upgrade MAJOR ON upgrade software 802 (p) any Checksum on Standby SPE failed after upgrade MAJOR ON upgrade software 803 (q) any No translation card-mem inserted after Standby SPE upgrade MAJOR OFF upgrade software 804 (r) any Lost communication with Standby SPE during reboot following upgrade MAJOR ON upgrade software 805 (s) any No software mem-card inserted in active SPE MAJOR OFF upgrade software 806 (t) any Checksum on new Standby SPE failed MAJOR ON upgrade software 807 (u) any No translation mem-card inserted in new Standby SPE MAJOR OFF 808 (v) any Lost communication with new Standby SPE MAJOR ON upgrade software 809 (w) any Failed to perform SPE-interchange MAJOR OFF upgrade software 810 (x) any Bad checksum on software mem-card MAJOR OFF upgrade software Associated Test Alarm Level MAJOR On/Off Board ON Test to Clear Value refresh spe-standby (See note (n). Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-409. Error Type Page 10-1153 Standby SPE Error Log Entries — Continued Aux Data Associated Test 812 (y) any SPE interchanged forced with health-override option: 822(z) any A non-hot interchange to the standby SPE occurred. 826 (aa) any Standby software mismatch Alarm Level WARNING On/Off Board OFF Test to Clear Value See note (y). See note (z). MAJOR ON upgrade software Continued on next page 1. Run the short test sequence first. If all the tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. NOTE: When more than one of the above error types exists at the same time, the alarm against the Standby SPE is cleared only when (1) any problems described by the Aux Data values for Error Types 1 and 257 are resolved and (2) all problems described in (b) through (o) are resolved. Notes: a. Aux Data value 0 is equivalent to Aux Data value 2017. All Aux Data values listed for Error Type 1 are described in "System Technician-Demanded Tests: Test Result Error Codes". These values are shared between Standby SPE maintenance activity results and the test results for the System Technician commands on Standby SPE components because the values represent the common set of problems that can be encountered when attempting to conduct any form of maintenance activity on the Standby SPE. b. Error Type 58 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier reports that the Standby SPE has gone into Down Mode. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE. The ability to communicate with the Standby SPE should be checked by issuing the test processor a | b short command, where "a | b" indicates the carrier that contains the Standby SPE. If all of the tests execute such that no test returns an Aux Data value of 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2022, 2024, or 2025, the Standby SPE was successfully put into Maintenance Mode. This indicates that the communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may be functional. However, to restore the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1154 functionality of the communication path, look for the presence of Error Types 80, 81, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these errors. c. Error Type 67 is logged when the Shadow Link Test (#318) fails. This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning. The functionality of the Memory Shadowing Link should be checked by issuing the test shadow-link command. If the test passes, the memory shadowing mechanism may be functional. However, to restore the memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types 82, 85, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these errors. d. Error Type 80 is logged when the Active SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor reports that the handshake that is maintained between the processor and the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier has been lost. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE. The status of the handshakes should be checked by issuing the test duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands. These commands initiate background tests that verify whether the handshake between Dupint-A and Active-MTP is operational. If the handshake between Dupint-A and Active-MTP is operational, the communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may be functional. However, to restore the communication path, look for the presence of Error Types 58, 81, 82, 98, 99, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these errors. e. Error Type 81 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier reports that the handshake that is maintained between the circuit pack and the Maintenance/Tape Processor on the Standby SPE has been lost. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE. The status of the handshakes should be checked by issuing the test duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands. These commands initiate background tests that verify whether the handshake between Dupint-A and Standby-MTP is operational. If the handshake between Dupint-A and Standby-MTP is operational, the communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may be functional. However, to restore the communication path, look for the presence of Error Types 58, 80, 82, 98, 99, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these errors. f. Error Type 82 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier reports that the handshake that is maintained between the circuit pack and the Duplication Interface circuit pack in carrier B has been lost. This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning. The status of the handshakes should be checked by issuing the test duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands. These commands initiate background tests that verify whether the handshake between Dupint-A and Dupint-B is operational. If the handshake between Dupint-A and Dupint-B is operational, the memory DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1155 shadowing mechanism may be functional. However, to restore the memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types 67, 85, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these errors. NOTE: Because the handshake between Dupint-A and Dupint-B is tested in the background, the test results from executing the test duplication-interface a command do not indicate their current status. However, if the background testing determines that all three handshakes (that is, Dupint-A to Dupint-B, Dupint-A to Active-MTP, and Dupint-A to Standby-MTP) have become operational, and if there are no other current STBY-SPE errors, Error Types 80, 81, and 82 and the associated STBY-SPE alarm will be cleared in about 30 minutes. g. Error Type 85 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack detects that writes made to the Standby SPE Memory are not being acknowledged. This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning. The presence of time-outs when shadowing to the Standby SPE Memory should be checked by issuing the test duplication-interface a long command. This command runs a test that forces memory writes to the Standby SPE Memory and detects time-outs waiting for acknowledgments. If time-outs are not detected, memory shadowing may be functional. However, to restore the functionality of memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types 67, 82, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these errors. h. Error Type 98 is logged when the Active SPEMTP Dual Port RAM Test (#104) fails. This implies an inability to communicate with the Active MTP. The ability to communicate with the Active MTP should be checked by issuing the test processor a | b short command, where "a | b" indicates the carrier that contains the Active SPE. i. Error Type 99 is logged when the Active SPE detects that the handshake that is maintained between the Active SPE Processor and the Active SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor has been lost. This implies an inability to communicate with the Active MTP. The ability to communicate with the Active MTP should be checked by issuing the test processor a | b short command, where "a | b" indicates the carrier that contains the Active SPE. j. Error Type 106 is logged when the Standby SPE Memory Functional Test (#332) fails. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE and also that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning. The functionality of the Standby SPE Memory should be checked by issuing the test memory a | b long command, where "a | b" indicates the carrier that contains the Standby SPE. This command runs the Memory Functional Test. If the test passes, the communication path between the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1156 Active SPE and the Standby SPE may be functional. However, to restore the functionality of the communication path, look for the presence of Error Types 58, 80, 81, 98, and 99 and use the recommended commands to resolve these errors. Additionally, if the Memory Functional Test passes, the memory shadowing mechanism may be functional. However, to restore the functionality of memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types 67, 82, and 85 and use the recommended commands to resolve these errors. k. If Error Type 139 is present, this error type takes precedence over all other error types until it is resolved. This error type indicates an incompatibility between the two Processor circuit packs in a High or Critical Reliability system. For a High or Critical Reliability system to work, the two Processor circuit packs must function together so that the circuit packs can perform interchanges between themselves. Use the following procedure to resolve this error: 1. Set the SPE-Select switches one at a time to select the Active SPE. This also forces the Tone-Clock in this SPE to become active. 2. If the active SPE is the B carrier, issue the test duplication-interface a long command. 3. Execute the test spe-standby long command. 4. Use the display error command with the "dup-spe" category to see if the Error Code 139 recurred. If the error did not recur, and if all STBY-SPE tests have passed, the system is functioning normally. 5. Restore the SPE-Select switches to normal. 6. If Error Code 139 still exists (and if the STBY-SPE tests have failed), one of the Processor circuit packs must be replaced. The system will function normally, but it will not be able to interchange properly to the Standby SPE without service disruption. Replacing the Standby processor is the best solution to this problem. However, the processor must be replaced with one of a vintage that is compatible with the current Active Processor. However, if it is found that the Active processor must be replaced (for example, the Standby processor is of a newer vintage), the repair strategy is more complex. Use the following procedure to replace the Active Processor circuit pack: NOTE: Replacing the Active Processor circuit pack will disrupt service. Schedule this procedure at the customer’s convenience. 1. Set the SPE-Select switches one at a time to select the Standby SPE. An SPE-interchange with a reset level of 3 or 4 results. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1157 2. Replace the new Standby (and former Active) SPE Processor circuit pack with a circuit pack of the appropriate vintage. 3. Issue the test spe-standby long command. Use the display error command with the "dup-spe" category to verify that all tests pass and that Error Type 139 does not recur. 4. Restore the SPE-Select switches to their normal position. l. Error Type 149 occurs when the Standby SPE goes into down mode during system technician demanded testing. Wait three minutes, then look for other STBY-SPE errors and follow the procedures described for these errors. m. Aux Data value 0 is equivalent to Aux Data value 2017. Aux Data values 2014, 2015, 2017, 2021, 2024, and 2051 for Error Type 257 are described in the "System Technician-Demanded Tests: Test Result Error Codes". The Aux Data values 2048, 2049, and 2050 for Error Type 257 are described in SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Maintenance documentation. These values are shared between Standby SPE maintenance activity results and the test results for System Technician commands on Standby SPE components because the values represent the common set of problems that can be encountered when attempting to conduct any form of maintenance activity on the Standby SPE. Error Type 257 with an Aux Data value of 2051 and a Major alarm results when, in attempting to refresh the Standby SPE, it is determined that software cannot communicate with the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier. This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning. This error type is accompanied by Error Type 80. Error Type 257 with an Aux Data value of 2051 and no alarm results when, in attempting to refresh the Standby SPE, it is determined that software cannot communicate with the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the B carrier. This does not necessarily imply that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning, but it is possible that it is not functioning. This error type is accompanied by Error Type 82. However, Error Type 82 may not be logged until sometime later. n. After issuing the specified command(s) to clear this alarm, perform the following procedure to clear the STBY-SPE alarm: 1. If all the tests pass or abort, issue a refresh spe-standby command. If the refresh is successful, wait 1 minute and then check for alarms against STBY-SPE. If the refresh was not successful, or if there are still alarms against STBY-SPE, continue attempts to resolve other STBY-SPE error types. The busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby commands may also be used to clear out STBY-SPE alarms. After entering the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release spe-standby command, all STBY-SPE alarms are retired and, 1 minute later, the equivalent of scheduled maintenance is run on the standby SPE. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1158 Note that the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby commands do not affect alarms on other Maintenance Objects in the standby processor complex. 2. If some of the tests fail, refer to the appropriate MO section and follow the procedures described there. The following table summarizes the error types that may affect the functionalities of the Communication Path to the Standby SPE and of Memory Shadowing. To restore the function, all error types that may affect the function must be investigated and resolved by following the recommended commands or procedures. Function Affected Error Types Communication Path To Standby SPE 58, 80, 81, 98, 99, 106, 1 with Aux Data values 2016, 2017, 2022, 2024, or 2025; 139 with Aux Data value 2015. Memory Shadowing 67, 82, 85, 106, 257 with Aux Data values 2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2048, 2049, 2050, or 2051. o. Error Type 801 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the loss of communication with the Standby SPE during the upgrade. This implies that the software reprogramming of the Standby SPE never completed. The upgrade software command should be re-executed. If it fails again, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced. p. Error Type 802 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the bad flash checksum on the Standby SPE after the completion of the upgrade. This implies that the on-board flash memory may not be functional. The Standby SPE is running the new software while the Active SPE is still running the old software. However, due to the bad flash checksum, the behavior of the Standby SPE may be unpredictable. The upgrade software command should be re-executed. If the command fails again, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced. q. Error Type 803 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the failure to insert the translation card-mem into the Standby SPE in time during the reboot immediately following a successful upgrade. This implies that the Standby SPE is running the new software while the Active SPE is still running the old software. The translation card-mem should be inserted into the Standby SPE at the appropriate time so as to allow the upgrade software command to be re-executed. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1159 r. Error Type 804 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to a loss of communication with the Standby SPE during the reboot immediately following a successful software upgrade. This implies that the communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may not be functional. Issue the test duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands. If the tests pass, re-execute the upgrade software command. s. Error Type 805 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the failure to insert the software card-mem in the Active SPE in time. The software card-mem should be inserted into the Active SPE at the appropriate time so as to allow the upgrade software command to be re-executed. t. Error Type 806 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to a bad flash checksum on the new Standby SPE after an upgrade of the old Standby SPE and SPE-Interchange. This implies that the on-board flash memory may not be functional. The behavior of the Standby SPE may unpredictable. The upgrade software command should be re-executed. If the command fails again, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced. u. Error Type 807 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the failure to insert the translation card-mem into the new Standby SPE after an upgrade of the old standby SPE and SPE-Interchange. The translation card-mem should be inserted into the Standby SPE. v. Error Type 808 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the loss of communication with the new Standby SPE during an upgrade following the upgrade of the old standby SPE and SPE-Interchange. This implies that the programming of the Standby SPE never completed. Use the "Special Upgrade Procedure" to re-execute an upgrade on the Standby SPE only. If the upgrade fails again, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced. w. Error Type 809 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to the failure to perform an SPE-Interchange immediately after the successful upgrade of the Standby SPE. This implies possible problems with the Dupint circuit packs. Issue the test duplication-interface a and test duplication-interface b commands. If the tests pass, re-execute the upgrade software command. x. Error Type 810 is logged when the upgrade software command failed due to a bad checksum on the software card-mem during the upgrade of the new Standby SPE following the successful upgrade of the old Standby SPE and of SPE-Interchange. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1160 The software card-mem should be replaced by one that has a good checksum. The upgrade software command should be re-executed. y. Whenever an SPE interchange is forced by using the health-override option as part of the reset system interchange command, a WARNING OFF circuit pack STBY-SPE alarm is raised, and the Fault Severity Level (FSL) of the new standby SPE is raised to its highest possible value to prevent an SPE interchange back to the original active SPE. This artificial FSL lasts one hour or until a busyout spe-standby command is executed, followed by a release spe-standby command. After this time, the FSL of the two SPEs are recomputed, and the healthiest SPE becomes or remains active. z. The system interchanged from the active SPE to the standby SPE with a restart that is more disruptive to service than the normal system hot start. The switches were not used to force this interchange. The level of restart can be observed by using the display initcauses command. Look for other alarms on the standby SPE that possibly caused this interchange. Also see "Reset System Interchange (High or Critical Reliability Systems Only)" in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’. aa. The software vintage in the Standby SPE does not match the software vintage in the active SPE. The upgrade software command should be executed for the standby SPE as described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. System Technician-Demanded Tests The following commands can be used to test and manipulate part or all of the standby SPE: ■ busyout spe-standby The busyout spe-standby command is used to stop all standby maintenance activity, disable shadowing, and hold the standby processor reset. A warning off circuit pack alarm is also raised against STBY-SPE MO. This command is more powerful than the refresh spe-standby command because it preempts the standby and enters maintenance mode, where as the refresh spe-standby does not do this. ■ release spe-standby The release spe-standby command is used to remove the busyout condition, restore memory shadowing, and force a refresh. 1 minute after the command is executed, the equivalent of standby scheduled maintenance is run. ■ refresh spe-standby The refresh spe-standby command is used to put the Standby SPE immediately into Standby Mode. The command conducts the same activities regardless of whether the Standby SPE is already in Standby DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1161 Mode or whether it is in Maintenance Mode. Whenever this command is issued, any Standby SPE maintenance activity currently in progress (except for entering maintenance mode) is preempted, the Standby SPE Processor is held reset, and the Standby SPE’s memory is refreshed. Recall that the refresh is necessary because, while the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing is disabled. When the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode, its memory must be brought up-to-date with Active SPE memory. Because they can preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, the refresh spe-standby and busyout spe-standby commands should be used judiciously. If the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode when one of these commands is issued, the current maintenance activity being conducted by the Standby SPE is immediately terminated with the following potential side-effects: ■ Testing of the Standby SPE components that are the target of the maintenance activity may not have completed. Depending on the maintenance activity and the point at which such activity is terminated, tests that detect faults and/or lack of faults on those Standby SPE components may not have had the opportunity to run. Accordingly, alarms will not be raised or retired on the components. ■ If the maintenance activity is Scheduled Maintenance, and if the refresh spe-standby or busyout spe-standby command is issued before a scheduled translation save is performed, the translation save is not completed, and the translation data on both the Active SPE and Standby SPE and on the memory cards do not reflect the changes made since the last translation save. In general, after a refresh spe-standby has been used, and after the user has finished working with the system, the test spe-standby long command should be issued in the event that the refresh spe-standby command preempted a Standby SPE maintenance activity. Testing the standby SPE allows standby maintenance to re-determine the health of the standby SPE and to compare this health to that of the active SPE. This testing could result in an SPE interchange to a healthier SPE. If the busyout spe-standby command has been used, the release spe-standby command should also be used. The latter command fully tests the standby SPE 1 minute later. Also, if the refresh spe-standby or busyout spe-standby command was used within the time frame that scheduled maintenance with a translation save was to have been conducted, the save translation command should be issued to ensure that the current translation data has been written to the Active SPE and Standby SPE tapes. When using the refresh spe-standby to preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, it may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times in order to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1162 labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later". Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby command. ■ reset spe-standby Normally, when the standby is brought into maintenance mode, it is done so with a Warm Restart. The reset spe-standby command can be used to bring the standby SPE from standby mode into maintenance mode with the requested restart level. ■ reset system-interchange If the health-override option is NOT specified, and if the standby Fault Severity Level (FSL) is less than or equal to that of the active SPE, and if the standby SPE is in standby mode, the interchange is allowed. Actually, if the standby FSL is less than that of the active FSL, the system does its own interchange in due time. If the FSL of the standby SPE is higher than that of the active SPE, but the alarmed standby maintenance objects do not affect the ability of the standby SPE to be put into standby mode, the command is rejected. This indicates that the health-override option can be used. If there are problems that would prevent the standby SPE from running system software, the command is rejected outright. If the health-override option is specified, and if the standby SPE is in standby mode, a Hot interchange is performed, regardless of the FSL level of the two SPEs. Once the interchange is performed, if the new active FSL is higher than the standby FSL, a STBY-SPE warning alarm is raised against the new standby SPE. This indicates that the system was forced to switch SPEs and is currently being held on the active SPE artificially. This prevents a SPE interchange back to the original active SPE. This STBY-SPE warning alarm lasts for one hour. After this time passes, system switches to the SPE with the lowest FSL. The STBY-SPE alarm is also retired if there is some indication of system technician testing of the standby SPE before the one hour expires. The assumption here is that a system technician person is present because the health-override option was used. Therefore, if there is some indication that repair work is going on, the alarm generated by the health-override should be retired. The following are indications of system technician testing being done: the standby SPE is busied out and then released, the active SPE is hard selected via the switches, or a test spe-standby long command is performed. ■ test processor [1] a|b [short | long] Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer to the PROCR-BD and PR-MAINT sections for a complete list of the tests that are run. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) ■ Page 10-1163 test memory [1] a|b [short | long] For this command, there is one additional test for the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack: the Memory Functional Test #332. Refer to the MEM-BD section for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test data-module Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer to the DATA-CHL section for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test network-control [[0]1] a|b [short | long] Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer to the SW-CTL, DATA-BD, DATA-CHL, and CARD-MEM sections for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test card-mem [[0]1] a|b [short | long] Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer to the CARD-MEM section for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test packet-control [[0]1] a|b [short | long] For test packet-control, the most significant difference between testing the Active Packet Control versus the Standby Packet Control is that the Reset Test (#586) runs on the Standby SPE Packet Control circuit pack. Also, the short and long options cause the identical set of tests to run. Refer to the PKT-CTRL section for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test interface [[0]1] a1 | a2 | b1 | b2 [short | long] For this command, there is a single test for the Standby SPE Processor Interface circuit pack(s) and a single test for each Processor Interface Port on a Processor Interface circuit pack. These tests are different from the tests that are run for the corresponding Active SPE Processor Interface circuit pack(s) and Processor Interface Port(s). Refer to the PI-PT section for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test duplication-interface [0[1] a|b [short | long] Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer to the DUPINT section for a complete list of the tests that are run. ■ test spe-standby [short | long] The test spe-standby [short | long] command results in the execution of all tests that would be run if each of the previous commands in this list was executed individually. Because of the number of tests that it runs, test spe-standby [short | long] takes from 10 to 30 minutes to complete. The Short and Long Test Sequences for test spe-standby are listed on the following pages. Refer to the appropriate maintenance section for a complete description of each of the tests. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1164 Test Sequence of Test SPE-Standby Command Test Number Name of Test and Associated MO Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence 332 Memory Functional Test X 318 Shadow Link Test (SHDW-LNK) X 285 Common Shadow Circuit MBUS Time-out Query (SHDW-CIR) X 283 Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (SHDW-CIR) X X 284 Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (SHDW-CIR) X X 278 SPE Select Switch Query (SPE-SELEC) X X 315 Duplication Interface Status Query (DUPINT) X X 275 Duplication Interface SPE A Loop Back Test (DUPINT) X X 276 Duplication Interface SPE B Loop Back Test (DUPINT) X X 280 Inter-Duplication Interface Loop Back Test (DUPINT) X X 271 Duplication Interface Background Test Query (DUPINT) X X 277 Duplication Interface Sanity Maze Test (DUPINT) X X 272 Duplication Interface Invalid Message Query (DUPINT) X X 274 Duplication Interface Manager I Loop Back Test (DUPINT) X X 273 Duplication Interface Sanity Circuit Test (DUPINT) X 85 Read All Memory Test X 86 RAM Checksum Test X 87 Memory Parity Test X 52 Control Channel Test (DATA-BD) X 50 NPE Audit (DATA-BD) X X For each administered Network Control Data Channel in the Standby SPE, the following DATA-CHL tests are run: 107 Data Channel Reset (DATA-CHL) X 108 Data Channel DPR Test (DATA-CHL) X 109 Data Channel Maintenance Loop Around Test (DATA-CHL) X X 110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test (DATA-CHL) X X 111 Data Channel Loop Back Test (DATA-CHL) X X 93 Switch Control Reset Test (SW-CTL) X 325 Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (SW-CTL) X Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1165 Test Sequence of Test SPE-Standby Command Test Number Name of Test and Associated MO Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence 95 Time-of-Day Clock Test (SW-CTL) X X 92 Control Channel Interface Test (SW-CTL) X X 94 Control Channel Transmission Test (SW-CTL) X X 324 EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (SW-CTL) X X 77 Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (PROCR) X X 80 Processor ROM Checksum Test (PROCR) X X 82 Processor Non-Maskable Interrupt Test (PROCR) X X 83 Processor Sanity Timer Test (PROCR) 102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test (PR-MAINT) X X 103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test (PR-MAINT) X X 106 MTP Sanity Handshake Test (PR-MAINT) X X 228 MTP Manager I Channel Loop Around Test (PR-MAINT) X X 229 MTP Auxiliary Channel Loop Around Test (PR-MAINT) X X 101 MTP Reset Test (PR-MAINT) X 104 MTP Dual Port RAM Test (PR-MAINT) X X The following Memory Card and 12 Volt Power Supply tests are executed: 701 12 Volt Power Supply Test (12V-PWR) X X 695 Cartridge Insertion Test (CARD-MEM) X X 696 Cartridge Format and Read Test (CARD-MEM) X X 697 Cartridge Match Test (CARD-MEM) X X 698 Cartridge Write-Protected Test (CARD-MEM) X X 699 Cartridge Directory Sanity Check and Recovery Test (CARD-MEM) X X 694 Cartridge Translation Data Integrity Test (CARD-MEM) X 693 Cartridge Erase/Write/Read Test (CARD-MEM) X 703 Flash Data Consistency Test (FL-DATA) X For each Processor Interface circuit pack in the Standby SPE, the following PI-BD tests are run: 52 Control Channel Test (PI-BD) 50 NPE Audit (PI-BD) 423 Standby PI Board Test (PI-BD) X X X X X For each administered Processor Interface Port, the following test is run: 404 Standby PI Port Test (PI-PT) X X Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1166 Test Sequence of Test SPE-Standby Command Test Number Name of Test and Associated MO Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence For a Packet Control circuit packet in the Standby SPE, the following three tests are run: 586 Packet Control System Technician Reset Test (PKT-CTRL) X X 583 Packet Control Read and Clear Error Counter Test (PKT-CTRL) X X 585 Packet Control Loop Around Test (PKT-CTRL) X X Running Tests on the Standby SPE Although this subsection is not about the individual test commands listed previously, several useful facts about executing these commands for Standby SPE components are mentioned here. These facts also apply to the test spe-standby [short | long] command. 1. If the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode, execution of the listed test commands results in the Active SPE putting the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode. Up to a two minute delay may be observed before the first test in the sequence is run and its test results are displayed on the terminal. Each subsequent test in the sequence takes from 10 to 60 seconds to run, except for the CARD-MEM Erase/Write/Read test #693, which takes one to five minutes to run. 2. The test memory [[0]1] a | b long command is an exception to the first item. The first test in the sequence is the Memory Functional Test (#332) which takes from 30 seconds to two minutes. After the Memory Functional Test (#332) is run, the same delays described in Item 1 of this list are relevant. 3. The test duplication-interface [[0]1] a | b long command is also an exception to the first item. The first test in the sequence is the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) which takes from 30 seconds to 2 minutes to run. After the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) is run, the same delays described in Item 1 of this list are relevant. 4. The test spe-standby long command is also an exception to the first item. The first test in the sequence is, the Memory Functional Test (#332), takes from 30 seconds to two minutes to run. After the Memory Functional Test (#332) is run, the next test in the sequence, the Shadow Link Test (#318), takes from one to five minutes to run. After the Shadow Link Test (#318) is run, the next test in the sequence, the MBUS Time-out Query (#285), takes from 30 seconds to two minutes to run. After the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) is run, the same delays described in Item 1 of this list are relevant. 5. If one of listed test commands is executed so that the Active SPE puts the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode, the Active SPE leaves the Standby SPE in Maintenance Mode for three minutes after the completion of the command. If an additional test command (with the exception of those DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1167 described in Items 6, 7, and 8) is executed within three minutes, the one to 20-minute delay prior to the first test will not be observed. Each test in the sequence, including the first test, takes from 10 to 60 seconds to run. Furthermore, the Active SPE leaves the Standby SPE in Maintenance Mode for three minutes after the completion of the additional command. This is true for each additional test command issued on a Standby SPE component. 6. The test memory [[0]1] a | b long command is an exception to Item 5. Because of the nature of the Memory Functional Test (#332) the same delays as described in Item 2 are always observed for test memory [[0]1] a | b long. 7. The test duplication-interface [[0]1] a | b long command is also an exception to Item 5. Because of the nature of the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) the same delays as described in Item 3 are always observed for test duplication-interface [[0]1] a | b long. 8. The test spe-standby long command is also an exception to Item 5. Because of the nature of the Memory Functional Test (#285), the Shadow Link Test (#318), and the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) the same delays as described in Item 4 are always observed for test spe-standby long. 9. For test commands whose sequence spans multiple terminal screens (for example, test spe-standby [short | long]) the same 3-minute window that was described in Item 4 applies to pressing the "page" key to proceed to the next screen of test results. If the "page" key is not pressed within three minutes of the completion of the last test on the current screen, the one to 20 minute delay is observed before the first test on the next screen is run and its test results are displayed on the terminal. Each subsequent test on that screen takes from 10 to 60 seconds to run. If the "page" key is pressed within three minutes of the completion of the last test on the current screen, the one to 20 minute delay will not be observed. Test Result Error Codes and Text Strings The text string messages and error codes documented in the Error Codes tables at the end of this section may result from any of the system technician commands described earlier in this section. In general, these error codes result from an inability of the Active SPE to successfully conduct a maintenance activity request on the Standby SPE and not from a problem detected by the test itself. In fact, all error codes except for 2015, 2021, 2047, 2048, 2049, and 2050 indicate that the test was not actually run. If an error code returned from a test does not appear in the Error Code table, the Active SPE successfully conducted the maintenance activity request on the Standby SPE, and the test was actually run (in most cases). For details on this error code, refer to the documentation describing the specific object you now suspect as possibly being defective. In the Short and Long Test Sequences DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1168 listed earlier in this section, the name of the object tested appears directly after each test number and name. Several of the conditions corresponding to the error codes documented here may be detected as soon as the test [[0]1] a | b [short | long] command is issued. The net result is that none of the tests in the sequence for the component will be attempted and a message will appear on the terminal message line describing why the command was rejected. The following is a list of these text strings. ■ Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later This message line error is displayed when a refresh spe-standby command is issued while maintenance software is in the process of putting the Standby SPE into Maintenance mode when any of the Error Types listed in "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value" have occurred and have not been resolved. It is also displayed when a system technician-demanded test has been issued and subsequently canceled because maintenance software is performing the Memory Functional Test, Shadow Link Test, or M-BUS Time-out Query. Another cause may be that maintenance software is in the process of putting the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode to run any other system technician-demanded test that must be conducted on the Standby SPE in Maintenance Mode. Allow up to 10 minutes for the maintenance software to complete its attempt to put the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode before issuing the refresh spe-standby command. ■ Cannot perform SPE interchange; for information use status system This message is displayed in response to the reset system interchange command and because there are outstanding STBY-SPE errors. Display the error log using the "dup-spe" category, and following the procedures for all STBY-SPE errors. ■ Cannot reset standby SPE at this time; use the ‘status system’ command This message is displayed when the standby SPE memory is not refreshed. Issue the refresh spe-standby command and try the reset again. ■ Could only hold Standby SPE reset because Active SPE is locked via SPE select switches This message is displayed when the refresh spe-standby command is issued when the active SPE is selected via the SPE select switches. Because the select switches disable shadowing, the refresh command can not refresh the memory on the standby SPE. The only effect the refresh command has is to hold the standby SPE reset. ■ Refresh not successful; use the ‘display errors’ and the ‘dup-spe’ category to check for standby SPE errors DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1169 This message line error, which corresponds to Error Codes 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2048, 2049, 2050, or 2051, is displayed when a refresh spe-standby command fails. ■ Standby SPE busy with another task; for information use status system This message line error, which corresponds to Error Code 2018, is displayed if a test command on a Standby SPE component is attempted while the Active SPE is performing some Maintenance Mode activity on the Standby SPE other than system technician-demanded maintenance. 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the standby into standby mode. 2. Repeat the command. 3. Issue the test spe-standby long command. ■ Standby SPE failed to reset with requested restart level; check for STBY-SPE errors ■ Standby SPE memory not refreshed; use the ‘refresh spe-standby’ command When a command that requires the standby SPE to be brought into maintenance mode is entered, but the standby SPE memory is not refreshed, this message is displayed. Issue the refresh spe-standby command and retry the command. ■ Standby SPE not available; for information use status system This message line error, which corresponds to Error Code 2020, is displayed if a test command on a Standby SPE component is attempted within the first five minutes of a restart of the Active SPE (that is, prior to the Active SPE holding the Standby SPE reset and refreshing it). 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Page 10-1170 check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the standby into standby mode. 2. Repeat the command. 3. Issue the test spe-standby long command. ■ Unable to interchange because the active SPE is locked active An SPE interchange cannot be performed when the active SPE is locked via the SPE select switches. Move the select switches back to the auto position and retry the reset system interchange command. ■ Unable to interchange because the standby SPE is busied out An SPE interchange can not be performed when the standby SPE is busied out. Release the standby SPE by entering the release spe-standby command and retry the command. ■ Unable to interchange due to alarms on the standby SPE; Use the ‘health-override’ option When components in the standby SPE complex are alarmed, and if these Standby alarms are more severe than the alarms in the active SPE complex, the reset system-interchange command returns this message. Using the reset system-interchange health-override command forces the interchange. See the Reset System command page for more details. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 4 Page 10-1171 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Active SPE was unable to disable or enable shadowing from Active SPE memory to Standby SPE memory. The communication path between the Active SPE and the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack may have failed, or the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack may have failed. 1. Check for Active SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2. Check for carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 3. If the B carrier contains the Active SPE, check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. If so, follow the repair procedures for connecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. 4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, and 3 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 7. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, and 3, proceed with Step 5. 5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 7, 8, and 9. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 4 Page 10-1172 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 6. If no error type is logged, the problem may be the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. ■ If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is on, replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 7, 8, and 9. ■ If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is not on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 7, 8, and 9. ■ If the LED is not on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem (that is, the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack has been replaced), escalate the problem. 7. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the standby into standby mode. 8. Repeat the command. 9. Issue the test spe-standby long command. 1029 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 1030 Page 10-1173 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The component on which the test was to be run is on the Standby SPE. This test may only be run on this component when it resides on the Active SPE. If it is absolutely necessary to conduct this test on the Standby SPE component, implement the following steps to make it become an Active SPE component. 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to return the Standby SPE to Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 2. Issue the reset system interchange command in order to cause an SPE switch. At this point, the component resides on the Active SPE. 1030 ABORT (cont’d.) 3. Move the SPE Select switches to make the SPE with the problem the current Active SPE. This action prevents software from switching to the other SPE since the current SPE has the error against it. 4. Repeat the test. 5. If the test passes and the alarm is resolved, return the SPE Select switches to the AUTO position. 6. If the test fails and the defective circuit pack is identified, the circuit pack needs to be replaced. However, the circuit pack now resides on the current Active SPE. Return the SPE Select switches to the AUTO position. Issue the refresh spe-standby command and then execute a reset system interchange command to cause an SPE switch. 7. The system is now on the healthy SPE. Replace the defective circuit pack on the Standby SPE as previously identified in Step 4. Refer to the "Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. 8. Repeat the procedure, beginning with Step 1. 2011 2012 2013 ABORT 2015 ABORT Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor did not reply to an Active SPE request to hold the Standby SPE Processor reset. The communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor may have failed, or the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor may have failed. Follow the procedures described for Error Code 2024 in the STBY-SPE section. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code Page 10-1174 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2016 2017 ABORT The Active SPE attempted to put the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode, but did not receive notification from the Standby SPE Maintenance software that it successfully entered Maintenance Mode OR, once in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE sent a request to the Active SPE to have the Active SPE conduct a portion of a test in the Standby SPE’s behalf, but the Standby SPE did not receive a response to its request. In either case, the communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may have failed. Follow the procedures described for Error Code 2024 in the STBY-SPE section. 2018 ABORT The test requires that a maintenance activity request be made to the Standby SPE; however, the request cannot be made because the Standby SPE is busy processing a previous maintenance activity request. 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE to Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 30 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 2. Repeat the test. 3. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components. 2019 ABORT A translation save on the Standby SPE was not carried out because the Shadow Link Test failed. (The Shadow Link Test was done to verify the integrity of the translation data on the Standby SPE.) 1. Check for Memory Shadowing Link errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2020 Page 10-1175 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test requires that a maintenance activity request be made to the Standby SPE; however, the request cannot be made because the Active SPE was restarted within the last five minutes and has not yet initialized the Standby SPE. Therefore, the Standby SPE is not available to handle maintenance activity requests. 1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE to Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 2. Repeat the test. 3. If the Active SPE was restarted with a Cold 1 or a reboot, issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components. 2021 ABORT An attempt to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory encountered a problem. In this case, the refresh from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory probably succeeded. However, the following steps should be followed just to verify that there are no problems. 1. Check for Active SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD (Memory circuit pack) Maintenance and follow the prescribed maintenance procedures. 2. Issue the refresh spe-standby command. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 2022 ABORT The Active SPE successfully put the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode but received an incorrect response to a maintenance activity request that it made to the Standby SPE OR, once in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE sent a request to the Active SPE to have the Active SPE conduct a portion of a test in the Standby SPE’s behalf, but the Standby SPE received an incorrect response to its request. The communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may have failed. Follow the procedures described for Error Code 2024 in the STBY-SPE section. 2023 ABORT Internal system error. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2024 Page 10-1176 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor did not respond to an Active SPE request to release the Standby SPE Processor to perform a function; OR the Standby SPE Processor was released but did not carry out the requested function and/or did not reply to the request; OR the Standby SPE Processor was released but cannot run because the Standby SPE Memory is defective. The communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor may have failed, or the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor may have failed, or the Standby SPE Processor may have failed. 1. Check for Active SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2. Check for carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 3. Check for Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 4. Check for Standby SPE Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PROCR (80286 Processor Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 5. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD (Memory circuit pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2024 (cont’d.) ABORT 6. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Cabinet Cable described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. 7. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 11. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, proceed with Step 8. 8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. 9. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 81 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack. Replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2024 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT (cont’d.) 2024 Page 10-1177 ABORT Description/ Recommendation 10. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if none of the three error types are logged, the problem is either the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack or the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack or the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on, and if the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is on, replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem, replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the fourth attempt to clear the problem, replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If none of the three LEDs is on AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear the problem, escalate the problem. (cont’d.) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2024 Page 10-1178 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 11. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the standby into standby mode. 12. Repeat the command. 13. Issue the test spe-standby long command. 2025 ABORT The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor successfully released the Standby SPE processor, but the Standby SPE processor did not successfully carry out the requested function. Either there is a problem with one or more components that make up the Memory Shadowing Link such that Active SPE Memory was not accurately shadowed to Standby SPE Memory OR there is a problem with the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack or the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack. 1. Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE Common Shadow Circuit errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) and follow the procedures. 2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD (Memory circuit pack) and follow the procedures. 3. Check for Standby SPE Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PROCR and follow the procedures. 4. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if the cable is loose or disconnected. If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. 5. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 10. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, 3, and 4, proceed with Step 6. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2025 (cont’d.) Page 10-1179 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation 6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. 7. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 82 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. 8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 85 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem may be the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack. Replace the Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. 9. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If Error Type 58 is logged OR if no error type is logged, the problem is either the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack, or the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on, and if the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2025 Page 10-1180 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation ■ If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. ■ If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is on, replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced), replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12. (cont’d.) Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2025 Page 10-1181 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the fourth attempt to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and carrier A Duplication Interface circuit packs have already been replaced), proceed with Step 10. ■ If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear the problem (the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and carrier A Duplication Interface circuit packs have been replaced and the test has been repeated once), escalate the problem. (cont’d.) 10. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the standby into standby mode. 11. Repeat the command. 12. Issue the test spe-standby long command. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code 2051 Page 10-1182 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation When attempting to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory, the Active SPE could not determine the status of one of the Duplication Interface circuit packs, or it determined that one of the Duplication Interface circuit packs was defective. 1. Check for carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures. 2. Check for carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance and follow the prescribed procedures. 3. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if the cable is loose or disconnected. If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. 4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, and 3 have now been repaired, proceed with Step 8. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, and 3, proceed with Step 5. 5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 8, 9, and 10. 6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 82 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 8, 9, and 10. 7. If Error Type 80 or 82 is not logged, escalate the problem. 2051 (cont’d.) ABORT 8. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more. 9. Repeat the test. 10. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Table 10-410. Error Code Page 10-1183 Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2054 ABORT This indicates an incompatibility between the two Processor circuit packs in a Duplication Option system. Follow the repair steps for STBY-SPE error 139 note (k). 2068 ABORT When attempting to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory, a problem was encountered when refreshing Packet Control circuit pack memory. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. other ABORT Any ABORT with an error code other than the ones listed previously indicates a problem that prevented the test from running. See Test Result of each maintenance object under test for details. other FAIL Any FAIL indicates that the test was actually run on the associated Standby SPE component. However, the test did not succeed and returned FAIL with the reason for the failure. See Test Result of each maintenance object under test for details. PASS The test was actually successfully run on the associated Standby SPE component and returned PASS. See Test Result of each maintenance object under test for details. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1184 STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] 10 MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO STRAT-3 MAJOR test synchronization Stratum 3 Clock STRAT-3 MINOR test synchronization Stratum 3 Clock STRAT-3 WARNING test synchronization Stratum 3 Clock The Digital Synchronization Network Plan (PUB 60110) specifies a hierarchy of synchronization nodes consisting of strata 1 to 4, where the sole Stratum 1 clock in the network is the most accurate. DEFINITY supports both Stratum 3 and Stratum 4 operations. Refer to SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for details on Stratum 4 operation. A Stratum 3 clock derives its timing from two DS1 references that are connected to a Stratum 3 or better (that is, lower stratum) source. The Stratum 3 clock provides a holdover of at least 24 hours should both DS1 references fail. (After 24 hours, the Stratum 3 clock still provides service but its accuracy may be degraded). The Digital Synchronization Network Plan (PUB 60110) requires that the Stratum 3 clock have duplicated components. The recognition of the Stratum 3 clock itself as well as its alarm signals, is supported only by the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. The TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack is also backwards-compatible with the TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack. The Stratum 3 clock may be connected to either the PPN or an EPN if the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack(s) is present in that port network. However, for reliability, it is recommended that the clock be connected to the PPN. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation , 555-230-653 for details on how to move the Stratum 3 clock between port networks. The only operation that software can perform is a query of the alarm leads. The only recovery action that can be performed on a catastrophic failure of the Stratum 3 clock is the utilization of the local oscillator on the Active TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. Neither software nor the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack can request additional information about the health of the Stratum 3 clock other than the information provided by the alarm leads. Furthermore, neither the software nor the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack can request that the external clock switch references, change configuration, disable/enable, initialize, etc. In G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386, the Stratum 3 clock has been implemented as an external that follows the specification in PUB 60110 for Stratum 3. Figure 10-85 shows how the Stratum 3 hardware configuration provides clock and alarm signals to the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack(s). The reference DS1 facilities are connected directly to the Stratum 3 clock for timing purposes, but the DS1 data may be routed into the switch by using a Y connector. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1185 DEFINITY TN767 TN767 or or TN722 TN722 TN780 TN780 Timing output Timing output Alarms TOC TOC PAI A B ST3 ST3 A B CI CI A B DS1 DS1 Ref B Ref A -48V Figure 10-85. -48V Stratum 3 Clock Hardware Configuration NOTE: When looking in the Stratum 3 cabinet, "A" card is on the left and "B" card is on the right. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1186 Stratum 3 Clock LED Strategy Red and green LEDs are provided on the components of the Stratum 3 clock for status and alarm indications. ! WARNING: The normal LED scheme is not followed for this device. Green LEDs do not indicate maintenance activity. There are no yellow LEDs, and there are more than three LEDs per circuit pack. The Stratum 3 clock has the following components: ■ 2 Clock Input cards (CI) Provides the logic to select the better DS1 reference or Clock Input card. The red FAIL LED on this card indicates a failure with the card or the DS1 reference connected to it. ■ 2 Stratum 3 Cards (ST3) Provides 24-hour holdover. The red FAIL LED on this card indicates a failure with the card. Replace the card. ■ 2 Timing Output Cards (TOC) Provides cable length compensation, multiple output ports, selection of the ST3, and CI outputs. This type of card has two red failure LEDs: one indicates a failure of the card; the other indicates a failure in one or more output ports. In either case, replace the card. ■ 1 PBX Alarm Interface (PAI) Filters power supplied to the clock, provides fuse protection, and provides alarm indications based on inputs supplied by other cards. The six LEDs on this card provide indications for the six alarm or status conditions as follows: 1. Loss of DS1 reference A. 2. Loss of DS1 reference B. 3. Loss of one clock unit. 4. Loss of both clock units. 5. Loss of one power supply. 6. Loss of both power supplies. NOTE: Removal of a card in the Stratum 3 clock may cause alarm(s) to be resolved and the query test to pass. However, the removed cards should still be replaced to restore the Stratum 3 clock to full service. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1187 The output of the CI and PAI cards go directly to the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack via two 25-pair amp-terminated cables. All of the cards have red and/or green LEDs for providing status or alarm indications. The following table shows the Stratum 3 Clock LED indications. NOTE: The abbreviations used in the table were defined previously with the exception of SRC (source) and PLL (Phase Locked Loop). Table 10-411. Card PAI CI ST3 TOC 1. Stratum 3 Clock LED Indications Name Color Indication REF A Red Loss of input reference A or CI A failed REF B Red Loss of input reference B or CI A failed ST A Red Failed Stratum 3 clock A ST B Red Failed Stratum 3 clock B PWR A Green -48VDC A present PWR B Green -48VDC B present FAIL Red Card failure DS1 Green DS1 source present CC Green Composite clock source1 present SRC ACTIVE Green Card is currently on-line FAIL Red Card failure LOCK Red PLL lost sync with reference or holdover mode REF A Red Timing Reference from CI A REF B Red Timing Reference from CI B FAIL Red Card failure PORT ALM Red Output port alarm (one or more) ST Green Reference present from ST clock INPUT Green Reference present from CI 500’ Green 500 feet phase advance 1000’ Green 1000 feet phase advance Composite Clock source refers to the protocol used to electrically transfer timing from the Stratum 3 clock to the PBX switch. The Composite Clock source is not relevant to Definity Generic 1.1. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1188 NOTE: When looking in the Stratum 3 cabinet, "A" card is on the left and "B" card is on the right. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Stratum 3 Clock Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test synchronization r 4 1 (d) Any Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) MINOR OFF test synchronization r 4 257 (e) Any Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) MINOR OFF test synchronization r 4 None WARNING ON 257 (c) 513 (f) Any Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) MINOR ON test synchronization r 4 769 (g) Any Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) MINOR ON test synchronization r 4 1025 (h) Any Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) MINOR/ MAJOR(a) ON test synchronization r 4 1281 (i) Any Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) MINOR/ MAJOR(a) ON test synchronization r 4 none MINOR/ MAJOR(a) ON 1537 (b) 1. Run the Short Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. In the context of the Stratum 3 clock, an OFF-BOARD alarm occurs when there is a DS1 facility problem; otherwise, the alarm is ON-BOARD indicating that there is a fault in the Stratum 3 clock or in the connection between the Stratum 3 clock and the PBX (Private Branch Exchange) switch. If the Stratum 3 clock cannot be referenced, and therefore the local oscillator on the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack must serve as the reference instead, a Major alarm is raised. Otherwise, a Minor alarm is raised. b. This error can be caused by one of the following conditions: 1. One or both TOCs (Timing Output Cards) may have failed, DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1189 2. the connection between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may be faulty, or 3. the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may be defective. A Minor alarm results if the Stratum 3 clock can still provide timing to the PBX; otherwise, a Major alarm is raised because the Stratum 3 clock is not providing timing and the PBX is referencing the local oscillator on the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. If only the Active TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack were faulty, the Standby TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack would become active and still synchronize to the Stratum 3 clock. When the system switches to the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack, the alarm is resolved, and it raises a TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) alarm to indicate that the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may be defective. If the alarm is minor: Look for a red LED on either or both TOC cards. If there is a red LED, then replace the card. If there is no red LED, then, using the Stratum 3 Wiring Guide, check that the wiring installation is correct. After replacing the card or correctly rewiring the installation, clear the alarm by first issuing the disable synchronization-switch command followed by the enable synchronization-switch command. Wait two minutes and then execute the status synchronization command. If Maintenance Name on the status screen shows "STRAT-3," then the problem is resolved. If not, then escalate the problem. If the alarm is major: Check connections between the Stratum 3 clock and the PBX. If there are no loose connections, using the Stratum 3 Wiring Guide, check that the wiring installation is correct. After reconnecting the loose connection or correctly rewiring it, clear the alarm by first issuing the disable synchronization-switch command followed by the enable synchronization-switch command. Wait one minute, and then execute the status synchronization command. If Maintenance Name on the status screen shows "STRAT-3," then the problem is resolved. If not, then escalate the problem. If the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack become active: Check connection between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack from which the system has just switched. If there are no loose connections, then, replace the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to the "How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack" section in the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation. Before switching back to the new TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack, use the test tone-clock PC long command to check that the Tone-Clock is receiving a signal from the Stratum 3 clock. The notation "PC" denotes a port network number and carrier. If all tests pass, switch to the new Tone-Clock circuit pack via the set tone-clock PC override command. If Test #651 fails, then the original TN780 Tone-Clock should be Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1190 reinserted, and the cable between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack should be replaced. If Test #651 continues to fail, then escalate the problem. c. This error indicates that the Tone/Clock circuit pack in the master port network is not a TN780 Tone/Clock circuit pack when a Stratum 3 clock is administered. Verify that the Tone/Clock in the master port network is TN780. d. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has either reference A or CI card A failed. Please refer to the error code 1 in the test description of the Test #649 for the repair procedure. e. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has one power supply failed. Please refer to the error code 2 in the test description of the Test #649 for the repair procedure. f. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has one clock unit failed. Please refer to the error code 4 in the test description of the Test #649 for the repair procedure. g. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has either reference B or CI card B failed. Please refer to the error code 8 in the test description of the Test #649 for the repair procedure. h. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has all power supplies failed. Please refer to the error code 16 in the test description of the Test #649 for the repair procedure. i. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has all clock units failed. Please refer to the error code 32 in the test description of the Test #649 for the repair procedure. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D/ND1 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) X X ND 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Page 10-1191 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649) The Stratum 3 clock provides the system with the following six alarm indications via the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack: 1. Reference A failed or CI card A failed. 2. Reference B failed or CI card B failed. 3. One power supply failed. 4. All power supplies failed. 5. One clock unit failed. 6. All clock unit(s) failed. This test queries the Stratum 3 clock for its alarm status (through the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack) and reports the results of the query. ! WARNING: The removal of a card in the Stratum 3 clock may cause alarm(s) to be resolved and the query test to pass. However, the removed cards should still be replaced to restore the Stratum 3 clock to full service. Table 10-412. TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query Error Code Test Result 1001 ABORT Description/ Recommendation The system could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times. 2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem. 1005 ABORT This test aborts when it is run on a Stratum 4 system. Do not change synchronization to Stratum 3 without consulting the synchronization plan administrator for this switch. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Table 10-412. Page 10-1192 TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued Error Code Test Result 1 FAIL Description/ Recommendation Either Reference A failed or CI card A failed. This condition usually indicates a failure of the DS1 reference; however, there may also be a failure of the CI card to which the reference is connected. System Technician dispatched to investigate this problem should take a spare CI card in case the CI card caused the failure. If you are NOT ON-SITE, use the following procedure: 1. Look for DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) errors using the display error command. Refer to the DS1-BD Maintenance documentation for recommended strategy to resolve any DS1-BD errors found. 2. If there are no DS1-BD errors OR after resolving all DS1-BD errors, issue the test synchronization r 4 command to determine if the alarm is still present. If all repetitions of the tests pass, then the alarm no longer exists. Otherwise, system technician should be dispatched with a spare CI card to use the following instructions on-site. If you are ON-SITE, use the following procedure: 1. Look for a red LED on CI card A (that is, the left CI card). If there is a red LED, then replace the CI card, if a spare is available. If no spare CI is available on-site, proceed to Step 3. If after replacing the CI card, the red LED on the new CI card lights also, then proceed to Step 3. 2. If a spare CI card is available, replace the suspect CI card. Otherwise, issue the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Table 10-412. Page 10-1193 TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued Error Code Test Result 1 FAIL (cont’d.) Description/ Recommendation 3. Look for DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) errors using the display error command. Refer to the DS1-BD Maintenance documentation for recommended strategy to resolve any DS1-BD errors found. If there are no DS1-BD errors, proceed to Step 5. 4. After all DS1-BD errors have been resolved, determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. 5. Check the DS1 reference A connections to the Stratum 3 clock. 6. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. If the problem persists after you have performed this procedure three times, follow normal escalation procedures. 2 FAIL One power supply failed. This error only occurs when the Stratum 3 clock has two power supplies, and one of them has failed. However, the clock can function with one power supply. 1. Locate the failed power supply by looking for a power supply with a red LED and replace it. 2. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, then follow the procedures for those test failures. If the problem persists after you have performed this procedure three times, then follow normal escalation procedures. 4 FAIL One clock unit failed. 1. Look at the Stratum 3 cabinet for a red LED on a circuit card marked "ST3." Replace the card. 2. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedures for those failures. If the problem persists after you have performed this procedure three times, follow normal escalation procedures. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Table 10-412. Page 10-1194 TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued Error Code Test Result 8 FAIL Description/ Recommendation Reference B failed or CI card B failed. This condition usually indicates a failure of the DS1 reference; however, there may also be a failure of the CI card to which the reference is connected. System Technician dispatched to investigate this problem should take a spare CI card in case the CI card caused the failure. If you are NOT ON-SITE, use the following procedure: 1. If there are no DS1-BD errors OR after resolving all DS1-BD errors, issue the test synchronization r 4 command to determine if the alarm is still present. If all repetitions of the tests pass, the alarm no longer exists. Otherwise, system technician should be dispatched with a spare CI card to use the following instructions on-site. If you are ON-SITE, use the following procedure: 1. Look for a red LED on a CI card B (the right CI card). If there is a red LED, replace the CI card, if a spare is available. If no spare CI is available on-site, proceed to Step 3. If after replacing the CI card, the red LED on the new CI card lights also, proceed to Step 3. 2. Otherwise, issue the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. 8 (cont’d.) FAIL 3. Look for DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) errors using the display error command. Refer to the DS1-BD Maintenance documentation for recommended strategy to resolve any DS1-BD errors found. If there are no DS1-BD errors, proceed to Step 5. 4. After all DS1-BD errors have been resolved, determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. 5. Check the DS1 reference A connections to the Stratum 3 clock. 6. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. If the problem persists after you have performed this procedure three times, follow normal escalation procedures. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)] Table 10-412. Page 10-1195 TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued Error Code Test Result Description/ Recommendation 16 FAIL All power supplies failed. 1. Replace the failed power supplies. 2. If battery backup for the Stratum 3 clock is not supplied or if the battery backup holdover time has been exceeded, the system references the local oscillator on the Active TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack until software detects one or both power supplies has(have) been restored (approximately 40 minutes). To speed up this restoration, issue the test synchronization r 4 command. All tests should pass. If any repetitions should fail, follow the procedures for those failures. If the problem persists after you have performed this procedure three times, follow normal escalation procedures. 32 FAIL All clock unit(s) failed. 1. Look at the Stratum 3 cabinet for red LEDs on circuit cards marked "ST3." Replace the card(s). 2. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those failures. If the problem persists after you have performed this procedure three times, follow normal escalation procedures. 2101 FAIL The TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack detects loss of signal. Refer to Note (b) of the STRAT-3 Hardware Error Log Entries table in the STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock) Maintenance documentation for replacement procedures. PASS The Stratum 3 clock has reported that it has no alarm conditions. If synchronization problems have been reported, look for SYNC errors and refer to SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for recommended strategy for those errors. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SVC-SLOT (Service Slot) Page 10-1196 SVC-SLOT (Service Slot) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level SVC-SLOT MINOR Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO none Service Slot The Service Slot maintenance object is used to detect when an invalid circuit pack is inserted into a SERVICE slot. The SERVICE slot is the leftmost slot in the J58890BB Port Carrier. It is identified as circuit pack slot location "00" in all commands, field entries, and displays used by the system administrator and the service technician. This slot does not provide tip and ring connectivity to the wall field. Therefore, only the following circuit pack types are allowed in the slot: ■ Call Classifier (TN744) ■ Integrated Announcement (TN750) ■ Maintenance/Test (TN771C) ■ Speech Synthesizer (TN725B) ■ Tone Detector (TN748C) A MINOR alarm is generated against the Service Slot maintenance object when a circuit pack of a type other than that included in the previous list is inserted into a SERVICE slot. The Service Slot maintenance object name is used instead of the maintenance object name for the illegal circuit pack to prevent any attempt to assign a port to an illegal circuit pack that is physically inserted into the SERVICE slot. Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Service Slot Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Alarm Level Associated Test 600 (a) None MINOR On/Off Board Test to Clear Value ON Notes: a. This error type indicates that a circuit pack type other than one of the following types was inserted into slot 00 (SERVICE slot) of the J58890BB port carrier. ■ Call Classifier (TN744) ■ Integrated Announcement (TN750) DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SVC-SLOT (Service Slot) ■ Maintenance/Test (TN771C) ■ Speech Synthesizer (TN725B) ■ Tone Detector (TN748C) Page 10-1197 The code of the invalid circuit pack can be displayed by using the list configuration board UUCSS command, where "UU" is the universal cabinet number, "C" is the carrier number, and "SS" is the slot number (always 00) of the alarmed circuit pack. Remove the invalid circuit pack to retire the alarm. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1198 SW-CTL (Switch Control) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO SW-CTL MINOR test network-control a/b sh Switch Control SW-CTL MAJOR test network-control a/b sh Switch Control The Switch Control resides on the TN777 Network Control (Netcon) circuit pack. The data channels (DATA-BD and DATA-CHL) also reside on the Netcon circuit pack. Standard systems have a single Netcon circuit pack and High and Critical Reliability systems have a Netcon circuit pack in each SPE complex. The Netcon in a standard system cannot be replaced without bringing the system down. The Netcon in the standby SPE of a High or Critical Reliability system can be changed without affecting normal system operation. The Switch Control is used to send control information between port circuit packs and the processor (see Figure 10-86). This control information is sent via the PPN cabinet’s Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. The portion of the TDM Bus used to transmit control messages is called the control channel. The control channel can be on either TDM Bus A or TDM Bus B, but only one bus is used for the control channel at any given time. The Switch Control is critical in the setup and take down of all calls but is not involved in the voice or data transmission that takes place during established calls. It is the Switch Control that detects when port circuit packs are plugged into or removed from the PPN cabinet. This information is then sent to the processor. The Switch Control monitors the health of the control channel on the PPN cabinet TDM Bus and informs the processor when errors occur. The Switch Control contains the hardware Time of Day (TIME-DAY) clock that the system uses for all its date and time information. In addition, the Switch Control also contains hardware to monitor critical system timing signals and informs the processor when these signals fail. For example, if the timing signals from a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the PPN cabinet fail, the Switch Control informs the processor, and the processor can switch in a spare Tone-Clock circuit pack, if one is available (High or Critical Reliability system). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1199 TDM BUS PORT CIRCUIT PACK PROCESSOR NETWORK CONTROL PORT CIRCUIT PACK PORT CIRCUIT PACK Figure 10-86. Switch Control Connectivity Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1200 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-413. Error Type Switch Control Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test network-control a/b sh r 1 1 Any Control Channel Test (#94) MAJOR ON test network-control a/b r 3 Control Channel Test (#94) MAJOR ON test network control a/b r 3 MINOR ON test network-control a/b l r 3 MAJOR ON test network-control a/b r 3 MAJOR ON test network-control a/b l r 2 2 (a) 257 (b) 0 or 1 None 513 (c) Time of Day Clock Test (#95) 769 (d) Any None 1025 1281 (e) Switch Control Loop Around Test (#92) Any 1537 1793 (f) None Switch Control Reset Test #93 Any None 2817 MCD Loop Around Test (#324) MAJOR ON test network-control a/b r 2 3073 MCD Memory Test (#325) MAJOR ON test network-control a/b r 3 3329 (g) None MAJOR ON (g) 1. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. Notes: a. This error may not cause a Switch Control alarm if Error Type 769 is also present since this error may actually be caused by the loss of clock signals and not by a Switch Control failure. b. The 257 errors are reported to the processor by the Switch Control and indicate possible hardware problems on the Network Control circuit pack. The receipt of these errors causes Switch Control maintenance to run specific Switch Control tests. If there really is a problem, the Switch Control tests usually causes other errors to be logged. In the rare case where no other errors are logged but 257 errors are occurring at a high rate (more than 10 in the last hour), the Network Control circuit pack should be replaced at the customer’s convenience. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1201 c. If the Aux Data is less than 100, the test may have been interrupted by LMM operations. Wait 1 minute, then test again. Retry the test a maximum of three times. If the Aux Data is more than 100 or fails two out of three times with Aux Data less than 100, the Netcon circuit pack needs to be replaced. d. A 769 error occurs when the Switch Control reports a loss of timing signals to the processor. When this error is present, the Switch Control is usually not alarmed since any Switch Control test failures are really the result of faulty signals from the PPN cabinet Tone-Clock circuit pack. See TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation for the procedures needed to diagnose Tone-Clock circuit pack troubles. e. This error indicates a loss of handshake between SW-CTL and the system software. Look for and resolve all other SW-CTL errors. In the rare case where no other errors are logged, but Error Type 1281 is occurring at a high rate (more than 10 in the previous hour), escalate the problem. For G3s, a loss of handshake between Switch Control in Network Control circuit pack (TN777B) and Processor circuit pack (TN786B or TN790) can be caused by the following components: Network Control circuit pack (TN777B), Processor circuit pack (TN786), Processor Interface circuit pack (TN765), Packet Control circuit pack (TN778), and M-BUS. Follow these repair steps: 1. Look for and resolve all other SW-CTL errors. 2. Look for and resolve all other PI-SCI, PI-BD, and PKT-CTRL errors. 3. If the error indicates a failure in the Network Control circuit pack, Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions to replace the Network Control circuit pack. Boot the system up after the Network Control circuit pack has been inserted successfully into the control carrier. 4. If the error of loss of handshake persists after the replacement of the Network Control circuit pack, then refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions to replace the Processor circuit pack. Refer to the "Software Upgrade" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’, to load the system software from the Memory Card (J58890TG-1 List 3) with the correct software release into the Processor circuit pack. Boot the system up after the system software is successfully loaded into the Processor circuit pack. 5. If the error of loss of handshake persists after the replacement of the Processor circuit pack, consider the replacement of the control carrier. It’s possible that the M-bus on the backplane of the control carrier may be defective. Recommended Repair Kits: Network Control circuit pack (TN777B), Processor circuit pack (TN786B or TN790), and Memory Card (J58890TG-1 List 3) with correct software release. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1202 f. The Aux Data for this error is not meaningful. The 1793 errors are in-line errors that indicate a possible problem with the interface between the Switch Control and the processor. The receipt of these errors causes Switch Control maintenance to run specific Switch Control tests. If there really is a problem, the Switch Control tests usually causes other errors to be logged. In the rare case where no other errors are logged but 1793 errors are occurring at a high rate (more than 10 in the last hour), the Network Control circuit pack should be replaced at the customer’s convenience. g. This error indicates bad clock detection circuitry on the Netcon circuit pack. Replace the Netcon circuit pack according to the control carrier circuit pack replacement procedures. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Switch Control Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Switch Control Reset Test (#93) Long Test Sequence D/ND1 X D Control Channel Interface Test (#92) X X ND Control Channel Transmission Test (#94) X X ND X D Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#325) EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#324) X X ND Time of Day Clock Test (#95) X X ND Control Channel Loop Around Test (DATA-BD) (#52) (a) X X ND NPE Audit Test (DATA-BD) (#50) (a) X ND Data Channel Reset Test (DATA-CHL) (#107) (b) X D Data Channel Interface Test (DATA-CHL) (#108) (b) X D Maintenance Loop Around Test (DATA-CHL) (#109) (b) X X ND Data Channel Crosstalk Test (DATA-CHL) (#110) (b) X X ND Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (DATA-CHL) (#111) (b) X X ND Continued on next page 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1203 Notes: a. Refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. b. Refer to DATA-CHL (Network Control Channel) Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests. Control Channel Interface Test (#92) Loop back messages are sent to the Switch Control via the interface used for control channel messages. The messages are returned to the SPE for verification via the same interface. Table 10-414. Error Code TEST #92 Control Channel Interface Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2013 2100 none ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Table 10-414. Error Code other Page 10-1204 TEST #92 Control Channel Interface Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation Messages could not be looped back through the control channel interface. If this is a standard system, the customer probably cannot make or receive calls. 1. This failure could be due to either a Netcon circuit pack failure or the loss of system timing signals. If the Switch Control is alarmed, then suspect a Netcon circuit pack failure. If the Switch Control is not alarmed, investigate the possible loss of system timing signals before replacing the Netcon circuit pack. Test #94 also fails if the system timing signals are lost. If Test #94 passes, do not suspect the loss of timing signals. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure that this failure is occurring consistently, run the Long Test Sequence to reset the Switch Control. Sometimes running the Long Test Sequence may clear the problem. If the test is still failing, proceed to Step 3 or 4. 3. If the system can process calls, replace the Netcon board. 4. If calls cannot be made, replace the Netcon board immediately. 5. The procedure for replacing the Network Control circuit pack (DATA-BD) in a High or Critical Reliability system is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. PASS The control channel interface between the processor and the Switch Control is working correctly. Continued on next page Switch Control Reset Test (#93) This test is destructive. This test resets the Switch Control and determines if it can successfully go through its initialization sequence. The test is destructive since there is the possibility of losing some control messages to or from port circuit packs. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Table 10-415. Error Code Page 10-1205 TEST #93 Switch Control Reset Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2013 2100 none ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to Standby SPE for a description of these error codes. 2000 or None FAIL The Switch Control could not be successfully reset. If this is a standard system, the customer probably cannot make or receive calls. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1. This failure could be due to either a Network Control circuit pack failure or the loss of system timing signals. If the Switch Control is alarmed, then suspect a Network Control circuit pack failure. If the Switch Control is not alarmed, investigate the possible loss of system timing signals. See “TDM Bus Clock”. If many port circuit pack LEDs are lit, suspect a TDM Bus Clock problem. If only the Network Control circuit pack LED is lit, suspect the Network Control circuit pack. If the Network Control circuit pack is determined to be at fault, proceed to Step 2. 2. If the system can process calls, replace the Netcon board. 3. If calls cannot be made, replace the Netcon board. 4. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. PASS The Switch Control has initialized correctly. Look at results of the other tests to see if it is operating correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1206 Control Channel Transmission Test (#94) Control channel messages are sent from the SPE to selected port circuit packs and the response from the port circuit packs is checked. This tests the ability of the Switch Control to send and receive messages on the control channel of the TDM Bus. This test cannot run on the Standby SPE Switch Control. Therefore, it is possible to have defective hardware on the Standby Network Control circuit pack that is not detectable. Table 10-416. Error Code 0 TEST #94 Control Channel Transmission Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The port circuit packs necessary for this test are not available. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test keeps aborting for this reason, then the Network Control circuit pack should be replaced. 1030 ABORT The Switch Control on the Standby SPE is being tested. 1. For recommended maintenance procedure, refer to ABORT Error Code 1030 in STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2013 2100 none ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Table 10-416. Error Code 0 Page 10-1207 TEST #94 Control Channel Transmission Test — Continued Test Result FAIL Description/ Recommendation The Switch Control cannot communicate on the TDM Bus control channel. The customer probably cannot make or receive calls. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure this failure is occurring consistently, run the Long Test Sequence to reset the Switch Control. Sometimes, running the Long Test Sequence may clear the problem. Remember that the Long Test Sequence is destructive. Placing and receiving calls is affected for several seconds. 2. If there are no TDM Bus alarms against the Standby TDM Bus, switch the control channel from its current bus to the Standby bus. If this test passes on the new bus, investigate the possibility of TDM Bus failures. If the test fails even after the control channel is switched to the standby TDM Bus, proceed to Step 3 or 4. 3. If the system is still able to process calls, replace the Netcon circuit pack at the customer’s convenience (Standard system) or right away (High or Critical Reliability system). 4. If calls cannot be made, replace the Netcon circuit pack immediately. 5. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. PASS The Switch Control can communicate with the port circuit packs over the TDM Bus. Continued on next page Time of Day Clock Test (#95) The short term accuracy of the Time of Day (TIME-DAY) clock is tested. The test reads the clock once, waits a short time, and reads the clock again. The second reading of the clock must be within certain limits relative to the first reading for the test to pass. The display time command can be used to display the current setting of the TIME-DAY clock. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1208 Table 10-417. TEST #95 Time of Day Clock Test Error Code 1000 Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation The test was interrupted by a higher priority task. 1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2. If the test aborts five times, wait until the system is less heavily used and rerun the test at that time. 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes. 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2013 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 2001 FAIL The Time of Day clock could not be read. 1. Run the set time command and set the time to the current time. 2. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to determine if setting the time corrected the error. Proceed to Step 3 if the error is still occurring. 3. Replace the Netcon circuit pack at the customer’s convenience (Standard system) or right away (High or Critical Reliability system). other FAIL The accuracy of Time of Day clock is not within limits. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is occurring consistently. 2. Replace the Network Control (DATA-BD) circuit pack at the customer’s convenience (unduplicated system) or right away (High or Critical Reliability system). 3. The procedure for replacing the Network Control (DATA-BD) circuit pack is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. PASS The Time of Day clock on the Switch Control circuit pack is operating correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Page 10-1209 Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#324) Loop back messages are sent to the Switch Control via the interface used for EPN maintenance circuit pack messages. The messages are returned to the SPE for verification via the same interface. Table 10-418. Error Code TEST #324 Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1005 ABORT The system does not contain an EPN, so this test is not executed. 1030 ABORT The component on which the test was to be run is on the Standby SPE. This test may only be run on this component when it resides on the Active SPE. 1. For recommended maintenance procedure, refer to ABORT Error Code 1030 in STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation. 32400 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. 2012 32413 32416 32423 32425 ABORT Internal system error 2013 32411 32421 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test. 32414 32417 32424 32427 ABORT 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “Standby SPE” for a description of these error codes. ABORT Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. The messages failed to return (timed out) and were not verified. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five retries. 2. If the test continues to abort and SW-CTL Test #325 passes, there is not a problem, but if SW-CTL Test #325 fails, follow the recommendations for SW-CTL Test #325. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Table 10-418. Error Code TEST #324 Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test — Continued Test Result any Page 10-1210 FAIL Description/ Recommendation This failure indicates that communications with the Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN is probably not possible. The EPN Manager I may not be usable. 1. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is occurring consistently, run the Long Test Sequence to reset the Switch Control. Sometimes running the Long Test Sequence may clear the problem. Remember the Long Test Sequence is destructive. Placing and receiving calls is affected for several seconds. 2. Replace the Netcon circuit pack whenever it is convenient for the customer (unduplicated system) or right away (High or Critical Reliability system). 3. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. PASS The EPN Maintenance circuit pack interface between the processor and the Switch Control is working correctly. Test #325 is a more thorough test of this interface but it is destructive. Continued on next page Switch Control Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#325) This test is destructive. This test writes test patterns into the EPN Maintenance circuit pack interface and verifies that it can read back these test patterns successfully. Messages to or from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can be lost when this test is run. Table 10-419. Error Code TEST #325 Switch Control Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test Test Result Description/ Recommendation 1005 ABORT The system does not contain an EPN so this test is not executed. 32500 ABORT Test disabled via software patch. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SW-CTL (Switch Control) Table 10-419. Error Code Page 10-1211 TEST #325 Switch Control Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test — Continued Test Result Description/ Recommendation 2013 32511 ABORT Could not allocate the system resources to run for this test. 2012 32513 32514 ABORT Internal system error 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to “Standby SPE” for a description of these error codes. 32515 FAIL This failure indicates that communications with the Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN is probably not possible. The EPN management terminal may not be usable. 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. 1. Run the Long Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is occurring consistently. Remember the Long Test Sequence is destructive. Placing and receiving calls is affected for several seconds. 2. Replace the Netcon circuit pack. 3. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’. PASS The EPN Maintenance circuit pack interface between the processor and the Switch Control is working correctly. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1212 SYNC (Synchronization) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO SYNC MAJOR display errors Synchronization Maintenance SYNC MINOR display errors Synchronization Maintenance SYNC WARNING test synchronization Synchronization Maintenance The Synchronization Maintenance is composed of both hardware and software components and its purpose is to provide a common reference frequency for reliable digital communication between systems and other PBXs, COs or CPE. Synchronization is achieved via the use of several system components which include the Tone-Clock, the DS1 Interface, and the Expansion Interface circuit packs. Synchronization is achieved between the PPN and the EPNs via the Expansion Interface Link (EXP-LINK) between the networks. Depending on the network synchronization plan and the status of synchronization sources, the system timing reference may be a Tone-Clock circuit pack, DS1 interface circuit packs or an external Stratum 3 clock. Stratum 4 synchronization extracts timing information directly from a DS1 reference or from a Tone-Clock. Stratum 3 synchronization requires the use of a Stratum 3 clock which provides a timing signal, derived from DS1 references, to the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. The external Stratum 3 clock is a more stable timing source than the Stratum 4 clock and provides 24-hour holdover in case of reference failures. The Stratum 3 clock has redundant components. Stratum 4 Synchronization The system can be configured with primary and secondary synchronization references (DS1 interface circuit packs) when using Stratum 4 synchronization. Both references are optional (since the local oscillator can be used), and the secondary reference is optional if a primary is provided. If this system is the master for the network, then its local oscillator would be used and no DS1s would be used as references. If the primary synchronization reference is not providing a valid timing signal, the system automatically switches to the secondary synchronization reference. If the secondary reference does not provide a valid timing signal or is not administered as a synchronization reference, a Tone-Clock circuit pack provides the system timing source. The system does not revert to the primary if the current reference is the secondary and is failing; however the system switches from the local oscillator to another reference when the new reference becomes available. The following diagram should assist in understanding Stratum 4 Synchronization Maintenance components within the system. This diagram depicts a possible Generic 1.2 configuration; DEFINITY Generic 1 does not support two EPNs, but the operation and maintenance described below is the same except for the references to multiple EPNs. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1213 PRIMARY SECONDARY REFERENCE REFERENCE DS-1 TONE/ DS-1 INTF CLOCK INTF PPN TIMING TIMING INFO INFO EI LINK EI LINK EPN EPN EXPANSION INTERFACE (EI) LINK* * EPN-TO-EPN LINKS ARE NOT USED TO CARRY TIMING Figure 10-87. Typical Stratum 4 Synchronization Configuration If the primary synchronization reference in the previous diagram is providing a valid timing signal, then the flow of system synchronization would travel from the DS1 interface circuit pack in the PPN across the active Expansion Interface fiber link to the two EPNs. The PPNDS1 interface circuit pack provides a timing signal for the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack and the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack provides timing for all circuit packs in the PPN. The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack uses the timing generated by the Tone-Clock circuit pack to generate a data stream which is sent across the Expansion Interface link to the Expansion Interface circuit packs in the two EPNs. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack uses the received data stream to generate a timing signal. The Tone-Clock circuit pack in the EPNs uses this signal to generate timing for all the circuit packs in their respective EPNs. The PPN, in the above mentioned scenario, is designated the master port network and the EPNs are called slave port networks. The master port network is defined as the port network that contains the system synchronization source. If the primary synchronization DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1214 reference does not provide a valid timing signal, Synchronization Maintenance switches to the secondary reference. Both the primary and secondary references must reside in the same port network, but there is no restriction as to in which port network both must reside (that is, both references may be in an EPN). The recommended placement of the references is in the PPN. There are two kinds of Stratum 4 synchronization that are supported: Type I and Type II. Stratum 4 type I is more stable than Type II and provides some switching capability at the hardware level. Stratum 4 Type II operation is the only synchronization strata provided by Generic 1. It is important to note that Stratum 4 Type I operation is not possible when one or both of the DS1 interface circuit packs providing the reference sources is a TN722. Both must be the TN767 or TN464 (suffix C or higher). Stratum 3 Synchronization The following diagram may help you to understand the synchronization components needed for Stratum 3 synchronization. NOTE: This is only one possible configuration. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1215 EXTERNAL STRATUM 3 DS1 REFERENCES CLOCK TONE/CLOCK TN780 PPN TIMING TIMING INFO INFO EI LINK EI LINK EPN EPN EXPANSION INTERFACE (EI) LINK* * EPN-TO-EPN LINKS ARE NOT USED TO CARRY TIMING Figure 10-88. Example Stratum 3 Synchronization Configuration For Stratum 3 synchronization, an external clock provides a timing signal to a TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack, and the TN780 provides timing to all circuit packs in the port network in which the TN780 resides (that is, the PPN in the previous diagram). The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack uses the timing generated by the TN780 to generate a data stream which is sent across the two Expansion Interface Links to the two EPNs to the EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs use the received data stream to generate a timing signal which is used by the Tone-Clock circuit packs in the EPNs to provide timing for all circuit packs in both EPNs. (The Tone-Clock circuit pack is not necessarily a TN780; only the Tone-Clock circuit pack connected to the external Stratum 3 clock must be a TN780.) The PPN, in the above mentioned scenario, is designated the master port network and the EPNs are called slave DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1216 port networks. The master port network is defined as the port network whose Tone-Clock is connected to the Stratum 3 clock. NOTE: The Stratum 4 equipment (usually a PBX) should never provide timing to a Stratum 3 PBX. NOTE: The external Stratum 3 clock may be connected to the TN780 Tone-Clock in any port network. However, it is recommended that it be connected to the PPN. Synchronization Troubleshooting For both Stratum 3 and 4 operation, major and minor alarms indicate that there is a problem with the system synchronization references. These alarms are resolved when the alarmed synchronization reference is restored. The status synchronization and display synchronization commands are used to determine the current system synchronization reference and the primary and secondary references that are administered respectively. Other commands associated with Synchronization Maintenance are disable synchronization-switch and enable synchronization-switch. These commands are used to disable the ability of Synchronization Maintenance to switch between synchronization references and to enable this switching ability, respectively. The set synchronization command is executed only after synchronization has been disabled and is used to manually switch to a specific synchronization reference. This command is useful to diagnose synchronization problems by forcing a specific reference (DS1 or Tone-Clock) to be the system synchronization reference to determine if a specific reference is providing a valid timing signal. For Stratum 3 operation, only a TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may be specified. To switch synchronization to the Stratum 3 clock, use the enable synchronization-switch command after verifying that the Stratum 3 clock is wired correctly. The system synchronization planner must avoid creating a timing loop when administering the primary and secondary synchronization references in a system. A timing loop exists whenever a system receives timing from another system whose timing reference is directly or indirectly derived from itself. Timing loops can lead to loss of digital data between systems that are exchanging data with any system within the loop. An invalid timing signal is also generated by any system within the loop, thus propagating the invalid timing signal to any system(s) using a system within the loop as a synchronization reference. Figure 10-89 shows a timing loop and a correct distribution of timing between the systems. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1217 "DEFINITY" "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATONS COMMUNICATONS SYSTEM SYSTEM GENERIC 2 GENERIC 2 "DEFINITY" "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATONS COMMUNICATONS "DEFINITY" "DEFINITY" COMMUNICATONS COMMUNICATONS SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM GENERIC 1 GENERIC 1 GENERIC 1 GENERIC 1 TIMING LOOP CORRECT TIMING DISTRIBUTION NOTE: SYNCHRONIZATION REFERENCE (PRIMARY OR SECONDARY) Figure 10-89. Synchronization Timing Loop A correctly designed network has no loops and each piece of equipment in the network is supplied by a clock of equal or lower stratum (that is, the inputs to a Stratum 3 clock should NEVER be from a Stratum 4 device). It is strongly recommended that the network administrator be consulted before administering any synchronization changes. The yellow LEDs of the TN768 and 780 Tone-Clock circuit packs flash in a specific pattern to indicate the status of the circuit pack. These flashing LED patterns are used to indicate if a Tone-Clock circuit pack is deriving timing from an external source or whether the Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing the timing signal for the port network. The yellow LED patterns for the TN768 and 780 Tone-Clock circuit packs are as follows: 1. Yellow LED is on 2.7 seconds and off 0.3 seconds—This light pattern indicates that an external timing source is being used as a synchronization reference and the circuit pack is in Active mode. 2. Yellow LED is on 0.3 seconds and off 2.7 seconds—This light pattern indicates that the local oscillator on the Tone-Clock circuit pack is being used as a synchronization reference and the circuit pack is in Active mode. 3. Yellow LED stays on—This light pattern indicates that the circuit pack has been reset but no translation has been downloaded. This pattern indicates the circuit pack is providing clocks and is in Active mode. 4. Yellow LED off is an indication that the Tone-Clock circuit pack is in Standby mode (neither generating tones nor supplying clocks). Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1218 5. The following two patterns may occur when the circuit pack is either in Active or Standby mode. The best approach to determine the mode of the circuit pack is to use the status system system technician command. ■ Maintenance running on the Standby circuit pack is indicated by the following pattern (yellow and green LEDs flashing): LED on 0.1 seconds, off for 0.2 seconds, on for 0.1 seconds, off for 0.4 seconds, on for 0.4 seconds, off for 0.4 seconds. ■ Green flashing and yellow flashing in a pattern different than the previously mentioned pattern indicates that maintenance is running on the Active circuit pack. Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 10-420. Error Type 0 1 1 1 (a) 18 (b) Synchronization Error Log Entries Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 Any Any Any test synchronization Any None WARNING/ MINOR(j)2 OFF None 0 disable sync WARNING OFF enable sync 1 Any None WARNING/ MINOR(j)2 OFF None 513 (d)1 Any None WARNING/ MAJOR(j)2 OFF None None MAJOR/ WARNING3 OFF None 0-50 None MAJOR/ WARNING OFF enable sync 2049 (g) (i)4 0 None WARNING OFF None 4 0 None WARNING OFF None 257 (c) 769 (e) 1793 (f)4 2305 (h) (i) Continued on next page 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures. This error type initially raises a Warning alarm. If this error type persists and alarms are not downgraded on this MO due to the value of set options, then, after a period of time, a Minor or Major alarm is raised. Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command. It may take up to one hour for these SYNC alarms to clear due to "leaky bucket" strategy. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1219 Notes: a. This error indicates a problem with the primary DS1 reference. It is cleared when the primary reference is restored. The following steps should give an indication of the source of the problem: 1. Check if the primary DS1 interface circuit pack is inserted in the carrier via the list configuration board PCSS command. 2. Check the connection of the cable supplying the external timing source to the primary DS1 interface circuit pack. 3. Test the primary DS1 interface circuit pack via the test board PCSS long command. Check the Error Log for DS1-BD errors and refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation to resolve any errors associated with the primary DS1 interface circuit pack. If no errors are listed in the Error Log for the primary DS1 interface circuit pack, continue with the following steps. 4. Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the master port network via the test tone/clock PC long command. Check the Error Log for TDM-CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Test #148 passes successfully. If Test #148 fails with an Error Code 2 through 32, refer to “TDM-CLK” to resolve the problem. If not, continue with the following steps. 5. Execute the disable synchronization-switch and the enable synchronization-switch commands. These two commands (when executed together) switch the system synchronization reference to the primary DS1 interface circuit pack. Check the Error Log and execute the status synchronization command to verify that the primary DS1 interface circuit pack is still the system synchronization reference. If the primary DS1 interface circuit pack is not the system synchronization reference, and this is not a High or Critical Reliability system, continue with the following step. 6. High or Critical Reliability system: Switch Tone-Clock circuit packs on the master port network via the set tone/clock PC command, and repeat the disable/enable commands described in the previous step. b. This error indicates that Synchronization Maintenance has been disabled via the disable synchronization-switch command. Execute the enable synchronization-switch command to enable Synchronization Maintenance reference switching and to resolve this alarm. c. This error indicates a problem with the secondary DS1 reference. It is cleared when the secondary reference is restored. Refer to note (a) to resolve this error substituting secondary for primary in the preceding resolution steps. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1220 d. This error indicates that the Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing the timing source for the system. The primary and secondary (if administered) are not providing a valid timing signal. Investigate errors 1 and 257 to resolve this error. e. This error indicates that the external Stratum 3 Clock fails to provide the system timing reference. Refer to Stratum 3 Clock Maintenance document to resolve the defective synchronization reference. This error indicates excessive switching of system synchronization references has occurred. When this error occurs, synchronization is disabled and the Tone-Clock circuit pack (in the master port network) becomes the synchronization reference for the system. Execute the following steps to resolve this error: 1. Check for timing loops and resolve any loops that exist. 2. Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the master port network via the test tone/clock PC long command. Check the Error Log for TDM-CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Test #148 passes successfully. If Test #148 fails with an Error Code 2 through 32, refer to the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation to resolve the problem. If not, continue with the following steps. 3. High or Critical Reliability system: Switch Tone-Clock circuit packs on the master port network via the set tone/clock PC command. Standard system: Replace the primary and secondary (if administered) DS1 Interface circuit packs. 4. Check for an error logged against the primary or secondary DS1 board. If there is an error, follow the DS1 section to resolve the errors. If there is not, enter enable sync, and wait for two to five minutes for the primary sync source to come on-line. In Release 5si + memory: This error indicates that some reference switches have occurred. If there is not a major SYNC alarm, then investigate other SYNC errors. If there is an active major SYNC alarm, and if this is not a Stratum 3 system, then follow the steps above. f. This error indicates that the Expansion Interface Link is experiencing timing slips. The two port networks are not synchronized. This error increases the bit error rates for data transmission between port networks. Verify that all the TDM/LAN Bus cables on the backplane are AT&T Parts number AT&T SK00199-001 rather than flat ribbon cables. Also, check that the bus terminators are the ZAHF V1 TDM/LAN Bus Terminator type. Refer to note (i) for error resolution steps. This error is cleared by a leaky bucket strategy and takes one hour to clear (leak away) the error counter once it is alarmed. Therefore, it may take up to one hour to clear the alarm after the problem is cleared. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1221 g. This error indicates that the slave Tone-Clock circuit pack is experiencing loss of signal. Refer to note (i) for error resolution steps. h. The following steps should be executed to resolve error 2049 and 2305: 1. Check for timing loops, and resolve any loops that exist. 2. Check the Error Log for any active as well as resolved Expansion Interface circuit pack errors and refer to EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation to resolve any errors found. 3. High or Critical Reliability system: ■ Switch Tone-Clock circuit packs in the slave port network via the set tone/clock PC system technician command. The error count for this particular error should start decrementing once the problem is solved—if the count does not decrease in 15 minutes the problem still persists. ■ If the problem still persists, switch the Tone-Clock in the slave port network back to the previous configuration. Then, switch Expansion Interface Links via the set expansion-link PCSS command. ■ If the problem still persists, switch the Expansion Interface Links back to the previous configuration via the set expansion-link PCSS. Then, switch the Tone-Clock circuit packs in the master port network. ■ If the problem still persists, switch the Tone-Clock circuit packs in the master port network back to the previous configuration. If the system synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock circuit pack, follow normal escalation procedures. If the system synchronization reference is a DS1 interface circuit pack, administer a different DS1 interface circuit pack as the primary synchronization reference. 4. Standard system:—Error 2049: ■ Test the Tone-Clock circuit packs in the master and slave port networks via the test tone/clock PC long command. Check the Error Log for TDM-CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Test #148 passes successfully. If Test #148 fails with an Error Code 2 through 32, refer to “TDM-CLK” to resolve the problem. If not, continue with the following steps. ■ If the master and slave Tone-Clock circuit packs do not fail TDM Bus Clock Test #150 (PPM Inquiry), replace the Expansion Interface circuit packs in the system. ■ If the system synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock circuit pack and the master Tone-Clock circuit pack fails TDM Bus Clock Test #150, follow the steps listed in “TDM-CLK” to replace the master Tone-Clock circuit pack. Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1222 ■ If the system synchronization reference is a DS1 interface circuit pack and the master Tone-Clock circuit pack fails TDM Bus Clock Test #150, the primary or secondary (if administered) synchronization references are not providing valid timing signals for the system. Check the system synchronization references administered, and follow the steps outlined in note (a) if the primary synchronization reference is providing timing for the system or note (c) if the secondary synchronization reference is providing timing for the system. ■ If the slave Tone-Clock circuit pack fails the TDM Bus Clock Test #150 but the master Tone-Clock does not fail this test, the master Tone-Clock circuit pack must be replaced. Follow the Tone-Clock replacement steps listed in the “TDM-CLK”. If SLIP errors remain follow SLIP ANALYSIS. 5. Standard system:—Error 2305: ■ Replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack in this port network and the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the PPN that is connected to this port network. ■ If the problem persists, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack in the slave port network. Follow the steps listed in “TDM-CLK” to replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack. i. Noise on the DS1 line can cause transient alarms on synchronization. Therefore, when a synchronization problem occurs causing error types 1, 257, or 513, a WARNING alarm is first raised for 15 to 20 minutes before the alarm is upgraded to a MAJOR or MINOR alarm. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Test Synchronization Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Test Synchronization Test (#417) 1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive X Long Test Sequence X D/ND1 ND Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYNC (Synchronization) Page 10-1223 Test Synchronization Test (#417) This test updates all the Synchronization Maintenance component circuit packs with the correct information regarding their role in providing synchronization for the system. All the Tone-Clock, Expansion Interface, and DS1 Interface circuit packs in the system are updated via this test. This test will either pass or abort. Table 10-421. Error Code TEST #417 Test Synchronization Test Test Result ABORT Description/ Recommendation Internal system error 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times. PASS The Synchronization Maintenance component circuit pack parameters have been successfully updated. The system should be synchronized after successful execution of this test. If synchronization problems still exist, refer to the Error Log to obtain information regarding the source of the problem. Continued on next page Issue 1 August 1997 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYS-PRNT (System Printer) Page 10-1224 SYS-PRNT (System Printer) MO Name (in Alarm Log) Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO SYS-PRNT MINOR test sp-link l System Printer SYS-PRNT WARNING release sp-link System Printer The Report Scheduler feature provides the capability to schedule selected administration commands to be printed by an asynchronous System Printer (SYS-PRNT) or sent to a Personal Computer (PC). The System Printer Link to this external device can be administered either as a data extension or to the EIA port on the switch Processor (PROCR) circuit pack which provides a standard EIA 232C interface. System Printer Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between the system and an external SYS-PRNT output device. The strategy includes a set of tests for detection of errors during normal operation, troubleshooting actions, and alarms for serious problems. System Printer Link Maintenance uses a try-and-wait mechanism for maintaining the SYS-PRNT link. If the link set-up fails, a minor alarm is raised for service attention. A warning alarm is raised when the SPE has been busied out. A maximum of two link retry attempts is made. After the second attempt, set-up attempts are only made by the application software (that is, the 15-minute timer fires and jobs are printed unless an immediate job was entered.) After two unsuccessful attempts to establish the link, a MINOR alarm is raised for service attention. If the System Printer Link is torn down due to an error, System Printer Link Maintenance raises a MINOR alarm but does not attempt to bring up the System Printer Link. In DEFINITY Generic 1, the following physical configurations are supported for the System Printer Link: a. from the EIA port on the Processor circuit pack to a SYS-PRNT output device via the standard EIA 232C interface b. from a data channel (DATA-CHL) on the Network Control circuit pack (DATA-BD) to a data extension where the SYS-PRNT output device connects via the standard EIA 232C interface The data extension can be a(n) PDM, MPDM, DTDM, or ADU. The PDM, MPDM, or DTDM connects to a Digital Line (DIG-LINE) on the TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack (DIG-BD); the ADU connects to a Data Line (DAT-LINE) of the TN726 Data Line circuit pack (DT-LN-BD). System Printer Link Maintenance does not cover the elements comprising the SYS-PRNT physical link; that is, the external SYS-PRNT output device, the EIA port on the Processor circuit pack, the Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM) and the Digital Line of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, the ADU and the Data Line of TN726 Data Line circuit pack, and the data channels on the TN777 Network Control circuit pack. If System Printer Link Maintenance cannot restore DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs/si 555-230-127 Issue 1 August 1997 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures SYS-PRNT (System Printer) Page 10-1225 the System Printer Link, the maintenance tests of these individual components of the System Printer Link must be executed to diagnose faults. Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link The following procedures should be followed to restore the System Printer Link: 1. Determine the status of the System Printer Link via the status sp-link command. Verify that the System Printer Link is not busied out for maintenance. On the System Printer Link Status Form, this is indicated by a "no" in the "Maintenance Busy?" field. If the System Printer Link has been busied out, issue the release sp-link command. If the link is "down," proceed to Step 2. 2. Issue the display system feature command to determine the destination of the System Printer Link. If the destination is an extension number, enter the status data-module command and verify that the data extension is in-service/idle. If the data extension is NOT available, refer to the "Port/Channel Number" field on the "Data-Module Status" Form. Look for errors and/or alarms on the circuit pack with which this extension is associated. Refer to the appropriate MO documentation for recommended repair strategy. Continue with Step 3. If the destination is eia, look for PR-MAINT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If errors are present, refer to Maintenance/Tape Processor Maintenance documentation, and continue with Step 5. 3. Determine if a data channel on the Network Control circuit pack is in-service/idle as follows: a. Use the list data-module command to find out the extension numbers of the data channels on the Network Control circuit pack. (There is a maximum of 4. They are listed as "netcon" on the Active SPE. Ignore the Standby data channels.) b. Enter the status data-module